FeatureCAM Reference Manual

FeatureCAM 2016 R2
Reference Help
FeatureCAM
Copyright © 1995-2015 Delcam Ltd. All rights reserved.
Delcam Ltd has no control over the use made of the software
described in this manual and cannot accept responsibility for any
loss or damage howsoever caused as a result of using the software.
Users are advised that all the results from the software should be
checked by a competent person, in accordance with good quality
control procedures.
The functionality and user interface in this manual is subject to
change without notice in future revisions of the software.
The software described in this manual is furnished under licence
agreement and may be used or copied solely in accordance with the
terms of such licence.
Delcam Ltd grants permission for licensed users to print copies of
this manual or portions of this manual for personal use only.
Schools, colleges and universities that are licensed to use the
software may make copies of this manual or portions of this manual
for students currently registered for classes where the software is
used.
Acknowledgements
This documentation references a number of registered trademarks
and these are the property of their respective owners. For example,
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or
trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States.
FeatureCAM Version: 2016 R2 Date: 11 December 2015 15:03

Contents
Introduction 1
Using the Help window ....................................................................................... 1
Reference help PDF ........................................................................................... 3
Technical support ............................................................................................... 4
Installing your PAF license ......................................................................... 4
Silent install ................................................................................................ 9
FeatureCAM product family .............................................................................. 10
3D product differences ............................................................................. 11
Evaluating other FeatureCAM components .............................................. 11
Getting Started in FeatureCAM 1

Getting started in FeatureCAM ........................................................................... 1
Starting FeatureCAM for the first time ........................................................ 2
Creating a new file ...................................................................................... 4
Screen layout ............................................................................................. 5
Getting help ................................................................................................ 6
Introduction to 2.5D milling ................................................................................. 9
Defining the Stock ...................................................................................... 9
Creating the features ................................................................................ 10
Viewing the part........................................................................................ 13
Simulating the toolpaths ........................................................................... 14
Order of manufacturing operations ........................................................... 15
Part documentation .................................................................................. 19
Controlling the strategies .......................................................................... 20
Generating NC code ................................................................................. 21
Tool mapping............................................................................................ 22
Changing the post processor.................................................................... 22
Saving the NC code ................................................................................. 23
Introduction to turning ....................................................................................... 24
Defining the stock ..................................................................................... 24
Preparatory steps ..................................................................................... 26
Defining the geometry .............................................................................. 27
Viewing the part........................................................................................ 35
Order of manufacturing operations ........................................................... 38
Part documentation (Turning) ................................................................... 40
Generating NC code (Turning) ................................................................. 41
Changing the post processor.................................................................... 41
Saving the NC code ................................................................................. 42
FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Contents • i

Introduction to turn/mill...................................................................................... 43
Preparatory steps ..................................................................................... 44
Viewing the part........................................................................................ 48
Creating three radial holes on the face ..................................................... 49
Engraving the face ................................................................................... 50
Creating three slots .................................................................................. 53
Introduction to 3D milling .................................................................................. 55
Defining the Stock .................................................................................... 56
Creating the bottle surface ....................................................................... 60
Viewing the part........................................................................................ 61
Creating a surface milling feature ............................................................. 63
Introduction to wire EDM................................................................................... 67
Defining the stock ..................................................................................... 67
Creating the profile ................................................................................... 68
Creating a wire EDM feature .................................................................... 69
Simulating the wire EDM toolpath ............................................................ 71
Generating NC code ................................................................................. 73
Adding a taper angle ................................................................................ 74
Introduction to Feature Recognition .................................................................. 77
Automatic Feature Recognition example .................................................. 78
Interactive Feature Recognition example ................................................. 84
What's New in FeatureCAM 1

What's new in FeatureCAM 2016 R2 .................................................................. 2
User interface ............................................................................................. 5
Importing .................................................................................................... 9
Milling ....................................................................................................... 12
Turning ..................................................................................................... 18
Machine Simulation .................................................................................. 21
Tombstone machining .............................................................................. 25
Add-ins and extensions ............................................................................ 28
XBUILD .................................................................................................... 38
Machine Design ........................................................................................ 47
What's new in FeatureCAM 2016 R1 ................................................................ 50
User Interface and work-flow .................................................................... 53
Importing .................................................................................................. 60
Milling ....................................................................................................... 63
Turning ..................................................................................................... 73
Add-ins and extensions ............................................................................ 78
XBUILD .................................................................................................... 86
What's new in FeatureCAM 2015 R3 ................................................................ 94
User Interface ........................................................................................... 96
Importing ................................................................................................ 104
Milling ..................................................................................................... 107
ii • Contents FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help

Turning and Turn/Mill ............................................................................. 115
5-axis machining .................................................................................... 123
Machine Design ...................................................................................... 128
What's new in FeatureCAM 2015 R2 .............................................................. 133
User Interface ......................................................................................... 136
Milling ..................................................................................................... 145
Turning ................................................................................................... 156
XBUILD .................................................................................................. 162
Add-ins and extensions .......................................................................... 164
Machine Simulation Design .................................................................... 169
What's new in FeatureCAM 2015 R1 .............................................................. 176
User interface improvements.................................................................. 179
Milling Improvements ............................................................................. 196
Turning improvements ............................................................................ 209
Wire EDM improvements........................................................................ 217
Importing ................................................................................................ 221
Add-ins and extensions .......................................................................... 225
XBUILD improvements ........................................................................... 235
Reference Help 245

Reference Help Introduction ............................................................................... 1
FeatureCAM interface ................................................................................ 1
New part ................................................................................................... 61
Saving your work ...................................................................................... 66
Import/Export ............................................................................................ 75
Printing ................................................................................................... 104
Coordinate systems ................................................................................ 109
Options menu ......................................................................................... 128
Using add-ins ......................................................................................... 145
Errors and warnings ............................................................................... 194
Stock ............................................................................................................... 205
Stock wizard ........................................................................................... 205
Stock Properties dialog .......................................................................... 220
4th-axis positioning (2.5D & 3D) ............................................................. 234
5-axis positioning (5AP).......................................................................... 256
Stock models .......................................................................................... 266
Geometry ........................................................................................................ 274
Geometry Constructors dialog ................................................................ 275
Point input for geometry creation ............................................................ 275
Exiting a geometry mode ........................................................................ 276
Points ..................................................................................................... 276
Lines ....................................................................................................... 277
Circles .................................................................................................... 281
Fillets ...................................................................................................... 285
Arcs ........................................................................................................ 288
Dimensions............................................................................................. 290
Interrogation ........................................................................................... 292
Snapping ................................................................................................ 295
Layers..................................................................................................... 299
FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Contents • iii

Using math to define fields and shapes .................................................. 303
Editing a model....................................................................................... 309
Curves ............................................................................................................ 318
Curve Creation dialog ............................................................................. 319
Chaining ................................................................................................. 319
Creating curves ...................................................................................... 325
Curve from curve .................................................................................... 327
Curve from surface (3D) ......................................................................... 343
Curves from other methods .................................................................... 356
Curve to geometry .................................................................................. 380
Surfaces.......................................................................................................... 381
Surface wizard ........................................................................................ 381
Surface design tips ................................................................................. 382
Surface editing ....................................................................................... 383
Surface editing tips ................................................................................. 383
From curves ........................................................................................... 384
Primitive surface ..................................................................................... 406
From one surface ................................................................................... 412
From multiple surfaces ........................................................................... 426
Solids (SOLID) ................................................................................................ 445
Comparison of surface and solid modeling............................................. 447
Part View for solids ................................................................................. 448
Unattached design features.................................................................... 449
Selecting and deleting solids .................................................................. 449
Verifying that a solid is valid ................................................................... 449
Invalid solids ........................................................................................... 450
Fixing bad surface faces......................................................................... 451
Transforming a solid ............................................................................... 451
Creating a solid ...................................................................................... 451
Feature Recognition (REC/3D MX) ................................................................. 495
Types of Feature Recognition ................................................................ 496
IFR using the New Feature wizard ......................................................... 499
AFR wizard ............................................................................................. 508
Features that can be recognized ............................................................ 511
Rerecognition wizard .............................................................................. 527
Features.......................................................................................................... 529
New Feature wizard ............................................................................... 530
Specific features ..................................................................................... 633
Groups and Patterns .............................................................................. 869
Editing features ...................................................................................... 884
Feeds and speeds ................................................................................ 1508
Toolpaths ...................................................................................................... 1516
Simulating toolpaths ............................................................................. 1516
Results window .................................................................................... 1547
NC Code ....................................................................................................... 1565
Creating NC code ................................................................................. 1566
Feed Optimization ................................................................................ 1570
Tool Mapping........................................................................................ 1575
Getting the file to the machine .............................................................. 1583
Customize Manufacturing ............................................................................. 1591
iv • Contents FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help

Machining attributes ............................................................................. 1591
Tooling.................................................................................................. 1744
Feeds/Speeds and Cutting Data Tables ............................................... 1847
Post Options ......................................................................................... 1857
Multiple fixture documents (2.5D & 3D) ........................................................ 1872
Creating a multiple fixture part.............................................................. 1872
Multiple Fixtures dialog ......................................................................... 1873
Configuration ........................................................................................ 1878
Layout................................................................................................... 1879
Individual blocks ................................................................................... 1880
Single block .......................................................................................... 1880
Nested .................................................................................................. 1881
Stock .................................................................................................... 1882
Completing the multiple fixture part ...................................................... 1883
Editing a multiple fixture document ....................................................... 1883
Saving and opening multiple fixture parts ............................................. 1884
Tombstone machining (TOMB) ..................................................................... 1885
Overview of tombstone machining ....................................................... 1885
Creating a tombstone machined part ................................................... 1886
Specifying tombstone dimensions ........................................................ 1887
Tombstone global fixtures .................................................................... 1889
Tombstone Process Plan dialog ........................................................... 1891
Adding a part to the tombstone ............................................................ 1893
Machine Simulation ...................................................................................... 1895
Using Machine Simulation .................................................................... 1895
Creating a Machine Design document ................................................. 1899
Machine Design tutorial: Simple 3-axis mill .......................................... 1938
Machine Design handbook ................................................................... 1945
Index 1965
FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Contents • v

Introduction
Welcome to the FeatureCAM help. Use the following sections to

learn how to use FeatureCAM:
 Introduction — learn how to use the help window (see page 1),
get technical support (see page 4), and see the FeatureCAM
product line (see page 10).
 Getting Started in FeatureCAM (see page 1) — helps you learn how
to use FeatureCAM.
 What's New in FeatureCAM (see page 1) — shows details of the
latest features.
 Reference Help (see page 245) — a comprehensive user guide for
FeatureCAM.
 XBUILD — shows you how to use XBUILD (C:\Program
Files\Delcam\FeatureCAM\Program\Help\xbuild.chm).
The documentation for XBUILD, FeatureCAM's post processor, is
available by selecting Help > Contents from the menu in XBUILD.
Using the Help window

The Help window contains information about FeatureCAM and how
to use it:
 The left panel lists the topics available in the help. It contains
three tabs, which enable you to search for information using a
variety of methods.
 The right panel displays the information in the topic you select.
You can display the window using the Help menu or by pressing the
F1 key.
FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Introduction • 1

Contents tab
The Contents tab lists the help topics arranged by subject. Use it
when you want to understand the structure of the application, or
when you want to read around a topic and look for related
information:
 To display the information for a topic, click its entry in the tree.
The Book icon indicates the topic contains subsections; the
Page icon indicates the topic has no subsections.
 To list the sections within a book topic, click the icon or its title.
Index tab
The Index tab lists names and subjects in alphabetical order. Use it
when you want to look for information, but are not sure of its name
or its location in the help:
 To find an index entry, type a subject in the box at the top of the
index, or use the scrollbar to navigate up and down the list.
 To display the topics associated with an entry, double-click its
entry in the list.
 To locate the selected topic in the Contents tab, click Display.
Search tab
The Search tab enables you to look for words or phrases contained
in the help topics:
 To search for a word, type it in the search box, and click List
Topics.
By default, the search looks for common suffixes as well as

the word itself. To search for the exact word only, deselect
the Match similar words check box.
 To search for a phrase, type the text, enclosed in double
quotation marks, in the search box, and then click List Topics.
If you do not enclose the text in quotation marks, the

search lists every occurrence of each word.
 To search for words or phrases using logical operators, enter the
text in the search field; click ; select the operator you want to
use; and then click List Topics.
 To restrict the search to the currently listed topics, select the
Search previous results check box.
 To restrict the search to the titles of the help topics, select the
Search titles only check box.
 To locate the selected topic in the Contents tab, click Display.
2 • Introduction FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help

Reference help PDF
The FeatureCAM Reference help is available as a PDF file which
enables you to print it to use away from your computer.
Select Help > Reference (PDF) to display the Reference help PDF.
This is available only in English.

Technical support
Technical support is available through:
 Your FeatureCAM reseller
 The FeatureCAM website
(http://www.delcam.com/software/featurecam/#)
Installing your PAF license

To install your PAF license:
1 Install FeatureCAM and any Solid Plugins you are using.
2 Ensure your dongle is plugged into one of the PC's USB ports.
3 If the PC that you have installed FeatureCAM on has internet
access, see Installing your PAF license with internet access (see
page 4).
If the PC that you have installed FeatureCAM on does not have
internet access, see Installing your PAF license without internet
access (see page 6).
For any problems, see PAF Troubleshooting (see page 7).
Installing your PAF license with internet access

1 Open FeatureCAM.
2 If the New Part Document Wizard is displayed, click Cancel to close
it.
3 Select the Help > Download License (PAF file) Updates menu
option.
The PAF file is downloaded. This process usually takes 10-20
seconds using a high-speed connection.
When finished downloading, a message is displayed telling you
the updated PAF file has been successfully updated.
If FeatureCAM is still in Evaluation Mode, see PAF

Troubleshooting (see page 7).
Installing your PAF license using the PAFWizard

1 Open FeatureCAM.

it.
3 Select the File > Evaluation Options menu option.
The Evaluation Options dialog is displayed.
4 In the Evaluation Options dialog, click Diagnostics.
The Dongle Diagnostics dialog is displayed:
5 In the Dongle Diagnostics dialog, click Run PAFWizard.

The PAFWizard is displayed.
6 In the PAFWizard, select the Tools > Check for PAF updates menu
option.
The PAF file is downloaded. This process usually takes 10-20
seconds using a high-speed connection.
When finished downloading, a message is displayed telling you
the updated PAF file has been successfully installed.
7 Close the PAFWizard and restart FeatureCAM.

You can now use FeatureCAM in full access mode.


Installing your PAF license without internet access
Your company should have received an email from Delcam
containing your Product Authorization File (PAF).
We ship the software before sending the PAF file to you. It is

very possible that you will receive the upgrade package
before you receive the email containing the PAF file.
If you do not have that email, please wait 72 hours before
installing the software or contacting support.
The email containing the PAF file could be sent to your
supervisor, IT department, or purchasing department
depending on the email address we have on file for your
company.
If you need us to resend the PAF, or if you need us to send it
to a different email address, please contact your support
representative with your name, email address, company
name, and the dongle number that you need the PAF for.
1 Save the PAF file included in your email to the desktop on your
PC.
2 Open FeatureCAM.
it.
4 Select the File > Evaluation Options menu option.
5 In the Evaluation Options dialog, click Diagnostics.
The Dongle Diagnostics dialog is displayed:
6 In the Dongle Diagnostics dialog, click Open PAF Directory.

7 If you have any existing *.paf, *.flx, or *.lic files in this
directory, please delete them or rename them to dcam.old.
8 Drag the PAF file from the desktop into this directory.
9 Restart FeatureCAM.

PAF Troubleshooting
 Are you evaluating items that you do not have a license for?
a Inside FeatureCAM, select File > Evaluation Options from the
menu.
You must close all files and windows in FeatureCAM

before you can access Evaluation Options.
b Deselect any items that you don't have a license for and click
Apply.
 Did you edit the PAF file in any way?

If you open the PAF file in any program other than Notepad or
WordPad, the file can become corrupt. If this happens, delete the
file and re-save the original file that you received by email.
 Is the PAF file being recognized?

The file extension must be *.paf, although the name of the file
may be different. It is possible that an email program or
something else has created or hidden an extension of *.txt. You
can check this by looking at the Type of file. To do this, right-click
on the PAF file and select Properties. The file Properties dialog
displays. The Type of file should be Delcam PAF licence file or PAF
file.
 Is the dongle attached to the computer?

In order for FeatureCAM to function, the dongle must be
attached to the computer.
 Do you have the latest Sentinel drivers installed?

a In FeatureCAM, select File > Evaluation Options from the menu.
b Click Diagnostics.
The Dongle Diagnostics dialog is displayed.
c Check the value for Dongle. If it reads None, you must update
the Sentinel drivers.

d Click Open Sentinel Driver directory.
The directory opens and contains the program file Sentinel
Protection Installer 7.4.0.exe.
e Run this program.
f Restart your computer.
 Do you have more than one PAF file on your computer?

Most Delcam software reads any file with a *.paf extension, so if
you want to keep an old *.paf file, rename the extension to
something other than *.paf (such as dcam.old).
If you have followed the above instructions, and you still receive an
error stating "FeatureCAM: ", make a note of the error along with
the message and contact your FeatureCAM support representative.

Silent install
You can perform a silent install of FeatureCAM using the command
prompt.
To perform a silent install, enter this in the command prompt:
"FeatureCAM.exe" /S /USERSHORTCUT=$shortcut_name
/D=$install_location /LANGUAGE=$language
 FeatureCAM.exe — The name of the installer. If you are installing
from the DVD the installer is called setup.exe.
 /S — This specifies the install is a silent install.
 $shortcut_name — The name of the FeatureCAM shortcut that is
created on the Desktop. For example "FeatureCAM V22".
 $install_location — The complete path where FeatureCAM should
be installed. For example C:\Program
Files\Delcam\FeatureCAM\V22.
If no install location is specified, it is installed in the default
location, C:\Program Files\Delcam\FeatureCAM.
Do not use quotes in the pathname.
 $language — The three letter acronym to specify the install
language of FeatureCAM. For example, for a Spanish install enter
esp. If no language is specified, or an incorrect acronym is used,
FeatureCAM is installed in English.
Catia add-in silent install

To perform a silent install of the Catia add-in, enter this in the
command prompt:
“FeatureCAMCatiaV5.exe" /S /D=$install_location
 FeatureCAMCatiaV5.exe — This is the name of the Catia plugin
installer. If you are installing from the DVD the installer is called
setup.exe.
 $install_location — This is the complete path where FeatureCAM
is installed.

FeatureCAM product family
FeatureCAM comprises several modules, which enable you to
perform different functions. This help file documents the entire
product family, so, to differentiate between the features specific to
individual products, the titles of help topic titles are followed by
product codes in parentheses. The codes are:
(25D) — requires a minimum of the 2.5D Milling product.
(3D LITE) — Requires a minimum of the 3D Lite product. The
functionality is also available in the 3D MX and 3D HSM products. 3D
Lite is an entry-level 3D product, which enables you to mill only one
surface per feature, but you can create multiple features. The
strategies available in 3D Lite are Z-level rough, Parallel rough,
Parallel finish, Isoline, and 2D spiral.
(3D MX) — Requires a minimum of the 3D MX product. The
functionality is also available in the 3D HSM product. 3D MX is a
mid-level 3D product that enables you mill multiple surfaces. It has
the same strategies as 3D Lite, plus Z-level finish, Radial finish,
Flowline finish, Four-axis finish, Horizontal + vertical, Between
curves, and Swarf milling.
(3D HSM) — Requires a minimum of the 3D HSM product. 3D HSM is
a high speed machining product with the same strategies as 3D MX,
plus Pencil, Plunge roughing, Remachine, Steep and Shallow, and
Spiral 3D.
(REC) — Requires the FeatureRECOGNITION product.
(MSIM) — Requires the Machine Simulation product.
(5AP) — Requires the 5-axis Positioning product.
(5AS) — Requires the 5-axis Simultaneous product.
(TURN) — Requires the Turning product.
(TURNMILL) — Requires the Turn/Mill product.
(WIRE) — Requires the Wire EDM product.
(TOMB) — Requires the Tombstone product.
(SOLID) — Requires the Solid Modeling product.
(MTT) — Requires the Advanced Turn/Mill (MTT) (Multi-turret turning)
product.
(SND) —Requires the shared Network Database product.
If no code follows the topic title, the functionality is available

in all FeatureCAM modules. However, because the help
contains many cross-topic links, you may cross module
boundaries while navigating though it.

To see which products are included in your current license, select
the Help > About FeatureCAM menu option. To evaluate products you
have not purchased, see Evaluation Options (see page 11).
3D product differences
The main differences between the three 3D products are:
3D Lite 3D MX 3D HSM
 Single surface Everything in 3D Lite, Everything in 3D MX,
 Z-level rough plus: plus:
 Parallel rough  Multiple surfaces  Plunge roughing
 Parallel finish  Feature Recognition  Pencil
 Isoline  Z-level finish  Remachine
 2D spiral  Radial  Steep and shallow
 Flowline  3D spiral
 Four-axis
 Horizontal +
vertical
 Between curves
 Swarf
You need 3D MX or 3D HSM to use 5-axis Simultaneous.
Evaluating other FeatureCAM components

FeatureCAM contains a variety of modules. You can evaluate the
modules you have not purchased. To evaluate other modules:
1 Close all FeatureCAM documents.

2 Click File > Evaluation Options from the menu. The Evaluation
Options dialog is displayed.
3 Select the Manually select product components option.

4 Select the boxes next to the product components you want to
try.
5 Click OK.
You can now access the new modules, but you cannot post code or
save a file. Your copy of FeatureCAM stays in evaluation mode until
you deselect the product components you have not licensed.
Select Activate all available product components to

automatically select the components you have licensed.

Getting Started in
FeatureCAM
Learn how to use FeatureCAM in the topics that follow.
FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Getting Started in FeatureCAM • 1

Getting started in FeatureCAM
FeatureCAM is a CAD/CAM software suite that automates machining
and minimizes programming times for parts on mills, lathes, and
wire EDM.
The functionality available to you depends on which

components you have licensed.
FeatureCAM generates toolpaths based on the features of the part,
and automatically selects appropriate tools, determines roughing
and finishing passes, and calculates feeds and speeds.
This Getting Started guide provides step-by-step instructions that
highlight some of the features of this versatile software.
FeatureCAM is very easy to use, and does not require any specialist
computing knowledge.

Starting FeatureCAM for the first time
1 From the Start menu, select All Programs > FeatureCAM >
FeatureCAM.
You can also start the program by double-clicking the
FeatureCAM icon on your desktop.

The first time you start FeatureCAM, it runs a program to create
the tools and materials database.
2 Click OK to begin the configuration. This displays the Tool and
Material Setup dialog.
3 To create a local database, select On my local computer.

If you want multiple computers to share the same tool and
material information:
a Select On another computer that I will access over a network.
b Click the Browse button, and use the Database Location dialog
to select the folder where the database is located.
You need to create a database folder on your network first,

and then copy an empty MDB database from the
FeatureCAM CD-ROM to this location. The default database
is created by MS Access, and should be accessed using the
MS Jet database driver. You may use a different database
type, such as MS SQL Server. For more information, refer
to the online help.
You need to have the Shared Network Database module to

use this option.
4 Click Next.
2 • Getting Started in FeatureCAM FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help

5 Choose the tools to load:
Inch - loads only the inch tools.

Metric - loads only the metric tools.
Both - loads both inch and metric tools.
6 Click Next.
7 If you chose to load both tool types, you are asked which tool
type you use more often. Select Inch or Metric, and click Next.
8 Click Finish to initialize the database.
The tools database specifies the set of tools used by

FeatureCAM to perform manufacturing operations. For best
results, use the Tool Manager (available from the
Manufacturing menu) to customize the database to reflect the
tools in your shop.

Creating a new file
Starting FeatureCAM displays the New Part Document wizard.
1 If the New Part Document wizard is not displayed, select the File >
New menu option.
2 Select New file in the New Part Document Wizard, and click Next.
3 Select a Milling Setup.
4 Select the Unit of Measure (Inch or Millimeter).
You can change the default dimension units later, by

selecting Options > File Options from the menu.
5 Click Finish.

Screen layout
The FeatureCAM interface contains a number of standard Windows
elements, such as toolbars, dialogs, context menus, and wizards.
Title bar displays the type of part setup in round brackets, in this
case (Milling), and the name of your part file in square brackets, in
this case [FM1]. When you have any unsaved changes in your part
file, an asterisk (*) is displayed next to its name.
Menu bar provides access to a number of menus. Selecting a
menu, such as View, opens a list of associated commands and
sub-menus. Sub-menus are indicated by a small arrow to the right
of the text. For example, selecting View > Principal Views displays
a list of commonly used views.
Toolbars provide quick access to the most commonly used
commands in FeatureCAM.
The graphics window is the main working area.
Toolbox window with the Steps panel, Part View panel, and
Browser.

The Steps panel contains an ordered list of steps for creating part
programs. Each step is a wizard that presents a series of dialogs
for each process. They are listed in the order in which you should
use them during the process of creating a part program.
The Part View panel provides a hierarchical view of the part.
The Browser contains information on the latest features available
in FeatureCAM, including example files that you can load straight
into FeatureCAM.
Results window contains the automatically generated
documentation including tooling lists, setup sheets, and the NC part
programs. Selecting one of the tabs at the bottom of the window
changes the content of this window.
Assistance bar displays help for the current command.
Feature/Geometry Edit bar lets you select and edit a feature, or
enter the point locations and parameters for geometry creation.
Status bar shows your current drawing units, tool crib, and post
processor settings, as well as your keyboard status and information
about the simulation when you run one.
Getting help
FeatureCAM provides a variety of ways for you to get help.
Context-sensitive help displays help for the current task. You can
also refer to the numerous examples in the Examples folder, located
in the FeatureCAM root directory. Finally, if you cannot find an
answer to your question, you can visit our website or contact our
technical support.
Online help
The online help documentation is your primary source for in-depth
technical information about FeatureCAM. It covers all FeatureCAM
modules, and is accessed from the Help menu, or by clicking on
the toolbar.
Reference help PDF

The help file is available as a PDF. This is the same as the online
help, but it enables you to print it and use it away from your
computer.
Select Help > Reference (PDF) to display the Reference help PDF.
Context-sensitive help
You can use one of the following methods to get help relevant to the
current task:

 Some commands automatically display the help in the Assistance
bar.
 Hovering the mouse over a toolbar icon displays a brief

description.
 Pressing F1 displays the relevant help page.

 Most FeatureCAM dialogs have the Help button. Clicking it
displays the relevant help page.
 Click the Context Help button on the toolbar. When the cursor
has changed to a question mark (?), click a menu item, button or
dialog for more information.
Links
You can find FeatureCAM information from the Help menu:
 Help > FeatureCAM on the Web for product news, online support,
training information, discussion forum, and mailing list.
 Help > Check for a FeatureCAM Patch for product updates.
This displays the Delcam Customer Download Center in your
internet browser and checks for an update patch for FeatureCAM.
You can only use a patch to update within a major version of
FeatureCAM. For example, you cannot upgrade from version 19 to
version 20, but you can upgrade from version 20 to a later version
of 20.
You can only use a patch to update official releases, not
experimental versions, service packs or enhancement releases. To
update any of these, you need to download the full release from
updates.delcam.com, which you can access by selecting the Help > Visit
the Delcam Customer Download Center menu option.
 Help > FeatureCAM API Help for documentation on the FeatureCAM
API (Application Programming Interface).
Technical Support
If you have any questions related to FeatureCAM, which you cannot
find an answer to in the documentation, you can contact the Delcam
technical support service. Email support@featurecam.com,
describing your problem as precisely as possible. This support is
free for the first 60 days after your initial purchase and 30 days
after the purchase of an upgrade.

Introduction to 2.5D milling
This example shows you how to create some simple 2.5D features,
generate toolpaths and output the toolpaths used to machine the
part.
To use the 2.5D milling example, start FeatureCAM (see page 2),
create a new file (see page 4), then follow these steps:
1 Create the stock (see page 9).
2 Create the features (see page 10).
3 View the part (see page 13).
4 Simulate the toolpaths (see page 14).
5 Create the part documentation (see page 19).
6 Control the automation (see page 20).
7 Change the post processor (see page 22).
8 Generate NC code (see page 21).
9 Tool mapping (see page 22).
10 Save the NC code (see page 23).
Defining the Stock

The stock is the initial material from which you cut your part. When
you create a new part, the Dimensions page of the Stock wizard is
displayed. It enables you to determine the shape and dimensions
for the stock, the stock material, part program zero, and the
coordinate system for modeling.
1 On the Dimensions page of the Stock wizard:
a Enter a Thickness of 1 (25 mm).

b Enter a Width of 4 (100 mm).
c Enter a Length of 5 (120 mm).
d Click Finish.
2 Click OK to accept the default values of the Stock wizard.
Creating the features

This step shows how to create Hole and Rectangular Pocket
features.
English units Metric units
1 Create a Hole feature.
a Click the Features step in the Steps panel.

b In the New Feature wizard, select Hole in the From Dimensions
section, and click Next.
c Enter a Diameter of 0.5 (12 mm), and click Next.
d Enter a hole center location of X 1.0 (25 mm) and Y 1.0 (25
mm), and click Next.
This displays the Strategies page. This page controls the types
of operations used to cut the feature. The default operations
for a Hole feature are to spot drill and then drill the hole. If
the Hole has a chamfer, the default is to cut the chamfer with
the spot drill operation.
e Accept the default strategy settings by clicking Next.

The Operations page shows a summary of the operations to
cut the feature, the automatically selected tools, and the
feeds and speeds.
f From the Finish menu button select the Finish

option.
2 Create a Rectangular Pocket feature.

b In the New Feature wizard, in the From Dimensions section,
select Rectangular Pocket, and click Next.
c Accept the default dimensions by clicking Next.
d Enter a pocket location of X 0.75 (15 mm), and Y 2.5 (60 mm),
and Z 0 (0 mm), and click Next.

The Strategies page shows that roughing and finishing
operations are created.
e Click the Finish button.
3 Use the Features step to create a second Hole with a

diameter of 0.5 (12 mm), located at X=4 (95 mm) and Y=3 (75
mm).
4 Use the Features step to create another Rectangular Pocket

the same dimensions as the first, but positioned at X=2.5 (55
mm), Y=0.5 (15 mm).
5 Select File > Save, and save the part as milling.fm.

Viewing the part
To look at the part in a different orientation you can select one of
the standard predefined views. These options are available from the
Standard toolbar:
1 To change the view to an isometric view, click the Isometric

button on the Standard toolbar.
2 To change the view to a front view, from the Principle View

menu button, click the Front button.
3 Click the Isometric button to return to the isometric view.

Simulating the toolpaths
Now you have created the features, FeatureCAM automatically:
 Selects the most appropriate tools and operations;
 Recommends machining strategies;
 Calculates speeds and feeds;
 Generates toolpaths and creates the NC code.
To view the simulated toolpath:
1 Click the Toolpaths step in the Steps panel todisplay the

Simulation toolbar.
2 On the Simulation toolbar, select the 3D Simulation option,

and then click Play to start the simulation.
If the Automatic Ordering Options dialog displays, click OK to
close it. This accepts the default ordering options.
This displays a solid 3D rendering of the cutting process.
If all tools are displayed in gray in the simulation, select

Options > Simulation > General from the menu, and select
the Tool Colors option, then click OK to close the dialog.
This displays tools in different colors so you can see which
features are machined by each tool.

Click the Play button on the Simulation toolbar to see
the changes.
3 Click the Play to Next Operation button. This displays the spot
drill operation.
4 Repeat step 3 to view each subsequent operation until you

complete the simulation.
5 Click Eject . This removes the Simulation toolbar.
Order of manufacturing operations

The Op List tab in the Results window shows all of the operations
needed to machine the features. A yellow warning sign next to an
operation indicates a potential problem with that operation. In this
case, if you see any warnings ignore them.

This section looks at:
 The automatic ordering options. (see page 16)
 The manual ordering options. (see page 18)
Automatic ordering operations

You can control the automatic ordering of operations by using either
rules or operation templates. The turning tutorial looks at operation
templates (see page 38).
1 Select the Automatic Ordering option on the Op List tab. This
ensures the automatic ordering rules are applied to the
operations.
2 Change the automatic ordering to group together the operations
which use the same tool.
a Click the Ordering Options button.

b In the Automatic Ordering Options dialog, select Minimize tool
changes, deselect everything else, and click OK.
3 Simulate the part.
a Select the Toolpaths step from the Steps panel.

This displays the Simulation toolbar.
b Click the 3D Simulation button.
c Click the Play button.

close it. Notice that the simulation first performs all the
spot-drills, then the drills, and then the rough and finish
milling for the pockets.
d Click the Stop button when simulation is complete to exit

the simulation mode.
4 Change the automatic ordering to move the finish operations to
the end of the list.

b In the Automatic Ordering Options dialog, select Do finish cuts
last, deselect everything else, and click OK.
This changes the order of operations in the Operation List.

a In the Simulation toolbar, click Play .

The finish cuts for the two pockets are now cut last.
b Click Stop when simulation is complete.

6 Change the automatic ordering to match the order of the
features in the Part View panel.

b Deselect everything, and click OK.
c Open the Part View panel by clicking on .
The tree view contains all the setups and features you have
created.
d Click the rect_pock2 item in the Setup1 node, and drag it up
above hole2.
a In the Simulation toolbar, click Play .

The second pocket is cut as the second feature.
b Click Stop .

Manual ordering options
The automatic ordering of operations determined the order by a set
of rules. You can also specify an exact ordering of operations
manually.
1 Select the Manual Ordering option on the Op List tab.
2 In the Fixed Operation Ordering dialog, select Do Not Show This
Warning Again, and click OK.
3 Select the spotdrill operation for hole2 from the list, and drag it
up ahead of the drill operation for hole1.
a In the Simulation toolbar, click Play . The simulation

performs the operations in the new order.
b Click Stop when simulation is complete.

5 Selecting Automatic Ordering to return to automatic ordering.
6 Click OK to close the Automatic Operation Ordering dialog.
If you want to erase the simulation and remove the

Simulation toolbar, click Eject .

Part documentation
As well as simulating the part manufacture, the simulation
generates tool and operation lists. The tools selected are based on
your tool database. You can print this information to use as an
operator's checklist, using the File > Print menu option.
1 Click the Details tab in the Results window to display the
Manufacturing Operations sheet.
2 Select the Tool List option at the top of the Details tab to show
the Manufacturing Tool Detail sheet. It contains all of the tools
used to create the part based on the tool crib you selected.

Controlling the strategies
You can control the strategies used to manufacture the part from
the properties dialog.
1 Open the Part View panel.
2 Right-click on hole1 under the Setup1 node, and select the
Properties option.
3 In the Properties dialog:
a Select the Strategy tab

b Deselect the Spot Drill option
c Click OK.
4 Select the Toolpaths step from the Steps panel.
5 In the Simulation toolbar, click the 3D Simulation button, and

then click Play to start the simulation.

There is no spot drilling for the first hole. If you look
through the operations list, there is only one spotdrill
operation listed. FeatureCAM optimizes the part
manufacturing process, but you control the level of
automatic optimization.
Generating NC code
FeatureCAM generates the NC code to manufacture parts on a CNC
machine. You can generate NC code after you have simulated the
part, and therefore calculated the toolpaths.
1 Select the NC Code step from the Steps panel. This displays
the NC Code dialog.
2 Click the NC Program button to generate the code.

Tool mapping
To change the location of the tools in the tool changer:
the NC Code dialog.
2 Click the Tool Mapping button. This displays the Tool

Mapping showing the current tool order.
3 To move the center drill to the 5th position in the tool changer:
a Select Center_5 in the table.
b Enter a Tool Number of 5 in the Slots frame.
c Click Set.
You cannot change the number in the table.

4 Click OK to save the changes, and close the Tool Mapping dialog.
Changing the post processor

To change the post processor:
1 Select Manufacturing > Post Process from the menu. This displays
the Post Options dialog.
2 Click Browse to view available post processors.
The default folder for posts is C:\Program
Files\Delcam\Examples\Posts.
3 Select your post processor and click Open.

The new post processor is displayed in the CNC File field.
4 Click OK to exit the Post Options dialog and use the new post
processor; click Cancel to exit the dialog and keep the original
post processor.

6 Run a simulation of the part to regenerate the NC code.
Saving the NC code

To save an NC program:
the NC Code dialog.
2 Click the Save NC button in the NC Code dialog.

3 In the Save NC dialog, accept the default filename and folder,
and click OK.

Introduction to turning
This tutorial shows you how to create a simple turning part,
generate toolpaths and output the toolpaths used to machine the
part.
To use the turn/mill example, start FeatureCAM (see page 2),
create a new file (see page 4) with a Type of Turn/Mill Setup or
Turning Setup, then follow these steps:
1 Create the stock (see page 24).
2 Preparatory steps (see page 26).
3 Define the geometry (see page 27).
7 Order the manufacturing operations (see page 38).
8 Create part documentation (see page 40).
9 Change the post processor (see page 22).
10 Generate NC code (see page 41).
11 Save the NC code (see page 23).
Defining the stock

The stock is the initial material from which you cut your part. By
default, the Stock wizard (Dimensions page) opens on the screen as
soon as you create a new part. It enables you to set the shape and
dimensions for the stock, the stock material, part program zero, and
the coordinate system for modeling.

a Enter an OD (outside diameter) of 4 (100 mm).

b Enter a Length of 5 (125 mm).
c Enter an ID (inside diameter) of 0 (0 mm).
d From the Finish menu button select the Finish and Edit
Properties option.
This displays the Stock Properties dialog.

2 In the Stock Properties dialog enter a Z of 0.0625 (1.5 mm), and
click OK.

Preparatory steps
The preparatory steps determine the coordinate system and tool
crib.
1 Select Options > Turning Input Modes > 3D (XYZ) from the menu to
enable you to enter coordinates as X, Y, and Z values.
2 Select Manufacturing > Set Tool Crib from the menu to display the
Select Active Tool Crib dialog.
3 Select the tools option from the Crib List, and click OK.
4 To display the complete part:
a Click the Rotate View menu button to display the View

menu:
b Click Center All .

Defining the geometry
This shows you how to design your part.
1 Draw two lines:
a Click the Geometry step in the Steps panel.

This displays the Geometry Constructors dialog.
b Select the Create more than 1 option, and click the Line from
two points button. This displays the Feature/Geometry Edit
bar.
c Create two lines that define the outer profile, in the

Feature/Geometry Edit bar:
For point 1, enter an XYZ 1 of X 2 (50 mm), Y 0, Z -3.5 (-88
mm).
For point 2, enter an XYZ 2 of X 1 (25 mm), Y 0, Z -3.5 (-88
mm).

Press Enter. This draws a line in the graphics window.
d Create a second line:

For point 1 enter an XYZ 1 of X 1 (25 mm), Y 0, Z -3.5 (-88
mm).
For point 2 enter an XYZ 2 of X 1 (25 mm), Y 0, Z 0.
Press Enter to create a second line.
2 Create a chamfer to trim your lines.

b In the Geometry Constructors dialog, in the list of Fillet options
click the Chamfer button.
c In the Feature/Geometry Edit bar, enter:
A width of 0.25 (6 mm).
A height of 0.25 (6 mm).
d Position your mouse pointer close to the chamfer location. The
chamfer snaps into place.

e Click to place the chamfer on your drawing. The chamfer
automatically trims your lines.
3 To turn the part you need to convert these three individual lines
into a single curve (chain the curve).
a Select the Curves step from the Steps panel.

b In the Curves Creation dialog, select the Pick Curve Pieces
button.
c In the graphics window, click locations , , and . Each
line segment changes color when selected.
d In the Feature/Geometry Edit bar, name the curve turn, and

press Enter.
4 Create third line which you will use to create a Bore feature.

b In the Geometry Constructors dialog, click the Line from two
points button.
c In the Feature/Geometry Edit bar:
For point 1 enter an XYZ 1 of X 0.625 (16 mm), Y 0, Z 0.
For point 2 enter an XYZ 2 of X 0.625 (16 mm), Y 0, Z -3.75 (-94
mm).
d Press Enter.
5 To chain the bore curve:

button.

c In the graphics window, click locations 4 and 5 (you select the
same line twice).
d In the Feature/Geometry Edit bar, name the curve bore, and

press Enter.

This shows you how to create the turning features.
1 Select the 2D Turned Profiles button, on the Display Mode

toolbar, to switch to a simplified 2D representation of the part.
To open the Display Mode toolbar, select the View > Toolbars
menu option, select the Display Mode option, then click OK.
2 Create a Turn feature.

b If you have the Turn/Mill module, the New Feature wizard asks
you which type of feature you want to create. Select the
Turning option, and click Next.
c Select Turn in the From Curve section, and click Next.

d In the Curve field select turn from the list.
Click the Pick Curve button to select the curve graphically.

The dialog minimizes to reveal the graphics window beneath.
Click the curve you named turn earlier.
In this particular case, two objects are available for selection:
a line and a curve. Whenever your selection needs to be
clarified, FeatureCAM opens the Select dialog.
In the Select dialog, select turn, and click OK.

e From the Finish menu button, select the Finish and Create
More option to continue creating features.
3 Create a Face feature.

a In the New Feature wizard, select the Turning option, and click
Next.
b In the From Dimensions frame, select Face, and click Next.
c On the Dimensions page:
Enter a Thickness of 0.0625 (1.5 mm).
Enter an Outer Diameter of 4 (100 mm).
Enter an Inner Diameter of 0.
Click Next.
d Click Finish and Create More.
4 Create a Hole feature.

Next.
b In the From Dimensions frame, select Hole, and click Next.
Enter a Depth of 3.75 (94 mm).
Enter a Diameter of 1.0 (24 mm).
Click Next.
d On the Location page enter a Z of 0.
e Click Finish and Create More.
5 Create a Bore feature by using the same process you used to

create the Turn feature. Use the curve named Bore.
6 Create a Groove feature.

Next.
b In the From Dimensions frame select Groove, and click Next.
Select a Location of ID.
Select an Orientation of X axis.
Enter a Diameter of 1.25 (31 mm).

Enter a Depth of 0.125 (3 mm).
Enter a Width of 0.25 (6 mm).
Leave the other settings at 0.
Click Next.
d On the Location page enter a Z of -3 (-75 mm).
7 Create a Thread feature.

Next.
b In the From Dimensions frame, select Thread, and click Next.
c On the Dimension page:
Select Get the thread dimensions from a standard thread.
Select OD.
In the Designation field select the 2.0000- 4.5 UNC (M50-15 for
metric).
Click Next.
d On the Dimensions page:
Select a Thread of Right hand.
Enter a Thread Length of 1.0 (24 mm).
Click Next.

8 Create a Cutoff feature.

Next.
b In the From Dimensions frame select Cutoff, and click Next.
Enter a Diameter of 4 (100 mm).
Enter an Inner Diameter of 0.
Enter a Width of 0.122 (3 mm).
Click Next.
d On the Location page enter a Z of –4.5 (–112 mm).
e Click Finish.
Viewing the part

You have been working in a 2D view.
To look at the part in a different orientation you can select one of
the standard predefined views. These options are available from the
Standard toolbar:

1 To return to a 3D view of the model, click the 2D Turned Profiles
button, on the Display Mode toolbar.
2 Click the Isometric View button on the Standard toolbar.
3 Shade the part.

a Open the Part View panel, and select bore1 under the Setup1
node.
b Click the Shade Selected button on the Display Mode

toolbar.
c Select thread1 in the Part View panel.
d Click the Shade Selected button again.
4 Click the Unshade All button on the Display Mode toolbar to

return to the wireframe view.


Simulation toolbar.

3 If the Automatic Ordering Options dialog displays, click OK to
This displays a solid 3D rendering of the cutting process. By
default, the 3/4 view is shown when cutting or drilling the ID of
the part.
If the 3/4 view is not displayed, select Options > Simulation

> Round Stock from the menu, select the 3/4 view with lathe
ID work option, then click OK to close the dialog. Click the
Play button on the Simulation toolbar to see the
changes.
4 Click the Play to Next Operation button. This displays the face
operation.

5 Repeat step 3 to view each operation until the whole part is cut.
6 Click Eject . This removes the simulation.
Order of manufacturing operations

The Op List tab in the Results window shows all of the operations
needed to machine the features. A yellow warning sign next to an
operation indicates a potential problem with that operation. In this
case, if you see any warnings ignore them.
You can control the automatic ordering of operations by using either

rules or operation templates. The 2.5D Milling tutorial looks at using
rules (see page 16).
This section changes the automatic ordering by modifying the Turn
Operation template.
To modify the template

1 Select the Automatic Ordering option on the Op List tab. This
ensures the automatic ordering rules are applied to the
operations.
2 Change the automatic ordering to group together the operations
which use the same tool.

b In the Automatic Ordering Options dialog, select Use template.
c Click Edit template.

3 In the Feature Order dialog:
a Select Rough OD Turn.

b Click until Rough OD Turn is below Finish ID Turn.
c Click OK to close the Feature Order dialog.
4 Click OK to close the Automatic Ordering Options dialog.
a Select the Toolpaths step from the Steps panel. This

displays the Simulation toolbar.
b Click the 3D Simulation button, and then click the Play

button to start the simulation.
Notice that the OD roughing and finishing now happen after
the hole is drilled.
c Click the Stop button when simulation is complete to exit

simulation mode.

Part documentation (Turning)
As well as simulating the manufacturing of the part, the simulation
also generates complete tool and operations lists. The tools selected
are based on your tool database. You can print all of this
information for use as an operator's checklist.
1 Click the Details tab in the Results window to display the
Manufacturing Operations sheet.
You can review this sheet using the scroll bars.

2 Select the Tool List option at the top of the Details tab to show
the Manufacturing Tool Detail sheet. It contains all of the tools
used to create the part based on the tool crib you selected.
You can print this documentation from the File > Print menu
option.

Generating NC code (Turning)
the NC Code dialog.
2 Click the Display the NC Code button to generate the NC

code.
Changing the post processor

To change the post processor:
1 Select Manufacturing > Post Process from the menu. This displays
2 Click Browse to view available post processors.
The default folder for posts is C:\Program
Files\Delcam\Examples\Posts.
3 Select your post processor and click Open.
The new post processor is displayed in the CNC File field.
4 Click OK to exit the Post Options dialog and use the new post
processor; click Cancel to exit the dialog and keep the original
post processor.

6 Run a simulation of the part to regenerate the NC code.

Saving the NC code
To save an NC program:
the NC Code dialog.
2 Click the Save NC button in the NC Code dialog.

3 In the Save NC dialog, accept the default filename and folder,
and click OK.

Introduction to turn/mill
This tutorial introduces you to:
 Creating parts for lathes with milling capabilities.
 Mixing turning and milling features.
 Creating milling features on the outside diameter and face of the
part.
 Simulating a turn/mill part.
You must have licensed the Turn/Mill option to run this

tutorial.
To use the turn/mill example, start FeatureCAM (see page 2),
create a new file (see page 4) with a Type of Turn/Mill Setup, then
follow these steps:
1 Preparatory steps (see page 44).
5 Create three radial holes on the face (see page 49).
6 Engrave the face (see page 50).
7 Create three slots (see page 53).

Preparatory steps
The preparatory steps define the stock and determine the
coordinate system and view.
a Select a shape of Round.

b Enter an OD (outside diameter) of 3.
c Enter a Length of 2.
d Enter an ID (inside diameter) of 0.
2 Click Next until you reach the Part Program Zero page.
3 Select Align to stock face.
4 Click Next.
5 Click to position the datum of the part.

6 From the Finish menu, select the Finish button.
7 From the View menu select Center All .

8 Select Options > Turning Input Modes > Diameter (DZ) from the
menu to enter coordinates as Diameter and Z values.

1 Draw three lines:

a Select the Geometry step from the Steps panel. This
displays the Geometry Constructors dialog.
b Select the Create more than 1 option, and click the Connected
Lines button. This displays the Feature/Geometry Edit bar.
c To create two lines that define the outer profile, in the
Feature/Geometry Edit bar:
For point 1 enter a D/Z 1 of D 2.5, Z 0.
For point 2 enter a D/Z 2 of D 2.5, Z -1.5.
Press Enter to create a line.
d Create a second line with the values:
For point 2 enter a D/Z 2 of D 2.75, Z -1.5.
Press Enter to create a second line.
e Create a third line with the values:
For point 2 enter a D/Z 2 of D 2.75, Z -2.
Press Enter to create a third line.

2 Create a Fillet to trim your lines.
a Select the Geometry step from the Steps panel.

b In the Geometry Constructors dialog, in the list of Fillet options
click the Corner Fillet button.
c In the Feature/Geometry Edit bar, enter a radius (R) of 0.125.
d Position your mouse pointer in the corner between the first
and second lines, and click to create the fillet. The fillet
automatically trims your lines.
3 To turn the part you need to chain the curves.

button.
c In the graphics window, click the first line and then the third
line.
d In the Feature/Geometry Edit bar, name the curve Turn, and
press Enter.

This example shows you how to create the turning features.
1 Click the 2D Turned Profiles button, on the Display Mode

toolbar, to switch to a 3D representation of the part.

b In the New Feature wizard, select the Turning option, and click
Next.
c Select Turn in the From Curve section, and click Next.
d In the Curve field select turn from the list.
Click the Pick Curve button to select the curve graphically.

The dialog minimizes to reveal the graphics window beneath.

Click the curve you named Turn earlier.
In the Select dialog, select turn, and click OK.
e Click Finish.
Viewing the part

1 On the Standard toolbar select the Isometric View button.
If this displays a 2D representation of the part, click the 2D

Turned Profiles button, on the Display Mode toolbar.
2 Shade the part:
a Open the Part View panel, and select turn1 under the Setup1
node.
b Click the Shade Selected button on the Display Mode

toolbar.
c Click the Unshade All button on the Display Mode toolbar

to return to the wireframe view.
3 To change the view to a top view; from the Principal View

menu button, click the Top button.

Creating three radial holes on the face
This shows you how to add three Holes to the part.
1 To return to a 2D view of the model, click the 2D Turned Profiles

button, on the Display Mode toolbar.
2 Create a Hole.

b In the New Feature wizard, select the Turn/Mill option, and click
Next.
c In the From Dimensions field, select Hole and click Next.
d In the Dimensions dialog:
Enter a Chamfer of 0.0.
Enter a Depth of 1.0.
Enter a Diameter of 0.25.
3 Create a Pattern from feature:

a In the New Feature wizard, select the Turn/Mill option, and click
Next.
b In the From Feature field, select Pattern, and click Next.
c Select the hole you just created and click Next.
d Select Radial in the setup XY plane, and click Next.
e On the Pattern - Dimensions page:
Enter a Number of 3.0.
Enter a Diameter of 2.0.
Enter a Spacing Angle of 120.
Enter an Angle of 60.
f Click Finish.
g Click Cancel.
4 View the 3D wireframe representation of the part:
a Click the 2D Turned Profiles button, on the Display Mode

toolbar, to switch to a 3D representation of the part.
b Click the Isometric View button on the Standard toolbar.
Engraving the face

This shows you how to engrave the part by:
 Creating the engraving text.
 Creating a Groove feature.
1 Create a curve.

b In the Curves Creation dialog, select the Curve Wizard
button.
c In the Curve wizard:
Select Other methods as the construction method.

Select Text as the constructor.
Click Next.
d On the Engraving Text page, configure the text properties.
Enter a Text of TURNMILL.

Select a Path type of Linear.
Enter a location of X 0.0, Y -0.045, Z 0.0.
Enter an Angle of -90.
From the Justification list, select Center.
Enter a Scaling of X 0.4, Y 0.4.

Click the Font button to display the Font dialog.
From the Font list, select Machine Tool Gothic.
Enter a Size of 72.
Click OK to close the dialog.
e Click Finish to close the wizard.
2 Create a Groove feature.
a Select the TURNMILL text (curve1) in the graphics window.
b Click the Features step in the Steps panel.

c In the New Feature wizard, select the Turn/Mill option, and click
Next.
d In the From Curve field, select Groove, and click Next.
e On the Curve page, click Next (as you have selected the text
in step 2a).
f On the Location page, click Next.
g On the Dimensions page:
Enter a Width of 0.0625.
Select Face.
Select Simple (Engrave).
h Click Finish.

Creating three slots
This shows you how to add three milled slots to the part.
1 Create a Slot feature:

b In the New Feature wizard, select the Turn/Mill option, and click
Next.
c In the From Dimensions section, select Slot.
Select Make a pattern from this feature, and click Next.
d On the Dimensions page:
Enter a Length of 1.0.
Enter a Width of 0.5.
Click Next.
e On the Patterns page select Radial around index axis, and click
Next.
f On the Location page:
Enter a B Angle of 90.
Enter a Radius of 1.25.
Enter a Z to 0.25.
Click Next.
g On the Dimension page:
Enter a Number of 3.
Enter a Spacing Angle of 120.
h Click Finish.


Simulation toolbar.
2 Select a CNC file (see page 1864) for a machine that supports
live tooling. For example:
..\Examples\Posts\TurnMill\Skeleton\skeleton-1-turret.cnc
3 Click the 3D Simulation button, and then click the Play

button to start the simulation. If the Automatic Ordering Options
dialog displays, click OK to close it. This accepts the default
ordering options.
The toolpaths are accurately simulated including the part

rotations.

Introduction to 3D milling
This tutorial introduces you to:
 Modeling 3D surfaces.
 Manufacturing surfaces using surface milling features.
 Manufacturing operations.
 Tool selection.
 3D manufacturing attributes.
You must have 3D milling to perform the examples in this

chapter. These examples are only specified in inch units. You
must have the basic tool crib installed.
This tutorial shows you how to create a simple part, generate
toolpaths and output the toolpaths used to machine the part.
To use the 3D milling example, start FeatureCAM (see page 2),
create a new file (see page 4), then follow these steps:
1 Define the Stock (see page 56).
3 Create the bottle surface (see page 60).
5 Create a surface milling feature (see page 63).

Defining the Stock
The stock is the initial material from which you cut your part.
a Enter a Thickness of 2.
b Enter a Width of 3.
c Enter a Length of 6.25.
d Click Finish.
2 Click OK to accept the default values of the Stock Properties
dialog.

1 Select View > Toolbars from the menu, in the Toolbars frame:
a Select Advanced.
b Select Geometry.
c Click OK.

2 Create three vertical lines:
a On the Geometry toolbar, select Vertical from the Line

menu.
b In the Feature/Geometry Edit bar, enter an XYZ of X 1, Z 0, and

press Enter.
c Create a second line by entering an XYZ of X 5.25, Z 0, and
press Enter.
d Create a third line by entering an XYZ of X 6, Z 0, and press
Enter.
3 Create three horizontal lines:
a On the Geometry toolbar, select Horizontal from the Line

menu.
b Enter an XYZ of Y 0.5, Z 0, and press Enter.
c Create a second line by entering an XYZ of Y 1.125, Z 0, and
press Enter.
d Create a third line by entering an XYZ of Y 1.5, Z 0, and press
Enter.
4 Create a through line:
a On the Geometry toolbar, select Point, Angle from the Line

menu.
b In the Feature/Geometry Edit bar, enter an angle A of 30.

c In the graphics window, click at the intersection between the
second horizontal and second vertical lines, at point , to
create a through line.
5 Create arcs.
a On the Geometry toolbar, select 2 Pts, Radius from the Arc

menu.
b In the Feature/Geometry Edit bar, enter a radius R of 0.5, and
click the vertical line around point and the horizontal line
around point .
c Create the second arc:

In the Feature/Geometry Edit bar, enter a radius R of 1.0, and
click the horizontal line around point and the through line
around point .

d Create the third arc by clicking the through line around point
and the horizontal line around point .
6 To mill the part you need to chain the curves.

button.
c Click at the intersection of the vertical and horizontal line at
point and at the intersection of the vertical and horizontal
line at point .

Creating the bottle surface
1 Select the Surfaces step from the Steps panel.
2 In the Surface wizard, select Surface of Revolution, and click Next.
3 On the Surface of Revolution page:
a Enter a Start Angle of 0.

b Enter an End Angle of 180.
c FeatureCAM automatically selects your chained curve in the
Curve field.

d In the Axis field, click the Pick line button, and select the
horizontal line around point .
Click Finish.
Viewing the part

1 To change the view to an isometric view, click the Isometric
button on the Standard toolbar.
2 Control how the part is displayed using the Viewing Options.

a Select Options > Viewing from the menu. This displays the
Viewing Options dialog.
b Select the Show surface boundaries only option, and click
Apply.
This displays the surfaces as only their outer boundaries and
trimmed loops. No additional lines are drawn in the interior of
the surface. This makes the display of larger models much
faster.

c Deselect the Show surface boundaries only option, and click
Apply.
This displays the surfaces with lines in the interior of the
surface. This aids visualization, but for large models, it makes
the display of the part slower.
d Enter a Surface fineness Wireframe of 20, and click Apply.
This displays the surfaces with more lines. Decreasing the
value of Surface Fineness improves the display quality but
slows down the graphics.
e Click OK to close the dialog.
3 From the Hide menu on the Advanced toolbar, click the Hide
All Geometry button.
4 From the Show menu on the Advanced toolbar, click the

Show all surfaces button.
5 Click the Shade button, on the Standard toolbar, to shade the

part.

Creating a surface milling feature
This shows you how to create the surface features and select the
toolpath strategies.
1 On the Standard toolbar, click the Select button, and select

the surface (srf1). On selection it turns red.
2 Select the Features step from the Steps panel.

3 In the New Feature wizard, in the From Surface frame, select the
Surface Milling option, and click next.
4 On the Part Surface page click Next.

5 On the New Strategy page, select the Choose Rough, Semi Finish,
and Finish… option, and click Next.
6 On the Rough page:
a Select the Z Level Rough option.

b Select Classify slices as 3D Pocket.
c Click Next.

7 On the Semi-Finish page, select None, and click Next.
8 On the Finish page, select Isoline.
9 Click the Finish button.


Simulation toolbar.

button to start the simulation. If the Automatic Ordering Options
dialog displays, click OK to close it. This accepts the default
ordering options.
Note how the toolpaths are accurately simulated including

the part rotations.

Introduction to wire EDM
This tutorial introduces you to the basics of creating wire EDM
toolpaths. It looks at:
 Setting up your material and wire thickness.
 Creating wire EDM features.
 Specifying a wire EDM cutting strategy.
 Simulating wire EDM toolpaths.
You must have licensed the Wire EDM option to run this
tutorial.
To use the wire EDM example, start FeatureCAM (see page 2),
create a new file (see page 4) with a Type of Wire EDM Setup, then
follow these steps:
1 Define the stock (see page 67).
2 Create the profile (see page 68).
3 Create a wire EDM feature (see page 69).
4 Simulate the wire EDM toolpath (see page 71).
5 Generate NC code (Wire EDM) (see page 73).
6 Add a taper angle (see page 74).
Defining the stock

The preparatory steps define the stock and determine the
coordinate system and view.

a Enter a Thickness of 0.5.
b Enter a Width of 4.
c Enter a Length of 4.
d From the Finish menu button select the Finish button.
Creating the profile

This step defines the profile.
1 Select the Curves step from the Steps panel.
2 In the Curves Creation dialog, select the Curve Wizard

button.
3 In the Curve Wizard:
a Select a construction method of Other methods.

b Select a constructor of Rectangle.
4 Click Next.
5 On the Rectangle page:
a Select Use corner, width, and height.

b Enter corner point of 1, 1, 0.
c Enter a corner radius of 0.5.
d Enter a Width of 2.0.
e Enter a Height of 2.0.
f Click Finish.
Creating a wire EDM feature

This shows you how to create a wire EDM feature.
1 Click the Features step in the Steps panel.

2 In the New Feature wizard, select the Die option in the 2 Axis
frame, and click Next.
3 On the Curves page, click the Pick curve or geometry button,

select the curve you created, and click Next.
4 On the Location page, click Next.

5 On the Dimensions page, enter a Thickness of 0.5 and click Next.
6 On the Start page, click Next.

7 On the Strategies page:
a In the Operations field select Retract.

b Select the Cutoff option.
c Select the Contour option.
d Click Finish.
Simulating the wire EDM toolpath


Simulation toolbar.
2 Click the 2D Simulation button on the Simulation toolbar.

3 Center the Simulation Speed slider to specify the simulation
rate.
4 From the Simulation Next menu button, select the Play to

Next Operation button to see the retract operation. If the
Automatic Ordering Options dialog displays, click OK to close it.

To slow down the simulation, drag the Simulation Speed
slider to the left.
5 Click the Play to Next Operation button again to see the cutoff
operation.

6 Click the Play to Next Operation button again to see the final
contour operation.
7 Click Eject .
Generating NC code
the NC Code dialog.
2 Click the Display the NC Code button to generate the NC

code.

Adding a taper angle
This example shows you how to add a draft angle to a wire EDM
part.
1 Open the Part View panel, select the die1 feature from the Setup1
node, and click the Properties button on the

Feature/Geometry Edit toolbar.
2 In the Properties dialog for die1:
a Select Constant.
b Select a taper type of Left.

c Enter a deg. of 10 as the taper angle.
d Click Apply.
3 Click the Hide Stock button from the Hide menu on the
Advanced toolbar.
4 Click the Isometric View button on the Standard toolbar.
5 Return back to the Properties dialog, set the taper type to Right,
and click Apply.
6 Change the taper type back to Left, and click OK to close the
Properties dialog.

button.

9 Click the Select button on the Standard toolbar.
10 Click inside the curve. FeatureCAM deletes that part of the stock.
11 Click Eject .
12 From the Show menu on the Advanced toolbar, click the

Show Stock button.

Introduction to Feature Recognition
There are two types of Feature Recognition in FeatureCAM, which
you can learn about in the following examples:
 Automatic Feature Recognition (see page 78) — Automatically
recognize all features in a solid model.
 Interactive Feature Recognition (see page 84) — Recognize
individual features from a solid model.

Automatic Feature Recognition example
This example shows you how to use Automatic Feature Recognition
to recognize features in a solid model.
To use the Automatic Feature Recognition example, start
FeatureCAM (see page 2), create a new file (see page 4), then
follow these steps:
1 Import the ug_plate.x_t solid model (see page 79).
2 Use Automatic Feature Recognition to create the features (see
page 81).

Importing the solid model
This step shows you how to import a solid model into FeatureCAM.
To import the solid model:
1 If the Dimensions dialog is displayed, click Cancel to close it.
2 Select the File > Import menu option to display the Import dialog.
3 Navigate to the \FeatureCAM\Examples\FeatureRECOGNITION
folder.
By default this folder is in the Program files\Delcam folder.
4 Select the ug_plate.x_t file and click Open.
The Import Results dialog is displayed.
5 Select Use the wizard to establish the initial setup location and stock
size and click Next.
The Pick Initial Setup Z Direction page is displayed.
6 Click Next.
The Pick Initial Setup X Orientation page is displayed.
7 Click Next.
The Stock Type page is displayed.
8 Select Block and click Next.
The Stock Dimensions page is displayed.
9 Select Compute stock size from the size of the part and click Next.
The Pick Initial Setup XYZ Location page is displayed.
10 Click LL.
This locates the Setup (the part's coordinate system origin on the
machine) in the lower-left corner of the stock.
11 Click Finish to close the Import wizard.
The part is imported into the document.

12 Press the Ctrl+1 keys to select an isometric view.
You can learn more about the options available in the Import
wizard by clicking the Help button on each page.

Using Automatic Feature Recognition
This step shows you how to use Automatic Feature Recognition to
create features.
To use Automatic Feature Recognition:
1 Select the Construct > Automatic Feature Recognition menu option.
The Automatic Feature Recognition dialog is displayed.
2 Select your imported solid in the list.
3 Click Options.
The AFR Options dialog is displayed.
4 In the AFR Options dialog:
a Select Create face feature
b Select Create hole pattern
c Deselect Create 3D feature
5 Click OK to close the AFR Options dialog.
6 Click Next.
The Setups page is displayed. You can use this page to select on
which Setups the recognized features are created. In this
example there is only one Setup.
7 Click Next.
The features page is displayed. A list is displayed of all the
recognized features, and a wireframe preview is displayed in the
graphics window.
You can deselect features in the list that you do not want to
create. In this tutorial, you do not need to create a Face feature.
8 Deselect face 01 in the list.
9 Click Finish to create the selected features.

The created features are displayed in the Part View.
You can move the cursor over an item's name in the Part View to
highlight it in the graphics window.

Simulating the toolpaths (AFR)
You can now simulate the toolpaths to see the result of the feature
recognition.
To simulate the toolpaths:

Simulation toolbar.

The 3D cutting simulation is displayed in the graphics window.
If there are any gouges, the simulation is paused and a warning

is displayed.
3 When the simulation is complete, check the part to ensure there
are no gouges and all the features have been machined
correctly.
4 In the Simulation toolbar, click Stop to clear the simulation.

Interactive Feature Recognition example
This example shows you how to use Interactive Feature Recognition
to recognize features in a solid model.
To use the Interactive Feature Recognition example, start
FeatureCAM (see page 2), create a new file (see page 4), then
follow these steps:
1 Import the Integrex.sat solid model (see page 85).
2 Use Interactive Feature Recognition to create the features (see
page 87).
3 Change the tool selection (see page 90).

Importing the solid model
This step shows you how to import a solid model into FeatureCAM.
To import the solid model:
1 If the Dimensions dialog is displayed, click Cancel to close it.
2 Select the File > Import menu option to display the Import dialog.
3 Navigate to the \FeatureCAM\Examples\FeatureRECOGNITION
folder.
By default this folder is in the Program files\Delcam folder.
4 Select the Integrex.sat file and click Open.
The Import Results dialog is displayed.
5 Select Use the wizard to establish the initial setup location and click
Next.
The Pick Initial Setup Z Direction page is displayed.
6 Click Next.
The Pick Initial Setup X Orientation page is displayed.
7 Click Next.
The Stock Type page is displayed.
8 Select Block and click Next.
The Stock Dimensions page is displayed.
9 Select Compute stock size from the size of the part and click Next.
The Pick Initial Setup XYZ Location page is displayed.
10 Click LL.
This locates the Setup (the part's coordinate system origin on the
machine) in the lower-left corner of the stock.
11 Click Finish to close the Import wizard.
The part is imported into the document.

12 Press the Ctrl+3 keys to select an isometric view.
You can learn more about the options available in the Import
wizard by clicking the Help button on each page.

Using Interactive Feature Recognition
This step shows you how to use Interactive Feature Recognition to
create features. In this example you will create Side features and
then Hole features.
Creating the Side features

To create the Side features:

The New Feature dialog is displayed.
2 Under From Curve, select Side.
3 Select Extract with FeatureRECOGNITION.
4 Click Next.
The Feature Extraction page is displayed.
5 Select Select side surfaces and click Next.
The Surface page is displayed.
6 In the graphics window, select the surface on which to create the
flat Side feature.
7 On the Surfaces page, click Add from selected items to add

the surface to the list.
8 Click the arrow on the Finish button, and then click Finish and
Create More.
The feature is created and the New Feature dialog is displayed.

9 Ensure Side and Extract with FeatureRECOGNITION are selected,
and click Next.
The Feature Extraction page is displayed.
10 Select Select side surfaces and click Next.
The Surface page is displayed.
11 In the graphics window, select the surfaces on which to create
the curved Side features, on both the front and back of the part.
Front:
Back:
Hold the Shift key and click to select multiple surfaces.
Press the Ctrl+3 or Ctrl+7 to select the back and front

isometric views.
12 On the Surfaces page, click Add from selected items to add
the surfaces to the list.
13 Click the arrow on the Finish button, and then click Finish to
create the features and close the dialog.

Creating the Hole features
To create the Hole features:

The New Feature dialog is displayed.
2 Under From Dimensions, select Hole.
3 Ensure Extract with FeatureRECOGNITION is selected.
4 Click Next.
The Hole Recognition Method page is displayed.
5 Select Recognize and construct multiple holes and click Next.
A preview of the recognized Holes is displayed in the graphics
window.
You can now select the Holes you want to create. Selected Holes
are displayed in red.
6 Click Select All to select all the recognized Holes.
7 Click Finish to create the Hole features and close the dialog.

Tool selection (IFR)
When using Feature Recognition, it is possible to create features
that you do not have the tools to machine.
In this example, there is no tool that meets the requirements for
drilling the large Holes. If you try to run a simulation, the Code
Generation Failed message is displayed.
When this happens, you can:
 add a new tool to your tool library that is the correct size to
machine the feature; or
 machine the feature with an existing tool.
In this example, you will use an existing tool.
To select a tool to machine the feature:
1 In the Results window, select the Op List tab.
The Operation List is displayed. The operations with no tool
selected have a red exclamation mark, and no tool name.
2 Double-click an operation with no tool to display the Feature

Properties dialog.
3 Select the Tools tab.
A list of available tools is displayed.

4 Select the check mark to the left of TD_03970_X:J to use this
tool.
5 Click OK to accept your changes and close the dialog.

Because similar Hole features are created as patterns instead of
individual features, you only need to edit one feature and your
changes are applied to all the features in the pattern.
The tool selection tolerance is determined by the Tool diameter

tolerance option on the Tool Selection tab of the Machining
Attributes dialog. You can increase this value to enable a wider
range of tools to be selected to machine a feature.

Simulating the toolpaths (IFR)
You can run a 3D simulation to check if the features have been
created correctly and to check for gouges.
1 Click the Toolpaths step in the Steps panel. This displays

the Simulation toolbar.

If the Automatic Ordering Options dialog appears, click OK to
The 3D cutting simulation is displayed in the graphics window.
3 Click Stop to clear the simulation results.

What's New in
FeatureCAM
FeatureCAM issues a major enhancement release every September,

January, and May. For details of our developments in the last year,
see:
What's New in FeatureCAM 2016 R2 (see page 2)
Visit our website at http://www.delcam.tv/lz/ for up-to-the-minute
news and videos; and visit http://updates.delcam.com to download
our latest service packs and enhancements.
FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help What's New in FeatureCAM • 1

What's new in FeatureCAM 2016 R2
FeatureCAM 2016 R2 contains the following new features and
enhancements:
User interface
FeatureCAM 2016 R2 contains the following changes and
improvements to the user interface:
 Sorting feature curves (see page 6) — You can now sort feature
profile curves based on selected criteria to improve the
machining times.
 Pocket curves manual ordering (see page 8) — You can now
manually specify the machining order of profile curves in Pocket
features.
Importing
improvements to importing:
 Importing SolidWorks 2016 files (see page 10) — You can now
import SolidWorks 2016 files into FeatureCAM.
 Parasolid v28.0 support (see page 11) — FeatureCAM now
supports Parasolid v28.0.
Milling
improvements to milling:
 5 axis Z-indexing (see page 13) — You can now use Z indexing in
5-axis simultaneous parts.
 Relative plunge (see page 15) — You now have more control of
when to use rapid moves during plunging in 2.5D features.
 Automatic tool selection (see page 16) — The automatic tool
selection has been improved for tools with a large shank to
prevent gouges.
 Toolpath features (see page 17) — You can now import toolpath
points from an operation in between existing points of a Toolpath
feature.
Turning
FeatureCAM 2016 R2 contains this improvement to turning:
2 • What's New in FeatureCAM FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help

 TNR undercut checking (see page 19) — You can now use
undercut checking and auto-round when using tool nose radius
compensation.
Machine Simulation
improvements to machine simulation:
 Selecting a Machine Design file (see page 22) — It is now easier
and quicker to change the machine design file used for machine
simulations.
 Simulating tool post movements during part handling (see page 23)
— The machine simulation now displays tool post movements
during part handling.
Tombstone machining
FeatureCAM 2016 R2 contains this improvement to tombstone
machining:
 Adding Tombstone parts (see page 26) — You can now specify the
location of the part relative to the fixture location.
Add-ins and extensions

improvements to add-ins and extensions:
 Turning heads with multiple tools (see page 29) — You can now
simulate multiple tools on a turning head to give you more
complete simulation and gouge checking.
 Mill-curve tolerance add-in (see page 31) — There is a new add-in
that enables you resize milling features quickly to bring them
into tolerance without redrawing the feature curve.
 Setup Sheet improvements (see page 34) — There are new tags in
the Setup Sheet add-in.
 Custom parallels for vises (see page 35) — You can now use
custom parallel sizes in the Import Vise add-in to ensure the part
and vise are simulated in the correct position.
 Setup Activate add-in (see page 36) — The Setup Activate add-in
has been improved.
 Silent install language (see page 37) — You can now specify the
install language when performing a silent install of FeatureCAM
using the command prompt.
XBUILD
improvements to XBUILD:

 Segment End Format (see page 39) — There is now a Segment
End Format in XBUILD that gives you more flexibility when
creating posts.
 Array operators (see page 40) — The method for managing data
stored in arrays has been improved.
 HTML documentation (see page 42) — You can now use a
template to improve the HTML documentation, and you can
create HTML documentation from the command prompt.
Machine design
FeatureCAM 2016 R2 contains this improvement to machine design:
 Adding tool locations to tool blocks (see page 48) — You can now
specify whether to locate the tool tip or the back of the tool
holder.

User interface
 Sorting feature curves (see page 6) — You can now sort feature
profile curves based on different criteria to improve the
machining times.
 Manually ordering Pocket curves (see page 8) — You can now
manually specify the machining order of profile curves in Pocket
features.

Sorting feature curves
You can now sort feature profile curves based on selected criteria to
improve the machining times. Previously you could only sort feature
curves manually or automatically.
To sort feature curves:

1 In the Feature Properties dialog, on the Dimensions tab, click
Curves or Boundaries (depending on the feature type).
2 The Ordering or Select Boundary Curves dialog is displayed.
3 Select the check-box next to the curves you want to use to
define the feature boundaries.
4 Under Ordering, select Manual ordering.
5 Click the new Sorting button.

6 The new Curve Sorting Options dialog is displayed.
7 Select how to sort the selected features:

Shortest path — Sort the features to reduce the movement
between features.
X/Y/Z ascending/descending — Sort the features by position.
8 For rows or columns of features, select how to transition between
rows or columns:
Unidirectional — Cut all rows of features in the same direction,
with a rapid move to the start of the next row.
Bidirectional — Cut rows of features in alternating directions to
reduce the rapid movement distance.
Location comparison tolerance — Specify the tolerance within
which a range of positions is considered a row or column.
9 Click OK to close the dialog and sort the features.

Manually ordering Pocket curves
You can now manually specify the machining order of profile curves
in Pocket features. Previously, this was calculated automatically in
some situations.
To manually order boundary curves for a Pocket feature:
1 On the Dimensions tab of the Feature Properties dialog, click
Boundaries to display the Select Boundary Curves dialog.
2 Under Ordering, select Manual ordering.
3 Use the Move item up and Move item down buttons to

order the curves.
Alternatively, drag curves in the list to reposition them.
4 Click OK to close the dialog.

Importing
 Parasolid v28.0 support (see page 11) — FeatureCAM now
supports Parasolid v28.0.

Importing SolidWorks 2016 files
You can now import SolidWorks 2016 files into FeatureCAM.
To import a SolidWorks file into FeatureCAM:
1 Select the File > Import menu option.
The Import dialog is displayed.
2 In the Files of type list, select SolidWorks (*.sldprt;*.sldasm).
Only SolidWorks documents are displayed in the Import dialog.
3 Select a file to display a preview image on the right of the dialog.
4 Click Open to import the file and close the dialog.
The Import Results wizard is displayed, which you can use to
specify the setup location and stock size, and to recognize
features.

Parasolid v28.0 support
FeatureCAM now supports Parasolid v28.0.

Milling
 5 axis Z-indexing (see page 13) — You can now use Z indexing in
5-axis simultaneous parts.
 Relative plunge (see page 15) — You now have more control of
when to use rapid moves during plunging in 2.5D features.
 Automatic tool selection (see page 16) — The automatic tool
selection has been improved for tools with a large shank to
prevent gouges.
 Toolpath features (see page 17) — You can now import toolpath
points from an operation in between existing points of a Toolpath
feature.

FC 5-axis Z indexing
You can now use Z-indexing in 5-axis simultaneous parts. This gives
you more control over the toolpaths to reduce machining times and
prevent collisions. Z axis indexing was previously available only for
4-axis parts.
Enable the Cut feature using Y Axis coordinates option and enter a C
Angle to use a fixed Z axis angle and move the tool in X and Y to
machine the feature. Deselect this option to enable the part to
rotate around the Z axis to machine the feature, keeping the tool
oriented towards the center of the C axis from the positive X axis.
Cut feature using Y Axis Cut feature using Y Axis

coordinates selected coordinates deselected
The tool moves in X and Y to The part is rotated about the

cut the features. index axis to cut the features.
To enable Z indexing:
1 Ensure you are using a CNC file that supports 5-axis positioning,
5-axis simultaneous and Z-indexing.

2 In the Stock Properties dialog, on the Indexing tab, select the new
Use Z-indexing option to enable Z-indexing for the document.
3 For each feature, deselect Cut feature using Y Axis coordinates on

the Dimensions tab of the Feature Properties dialog to enable the
part to rotate about the Z axis during cutting.

Relative plunge
You now have more control of when to use rapid moves during
plunging in 2.5D features, which enables you to improve machining
times by reducing unnecessary feed moves when it is safe to rapid.
For example, you can use this to plunge at the feed rate for
features starting inside the stock, and plunge at the rapid rate for
features starting outside the stock boundary.
There is a new Relative plunge option on the Plunge tab of the
Feature Properties dialog.
Relative plunge deselected Relative plunge selected
— Rapid move
— Plunge clearance attribute
Select this option to measure the Plunge clearance from the bottom
of the feature instead of from the top.
Previously, you could only do this by using a negative Plunge
clearance which is equal to the depth of cut minus the desired
plunge height above the bottom of the cut.
This is available for Pocket, Boss and Side features when

using OT toolpaths.

Automatic tool selection
The automatic tool selection has been improved for tools with a
large shank to prevent gouges. When the shank diameter is greater
than the cutter diameter, the tool selection now considers the cutter
length attribute instead of the exposed length to prevent collisions
between the shank and the stock.
For example, previously this tool could have been selected because
the exposed length is large enough to prevent the tool holder from
gouging the stock. Now a longer tool will be selected to prevent the
shank colliding with the stock.
— Cutter length
— Exposed length

Toolpath features
You can now import toolpath points from an operation in between
existing points of a Toolpath feature. Previously, imported points
would replace existing points.
For example, you can use a curve to specify the start and end
points of a toolpath, and then insert the toolpath points from an
operation between the start and end points.
To import toolpath points from an operation into a toolpath feature:
1 In the Part View, double-click the toolpath feature to display the
Toolpath Properties dialog.
2 On the Toolpaths tab, select a toolpath point.
You can import the toolpath points above or below the selected
point.
3 Click Add operation .
The Add Operation to Toolpath dialog is displayed.
4 In the Operation list, select the operation from which you want to
import the toolpath points.
5 Select where you want to locate the imported toolpath points:
 Replace all toolpath points — Delete all existing toolpath points
and import the toolpath points from the operation.
 Add operation points before selected toolpath point — Import
the toolpath points from the operation and insert them before
the toolpath point selected in the Toolpath Properties dialog.
 Add operation points after selected toolpath point — Import the
toolpath points from the operation and insert them after the
toolpath point selected in the Toolpath Properties dialog.
6 Click OK to close the dialog and import the toolpath points.

Turning
FeatureCAM 2016 R2 contains this improvement to turning:
 TNR undercut checking (see page 19) — You can now use
undercut checking and auto-round when using tool nose radius
compensation.

TNR undercut checking
You can now use undercut checking and auto-round when using tool
nose radius compensation. Previously, these were only available
when TNR comp was disabled.
For example, in this part the undercut has been removed to prevent
the tool from gouging the part, and auto-round is used to insert an
arc move in the corner of the toolpath without changing the shape
of the machined part.
To enable tool nose radius compensation, select TNR Comp for each
operation on the Strategy tab of the Feature Properties dialog.

To enable auto-round and undercut checking, use the options on the
Turning tab of the Feature Properties dialog.

Machine Simulation
improvements to machine simulation:
 Selecting a Machine Design file (see page 22) — It is now easier
and quicker to change the machine design file used for machine
simulations.
 Simulating part handling tool post controls (see page 23) — The
machine simulation now displays tool post movements during
part handling.

Selecting a Machine Design file
There is a new status bar item that enables you to change the MD
file quickly without using the Setup wizard.
Click the name of the machine design file to display the Setup -
Simulation information dialog, which you can use to change the
machine design file associated with the active setup.
If the Generate single program (see page 230) option is

enabled in the Stock Properties dialog, this sets the MD file for
the first setup, instead of the active setup. For Vertical
Turnmilling documents, this sets the MD for the first turning
setup.
Smart MD choice
When you select an MD file that does not exist, or when the CNC file
refers to an MD file that does not exist, FeatureCAM now selects an
appropriate MD file from the Examples\Machine Design folder.
If a smart MD choice is made, a message dialog is displayed when
you close the dialog and when you run a simulation. You can disable
these messages by deselecting Notify me when a smart choice is
made.

Simulating tool post movements during part handling
The machine simulation now displays tool post movements during
part handling, enabling you to check the movements for collisions.
In the following example the upper tool post is moved away, and
the lower tool post is indexed to a safe position to prevent collisions
during the transfer.
To control the tool posts during part handling:

1 Create a Part Handling feature.
2 In the Feature Properties dialog, in the Strategy tab, click Tool post
control.
The Transfer Tool Post Control dialog is displayed.
3 Select a Location for each tool post to specify whether to move it

to the home position, a safe position away from the part, or keep
it where it is.
4 Enter an Index number to specify to which tool location the tool
post should index.
Use this to ensure tools do not cause collisions, or improve
machining times by indexing to the next tool in advance.

6 Run a machine simulation.
The tool post movements are displayed in the simulation.

Tombstone machining
FeatureCAM 2016 R2 contains this improvement to tombstone
machining:
 Adding Tombstone parts (see page 26) — You can now specify the
location of the part relative to the fixture location.

Adding Tombstone parts
When adding parts to a tombstone, you can now specify the location
of the part relative to the fixture location. Previously, you could only
add parts relative to the faces of the tombstone.
For Heidenhain posts, this enables you to use a datum shift from
the fixture location to the setup, instead of from the tombstone
origin to the setup.
To add a part to a tombstone relative to a fixture location:
1 Use the Fixture Offset Locations dialog to create a fixture location.
You will locate your part relative to this location.
2 Use the Add Part wizard to add a part and select the primary
setup.
3 On the Select Fixture page, select Create a new fixture zero at the
setup origin, and click Next.
The new fixture location page is displayed.
4 Select Relative to a global fixture location to use the new method

to add the part relative to an existing fixture location on the
tombstone.
5 Select a fixture location in the list, and click Next.

The new Part Location page is displayed.
6 Enter the X, Y, and Z Offset values to offset the part's primary

setup location from the fixture location.
7 Click Preview to display a wireframe preview of the part in the
graphics window.
8 Click Next to display the Preview page.
9 Click Finish to add the part to the tombstone.
For Heidenhain posts, the NC code now includes a datum shift
from the fixture location to the setup location.
When using the existing method, the datum shift is from the
tombstone location to the setup.

 Turning heads with multiple tools (see page 29) — You can now
simulate multiple tools on a turning head to give you more
complete simulation and gouge checking.
 Mill-curve tolerance add-in (see page 31) — There is a new add-in
that enables you resize milling features quickly to bring them
into tolerance without redrawing the feature curve.
 Setup Sheet improvements (see page 34) — There are new tags in
the Setup Sheet add-in.
 Custom parallels for vises (see page 35) — You can now use
custom parallel sizes in the Import Vise add-in to ensure the part
and vise are simulated in the correct position.
 Setup Activate add-in (see page 36) — The Setup Activate add-in
has been improved.
 Silent install language (see page 37) — You can now specify the
install language when performing a silent install of FeatureCAM
using the command prompt.

Turning heads with multiple tools
In FeatureCAM 2015 R3, support was introduced for turning head
tool holders (see page 119).
You can now simulate turning heads with multiple tools. This
enables you to create accurate simulations and check for gouges
when using multiple tools. Using multiple tools in the same turning
head enables you to reduce the machining time by reducing the
time it takes to change to the next tool.
This requires the Advanced Turn/Mill (MTT) module, and it requires a

modified CNC file and modified MD file (see page 1936) to facilitate
the U axis movement.
To use a turning head tool holder with multiple tools:
1 Create a turning head feature (see page 186) for each tool on
the tool holder. For example, create a rough and finish pass as
separate features.

2 For each feature, set the U Axis Sign attribute in the Dimensions
tab of the Feature Properties dialog to specify which direction
along the U axis the tool is cutting.
3 Use the Tool Block Selection dialog (see page 1579) to select the
Tool block as the turning head and select which sub slot holds
each tool.
Machine Design
To modify the Machine Design file to simulate a turning head with
multiple tools:
1 Create a UCS for each tool location on the sliding u-plate, facing
in opposite directions. This enables the tools to cut the part from
both sides.
2 Select Machine Design > Tool Block for Tool Post and use the Tool
Block dialog to create a tool location at each UCS.

Mill-curve tolerance add-in
There is a new Mill-curve tolerance add-in that enables you
automatically resize milling features quickly to bring them into
tolerance without redrawing the feature curve.
Previously, this was available only for turning features using the
Turn-curve tolerance add-in.
To use the Mill-curve tolerance add-in:
1 Install the MillCurveTolerance.bas add-in.
2 Select a milling feature created from a curve in the XY plane.
3 In the Utilities toolbar, click the Tolerances button.
The Tolerance of Line Segments dialog is displayed, and the
vertical and horizontal segments of the curve are labeled in the
graphics window.
4 Adjust the labels:

 To change the label size, enter a new value in the Segment
Text Size box, and click Set.
 To label only the currently selected segment, deselect the
Segment Labels On check box.

5 In the Segments list, select the segment you want to adjust. The
segment and its label are displayed in red in the graphics
window.
6 Specify the adjustment for the segment:

 To calculate the adjustment from specified tolerances, select
the Upper tolerance - Lower tolerance option and enter the
tolerance values.
 To calculate the adjustment from standard tolerances, select
the Upper tolerance - Lower tolerance option, and select the
tolerances in the ISO 286-2 list.
 To specify the adjustment, select Net tolerance, and enter the
distance by which you want to move the segment.
7 Click Apply Tolerance. The adjustment for the segment is
displayed below the button.
8 Click OK to apply your changes and close the dialog.
FeatureCAM creates a new curve and feature, and displays the
results in the graphics window, for example:

Notes
 You can use this only for features created from curves; Bosses,
Chamfers, Grooves, Pockets, Rounds, and Sides.
 If a feature is created from multiple curves, only the first curve is
adjusted.
 Open and closed curves work the same.
 If you enter a tolerance that would break the feature, a message
is displayed explaining the maximum tolerance you can enter for
a segment.
 Non-vertical and non-horizontal lines and curves are translated
to accommodate the tolerance but not altered.

Setup Sheet improvements
There are new tags in the SetupSheet.dll add-in:
 NC code file name — fm.cnc_file_name
 Actual depth of cut — operation.actual_depth
This is the setup or feature depth minus the allowances and
offsets. This is applicable to all feature and operation types.
 Z end of operation — operation.z_start
 Z start of operation — operation.z_end

Custom parallels for vises
You can now use custom parallel sizes in the Import Vise add-in
(see page 191) to ensure the part is simulated in the correct
position in the vise.
There are new options in the Import Vise dialog.
To create a custom parallel size:

1 Select Add parallels.
2 In the Parallels dimensions list, select Custom.
3 Select Metric to enter the dimensions in cm, or deselect it to
enter the dimensions in inches.
4 Enter the width (W), length (L), and thickness (T) dimensions.
5 Select Save to library to add your custom parallel to the Parallel
dimensions list.

Setup Activate add-in
The SetupActivate.bas add-in has been improved. You can use the
this add-in to assign solids to setups, and only display solids
assigned to the active setup.
Previously, solids without the prefix part would be hidden, now
solids with no prefix are not hidden, so you can use this add-in
without having to rename your part solids.
This is useful when using the Import vise add-in (see page 191), as
part solids are no longer hidden when you import vises into a
document.

Silent install language
You can now specify the install language when performing a silent
install of FeatureCAM using the command prompt.
To perform a silent install, enter this in the command prompt:
"FeatureCAM.exe" /S /USERSHORTCUT=$shortcut_name
/D=$install_location /LANGUAGE=$language
 FeatureCAM.exe — The name of the installer. If you are installing
from the DVD the installer is called setup.exe.
 $shortcut_name — The name of the FeatureCAM shortcut that is
created on the Desktop.
 $install_location — The complete path where FeatureCAM is
installed.
If no install location is specified it is installed in the default
location, C:\Program Files\Delcam\FeatureCAM.
Do not use quotes in the pathname.
 $language — The three letter acronym to specify the install
language of FeatureCAM. For example, for a Spanish install enter
esp. If no language is specified or an incorrect acronym is used,
FeatureCAM is installed in English.

XBUILD
 Segment End Format (see page 39) — There is now a Segment
End Format in XBUILD that gives you more flexibility when
creating posts.
 Array operators (see page 40) — The method for managing data
stored in arrays has been improved.
 HTML documentation (see page 42) — You can now use a
template to improve the HTML documentation, and you can
create HTML documentation from the command prompt.

Segment End Format
There is now a Segment End Format in XBUILD that gives you more
flexibility when creating posts.
You can use the Segment End Format to include cancel codes
without having to wait until the next Tool Change or Segment Start
Format is called.
In XBUILD, select the Formats > Program > Segment End to open it in
the Format editor.
The Segment End Format is output after each segment.
For example, when using a UDF feature to insert code between

operations, you can use the Segment End format to ensure that the
UDF code is output before the cancelation codes for the previous
operation.
Without Segment End With Segment End
1 Initialize 1st operation 1 Initialize 1st operation
(Segment Start Format) (Segment Start Format)
2 Cut 1st operation (Move 2 Cut 1st operation (Move
Formats) Formats)
3 Inserted code (UDF Text 3 1st operation cancel codes
Format) (Segment End Format)
4 1st operation cancel codes 4 Inserted code (UDF Text
(Segment Start Format) Format)
Initialize 2nd operation 5 Initialize 2nd operation
5 Cut 2nd operation (Move 6 Cut 2nd operation (Move
Formats) Formats)
6 2nd operation cancel codes 7 2nd operation cancel codes

Array operators
The method for managing data stored in arrays has been improved.
Operator Function Example Result
Initializes a new [arr = arr is the
ar_new(...) array from a list of ar_new(1, array {1, 2,
elements. 2, 3, 4)] 3, 4}
Initializes a new arr is the

ar_by_len(l
array of size length,
[arr = array
ength, ar_by_len(3 {"abc",
value) with all elements , "abc")] "abc",
initialized to value. "abc"}
Retrieves the [arr =
element at position ar_new("a",
ar_get(arra
y, index) index in array. "b", "c")] Returns "c"
Array indexes are [ar_get(arr
0-based. , 2)]
Sets the element at

[arr =
position index in
ar_set(arra ar_new(1, arr is the
array equal to
y, index, 2, 3)] array {1, 4,
value) value. [ar_set(arr 3}
Array indexes are , 1, 4)]
0-based.
Adds delta to the [arr =
ar_incr(arr element at position ar_new(1, arr is the
ay, index, index in array. 2, 3)] array {-2, 2,
delta) Array indexes are [ar_incr(ar 3}
0-based. r, 0, -3)]
[arr =
Appends a list of ar_new(1, arr is the
ar_append(a
rray, ...) elements to the end 2, 3)] array {1, 2,
of array. [ar_append( 3, 4, 5}
arr, 4, 5)]
[arr1 =
ar_new("a", arr3 is the
Creates a new
"b", "c")] array {"a",
array containing all
ar_concat(a [arr2 = "b", "c",
of the elements of "d", "e",
rray1, ar_new("d",
array1 followed by
array2) "e", "f")] "f"}. arr1
all the elements of [arr3 = and arr2 are
array2. ar_concat(a unchanged.
rr1, arr2)]
Creates a new [arr1 =
ar_copy(arr arr2 is the
array containing all ar_new(1,

ay) of the elements of 2, 3)] array {1, 2,
array1. [arr2 = 3}. arr1 is
ar_copy(arr unchanged.
1)]
[arr =
ar_new("a",
Returns the number
ar_len(arra "b", "c",
y) of elements in "d")] Returns 4
array. [ar_len(arr
)]

HTML documentation
You can create HTML documentation from CNC files to keep records
and compare them easily.
Several improvements have been made to the HTML
documentation:
 You can now use a template to improve the HTML documentation
output (see page 43).
 You can now include images and comments in the documentation
(see page 45).
 You can create HTML documentation from the command prompt
(see page 46).

HTML documentation: Using a template
You can now use a template when creating HTML documentation
from a CNC file to improve the output.
HTML documentation without HTML documentation with template:

template:
Creating HTML documentation

To create HTML documentation for a CNC file:
1 In XBUILD, select one of the File > Document CNC > HTML menu
options.
To create documentation without a template, select HTML
Standard.
To create documentation using a template, select HTML With
Template.
The Save As dialog is displayed.
2 Browse to the location in which you want to save the HTML file.
3 Click Save.
If you are using a template, the Open dialog is displayed.
4 Select the html template file you want to use to create the
documentation.

The default template location is Program Files > Delcam >
FeatureCAM > Posts > HTMLDocTemplate.html.
5 Click Open.
Editing the template

You can edit the template to customize the style and content of the
HTML documentation.
The default template location is in the FeatureCAM > Posts folder. To
customize the template, replace it with a file with the same name or
customize the template file directly (remember to save a backup).
The template is responsible for providing most of the HTML. For
example, it must include the <html></html>, <head></head>,
<title></title>, and <body></body> tags. You can also include
the <style></style> tags to write your own custom CSS. Consider
the template a standalone HTML file, it must be able to display
correctly in a browser.
When you output the documentation, the tags in the template are
replaced with corresponding information from the post. For
example, if the {general info} tag is included in the template, the
html output includes the post's general information.
If the {machine image} tag is included in the template, any image
in the same directory as the post is included in the HTML
documentation.
You can include plain text in the template which is displayed in the
HTML documentation, such as introductions and additional
information.

HTML documentation: Inserting images and comments
You can now add images to HTML documentation when using a
template, and you can add comments to post variables to document
their usage.
To add an image to the HTML documentation, include it in the same
directory as the CNC file.
To add a comment about a post variable, select a variable in the
Post Variable Names dialog and enter a User-visible Name and a
Comment.
The name and comment are displayed in the HTML documentation:
These comments are not displayed in FeatureCAM or in the other

documentation formats.

HTML documentation: Using the Command prompt
You can now use the command prompt to create HTML
documentation for a CNC file without using XBUILD, which enables
you to use scripts more easily.
To create the HTML documentation without a template, enter this
into the command prompt:
"Path & filename of XBUILD" /html "Path & filename of CNC"
"Path & filename of html file"
To create the HTML documentation using a template, enter this into
the command prompt:
"Path & filename of XBUILD" /html "Path & filename of CNC"
"Path & filename of html file" Path & filename of template.

Machine Design
FeatureCAM 2016 R2 contains this improvement to machine design:
 Adding tool locations to tool blocks (see page 48) — You can now
specify whether to locate the tool tip or the back of the tool
holder.

Adding tool locations to tool blocks
When adding tool locations to tool blocks, you can now specify the
tool tip location instead of the back of the tool holder.
This enables you to program complex machines more easily, as the
geometry of many gang tool posts is such that it is better to specify
the location of the tool tip instead of the back of the tool holder.
Select the new option in the Tool Information dialog when adding a
tool location in a turning machine.
This affects the tool location wire frame preview and machine
simulation.
Tool location at back of Tool location at tool tip:

tool holder:

enhancements:
User interface
 Reference help PDF (see page 54) — The FeatureCAM Reference
help is now available as a PDF file.
 Highlighting objects from the Part View (see page 55) — You can
now highlight objects in the graphics window by moving the
cursor over the object's name in the Part View.
 Creating Setups during IFR (see page 56) — You can now create
Setups from within the New Feature wizard when using
Interactive Feature Recognition.
 Changing the simulation tool color (see page 57) — You can now
manually change the tool color at any time in a simulation.
 Displaying NC Code (see page 58) — NC code is now displayed
using fixed width text, where all the characters line up vertically,
to make it easier to read.
 Creating curves (see page 59) — The images in the curve
creation dialogs have been improved to make them easier to
understand.
Importing
 Imported solid names (see page 61) — When you import a solid
into FeatureCAM the solid name is now retained from the original
program.
 Importing AutoCAD files (see page 61) — You can now import
ACIS solids from DWG files.
 Spatial R25 SP2 Interop integrated (see page 62) — Spatial R25
SP2 Interop is now integrated.
 Parasolid v27.1 (see page 62) — FeatureCAM now supports
parasolid v27.1.
Milling
 Vortex non-cutting moves (see page 64) — You now have more
control over the non-cutting moves in vortex toolpaths.
 Collision avoidance (see page 65) — Toolpaths are now
collision-checked between unmachined stock and the shank and
holder.

 Swarf machining Z limits (see page 66) — You can now limit Swarf
operations to within a specified Z range on the surface.
 5-Axis 2D spiral toolpaths (see page 68) — You can now specify
axis smoothing options for 2D spiral toolpaths.
 Side grooves (see page 69) — The toolpath calculation for ID and
OD Grooves has been improved with several new options and
supported functions.
 Multiple coolant types (see page 71) — You can now use multiple
coolant types for a single operation.
 User Defined Stock for NT toolpaths (see page 72) — When using a
stock solid and you create a 2D NT toolpath, FeatureCAM now
calculates the toolpaths using the stock solid boundary to
prevent air-cutting.
Turning
 Turning tool orientation (see page 74) — You can now use a
turning tool in multiple orientations without having to create a
different tool in the database for each orientation.
 Roughing engage angle (see page 76) — You can now specify the
engage angle, lead in angle, and lead out angle for Turning
roughing operations.
 Negative leave allowance for grooves (see page 77) — You can
now use a negative leave allowance for groove features created
from curves.

 Setup Sheet add-in (see page 79) — There are new tags which
you can use to create more useful setup sheets.
 FeatureCAM to CAMplete (see page 80) — In the FeatureCAM to
CAMplete dialog (see page 166), there is a new button that
enables you to mark solids that are selected in the part as
clamps.
 API improvements (see page 80) — The API has been improved to
support full machine architecture.
 Nesting add-in (see page 81) — You can now use PowerSHAPE's
nesting tool to nest parts in FeatureCAM.
 Import Vise add-in (see page 83) — You can now import vises into
FeatureCAM for 3D simulation and gouge checking.
 Bar-fed mills support (see page 85) — Bar-fed mills are now
supported, such as the Willemin-Macodel 408MT and Mazak
integrex i-150.

XBUILD
 Intermediate CNC files (see page 87) — You can now split the nc
file into multiple intermediate files, and then combine these
intermediate files in different ways to create multiple output files.
 Multi-code coolant (see page 89) — You can now use different on
and off codes for a single coolant type, depending on which
turret and tool is being used.
 5-axis untransformed coordinates (see page 91) — There are new
milling reserved words that contain the untransformed X, Y, and
Z coordinates in a 5-axis part.
 Formatting reserved words (see page 92) — When formatting
numeric reserved words in XBUILD, you can now remove trailing
zeros from integer values without removing the decimal point.
 CNC documentation (see page 93) — The HTML documentation
has been improved to make the output more readable.

User Interface and work-flow
improvements to the user interface and work-flow:
 Reference help PDF (see page 54) — The FeatureCAM Reference
help is now available as a PDF file.
 Highlighting objects from the Part View (see page 55) — You can
now highlight objects in the graphics window by moving the
cursor over the object's name in the Part View.
 Creating Setups during IFR (see page 56) — You can now create
Setups from within the New Feature wizard when using
Interactive Feature Recognition.
 Changing the simulation tool color (see page 57) — You can now
manually change the tool color at any time in a simulation.
 Displaying NC Code (see page 58) — NC code is now displayed
using fixed width text, where all the characters line up vertically,
to make it easier to read.
 Creating curves (see page 59) — The images in the curve
creation dialogs have been improved to make them easier to
understand.

Reference help PDF
The FeatureCAM Reference help is now available as a PDF file, which
enables you to print it to use away from your computer.
Select the new Help > Reference (PDF) to display the Reference help
PDF.

Highlighting objects from the Part View
You can now highlight objects in the graphics window by moving the
cursor over the object's name in the Part View. This enables you to
find features quickly and improves the work-flow in complex
documents.
For example, move the cursor over an object in the Part View:
The object is highlighted in green in the graphics window:
To turn off this option, deselect Show feature dynamic highlight on

the General tab of the Viewing Options dialog.

Creating Setups during IFR
When creating Milling and Wire EDM features using Interactive
Feature Recognition, you can now create Setups from within the
New Feature wizard. This enables you to program parts with multiple
setups more quickly.
To create a Setup using the New Feature wizard:
1 In the New Feature wizard, select the feature type you want to
recognize.
3 Click the new Create new setup button.
The Setup wizard is displayed.

4 Use the Setup wizard to create a new setup, then click Finish.
The New Feature wizard is displayed.
You can use the Create new setup button to create more setups,
or click Next and use the New Feature wizard to create features.

Incrementing tool color in simulation
You can now manually change the tool color at any time in a
simulation to make it easier to understand the toolpaths and see
the tool simulation. For example you can use this to display
different passes of an operation in different colors to check for air
cutting.
This is only available for 3D, 3D rapid cut and machine simulations.
To change the tool color during a simulation:
1 In the Simulation Options dialog, on the General tab, ensure Tool
Colors is selected.
2 Run a simulation.
The tool color is displayed during the simulation.
3 Click the new Change the Simulation Tool Color button.

4 Continue the 3D simulation.
The tool color is changed in the simulation.

Displaying NC Code
NC code is now displayed using fixed width text, where all the
characters line up vertically, to make it easier to read.
You can display the NC Code in a variable-width font by
right-clicking in the NC Code window and deselecting Fixed Width
Font. Variable-width text requires less horizontal space.
Variable width Fixed width

Creating curves
The images in the curve creation dialogs have been improved to
make them easier to understand.
Letters are now used to show dimensions instead of arrows.

Importing
 Imported solid names (see page 61) — When you import a solid
into FeatureCAM the solid name is now retained from the original
program.
 Importing AutoCAD files (see page 61) — You can now import
ACIS solids from DWG files.
 Parasolid v27.1 (see page 62) — FeatureCAM now supports
parasolid v27.1.

Solid names
When you import a solid into FeatureCAM the solid name is now
retained from the original program. Previously, imported solids were
named ps_solid and numbered sequentially.
This applies when importing X_T, SolidWorks, SolidEdge files, when
pasting from PowerSHAPE, and for any solids imported using
Exchange.
You can turn this off with the importUseParasolidName

variable in the INI file.
Importing AutoCAD files

You can now import AutoCAD files using the FeatureCAM native
import. Previously you could only import using Exchange. The
FeatureCAM native import is quicker, and enables you to import
3DSOLID, REGION, and BODY entities as solids, instead of as a
collection of surfaces.
When you import an AutoCAD file that contains solids, the AutoCAD
Import Method dialog is displayed.
Select Natively within FeatureCAM... and click OK to use

FeatureCAM's native import.
For some files this may behave differently to the old method of
importing using Exchange. To use the old method of importing,
select the File > Import Using Exchange menu option.

Spatial R25 SP2 Interop integrated
Spatial R25 SP2 Interop is now integrated.
3D InterOp-enabled applications now support CATIA V5-6 R2015
and NX 10.
Parasolid v27.1
FeatureCAM now supports parasolid v27.1.

Milling
 Vortex non-cutting moves (see page 64) — You now have more
control over the non-cutting moves in vortex toolpaths.
 Collision avoidance (see page 65) — Toolpaths are now
collision-checked between unmachined stock and the shank and
holder.
 Swarf machining Z limits (see page 66) — You can now limit Swarf
operations to within a specified Z range on the surface.
 5-Axis 2D spiral toolpaths (see page 68) — You can now specify
axis smoothing options for 2D spiral toolpaths.
 Side grooves (see page 69) — The toolpath calculation for ID and
OD Grooves has been improved with several new options and
supported functions.
 Multiple coolant types (see page 71) — You can now use multiple
coolant types for a single operation.
 User Defined Stock for NT toolpaths (see page 72) — When using a
stock solid and you create a 2D NT toolpath, FeatureCAM now
calculates the toolpaths using the stock solid boundary to
prevent air-cutting.

Vortex non-cutting moves
You now have more control over the non-cutting moves in vortex
toolpaths, which enables you to reduce machining times. Use the
new Vortex Non-Cutting Moves dialog to specify whether to retract
and increase the feed rate on non-cutting moves.
To display the Vortex Non-Cutting Moves dialog:
 for 2D toolpaths, click Non-Cutting Moves in the Stepovers tab of
the Feature Properties dialog.
 for 3D toolpaths, click Non-Cutting Moves in the Strategy tab of
 to change the default options, click Non-Cutting Moves in the
Milling tab of the Machining Attributes dialog.
Under Retract on non-cutting moves, select whether you want the

tool to retract on non-cutting moves:
 Never — the tool does not retract on non-cutting moves.
 Automatic — FeatureCAM will decide when the tool should retract
on non-cutting moves.
 Longer than — the tool retracts instead of making non-cutting
moves larger than the value you enter. For example, the left
image is a standard vortex toolpath and in the right image the
non-cutting moves are replaced with retracts.

Select Increase feed rate for non-cutting moves to override the feed
rate for non-cutting moves with the specified Non-cutting feed rate. If
the Non-cutting feed rate is lower than the Feed rate specified on the
F/S tab, the Non-cutting feed rate is ignored.
Collision avoidance
Toolpaths are now collision-checked between unmachined stock and
the shank and holder. Previously, you could only collision-check the
shank and holder against the model, not the stock.
2016 R1 2015 R3
No collision Collision
To enable collision-checking against the shank and holder, select

Holder collision clipping on the Strategy tab of the Feature Properties
dialog.

Swarf machining Z limits
You can now limit Swarf operations to within a specified Z range on
the surface. This enables you to limit air cutting, such as by limiting
the toolpath where part of a surface has already been machined,
and gives you more control when using swarf machining with other
operations.
This was previously available for most 3D finish operations except

swarf.

To specify the Z limits, use the new Z start and Z end attributes in
the Milling tab of the Feature Properties dialog.
Select Z start or Z end to display the location of the Z limits in the

graphics window.
The toolpath follows the isolines of the surface, but the toolpath is
clipped above and below the specified Z level.
5 Axis simultaneous
For 5 axis simultaneous machining, you may not be able to enter
values accurately for Z start and Z end depending on the rotation of
the view and the axes, but you can use the Pick Z location button to
pick the location in the graphics window and FeatureCAM will
calculate the required value.

5-axis 2D spiral toolpaths
In FeatureCAM 2015 R3, the 5-Axis tab was made available for 2D
spiral toolpaths, which enables you to perform 5-axis engraving
(see page 753).
You can now specify axis smoothing options using the Axis
Smoothing tab, which enables you to create smoother toolpaths
which give a better surface finish and reduce tool wear.
To display the Axis Smoothing tab, ensure Tool axis smoothing is

selected on the 5-Axis tab, then click Apply.

Side grooves
The toolpath calculation for ID and OD Grooves has been improved
with several new options and supported functions. This gives you
more control when creating side groove features, so you can create
better and smoother toolpaths with better gouge checking.
To enable the new toolpath calculation, select Use New ID/OD Groove
on the Milling tab of the Machining Attributes dialog.
When this option is selected, these changes are made to side

groove toolpaths:
 The plunge and retract moves are checked for gouges.
You can disable the gouge checking on plunge and retract moves
by deselecting the Plunge gouge check option on the Strategy tab
of the Feature Properties dialog.
 You can use wind fan finishing for the finish operation.
To specify the wind fan settings, click Wind Fan on the Strategy
tab of the Feature Properties dialog, and use the Wind Fan Finish
Options dialog (see page 1643).

 You can use arc lead-in moves for the finish operations.
Previously you could only use a linear lead-in move.
To use an arc lead-in move, select Arc Lead on the Stepovers tab
 You can set a start point for the finish pass.
To set a start point, use the Start point attribute on the Plunge
tab of the Feature Properties dialog.
To create a side groove feature, create a Groove feature and select

the Inside/Outside option on the Dimensions tab of the Feature
Properties dialog.

Multiple coolant types
You can now use multiple coolants for a single operation. Previously
you could only use one type of coolant for an operation.
There is a new Coolant tab where you can specify the types of
coolant for an operation. Previously, you selected the coolant type
from a list on different tabs depending on the operation type.
The new Coolant tab is available in these places:
 Set the coolant for an operation in the Feature Properties dialog.
 Set the default coolant for a tool in the Tool Properties dialog.

 Set the default coolant for the document in the Machining
Attributes dialog, for both Mill and Turn.
User Defined Stock for NT toolpaths

When using a stock solid and you create a 2D NT toolpath,
FeatureCAM now calculates the toolpaths using the stock solid
boundary to prevent air-cutting. Previously this was only available
for OT toolpaths.
In this example, a Boss feature is cut using a stock solid.
2015 R3: 2016 R1

Turning
improvements to turning:
 Turning tool orientation (see page 74) — You can now use a
turning tool in multiple orientations without having to create a
different tool in the database for each orientation.
 Roughing engage angle (see page 76) — You can now specify the
engage angle, lead in angle, and lead out angle for Turning
 Negative leave allowance for grooves (see page 77) — You can
now use a negative leave allowance for groove features created
from curves.

Turning tool orientation
You can now use a turning tool in multiple orientations without
having to create a different tool in the database for each
orientation.
For example, this tool is used in two orientations, but only one tool
is required in the tool database.
Previously, to use a tool in multiple orientations you had to create

duplicates of the tool, and select the tool orientation on the
Orientation tab of the Tool Properties dialog.

Select the new Automatic tool orientation option in the Misc tab of
the Machining Attributes dialog.
When Automatic tool orientation is selected, only tools in the default

orientation are available, but the specified tool orientation is ignored
and a tool can be used in any orientation.
For example, for OD turning operations, only tools with a SW
orientation are available:

If you have any tools in the non-default orientation, specify the
orientation as default and you can use it in any orientation,
otherwise the tool will not be available.
Roughing engage angle

You can now specify the engage angle, lead in angle, and lead out
angle for Turning roughing operations. Previously you could specify
these options only for the finish pass.
This enables you to prevent the tool from plunging directly into the
stock, reducing the load on the tool.
Engage angle
To specify the engage angle for a roughing operation, set the new
Engage angle option on the Turning, Facing, or Boring tab of the
You can enter an Engage angle between 0 and 90. The tool engages
the part at the specified angle for boundary moves, but a lower
value may be used if the value you enter would be above the rapid
level.
Lead in and lead out angle

To specify the lead in and lead out angles for a roughing operation,
ensure the TNR comp option is selected on the Strategy tab of the
Feature Properties dialog, and set a Lead in angle and Lead out angle
on the Turning, Boring, or Facing tab.
The tool engages the part at the lead in angle for boundary moves
and disengages the part at the lead out angle.

Default values
You can set the default values for these angles on the Turn/Bore tab
of the Machining Attributes dialog.
Previously you could set the default Engage angle, Lead in angle, and
Lead out angle. You can now set these options separately for rough
and finish operations.
Negative leave allowance for grooves

In FeatureCAM you can set a leave allowance to leave unmachined
material after a finish pass, and you can set a negative leave
allowance to machine past the feature boundary, such as to allow
for shrinkage.
You can now use a negative leave allowance for Groove features
created from curves. Previously, this was only available for Grooves
created from dimensions.
You can edit the Leave allowance attribute for an operation on the
Turning tab of the Feature Properties dialog.

 Setup Sheet add-in (see page 79) — There are new tags which
you can use to create more useful setup sheets.
 FeatureCAM to CAMplete (see page 80) — In the FeatureCAM to
CAMplete dialog (see page 166), there is a new button that
enables you to mark solids that are selected in the part as
clamps.
 API improvements (see page 80) — The API has been improved to
support full machine architecture.
 Nesting add-in (see page 81) — You can now use PowerSHAPE's
nesting tool to nest parts in FeatureCAM.
 Import Vise add-in (see page 83) — You can now import vises into
FeatureCAM for 3D simulation and gouge checking.
 Bar-fed mills support (see page 85) — Bar-fed mills are now
supported, such as the Willemin-Macodel 408MT and Mazak
integrex i-150.

Setup Sheet add-in
You can use the SetupSheet.dll (see page 177) add-in to generate
html setup sheets from your document to give information to the
machine operator about the manufacturing, tooling, and toolpaths
of a part.
There are new tags which you can use to create more useful setup
sheets:
 Turn tool orientation
 operation.tool_holder_orientation — tool holder
orientation (for lathe and thread tools)
You can use this with or without the new Automatic tool
orientation option (see page 74).
 Spot drill body diameter
 use_order_tool.body_diameter — tool body diameter (User
Order Tool Loop)
 operation.tool_body_diameter — tool body diameter
(Setup Loop)
 tool.body_diameter — tool body diameter (Tool Loop)
 Drill cycle and first peck
 operation.drill_cycle_type — drill cycle type of the
operation
 operation.drill_peck_depth — peck depth of a drill
operation
 operation.drill_peck_depth2 — peck depth 2 of a drill
operation
 operation.drill_min_peck — min peck of a drill operation
 Operation number
 operation.number — the operation number displayed in the
Details tab of the Results window in FeatureCAM
 The CNC post processor file name
 fm.cnc_file_name — The name of the cnc file used to
generate the nc code.
 Tool list. See the Setup Sheet help for how to use these options.
 Show a tool only once in the operation list, even when it is
used in multiple operations.

 List only the tools you have marked. You can mark tools by
adding _SHOWTOOL to the Comments field in the Tool
Properties dialog.
To see the Setup Sheet help, click the Help button in the Setup
Sheet Options dialog.
FeatureCAM to CAMplete
CAMplete TruePath is an application that you can use to analyze,
modify, optimize, simulate and post 5-Axis toolpaths. You can use
the FeatureCAM to CAMplete add-in to export a document to use
with CAMplete TruePath.
In the FeatureCAM to CAMplete dialog (see page 166), there is a new
button that enables you to mark solids that are selected in the part
as clamps.
To mark selected solids as clamp solids, click Select solids selected in
the part.
The solids are selected in the Select solids to be exported as clamps
list.
FeatureCAM API improvements

The API has been improved to support full machine architecture:
 pallet changes are now supported.
 you can temporarily disable gouge checking between solids.
 you can temporarily remove a solid from the machine heirarchy.
 you can move the tool change location.
 you can query the current operation, feature, tool and setup.
See the FeatureCAM API help for more information. Select the Help
> FeatureCAM API help menu option to display the FeatureCAM API
help.

Nesting add-in
There is a new Nesting add-in that you can use to nest multiple
parts and machine them from a single stock using PowerSHAPE's
nesting tool.
You must have PowerSHAPE open to use the add-in, and you can
only nest parts which have a solid model.
To use the Nesting add-in:
1 Load the Nesting.bas add-in.
2 On the Utilities toolbar, click Nesting.
The Nesting To FeatureCAM dialog is displayed.
3 In the Stock list, select the block in which you want to nest the
parts.
Select an existing block to nest additional parts in a block you
created previously, or select New Block to start a new block.
4 In the fields around the stock diagram, enter the dimensions of
the block in which you want to nest the parts.
5 Enter the Distance between parts to specify the minimum distance
you want to leave between the nested parts on the block.

6 Enter a Text height to specify the height of the label on each part.
7 Click Add and use the Open dialog to select the parts you want to
nest.
8 Enter the Quantity to specify how many duplicates of each part
you want to nest in the block.
9 Enter the Priority to determine which parts to nest first. The parts
with lowest Priority values are nested first. For parts with the
same Priority value, the largest parts are nested first.
10 Enter the Rotation increment to specify the smallest increment by
which the part can be rotated when nesting. You may be able to
fit more parts in a block by reducing the Rotation increment.
11 To remove a part from the dialog, select the row and click Delete.
12 Click OK to nest the parts.
FeatureCAM opens each file and puts all the features into a
group, then adds the features to a new FM file. The solids are
sent to PowerSHAPE and nested using PowerSHAPE's nesting
tool.
When the nesting is completed in PowerSHAPE, a message dialog
is displayed telling you to modify the positions of the parts in
PowerSHAPE if necessary.
13 Modify the position of the parts in PowerSHAPE, then click OK to
close the message dialog.
The positions of the parts are updated in FeatureCAM.
A message dialog is displayed asking if you want to save the
stock.
14 Click Yes to run a 3D simulation and save the stock. This enables
you to nest additional parts in this block later.
You can select saved stocks in the Stock list in the Nesting To
FeatureCAM dialog to nest additional parts in a saved stock.
A message dialog is displayed saying the nesting is completed.

Import Vise add-in
There is a new Import Vise add-in that you can use to import vises
into FeatureCAM for 3D simulation and gouge checking.
1 Load the Import_Vise.bas add-in.
2 On the Utilities toolbar, click Import_Vise.
The Import Vise dialog is displayed.
3 In the Vise list, select the vise you want to import.

A preview of the vise is displayed in the dialog.
Vises
1 Select an option in the Part position in vise list to specify how to
align the part in the vise.
2 Under Part along, select the axis that you want to be
perpendicular to the jaws to specify the orientation of the part in
the vise.
3 Under X offset from position, enter the offset of the part along the
axis parallel to the jaws. You can enter a negative value.
For example, select a Part position in vise of Left and enter a X
offset from position of -1 to extend the part by 1 inch past the left
edge of the jaws.
4 Under Amount of part held, enter the height at which to hold the
part in the vise. If this value is set to 0 it is ignored and the part
is held at the bottom of the vise.
This option is unavailable when using parallels.
5 Under Jaws position, select how you want to position the jaws to
hold the part.

For Selected Solid Faces, Selected Surfaces, and Selected
geometry, select items in the graphics window.
6 For vises with multiple holding positions, select Alternative
holding to use the alternative holding position.
7 To add parallels to raise the part in the vise, select Add parallels
and select the Parallels dimensions from the list.
8 Click Import to import the vise.
Turning chucks
1 Under Part along, select the axis about which the chuck rotates to
specify the orientation of the part in the vise.
2 Under Z offset from position, enter an offset to raise or lower the
part in the jaws.
3 Under Part length from Jaws Faces, enter the length of part you
want to extend past the top of the jaws.
4 Under Jaws position, select how you want the jaws to hold the
part.
For Selected Solid Faces, select solid faces in the graphics
window.
5 Select the Jaws types you want to use.

Bar-fed mills support
Bar-fed mills are now supported, such as the Willemin-Macodel
408MT and Mazak integrex i-150. Bar-fed mills enable you to
machine multiple parts from bar stock, and to automatically transfer
the machined slugs to the sub-spindle to machine the cut-off face.
This eliminates the need for manually positioning the part, which
can be a source of inaccuracy.
This requires a UDF add-in, and a customized MD file and post.

XBUILD
 Intermediate CNC files (see page 87) — You can now split the nc
file into multiple intermediate files, and then combine these
intermediate files in different ways to create multiple output files.
 Multi-code coolant (see page 89) — You can now use different on
and off codes for a single coolant type, depending on which
turret and tool is being used.
 5-axis untransformed coordinates (see page 91) — There are new
milling reserved words that contain the untransformed X, Y, and
Z coordinates in a 5-axis part.
 Formatting reserved words (see page 92) — When formatting
numeric reserved words in XBUILD, you can now remove trailing
zeros from integer values without removing the decimal point.
 CNC documentation (see page 93) — The HTML documentation
has been improved to make the output more readable.

Intermediate CNC files
You can now split the nc file into multiple intermediate files, and
then combine these intermediate files in different ways to create
multiple output files. This gives you more control over the nc code
files you create.
For example, you can use this to create a tool list at the start of the
output file easily without needing to use a macro, by separating
each line of tool information into an intermediate file, and placing it
at the beginning of the output file.
You can also use this to group Wait codes together and output them
at a single point in the post, and avoid mismatched wait codes when
outputting to multiple channels.
To use multiple output streams for the nc code:

1 In XBUILD, select the CNC-Info > Manage Files menu option to
display the new Files dialog.
2 Select Use Output Streams.

3 Under Intermediate Files, select the intermediate nc files you want
to create and enter a Name.
Each intermediate file has a number, which you can use to send
individual lines of the nc code into different intermediate files.

4 Under Output Files, specify the final nc files you want to create
and output from FeatureCAM.
a Enter the File Suffix and Ext to specify the suffix and extension
that will be applied to the file you output.
b Under Source List, enter the intermediate files you want to
combine to create the output file.
In the example above, the NC Code output file includes all the
intermediate streams, and the ToolList output file includes
only the tool list intermediate file.
c Enter the Display Name. This is the name of the nc file when
displayed in the NC Code tab of the Results window in
FeatureCAM.
5 Add the new reserved words to a format to separate the lines of
nc code into the intermediate files.
 <F1> to <F20> — Use this word at the start of a line to send
the line to an intermediate file.
 <SET-F1> to <SET-F20> — Use this word at the start of a line
to send all proceeding information to an intermediate file,
including in other formats.
Alternatively you can use the intermediate file name, such

as <F:start> and <Set-F:start>.
For example, use <F10> before the tool name in the Tool Change
format to send the tool name to the tenth intermediate file. Use
<SET-F1> at the beginning of the Program Start format to send
all nc code except the tool names to the first intermediate file.
6 Simulate the toolpaths in FeatureCAM.
7 In the NC Code tab of the Results window, select an output file in
the list to display it.
8 Use the Save NC dialog to save the nc code output files.

Multi-code coolant
You can now use different on and off codes for a single coolant type,
depending on which turret and tool is being used.
To use multi-code coolant:
1 In XBUILD, in the Coolant dialog, select the new Multi-code option
to enable multi-code coolant for a coolant type.
2 Click Configure to display the Coolant Configuration dialog.
3 For each row, select the Tool Posts for which you want to specify
the On and Off Codes.
4 Enter the Tool Range, the range of tool numbers for which you
want to specify the On and Off Codes.
5 Enter the On and Off Codes.
6 If needed, click Add Row to add more rows.

8 In the Coolant dialog, under Separate codes with, select an option
to determine how to separate multiple codes when they are used
together in the NC code.
Newline — Select this option to use a line break between coolant

codes in the NC code.
Space — Select this option to use a space between coolant codes
in the NC code.
Nothing — Select this option to not separate coolant codes in the
NC code.
Other — Select this option and enter a string to use between
coolant codes in the NC code.

5-axis untransformed coordinates
There are new milling reserved words that contain the
untransformed X, Y, and Z coordinates in a 5-axis part. For
example, you can use these in a post for positioning before turning
on the RTCP transformation.
The new reserved words are:
 <UNXFORM-X-COORD>
 <UNXFORM-Y-COORD>
 <UNXFORM-Z-COORD>
These are only valid in the Program Start, Segment Start and Tool
Change formats.

Formatting reserved words
When formatting numeric reserved words in XBUILD, you can now
remove trailing zeros from integer values without removing the
decimal point. Use this option to ensure numeric reserved words are
interpreted correctly by your machine tool controller.
In the Word Formatting dialog, select Minimize width to remove the
trailing zeros and select the new Keep Decimal Points option to keep
the decimal point.
For example, when Keep Decimal Points is deselected, a value of 5 is
output as 5, when Keep Decimal Points is selected, it is output as 5..
Keep Decimal Points Keep Decimal Points
deselected: selected:

CNC documentation
In XBUILD, you can select the File > Document CNC > HTML menu
option to create HTML documentation about the CNC file.
The HTML documentation has been improved to make the output
more readable:
 The CSS and HTML style has been modified to better present the
output.
 Sections of the documentation with no content are not displayed
in the output.
 Unnamed post variables are not displayed in the output.
 Some sections of the documentation have been removed, such
as Motion Commands, Spindle, Synchronize Spindles,
Compensation Commands, Stop Commands, Airblast, and
Circular Planes.
 Unnecessary data has been removed from the General Info,
Machine Info, Turret Info, Feeds and Speeds Info, Milling Cycle,
and Turning Cycle sections.
 Several section headers have been renamed, and table elements
have been reworded to be more clear.

enhancements:
User interface
 Improved icons (see page 97) — Several icon graphics across
FeatureCAM have been updated.
 Selecting objects (see page 98) — There is a new Select Partial
mode.
 Inserting Part Library features (see page 99) — You can now use
the New Feature wizard to insert Part Library features into a
document.
 Pasting features using polar coordinates (see page 101) — You can
now use polar coordinates to locate features in the Paste Special
wizard.
 Deleting unused curves (see page 103) — There is a new add-in
that you can use to identify all unused curves in a model and
delete them.
Importing
 Importing SolidEdge ST7 files (see page 106) — You can now
import SolidEdge ST7 files.
Milling
 Creating Faces features using IFR (see page 108) — You can now
automatically round the corners of Face features that are created
using Interactive Feature Recognition.
 Automatic tool selection (see page 110) — You can now specify an
additional clearance on the automatic tool selection to ensure the
tool holder does not collide with the stock.
 Simulating tool holders (see page 112) — You can now simulate
complicated tool holders more accurately.
 Machine movement limits (see page 113) — You can now display a
warning message when the machine exceeds its limits of
movement during machine simulation.

Turning and Turn/Mill
 Indexing using a stock solid (see page 116) — You can now
calculate the index height directly from the stock solid, instead of
calculating it above a square bounding box.
 Setting the program point for turnmilling tools (see page 118) —
You can now specify the program point for turnmilling tools.
 Turning head tool holders (see page 119) — Turning head tool
holders are now supported.
5-axis machining
 C-axis indexing (see page 124) — You can now specify the C-axis
position of the part in the machine at the start of an operation.
 5-axis engraving (see page 126) — You can now create 5-axis
engraving features with the tool axis normal to the surface.
Machine Design
 Specifying machine movement limits (see page 129) — You can
now set the limits of movement for solids in a Machine Design
file.
 Testing machine movements (see page 130) — You can now use
machine jogging to simulate the movement of solids in a Machine
Design document without having to use an FM file.
 Simulating mini-turrets (see page 132) — You can now simulate
mini-turrets, which are tools with multiple inserts where the tool
rotates around the b-axis to access each tool.

User Interface
 Improved icons (see page 97) — Several icon graphics across
FeatureCAM have been updated.
 Selecting objects (see page 98) — There is a new Select Partial
mode.
 Inserting Part Library features (see page 99) — You can now use
the New Feature wizard to insert Part Library features into a
document.
 Pasting features using polar coordinates (see page 101) — You can
now use polar coordinates to locate features in the Paste Special
wizard.
 Deleting unused curves (see page 103) — There is a new add-in
that you can use to identify all unused curves in a model and
delete them.

Improved icons
Several icon graphics across FeatureCAM have been updated to
improve the user interface, including:
 Feature Properties dialog
 Part View
 Part Library
 Tombstone Process Plan dialog

Selecting objects
There is a new Select Partial mode, which enables you to box-select
items by partially selecting them. This improves work-flow when
selecting multiple items, and enables you to select items more
easily in complicated documents.
To enable the new Select Partial mode:
 In the Standard toolbar, in the Select Menu, select Select Partial.
 Select the Edit > Select > Box Select Partial menu option.
Click and drag to select objects. You do not need to enclose an
object to select it. In the example below, all three features are
selected:

Inserting Part Library features
You can now use the New Feature wizard to insert Part Library
features into a document.
Adding features to the Part Library

To add a feature to the Part Library:
1 Select the Construct > Part Library menu option.
The Part Library dialog is displayed.
2 Select a feature in the Tree View or graphics window.
3 In the Part Library dialog, click Add Selected.
The selected feature is added to the list in the Part Library dialog.
Inserting features from the Part Library into the document

To use the Part Library in the New Feature wizard:
1 Click the Features step in the Steps panel to display the New
Feature wizard.
2 In the New Feature wizard, under From Feature, select User and
click Next.
The User defined feature page is displayed.
The Part Library features are displayed in the Registered features
list.
3 Select a feature in the list and click Next.

The Paste Special dialog is displayed.
4 Use the Paste Special dialog (see page 1497) to insert the
selected feature into the document, then click Finish to close the
dialog.

5 The User defined feature page of the New Feature wizard is
displayed.
6 Use the wizard to insert more features from the Part Library, or
click Cancel to close the wizard.

Pasting features using polar coordinates
You can now use polar coordinates to locate features in the Paste
Special wizard. This gives you more control when duplicating
features and when using the Part Library (see page 1501).
You can only use polar coordinates to locate individual

features.
To duplicate a feature into a new location using polar coordinates:
1 Right-click a feature in the Part Tree, and select Copy.
2 Select the Edit > Paste Special menu option.
The Paste Special wizard is displayed.
3 Select Paste the clipboard contents. Select a new location and click
Next.
The Reference page of the Paste Special wizard is displayed.
4 Click Next. You do not need to specify a reference location.
The Location page of the Paste Special wizard is displayed.
5 Select the new Polar option.
6 Enter the Radius and Angle to offset the new feature from the
setup location.
7 Enter the Z value to specify the Z height of the feature above the
setup.
8 Click Preview to display a preview of the new feature in the
graphics window.

9 Click Finish to create the new feature and close the wizard.

Deleting unused curves
There is a new delete_curves.bas add-in that you can use to identify
all unused curves in a model and delete them.
To delete all unused curves in a document:
1 Load the delete_curves.bas add-in using the Macro Add-ins dialog.
2 In the Utilities toolbar, click deletecurves.
3 The Curve Information dialog is displayed, which contains a list of
unused curves in the document.
4 Click OK to delete all unused curves and close the dialog.

Importing
FeatureCAM 2015 R3 contains these changes and improvements to
importing files from external applications:
 Importing SolidEdge ST7 files (see page 106) — You can now
import SolidEdge ST7 files.

Importing SolidWorks 2015 files
You can now import SolidWorks 2015 files into FeatureCAM.
To import a SolidWorks file into FeatureCAM:
2 Browse to the folder containing the file you want to open.
3 In the Files of type list, select SolidWorks (*.sldprt;*.sldasm).
Only SolidWorks documents are displayed in the Import dialog.
5 Click Open to import the file and close the dialog.
features.

Importing SolidEdge ST7 files
You can now import SolidEdge ST7 files.
To import a SolidEdge file:
3 In the Files of type list, select SolidEdge (*.par;*.psm:*.asm).
Only SolidEdge files are displayed in the Import dialog.
Click Open to import the selected file and close the dialog.
features.
Spatial R25 SP1 Interop integrated

Spatial R25 SP1 Interop is now integrated.
InterOp now supports Creo 3.0 BREP, Assembly, PMI, and Graphical
translation.

Milling
Milling:
 Creating Face features using IFR (see page 108) — You can now
automatically round the corners of Face features that are created
using Interactive Feature Recognition.
additional clearance on the automatic tool selection to ensure the
tool holder does not collide with the stock.
 Simulating tool holders (see page 112) — You can now simulate
complicated tool holders more accurately.
 Machine movement limits (see page 113) — You can now display a
warning message when the machine exceeds its limits of
movement during machine simulation.

Creating Face features using IFR
You can now automatically round the corners of Face features that
are created using Interactive Feature Recognition.
This enables you to use a Face feature instead of a Side feature in
some situations, which can reduce the machining time by reducing
air cutting. This is especially useful when using cutter compensation
and partline programming.
In the example below, a Face feature is created on the orange

surface, and a deburr radius is applied to round the outside corners
of the feature during machining:
To specify a corner radius for a Face feature:

1 Create a Face feature using Interactive Feature Recognition (see
page 499).
2 In the Face Properties dialog, in the Misc tab, select one of the
new options.
Use the Deburr radius option to round the outside corners of the
feature.
Use the Min corner radius option to round the inside corners of
the feature.
3 In the New Value field, enter a new value and click Set to override
the selected option.

4 Click OK to accept your changes to the feature and close the
dialog.
For Face features with multiple operations, you can set the
Min. corner radius option separately for the rough operation
and for each finish pass.

In FeatureCAM 2015 R2, the Tool Holder Clearance dialog (see page
146) was added, which enables you to specify an additional
clearance on the automatic tool selection to prevent tool holder
gouges.
There is a new Stock option in the Clearance Requirement list. Select
this option to ensure the tool is long enough for the tool holder to
clear the total depth into the stock.
No additional clearance: Clearance above the stock:
To specify a tool holder clearance above the stock for automatic tool
selection:
1 Select the Manufacturing > Machining Attributes menu option to
display the Machining Attributes dialog.
2 On the Tool Selection tab of the Machining Attributes dialog, click
Tool Holder Clearance.
The new Tool Holder Clearance dialog is displayed.
3 In the Clearance Requirement list, select Stock.


Simulating tool holders
You can now simulate complicated tool holders more accurately.
This enables you to create better toolpaths that can access more
material and check for gouges more accurately when using
automatic tool holder clearance (see page 1680).
Previously, the shape of the tool holder was approximated using
either a cylinder or a cone.
The tool holder shape does not take into account undercuts, for
example:
If the tool holder has this The toolpaths are
curve: calculated with this tool
holder shape:

Machine movement limits
You can now display a warning message when the machine exceeds
its limits of movement during machine simulation.
There is a new Pause on limits option in the 2D/3D Shaded tab of the
Simulation Options dialog. Select this option to pause the machine
simulation if the machine moves outside the limits specified in the
MD file.
A new message dialog is displayed when the machine moves

outside the specified limits.
The Outside of Limits message dialog displays:

 The solid name that has exceeded its limits.
 The axis of movement.
 The specified limit.
 The solid's current position.
You can select these options in the Outside of Limits message
dialog:
 Don't pause for this solid again — Select this option to continue
the machine simulation without pausing when this solid exceeds
its limits.
 Don't pause on limits again — Select this option to run machine
simulations without pausing when any solids exceed their limits.
This is the same as deselecting Pause on limits in the Simulation
Options dialog.

To specify a machine's limits of movement (see page 129), you
need to edit the Machine Design file.

Turning and Turn/Mill
Turning and Turn/Mill:
 Indexing using a stock solid (see page 116) — You can now
calculate the index height directly from the stock solid, instead of
 Setting the program point for turnmilling tools (see page 118) —
You can now specify the program point for turnmilling tools.
 Turning head tool holders (see page 119) — Turning head tool
holders are now supported.

Indexing using a stock solid
You can improve machining times for turn/mill parts with stock
solids by reducing the distance above the part at which the tool
indexes. There is a new Calculate index radius from solid stock outline
option that enables you to calculate the index height directly from
the stock solid, instead of calculating it above a square bounding
box:
Calculate index radius from Calculate index radius from solid

solid stock outline off: stock outline on:
— Distance to bounding — Distance to stock boundary

box — Z rapid level attribute value
— Z rapid level attribute
value

The new option is displayed on the Misc tab of the Machining
Attributes dialog.

Turnmilling program point
You can now specify the program point for turnmilling tools. This
enables you to touch-off the tool at the edge, and specify the insert
radius compensation at the machine instead of in FeatureCAM.
Previously, this option was available for turning tools only.
In the Machining Attributes dialog, on the Misc tab, select an option
under Turnmilling program point:
 Tool edge — Select this option to adjust the tool program point
by the tool radius in the NC code.
 Tool center — Select this option to adjust the tool program point
by the tool radius at the machine.
This option does not affect turnmilling tools that are used for
milling.
To use a turnmilling tool, select the Turnmilling option in the
Strategy tab of the Feature Properties dialog for a Turn feature.

Turning head tool holder support
Turning-head tool holders are supported in FeatureCAM, which
enable you to perform turning and boring operations on a milling
machine.
For more up to date help, see the reference help (see page
186).
For example, in the image below the piece is machined by rotating
the tool around the stock.

modified Machine Design file (see page 1936) and CNC file that
provide the U coordinate.
4-Axis indexing is supported, but 5-Axis positioning is not.
To create a turning head feature:
1 Create a Setup over the center of rotation of the turning head, so
that the tool will rotate about the Setup Z axis.
2 Create a curve in the XZ plane that defines the profile of the
turned shape.
3 Load the TurningHeadCS.dll add-in using the Macro Add-ins
dialog.
click Next.

5 In the Registered features list, under Macro Add-ins, select Turn
Head, and click Next.
The Curves page is displayed.

6 Select the curve in the graphics window and click Add from
selected items .
7 Click Next to display the Location page.
8 Click Next to display the User defined feature page.
9 Specify the parameters to define the feature. To change a

parameter, select the parameter name, select an option in the
New Value list, then click Set.
Profile — Select a curve to define the turning feature profile.
Toolpath Type — Select whether you want to create an Inside
Diameter or Outside Diameter feature.
Rough Stock Curve — Select the curve that defines the toolpath
boundary for the feature. Leave this unset to machine to the
stock boundary.

Rough Pass — Select True to include a rough operation.
Finish Pass — Select True to include a finish operation.
Cycle Type — Select the cycle type.
In a Turn cycle, the roughing tool feeds along the Z axis while
stepping down the X axis.
In a Face cycle, the roughing tool feeds from the outside of the
part to the center while stepping down in the negative Z
direction.
Cut Direction — Select the direction along the Z axis you want to
cut the feature.
10 Click Finish to create the Turn Head feature and close the dialog.
tool block solid as a tool block for the turning tools.
12 You may need to adjust the Start point and End point on the
Turning tab of the Turn Head Properties dialog for each operation
to ensure the tool does not collide with the part at the start and
end of the toolpath.
13 Run a simulation to check for collisions.
The rotation of the tool is not displayed in the simulation, but the
tool is checked for collisions and gouges. For example, in this
image the tool has gouged with the clamp at , and another
gouge is displayed at .
Machine Design
To modify a Machine Design file to support turning head tool
holders:
1 In the Machine Design document, ensure the Machine Design >
Enable Turn/Mill UI is selected.
2 Select the Machine Design > Supports Specialized Turning Heads
menu option.

3 Create or import solids to represent the turning head tool holder
and the plate that moves in the U axis that holds the turning
tool.
4 Use the Parent/Child Relationships dialog (see page 1910) to

make the U plate solid a child of the turning head tool holder
solid.
5 Use the Specify Movement dialog (see page 1904) to enable the U
plate solid to move in +delta X.
6 Create a UCS on the U plate solid to locate the tool.
7 Using the Tool Block dialog (see page 1923), make the turning
head tool holder solid a tool block, and create a tool location on
the tool block using the UCS you created on the U plate solid.

5-axis machining
5-axis machining:
 C-axis indexing (see page 124) — You can now specify the C-axis
position of the part in the machine at the start of an operation.
 5-axis engraving (see page 126) — You can now create 5-axis
engraving features with the tool axis normal to the surface.

C-axis indexing
You can now specify the C-axis position of the part at the start of an
operation. This is useful for large parts where the machine has
limited travel, or to prevent machine collisions.
There is a new Orientation angle option in the Milling or Drilling tab
Use this option to specify the rotation of the X and Y axes about the
Z-axis. This option only applies if the machine tool starts at the
singularity (where the machine tool's Z-axis is aligned with the
setup's Z-axis).
If the machine tool is not at the singularity, you can specify the
C-axis orientation using these methods:
 Use the Alternative 5-axis position (see page 261) option to
specify a C-axis orientation of either 0 or 180 degrees.
 Use the Use Origin of this Setup as the Touch-off Point option in the
5 Axis Fixture Location dialog. This method applies the C-axis
orientation to all setups in the part, instead of to individual
operations.
For example:
With an orientation angle of With an orientation angle of
0, the groove is cut in the 90, the groove is cut in the
machine's Y direction. machine's X direction.

5-axis engraving
The 5-Axis tab of the Feature Properties dialog is now available for
2d spiral operations, which you can use to create 5-axis engraving
features. This enables you to use a tool axis angle normal to the
surface to ensure the engraving has a uniform cross-section and
depth of cut.
To create a 5-axis surface engraving feature:

1 Create a surface below the stock boundary to determine the
depth of the engraving, for example:

2 Create the curve to define the shape of the engraving feature,
for example:
You can use the Construct > Curve > From Surface > Project
onto Surface menu option to project a curve onto a surface.
3 Create a surface milling feature with a 2D spiral operation.
4 Double-click the feature in the Part View to display the Feature
Properties dialog, and select spiral2d in the Tree View.
5 On the Stock tab, under Choose the drive curve, select Select
curves for boundaries and click Curve Options.
The Boundary Curve dialog is displayed.
6 Under Boundary curve type, select Wall only.
This creates a toolpath along the curve.
7 Under Boundary curves, click Boundaries.
The Select Boundary Curves dialog is displayed.
8 Select the curve that defines the shape of engraving, and click
OK to close the Select Boundary Curves dialog.
9 Click OK to close the Boundary curves dialog.
10 On the 5-Axis tab, select Use Lead and Lean, and in the from list,
select Contact normal.
This keeps the tool axis normal to the surface.
11 Click OK to close the Feature Properties dialog.

Machine Design
Machine Design:
 Specifying machine movement limits (see page 129) — You can
now set the limits of movement for solids in a Machine Design
file.
 Testing machine movements (see page 130) — You can now use
machine jogging to simulate the movement of solids in a Machine
Design document without having to use an FM file.
 Simulating mini-turrets (see page 132) — You can now simulate
mini-turrets, which are tools with multiple inserts where the tool
rotates around the b-axis to access each tool.

Specifying machine movement limits
You can now set the limits of movement for solids in a Machine
Design file. This gives you more control of machine simulations, and
enables you to ensure the machine does not move beyond its limits
during a simulation.
To specify the limits of movement for a solid:
1 In a Machine Design document, select the Machine Design >
Specify Movement menu option.
The Specify Movement dialog is displayed.
2 Use the Specify Movement tab to select a solid and specify how it
can move.
3 Use the new Specify Limits tab to specify the Home Position and
the linear and rotational limits of movement for the selected
solid.

FeatureCAM can display a warning if a solid exceeds these limits
during machine simulation (see page 113).
There are several new example MD files that have limits of

movement set. These are located in
\FeatureCAM\Examples\Machine Design\Axis Limits.

Testing machine movements
You can now use machine jogging to simulate the movement of
solids in a Machine Design document without having to use an FM
file. This enables you to test the movement and ensure the limits
(see page 1906) are set correctly.
To use machine jogging to test machine movements:
1 Save any changes to your MD document.
Any unsaved changes to the document are not displayed in the
jogging simulation.
2 Select the Machine Design > Jog Machine menu option.
The new Jog Machine dialog is displayed.
Each row displays an axis in which solids in the document can

move.
3 Select a solid in the list next to an axis name.
The list is unavailable if there is only one solid that can move in
that axis.
4 For the selected solid, move the slider between the minimum
limit and the maximum limit.
The solid's current position is shown in the middle field, and the
solid's movement is simulated in the graphics window.

You can set the limits and home positions of the solids
using the Specify Movement dialog (see page 129).
5 To hide solids in the jogging simulation, click Select in the

Standard toolbar, then click solids in the graphics window.
6 To return all solids to their default positions, click Reset All.
7 When finished, close the dialog. The jogging simulation is
cleared, and all solids are returned to their default positions.

Simulating mini-turrets
You can now simulate mini-turrets, which are tools with multiple
inserts where the tool rotates around the b-axis to access each
insert. This enables you to create a more flexible tooling setup and
perform faster tool changes. The tools are simulated
simultaneously, which enables you to check for gouges with the
tools that are not currently in use.
To simulate a mini-turret:
1 In the Machine Design file, create a solid and UCS to represent
the mini-turret. The X-axis of the UCS must point towards the
main spindle.
2 Create a UCS for each tool location. The difference between the
X-axis of the tool location and the turret UCS determines the
angle that the mini-turret is rotated to use the tool.
3 In the Tool Block dialog:
a Select the turret solid under This solid is a tool block for solids.
b Select the turret UCS under This UCS will match up with the tool
location on the turret.
c Use the Tool Locations tab to add each tool location UCS as a
separate sub slot in the tool block.
d Click OK to close the dialog.
4 Save the Machine Design file.
5 In the FM document, use the Tool Mapping dialog to specify
which tool block to use for each feature.

enhancements:
User interface
 Changing the point size (see page 137) — You can now change
the size of geometry point objects to make them easier to see.
 Customizing the snapping cursor (see page 138) — You can now
change the size and color of the snapping cursor.
 Measuring curve length (see page 139) — You can now find the
length of curves and geometry segments.
 Creating internal gears (see page 140) — You can now perform
analysis on internal gears curves.
 Combining solids (see page 141) — You can now combine
multiple solids.
 Hiding rapid moves in centerline simulations (see page 142) — You
can now hide rapid moves in centerline simulations.
 Chip recognition size (see page 143) — You can now specify the
size at which detached pieces of stock are considered to be chips
and hidden from simulation.
 Recognizing features on large parts (see page 144) — IFR now
works more quickly for large parts.
Milling
additional clearance on the automatic tool selection to prevent
tool holder gouges.
 Vortex approaches flats from outside stock (see page 148) —
Vortex toolpaths can approach flat areas from outside of stock
instead of always ramping into it.
 Output options for 2D NT toolpaths (see page 150) — The Output
Options dialog is now available for 2D toolpaths that use NT or
Vortex stepover types.
 Previewing the toolpath point distribution (see page 152) — You
can now preview the points of a surface milling toolpath to help
with editing the point distribution.
 Tool pecking depths (see page 153) — You can now specify the
pecking depths for individual tools.

 Changing the posting tolerance (see page 154) — You can now
create more precise toolpaths, which is useful for machining
small parts.
 Helical side finish (see page 155) — Helical side finish operations
are now machine at the feed rate, instead of the plunge feed
rate.
Turning
 Removing undercuts in no-drag turning features (see page 157) —
You can now remove undercuts in no-drag turning features to
prevent gouges and simplify toolpaths.
 Controlling steady rests (see page 158) — You can now open and
close the jaws of a steady rest without moving it to the home
position.
 Simulating bar stock (see page 160) — You can now simulate bar
stock in FeatureCAM by specifying the length of the stock
displayed in simulation.
 Custom turret names (MTT) (see page 161) — You can now use
customized turret names to make FeatureCAM more consistent
with your machine.
XBUILD
 Generating Post documentation (see page 162) — You can now
output your CNC data file as HTML or XML to make it
understandable.
 Using macros in the post processor (see page 163) — The Disable
Macros option in the Post Options dialog is now selected by
default.

 Using Setup Sheets (see page 165) — There are new tags which
you can use to create more detailed setup sheets.
 FeatureCAM to CAMplete TruePath add-in (see page 166) — You
can export documents to CAMplete TruePath, which you can use
to analyze, modify, optimize, simulate and post 5-Axis toolpaths.
 Probing update options (see page 168) — When creating probing
features, you can now select multiple update options, which
enables you to perform multiple actions from a single probing
cycle.
 Support for Microsoft SQL 2014 (see page 168) — FeatureCAM
now supports Microsoft SQL server 2014.

Machine Simulation Design
 Multi-tool blocks (see page 170) — You can now create multi-tool
blocks and double-sided tool blocks in Machine Design files and
use them in machine simulations.
 Selecting the tool block (see page 173) — You can now select
which tool block holds each tool within an FM file, which enables
you to create accurate machining simulations more easily.
 Protecting Machine Design documents (see page 175) — You can
protect your Machine Design files from the extraction of solids,
so that you can share them for simulation without anyone being
able to extract the solids.

User Interface
 Changing the point size (see page 137) — You can now change
the size of geometry point objects to make them easier to see.
 Customizing the snapping cursor (see page 138) — You can now
change the size and color of the snapping cursor.
 Measuring curve length (see page 139) — You can now find the
length of curves and geometry segments.
 Creating internal gears (see page 140) — You can now perform
analysis on internal gears curves.
 Combining solids (see page 141) — You can now combine
multiple solids.
 Hiding rapid moves in centerline simulations (see page 142) — You
can now hide rapid moves in centerline simulations.
 Chip recognition size (see page 143) — You can now specify the
size at which detached pieces of stock are considered to be chips
and hidden from simulation.
 Recognizing features on large parts (see page 144) — IFR now
works more quickly for large parts.

Changing the point size
You can now change the size of geometry point objects to make
them easier to see.
To change the point size:
1 Select the Options > Viewing menu option.
The new Point size option is displayed in the Viewing Options
dialog.
2 Enter a Point size to specify the size of geometry point objects in

the graphics window.

Customizing the snapping cursor
The snapping cursor shows you which object you are snapping to.
You can now change the size and color of the snapping cursor to
improve work flow when working with large, small or complex parts.
To change the size of the snapping cursor:
1 Select the Options > Viewing menu option.
The new Snapping Point Size option is displayed in the Viewing
Options dialog.
2 Enter a Snapping Point Size to specify the size of the snapping

cursor in the graphics window.
To change the color of the snapping cursor:

1 Select the Options > Coloring > Default Colors menu option.
The Default Colors dialog is displayed.
2 Select Highlight in the list.
3 Click More Colors to display the Color dialog.
4 Select a color and click OK to close the dialog.
The selected color is displayed in the Default Colors dialog.
5 Click Apply to apply the color to the selected item.
6 Click Done to close the dialog.

Measuring curve length
You can now find the length of curves and geometry segments,
which enables you to find important dimensions of complicated
shapes easily.
To find the length of a curve:

1 Select the Construct > Dimension > Interrogation menu option. The
Pick Dimension dialog (see page 293) is displayed.
2 Under Pick type, select the new Length option.
3 Click Pick Location and select the curve you want to measure
in the graphics window.
The length of the selected curve is displayed in the Pick value
field.
4 To measure another curve, repeat the previous step.
5 When you have finished, click OK to close the dialog.

Creating internal gears
In FeatureCAM 2015 R1, the Analysis tab was added to the Gears
dialog (see page 192), which enables you to view the calculated
dimensions of the gear, the calculated pin gauge diameter and the
outside measurement over pins diameter. In FeatureCAM 2015 R2,
the Analysis tab has been extended to enable you to find the
measurement over pins value of an internal gear.
To create and analyze an internal gear curve:

1 Select the Construct > Curve > Other Methods > Gears menu
option.
The Gears dialog (see page 378) is displayed.
2 In the Curve tab, specify the properties of the gear.
3 Select the Analysis tab.
The calculated dimensions of the gear are displayed under
General calculations.
4 Under Measurement over pins (MOP), select Internal Gear.
The Ideal pin diameter and MOP ideal values are displayed.
5 Enter the Actual pin diameter and click Recompute.
The calculated measurement over pins value is displayed in the
MOP actual field.

Combining solids (SOLID)
You can now combine multiple solids in different ways to create
complicated shapes more easily. Previously, you could combine only
two solids at once.
To combine solids:
1 Select the Construct > Solid > Modifiers > Combine solids menu
option.
The Combine Solids dialog is displayed.
This dialog was previously called the Boolean dialog.

2 Enter a New solid name.
3 Select an Operation:
 Difference — Subtract a solid from another solid. You can
combine only two solids with this operation.
 Union — Merge multiple solids together.
 Intersection — Create a solid at the intersection of multiple
solids.
4 Add the solids you want to combine:
 To add a solid by name, select it in the Solid list and click Add
item from list.
 To add solids graphically, click Pick solid and select them in

Hiding rapid moves in centerline simulations
You can now hide rapid moves in centerline simulations. This
enables you to see the cutting moves more clearly in complicated
toolpath simulations.
Rapid moves shown: Rapid moves hidden:
To hide rapid moves in centerline simulations, deselect the View >

Simulation > Show Centerline Rapids menu option. The next time you
run a centerline simulation, rapid moves are not displayed.

Chip recognition size
You can now specify the size at which detached pieces of stock are
considered chips and hidden from simulation.
There is a new Chip recognition size option on the Round Stock tab
of the Simulation Options dialog.
For parts with large stock, you may want to reduce this value to
ensure cutoffs are not hidden.

Recognizing features on large parts
Interactive Feature Recognition (IFR) now works more quickly on
large parts.
Previously, IFR would validate the solid when recognizing features,
which could take a long time for large parts.
To verify that a solid is valid (see page 449), select the solid in the
Automatic Feature Recognition dialog and click Verify.

Milling
improvements to Milling:
additional clearance on the automatic tool selection to prevent
tool holder gouges.
 Vortex approaches flats from outside stock (see page 148) —
instead of always ramping into it.
 Output options for 2D NT toolpaths (see page 150) — The Output
Options dialog is now available for 2D toolpaths that use NT or
Vortex stepover types.
 Previewing the toolpath point distribution (see page 152) — You
can now preview the points of a surface milling toolpath to help
 Tool pecking depths (see page 153) — You can now specify the
pecking depths for individual tools.
 Changing the posting tolerance (see page 154) — You can now
create more precise toolpaths, which is useful for machining
small parts.
 Helical side finish (see page 155) — Helical side finish operations
are now machine at the feed rate, instead of the plunge feed
rate.

You can now specify an additional clearance on the automatic tool
selection to prevent tool holder gouges.
No additional clearance: Clearance above the Setup:
To specify a tool holder clearance for automatic tool selection:

1 Select the Manufacturing > Machining Attributes menu option to
display the Machining Attributes dialog.
2 On the Tool Selection tab of the Machining Attributes dialog, click
Tool Holder Clearance.
The new Tool Holder Clearance dialog is displayed.
3 In the Clearance Requirement list, select the clearance you want

between the tool holder and the part. Select from:
 None — Select this option to leave no additional clearance.
Old part files still select the same tools as before.
 Feature — Select this option to ensure the tool is long enough
for the tool holder to clear the feature.

 Setup — Select this option to ensure the tool is long enough
for the tool holder to clear the total depth into the setup.
4 Enter an Extra allowance as a % of feature or setup depth to leave
extra clearance of the tool holder above the feature or Setup.
5 Select how tool selection is affected if no matching tool is found:
 Give an error if no tool meets requirements — FeatureCAM does
not select a tool for the operation, so an error is shown during
NC code generation. In the Operation List, a red exclamation
point is displayed beside operations with no tool selected.
 Select tool closest to requirements if none match — this enables
you to generate NC code, but it may result in tool holder
gouges because a smaller tool may be used.

Vortex approaches flats from outside stock
instead of always ramping into it. This enables you to create Vortex
toolpaths that are faster to machine and are compatible with a
wider selection of tools.
FeatureCAM 2016 R1 FeatureCAM 2016 R2
The tool ramps into the part The tool approaches from
the outside
To approach from outside the stock, FeatureCAM:

 extends a section of the flat area beyond the stock and into an
area already machined; and;
 fills the extended section with cutting moves.
By extending the section to an area already machined, the

machine tool can approach the flat area in open space.
Edge of flat area

Stock
Extended section of flat area filled with cutting moves
Outside edge of extended section
Area already machined

Criteria for toolpath to approach from outside stock
FeatureCAM only extends a section of the flat area if the extended
section:
 has an outside edge that the machine tool can approach.
 does not gouge the model.
 is wide enough to be profile smoothed successfully.
 can reach an area already machined within the distance of one
tool diameter.
If the extended section fails to meet the criteria, FeatureCAM does
not extend the flat area and instead uses a ramp move to approach
the toolpath.

Output options for 2D NT toolpaths
The Output Options dialog is now available for 2D toolpaths that use
NT or Vortex stepover types. This enables you to control how the
points of 2D vortex and New Technology toolpaths are processed in
the NC program. Previously, this was only available for 3D
toolpaths.
To display the Output Options dialog, click Output Options on the

Milling tab of the Feature Properties dialog.
The dialog contains these output options:
 Filter linear moves — This automatically removes unnecessary
points in the toolpath while maintaining tolerance. The points are
not equispaced because unnecessary points are deleted.
 Filter linear moves and convert arcs to linear — This is similar to
the first option except that all arcs are replaced by straight line
segments. This option is suitable for machine tools which do not
handle arcs well.
 Redistribute points after filtering linear moves. Convert arcs to linear
— This option allows the insertion of new points. This ensures a
constant distance between points, only inserting extra points if
they are necessary to keep tolerance. This option may increase
toolpath creation time, but reduce time on the machine tool. This
option is suitable for machine tools that can handle large
numbers of equispaced points.

 Approximate linear moves with arcs and lines — Select this option
to create an arc line approximation for toolpaths that are
contained in the XY, YZ, and XZ plane. This allows 3D programs
to be smaller and to result in smoother surface finishes for
certain types of parts.
 Limit linear moves — Select this option to limit the distance
between linear move points to the Maximum length value.

Previewing the toolpath point distribution
You can now preview the points of a surface milling toolpath to help
To redistribute toolpath points:
1 In the Surface Milling Properties dialog, on the Milling tab, click
Output Options.
The Output Options dialog is displayed.
2 Under Output Filtering, specify the options for filtering linear
moves in the toolpath.
3 Click the new Preview button. The points of the toolpath are
shown in blue in the graphics window.
4 Modify the view in the graphics window to see the toolpath

preview.
5 When you have finished, click OK to close the dialog.

Tool pecking depths
Pecking is used when drilling deep holes, where the tool retracts
multiple times while drilling to clear debris from the hole.
You can now specify the pecking depths for individual tools.
Previously, you had to change the pecking depths for individual
operations to override the global settings.
To specify the pecking depths at which the drill retracts:
 You can change the global pecking depths on the Pecking tab of
 You can change the pecking depths for each tool on the new
Pecking tab of the Tool Properties dialog:
Leave the values at 0% to use the global values in the

Machining Attributes dialog.
 You can see and edit each operation's absolute pecking depths
on the Cycle tab of the Hole Feature Properties dialog.
The peck style (see page 1605) is specified in the .cnc file. This
determines which of the tool's pecking values are used to calculate
the absolute pecking depths for the operation.

Changing the Posting tolerance
You can now control the tolerance with which toolpaths are created.
This enables you to create more precise toolpaths, which is useful
for machining small parts.
There is a new Posting tolerance option in the Misc tab of the
Reduce the Posting tolerance for small parts to create more precise
toolpaths. You must also adjust your post processor to output more
digits. For example, if you adjust the posting tolerance from 0.001
to 0.0001, then you must adjust the digit format in the post
processor so that the extra decimal place is used in the NC code.
Reducing the posting tolerance creates additional lines of NC code,
so you should only do this for high-precision NC machines that can
use the high-precision coordinates, when required for an
application.

Helical side finish
You can use the Helical side finish option to create a continuous
spiral finishing toolpath for a 2.5D milling feature, which prevents
tool marks on the surface.
Helical side finish operations are now machined at the feed rate
specified on the F/S tab of the Feature Properties dialog, previously
they were machined using the plunge feed rate, specified by the
Plunge feed override on the Plunge tab.
To enable this option, select Helical side finish on the Strategy tab of
the Feature Properties dialog, and enter a Pitch for the spiral.

Turning
improvements to Turning:
 Removing undercuts in no-drag turning features (see page 157) —
prevent gouges and simplify toolpaths.
 Controlling steady rests (see page 158) — You can now open and
close the jaws of a steady rest without moving it to the home
position.
 Simulating bar stock (see page 160) — You can now simulate bar
stock in FeatureCAM by specifying the length of the stock
displayed in simulation.
 Custom turret names (MTT) (see page 161) — You can now use
customized turret names to make FeatureCAM more consistent
with your machine.

Removing undercuts in no-drag turning features
You can create turning features with a no-drag finishing strategy,
where the tool does not cut the feature in a single movement, which
reduces tool wear and prevents chips being dragged along the
surface.
prevent gouges and simplify toolpaths, which improves machining
time and prevents unnecessary tool wear. Previously, this option
was available only for features which use a conventional finishing
strategy.
To create a no-drag turning feature and remove undercuts:

2 In the Turn Properties dialog, on the Strategy tab, select No-Drag.
3 Select an operation in the Tree View.
4 On the Turning tab, select an option in the Undercuts list:
 No checking — Select this option to not check the feature for
undercuts.
 Adjust to tool geometry — Select this option to clip undercuts
that cause the tool to gouge the part.
 Remove all undercuts — Select this option to remove all
undercuts.

Controlling steady rests
You can now open and close the jaws of a steady rest without
moving it to the home position.
This is useful for turning operations on long parts. For example, you
can machine up to the steady rest, open the steady rest and
machine past it, then close the steady rest and machine to the end
of the part.
Steady rest open: Steady rest closed:
To control the jaws of a steady rest without moving it:
Feature wizard.
2 Select Part Handling and click Next.
The Dimensions page is displayed.
3 To close a steady rest, select Part Support On.
To open a steady rest, select Part Support Off.
4 Click Next.
The Strategies page is displayed.
5 In the Support type list, select Steadyrest.
6 Select the new Jaws only option.
7 Click Finish to close the wizard.

8 To specify when the Part Handling feature is performed, click and
drag the feature in Part View, or change the Base Priority
attribute on the Misc tab of the Part Handling Properties dialog.

The Jaws only option is also displayed on the Strategy tab of the Part
Handling Properties dialog.
There is a new <JAWS-ONLY> reserved word in XBUILD. You must

update your post Formats to use the reserved word to obtain the
correct NC code that matches the new simulation.

Simulating bar stock
You can now simulate bar stock in FeatureCAM by specifying the
length of the stock displayed in simulation without changing the
stock dimensions.
Select the Options > Simulation menu option, and use the new
Display Specific Stock Length option on the Round Stock tab of the
Simulation Options dialog.

Custom turret names (MTT)
You can now use customized turret names to make FeatureCAM
more consistent with your machine. Previously, all turrets were
called upper and lower turrets.
The turret names are taken from the names of the turret or gang
solids in the Machine Design file, and are used throughout
FeatureCAM:
 In the Part View panel.
 In the Tool Posts tab of the Results panel.
 In the Details tab of the Results panel.

 In the NC program.

XBUILD
FeatureCAM 2015 R2 contains the following XBUILD improvements:
 Generating Post documentation (see page 162) — You can now
output your CNC data file as HTML or XML to make it
understandable.
 Using macros in the post processor (see page 163) — The Disable
Macros option in the Post Options dialog is now selected by
default.
Generating Post documentation

In XBUILD, you can output your CNC data file as a text file. This file
has a .cnx extension, and you can edit and print it with any text
editor.
You can now output your CNC data file as HTML or XML to make it
more understandable.
Select one of these File > Document CNC menu options:
 CNX (Text) — Creates a .cnx file which can be read by any text
editor.
 HTML — Creates a .html file. This is the most readable
document.
 XML — Creates an .xml file.

Using macros in the post processor
The Disable Macros option in the Post Options dialog is now selected
by default. You must deselect this option to enable macro
generation for the NC code.

FeatureCAM 2015 R2 contains the following changes to add-ins and
extensions:
 Using Setup Sheets (see page 165) — There are new tags which
you can use to create more detailed setup sheets.
 FeatureCAM to CAMplete TruePath add-in (see page 166) — You
can export documents to CAMplete TruePath, which you can use
to analyze, modify, optimize, simulate and post 5-Axis toolpaths.
 Probing update options (see page 168) — When creating probing
features, you can now select multiple update options, which
enables you to perform multiple actions from a single probing
cycle.
 Support for Microsoft SQL 2014 (see page 168) — FeatureCAM
now supports Microsoft SQL server 2014.

Using Setup Sheets
You can use the SetupSheet.dll (see page 177) add-in to generate
html setup sheets from your document to give information to the
machine operator about the manufacturing, tooling, and toolpaths
of a part.
There are new tags which you can use to create more useful setup
sheets:
 Machining allowances:
 {operation.finish_allowance} — Finish Allowance.
 {operation.bottom_finish_allowance} — Bottom Finish
Allowance.
 {operation.surface_finish_leave_allowance} — Finish
Leave Allowance.
 Stepover:
 {operation.stepover} — 3D milling stepover.
 Z increment:
 {operation.finish_z_increment} — Finish Z Increment
 {operation.surface_finish_z_increment} — Surface Finish
Z Increment.
 {operation.surface_rough_z_increment} — Surface Rough
Z Increment.
 Coolant:
 {tool.coolant_override} — The tool's coolant override.
 Depth of cut:
 {operation.depth_of_cut} — Rough Z Pass Increment.
 {operation.turn_depth_of_cut} — Rough Depth of Cut for
turning operations.

FeatureCAM to CAMplete TruePath add-in
modify, optimize, simulate and post 5-Axis toolpaths.
To export a document to use with CAMplete TruePath:
1 License the CAMplete verification product component, and ensure
it is selected in the Evaluation Options dialog.
2 In the Post Options dialog, select the CAMplete_TruePath.cnc post
in the /Posts/Mill/5-Axis folder.
3 Load the FeatureCAMToCAMplete.dll add-in (see page 145).
4 In the Utilities toolbar, click FeatureCAMToCAMplete .

The FeatureCAM to CAMplete dialog is displayed.
5 Click Browse and select where you want to save the exported
files.
6 In the Select solids to be exported as clamps list, select solids you
want to export as clamps and fixtures.
You can export multiple clamp and fixture solids.

To mark multiple solids as clamps, select them in the graphics
window and click Select solids selected in the part.
7 Click Export Part solid to export a solid to use as the part in
CAMplete. You can export only one part solid.
 To export a solid in the document as an .stl file, select Select
solid to export as part, and select a solid from the list.
 To use an .stl file, select Select existing .stl file and click
Browse and select it in the Select part .stl file document.
If want to machine a part made of multiple solids, you can

use FeatureCAM's solid modelling to combine (see page
475) them.
8 Select whether you want the post to use the Tool number or Tool
ID to identify tools.
9 Under Offset from the setup UCS to pallet, enter the offset
distances in the X, Y and Z directions.
10 Click Preview to display a point in the graphics window which
shows the offset from the setup UCS.
11 Click Export to export the document and close the dialog. The
files are created in the selected output directory.

Probing update options
When creating probing features, you can now select multiple update
options. This enables you to perform multiple actions from a single
probing cycle.
To create a probing feature with multiple update options:
1 Select the Options > Add-Ins menu option and use the Macro
Add-ins dialog (see page 145) to load the StandardProbing2.dll
add-in.
This replaces the StandardProbing.dll add-in, but it is still

available to enable backwards compatibility.
2 Create a User Defined Feature, and select the feature type you
want to measure, then click Next.
3 Select an item in the Dimension list, enter a New Value, and click
Set.
You can enter the following values:
 MCS — Enter the Machine Coordinate System you want to
update.
 Tool — Enter the tool number for the tool you want to update.
 Store — Specify whether to store the results.
 Print — Specify whether to print the results.
4 Complete the wizard and click Finish to create the probing
feature.
Support for Microsoft SQL server 2014

FeatureCAM now supports Microsoft SQL server 2014.
You can use SQL server (see page 1839) to improve the
performance and reliability of your network database in
FeatureCAM.

Machine Simulation Design
improvements to Machine Simulation design:
 Multi-tool blocks (see page 170) — You can now create multi-tool
blocks and double-sided tool blocks in Machine Design files and
use them in machine simulations.
 Selecting the tool block (see page 173) — You can now select
which tool block holds each tool within an FM file, which enables
you to create accurate machining simulations more easily.
 Protecting Machine Design documents (see page 175) — You can
protect your Machine Design files from the extraction of solids,
so that you can share them for simulation without anyone being
able to extract the solids.

Multi-tool blocks
You can now create multi-tool blocks and double-sided tool blocks in
Machine Design files and use them in machine simulation.
Previously, each tool block could hold only one tool.
To create a multi-tool block:

1 Ensure that the Machine Design > Enable Millturn UI menu option
is selected to access the lathe design options.
2 Select the Machine Design > Tool Block for Turret menu option.
The Tool Block tab of the Tool Block dialog is displayed. This tab
has been updated.
3 Select a solid to use as the tool block.

4 Select a UCS for the tool location on the turret, or click New UCS
Wizard and create one.
5 Select which turrets the tool block can address.
6 Select which tool locations on the turret the tool block can attach
to.

7 Select the new Tool Locations tab.
8 Click Add to add a new tool location.

The new Tool Information dialog is displayed.
9 Select a UCS to define the tool location (see page 1930), or click
New UCS Wizard and create one.
10 Select which of the spindles the tool addresses.
11 Under Holds which tool type, select the tool types that can be
used at this tool location. For OD Lathe tools, select the
Handedness of the tool.
12 Click OK to add the tool location and close the Tool Information
dialog.
13 To remove a tool location, select it and click Remove.
14 To edit a tool location, select it and click Edit, or double-click it.
15 Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the order of
the tool locations in the dialog.

16 Click OK to close the Tool Block dialog.

Selecting the tool block
You can now select which tool block holds each tool within an FM
file, which enables you to create accurate machining simulations
more easily.
To select the tool block for a tool:
1 Open a Turning or Turn/Mill document that contains toolpaths.
2 Select the Manufacturing > Tool Mapping menu option.
The Tool Mapping dialog is displayed.
3 Select a tool in the list, and click the new Select Block button.
The new Select Block dialog is displayed.
4 In the Tool block list, select the tool block solid from the Machine
Design file that you want to hold the selected tool.

5 Select the sub slot in the list that you want to hold the tool.
6 Click OK to close the Tool Block Selection dialog.
The tool block you selected is displayed in the tool mapping tree.
7 Click OK to close the Tool Mapping dialog and save your changes.

Protecting solids in Machine Design documents
You can protect your Machine Design files from the extraction of
solids, so that you can share them for simulation without anyone
being able to extract the solids.
FeatureCAM comes with some locked Machine Design files. You can
use these for simulation, but you cannot extract solids from them.
When you open a locked file, a dialog is displayed explaining the
restriction.
You can lock your files, but you cannot unlock them. You should not
lock an original file, instead create a copy of it and lock the copy.
To lock a file:
1 Use the File > Save As menu option to save a copy of your file.
2 Select the File > Lock/Unlock menu option.
The Lock or Unlock File dialog is displayed.
3 Select Lock.
If you lock a file, you cannot unlock it.

4 Click OK to close the dialog and save your changes.

enhancements:
User interface
 Installing FeatureCAM (see page 180) — During installation, a
dialog reminds you to prepare to update to Windows 8.
 SQL server authentication (see page 181) — FeatureCAM can now
record the credentials for accessing the tools databases held in
SQL Server.
 Accessing machining attributes (see page 182) — The Machining
Attributes dialog can be opened directly from the Part View panel.
 Customizing the Toolbox (see page 182) — The width each view
in the Toolbox can be customized separately.
 Adding new stock materials (see page 184) — The New Stock
Material dialog prevents the creation of invalid stock names.
 Improved feature recognition (see page 185) — Feature
recognition automatically excludes clamps from solids.
 Recognizing Face features (see page 186) — You can now
recognize multiple Face features simultaneously.
 Snapping modes (see page 187) — The Snap Mode toolbar
includes a new option that allows the use of the centre points of
cylinders and cones.
 Creating solids (see page 188) — The Finish button of the Solid
Wizard is configurable in the same way as the Features Wizard.
 Polygonal curves (see page 190) — A new option is available for
creating polygonal curves.
 Creating gears (see page 192) — The Gears dialog now includes
alternative methods of specifying curve information. A separate
tab reports the properties of the calculated gear.
 Command line options (see page 194) — FeatureCAM's command
line interface has been extended.
 Selecting surfaces (see page 195) — Selecting the surfaces of
long narrow models has been improved.
Milling
 Tool Holder collision avoidance (see page 197) — You can now
automatically clip toolpaths which would cause a tool holder
collision or a gouge.

 Machine maximum stock (see page 199) — A new machine
maximum stock setting enables you to machine as much stock
as possible without retracting the tool.
 Isoline and Flowline features (see page 200) — A new sequence
option for isoline and flowline milling gives greater control over
the creation of toolpaths.
 Configuring counterbore operations (see page 202) — A new
Touch off at the shoulder option enables you to choose the z-zero
position for a counterbore operation.
 Default auto-chamfer tool (see page 204) — The Machining
Attributes dialog includes the ability to set a default tool for
chamfer operations.
 Setting toolpath boundaries (see page 205) — You can use a
clipping curve to restrict z-level roughing to a specific area of a
part.
 Creating 5-axis patterns (see page 207) — 5-axis milling patterns
can be specified for any axis.
Turning
 Improved machining time for dips (see page 210) — FeatureCAM
uses a rapid move to machine dips smaller than the depth of cut.
 Synchronizing operations (see page 211) — Improved
synchronization points for multi-turret machines make it easier
to manage and update synchronization groups.
 Turning curves (see page 213) — Follow and pinch turning are
now available for the face and back-face cycles of curves.
 Tool properties for multi-turret machining (see page 215) — You
can assign operations to specific turrets in the Tool Properties
dialog.
 Multiple part catchers (see page 216) — Multiple part catcher
support is supported through the Cutoff Properties dialog and the
FeatureCAM API.
Wire EDM
 Improved reliability for no-core machining (see page 218) —
FeatureCAM can create no core toolpaths that ensure no material
remains after machining.
 Selecting cutting data (see page 219) — Two new conditions are
available for selecting data.
Importing
 Using Inventor 2015 (see page 222) — FeatureCAM has been
certified for use with Autodesk Inventor 2015.

 Importing Pro/E files (see page 223) — The feature tree of
imported Pro/E files can be displayed.
 Importing JT files (see page 223) — You can load solids from JT
files in addition to surfaces.
 Importing PDF files (see page 224) — You can import curves from
Acrobat files using Delcam Exchange.

 Using add-ins (see page 226) — The Macro Add-ins dialog has
been updated to improve the management of add-ins and
macros.
 The Add-in Library (see page 228) — FeatureCAM now includes a
catalog of add-ins that were previously only available on the
website. The Add-in Library is a new feature that enables you to
quickly view and select add-ins from the catalog.
 Turn-curve tolerance (see page 230) — A new
TurnCurveTolerance.bas add-in enables you to tolerance multiple
segments in turned or internal bore features.
 Exporting NC programs to NCSIMUL (see page 233) — The
FeatureCAMToNCSIMUL.dll add-in can now export turn/mill
programs as well as milling programs.
 Extended machine support (see page 234) — Add-in support for
traveling steady rests, bar fed mills, and the Mori Seiki NTX1000
is available for FeatureCAM.
XBUILD
 Custom formats (see page 236) — The Custom Format Name
dialog has an enhanced user interface to support the creation of
naturalistic process names.
 Customizing cutting data from Wire EDM (see page 237) — You can
now configure the headings of the cutting data table for use with
Wire EDM.
 Saving CNC files (see page 240) — Post numbers can be used to
identify individual output files for Fanuc-style multi-turret lathes.
 Configuring reserved words (see page 242) —The Word Info dialog
includes a new option that enables you remove all non-significant
zeros from numeric outputs.
 Using the Reserved Words dialog (see page 243) — The Reserved
Words dialog is easier and quicker to use.

User interface improvements
 Installing FeatureCAM (see page 180) — During installation, a
dialog reminds you to prepare to update to Windows 8.
 SQL server authentication (see page 181) — FeatureCAM can now
record the credentials for accessing the tools databases held in
SQL Server.
 Accessing machining attributes (see page 182) — The Machining
Attributes dialog can be opened directly from the Part View panel.
 Customizing the Toolbox (see page 182) — The width each view
in the Toolbox can be customized separately.
 Adding new stock materials (see page 184) — The New Stock
Material dialog prevents the creation of invalid stock names.
 Improved feature recognition (see page 185) — Feature
recognition automatically excludes clamps from solids.
 Recognizing Face features (see page 186) — You can now
recognize multiple Face features simultaneously.
 Snapping modes (see page 187) — The Snap Mode toolbar
includes a new option that allows the use of the centre points of
cylinders and cones.
 Creating solids (see page 188) — The Finish button of the Solid
Wizard is configurable in the same way as the Features Wizard.
 Polygonal curves (see page 190) — A new option is available for
creating polygonal curves.
 Creating gears (see page 192) — The Gears dialog now includes
alternative methods of specifying curve information. A separate
tab reports the properties of the calculated gear.
 Command line options (see page 194) — FeatureCAM's command
line interface has been extended.
 Selecting surfaces (see page 195) — Selecting the surfaces of
long narrow models has been improved.

Installing FeatureCAM
Following Microsoft's decision to withdraw support for Windows 7 in
2015, Delcam will also be withdrawing support for this operating
system. To enable you to prepare for this change, FeatureCAM 2015
R1 displays the following reminder when it detects you are installing
it on a computer running Windows 7. or a 32-bit version of Windows
8:
If you want to continue using FeatureCAM updates after June 2015,

you must update your computer to a 64-bit version of Windows 8.

SQL server authentication
You can now specify a username and password for SQL (see page
142) authentication. When you use SQL authentication, the
Database Name list only displays databases to which you have
access.
There are new options in these places:
 The Database tab of the File Options dialog:
 In the INITDB window:
To use SQL authentication:

1 Display the Database tab of the File Options dialog or the INITDB
window.
2 Select On a SQL server.
3 Enter a Server Name.
4 In the Authentication Mode list, select SQL Server.
5 Enter a SQL Username and a SQL Password.
6 In the Database Name list, select a database. The list displays
only the databases for which you have access rights.
Accessing machining attributes

The Machining Attributes dialog can now be opened from the Parts
View panel as well as from the Manufacturing > Machining Attributes
menu option. This streamlines the document creation process by
enabling you to quickly view and change the attributes of the part
you are working with.
To open the Machining Attributes dialog from the Part View:
1 Double-click the Machining Attributes option below the document
name. For example:
2 Update the machining attributes, and then click OK to save your

changes and close the dialog.
Customizing the Toolbox

FeatureCAM now remembers the last width change for each view in
the Toolbox panel. This enables you to customize the display of the
Steps, Part View, and Browser panels individually, and then have
FeatureCAM automatically change the Toolbox width each time you
switch between them. The separate widths are saved when you
close the program, which means that your changes are remembered
between sessions and can be shared across installations using the
ezfm_ui.ini file.

To resize the Toolbox views:
1 Select Part View.
2 Position the cursor over the Toolbox border. When the cursor
changes to , left-click and drag the border to its new position.
For example:
3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for the Steps view and the Browser view.

Adding new stock materials
To avoid creating names that cause errors, the names of new
materials are now restricted to capital letters (A-Z), numbers (0-9),
underscores (_), and dashes (-). To enable you to type normally,
lower-case letters are automatically converted to upper-case, and
spaces are automatically converted to underscores.
To create a new stock material:
1 Select the Manufacturing > Feeds/Speeds and Cutting Data Tables
menu option. The Feeds/Speeds and Cutting Data Tables dialog is
displayed.
2 Click the New Stock Material button. The New Stock Material
dialog is displayed.
3 Enter a name for the material and click OK to save your changes
and close the dialog. The name is displayed in the Material list.
4 Complete the details of the material in the Feeds/Speeds and
Cutting Data Tables dialog.
5 Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.

Improved feature recognition
Previously, feature recognition identified and selected clamps as
well as features on the part itself. This meant that when using
feature recognition on a model that included clamps, you would
often need to deselect clamp features.
In FeatureCAM 2015 R1, the feature recognition algorithm has been
refined to automatically exclude the features of clamps from the
recognition process, so cutting out unnecessary work and enabling
you to create documents more quickly.
For example, to identify sides using feature recognition:

1 Open the solid.
2 Right-click the clamps and select Use Solids as Clamp from the
context menu.
3 Open the New Feature Wizard.
4 Under From Curve, select the Side option.
5 Select the Extract with FeatureRECOGNITION check box, and click
Next.
6 In the Feature Extraction dialog, select Automatic recognition and
click Next. The Feature Recognition Options dialog is displayed,
and only the side features on the part are selected.
7 Complete the wizard and click Finish.

Recognizing Face features
You can now use FeatureRECOGNITION to recognize multiple Face
features simultaneously. This makes it easier to program complex
parts, because you no longer need to create Face features
individually.
To recognize Face features from surfaces:

1 Open a part that contains multiple flat surfaces.
2 In the Steps panel, click the Features step. The New Feature
wizard is displayed.
3 In the From Dimensions section, select Face.
4 Select the Extract with FeatureRECOGNITION check box, then click
Next. The Surfaces page is displayed.
5 Select all flat surfaces you want to recognize in the graphics
window, and click to add the selected surfaces.
6 Click Next.
A message asks if you want to create multiple features.
7 Click Yes to create the features and close the wizard.

Snapping modes
A new Snap to cylinder end points option has been added to the Snap
Mode toolbar and the Snap Modes dialog. Use it to select and work
with the center end points of cylinder and cone axes.
To select the cylinder end points:
1 Use one of these methods to select Snap to cylinder end points
mode:
 In the Snap Modes dialog, select .
 In the Snap Mode toolbar, click the Snap to cylinder

button.
In the Graphics view, selection points are displayed at the center
end points on the axis of each cylinder and cone.
2 Click the selection points to construct geometry or to display the
distance between points. For example:
If the Snap to cylinder button is not shown in the Snap Mode

toolbar, select the toolbar in the Toolbars tab of the Customize
Toolbars dialog (see page 23), and click Reset Selected.

Creating solids
To improve usability, a new Finish button has been added to the
Solid Wizard. It works in the same way as the Finish button in the
Features Wizard, and enables you to speed up the creation of
multiple solids. For example:
To create solids using the Solid Wizard:

1 Open the Solid Wizard.
2 Select a method of solid construction.
3 Select a constructor.
4 When you have completed your setting changes, click the down
arrow on the Finish button and choose an option. Select:
 Finish to create the solid and close the wizard.
 Finish and Edit Properties to close the wizard and open the
properties dialog for the solid you created. You can then view
and edit the settings.
 Finish and Create More to create the solid and return to the
start of the wizard. You can then create a new solid.
FeatureCAM remembers your selection and, when you next use
the wizard, the icon displayed on the button indicates its current
state. For example: indicates the button is currently in
Finish and Edit Properties mode.

Similarly, you can create multiple items when using the Solids
toolbar to create items. For example:
To create solids from the properties dialogs:

1 Select an option in the Solid toolbar. The properties dialog for the
solid is displayed.
2 Edit the settings.
3 Click the down arrow on the Apply button and choose an option.
Select:
 Apply and Edit Properties to save your changes and continue
editing the current solid.
 Apply and Create More to save your changes. Each time you
click Apply, FeatureCAM creates a new solid.
As with the Solid Wizard, FeatureCAM remembers your selection,
and an icon indicates the button's current state.

Polygonal curves
FeatureCAM 2015 R1 contains a new Polygon tool. Use it to create a
curve in the shape of a regular polygon.
To create a polygonal curve:
1 Open the Polygon dialog in one of these ways:
 In the Curve Wizard (see page 325), select Other methods,
select Polygon, and click Next.
 On the Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar, click the
Polygon button in the Curve menu.
 Select Construct > Curve > Other Methods > Polygon.
The Polygon dialog is displayed.
2 Enter a Curve name.

3 Enter the Number of sides in the polygon. For example, to create
a regular hexagon, type 6.
4 Enter the x and y coordinates of the Center point, or click and

select the location in the graphics window.
5 To fillet the corners, enter a Corner Radius.
6 To rotate the rectangle counter-clockwise from the X axis, enter
an Angle in degrees.
7 By default the curve is created on the UCS plane. If you want to
position the curve on a parallel plane, enter an Elevation.
8 Size the polygon using one of these methods:

 In the Side length box, enter the length of the sides.
 In the Center to side box, enter the perpendicular distance
between the curve center and the sides.
 In the Center to corner box, enter the distance between the
curve center and the corners.
9 To convert the curve into arcs and lines, select the Create as
curves and lines check box.
10 Click Preview to display the polygon in the graphics window.
11 Click OK or Finish to close the dialog.

Creating gears
The Gears dialog has been extended to allow the use of alternative
parameters to specify gear curves. You can now specify Outer
diameter, Root diameter, and Diametric pitch or Module
measurements, making it easier for you to create curves directly
from the specification. In addition, a new Analysis tab enables you
to view the properties of the calculated gear and the measurement
over pins values.
To create a gear curve:

1 Open the Gears dialog in one of these ways:
then Gears, and click Next.
Gears button in the Curve menu.
 Select the Construct > Curve > Other Methods > Gears menu
option.
The Gears dialog displays the Curve tab.
2 Enter a Name for the curve.
3 Enter a Firmness value to determine the number of control points
in the tooth profile. The smaller the value; the greater the
number of control points used to sample the curve.
4 Complete the gear specification:
 Number of teeth — Enter the number of teeth on the gear.
 Pressure angle — Enter the acute angle, in degrees, between
the tangent to the two base circles and a normal to the line
connecting the gear centers.

 Tip radius — Enter the radius of the tooth corner.
 Addendum — Enter the radial distance from the pitch circle to
the outermost point of the tooth. Alternatively, select Outer
diameter and enter the outside diameter of the gear.
 Dedendum — Enter the radial distance from the depth of the
tooth trough to the pitch circle. Alternatively, select Root
diameter and enter the root diameter of the gear.
 Pitch diameter — Enter the diameter of the pitch circle.
Alternatively, select Module and enter the pitch diameter
divided by the number of teeth, or select Diametric pitch and
enter the number of teeth divided by the pitch diameter.
 Root fillet radius — Enter the radius of the fillet at the bottom
of each tooth.
 Center point —Enter the coordinates for the centre of the gear
curve, or click and pick the curve in the Graphics window.
5 Select the Analysis tab to view the calculated dimensions of the
gear, the calculated pin gauge diameter and the outside
measurement over pins diameter.
The Analysis tab is not displayed when you create a gear

using the Curve Wizard.
6 If you want to change the calculated diameter of the pin gauge,
enter a new value in the Actual pin diameter box, and click
Recompute.
7 Click OK (or Finish if you are using the wizard).

Command line options
The command line interface for ezfm.exe, the FeatureCAM
executable, has been extended. You can use it to control
administrative functions, as well as to load customized
user-interface and manufacturing setups. The following commands
are available:
-b Load the specified VB add-in from the

specified path.
-c Run the script at the specified path.
-dbug Send the debug output to the console.
-debugtofile Send the debug output to file ezfm_debug.txt
-help or -? List the command line options available for
FeatureCAM.
-i Load the settings from the specified
FeatureCAM .ini file.
-l Specify the network license for FeatureCAM.
-m Load the manufacturing settings from the
specified ezfm_mfg.ini file. For example:
ezfm -uc:\ProgramData\FeatureCAM\ezfm_mfg.ini
-noflex or Skip the license checks.
-norms
-regserver Register the FeatureCAM library
-u Load the user-interface settings from the
specified ezfm_ui.ini file. For example:
ezfm
-uc:\ProgramData\FeatureCAM\ezfm_custom_ui.ini
-viewal Send debug graphics to this ezfm instance
To open FeatureCAM using a command line option:

1 Open a Command Line window.

2 Type ezfm.exe, followed by the parameter. For example:
You must enter the full path of the executable and any
specified files when they are not located in the currently
selected directory.
3 Press the Enter key to execute the command.
Commands are not case-sensitive.
Selecting surfaces
Previously, it could be difficult to select surfaces at each end of a
long narrow model. This was because rotating the part would place
the view point inside the model causing the outer surfaces to
disappear. The problem has been fixed in FeatureCAM 2015 R1.

Milling Improvements
improvements to the Milling module:
 Tool Holder collision avoidance (see page 197) — You can now
automatically clip toolpaths which would cause a tool holder
collision or a gouge.
 Machine maximum stock (see page 199) — A new machine
maximum stock setting enables you to machine as much stock
as possible without retracting the tool.
 Isoline and Flowline features (see page 200) — A new sequence
option for isoline and flowline milling gives greater control over
the creation of toolpaths.
 Configuring counterbore operations (see page 202) — A new
Touch off at the shoulder option enables you to choose the z-zero
position for a counterbore operation.
 Default auto-chamfer tool (see page 204) — The Machining
Attributes dialog includes the ability to set a default tool for
chamfer operations.
 Setting toolpath boundaries (see page 205) — You can use a
clipping curve to restrict z-level roughing to a specific area of a
part.
 Creating 5-axis patterns (see page 207) — 5-axis milling patterns
can be specified for any axis.

Tool holder collision avoidance
You can now automatically clip toolpaths which would cause a tool
holder collision or a gouge. This makes it easier to program complex
parts safely, and you can fix problems without having to simulate
the toolpaths repeatedly to find the cause of collisions.
Holder collision clipping only checks for collisions between the

tool holder and part surfaces or check surfaces, not remaining
stock.
To use tool holder collision and gouge avoidance:
1 Create or open a part containing a Surface Milling feature.
2 Double-click the feature in the Part View to display the Surface
Milling Properties dialog.
3 Select an operation in the Tree View.
4 In the Strategy tab, select Holder collision clipping.
5 Select a pass of the operation in the Tree View.
6 In the Milling tab, enter a Holder clearance and Shank clearance.
The toolpath is clipped when the holder or shank move within
these distances of a surface.
7 Click OK to accept.

8 Simulate the toolpath to show which areas have not been
machined:

Machine maximum stock
There is a new Machine maximum stock setting, which you can use
with Holder collision clipping (see page 197) to machine as much
stock as possible without the tool retracting. This creates smoother
toolpaths with fewer retracts, which can improve the surface finish
and reduce the machining time.
Machine maximum stock Machine maximum stock
deselected: selected:
On some parts, this may increase air cutting, which could increase
the machining time.
On the Strategy tab of the Surface Milling Properties dialog, select
Holder collision clipping and Machine maximum stock:

Isoline and flowline features
There is a new sequence option for Isoline and Flowline surface
milling features, which gives you more control over the toolpaths.
You can now create toolpaths which start at the center of the
surface and cut outwards, such as for machining towards and up the
walls of cavities.
To create an Isoline or Flowline surface milling feature:

1 Import or open a model with surfaces you want to machine.
2 Click New Feature on the Advanced toolbar. The New Feature
3 In the From Surface area, select Surface Milling and click Next.
4 In the Graphics window, select the surfaces you want to machine
and click . Click Next.
5 Select Choose a single operation and click Next.
6 In the Finishing Strategies section, select Isoline or Flowline and
click Finish.
To change the Sequence for an Isoline or Flowline Surface Milling

feature:
1 In the Part View, double-click the feature to display the Surface
2 Select the Isoline or Flowline operation in the Tree View.

The Sequence is displayed on the Surface control tab:
3 Click Sequence to cycle through the toolpath sequence

options for the selected surfaces. Select:
 None to create a toolpath that cuts across the surface in the
same way as in FeatureCAM 2014 R3. This is selected by
default.
 In to out to create a toolpath that starts at the center of the
surface and cuts outwards.
 Out to in to create a toolpath that starts at the outside of the
surface and cuts inwards.
The Continuous Spiral option on the Strategy tab overrides

this setting.
4 Click OK to save your changes.

Configuring counterbore operations
By default, FeatureCAM calculates the z depth of an operation as
the sum of the hole's Bore depth and the tool's Pilot length. In
FeatureCAM 2015 R1, the Counterbore tab of the Counterbore Tool
Properties dialog (see page 1757) contains a new Touch off at the
shoulder option, which enables you to locate the tool's z-zero
position at the end of the tool flutes (the tool shoulder) instead of at
the end of the pilot (the tool tip). This improves the accuracy of the
toolpath in 2-axis drilling because it minimizes the effect of the pilot
length, which is susceptible to greater variation in tolerance.
To choose the z-zero position for a counterbore operation:

1 Double-click the hole feature in the Part View. The Hole Feature
Properties dialog is displayed.
2 Select the Counterbore operation in the Tree view.
3 On the Tools tab, double-click the counterbore tool you want to
configure. The Counterbore Tool Properties dialog is displayed.
4 On the Counterbore tab, select the Touch off at the shoulder check
box to position the tool z-zero at the end of the flutes; deselect
the check box to position the tool z-zero at the end of the pilot.
5 Complete any other changes in the dialog.
6 Click OK to save your changes and close the Counterbore Tool
Properties dialog.

7 Click OK to save your changes to the Hole Feature Properties
dialog.
Selecting the Touch off at the shoulder check box has no effect
on the simulation of the toolpath.

Default auto-chamfer tool
You can now set a default tool for chamfer operations. This enables
you to create multiple features without having to modify them
individually to change the tool.
To set a default chamfer tool:
1 Select Manufacturing > Machining Attributes from the menu. The
Machining Attributes dialog is displayed.
2 In the Tool Selection tab, select a Default auto-chamfer tool from
the list:

The selected tool is used for any new chamfer operations you
create; any existing chamfer operations that use the default tool
are updated.

Setting toolpath boundaries
Previously, in 3D milling, the Stock Model option was a
clipping-curve alternative in the Stock tab of the Surface Milling
Properties dialog. This meant that when you chose to use a stock
model to determine the toolpath boundaries, the machining
operation had to be applied to the whole part. In FeatureCAM 2015
R1, the Stock Model setting is selectable separately to the clipping
curve, enabling you to limit operations to a specific area of a part
for z-level rough, parallel rough, and 3-axis finishing strategies.
To specify the boundaries of the toolpath:
1 Double-click the feature in the Part View, or right-click the
surface and select Properties. The Surface Milling Properties dialog
is displayed.
2 Select the strategy in the tree view. The strategy tabs are
displayed.
3 Select the Stock tab.
4 Choose a clipping curve. Select:

 Use part surface dimensions to create toolpaths on the surfaces
regardless of the location of the stock.
 Use stock dimensions to restrict the toolpaths to the portions
of the surface feature that are within the stock.

 Use solid model to restrict toolpaths to be within the solid
model or STL model that you choose.
 Select curves for boundaries to use curves to restrict the
toolpath boundaries, or to affect the shape of a spiral
toolpath.
5 To use the curve in combination with a stock model:
a Select the Stock model check box.
b Select the model from the list.
c Select an entry in the Operations list.
6 If you want to save the boundary for future use, click Save
Combined Boundary.

Creating 5-axis patterns
The New Feature Wizard now contains an additional option for
creating 5-axis milling patterns. With the new Radial arbitrary index
axis option on the Patterns page you can make a hole pattern
around any axis, enabling you to program patterns in 5-axis parts
quickly and easily. For example:
To create a 5-axis pattern from a new hole:

1 Create a stock using 5th axis positioning in the Stock Wizard, or
select 5th axis positioning in the Indexing tab of the Stock
Properties dialog.
2 In the New Feature Wizard, select the Hole option, select the Make
a pattern from this feature check box. Click Next.
3 In the Dimensions page, enter the details of the hole you want to
create. Click Next.

4 In the Patterns page, select the Radial arbitrary index axis option.
Click Next.
5 In the Location page, enter the vector of the central axis and the
position of the hole. Click Next.
6 In the Dimensions page, enter the Number of holes in the pattern
and the Spacing angle between each hole. Click Next.
7 In the Location page, enter the vector of the indexing axis and
the position of its origin. Click Finish.
To create a 5-axis pattern from an existing hole:

1 Select 5th axis positioning in the Indexing tab of the Stock
Properties dialog.
2 In the New Feature Wizard, select the Pattern option. Click Next.
3 In the Pattern Base page, select the hole from which you want to
create the pattern. Click Next.
4 In the Patterns page, select the Radial arbitrary index axis option.
Click Next.
5 In the Dimensions page, enter the Number of holes in the pattern
and the Spacing angle between each hole. Click Next.
6 In the Location page, enter the vector of the central axis and the
position of the hole. Click Finish.

Turning improvements
improvements to the Turning module:
 Improved machining time for undercuts (see page 210) —
FeatureCAM uses a rapid move to machine undercuts smaller
than the depth of cut.
 Synchronizing operations (see page 211) — Improved
synchronization points for multi-turret machines make it easier
to manage and update synchronization groups.
 Turning curves (see page 213) — Follow and pinch turning are
now available for the face and back-face cycles of curves.
 Tool properties for multi-turret machining (see page 215) — You
can assign operations to specific turrets in the Tool Properties
dialog.
 Multiple part catchers (see page 216) — Multiple part catcher
support is supported through the Cutoff Properties dialog and the
FeatureCAM API.

Improved machining times for undercuts
FeatureCAM now creates more efficient toolpaths for features that
contain undercuts smaller than the depth of cut. Instead of feeding
along a previous cut to machine the undercut, FeatureCAM now
uses a rapid move. This prevents the tool from cutting the surface
twice, and so reduces machining time, increases tool-life, and
prevents problems such as work-hardening on the part.
To machine a turning feature that includes a small undercut in
FeatureCAM 2015 R1, the tool:
1 Cuts the part to the correct diameters.
2 Retracts and makes a rapid move to the undercut location.
3 Cuts the undercut.

Synchronizing operations
Synchronization points in the Turrets tab (see page 1557) enable
you to specify the order in which operations are performed on
multi-turret machines. In FeatureCAM 2015 R1, synchronization
points have been redesigned to be independent of operations in the
tab, making it easier to change and update synchronization groups,
and providing a simplified, more intuitive user interface.
Adding operations to the sequences

When you insert a feature into the Part View and Automatic Ordering
is selected in the Ops List tab, FeatureCAM adds the feature's
operation to the appropriate synchronization group. For example, a
copy of the hole6 feature is automatically assigned to the same
synchronization group and turret as the original hole.

Moving operations within the sequence
When you drag operations within the Turrets tab, the cursor
changes to ; when you drop the operations, they
are added immediately after it. If the insertion point is at the
boundary of two synchronization groups, the position of the mouse
cursor above or below the boundary marker determines which
group the operations are added to.
In addition, when you drag one operation of an operation pair, both

operations are moved together.
Operation pairs are created by FeatureCAM when a feature

generates two linked operations. For example, linked
operations are created by FeatureCAM's pinch turning feature.
Removing operations from the sequence

When you delete a feature, or exclude it by deselecting its check
box in the Part View, FeatureCAM adjusts the remaining operations
in the synchronization group. When you reselect a previously
excluded feature, it is reinstated at its original position in the
synchronization group.

Turning curves
Follow and pinch turning are now available for the face and
back-face cycles of curves. This enables you reduce machining time
and take full advantage of multi-turret lathes.
To select the cutting method for a curve:
1 Double-click the Turn feature in the Part View panel. The Turn
Properties dialog is displayed.
2 Select the Strategy tab.
3 Select the Turning option.
4 Under Operations, choose a cutting method for each pass you
have enabled. Select:
 Single turret to cut the feature using one turret.
 Pinch turning to cut the feature using turrets positioned above
and below the axis of rotation. The tools cut simultaneously:
the first tool leaves a spiral of material and the second tool
cuts the spiral of material left by the first tool. For example:
 Follow turning to cut the feature using turrets positioned

above and below the axis of rotation. Each turret uses a
standard depth of cut, and the top tool leads the bottom tool.
For example:

5 Click Apply. The details of the turrets are displayed in the tree
view. For example:

Tool properties for multi-turret machining
The Override tab of the Tool Properties dialog includes new turret
options that enable you to set the tool registers for multiple turrets.
Use them to quickly view and edit the overrides of tools that are
assigned to different slot numbers on different turrets without using
the Tool Mapping dialog (see page 1575).
To specify the register settings of turrets in the Tool Properties
dialog:
1 Open the Tool Properties dialog for the tool.
2 Select the Overrides tab.
3 Select the Set all turrets option.
4 In the Turret and spindle list, select the turret you want to work
with. For example:
5 Edit the Default tool registers settings for the turret.

6 Repeat steps 4 through 5 for each turret on the machine.
8 If you are asked whether to set the edited tool as override, click
Yes to use the new tool for the operation; click No to continue
using the original tool.

Multiple part catchers
FeatureCAM now supports multiple part catchers on Turnmill
machines, such as the Nakamura WT-150. Cutoff catchers are
supported by selecting the Part catcher check box in the Strategy tab
of the Cutoff Properties dialog (see page 1389); other catchers can
be implemented by creating user-defined features with
FeatureCAM's application programming interface (API).
For more information on implementing multiple part catchers,

contact your sales representative.

Wire EDM improvements
improvements to the Wire EDM module:
 Improved reliability for no-core machining (see page 218) —
FeatureCAM can create no core toolpaths that ensure no material
remains after machining.
 Selecting cutting data (see page 219) — Two new conditions are
available for selecting data.

Improved reliability for no-core machining
You can create a no-core toolpath that machines an area without
creating a slug.
In FeatureCAM 2015 R1, no-core toolpaths are more reliable, and
no material remains after machining. This eliminates the risk of
loose pieces being left during cutting, which can cause the machine
to stop and can damage the nozzle.
To create a no-core toolpath:

1 Create a 2-Axis Die feature.
2 Display the Properties dialog for the Die feature.
3 In the Strategy tab, select Pocketing or Zigzag in the Operations
list.
4 To add an unmachined area, click Islands and select a curve
using the Select Islands dialog.

Selecting cutting data
The Condition dialog contains two new parameters: Nozzle Position
and Fluid. If your machine supports different nozzle positions or
different types of dielectric fluid, you can use these parameters to
select machine register settings from the cut-data database.
To select a machine condition for an existing document:

1 Create a Wire EDM document, and open the Stock Properties
dialog.
2 On the Dimensions tab, click the Condition button. The new
Nozzle Position and Fluid lists are shown at the bottom of the
Condition dialog.
3 In each list, select an option to identify the combination of
conditions you want to use. If you want to create a new option
for a list, click the adjacent button and enter its name. For
example, to specify a new Nozzle Position option:
a Click . The New Nozzle Position Type dialog is displayed.
b Enter a name for the new position.
c Click OK to save your change and close the dialog.
The option is displayed in the Nozzle Position list.
4 To check or specify the machine settings for the condition, click
the Cutting Data button. The Feeds/Speeds and Cutting Data Tables
dialog is displayed showing the condition you selected:
 If you have selected a previously defined condition, the
machine settings for each pass are displayed in the Wire EDM
tab. To change a setting, double-click its cell in the table and
overtype the value.
 If you have selected an undefined condition, a message is
displayed in the Wire EDM tab. Click New, select the number of
passes required for this condition, and enter the setting values
for the condition.

You can customize the Wire EDM table using the Cutting
Condition Names dialog (see page 237) in XBUILD.
5 When you have finished, click OK to save your changes and close
the dialog.
6 In the Condition dialog, click OK.
You can also specify the condition in the Stock wizard.

Importing
improvements to importing files from external applications:
 Using Inventor 2015 (see page 222) — FeatureCAM has been
certified for use with Autodesk Inventor 2015.
 Importing Pro/E files (see page 223) — The feature tree of
imported Pro/E files can be displayed.
 Importing JT files (see page 223) — You can load solids from JT
files in addition to surfaces.
 Importing PDF files (see page 224) — You can import curves from
Acrobat files using Delcam Exchange.

Using FeatureCAM with Inventor 2015
FeatureCAM has been certified for use with Autodesk Inventor 2015,
an easy-to-use application for the design and documentation of 3D
mechanical parts and assemblies. This enables you to use Inventor's
latest design tools to create models, and then to quickly import
them into FeatureCAM to create features that are ready for
machining.
To use Inventor designs in FeatureCAM:
1 Open the New Part Document wizard.
2 Select Open an existing file and click Next. The Open dialog is
displayed.
3 In the Files of type list, select Inventor (*.ipt, *.iam).
4 Select the file you want to work with and click Open.
5 In the New Part Document wizard, select the type of document
you want to create, select the Wizard option, and click OK. The
file is loaded and the Import Results dialog is displayed.
6 Select Use the wizard to establish the initial setup location, stock
size, and import features from Inventor.
When FeatureCAM is installed on the same computer as

Inventor, it accesses the Inventor data and creates hole
features as originally designed.
7 Complete the wizard to create the part.

Importing ProE files
FeatureCAM can now display the feature tree of imported Pro/E
files. Only solid models are imported from Pro/E; the solid models
are imported as surfaces or solids depending on the options you set
in the Import/Export Options (see page 77) dialog. Only solids are
read from a Pro/E file. Any curves or surfaces read must be part of
a solid.
You must have the FeatureCAM ProE Import module to import

Pro/E files.
To import CAD files:
1 Open a new or existing part file. You must have a part open to
import geometry.
2 Select the File > Import menu option. The Import dialog is
displayed.
3 Select the file you want to import and click Open. The Import
Results dialog is displayed.
Files must have an extension of *.prt, *.prt.%number% (for

example foo.prt.8), *.asm, or *.asm.%number% (for example
bar.asm.23).
Importing JT files
Previously, FeatureCAM was only able to import surfaces from JT
files even though the format supports other information, such as
boundary representation surfaces (NURBS), Product and
Manufacturing Information (PMI), and metadata. In FeatureCAM
2015 R1, the interoperability of the import process has been
extended and you can now also load solids from JT files.
To import a JT file:
import geometry.
2 Select the File > Import Using Exchange menu option. The Import
3 Select the JT file you want to use, then click Open to import the
data.
You must install Delcam Exchange to use this feature. Contact

your sales representative for more information.

Importing PDF files
The FeatureCAM license now includes the ability to import curves
from Adobe Acrobat files using Delcam Exchange.
For example, to import curves from an acrobat file:
1 Open a document.
2 Select the File > Import using exchange menu option. The Import
3 In the Files of type list, select PDF Files (*.pdf).
4 Locate and select the acrobat file containing the curves you want
to import, then click Open.
5 A message asks if you want to review the import log. Click Yes to
view the log, or click No to continue.
6 If the Import Units dialog is displayed to inform you the file was
defined using different measurement units to those used in your
document, select an option then click OK to continue. The Import
size and click Next to create a part using the Import Wizard, or
click Accept the imported data 'as is' and exit the wizard and click
Finish to complete the import process.
The curves are displayed in the graphics view and listed in the
Part View.

improvements to its add-ins and extensions:
 Using add-ins (see page 226) — The Macro Add-ins dialog has
been updated to improve the management of add-ins and
macros.
 The Add-in Library (see page 228) — FeatureCAM now includes a
catalog of add-ins that were previously only available on the
website. The Add-in Library is a new feature that enables you to
quickly view and select add-ins from the catalog.
 Turn-curve tolerance (see page 230) — A new
TurnCurveTolerance.bas add-in enables you to tolerance multiple
segments in turned or internal bore features.
 Exporting NC programs to NCSIMUL (see page 233) — The
FeatureCAMToNCSIMUL.dll add-in can now export turn/mill
programs as well as milling programs.
 Extended machine support (see page 234) — Add-in support for
traveling steady rests, bar fed mills, and the Mori Seiki NTX1000
is available for FeatureCAM.

Using add-ins
FeatureCAM 2015 R1 now ships with most of the catalog of add-ins
available for customizing and extending its abilities. This enables
you to quickly view and select all the applications that have been
developed for general and specific purposes without the need to
locate and download them from the Internet. To accommodate this
expansion, the Macro Add-ins dialog has been updated to make it
easier to control and select the add-ins you want to use.
To choose the add-ins you want to use in FeatureCAM:

1 Select the Options > Add-Ins menu option. The Macro Add-ins
2 Select the check boxes of the add-ins you want to use. One or
more buttons is added to the Macro toolbar for each add-in you
can control manually.
Alternatively, if the add-ins are not listed in the dialog, click
Library (see page 228) to load them from the FeatureCAM
library, or click to load them from file.
Use the Customize Toolbars dialog (see page 28) to create

or change the toolbar buttons of add-ins.

3 Deselect the check boxes of the add-ins you do not want to use.
To remove the selected add-in from the list, click .

4 If you want to view or edit an add-in, click . The IDE Editor
(see page 147) is displayed.
To run an add-in, click its button on the Macro toolbar.
Alternatively, select the View > Run Basic Macro menu option, select
the macro in the Run Macro dialog, and click Run.

The Add-in Library
The Add-in Library is a new feature for FeatureCAM 2015 R1. It
contains most of the add-ins currently available for FeatureCAM
together with descriptions of what they do and how they work. Use
it to find out more about add-ins and to choose those you want to
make available in the Macro Add-ins (see page 226) dialog.
To use the Add-in Library:
1 In the Macro Add-ins dialog, click the Library button. The Add-In
Library dialog is displayed.
The left column lists the available add-ins and macros,

categorized by type; add-ins already available in the Macro
Add-ins dialog are marked by a check icon.
2 Choose one or more actions:
 To show programming examples in the list, select the Include
programming examples check box.
 To search the list, type a string in the Search box. For
example, to restrict the list to only those add-ins that include
NCCode in their name, type NCCode.
 To display the Description of an add-in, select its entry in the
list.

 To add an add-in to the Macro Add-ins dialog, select its entry
in the list and click Load. The entry is marked by a plus
icon.
 To remove an add-in from the Macro Add-ins dialog, select its
entry in the list and click Unload. The entry is marked by a
cross icon.
3 Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. Loaded
add-ins are listed in the Macro Add-ins dialog; unloaded add-ins
are removed from it.

Turn-curve tolerance
TurnCurveTolerance.bas is a new add-in which enables you to
tolerance turned or internal bore features according to ISO 282-2
standards or custom tolerances specified in design documents. Use
it to quickly resize features without redrawing the curve.
To adjust a curve:
1 Install the TurnCurveTolerance.bas add-in. (see page 145)
2 Select the turning or internal bore feature in the Part View.
3 In the Macros toolbar, click the add-in's button. The Fillet and
Chamfer Limit dialog is displayed.
4 Enter the size of the largest fillet or chamfer of the feature:

 Diagonals and arcs shorter than or equal to this value are
treated as chamfers and fillets. When neighboring segments
are adjusted, the add-in translates them without changing
their size or orientation.
 Diagonals and arcs longer than this value are treated as
stationary parts of the curve. They affect the tolerance limits
of adjacent segments and are not translated.

5 Click OK. The Tolerance of Turned Segments dialog is displayed,
and the vertical and horizontal segments are labeled in the
graphics window.

 To change the label size, enter a new value in the Set text size
box, and click Set.
Segment labels on check box.
segment and its label are displayed in red.

tolerance values.

10 Repeat steps 7 through 9 for each segment you want to adjust.
results in the Graphic window. For example:

Exporting NC programs to NCSIMUL
FeatureCAMToNCSIMUL.dll is an add-in, which provides the ability
to export NC code for simulation and optimization in NCSIMUL. In
FeatureCAM 2015 R1, the add-in has been extended to enable the
export of turn/mill programs as well as the original milling
programs.
To export a program to an NCSIMUL project:
1 Install NCSIMUL on your computer and the NCSIMUL tool for
reading FeatureCAM files.
2 In FeatureCAM, open the milling or turn/mill document you want
to export.
3 Run a simulation and generate the NC code, Ensure the code has
no errors.
5 Select the FeatureCAMToNCSIMUL.dll check box.
If the add-in is not listed in the dialog, you can load it from
the Add-ins Library dialog.
6 Click OK. The FeatureCAM to NCSIMUL add-in button is displayed
in the Macros toolbar.
7 Click the FeatureCAM to NCSIMUL button on the Macros toolbar.
The FeatureCAM to NCSIMUL dialog is displayed.
8 In the FeatureCAM to NCSIMUL dialog, select the export options
for the document.
9 Click Export to save the NC code to file. FeatureCAM simulates
the part and exports the program files. When the export is
finished, a message lists the files and their locations.

Extended machine support
FeatureCAM now includes add-in support for the following machines
and features:
Mori Seiki NTX1000

The Mori Seiki NTX1000 is an integrated mill turn center designed
for machining small, precision parts. A new machine design (.md)
file and post are available for programming the machine together
with a user defined feature for controlling the actions of the
workpiece discharge unit.
Traveling steady rests

A new TravelingSteadyRest. bas add-in enables you to program a
steady rest to follow behind the tool while roughing bar stocks. This
add-in is not available in the library as it requires a customized post
and machine model for each installation. For more information,
contact the post-processor department of your local support office.

XBUILD improvements
improvements to the XBUILD module:
 Custom formats (see page 236) — The Custom Format Name
dialog has an enhanced user interface to support the creation of
naturalistic process names.
 Customizing cutting data from Wire EDM (see page 237) — You can
now configure the headings of the cutting data table for use with
Wire EDM.
 Saving CNC files (see page 240) — Post numbers can be used to
identify individual output files for Fanuc-style multi-turret lathes.
 Configuring reserved words (see page 242) —The Word Info dialog
includes a new option that enables you remove all non-significant
zeros from numeric outputs
 Using the Reserved Words dialog (see page 243) — The Reserved
Words dialog is easier and quicker to use.

Custom Formats
The Custom Format Name dialog now supports the use of
underscores and periods in format names. This enables you to
create more naturalistic process names and to accurately represent
decimal measurements. In addition, space characters are
automatically converted to underscores to ensure the names are
unbroken.
To create a Custom Format:
1 In XBUILD, select the Formats > Custom > New menu option. The
Custom Format Name dialog is displayed.
2 Enter a name for the custom format. You can use any upper- or
lower-case character, periods, and underscores. For example:
3 Click OK to create the format and close the dialog. The XBUILD
Editor is displayed with the format name in the Title bar.
4 When you have finished creating the format, select the File > Quit
menu option, and click Yes in the message dialog to save your
changes.

Customizing cutting data for Wire EDM
The Wire EDM tab (see page 219) in FeatureCAM has been extended
to include customizable fields, which can be used to record
machine-specific settings as well as the original Feed, Water,
Comp-num, and Comp-val values. To enable you to manage and
customize all the fields, the Cutting Condition Names dialog has been
redesigned, and it now lists the original settings followed by 16
fields that can contain numeric information and 6 fields that can
contain strings.
To specify the condition names:
1 In XBUILD, select the CNC-Info > Machine menu option. The
Machine Information dialog is displayed.
2 In the Machine type list, select Wire EDM and click OK to close the
dialog.
3 Select the CNC-Info > Cutting Condition Names menu option. The
Cutting Condition Names dialog is displayed.

4 In the Reserved Word column, click the setting you want to
customize, and type a name for it in the box at the bottom of the
table. The name is displayed in the custom name column of the
table. For example:
5 Repeat step 4 for each setting you want to customize.

7 Select the File > Save CNC or File > Save as CNC menu option to
save the post file.

When you next view the stock settings, the field names you
specified are displayed on the Wire EDM tab of the Feeds/Speeds And
Cutting Data Tables dialog. For example:

Saving CNC files
FeatureCAM 2014 R2 included the ability to display the post number
of turrets throughout the user interface. In FeatureCAM 2015 R1, a
new Use P numbers in NC file name option has been added to the
Turret Information dialog that enables you to also include these post
numbers in the names of saved NC files. In addition, a new NC File
Extension box gives you the ability to customize the letter used as
the post extension's prefix.
To specify the turret identifier for the CNC files:

1 In XBUILD, select the CNC-Info > Turrets menu option. The Turret
Information dialog is displayed.
2 In the Multi-turret programming list, choose an option to specify
the type of NC Program files you want to create. Select:
 None for lathes with one turret.
 Okuma Style for multi-turret lathes that require one program
file for all turrets.
 Fanuc Style for multi-turret lathes that require a separate
program file for each turret.
3 By default, the turret identifier starts with P. If you want to use a
different prefix, enter a new character in the NC file extension
box.

4 Select the Use P numbers in NC file name check box to use the P
number of each turret as the suffix of the NC file extension.
Deselect the check box to use the default post numbers for the
file extensions.
5 Complete the settings, and click OK to save your changes and
close the dialog.
6 Save the post file.
7 In FeatureCAM, generate the NC code for your part, and select
the File > Save CNC menu option. The Save NC dialog is displayed.
8 Enter the output settings and click OK to create the NC program
files:
 With Fanuc-style and Use P numbers in NC file name selected;
the P numbers are 1, 3, 11, 20; and an NC file extension of T,
FeatureCAM creates files named: %DocumentName%.T1.TXT,
%DocumentName%.T3.TXT, %DocumentName%.T11.TXT, and
%DocumentName%.T20.TXT.
 With Fanuc -style selected and Use P numbers in NC file name
deselected; P numbers of 1, 3, 11, 20; and an NC file extension
of T, FeatureCAM creates files named: %DocumentName%.TXT,
%DocumentName%.T2.TXT, %DocumentName%.T3.TXT, and
%DocumentName%.T4.TXT.
 With Okuma-style or None selected, only one file is created.

Configuring reserved words
The Word Info dialog enables you to view and change the output
format for reserved-word values. In FeatureCAM 2015 R1, the
dialog has been redesigned, and now includes a Minimize width
option, which allows you to omit all non-significant zeros from
numeric outputs, and a Preview column, which displays the effect of
the settings for each reserved word.
To configure the output of reserved words:

1 In XBUILD, select a Words option in the CNC-Info menu. The
Words Info dialog displays the sub-set of reserved words for the
option you selected.
2 For each reserve word you want to update, select the Minimize
width check box. This removes leading zeros from decimal-only
outputs and trailing zeros from integer-only outputs. For
example, when the check box is selected, the reserved word
outputs 4 as 4, and 0.2 as .2; when the check box is deselected,
4 is output as 4.0, and 0.2 is output as 0.2.
3 Check the effect of your changes using the Preview column:
 To test the effect of the settings on different outputs, type a
new value in the box above the column.
 To test the effects of the Inch format and Metric format
settings, select the preview options below the column.

Using the Reserved Word dialog
The Reserved Word dialog of the Formats editor enables you to
quickly add variables to the format you are editing.
In FeatureCAM 2015 R1, several new features have been added to

the dialog that make it easier for you to find and add words to a
format:
 Words are now identified by category: string words are followed
by (S); logical words are followed by (L): and numeric words are
followed by (N); system words have no identifier.
 Tabs across the top of the dialog enable you to restrict the list to
a specific category of word. For example, to list only system
words, select the System tab; to list all reserved words again,
select the All tab.
 In the All tab, words are listed in alphabetical order instead of by
alphabetical order within category. This enables you to look for
words by name without knowing the category it belongs to.
 A new search box below the tabs enables you to list only those
words that contain a specified string. For example, type spindle in
the box to list only those words that contain the string "spindle".
When you select a word, the box is automatically cleared and the
list scrolls to display the word's entry.
 In addition to being selectable, the Modal delimiters check box
can now be toggled on and off using the Control key. To insert a
word in modality brackets, press the Control key; select the word
in the list, and release the key.

Reference Help
The FeatureCAM Reference Help is split into the following sections,

which follow the recommended steps in the Steps panel (see page
1). You can follow these steps to create a part from start to finish
and output the NC Code.
 Reference Help Introduction (see page 1) — This section covers

the main concepts in FeatureCAM, such as the user interface,
and creating and saving parts.
 Stock (see page 205) — This section covers stock (the material
from which you machine the part), and indexing.
 Geometry (see page 274) — The basic shapes, such as lines and
circles, from which you can create curves.
 Curves (see page 318) — Curves are continuous paths in 2D or
3D space. Use curves to create features, surfaces and solids.
 Surfaces (see page 381) — Surfaces are continuous sets of
points in 2D or 3D space which have no thickness. Use surfaces
to create surface milling features.
 Solids (see page 445) — Solids are groups of connected surfaces
that make up a solid model.
 AFR (see page 495) (Automatic Feature Recognition) —
Automatically extract machining features from solid models.
 Features (see page 529) — Use features to generate toolpaths
without creating individual manufacturing operations.
 Toolpaths (see page 1516) — Simulate the toolpaths in
FeatureCAM to see the finished part and check for collisions.
 NC Code (see page 1565) — Create the NC code and send it to
the machine (see page 1583).
 Customize Mfg. (see page 1591) — Customize the manufacturing
settings.
FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Reference Help • 245

These steps are used for mill, turn, turn/mill, and wire documents;
different steps are used for multiple fixture (see page 1872),
tombstone machining (see page 1885), and machine simulation
(see page 1899) documents.
246 • Reference Help FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help

Reference Help Introduction
This section covers the main concepts you need to use FeatureCAM:
 using the FeatureCAM interface (see page 1).
 creating a new part (see page 61), saving your part (see page
66), and importing and exporting parts (see page 75).
 coordinate systems (see page 109).
 document-level options (see page 128).
 add-ins (see page 145).
 fixing errors (see page 194) in the toolpaths.
FeatureCAM interface
The FeatureCAM interface contains a number of traditional Windows
elements, such as toolbars, dialogs, context menus, and wizards.
Title bar Results window

Menu bar (see page 2) Assistance bar — Step-by-step
instructions are displayed on the assistance
bar.

Toolbars (see page 10) Feature/Geometry Edit bar
Graphics window Status bar (see page 32)
Toolbox (see page 3)
window with Part View (see
page 4), Steps (see page 6)
panel, and Browser (see page
8).
As with other Windows programs, you can tell FeatureCAM what to
do in several ways:
 Select a button on a toolbar;
 Select an option from a menu;
 Select an option from a context menu;
 Press a keyboard shortcut (see page 30).
As you master FeatureCAM, try combining several methods of

issuing commands to get your work done faster.
Right-clicking displays a context menu. The menu varies depending
on where you are in the program. The menu contains common
commands and functions that are useful in that area.
Menu bar
The menu bar is displayed at the top of the screen.
Like many other Windows-based software packages, FeatureCAM

includes a series of drop-down menus. These menus are unique to
FeatureCAM and give one or more of the functions you need to use
the program.
You can access many of these functions using the Steps panel
and toolbars.
Some of the menus contain sub-menus, for example:

In the documentation, if you are instructed to move through a
series of sub-menus, this is formatted with a chevron
between each menu item. For example: Select Construct >
Surface > Primitives > Cylinder from the menu.
Toolbox
The Toolbox is to the left of the Graphics window in FeatureCAM and
contains three panels:
 Part View (see page 4)

 Steps (see page 6)
 Browser (see page 8)
To toggle the display of the Toolbox, click on the tab name to
collapse or expand it.
To adjust the width of the toolbar, move the cursor over the
Toolbox border. When it changes to , click and drag the border.

Part View
The Part View panel displays a hierarchical view of the part. Each
Setup is listed with each of the features of the Setup listed below.
From this view you can select, show, hide, or edit features.
To use the part view:

 Click next to an item to expand the view and show the item's
sub-items. Click to collapse the view and hide the item's
sub-items.
 Move the cursor over an item's name to highlight it in green in
the graphics window. Use this to distinguish between overlapping
items and find items in complex documents.
 Click an item's name in the Part View to select the item. Selected
features are highlighted in red in the graphics window.
 Right-click an item to display the context menu to perform an
action on the item. Alternatively, click next to the selected
item.
 Features have a check box next to their name. When you
deselect the feature, it is excluded from the next toolpath
generation.
 All objects, except geometry, are represented in the Part View.
 You can select multiple items in the part view by using Shift+click
and Ctrl+click.

Symbol Meaning Notes
Documen Displays the name of the current
t document. Use the right-click context menu
to Include All Features or Exclude All
Features in the current document.
Machinin Double-click the icon to display the
g Machining Attributes dialog (see page 1591)
Attribute where you can specify the default
s machining attributes.
Stock If you select the stock name in the Part
View, the stock is highlighted in red in the
graphics window. Double-click the stock
name to open the Stock Properties dialog.
You can show, hide, and center the stock
from the context menu.
Setup The features belonging to the Setup are
listed below each Setup name.
Feature If you select a feature name in the Part
View, the feature is highlighted in red in
Pattern A pattern or group of features. If you select
or Group a pattern or group name in the Part View,
the pattern or group is highlighted in red in
Stock Lists any stock models (see page 266) in
Models the document. Select Add Stock Model from
the context menu to open the Add Stock
Model dialog.
Turrets Lists the turrets for multi-turret Turn
documents. (MTT (see page 10)). The
turret names are taken from the solid
names in the Machine Design file.
Curves Lists the curves in the document. If you
select a curve name in the Part View, the
curve is highlighted in red in the graphics
window.
Surface If you select a surface name in the Part
View, the surface is highlighted in red in

Symbol Meaning Notes
STL Lists STL solid model files that have been
imported into FeatureCAM. Select an STL
name in the Part View and the STL is
highlighted in red in the graphics window.
Solids Lists the solids in the document. If you
select a solid name in the Part View, the
solid is highlighted in red in the graphics
window.
Layers Lists the layers (see page 299) in the
document.
Steps panel
The Steps panel contains an ordered list of steps for creating part
programs. Each step is a wizard that presents a series of dialogs for
each process. They are listed in the order in which you should use
them during the process of creating a part program.
Stock — Click this step to open the Stock wizard (see page
205), which steps you through entering the shape and dimensions
of the stock, the stock material, the Setup (part program zero), and
the coordinate system for modeling.
Geometry — Click this step to open the Geometry Constructors

dialog (see page 275). Points, arcs, lines, and other shapes are
used to describe the overall shape of parts. Many different
geometry tools are available. You can also import geometry from
CAD systems.
Curves — Click this step to open the Curve Creation dialog (see
page 319). Shapes that involve more than a single line or arc are
described as curves. For 3D Milling customers, there are also
Surfaces and Solids steps for creating 3D surface and solid models.
Surfaces (3D LITE (see page 10)) — Click this step to open the
Surface Wizard (see page 381), which steps you through creating
surfaces from curves, primitive surfaces, surfaces from one surface,
and surfaces from multiple surfaces.
Solids (SOLID (see page 10)) — Click this step to open the
Solid Wizard (see page 452), which enables you to create solids
using numerous techniques.

AFR (Automatic Feature Recognition) (RECOG (see page 10))
— Click this step to open the Automatic Feature Recognition wizard
(see page 508), which enables you to create features automatically
from solid models.
Features — Click this step to open the New Feature wizard (see
page 530). Features are common shop terms like pocket, or thread.
They are created from curves and dimensions. These objects
describe your part in 3D and are used to generate toolpaths.
Toolpaths — Click this step to display the Simulation toolbar

(see page 1516). Toolpaths are generated from collections of
features. You can simulate them in FeatureCAM using toolpath
centerlines, 2D shaded, or 3D solid shaded simulations.
NC Code — Click this step to open the NC Code dialog (see page
1565). Machine-specific G-codes are generated from the toolpaths.
Translators are provided for many different NC controls and include
a program for creating new translators.
Customize Manufacturing — Click this step to open the

Customize Manufacturing dialog (see page 1591). FeatureCAM
automates the entire part programming process, you can customize
all of the system settings including feed/speed tables, tooling
databases, or feature settings.

Browser
The Toolbox contains a Browser.
To open the browser, click the Browser tab inside the Toolbox
window.
The Browser contains information on the latest features available in
FeatureCAM, including example files that you can load straight into
FeatureCAM. To load an example project from the Browser, click the
preview picture.

Click the Folder icon to open a folder containing more files.
To resize the Browser, move the cursor over the Toolbox

border until the cursor changes to , then click and drag the
border.
Browser buttons
The Browser contains the following buttons at the top:
Home - Click to go home to the default Browser home
page.
Website - Click to open the FeatureCAM website
(www.featurecam.com).
Release Center - Click to open the FeatureCAM Release
Center website (releasecenter.featurecam.com).
Forum - Click to open the FeatureCAM user forum
(forum.featurecam.com).
Email - Click to email Delcam about non-support-related
issues, or if you do not have the email address of your
reseller.
You may need to go back to the top of the page to see these
buttons by scrolling or using the Top button detailed below.
And the following button at the bottom:

Top - click to go to the top of the current page.
Context menu
Right-click inside the browser to open a context menu that includes
the following items:
Back - the Browser returns to the previous page that you viewed.
Select All - selects all the content on the Browser's current page.

Print - prints the Browser's current page.
Refresh - reloads the page to include any changes that have been
made to the page.
Viewing other HTML files

To open an HTML file saved on your computer in the Browser:
1 Select File > Open from the menu.
This displays the Open dialog.
2 Under Files of Type at the bottom of the dialog, select either
HTML (*.html, *.htm) or All Files (*.*).
3 Browse to where the file is saved.
4 Either double-click the name of the file you want to open or
select it and click Open.
The file is displayed in the Browser.
To close a file that you have opened from your computer in this
way, right-click inside the browser and select Back from the context
menu.
Default browser content (see page 143)
Toolbars
Toolbars are usually located at the top, but you can dock them in
other locations or undock them and leave them floating anywhere
on the screen. Toolbars comprise one or more buttons, which each
has a different function. You can quickly access many of the menu
functions using the toolbars.
The following toolbars are available in FeatureCAM:
Standard (see page 11)
Advanced (see page 12)
Curves and Surfaces (see page 13)
Snap Mode (see page 15)
Display Mode (see page 16)
Geometry (see page 17)
Simulation (see page 17)
Steps (see page 22)
Solid (see page 22)
More Simulation (see page 22)

Only the Standard and Advanced toolbars are shown by default. Use
the Customize Toolbars (see page 23) dialog to set which toolbars
are displayed.
Buttons are often grouped together to save space on the

toolbars. Click the arrow buttons to access the menu of all
buttons in a group.
Standard toolbar
The New Part Document button creates a new part

file. You can control how files are created by
selecting Options > File Options from the Menu bar,
and customizing the settings on the New Files tab.
The Open button opens an existing file. You can
control how files are opened by selecting Options >
File Options from the Menu bar, and customizing
the settings on the Existing Files tab.
The Save button saves the current file. You can
control how files are saved by selecting File > Save
Options from the Menu bar.
The View menu enables you to select viewing
modes for your part. Your cursor shows the same
icon as the viewing mode you selected.
The Principal View menu enables you to select one
of seven predefined views for your part.
The Shade button toggles display of shaded
surfaces for solid modeling. You need to have the
Solid Modeling module to use this option.
The Undo button reverses the effect of the
previous command. FeatureCAM remembers a long
list of the commands that are performed, so you
can undo more than one command.
The Delete button erases the object that is selected
on the screen. The object is removed from the
system.

The Select menu enables you to select objects in
the graphics window (see page 56), using the
Select, Select Partial, or the Drag Select method.
When you are in select mode, the mouse pointer is
displayed as a standard arrow pointer in the
graphics window.
The Transform button opens the Transform dialog,
and enables you to move or copy the selected
entity.
The Options Dialog button opens the Options
dialog, and enables you to customize FeatureCAM.
The Context Help button switches on
context-sensitive help. When the cursor has
changed to a question mark (?), click a menu
item, button, or dialog to receive more
information.
The FeatureCAM Help button opens online help.
Advanced toolbar
The Show menu contains the object categories

that can be displayed in the graphics window.
The Hide menu contains the object categories that
can be hidden in the graphics window. Hiding
objects does not delete them; it just removes
them from display.
Click the Curve Wizard button to display the Curve
wizard, which enables you to construct curves. The
commands available in this wizard are also
available from the Curves and Surfaces (see page
13) toolbar.
Click the Surface Wizard button to display the
Surface wizard, which enables you to construct
surfaces. The commands available in this wizard
are also available from the Curves and Surfaces
(see page 13) toolbar.

Click the Solid Wizard button to display the Solid
wizard, which enables you to construct solids. This
option is available if you have the Solid Modeling
module. (SOLID (see page 10))
Click the Toggle Geometry Bar button to toggle the
display of the Geometry toolbar (see page 17).
Click the Snap Modes button to display the Snap
Modes dialog, which enables you to set the
locations for point snapping.
Click the New Feature Wizard button to display the
New Feature wizard, which enables you to create
features.
Click the UCS button to display the User Coordinate
System dialog, which enables you to create a new
UCS or change an existing UCS.
Click the Setups button to display the Setups
dialog, which enables you to create or edit a part
program zero.
Curves and Surfaces toolbar

The Curves and Surfaces toolbar enables you to quickly specify
curves and surfaces. It is divided into two sections: the curve
buttons are on the left section; the surface buttons are on the right.
To use the toolbar:

1 Display the Curves and Surfaces toolbar in one of these ways:
 Select View > Toolbars from the menu to display the Customize
Toolbars dialog. In the Toolbars list, select Curves and Surfaces
and click OK.
 Right-click in a space in the toolbars area and select Curves
and Surfaces from the context menu.
2 Click to list the options in a group.

3 Click the curve or surface you want to create.
The button in the toolbar displays the icon of the item you last
selected. Click the button again to create another item of the same
type.

Curve from Other Curve from Curve Curve from Surface
Methods Menu: Menu: Menu:
Join (see page Boundary (see
Spline/interpolation 327) page 343)
(see page 367)
Curve Trimmed Edge
Text (see page Start/Reverse (see (see page 344)
368) page 329)
Intersection (see
Ellipse (see page Offset (see page page 345)
374) 332)
Isoline (see page
Rectangle (see Project to UCS 347)
page 375) (see page 333)
Project onto
Functions (see Extract Font Surface (see page
page 356) Curve (see page 334) 349)
Cams (see page Smooth/Reduce Surface Edges
364) Curve (see page 335) (see page 350)
Polygon (see Unwrap (see Surface Projection
page 376) page 339) (see page 351)
Gears (see page Merge (see page Revolved Surface
378) 341) Boundary (see page
353)
Surface Primitives Menu: Surface from Curve Menu:
Sphere (see page 406) Extrude (see page 385)

Cylinder (see page 409) Surface of Revolution (see
page 386)
Flat (see page 410)
Swept Surface (see page
Surface(s) from Feature
389)
(see page 411)
Ruled Surface (see page
392)
Coons (see page 395)
Curve Mesh (see page 397)
Lofted Surface (see page
400)
Cap Surface (see page
403)

Surface from Surface Menu: Surface from Surfaces Menu:
Region from Surface (see Fillet (see page 427)

page 413)
Merge (see page 431)
Reverse Surface (see
Surface-Surface Trim (see
page 414)
page 432)
Offset Surface (see page
Modify Surface (see page
416)
437)
Extend Surface (see
Corner Blend (see page
page 417)
441)
Trim Surface (see page
418)
Untrim a Surface (see
page 422)
Split Surface (see page
424)
To construct surfaces, you must have the FeatureCAM 3D

module.
Snap Mode toolbar
Select Snap to Grid to enable snapping to points in

the snapping grid, which is displayed on the stock.
You can customize the snapping grid by selecting
the Options > Snapping Grid menu option.
Select Snap to Point to enable snapping to point
objects.
Select Snap to End Point to enable snapping to the
end points of finite lines and arcs, including the
corners of the stock and lines in STL objects.
Select Snap to Midpoint to enable snapping to the
middle points of finite lines and arcs.

Select Snap to Section to enable snapping at equal
intervals of a finite line. The number of intervals a
line is split into is controlled by the Sections option
in the Snapping Grids dialog.
Select Snap to Intersection to enable snapping to the
intersections of lines, arcs, and circles.
Select Snap to Center to enable snapping to circle
centers. This setting also controls the display of
circle and arc center points.
Select Snap to Quadrant to enable snapping to the
four points on a circle corresponding to 0, 90, 180,
and 270 degrees.
Select Snap to Object to enable snapping to points
on objects, such as surfaces or STL objects.
Select Snap to Tangent to enable snapping to objects
such that the object you create is tangent to the
snapped object.
Select Snap to Toolpath to enable snapping to points
on a centerline toolpath simulation.
Select Snap to cylinder end points to enable
snapping to the end points of a cylinder or
cone axis.
Select Snapping Discrimination Dialog to display the
Snap Discrimination dialog if the point you select
could snap to more than one location.
Display Mode toolbar
The Shade Selected button shades objects selected

on the screen. This is the only way to shade
features.
The Unshade Selected button removes shading from
the selected objects, and returns them to line
drawings.
The Unshade All button returns all objects to line
drawings.
The Hidden Line button toggles the view of solids to
hidden line mode.

The Draft Hidden Line button toggles the view of
solids to draft hidden line mode.
The Show Normals button shows the normals for
selected surfaces in the model.
The Unshow Normals button hides the normals for
selected surfaces in the model.
The 2D Turned Profiles button shows turning features
as 2D profile.
Geometry toolbar
The Point button creates a point at X Y Z

coordinates.
The Line menu lets you create different types of
lines.
The Circle menu lets you create different types of
circles.
The Fillet menu lets you create different types of
fillets.
The Arc menu lets you create different types of
arcs.
The Dimension menu lets you create dimensions,
or special text labels with attached lines to
indicate your part's size.
The Edit menu lets you edit selected geometry.
The Chain menu lets you construct feature curves
from selected geometry.
Simulation toolbar
The Simulation toolbar is displayed when you click the Toolpaths
step in the Steps panel:

It is not docked by default, but you can dock it and display it as a
normal toolbar.
Click the Eject button to remove the Simulation

toolbar from the screen, and erase the simulation
from the graphics window.
The Show Centerline button selects a centerline
simulation. When you click the Play button, the
simulation is performed using the current view to
draw the toolpaths. A line drawing representing
the center of the tool tip is displayed.
The 2D Simulation button selects 2D simulation.
When you click the Play button, a two-dimensional
color simulation is performed showing the regions
cut by each operation. The view is changed to the
top view automatically, and anything on the screen
is temporarily erased until the simulation is
complete. You cannot change the view during the
simulation. When the simulation is complete you
can change the view, but the toolpaths are erased.
The 3D Simulation button selects 3D simulation.
When you click the Play button, a 3D shaded
simulation is performed in the current view with
the tool animated through all of its moves. You
can dynamically change the view of the simulation
at any point during or after the simulation. The
simulation does not have to be recalculated, so the
view change is instantaneous.
The 3D RapidCut button selects rapidcut
simulation. When you click the Play button, a 3D
simulation is performed without animating the
tool. Only the final results are displayed. For most
parts, the simulation takes only a few seconds to
complete. This simulation can be viewed
dynamically.
This simulation type is available if you have the
FeatureCAM3D module; it does not apply to turned
parts. (3D LITE (see page 10))

The Machine Simulation button selects machine
simulation. When you click the Play button, a full
machine simulation is performed showing you how
the machine cuts the part. Odd motions and
collisions can be detected so that the program can
be adjusted long before code is sent to the CNC
machine.
This simulation type is available if you have
licensed the Machine Simulation component.
(MSIM (see page 10))
Click the Stop button to cancel a simulation.
Click the Play button to start a simulation, or
resume a paused simulation. After you have
clicked the Play button, it becomes the Pause
button.
This button starts a simulation of the selected
feature, or resumes a paused simulation.
Click the Pause button to pause the simulation.
After you have clicked the Pause button, it
becomes the Play button.
Click the Fast Forward to End button to accelerate
the simulation, and fast forward it to the end.
Click this button to accelerate the simulation of the
selected feature, and fast forward it to the end.
Click the Single Step button to move the simulation
ahead by one tool move. The keyboard shortcut
for this button is Alt+F3.
Click this button to move the simulation of
selected feature ahead by one tool move.
Click the arrow of the Simulation Next menu to
access a sub-menu of buttons:
Play to next operation — Click this button to
play the simulation and pause at the next
operation.
Play to next rapid — Click this button to play
the simulation and pause at the next rapid.
Play to next tool change — Click this button to
play the simulation and pause at the next tool
change.
Play to next Z level — Click this button to play
the simulation and pause at the next Z level.

Click the Simulation Next menu arrow to specify
how the simulation is played.
Click the Clear Toolpath button to erase any
centerline toolpaths shown on the screen.
Click the Region of Interest button to limit the
portion of the part that is rendered during a 3D
solid simulation or a rapidcut simulation.
Click the Show Tool Load button to display the Tool
Load dialog during the next 3D simulation. This
dialog graphs the horsepower requirements of the
part program, and displays the current simulation
time and instantaneous horsepower.
Deselect Toggle Rapids in Centerline Simulation to
hide rapid moves in centerline simulations so that
you can see cutting moves more easily in
complicated toolpaths.
Click Change the Simulation Tool Color during a
simulation to change the color of the simulation
tool. This does not affect the color of cuts that
have already been simulated. For example you can
use this to display different passes of an operation
in different colors to check for air cutting.
Use the Sim Speed slider to adjust the simulation
speed. Move the bar to the right to speed up the
simulation; move the bar to the left to slow it
down.
When using 3D RapidCut, the slider affects the
simulation display. If the slider is all the way to
the right, only the final simulation result is
displayed. Move the slider further to the left to see
intermediate results.
You can increase the length (see

page 20) of the Sim Speed slider, to
make it easier to control the speed.
Lengthen Sim Speed slider

You can increase the length of the simulation speed slider on the
Simulation toolbar (see page 17), to make it easier to control the
speed.
To do this:
1 Ensure the Simulation toolbar is displayed (see page 24).

2 Select View > Toolbars from the menu. The Customize Toolbars
dialog is displayed, but you don't need to do anything in the
dialog.
3 Click on the Sim Speed slider in the Simulation toolbar and it
displays a border.
4 Hover over the border at the right of the button and the mouse
pointer changes to a double arrow icon.
5 Drag the right border out as far as you want.

6 Click OK to save your changes and close the Customize Toolbars
dialog.

Steps toolbar
The Steps toolbar displays the Steps available in the Steps panel
(see page 6) in the Toolbox window.
Using the Steps toolbar instead of the Steps panel enables you
to use the Part View panel and still gives you quick access to
the Steps in the Steps panel.
Solid toolbar
The Solid from Curve menu lets you construct solids

from curves.
The Solid from Surfaces menu lets you construct
solids from surfaces.
The Modify Solid menu lets you edit solids.
The Manufacturing Solids menu lets you select a
manufacturing category.
More Simulation toolbar
This button toggles the display of the Simulation

toolbar (see page 17), and lets you preview the
toolpaths from start point.
This button toggles the display of the Simulation
toolbar, and lets you preview the toolpaths for
selected Z level.
This button toggles break points in the simulation at
toolpath level.
This button toggles break points in the simulation at
Z level.

Customize Toolbars dialog
The Customize Toolbars dialog enables you to set which toolbars to
display (see page 24), which buttons to show on a toolbar (see
page 27), whether to show other interface features (see page 29),
and which keyboard shortcuts to use (see page 30).
Use one of the following methods to display the Customize Toolbars

dialog:
 Select View > Toolbars from the menu.
 Right-click on an empty part of the toolbar area and select
Customize from the context menu.
The Customize Toolbars dialog has these tabs:
 Toolbars (see page 24)
 Commands (see page 27)
 Misc. (see page 29)
 Keyboard Shortcuts (see page 30)

Toolbars tab
You can use the Toolbars tab of the Customize Toolbars dialog (see
page 23) to set which toolbars to display.
Only the Standard and Advanced toolbars are displayed by default.

To display a toolbar, select the box next to its name. To hide a
toolbar, deselect the box next to its name.
You can quickly change the toolbar display by right-clicking on

an empty part of the toolbar area and selecting/deselecting
the toolbar name in the context menu.
New — Click the New button to create a new, custom, toolbar. The
New Toolbar dialog is displayed. Enter a Toolbar name and click OK.
The new toolbar shows in the Toolbars list and is automatically
displayed. Add buttons to your new toolbar using the Commands
tab.

Reset Selected — Click the Reset Selected button to revert the
selected toolbar to its default display of buttons after you have
added/removed buttons.
Delete — You can delete a custom toolbar that you have added by
selecting it and clicking the Delete button.
Default Toolbars — Set the toolbar display back to the default (just
the Standard and Advanced toolbars).
Toolbar name — You can edit the name of a custom toolbar by
selecting it in the list and entering a new name here.
Button size — Select the display size for the buttons on the toolbars
to either Small or Large.
Style — Select your preferred style for the user interface from
Classic, Shaded Grey, and Glass. The default style is Shaded Grey.
When you change to a different style, FeatureCAM asks you if you
want to change the background color scheme to one that matches.
Classic:

Shaded Grey:
Glass:
The Glass style is available only in Windows Vista and later.

Commands tab
Use the Commands tab of the Customize Toolbars dialog (see page
23) to add buttons to toolbars.
To add a button to a toolbar:

1 Display (see page 24) the toolbar you want to update.
2 On the Commands tab, select the category that the button
belongs to in the Categories list.
The buttons belonging to the category are displayed in the
Buttons section.
3 Select a button icon in the Buttons section to see the Description
of the button.
4 Drag the button icon from the Buttons section and position it in
the toolbar. The button is added to the toolbar.
To remove a button from a toolbar:
1 Display (see page 24) the toolbar you want to update.
2 Open the Customize Toolbars dialog on either the Toolbars or
Commands tab.
3 Drag-and-drop the button you want to remove. The button is
removed from the toolbar.
To revert to the default buttons on a toolbar, select the toolbar
name on the Toolbars tab (see page 24) and click the Reset Selected
button.

Creating toolbar buttons for macros
Some macros, such as the SelectHeight.bas and HoleRecog.bas macros
do not have buttons in FeatureCAM. To use a macro you must
create a custom toolbar button, add it to a toolbar, then assign the
macro to the button.
For example, the macro SelectHeight.bas does not have a button.
You need to create a button to use the macro.
To create a button for a macro:
1 Ensure the macro is selected in the Add-ins dialog:
a If the Customize Toolbars dialog is displayed, click Cancel to
close it.
b Select Options > Add-Ins to display the Macro Add-ins dialog.
c In the Add-In Files list in the Macro Add-ins dialog, select the
macro.
2 Select View > Toolbars to display the Customize Toolbars dialog.
3 On the Commands tab, select Macros from the Categories list.
4 Click and drag the Custom toolbar button (the hammer symbol)
onto the toolbar where you want it to appear.
5 Assign the macro to the button (see page 29).

Assigning a macro to a custom toolbar button
Use the Macro Toolbar Button dialog to assign a macro add-in to a
custom toolbar button (see page 28).
To assign a macro add-in to a custom toolbar button:

1 Load the add-in (see page 145) you want to assign to the button.
2 Right-click a custom toolbar button. The Macro Toolbar Button
The dialog is also displayed when you click a custom toolbar

button that does not have a macro add-in assigned to it
3 In the Macro name list, select the add-in.
4 Select a button icon from the Available icons.
5 Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. The macro is
executed when you click the custom toolbar button.
Misc. tab
You can use the Misc tab of the Customize Toolbars dialog (see page
23) to control the display of other User Interface items.
Toolbox — Select this option to display the Toolbox (it is displayed

by default). Deselect it to hide the Toolbox.

Buttons size — This controls the display of the buttons in the Steps
Toolbox.
Assistance Bar — Select this option to display the Assistance Bar (it
is displayed by default). Deselect it to hide the Assistance Bar.
Status Bar — Select this option to display the Status Bar (it is
displayed by default). Deselect Status Bar to hide the Status Bar.
Keyboard Shortcuts tab

Use the Keyboard Shortcuts tab of the Customize Toolbars dialog
(see page 23) to set keyboard shortcuts for FeatureCAM commands.
To set a new shortcut key:

1 Select a category from the Categories list.
2 Select a command from the Commands list.
If the command already has a shortcut, it is listed under Current
keys.
3 To assign a new key, select the Press new shortcut key field and
press the keys that you want to use as the shortcut.
Press the keys on the keyboard, for example, press and

hold down the Alt key and press the N key; do not type ALT
+ N.
A warning displays if the shortcut you entered is already

assigned to a command.
4 Click the Assign button to save the new shortcut.

If you click Assign after receiving a warning that the
shortcut is already assigned to a command, the shortcut is
removed from the existing command and assigned to the
new command.
Remove — Click this button to remove the shortcut assigned to the
selected command.
Reset All — Click this button to reset all shortcuts to the FeatureCAM
defaults.
Document — Click this button to open a *.txt file, containing a list of
the current shortcuts, in your text editor. You can print or save this
file.
Customizing toolbars
To customize an existing toolbar:
1 Select View > Toolbars from the menu.
2 In the Customize Toolbars dialog (Toolbars tab), select the check
box next to the toolbar that you want to modify.
3 Click the Commands tab.
a Select the command category.

b Drag the button from the Buttons frame to a location on your
toolbar.
1 Repeat Step 3 until you have added all necessary commands.
2 Click OK.

If you make a mistake, and want to revert to default settings,
open the Customize Toolbars dialog again, select the toolbar,
and click the Reset Selected button.
To create your own toolbar:

1 Select View > Toolbars from the menu.
2 In the Customize Toolbars dialog, click the New button on the
Toolbars tab.
3 In the New Toolbar dialog, enter the name for your toolbar, and
click OK.
A new empty toolbar is created.

4 Follow Steps 3 - 5 in the procedure above to add commands to
your toolbar.
Status bar
The Status bar shows your current program status.
You may find it useful while drawing or simulating the part. The
status bar uses a text display for:
 Cursor coordinates during geometry creation
 The name of the object you are snapping to, for example Point
'pt1'
 The coordinate plane of the current view (XY, XZ, or YZ)
 Your drawing units (Inch or Millimeter)
 The name of the current layer. Click the name to change to a
different layer, or open the Layers dialog.
 The name of the current UCS. Click the name to select a different
UCS.
 The name of the current setup. Click the name to select a
different setup.
 The name of the current CNC. Click the name to display the Post
Options (see page 1857) dialog.

 The name of the current MD file. Click the name to display the
Setup - Simulation information (see page 219) dialog.
 The name of the current tool crib. Click the name to select a
different tool crib.
 The number of cores being used. Click to open the Core Usage
(see page 33) dialog and change the number of cores used.
 Simulation information (tools, feeds/speeds, elapsed time)
The Status bar is not a toolbar and you cannot dock it. It forms the
bottom part of the FeatureCAM window and displays information
about the computer, the state of the program, or information about
what you are doing. You can turn its display on or off by selecting
View > Toolbars and selecting/deselecting Status Bar on the Misc.
tab.
Core usage (3D)

FeatureCAM can use multiple core or multiple processor PCs.
This multi-threading feature is available for the following 3D
toolpath strategies:
 Parallel roughing and finishing
 Z-level roughing and finishing, and interleave
 3D spiral
Toolpath application to stock models is multithreaded.
Our tests have found typical improvements for two cores of between
10% and 50% for toolpath creation time, with an average of about
23%.
The number of cores that you are currently using is displayed at the
end of the Status bar:
Click this area to open the Core Usage dialog:

FeatureCAM uses the maximum number of cores by default, but you
can limit the number of cores, if you want to use other cores for
operations outside FeatureCAM.
Keyboard shortcuts
You can use the keyboard to navigate around the menus. To do
this, press and hold the Alt key, and then press the letters on your
keyboard that correspond to the letters underlined on the Menu bar
and in the menu options. For example, to rotate your part, press
and hold the Alt key, press the V key for the View menu, then press
the V key again for Viewing Modes, then press the R key for Rotate.
Typically, use the Ctrl-key shortcuts for standard Windows
commands (Ctrl+N to create a new file; Ctrl+S to save a file), and
the Alt-key shortcuts to execute FeatureCAM-specific commands
(Alt+R to refresh the view).
Key sequence Action

Alt+click-and-drag on any Move button around in toolbar.
toolbar button
Alt+1 (2,3,4) User View 1 (2,3,4)
Alt+ Step simulation forward one step.
Alt+ Step simulation backward one step.
Alt+Enter Properties
Alt+F1 Centerline simulation.
Alt+F2 Play/pause simulation.
Alt+F3 Single-step simulation.
Alt+L Last view.
Alt+R Refresh
Alt+Shift+V Save view.
Ctrl+click a column of any Activates the second level of sorting.
list box that does sorting
Ctrl+click a viewing mode Stay in that viewing mode.
button
Ctrl+click the 3D Simulation Run 3D simulation in hidden line mode
button. Release key and and do continuous looping.
click the Play button.

Key sequence Action
Ctrl+click Fast Forward to Stop the simulation when it encounters
End the next rapid (in addition to the next
operation).
Ctrl+click the Machine Run machine simulation in hidden line
Simulation button. mode and do continuous looping.
Release key and click the
Play button.
Crtl+0 Bottom view
Ctrl+1 Isometric view
Ctrl+2 Front view
Ctrl+3 Isometric 2 view
Ctrl+4 Left view
Ctrl+5 Top view
Ctrl+6 Right view
Ctrl+8 Back view
Ctrl+A Select all.
Ctrl+C Copy
Ctrl+E Center selected.
Ctrl+F Find (text in a text window). The cursor
must be in a text window.
Ctrl+H Replace (text in a text window). The
cursor must be in a text window.
Ctrl+J Hide selected
Ctrl+K Hide unselected
Ctrl+L Center all.
Ctrl+N New file
Ctrl+O Open file
Ctrl+P Print
Ctrl+R Display the New Feature wizard.
Ctrl+S Save file
Ctrl+V Paste

Key sequence Action
Ctrl+X Cut
Ctrl+Y Redo
Ctrl+Z Undo
Ctrl+click the Pick Curve Causes the warp status for that dialog
button to toggle.
Ctrl+click the Pick Curve Toggles between simulation of the

button while a feature is selection feature and the entire Setup.
selected
Ctrl+click the Play Run simulation in hidden line mode.

button
Hold Ctrl while toolpath is Temporarily turns off Toolpath
being computed Computation Minimization. Toolpaths
are recomputed for all features even if
that feature did not change.
Ctrl+Alt+click-and-drag on Duplicate and move button around in
any toolbar button toolbar.
Ctrl+Shift+click the 3D Continuous loop simulation for 3D
Simulation button. simulation.
Release keys and click the
Play button.
Ctrl+Shift+click the Machine Continuous loop simulation for machine
Simulation button. simulation.
Release keys and click the
Play button.
Ctrl+Shift+A Shade selected.
Ctrl+Shift+C Unshade all.
Ctrl+Shift+N Unshade selected.
Ctrl+Shift+P Toggles perspective.
Delete Delete the selected object
Double-click a simulation Activate that simulation without clicking
button the play button.
Esc Stop current simulation.

F1 Context-sensitive help.

Key sequence Action
Middle-click-and-drag in the Performs viewing based on the current
graphics window viewing mode.
The mouse wheel-click-and-drag also
performs this function.
Mouse scroll wheel Zoom
Shift+click an edge when Selects all edges of the face and adds
filleting them to the list.
Shift+click the NC Code tab Show ACL instead of NC code.
Shift+click while clipping Removes the entire picked region
when Multiple Region is On instead of to the nearest intersection.
Shift+right-click in graphics Dynamic viewing using current view
window mode.
Shift+click the Show button Displays a dialog that shows the
in the SCL dialog attributes of the model selected in SCL
dialog.
Viewing
There are several ways to control your view of objects in the
graphics window (see page 1):
Show menu (see page 37)
Hide menu (see page 39)
View menu (see page 40)
Principle View menu (see page 41)
User views (see page 42)
Entities (see page 43)
Viewing options (see page 44)
Motion controller support (see page 53)
Refreshing the view (see page 54)
Show menu
Show functions help control what is displayed. This is useful as you
place and model intricate features in a complex part.

You access the show functions by selecting View > Show from the
menu or using the Show Menu button on the Advanced toolbar:
Show All — Use this menu option to show everything in the part
model.
Show All Geometry — Use this menu option to show all geometry
(points, lines, arcs, and circles).
Show All Dimensions — Use this menu option to show all dimension
information added with the Dimension tools (see page 290).
Show All Curves — Use this menu option to show all curves (see
page 318).
Show All Surfaces — Use this menu option to show all surfaces
(available only in FeatureCAM 3D).
Surfaces and features from surfaces are different.

Show All Features — Use this menu option to show all features.
Show All Solids — Use this menu option to show all solids (see page
445).
Show All Vertical Surfaces — Use this menu option to show the
vertical surfaces in the model. This is useful for identifying surfaces
that are part of 2.5D features like holes or pockets contained in a
surface or solid model.
Show Stock — Use this menu option to show the stock outline.
Show Current UCS — Use this menu option to show the current UCS
(see page 109) icon.
Show Current Setup — Use this menu option to show only the
features and drawing elements that are in the current Setup.
Show Selected — Use this menu option to show only the selected
elements.

Layers (see page 299)
Change layer (see page 303)
Hide menu
Hide controls what is displayed at any given time. This is useful as
you place and model intricate features in a complex part. Besides
the display factors, you can’t snap, select or build curves from
hidden entities. The hide functions are not exclusive. You can click
different buttons sequentially, hiding different entities until only the
ones you want are still in view.
You access the hide functions by selecting View > Hide from the
menu or using the Hide Menu button on the Advanced toolbar:
Hide All — Use this menu option to hide all geometry, curves,
features. The stock and axis icon remain visible. A common
procedure is to Hide All, then Show only one type of entity, for
example features.
Hide All Geometry — Use this menu option to hide all geometry.
Other entities remain visible.
Hide All Dimensions — Use this menu option to hide all dimension
information added with the FeatureCAM Dimension tools (see page
290).
Hide All Curves — Use this menu option to hide all curves (see page
318). Other entities remain visible.
Hide All Surfaces — Use this menu option to hide all surfaces in the
part model. Only available in the 3D version.
Hide All Features — Use this menu option to hide all features.
Hide All Points — Use this menu option to hide all points.

Hide All Nonvertical Surfaces — Use this menu option to hide all
surfaces that are not vertical relative to the current setup. This is
helpful if you want to isolate the surfaces that are part of 2.5D
features in a surface or solid model.
Hide All Solids — Use this menu option to hide all of the solid
models.
Hide Stock — Use this menu option to hide the stock (see page 205)
outline. All other entities remain visible.
Hide Current UCS — Use this menu option to hide the current user
coordinate system.
Hide Current Setup — Use this menu option to hide the axis of the
current Setup. All other entities remain visible.
Hide Selected — Use this menu option to hide all selected entities.
Non selected entities are still visible.
Hide Unselected — Use this menu option to hide all entities other
than the selected ones.
View menu
View changes the way you interact with the view of the part.
Selecting any of the options from the View menu puts you in view
mode. Your cursor shows the same icon as the viewing mode you
selected. Viewing is performed interactively in FeatureCAM with the
mouse.
You access the view functions by selecting View > Viewing Modes
from the menu or using the View Menu button on the Standard
toolbar:
Click and hold the mouse button, then move the mouse. Up or to
the right changes the drawing one way, zooming or rotating
clockwise for example. Down or to the left has the opposite effect.

Center All — Use this menu option to change to a complete view of
the part, centering it in the graphics window. The view of the part
automatically scales to fit in the window.
Center Selected — Use this menu option to center the entities you
have selected in the graphics window. The view of the part is
automatically scaled to fill the window with the selected items. The
angle of view is not changed.
Center Selected Point — Use this menu option to center the view
about the last location you selected in the graphics window.
Principal View menu

Principal View changes the main view to one of several commonly
used views.
You access the Principal View functions by selecting View > Principal
Views from the menu or using the Principal View Menu button on the
Standard toolbar:
Isometric — Use this menu option to change the view to a three

quarter view of the part showing the top and two sides with the
current UCS near the bottom of the view area.
Isometric 2, Isometric 3, Isometric 4 — Alternative isometric views
The following example shows all four isometric views:
Isometric: Isometric 2:

Isometric 3: Isometric 4:
Top — Use this menu option to change to a view of the part from
the top only. Useful for drawing geometry, but harder to see the
wireframe model of the part.
Bottom — Use this menu option to change the view to the bottom of
the part. No sides of the part are visible from this perspective.
Front — Use this menu option to change to a view of the part from
the front with no other surfaces visible.
Back — Use this menu option to change to a view of the part from
the back with no other surfaces visible.
Left — Use this menu option to change to a view of the part from
the left side with no other surfaces visible.
Right — Use this menu option to change to a view of the part from
the right side with no other surfaces visible.
Selecting View > Principle Views from the menu gives you some
extra options:
Perspective — If selected, the view is a perspective view. If
deselected, the view is an orthographic view.
As on UCS — Use this menu option to change your view to that of
the current UCS.
As on setup — If selected, the view is relative to the current Setup.
If deselected, the view is relative to the world coordinate system.
As on STOCK — Use this menu option to change your view to that
relative to the Stock.
User views
The User Views (View 1, View 2, View 3, and View 4) store various
views of your model. When you select View > User Views > Save
View, the current view is saved under the next available view
number. Select one of these views to return to this view.

Entities
Another useful viewing tool in the View menu is Entities. Select
Entities in the View menu to open the Entities dialog.
All geometry, curves, stock, features, and surfaces are listed. You
can sort the list by clicking one of the title buttons. This makes it
easy to select by layers, construction type or category of entity.
Select an item or multiple items with ctrl+click and then click a
button to perform one of the following actions:
Close — Click this button to exit the dialog.
Show — Click this button to display the selected entities in the
graphics window.
Hide — Click this button to remove the selected entities from the
display in the graphics window.
Delete — Click this button to remove the selected entities from the
part file.
Rename — This button is available only for individual selections and
opens the Rename Object dialog where you can enter a New Name
for the entity.
Properties — This button is available only for some kinds of entity
and for individual selections. The properties dialog that opens
depends on the kind of entity. For example, features open the
Help — Click this button to open this help page.

Viewing options
As well as the Windows settings, you can control the quality of your
part display in FeatureCAM after you have installed it. You have to
balance the detail quality against the increased time it takes to
generate more detail. Set these options in the Viewing Options
dialog, accessed through Options > Viewing in the menu.
The Viewing Options dialog has three tabs:

General (see page 44)
Dynamic (see page 46)
Machine (see page 49)
General tab

These are the options on the General tab:
Curve fineness — This option adjusts the length of line segments for
displaying curves. The smaller the line segments, the smoother the
curve appears.
With small Curve fineness values, more data is processed so the
graphical performance slows down. If you increase the fineness
value, graphical performance is improved but the display quality
suffers, producing jagged, more notched curve representations.
Because it is easy to modify this value, you can use different
settings at different stages of development.
Surface fineness — This option adjusts the area of flat polygons
(plane segments) for displaying a surface.
FeatureCAM uses surfaces to display all features and stock models.
The smaller the area of the polygons used to display a surface, the
smoother the surface appears. There are separate surface fineness
values for the shaded and wireframe representations of the
surfaces.
With small Surface fineness values, more data is processed, so the
graphical performance slows down. If you increase the fineness
value, graphical performance is improved, but the display quality
suffers, producing more faceted, rougher surface representations.
Because it is easy to modify this value, you can use different
settings at different stages of development.
Show surface boundaries only — With this option selected, surfaces
are displayed as only their outer boundaries and trimmed loops. No
additional lines are drawn in the interior of the surface. This option
makes the display of larger models much faster.
Show feature dynamic highlight — When this option is selected,
moving the cursor over an object's name in the Part View highlights
the object in the graphics window.
View animation — This option provides smooth, animated transitions
between principal views. If you select View animation, the part
rotates smoothly between two principal views. If you deselect it, the
view changes abruptly to the new view.
Selection radius — This option specifies the radius (in pixels) of the
hit area for a selection pick. If this number is set small, then you
must select very close to an object to select it. If it is set large, then
picking may be more unpredictable.
Point size — Enter a Point size to specify the size of geometry point
objects in the graphics window.
Snapping Point Size — Specify the size of snapping grid points in the
graphics window.

Dimension text size — This setting controls the size of the dimension
text and the dimension (see page 290) arrow heads. There are
separate settings for English (inch) and Metric (mm) parts. When
the part is scaled, the text and arrows are scaled along with the
drawing.
Dynamic tab
These are the options on the Dynamic tab:

Viewing Mode on startup — Set the default viewing mode when
FeatureCAM first opens. For example, if you select Trackball, the
next time FeatureCAM starts up, the viewing mode is Trackball.
All the viewing modes are available, plus an option called Mode from
Last Session. This option keeps track of the viewing mode last set
before FeatureCAM was closed, and uses that viewing mode the
next time FeatureCAM starts up. For example, if the option is set to
Mode from Last Session, and you had set the viewing mode to Rotate
before you closed FeatureCAM, Rotate is the viewing mode that is
set in the toolbar the next time you open FeatureCAM.
Middle mouse button behavior — Set the viewing mode for the
middle mouse button.
You can set a specific viewing mode such as Trackball, Rotate, Pan,
Zoom, Pan, and Zoom, and so on, or choose the Current Viewing
Mode option that allows the middle mouse button (along with key
combinations) to perform the viewing mode that is currently set in
the toolbar.
Middle mouse button with Shift — Set the viewing mode for the
middle mouse button, when the Shift key is held down.

the toolbar.
Middle mouse button with Ctrl — Set the viewing mode for the middle
mouse button, when the Ctrl key is held down.
the toolbar.
Middle mouse button with Ctrl+Shift — Set the viewing mode for the
middle mouse button, when the Ctrl and Shift keys are held down.
the toolbar.
Reverse scroll wheel zoom
This option in the Dynamic Viewing Options (see page 48) tab
reverses the association of direction of the scroll wheel with the
zoom direction.
Reset Settings
In the Dynamic Viewing Options tab, you can reset the settings to
either the FeatureCAM or PowerMILL defaults:
FeatureCAM PowerMILL
Viewing Mode on Pan and zoom Trackball
startup
Middle mouse button Current Viewing Mode Trackball
behavior
Middle mouse button Pan and Zoom Pan
with Shift
Middle mouse button Rotate PowerMILL Pan &
with Ctrl Zoom
Middle mouse button Zoom Box Zoom
with Ctrl+Shift

Setting up dynamic viewing options
To customize the dynamic viewing options:
1 Select Options > Viewing from the menu.
2 In the Viewing Options dialog, click the Dynamic tab.
3 Customize the viewing mode used on startup.
All standard viewing modes are available as options, plus an
option called Mode from Last Session. This option keeps track of
the viewing mode last set before FeatureCAM was closed, and
uses that viewing mode the next time FeatureCAM starts up.
4 Customize the default behavior for the middle mouse button.
You can set the behavior to be specific viewing modes such as
Trackball, Rotate, Pan, Zoom, Pan and Zoom, or choose the
Current Viewing Choice option that allows the middle mouse
button (along with key combinations) to perform the viewing
mode that is currently set in the toolbar.
If you want to reverse the association of direction of the scroll
wheel with the zoom direction, select the Reverse Scroll Wheel
Zoom option.
5 Click OK.
To revert to default FeatureCAM settings:

2 In the Viewing Options dialog, click the Dynamic Viewing Options
tab.
3 Click the Reset Settings to FeatureCAM button.
To revert to default PowerMILL settings:

2 In the Viewing Options dialog, click the Dynamic Viewing Options
tab.
3 Click the Reset Settings to PowerMILL button.

Machine tab
These are the options on the Machine tab:

Milling — Select the type of milling machine from Vertical and
Horizontal, to improve viewing during machine simulation and tool
previews.
Turning — Select the type of turning machine from Slant bed lathe
and Vertical turret lathe, to improve viewing during machine
simulation and tool previews.
Shading options
Use the Shading Options dialog to control how surfaces are shaded.

To display the Shading Options dialog, select the Options > Surface
Shading menu option.
For shading, we recommended the following procedure:

1 By default deselect Depth Cue.
2 Adjust the Ambient material parameter to lighten or darken the
shading.
3 If you are shading a model with many flat surfaces, select Depth
Cue.
4 If Depth Cue is selected, adjust the k and linear parameters to
lighten or darken the image.
Lighting
Two lights — Select this option to use light from two separate
sources for more even lighting effects.
The lighting model has two different modes. With Depth Cue turned
off, the lighting model uses light vectors (or directions). In this
mode, the shading is not affected by the position of the light, but
rather only the direction of the light. In this case you can specify
the two light vectors as Light vector 1 and Light vector 2.

Depth cue — Select this option to use lighting positions for the
lighting model. Both the lighting direction and distance from the
surface to the light affect the shading of a surface. In this case you
can specify the two light vectors as Light position 1 and Light
position 2. The amount that the light is diminished is determined by
the following formula:
1/(k + linear * Distance of surface to light)
Both k and linear variables are available for you to alter. Setting k or
linear to larger values darkens the view.
Display
The shading performed by FeatureCAM translates surfaces into
triangles for shading.
Smooth shading — Select this option to indicate that the shading of
the triangles should be blended. If it is deselected, the individual
triangles are visible.
Smooth line — Select this option to smooth out the jagged edges of
lines. This applies to all line drawings including toolpaths.
This option can be time-consuming.

Backfaces removed — Select this option to hide surfaces whose
normals point into the screen. This option improves shading speeds
for solid models. If portions of the model are visibly missing, turn
this option off.
Backface lighting — Select this option to duplicate the light vectors
in back of the model (for diffused lighting). This option applies when
Depth cue is deselected.
Backface highlight — Select this option to duplicate the highlighting
effects for the duplicate lights. This option applies when Depth cue is
deselected.
Z-buffer — Select this option to sort surfaces by their depth. We
recommend that you keep this setting selected.

Z-buffer lines — Select this option to enable the lines to be sorted
along with the surfaces. This enables surfaces to occlude lines that
are positioned behind. This option is provided for viewing toolpaths
in conjunction with shaded surfaces.
Use graphics hardware — Select this option to try to use your

graphics card to speed up shading. Many graphics cards are not
reliable for shading. If your shading looks bad or performs slowly,
turn off this setting.
Dither — Select this option to smooth the shading across the part.
When deselected, discrete bands of shading are often evident.
Z-buffer rubberband — Select this option to Z-buffer rubberband
geometry. Rubberband geometry are the forms of geometry that
are interactively updated, such as when you drag a circle radius.
Anti-alias tool window — You may need to disable this option if your
graphics card or driver cannot support the anti-aliasing well.
Material
Transparent — Select this option to enable the Opacity option.
Opacity — Enter how opaque the surface is from 0 (transparent) to 1
(opaque).
Shininess — Enter how a highlight spreads from 0 (tight) to 100
(broad).
Ambient — Enter the amount of light present in the shading process
besides the two light settings. This is a cumulative setting with
Ambient set in the Lighting section.
Diffuse — Enter how the light spreads in the area occupied by the
surface. This setting combines with the same setting in Lighting to
determine the overall diffusing effect.
Specular — Enter the amount of specular light reflection from 0 (no
specular reflection) to 1 (full specular reflection).

Stock
Shade stock by default — Select this option to show the stock as
shaded by default and enter a Stock Opacity between 0 (0% shaded)
and 1 (100% shaded).
This is an example part with Shade stock by default deselected:
And with Shade stock by default selected with a Stock Opacity of 0.3
(30%):
Motion controller support

FeatureCAM supports advanced motion controllers from
http://3dconnexion.com (http://3dconnexion.com). Supported
controllers are the SpaceBall, SpaceMouse and SpaceTraveler.
When you use one of these controllers you can use one hand for
your mouse and the other hand for viewing, enabling more efficient
control of FeatureCAM.

How to Use 3Dconnexion Devices with FeatureCAM
The controller from 3Dconnexion comes with a CD that contains a
device driver and simple test programs. Install the CD and use the
test programs to make sure that your controller is installed properly
and to make sure that you've got the idea of how to use the
controller. After that, run FeatureCAM and you'll be able to control
the view in FeatureCAM in exactly the same way as the test
programs.
Refreshing the view

When you zoom out, FeatureCAM simplifies the visual
representation of the geometry in the graphics window to improve
performance. For example, arcs, fillets, and circles are replaced with
straight lines.
You can refresh the view to be suitable for the current zoom factor.
Use one of the following methods to refresh the view:
 Select View > Refresh from the menu.
 Press the ALT + R keys.
Smart dialogs
To provide you with more space in the graphics window,
FeatureCAM automatically minimizes some dialogs by default. For
example, the Select Stock Curve dialog minimizes into a small title
bar when you click the Pick Curve button.
When the dialog is minimized, the cursor shape changes to . This

indicates you need to select an object in the graphics window. When
you select the object, the dialog is restored. If you want to restore
the dialog without making a selection, click the button in the
small title bar.
To disable auto-minimization, deselect Options > Warp Dialogs

in the menu.
Managing your settings

You can customize the toolbars, view options, colors, and so on, but
your changes last only for the duration of the current session,
unless you instruct FeatureCAM to save them.
You can choose to save your changes automatically. To do this,
select Options > Save on Exit from the menu.

If you don't want to save your changes every time you exit the
program, deselect the Save on Exit option. Now you can choose
Options > Save Settings Now to save the modified configuration.
FeatureCAM uses two .ini files to store your settings:
 ezfm_ui.ini contains toolbars, dialog locations, graphics settings,
colors, and other user settings.
 ezfm_mfg.ini contains manufacturing defaults and .cfg settings.
The ezfm_mfg.ini file contains default values for both inch and metric
attributes. For example, there is an entry for zrapid in inches and
also an entry for zrapid_mm in mm. In general, the name for the
metric attributes is the same as the inch name, with a suffix of
_mm.
If you want to replace the current settings with the previously saved
settings, select Options > Reload Settings from the menu.
You can make a backup copy of the .ini files before you save any
changes; this way you can revert to the default settings if
something goes wrong. Alternatively, you can delete the .ini files;
when you restart FeatureCAM, these files are recreated
automatically with the default settings.
Enabling wizards
You can switch some FeatureCAM wizards on and off.
New Part Document wizard

To turn the New Part Document wizard off, restart FeatureCAM, and
deselect Show this dialog on program start.
To turn the New Part Document wizard back on, restart FeatureCAM,
select File > Part Wizard from the menu, and select Show this dialog
on program start.
Stock wizard
To turn the Stock wizard on/off:
1 Select File > New from the menu.
2 In the New Part Document dialog, for the Initial stock dialog
option, select:
Wizard — Select this option to show the Stock wizard next. This is
a default option.
Properties — Select this option to show the stock Properties
dialog next. This dialog presents the pages of the Stock wizard in
a more concise form.

None — Select this option and FeatureCAM does not ask you to
set up the stock. You must select the Stock step from the
Steps panel.
3 Click OK.
Selecting graphical objects

Many commands require you to select objects in the graphics
window.
There are two selection modes, which you can access from the
Standard toolbar:
 Select
 Select Partial
 Drag Select
Select
To select an object you can:
 Click the left mouse button on an object. This selects that object
(by turning it red) and deselects any other object.
 Hold down the SHIFT key and click the left mouse button on an
object. This adds that object to the selected set of objects. This
method allows you to select more than one object.
 Click and drag a box around the objects you want to select. This
method is called box select. As you drag the mouse, a green box
is displayed in the graphics window.
All objects that are completely encompassed in the box are

selected. If you hold down the SHIFT key while selecting, the
objects are added to the selected set of objects.

Select Partial
This method enables you to box select multiple objects without fully
enclosing them.
In the example below, all three features are selected:
Drag Select
This method enables you to select multiple entities by dragging the
mouse pointer across them.
This example part contains different colored faces and geometry:
Other selection methods do not work well for this part.

For example, if you use the Select by Color/Type (see page 59)
dialog, you can select either the green lines or the gray lines, but
not both at the same time:

If you use the Select button for a box selection of lines in a front
view, you cannot select the lines without selecting some of the
surfaces too:
Using the new Drag Select option, you can drag the mouse pointer
over the lines to the left of the stock to select them all:
Drag Select can save time when selecting adjacent surfaces. With
the standard Select mode, to select adjacent surfaces, you must use
a box-select or Ctrl+click each surface. With Drag Select, just move
the mouse pointer over adjacent surfaces. You can hold down the
Ctrl key with Drag Select to add non-adjacent surfaces to the
selection, or after you have released the mouse button, for example
to change the view of the part.

Select by Color/Type
Select Edit > Select by Color/Type from the menu to open the Select
by Color/Type dialog:
Use one or more of the options to control which entities are

selected:
Color — To select entities of a particular color, select the color in the
menu.
Entity Type — To select all entities of a particular type, select the
type in the menu.
Hole Depth — To select all holes of a particular depth, first select a
type of hole in the Entity Type menu, then enter the Hole Depth
Value, and a Tolerance for how close to the Value the depth must be.
Hole Diameter — To select all holes of a particular depth, first select
a type of hole in the Entity Type menu, then enter the Hole Diameter
Value and a Tolerance for how close to the Value the diameter must
be.
Select an entity in your part before opening the dialog to

pre-populate the fields.
Selecting from within dialogs

Many commands require you to select curves, surfaces, or solids
using a dialog containing an interface similar to this one with
buttons and a list field:

— Click this button to add the entity or entities selected in the
graphics window to the list.
— Click this button to remove the entity selected in the list.
— Click this button to pick curve or geometry from the graphics

window.
— Click this button to pick surface from the graphics window.
— Click this button to pick solid from the graphics window.
To add an entity to the list, either:

 Select an entity in the graphics window and click the Add
button.
 Click the Pick button and then select the entity in the graphics
window.
If you select the entity before opening the selection dialog,

the entity is already listed.
To remove an entity from the list, select it by clicking its name and
click the Remove button.
Click Next or OK to continue.

New part
When you open FeatureCAM, the New Part Document Wizard (see
page 61) is displayed, which enables you to specify the type of part
file and the shape of the stock. While running FeatureCAM you can
have more than one part file open simultaneously.
Creating a new part

Use one of the following methods to display the New Part Document
(see page 63) dialog:
 Select File > New from the menu.
 Click New Part Document in the Standard toolbar (see page

11).
 Press the Ctrl + N keys.
When you have created a part, you can define the Stock (see page
205).
New Part Document Wizard

The New Part Document Wizard is displayed when you open
FeatureCAM, or when you close all open documents.
You can use the New Part Document Wizard to create a new file or
open an existing file.
To create a new file:

1 Select New file and click Next.
2 On the next page, select the kind of part that you want to make
from:
 Turn/Mill

 Vertical Mill/Turn
 Milling Setup
 Wire EDM Setup
 Multiple Fixture
 Tombstone Fixture
 Simulation Machine Design
The options available depend on which module(s) you have

purchased.
3 Select the Unit of Measure.
4 Click Finish.
The Stock Wizard (see page 205) is displayed.
To open an existing file:
1 Select Open an existing file and click Next.
3 Select the file you want to open and click Open.
If you do not want to see this wizard again, deselect Show this
dialog on program start.
If you want to show the wizard again, select File > Part Wizard from
the menu.
You can create a new file without using the Wizard (see page 61).

New Part Document dialog
You use the New Part Document dialog to begin a new part if you are
not using the wizard (see page 61).
Use one of the following methods to display the New Part Document
(see page 63) dialog:
 Select File > New from the menu.
 Click New Part Document in the Standard toolbar.

 Press the Ctrl + N keys.
To create a new part document:
1 Select the Type of your part from:
 Turning Setup (TURN (see page 10)) for 2-axis turned parts.
This is only the type of the first setup of your part. Your part
can contain multiple setups and these setups can mix different
manufacturing techniques.
 Turn/Mill (TURNMILL (see page 10)) for turning that supports
live tooling.

 Vertical Mill/Turn (TURNMILL (see page 10), MTT (see page
10), and 5AP (see page 10)) for a vertical mill/turn machine.
This creates two Setups automatically, Setup1 is a turning
Setup and Setup2 is a milling Setup.
 Milling Setup (25D (see page 10)) for 2.5D or 3D milled parts.
Select this type for 5-axis positioning as well. This is only the
type of your first setup.
 Wire EDM Setup (WIRE (see page 10)) for a 2-axis or 4-axis
wire EDM part.
 Multiple Fixture (see page 1872) for laying out multiple parts
on the table. You can mix different milled parts for multiple
part manufacturing.
 Tombstone Fixture (TOMB (see page 10)) for a Tombstone
Machining (see page 1885) part.
 Simulation Machine Design (MSIM (see page 10)) for a Machine
Design document. Use this document to create a machine tool
model for simulation.
These options are limited by the FeatureCAM modules you

have purchased.
2 Select the Unit of Measure you will use to model your part from:
 Inch
 Millimeter
See System units (see page 64) for more information.
3 Select how you would like to set up your stock. Select from:
 Wizard — Select this option to open the Stock wizard (see
page 205) next. This option is best for novice users.
 Properties — Select this option to open the Stock Properties
(see page 220) dialog next. This dialog presents the pages of
the stock wizard in a concise form.
 None — Select this option if you want to set up the stock later
using the Stock Properties (see page 220) dialog.
4 Click OK.
System units
You choose dimension units when you create a new part file. You
can choose from either Inch or Millimeter. If you wish to change the
dimension units for new parts later, select Options > File Options. If
you always produce parts in the same units, you can turn off the
automatic display associated with a new file by deselecting Always
ask when a new document is created.

Inch units set FeatureCAM to size the part, its features, and the
tools in inches and fractions (decimal display) of inches. All
measurements are in inches.
Millimeter units set FeatureCAM to size the part, its features, and
the tools in millimeters. There is no option for setting larger metric
units as the default.
Thumbnail pictures
When you select a part in the Open dialog, a preview image is
displayed.
The image that is displayed depends on the options in the Save

Options (see page 67) dialog. The image updates each time you
save the part unless you specify a permanent image (see page 71)
to store in the file.

Saving your work
You cannot save a FeatureCAM file unless you have a dongle.
Saving your part file to disk and saving part documentation and part
program are separate operations.
Saving a part file (see page 66)
Save options (see page 67)
Saving an NC part program (see page 1567)
Part documentation (see page 70)
Export (see page 102)
Saving a part file

You can’t save a FeatureCAM file unless you have a dongle. To save
a FeatureCAM part file for the first time:
1 Select File > Save As from the menu to display the Save As
dialog.
2 Navigate to where you want to save the file.
3 Enter a File name.
4 From the Save as type list, select FM Documents (*.fm) to
automatically give the filename a suffix of .fm, or select All Files
(*.*) to enter a suffix manually. You add any file extension to the
end of the name, but the file is saved in FeatureCAM format.
5 Click Save to save the file.

Save Options
Select File > Save Options from the menu to display the Save Options
dialog.
Create backup copy — Select this option to save a number of

previous versions of your part as you work. Enter the Number of
copies to keep and set the Backup location. When you save a file, the
previous version(s) are saved to disk using the name, but prefixed
with Backup of. The latest version of the file is always saved using
the name of your FeatureCAM part.
Compress file — Select this option to reduce the size of the
FeatureCAM files on disk.
Compressed files cannot be read into earlier versions of

FeatureCAM.
Save preview picture in file — Select this option to store an image of
the part in the file. This image is displayed in the Open (see page
65) dialog.
Always save as 32-bit — Select this option to ensure maximum
compatibility between Windows Operating Systems. A file saved as
64-bit can be opened only with a 64-bit version of FeatureCAM. This
option is available only in 64-bit FeatureCAM.
Save computed toolpath — For certain parts, generating toolpaths
can be time-consuming and you may want to save them for the
next time you open a part. The setting of Save computed toolpath
controls the default behavior for saving toolpaths. Select from
Always save, Never save, or Ask me to be prompted each time you
save a part. The toolpath is saved as an .fmp file.

This is different than saving the NC text file that the NC
machine reads. Instead you are saving the FeatureCAM
internal toolpath representation.
If you upgrade to a newer version of FeatureCAM, the

toolpath is disregarded and recomputed.
OK — Click the OK button to save your settings and close the
dialog.
Cancel — Click the Cancel button to close the dialog without saving
any changes.
Help — Click the Help button to open this Help topic.
Send Part Files dialog

To display the Send Part Files dialog, select File > Send from the
menu.
Select the files you want to send from:

Part document — The current .fm file.
Milling post — The current Milling .cnc file.
Turning post — The current Turning .cnc file.
Wire EDM post — The current Wire EDM .cnc file.
User interface settings — The .ini file containing your user interface
preferences.
Machine design files (.md) — the current .md file.
Crash and performance logs — Select this option to create a separate
.zip file of your system's crash and performance logs.

Select how you want to send the files:
As individual files — The individual files are attached to a new email.
As a zip file — The files are zipped and the .zip file is attached to a
new email.
Save to desktop — The files are zipped and the .zip file is saved to
your desktop.
Size confirmation
If you are sending .zip files, a Size Confirmation warning dialog is
displayed:
The average email server limits attachments to 10 MB.
The total size of the attachement(s) is: N (where N is the size of your
attachment(s))
Would you like to continue sending?
Click Send to attach the files to an email.
Click Don't Send to keep the files on your desktop.
Click Cancel to discard the files.
FeatureCAM file types

You can save several different types of files for your part.
 .op is the Manufacturing Operation Sheet and is the same
information shown on the Details tab when you select Operation
List.
 .tl is the Manufacturing Tool Detail Sheet and is the same
information shown on the Details tab when you select Tool List.
 .txt is a text file containing the NC code for the particular part
file.
 .tdb is a FeatureCAM tooling database that contains just the tools
you used to create the part.
 .fdb is a FeatureCAM material database that contains the feed
and speed tables used for the part.
 .cdb is a FeatureCAM machine configuration database that
contains the settings for default attributes.
The filename of all files is the same as the part name. If you have a
part called part, the files created are: part.op, part.tl, part.txt, part.tdb,
part.fdb. When saving the NC code you are given the opportunity to
change the NC file name. If you enter a different NC file name, the
default file extension is .txt.

If a part has multiple setups, the Setup ID number is appended to
the part name. For example, if you have a part called plate with
three Setups, three different sets of files are created called plate,
plate2, and plate3. So a .op, .tl, .txt, .tdb, .fdb, and .cdb file are created
for each Setup for a total of eighteen files.
Part Documentation
The Part Documentation dialog enables you to add comments to the
printed documentation and set a permanent preview picture for the
part.
To display the Part Documentation dialog, select File > Part
Documentation from the menu.
The Part Documentation dialog contains two tabs:
Documentation (see page 70)
Preview Picture (see page 71)
Documentation tab
On the Documentation tab of the Part Documentation (see page 70)
dialog, optionally enter a Title, Author, Company, Part/Drawing No.,
Revision, Note 1, Note 2, and Comments. To print these values along
with the documentation, select Comments in the Printing Options
(see page 106) dialog.
If you use the custom setup sheet add-in (see page 177),
these values are copied to the Setup Sheet Options dialog.

Preview Picture tab
On the Preview Picture tab of the Part Documentation (see page 70)
dialog, you can set a permanent preview image for the part. This
image is displayed in the preview pane in the File > Open dialog
when you select a file.
This image is normally updated each time you save the part. If you
want to store a permanent image with the part:
1 Create the view of the part you want to store.
2 Click Update preview picture .
The current view in the graphics window is displayed as the
Current preview picture, for example:
3 Click OK to save the preview picture or Cancel to close the dialog

without saving the preview picture.
Saving your settings

FeatureCAM uses two .ini files to store your settings:
 ezfm_ui.ini contains toolbars, dialog locations, graphics settings,
colors, and other user settings.
 ezfm_mfg.ini contains manufacturing defaults and .cfg settings.
The ezfm_mfg.ini file contains default values for both inch and metric
attributes. For example, there is an entry for zrapid in inches and
also an entry for zrapid_mm in mm. In general, the name for the
metric attributes is the same as the inch name, with a suffix of
_mm.
Three items from the Options menu affect the communication with
the ezfm_ui.ini and ezfm_mfg.ini files:

 Options > Save Settings Now — writes the current settings to the
files.
 Options > Reload Settings — reads the settings contained in the
files into the program.
 Options > Save on Exit — saves the current settings when you exit
the program. If this option is not selected, the settings for your
current session are not saved to the files when you exit.
In old versions of FeatureCAM all program options were

stored in one file, the ezfm.ini file, located in the same folder
that Windows is installed in. That file included the settings
you chose for toolbars, the Viewing, Simulation, Default
Attributes, and Post Options dialogs. When you run version 15
or later for the first time, it reads the existing ezfm.ini file and
splits the contents into the two new .ini files. All changes are
written to the new .ini files, the old .ini file does not change.

Command line options
The command line options enable you to start FeatureCAM in a
specified mode; to run a script or add-in; or to pre-load information
from file. FeatureCAM supports the following parameters:
-b: Loads a VB add-in from the specified path.

-c Runs the script at specified path.
-dbug Sends the debug output to the console.
-Debug Sends the debug output to file ezfm_debug.txt
ToFile
-? or Lists the command line options available for FeatureCAM.
-help
-i Loads the settings from the specified v14 ini file.
-l Specifies the network license for FeatureCAM.
-m Loads the manufacturing settings from the specified ezfm_mfg.ini f
example:
ezfm -uc:\ProgramData\FeatureCAM\ezfm_mfg.ini
-noflex Skips the flex/rms license checks.
-RegSer Registers the FeatureCAM library
ver
-u Loads the user-interface settings from the specified ezfm_ui.ini file
example:
ezfm -uc:\ProgramData\FeatureCAM\ezfm_custom_ui.ini
-viewal Sends debug graphics to this ezfm instance
To open FeatureCAM using a command line option:

1 Open the Command Line window.

2 Type the name of the FeatureCAM executable followed by the
parameter. For example:
You must enter the full path of the executable and any
specified files used when they are not located in the
currently selected directory. Commands are not
case-sensitive.
3 Press the Enter key to execute the command.
The path to the .ini file for versions of FeatureCAM older than
15 is -Ic:\path\ezfm.ini. This is still available but is used only
during initialization if the ezfm_ui.ini and ezfm_mfg.ini files are
not found. If the new .ini files are found, the -I option is
ignored.

Import/Export
You can import (see page 82) and export (see page 102) various
file types into and from FeatureCAM.
The settings for import and export are in the Import/Export Options
(see page 75) dialog. To open this dialog select File > Import/Export
Options from the menu.
Import/Export Options
The Import/Export Options dialog contains settings for importing and
exporting.
To display the Import/Export Options dialog select File > Import/Export
Options from the menu.
The dialog has three tabs:
Solid Import (see page 77)
Digitized Data (see page 78)
General tab
The General tab controls how FeatureCAM imports or exports files. It
contains the following options:
Always replace object on import — Select this option to overwrite

objects of the same name when you import. Deselected prompts for
every replacement. You can’t have two objects with the same name.

Smooth EZ-MILL curves — Select this option to improve EZ-MILL
curves on import because FeatureCAM has a higher resolution curve
format.
Keep IGES import log file — Select this option to keep a log of the
import process for later review or troubleshooting.
IGES log file name — Enter the path and filename for saving a record
of the import process.
Import IGES entity of type:
Logically dependent — can exist by itself but is also referenced by
another entity (case of groups or grouping situation).
Physically dependent — generally, you should deselect this option to
indicate you do not want physically dependent entities to be
imported. But if you are having trouble with your IGES file and it is
not importing properly, try selecting this option and re-importing.
Entities in an IGES file are marked to be either physically dependent
or not. Those that are marked to be physically dependent are
entities that are used in the construction of other entities. For
example, a trimming loop is physically dependent upon the trimmed
surface that uses it. The trimming loop is not important all by itself,
but is instead a building block of something else. The trimmed
surface is in turn marked physically dependent to indicate that it is
a building block of a parent entity, a solid. By selecting Physically
dependent, you cause FeatureCAM to show everything in the IGES
file - not just the top-level entities that are usually shown, but also
all of the lower-level building blocks. This is generally not what you
want. Generally you want only the top-level entity, for example the
solid.
Both physically and logically dependent — meets both logically and
physically dependent criteria (is referenced by at least two other
entities — the parent for the logical link cannot be the parent for the
physical as well).
Center stock automatically — Select this option to automatically size
and position the stock so that it covers the imported data.
Number of decimal places in IGES export — determines how finely
data is exported to the IGES format.

Solid Import tab
The Solid Import tab contains the following options:
Heal Catia solids — Select this option to try to repair the faces or
surfaces contained in the CATIA .mod file. This option can be
time-consuming because it attempts to:
 retrim the surfaces/faces against each other.
 force edges of surfaces to lie on the surface.
 simplify surfaces like converting a general surface into a cylinder.
Import hidden Catia V5 solids — Select this option to import all parts
contained in the CATIA file even if those parts are hidden.
Import file as solids — Select this option to import files as solid
models. If this option is deselected, the models are imported as
surface models. We recommend that you import models as solids. If
this option is selected and the solid fails to import properly, you are
asked if you would like to attempt to heal the solid to try and fix the
import problem.
Import work planes — When selected, planar surfaces in solids are
imported. When deselected, planar surfaces in solids are ignored.
Stitch IGES surfaces into solids/sheets — Select this option to try to
create one or more solids or sheets from an IGES file. If an IGES file
contains more than one solid or sheet, this is the most efficient way
to create the multiple objects from the file.

Digitized Data tab
Digitized data is imported into FeatureCAM through DXF Polyline
entities. The Digitized data import/export options affect how this
data is imported. These settings affect only the import of the data.
If you want to change one of these options, you must remove the
old data and import the .dxf file again.
The Digitized Data tab contains the following options:
DWG/DXF Non-Smooth Polyline Import Method:

 As Curve — Select this option to import a non-smooth polyline as
a curve
 As Connected Lines — Select this option to import the
non-smooth polyline as a series of line segments.
DWG/DXF Smooth Polyline Import Method:
If the polyline has smooth vertices, it is imported as a curve. There
are two options:
 Interpolation — the curve passes through the data. If the data is
very dense, interpolation sometimes causes the curve to wiggle
in between the points. The spline interpolation (see page 367)
technique is used to create the curve.
 Approximation — the curve comes very close to the data points
and is unlikely to wiggle for densely-spaced data.
DWG/DXF Polygonal Mesh Import Method:
If the polyline is a polygonal mesh, it is imported as a surface.
There are two options:

 Interpolation — the surface passes through all of the data points.
If the data is very dense, some wiggles may appear in the
surface. A cubic hermite technique is used to create the surface.
 Approximation — the surface comes close to the data points. The
points are used as control points to the surface and the surface is
unlikely to wiggle for densely-spaced data.
Example of digitized data format for a 3D point
Text preceded by <--- is included only as a comment.

0
SECTION
2
ENTITIES
0
POINT
10
0.0000 <--- X
20
0.0000 <--- y
30
0.0000 <--- Z
0
ENDSEC
0
EOF
Example of digitized data format for a two-point curve
0
SECTION
2
ENTITIES
0
POLYLINE
0
VERTEX
10
0.0000 <--- x0
20
0.0000 <--- y0
30
0.0000 <--- z0
0
VERTEX
10
1.0000 <--- x1
20

1.0000 <--- y1
30
0.0000 <--- z1
0
SEQEND
0
ENDSEC
0
EOF
Example of digitized data format for a spline curve
At least four points are needed for a spline.

0
SECTION
2
ENTITIES
0
POLYLINE
0
VERTEX
70
8
10
0.0000 <--- x0
20
0.0000 <--- y0
30
0.0000 <--- z0
0
VERTEX
70
8
10
0.0000 <--- x1
20
1.0000 <--- y1
30
0.0000 <--- z1
0
VERTEX
70
8
10
1.0000 <--- x2
20
1.0000 <--- y2
30
0.0000 <--- z2

0
VERTEX
70
8
10
1.0000 <--- x3
20
2.0000 <--- y3
30
0.0000 <--- z3
0
SEQEND
0
ENDSEC
0
EOF
Example of digitized data format for a surface defined by four
corner points
0
SECTION
2
ENTITIES
0
POLYLINE
70
16
71
2 <--- Number of rows
72
2 <--- Number of columns
0
VERTEX
70
64
10
0.0000 <--- x of row 0, column 0
20
0.0000
30
0.0000
0
VERTEX
70
64
10
1.0000 <--- x of row 0, column 1
20

0.0000
30
0.0000
0
VERTEX
70
64
10
0.0000 <--- x of row 1, column 0
20
1.0000
30
0.0000
0
VERTEX
70
64
10
1.0000 <--- x of row 1, column 1
20
1.0000
30
0.0000
0
SEQEND
0
ENDSEC
0
EOF
Importing files
Use the File > Import menu option to load a CAD model from file.
To import a CAD model from a file:
import geometry.
2 If you want to set or change the import options, select File >
Import/Export Options.
3 Select File > Import from the menu. The Import dialog is
displayed.
4 Select the file you want to import, and click Open.
A message asks if you want to review the log file: click Yes to
display the results, or click No to continue. The Import Results
wizard (see page 85) is displayed.
5 Follow the instruction in the wizard to complete the process.

FeatureCAM can import these formats. If the description is followed
by (3D), you need FeatureCAM 3D or the Solid Modeling module to
import it.
Type Description
.ddx (see page Delcam PowerSHAPE (Delcam Data Exchange (see page
88) 87))
.dwg; .dxf (see AutoCAD files (3D for embedded solids)
page 89)
.iges (see page Industry standard neutral CAD files (3D for surface or
91) solids)
.geo Bridgeport EZ-CAM 2D geometry
.xmt and .xmb (see Parasolid-based solid models (3D)
page 94)
.sat and .sab (see ACIS-based solid models (3D)
page 94)
.sldprt (see page SolidWorks files (3D)
95)
.sldasm (see page SolidWorks assembly files (3D)
96)
.mod and .model CATIA V4 files (This module is priced separately.)
(see page 96)
.ipt and .iam (see Autodesk Inventor files (3D)
page 97)
.prt, .prt<number>, Native Pro/ENGINEER files, PTC Creo files (This module
.asm and priced separately.)
.asm<number>
(see page 97)
.catpart (see page CATIA V5 files (This module priced separately.)
97)
.par and .asm (see Native SolidEdge files (3D) and SolidEdge assembly files
page 98)
.prt (see page NX (formerly Unigraphics) native files (priced separately)
98)
.stp or .step (see STEP files (priced separately)
page 98)

You can import models from other file formats using the File >
Import Using Exchange menu option (see page 87).
Supported import formats

This version of FeatureCAM supports at least the following import
formats when using native import (not Delcam Exchange).
You may be running a service pack of FeatureCAM that supports a
later version of a file format, but on the previous update of the help
file these are the supported formats:
File format: First supported in
version:
SolidWorks 2016 22.4
SolidEdge ST7 21.8
DWG 2013 20.0
Parasolid v28.0 22.4
CATIA V5-6R2015 22.0
CATIA V5-6R2014 21.8
CATIA V5 R23 20.0
UG NX 10 22.0
UG NX 9.0 21.8
Autodesk Inventor 2016 21.8
Pro/E Creo3 21.8
Pro/E Creo2 19.1
Pro/E Creo 18.8
If you have an example file that does not import properly, please
send it to your authorized support representative and they will send
it to Delcam developers for examination and bug fixing as
necessary.
Working with imported geometry

Imported geometry is often less exact than geometry you create
directly in FeatureCAM. End points may not match and you may find
that you have a lot of extraneous data on your screen. Deleting or
hiding the extraneous data greatly speeds up the display of your
part. You may also want to chain your data one piece at a time
instead of using automatic chaining.

Gaps in your data make chaining your geometry into curves more
difficult. With small gaps you may have to adjust the Chaining
tolerance set in Chaining in the Options menu. This tolerance
represents the distance between endpoints that will automatically
be bridged by the chaining algorithm. By increasing this tolerance
you may be able to automatically close the gaps between endpoints
during chaining. You can change this tolerance in the Chaining
dialog. With some data you may find that you must manually insert
line segments or arcs to close the gaps in the data. After closing
these gaps, you should find that the data will chain more easily.
Import wizard
When you import a file, FeatureCAM steps you through its import
wizard. This wizard helps you:
1 Import the file into FeatureCAM.
2 Size the stock.
3 Orient the stock.
4 Position the part program zero.
5 Set up a part for indexing.
6 For some solid file formats, it helps you recognize and suppress
some part features.
To use the wizard, select File > Import from the menu and follow the
steps of the wizard.
Import Results dialog

After importing a file, the Import Results dialog is displayed.
The options available depend on the file you imported and include:

Use the wizard — Select this option and click Next to run the Import
wizard (see page 85) to align the part to the stock, size the stock,
and for some file formats, perform some initial feature recognition.
Accept the imported data 'as is' and exit the wizard — To exit without
using the wizard, select this option and click Finish.
Launch AFR after finish — If you want to run automatic feature
recognition on the imported model, select this option. Automatic
feature recognition runs after the import procedure is complete.
Use the same alignment as last import — If you are re-importing a
part or importing parts that are part of an assembly, select this
option. The alignment transformation is saved with each import and
you can reapply it using this option.
Undo does not reset the saved transformation.
Stock Type page

Use the Stock Type page of the import wizard to specify the shape
of the stock.
The following stock shapes are available:
Block: Round: N-Sided:
To complete this page:

1 Select the stock shape as Block, Round, or N-Sided.
 If you selected Block — Enter the Length (X dimension), Width
(Y dimension), and Thickness (Z dimension).
 If you selected Round — Select the Axis (see page 208) and
enter the Length and OD (outside diameter). If you are
working with tube stock, enter a positive number as the ID
(inside diameter).
If wrapping (see page 243) or indexing (see page 234),

the axis must match your index axis.
 If you selected N-Sided — Enter the Axis (see page 208), the
OD (outside diameter), the number of Sides, and the Length
of your stock.
You can skip this step and use the Stock Wizard (see page
205) later to define the stock.

If you are running the offline version of FeatureCAM, you
also have the option of automatically resizing the stock.
If you want to use a Curve or a Solid to define the stock,

use the Stock Properties (see page 220) dialog.
2 Click Next, or click Finish (see page 206).
Select Round Stock Center page

Use the Select Round Stock Center page to specify the location of the
central axis of the stock.
Use one of the buttons to locate the central axis:
Pick location — Select a location in the graphics window that

represents the round stock center point.
Center of revolved surface — Select a revolved surface (see page

113) to use the axis about which it is revolved is as the center of
the stock.
Center of imported data's bounding box — Use the geometric

center of the imported data as the center of the stock. Use this
option to quickly position the stock when importing simple or
symmetrical solids.
Pick Initial Setup XYZ Location page

Use the Pick Initial Setup XYZ Location page to specify the location of
the setup.
Use the buttons to position the setup:
 — Click one of these buttons to align the setup with a

position on the stock.
 Pick location — Select a location in the graphics window.
 Center of revolved surface — Select a revolved surface (see

page 113) to position the setup in the center of the surface.
 Enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates of the setup.
 Preview — Display a preview of the setup location in blue in the
graphics window.
Import Using Exchange

You can import files using Delcam Exchange. There is an option on
the File menu. Select File > Import Using Exchange:

You must have Delcam Exchange installed to use this feature.
Importing PDF files

You can import curves from Adobe Acrobat files using Delcam
Exchange.
To import curves from an acrobat file:
1 Open a document.
2 Select the File > Import using exchange menu option.
3 In the Files of type list, select PDF Files (*.pdf).
4 Locate and select the acrobat file containing the curves you want
to import, then click Open.
5 A message asks if you want to review the import log. Click Yes to
view the log, or click No to continue.
6 If the Import Units dialog is displayed to inform you the file was
defined using different measurement units to those used in your
document, select an option then click OK to continue. The Import
size and click Next to create a part using the Import Wizard, or
click Accept the imported data 'as is' and exit the wizard and click
Finish to complete the import process.
The curves are displayed in the graphics view and listed in the
Part View.
Importing Delcam PowerSHAPE files

FeatureCAM supports the import of these *.ddx entities:
 lines
 arcs
 NURBS curves
 any surface that can be converted into a 'NURBS surface' by the
DGK2DGK function.
 any surface that can be converted into a 'trimmed NURBS
surface' by the DGK2DGK function.
 Parasolid (X_T) information.

Importing AutoCAD files
FeatureCAM supports the import of the following .dwg and .dxf
entities. .dxf files have both ASCII and binary forms, .dwg files have
only binary form. If the entity has (3D) listed after it, then you need
FeatureCAM 3D or the Solid Modeling module.
.dxf entity FeatureMILL object
LINE line from 2 points
POLYLINE lines from 2points
POLYLINE with curve
smooth
vertices
POLYGON surface
MESH
LINE3D line from 2 points
POINT point
SPLINE (DXF curve
only)
UCS UCS
SEQEND line from 2 points
LAYER layer
VERTEX line from 2 points
COLOR object colors are maintained upon import
CIRCLE circle center radius
arc center begin end
curve
ARC arc center begin end
curve, if asymmetrically scaled
INSERT DXF
BLOCK trimmed surfaces (3D)
BODY trimmed surfaces (3D)
SHEET trimmed surfaces (3D)
3DSOLID
DIMENSION dimension object

Importing dimensions
AutoCAD files can contain two different spaces, model space and
paper space. Model space is where you draw up geometry, 3D
solids, and so on. Paper space is the formatted space where
multiple views are formatted. Most AutoCAD files have only model
space. FeatureCAM can import dimensions in both model space and
paper space.
AutoCAD dimensions are imported as FeatureCAM dimensions. That
means that you can modify the color of the dimension, easily delete
the entire dimension or use the Show or Hide pull-out menus to
toggle the display of dimensions.
See Simplifying 3D AutoCAD data for 2D import (see page 90) for
more details.
Importing solids
You can import ACIS solids from DWG files, such as 3DSOLID,
REGION and BODY entities, by using the FeatureCAM native import.
When you import a DWG that contains solid entities, the AutoCAD
Import Method dialog is displayed.
Select whether to import using Exchange or the FeatureCAM native
import. The FeatureCAM native import is faster, and you can import
solid entities as solids in FeatureCAM. Solids are imported as
collections of surfaces when using Exchange.
Simplifying 3D AutoCAD data for 2D import

Many AutoCAD models comprise higher level objects such as
3DSOLIDs or BODYs. If you have licensed FeatureCAM 3D or the
Solid Import module, you can import these entities directly into
FeatureCAM. If not, you must simplify this data before importing.
To import the geometry that is used to create the 3DSOLIDs, select
your model and then use the EXPLODE command, or the Explode
pull-out from the Modify toolbar, to repeatedly reduce your model
into these more primitive elements.
When exploding solids you often get duplicate lines and circles. Any
edge that was shared between two different faces is duplicated. This
repeated geometry causes trouble if you try to chain the geometry
by double-clicking. To work around this, you can:
 Chain manually (see page 318), by picking each piece
individually
 Use AutoCAD to explode specific faces of the model (not the
entire model), and then do chaining normally with double-click or
piece-to-piece

 Remove duplicate pieces in FeatureCAM and then do chaining
normally
To see if you have imported geometry:
1 Select a line or circle.
2 Look at the object's name listed in the status bar. Imported lines
have names that begin with _ln and imported circles have names
that begin with _circ.
3 Select the object again.
4 See if the same name is listed in the status bar.
5 If a duplicate name appears and selected geometry is the same,
delete the second occurrence of the geometry.
If your AutoCAD model contains layers, those layers are kept after
import.
Importing IGES files

It is helpful to set the export settings of your CAD system for proper
import.
 SolidWorks settings (see page 93)
 AutoCAD settings (see page 93)
 For other systems try and ensure that 3D surfaces are exported
as trimmed NURBS.
If you are working with Pro/Engineer from Parametric Technology
Corporation set the following IGES import options (see page 75):
 Physically dependent - OFF
 Logically dependent - ON
 Both physically and logically dependent - ON
See Import/Export Options for more details on these parameters
FeatureCAM can read the following IGES entities. If the 3D column
is selected in the table, then you need FeatureCAM 3D or the Solid
Modeling module to read these entities.
Entity IGES Description FM Object Type 3D
100 Circular Arc Circle and arc
102 Composite Curve Curve
104 Conic Arc Curve
106 Copious Data Line
108 Plane Not supported
110 Line Line, multiple lines

112 Parametric Spline Curve
Curve
114 Parametric Spline Surface
Surface
116 Point Point
118 Ruled Surface Surface
120 Surface of Surface
Revolution
122 Tabulated Cylinder Surface
126 Rational B Spline Curve
Curve
128 Rational B Spline Surface
Surface
141 Boundary Curve
142 Curve on Parametric Curve
Surface
143 Bounded Surface Surface
144 Trimmed Surface Surface
186 Brep Solid with Solid
Modeling, Surfaces
without Solid Modeling
304 Line Font Definition Not supported
408 Subfigure Instance Geometry, curves, or
surfaces
410 View Not supported
502 Vertex Point
504 Edge Curve
508 Loop Curve
510 Face Surface without Solid
Modeling
514 Shell Surfaces without Solid
Modeling,
Solid with Solid
Modeling

Dimension entities from IGES files, such as labels, notes, and
arrows are also imported. All other IGES entities are ignored. Look
in the status bar and the log file for feedback about the IGES file
import. After importing a *.iges file an alert displays either The IGES
file has been imported successfully or The file example.iges is
corrupted and cannot be imported. A log file is created which details
the IGES import process. The name of this file is specified in the
Import Settings dialog which is displayed with the Import Settings
option of the File menu.
AutoCAD IGES Export settings

Use the following steps to set the IGES export settings in AutoCAD
before exporting for FeatureCAM:
1 Select IGES Out… from the File menu.
2 Select Edit Options….
3 Select Geometry….
4 Set the parameters as follows:
 For 3D Solid/Designer Part Mapping, select Surfaces.
 For Trimmed Surface Mapping, select Trimmed Surface (144).
 For AutoSurf Augmented Line Mapping, select Copious Data
6-tuples (106: 13).
 Select Map Point Entities.
 Select Map RAY and XLINE objects to 110:1,2 (Unbounded Line
Forms).
SolidWorks IGES Export settings

Use the following steps to set the IGES export settings in
SolidWorks before exporting for FeatureCAM:
1 In the SolidWorks menu, select File > Save As.
2 In the Save As dialog, select IGES (*.igs) as the Save as type.
3 Click the Options button. The Export Options dialog opens.
4 In the Output as section, select the IGES solid/surface entities
option and select Trimmed Surface(type 144) from the list.
5 Select the IGES wireframe (3D curves) option and select B-Splines
(Entity type 126) from the list.
6 For Surface representation/System preference, select ANSYS.
7 From the remaining options, select:
 Export 3D Curve features

 Use high trim curve accuracy
 Save all components of an assembly in one file
 Flatten assembly hierarchy
8 Click OK to save your settings and close the Export Options

dialog.
9 Continue to save your file, or click Cancel to return to
SolidWorks.
Importing Parasolid files
You need FeatureCAM 3D or the Solid Modeling module to

import Parasolid files.
CAD systems that use the Parasolid kernel can create files of type
.xmt. These files contain the solid models created by systems
including SolidWorks, SolidEdge, and Unigraphics. FeatureCAM can
import ASSEMBLIES and PARTS that are made up of BODIES.
SolidWorks is a registered trade name of Solidworks Inc.
Parasolid, SolidEdge, and Unigraphics are registered trade names of
Siemens AG.
Importing ACIS files
You need FeatureCAM 3D or the Solid Modeling module to

import ACIS files.
CAD systems that use the ACIS kernel can create files of type *.sat.
These files contain the solid models created by systems including
Mechanical Desktop, CadKey and others. These solids can also be
imported in *.dwg and *.dwf files.
FeatureCAM cannot import wireframe models, only solids. The

normals of solids are reverse for ACIS models because the
ACIS convention is opposite to the FeatureCAM convention.

Importing SolidWorks files
The files have a .sldprt extension. Only the final solid model is
imported. Geometry, curves, and construction history are not
imported. This means that you only get a single solid and not the
individual design features from SolidWorks.
SolidWorks configurations are also supported. If there are multiple
configurations, the SolidWorks Configurations dialog is displayed.
Select which configuration you want to import and click OK.
If you import a .sldprt or .sldasm file into FeatureCAM, colors

are not honored. To keep colors, export an .X_T file from
SolidWorks and import that file into FeatureCAM.
Solid Source File dialog

FeatureCAM remembers the location of the file from which a
SolidWorks file is imported. If the solid source .sldprt file is renamed
or moved, you can set the new name and/or location here to keep
the associativity.
1 Right-click the name of the solid in the Part View and select Solid
Source File from the context menu: The Solid Source File dialog is
displayed:
2 Click the Browse button to find the source file.

If associativity is kept, FeatureCAM displays a warning when the
source file is updated, to ask if you also want to update the .fm
file.

Importing SolidWorks assemblies
You can import the solids contained in SolidWorks assemblies (files
with an .sldasm extension) if you have the .sldasm file and all of the
referenced .sldprt files.
Each solid of the assembly is loaded into a single FeatureCAM
document.
See also Importing Solidworks files (see page 95).
Importing CATIA V4 files
You need the Catia Import module to import CATIA V4 files.

You can import CATIA version 4 (specifically versions 4.1.x or 4.2.x)
files directly into FeatureCAM. These files must have a *.mod or
*.model extension. In general, only 3D surface and solid models can
be imported, but composite curves can also be imported. A log of
the import is recorded in windows\temp\catia.txt.
CATIA Object Type FeatureCAM Object Type
Point Not translated
Line Curve
Circle Curve
Ellipse, Hyperbola, Parabola Curve
Curve Curve
Composite curve Curve
NURBS curve Curve
Polynomial surface, B-spline Surface
polynomial surface
NURBS surface Surface
Skin Surfaces or solid depending on
option settings (see page 77).
Exact solid Surfaces or solid depending on
Polyhedral solid Surfaces or solid depending on

Importing Autodesk Inventor files
You can import Autodesk inventor *.ipt files directly into
FeatureCAM. Only the final 3D solid model is imported, 2D
geometry, assemblies, and sketches are not imported. You can also
import solids contained in Autodesk Inventor assembly files directly
from *.iam files.
Importing Pro/E files
You need the FeatureCAM ProE Import module to import Pro/E

files.
These files must have an extension of *.prt, *.prt.<number> (for
example foo.prt.8), *.asm, or *.asm.<number> (for example
bar.asm.23). Only solid models are imported from Pro/E. The solid
models are imported as surfaces or solids depending on the options
you set in the Import/Export Options (see page 77) dialog. Only
solids are read from a Pro/E file. Any curves or surfaces read must
be part of a solid.
FeatureCAM can read Pro/E Family Tables, which are multiple
configurations of a given part.
Importing CATIA V5 files
You need the FeatureCAM Catia V5 Import module to import

CATIA V5 files.
CATIA V5 files can be imported directly. These files must have an
extension of *.catpart. A log of the import is recorded in
windows\temp\catia.txt. Only solid models are read from a CATIA V5
file. Any curves or surfaces read must be part of a solid. Colors are
kept upon import.
Not all CATIA solids can be imported into FeatureCAM as

solids. This is because the solid modeling technology used by
FeatureCAM requires that a solid be truly watertight, and
CATIA uses a different solid modeling technology that allows
for solid models that aren't truly watertight. So the bottom
line is that FeatureCAM won't be able to import every CATIA
solid as a solid, but it should be able to bring them in as
surfaces at the very least. If you import as surfaces, then you
should be able to stitch the surfaces into a solid with some
amount of retrimming/remodelling effort depending upon the
quality of the original CATIA model.

Importing SolidEdge files
FeatureCAM can import the solid models directly from a native
SolidEdge (*.par) file. The solid models are imported as Surfaces or
Solids depending on option settings (see page 77).
FeatureCAM can also import SolidEdge assembly (*.asm) files.
Importing NX (Unigraphics) files
You need the FeatureCAM UniGraphics module to import NX

(formerly Unigraphics files.
NX *.prt files can be imported directly into FeatureCAM. Only solid
models are imported.
Importing STEP files
You need the Step Import module to import STEP files

FeatureCAM can import solid models via STEP AP203 or AP214. The
solid models are imported as Surfaces or Solids depending on option
settings (see page 77).
AP203 and AP214 contain the same geometry specifications. AP214
allows support for attributes which are not present in AP203 (color,
line thickness, line type, and so on).
Importing STL files

STL (Standard Tessellation Language) is a file format native to
stereolithography CAD software. You can import a standard format
STL file directly into FeatureCAM with no special license or optional
reader (STL import is part of the 2.5D Milling product). These files
must have a *.stl extension. The result is an STL 'blob' which is all
the triangles as a single pickable unit, that is, not separate solids, or
separate faces. The blob can then be machined using 3D techniques
for rapid prototyping (surface manufacturing - in the 3D product),
or can be used as a stock model (in all products).
FeatureCAM supports both binary and ASCII STL.
Importing DMT files

DMT (Delcam's Machining Triangles) is a file format generated by
Delcam (http://www.delcam.com)'s CAD software including
PowerMILL, PowerSHAPE, and CopyCAD. The file has the extension
of *.dmt and you can import it directly into FeatureCAM. The DMT
file represents 3D models as triangles, similar to an STL (see page
98) file. Any function or operation that can be applied to an STL file
can also be applied to a DMT file.

Hole recognition on imported parts
You can use the hole recognition to recognize holes in imported
parts. Hole recognition is different from Feature Recognition
because it uses additional data from the imported model, instead of
using just the solid data. This enables you to recognize
non-geometric information, such as threads for tapped holes.
Inventor hole recognition (see page 99)
SolidWorks hole recognition (see page 100)
SolidEdge hole recognition (see page 101)
Inventor hole recognition

You can use the Inventor Hole Recognition page of the Import wizard
to recognize holes in imported Autodesk Inventor parts (see page
97), as shown in this example (see page 102).
Inventor hole recognition is different from Feature Recognition
because it uses additional data from the Inventor model, instead of
You must have Autodesk Inventor installed and licensed on

your computer to use Inventor hole recognition.
Inventor hole recognition has this limitation:
 Only holes that were created using Inventor hole features are
recognized automatically. Holes that were created as extrusions
have to be recognized using FeatureCAM's automatic feature
recognition.
1 To use Inventor hole recognition, select Use Inventor to extract
information about the hole types and dimensions.
2 Select Suppress recognized holes in the imported model to
suppress the holes after they have been recognized. This
removes the holes from the solid model so they are not
recognized again if you use Feature Recognition.
3 If you do not want to perform hole recognition using Inventor,
select Use FeatureCAM to recognize holes later.
It may take some time to start up Inventor and recognize the

holes, so please be patient.

SolidWorks hole recognition
You can use the SolidWorks Hole Recognition page of the Import
wizard to recognize holes in imported SolidWorks parts, as shown in
this example (see page 102).
SolidWorks hole recognition is different from Feature Recognition
because it uses additional data from the SolidWorks model, instead
of using just the solid data. This enables you to recognize
You must have SolidWorks installed and licensed on your

computer to use SolidWorks hole recognition.
SolidWorks hole recognition has some limitations:
 Only holes that were created using SolidWorks hole wizard are
must be recognized using FeatureCAM's automatic feature
recognition.
 FeatureCAM supports recognizing tapped, counter drill, and
counter bore holes created in SolidWorks. Boring and Reaming
are not supported because they are dependent on tolerance.
Dowel holes are recognized, and machined with a Ream
operation.
 Tapered taps are driven to a different depth than straight taps.
For straight taps, a tip allowance is added to the thread depth so
that the tool cuts the complete thread, this is not added for
tapered taps so that the OD is not affected.
 FeatureCAM recognizes SolidWorks patterns only if those
patterns can be mapped to a FeatureCAM pattern.
1 To use SolidWorks hole recognition, select Use SolidWorks to
extract information about the hole types and dimensions.
3 If you do not want to perform hole recognition using SolidWorks,
select Use FeatureCAM to recognize the holes later.
It may take some time to start up SolidWorks and recognize

the holes, so please be patient.

SolidEdge hole recognition
You can use the SolidEdge Hole Recognition page of the Import
wizard to recognize holes in imported SolidEdge parts (see page
98), as shown in this example (see page 102).
SolidEdge hole recognition is different from Feature Recognition
because it uses additional data from the SolidEdge model, instead of
You must have SolidEdge installed and licensed on your

computer to use SolidEdge hole recognition.
SolidEdge hole recognition has some limitations:
 Only holes that were created using SolidEdge hole wizard are
have to be recognized using FeatureCAM's automatic feature
recognition.
 FeatureCAM recognizes SolidEdge patterns only if those patterns
can be mapped to a FeatureCAM pattern.
1 To use SolidEdge hole recognition, select Use SolidEDGE to
extract information about the hole types and dimensions.
3 If you do not want to perform hole recognition using SolidEdge,
select Use FeatureCAM to recognize the holes later.
It may take some time to start up SolidEdge and recognize

the holes, so please be patient.

Recognizing and suppressing holes on imported parts example
This is an imported solid part:
The image below shows the solid part with the holes recognized and
suppressed. The holes in the solid are filled in, but the recognized
Hole features can be seen as circles:
The Part view shows the eight holes that were created:
Exporting files
You can export the following file formats from FeatureCAM:

DXF and DWG (see page 103)
IGES (see page 103)
STL (see page 104)
Exporting .dxf and .dwg files

The .dxf and .dwg files exported are version 11 files. .dxf files are
exported in the ASCII form, the binary form is not exported.
FeatureCAM object DXF entity
Point POINT
Circle CIRCLE
Arc ARC (Note that all arcs
are modified so that the
normal points in the +Z
direction)
Line LINE
Layer LAYER
UCS UCS
Exporting .iges files

The different FeatureCAM categories of geometry, curves, features
and so on are exported to .iges as shown in the following table.
FeatureCAM exports .iges v4 files for easy compatibility with other
systems.
FeatureCAM Entity IGES Entity
2.5D Feature 144 = Trimmed
surface(s) or
142 = Curve(s) on
parametric surface
Surface 128 = NURBS surface
Curve 126 = NURBS curve
3D feature 144's and 142's
Point 116 = Point
Line 110 = Line
Arc/Circle 100 = Circular arc
Layer
Dimensions, & other attributes not exported

Save STL dialog
This option is available after you run a 3D simulation. It enables you
to create an .stl file of the final simulation. An .stl file is a triangle file
used by layered manufacturing machines. The accuracy of the
model is controlled by the 3D simulation options.
To display the Save STL dialog:
1 Play a 3D simulation (see page 1519).
2 Select View > Simulation > Save simulation results from the menu.
To use the Save STL dialog to save an .stl file:

1 Click Save to current directory to write to the same folder as your
part is being saved in or click Save to other directory and specify
the folder.
2 Enter an STL File Name.
3 Select Save STL using short filename to limit your filename to 8
characters.
4 Select Create subfolder if you want to create a subfolder with the
same name as your part.
5 Select Overwrite existing file to automatically overwrite any file
with the same name.
6 Click OK.
Printing
There are several places to access printing options in FeatureCAM:
Print (see page 105) dialog — This is the main print dialog. Set the
quality, number of copies and other settings and start printing. You
can also access the Printing Options (see page 106) dialog from
here, where you set what to print.

Print Preview (see page 107) — See a preview of the pages that will
be printed.
Print Setup (see page 107) dialog — Set the printer, paper and
orientation.
Print dialog
Select File > Print from the menu to display the Print dialog:
Printer — This displays the current printer. To set or change the

printer, click the Setup button to open the Print Setup (see page
107) dialog.
Print Quality — Set the print resolution. Select from 600 dpi or 300
dpi.
Print to File — Select this option to open the Print to File dialog when
you click the OK button. In the Print to File dialog, you can save the
print settings as a .prn file to print later.
Copies — Enter the number of copies you want to print, or use the
arrow buttons.
Collate Copies — If you are printing more than one copy, select
Collate Copies to print all the pages of the first copy before moving
on to the next copy. Deselect Collate Copies to print page 1 for all
copies, then page 2, and so on.
Setup — Click this button to display the Print Setup (see page 107)
dialog.
Options — Click this button to display the Printing Options (see page
106) dialog.
OK — Click OK to print.
any changes.

Printing Options dialog
To display the Printing Options dialog, select File > Print from the
menu, then click Options in the Print (see page 105) dialog.
Print Range — Select the elements you want to print. Select All to
print everything, or select Selection to choose which elements to
print, from:
 Graphics Window
 Comments (see page 70)
 Operations List
 Tool List of All Setups
 Tool List of Each Setup
 NC Program
Use white background — Select this option to print the graphics
window with a white background regardless of the background color
that is set. Deselect this option to print the background color as you
see it.
Print Tool Path — Select this option to print the tool path.
Print to Scale — Select this option to print the graphics window to
scale.
dialog.
any changes.

Print Preview
Select File > Print Preview to display a preview of the pages to be
printed.
The preview has several buttons at the top:
Print — Click the Print button to open the Print (see page 105)
dialog to print the previewed pages.
Next Page — Click this button to view the next page to be printed.
Prev Page — Click this button to view the previous page to be
printed.
Two Page — Click this button to view two pages at the same time.
One Page — If you are viewing two pages, click this button to return
to viewing one page at a time.
Zoom In — Click this button to zoom into the preview.
Zoom Out — If you are zoomed into the preview, click this button to
zoom out of the preview.
Close — Click Close to exit the print preview.
Print Setup dialog

To open the Print Setup dialog, select File > Print Setup from the
menu.
Printer
Name — Select the name of the printer you want to use.
Status — This displays the status of the selected printer.
Type — This displays the type of the selected printer.

Where — This displays the location of the selected printer.
Comment — This displays any comments associated with the
selected printer.
Paper
Size — Select the paper size.
Source — Select the paper source.
Orientation
Select the paper orientation from Portrait or Landscape.
You can see how the Paper Size and Orientation settings affect
the print output by doing a Print Preview (see page 107).

Network — Click the Network button to browse to a printer on the
network.
dialog.
any changes.

Coordinate systems
A User Coordinate System (see page 109) (UCS) is an origin, X
direction, Y direction, and Z direction used for modeling and is
displayed like this:
Setups (see page 114) can be anywhere in three-dimensional

space. They can even exist in the same location as other Setups.
When you create a Setup, you need to keep in mind what it means
for the part. The Setup is the part origin (0, 0, 0) on the machine
and in the NC code. You have to place the Setup where that origin
also works with the manufacturing of features in the Setup.
A Setup is displayed like this:
The origin and coordinate system for each NC part program is

determined by the Setup and its associated UCS. When you Save NC
(see page 1567) code, the part program and manufacturing
documentation is generated and saved for all Setups of your part.
User Coordinate Systems (UCSs)

A User Coordinate System (UCS) is an origin, X direction, Y
direction, and Z direction used for modeling. Two-dimensional
geometry is usually created in the XY plane of the current UCS. You
can use many different UCSs while modeling your part. When you
create a manufacturing Setup, you select a single UCS to determine
the part program zero and set the direction for the X, Y, and Z axes.
You can create UCSs in many different locations. You can create a
UCS by explicitly transforming an existing UCS or by using the
Alignment wizard (see page 112) to create UCSs at convenient
locations on your part. The name of the current UCS is displayed in
the Status bar (see page 32). To change to a different UCS, click the
current UCS name in the status bar and select the new UCS from
the context menu.

UCS dialog
The UCS dialog enables you to create and edit User Coordinate
Systems.
Use one of the following methods to display the UCS dialog:
 Select Construct > UCS from the menu.
 Click UCS in the Advanced toolbar (see page 12).
Current UCS displays the name of the current coordinate system.

The Parameters in world coordinate system section displays the UCS
coordinates in the World Coordinate System. Selecting a different
UCS from the Current UCS list changes the current User Coordinate
System (see page 111).
Click New to display the New UCS dialog, which enables you to
create a new UCS (see page 110).
You can use the Translate, Rotate, Align, Rename, and Reset buttons
to edit the current UCS (see page 111).
To delete the current UCS, select the UCS name in the Current UCS
list and click Delete.
See User coordinate systems (see page 109) for more information
on UCSs and How do setups relate to UCSs? (see page 127).
Creating a User Coordinate System

To create a User Coordinate System:
1 Click UCS in the Advanced toolbar to display the UCS dialog.

2 Click New in the UCS dialog to display the New UCS dialog.
3 In the New UCS dialog, enter a Name for the new UCS.

4 If you want to create a copy of an existing UCS:
a Select Create from UCS.
b Select a UCS from the list.
c Click OK to close the New UCS dialog.
d Modify your new UCS using the UCS dialog (see page 111).
5 If you want to use the alignment wizard:
a Select Create and go to alignment wizard.
b Click OK to display the Align UCS dialog.
c Use the alignment wizard (see page 112) to position your new
UCS.
Changing User Coordinate Systems

To change the current UCS using the Status bar:
1 Click the current UCS name in the Status bar (see page 32).
2 Select a UCS from the context menu.
To change the current UCS using the UCS dialog:

2 Select a UCS from the Current UCS list.
Editing a User Coordinate System

To edit a User Coordinate System:

2 Select a UCS from the Current UCS list.
3 Use the following buttons to edit the UCS:
 Translate — Click this button to open the Translate dialog,
where you can enter coordinates for the new UCS or click Pick
location to select the point in the graphics window.
 Rotate — Click this button to open the Rotate dialog. Enter the
rotation angle in degrees (positive or negative) about the X,
Y, and/or Z axes.
 Align — Click this button to open the Align wizard (see page
112).
 Rename — Click this button to open the New UCS Name dialog,
where you can enter a new Name for the UCS.
 Reset — Click this button to make the UCS equivalent to the
World Coordinate System.

4 Click Close to close the dialog.
Align (UCS) wizard

The Align Wizard enables you to place a UCS using a number of
methods. Select a method and click Next. The next page then
prompts you for the information listed below.
Method Next Page Prompts To
Stock Select a face, then select a
corner of that face. You can
graphically pick either the
face or corner.
Feature Select the feature from a list
of features in the part, or
select it graphically. The
UCS is placed at
predetermined locations on
the feature.
Three points Specify the locations of an
origin, a point anywhere on
the new X axis, and any
point in the new XY plane.
Two lines Select two intersecting lines
in the model to specify the
new X and Y axes.
Circle Select a circle. The UCS is
positioned at the center of
the circle.
Curve Select a curve. The UCS is
positioned at the start point
or end point of the curve.
The Z axis is aligned with
the curve normal.
UCS Select another UCS. The
new UCS is now a copy of
the UCS you selected. You
can then edit it with other
functions in the UCS dialog.
Surface Select the surface and a
point on the surface. UCS is
positioned at the point on
the surface with the Z axis
aligned with the surface
normal.

Revolved
Surface (see
page 113)
Align to revolved surface

This method is typically used to align the UCS to the axis of a
turned part. This alignment method works only for surfaces of
revolution. For many imported models, flat disks are not
represented as surfaces of revolution. For the model below you
should select the cylindrical surfaces instead of the disk in order to
position the UCS at the end of the part.
To complete the Align to Revolved Surface dialog:
1 Click Pick surface .

2 Select the surface of revolution in the graphics window.
3 If you want to use the other end of the surface, select Flip
direction.
4 Click Finish.
If the selected surface is not a surface of revolution, the error
message Can’t construct UCS from the selected surface is
displayed. Repeat steps 1 to 4 and select a different surface.
Using multiple UCS and Setups

When you create features, they are added to the active Setup and
UCS. You can create profile curves in any convenient UCS. For 2.5D
features, create each curve in the XY plane (or parallel to the XY
plane) of the UCS. You can then use a curve to create a feature in
any Setup whose XY plane is parallel to the plane of the curve.
Click Setups in the Advanced toolbar to display the Setups (see

page 114) dialog, where you can change the current UCS.
Click UCS in the Advanced toolbar to display the UCS (see page
110) dialog, where you can change the current UCS.

View Toolpaths for a Setup
Setups
You can use Setups to work in different orientations on the same
part. You can have multiple Setups in a model.
When you create a feature, it is added to the active Setup. To
change the active Setup, select a Setup in the Part View panel, or
use the Setups dialog (see page 114).
To create a setup, use the Setups dialog (see page 114), or click
Create new setup in the New Feature wizard.
To manage and delete setups, use the Setups dialog (see page
114), or right-click setups in the Part View and use the context
menu.
If you have two parts that share most of the same design,
you can create the common features in one Setup, and the
unique features in two other Setups. Depending which Setups
you include in the plan and manufacture, you can create two
parts using only one FeatureCAM document.
Setups dialog
You can use the Setups dialog to change the active Setup, create
new Setups and edit existing Setups.
Use one of the following methods to display the Setups dialog:
 Select Manufacturing > Setups from the menu.
 Click the Setups button on the Advanced toolbar.

 Double-click a Setup name in the Part View.
 Right-click a Setup name in the Part View and select Properties

Click New to display the Setup wizard (see page 212), which you
can use to create a new Setup.
To edit an existing setup, select the Setup from the Current Setup
list, then click Edit to display the Setup wizard (see page 115).
To change the active Setup, select a Setup from the Current Setup
list and click Close.
You can also change the active Setup in the Status bar (see
page 32). Click the existing setup name and select a different
setup from the context menu.
Setup wizard
The Setup wizard enables you to create or edit a Setup.
It contains these pages.
The pages that are displayed depend on the options that you
select.
Definition (see page 116)
Part Program Zero (see page 118)
Pick Initial Setup Z Direction (see page 121)
Pick Initial Setup X Orientation (see page 121)
Pick Setup XYZ Location (see page 121)
Part Program Offset (see page 122)
Simulation Information (see page 122)
Right Angled Head (see page 123)
Posting

Setup - Definition
Setup Name — Enter a name for the Setup. This name is used only
as a label for the Setup.
Fixture ID — Verify the Fixture ID for the Setup. The default value
should be correct because it is taken from the current *.cnc post
processor template file. If the default value is not correct, enter the
correct value.
Part Name — Optionally enter a different Part Name for the part. This
defaults to the file name, but you may need to override this for
Fanuc controls to give the part a numeric part name.
Multi-axis Setups have these attributes:
Index X coordinate (5AP (see page 10)) — Optionally enter the
absolute X coordinate to use for the index retract move.
Index Y coordinate (5AP (see page 10)) — Optionally enter the
absolute Y coordinate to use for the index retract move.
Index Z coordinate (5AP (see page 10)) — Optionally enter the
absolute Z coordinate to use for the index retract move.
If you do not enter a coordinate, the Z index clearance (see

page 1648) value is used for the index retract move. Z
index clearance is a clearance distance above the stock
bounding cylinder. This can result in a Z value for indexing
that is outside the valid range for the machine. It can also
result in less-efficient retract moves if the part is an
irregular shape.
Orientation angle — Enter the initial C-axis position of the

part in the machine at the start of the operation.

For example:
This option only applies if the machine tool starts at the singularity
(where the machine tool's Z-axis is aligned with the setup's Z-axis).
operations.
5-axis position menu (5AP (see page 10)) — There is often an
alternate orientation (see page 261) option for accessing a face.
Select from:
 Standard — The default orientation.
 Alternate — The alternative orientation to the default.
 Use Post preference — Uses the position (Positive or Negative) set
in XBUILD in the Five Axis dialog for the Preferred orientation of
the primary rotary axis option.
Click Next to open the Setup - Part Program Zero (see page 118)
page, or click Finish.

Setup - Part Program Zero
You can use the Part Program Zero page of the wizard to select a
method of specifying part program zero. This is the origin of the
coordinate system for the NC program.
To complete this page, select one of the options and click Next.
 Align to Stock Face (see page 119) — Select this option if you
want to align the Setup with the center or corner of one of the
Stock faces, or to explicitly pick a location.
 Align to Index axis (see page 120) — Select this option to align
the Setup with the index axis. (This option is available only for a
turn/mill or 4th-axis indexed (see page 211) part.)
 Align with existing UCS (see page 120) — Select this option if you
want to align the Setup with a previously created user coordinate
system (UCS).
 Align to part geometry (see page 121) — Select this option if you
want to align the Setup relative to the part geometry.
 Use current location — Select this option if you want to leave the
Setup at its current location.

Align to Stock Face
Align to Stock Face enables you to align the part program zero to a
face on the Stock.
1 In the Stock Face section, select the face that you want to use.
2 In the XYZ Location section, either click the Pick location button
and select the location on the model or click the pointing finger
button that corresponds to either the Center of the stock or
one of the corners:
 UL — upper left corner
 UR — upper right corner
 LL — lower left corner
 LR — lower right corner
3 Click Next to open the Setup - Part Program Offset (see page 122)
page, or click Finish.

Align to Index axis

1 If you want to translate the origin off the axis, enter the Radius
from rotation axis.
2 If you want to rotate the coordinate system around the Stock
axis (see page 235), enter an Angular location.
3 Enter an X Offset if you want to translate the coordinate system
along the X axis.
4 Click Finish.
Align with existing UCS
This page enables you to align the part program zero with an
existing user coordinate system.
1 Select the name of the UCS from the list or click the Pick UCS
button and select it from the graphics window.
2 Click Next to go to the Part Program Offset (see page 122) page
or click Finish.

Align to part geometry
Click one of the buttons to specify the Setup's Z direction using the
method listed.
Click Next and the Pick Initial Setup X Direction page is displayed.
Click one of the buttons to specify the Setup's X direction using one
of the methods listed.
Click Next and the Pick Setup XYZ Location page is displayed:
If you are using the center of a revolved surface, you can click
Opposite End to create the Setup at the other end of the cylinder.
Click Finish.

Setup - Part Program Offset
This page enables you to translate the location of the Setup. One
reason to translate the Setup is to model the extra stock on top of
the part that is removed during a facing operation. You may also
want to translate it to a location that you cannot easily snap to.
1 If you want to translate the stock, enter the amount to offset the
stock as the X Offset, Y Offset, and/or Z Offset.
2 Click the Preview button if you want to review the new location of
the Setup.
3 Click Next to open the Setup - Simulation information (see page
122) page, or click Finish.
Setup - Simulation information

Use this page of the wizard to specify an offset for loading the part
onto the machine and select the machine design file that is used for
Machine Simulation.
This dialog is available in these places:
 In the Stock wizard
 In the Setup wizard

 From the Status bar
The X Offset, Y Offset, and Z Offset parameters represent offsets for

loading the part onto the machine. For simulating single milling or
turning setups these offsets are applied to the setup after the part
is aligned with the top-most location (see page 1912). For indexed
parts or turn/mill parts, the offset is relative to the stock axis.
Under Simulation machine design file, select Always use this one to
specify an MD file to use for this setup, or select Use the one
specified in the .cnc file to inherit the MD file from the CNC file for
this setup.
If you select an MD that does not exist, or the CNC file refers to an
MD file that does not exist, FeatureCAM selects an appropriate MD
file from the Examples\Machine Design folder.
made.
Setup - Right Angled Head

1 Select the option on this page if you want to allow the creation of
features that can be cut only with a right-angled tool holder.
2 Click Finish.

Setup - Posting
Machine Z-zero is offset from the setup Z-zero by — This offsets the
<ARM-POS> reserved word in Z.
Generate 4 axis toolpath at the wire guide planes:
By default, FeatureCAM outputs the upper and lower toolpaths at
the same planes as the feature is programmed. For example, if the
feature is at Z0 and has a depth of 1, then the upper toolpath is at
Z0 and the lower toolpath is at Z-1.
Some machines need the output to be at the Z planes of the upper
and lower wire guides, so FeatureCAM must project the toolpaths
outwards to the location of the guides. For example, if the wire
guides are at Z-2 and Z10, we need to project the upper toolpath to
Z10 and the lower toolpath to Z-2.
For these machines, select Generate 4 axis toolpath at the wire guide
planes and enter the Z planes of the Upper guide and Lower guide.

In the image below, is the original lower toolpath, is the
toolpath at the wire guide plane.
Fixture ID
Fixture ID has two related contexts:
 One specifies the fixture offset used to model the part within
FeatureCAM, especially in multiple fixture situations.
 The other specifies the fixture offset used to produce the part in
NC code.
For NC code, FeatureCAM passes the Fixture ID to XBUILD, which
uses the reserved word <FIXTURE> to pass the fixture offset
information to the machine. While your part may have been
displayed and modeled at one location, the fixture offset may
override that location in actual production depending on your
machine tool system.
You must set the Fixture ID to correspond to your machine tool. If
your machine uses G54 or G55, set the Fixture ID to 54 or 55. If your
machine uses H1, set the Fixture ID to 1.
The other fixture offset type reserved words, Datum Shift and
Datum Set, are not supported. Datum Shift and Set are
commonly seen as G92, or G97 codes.
Part Name
The Part Name defaults to be the same as the FeatureCAM part file
name. This name is used in three places:

 The part name in the NC file comment.
 If the part has macros, the names of the macros are derived
from the program name. A two-digit number is appended to the
program name to form the macro name. For example, if the part
is named plate the first macro would be named plate01.
 The name of the NC text file and documentation files (setup
sheet and tooling list).
You can change the Part Name in the Setups (see page 114) dialog.
Even though the name is changed in the Setups dialog, this name is
the same for all Setups. A number is appended to subsequent
Setups. Changing the Part Name changes the name of the NC file,
tooling list and operations sheet that is generated. See Saving an
NC part program to disk (see page 1567) for more information on
output files.
Fanuc control users: you need to use a numeric value for the
NC program name. This gives you a numeric NC file name and
appropriately named macros.
Setting up a part for multi-spindle turning

Setups
You need at least two Setups (see page 114) for multi-spindle
turning, one Setup for the main spindle and a second Setup for the
sub-spindle. The Z axes of the two Setups must point in opposite
directions.
If your NC controller requires that both coordinate systems

point in the same direction, this adjustment is made in the
post processor.
The origin of the two setups can be positioned at any convenient
point on the part.
FeatureCAM automatically creates setups with non-descriptive

names like Setup1 or Setup2. You may want to rename your
setups with more descriptive names like Main Spindle.
The first Setup is automatically assigned to the main spindle. To
perform the first operations on the sub-spindle, either:
 In the Part View panel, click and drag the sub-spindle Setup
above the main spindle Setup.
 Select Manufacturing > Process Plan from the menu to display the
Process Plan (see page 1492) dialog, and use the arrow buttons
to change the order of the Setups in the Process Plan list.

Associating features with Setups
Features are associated with the current Setup. For multiple turret
cutting, the Setup associated with the feature dictates which spindle
holds the part while the feature is being cut. The Part View displays
a list of the Setups in the model, with the Features on each Setup
listed below the Setup name.
Moving the part

The part must be moved between the two spindles using a collection
sub-spindle features (see page 843) and perhaps bar feed features
(see page 828).
Machine Simulation
Machine simulation shows each Setup cut twice if there is a
sub-spindle move.
Setting up a part for multi-turret turning

The following issues must be considered for multi-turret turning:
 Multi-turret machining can be performed with as few as one
setup.
 The post processor that is loaded while you are creating your
part must support multiple turrets.
 For pinch or follow turning, your post processor must have
opposing turrets.
 For appropriate machine simulation the post processor must
have the same turret and spindle description as the machine
design file.
 With the exception of automatically synchronized features (see
page 1561), features are automatically associated with the first
turret. To move an operation to another turret, you must use the
Tool Posts (see page 1557) tab.
How Setups relate to UCSs

A User Coordinate System (UCS) is an origin and three vectors (X,
Y, and Z) that determine a position and orientation in
three-dimensional space. You can use an unlimited number of these
to model your part.
One particular UCS is associated with a Setup. A Setup is an
orientation and part program zero for a physical setup on the
machine tool. The orientation and program zero are determined by
the associated UCS and the Setup contains additional information
like the fixture ID and the name of the NC program that are
generated.

If Setups are created directly by aligning with the stock, special
UCSs are created with the string UCS appended to the Setup name.
For example a UCS called UCS_setup2 is automatically created for
Setup2. These UCSs are used to store the location/orientation
information for the Setup. They cannot be deleted if their Setup
exists.
Options menu
The Options menu gives you access to all the option settings of
FeatureCAM.
Viewing (see page 44)
Surface shading (see page 49)
Simulation (see page 1525)
Coloring (see page 128)
Chaining (see page 324)
Snapping Modes (see page 295)
Snapping Grids (see page 298)
Update Op List (see page 133)
File Options (see page 136)
Coloring
You can change the default color used for many types of object (see
page 131).
Select Options > Coloring from the menu then select one of the
following:
Change Selected (see page 128)
Default Colors (see page 129)
Color Overrides (see page 132)
Change Selected
You can use the Selected Object Color Overrides dialog to change the
color of selected object(s).
To display the Selected Object Color Overrides dialog:
1 In the graphics window, select any objects you want to change
the color of.

2 Select Options > Coloring > Change Selected from the menu:
3 If you want to select a different object, click Pick object and

select an object in the graphics window.
4 Click More Colors to display the Colors dialog.
5 Select a color from the Basic colors palette or click Define Custom
Colors to pick a different color.
Any Custom colors that you define are saved in the settings
file (see page 71) and are available next time you use
FeatureCAM.
6 Click OK to close the Colors dialog.
7 Click Apply to apply the color to the selected object.
8 If you want to reset the selected object to the default (see page
131) color, select Remove override and click Apply.
Default Colors
You can use the Default Colors dialog to change the default colors
used in FeatureCAM.

To display the Default Colors dialog, select Options > Coloring >
Default Colors from the menu.
To change the default colors using the Default Colors dialog:

1 Select an object type from the list, for example, Feature.
FeatureCAM.
This color is used for any new objects of this type that you create
in FeatureCAM.
6 If you want to change the color for the objects that already exist
in FeatureCAM, select Apply my choice to all existing Features,
then click Apply.
7 If you want to reset the selected object's color to its default
value (see page 131), click Reset, then click Apply.
8 If you want to reset all colors to their default values (see page
131), click Reset All, then click Yes.

Default color list
The following table displays the list of default colors in FeatureCAM.
To change the default colors use the Default Colors dialog (see page
129).
Object Default color Description
Feature Purple This is the default color for a FeatureCAM fea
such as a Hole, Face, or Side feature.
Geometry Charc This is the default color for a 2D object such a
oal circle, line, or arc.
gray
Curve Royal This is the default color for a 2D or 3D curve.
blue
Surface Dark This is the default color for a 3D surface.
green
Solid Light This is the default color for a 3D solid. All face
blue the solid use this color.
Dimension Dark This is the default color for dimension objects
green such as linear, radial, and annotation dimens
objects.
Stock Mid This is the default color for the stock that the
blue part is cut from.
Selection Red This is the default color for an object that is
selected in the Graphics window.
Highlight Bright This is the default color used to emphasize
green objects that are currently active in a dialog, a
the snapping cursor.
Lower White This is the default color of the lower portion o
Backgroun the graphics window. If it is a different color t
d the Upper Background color, the two are blen
in a horizontal gradient.
Upper Gray This is the default color of the upper portion o
Backgroun the graphics window. If it is a different color t
d the Lower Background color, the two are blen
in a horizontal gradient.
Constructio Bright This is the default color used for rubber-band
n green objects during geometry construction.
Preview Royal This is the default color for temporary objects
blue that are displayed when you click a Preview
button.

Hyperlink Mid This is the default color for text labels in warp
blue dialogs (that is dialogs that allow the use of
interrogation (see page 292) to obtain the
value).
Main Yellow This is the default color for operations on the
Spindle /green main spindle.
Operations
Sub Lilac This is the default color for operations on the
Spindle spindle.
Operations
Rapid Green This is the default color for a rapid toolpath
move.
Toolpath Black This is the default color for a feed toolpath m
Index Red This is the default color for a toolpath move t
represents the rotation of an indexer.
Partline Cyan This is the default color for a toolpath that ha
Program partline programming (see page 1607, see pa
1660) activated.
Ramps and Royal This is the default color for ramps and leads.
Leads blue
Tool Dark This is the default color for a tool.
gray
Tool Holder Dark This is the default color for a tool holder.
blue
Tool Shank Light This is the default color for a tool shank.
gray
Tool Dark This is the default color for a tool spindle.
Spindle gray
Lathe Yellow This is the default color for a lathe tool insert
Insert
Color Overrides
You can use the New Object Color Override dialog to override the
default color (see page 131) of new objects.

To display the New Object Color Override dialog, select Options >
Coloring > Color Overrides from the menu.
To override the default color of all new objects of a given type:

1 Select an object type from the list.
FeatureCAM.
6 If you want to reset the selected object to the default (see page
131) color, select Remove override and click Apply.
Update Op List
By default, the Operation List is updated automatically each time
you modify a part. For large parts with many operations, updating
the Operation List can take a long time.
You can use the Update Operation List dialog to stop the Operation
List from updating automatically every time you change the part.
To display the Update Operation List dialog, select Options > Update
Op List from the menu.
In the Update Operation List dialog, select one of the following
options:

 Never update — Select this option to turn off updating.
 Always update — Select this option to update the list
automatically each time you change the part.
 Ask before update — Select this option to confirm before
updating.
Click Update Now to update the Operation List.
Snapping modes and grids

When you create geometry, you can enter point coordinates directly
from the Feature/Geometry Edit bar.
This method is exact but not always convenient or feasible. You can
also pick points directly on the screen with the mouse, although this
method may be less precise.
To increase the drawing precision, FeatureCAM uses the snap and
grid functionality. Grid is a set of evenly spaced dots that serve as a
visual distance reference. Snap is a set of evenly spaced invisible
hot spots that restrict the points that you can pick with your mouse,
and therefore helps you position lines, points or shapes more
precise. To control how the cursor snaps, use the Snap Mode (see
page 15) toolbar. Snapping to grid is the most common mode, and
enables you to snap to a point on a coordinate system that is laid
out on the stock. The grid plane rotates with the viewing plane: in a
front or back view, the grid is in the X plane; in a right or left view,
the grid is in the Y plane; and in the top or bottom view, the grid is
in the Z plane. The procedure below allows you to adjust the grid
size.
To adjust the grid:

1 Select Options > Snapping Grids from the menu.

2 In the Snapping Grids dialog, enter the grid coordinates.
Setting grid spacing too fine can slow the display down.
3 In the Section field enter the number of segments to divide the
open geometry into when snapping to sections.
4 To have the grid redrawn during view shifts, select the Grid
resizes to match block in standard views option.
5 Choose the Grid Display option:
Always show displays the grid, even if you have turned off
snapping to grid.
Always unshow hides the grid even if you have turned on
snapping to grid.
Automatic displays the grid only when you are snapping to grid.
6 Click OK.

File Options dialog
Select Options > File Options from the menu to display the File
Options dialog:
The File Options dialog contains these tabs:

New Files (see page 137)
Existing Files (see page 138)
Database (see page 140)
Browser (see page 143)

New Files tab
You can use the New Files tab of the File Options dialog (see page
136) to specify the default options for new part documents.
Select the default Setup type, Unit of Measure, and Initial stock dialog.
Optionally deselect Always ask when a new document is created.
dialog.
any changes.
Apply — Click the Apply button to save your changes and keep the
dialog open.

Existing Files tab
You can use the Existing Files tab of the File Options dialog (see
page 136) to specify the Tools and Feed/Speed options for existing
files and change the default File Location.
When a part is opened in FeatureCAM:

1 The name of the tool crib that was originally used to create the
file is saved in the .fm file. If there is a tool crib with the same
name in the current installation of FeatureCAM, that tool crib is
made current. If it does not exist, the last opened crib is used.
2 All tools that were explicitly overridden in the part file are copied
to the current crib. These tools are temporary and are available
only when the current part is open.
3 A new crib is created that contains only tools used for that part.
This crib contains tools that were overridden and all tools that
were automatically selected. The crib is called
<filename>_tools_from_last_save. This crib is temporary and is
available only when this part is opened.
4 If Use the tool crib saved with the part document is selected, then
this new crib is the active crib.
If you select Use the tool crib saved with the part document the
part is cut with exactly the same tools. We do not recommend
this if you are going to make modifications to your part
because this small tool crib probably does not have enough
tools to cut additional features.
Feed and speed tables are handled similarly.
1 When a file is saved, the feed/speed tables for the part's material
are saved with the file.

2 If Use the F/S tables saved with the part document is selected, then
this new table is used as your feed/speed database.
3 If Use the F/S tables from FeatureCAM's F/S database is selected,
then the existing databases are used.
The File Location is the default directory for opening, saving, and
importing files. If you specifically set the File Location to a particular
folder, then FeatureCAM starts in that folder whenever you start up
FeatureCAM in the future and FeatureCAM ignores the Start In folder
that is listed in the shortcut to FeatureCAM. The starting folder is
used when you first open, import, or save a part. But if you
navigate to a new folder during your session, then the new folder is
used for subsequent opens, imports, and saves. FeatureCAM uses
the idea of a current working folder, which means that if sometime
during your session you navigate to some other folder to open a
file, then any future opens or saves in that session use the new
folder. But the File Location folder is always used as the starting
folder for the next time you run FeatureCAM.
dialog.
any changes.
dialog open.

Database tab
You can use the Database tab of the File Options dialog (see page
136) to change the location of the database where tool cribs and
feed/speed information is stored. FeatureCAM supports the sharing
of the tool and feed/speed database on a network so that multiple
computers can use the same tool cribs and feed/speed information.
Specify the location of the database:

Local — Select this option to use the database on your PC.
MSAccess (see page 141) — Select this option to use an MS Access
shared network database. Click Browse and browse to the location
of the shared network database.
SQL (see page 142) — Select this option to use an SQL Server
network database. Select the Server Name and the Database Name.
To use SQL authentication, select SQL Server in the Authentication
Mode list and enter your SQL Username and SQL Password. If you
use SQL authentication, the Database Name list only displays
databases to which you have access.
Enter a network path — Enter a valid network path in order to create
a Workgroup configuration (see page 1741).
dialog.
any changes.

dialog open.
MS Access shared network database (SND)

The shared network database is provided as an empty MDB format
database, created by Microsoft Access and accessed using the
Microsoft Jet database driver.
The database must be set up properly before it can be used:
1 Establish a location on your network for the database and copy a
blank database from the FeatureCAM DVD to that location.
2 Fill the database with default tooling and feed/speed information.
Do this by running INITDB on any computer that has access to
the database and point INITDB to the database.
3 Set the location of the database for each user using the Browse
button during installation (see page 1837), or after installation
on the Database tab (see page 140) of the File Options dialog.
To set up a network database on a 64-bit machine:
1 Download the 32-bit Microsoft Access Database driver from
internet. The 32-bit driver needs to be used on both 32 and
64-bit machines.
2 If a 64-bit driver is already installed on the machine (for
example, if you have 64-bit MS Office installed), you must
uninstall it.
Uninstalling the 64-bit driver and installing the 32-bit

driver, could break 64-bit MS Access.
3 Install the 32-bit driver you downloaded in step 1.
4 Open the folder C:\Windows\SysWOW64.
5 Find and run the file odbcad32.exe. The ODBC Data Source
Administrator dialog is displayed.
6 Click Add on the User DSN tab. The Create New Data Source dialog
is displayed.
7 Scroll down, select Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb, *.accdb) and
click Finish. The ODBC Text Setup dialog is displayed.
8 For the Data Source Name option, enter MS Access Database and
click OK. The database is displayed in the list of User Data
Sources on the User DSN tab.

Network database configuration is user-based. If there are
multiple users on the machine, each user must go through the
process above and configure it.
SQL shared network database (SND)

You can use SQL Server for your network database. This gives
better performance and reliability for your network database.
Microsoft SQL Server 2014 Express is a free edition of SQL Server
that you may use to host your Delcam tools and materials database
used by FeatureCAM. It is available in 32-bit and 64-bit editions and
in these languages:
 Chinese  Japanese
(simplified)  Korean
 Chinese  Portuguese
(traditional) (Brazil)
 English  Russian
 French  Spanish
 German
 Italian
When using Microsoft SQL Express to host your FeatureCAM tools
and materials you need a server computer to host the SQL Server
software and the tools/materials database. This server computer
should be a different computer from the client workstations where
users are running FeatureCAM.
The database server can host tools and materials databases

from different versions of FeatureCAM, or different parts of
your organization.
Installation
1 Pick a computer at your facility that you want to host the
FeatureCAM tools and materials database. We'll call this the
database server. The database server must meet these criteria:
 It must be running Microsoft Windows.
 It must be connected to your network.
 It must be able to run Microsoft SQL Server Express 2014.
 You can see system requirements at
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms143506.aspx
(http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms143506.aspx)
2 Find out the hostname of the database server.

3 Download either the Express (Database Only) or Express with
Tools from
http://www.microsoft.com/en-gb/download/details.aspx?id=422
99
(http://www.microsoft.com/en-gb/download/details.aspx?id=422
99). If your database server is a 32-bit Windows, then you'll need
to download the 32-bit version of SQL Server Express. If 64-bit,
then download the 64-bit version instead.
The bitness of your download must match the bitness of the

database server computer, and has nothing to do with the
bitness of your client workstations. You may download the
language of your choice.
4 Install Microsoft SQL Server Express on your database server.
5 From any client workstation using FeatureCAM 2016 R2, find
INITDB in the Start menu and run it.
6 In the Tool and Material Setup dialog, select On a SQL Server and
enter the hostname of the database server computer as the
Server Name.
7 After entering the Server Name, you can select an existing
database on the database server in the Database Name menu, or
create a new one.
8 The first time you run INITDB you can do one of the following:
 Initialize a new database with all the default tools.
 Import tools from another database elsewhere on your
network
 Upgrade an existing database to the latest version of
FeatureCAM and load it with all of the default tooling.
Subsequent client installations default to this choice.
Browser tab
You can use the Browser tab of the File Options dialog (see page
136) to change the default Browser home page.

To change the default Browser home page:
Enter the path to the HTML page you want as the default home
page, or click Browse to browse to where it is saved.
Alternatively you can enter the full URL of any website, for
example http://www.delcam.com.
Default — Click this button to reset the location to C:\Program

Files\Delcam\FeatureCAM\Browser\DefaultFeatureCAMHTMLPage.html
.
Use Blank — Click this button to use a blank page for the default
Browser home page.
dialog.
any changes.
dialog open.
You may need to restart FeatureCAM for the new Browser

home page to take effect.
Parametric modeling
You can use equations in numeric fields in FeatureCAM dialogs. In
parametric mode, the equation is displayed. With parametric
modeling off, the result of the equation is displayed.
To enable parametric modeling, select Parametric Modeling in the
Options menu.

Using add-ins
Add-ins are external scripts and applications that extend the
functionality of FeatureCAM and enable you to perform custom
tasks. Use the Macro Add-ins dialog to specify which add-in you
want to make available for this installation of FeatureCAM.
To work with add-ins:

2 Select the check box of the add-in you want to use. If the add-in
is not listed in the dialog, click Library to load it from the add-in
library (see page 146), or click to load it from file. One or
more buttons may be added to the Macro toolbar.
Use the Customize Toolbars dialog (see page 28) to create

or change an add-in's toolbar button.
3 Deselect the check boxes of the add-ins you do not want to use.
To remove the selected add-in from the list, click .

4 If you want to view or edit an add-in, click . The IDE Editor
(see page 147) is displayed.

To run an add-in, click its button on the Macro toolbar.
Alternatively, select the View > Run Basic Macro menu option, select
the add-in in the Run Macro dialog, and then click Run.
UDF add-ins (see page 857) do not have a toolbar button, you use
them from within the New Feature wizard.
Add-in Library
The Add-in Library dialog lists all the macros and programming
examples that are available with your installation of FeatureCAM.
Use it to view information about an add-in and to specify which
add-ins are available in the Macro Add-ins dialog (see page 145).
To use the Add-in Library:
1 In the Macro Add-ins dialog, click the Library button. The Add-In
Library dialog is displayed.
The left column lists all available macros, categorized by type;

macros already available in the Macro Add-ins dialog are marked
by a check icon.
2 Choose one or more actions:
 To show programming examples in the list, select the Include
programming examples check box.

 To search the list, type a string in the Search box. For
example, to restrict the list to only those macros that include
NCCode in their name, type NCCode.
 To display the Description of a macro, select its entry in the
list.
 To add a macro to the Macro Add-ins dialog, select its entry in
the list and click Load. The entry is marked by a plus icon.
 To remove a macro from the Macro Add-ins dialog, select its
entry in the list and click Unload. The entry is marked by a
cross icon.
3 Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. Loaded
macros are listed in the Macro Add-ins dialog; the unloaded
macros are removed.
Using the Integrated Development Environment (IDE)

FeatureCAM includes an Integrated Development Environment (IDE)
that you can use to edit BASIC programs. Use this dialog to view,
edit, and write subroutines, functions, macros, and add-ins.
To view and edit the code of an existing add-in:

1 Deselect the check box of the macro in the Macro Add-ins (see
page 145) dialog.
You cannot edit a macro that is in use; [run] is displayed in

the title bar of the editor if the macro is running.

2 Select the View > Basic IDE menu option. The IDE Editor is
displayed
3 In the IDE Editor, select File > Open. The Open dialog is
displayed.
4 Select the add-in you want to view and click Open. The add-in
opens in design mode, where you can read and edit the BASIC
code. Comments are prefixed with a ' character.
Probing
The FeatureCAM Probing Add-in enables you to integrate probing
capabilities with your machining processes. Although the details of
adding probing capabilities depend on the machines and probes
selected, the FeatureCAM Probing Add-in provides much of
infrastructure you need and establishes a solid foundation that you
can extend.
With the FeatureCAM Probing Add-in, you add probing features in
the same way that you add other features. Graphical markers show
the location, orientation, and type of each probing feature added. As
design work continues, you can edit probe feature parameters to
match design refinements. Throughout the design cycle, you can
use FeatureCAM's simulation capability to animate the probing
toolpaths along with other tooling sequences. When you are
satisfied with the design, FeatureCAM generates NC code that
includes information needed to interface with probing and machine
hardware. You can add probing features at any stage of the design
process.
Load (see page 145) the StandardProbing2.dll add-in, and click the
StandardProbing2 button in the Utilities toolbar to display the
Probing Settings dialog.

The StandardProbing.dll add-in is the old version of this add-in.
Only use this version if you need backwards compatibility with
probing features created in earlier versions of FeatureCAM
than 21.1.
Default Tool Name — By default, the add-in looks for a lollipop tool,
but you can override that here. Enter a tool name.
Show Overtravel — Select this option to show a representation of the
overtravel in the preview in the graphics window and during
simulation.
Remachine If — Specify the condition under which the machine can
attempt to remachine a feature. This sets the default for the
Remachine If option for Test Abort/Continue/Remachine features.
Enter LT (for Less Than) to remachine features that are too small
such as for Hole features, or enter GT (for Greater Than) to
remachine features that are too large, such as for Boss features.

To create a probing feature, open the New Feature wizard and select
User. Click Next to open the New Feature - User defined feature page:
The probing features are divided into five types. You can create all
of these features in milling and turn/mill documents.
 Measure Boss/Bore (see page 150)
 Measure Boss/Bore 3 Pt (see page 152)
 Measure Corner (see page 154)
 Measure Single Surface (see page 155)
 Measure Web/Pocket (see page 157)
Measure Boss/Bore
The Measure Boss/Bore probe feature probes outside (Boss) or
inside (Bore) from one, two, or four directions. The location of the
feature should be at the level of the top of the Boss or Bore feature.
The Clear Height is above this location and the Measure Height is
below, so the total movement along the Probe Direction is (Clear
Height + Measure Height).
Boss 1 point: Boss 2 point: Boss 4 point:

Bore 1 point: Bore 2 point: Bore 4 point:
Obstructed Bore 1 Obstructed Bore 2 Obstructed Bore 4

point: point: point:
To edit the values on this page:

1 Select the attribute name in the Dimension column.
2 For New Value, enter, pick, or select a value.
3 Click the Set button to save the new value.
Feature Type — Select Boss, Bore, or Obstructed Bore.
Diameter — Enter or pick the diameter of the feature.
Probe Direction — Select the probe direction from the New Value
menu from -X, +X, -Y, +Y, X, Y, or XY.
Standoff Distance — Enter or pick the distance from the start of the
probe stroke to the nominal probe point.
Overtravel — Enter or pick the distance from the nominal probe
point to the end of the probe stroke.
Clear Height — Enter or pick the length of the clear stroke.

Measure Height — Enter or pick the distance the probe descends
below the feature location before probing.
Specify the update options to pass to XBUILD:
update.
Update Parameter — Enter a value to be passed through to XBUILD.
Set — You must click the Set button to save a New Value for the
selected attribute.
Unset — Click this button to return the value of the selected
attribute to its default value.
Measure Boss/Bore 3Pt

The Boss/Bore 3Pt probe feature probes outside (Boss) or inside
(Bore) from three directions specified by the operator. The location
of the feature should be at the level of the top of the Boss or Bore
feature. The Clear Height is above this location and the Measure
Height is below, so the total movement along the Probe Direction is
(Clear Height + Measure Height).
Boss 3 point: Bore 3 point: Obstructed Bore 3
point:

Feature Type — Select Boss, Bore, or Obstructed Bore.
Diameter — Enter or pick the diameter of the feature.
Angle A — Enter the number of degrees from the X axis to the probe
direction.
Angle B — Enter the number of degrees from the X axis to the probe
direction.
Angle C — Enter the number of degrees from the X axis to the probe
direction.
update.

selected attribute.
Measure Corner
The Measure Corner probe feature probes inside or outside a corner
using 2 or 4 probe points. The location of the feature should be at
the corner which is probed. The Clear Height is the distance above
the corner at which to begin the probe stroke and the Measure
Height is the distance below the surface at which the probe touches
(relative to the Probe Direction). The Standoff Distance is the
distance away from the edge on each side, at which the probe
touches.
Corner inside Corner inside Corner outside Corner outside
2 point: 4 point: 2 point: 4 point:


Inside Outside — Select Inside to probe an inside corner or Outside
to probe an outside corner. Click Set to save.
Probe Direction — Select the probe direction from -X-Y, -X+Y, +X-Y,
or +X+Y; and click Set to save.
Points per Side — Select the number of points to probe for each side
of the corner, from 2 or 4.
update.
selected attribute.
Measure Single Surface

The Single Surface probe feature probes a single point along the
direction you specify. The location of the feature should be at the
point where the probe is expected to touch the surface.
Single surface Single surface
Top: Side:

Probe Direction — Select the probe direction from -X, +X, -Y, +Y, or
-Z; and click Set to save.
update.
selected attribute.
1 Unset — Click this button to return the value of the selected

Measure Web/Pocket
The Measure Web/Pocket probe feature probes outside (Web) or
inside (Pocket) along the direction you specify. The location of the
feature should be at the level of the top of the Pocket. The Clear
Height is above this location and the Measure Height is below, so the
total movement along the Probe Direction is (Clear Height + Measure
Height).
Web: Pocket: Obstructed Pocket:

Feature Type — Select the feature type from Web, Pocket, or
Obstructed Pocket. Click Set to save.
Feature Width — Enter or pick the width of the Web of Pocket. Click
Set to save.
Probe Direction — Select the probe direction from -X, +X, -Y, +Y, X,
Y, XY

update.
selected attribute.
Test Abort/Continue
Comment — The comment is output in the NC code at the start of

the test feature.
Result Register — This is where the result of your probing
measurement is placed. For example, if you know that your
machine uses register 510, enter 510 for this value.
Continue Label — Enter the place to jump to in the code if the
program wants to continue after this test feature. You can create a
new jump label using the Test Jump Label (see page 160) feature.

Abort Label — Enter the place to jump to in the code if the program
wants to abort after this test feature. You can create a new jump
label using the Test Jump Label (see page 160) feature.
Test/Abort/Continue/Remachine

the test feature.
Nominal Value — Enter the measurement that you are testing, for
example the diameter of a Bore feature.
Nominal Value Register — This is the register that the machine uses
to store the Nominal Value
Remachine Flag Register — This is the register where the machine
stores the count for the number of times the feature is remachined.
Result Register — This is the register where the machine stores the
result of the probing measurement.
Continue Label — This is the label to jump to, to continue
machining.
Remachine Label — This is the label to jump to, to remachine the
feature.
Temporary Register — This is used to store any temporary logic
needed to process the decision-making feature.

Test Jump Label

the test feature.
Remachine Flag Register — This is the register where the machine
stores the count for the number of times the feature is remachined.
Decision-making example
This example part has many features.
After milling a Face feature, the first Bore feature is milled, then
the second Bore feature , followed by the rest of the features. To
avoid unnecessary machining time, you can probe Bore after it
is cut and make a decision whether to continue, remachine it, or
abort the program, depending on the results of the probe.

1 Create a Test Jump Label feature to start the process.
The NC code for this Test Jump Label feature reads:

(Test Jump Label PROBEOPER TEST_JUMP_LABEL1)
(Start Bore)
#101=0
N11
2 You want the decision-making process to start after the Face
feature, so set the Base priority for the Test Jump Label to 2, and
drag the feature to the correct place in the Part View.
3 Create a Measure Boss/Bore feature to probe Bore1 after it has
been milled.
4 Create a Test Abort/Continue/Remachine feature to control what
happens after the probing. For this example the following values
are set:
Nominal Value 27.000
Tolerance Value 0.050
Continue Label 12
Remachine Label 11 (the value that was set for the starting Test
Jump Label)
Size Error 13
5 Set the Base priority to 5 because you want this to be the 5th
feature (after the Face feature, starting Test Jump Label, Bore1
feature, and Measure Boss/Bore feature).
The NC code for this Test Abort/Continue/Remachine feature
reads:
( Test Abort/Continue/Remachine PROBEOPER
TEST_ABORT_CONTINUE_REMACHINE1 )
(Remachining check conditional)

(Begin decision sequence)
#102=27 (nominal value)
#104=[#102-#510] (signed difference of actual from
nominal)
#103=0.05 (tolerance value)
(Decision 1)
IF [ABS[#104]LT#103] GOTO 12 (within tolerance case)
(Decision 2)
IF [#104LT0]GOTO 13
(Decision 1 and 2 skipped)
[#101=#101+1]
IF [#101EQ1] GOTO 11 (run toolpath again)
DPRNT[Error: Second Required Remachining]
GOTO 99999
(Decision 2 result)
N13
DPRNT[Error: Too Big]
GOTO 99999
(Decision 1 result)
N12
N835 M5 M9
N840 G91 Z0
N845 M01
6 Create an Abort label at the end of the NC code:
7 Set its Base priority to a large number, such as 100.

The NC code for this Test Jump Label feature reads:
( Test Jump Label PROBEOPER TEST_JUMP_LABEL3 )
(Abort)
#101=0
N99999
FeatureCAM to Vericut add-in

VERICUT is an application from CGTech-UK, which enables you to
simulate, fix problems in, and optimize CNC toolpaths for more
efficient machining. Use the FeatureCAMToVericut.bas add-in to
export milling, turning and turn/mill documents as VERICUT
projects.
To export a document as a vericut project:
1 License the Vericut verification product component, and ensure it
is activated in the Evaluation Options dialog.
2 Open the .fm file you want to export.
3 Load the FeatureCAMToVericut.dll add-in (see page 145).
4 In the Post Options (see page 1857) dialog, select the post
processor you want to use.
5 Run a simulation to generate the NC code, and ensure the part
has no errors.
6 Create a UCS in the part to use as the VERICUT machine Attach
component.
 If you want to export multiple setups, you must create an
Attach UCS for each setup. If you do not want to export a
setup from the part, deselect the setup's check box in the Part
View.
 For 5-Axis parts, all the setups are combined, so you need to
create only one Attach UCS.
7 If the part must be moved between setups during simulation,
create a rotational UCS to describe the movement.
8 Click the FeatureCAMToVericut button in the Utilities toolbar.

The FeatureCAM to VERICUT dialog is displayed.
9 Specify the export settings in the FeatureCAM to VERICUT dialog
(see page 165).
10 Click Export and Open in Vericut to export the document and open
it in VERICUT.
The following files and folders are created:

 .vcproject file — VERICUT project file containing all of the
exported data that can be opened in VERICUT.
 .mcd files — G code.
 .tls files — tool library.
 .stl files — all solid models and stock are exported as .stl files.
Names of the .stl files either reflect name of the solid in
FeatureCAM or name of the model (i.e., stock.stl).
 Clamps folder — contains .stl files representing fixture/clamp
models.
 Holders folder — contains .stl files representing tool holders.
 .fcvini file — FeatureCAM to VERICUT project settings file
containing data entered into the form during project export.
 .log file — Export log. Exporting problems are logged in this
file.
If you report a problem with the FeatureCAM to VERICUT
add-in, include the .log file, FeatureCAM .fm file and .cnc files,
VERICUT template, control and machine files.
If you do not have VERICUT installed, select File > Export in the
FeatureCAM to VERICUT dialog to export the document without
opening it in VERICUT.
You can now use VERICUT to simulate the part.

FeatureCAM to VERICUT dialog
Use the FeatureCAM To VERICUT dialog to specify the options for
exporting milling or turn/mill documents as Vericut projects:
Select output directory — Enter the path of the folder in which you
want to save the project, or click Browse to select it.
Exported project will be based upon this VERICUT template — Click
Browse and select a .VcProject file to use as the Vericut template.
The information is loaded from the template into the add-in, such as
the Attach components and the machine subsystems. You must
select a Vericut template before defining the export settings.
Select UCS to use for Cut Stock Transition — If the part must be
moved between setups during simulation, select a UCS from the list
to describe the movement.
Combine setups — Select this option to combine multiple setups into
one. You must select this option for 5-Axis parts.
Settings for setup — Select the setup for which you want to edit the
settings. Edit the settings for each setup you want to export.
Exported setup properties will be based upon this VERICUT template —
To specify a separate Vericut template for each setup, click Browse
and select a template file to use for the selected setup. You can use
this if you are using a different machine for each setup. This does
not affect the global project settings.

Export NC Program — Select this option to generate and export the
NC program with the document. If this is deselected, VERICUT uses
the NC program specified in the template, or you can specify the NC
program manually in VERICUT.
Export Tools — Select this option to export information for all the
tools used in the document. If this is deselected, VERICUT uses the
tools specified in the template, or you can specify them manually in
VERICUT. Click Tool Options to display the Tool Export Options dialog
(see page 167), which you can use to specify the options for
identifying tools in VERICUT.
Establish UCS — Click UCSs to display the UCSs dialog (see page
167), which you can use to specify attach UCSs and Attach
components.
Export initial stock and target part (design) solids — Select Stock and
Design to display the Stock and Design Export Settings dialog (see
page 168), which you can use to specify options for exporting the
stock and part solids.
Export solids as clamps (fixtures) — Click Fixtures to display the
Fixture Export Options dialog (see page 170), which you can use to
specify the clamps and fixtures to export.
Establish work offsets — Click Work Offsets to display the Add Work
Offset dialog (see page 171), which you can use to specify VERICUT
work G code offsets.
Machine turret information — Click this button to display the Machine
Turret Info dialog (see page 172), which you can use to specify the
turret options. This is only available for multi-turret parts.
Menu bar
The menu bar is displayed at the top of the FeatureCAM to VERICUT
dialog. It contains the following options:
 File menu:
 Export — Exports the document and generates the .vcproject
file, without opening VERICUT. You can use this option if you
do not have VERICUT installed on your machine.
 Export and Open in VERICUT — Exports the document and
generates the .vcproject file, opens VERICUT and loads the
exported project.
 Exit — Closes the FeatureCAM to VERICUT dialog.
 Options menu:
 VERICUT — Displays the VERICUT Options dialog, which you
can use to select the location of the VERICUT batch file.

 Tool — Displays the Tool Export Options dialog (see page
167), which you can use to specify the options for identifying
tools in VERICUT.
 Save settings — Saves the dialog settings in the .fm file. This
enables you to close the dialog, edit the part and open the
dialog again without losing the settings you entered.
 Help menu:
 Help — Displays the Help file.
Tool Export Options dialog

Use the Tool Export Options dialog to specify the options for
identifying tools in VERICUT.
To use the Tool Export Options dialog:

1 Select an option to specify how you want VERICUT to recognize
the tools. This option must match the settings of your cnc file's
Tool change format. Select from:
 Tool numbers (positions in the crib) — Use the tool's position in
the tool crib to identify the tools in VERICUT.
 Tool numbers and names — Use the tool number and tool
name to identify the tools in VERICUT.
 Tool IDs — Use the Tool ID specified in the Tool Mapping dialog
(see page 1575) to identify the tools in VERICUT.
 Prefix tool ids with turret identifier (for multi-turret parts) — Select
this option to include the turret identifier before the tool id for
multi-turret parts. This option is not available for Milling parts.
UCSs dialog
Use the UCSs dialog to specify an attach point and Attach
component.
The dialog displays different options for Milling and Turning or
Turn/Mill parts.

Milling parts:
Turning and Turn/Mill parts:
To use the UCSs dialog:

1 In the Select UCS to use as an attach point list, select the
coordinate system to represent the position and orientation of
the stock, design, fixture and clamp models on the machine in
VERICUT.
2 In the Select component to attach UCSs to list, select a component
to represent the Attach component of the machine in VERICUT.
3 For turning and Turn/Mill documents, select an attach UCS and
Attach component for the sub spindle.
Stock and Design Export Settings

Use the Stock and Design Export Settings dialog, which you can use
to specify the options for exporting the stock and part solids.
Turn/Mill parts.

Milling parts:
Turning and Turn/Milling:
To use the Stock and Design Export Settings dialog:

1 To export the stock as an .stl file and use it as a stock model in
VERICUT:
a Select Export Stock solid (.stl file).
b In the Attach component list, select a component to represent
the stock Attach component in VERICUT.
c For Turn/Mill parts, select Attach components for the Main
spindle and Sub spindle.
2 To export a part solid as an .stl file and use it as a Design solid in
VERICUT:
a Select Export Design/Part solid (.stl file).
b In the Solid name list, select the solid you want to export.
c In the Attach component, select a component to represent the
design Attach component in VERICUT.
d For Turn/Mill parts, select Attach components for the Main
spindle and Sub spindle.

Fixture Export Options dialog
Use the Fixture Export Options dialog to specify the clamps and
fixtures to export.
Turn/Mill parts.
Milling parts:
Turning and Turn/Mill parts:
To use the Fixture Export Options dialog:

1 In the Solid list, find the solids you want to export.
2 In the Export list, select Yes next to the solids you want to
export, and select No next to the solids you do not want to
export.

To select multiple solids quickly, select the solids you want to
export in FeatureCAM, then click Select solids selected in the
product to change the Export value for all selected solids to Yes.
Solids which are marked as clamps in FeatureCAM have Yes
selected in the Export list automatically.
3 In the Attach to list, select the component you want to use as the
fixture Attach component in VERICUT.
To apply an Attach component to multiple solids, select an Attach
component in the Attach solids selected in the list to list and click
Apply.
4 For turning parts, in the Spindle list select Main or Sub to specify
the spindle.
To specify the spindle for multiple solids, select a spindle in the
Solids selected in the list are entities of list and click Apply.
Add Work Offset dialog

Use the Add Work Offset dialog to specify VERICUT work G code
offsets, which determines where the G code touch-off points are.
The currently defined work offsets are displayed in the Work offsets
section.
To use the Add Work Offset dialog:

1 In the Offset Name list, select an option to determine the type of
offset table to determine the Table name. Select from:
 Work Offsets — Store the work coordinate system offset
(fixture offset) values.

 Program Zero — Specify the programmed zero location of a G
code NC program file, accounting for tool length
compensation.
2 If Work offsets is selected, enter the corresponding fixture offset
in the Register field (such as 54 for G54, or 55 for G55)
3 In the Subsystem field, enter the machine subsystem ID defined
in the VERICUT machine file.
4 In the 'From' Component list, select the VERICUT machine
component that represents the From point for determining the
program zero offset.
5 In the 'To' CSYS Origin list, select the FeatureCAM UCS that
represents the NC program origin. This is usually the name of the
setup.
6 To:
 create a new offset using the values you entered, click Add
new offset.
 overwrite the selected offset with the values you entered,
click Modify selected offset.
 delete the selected offset, click Delete selected offset.
Machine Turret Info dialog

Use the Machine Turret Info dialog to specify the turret options. This
dialog is only available for multi-turret parts.
To specify the turret options:

1 For each item in the Turret/Spindle list:
a In the Type list, select the turret type.
b In the Subsystem list, select the machine subsystem ID
defined in the VERICUT machine file.

FeatureCAM to NCSIMUL add-in
NCSIMUL machine is an application from Spring Technologies, which
enables you to simulate, fix, and optimize CNC tool paths. Use the
FeatureCAMToNCSIMUL.dll add-in to export milling or turning
documents to NCSIMUL projects.
To export a document to an NCSIMUL project:
1 Install NCSIMUL on your computer and the NCSIMUL tool for
reading FeatureCAM files.
2 Install the FeatureCAMToNCSIMUL.dll add-in. (see page 145)
3 In the milling or turn/mill document, run the simulation and
generate the NC code. Fix any errors.
4 Click the FeatureCAM to NCSIMUL button on the Macros toolbar.
The FeatureCAM to NCSIMUL dialog is displayed.
5 Use the FeatureCAM to NCSIMUL dialog to set the options for
exporting your project.
The options displayed in the dialog depend on the type of part
you are working with:
 Non-indexed part:

 4-axis indexed part:
 5-axis indexed part:
 Select output directory — By default, the NCSIMUL file is saved

in the document folder. To save the file in a different folder,
enter the location and name of the folder, or select Browse to
select it.
 NCSIMUL machine file — Enter the path to the NCSIMUL
machine file, or click Browse to select it.
 Select solids to be exported as clamps — Select any solids you
want to export.

 Post uses to identify tool — Select Tool number or Tool ID to
specify how tools are identified in the post file.
 Machine Zero offset from setup UCS — Enter the distance
between the Setup UCS and the machine table 0.
 Select Setup — For non-indexed parts, select the Setup you
want to export from the menu.
 Select whether post uses — For 5-axis indexed parts with the
NC Code Reference Point set to each Setup's own fixture,
select an option to specify whether the post supports
Individual fixture offset or DATUM shift and rotation.
6 Click Export to export the file. FeatureCAM simulates the part and
exports the program files. When the export is finished, a
message lists the files and their locations.
NCSIMUL always creates a separate project for each Setup in the
document. If the Generate single program option is enabled, the
add-in disables the option, creates the program files, and then
returns the option to its original state.

FeatureCAM to CAMplete TruePath add-in
modify, optimize, simulate and post 5-Axis toolpaths.
To export a document to use with CAMplete TruePath:
1 License the CAMplete verification product component, and ensure
it is selected in the Evaluation Options dialog.
2 In the Post Options dialog, select the CAMplete_TruePath.cnc post
in the /Posts/Mill/5-Axis folder.
3 Load the FeatureCAMToCAMplete.dll add-in (see page 145).
4 In the Utilities toolbar, click FeatureCAMToCAMplete .

The FeatureCAM to CAMplete dialog is displayed.
5 Click Browse and select where you want to save the exported
files.
6 In the Select solids to be exported as clamps list, select solids you
want to export as clamps and fixtures.
You can export multiple clamp and fixture solids.

To mark multiple solids as clamps, select them in the graphics
window and click Select solids selected in the part.
7 Click Export Part solid to export a solid to use as the part in
CAMplete. You can export only one part solid.
 To export a solid in the document as an .stl file, select Select
solid to export as part, and select a solid from the list.
 To use an .stl file, select Select existing .stl file and click
Browse and select it in the Select part .stl file document.
If want to machine a part made of multiple solids, you can

use FeatureCAM's solid modelling to combine (see page
475) them.
8 Select whether you want the post to use the Tool number or Tool
ID to identify tools.
9 Under Offset from the setup UCS to pallet, enter the offset
distances in the X, Y and Z directions.
10 Click Preview to display a point in the graphics window which
shows the offset from the setup UCS.
11 Click Export to export the document and close the dialog. The
files are created in the selected output directory.
Custom setup sheets add-in

You can create custom setup sheets for milling, turning, and
turn/mill parts using the SetupSheet.dll add-in.
The add-in extracts information from the Part Documentation (see
page 70) dialog and enables you to take images for each Setup.
You can use setup sheets to give information to the machine
operator about the manufacturing, tooling, and toolpaths of a part.
To load and run the add-in:
1 Select Options > Add-Ins from the menu.
The Macro Add-ins dialog is displayed.
2 Click the Browse button and browse to the SetupSheet.dll file.
If you installed FeatureCAM in the default location, the file is at
C:\Program Files\Delcam\FeatureCAM\Addins\SetupSheet\SetupSheet.dll.
3 In the Macro Add-ins dialog, in the Add-In Files list, ensure that
the check box to the left of the SetupSheet.dll file address is
selected.
4 Click OK.

The Utilities toolbar is displayed, containing the SetupSheet
button.
5 Click the SetupSheet button to run the add-in.
The Setup Sheet Options dialog is displayed:
The Title, Author, Note 1, Note 2, Company, Part/Drawing No.,

Revision, and Comments values are copied from the
Documentation (see page 70) tab of the Part Documentation dialog
and you can edit them there.
You can use this dialog to capture an image for each Setup in the
current document, as well as an image to represent the whole
document.
To capture an image for a Setup, select the Setup name in the
Setups list and click the Capture Setup Image button to capture the
current contents of the graphics window.
First run a simulation only for the Setup you want to capture
by deselecting other Setups in the Part View; then adjust the
view to show a good orientation of the Setup, and open the
Setup Sheet Options dialog to capture the image in the
graphics window.

You must use a template to create the setup sheets. Click the
Browse Template button to find and set the template you want to
use. There is a template, SetupSheetTemplate.html, in the
Addins\SetupSheet folder.
To create the setup sheets, click the Create Setup Sheets button. The
part is simulated to generate toolpaths and the setup sheet is
displayed in your web browser. You can save the HTML file from
your browser.
To open the setup sheet in the FeatureCAM Browser, select File >
Open from the menu and browse to the setup sheet HTML file.
Turn-curve tolerance add-in

The TurnCurveTolerance.bas add-in enables you to tolerance turned
or internal bore features according to ISO 282-2 standards or
custom tolerances specified in design documents. Use it to quickly
resize features without redrawing the curve.
To adjust a curve:
1 Install the TurnCurveTolerance.bas add-in. (see page 145)
2 Select the turning or internal bore feature in the Part View.
3 In the Macros toolbar, click the add-in's button. The Fillet and
Chamfer Limit dialog is displayed.
4 Enter the size of the largest fillet or chamfer of the feature:

 Diagonals and arcs shorter than or equal to this value are
treated as chamfers and fillets. When neighboring segments
are adjusted, the add-in translates them without changing
their size or orientation.
 Diagonals and arcs longer than this value are treated as
stationary parts of the curve. They affect the tolerance limits
of adjacent segments and are not translated.

5 Click OK. The Tolerance of Turned Segments dialog is displayed,
and the vertical and horizontal segments are labeled in the
Graphic View.

box, and click Set.
segment and its label are displayed in red.

tolerance values.
tolerance in the ISO 286-2 list.

results in the Graphic window. For example:

Mill-curve tolerance add-in
You can use the MillCurveTolerance.bas add-in to resize milling
features quickly to bring them into tolerance, without redrawing the
feature curve.
To use the Mill-curve tolerance add-in:
1 Install the MillCurveTolerance.bas add-in.
2 Select a milling feature created from a curve in the XY plane.
3 In the Utilities toolbar, click the Tolerance button.
The Tolerance of Line Segments dialog is displayed, and the
vertical and horizontal segments are labeled in the graphics
window.

box, and click Set.

segment and its label are displayed in red in the graphics
window, for example:

tolerance values.
results in the graphics window, for example:

Notes
 You can use this only for features created from curves; Bosses,
Chamfers, Grooves, Pockets, Rounds, and Sides.
 If a feature is created from multiple curves, only the first curve is
used.
 Open and closed curves work the same.
 If you enter a tolerance that would break the feature, a message
is displayed explaining the maximum tolerance you can enter for
a segment.
 Non-vertical and non-horizontal lines and curves are translated
to accommodate the tolerance but not altered.
Vortex Milling Calculator add-in

You can use the Vortex Milling Calculator to optimize a vortex
toolpath to reduce the machining time while maintaining the cutting
load on the tool.
You can find the maximum chip thickness based on tooling catalog
input values, and calculate the feedrate and stepover required to
maintain a specified maximum chip thickness.
To use the Vortex Milling Calculator:
1 Install the VortexMillingCalculator.bas add-in. (see page 145)
2 Select a feature for which you want to optimize a vortex
toolpath.
3 In the Utilities toolbar, click VortexMillingCalculator.

The Vortex Milling Calculator dialog is displayed.
The tool information and the toolpath values are extracted from
the document and displayed in the dialog.
4 In the MATERIAL list, select the stock material you are
machining.
5 To calculate the maximum chip thickness, specify the INPUT
VARIABLES and click Calculate.
 Feedrate and Feed/Tooth — This is the Feed value on the F/S
 Speed and Surface Speed — This is the Speed value on the F/S
 Stepover — This is the Distance between cuts value on the
Stepovers tab of the Feature Properties dialog.
 Stepdown — This is the Z increment value on the Milling tab of
A message is displayed that tells you the maximum chip
thickness will be recalculated.

6 To apply an upper limit when calculating the maximum chip
thickness, enter a Maximum Chip Thickness, click Set Max, and
select Do not exceed. The calculated Maximum Chip Thickness will
not exceed this value.
7 To calculate the values required to maintain a maximum chip
thickness, specify a Maximum Chip Thickness and click Calculate.
A message is displayed that tells you the new maximum chip
thickness. Select whether you want to update the feedrate or
stepover to maintain the new maximum chip thickness.
8 Click Apply to update the feature with the new values and update
the toolpath time.
Turning head tool holders

Turning-head tool holders are supported in FeatureCAM, which
machine.
For example, in the image below the piece is machined by the tool
rotating around the stock.

modified Machine Design file (see page 1936) and CNC file to
facilitate the U axis movement.
4-Axis indexing is supported, but 5-Axis positioning is not.
To create a turning head feature:
1 Create a Setup over the center of rotation of the turning head, so
that the tool will rotate about the Setup Z axis.
2 Create a curve in the XZ plane that defines the profile of the
turned shape.

3 Load the TurningHeadCS.dll add-in using the Macro Add-ins
dialog.
click Next.
5 In the Registered features list, under Macro Add-ins, select Turn
Head, and click Next.
The Curves page is displayed.

6 Select the curve in the graphics window and click Add from
selected items .
7 Click Next to display the Location page.
8 Click Next to display the User defined feature page.
9 Specify the parameters to define the feature. To change a

parameter, select the parameter name, select an option in the
New Value list, then click Set.
Profile — Select a curve to define the turning feature profile.

Toolpath Type — Select whether you want to create an Inside
Diameter or Outside Diameter feature.
Rough Stock Curve — Select the curve that defines the toolpath
boundary for the feature. Leave this unset to machine to the
stock boundary.
Rough Pass — Select True to include a rough operation.
Finish Pass — Select True to include a finish operation.
Cycle Type — Select the cycle type.
In a Turn cycle, the roughing tool feeds along the Z axis while
stepping down the X axis.
In a Face cycle, the roughing tool feeds from the outside of the
part to the center while stepping down in the negative Z
direction.
Cut Direction — Select the direction along the Z axis you want to
cut the feature.
U Axis Sign — Select which direction along the U axis the tool is
cutting.
10 Click Finish to create the Turn Head feature and close the dialog.
11 When using two tools on the turning head, create a separate
feature for each tool with opposite U Axis Sign selected.
tool block solid as a tool block for the turning tools.
13 You may need to adjust the Start point and End point on the
Turning tab of the Turn Head Properties dialog for each operation
to ensure the tool does not collide with the part at the start and
end of the toolpath.
14 Run a simulation to check for collisions.

The rotation of the tool is not displayed in the simulation, but the
tool is checked for collisions and gouges. For example, in this
image the tool has gouged with the clamp at , and another
gouge is displayed at .
Nesting add-in
Use the Nesting add-in to nest multiple parts and machine them
from a single stock using PowerSHAPE's nesting tool.
You must have PowerSHAPE open to use the add-in, and you can
only nest parts which have a solid model.
To use the Nesting add-in:
1 Load the Nesting.bas add-in.
2 On the Utilities toolbar, click Nesting .

The Nesting To FeatureCAM dialog is displayed.
3 In the Stock list, select the block in which you want to nest the
parts.
Select an existing block to nest additional parts in a block you
created previously, or select New Block to start a new block.
4 In the fields around the stock diagram, enter the dimensions of
the block in which you want to nest the parts.
5 Enter the Distance between parts to specify the minimum distance
you want to leave between the nested parts on the block.
6 Enter a Text height to specify the height of the text label on each
part.
7 Click Add and use the Open dialog to select the parts you want to
nest.
8 Enter the Quantity to specify how many duplicates of each part
you want to nest in the block.
9 Enter the Priority to determine which parts to nest first. The parts
with lowest Priority are nested first. For parts with the same
Priority, the largest parts are nested first.

10 Enter the Rotation increment to specify the smallest increment by
which the part can be rotated when nesting. You may be able to
fit more parts in a block by reducing the Rotation increment.
11 To remove a part from the dialog, select the row and click Delete.
12 Click OK to nest the parts.
FeatureCAM opens each file and puts all the features in each file
into a group, then adds the features to a new FM file. The solids
are sent to PowerSHAPE and nested using PowerSHAPE's nesting
tool.
When the nesting is completed in PowerSHAPE, a message dialog
is displayed telling you to modify the positions of the parts in
PowerSHAPE if necessary.
13 Modify the position of the parts in POWERSHAPE, then click OK to
close the message dialog.
The positions of the parts are updated in FeatureCAM.
A message dialog is displayed asking if you want to save the
stock.
14 Click Yes to run a 3D simulation and save the stock. This enables
you to nest additional parts in this block later.
You can select saved stocks in the Stock list in the Nesting To
FeatureCAM dialog to nest additional parts in a saved stock.
A message dialog is displayed saying the nesting is completed.
Import vise add-in

Use the Import Vise add-in to import vises into FeatureCAM for 3D
simulation and gouge checking.
To import a vise into FeatureCAM:
1 Load the Import_Vise.bas add-in.
2 On the Utilities toolbar, click Import_Vise.

The Import Vise dialog is displayed.
3 In the Vise list, select the vise you want to import.

A preview of the vise is displayed in the dialog.
Vises
1 Select an option in the Part position in vise list to specify how to
align the part in the vise.
2 Under Part along, select the axis that you want to be
perpendicular to the jaws to specify the orientation of the part in
the vise.
3 Under X offset from position, enter the offset of the part along the
axis parallel to the jaws. You can enter a negative value.
For example, select a Part position in vise of Left and enter a X
offset from position of -1 to extend the part by 1 inch past the left
edge of the jaws.
4 Under Amount of part held, enter the height at which to hold the
part in the vise. If this value is set to 0 it is ignored and the part
is held at the bottom of the vise.
This option is unavailable when using parallels.
5 Under Jaws position, select how you want to position the jaws to
hold the part.
For Selected Solid Faces, Selected Surfaces, and Selected
geometry, select items in the graphics window.
6 For vises with multiple holding positions, select Alternative
holding to use the alternative holding position.
7 To add parallels to raise the part in the vise, select Add parallels
and select the Parallels dimensions from the list.
To add a custom parallel:

a Select Custom in the Parallels dimensions list.
b In the Parallels dimensions list, select Custom.
c Select Metric to enter the dimensions in cm, or deselect it to
enter the dimensions in inches.
d Enter the width (W), length (L), and thickness (T) dimensions.
e Select Save to library to add your custom parallel to the
Parallel dimensions list.
Turning chucks
1 Under Part along, select the axis about which the chuck rotates to
specify the orientation of the part in the vise.
2 Under Z offset from position, enter an offset to raise or lower the
part in the jaws.
3 Under Part length from Jaws Faces, enter the length of part you
want to extend past the top of the jaws.
4 Under Jaws position, select how you want the jaws to hold the
part.
For Selected Solid Faces, select solid faces in the graphics
window.
5 Select the Jaws types you want to use.

You may find the Setup Activate add-in (see page 194) useful when
using the Import vise add-in. You can use the Setup Activate add-in
to automatically hide vise solids associated with the non-active
setup.

You can use the SetupActivate.bas add-in to automatically hide
unnecessary solids when switching between setups.
To use the Setup Activate add-in:
1 Load the SetupActivate.bas add-in (see page 145) using the
Macro Add-ins dialog.
2 Add the name of a setup to the start of a solid's name, such as
setup1_solid1.
3 Select a setup in the Part View.
Solids which have this setup at the start of their name are
displayed.
Solids which have another setup at the start of their name are
hidden.
Errors and warnings

Because only one stage is displayed at a time, an error may occur in
another stage in the document, but does not appear in the
operation sheet currently displayed.
FeatureCAM does not switch stages to take you to the first

error.
A single problem often results in multiple errors. When multiple
errors occur, you should fix the tooling errors and regenerate the
toolpaths. In many cases, the other errors are resolved.
Warnings are also shown in the operation sheet, but do not prevent
FeatureCAM from continuing to generate toolpaths. FeatureCAM
does not draw attention to the warnings it gives because the tool
path generation was successful.
Manufacturing errors occur when FeatureCAM is unable to complete
the toolpath generation for a part. When an error occurs, you
cannot run any simulation, post to NC code, or save NC code. Errors
are displayed between lines of asterisks (*) in the Operation Details
sheet listed after the operation in which the error occurred. Errors
are displayed in the Op List tab with a red exclamation point icon
in the left margin and warnings are marked with exclamation point
on a yellow triangle icon.
If an error is detected during toolpath generation, the Code
generation failed dialog is displayed.

If you click Yes in this dialog, the first error in the operations list is
highlighted. If you click No, the errors still appear in the operations
list, but you must explicitly ask to step through the errors by
clicking Next Error.
If an error occurs during toolpath generation, three error buttons
display in a separate toolbar in the left-hand corner of the window
to enable you to read and fix the errors. The buttons perform the
following functions:
Selects the next error in the operations list.
Selects the previous error in the operations list.

Provides options for fixing the error that is selected.
If you click Hint while an error is selected in the Manufacturing
Operations Sheet, a series of dialogs appears to help you fix the
error.
Troubleshooting 3D toolpaths
Troubleshooting Z level roughing (see page 760)
Troubleshooting isoline milling (see page 772)
Troubleshooting projection milling methods (see page 747)
Troubleshooting Z level finishing (see page 771)
Warning codes
Code Cause Suggested Action

DCT02W Bottoming tap required for 1 Accept
this feature. 2 Modify feature
TPAFITW Arc fitting is incompatible Use linear output options.
with:
 3D cutter comp
 5-axis non-ball-end tool
 Normal to surface lead-in
 Z level finish scallop
stepover
 Steep and shallow
finishing
TPL01W Start point attribute not set Set Start point attribute.
for canned cycle for rough or
finish pass.

TPL02W Improperly defined stock Define stock curve.
curve. Stock curve is a point
or is undefined somehow.
TPL03W Profile lies outside stock Define feature curve.
boundary. No feature curve
defined or feature curve
does not overlap with stock
curve.
TPL04W Ignoring improperly Change start point.
specified start point.
TPL05W Ignoring improperly Change end point.
specified end point.
TPL06W Ignoring Tool Nose Radius Select Enable Cut Comp in
Compensation. Cutter comp Post Options (see page
is enabled for the feature 1857).
but disabled in Post Options
(see page 1857).
TPL07W Undercut detected. Unable
to completely rough feature
with this tool.
TPL08W Undercut detected. Unable
to completely finish feature
with this tool. Operation did
not completely cut the
feature, some material
remains.
TPP01W Can’t extend ends of 1 Use smaller endmill.
toolpath. The lead in/out 2 Change lead distances or
distances cannot be applied angles (see page 985).
to an open toolpath, 3 Set a plunge point (see
because it would result in a page 994).
gouge. No lead- in/out
moves are applied to the
toolpath.
Note this can result in a

posting error if you are
using cutter compensation.

TPP02W Can’t find ramp-in arc. The 1 Use smaller endmill. See
ramp-in arc cannot be How to change tools.
applied to a closed toolpath, 2 Change stepovers (see
gouge. No ramp-in moves 3 Set a plunge point (see
are applied to the toolpath. page 994).

TPP03W Can’t find ramp-out arc. The 1 Use smaller endmill. See
ramp-out arc cannot be How to change tools.
applied to a closed toolpath, 2 Change stepovers (see
gouge. No ramp-out moves 3 Set a plunge point (see
are applied to the toolpath. page 994).

TSD02W Could not find a spiral tool, Do one of:
substituting with a gun  Accept
style.  Copy tool from another
crib.
 Create a tool.
 Override with a different
tool.
 Select a different crib.
 Modify feature.
TSD12W Could not find a plug tool, Do one of:
substituting a bottoming tap  Accept
 Copy tool from another
crib.
 Create a tool.
tool.
 Modify feature.
TSH11W Tool must be ground before Grind tool.
use, slotting operation.

TSI02W This tool must be adjusted Adjust diameter prior to
by operator for correct running part.
diameter--. boring operation
TSJ11W Tool must be ground before Grind tool.
use, zigzag operation
TSK03W Tool can’t cut round. Do one of:
tool.
crib.
 Create a tool.
 Modify feature.
TSK11W Tool must be ground before Grind tool.
use, profile milling
operation.
TSK12W Chamfer tool cannot cut Do one of:
chamfer.  Override with a different
tool.
crib.
 Create a tool.
 Modify feature.
TSK22W Counter sink tool cannot cut Do one of:
chamfer  Override with a different
tool.
crib.
 Create a tool.
 Modify feature.
TSK42W Facemill cannot cut Select a Face Mill tool with
Chamfer. The angle of the a suitable chamfer angle.
chamfered Face Mill tool is
not suitable for cutting the
Chamfer feature.

Error codes
If an error code is suffixed SE, it is a soft error. A soft error
does not prevent you from running a simulation and
generating NC code, but it does prevent you saving the NC
code (the File > Save NC menu option is unavailable). You
should not use NC code containing soft errors.
Code Cause Suggested Action

DCT01 Feature was unable to be Fix tool selection error.
decomposed.
FS001 Feed/speed table not found Do one of:
for the given operation.  Add a new feed/speed
table.
 Override the feeds and
speeds.
 Select a different tool.
FS002 Feed/Speed table not found Do one of:
for the given operation. This  Add a new feed/speed
error indicates that a BRIGHT table.
tool material table could have  Override the feeds and
been used but was unable to speeds.
find it.
 Select a different tool.
FST01 Feeds and speeds were not Fix tool selection error.
computed because a tool was
not available.
TPD03 Successive moves on the Check feature curve.
same line
TPD04 Feature curve cannot end Look at boundaries or feature
inside stock boundary curve.
TPD12 Geometric error while Check to see if the curve has
computing turning offsets. any unnecessarily small
segments.
TPD14 Tool insert is too large to cut Change selected tool
curve cleanly.
TPD18 No cutting area determined Check feature or stock curve.
TPD19 The Feature's curve Start point Move the Start point or End
or End point is in the stock point.
material.

TPD21 Unable to determine area to Check feature curve or stock
be machined. curve.
TPD22 Unable to cut in the specified Cut in a different direction.
direction.
TPD52 Illegal value for cut depth. Check depth feature
parameter.
TPD54 First infeed is too small Check threading parameters.
TPD56 Second infeed is too small Check threading parameters.
TPD58 Memory overflow Contact distributor.
TPD60 Depth is smaller than infeed Check threading parameters.
TPD61 Check retract/engage angles Change parameters
and depth
TPD64 Tool undefined Change tool.
TPD65 Illegal value of engage or Change parameters.
withdraw angle
TPD66 Illegal tool shape Adjust tool.
TPD67 Tool wider than slot Change tool.
TPD68 Slot deeper than max tool Change tool or slot
depth parameters.
TPD69 Unable to verify, check path Check feature curve.
TPD70 Check tool diameter value Check tooling parameters.
TPD71 Check zstep value Check feature parameters.
TPDMK Library error Check that the tool being used
01 is not too big, or that the
curvature of the edge is not
smaller than the tool being
used.
TPSRF Bad surface(s) Try to fix the bad surfaces by
01 right-clicking on them and
selecting Fix Face from the
context menu; or remove
them from the Surface
feature.

TSA01 Tool not found for standard Do one of:
drilling operation  Copy a tool from drilling
operation another crib.
 Create a tool.
 Override with another tool.
 Modify feature.
TSA02 Tool not found for drilling Do one of:
operation before ream.  Copy a tool from drilling
 Create a tool.
 Modify feature.
TSB01 Tool not found for spotdrilling Do one of:
operation.  Copy a tool from drilling
 Create a tool.
 Modify feature.
TSC01 Tool not found for reaming Do one of:
 Create a tool.
 Modify feature.
TSD01 Tool not found for tapping Do one of:
 Create a tool.
 Modify feature.

TSE01 Countersink tool not found for Do one of:
chamfer operation.  Copy a tool from drilling
 Create a tool.
 Override (see page 981)
with another tool.
 Select a different crib (see
page 1745).
 Modify feature.
TSF01 Tool not found for countersink Do one of:
 Create a tool.
with another tool.
 Modify feature.
TSG01 Tool not found for Do one of:
counterbore operation.  Copy a tool from drilling
 Create a tool.
with another tool.
 Modify feature.
TSH01 Tool not found for slotting Do one of:
 Create a tool.
 Modify feature.
TSH02 Selected tool not valid for Do one of:
slotting operation.  Copy a tool from drilling
 Create a tool.
 Modify feature.

TSI01 Tool not found and unable to Do one of:
create a custom tool for  Copy a tool from drilling
boring operation. operation another crib.
 Create a tool.
 Modify feature.
TSJ01 Tool not found for zigzag Do one of:
 Create a tool.
 Modify feature.
TSK01 Endmill tool not found for Do one of:
profile milling operation.  Copy a tool from drilling
 Create a tool.
 Modify feature.
TSK02 Selected tool not valid for Do one of:
profile chamfering operation.  Copy a tool from drilling
 Create a tool.
 Modify feature.
TSK03 Tool not found for profile Do one of:
rounding operation.  Copy a tool from drilling
 Create a tool.
 Modify feature.
TSK42 Unchamfered Face Mill tool Select a chamfered Face Mill
selected for chamfer tool or a Chamfer Mill tool.
operation.

TSM01 Tool not found for profile Do one of:
milling operation during  Copy a tool from drilling
decomposition of the feature. operation another crib.
 Create a tool.
 Modify feature.


Stock
The Stock is the material block from which you machine the part.
This can be a basic shape, or a detailed solid model (see page 223).
Use these methods to define the stock:
 Click the Stock step in the Steps panel to display the Stock
wizard (see page 205)
 Double-click the stock in the graphics window to display the
Stock Properties dialog (see page 220)
Stock models
You can use stock models (see page 266) to eliminate air cutting by
limiting the toolpath boundaries where a previous feature has
already been machined.
Stock wizard
The Dimensions (see page 207) page of the Stock wizard is
displayed automatically when you create a new part file:

To display the Stock wizard, click the Stock step in the Steps
panel.
The Stock wizard helps you specify the shape (see page 207), size
(see page 207), and material (see page 209) of the Stock, control
multi-axis positioning (see page 211), and create an initial Setup
(see page 212).
Finish stock button

The Finish button closes the Stock wizard and creates the stock you
defined. Click the down arrow to specify how the button works.
Finish
Select the Finish option to accept the default settings in the
remaining pages of the wizard, create the Stock, and exit the
wizard. You can edit the Stock attributes later in the Stock
Properties (see page 220) dialog.
Finish and Edit Properties

Select the Finish and Edit Properties option to open the Stock
Properties (see page 220) dialog, which contains the properties you
specified in the wizard, and other, advanced attributes.
To display the Stock Properties (see page 220) dialog when creating
Stock:
1 Click the down arrow in the Finish button. The menu is

displayed:
2 Select Finish and Edit Properties. The Stock Properties (see page
220) dialog is displayed.
The Finish button remembers your last preference and the

icon changes to or to indicate the current
mode.

Dimensions
The first page of the Stock wizard (see page 205) is the Dimensions
page. Use this page to set up the shape and size of your stock.
The following stock shapes are available:

Block: Round: N-Sided:

1 Select the stock shape as Block, Round, or N-Sided.
 If you selected Block — Enter the Length (X dimension), Width
(Y dimension), and Thickness (Z dimension).
 If you selected Round — Select the Axis (see page 208) and
enter the Length and OD (outside diameter). If you are
working with tube stock, enter a positive number as the ID
(inside diameter).

 If you selected N-Sided — Enter the Axis (see page 208), the
OD (outside diameter), the number of Sides, and the Length
of your stock.
You can skip this step and use the Stock Wizard (see page
205) later to define the stock.
If you are running the offline version of FeatureCAM, you

also have the option of automatically resizing the stock.

If you want to use a Curve or a Solid to define the stock,
use the Stock Properties (see page 220) dialog.
2 Click Next to display the Stock - Material (see page 209) page of
the Stock wizard, or click Finish (see page 206).
Axis
For Round and N-Sided stock, the axis that corresponds to the
length of the stock is specified as the Axis.
Z axis: Y axis: X axis:
Select Axis: Z for Select Axis: Y for Select Axis: X for

all turning, all 4th axis all 4th axis
turn/mill parts or wrapping parts wrapping parts
milling parts where the Y axis where the X axis
where you want is the wrapping is the wrapping
the XY plane to axis. axis.
correspond to the
face of the part.
See also 4th-axis wrapping (see page 243)

Material
The second page of the Stock wizard (see page 205) is the Material
page:
This dialog is where you choose the material type for the stock.
Advanced users can also add new materials or view feed/speed
tables.
Material — Select a material from the list to view or edit its settings.
You can use the Show/Hide Material (see page 1512) dialog to
specify which materials are displayed in the Material list.
Unit Horsepower or Specific Cutting Force (see page 210) — A default
value is displayed for the selected material, or you can enter a new
value for the material.
Hardness (see page 210) — A default Hardness is displayed for the
selected material. If you know the specific hardness of the material,
enter the numeric value in the Hardness field and then select the
Hardness Units that the hardness is measured in.
For some materials, the hardness is used in determining feeds

and speeds. If you underestimate this value, the
automatically generated feeds and speeds could be overly
aggressive.
Hardness Units — The scale the hardness setting is based on. The
supported scales are Brinell, Rockwell B, Rockwell C, and Tensile
Strength (ksi). Brinell is the default hardness scale.
New Material button — Displays the New Material Name dialog. Enter
the name of the new material and click OK. If the material does not
have an entry in the database, a warning is displayed. If you want
to create a new material click Yes to add feed and speed
information for the material. The Feeds/Speeds And Cutting Data
Tables dialog is displayed.

F/S Tables — Click this button to open the Feeds/Speeds and Cutting
Data Tables (see page 1847) dialog.
Click Next to open the Multi-axis positioning (see page 211) page, or
click Finish (see page 206).
Unit Horsepower or Specific Cutting Force

The power needed to perform a cut is based on the rate the
material is being removed and a power constant that is dependent
on the material. This constant is known as the Unit Horsepower or
Specific Cutting Force. In FeatureCAM, this number is used to
generate horsepower estimates for operations. These estimates are
displayed in the Op Details report. If you enter an inaccurate value
for the Unit Horsepower, no error is generated. The only
consequence is that incorrect horsepower estimates are displayed.
For materials that are pre-defined in FeatureCAM, an approximate
value is supplied that is independent of a material's hardness. For
many materials, the Unit Horsepower is dependent on the hardness
of the material, so you may have to adjust this constant to get
more accurate horsepower estimates. A list of specific Unit
Horsepower values can be found in a machinist's handbook. For
defining new material tables, the Unit Horsepower constant must be
supplied by the user.
Hardness
When you select a material name, the Hardness value displayed is
low end of the defined hardness range for that material (if the
material uses a range). Adjust the hardness to reflect the actual
hardness of your material in the field. The feeds and speeds
calculated for your part are influenced by the hardness of your
material, but only if the material is defined using a hardness range
(see page 1850).

Multi-axis positioning
You can use the Multi-axis positioning page of the Stock wizard (see
page 205) to specify if you are creating your part with 4th-axis
indexing or 5th-axis positioning.

1 If you are not using 4th-milling or 5th-axis milling, select No, and
click Next.
The Setup - Definition (see page 212) page is displayed.
2 If you are using multi-axis positioning:
 If you are using 4th-axis positioning, or 4th-axis wrapping
select 4th-Axis Positioning, then select the axis you index
around. See Indexing (see page 234) or 4th-axis wrapping
(see page 243) for more information.
 If you are using 5th-axis positioning, select 5th-Axis
Positioning. See 5-axis positioning (see page 256) for more
information.
3 Click Next.
The Multi-axis options (see page 211) page is displayed.
Multi-axis options
On the Multi-axis options page of the Stock wizard, you can specify
options for 4th-axis wrapping and indexing and 5th-axis positioning.
This page is only displayed if you selected 4th Axis Positioning

or 5th Axis Positioning in the Multi-axis positioning (see page
211) page.
To complete this page for 4th-axis milling:

1 Select the dominance from:
 Tool Dominant — If you want the order of operations to be tool
dominant across all Setups, select this option.

You must also select Minimize tool changes in the
Automatic ordering options dialog (see page 1553) for
Tool Dominant to work correctly.
 Setup Dominant — If you want the order of operations to
complete each Setup before moving on to another Setup,
select this option. The milling ordering attributes determine
the order in which operations are performed within a Setup.
Select Generate Single Program if you want to create a single
5-axis indexed program.
2 Click Next.
The Setup - Definition (see page 212) page is displayed.
To complete this page for 5th-axis milling:

1 If you want to use fixture offsets, follow steps 2-6 here (see
page 265).
2 If you want to use a single coordinate system, follow steps 2-6
here (see page 263).
See Overview of 5-axis positioning (see page 256) for more
information.
Setup - Definition
Use the Setup - Definition page of the Stock wizard (see page 205) to
name the Setup and specify the fixture ID.
Setup Name — Enter a name for the Setup. This name is used only
as a label for the Setup.

Fixture ID — Verify the Fixture ID for the Setup. The default value
should be correct because it is taken from the current *.cnc post
processor template file. If the default value is not correct, enter the
correct value.
Part Name — Optionally enter a different Part Name for the part. This
defaults to the file name, but you may need to override this for
Fanuc controls to give the part a numeric part name.
Multi-axis Setups have these attributes:

irregular shape.

For example:

operations.
Select from:
Click Next to open the Setup - Part Program Zero (see page 214)
page, or click Finish (see page 206).
Setup - Part Program Zero
You can use the Part Program Zero page of the wizard to select a
method of specifying part program zero. This is the origin of the
coordinate system for the NC program.
To complete this page, select one of the options and click Next.
 Align to Stock Face (see page 215) — Select this option if you
want to align the Setup with the center or corner of one of the
Stock faces, or to explicitly pick a location.
 Align to Index axis (see page 216) — Select this option to align
the Setup with the index axis. (This option is available only for a
turn/mill or 4th-axis indexed (see page 211) part.)

 Align with existing UCS (see page 216) — Select this option if you
want to align the Setup with a previously created user coordinate
system (UCS).
 Align to part geometry (see page 217) — Select this option if you
want to align the Setup relative to the part geometry.
 Use current location — Select this option if you want to leave the
Setup at its current location. Click Next to open the Setup -
Simulation information (see page 219) page, or click Finish (see
page 206).
See Overview of setups (see page 114) for more information on
part program zero.
Align to Stock Face
Align to Stock Face enables you to align the part program zero to a
face on the Stock.
1 In the Stock Face section, select the face that you want to use.
2 In the XYZ Location section, either click the Pick location button
and select the location on the model or click the pointing finger
button that corresponds to either the Center of the stock or
one of the corners:
 UL — upper left corner
 UR — upper right corner
 LL — lower left corner
 LR — lower right corner

3 Click Next to open the Setup - Part Program Offset (see page 218)
page, or click Finish (see page 206).
Align to Index axis

The Part Program Zero page (see page 214) of the Stock wizard (see
page 205) for Align to Index axis enables you to specify the origin of
the stock for a turn/mill or 4th-axis indexed part.

1 If you want to translate the origin off the axis, enter the Radius
from rotation axis.
2 If you want to rotate the coordinate system around the Stock
axis (see page 235), enter an Angular location.
3 Enter an X Offset if you want to translate the coordinate system
along the X axis.
4 Click Finish (see page 206).
Align with existing UCS
This page enables you to align the part program zero with an
existing user coordinate system.

1 Select the name of the UCS from the list or click the Pick UCS
button and select it from the graphics window.
2 Click Next to go to the Part Program Offset (see page 218) page
or click Finish.
Align to part geometry

If you select Align to part geometry on the Part Program Zero page
(see page 214) of the Stock wizard (see page 205), the Pick Initial
Setup Z Direction page is displayed:
Click one of the buttons to specify the Setup's Z direction using the
method listed.
Click Next and the Pick Initial Setup X Direction page is displayed.
Click one of the buttons to specify the Setup's X direction using one
of the methods listed.

Click Next and the Pick Setup XYZ Location page is displayed:
If you are using the center of a revolved surface, you can click
Opposite End to create the Setup at the other end of the cylinder.
Click Finish (see page 206).
Setup - Part Program Offset
This page enables you to translate the location of the Setup. One
reason to translate the Setup is to model the extra stock on top of
the part that is removed during a facing operation. You may also
want to translate it to a location that you cannot easily snap to.
1 If you want to translate the stock, enter the amount to offset the
stock as the X Offset, Y Offset, and/or Z Offset.
2 Click the Preview button if you want to review the new location of
the Setup.
3 Click Next to open the Setup - Simulation information (see page
219) page, or click Finish (see page 206).

Setup - Simulation Information
Use this page of the wizard to specify an offset for loading the part
onto the machine and select the machine design file that is used for
Machine Simulation.
This dialog is available in these places:
 In the Stock wizard
 In the Setup wizard
 From the Status bar
The X Offset, Y Offset, and Z Offset parameters represent offsets for

loading the part onto the machine. For simulating single milling or
turning setups these offsets are applied to the setup after the part
is aligned with the top-most location (see page 1912). For indexed
parts or turn/mill parts, the offset is relative to the stock axis.
Under Simulation machine design file, select Always use this one to
specify an MD file to use for this setup, or select Use the one
specified in the .cnc file to inherit the MD file from the CNC file for
this setup.
If you select an MD that does not exist, or the CNC file refers to an
MD file that does not exist, FeatureCAM selects an appropriate MD
file from the Examples\Machine Design folder.
made.

Setup - Right Angled Head
1 Select the option on this page if you want to allow the creation of
features that can be cut only with a right-angled tool holder.
Stock Properties dialog

You can use either the Stock wizard (see page 205) or the Stock
Properties dialog to set up the stock. The Stock Properties dialog
contains all the same options as the Stock wizard.
Use one of the following methods to display the Stock Properties
dialog:
 Right-click the stock in the Part View panel and select Properties
 Double-click the stock in the Part View panel.
 Right-click the stock in the graphics window and select Properties
 Double-click the stock in the graphics window.

By default, the stock is displayed in blue in the graphics
window.
The Stock Properties dialog contains two tabs:

Dimensions (see page 222)
Indexing (see page 229)

Dimensions tab (Stock)
You can use the Dimensions tab of the Stock Properties dialog (see
page 220) to specify the size, shape, material and location of the
stock.
To complete the Dimensions tab:

1 Select the stock shape from the following:
 Block — Enter the Length (X dimension), Width (Y dimension),
and Thickness (Z dimension).
 Round — Select the Axis and enter the Length and OD
(outside diameter). If you are working with tube stock, enter
a positive number as the ID (inside diameter).

 N-sided — Enter the Axis, the OD (outside diameter), the
number of Sides and the Length of your stock.
 User-defined (see page 223) — Click Stock Solid to display the
Select Stock Solid dialog.
2 Optionally click Stock Curve (see page 224) to display the Select
Stock Curve dialog, where you can select a curve in the model to
describe a custom profile stock of the part.

3 If you created or imported geometry, the Resize button is
displayed. Optionally click Resize to resize the stock
automatically. The Stock Dimensions (see page 226) wizard is
displayed.
4 Optionally click Material to display the Material dialog. This
contains the same options as the Material page (see page 209) of
the Stock wizard.
5 If you want to move the stock, enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates
of the new location or click Pick Location and select a point in
6 If the part is a Wire EDM part, the Condition button is displayed.
Click Condition to display the Condition dialog (see page 228),
which you can use to specify the material, wire properties, and
machine type.
User-defined stock
You can use a solid to define the shape of the stock.
To use a stock solid:
1 Double-click the stock in the graphics window or Part View to
display the Stock Properties dialog.
2 On the Dimensions tab (see page 222) of the Stock Properties
dialog, select User defined.
3 Click Stock Solid to display the Select Stock Solid dialog.
A list of solids is displayed. To display all solids in the model,
select Show all.
4 Select a solid in the list, or click Pick Solid and select a solid
5 Click OK to close the Select Stock Solid dialog.
6 Click OK to close the Stock Properties dialog.
If you create Side or Boss features when using a stock solid, the
toolpaths are trimmed to the stock boundary to prevent air cutting,
even when the stock solid has multiple regions.

For example, to machine this part:
The stock is a cylinder with a hole, and a Side feature is created.
In the 2D simulation top view, you can see the toolpaths are
trimmed to the stock solid, the tool does not cut across the hole in
the stock:
If you enable the Individual rough levels (see page 963) option, each
z-level of the toolpath is trimmed to the stock boundary separately,
which further prevents air cutting.
Stock curve
You can use the Select Stock Curve dialog to specify a curve to
define the shape of the stock.

To display the Select Stock Curve dialog, click Stock Curve on the
Dimensions tab (see page 222) of the Stock Properties (see page
220) dialog:
Compute the Stock Boundary from the block stock — This is the
default option and uses the block stock.
Use a Curve as the Stock Boundary — Select this option to use a
curve as the Stock Boundary and select a curve (see page 59) to
use as the stock boundary. You can use this method to define the
shape of irregular shaped stock, so the toolpaths do not air cut in
regions without stock.
Show all curves — Select this option to display all available curves in
the list.
More about Stock curves

Stock curves must be closed and lie in the world XY plane. You may
use a full circle, but only a single curve or circle can be selected.
Also, the curve must not self-intersect, although FeatureCAMdoes
not detect this condition.
A stock curve is the default stock boundary for features on the top
and bottom of the stock. For simplicity and flexibility, the stock
curve should meet the positive X and Y axes. This location lets you
easily calculate the width and length of the stock curve extent and
position the origin at the corner of those rectangular extents.
To work from the sides of the stock, the Width and Length of the
block stock must be set manually. They are measured from the
world origin. If the stock curve's extents do not align with the world
origin, the length and width settings will not match the stock curve's
location and dimensions.
Because of the nature of stock defined by a curve, aligning a UCS to
custom stock ignores the stock curve and works with the
rectangular extents.

Stock Dimensions wizard
You can use the Stock Dimensions wizard to resize the stock to fit
objects in the model.
To display the Stock Dimensions dialog, clicking Resize on the
Dimensions tab (see page 222) of the Stock Properties (see page
220) dialog.
The first page of the wizard has columns which display the size of
the Imported Data (or created geometry), the Stock Dimensions, and
the Offset of the imported data. The first column always shows you
the dimensions of the data that is currently displayed in the
graphics window. The other two columns differ depending on the
type of stock.
Block stock
If you select Enter specific stock dimension, enter the Length, Width
and Thickness of the stock in the Stock Dimensions column. You can
also offset the part relative to the stock by entering the X offset, Y
offset, and Z offset in the Offset imported data column. Optionally
click the Center button, to move the part to the center of the stock.

If you select Compute stock size from the size of the part, the stock is
automatically sized to fit the part.
You can enter Extra stock size for any dimension.

Click Next to open the next page of the wizard and select one of the
following options:
Move geometry — Select this option to move the geometry in
relation to the stock.
Move stock — Select this option to move the stock in relation to the
geometry.
Round and N-sided stock

For these two stock shapes, your only choice is to Enter specific
stock dimensions. In the Stock Dimensions column, enter the stock
dimensions and in the Offset column enter offsets for translating the
part relative to the stock.
For all stock shapes, this page addresses only the size of the
stock. It does not affect the part programming origin.

Condition dialog (WIRE)
Use the Condition dialog to specify the machine configuration for the
stock. The combination of parameters determines the feed, water
and cutter compensation values selected from the cut-data
database.
To specify the machine condition:

1 In the Stock Properties dialog, select the Dimensions tab, and
click Condition. The Condition dialog is displayed.
2 Select a list option for each parameter supported by your
machine:
 Material specifies the stock material. Alternatively, click to
create a new material.
 Wire specifies the wire type. Alternatively click to create a
new wire.
 Wire diameter specifies the wire diameter. Alternatively, click
to create a new wire diameter.
 Machine specifies the machine type. Alternatively, click to
create a new machine.
 Nozzle position specifies a nozzle position. Alternatively, click
to specify a new position.
 Fluid specifies the dielectric fluid. Alternatively, click to
specify the fluid.
If you are not setting the Feed, water and cutter

compensation registers (see page 1509) from a cut-data
database, you need only specify the Wire diameter. The
value is used to determine the width of the cut in the 3D
simulation.
3 If you want to check the machine settings for this condition or
want to specify the machine settings for a new combination of
parameters, click Cutting Data. The Feeds/Speeds and Cutting Data
Tables dialog (see page 1847) is displayed.

4 Click OK or Next to save your changes.
Indexing tab (Stock)

You can use the Indexing tab of the Stock Properties dialog (see
page 220) to control multi-axis indexing:
No multi-axis positioning — Select this option to perform no

indexing.
For turn/mill or turn parts select Generate Single Program with
program stop between each setup (see page 230) if you are using a
sub-spindle to change between each Setup.
For milling and Wire EDM parts select Generate Single Program with
program stop between each setup (see page 230) if you need to stop
the machine to turn the part around and machine on both sides.
4th-axis positioning — Select this option to perform 4-axis indexing
(see page 234).
Index axis UCS — Select the UCS whose index axis you want to
use for 4th-axis indexing.
5th-axis positioning (5AP (see page 10)) — Select this option to
perform 5-axis positioning (see page 256).

Click Fixture Location to display the 5 Axis Fixture Location dialog
(see page 230), which you can use to specify a reference point
for the NC code.
Use Z-indexing — Enable 5 axis Z-indexing (see page 232) for the
document.
For turn/mill parts, you must select 4th Axis Positioning.
Operation Ordering — select the dominance from:

You must also select Minimize tool changes in the Automatic

ordering options dialog (see page 1553) for Tool Dominant
to work correctly.
complete each Setup before moving on to another Setup, select
this option. The milling ordering attributes determine the order in
which operations are performed within a Setup.
Generate Single Program with program stop between each setup

Generate Single Program with program stop between each setup is an
option on the Indexing tab (see page 229) of the Stock Properties
dialog.
This option combines the toolpaths of all Setups into a single Setup.
This means that when simulating the toolpaths, the toolpaths from
all Setups are displayed and a single NC program is created. This
option must be set if you are using a Sub-spindle (see page 843). If
this option is deselected a separate NC file is created for each
Setup.
If Generate Single Program with program stop between each setup is
selected, FeatureCAM inserts a stop operation between each Setup.
This enables the part to be flipped and machined on both sides
within a single NC program. For a turn or turn/mill document, the
stop operation is created if the Setups are on the same spindle and
oriented opposite to each other. For a milling document, the Setups
can be in any orientation.
5 Axis Fixture Location dialog

You can use the 5 Axis Fixture Location dialog to specify a reference
point for the NC code.

To display the 5 Axis Fixture Location dialog, select 5th-axis
positioning on the Indexing tab (see page 229) of the Stock
Properties dialog (see page 220), then click Fixture Location.
NC Code Reference Point — Select what to use for the reference

point from:
 Pivot Point for table/table machines or Machine Zero for others
 Each setup's own fixture (each setup's origin)
 Touch-off Point
Use Origin of this Setup as the Touch-off Point — Select a setup from
the list to use as the touch-off point.
Also use the setup as your part's initial orientation on the machine tool
— Select this option to use the selected setup as the initial
orientation of the part on the machine tool. Deselect this option to
use the STOCK axis as the part's initial orientation.
Offset of Touch-point from Machine Zero — Enter the distance, in each
direction, of the 5- Axis Touch-off Point from the center of the
A-axis face. This distance is different for each part.
In this example, the X and Y offsets are negative and the Z offset
is positive.
Center of A-axis face

Touch-off Setup origin
First Axis Rotational Offset — Enter the angle (measured
counter-clockwise) between the spindle axis and the A axis when
the B angle is set to 0.
For example, if the A-axis faces the spindle when B is set to 0,
then enter 0. If it faces the door when B is set to 0, as in the
example below, then enter -90. This offset is set the same for all
parts machined on a specific machine.
A-axis
Spindle axis
B-axis rotation
5 Axis Z-indexing
Select the Use Z indexing option to enable 5 Axis Z-indexing for the
document.
This enables you index the part about the Z axis in 5-axis
simultaneous parts, for example:

To use Z-indexing:
1 Ensure you are using a CNC file that supports 5-axis positioning,
5-axis simultaneous and Z-indexing.
2 In the Stock Properties dialog, on the Indexing tab, select the new
Use Z indexing option to enable Z indexing for the document.
3 For each feature, deselect Cut feature using Y Axis coordinates on
the Dimensions tab of the Feature Properties dialog to enable the
part to rotate about the Z axis during cutting.

4th-axis positioning (2.5D & 3D)
You must have a CNC control that supports a 4th axis, and a rotary
table or native 4th axis that can be controlled by the CNC machine.
There are several ways to use the 4th axis:
Indexing (see page 234) — The 4th-axis is used as an indexer, to
rotate the part between machining operations so that the machining
takes place on different planes of the part.
Wrapping (see page 243) — The rotary table is used as a
continuously moving axis. Rotation occurs during the machining
operation and the tool movement is limited to either the X- or
Y-axis and the Z-axis. The part itself is rotated to take the place of
the axis not used. This feature is capable of wrapping any feature
while the part is rotated.
4-axis simultaneous (see page 254) — Another method of using the
rotary table's rotational axis is to use all four degrees of freedom at
once with FeatureCAM's 4-axis simultaneous product. This enables
you to directly machine surfaces without the need for unwrapping
and may result in the machine moving in X, Y, Z, and A (for
instance) all at once.
Indexing
Indexing uses the 4th axis to rotate the part between machining
operations so that the machining takes place on different planes of
the part. In FeatureCAM each face of the part can be assigned to a
separate Setup (see page 238) or features can be placed radially
(see page 240) around the center of rotation by using only one
Setup.
Parts whose features can be accessed by rotating around a single
axis are candidates for 4th-axis wrapping (see page 243).

You must have a CNC control that supports a 4th axis, and a
rotary table or native 4th axis that can be controlled by the
CNC machine in order to use indexing.
The Stock Axis

The Stock Axis corresponds to machine zero and the axis of rotation
for an indexer. It is not normally displayed, but you can display it by
selecting View > Show > Show Stock Axis from the menu. It is
displayed as two vectors. One shows the axis of rotation and the
other indicates the orientation of a 0 rotation.
4th-axis index around Z example

You can index around the Z axis for 2.5D machining, using, for
example, a rotary table lying flat on a vertical milling machine. This
means that you can mill large parts that exceed the travel of the
machine in one direction, by milling them in stages.
This example shows a part being machined with no multi-axis
positioning. When drilling holes near the edges of the part, the
machine moves a lot in the X and Y directions:

And risks a collision at point :
By selecting 4th Axis Positioning and Index around the STOCK Z Axis,
you can cut the holes by rotating around the Z axis:
Creating an indexed part

To create an indexed part
1 Display the Stock Axis. This is used for reference.
2 Click the Stock step.

3 Click Next twice.
4 Select the 4th Axis Positioning option.
5 Decide what world coordinate axis to rotate about. The X-axis is
recommended because most post processors support only X-axis
indexing. (For the rest of this description we have assumed that
you have selected the X axis.) For the X-axis, click Index around
the X-axis. For the Y-axis, click Index around the Y-axis.
6 Position the stock (see page 238) appropriately.
7 Set the Tool Change Location (see page 242).
8 If you want to create Setups on each face:
a Create the Setups for indexing (see page 238).

b Switch to each Setup and create your features (see page
530).
9 If you want to use a single Setup, create each feature and follow
this procedure (see page 240) to orient each feature.
10 Generate the toolpaths.
11 Click Post Process in the Manufacturing menu and select a post
from the 4-Axis directory.
12 Click the NC tab in the Results window.
4th-axis rotation
In this example, the part is indexed around the X axis.
The X axes of each Setup are parallel to the X-axis of the

Stock axis.
4th axis
Stock axis

Using multiple Setups
Normally each Setup generates a separate program. If the Setups
of your part are a simple rotation around your machine's fourth axis
as shown below you can use indexing to combine all the Setups into
a single program that rotates each Setup into position using the 4th
axis.
Indexing can be performed around the X or Y axis of the stock axis.

The post processor you use must have the same indexing axis as
your part. For each Setup the corresponding axis must be parallel to
the indexing axis. For example, if you are indexing around the world
coordinate X axis, the X axes of each Setup must be parallel to the
stock axis.
When using indexing, the part documentation is combined for all
Setups. This means that you have just one operations list, one tool
list, and one NC part program for all Setups.
When positioning features (see page 534), use the XYZ or polar
types of positioning.
You can combine milling and turning Setups using the Vertical
mill/turn (see page 238) document type.
Vertical mill/turn (TURNMILL, MTT, 5AP)
The minimum components (see page 10) you need for vertical
mill/turn are Turn/Mill, Advanced Turn/Mill, and 5 Axis
Positioning. In addition, the 3D MX, 5AS, and MSIM
components are recommended for a complete solution for
your vertical mill/turn machine's capabilities.

FeatureCAM supports vertical mill/turn machines such as Okuma
Vertical MILL/TURN VTM120YB, Mori Seiki SuperMILLER 400, Mori
Seiki NMV5000 DBC, Mazak Integrex e-800V II (side spindle),
Matsuura Cublex 25, and DMG FD Series.
Use the Vertical Mill/Turn document type:
When you open a new Vertical Mill/Turn document, two Setups are
created by default:
Setup1 is a turning Setup and Setup2 is a milling Setup.

The Vertical Mill/Turn option in Stock Properties is automatically
selected for a Vertical Mill/Turn document, and the Fixture Location
button is available for the milling part of the document:

Load and run the VerticalMillTurnAddin.bas add-in to access these
two buttons:
The PostMillTurnSetups button combines the two Setups into a

single NC code file.
The SimTurnMillingSetups button combines the two Setups into

one simulation for 3D or machine simulation.
Using a single Setup

Positioning features
When creating 4th-axis indexing or turn/mill parts, there is an
option on the Location (see page 534) page of the Feature wizard
(see page 530) for positioning called Radial about the X axis (or
Radial about the Y axis if indexing around the Y axis). Use this
method of positioning 4th-axis features, unless you want to create
Setups on each face you want to machine. Use the angle and radius
dimensions to orient the feature on the proper face.
In the case of indexing around the X axis, the X coordinate moves

the feature along the X axis and the Y coordinate translates the
feature in the perpendicular direction.
In the case of indexing around the Y axis, the Y coordinate moves

the feature along the Y axis and the X coordinate translated the
feature in the perpendicular direction.

Positioning the stock
Often, the initial part Setup is positioned at the same point as the
Stock Axis (see page 235).
You can position the Setup axis at whatever point is convenient for
locating part zero, but you must move the stock so that the Stock
Axis is positioned at the center of rotation of your indexer. You do
this in the Stock Properties dialog:
1 Open the Stock Properties dialog by selecting the stock in the Part
Tree and then selecting Properties from the context menu.
The Stock Properties dialog is displayed.

2 On the Dimensions tab, adjust the X, Y, and Z coordinates to
move the stock. In the example below, it is assumed that the
center of the stock is aligned with the axis of the indexer. The
stock is shifted by a negative amount in Y equal to half the stock
width and a positive amount in Z equal to half the stock
thickness.
3 Click the Apply button to see the results.

4 Click OK when the stock has been moved correctly.
Tool Change Location

You must set the Tool Change Location (see page 1857) correctly for
the simulation of 4th-axis indexing parts to be accurate.
This does not affect the NC code, only the graphics.

The distance from the Stock Axis origin to the Tool Change Location
must be long enough so that the tool clears the part as it rotates.
The images below (with the Tool Change Location marked by an
arrow) show the circle that would be formed by sweeping a tool
change location around the stock axis. Notice that this circle clears
the entire part.

How the clearance plane is calculated
In 4th-axis positioning and 5th-axis positioning, the tool must
retract to a safe distance so that it does not collide with the part
while it is indexing. To achieve this, FeatureCAM calculates the
maximum stock radius and adds to that the Z-index clearance
to determine the appropriate retract distance.
Restrictions of indexing
 You must use a post from the 4-Axis directory. Normal posts do
not support indexing.
 The post CNC files have the indexing axis hard-coded. Most are
setup to rotate about the X axis. The axis of rotation in your
program must match the rotation axis of the post.
 If you are using multiple Setups and are rotating about the world
X axis the X axes of the Setups must be parallel to the world X
axis.
 If you are using multiple Setups and are rotating about the world
Y axis the Y axes of the Setups must be parallel to the world Y
axis.
Wrapping (3D)
4th-axis wrapping enables you to wrap a 2.5D feature around either
the X or Y axis. You must have a machine with 4th-axis capabilities
to use this feature.
4th-axis wrapping uses the rotary table as a continuously moving
axis. Rotation occurs during the machining operation and the tool
movement is limited to either the X or Y axis and the Z axis.
Wrapping is limited to cylindrical stock. A side effect of wrapping is
that all arc moves must be converted to linear moves for posting.
This conversion is controlled by the Wrap tolerance (see page 1648)
attribute.
You can wrap any milling feature using 4th-axis wrapping or
turn/milling. This example shows a simple Groove feature that is
wrapped around the X axis.

feature: 3d simulation:
The features are not displayed as wrapped, but when you

generate toolpaths for a wrapped Setup, the toolpaths are
wrapped.
Basic requirements
These are the basic requirements for 4th-axis wrapping:
 Use Round shaped stock with an Axis of X or Y. Set this on the
Dimensions (see page 207) page of the Stock wizard or the
Dimensions tab of the Stock Properties (see page 220) dialog.
 Select the 4th axis positioning option either on the Multi-axis
positioning (see page 211) page of the Stock wizard or the
Indexing (see page 229) tab of the Stock Properties dialog.
 Indexing and wrapping occur about the Stock Axis. To help you
understand this, you can display the Stock Axis by selecting View
> Show > Show STOCK axis from the menu. The Stock Axis
displays in blue.

 All of your features need to be designed up off the Stock Axis, for
example, at the OD of your round stock. You can get them there
by translating the feature up in Z, or by making a Setup that is
up off the stock axis.
 Select the Wrap feature around X-axis option of any feature you
want to wrap.
 Use a 4-axis indexing post from .../Posts/Mill/4-Axis.
Creating a part using 4th-axis wrapping

To create a part using 4th-axis wrapping:
1 Select the View > Show > Show Stock Axis menu option.
2 Click the Stock step in the Steps panel to display the Stock
wizard.
a On the Dimensions (see page 207) page of the Stock wizard,
select a Round stock shape, and select an Axis to use as a
wrapping axis.
b On the Multi-axis positioning (see page 211) page of the Stock
wizard, select 4th-axis positioning, and select the axis around
which you want to index.
Most 4th-axis post processors provided with FeatureCAM

index around the X axis.
c Click Finish to close the wizard.
3 When creating a feature that you would like to wrap:

a Position it using the Radial about axis option on the Location
(see page 534) page of the New Feature wizard or the Location
b Select Wrap feature around axis on the Dimensions (see page
905) tab of the Feature Properties dialog.
4 Select Manufacturing > Post Process from the menu. The Post
Options (see page 1857) dialog is displayed.
5 Click the Browse button to specify your post processor.
6 Select a post from the 4-Axis folder. Ensure that you select a
post processor that matches the index axis you selected in the
Stock wizard.
7 Click OK.
8 Run a centerline simulation (see page 1516). Notice that the
toolpaths are wrapped around a cylinder. Centerline and 3D
simulation allow you to preview the wrapped toolpaths.
9 If the wrapped feature is too chunky, you may need to lower the
Wrap tolerance attribute on the Misc. (see page 1648) tab of
Machining attributes.
10 Click the NC Code (see page 1557) tab in the Results window.
Creating a 4th-axis wrapped feature from a 3D model

To create a 4th-axis wrapped feature from a 3D model:
1 Pick a single feature that you want to machine on the part.

2 Check it is a wrapped feature. If the feature has all straight
sides, it can be cut with a normal 2.5D feature.
1 Consider the restrictions of 4th-axis wrapping (see page 252) to

make sure it is correct for cutting the feature.
2 Do the sides go through the center axis of wrapping? If you
really need to cut these sides accurately, you must use Cut sides
perpendicular to index axis (see page 251).
3 Use surface edges (see page 350) to extract a curve from the
solid model.

4 Unwrap (see page 339) the curve. Make sure you use the option
to project to the UCS. The curve may look strange to you, but it
does work.
1 Make the feature opting to wrap around the index axis.
This option is not available in the Feature wizard. If you use

the wizard, you must create a normal feature and edit it to
change it into a wrapped feature.
2 Generate the toolpaths. If you have any problems consider the
restrictions of 4th-axis wrapping (see page 252).

Cylindrical cams
You must have 4th-axis wrapping (see page 243) to cut

cylindrical cams.
Cylindrical (or barrel) cams are specified as you would a normal
cam. See Cams (see page 364) for more information on
reciprocating cams. For simple cams, the rise and fall are radial
distance. On cylindrical cams the rise and fall displacements are
along the wrapping axis.
For example, if you create a barrel cam that is wrapped around the
X axis with these parameters:
the following curve is created:

Notice that the displacement is in the X direction. If you create a
groove feature using the barrel cam curve, you get the toolpath
shown below.
Creating a cylindrical Cam

Follow the steps for How to create a NC program using 4th-axis
wrapping (see page 245). For Step 3, Create your part features,
follow these steps:
1 Open the Cam Properties dialog in one of these ways:
then Cams, and click Next.
 On the Curve toolbar (see page 13), click the Cams button
in the Curve menu.
 From the menu, select Construct > Curve > Other methods >
Cams.
2 On the General tab, select Cylindrical Cam.
3 Specify the Base Radius as the radius of your cylindrical stock.
4 Specify either Wrap X-axis or Wrap Y-axis. Make sure that this
setting matches the wrapping axis you specified in your setup.
5 On the Segments tab, enter the segment parameters.
6 Click OK or Finish.
7 Use this curve to create a groove.
You now have a feature that you can use for 4th-axis wrapping.

Cut sides perpendicular to index axis
When milling features are wrapped (see page 243) around the index
axis, one coordinate axis is converted from linear moves into
rotational moves. For wrapping around the X axis, the Y axis moves
are converted into C axis rotations. For simple wrapping the NC
code is relatively simple, but the walls of the resulting feature are
not perpendicular to the index axis. The following image shows the
front view of a wrapped pocket. The toolpath is calculated relative
to the top curve causing the pocket to be overcut at the bottom.
The overcut regions are shown in red. The blue lines show the
extension of the cut walls and indicate that the walls are no longer
perpendicular to the index axis.
To make the walls perpendicular to the index axis, as shown below,

use the Cut sides perpendicular to Index axis attribute.

If you require perpendicular sides, you must have a lathe or mill
with X-axis, C-axis, and Y-axis motion. To program your feature to
have perpendicular sides you must select Wrap feature around X-axis
and also select Cut sides perpendicular to index axis. Features cut
with this option have sides that are perpendicular to the index axis.
There are a number of restrictions (see page 252) for this type of
feature.
Restrictions for cut sides perpendicular

 Simple slots and grooves are not supported.
 The first move of the toolpath should be perpendicular to the axis
of rotation. Otherwise you end up with a really big offset move at
the beginning of the ramp-in which can result in the tool
traveling backwards with respect to the direction of the toolpath.
This is because on the initial plunge move, we do not know the
offset direction, so the Y offset is 0. The first move of the ramp is
at close to 90 and needs almost a full tool radius offset. If you
are doing a linear ramp at the start of a roughing operation, you
end up with a full tool radius offset change on each ramp move.
 The feature you are cutting should have no sharp corners.
 Open profile sides should use the insert arc check box in the
Stepovers tab (see page 985).
 Roughing operations create sharp corners on the inner stepovers
if you use too large a tool. The default tool is always too large.
 There is a limit on depth of cut with a given tool. It is related to
the no sharp corners rule. If you are cutting a rectangular
pocket, when the tool moves along one side, the Y offset is 0.
The corner radius must be large enough that the tool does not
gouge the next side wall when it finishes the current cut. The
limit is:
 R = Radius (feature location to index axis)
 CR = Corner Radius of profile
 TR = Tool Radius
 Diff = CR - TR
 A = atan(CR/R)
 Max Depth = Diff/tan(A)
 Max Depth = Diff*(R/CR)
Restrictions of 4th-axis wrapping

 You must use a post from the 4-Axis directory. Normal posts do
not support 4th-axis wrapping.

 The post CNC files have the indexing axis hard-coded. Most are
set up to rotate about the X axis. The axis of rotation in your
program must match the rotation axis of the post.
 If you are rotating around the stock X axis, the X axes of the
setups must be parallel to the world X axis.
 If you are rotating around the stock Y axis the Y axes of the
setups must be parallel to the world Y axis.
 4th-axis wrapping is not simultaneous motion of four axes. Only
three axes are active. In the case of X-axis wrapping, you get X
and Z translational motion and a rotation around Y.
 2D simulation does not work for 4th-axis wrapping.
If you are using Cut Sides perpendicular to index axis (see page
251) the following restrictions also apply:
 It does not apply to simple slots and grooves.
 The curve of the feature cannot have any sharp corners.
 If you are wrapping an open profile side, select the Arc Lead
option on the Stepovers (see page 985) tab.
 If you preview the toolpaths and are getting wild moves at the
feature edges, select a smaller tool. Often the automatically
selected tool is too large. Most problems using Cut sides
perpendicular to index axis are related to using a tool that is too
large. Make sure the tool is small enough before making the
changes discussed below.
 If the finishing pass for the walls of the feature does not
immediately follow the roughing pass, you may need to adjust
the plunge point for the finishing pass to ensure that it plunges
near the center of the feature. You want to avoid plunging near
the outside walls where the Y displacement is the greatest. If the
initial move of the finish pass gouge, adjust the plunge point for
the finish pass.

If your finish pass is starting in the center of the feature where
there is no Y displacement, then no adjustment is necessary.
- Center of feature with no Y displacement

If the plunge move is out on the edges where the Y displacement is
greater, then set a plunge point (see page 994) so that the tool
plunges more toward the center of the feature.
- Edges with max Y displacement
4-axis simultaneous
A 4-axis simultaneous surface milling feature requires your machine
to have four degrees of freedom. For FeatureCAM, the four degrees
of freedom are restricted to moving in X, Y, and Z, and a rotation
about the stock indexing axis (A, B, or C in the case of turn/mill).
You may define 4-axis features in a turn/mill document with a tool
that 'cuts from the OD'. You may also use 4-axis features in a
4-axis indexed milling environment in a milling document (see the
Indexing tab of the Stock properties).

In an appropriate document type, with an appropriate post (.cnc
file), some surface milling operations have a 4-axis (see page 1135)
tab. The 4-axis tab enables you to control or specify the tool
orientation. The default value is Vertical, which is used for standard
3-axis milling. However, it can also be a continuously changing
orientation for 4-axis simultaneous machining. With 4-axis
simultaneous, FeatureCAM tries to machine the feature's surfaces
while tilting the tool axis in the way you specify.
FeatureCAM's 4-axis product is identical to its 5-axis (see page 256)
product (there are no new terms, dialogs, or concepts to
understand) with one important exception: during toolpath
calculations, all tool axes are projected onto the appropriate plane.
For instance, if the current document is an index-around-X type,
then at a particular toolpath point, the tool axis is projected onto
the STOCK YZ plane. This results in the toolpath point at (XYZ), and
a tool axis of (0JK) so that (0JK) can be converted to an 'A' angle in
the posting process.

5-axis positioning (5AP)
5-axis positioning enables you to mill 2.5D or 3D toolpaths at 5-axis
orientations.
You must license the 5-axis positioning option to use 5-axis

positioning.
5-axis positioning provides a convenient method of manufacturing
parts that require milling on multiple faces by minimizing setups.
The image below shows an example of a part that requires milling
from four different orientations. With 5th-axis positioning, the whole
part can be milled with a single program.
FeatureCAM provides two types of 5-axis positioning NC programs.

The first method requires the operator to set only a single
coordinate system (see page 263). The entire program is then
generated with regard to this coordinate system. The advantage of
this method is that it minimizes the setup time. The disadvantage is
that the resulting NC programs are harder to read because the
coordinates for milling each face are rotated.
The second method uses standard fixture offsets (see page 265) to
determine the coordinate system for each face. The advantage of
this method is that the code for each face is easier to read. The
disadvantage is that the operator must touch-off each face.
5-axis machine types

The following 5-axis machine types are supported by FeatureCAM.

Table on table machines
Horizontal with stacked tables — These horizontal milling machines
rotate about the Y-axis, then around the X-axis. They are also called
B over A machines.
Vertical with stacked tables — These machines are vertical mills that
rotate about X-axis then around the Y-axis. These machines are
also known as A over B machines.
Machines with tilting heads

FeatureCAM supports tilting-head machines that have the following
two capabilities:
3D coordinate transforms — The control must allow programming of
2.5D features in the X and Y planes. This means that the depths of
features are always in the Z or -Z directions.
Tool length offset — The touch-off point (or zero point) of the tool
must move with the rotated tool.
The machine architectures supported are as follows:

C rotary table and B tilting head — These machines rotate about Z
and then the head rotates around the Y-axis.
C rotary table and A tilting head — These machines rotate about Z

and the head rotates around X.

C swiveling and A tilting head — These machines rotate around Z
with a table and then the head tilts around the X axis. They are also
known as gimbal heads.
B and A tilting head — Rotates about Y using a table and then X in

the head.

A and B tilting head — Rotates about X using a table and then Y in
the head.
B and 45 Degree angled A tilting head — Rotate about Y, then

rotate about X with a head that is angled by 45 degrees. This head
is also known as a huron head.

A and 45 degree angled B tilting head — Rotate about X, then about
Y with a head that is angled by 45 degrees. Also known as a huron
head.
See machine dimensions for specific machine parameters.
Alternative 5-axis position

For some 5-axis machines, you can rotate the orientation of the
machine axis by 180 degrees to address a particular
face. FeatureCAM has a default orientation for each machine
architecture.
To use the alternative orientation, specify the 5-axis position
attribute at these levels:
 Operation level (see page 1161)
 Setup level (see page 212)
 Machine level (see page 1607)
As an example in the machine below, the default is to keep A in the
0 to 180 range and then find the suitable B.

With alternate enabled, we keep A in the 0 to -180 range and then
find the suitable B.
The default and alternative orientations for each 5-axis machine

type are shown below.
Horizontal with stacked tables (rotate about Y then X)
Default is to keep B 0 to 180, then find A. Alternative is to keep B 0
to -180, then find A.
Vertical with stacked tables (rotate about X then Y)
Default is to keep A 0 to 180, then find B. Alternative is to keep A 0
to -180, then find B.
C rotary table and B tilting head
Default is to keep B 0 to 180, then find C. Alternative is to keep B 0
to -180, then find C.
C rotary table and A tilting head
Default is to keep A 0 to 180, then find C. Alternative is to keep A 0
C swiveling and A tilting head
Default is to keep A 0 to 180, then find C. Alternative is to keep A 0
B and A tilting head
Default is to keep B 90 to -90 if Setup’s Z is positive and 90 to 270
if Setup's Z is negative, then find A. Alternative is to keep B 90 to
270 if Setup's Z is positive and 90 to -90 if Setup's Z is negative,
then find A.
A and B tilting head
Default is to keep A 90 to -90 if Setup's Z is positive and 90 to 270
if Setup's Z is negative, then find B. Alternative is to keep A 90 to
270 if Setup's Z is positive and 90 to -90 if Setup's Z is negative,
then find B.

5-axis positioning using a single coordinate system
This method minimizes setup time by requiring only a single
touch-off point and is performed with the following steps:
1 Create a part with multiple Setups, then:
 on the Multi-axis Positioning (see page 211) page of the Stock
wizard, select 5th Axis Positioning and click Next; or
 on the Indexing (see page 229) tab of the Stock Properties
dialog, select 5th Axis Positioning, and click Fixture Location.
2 Select a Setup from the Use Origin of this Setup as the Touch-off
Point list. The Z-axis of this setup must be parallel with the
A-axis.
3 In the Offset of Touch-off Point from Machine Zero section, enter
the distance, in each coordinate system direction, of the 5- Axis
Touch-off Point from the center of the A-axis face. This distance
is different for each part.
In this example, the X and Y offsets are negative and the Z offset
is positive.
Center of A-axis face

Touch-off Setup origin
4 For the First Axis Rotational Offset, enter the angle (measured
counter-clockwise) between the spindle axis and the A axis when
the B angle is set to 0.

For example, if the A-axis faces the spindle when B is set to 0,
then enter 0. If it faces the door when B is set to 0, as in the
example below, then enter -90. This offset is set the same for all
parts machined on a specific machine.
A-axis
Spindle axis
B-axis rotation

6 Click Finish in the stock wizard or OK in the Stock Properties
dialog.
7 Generate toolpaths. Ensure Minimize tool changes (see page
1553) is selected in the Automatic Ordering Operations dialog if
you are using Tool-dominant toolpaths.
The simulation works for both centerline and 3D simulation. In
centerline simulation an arc is displayed for a 5-axis
reorientation. In 3D simulation the part position and orientation
stays fixed and the tool moves. The tool does not move smoothly
between Setups, it reappears in the new Setup.
8 Select a 5-axis post processor and create NC code.

9 The NC code is generated with respect to the B-axis coordinate
system. Only a single touch-off is required to locate the part.
10 The Rotary Center Offset values are contained in the post
processor files. See five axis post processing variables for more
information.
5-axis positioning using fixture offsets

To do 5-axis positioning using fixture offsets:
1 Create a part with multiple Setups, then:
 on the Multi-axis Positioning (see page 211) page of the Stock
wizard, select 5th Axis Positioning and click Next; or
 on the Indexing (see page 229) tab of the Stock Properties
dialog, select 5th Axis Positioning.
2 Click Use Fixture Offset. The 5-Axis Touch-off Setup and 5-Axis
Touch-off Setup Offset do not apply to this method.
3 For the B-Axis Rotational Offset, enter the angle (measured
counter-clockwise) between the spindle and the A-axis when the
B angle is set to 0. For example, the A-axis faces the spindle
when B is set to 0, then enter 0. If it faces the door when B is set
to 0, as shown in this figure, then enter -90. This offset will be
set the same for all parts machines on a specific machine.

5 Click Finish in the stock wizard.
6 Generate toolpaths. Remember to select Minimize tool changes, if
you want Tool-dominant toolpaths.

The simulation works for both centerline and 3D simulation. In
centerline simulation an arc is displayed for a 5-axis
reorientation. In 3D simulation the part position and orientation
stays fixed and the tool moves. The tool does not move smoothly
between setups, it simply reappears in the new setup.
7 Select a post processor that supports fixture offsets and create
NC code.
8 The NC code is generated with respect to the coordinate system
of each Setup. If you want to see the NC code for each Setup
specified in machining coordinates (Y up and X to the right), then
each Setup should be positioned so that the Setup coordinate
system is aligned with the machine coordinates when that face is
pointing toward the tool. The operator must touch-off each Setup
individually.
Rotation of primary axis

The rotation of the primary axis (the B axis on an A over B
machine) operates by default in the 0 - 90 and 90 - 180 quadrants.
If you want to operate in 0 - -90 and -90 - -180 quadrants then use
the following steps.
1 Hold down the CTRL key and click the right mouse button on the
status bar at the bottom of the FeatureCAM screen.
2 Check the Use -90 -180 for first axis rotation.
Stock models
Stock models eliminate air cutting, save programming time, and
save machining time by using more efficient toolpaths.
You can create stock models in FeatureCAM from:
 Stock
 Solid
 STL file

 Some operation results:
 These 2.5D features' rough or finish operations: pocket,
rectangular pocket, boss, side, chamfer, slot, step bore.
 A Z-level rough or parallel rough 3D operation
These operations can use a stock model:
3D surface milling operations:
 Z-level  Flowline
rough  Between 2
 Parallel curves
rough  Horizontal +
 Parallel vertical
finish  Corner
 Z-level remachining
finish  Pencil
 Isoline  Swarf
finish  Steep and
 2D spiral shallow
 3D spiral
 Radial
2D rough or finish operations
for these features:
 Boss  Side
To create a stock model:

1 Right-click on Stock Models in the Part View (see page 4) and
select Add Stock Model from the context menu.

The Add Stock Model dialog is displayed.
2 Enter a Name for the new stock model.

3 Enter a Step Size to edit the step between slices.
4 Enter a Tolerance to control the resolution of the stock model.
Increasing the tolerance increases the precision of the slices
which is useful for smaller parts, but this may cause FeatureCAM
to run slower.
5 Select whether to create the stock model from:
 Stock — This is the existing stock.
 Solid — Select a solid in the menu.
 STL — Select an .STL file in the menu.
 Operation results — Select from the available 2.5D operations,
a 3D Z-level rough, or a 3D parallel rough operation in the
menu.
6 Click OK to create the new stock model.
The stock model is displayed below Stock Models in the Part View,
for example:

To use a 2.5D stock model:
The stock model you created is available for you to use for
subsequent Boss or Side features in the Select Stock Curve dialog,
for example:
Open the Select Stock Curve dialog by clicking the Stock Curve
button on the Dimensions (see page 905) tab of the Feature
Properties dialog.
To use a 3D stock model:

The stock model you created is available for you to use for
subsequent Z-level or parallel rough operations on the Stock (see
page 1123) tab of the Surface Milling Properties dialog, for example:

Stock Model Properties dialog
You can open the Stock Model Properties dialog in one of these
ways:
 Double-click the name of the stock model in the Part View.
 Right-click the name of the stock model in the Part View and
select Properties from the context menu.
Name — This displays the name that you gave the stock model
when you created it.
Step Size — Enter the step between slices. You can change the
default by changing the Stepover attribute on the Surface Mill tab of
Tolerance — Enter the tolerance of a slice when a new stock model
is created. The stock model is stored as a set of closed slices of the
solid stock in X and Y. Increasing the tolerance increases the
precision of the slices which is useful for smaller parts, but this may
cause FeatureCAM to run slower.You can change the default by
changing the Tolerance (Rough) attribute on the Surface Mill tab of
Stock model operations — This displays a list of the stock model
operations.
Available operations — A list of operations that you can add to the
stock model.
Click to add the operation selected in the Available operations
list to the Stock model operations list.
Click to remove the selected operation from the Stock model
options list. The operation is added to the Available operations list.

Stock model example
This example part uses a stock model to avoid air cutting:
The Z-level roughing toolpath of the initial Surface feature looks like
this:

You can use these results to create a Stock Model.
If you create a second Surface feature with a Z-level rough using a

tool half the size as for the first feature, the toolpath results look
like this.
There is a lot of air cutting. You can use the stock model that you
created from the first Z-level rough operation to avoid air cutting.

To do this, on the Stock tab for the second feature, select Stock
Model and select the stock model name and the operation you want
to use from the Operations list:
Using the stock model, the Z-level rough toolpath for the second
feature has minimal air cutting:

Geometry
In FeatureCAM, geometry is the set of basic constructors you use to
create shapes, from which you can create curves (see page 318).
Geometry is displayed in black, for example:
Use these methods to create geometry:
 Click the Geometry step in the Steps panel to display the

Geometry Constructors dialog.
 Click the Toggle Geometry Bar button on the Advanced

toolbar to display the Geometry toolbar.
 Select Construct from the menu to display the list of geometry

creation tools.
When you are using any of the geometry tools, step-by-step
instructions are displayed on the Assistance bar (see page 1), which
explain how to use the active tool, for example:
Using the above methods, you can create points (see page 276),
lines (see page 277), circles (see page 281), fillets (see page 285),
arcs (see page 288), and dimensions (see page 290), and you can
edit existing geometry (see page 314).

Snapping
Snapping (see page 295) enables you to snap the cursor to
significant locations on existing geometry, and is necessary for
creating smooth or continuous geometry. When you create
geometry, it is aligned to the plane of the snapping grid (see page
296).
Geometry Constructors dialog

The Geometry Constructors dialog contains a selection of tools for
creating and editing geometry:
To display the Geometry Constructors dialog, click the Geometry

step in the Steps toolbar.
You can use these geometry tools:
 Point (see page 276)
 Line (see page 277)
 Circle (see page 281)
 Fillet (see page 285)
 Arc (see page 288)
 Dimension (see page 290)
 Edit/Clip (see page 314)
If you want to create multiple geometry objects without opening the
Geometry Constructors dialog again, select Create more than 1.
Point input for geometry creation

When a point is needed, a message is displayed on the Assistance
bar, such as Pick first point. The coordinates for that point are
shown in yellow on the dialog bar.

Use one of the following methods to specify the location of a point:
 Enter the point coordinates into the yellow fields on the
Feature/Geometry Edit bar, then click Create. This method is used
for entering the exact location relative to the UCS, such as when
reading from a drawing.
 Pick the point with the mouse in the graphics window. Use the
appropriate snap mode (see page 295) to pick precise locations
such as intersections or tangent points. This method is typically
used when the point you want is relative to another piece of
geometry.
Exiting a geometry mode

When you enter a geometry creation mode, it remains enabled until
you exit the mode. This enables you to create multiple geometry
objects quickly without having to use the wizard or toolbars
repeatedly.
Use one of these methods to exit geometry mode:
 In the Standard toolbar, click Select .

 Press the Esc key on your keyboard.
 Click a different step, toolbar or menu button.
If you are using the Geometry Constructors dialog, deselect

Create more than 1 before selecting a tool to automatically exit
geometry mode after using the tool.
Points
You can use these methods to create a point:

Geometry Constructors (see page 275) dialog, then click the Point
button.
 In the Geometry toolbar, click Point .

 Select the Construct > Point menu option.
When a point is needed, a message is displayed on the Assistance
bar, such as Pick first point. The coordinates for that point are
shown in yellow on the dialog bar.
Use one of the following methods to specify the location of a point:

 Enter the point coordinates into the yellow fields on the
Feature/Geometry Edit bar, then click Create. This method is used
for entering the exact location relative to the UCS, such as when
reading from a drawing.
 Pick the point with the mouse in the graphics window. Use the
appropriate snap mode (see page 295) to pick precise locations
such as intersections or tangent points. This method is typically
used when the point you want is relative to another piece of
geometry.
You do not usually need to create point objects, instead you can use
snapping (see page 295) to locate points when creating geometry.
Lines
You can use these methods to create a line:

Geometry Constructors (see page 275) dialog, then click one of
the line creation buttons.
 In the Geometry toolbar, click one of the buttons in the Line
Menu.
 Select the one of the Construct > Line menu options.
You can draw the following types of lines:
Two points (see page 277)
Connected lines (see page 278)
Horizontal line (see page 279)
Vertical line (see page 279)
Angle line (see page 279)
Offset line (see page 280)
Two points line

Line from two points creates a finite (see page 316) line from two
endpoints. To create the line:
1 Use one of these methods to enter line-creation mode:

Geometry Constructors (see page 275) dialog, then click Line
from 2 Pts .

 In the Geometry toolbar, click Line from two Pts in the Line
Menu.
 Select the Construct > Line > 2 Pts menu option.
2 Pick or enter (see page 275) the location of the first point.
3 If you want to explicitly locate the second point, Pick or (see
page 275) enter the location of the second point.
4 If you want to enter an angle and length (from which the second
point is derived):
 Enter the angle in degrees in the A field. The angle is specified
counter-clockwise from the direction of the X axis.
 Enter the length in the L field.
5 Press the Enter key or click the Create button.
6 When you have finished creating lines, exit line mode (see page
276).
Connected lines
Connected lines creates a series of finite (see page 316) lines from a
series of points. The end point of one line becomes the start point of
the next. To create the line:

Geometry Constructors (see page 275) dialog, then click
Connected lines .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click Connected Lines in the Line

Menu.
 Select the Construct > Line > Connected menu option.
2 Pick or enter (see page 275) the location of the first point.
3 If you want to explicitly locate the next point, Pick or enter (see
page 275) the location of the second point.
4 If you want to enter an angle and length (from which the next
point is derived):
 Enter the angle in degrees in the A field. The angle is specified
counter-clockwise from the direction of the X axis.
 Enter the length in the L field.
5 Press the Enter key or click the Create button.
6 Repeat steps 2 to 5 to create more lines.

7 When you have finished creating connected lines, exit line mode
(see page 276).
Horizontal line
Horizontal line creates an infinite (see page 316) horizontal line
through a point. To create the line:

horizontal .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click Line Horizontal in the Line

Menu.
 Select the Construct > Line > Horizontal menu option.
2 Pick or enter (see page 275) the location of the point.
3 When you have finished creating horizontal lines, exit line mode
(see page 276).
Vertical line
Vertical line creates an infinite (see page 316) vertical line through a
point. To create the line:

vertical .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click Line vertical in the Line

Menu.
 Select the Construct > Line > Vertical menu option.
2 Pick or enter (see page 275) the coordinates of the point.
3 When you have finished creating vertical lines, exit line mode
(see page 276).
Angle line
Line at angle through point creates an infinite (see page 316) line
through a point you select and at the angle you specify in degrees.
To create the line:

Geometry Constructors (see page 275) dialog,then click Line at
Angle thru Pt .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click Pt, Angle in the Line Menu.

 Select the Construct > Line > Pt, Angle from Horz/Vert/Line menu
option.
2 Enter the angle in degrees in the A field. The angle is specified
counter-clockwise.
 To specify the angle relative to a vertical line passing through
the point, select the From Vert. option.
 To measure the angle relative to a horizontal line passing
through the point, select the From Horiz. option.
 To measure the angle relative to an existing line, select the
From line option.
3 Pick or enter (see page 275) the coordinates of the point.
4 If you selected From line, you are prompted to select the line.
5 Click Create.
6 Repeat the process from step 2 to create more lines.
7 When you have finished creating lines, exit line mode (see page
276).
Offset line
Offset creates a new line, arc or circle by offsetting it from an
existing line or arc.
Use one of these methods to enter offset mode:

Offset .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click Line Offset in the Line Menu.

 Select the Construct > Line > Offset menu option.
To offset an object by a specific distance:

1 Enter the distance in the Offset field.
2 Select an existing line, arc or circle in the graphics window.

You can also select a line from the stock even though there
is no line explicitly there.
3 Move the cursor to the side of the selected object. A preview of
the new object is displayed.
4 Left-click to create the offset.
To offset an object in real time:

1 Click and drag an object to the location you want the offset. A
preview of the offset is displayed in the graphics window.
You can use snapping (see page 295) to align the offset with
existing geometry.
2 Release the mouse button to create the offset.
When you have finished creating offsets, exit the mode (see page
276).
Circles
You can use these methods to create a circle:
 Click the Geometry step in the Steps toolbar, then click one
of the circle creation buttons in the Geometry Constructors (see
page 275) dialog.
 Click one of the circle creation buttons in the Circle Menu in the
Geometry toolbar.
 Select Construct > Circle from the menu and select one of the
options.
You can draw these types of circles:
Circle from radius and center (see page 282)
Circle from center and edge (see page 282)
Circle from diameter (see page 283)
Circle tangent to two entities (see page 283)
Circle from two points and radius (see page 284)
Circle through three points (see page 284)

Circle from radius and center
Circle from radius and center creates a circle from a center point and
a radius value.
To create the circle:

Geometry Constructors (see page 275) dialog, then click Circle
from Rad, Center .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click Circle from Rad, Center in

the Circle Menu.
 Select the Construct > Circle > Center, Radius menu option.
2 Enter the radius at the R prompt in the dialog bar. If you are
going to type the coordinate of the center point, press the Tab
key.
3 Pick or type (see page 275) the point at the center of the circle.
4 When you have finished creating circles, exit circle mode (see
page 276).
To specify the radius of the circle dynamically:
1 Click the mouse at the center point of the circle.
2 Drag the mouse to specify the radius of the circle.
Circle from center and edge

Circle from center, edge defines a circle by its center point and a
point on the circle's edge. The distance from the center point to the
edge point is used as the radius of the circle. To create this type of
circle:
1 Use one of these methods to enter circle-creation mode.

from center, edge .
 In the Geometry toolbar,click Circle from center, edge in

the Circle Menu.
 Select the Construct > Circle > Center, Edge menu option.
2 Pick or type (see page 275) the Center point.
3 Optionally select Concentric to create more than one, concentric,
circle.

4 Pick or type (see page 275) the Edge point. If you drag the
mouse when locating the edge point, the circle interactively
changes as you drag.
page 276).
Circle from diameter

Circle from diameter defines a circle from two points. The distance
between the two points specifies the circle's diameter. The midpoint
between the two points becomes the circle center. To create this
circle:
1 Use one of these methods to enter circle-creation mode:

from diameter .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click Diameter in the Circle Menu.

 Select the Construct > Circle > Diameter menu option.
2 Pick or type (see page 275) the first point.
3 Pick or type (see page 275) the second point. If you drag the
mouse when locating the second point, the circle changes
interactively as you drag.
page 276).
Circle tangent to two entities

Circle tangent two defines a circle by snapping tangent to two
existing objects. The location that you select the two objects
determines the position of the new circle. Create this type of circle
using these steps:
1 Use one of these methods to enter circle-creation mode.

Tangent Two .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click Circle tangent two in the

Circle Menu.
 Select the Construct > Circle > Tangent Two menu option.

2 Enter the circle's radius in the dialog bar at the bottom of the
screen.
3 Click the first object.
4 Click the second object.
page 276).
See also circles (see page 281)
Circle from two points and radius

Circle, two points, radius defines a circle of a specific radius and two
individually defined point locations on the circle's circumference.
The center of the circle is always placed to the left of the direction
in which you define the two points through which the circle must
pass.
If you want to create a circle that is tangent to two objects,

use Circle tangent to two entities (see page 283).

Rad, 2 Pts .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click 2 Pts, Radius in the Circle

Menu.
 Select the Construct > Circle > 2 Pts, Radius menu option.
2 Set the radius in the dialog bar.
3 Pick or type (see page 275) the first point.
4 Pick or type (see page 275) the second point.
page 276).
Circle through three points

Circle from three points defines a circle with three points on the
circle’s circumference. A circle tangent to three existing circles or
arcs can be created by selecting the existing elements with the
tangent snap active. Use the following steps to create a circle
through three points.

from 3 Pts .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click 3 Pts in the Circle Menu.

 Select the Construct > Circle > 3 Pts menu option.
2 Pick or type (see page 275) each point.
page 276).
Fillets
2D Fillets create a rounded corner between other existing geometry
and trim the existing geometry against the endpoints of the fillet.
The figure on the left shows the original lines. The figure on the
right shows these lines after the fillet has been inserted. Note that
the lines are trimmed against the fillet.
You can use these methods to create a fillet:
 Click the Geometry step in the Steps toolbar to display the

Geometry Constructors (see page 275) dialog, then click a fillet
button.
 In the Geometry toolbar, click a button in the Fillet Menu.
 Select a Construct > Fillet menu option.
You can create these types of fillets:
Corner fillet (see page 285)
Two point fillet (see page 286)
Three point fillet (see page 287)
Chamfer (see page 287)
Corner fillet
Corner fillet creates a fillet (see page 285) in a corner originally
defined by an intersection of lines or arcs.

1 Use one of these methods to enter fillet-creation mode:

Corner Fillet .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click Corner Fillet in the Fillet

Menu.
 Select the Construct > Fillet > Corner Fillet menu option.
2 Enter the radius in the R field.
3 Move the cursor over a corner or an intersection between two
lines, arcs or circles. A preview of the fillet is displayed in the
graphics window.
4 When the preview displays the fillet you want to create, left-click
to create the fillet. Creating a fillet automatically trims the
existing lines or arcs to the new fillet.
5 When you have finished creating fillets, exit fillet-creation mode
(see page 276).
Two point fillet

Two point fillet creates a fillet (see page 285) in a corner originally
defined by an intersection of lines or arcs. The corner fillet (see
page 285) is usually easier to create, but the two point fillet may be
easier to control if you are creating a fillet in a crowded area.

Geometry Constructors (see page 275) dialog, then click 2 Pt
Fillet .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click 2 Pt Fillet in the Fillet Menu.

 Select the Construct > Fillet > 2 Pt Fillet menu option.
2 Enter the radius of the fillet in the R field.
3 Select an object.
4 Move the cursor over an object which intersects the first object.
A preview of the fillet is displayed in the graphics window.
5 Left-click the second object to create the fillet. Creating a fillet
automatically trims the existing lines or arcs to the new fillet.
6 When you have finished creating fillets, exit fillet mode (see page
276).

Three point fillet
Three points defines a fillet (see page 285) by selecting three points,
similar to the three point circle (see page 284). To create this fillet:

Geometry Constructors (see page 275) dialog, then click 3 Pt
Fillet .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click 3 Pt Fillet in the Fillet Menu.

 Select the Construct > Fillet > 3 Pt Fillet menu option.
2 Pick or enter (see page 275) the location of three points. The
three points are the start, middle, and end points of the fillet.
The points can be selected in clockwise or counter-clockwise
order around the arc.
3 If the last point is entered in the dialog bar, click Create to create
the fillet.
4 When you have finished creating fillets, exit fillet mode (see page
276).
2D Chamfer
To create a chamfer that trims surrounding geometry:
1 Use one of these methods to enter chamfer-creation mode:

Chamfer .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click Chamfer in the Fillet Menu.

 Select the Construct > Fillet > Chamfer menu option.
2 Enter a Width and Height in the Geometry Edit bar.
3 Move the cursor over a corner or an intersection between two
lines, arcs or circles. A preview of the chamfer is displayed in the
graphics window.
4 When the preview displays the chamfer you want to create,
left-click to create the chamfer. Creating a chamfer automatically
trims the existing lines or arcs to the new chamfer.
5 When you have finished creating chamfers, exit chamfer mode
(see page 276).

Arcs
Arcs create rounded curving segments defined as parts of circles.
You can use these methods to create an arc:

Geometry Constructors (see page 275) dialog, then click an arc
button.
 In the Geometry toolbar, click a button in the Arc Menu.
 Select a Construct > Arc menu option.
If you want to create arcs at corners or intersections, see Fillets
(see page 284).
You can create these types of arcs:
Arc from three points (see page 288)
Arc from two points and radius (see page 289)
Arc from two points and center (see page 289)
Arc from center, radius, begin, and end points (see page 290)
Arc from three points

Arc from three points constructs an arc (see page 288) through a
start point, edge point, and a finish point.
To create an arc from three points:
1 Use one of these methods to enter arc-creation mode:

Geometry Constructors (see page 275) dialog, then click Arc
from 3 Pts .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click 3 Pts in the Arc Menu.

 Select the Construct > Arc > 3 Pts menu option.
2 Pick or enter (see page 275) the location of each point.
3 Click Create to make the arc.
4 When you have finished creating arcs, exit arc mode (see page
276).
If you want to create an arc that is tangent to three objects,

ensure the Snap to tangent snap mode is enabled.

Arc from two points and radius
Arc from two points, radius constructs an arc (see page 288) through
two points with a specific radius.

from Radius, 2 Pts .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click 2 Pts, Radius in the Arc

Menu.
 Select the Construct > Arc > 2 Pts, Radius menu option.
2 Enter the radius of the arc in the R field.
3 Pick or enter (see page 275) the location of the beginning point.
A display of the arc is displayed in the graphics window.
4 Pick or enter (see page 275) the location of the end point.
276).
If you want to create an arc that is tangent to two objects,

ensure the Snap to tangent snap mode is enabled.
Arc from two points and center

Arc from two points, center constructs an arc (see page 288) through
two points with a specific center point.

from Center, 2 Pts .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click Center, Beg, End in the Arc

Menu.
 Select the Construct > Arc > Center, Beg, End menu option.
2 Pick or enter (see page 275) the location of the center point.
3 Pick or enter (see page 275) the location of the beginning point.
A preview of the arc is displayed in the graphics window.
4 Pick or enter (see page 275) the location of the end point.

5 If you enter the last point in the dialog bar, click Create to make
the arc.
276).
Arc from center, radius, begin, and end points

This selection constructs an arc (see page 288) with a specific
center and radius with the starting and ending points determined by
angles.

Geometry Constructors (see page 275) dialog, then click Arc,
Rad, Cen, Beg, End .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click Center, Rad, Beg, End in the

Arc Menu.
 Select the Construct > Arc > Center, Rad, Beg, End menu option.
2 Enter the radius in the R field.
3 Pick or enter (see page 275) the location of the center point.
4 Enter the Begin Angle in degrees. This angle is measured
counter-clockwise from horizontal.
5 Enter the End Angle in degrees.
If the Relative option is deselected, the angle is absolute
measured counter-clockwise from horizontal. If the Relative
option is selected, the angle is measured relative to the Begin
Angle.
6 Click Create to create the arc.
276).
Dimensions
You can create dimensions in the graphics area which display
various text labels or numerical dimensions on the model.
Dimensions do not affect the behavior of the model, and cannot be
used to create features or surfaces and so on.
You can use these methods to create a dimension:

Geometry Constructors (see page 275) dialog, then click a
dimension button.
 In the Geometry toolbar, click a button in the Dimension Menu.
 Select a Construct > Dimension menu option.
You can create these types of dimensions:
 Horizontal Distance — dimension information only in the
horizontal axis of the model.
 Vertical Distance — dimension information only in the vertical axis
of the model.
 Linear Distance — dimension information based on the direct
distance between two points, regardless of angle.
 Radius — dimension information for the radius of the selected
object.
 Diameter — dimension information for the diameter of the
selected object.
 Angle — dimension information for the angle between two
selected lines.
You can create these types of text labels:
 Text Label — a floating text label, which is not pinned to an
object.
 Annotation — a text label which is pinned to an object, with an
arrow pointing to a specific location on the object. If you move
the object, the annotation moves also.
Curvature samples the surface and computes the curvature in two
directions to describe how the surface behaves at a point. Unlike the
other dimensioning tools, Curvature is a real-time rubber-banding
effect where you traverse the surface to find the point with the
smallest curvature radius. From this information you can determine
the smallest tool you need to manufacture the surface.
To use Curvature:
1 Select Construct > Dimension > Curvature from the menu.
2 Select a surface in the graphics window.
3 Move the cursor over a point on the surface, particularly in the
tight constrained areas or joints. The properties of the point are
displayed in the dialog bar.
4 Note the smallest value of the Radius of curvature. This is the
smallest tool end radius you need to accurately machine the
surface.

5 Set up rough and finish passes for the surface feature based on
this knowledge, and ensure the tool is available for production.
When using some dimension tools, you can enter information in the
Dimension dialog bar (see page 292).
Dimension dialog bar

When using some dimension tools, you can enter information in the
Dimension dialog bar.
You can enter the following information:

 Prefix — Text displayed before the numeric dimension in the
graphics window. Leave a space at the end of the prefix if
required.
 Decimal Places — The number of decimal places used when
displaying the numeric dimension. The option 0.123 is selected by
default.
 Suffix — Text displayed after the dimension in the graphics
window. Leave a space at the beginning of the suffix if required.
 Tolerance + and - — The distance the dimension can deviate from
the absolute listed dimension. The deviation allowances are
displayed next to the dimension.
 DX DY — The distance from the previously selected point to the
dimension text.
Interrogation
Any numeric value in a dialog which has a blue label can be
extracted from objects in the graphics window.
To use interrogation to extract a value from an object:
1 Click a blue label to hide the dialog.
2 Pick a point in the graphics window, use snapping modes (see
page 295) to select the point you want.
3 If another point is required, repeat step 2.
When you have picked enough points for FeatureCAM to calculate
the value for the field, the dialog is displayed, with the new value
in the field.
Some values require one point to calculate, some require two:

Value type Number How FeatureCAM uses the
of points point(s)
required
Length or 2 Calculates the difference
Width between either the X or Y
coordinates of the points,
depending on the type of
dimension. If the dimension is
shown vertically in the dialog,
the Y coordinates are used.
Horizontal dimensions use the X
coordinates.
Angle 2 A line is created between the two
points and the angle between
that line and the Z axis is
calculated.
Depth 2 The difference between the Z
coordinates of the points is
calculated.
X Y or Z 1 The X, Y or Z coordinate is
extracted from the point.
Radius or 1 The radius or diameter of a circle
Diameter can be extracted.
Alternatively, hold the Shift key and click a blue label to display the
Pick Dimension (see page 293) dialog. When you click OK in the Pick
dimension dialog, the value is automatically inserted into your
dialog.
Pick Dimension dialog

The Pick Dimension dialog enables you to extract numbers from
objects in the Graphics window using snapping modes (see page
295) and pick filters (see page 294). You can then copy these
values and use them in other dialogs.
Use one of the following methods to display the Pick Dimension
dialog:
1 Click the Interrogation button in the Dimension Menu in the
Geometry toolbar.
2 Select Construct > Dimension > Interrogation from the menu.

3 If a dialog is displayed containing a field which has a blue label,
hold the Shift key and click the blue label.
To use the Pick Dimension dialog:

1 Select a Pick type (see page 294), Pick filter (see page 294), and
Alignment (see page 294).
2 Click Pick location and select any required points or items in

The measured dimension is displayed in the Pick value field.
Pick types and pick filters for interrogation

Location — This extracts the X, Y or Z coordinate of a point. The
coordinate extracted depends on the selected Pick filter setting. The
coordinate system is based on the Alignment setting.
Distance — This extracts the distance between two points. The Pick
filter setting controls whether the distance is measured in the X, Y,
Z directions, in the XY plane (2D filter) or in 3D. The coordinate
system is based on the Alignment setting.
Same as — This extracts either the radius or diameter of a circle or
an arc, or the depth of a feature. In the case of blind holes, the
overall depth of the hole is extracted, including the additional depth
to represent the drill tip.
Length — This extracts the length of a curve or geometry segment.
Alignments for interrogation

Grid — The points are calculated in the plane of the snapping grid
(see page 296).
UCS — The points are calculated relative to the current UCS.

Setup — The points are calculated relative to the current Setup.
None — The points are calculated relative to the stock coordinate
system.
Snapping
Snapping helps you position lines, points, or shapes as you
construct geometry for the part. Use it to select important points
relative to existing geometry, such as intersections or end points.
To display the Snap Modes dialog:
 Select Options > Snapping Modes from the menu.
 Click the Snap modes button in the Advanced toolbar.

To display the Snap Mode toolbar (see page 15):
 Select View > Toolbars from the menu to display the Customize
Toolbars dialog, select Snap Mode from the Toolbars list, then
click OK.
 Right-click in a space in the toolbars area and select Snap Mode
 In the Snap Modes dialog, select Show snap mode toolbar.
The following buttons are displayed in the Snap Modes dialog and
the Snap Mode toolbar:
 Grid points — Snaps the cursor to the rotating snapping grid (see
page 296). You can specify the grid spacing in the Snapping Grids
 Points — Snaps the cursor to points (see page 276).
 End points — Snaps the cursor to the ends of line segments,
arcs, and curves, and the corners of the stock.
 Midpoints — Snaps the cursor to the points equidistant from two
ends of an open geometry object.
 Even sections — Divides open geometry objects into equal-sized
segments and snaps the cursor to the ends of the segments. You
can specify the number of segments in the Section field of the
Snapping Grids dialog, the default is 5.
 Toolpath — Snaps the cursor to the toolpath lines.
 Intersections — Snaps the cursor to the points where geometry
object meet.

 Circle centers — Snaps the cursor to the mathematical point
equidistant from all points on a circle or an arc. If this button is
selected, a cross is displayed at the centers of all arcs and circles
in the graphics window. This option enables snapping to the
center of circles displayed as Curvature (see page 290)
dimensions.
 Quadrants — Snaps to the points on a circle or arc that the X and
Y axes would pass through if the object was centered around the
origin.
 Objects — Snaps the cursor to the nearest point on a geometry
object.
 Tangent to objects — Snaps the cursor to the points on curved
geometry which are on a tangent to the curve and the current
mouse position.
 Cylindrical center end point — Snaps to the end points of a
cylinder or cone axis.
 Snapping Discrimination Dialog — Displays the Snapping
Discrimination (see page 297) dialog if more than one snapping
option applies.
When you move the cursor over an object in the graphics window,
the snapping mode applied to the cursor is displayed on the Status
bar. A preview of the point is displayed in green, which changes
shape depending on the snapping mode.
You can have more than one active snap mode. For example, you
can snap tangent to a circle on one end of a line, then snap to an
intersection at the other end of the line.
Rotating snapping grid

If you are snapping to the grid or locating general points without
snapping to existing geometry, the points are placed in the plane of
the snapping grid.
To show the snapping grid:
1 Select Options > Snapping Grids from the menu to display the
Snapping Grids panel.
2 In the Grid Display section of the Snapping Grids panel, select
Always show.
3 Click OK to close the panel.
The snapping grid rotates with the viewing plane and enables you to
create geometry in different planes without having to create new
user coordinate systems.

In the isometric view, the grid is on the top face:
In the front view, the grid is on the front face:
Snap Discrimination Dialog

If the Snapping Discrimination Dialog option is selected in the Snap
Modes dialog, when you select a point to which more than one
snapping option applies, the Snap Discrimination Dialog is displayed.
A list is displayed showing the snapping options which apply to the
selected point.
To use the Snap Discrimination Dialog:

1 Select a snapping option from the list.

2 Click OK.
Snapping Grids dialog

Select Options > Snapping Grids from the menu to display the
Snapping Grids dialog.
X Origin — This sets where to start the grid points in the X direction
in relation to the current UCS.
Y Origin — This sets where to start the grid points in the Y direction
in relation to the current UCS.
X Spacing — This sets the distance between grid snap points in the
X direction.
Y Spacing — This sets the distance between grid snap points in the
Y direction.
High values of Spacing can result in the model displaying

slowly.
X Length — This sets how far the grid displays in the X direction.
Y Length — This sets how far the grid displays in the Y direction.
Section — This sets how many segments to divide the open
geometry into when snapping to sections.
Grid resizes to match — This sets whether the size of the grid is
calculated from the Length values or the stock dimensions.
Grid Display — This sets when you see the grid and when you do
not.
 Always show — This displays the grid, even if you have turned
off snapping to grid.
 Always unshow — This hides the grid even if you have turned
on snapping to grid.

 Automatic — This displays the grid when you are snapping to
the grid, and hides the grid when you are not snapping to the
grid.
You can change the size of the snapping cursor with the Snapping
Point Size option on the General tab of the Viewing Options dialog
(see page 44).
Layers
Layers are useful for organizing the different elements in your part
document.
Layers have a long history in CAD tools. Traditionally, layers are
used to organize similar parts of a design or drawing.
In FeatureCAM, for example, you could put geometry on one

layer, named geometry, and features on another layer, named
features.
Layers are also useful for controlling the view. If your layers are
well organized, you can turn the display of different layers on and
off for even finer control than the Show (see page 37) and Hide (see
page 39) menus offer. Setups and UCS can be used in similar ways.
For example, you could put clamps on a layer, named clamps.

The Show and Hide menus enable you to show/hide all solids,
but you could show/hide clamps only by using a separate
layer.
Create and edit layers in the Part View (see page 300), or using the
Layers (see page 301) dialog.
When you create a new element, it is created on all the layers that
are active. Set which layers are active in the Layers (see page 301)
dialog.
You can move an element from one layer to another by selecting it
and dragging it to the new layer in the Part View or by using the
Change Layer (see page 303) dialog.

Layers in the Part View
You can see a list of the document's Layers in the Part View:
You can quickly show or hide layers using the check boxes.
System layer — You cannot edit a System layer, but you can
show or hide it.
User layer — Add your own layers to organize your work. To add
a new layer, right-click on the Layers item and select New Layer
Current layer — New items are added to the current layer.
Double-click on a user layer to make it the current layer. You
cannot hide the current layer.
Layers context menus

Right-click on the Layers item in the Part View to display a context
menu:
New Layer — Select this option to create a new user layer.

Show All Layers — Select this option to show the contents of all
layers in the Graphics area.
Hide All Layers — Select this option to hide the contents of all layers
in the Graphics area.

Layers — Select this option to open the Layers dialog.
Right-click on a layer name in the Part View to display a different
context menu:
Show Layer — Select this option to show the contents of the layer in
the Graphics area.
Hide Layer — Select this option to hide the contents of the layer in
the Graphics area.
Set as Current Layer — Select this option to set the layer as the
current layer. New items are added to the current layer.
Rename — Select this option to rename the layer.
Delete — Select this option to delete the layer.
Select Contents — Select this option to select the contents of the
layer. This is useful, for example, if you want to move them to
another layer.
The Set as Current Layer, Rename, and Delete options are

unavailable for system layers.
Layers dialog
Use the Layers dialog to create and edit the layers (see page 299)
in your part document.
Use one of the following methods to display the Layers dialog:

 Click the Layers button in the Show Menu of the Advanced
 Select View > Layers from the menu.
 Click the current layer name on the Status bar (see page 32) and
select Layer Dialog from the context menu.
 Right-click Layers in the Part View and select Layers from the
context menu.
Current Layer — This displays the name of the current layer. You can
select a different layer from the list to make it the current layer.
Active layers — All layers in the document are listed in the lower
part of the dialog. Selected layers, which have next to their
names, are active and displayed in the graphics window. Any new
elements that you create are created on all active layers. To create
new elements on one or some layers only, deselect the layers you
do not want to contain the new element to make them inactive.
For example, you could create a new layer called Geometry and
make the other layers inactive, so that when you create new
geometry it is drawn only on the geometry layer. If you have other
existing geometry or points you need to use to construct your
geometry, leave the other layers active.
dialog.
any changes.
New — Click the New button to create a new layer.
Delete — Click the Delete button to delete the selected (highlighted
in blue) layer(s).
Rename — Click the Rename button to change the name of the
selected (highlighted in blue) layer.
Preview — Click the Preview button to preview the selected
(highlighted in blue) layer(s).
Name Layer dialog

The Name Layer dialog is displayed when you click the New or
Rename buttons in the Layers (see page 301) dialog.
Enter the name for the new layer or the new name for an existing
layer. You can use upper case and lower case letter, number, and
symbols.
dialog.
any changes.
Change Layer dialog
To open the Change Layer dialog, first select one or more entities in
the Graphics window, then do one of the following:
 Right-click on the selected entity and select Change Layer from
the context menu.
 Click the Change Layer button in the Show Menu of the

Advanced (see page 12) toolbar.
 Select Edit > Change Layer from the menu.
Select the new layer from those listed.
dialog.
any changes.
Using math to define fields and shapes

In FeatureCAM, you can use a variety of mathematical tools to enter
information into numeric fields, for example:
Turning input modes (see page 304)
Equations (see page 304)
Variables and constants (see page 304)
Operators (see page 305)

Mathematical (including trigonometric) functions (see page 307)
Polar (see page 307) and Cartesian coordinates
Degrees and radians
Turning input modes

Turning input modes determine how you enter coordinates when
creating a Turning model.
To change the turning input mode, select Options > Turning Input
Modes from the menu and select one of the following options:
 3D (XYZ) — Enter coordinates as X Y Z values.
 Radius (RZ) — Enter coordinates as a radius and Z coordinate.
 Diameter (DZ) — Enter coordinates as a diameter and Z
coordinate.
Equations
You can use equations in numeric fields in FeatureCAM dialogs. In
parametric mode (see page 309), the equation is always displayed.
With parametric modeling off, the result of the equation is
displayed.
Equations are input similar to the DOS command line format. The
operators are listed in the Operators table (see page 305). In a
complex equation, multiplication and division operations are
performed first, then addition and subtraction. Parentheses are also
supported and can change the order of operation.
You can specify real numbers in several ways, for example:
1.
.1
1.234
1.e2
.1e3
.1e-4
1.2e+6
Numeric arguments can be constants. The results of operators can
be assigned to variables just like any other function:
x=1
y = 2 * (x + 2)
z = y * 47.5
You can then use the variable in other numeric fields alone, or with
other operations.

Operators table
Operator Description Operator Description
+ addition, acosd Computes the
adds two (num) arccosine (in
numbers degrees) of a
number.
- subtraction, atand Computes the
subtracts (num) arctangent
two numbers (in degrees)
of a number.
Result range
is -90 to 90.
* multiplicatio atan2d Computes the
n, multiplies (y,x) arctangent
two numbers (in degrees)
of y/x. Result
range is -180
to 180.
/ division, ceil(num) Returns the
divides two nearest
numbers integer
greater than
or equal to a
number.
sin(num) Computes floor(num) Returns the
the sine of nearest
an angle integer less
(given in than or equal
radians). to a number.
cos(num) Computes fabs(num) Returns the
the cosine of absolute
an angle value of a
(given in number.
radians).
tan(num) Computes sqrt(num) Returns the
the tangent square root of
of an angle a number.
(given in
radians).

sind(num) Computes mm2in(milli Converts
the sine of meters) from
an angle millimeters to
(given in inches.
degrees).
cosd(num) Computes exp(num) Returns e^x
the cosine of where e =
an angle 2.71828.
(given in
degrees).
tand(num) Computes log(num) Returns ln(x)
the tangent where ln is
of an angle the natural
(given in logarithm.
degrees).
asin(num) Computes log10(num) Returns the
the arcsine base-10
(in radians) logarithm of a
of a number. number.
acos(num) Computes pow(base, Returns a
the arccosine power) base number
(in radians) raised to a
of a number. power.
atan(num) Computes degtorad(nu Returns an
the m) angle in
arctangent radians as
(in radians) converted
of a number. from degrees.
Result range
is -pi/2 to
pi/2.
atan2(y,x) Computes radtodeg(nu Returns an
the m) angle in
arctangent degrees as
(in radians) converted
of y/x. from radians.
Result range
is -pi to pi.
asind(num Computes pi The
) the arcsine mathematical
(in degrees) value of pi to
of a number. ten decimal
places.

Functions
You can open the Functions dialog in one of these ways:
 Select Construct > Curve > Other Methods > Functions from the
menu.
 Open the Curve Wizard (see page 325) and select Other methods
as the method and Function as the constructor.
With functions, you create user-defined mathematical relationships
to generate a graphical figure. Functions can be of several types:
y=F(x) (see page 357)
x=F(y) (see page 357)
r=F(a) (see page 358)
x=F(t), y=G(t) (see page 360)
r=F(a), Z=G(a) (see page 361)
x=F(t), y=G(t), z=H(t) (see page 362)
The variables a, r, t, x, and y are local to the functions dialog. Any
previous values that you have set for these variables are ignored.
However, you are free to use any other previously defined variables.
In addition to variables, you may use any predefined functions or
constants discussed under Equations (see page 304).
Trigonometric functions are often used in constructing these
functions. Be careful to use sind(), cosd(), and so on when using
degrees and sin(), cos(), and so on when using radians.
Polar coordinates
You can input polar coordinates in any field that accepts point
locations.
The coordinate input takes the form:
polarXd(r, ,Xc) which is calculated as r(cos ) + Xc.
polarYd(r, ,Yc) which is calculated as r(sin ) + Yc.
Where:
polar specifies polar coordinates.
polarx, is an X coordinate.
polary is a Y coordinate.
d specifies the angle in degrees.

polarxd is a polar coordinate for X with the angle of rotation
specified in degrees.
polarx is a polar coordinate for X with the angle of rotation
specified in radians.
For example, polarXd(1,45,2.5) polarYd(1,45,3.0) and
polarX(1, /4,2.5) polarY(1, /4,3.0) describe the same point. the first
in degrees, the second in radians.
the rotation is specified from, or parallel to, the x axis of

the current Setup.
r is the length of the offset.
is the rotation angle, which can be negative.
Xc, Yc an optional center point.
If you don’t specify a center point, the current origin for the
Setup is used.

Editing a model
There are several ways to edit a model after you have created it.
You can use the following methods to quickly make changes to the
model:
 Select Edit > Undo from the menu to return FeatureCAM to the
state before your previous change. Undo has multiple levels
limited only by system resources.
 Select Edit > Redo from the menu to restore any changes you
have undone.
 To modify a geometry object:
1 Select an object in the graphics window or in the Part View
panel.
2 The object's properties are displayed in the Geometry Edit bar.
3 Enter any values you want to change in the Geometry Edit bar.
4 Click Modify to update the object with the new values.
Parametric modeling
When Parametric modeling is enabled, FeatureCAM remembers the
connections between objects you create in the graphics window, so
that updating one object automatically updates the linked object.
For example, if a line was created tangent to two circles, this
relationship is stored. If you change the location or radius of one of
the circles, the line is updated to reflect that change.
By default, parametric modeling is off, to turn on parametric
modeling, select Options > Parametric Modeling from the menu.
In the image below, a pocket was created from a curve, which was
created from a series of circles connected by tangent lines:

By editing the diameter of one of the circles, the end points of the
lines change, the curve changes and the pocket changes as shown
below:
The Transform dialog enables you to move, rotate, scale, reflect or

copy objects:
To display the Transform dialog, select the object(s) you want to

transform, then:
 Click the Transform button in the Standard toolbar.

 Select Edit > Transform from the menu.
 Right-click on a selected object in the graphics window or the
Part View panel and select Transform from the context menu.
You can transform geometry, curves, features, surfaces, or solids.
Features cannot be transformed using the Scale or To UCS

methods.
To use the Transform dialog:
1 Select the transform method:

 Translate (see page 311) — Move selected objects to a new
location. You can move an absolute distance as specified in
XYZ vectors, or you can move from point to point.
 Rotate (see page 312) — Rotate selected objects by a
specified angle about a point and axis.
 Scale (see page 312) — Scale the selected objects about a
point, either uniformly, or along individual axes. This option is
unavailable for features.
 Reflect (see page 313) — Mirror the selected objects about a
line. The line can be an existing axis, or any other line.
 To UCS lets you transform objects from the current UCS into
second UCS. Select either Same Z or Oppose Z to control the
orientation of the Z axis of your object. This option is not
available for features.
2 Select Move if you want to move the object to the new position.
3 Select Copy if you want to the keep the original object and create
a copy of it in the new position.
4 If you selected Copy, the Copies field is displayed. Enter the
number of copies of the object you want to create.
If you selected Copy and parametric modeling (see page 309) is
on, the Keep link to object option is displayed. Select this option
to link the new object to the original, so that changes to one
object affect the other object.
To translate features, see Paste special (see page 1497).
Translating an object
transform, then:

 Right-click on a selected object in the graphics window or the
Part View panel and select Transform from the context menu.
To translate an object:
1 Select Translate in the Transform dialog.
2 Select Move or Copy.
3 If you choose Copy, optionally select Keep link to object, and
enter the number of Copies.
XYZ Distance - enter the distance you want to move the entity in
the X, Y, and Z directions.

Distance from 2 points - enter the coordinates of a point on the
entity in the From fields or click in the From area and pick a point
with the mouse. Enter the coordinates you want the selected
point of the entity to appear in the To fields or click in the To area
and pick that point with the mouse.
4 Click OK.
Rotating an object
transform, then:

Right-click on a selected object in the graphics window or the Part
View panel and select Transform from the context menu.
To rotate an object
1 Select Rotate in the Transform dialog.
2 Select Move or Copy. If you choose Copy, optionally select Keep
link to object, and enter the number of Copies.
3 Select Center point and X-axis to rotate around X.
4 Select Center point and Y-axis to rotate around Y.
5 Select Center point and Z-axis to rotate around Z.
6 To change the center point for either of these options, click the
Pick location button and select the center point, or enter the
coordinates.
7 If you would rather rotate about a line you have created, click
Line and then click the Pick line button and then select the
line in the graphics window.
8 Click OK.
Scaling an object
transform, then:

1 Select Scale in the Transform dialog.

2 If you want to scale the object the same amount in all directions,
select Uniform and enter the Scale XYZ factor. (For example, a
scale factor of 0.5 generates geometry at one half the size of the
original for the first copy).
3 If you want to scale the object differently in each direction,
deselect the Uniform check box and then enter separate X, Y and
Z factors.
4 Scaling is performed relative to a point. Enter the coordinates of
this point or click the Pick location button and select the point
in the graphics window. Using a scale factor of 0.5, the distance
between the point and the element would be decreased by half
for the new element. When using multiple objects, you may want
to select the centre point of the group of objects to maintain
proportional spacing in the final drawing.
5 Select Move or Copy.
6 If you choose Copy, optionally select Keep link to object, and
enter the number of Copies.
Reflecting an object
transform, then:

1 Select Reflect in the Transform dialog.
2 Select Move or Copy. If you choose Copy, optionally select Keep
link to object, and enter the number of Copies.
3 Now you must specify the plane through which the objects are
transformed. This plane can be specified by either selecting a
plane (XZ, YZ or XY) and specifying the height of the plane (X, Y
or Z respectively), or by picking a line and selecting one of the
axis options (Line and X-axis, Line and Y-axis or Line and
Z-axis).
4 Click Finish.

Multiple Regions
The Multiple Regions option affects how the Trim, Extend, and Clip
functions work. When Multiple Regions is off, a clipped geometry is
considered as multiple separate lines. When Multiple Regions is on,
the clipped geometry is considered to be one line, even though it
displays in multiple segments. Selecting either segment selects the
entire line, or both segments. Trim and Extend can extend separate
segments, or extend visible portions of lines depending on the
setting of Multiple Regions.
To enable Multiple Regions, select Options > Multiple Regions from
the menu.
Edit
You can use the Edit menu to modify existing geometry.
You can use these methods to edit geometry:

Geometry Constructors (see page 275) dialog, then click an edit
button.
 In the Geometry toolbar, click a button in the Edit Menu.
 Select a Construct > Edit Geometry menu option.
You can use the following edit tools:
Clip (see page 315)
Trim/extend (see page 315)
Infinite (see page 316)

You can change how the edit tools behave by enabling or disabling
parametric modeling (see page 309) and multiple regions (see page
314).

Clip
Clip removes a region of a line, arc, circle, or curve. A region is
defined as a portion of an object between two intersection points. A
region of a circle is highlighted between two lines in the figure
below.
If you want to connect geometry into a curve using chaining,

you do not need to completely trim the geometry.
To clip geometry:
1 Use one of these methods to enter clipping mode:

Geometry Constructors (see page 275) dialog, then click Clip
.
 In the Geometry toolbar, click Clip in the Edit Menu.

 Select the Construct > Edit Geometry > Clip menu option.
2 Move the mouse over the object you want to clip. Note that as
you move your mouse, the regions of geometric objects are
highlighted. Click the mouse to remove a region.
3 When you have finished clipping, exit clipping mode (see page
276).
Restrictions
 You can trim curves against lines and arcs, but you cannot trim
lines or arcs against curves.
 You cannot trim curves against other curves.
 You cannot clip infinite lines and circles unless they are crossed
by a line or arc.
 Interactive feedback works only for lines and arcs.
Trim or extend
Trim/extend changes the length of a line or an arc. You can use
Trim/extend to lengthen or shorten lines and arcs as follows:
1 Use one of these methods to enter trim/extend mode:

Trim/extend .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click Trim/extend in the Edit

Menu.
 Select the Construct > Edit Geometry > Trim/extend menu
option.
2 Click an endpoint of a line or an arc.
3 Click the new point. You can also drag the mouse to locate the
new endpoint location.
The new point does not have to be exactly on the line or

arc. This does not change an element's orientation
(location, angle, or radius).
4 When you have finished trimming or extending lines and arcs,
exit trim/extend mode (see page 276).
Infinite
Infinite changes arcs to full circles and finite lines (see page 316)
into infinite lines (see page 316).
1 Use one of these methods to enter infinite mode:

Infinite .
 In the Geometry toolbar, click Infinite in the Edit Menu.

 Select the Construct > Edit Geometry > Infinite menu option.
2 Click the arc or finite line you want to make infinite.
3 When you have finished with all the arcs and lines you want to
make infinite, exit infinite mode (see page 276).
Infinite and finite lines

Finite lines are lines which have distinct endpoints. Geometry
methods such as line from two points (see page 277) create finite
lines using the endpoints you specify. Infinite lines do not have end
points and therefore go on forever. No matter how much you zoom
or pan, you never see the end of these lines. Infinite lines are used
to represent lines with a particular slope, such as horizontal (see
page 279) or vertical (see page 279) lines.

You can change an infinite line to a finite line using Clip (see page
315) or a finite line to an infinite line using Infinite (see page 316).
Decimal Places dialog

The Decimal Places dialog specifies the number of decimal places
displayed.
To display the Decimal Places dialog, select Options > Decimal Places
from the menu.
There are two lists:
English — The number of decimal places displayed in models using
English units (inches).
Metric — The number of decimal places displayed in models using
metric units (mm).
Select the number of decimal places from the lists. For example if
you want four decimal places displayed, select 0.1234.
Some dialog fields may not be wide enough to display the

selected number of decimal places. If this is the case, select
the value in the field and press the left and right arrow keys
on the keyboard to scroll.

Curves
Curves are paths in 2D or 3D space from which you can create
surfaces (see page 381), solids (see page 445), and features (see
page 529). You can create them in FeatureCAM or import them from
a CAD system. Curves are displayed in blue, for example:
Curves can be open or closed. Open curves have end points that do
not meet. Some features must be created from a closed curve. A
closed curve defines an area that is separate from the exterior of
the curve.
Use these methods to create curves:
 Click the Curves step in the Steps panel to display the Curve
Creation dialog (see page 319).
 Use the Curves and Surfaces toolbar (see page 13).
 Select the Construct > Curve menu option to display the list of
curve creation tools.
You can create curves from geometry objects (see page 318), from
other curves, from points (see page 367), from cam dimensions
(see page 364), from Windows fonts (see page 368), or from
surfaces (see page 343). Many curve creation methods are available
from the Curve wizard (see page 325).
Any ambiguities such as overlapping or intersecting curve

links can cause failures and unpredictable results in the
machining routines in FeatureCAM.

Curve Creation dialog
To display the Curve Creation dialog, click Curves in the Steps
panel.
Closed Curve (see page 320) — Chain (see page 319) pieces of
geometry into a closed boundary using a single mouse click.
Pick Curve Pieces (see page 321) — Chain (see page 319) pieces
of geometry into an open boundary using a mouse click at each
end.
Curve Wizard (see page 325) — Create curves using the curve
wizard (see page 325).
Surface Projection (see page 351) — Chain projections of vertical

surfaces into curves using mouse clicks.
Chaining
Lines, circles, and arcs typically represent the shape of a part. To
use a sequence of lines and arcs to create a feature, you must chain
them into a curve. Chaining is the primary way of creating curves
by connecting pieces of geometry. In many cases you do not need
to trim the geometry before creating a curve; chaining works better
with smooth, tangent-continuous paths because these paths are
more conducive to manufacturing.
There are two chaining modes; Closed Curve (see page 320) and
Pick Curve Pieces (see page 321).

You can use Pick Curve Pieces (see page 321) to select the
geometry segments manually, or Closed Curve (see page 320) to
automatically generate a closed path. You can also double-click
when using Pick Curve Pieces (see page 321) to automatically
generate a closed path.
 In the example below, left-clicking at point in Closed Curve
(see page 320) mode (or double-clicking at point in Pick
Curve Pieces (see page 321) mode) creates a closed curve
around the geometry:
 In the example below, left-clicking at point , then left-clicking

at point in Pick Curve Pieces (see page 321) mode creates an
open curve along a path that connects the geometry:
You can continue to click on geometry segments to chain them to

the curve. You can then complete the curve by clicking the Create
button, or continue chaining to create a closed loop.
Closed Curve
Closed Curve enables you to automatically generate a closed path
along a series of geometry segments and chain them into a closed
curve.
To use Closed Curve:
1 Use one of the following methods to enter Closed Curve mode:

 Click the Curves step in the Steps panel to display the
Curve Creation dialog, then click the Closed Curve button.
 Click the Closed Curve button in the Chain Menu in the

Geometry (see page 17) toolbar.
 Select Construct > Curve > Chaining > Closed Curve from the
menu.
2 Enter a name for the curve in the Name field, or leave it as
default to use the automatically generated name.
3 Select the Plane in which you want to create the curve.
 Grid — Select this option to create the curve in the plane of
the snapping grid (see page 296).
 UCS — Select this option to create the curve in the plane of
the UCS (see page 109).
 Setup — Select this option to create the curve in the plane of
the Setup (see page 114).
 Unrestricted — Select this option to create a 3D curve.
4 Click on a geometry object in the graphics window to display a
preview of the curve.
5 If the curve follows the wrong path, click Clear Pieces to deselect
the created path, then repeat step 4.
6 Click Create or press the Enter key to create the curve.
Pick Curve Pieces

Pick Curve Pieces enables you to manually select a path along a
series of geometry segments and chain them into either an open or
a closed curve.
To use Pick Curve Pieces:
1 Use one of the following methods to enter Pick Curve Pieces
mode:
 Click the Curves step in the Steps panel to display the

Curve Creation dialog, then click the Pick Curve Pieces
button.
 Click the Pick Curve Pieces button in the Chain Menu in the
 Select Construct > Curve > Chaining > Pick Pieces from the
menu.

2 Enter a name for the curve in the Name field, or leave it as
default to use the automatically generated name.
3 Select the Plane in which you want to create the curve.
 Grid — Select this option to create the curve in the plane of
the snapping grid (see page 296).
 UCS — Select this option to create the curve in the plane of
the UCS (see page 109).
 Setup — Select this option to create the curve in the plane of
the Setup (see page 114).
 Unrestricted — Select this option to create a 3D curve.
4 Click on a series of geometry segments in the graphics window
to create a path along them. A preview of the curve is displayed
in blue in the graphics window.
5 If you select the wrong segment, or the curve follows the wrong
path, do one of the following:
 Click the Undo button in the Standard toolbar to clear the

previously selected segment.
 Click the Clear Pieces button in the dialog bar to deselect all
segments.
 Use Unpick Curve Pieces (see page 324) to unchain geometry
segments. Repeat step 1 to enter Pick Curve Pieces mode.
6 Click Create or press the Enter key to create the curve.
Restrictions of using pick pieces (chaining) for creating

curves
 All of the geometry must be shown on the screen.
 Pick Curve Pieces does not work for curve segments; you can
only connect arcs, lines, and circles. To connect curve segments
use Curve join (see page 327).
 The geometry must be tangent continuous (smooth). Even if
your geometry looks smooth, it may not be. Make sure that you
have used tangent snapping when creating the geometry.
 Chaining has a limit on its search path length in order to improve
performance. If you are working with data with a lot of small
pieces you may need to increase this limit.
Troubleshooting pick pieces (chaining)

I cannot form a closed loop.

 Your data may be too complex to use the double-click interface.
If double-clicking (or single clicking in Closed Curve mode) does
not work, click the start segment, then click the next segment
you want to add to the curve, and proceed until you have
selected the complete curve. If there is only one simple path
between points, click a couple of segments apart and
FeatureCAM finds the path that connects them.
 The whole target curve must be visible on screen. Show the
additional geometry if it is not displayed.
 If you are working with data with many small pieces you may
need to increase the Double-click Depth or Single Click Depth in
the Chaining Options (see page 324) dialog. To see if this is the
case, go into Select mode and then pick pieces of your geometry.
Increasing the Endpoint tolerance setting should also help.
 Arcs and fillets need to be tangent or chaining may choose the
other branch. Make sure that the geometry is really tangent by
recreating the geometry that does not chain by using the Snap to
tangent snap mode. You may want to turn off the other snap
modes to ensure that you are truly snapping to the tangent.
 Gaps between the endpoints of geometry objects must be less
than the Tolerance value, which you can specify in the Chaining
Options (see page 324) dialog. Look for blue squares in the
chaining data. They indicate that the curve is not connected to
another piece at that point. Zoom in on that data. Select the
pieces in the gap. If there are no pieces, you may need to
increase the Endpoint tolerance.
The loop that is selected is wrong.
 If double-clicking is selecting the wrong loop, the data may have
sharp corners or the algorithm may just be making some wrong
decisions. If double-clicking does not work, you can click the
start segment, then click the next segment you want added to
the curve and proceed until you have selected the complete
curve. If there is only one simple path between points, you can
click a couple of segments apart and FeatureCAM finds the path
that connects them.
I cannot pick the pieces.
 You are probably picking pieces that are already curves. You
must use Curve join (see page 327).
Chaining does not work in 3D.
 When you enter Chaining mode, select the Unrestricted button in
the dialog bar. This enables chaining to pursue links that are not
planar.
Chaining is working in the wrong plane.

 The Grid, UCS and Setup buttons restrict the plane of chaining.
Select a plane and re-chain.
Unpick Curve Pieces

Unpick Curve Pieces allows you to deselect geometry segments
when chaining. This is useful if you select the wrong geometry
segment when chaining, or the curve you are creating follows the
wrong path.
To use Unpick Curve Pieces:
1 Click the Unpick Curve Pieces button in the Chain Menu in the
2 Click on a selected geometry segment in the graphics window to
deselect it.
Chaining Options dialog

The Chaining Options dialog contains settings which you can use to
improve your chaining results.
Use one of the following methods to display the Chaining Options
dialog:
 Select Options > Chaining from the menu.
 Click the Options button in the dialog bar when using chaining.
The Chaining Options dialog contains the following settings:

 Avoid sharp corners — This option causes the chaining process to
select paths which do not contain sharp (acute) corners if
possible.

 Chain only on-screen geometries — This option causes the
chaining process to use only the geometry visible on screen for
calculations. If you have a part which has many pieces of
geometry, you can zoom in on the curve you want to chain to
simplify the process. If deselected, chaining can be slow on parts
with lots of geometry, because FeatureCAM considers all
geometry in the part, even if you are chaining a single closed
circle and it is the only visible geometry.
 Endpoint tolerance — Geometries separated by a distance less
than this value are considered to intersect. You may need to use
a higher value for imported data than for data created in
FeatureCAM.
 Double-click depth — The number of segments FeatureCAM
analyzes in each direction to connect your start and end points.
You may need to use a higher value for imported data than for
data created in FeatureCAM.
 Single-click depth — Enter the number of segments the program
analyzes in each direction to connect your start and end points
for manual chaining. You may need to use a higher value for
imported data than for data created in FeatureCAM.
Creating curves
Use one of the following methods to create curves:
 Curve Wizard (see page 325) dialog.
 Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar.
 From the menu, select Construct > Curve and select one of the
options.
Curve Wizard
The Curve wizard contains a list of all the curve creation tools,
grouped by method of construction.
Use one of the following methods to display the Curve Wizard dialog:
 Click the Curves step in the Steps panel to display the Curve
Creation dialog, then click the Curve wizard button.
 Click the Curve Wizard button in the Advanced toolbar.

 Select Construct > Curve > Curve Wizard from the menu.
To use the Curve Wizard dialog:

1 Select a method of construction from the list at the top of the
dialog, from the following:
 Curve from curve (see page 327)
 Curve from surface (see page 343)
 Other methods (see page 356)
A list of specific constructors for the selected method of
construction is displayed at the bottom of the dialog.
2 Select a specific constructor from the list at the bottom of the
dialog.
3 Click Next to display the selected constructor's dialog.

Curve from curve
You can use the Curve wizard (see page 325) to create curves from
existing curves.
You can create the following types of curve from curves:

Join (see page 327)
Curve Start/Reverse (see page 329)
Offset (see page 332)
Project to UCS (see page 333)
Extract Font Curve (see page 334)
Smooth/Reduce Curve (see page 335)
Unwrap Curve (see page 339)
Merge Curves (see page 341)
Join
Join connects a series of curves and geometry objects into a single
curve. If the end points are not in the same location, a straight line
is drawn between them to create the curve. You can specify the
order of the objects manually or allow FeatureCAM to calculate the
path along them. You can only join whole curves and geometry
objects, to connect segments see Chaining (see page 319).
To use Join:

1 Use one of the following methods to display the Join Curves
dialog:
 In the Curve Wizard (see page 325), select Curve from curve,
then Join, then click Next.
 Select Construct > Curve > From Curve > Join from the menu.
 Click the Join button in the Curve From Curve menu in the
Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar.
1 Optionally enter a curve name in the Name field, or leave the
default name.
2 Use one of the following methods to add the curves you want to
join to the Objects list:
 Select a curve in the Curve list and click the Add item from list
button.
 Select a curve in the graphics window or the Part View panel
and click the Add item from list button.
 Click the Pick curve or geometry button and select a curve

3 Select Show Preview to display a preview of the new curve in the
graphics window.
4 To change the order of the objects, click the Move item up
and the Move item down buttons.
5 To reverse the direction of an object, select it from the Object list
and click the Reverse selected curve button.
6 To remove an object from the Objects list, select it and click the
Delete item button.

7 Optionally select Connect start and end. This draws a straight line
between the open end of the first curve and the open end of the
last curve. A preview of this line is shown in the graphics
window; ensure the line does not intersect the curve.
The Tolerance is used in two ways:
 When FeatureCAM decides how to order the segments. If the
distance between two segments is lower than the tolerance
value, they are considered adjacent and are joined together;
otherwise the closest segment is joined with a straight line.
 When creating the new curve from the ordered segments. If the
distance between the first point of a segment and the last point
of the previous segment is less than the tolerance value, the first
point is not added; otherwise the first point is added to the new
curve, resulting in a line segment between the two points.
When working with curves, FeatureCAM examines the last control
point as compared to the first control point of the next object. Arcs
are converted to curves and manipulated as curves. When
comparing points, FeatureCAM uses a Manhattan distance.
Curve Start/Reverse
Curves have a start point, an end point, and a direction. You can
use Curve Start/Reverse to change the direction of a curve (see page
329) or change the start point of a curve (see page 330).
Changing the direction (see page 329) of a curve has a number of
possible uses:
 to change the direction of a sweep in a swept surface.
 to change the direction of a curve in a surface.
 to change the direction of a curve as you are joining curves
together.
Changing the start point (see page 330) of a curve is helpful for
operations such as Ruled surface (see page 392). The start points of
the two curves are used to form a correspondence between the
curves when the surface is created.
Reversing a curve
You can reverse the direction of open and closed curves:

1 Use one of the following methods to display the Curve
Start/Reverse dialog:
then Curve Start/Reverse, and click Next.
Curve Start/Reverse button in the Curve from Curve menu.
 From the menu, select Construct > Curve > From Curve > Curve
Start/Reverse.
1 If you want to create a new curve, select Create new curve.
Optionally enter a curve name in the Name field, or leave the
default name.
2 If you want to replace the old curve with the new, select Modify
existing curve.
3 Select the curve you want to use from the Curve menu, or click
the Pick Curve button and select it in the graphics window.
The direction of the curve is displayed in the graphics window.
4 Select Reverse.
5 Click Preview. The direction of the new curve is displayed.
Changing the start point of a curve

You can change the start point of closed curves:

1 Use one of the following methods to display the Curve
Start/Reverse dialog:
then Curve Start/Reverse, and click Next.
Curve Start/Reverse button in the Curve from Curve menu.
 From the menu, select Construct > Curve > From Curve > Curve
Start/Reverse.
Optionally enter a curve name in the Name field, or leave the
default name.
2 If you want to modify the existing curve, select Modify existing
curve.
The direction of the curve is displayed in the graphics window.
The start point is at the tip of the direction arrow.
4 Select Set start point.
5 Enter the location of the new start point in the Start point fields,
or click the Pick new start point button and select it in the
graphics window.
6 Click Preview. The direction arrow moves to the new start point
location.

Offset
Offset curve offsets a curve in a specified direction by a specified
distance.
Offset is a mathematical function based on the curve. It is not

necessarily a linear transformation. If you just want to move
a curve, use the Transform (see page 310) dialog.
1 Use one of the following methods to display the Offset Curve
dialog:
then Offset, and click Next.
Offset button in the Curve from Curve menu.
 From the menu, select Construct > Curve > From Curve > Offset.
default name.
3 Enter the Offset distance.
4 Select Left or Right to offset the curve in the direction you want.
The new curve is displayed in blue in the graphics window.

5 Offsetting a curve sometimes results in overlapping regions, for
example:
To remove such regions, select Eliminate self-intersections and

enter a Tolerance. The overlapping regions are trimmed away:
Offsetting a curve can have somewhat surprising results

depending on the nature of the curve, for example, arc
sections of the curve might reverse themselves. Until you are
familiar with the effects of Offset, you should save your work
before performing the offset to be sure you can return to a
good set of data for your part model.
Project to UCS
Project to UCS displays a curve's 'shadow' in a different coordinate
system. Projecting to UCS creates a new curve in the selected UCS,
but does not affect the original.
This method assumes that you are projecting a curve from one UCS
to the one you are currently in.

1 Use one of the following methods to display the Project to UCS
dialog:
then Project to UCS, and click Next.
Project to UCS button in the Curve from Curve menu.
 From the menu, select Construct > Curve > From Curve >
Project to UCS.
default name.
3 Select the UCS from the list.
4 Select the plane you want to project the curve to from YZ Plane,
XZ Plane, or XY Plane.
Extract Font Curve

When you create text in FeatureCAM, it is created as a single curve.
You can use Extract Font Curve to extract characters or segments
from the curve so you can edit them.
To extract a font curve, the model must contain engraving

text.
To extract a font curve:

1 Use one of the following methods to display the Extract Font
Curves dialog:
then Extract Font Curves, and click Next.
Extract Font Curves button in the Curve from Curve menu.
Extract Font Curves.
default name.
3 Select a text curve from the Font list, or click the Pick Curve
button and select it in the graphics window.
The font used to create the text determines some things about
the behavior of the Font Segment option. If the character
encloses open space such as the letter 'P', you can select either
the inner or outer curve segment. If the Machine Tool Sans Serif
font is used, many of the characters are drawn in separate
segments so you can only select individual segments of that font
with this function.
4 To extract a single segment or character, click the Font Segment
5 To extract all characters in the selected text curve as separate
curves, click the Select All button.
Smooth/Reduce Curve
To reduce curve data:

1 Use one of the following methods to display the Smooth/Reduce
Curve dialog:
then Smooth/Reduce Curve, and click Next.
Smooth/Reduce Curve button in the Curve from Curve
menu.
Smooth/Reduce Curve.
default name.
5 If you want to replace the old curve with a new one, select
Modify existing curve.
6 Select the curve reduction method (see page 338) by either:
 Selecting Smooth spline approximation, or
 Selecting Arc/line approximation and selecting Chain arcs/lines
7 Enter a Tolerance. This number indicates how closely the new
curve approximates the original curve.
8 Click the Preview button.
9 The Data reduction % is displayed in the dialog, which shows you
how much less data the new curves occupies versus the original
curve.

10 If the Tolerance value results in a curve which has more data
than the original, a warning dialog is displayed. To reduce the
amount of data in the new curve, increase the tolerance.
Creating a smoother curve requires more data. This frequently
occurs with piecewise linear input curves where the tolerance is
smaller than the linear pieces that comprise the curves. This
operation performs a combination of both smoothing and data
reduction.
11 If you want to see this curve extruded as a sample use of the
new curve, select Show preview surface button and click Preview
again. A surface is displayed. This surface can be shaded to
check the quality of the curve.
12 Repeat steps 6 - 10 until you are happy with the resulting curve.
Approximating curves with lines and arcs

How to approximate curves with lines and arcs:
1 Use one of the following methods to display the Smooth/Reduce
Curve dialog:
then Smooth/Reduce Curve, and click Next.
Smooth/Reduce Curve button in the Curve from Curve
menu.
Smooth/Reduce Curve.
2 Select a curve from the Curve list or in the graphics window.
3 Select Arc/line approximation.

4 Deselect Chain arcs/lines.
5 Enter a Tolerance. This number indicates how closely the arcs
and lines come to the original data. If you created the curve
initially, try to use a tolerance that is larger than you used to
create the curve.
7 The data reduction % value is displayed which shows you how
much less data the arcs and lines require than the original curve.
8 If the Tolerance value results in a curve which has more data
than the original, a warning dialog is displayed. To reduce the
amount of data in the new curve, increase the tolerance, but this
is not essential if you want to use this tolerance value.
9 Select the Show preview surface then click Preview to display a
preview of a surface extruded from the new curve. You can
shade this surface to verify the quality of the curve.
Reducing curve data

Curves that are created by approximations are often represented by
a linear curve with hundreds or thousands of points. This data is
accurate, but often very inefficient to work with. The Smooth/Reduce
Curve command (available from the Curve wizard (see page 325) or
the Construct menu) provides two methods for reducing these linear
curves:
 Smooth spline approximation — This method approximates the
curve with a smooth cubic spline curve. This method works best
for three dimensional curves which are made up of many small
linear segments.
 Arc/line approximation — This method approximates the curve
with arcs and lines. It works best for planar curves that originally
came from arcs and lines or piecewise linear curves from import,
trim loop extraction or surface/surface intersection that are
approximating arcs and lines. Arc/line works best when the
arc/line tolerance is bigger than the original sampling tolerance.
If you select Chain arcs/lines, the curve is approximated with
lines and arcs and then chained into a curve.
See How to reduce curve data (see page 335) or How to
approximate curves with lines and arcs (see page 337) for more
information on uses of the Smooth/reduce curve dialog.

Unwrap Curve
If you are working with a curve that has been wrapped around an
axis and you want to unwrap the curve into a planar curve, use
Curve unwrap. Wrapped features in FeatureCAM require a planar
curve, so this function is helpful if you want to generate toolpaths
from data that is already wrapped (see page 340).
To construct a curve using Unwrap:
1 Use one of the following methods to display the Unwrap Curve
dialog:
then Unwrap Curve, and click Next.
Unwrap Curve button in the Curve from Curve menu.
Unwrap Curve.
default name.
4 Select the Axis that the curve is wrapped around. This setting
defaults to the wrapping axis specified in the Stock wizard (see
page 205).
5 The Tolerance controls the accuracy of the unwrapped curve. All
unwrapped curves are piece-wise linear, so the smaller the
tolerance, the more points your curve has.

6 The Radial offset should normally be set to 0 because the curve is
unwrapped in place. If you have extracted the curve at the
bottom of the feature, then you need to set the Radial offset to
the depth of the feature to offset the curve to the top.
7 Select Project to UCS plane if you are creating a 2D feature, or
deselect it if you want a 3D curve.
8 Select Reduce/Smooth if you want to reduce the number of points
in your curve.
Unwrap Curve example

The following part is a solid model that has a pocket wrapped
around the X axis.
The top curve is obtained by extracting the top trimming loop from
the pocket.

This curve is then unwrapped into a flat curve that can be used to
create a wrapped Pocket feature in FeatureCAM.
Merge Curves
You can use Merge Curves to chain large geometry datasets, without
the need for lots of mouse clicks.
To create curves using Merge Curves:
1 Select the geometry and/or curves that you want to merge.
2 Use one of the following methods to display the Merge Curve
dialog:
 In the Curve Wizard (see page 325), select Merge Curves, then
Unwrap Curve, and click Next.
Merge Curves button in the Curve from Curve menu.
 From the menu, select Construct > Curve > From Curve > Merge.
default name. This is the name of the first curve created. If more
than one curve is created, the additional curves have a suffix of
_1, _2, and so on.

4 Enter a Tolerance for the maximum variation of the new curve
from the original curve.
5 Click the Preview button to display a preview of the new curves in
Merge Curves example

This example part has geometry made up of many separate lines
and circles:
With Circle centers enabled in the Snap Modes (see page 134)
dialog, you can see that there are many circles in the design:
Creating the curves using normal curve chaining (see page 318)
would be very difficult and time-consuming. By using Curve Merge,
you can select all the geometry, then create all the curves at the
same time in one step:

Curve from surface (3D)
existing surfaces.
Surfaces are usually 3D objects in FeatureCAM 3D. There are

several kinds of curves derived from surfaces. Curves from this set
of categories are often used as building blocks for new surfaces or
trimming surfaces.
You can create the following types of curves from surfaces:
Surface Boundary (see page 343)
Trimmed Edges (see page 344)
Surface Intersection (see page 345)
Surface Isoline (see page 347)
Projected onto Surface (see page 349)
Surface Edges (see page 350)
Surface Projection (see page 351)
Revolved Boundary (see page 353)
Surface boundary
Surfaces are defined in a rectangular array of rows and columns,
even though the surface itself may not look like that. Because of
this definition, you can extract individual curves in the surface,
especially those on the boundaries.
Boundary curves are particularly useful as a step in building and
modifying surfaces. For example, you probably want to extract
boundary curves to build a cap surface.
Surface boundary extracts the curve from a surface's boundary:

1 Open the Surface Boundary dialog in one of these ways:
 In the Curve Wizard (see page 325), select Curve from surface,
then Surface Boundary, and click Next.
Boundary button in the Curve from surface menu.
 From the menu, select Construct > Curve > From Surface >
Boundary.
default name.
2 Select the surface you want to use from the Surface menu, or
use the Pick Surface button to select it in the Graphics
window.
3 Use the Pick Curve button to pick a boundary in the graphics

window, or select from:
 First Row
 Last Row
 First Column
 Last Column
The selected boundary is highlighted in red in the graphics
window.
Trimmed edge
Surfaces are defined in a rectangular array of rows and columns,
even though the surface itself may not look like that. Because of
this definition, you can extract individual curves in the surface, in
this case those on the first or last column or row.

Edge curves are particularly useful as a step in building and
modifying surfaces. For example, you probably want to extract edge
curves to build a cap surface.
1 Open the Trimmed Edge dialog in one of these ways:
then Trimmed Edges, and click Next.
Trimmed Edge button in the Curve from surface menu.
Trimmed Edge.
default name.
window.
3 Click the Pick Curve button and pick an edge in the graphics
window.
4 Optionally select Join adjacent loops to connect the curve to other
trim loops that are present in the source surface. You may need
to use Undo so you can select/deselect this option to get the
required curve.
Intersection
Calculating the curve of intersection between two surfaces is useful
for surface trimming (see page 418) or to use as a curve for a 3D
groove feature (see page 689).

The intersection of two surfaces that meet is generally a 3D curve.
As long as the surfaces are not tangent (like a surface and its fillet)
or do not have a complete region of overlap you should be able to
calculate their intersection curve using FeatureCAM. Intersection
curves are often used for surface trimming (see page 418).
1 Open the Surface Intersection dialog in one of these ways:
then Surface Intersection, and click Next.

Intersection button in the Curve from surface menu.
Intersection.
default name.
2 Select the first surface in the Surface 1 menu or use the Pick
Surface button to select it in the graphics window.
3 Add each intersecting surface in one of these ways:
 Select the intersecting surface in the Intersecting Surfaces
menu and click the Add button to add it to the Surface list
 Click the Pick Surface button and select each surface in

To remove a surface from the Surface list, select it and click the
Delete item button.
4 Click the Preview button to see the intersection curve highlighted
See also Surface-surface trimming (see page 432).
Isoline
Surfaces are defined using a rectangular array of points arranged in
rows and columns; these points are not displayed. For any location
on the surface, curves exist that travel from one surface boundary
to another. These curves are called isolines. In this image, the 3
blue curves are row isolines and the 5 orange curves are column
isolines.

To create an isoline curve:
1 Open the Surface Isoline dialog in one of these ways:
then Surface Isoline, and click Next.
Isoline button in the Curve from surface menu.
Isoline.
default name.
window.
3 Select Row or Column. The selected part of the surface is
highlighted in the graphics window.
4 Select Multiple to create more than one isoline curve or Pt. to
create one isoline curve that passes through a specific point.
5 If you selected Multiple, enter the Count number of isolines you
want. Optionally select Include boundary to additionally create
curves from the boundary isolines.
6 If you selected Pt, enter the coordinates of the point that you
want the isoline to pass through, or use the Pick point button
to select the point in the graphics window.

Project onto surface
Often, you want the outline of one surface as traced against another
surface. This function generates that curve for you. This function is
often used as an intermediate step in constructing or modifying yet
another surface.
1 Open the Project Onto Surface dialog in one of these ways:
then Project onto Surface, and click Next.
Project onto Surface button in the Curve from surface
menu.
Project onto Surface.
default name.
window.
4 Select the correct direction relative to the current UCS.

Surface edges
Surface edges is useful for extracting trimming loops from 3D
surface data, and projecting that curve onto the XY plane of the
current UCS. You can use these curves to create 2.5D features.
IGES files often contain complete solid models of a part. Features
such as pockets and holes are subtracted from part surfaces
resulting in a collection of trimmed surfaces. In this model, the
seven pockets have been subtracted from the surrounding surfaces.
Rather than manufacturing all of these surfaces using 3D surface

manufacturing techniques, you should use 2.5D Pocket features for
each pocket.
Surface edges enables you to extract trimming curves from a
collection of surfaces, join them into a curve and then project the
curve onto the XY plane of your current UCS. You can then use this
curve to create features.
To extract curves from 3D data:

1 Open the Surface Edges dialog in one of these ways:
then Surface Edges, and click Next.

Surface Edges button in the Curve from surface menu.
Surface Edges.
default name.
2 Select the edge you want to use from the Edges menu, or use
the Pick curve on surface button to select it in the graphics
window. The edge is added to the table.
Applies to solids only (not a random collection of surfaces).
Ctrl+click two edges to select all edges that make up the

shortest path between them.
Double-click an edge to select all tangential edges.

3 The location of the pick is used to select a surface and extract a
trimming edge. Click the Use next edge of surface button if
you picked the correct surface, but the wrong edge.
4 Continue selecting edges in order until you have selected all
edges.
Use the Move item up and Move item down buttons to
reorder the edges if necessary.
5 If the edges are in the correct order, but the endpoints are
matched up incorrectly, select the surface name in the table and
click the Reverse button.
6 Select Connect start and end if you want the curve to be closed
automatically.
7 Select from the Project to UCS menu to have the curve
automatically projected to the 2D XY plane of the UCS.
8 If a hollow blue square is displayed at the intersection of two
edges, then the edges have not quite matched up. You can
correct this by either selecting the missing edge that will connect
the endpoints, or if it is just an issue of floating point error,
increase the Tolerance parameter.
Surface Projection
Surface projection enables you to extract curves from vertical
surfaces. You can use these curves to create 2.5D features from
surface or solid models.

This method is a wizard that creates geometry by projecting
straight-walled surfaces, for example:
The method performs these steps:

1 Identify straight vertical surfaces from the selected set or from
all surfaces (depending on the option selected).
2 Project these surfaces on to the current UCS.
3 Convert the curves into lines and arcs.
To create a curve using surface projection:

1 Open the Surface Projection wizard in one of these ways:
then Surface Projection, and click Next.
Surface Projection button in the Curve from surface menu.
Surface Projection.
The Surface Projection wizard opens on the first page.
2 If you are not extracting curves from drafted features, set both
the Wall angle and Elevation to 0 and click Next.
3 If you want to extract curves from drafted surfaces, enter a Wall
angle, or click the blue Wall angle label and click two points on
the same vertical isoline in the graphics window.
4 For the Elevation enter the Z coordinate of the top of the feature
or click the Elevation label and click the top of a wall of the
drafted surface in the graphics window.
5 Click Next.
6 Select from:
 All surfaces — to extract curves from all surfaces.

 Only selected — to extract curves from only the surfaces you
have selected.
7 If you are working with a solid model, you have the option to
Remove hidden lines on solids. It is generally a good idea to select
this option. It prevents the creation of curves from blind features
that are on the bottom of the part.
8 Click Next.
9 After you click the Finish button in this dialog, you must chain
(see page 319) the geometry into curves. Select what to do with
the geometry after chaining:
 Remove after chaining — if you want the geometry you created
to be removed when you have finished chaining.
 Keep all geometry — if you want to permanently keep the
geometry after chaining.
Revolved Boundary
Revolved surface boundary is used to create curves from revolved
surfaces.
To create curves from revolved surfaces:
1 Open the Revolved Surface Boundary dialog in one of these ways:
then Revolved Boundary, and click Next.
Revolved Boundary button in the Curve from surface menu.
Revolved Surface Boundary.

2 Select a method from:
 Polygonal method. This method uses the simulation engine to
triangulate the file and create a profile curve. It is the
recommended method for solid and STL models.
This method is available only for solid and STL models

 Surface method
 Solid method
This method is available only for solid models.

3 If you selected Surface method, select:
 All surfaces — if you want to generate geometry from all of
the surfaces and faces of your part.
 Only selected — if you want to restrict the geometry creation
to surfaces/faces that are currently selected.
4 If you selected Polygonal method, click the Tolerances button to
enter tolerances.
5 Optionally select Convert to geometry to convert the curve into its
geometry components.
6 Click the Preview button to see a preview of the curve in the
graphics window.
Revolved surface boundary examples

Polygonal method
This is the recommended method for solid and STL models; it uses
the simulation engine to triangulate the file and create a profile
curve. This example part is an imported .stl file.
With surface shading turned off, you can see the triangles that
make up the .stl file:
To create the turned profile, select Construct > Curve > From Surface
> Revolved Surface Boundary from the menu.
1 In the Revolved Surface Boundary dialog, select Polygonal method.
2 Optionally click the Tolerances button to change the default
Triangle tolerance and Arcline approx. tolerance values.

3 Click the Preview button to see the boundary highlighted in dark
blue in the graphics window:
FeatureCAM finds the correct profile height of the revolved

square ends of the balustrade.
4 Click OK to create the curve.
You can use this curve to create a Turn feature.
Solid method
Turned parts that are imported as solids are typically modeled using
a series of surfaces of revolution. In order to accelerate the creation
of turned features from these solid models, FeatureCAM provides a
method of intelligently extracting geometry from these revolved
solids. This functionality can be invoked from the process of
importing a solid model into a turn or turn/mill document or by
using the Revolved surface boundary curve creation tool. The images
below, from left to right, show the initial solid model, the geometry
created using the Surface method, and the geometry created using
the Solid method. The solid method can only be used for solid
models. You can see from the images below that the solid method
provides better trimming of the geometry versus the surface
method.

Curves from other methods
other methods.
These are the other methods of creating curves:

Function (see page 356)
Cams (see page 364)
Splines (see page 367)
Text (see page 368)
Ellipse (see page 374)
Rectangle (see page 375)
Polygon (see page 376)
Gears (see page 378)
Function
You can use functions to create curves from mathematical
relationships that you define.
To create a curve using a function:
1 Open the Functions dialog in one of these ways:
then Functions, and click Next.
 On the Curve (see page 13) toolbar, click the Functions

button in the Curve Menu.
Functions.

2 Select the type of Function you want from the menu, from:
 y=F(x) (see page 357)
 x=F(y) (see page 357)
 r=F(a) (see page 358)
 x=F(t), y=G(t) (see page 360)
 r=F(a), Z=G(a) (see page 361)
 x=F(t), y=G(t), z=H(t) (see page 362)
The variables a, r, t, x, and y are local to the Functions dialog.

Any previous values that you have set for these variables are
ignored. However, you can use any other previously defined
variables. As well as variables, you can use any predefined
functions or constants discussed under Equations (see page
304).
Trigonometric functions are often used in constructing these

functions. Be careful to use sind(), cosd(), and so on when
using degrees and sin(), cos(), and so on when using radians.
y = F(x) and x = F(y)

In the Function list, select the kind of function you want to build.
Use y = F(x) to specify y as a function of x, and x = F(y) to specify x
as a function of Y.
F — This is the field where you build your function. You can use the
operations described in the Equations (see page 304) section.
Start — This sets the starting point for the range over which your
function is evaluated.
End — This sets the ending point for the range over which your
Increment — This sets the value added to or subtracted from the
previous point evaluated for the function to determine the next
value to be run through the function.

Preview — This generates the curve and displays it for your review
but does not apply the generated function to the drawing as
geometry. Depending on your start and end points and the
increment, it may take a while to evaluate and build the preview
image.
Y=F(x) example:
r = F(a)
The function r = F(a) is useful for describing polar functions where
the radius is calculated as a function of the end angle or argument
variable.
In the Function list, select r = F(a).
F,G, and H — These are the fields where you build your function.
You use the operations described in the Equations (see page 304)
section.
Degree — Select this option to evaluate the function in degrees.
Radian — Select this option to evaluate the function in radians.

image.
r = f(a) example

x = F(t), y = G(t)
In the Function list, select x=F(t), y=G(t) which models parametric
functions.
section.
image.
x = F(t), y = G(t) example

For an example, consider an ellipse. You can use either radian- or
degree-based math, but be sure you use the correct range for the
system you selected. Using a radian system, but specifying the
range from 0-360 (degrees) does not work.
A simple description of an ellipse in degrees is:
x = <width> * sind(t) + <offset>; y = <height> * cosd(t) +
<offset>

If you do not specify an offset, the ellipse is centred on the current
UCS. The diagram below shows an ellipse defined and previewed in
FeatureCAM.
You can also create an ellipse directly using the Ellipse curve
(see page 374) tool.
r = F(a), z = G(a)
Use the function r = F(a), z = G(a) for polar functions with a Z
coordinate that is specified as a function of the angle.
In the Function list, select r = F(a), Z = G(a).
section.
Degree — Select this option to evaluate the function in degrees.
Radian — Select this option to evaluate the function in radians.

image.
r = F(a), Z = G(a) example

You can use the r = F(a), Z = G(a) function to model a helix, for
example:
x = F(t), y = G(t), z = H(t)

Use this function when x, y, and z are parametric functions.

In the Function list, select x = F(t), y = G(t), z = H(t).
section.
image.
x = F(t), y = G(t), z = H(t) example

Cams
Use cams to create the geometric profile of various reciprocating
cams. The shape of the cam is the actual profile of the cam, not the
pitch curve (center line of the follower).
If you have 4th axis support (see page 243) you can also create
Cylindrical or Barrel cams (see page 249).
Open the Cam Properties dialog in one of these ways:
 In the Curve Wizard (see page 325), select Other methods, then
Cams, and click Next.
 On the Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar, click the Cams
button in the Curve Menu.
 From the menu, select Construct > Curve > Other methods > Cams.
The Cam Properties dialog has three tabs: General (see page 364),
Roller (see page 365), and Segment (see page 366).
General tab
The General tab contains options that define the basic dimensions
on which the specific cam attributes are based.
1 Enter the Center coordinates for the cam. Center sets the X and Y
coordinates for the center of the cam body.
2 Enter the Base Radius, the radius of the circle that defines the
body of the cam. This dimension is the minimum distance
between the cam's center and the follower.

3 Enter the Start Angle. Start angle defaults to parallel to the X axis.
Enter an angle in degrees to move the start angle. The direction
of rotation for the start angle is controlled by the Clockwise
Construction option.
4 Cams have a counter-clockwise construction by default. Select
Clockwise Construction to construct the cam from sequential
segments arranged in a clockwise rotation. Note that the Start
Angle is also affected by this setting.
5 If you have 4th-axis support, you can also create cylindrical
cams (see page 249) or barrel cams. Design your cam as usual,
and select Cylindrical Cam.
Roller tab
The Roller tab has options that describe the how the cam is followed
(by a roller).
1 Select the Type (see page 366) of follower motion and its
associated acceleration diagram, commonly described as:
Harmonic (SH) (also known as Simple Harmonic)
Parabolic (PB)
Cycloidal (CY)
Modified Sine (MS)
Modified Trapezoid (MT)
Polynomial 3-4 (4P) (also known as 4th Power Polynomial)
Polynomial 3-4-5 (5P) (also known as 5th Power Polynomial)
Polynomial 4-5-6-7 (7P) (also known as 7th Power Polynomial)
2 Select the Follower Type for the kind of follower the cam is used
with. It can be either Flat or Roller.
3 If you selected Roller, enter:

 Offset — This sets the distance between the center line of
translation for the follower and the cam's center which
controls the pressure angle on the follower. This is not the
cutter offset.
 Radius — This sets the radius of the roller that follows the
cam's shape. If you select a roller-type follower, then you
must enter a radius. A zero roller radius simulates a
knife-edge follower, or constructs the pitch curve of the cam.
See also Cam performance at high speeds (see page 366).
Cam performance at high speeds

Cam type Performance at high speeds
3-4 Polynomial, 3-4-5 Excellent
Polynomial, 4-5-6-7
Polynomial, Modified
Trapezoid, Cycloidal
Modified Sine Good to excellent
Harmonic, Parabolic Good
Segments tab
The Settings tab defines the cam segments and their specific
parameters. The segment arcs are listed in counter-clockwise
sequence.
 Create new entries by clicking New button. The Edit Cam
Segment (see page 367) dialog is displayed.
 To edit an entry, double-click the entry or select the entry and
click the Edit button. The Edit Cam Segment (see page 367)
 To delete a segment, select it in the table and click the Delete
button.

 To change the segment order, select a segment and click the
Move Item Up or Move Item Down button.
Edit cam segment
Select the segment Type:

 Dwell indicates an arc of rotation that neither rises nor falls but
whose diameter from the center is determined from the ending
displacement of the directly preceding segment. Duration sets
how many degrees of rotation the dwell lasts.
 Rise indicates that this segment rises to a greater diameter than
the preceding segment. If this segment is the first segment, rise
is calculated from the base circle defined in the General (see
page 364) tab. Duration sets how many degrees across which the
rise occurs. Displacement sets how far the rise deviates from the
previous segment or the base circle if the segment is the first
segment defined for the cam.
 Fall indicates that this segment decreases from some
displacement to a lower displacement, but never less than the
base circle defined in the General (see page 364) tab. So a fall
should not be the first segment defined. Use Cams to create the
geometric profile of various reciprocating cams. It is the actual
profile of the cam, not the pitch curve (center line of the
follower).
Splines
Splines automatically draws a curve, similar to a Bezier curve,
through a series of points.
To use Splines:
1 Enter Splines mode in one of these ways:
then Splines, and click Next.
Spline/Interpolation button in the Curve Menu.
Spline/Interpolation.

2 Click the Options button in the dialog bar to switch between the
four spline modes which determine whether the curve is an open
or a closed interpolation and an open or closed spline. The active
spline mode is displayed next to the Options button.
3 Pick or enter (see page 275) the location of a series of points.
A preview of the curve is displayed in the graphics window.
4 Click the Create button to create the curve.
The table below shows the effect of the different spline modes:
Open Open
interpolation: approximation:
Closed Closed
interpolation: approximation:
Text
You can type in text in any TrueType font you have installed for
Windows, and use the text as curves to engrave your part with
customized text.
Engraving in FeatureCAM has two steps:
1 Create the text as a curve.
2 Use the curve to create a Groove (see page 689) feature.
Text can be created as:
 Linear (see page 369)
Linear text can be horizontal:
at an angle:

or vertical:
 Circular (see page 371)
 Curve (see page 372)

text is along a curve:
The fonts used are standard Windows outline fonts and a custom
single line font included with FeatureCAM called Machine Tool Sans
Serif. Single line fonts use single strokes for the letters. Outline
fonts represent the boundaries of the letters. This image shows the
difference between the two types of font.
Regardless of the font used, a Groove feature traces each line of the
font, not the region between the outlines. If you are looking for
simple engraving, we recommend the single line font.
After you create the text, use the resulting curve to create a simple
groove to engrave the text into your part. Bosses and pockets are
possibilities too, but any feature based on text may require
specialized small tools for their manufacturing processes unless you
use the Machine Tool Sans Serif font.
The settings for scaling, spacing and fonts are saved for the next
time you create a text string.
OLF engraving fonts from our partner oneline.com are supported.
Linear
To create text along a line:

1 Open the Engraving Text dialog in one of these ways:

then Text, and click Next.
Text button in the Curve menu.
 From the menu, select Construct > Curve > Other Methods >
Text.
1 Enter the text you want to create in the Text field.
default name.
3 For the Path type, select Linear.
4 Enter the Location as X, Y, and Z coordinates or click the Pick
point button to pick it in the graphics window. This point is
used with the Justification setting to position the text.
5 To invert the text, select Reverse.
6 To rotate the text counter-clockwise around the Location point,
enter an Angle between 0 and 360 degrees.
7 To create the text vertically, select Vertical text.
8 Select the Justification as Left, Center, or Right. These positions
use the point you enter as the left end, center, or right end of
the text.
9 Enter the Alignment. The alignment is a translation factor for X
and Y for the entire text string. Use these fields to tweak the
location of the string.

10 Enter the Scaling amount to control scaling of the text. A value of
between 0 and 1 shrinks the text. Values greater than 1 expand
the text. You can have different values in the fields to stretch
text for special effects. A negative value reflects the text, useful
for making molds. If you set the font to be 72 points, this
number reflects the size in inches of the font in the given
direction.
11 Enter the Spacing. The spacing is the size of the gap between the
letters. It is uniform across the entire text string.
12 Click Font to change the font settings. The Font dialog is
displayed, which you can use to change the text font to a
Windows font on your system.
For simple engraving, you can use the Machine Tool Sans
Serif with a Size of 72 points, and control the size of the text
with the Scaling options in the Engraving Text dialog.
Circular
To create text along a circle:

Text.

default name.
3 For the Path type, select Circular.
4 Enter the location of the Center of the circle as X, Y, and Z
coordinates or click the Pick point button and pick it with the
mouse. This point is used along with the Justification setting to
position the text.
5 Enter the Radius of the circle.
6 To rotate the text counter-clockwise around the Center point,
enter an Angle between 0 and 360.
7 To create text on the bottom quadrants of the circle, enter the
appropriate angle and click Reverse.
the text.
direction.
Curve
To create text along a curve:


Text.
default name.
3 For the Path type, select Curve.
4 Select the curve from the Curve menu or use the Pick curve
button to select the curve graphically.
5 If you want to reflect the text to the other end of the curve, click
Reverse.
Changing the justification moves the text to the other end

of the curve without flipping the text.
the text.

direction.
Ellipse
The Ellipse curve tool creates an elliptically-shaped curve in the
plane of the current UCS or a plane parallel to the UCS plane.
1 Open the Ellipse dialog in one of these ways:

then Ellipse, and click Next.
Ellipse button in the Curve menu.

Ellipse.
default name.
2 Enter the coordinates of the Axis endpoint 1,or click the Pick point
button to pick it in the graphics window.
3 Enter the coordinates of the Axis endpoint 2, or click the Pick
point button to pick it in the graphics window.
4 Enter the Height of the ellipse above the axis. The total height of
the ellipse is 2*Height.
5 Optionally enter an Elevation amount, if you want the curve to be
on a plane parallel to the current UCS plane.
6 Optionally select Create as arcs and lines, to convert the curve
into arcs and lines.
7 Optionally click the Preview button to see the results of the
current settings in the Graphics window.
Rectangle
The Rectangle tool creates a rectangular shaped curve in the plane
or parallel to the plane of the current UCS.
1 Open the Rectangle dialog in one of these ways:

then Rectangle, and click Next.

Rectangle button in the Curve menu.
Rectangle.
default name.
2 Select from:
 Use corner, width, and height — Select this option to create the
rectangle based on a corner point.
 Use center, width, and height — Select this option to create the
rectangle based on a center point.
3 Depending on the method option selected, enter the coordinates
or click the Pick Point button and select a point in the
graphics window to set the location of the Corner point or Center
point.
4 Optionally enter a Corner Radius to give the rectangle round
corners.
5 Optionally enter an Angle in degrees to rotate the rectangle
counter-clockwise from the X axis.
6 Optionally enter an Elevation amount, if you want the curve to be
on a plane parallel to the current UCS plane.
7 Optionally select Create as arcs and lines, to convert the curve
into arcs and lines.
Polygon
The Polygon tool creates a curve in the shape of a regular polygon
in the plane or parallel to the plane of the current UCS.
To create a polygonal curve:
1 Open the Polygon dialog in one of these ways:
select Polygon, and click Next.
Polygon button in the Curve menu.
 Select Construct > Curve > Other Methods > Polygon.

The Polygon dialog is displayed.
2 Enter a Curve name.

3 Enter the Number of sides in the polygon. For example, to create
a regular hexagon, type 6.
4 Enter the x and y coordinates of the Center point, or click and

select the location in the graphics window.
5 To fillet the corners, enter a Corner Radius.
6 To rotate the rectangle counter-clockwise from the X axis, enter
an Angle in degrees.
7 By default the curve is created on the UCS plane. If you want to
position the curve on a plane parallel to the UCS plane, enter an
Elevation.
8 Size the polygon using one of these methods:
 In the Side length box, enter the length of the sides.
 In the Center to side box, enter the perpendicular distance
between the curve center and the sides.
 In the Center to corner box, enter the distance between the
curve center and the corners.
9 To convert the curve into arcs and lines, select the Create as
curves and lines check box.
10 Click Preview to display the polygon in the graphics window.
11 Click OK or Finish to close the dialog.

Gears
Use the Gears dialog to create AGMA involute spur gears, one of the
most common types of gear designs.
To create a gear curve:
1 Open the Gears dialog in one of these ways:
then Gears, and click Next.
Gears button in the Curve menu.
 Select the Construct > Curve > Other Methods > Gears menu
option.
The Gears dialog displays the Curve tab.
2 Enter a Name for the curve.

3 Enter a Fineness value to determine the number of control points
in the tooth profile. The smaller the value; the greater the
number of control points used to sample the curve.
4 Enter the gear specification:
 Number of teeth — Enter the number of teeth on the gear.
 Pressure angle — Enter the acute angle, in degrees, between
the tangent to the two base circles and a normal to the line
connecting the gear centers.
 Tip radius — Enter the radius of the tooth corner (see Diagram
2).

 Addendum — Enter the radial distance from the pitch circle to
the outermost point of the tooth (see Diagram 2).
Alternatively, select Outer diameter and enter the outside
diameter of the gear.
 Dedendum — Enter the radial distance from the depth of the
tooth trough to the pitch circle (see Diagram 2). Alternatively,
select Root diameter and enter the root diameter of the gear.
 Pitch diameter — Enter the diameter of the pitch circle (see
Diagrams 1 and 2). Alternatively, select Module and enter the
pitch diameter divided by the number of teeth, or select
Diametric pitch and enter the number of teeth divided by the
pitch diameter.
 Root fillet radius — Enter the radius of the fillet at the bottom
of each tooth (see Diagram 2).
 Center point —Enter the coordinates for the centre of the gear
curve, or click and pick the curve in the Graphics window.
6 Select the Analysis tab to view the calculated dimensions of the
gear, the calculated pin gauge diameter and the outside
measurement over pins diameter.
The Analysis tab is not displayed when you create a gear

using the Curve Wizard.
7 Select whether you want to create an External Gear or an Internal
Gear.
8 If you want to change the calculated diameter of the pin gauge,
enter a new value in the Actual pin diameter box, and click
Recompute.

Diagram 1:
Pressure angle
Base diameter
Pitch diameter
Diagram 2:
Addendum
Dedendum
Tip radius
Outside circle
Pitch circle
Root fillet radius
Root circle
Base circle
Curve to geometry
You can create geometry from curves. You can use geometry in
ways you cannot use curves, such as for Chaining (see page 319).
To create geometry from a curve:
1 Select a curve in the graphics window.
2 Select Construct > Curve > To Geometry from the menu.
The geometry is created in the graphics window behind the
selected curve.

Surfaces
Surfaces are continuous sets of points in 2D or 3D space which have
no thickness, which you can use to create surface milling features.
Use these methods to create surfaces:
 Click the Surfaces step in the Steps panel to display the

Surface wizard (see page 381).
 Use the Curves and Surfaces toolbar (see page 13).
 Select the Construct > Surface menu option to display the list of
surface creation tools.
Surfaces are defined by a rectangular mesh of control points, which

determines the shape and smoothness of the surface.
The rectangular nature of the control point mesh means that a
surface has four boundary curves. In some cases, surfaces are
constructed where one or two (opposite) boundary curves are
degenerate or form a single point such as the poles of a sphere. In
other cases where surfaces wrap around, such as a cylinder, two
opposite boundaries can be the same curve and are called seams.
With seams and degeneracies, a surface may appear to have only
three, or two, or even no boundaries (a sphere), but the four
boundaries are always defined. With these four boundaries, you can
break a surface into rows and columns so surfaces have a table-like
structure.
Surface wizard
You can use the Surface wizard to create surfaces.
Use one of the following methods to display the Surface Wizard:
 Click Surfaces in the Steps panel.
 Click Surface Wizard in the Advanced toolbar.

 Select Construct > Surface > Surface Wizard from the menu.
To use the Surface wizard:

1 At the top of the wizard, select a surface construction method
from the following:
 From curves (see page 384)
 Primitive surface (see page 406)
 From one surface (see page 412)
 From multiple surfaces (see page 426)
A list of constructors for the selected construction method is
displayed at the bottom of the wizard.
2 Select a specific constructor from the bottom part of the wizard.
3 Click Next to display the selected constructor's dialog.
Surface design tips

Here are some concepts and techniques that have proved helpful in
designing 3D surfaces.
 Design first, edit last. Put all the surfaces in place first, then trim
and fillet the surfaces together to create the final shape and
boundaries.
 Use quality source curves. Quality curves have as much detail as
possible designed into the curves before the curves are used to
make surfaces. Curves are much simpler to design and edit. With
Parametric modeling active, changes to your source curves
propagate automatically into the surface.

 Build as much detail into a single surface as possible. It's easier
to split and reduce surfaces than to merge and combine them.
Similarly, machining with isoline operations uses one surface at a
time and filleting and trimming work with two surfaces at a time
so the more detail the better.
 Learn which surface methods are approximate and which are
exact. Approximate methods are not better or worse than exact
methods, but have more degrees of freedom in filling in the
space between input curves or surfaces. Other surface methods
are conditional. They are exact to what they do, but when used
with approximate surfaces, the resulting surface is still
approximate.
 Approximate: surface intersection, trim, untrim, fillet, lofting,
merge, modify, offset. (Another key is any operation that
includes a tolerance setting. That is a flag that the source
material is being approximated.)
 Exact: extrude, surface of revolution, sweep, ruled, sphere,
cylinder, flat, from a feature.
 Conditional: split, region, reverse, coons, cap. Coons is a
mathematical definition of how four boundary curves describe
a surface. Learn which dialogs give you the option to
modify-in-place or create a new object.
 Learn when and how to use the option to Modify-in-place or
Create a new object. Both methods have their uses. Modifying an
object in place breaks the parametric link for which constructor
was used for the original object and prohibit parametric modeling
from updating an object in the future. This limits you to further
modification operations only. Creating new objects can result in
excessive clutter on the screen.
 Do not use self-intersecting curves or surfaces. Curves and
surfaces with that characteristic are not viable for predictable
editing, construction or machining.
Surface editing
There are a number of ways to edit surfaces. FeatureCAM supports
filleting (see page 427), merging (see page 431), intersecting (see
page 432), and direct modification (see page 437) of the surface.
You can also derive a surface from a 2.5D feature.
Surface editing tips

Here are some hints for editing surfaces:

 Do not include portions of the boundary when constructing
curves for trimming. Trimming curves may cross or end on
boundaries.
 Do not use surface/surface intersection to get a boundary of a
surface. Use surface boundary extraction.
 Intersecting tangent surfaces produces inaccurate or broken
intersection curves, such as a fillet surface and the surface it's
tangent to. Instead, extract curves and trim with a curve instead.
 Do not intersect coincident surfaces (surfaces that overlap).
Extract curves and trim with a curve instead.
 Avoid cutting through the pole of a surface with a degeneracy
such as the tip of a sphere or surface of revolution.
 Avoid cutting along a seam of a surface (across is fine). A seam
exists, for example, at the left/right boundary of a cylinder. You
can detect seams with the curve extraction dialog, and then
canceling out after you know where the seam is. Cutting a seam
can usually be avoided by rotating the object.
 Surfaces can be trimmed multiple times.
 Curves for surface/curve trimming can extend off the surface
and/or cut the surface multiple times.
From curves
You can use the Surface wizard (see page 381) to create surfaces
from curves.
You can create the following types of surface from curves:

Extrude (see page 385)
Surface of Revolution (see page 386)

Swept Surface (see page 389)
Ruled Surface (see page 392)
Coons (see page 395)
Curve Mesh (see page 397)
Lofted Surface (see page 400)
Cap Surface (see page 403)
Extrude
Extrude creates a surface from a curve by extending that line
sideways a specified distance. Sideways can be a linear distance in
any direction. This is important as the extrude does not have to be
only in the direction of an X, Y, or Z axis. Extruding along an axis is
an easy way to build such a surface which you could then move or
transform into the final position if you prefer. Extrudes are a
shortcut to create a ruled surface between a curve and a
transformation of the curve.
An extruded surface requires a source curve as input. If you

have no curves or geometry in the drawing, you cannot create
an extruded surface.
Extruded surfaces are exact (see page 382).
To create an extruded surface:
1 Use one of the following methods to display the Extruded Surface
dialog:
 Click the Surfaces icon in the Steps toolbox. In the

Surface Wizard, select From curves and Extrude.
 In the Advanced toolbar, click the Surface Wizard button.

In the Surface Wizard, select From curves and Extrude.
 In the Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar, click the
Extrude button in the Surface from Curve Menu.
2 Optionally enter a name in the Surface name field.
4 Specify the dimensions of the extrude using one of the following
methods:
 Enter the dimensions of a vector along which to extrude the
surface in the Vector X, Y and Z fields.
 Enter the beginning and end locations of the extrude.

Example
The handle on this hairdryer is an extruded surface:
The curve for the handle was drawn with the arcs and lines tools.
The geometry was chained into a single curve which was then
transformed down in Z to the depth where the handle exists. This
transform operation puts a bounding curve in location for the top
surface of the handle as well.
Then the handle curve was extruded along a vector -0.75 inches in
Z.
Surface of Revolution
A surface of revolution is created by rotating a curve about a
specified axis. The revolution is any amount from -360 to 360 .
These are similar to a swept surface, and can be used to create
other primitive shapes not provided such as a torus or a cone.
These surfaces are exact.
While you can use a 3D curve as the curve to spin around an axis,
there is a higher chance of creating a self-intersecting surface.
Where possible, it's best to use a 2D curve for input to this surface.
To create a surface of revolution, you need a curve and either

the X or Y axis for rotation, or a custom line for the axis.
To create a Surface of Revolution:

1 Use one of the following methods to display the Surface of
Revolution dialog:

Surface Wizard, select From curves and Surface of Revolution.

In the Surface Wizard, select From curves and Surface of
Revolution.
Surface of revolution button in the Surface from Curve
Menu.
4 Enter the Start angle in degrees.
5 Enter the End angle in degrees.
6 In the Construction method section, select which axis the curve is
rotated about. Select from Custom line, X-Axis, Y-Axis or Z-Axis.
7 If Custom line is selected, select the curve you want to use from
the Axis list, or click the Pick Curve button and select it in the
graphics window.
8 Click Apply.
9 Click Preview to display a preview of the surface in the graphics
window.
10 Click Finish, or OK to create the surface.
Revolved surfaces may have no cap on the ends depending on

the source curve. Depending on the milling technique you
select, such as Z-level roughing, you may need a cap surface
(see page 403).
More about revolved surfaces (see page 387).
Surface design hints (see page 382)
More about revolved surfaces

Surface of revolution is created by spinning a 2 dimensional curve
about an axis that you specify. The revolution is any amount from
0 up to 360 degrees. These are similar to a swept surface, but
can be used to create other primitive shapes not provided such as a
torus or a cone.
These surfaces are exact (see page 382).

Revolved surfaces may have no cap on the ends depending on the
source curve. Depending on the milling technique you select, such
as Z-level roughing, you may need a cap surface.
An example of a revolved surface (see page 388).
Revolved example
The motor housing on the blow-dryer model is a surface of
revolution. The source curve for the housing was created from a top
view and then rotated 90 around the X axis to orient the curve for
the revolve construction. A line was drawn from the center of the
housing down in Z to act as the axis for the revolution. Later, this
model uses a cap surface to complete the housing as an example of
the cap surface.
Set the surface for a full 360 of revolution. Select the axis and the
curve to pass around the axis and the result is shown in the second
image. You could also have created this same surface as a sweep
around the circle.
If the source curve had extended all the way to the rotation axis,
the housing could be completed in one step. A drawback to this
method is that the central boundary would be degenerate (a point)
and may not provide good machining results.

Swept Surface
A swept surface creates a surface by replicating the shape of the
curve at multiple positions along a path. The path is not necessarily
a straight line. A sweep moves one curve along another and is
useful for making many shapes. By creating complex curves for
both the axis and the cross-section, complex fillets and blends can
be directly achieved in a single surface.
Swept surfaces are exact (see page 382) unless the path or axis
curve is a spline curve, not a curve built from lines, and arcs and
chained together. Along a spline curve axis, the shape may deform.
There are two kinds of sweeps: a regular sweep and a translational
sweep. Translational sweeps maintain the same relationship
between the curve and axis normals at all points throughout the
sweep. Otherwise, the sweep curve stays in its drawn position at all
points on the axis.
The swept curve needs to be hooked to the axis curve at the start
point of the curve. This figure shows an example of a cross-section
curve that is properly defined. A UCS was created at the start point
of the axis curve. The cross section curve was then defined relative
to this UCS. Note that the setup axes were not changed. The UCS is
used as a design coordinate system only.
The simplest way to create a curve at this location is to create a

UCS at the start point of the axis curve and create your cross
section curve in that UCS. See How to create a User Coordinate
System (see page 110).
The model must contain two curves before you can create a
swept surface.

To create a Swept Surface:
1 Use one of the following methods to display the Swept Surface
dialog:

Surface Wizard, select From curves and Swept Surface.

In the Surface Wizard, select From curves and Swept Surface.
Swept Surface button in the Surface from Curve Menu.
3 Select the curve that defines the axis the sweep will follow from
the Axis list, or click the Pick Curve button and select it in the
graphics window.
4 Select Translational sweep if you want to maintain the same
relationship between the curve and axis normals at all points
throughout the sweep
5 Select the curve that defines the cross-section of the sweep from
the Cross section list, or click the Pick Curve button and
select it in the graphics window.
6 Select Sweep from other end to reverse the direction of the
sweep.
window.
If the previewed surface is not what you want, select or

deselect the Translational sweep setting and click Preview.
Click OK (or Finish if you are using the wizard).
More about swept surfaces
An example of a swept surface (see page 391)
More about swept surfaces

Sweep (Constant Width) creates a surface by projecting a two
dimensional curve along a path. The path is not necessarily a
straight line. A sweep moves one curve along another and is useful
for making many shapes. By creating complex curves for both the
axis and the cross-section, complex fillets and blends can be directly
achieved in a single surface.

You need to be sure and line up your cross section and your path
curve. One way to do this is to create a UCS aligned with the start
of the path curve and draw or transform your cross section curve
into place.
Swept surfaces are exact (see page 382).
Sweep example
The speaker housing uses a swept surface to define the top, back,
and bottom sides in one surface. The source curves are a large
diameter circle segment (1000 inches) and a center line through the
three sides (at maximum diameter of the segment). The
Translational sweep switch was turned off for this surface to keep
the bow in the same orientation relative to the axis throughout the
sweep. The slightly bowed bottom is flattened later as a Modify
surface operation.

Ruled Surface
A Ruled surface creates a linear surface between two curves. The
curves can be open or closed, planar or non-planar. For closed
curves, the starting points of the curves should line up or the
surface may twist in odd ways.
The model must contain at least two curves before you can
create a ruled surface pull-out.
To create a ruled surface:
1 Use one of the following methods to display the Ruled Surface
dialog:

Surface Wizard, select From curves and Ruled Surface.

In the Surface Wizard, select From curves and Ruled Surface.
Ruled Surface button in the Surface from Curve Menu.
3 Select a curve on a bounding edge of the surface from the Curve
list, or click the Pick Curve button and select it in the
graphics window.
4 Repeat step 3 to select more curves. You need to select at least
two curves to define a surface.
5 Use the Move item up , Move item down , Reverse selected
curve , and Delete item buttons to set the sequence and
direction of the curves in the ruled surface.
6 Optionally select Reparameterize curves.
window.
More about ruled surfaces (see page 393)
An example of a ruled surface (see page 394)
More about ruled surfaces

Ruled surface defines a surface by plotting rules between two
different curves. The curves can be open or closed, planar or
non-planar. For closed curves, the starting points of the curves
must line up or the surface may twist in odd ways. See Twists in
surfaces or solids with closed cross sections (see page 395) for
more information. Ruled surfaces are useful for filling a region and
blending between two curves and can be used with more than two
curves to create a single surface where each section is the same as
if each pair of curves were used to create a ruled surface.
Chained curves behave differently in a ruled surface than spline
curves. If your surface does not look quite right in the Preview,
select the Reparameterize curves check box and try the Preview
again. Reparameterize curves analyzes the curves and may adjust
the control points of the curves to yield a better surface result.
Reparameterize affects both chained and spline curves, but the
effect is stronger on chained curves.

Ruled surfaces are exact (see page 382).
Ruled example
The blow-dryer uses a ruled surface as a parting surface in the
model. The two curves (lines in this case) are drawn along opposite
sides of the stock and are then translated down in Z to the
appropriate depth.
Then they are selected as the two curves for the ruled surface which
passes under the other surfaces of the model to the extent of the
part so there is a complete surface for use in the mold.

Twists in surfaces or solids with closed cross sections
When creating ruled surfaces of lofted surfaces or solids with closed
cross sections, ensure that the start points of the curves are in the
correct positions. This example shows a ruled surface created from
cross sections with misaligned start points (marked with arrows):
After using Curve start/reverse (see page 329) to change the start
point of the square center curve, the twist is removed, as shown:
Coons
Coons defines a surface between four bounding curves. Coons
surfaces are useful for filling in the area bounded by curves. For
planar curves, Cap surface (see page 403) is probably a better
option, although the curves must be joined into a loop first. For a
grid of curves, Coons surfaces do not produce smooth results
because each surface is not influenced by its neighbors. Joining
curves into cross-sections and using Lofted (see page 400) surfaces
produces better results in that situation.
When using the three curve Coons option, the ordering of the
curves makes a difference in the appearance of the surface. Try
different sequences until the result is correct.
Chained curves behave differently in a Coons surface than spline
curves. If your surface does not look correct in the Preview, select
Reparameterize curves and try the Preview again. Reparameterize
curves analyzes the curves and may adjust the control points of the
curves to yield a better surface result. This option affects both
chained and spline curves, but the effect is stronger on chained
curves.
Coons surfaces are not as common in practice as they are in
mathematical discussion. Coons surfaces are approximate (see page
382).

Creating a Coons surface
In general, you use four curves and the curves must each be open,
but together form a closed loop. To use three curves, select 3 curves
and the fourth curve field is disabled. If the corners do not match,
you receive an error message, "unable to construct surface with
these inputs."
To create a Coons surface.
1 Use one of the following methods to display the Coons dialog:
 In the Surface (see page 381) wizard, select From curves and
Coons, click Next.
 Click the Coons button in the Surface from Curve Menu in

the Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar.
 Select Construct > Surface > From Curves > Coons.
3 Optionally select 3 curves if you want to create a three-curve
Coons surface.
4 Select a curve from the Curve 1 list, or click the Pick Curve
button and select it in the graphics window. This curve must
create a corner with Curve 1.
button and select it in the graphics window. This curve must
create a corner with Curve 2, and if 3 curves is selected, this
curve must create a corner with Curve 1.
7 If 3 curves is deselected, select a curve from the Curve 4 list, or
click the Pick Curve button and select it in the graphics
window. This curve must create a corner with Curve 1 and Curve
3.
9 Click the Preview button to display a preview of the surface in the
graphics window.

Coons example
You might use a Coons surface to create a trough shape that necks
down as shown below. This is easy to draw as two bounding curves
on the stock surface, and two arcing end curves. You have less
control over the behavior of the surface between curves than if you
had used a lofted surface to create a similar shape.
Curve Mesh
Surface from curve mesh creates a surface from a grid of curves.
Overview (see page 398)
How to create a surface from a curve mesh (see page 399)
Restrictions of surface from curve mesh (see page 399)
See also Coons (see page 395).

Overview of surface from curve mesh
The curve mesh constructor makes a smooth surface from a mesh
of row curves and column curves. For example, if you have the
curves shown below:
the curve mesh constructor creates the surface shown here:
The mesh of curves may only partially intersect. This allows the
surface to be built up incrementally. The figure below shows an
example of such a surface.

The surface is made up of Coons patches. If the input curves are
smooth, the surface is smooth (equal tangent plane planes along
the curves). The input curves must intersect at crossing points, but
explicit curve points are not necessary at the crossings. The curves
are reversed automatically. Triangular patches are supported when
a pair of row or column curves meet at their ends.
Creating a surface from a curve mesh

To create a Curve Mesh:
1 Use one of the following methods to display the Curve Mesh
dialog:

Surface Wizard, select From curves and Curve Mesh.

In the Surface Wizard, select From curves and Curve Mesh.
Curve Mesh button in the Surface from Curve Menu.
3 Select a curve from the Row curve list, or click the Pick Curve
4 Select a curve from the Column curve list, or click the Pick Curve
5 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select more curves. You need to select
at least two row curves and column curves.
6 Use the Move item up , Move item down , and Delete item
buttons to set the sequence of the curves in the mesh.
7 Enter a Tolerance. This determines the accuracy of the
approximation to the curves.
8 Select Zero twists to minimize surface curvature.
window.
Restrictions of surface from curve mesh

The input curves must intersect at crossing points, but explicit curve
points are not necessary at the crossings.

Lofted Surface
Lofting has its heritage from shipbuilders as they laid out ship hulls.
They passed imaginary lines between multiple sequential
cross-sections. A lofted surface creates a smooth surface from
cross-sectional curve data. The curves can be non-planar as well.
To create a Lofted Surface:
1 Use one of the following methods to display the Lofted Surface
dialog:

Surface Wizard, select From curves and Lofted Surface.

In the Surface Wizard, select From curves and Lofted Surface.
Lofted Surface button in the Surface from Curve Menu.
3 Select a curve from the Curve list, or click the Pick Curve
4 Repeat step 3 to select more curves. You need to select at least
two curves to create a lofted surface.
5 Use the Move item up , Move item down , Reverse selected
curve , and Delete item buttons to set the sequence and
direction of the curves in the ruled surface.
6 Select Interpolated or Spline. Click Preview to see the difference.
7 Optionally select Uneven spacing. Click Preview to see the
difference.
window.
More about lofted surfaces (see page 401).
An example of a lofted surface (see page 402).

More about lofted surfaces
Lofting defines surfaces that project between multiple curves. A
lofted surface is used to create a smooth surface from
cross-sectional curve data. The curves can be open or closed, but
for closed curves the start points need to line up for good results.
The curves can be non-planar as well.
Lofted surfaces are commonly used when there are many uniformly
spaced cross-section curves available. A lofted surface has to fill in
a lot of data between the cross-sections and so is an approximate
surface. The data calculated to pass through the surface can be
tweaked with the Uneven spacing switch for a better fit when the
data points are not uniformly spaced.
The curves can be open or closed, but for closed curves the start
points for each curve need to line up with the other curve start
points for good results. See Twists in surfaces or solids with closed
cross sections (see page 395) for more information.
Lofted surfaces are commonly used when there are many
cross-section curves available. A lofted surface has to fill in a lot of
data between the cross-sections so it is an approximate surface.
The data calculated to pass through the surface can be tweaked
with the Uneven spacing switch for a better fit when the input curves
are not uniformly spaced.
Spline approximates the surface with input curves as control
points/curves. They are smooth between points. Interpolate uses the
input curves as explicit curves for the surface to pass through and
the surface may wave, or bend between points. Setting the Uneven
spacing switch might improve the fit if the input curves are not
uniformly spaced. A lofted surface may be either exact (see page
382) or approximate (see page 382) depending on your settings.
The Select degree spinner allows you to vary the tightness by
changing the degree of the polynomial used to calculate the
resulting surface. A degree of one passes straight lines between
curves (like a ruled surface). Higher degree curves allow a looser
result between input curves. The highest degree possible is three or
one less than the total number of curves, whichever is greater. If
you are going to export the part file to another CAD package, some
other software does not support degree values higher than three.
Chained or joined curves behave differently in a lofted surface than
spline curves. If your surface does not look quite right in the
Preview, set the Reparameterize curves check box and try the
Preview again. Reparameterize curves analyzes the curves and may
adjust the control points of the curves to yield a better surface
result. Reparameterize affects both chained and spline curves, but
the effect is stronger on chained curves.

Lofting should not be used when a sweep, or other more
exact constructor could be used.
Lofted example
The soap dish model uses a lofted surface. Its source curves are
worth understanding. Using a UCS on the side of the stock as shown
in the diagram, simple geometry was drawn at depth (relative to
the Setup) in Z. The geometry was then transformed in X to set the
beginning, middle, and end curves of the top surface of the soap
dish electrode. These curves were then used to build the lofted
surface. The geometry may have to be reversed, to get the right
surface.

Cap Surface
A cap surface takes a closed planar curve and makes a trimmed
surface. It's a shortcut to build a flat surface trimmed with a
custom-fit edge and for solid models. It is useful for making a
planar trimmed surface to fill the area inside a curve.

You probably need to extract the source curve from an
existing surface (see page 343) or surfaces.
To create a Cap Surface:
1 Use one of the following methods to display the Cap Surface
dialog:

Surface Wizard, select From curves and Cap Surface.

In the Surface Wizard, select From curves and Cap Surface.
 In the Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar, click the Cap
Surface button in the Surface from Curve Menu.
3 Select a closed curve from the Curve list, or click the Pick Curve
4 Use the Move item up , Move item down , and Delete item
buttons to set the sequence of the curves in the mesh.
5 Enter a Tolerance. This determines the accuracy of the
approximation to the curves.
window.
More about cap surfaces (see page 404)
An example of a cap surface (see page 405)
More about cap surfaces

Cap surfaces can be used to make a cylinder into a closed solid, for
example. Extract the boundary curve at each end of cylinder and
make a cap surface out of each one. You can also create closed
solids from extrudes, sweeps, and revolutions.

Supporting multiple curves in the cap surface allows you to nest
your curves inside other curves. Depending on the direction of the
curve, you can then include cutouts and surfaces within cutouts all
in one operation. In the example below, the gray portion of the
bullseye pattern contains surfaces, while the reversed clear rings
have no surfaces of surfaces. Use Preview with this feature to get the
curves directions right before you close the dialog.
A cap surface may be either exact or approximate depending on

your settings (see page 382).
Cap surface creates a surface to cover an 'open end' of another
surface or surfaces. The surface(s) to be capped should form a
closed surface by itself, or when considered as a group. While you
can cap open surfaces, a straight line is drawn between the open
points of the surface, and can generate inappropriate surfaces in
cases where the endpoints cause the closing line to cross the
surface boundary.
Cap example
The blow-dryer has a cap surface on the handle, but the handle is
an open curve. So you have to close the curve and create a new
curve from the handle curve and the geometry you used to close
the curve. Snapping a line between the endpoints creates the
needed geometry. Chain it all into a curve and build the Cap
surface.

Primitive surface
You can use the Surface wizard (see page 381) to create primitive
surfaces.
You can create the following types of primitive surfaces:

Sphere (see page 406)
Cylinder (see page 409)
Flat (see page 410)
Surface(s) from Feature (see page 411)
Sphere
Sphere constructs a spherical surface with a specified radius around
a center point, or by using an existing circle as the 'equator' of the
sphere you want to construct. Spheres are exact (see page 382)
surfaces, but contain seams and degenerate curves at their poles.
To use Sphere:
The model must contain an existing surface.
1 Click the Sphere button in the Surface Primitives Menu in the

Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar to display the Sphere
dialog.
3 Select a Construction method.
4 If Center and radius is selected:
a Enter the coordinates of the center point in the Center point
fields, or click the Pick location button and select it in the
graphics window.

b Enter the Radius of the circle.
5 If Circle is selected.
Select a circle from the Circle list or click the Pick circle
window.
An example of a sphere surface (see page 408)

Sphere example
This blow-dryer example uses a spherical motor housing. So if the
design called for 2.25 inch diameter sphere instead, you could
create such a surface by drawing the 2.25 inch diameter circle at
depth in the block. Now use that circle to construct a sphere, which
you could trim with the ruled parting surface.

Cylinder
Cylinder creates a tube specified as a radius around a center line.
You can specify the dimensions of the cylinder either with a start
and point and a radius, or with a point, a direction, length and
radius. It has no caps on the ends so you may need to use a Cap
(see page 403) surface to complete your design. Cylinders are exact
(see page 382) surfaces and contain a seam where two edge
boundaries meet. Be careful not to trim across the seam. Editing
along the seam is fine.
To use Sphere:
1 Click the Cylinder button in the Surface Primitives Menu in the

Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar to display the Cylinder
dialog.
3 Select either Two points or Direction, length to specify the
construction method.
4 If Two points is selected:
a Enter the coordinates of the start point in the Center fields, or
click the Pick location button and select it in the graphics
window.
b Enter the coordinates of the end point in the End point fields,
or click the Pick location button and select it in the
graphics window.
5 If Direction, length is selected.
a Enter the coordinates of the start point in the Center fields, or
click the Pick location button and select it in the graphics
window.
b Enter the X, Y and Z dimensions of a direction vector in the
Direction fields.
c Enter the length of the cylinder in the Length field.
6 Enter the Radius of the cylinder.
window.
An example of a cylinder surface (see page 410)

Cylinder example
You can model the vent tube of the blow-dryer example as a
cylinder. Pick end and center points with the mouse and Pick
buttons, or enter explicit coordinates. Set the points 2 inches in Z in
the stock to create the cylinder at the right depth. Now set the
radius to 1 inch. The cylinder can be trimmed to the rest of the
model with the ruled surface.
Flat Surface
Flat Surface creates a flat rectangular surface between two corner
points. The sides of the rectangle are aligned with the UCS axes.
To create a Flat Surface:
1 Click the Flat button in the Surface Primitives Menu in the

Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar to display the Flat
Surface dialog.
3 Enter the coordinates of the top-right corner point in the X, Y
and Z field, or click the Pick location button and select it in
4 Enter the coordinates of the bottom-left corner point in the X, Y
and Z field, or click the Pick location button and select it in
5 Enter the Z elevation in the Elevation (Z) field, or click the Pick
location button and select it in the graphics window. The
elevation is uniform across the surface.
window.
More about flat surfaces (see page 411)
An example of a flat surface (see page 411)

More about flat surfaces
Flat creates a rectangular surface between two diagonally opposite
corners. This surface is a shortcut to create a ruled surface without
having to build bounding curves if the surface is rectangular. Flat
surfaces are exact (see page 382).
Flat example
The blow-dryer's parting surface can also be built with a flat
surface. Simply create a flat surface at depth with corner points that
align with two opposing block stock corners.
Surface(s) from Feature

You can create a 3D surface from any 2.5D feature.
The model must contain an existing 2.5D feature.

To create a surface from a feature:
1 Click the from Feature button in the Surface Primitives Menu in

the Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar to display the
Surface(s) from Feature dialog.
3 Select a feature from the Feature list or click the Pick feature
window.
More about turning features into surfaces (see page 412)
An example of a surface from a feature (see page 412)

More about turning features into surfaces
You can use these surfaces in your part modeling or even to
manufacture them using the 3D techniques, or to modify with the
Surface editing tools so you can join your 2.5D features to your 3D
features.
Features can be a shortcut to create swept and cap surfaces with
the familiar dimension driven feature interface. The draft angle, or
radiused features produce a swept surface for the side walls
(including chamfer and bottom/top radius) and a cap surface for the
bottom in one operation.
Feature to surface example

The soap dish model can be built with a Boss feature for the side. In
that method, you need to trim the fillet against the boss, but you
have to create a surface to trim against. Select Surfaces from
feature, name the new surface. Select the Boss feature as the
source feature. FeatureCAM calculates the corresponding surface.
From one surface

from an existing surface.
You can create the following types of surface from one surface:

Region from Surface (see page 413)
Reverse Surface (see page 414)
Offset Surface (see page 416)
Extend Surface (see page 417)
Trim Surface (see page 418)
Untrim Surface (Fill Hole) (see page 422)
Split Surface (see page 424)
Surface Region
Surface Region derives a second surface from an original surface.

To use Surface Region:
1 Click the Region button in the Surface from Surface Menu in

Surface Region dialog.
2 Select Create new surface(s) to create a new surface or Modify
existing surface(s) to trim the selected surface.
3 Optionally enter a name in the Surface name field. This field is
available only if Create new surface(s) is selected.
4 Select a surface from the Surface list, or click the Pick surface
5 Enter the coordinates of two points in the Isoline selection
section, or click the Pick point on surface button and select them
in the graphics window. The new surface is bound between the
selected points.
6 Select Row or Column to orientate the selection region.
window.
More about surface regions. (see page 414)
An example of a surface region. (see page 414)
Surface editing hints (see page 383)

More about surface regions
Surface region derives a second surface from part of an original
surface. A subregion of a surface is sometimes necessary for an
auxiliary surface to use for surface/surface intersection, filleting,
milling, and so on.
When you extract a region, you are getting a band of either
columns or rows and this is an exact operation within the limits of
the source surface.
Surface region is an exact process, however, if the source material
is approximate, the resulting region can be no more precise than
the source material.
Region example
For the top surface of the soap model, you could extract a row or
column slice between any two points you choose. The picture below
shows a potential region of rows from the Top surface of the model.
Reverse Surface
Surface Reverse is an exact (see page 382) operation.

To use Surface Reverse:
1 Click the Reverse button in the Surface from Surface Menu in

Surface Reverse dialog
existing surface(s) to modify the selected surface.
5 Select whether you want to:
 Reverse normals.
 Transpose row/column.
 Reverse trim loops.
Sheets (see page 445) can also be reversed using Surface

reverse. You must select them from the Surface list and not in
More about surface reverse (see page 415)
More about surface reverse

Because of the rectangular definition of surfaces, you have three
options in the surface reverse process.
 You can keep the same surface, but reverse the direction of the
calculated normals, thereby turning the surface inside out. This is
perhaps the most common function as it affects isoline milling
(see page 772).
 You can reverse the layout of the surface by swapping all the row
and column layout with each other.
 You can also reverse the trim loops of the surface. This process
takes a trimmed surface and changes the trim operation so that
what was trimmed away before is now the retained surface and
the discarded surface is the surface you selected for the surface
reverse operation.

Surface Offset
Surface Offset offsets a surface along its surface normals. You may
need to reverse the surface normals to get the offset you want.
Surface offset is an approximate (see page 382) operation.

To use Surface Offset:
1 Click the Offset button in the Surface from Surface Menu in

Surface Offset dialog.
5 Enter the offset distance in the Offset field.
6 Enter a Tolerance. This determines the accuracy of the offset.
window.
More about surface offset (see page 416)
More about surface offset

An offset surface is a constant distance away from the original. The
offset produces an approximation of this, which is why there is a
tolerance. The original surface must be smooth (no sharp corners)
or the offset result is not correct.
Use offsets to thicken an object or to account for shrinkage in
mold-making.
Use offsets to intersect two (offset) surfaces to get the center curve
of an implied fillet. This curve could be used for a groove milling
operation to cleanly mill a fillet without actually making the fillet
surface.
If an offset can be produced by an exact operation, for example,
offsetting a curve and using revolution or a sweep, then use the
exact operation.

Extend Surface
Extend Surface adds a linear extension to the selected surface
similar to extruding the boundary curve of the surface however far
you set. The direction of the extend is the tangent direction at the
boundary. The surface is defined with rows and columns as you
select which boundary to extend.
Extend surface removes all trim.

To use Extend Surface:
1 Click the Extend button in the Surface from Surface Menu in

Extend Surface dialog.
5 To pick the side to extend, select an option or click the Pick curve
on surface button and select it in the graphics window.
6 Enter the extend distance in the Distance field.
window.
More about extending surfaces (see page 417)
An example of an extended surface (see page 418)
More about extending surfaces

Surface extends create extra surface to fill gaps or to be trimmed
away cleanly by a nearby surface. For example, open fillets often
have to be extended slightly before they cleanly trim the surfaces
they fillet (and so they can be cleanly trimmed by another surface).
Extend is an exact operation.

Extend example
Consider the fillet in the soap dish model. If the top surface were
undersized for some reason, or the fillet radius did not reach to the
top surface, an extend operation could resolve the problem. In this
case, select the Extend surface option from the Curves and Surfaces
Unless you are sure of your process, it's safer to create a new
surface instead of modify an existing surface. Select the Create new
surface option and name it. Working through column and row
options and previewing the results, the intended surface is achieved
using First Column and an extension of 0.1 inch.
Trim Surface
Trimming cuts away a portion of a surface. The portion that is
removed is determined by a trimming curve that lies on the surface.
Trimming is useful for creating solid models or for simply removing
an unwanted portion of a surface.

How to trim a surface with a curve (see page 420)
Trimming restrictions (see page 421)
Comparison with Surface/surface trimming (see page 436)
See also Surface/surface intersection (see page 345),
Surface/surface trimming (see page 432), and Fillets (see page
427).
Overview of trimmed surface

A trimmed surface is a surface that has a portion removed by an
embedded curve. The curve divides the surface into two pieces. For
example a square surface with a circular trimming loop forms either
a square with a hole in it or a disk depending on which portion of
the surface you want to keep.
This orange surface is the top portion of a soap bottle mold. It must
be trimmed by the red curve to reflect the correct shape.

This blue surface shows the result of trimming the orange surface
with the red curve.
See trimming restrictions (see page 421) for the rules for trimming
surfaces.
Trimming a surface with a curve
To trim a surface, The model must contain a surface and a

curve that bounds the area to be trimmed in the part model.
The curve must cut across the surface boundary at two points
for an open trim, or be contained completely within the
surface.
To use Trim Surface:
1 Click the Trim button in the Surface from Surface Menu in the
Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar to display the Trim
Surface with Curve dialog.
4 Select a surface from the Surface list and click the Add item from
list button, or click the Pick surface button and select it in
the graphics window. Picking the surface in the graphics window
tells FeatureCAM which side to keep.
5 Select a curve from the Trimming Curve list and click the Add item
from list button, or click the Pick curve button and select
it in the graphics window.

6 Enter a Curve Tolerance. This determines the accuracy of the
approximation to the curve.
7 Enter a Surface Tolerance. This determines the accuracy of the
approximation to the surface.
8 If you want to change which side of the surface is kept, select a
surface from the Surface list and click to toggle whether trim
is decided by pick location.
window.
Trimming restrictions
Trimming curves have two main restrictions:
1 The curve must lie on the surface. Convenient ways of getting a
curve on a surface are:
 If the surface is a flat surface, model the curve in the plane of
the curve.
 Project a curve onto the surface (see page 349).
 Intersect two surfaces to get a curve (see page 345).
2 The curve must divide the surface in two distinct regions. If not,
you will get the error Can’t trim, curve does not end on a boundary.
Think of the surface as a piece of paper and the trimming curve
as a path for a pair of scissors. After the cutting operation, you
should be left with two pieces of paper. The trimming curve must
do one of the following:
 Form a loop in the interior of the surface
 Cut across two surface boundaries
 Cut across the same boundary twice
Trimming examples:
Valid: Valid: Valid: Invalid:
Additional trimming restrictions (see page 422)

Additional trimming restrictions
 Do not include portions of the boundary when constructing
curves for trimming. Trimming curves may cross or end on
boundaries.
 Avoid cutting through the degenerate boundary a surface such as
the pole of a sphere or surface of revolution.
 Avoid cutting along a seam of a surface (across is fine). A seam
exists, for example, at the left/right boundary of a cylinder. You
can detect seams with the Curve Extraction dialog, and then
canceling out after you know where the seam is. Avoid cutting a
seam rotating the object because many objects with seams are
symmetrical.
Untrim surface
Untrim removes one or all trimming loops from a trimmed surface
and consequently adds area back to a surface.
How to untrim a surface (see page 423)
See also Overview of trimmed surface (see page 419) and Surface
editing hints (see page 383).
Overview of untrimming surfaces

A trimmed surface is a surface with an embedded curve that
removes a portion of the surface. See Overview of trimmed surfaces
(see page 419) for more information.
When you untrim a surface you are removing the trimming curve
from the surface and therefore adding the material back to the
surface. The trimmed surface in the first image becomes the surface
in the second image after you remove its circular trimming loop.

If you import a part model, it is often useful to untrim portions of
the part that you would like to machine with 2.5D features. For
example, in this simple part, surfaces are used to represent the
geometry of the hole.
Because it is preferable to drill the hole using FeatureCAM's Hole

feature (see page 637), we can untrim the surface by removing the
entire trimming loop and mill it as if the hole did not exist and then
later add in a Hole feature for drilling the hole.
For some parts, a feature such as a Hole may result in trimming
edges in multiple surfaces. In this example, a hole trims away two
surfaces:
Removing the entire outer trimming loop is undesirable because the

notches at the top of the surfaces would also be removed. Instead,
only the semi-circular edges from both surfaces need to be removed
as shown here:
Untrimming surfaces and filling holes

Untrim Surface untrims a previously trimmed surface region to
restore the entire surface.
The model must contain a trimmed (see page 418) surface.

To use Surface Region:
1 Click the Untrim button in the Surface from Surface Menu in

the Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar to display the Untrim
a Trimmed Surface dialog.
All trimming loops are displayed.
5 To remove all trimming loops, select Untrim all.
6 To remove a single loop:
a Select Untrim selected loop.
b Click the Pick curve on surface button and select the loop
7 To remove a single edge:
a Select Untrim edge(s).
b Click the Pick edges to untrim button and select the edge
c A button labeled Untrim a Trimmed… is displayed.
d Select the trim curve(s) in the graphics window.
e Double-click the button labeled Untrim a Trimmed… to display
the Untrim a Trimmed Surface dialog.
window.
Split Surface
Split Surface breaks an existing surface into two new surfaces along
a row or column division.

To use Split Surface:
1 Click the Split button in the Surface from Surface Menu in the
Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar to display the Split
Surface dialog.

2 Optionally enter names in the Surface name 1 and Surface name 2
fields.
4 Enter the coordinates of two points in the Isoline selection
section, or click the Pick point on surface button and select them
in the graphics window. The new surface is bound between the
selected points.
5 Select Row or Column to specify in which direction to split the
surface.
6 Enter the coordinated of a point, or click Pick point on surface

and select it in the graphics window.
7 A preview of the split is displayed in the graphics window.
More about splitting surfaces (see page 425)
More about splitting surfaces

A subregion of a surface is sometimes necessary for an auxiliary
surface to use for surface/surface intersection, filleting, milling, and
so on. Split is an exact (see page 382) operation within the limits of
the original surface.
Splitting the top surface of the soap dish model creates two
surfaces. The pictures show a split along a column of the surface.

From multiple surfaces
from multiple existing surfaces.
You can create the following types of surface from multiple

surfaces:
Fillet Surfaces (see page 427)

Merge Surfaces (see page 431)
Surface-Surface Trimming (see page 432)
Modify Surface (see page 437)
Corner Blend (see page 441)
Fillet Surface
Fillet Surface creates a smooth curved transition surface between
two adjacent surfaces.
How to create a fillet surface (see page 429)
Restrictions (see page 430)
See also surface-surface intersection (see page 345) and Trimming
a surface with a curve (see page 418).
Overview of fillets
A fillet is a surface that creates a smooth tangent-continuous blend
between two surfaces. This figure shows a fillet surface that blends
two flat surfaces.

This figure shows the same fillet with the surfaces automatically
trimmed against the two fillet boundaries.
Just like the case of an arc between two lines, there is more than
one possible fillet between two surfaces. This figure shows the same
two flat surfaces with a fillet on another corner.
A constant radius or rolling ball fillet is created by setting the Begin

radius and End radius to the same value. A variable radius fillet is
created by entering different values for the two radii.
Filleting multi-step process:
1 Intersect the two surfaces (see page 345). If you explicitly
specify the intersection curve this step is skipped. The most
common reason for explicitly entering the intersection curve is to
calculate the curve separately and then extend it so that the fillet
extends beyond the surface boundaries.
2 Construct fillet surface.
3 Optionally trim one surface against the top of the fillet. The top
boundary curve of the fillet must be a valid trimming curve for
the top surface.

4 Optionally trim the other surface against the bottom of the fillet.
The bottom boundary curve must be a valid trimming curve for
the bottom surface.
It is possible to create a valid fillet surface that does not allow you
to trim the surfaces against the fillet. In this example, the fillet is in
the middle of both surfaces and as a result the boundaries of the
fillet are not valid trimming curves. See Trimming restrictions (see
page 421) for the rules of valid trimming curves.
Creating a Fillet Surface
The model must contain two surfaces that intersect to create

a fillet.
To create a Fillet Surface:
1 Click the Fillet button in the Surface from Surfaces Menu in

the Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar to display the Fillet
Surfaces dialog.
3 Select a surface from the Surface 1 list, or click the Pick Surface
5 If you want to trim the surfaces with the fillet:
a Select Trim to fillet.
b Enter a Trim tolerance. This determines the accuracy of the
trimming. For most parts (less than 1 foot cubed), it is
recommended that you enter a value between 0.001 and 0.0001
inches (0.0254 and 0.00254 mm).
c Select Create new surface(s) to create a new surface or Modify
6 Optionally select a curve from the Intersection list or click the
Pick curve button and select it in the graphics window. The
fillet is limited along the selected curve.
7 Select Construct arcs only to create only the arcs that comprise
the fillet. You can use these arc curves to create other surfaces
later.
8 Select a corner from the list. This determines which corner the
fillet is created in. The corner numbers in the list refer to the
drawing.

9 Enter a Tolerance. This determines how accurately the fillet
follows the original surface. For high quality fillets for parts that
are approximately 1 foot cubed, the recommended settings are
between 0.001 and 0.0001 inches (or 0.0254 and 0.00254 mm).
10 Specify an Arc step:
 If Variable is selected, the spacing of the fillet cross sections
are calculated automatically based on the Tolerance. More
cross sections are placed in curved regions of the fillet as in
this figure:
 If Variable is deselected, enter an Arc Step. The spacing is

constant between cross sections as in this image:
11 Enter a Begin radius and an End radius. For a closed fillet, these
values must be equal.
window.
Fillet restrictions
 The fillet constructor works with two surfaces only.
 The surfaces must intersect.
 If trimming, the top and bottom boundary curves of the fillet
must form a valid trimmed surface in the respective surfaces.
See Trimming restrictions (see page 421) for the rules of valid
trimming curves.

 Fillet creation does not consider trimmed portions of a surface so
if you fillet a trimmed surface, the fillet extends for the complete
length of the original surface. You can either trim the fillet away
after it has been created or use an intersection curve to limit
where the fillet runs.
 The input surfaces must be smooth with no sharp corners.
 The fillet radius should be less than the smallest radius of the
intersection curve. If it is larger, the fillet may overlap itself.
See Surface design hints (see page 382) for additional
recommendations.
Merge Surfaces
Merge Surfaces combines surfaces together to create a new surface.
The model must contain at least two surfaces.

To Merge Surfaces:
1 Click the Merge button in the Surface from Surfaces Menu in

the Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar to display the Merge
Surfaces dialog.
5 Select a side for surface 1 from the Pick side to merge list, or click
the Pick curve on surface button and select it in the graphics
window.
6 Select a side for surface 2 from the Pick side to merge list, or click
the Pick curve on surface button and select it in the graphics
window.
7 Optionally select Flip surface 1.
8 Select Extract or Blend. Extract maintains the original surface in
the final merge, Blend loses some of the original surfaces that
are merged.
window.
More about merging surfaces (see page 432)

More about merging surfaces

You can merge with a blend so that the two surfaces transition into
each other more gradually. Or you can make an exact merge so
that the new surface keeps all of the original surface data of the two
source surfaces.
Surfaces for a merge ideally have the same number of rows or
columns so the two surfaces meet. The Exact option is best when
the two surfaces share a common boundary curve. When they don't
meet, exact inserts a ruled surface between the boundaries being
merged.
If you had two neighboring flat surfaces, you could combine them
with merge into one flat surface.
The Blend option is best when the surfaces don't meet. A fillet-like
blend is created to fill the gap. Merging automatically untrims
trimmed surfaces. Merged surfaces may be trimmed again as
needed.
The Exact option is best when the two surfaces share a common
boundary curve. When they don't meet, exact inserts a ruled
surface between the boundaries being merged.
The Blend option is best when the surfaces don't meet. A fillet-like
blend is created to fill the gap. Merging doesn't work for trimmed
surfaces. Surfaces can be untrimmed, merged and then retrimmed.
Surface-Surface Trimming
Surface-Surface Trimming calculates the intersection of one surface
against one or more surfaces and trims the surfaces with this curve.
How to trim surfaces against each other (see page 434)
Restrictions (see page 435)
Comparison with Trim a surface with a curve (see page 436)
See also Trim a surface with a curve (see page 418) and
Surface-surface intersection (see page 345).

Overview of surface/surface trimming
Surface/surface trimming has two types of surfaces, trimming
surfaces and trimmed surfaces. The trimming surface is the surface
that does the cutting. Think of it as a pair of scissors or a knife. The
trimmed surfaces are the surfaces that are cut. Think of them as
the paper. You can have only one trimming surface, but you may
have more than one trimmed surfaces.
The first step of surface/surface trimming is calculating the
intersection of the trimming surfaces and the trimmed surface(s).
This step happens behind the scenes and is only visible if you are
previewing your calculation before actually performing it. This curve
is then used to trim away a portion of the trimmed surfaces. If
these surfaces are the original surfaces,
the blue curve in this figure is the intersection curve between the
two surfaces.

These surfaces are the result of using the vertical surface as the
trimming surface to cut the horizontal surface. If you select the Trim
this surface also check box, the trimming surface is also trimmed
using the intersection curve as in this image:
Trimming surfaces against other surfaces

Surface-Surface Trimming trims a surface against another surface.
The model must contain two intersecting surfaces.

To use Surface-Surface Trimming:
1 Click the Surface-Surface Trim button in the Surface from

Surfaces Menu in the Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar to
display the Surface-Surface Trimming dialog.
4 Select a surface from the Trimming Surface list and click the Add
item from list button, or click the Pick surface button and
select it in the graphics window. Picking the surface in the
graphics window tells FeatureCAM which side to keep.
5 Optionally select Trim this surface also, then select a side from
the Side kept list.
6 Select a surface from the Trimmed Surface list and click the Add
item from list button, or click the Pick surface button and
select it in the graphics window. Picking the surface in the
graphics window tells FeatureCAM which side to keep.
7 Repeat step 6 to select more surfaces to trim.
8 If you want to change which side of the surface is kept, select a
surface from the Surface list and click to toggle whether trim
is decided by pick location.
The options for Side kept are:

 Picked side - keeps the portion of the trimmed surfaces where
you picked with the mouse.
 Normal - keeps the side of the trimmed surfaces that are on
the opposite side as the normal of the trimming surface.
 Reverse - keeps the side of the trimmed surfaces that are on
the same side as the normal of the trimming surface.
9 Enter a Tolerance. This determines the accuracy of the trim.
window.
Surface/surface trimming restrictions

 The intersection curve is calculated using the surface/surface
intersection technique. If you receive the message No
surface/surface intersection, then FeatureMILL cannot determine
the intersection curve for your surfaces. For additional details see
these restrictions (see page 383).
 If you receive the message Can't trim, trim curve does not end on a
boundary, then an intersection curve has been calculated, but it
is not a valid trimming curve for your surfaces. This figure shows
an example.
See Trimming restrictions (see page 421) for all the restrictions
for trimmed surfaces.
 If you have multiple trimmed surfaces, the intersection curve
must form a valid trimmed surface for each of the trimmed
surfaces.
 If you have selected the Trim this surface also check box, then
the intersection curve must form a valid trimmed surface with
respect to the trimming surface.

Comparison of Surface/surface trimming and Trim a surface with a
curve
Surface/surface trimming is more accurate and is the preferred
method of trimming surfaces against each other.
Surface/surface trimming should be used if the intersection curve of
the two surfaces is a valid trimming curve for the surface to be
trimmed.
Surface/surface trimming performs surface/surface intersection as its
initial step. The resulting curve is then used to trim the surfaces.
This curve must be a valid trimming curve for the surfaces to be
trimmed. See trimming restrictions (see page 421) for more
information. If the intersection curve does not cut all the way across
the surfaces to be trimmed, you may have to calculate the
intersection curve separately and then join it with other curves to
form a valid trimming curve for the surface.
Trim a surface with a curve should be used:
 If you only have a curve with which to trim a surface.
 If the surfaces are tangent at their intersection such as a fillet
and its blending surfaces. In this case, extract the boundary
curve of the fillet surface and use it to trim the other surface.
 Where one surface needs to be trimmed by multiple other
surfaces before a complete loop is formed. You may need to
extract trimmed edges or calculate surface/surface intersection
curves and join them to create the trim loop. In this example,
the orange revolved surface cannot be trimmed by either the
blue or red surface alone.
Instead:

1 Create a curve at the intersection of the blue surface and the
orange surface.
2 Create a curve at the intersection of the red surface and the
orange surface.
3 Join the two curves.
4 Trim the orange surface with the joined curve.
Modify Surface
Modify Surface works with the surface by manipulating links and
surface curves.
The model must contain a surface.

To use Modify Surface:
1 Click the Modify button in the Surface from Surfaces Menu in

the Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar to display the Modify
Surfaces dialog.
2 Select a surface from the Surface list, or click the Pick Surface
3 Select Show surface to display a preview of the surface in the
graphics window.
4 Select an operation type from the Operation list. You can select:
 Move point (see page 437)
 Change link to line (see page 438)
 Change link to arc (see page 439)
 Add surface curve (see page 439)
 Delete surface curve (see page 440)
5 Follow the instructions in the dialog. Depending on which
operation type is selected, enter or pick a point, link or curve. If
Add surface curve is selected, Select Row or Column.
More about modifying surfaces (see page 440)
An example of a modified surface (see page 441)
Move Point
Move Point enables you to change any intersection point on the
surface to any other point.

To use Move Point:
1 In the Modify Surface (see page 437) dialog, select Move Point.
3 Click the Pick point on surface button and select a point in the
graphics window.
The coordinates of the point are displayed.
4 Enter new coordinates for the point.
The surface is redefined to maintain the overall smoothness of the
surface so the shape is still tangent continuous.
This edit breaks the link between the surface and the method
originally used to construct it. You cannot open the surface's
Properties dialog and modify it based on the parameters that
originally defined it as those parameters no longer apply directly to
this surface.
Change link to line

Change link to line converts any selected segment into a straight line
between its end points.
To use Change link to line:
1 In the Modify Surface (see page 437) dialog, select Change link to
line.
3 Click the Pick curve on surface button and select a curve in

The selected segment is converted into a straight line, and the
surface shape is recalculated.
this surface.

Change link to arc
Change link to arc converts a selected segment to an arc that has
the same shape. This does not change the shape of the surface but
you can use it to control surface behavior between defining curves,
for example.
To use Change link to arc:
1 In the Modify Surface (see page 437) dialog, select Change link to
arc.

The selected segment is converted into an arc, and the surface
shape is recalculated.
this surface.
Add surface curve

Add surface curve adds another surface curve to a surface. You can
then use the curve to modify the shape of the surface.
To use Add surface curve:
1 In the Modify Surface (see page 437) dialog, select Add surface
curve.
3 Click the Pick point on surface button and select a point in the
graphics window.
The coordinates of the point are displayed.
4 Select Row or Column to determine the orientation of the new
curve.

this surface.
Delete surface curve

Delete surface curve removes a surface curve from the surface. This
can change the shape of the surface. You cannot delete a boundary
curve.
To use Delete surface curve:
1 In the Modify Surface (see page 437) dialog, select Delete surface
curve.

this surface.
More about modifying surfaces

Modify works with the surface by manipulating links and surface
curves. The links of a surface characterize the shape of the surface.
The collection of links in one direction across the surface is known
as a surface curve. When you select the surface to modify, a
number of blue lines appear with intersection points. These are the
links and surface curves. A link is any segment between two
intersection points.
Isolines are displayed on the screen, but they are not the surface
curves that are edited. To see the isolines while editing, select the
Show surface option. With Modify you can change specific points in
the surface to fine tune your surfaces to match your needs.
Changing the surface with Modify breaks the parametric link of the
surface to the original construction data.

Modify example
The speaker case, for example, has a slightly bowed bottom. With
Modify, you can flatten that part of the model. Orient the model so
you can see the bottom. The view of the model is shown on the left.
On the right is an unshaded zoom of the model in the same
orientation so you can see the result of the Modify operation. Using
Modify, set Change link to line to make a straight line between the
points and select the front edge of the bottom. Click Apply. Notice
how the bottom surface flattened out in comparison to the source
curve which is also visible. This surface can no longer be edited
from the Sweep operation used to create it because the Modify
operation breaks the relationship to the original data. Another
Modify operation is needed to flatten the back edge of the surface.
Corner Blend
Blend surfaces are surfaces that create smooth transitions between
two, three or four surfaces.

Overview of blend surfaces (see page 442)
Using Corner Blend (see page 443)
Restrictions on blend surfaces (see page 444)
See also Fillet (see page 427), Surface/surface trimming (see page
432), Curve from surface intersection (see page 345), Curve from
surface isoline (see page 347), and Curve projected onto a surface
(see page 349).
Overview of blend surfaces

A fillet (see page 427) is a type of blend surface, but it requires that
the two surfaces actually intersect. They also have the restriction
that they can only blend two surfaces. A blend surface is a more
general blend of two, three or four surfaces. This surface
constructor requires that you be familiar with creating curves on a
surface and tangency, but it creates complex blends if these
concepts are mastered by the user.
Two-surface blends
This figure shows a two-surface blend example. For this blend you
must supply the curve on each surface to create this surface.
Three-surface blends
This figure shows a three-surface blend example. This blend is used
to create what is known as a 'suitcase fillet'. This means that you
want to create the intersection of three fillets like the corner of a
suitcase. If you create the fillets with FeatureMILL3D, the curves
can usually be automatically detected.

Four-surface blends
This figure shows a four-surface blend example. It is another
suitcase fillet. In this case one surface is not a fillet.
The curve for this surface must be specified. Four-surface blends

can also be used to join four distinct surfaces as in this figure.
Using Corner Blend

Corner Blend creates a blend surface between two surfaces.
To use Corner Blend:
1 Click the Corner Blend button in the Surface from Surfaces

Menu in the Curves and Surfaces (see page 13) toolbar to display
the Corner Blend dialog.
3 Enter the number of surfaces you want to blend in the Surfaces
field. This must be a number between 1 and 4.
4 Select a surface from the Fillet 1 list, or click the Pick Surface
5 Select a curve from the Curve On Fillet 1 list, or click the Pick
curve or geometry button and select it in the graphics
window. Select **Automatic to use an automatically selected
curve. See Restrictions on blend surfaces (see page 444) for
further information.

6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for Fillet 2, Fillet 3 and Aux Srf.
7 Enter a Tolerance. This determines the accuracy of the corner
blend.
8 If you want the fillets to be trimmed against the blended surface:
a select Trim Fillets.
b Enter a tolerance in the Trim Tol field.
c Select Create new srf(s) to create a new surface or Modify
existing srf(s) to modify the existing surfaces.
window.
If the edges of the fillet are too coarse set the Tolerance to a
smaller value.
Restrictions on blend surfaces

For three or four surfaces, if you choose **Automatic as the curve to
indicate that the system should automatically calculate the curve
then the following restrictions apply:
 The fillet surfaces must extend to where they intersect with the
other fillet surfaces. This figure shows an example of surfaces
that do not intersect.
 If the surfaces are not a FeatureCAM-created fillet (either not a

fillet at all, or an imported surface), the automatic corner
boundary calculation may fail. In these cases it is better to
specify the curve-on-surface for that particular surface.
 FeatureCAM attempts to find a closed loop across the three or
four surfaces by intersecting the rail curve boundaries of each
fillet with the other fillet's rail curves. This figure shows rail
curves.

 Therefore, if any of the curves on surfaces are specified, they
must intersect with these rail curves of the fillet surfaces where a
curve on a surface is not supplied.
 If a fourth surface is supplied, it is usually not a fillet surface. For
these surfaces you must supply a curve on the fourth surface.
The curve supplied must be on the fourth surface and should be
tangent to the rail curves or the neighboring fillets.
 If the automatic calculation fails, try a bigger tolerance,
supplying more curves on the surfaces or extending the fillet
surfaces so that they intersect. Sometimes it is helpful to
recreate the fillet surfaces with a tighter tolerance or a variable
arc step.
General restrictions
 With only two surfaces, you must indicate curves on each surface
to connect.
 For three sided cases, if there is a natural pole as in this image,
it is best to put the fillet surface that is furthest from the pole as
the first surface.
- natural pole
- use furthest fillet surface as the
first surface
Solids (SOLID)
Solids are groups of connected surfaces that make up a solid model
within an enclosed volume.

You can create solids in FeatureCAM (see page 451), or imported
them from CAD modeling systems (see page 82).
Use these methods to create solids in FeatureCAM:
 Click the Solids step in the Steps panel to display the Solid
wizard.
 Use the Solid toolbar (see page 22).
 Select the Construct > Solid menu option to display the list of
solid creation tools.
Definitions
A solid is a collection of surfaces (called faces) that define a 3D
volume. The edges that join faces are shared between the faces. A
solid cannot have any holes. If you filled it with water and tumbled
it around, it would not leak. For example, a box is a solid, but a box
with a missing face is not. FeatureCAM names these objects with a
prefix of solid, for example solid123.
A face is an individual surface contained in a solid. FeatureCAM

names these objects with a prefix of face, for example face472.
An edge is a curve that connects two faces. FeatureCAM names

these curves with a prefix of edge, for example edge857. These
curves are not normally displayed, but they are displayed by dialogs
that need an edge.

A sheet is a group of surfaces that are created using the solid
modeling tools, but that do not create a solid. Sheets have
restrictions on how they can be used because they do not enclose a
3D volume. FeatureCAM names them with a prefix of sheet, for
example sheet902. When you create a sheet, a dialog is displayed
indicating that a non-solid result was created from the design
operation.
A surface is a single 3D surface that is created with the tools of the

FeatureCAM Surface wizard or imported from a CAD system (usually
through IGES file transfer). These surfaces do not share edges with
neighboring surfaces even though the boundaries may overlap. The
edges are individually defined in each surface. Certain collections of
surfaces may be converted into sheets or solids using the design
features available in the From surfaces (see page 463) category of the
Solid Wizard (see page 452).
Comparison of surface and solid modeling

The advantages of surface modeling are:
 For representing curved shapes, surface modeling tools are more
powerful. Operators like Ruled Surface (see page 392), Curve
Mesh (see page 397), Cap Surface (see page 403), and Modify
Surface (see page 437) are available only for surface modeling.
Lofted Surface (see page 400) is more powerful than the solid
Fillet Edges (see page 470) design feature.
 With surfaces you are not forced to always work with 3D
volumes. You can build your model face by face with surfacing
tools without having to worry about 3D volumes.
The advantages of solid modeling are:
 Many surfaces are grouped together in a single solid, so solids
can be a more efficient way to model.
 Modeling operations that need to know the connections between
surfaces are more powerful in solids. Filleting is stronger in solids
because you need only pick shared edges.

 Useful modeling tools like Combine Solids (see page 475), Shell
(see page 477), and Silhouette Curves (see page 483) are
available only for solids.
Part View for solids

All solids are listed under the Solids section of the Part View. Below
each solid is a sequence of design features that were used to create
the solid. The first design feature listed for a solid is the base
feature. Base design features define the initial shape of the solid.
Base design feature names have the suffix base. Subsequent design
features listed under the solid, further modify the shape of the solid.
The prefix of a design feature name indicates the type of design
operation that was used to create it.
In the example below, solid11 is made up of three separate design
features. The first feature is named stkbase1. As the first feature of
the solid, it is the base feature. The prefix, stk, indicates that the
stock was used to create the feature. The second design feature is
named extcut1. The name indicates that an extrude design
operation was used to cut out the pocket shape. The final design
feature is named fillet1 and was created using a fillet design
operation.
The list of design features is available only for solids that are
created in FeatureCAM. If you import a solid, only the
resulting solid model is imported. You can access the faces of
the solid, but you have no history of how the model was
constructed.

Unattached design features
If a solid design feature becomes disconnected from the solid, a
question mark is displayed over its icon in the part view as shown
below.
These disconnected design features are called unattached features.

They can occur if you place a feature outside of the boundaries of a
solid, or an edit to the solid makes a feature become unattached.
For example, if you fillet an extrude feature and then delete the
extrude feature, the fillet feature becomes unattached.
Unattached features do not cause any harm, but they are no longer
contributing to the shape of the solid. If you select the solid, the
faces of the unattached features are not selected.
Selecting and deleting solids

You can select solids in one of these ways:
 Hold down the Space bar and directly pick the solid in the
graphics window. To select multiple solids in the graphics
window, hold down the CTRL key and Space bar and then select
each solid.
 Click the name of the solid or one of its design features in the
Part View
 Right-click on a face of the solid and select Select Solid from the
context menu.
Clicking in the graphics window selects only a face of the

solid.
Solids can be deleted only by selecting them and either pressing the
DELETE key or selecting Delete from the Edit menu.
Verifying that a solid is valid

Occasionally, a solid model can be imported that looks good, but is
not a valid solid. That can cause problems performing further solid
modeling operations or recognizing features from the solid. To
check that the solid is valid:
1 Click the AFR (Automatic Feature Recognition) step in the

Steps toolbox.

2 Click the Verify button.
A dialog displays indicating whether the solid is valid.
If you want to see a visual representation of where any problems

with a solid are:
1 Select Construct > Solid > Verify Solid from the menu.
The Verify Solid dialog is displayed.
2 Select the solid that you want to verify from the list.
3 Select the Color bad faces option.
4 Click Verify.
Any self-intersecting faces are shown in the color that is set for
Verify: self intersecting in the Default Colors (see page 128)
dialog.
Any other bad faces are shown in the color that is set for Verify
solid bad face in the Default Colors (see page 128) dialog.
Invalid solids
If you try to import and invalid solid, an error is displayed and you
can choose to import the solid as surfaces. You can then try to
create a solid from these surfaces using the Stitch (see page 463)
constructor.
Imported surfaces are named according to which solid they belong
to. For example, the surfaces imported from a solid named solid1
are named solid1_1, solid1_2, solid1_3, and so on in the Part Tree;
and the surfaces from a solid named solid2 are named solid2_1,
solid2_2, solid2_3, and so on. This makes it easier to see which
surfaces belong to which solid and to select all the surfaces from
just one solid.

Fixing bad surface faces
If you see error TPSRF01: Bad surface(s): face_name. Remove from
feature when trying to create a Surface feature, you have some bad
faces in the surface.
You can try to 'fix' these faces in this way:
1 Select the faces that are a problem.
2 Right-click on one of the faces and select Fix Face from the
context menu.
If this does not solve the problem, remove the bad surfaces from
the Surface feature.
Transforming a solid
To transform a solid:
1 Select the solid (see page 449).
2 Click the Transform button in the Standard toolbar.

The Transform (see page 310) dialog is displayed.
3 If you selected to move the solid, a solid operation is created in
the Part View.
4 If you select to copy the solid, a new solid is displayed in the Part
View.
Creating a solid
Solid modeling commands are available from the Solid Wizard (see
page 452), the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, and the Construct >
Solid menu.
The specific solid constructors are divided into four different
methods:
From Curves (see page 454):

Extrude Solid Design Feature (see page 455)
Revolved Solid Design Feature (see page 456)
Swept Solid Design Feature (see page 459)
Lofted Solid Design Feature (see page 461)
From Surfaces/Primitives (see page 463):

Stitch (see page 463)
From 2.5D Feature (see page 466)

Stock (or Cube) (see page 465)
Extrude a Surface (see page 467)
Revolve a Surface (see page 469)
Shape Modifiers (see page 470):

Fillet Edges (see page 470)
Cut with Parting Surface (see page 473)
Combine Solids (see page 475)
Shell (see page 477)
Manufacturing (see page 482):

Silhouette Curves (see page 483)
Select Core/Cavity (see page 485)
Split Face (see page 488)
Delete Face (see page 489)
Explode (see page 491)
Parting Surface (see page 491)
Draft a Face (see page 493)
Solid Wizard
The Solid Wizard guides you through the steps needed to create a
solid.
To use the Solid Wizard:

1 Open the Solid Wizard in one of these ways:
 Click the Solids button in the Steps panel.
 Click the Solid wizard button on the Advanced toolbar.

 Select Construct > Solid > Solid Wizard from the menu.
2 If you have not created a base solid a page is displayed that
helps you create it. Select:
 Use the stock as the base solid to create the base solid from
the stock or make another cube shape.
 Define a custom shape to continue with the solid wizard opens.
3 Select a method of solid construction.
4 Select a specific solid constructor.
5 Click Next to open the dialog for the solid constructor you
selected.
6 When you have specified the settings for the solid, click Finish
(see page 453) to create it. FeatureCAM uses the defaults for
any remaining settings.
Finish solid button

Click the Finish button to create the solid you selected. If you click
the button before completing all the options in the wizard,
FeatureCAM uses the defaults for the remaining settings.
To specify how the button works, click the down arrow and choose
an option. Select:
 Finish to create the solid and close the wizard.
 Finish and Edit Properties to close the wizard and open the
properties dialog for the solid you created.
 Finish and Create More to create the solid and return to the start
of the wizard. You can then create a new solid.
FeatureCAM remembers your selection and, when you next use the
wizard, the icon displayed on the button indicates its current state.
For example: indicates the button is currently in Finish
and Edit Properties mode.
Solid toolbar
The Solid toolbar lets you quickly access the dialog for the type of
solid you want to create.
To use the Solid toolbar:

1 Display the Solid toolbar in one of these ways:
 Select View > Toolbars from the menu, select Solid on the
Toolbars tab and click OK.

 Right-click in a space in the toolbars area and select Solid
2 Click a solid constructor button on the toolbar.
The constructors are grouped into four methods. Click the

arrow buttons to access the menu of all buttons in a
group.
From curves
The following From Curves solid constructors are available:
Extrude (see page 455)
Revolved Solid (see page 456)
Swept (see page 459)
Lofted (see page 461)
All of the solid design features created from curves have the
following options:
As new base solid — This creates an independent base solid that is
not subordinate to any other solid.
As add — This create the design feature and appends it to the solid.
As cut — This creates the design feature and subtracts it from the
solid.
In this example a circle is extruded down into a block
If the extrude feature
type is an add then the
cylinder is trimmed
against the surfaces of
the box and the
portions of the cylinder
outside of the box is
added to the solid.
If the extrude feature
type is a cut then the
cylinder is trimmed
against the surfaces of
the box and the
portions of the cylinder
inside of the box are
subtracted from the
solid.

For As add or As cut, if there is more than one base solid, you must
pick or select the base solid.
Extrude
Extrude creates a solid design feature by pushing a curve in a
straight line. Below are examples of an add extrude with a circle as
the curve and a cut extrude with a rectangle as the curve.
To create a solid extrude design feature:

1 Open the Extruded Solid dialog in one of these ways:
 In the Solid Wizard (see page 452), select From Curves, then
Extrude, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Extrude

button in the Solid from curve menu.
 From the menu, select Construct > Solid > From Curves >
Extrude.
1 Optionally enter a Name for the solid, or leave the default name.
2 Select the type (see page 454) As New Base Solid, As Add, or As
Cut.
3 Select the curve name in the Curve list or click the Pick Curve
button and select the curve in the graphics window.
The curve must be planar.

4 Specify the parameters of the extrude. You can do this in one of
two ways:
 Enter the specific Vector of the extrude.
 Enter the points to extrude From and To.
5 If you want to draft the walls of the surface, enter a Draft Angle.
6 Click the Preview button to see a line drawing of the feature.
7 If you displayed this dialog from the Solid toolbar, you can click
Apply to preview the feature as a solid. If the cut is on the wrong
side of the curve, click Flip side to Cut and click Apply again to
verify.
You can also use open curves for solid extrudes.

You can use open curves for solid base extrudes or solid cut
extrudes. You cannot use them for solid add extrudes. For base
extrude solids, a sheet is created without any end caps.
For cut extrude solids, you must ensure that the cut will divide
the solid into two distinct pieces like in this figure.
When working with open curves, an additional option called Flip
Side to Cut is displayed. After previewing your result, you can
select this option if you want to keep the solid on the other side
of the extrude.
Revolve
Revolved Solid creates a solid design feature by revolving a curve
around a line.
This example shows a base solid created with a curve on the axis
revolved 360 . You can tell that the curve was on the axis because
there is no hole in the middle.

This example is an extrude cut design feature rotated 180 :
This example shows a base solid created with a curve off the axis
(note the hole in the middle) and revolved 270 :
To create a solid of revolution design feature:

1 Open the Revolved Solid dialog in one of these ways:
Solid of Revolution.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Revolve

button in the Solid from curve menu.
Revolve.
3 Select the curve name in the Curve list or click the Pick Curve

4 Pick the Construction method. This is where you set what is
revolved around, or the pole. You can pick a Custom line, X-Axis,
Y-Axis, or Z-Axis.
5 If you selected Custom line, select the name of the line in the
Axis list or click the Pick Line button and select the line in the
graphics window.
6 Enter the Start angle in degrees.
7 Enter the End angle in degrees.
Cut.
side of the curve, click Flip Side to Cut and click Apply again to
verify.
Using open curves for solids of revolution

If the curve is open, a dialog is displayed with the following options:
Close curve using lines to axis — This creates a straight line from
the curve endpoints to the axis.

Close curve by joining endpoints — This creates a straight line
between the endpoints of the curve.
Continue with curve as-is — No change is made to the curve and a

sheet is created.
Sweep
A Swept solid takes a curve and runs it along another curve. The
example below shows a circle swept along a curved path to create a
groove shape.
To create a swept solid design feature:

1 Open the Swept Solid dialog in one of these ways:
Swept, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Sweep

button in the Solid from Curve menu.
Sweep.
3 Select the curve name in the Axis list or click the Pick Curve

4 Select the curve name in the Cross section list or click the Pick
Curve button and select the curve in the graphics window.
Cut.
6 Click the Preview button to check out your shape.
7 If the sweep does not follow the Axis curve, click Sweep from the
other end and click Preview again. If you still receive an error see
below.
verify.

Troubleshooting swept solids
If you use a cross section that is too large, it can result in surfaces
that self-intersect. If sweeping from both ends of the curve does not
work, cancel the swept solid and try creating a swept surface. If the
result shows overlapping surface regions like shown below, then the
cross section is too large.
Loft
The Lofted design feature takes a series of curves and fits a surface
to them.
To create a solid lofted design feature:

1 Open the Lofting dialog in one of these ways:
Lofted, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Loft button
in the Solid from curve menu.
 From the menu, select Construct > Solid > From Curves > Loft.
Cut.
3 Select the curve name in the Curve list and click the Add
button, or click the Pick Curve button and select the curves in
4 If you want to connect the first and last curves, select the Closed
option.
The Closed option connects the first and last curves; you cannot
repeat curves in a loft. In this example, the curves in the first
image are lofted. In the second image, the loft is not closed. The
loft on the third image shows a closed loft.
5 Click the Preview button to confirm that the surface is correct.

6 If you are working with open curves and surface twists, click the
name of the curve in the curve list and click the Reverse Selected
Curve button and click Preview again.
7 If you are working with closed curves and surface twists, you
may need to change the start point of some of the curves.
verify.
If you cannot achieve the required shape, you may be able

use a lofted surface (see page 400) to create the shape.
From surfaces
The following From Surfaces solid constructors are available:
Stitch (see page 463)
From 2.5D Feature (see page 466)
From Stock (Cube) (see page 465)
Extrude a Surface (see page 467)
Revolve a Surface (see page 469)
Stitch
Stitching converts well-trimmed surface models with shared edges
and shared boundaries into solid models. When the surfaces have
been stitched together into a solid, you can perform any solid
modeling operation on the solid.
The surfaces must not overlap or have gaps between them.

The surfaces in this example will not stitch because they overlap.

The surfaces in this example will stitch because the overlap has
been trimmed away.
Types of models that are good candidates for stitching are:

 IGES files containing trimmed surfaces from solid modeling
packages
 Surfaces that you model and trim using FeatureCAM surfacing
tools
To stitch surfaces into solids:

1 Open the Stitching dialog in one of these ways:
 In the Solid Wizard (see page 452), select From

Surfaces/Primitives, then Stitch, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Stitch

button in the Solid from surface(s) menu.
 From the menu, select Construct > Solid > From Surfaces >
Stitch.
3 Optionally select Log all errors and enter a file name and location.

4 If the surfaces form a sheet instead of a solid, select the
Non-solid Results OK option. If you do not select this box, you are
given an error if the surfaces do not form a complete solid. See
Overview of solids (see page 445) for further information.
5 Select the surface in the Surface list and click the Add button,
or click the Pick Surface button and pick the surfaces in the
graphics window. Each surface you pick will be entered in the
surface list.
If you have already selected the surfaces before opening

the dialog, they are listed in the Surface list.
6 Optionally, click the Preview button to confirm that the surface is
correct.
8 If the surfaces form a solid, a new solid is listed in the Part View.
If the surfaces do not form a solid or a sheet, an error message
is displayed.
Troubleshooting
 Ensure that no duplicate surfaces are displayed.
 Ensure that the surfaces do not overlap. In this case, you must
trim the surfaces before stitching.
Stock
To create a solid from your stock or a cube:
1 Open the Solid Cube dialog in one of these ways:

Surfaces/Primitives, then From Stock (Cube), and click Next.

 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Stock
Stock.
3 Select whether you want to use your Stock or a Cube.
4 If you selected Stock, click OK or Finish.
If you selected Cube, enter the coordinates of each corner or
click the Pick Point button and pick the point in the graphics
window.
From 2.5D feature

When a 2.5D feature is created, a 3D surface representation is
created for display. Although you can generate toolpaths and create
a 3D shaded simulation of the part, you must convert the features
into solid modeling operations to subtract them from a solid. In the
example below, a Boss feature and three holes were converted to a
solid.
All solids created from 2.5D features are subtractive, even

Boss features.
To create a solid modeling operation for a 2.5D feature:

1 Open the Solid from Feature dialog in one of these ways:

Surfaces/Primitives, then From 2.5D Feature, and click Next.
 On the Solid toolbar (see page 453), click the From Feature
From Feature.
3 Select the feature name in the Feature list or click the Pick
Feature button and pick the feature in the graphics window.
You can convert all 2.5D features except Side features. Patterns
of features are also supported.
4 If you have more than one base solid created, select or pick the
Solid to Cut.
All features are subtracted from the solid, even bosses.
Extrude a Surface
Extrude creates a solid design feature by pushing a surface in a
straight line. This operation is identical to Extrude solid design
feature (see page 455) except it works with surfaces not curves as
the input. Below are examples of a surface and its extrusion.

To create a solid extrude design feature:
1 Open the Extruded Solid dialog in one of these ways:

Surfaces/Primitives, then Extrude a Surface, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Extrude a
surface button in the Solid from surface(s) menu.
Extrude a surface.
Cut.
4 Select the surface name in the Surface list or click the Pick
Surface button and select the surface in the graphics window.
You cannot use a face of a solid.

5 Specify the parameters of the extrude. You can do this in one of
two ways:
 Enter the specific vector of the extrude.
 Enter the point to extrude from and then enter the point
where the extrude ends.

6 If you want to draft the walls of the surface, enter a Draft Angle.
8 If you displayed this dialog from the solid toolbar, you can click
side of the curve, click Flip side to cut and click Apply again to
verify.
Revolve a Surface
Solid of revolution creates a solid design feature by revolving a
surface around a line.
To create a solid of revolution:

1 Open the Revolved Solid dialog in one of these ways:

Surfaces/Primitives, then Revolve a Surface, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Revolve a
Surface button in the Solid from surface(s) menu.
Revolve a surface.

3 Select the surface name in the Surface list or click the Pick
surface button and select the surface in the graphics window.
You cannot use a face of a solid.

4 Pick the Construction method. This is where you set what is
revolved around, or the pole. You can pick a Custom line, or the
X-, Y-, or Z-axis.
5 Select the type as New base solid, Add, or Cut. See Type of
design feature for further information.
6 Set the Start angle in degrees.
7 Set the End angle in degrees.
8 If you select Custom line, select the name of the line in the Axis
menu or click the Pick line button and select the line in the
graphics window.
side of the curve, click Flip side to cut and click Apply again to
verify.
Shape Modifiers
The following Shape Modifiers solid constructors are available:
Fillet Edges (see page 470)
Cut with Parting Surface (see page 473)
Combine Solids (see page 475)
Shell (see page 477)
Offset Faces (see page 480)
Chamfer (see page 482)
Fillet
Because solids share edges among faces, solid filleting is simpler
and more powerful than surface filleting. You simply select edges of
the solid and enter fillet radii. The surfaces are then blended across
the edge and the faces are automatically trimmed. You can create
constant radius fillets as shown on the left or variable radius fillets
as shown on the right.

To create a fillet-edged solid:
1 Select the solid (see page 449) in the Part View.
2 Open the Edge Fillet dialog in one of these ways:
 In the Solid Wizard (see page 452), select Shape Modifiers,

then Fillet Edges, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Fillet button
in the Modify solid menu.
 From the menu, select Construct > Solid > Modifiers > Fillet.
When the dialog is displayed, the edges of the solid are
highlighted in blue in the graphics window.
4 Select the fillet type from Constant or Variable.
 If you selected Constant, enter the Radius.
 If you selected Variable, enter the Begin radius and the End
radius.
5 If you want to fillet all the edges of a face, select it in the Face
list, or click the Pick surface button and pick the face in the
graphics window.

6 If you want to set the radius for an edge, select it in the Edge
list, or click the Pick curve button and pick the edge in the
graphics window.
Ctrl+click two edges to select all edges that make up the

shortest path between them.
Double-click an edge to select all tangential edges.

7 Click the Add button to accept the face or edge and its
radius/radii.
The name of the edges and their fillet radii show in the
Edge/Radius box and the edge is shown as a red arrow in the
graphics window. For variable fillets, both the Begin radius and
the End radius show in the Radius column and are
comma-separated.
8 Add any other edges you want to fillet. If you want to use a
different radius on the next edge, enter a different Radius.
9 Click Preview if you want to preview the fillet before committing
to the changes.
10 If you need to change the radius on an edge, select the edge in
the Edge/Radius box, enter a new Radius, or Begin radius and End
radius, and click the Set radius on selected button.
11 If you want to change the radius of all the edges, enter the new
radius and click the Set radius on all button.
Controlling the shape of fillet joints

The joints where fillets intersect can either be mitered or blended.
To create a mitered fillet, fillet the adjacent edges in different fillets.
The fillets are intersected and trimmed against each other.

To create a blended fillet, fillet the adjacent edges in a single fillet.
The blend is calculated automatically based on the radii or the
fillets.
Cut with Surface

When you have a solid, you can cut it with a surface or a collection
of surfaces with common edges. This is useful for separating the
solid into two mold halves.
In the example below, the solid is a revolved glass that was
subtracted from a box.
This solid is then cut with a flat surface resulting in half of the solid
being cut away.

You can also cut a solid with a collection of surfaces that have
common edges. The surfaces are stitched together and the solid is
then cut with the resulting surfaces.
To cut a solid with a parting surface:

1 Open the Cut with a parting surface dialog in one of these ways:

then Cut with Parting Surface, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Cut with surface
button in the Modify solid menu.
 From the menu, select Construct > Solid > Modifiers > Cut with
surface.
3 Select the name of the solid in the Cut this solid list or click the
Pick solid button and pick the solid in the graphics window.

4 Select the name of the surface in the Surface list and click the
Add button or click the Pick surface button and pick the
surface in the graphics window.
5 If you have additional surfaces to cut with, repeat the previous
step.
The surfaces must have common edge curves that allow

them to be stitched together.
6 If you want to create a solid for both sides, select Keep both
sides.
7 Click the Preview button to preview the cut. The result is shown
in thick blue lines. If you want to cut on the other side of the
surface(s), click the surface name and click the Reverse selected
surface button.
Combine Solids
Normally you work only on a single solid model. You start with a
base and create additional design features that alter the shape of
the solid. Sometimes it is convenient to work on two different solids
separately and then combine them into a solid, for example
combining an imported solid and a mold base.
This is an example of a solid mold base:
This is the cavity solid:

This is the result of combining the mold base and the cavity.
Combine solids allows you to combine solids in three different ways.

A Difference B is A minus the portion of B that is inside of A.
A Union B is A plus the portion of B that is outside of A.
A Intersection B is the volume that is common to both A and B.
Examples
Initial solids Square Difference Cube Difference

Cube Square
Cube Union Cube Intersection

Cylinder cylinder
or or
Cylinder Union Cylinder
Cube Intersection Cube
To combine solids:

1 Open the Combine Solids dialog in one of these ways:

then Combine Solids, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Combine Solids
 From the menu, select Construct > Solid > Modifiers > Combine
solids.
2 Enter a New solid name.
3 Select an Operation:
 Difference — Subtract a solid from another solid. Solid2 is
subtracted from Solid1.
 Union — Add multiple solids together.
 Intersection — Create a solid at the intersection of multiple
solids.
4 Add the solids you want to combine:
 To add a solid by name, select it in the Solid list and click Add
item from list .
 To add solids graphically, click Pick solid and select the

solids (see page 449) in the graphics window.
5 Click Preview to preview the results.
Shell
Shell creates a thin-walled solid from another solid. In this example,
all the walls of the box are offset to create a rectangular void in the
center of the solid.

If you are using a hidden line view or shaded view, results of the
shell design feature are not visible, but if you cut the solid, you can
see the void.
You can optionally select faces of the solid not to offset. The faces
that are not offset create openings into the void.
To create a shell:
1 Open the Shell dialog in one of these ways:

then Shell, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Shell button
 From the menu, select Construct > Solid > Modifiers > Shelling.
3 Enter the Offset distance. A negative distance offsets the faces
into the solid. A positive distance offsets the surfaces out of the
solid.
For solids with tight regions or fillets, you cannot offset the
faces more than the smallest fillet radius or the smallest
gap between faces.
4 Select the name of a solid from the Offset this solid list or click
the Pick solid button and select the solid (see page 449) in
5 If you want to exclude any faces, select the name of the face in
the Faces to not offset list and click the Add button or click
the Pick surface button and pick the faces in the graphics
window.
If the Offset distance is too large, the offset surfaces intersect

and cause an error. Your only choice in this situation is to use
a smaller Offset distance.
Offset
To offset a solid:

1 Open the Offset dialog in one of these ways:

then Offset, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Offset button
 From the menu, select Construct > Solid > Modifiers > Offset.
solid.
4 Select the name of a solid from the Offset this solid list or click
the Pick solid button and select the solid (see page 449) in
Offset Faces
To offset a face or faces of a solid:

1 Open the Offset Faces dialog in one of these ways:

then Offset Faces, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Offset Faces
 From the menu, select Construct > Solid > Modifiers > Offset
Faces.
solid.
4 Select the name of the face you want to offset from the menu
and click the Add item button or click the Pick surfaces
button and select the surface in the graphics window.

Chamfer
1 Open the Edge Chamfer dialog in one of these ways:
 In the Solid Wizard, select Shape Modifiers, then Chamfer, and

click Next.
 On the Solid toolbar, click the Chamfer button in the

Modify solid menu.
 From the menu, select Construct > Solid > Modifiers > Chamfer.
3 If you want to chamfer all the edges of a face, select it in the
Face list, or click the Pick surface button and pick the face in
4 If you want to chamfer a single edge, select it in the Edge list, or
click the Pick curve button and pick the edge in the graphics
window.
5 Click the Add button to accept the face or edge.
The name of the edges and their fillet radii are displayed in the
Edge/Radius box and the edge is shown as a red arrow in the
graphics window.
Manufacturing
These Manufacturing solid constructors are available:
Silhouette Curves (see page 483)
Select Core/Cavity (see page 485)
Split Face (see page 488)
Delete Face (see page 489)

Explode (see page 491)
Parting Surface (see page 491)
Draft a Face (see page 493)
Silhouette Lines
Silhouette curves represent the widest part of a solid and serve as
useful parting curves for molds. You can also use these curves to
split the faces of a solid.
Silhouette curve
One of the tasks in creating a mold for a solid model is determining
the parting lines and splitting the part into at least two parts.
Silhouette curves represent the widest extent of a part when viewed
from the +Z direction. These curves often are helpful for
determining parting lines.
The first image shows a solid model. Initially, the side of the part is
a single surface. As a first step in creating two mold halves, we
would like to split the side face at its widest part. The second image
shows the silhouette curve for the solid.
Silhouette curve
In the Silhouette Curves dialog, you can also use the calculated
silhouette curves to split the faces of the solid. The figures below
show that the side face is now split into two separate pieces along
the silhouette curve.
See Select core/cavity (see page 485) for more information on

splitting solids into two halves.

This curve can then be used to create parting surfaces (see page
491).
To create a silhouette curve:

1 Open the Silhouette Curves dialog in one of these ways:
 In the Solid Wizard (see page 452), select Manufacturing, then

Silhouette Curves, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Silhouette
Curves button in the Manufacturing Solids menu.
 From the menu, select Construct > Solid > Manufacturing >
Silhouette Lines.
2 Optionally enter a Curve name, or leave the default name.
3 Select the name of a solid from the Solid list or click the Pick
solid button and select the solid (see page 449) in the
graphics window.
4 If you want to extract hidden silhouettes, select Include hidden
silhouettes.
With this option deselected, only silhouettes that are visible from
the top are extracted. With it selected, all silhouettes are
extracted. The first image shows a tube without the hidden
silhouettes. The second image shows both hidden and visible
silhouettes.

5 The silhouette curves are determined from the +Z direction of
the UCS. Select the UCS from the UCS list.
6 If you want to split the faces of the solid at silhouette curves,
select Split Faces at Silhouettes.
7 Silhouette curves can often be made up of many small pieces. To
reduce the number of these pieces (see page 338), check
Smooth/Reduce. The number after the Smooth/Reduce label is the
tolerance for data smoothing. The smaller the number, the
tighter the curve approximates the original silhouette. This
option can smooth out sharp corners in your curve, so use it with
caution.
8 If you want to join (see page 327) the resulting curves that
touch into a single piece, select Join Resulting Curves.
9 The Tolerance affects how tightly the silhouette curve
approximates the actual silhouette. Reduce this number if the
silhouette misses regions of your part.
Core/Cavity
Select core/cavity uses surface orientation to extract surfaces for
the core or cavity portion of a mold.
It segregates the surfaces of a solid into one of three different
types.
Original example

Top
All surfaces (or portions of surfaces if the Automatic Split option is
enabled) that are visible from the top.
Bottom
All surfaces (or portions of surfaces if the Automatic Split option is
enabled) that are visible from the top.
Other
All surfaces that do not fall into either the top or bottom category.
These surfaces are usually referred to as the core.
We recommend using the Automatic split option. This option splits

the faces of the solid at either the silhouette of the solid, or along a
parting surface that you provide as the Part Srf. With the Part Srf
option set to **Automatic, the silhouette curve is automatically
calculated and used to split the faces before the classification into
the top, bottom or other category.

If you specify a parting surface for the Automatic splitting, this
surface must pass all the way through the solid.
To select a core/cavity:
1 Open the Select Core/Cavity dialog in one of these ways:

Select Core/Cavity, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Core/Cav

button in the Manufacturing Solids menu.
Core/Cavity.
2 Choose whether to you want to Select the Bottom, Top, or Other
surfaces.
graphics window.
4 The silhouette curves are determined from the +Z direction of
the UCS. Select the appropriate UCS from the UCS list.

5 If there are surfaces you want to exclude, click the Pick surface
button, select the surfaces in the graphics window and click
the Add button.
6 If you want to include the vertical surfaces, select Include vertical
surfaces.
7 Optionally select Make solid from result.
8 If you want to split the surfaces at the silhouette curve, check
Automatic split and leave the Part srf field set to **Automatic.
9 If you want to split the surfaces at a parting line check Automatic
split and set the Parting surface field to the name of the parting
surface.
The appropriate surfaces are now selected so that you can easily
create 3D surface milling features.
Split Face
Split face takes a curve or list of curves, projects them onto the
selected face and splits the face into multiple faces using the
projected curves as the boundaries.
To create a split face design feature:

1 Open the Split Face dialog in one of these ways:

Split Face, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Split Face

 From the menu, select Construct > Solid > Manufacturing > Split
Face.
3 Select a face name in the Face list or click the Pick surface
button and select the face in the graphics window.
4 Select the curve name in the Curve list and click the Add
button, or click the Pick Curve button and select the curves in
5 Repeat the previous step if you want to use more than one curve
to split the face.
6 Click the Preview button to confirm that the surface is correct.
Delete Face
If you have a solid that you designed in FeatureCAM, you can easily
delete a design feature (see page 449). If you delete an extrude
feature, that cuts a slot in a part, the slot is removed and the
material is filled back in that region. If you have a solid model that
you imported or stitched, it is difficult to remove a design feature
because you do not have the design features that were used to
create the part, so you must use delete faces to remove the feature
and heal the model back together.
This example was an imported surface model that was stitched into
a solid.
The first image is the original solid and the second image shows the
same model with the faces that represent the three holes deleted.
Most of the regions that you want to remove are the equivalent of
2.5D features in your solid. This includes extruded holes, pockets,
or bosses. It is important that you select all surfaces that represent
the feature in the solid. For example for a blind hole, the walls and
bottom must be removed. If you only select the walls to be
removed, the bottom would be left floating in space and cannot be
healed back into the model.

To delete faces from your solid:
1 Open the Delete Face dialog in one of these ways:

Delete Face, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Delete Face
Delete Face.
2 If you want to create a new solid with the faces removed, select
Create new solid. Enter a Solid name for the new solid, or leave
the default name.
3 If you want to modify an existing solid, select Modify existing
solid.
4 Select the faces in one of these ways:
 Selecting the surface name and clicking the Add button.
 Picking the surfaces in the graphics window and clicking the
Add button.
 Clicking the Pick surface button and picking the surfaces

5 If you want the gaps left by the deleted surfaces to be filled in,
select Heal remaining faces.
7 If you get an error message, it is probably because you left out
some of the surfaces that need to be removed. Add the other
surfaces and try Preview again.

Explode Solid
This constructor copies the faces of a solid into surfaces.
To explode a solid:
1 Open the Explode into surfaces dialog in one of these ways:

Explode, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Explode

Explode.
2 Optionally enter a Surface name, or leave the default name.
graphics window.
4 If you only want to copy the selected faces, select the Selected
faces only option.
Parting Surface
This function creates a parting surface from a curve.

The parting surface constructor does not part the model. Use Cut
solid with parting surface or Select core/cavity for that functionality.
The curve can be a 2D or 3D curve. The curve can be obtained in
many ways including Silhouette Curves (see page 483), Surface
Edges (see page 350), and Curve projected onto a surface (see
page 349). The Z axis of the UCS indicates the parting direction of
the mold. For 3D curves the curve is divided at any corners.
To create a parting surface:
1 Open the Parting surface dialog in one of these ways:

Parting Surface, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Parting Surface
Parting Surface.
3 Enter the Land Width. This is the width of your parting surface.
4 Select the UCS you would like to use in the UCS list. The Z axis
of this UCS is used as the parting direction.
5 Select the Parting Curve from the list and click the Add button
or use the Pick curve button to select the curve in the
graphics window.

6 If your curve is 3D, it is broken up, and subdivided at sharp
corners, into a number of curves. Each of these names is listed
under your curve name.
7 Click the Preview button to see your surface.
If a section of your curve seems to be oriented incorrectly

follow the steps below.
To change the direction of a segment of a parting surface.
1 Select the curves in the Curve list to highlight the segment.
The direction is displayed in the Extrude direction field.
2 To change the direction, enter a new vector in the form (X,Y,Z).
You must enter the parentheses and the commas. For example
(1,0,0) is the X direction.
3 Click the Set button.
4 Click the Preview button to see the results.
Draft a Face
Many of the solid design features allow you to include a draft angle,
but they require that all faces be drafted the same amount. Draft a
face allows you to set a draft angle on one or more faces
individually.
To draft a face properly, the Fixed reference surface determines how
the face is rotated. When a face is drafted, the surface must be
rotated around a particular axis. This axis is determined by the
intersection of the face and the fixed reference surface. By default a
face is rotated around its intersection with the XY plane of the
current UCS. This means that for a face that intersects the XY
plane, a positive angle keeps the top of the face fixed and rotates
the bottom of the face in. The same result is calculated if a surface
connected to the top edge of the face is selected as the fixed
reference face.

If the surface connected to the bottom edge of the face is selected
as the fixed reference, the bottom of the face stays fixed and the
top edge of the face is moved out.
To draft a face:
1 Open the Draft existing face dialog in one of these ways:

Draft a Face, and click Next.
 On the Solid (see page 453) toolbar, click the Draft Face
 From the menu, select Construct > Solid > Manufacturing > Draft
Face.
3 Enter the Draft Angle in degrees.
4 Select the faces to draft in one of these ways:
 Select the surface name in the Faces to draft list and click the
Add button.
 Pick the surfaces in the graphics window and click the Add
button.
 Click the Pick surface button and pick the surfaces in the
graphics window.

5 To keep the top of the face fixed, select the surface connected to
the top of the face in the Fixed Reference list or click the Pick
surface button and pick it in the graphics window.
6 To keep the bottom of the face fixed, select the surface
connected to the bottom of the face in the Fixed Reference list by
clicking the Pick surface button and pick it in the graphics
window.
7 Click the Preview button to review the results.
Feature Recognition (REC/3D MX)

You can use Feature Recognition to extract manufacturing features
and their operations from existing solid or surface models and
automatically create toolpaths. You do not need to create geometry
or curves to use Feature Recognition, you can make use of the
information contained in the CAD model.
Feature Recognition requires the FeatureRECOGNITION option

for FeatureMILL 25D. It is included in FeatureMILL 3D MX and
3D HSM.
There are two types of Feature Recognition in FeatureCAM:

 Use Automatic Feature Recognition (see page 508) (AFR) to
recognize all features in a part at the same time.
 Use Interactive Feature Recognition (see page 499) (IFR) to
recognize a specific feature type.

This is a solid model This shows the part after
imported into FeatureCAM. using Automatic Feature
It contains only surface Recognition. The Face, Hole,
information. Pocket and Side features
have been automatically
created.
Types of Feature Recognition

These types of Feature Recognition are available in FeatureCAM.
 Automatic Feature Recognition (see page 508) wizard — The
Automatic Feature Recognition (AFR) wizard tries to create all
features for milling a part. It creates features by dividing the
model into horizontal slices. All features of the model are
recognized at the same time. It creates plain, counter drilled,
counter bored and counter sunk holes and all milling features are
created as Side features. It often creates a set of features that
completely cut your solid, but it may create more features that
you might create if you modeled the features.
 Interactive Feature Recognition (IFR) (see page 499) via the New
Feature wizard — The IFR option of the New Feature wizard is
applicable to Hole, Pocket, Boss, Side, and Face features. It is
more limited to how much of the part can be automatically
recognized and you must recognize each type of feature with
separate runs of the wizard.
 Automatic recognition of turned features — This option is
available only through the Import (see page 85) wizard.

Example
The following example shows the milling features that are extracted
using AFR and IFR method. The image below shows the three side
features created by the Automatic Feature Recognition wizard. The
model has the advantage that the two slots are cut by the top
feature. It has the disadvantage that top pocket is not represented
by a single pocket.
The image below shows the same example after using IFR. Each
pocket is represented by a separate pocket, but the two slots are
ignored.
Feature recognition examples

The following examples show features that have been recognized using
feature recognition.
Pockets
Holes
Sides
Slots

IFR using the New Feature wizard
You can use these methods of Interactive Feature Recognition:
1 Recognition from surfaces (see page 500) — Select surfaces that
represent the shape and depth of a feature. For holes and slots
this is the only applicable method.
2 Recognition using curve chaining (see page 502) — For milled
features that require curves (bosses, pockets and sides) the
shape of the features can be determined by chaining the curves
in the plane of the current UCS. Use this technique for features
that are made up of too many surfaces to conveniently pick.
To use IFR (Interactive Feature Recognition):

2 Select Hole, Boss, Pocket, Side, Chamfer, or Face.
3 Select Extract with FeatureRECOGNITION and click Next.
4 Follow the steps in the wizard.
You can click the Help button on each page of the wizard to get
more help for that page.
For more information about recognizing specific types of
features, see Features that can be recognized (see page 511).
Recognizing features from surfaces

2 Select your feature type. You can recognize Holes, Slots,
Pockets, Bosses, Sides, and Faces.
4 If you are extracting a single Hole or a Hole pattern, click Extract
a single hole or pattern of holes and click Next.
If you want to recognize all Holes in your part, see How to
recognize all Holes in a Setup (see page 512).
If you are creating a Pocket, Boss or Side, you are presented
with a choice of methods. Click Select surfaces and click Next.
5 Select the surfaces and click Next. For more information see
Feature recognition - surface selection.
This page enables you to select the surfaces to represent a feature.
The list contains the names of selected surfaces.
To complete this page
1 Select a surface (see page 56) in the graphics window. Any
surfaces that were selected before displaying the wizard are
listed.
2 Click to add the surfaces to the selected list. The surfaces
change to the highlight color (green by default).
3 If you prefer to pick surfaces one at a time, click the Pick surface
button and select a surface in the graphics window. Repeat
this step for each surface you want to pick.
4 To remove a surface from the list, select the surface in the
graphics window or click the name in the list and click .
Hold the Shift key to select multiple surfaces.

5 Optionally select Hide surfaces when finished to hide the selected
surfaces after creating the feature. This is useful if you want to
clear the screen to for selecting additional surfaces.
To show any hidden surfaces, select Show All or Show All

Surfaces from the Show Menu in the Advanced toolbar.
6 Click Next.
7 Click Preview to display a wireframe preview of the features in
8 If you are making a feature other than a Hole, the top and
bottom page is displayed. The top and bottom surfaces are
extracted from the surfaces, but you can select different points
to change the top and bottom heights of the feature. For more
information see Feature recognition - top & bottom.
9 Click Next.
10 Confirm the extracted dimensions of the feature. Optionally edit
the feature’s dimensions and click Next.
11 The Strategies page is displayed. Specify the attributes to modify
the machining process, then click Next. See the Strategy tab for
information on the specific attributes.
12 The Operations page is displayed. This page displays the
operations used to manufacture the feature along with the
names of the selected tools and calculated feed and speed
values. If these values are acceptable, click Finish. If you want to
change the tooling or feeds and speeds click Next and follow the
instructions on the screen.
Some additional things to keep in mind are:
 It is often easiest to select the surfaces from the top view after
clicking Hide all nonvertical surfaces from the Hide menu.
 Pockets require a closed curve. After you select your surfaces,
view them from the top. The selected surfaces should form a
loop as shown in this example. If you don’t see a loop as in this
example, you must select additional surfaces to fully define the
Pocket.
 For Pockets there is no automatic island detection. Do not include
island surfaces in your selection. Instead create your Pocket
without the island and then add the island separately by editing
the feature.
 Chamfers and draft angles are not recognized, but you can add
these parameters to the feature in the Dimensions page of the
New Feature (see page 530) wizard.

 If you select surfaces that define more than one cavity, a single
Pocket feature is created that contains multiple pocket cavities.
The collection of features is then milled one z-level at a time.
Recognizing features from surfaces using curve chaining

2 Select your feature type. Only Pocket, Boss, and Side features
can be recognized using curve chaining.
3 Click Extract feature from solid model and click Next.
4 Click Chain curves and click Next.
5 The geometry for the features is projected onto the plane of the
UCS.
6 The top and bottom page is displayed. Enter the top and bottom
values or click the Pick buttons and graphically pick the locations.
Click Next. For more information see Feature recognition - top &
bottom.
7 Confirm the extracted dimensions of the feature. Modify the
feature's dimensions if required and click Next.
8 The Strategies page is displayed. select the attributes you want
to use and click Next.
Feature recognition surface requirements

The following requirements apply for the recognition of surfaces for
milling features:
 Only straight-walled surfaces are recognized. If a single surface
also contains the bottom radius or a chamfer it is not recognized.
 Tapered surfaces are not recognized.
 The current Setup must be oriented so that the vertical walls of
feature surfaces are parallel to the Z-axis.
 You can include surfaces other than straight walls and they are
used to calculate the depth of the feature. These surfaces are not
used in determining the feature shape.

Recognizing Pockets and Bosses from top or bottom
surfaces
1 Import your solid model or IGES file.
2 If necessary, transform the part so that the surfaces that
represent the features are facing toward the Z axis.

4 Select a Boss or Pocket feature type. Click Extract with
FeatureRECOGNITION and click Next.
5 Click Use horizontal surface and click Next.
6 For a boss, select the flat top surface of the boss.
1 For a pocket, select the flat bottom surface. For more

information see Feature recognition - surface selection. Click
Next.
listed.


6 Click Next.
values or click the Pick buttons and graphically pick the
locations. Click Next. For more information see Feature
recognition - top & bottom.
2 Specify the feature's dimensions and click Next.
3 The Strategies page is displayed. Specify the options to
determine how the feature is machined, and click Next.
4 The Operations page is displayed, which shows a list of
operations in the feature, the tool used to machine each
operation, and the calculated feed and speed values. To accept
these values, click Finish to create the feature and close the
wizard. To change the tooling or feeds and speeds, click Next and
complete the rest of the wizard.
Chamfer recognition
In FeatureCAM, you can create chamfering/deburring operations,
even when the model does not contain these chamfers or deburr
regions.
For example, the following model contains various bosses, pockets,
and sides, and has lots of sharp edges:

There are no chamfers on the model itself or on the features:
To create automatic chamfers:

1 Select Chamfer in the New Feature wizard and select Extract with
FeatureRECOGNITION:

2 Click Next to open the New Feature - Feature Recognition Options
page:
Here you can enter the width of the chamfers and other options.
The chamfers are highlighted on the model, for example:
3 To accept the highlighted chamfers, click Select All, then Finish.

The chamfers are created and are shown in the Part View.
FeatureCAM deburrs the edges using 3D chamfers without gouging
neighboring edges, for example:

Recognizing drafted features
1 Import your solid model or .iges file.

4 Select your feature type. Only Pocket, Boss, and Side features
can be recognized using curve chaining.
5 Click Extract with FeatureRECOGNITION and click Next.
6 Click Chain curves. Wall angle and elevation values are shown.
7 If you know the angle, enter it. If not, click the Draft Angle label.
The dialog warps out of the way. Click two points on the same
vertical isoline as shown below. The dialog returns.
8 For the Elevation enter the Z coordinate of the top of the feature
or click the Elevation label and click the top of a wall of the
drafted surface. Click Next.
9 The geometry for the features is projected onto the plane of the
UCS. Chain the appropriate geometry.
values or click the Pick buttons and graphically pick the
locations. Click Next. For more information see Feature
recognition - top & bottom.
11 Confirm the extracted dimensions of the feature. Modify the
feature's dimensions if required and click Next.
12 The Strategies page is displayed. Select the attributes you want
to use, then click Next.

AFR wizard
Use Automatic Feature Recognition to automatically create features
from a solid model.
To use the Automatic Feature Recognition wizard:
1 Click the AFR step in the Steps toolbox to display the

Automatic Feature Recognition wizard:
2 Select the solid you want to recognize from the list, or click the
Pick solid button and pick it in the graphics window.
3 Optionally click the Verify button to ensure that the solid is valid.
4 Click Options to display the AFR Options dialog (see page 509).
5 To complete the wizard and create all features, click Finish.
To select which features you want to create on each setup:
a Click Next to display the setups page of the wizard.
b Select the setups for which you want to create features.
c Click Next to display the first setup page of the wizard.
The setup name is displayed at the top of the wizard, and
available features are displayed in blue in the graphics
window.

d In the list, select the features you want to create on this
setup. Selected features are highlighted in orange in the
graphics window.
e If you selected multiple setups in step b, click Next and use
the wizard to select features for each setup.
f When finished, click Finish to complete the wizard and create
the features.
AFR Options dialog

Use the AFR Options dialog to specify how features are recognized
and created during feature recognition.
To display the AFR Options dialog, select the Options > Feature
Recognition menu option.
Create face feature — Select this option to create a Face feature to

automatically level the top of the part.
Create hole pattern — Select this option if you want to group Holes
into Patterns.
Bottom radius suppression — Select this option to ignore the radius
at the bottom of a Pocket.
Maximum Hole diameter — This is the threshold between Holes and
Pockets. For cylinders larger than the value entered, a Side feature
is created instead of a Hole feature.
Create 3D feature — Select this option to create a 3D feature.
Add rough operation — Select this option to add a rough operation.

Single feature, single operation — Select this option to create all
found features as one feature with one operation.
Single feature, multiple operation — Select this option to create all
found features as one feature with multiple operations.
Multiple feature — Select this option to create multiple features. This
uses more memory.
Display error messages if recognition fails — Select this option to
receive an error message if recognition fails.
Use edge-based FR — If feature recognition is not working correctly
for your solid, select this option to use the body outline of a solid for
feature recognition, instead of using the faces. This may give you
better feature recognition results, but it is slower than the other
method.
Feature recognition - surface selection

listed.


6 Click Next.

Automatic feature recognition error
The type of automatic feature recognition performed by the AFR
wizard provides a solution for many types of models, but it is not
the best method for every model. If the AFR wizard fails for your
model, try other automatic feature recognition methods (see page
496) or try Interactive Feature Recognition in the New Feature wizard.
Features that can be recognized

FeatureCAM can recognize the following feature types:
 Holes (see page 511)
 Slots (see page 518)
 Bosses (see page 519)
 Pockets (see page 521)
 Sides (see page 524)
 Faces (see page 525)
This set of features should cover the features contained in most
parts. If you need to extract other features from a solid or surface
model, you should use the Curve from surface (see page 343) tools
and then create your features from this geometry.
Hole recognition
FeatureCAM can recognize four types of hole:
Hole type Surfaces recognized from
Plain Cylindrical surfaces with an optional 45
chamfer surface.
Counterbo Two cylinders (larger diameter on top)
re with an optional 45 chamfer on the top.
Countersin A cylinder with a cone on top that is not
k 45 .
Counterdril A cylinder on top of a cone, on top of
l another cylindrical surface. A 45 chamfer
is optional on top.
Example hole surfaces are shown below.

Plain hole
Counterbore hole
Countersink hole
Counterdrill hole
The cylinders can be comprised of one or more surfaces.

Holes are recognized automatically using either the Automatic
Feature Recognition (see page 508) wizard or IFR option in the New
Feature (see page 499) wizard. You should get the same results
using either method. Using the AFR wizard recognizes Hole features
along with other features, but using the IFR option recognizes only
holes. You can recognize Hole features from surface or solid models.
Follow the steps listed here (see page 500) to use the IFR option.
See Hole features (see page 637) for complete details on all hole
types; How to recognize features from surfaces (see page 500) for a
description of the overall process; and Feature recognition surface
requirements (see page 502) for information on how surfaces are
used in feature recognition.
FeatureCAM uses the Spline Tolerance (see page 1648) machining
attribute to determine whether a surface is a hole.
Recognizing all holes in a Setup

1 Import your solid model or *.iges file.

4 Select the Hole feature type.
6 Select Recognize and construct multiple holes and click Next.
7 See New Feature - Hole recognition options (see page 516) for
information on completing this process.

New Feature - Hole recognition method
The Hole Recognition Method page provides the choice of recognizing

one or all holes for the current Setup.
Which method would you like to use?
 Extract a single hole or a pattern of holes — Use IFR to create
individual Hole features, and optionally create a pattern from
them.
 Recognize and construct multiple holes — Use AFR to recognize all
holes in the solid. The Hole Recognition Options dialog (see page
516) is displayed when you click Next.
Make all holes be created at a constant z height — Create all Hole
features at the same z height, regardless of the position of the hole
in the solid.
Merge disjoint holes — Select this option to merge disjoint holes into
a single feature. Disjoint holes are coaxial holes that are stacked on
top of each other and share the same diameter and center location.
This is only available for AFR.
The following example contains disjoint and hidden holes. This is the
unshaded view of the solid model:

IFR with Merge disjoint holes deselected produces this result:
This is the result with Merge disjoint holes selected:
This is the result with Merge disjoint holes and Merge hidden holes
selected:
Merge hidden holes — Select this option to merge disjoint holes,

even if there is material between the holes in the solid. For
example, select this option to merge two holes on opposite sides of
a solid into a single Hole feature all the way through the solid. This
is only available when Merge disjoint holes is selected.

The following example contains disjoint and hidden holes. This is the
unshaded view of the solid model:
IFR with Merge disjoint holes deselected produces this result:
This is the result with Merge disjoint holes selected:

This is the result with Merge disjoint holes and Merge hidden holes
selected:
Exclude holes with diameter greater than — Ignore holes outside the
specified size range. This is only available for AFR.
New Feature - Hole Recognition Options
This page lets you control the feature recognition process and select
which of the recognized holes to keep. To complete this page:
1 Optionally select Include partial holes.
 If you want to recognize only holes with 360 degree
cross-sections, deselect Include partial holes. This option
typically recognizes all the holes in your model.

 Partial hole features are recognized from pieces of cylinders.
This includes holes that have been partially cut away or
corners pockets. See example. If you would like to have holes
recognized from these surfaces, select Include partial holes.
2 Next determine if you would like to ignore blind holes that are on
the opposite of the part. Select Exclude hidden holes to turn on
this option.
This option is available only if your part model is a solid

model.
3 You can also create patterns and/or groups.
 If holes with identical dimensions are recognized and you
want to create patterns for these holes, select Merge holes of
the same parameters into a pattern. By creating a pattern, you
can later edit the whole pattern in a single dialog.
 If you would like to create a group of all of the holes select
Add all new holes into a group if there is more than one.
4 All of the recognized holes are highlighted in thick lines. You
must select which of these holes you would like to keep.
 If you want to keep all of the recognized holes, click Select all
and click Finish.
 If you want only some of the recognized holes, select the
holes in the graphics window and click Finish.

Slot recognition
FeatureCAM can recognize only straight slots. They are recognized
from straight, parallel side surfaces. You must select surfaces on
both sides of the slot. In the example below, the shaded surfaces
are the selected surfaces. The extent of the slot is defined by these
surfaces. Note that the flat bottom surface is ignored.
For interrupted slots, select surfaces on each end. In the image

below, the slot is interrupted, but can be created by selecting the
wall surfaces at either end.

If the feature you are trying to recognize is a straight cut that
extends off the side of the part, as in the yellow region of the part
shown below, use a Side feature (see page 524). You cannot
recognize such a feature as a slot because it does not have
opposing side walls.
You cannot recognize chamfers, draft angles, and bottom radii, but
you can add these parameters to the slot in the Dimensions page of
the New Feature (see page 530) wizard. See:
 Slot (see page 661) feature for more general information on slots.
 How to recognize features from surfaces (see page 500) for a
description of the overall process.
 Feature recognition surface requirements (see page 502) for
further information on how surfaces are used in feature
recognition.
Boss recognition
Bosses are features that must be closed. This means that the
cross-section of the feature must form a loop.
Bosses can be created by recognizing features directly from
surfaces (see page 500) by using curve chaining from the solid
model (see page 502) or automatically (see page 521).
If you are recognizing the feature directly from surface data keep in
mind:
clicking Hide All Nonvertical Surfaces from the Hide menu.

 Bosses require a closed curve. After you select your surfaces,
view them from the top. The selected surfaces should form a
loop, for example.
 If you do not see a loop as in the following example, you must

select additional surfaces to fully define the pocket.
 You cannot recognize chamfers, draft angles, and bottom radii,

but you can add these parameters to the feature in the
Dimensions page of the New Feature (see page 530) wizard.
 If the part has multiple bosses at the same height, you should
select all the surfaces of each boss and create a single Boss
feature. The collection of features is then milled at one z-level at
a time. If you accidentally create more than one boss at the
same height, the first boss cuts away the second boss.
 You can recognize drafted Boss features. See How to recognize
drafted features (see page 507) for more information.
See also Boss feature (see page 679) and Feature recognition
surface requirements (see page 502)

Automatic Boss recognition on solid models
If you are working with a solid model, you can recognize a limited
set of Boss features automatically. In general, it is recommended
that you use the AFR (see page 508) wizard for parts with Boss
features. For a set of faces to be recognized as a Boss
automatically, the following conditions must be met:
 The Boss must have a flat top.
 The Boss must have walls all the way around it.
 If the part has multiple bosses at the same Z height, they must
be included in a single Boss feature. (If they are not, each boss
cuts away the other). The surface of each individual boss must
be the same for them to be included as a single feature.
Bottom radii are recognized. Chamfers are not recognized, but you
can add them in the Feature Properties dialog. Drafted bosses
cannot be recognized automatically. You must use Chain feature
curves option (see page 507) to recognize drafted features.
Pocket recognition
Pockets are features that must be closed. This means that the
cross-section of the feature must form a loop.
You can recognize Pockets using one of these methods:
 Pockets with bottoms and walls all around can be automatically
recognized (see page 521) from solid models. This is the only
method that can recognize islands and bottom radii.
 Recognition from selected bottom surfaces (see page 503).
 Recognition from selected side surfaces (see page 500).
 By extracting feature geometry and chaining curves (see page
502). This is the only method that can be used to recognize
drafted pockets (see page 507).
See also Pocket feature (see page 700) and Feature recognition
surface requirements (see page 502).
Automatic Pocket recognition on solid models

If you are working with a solid model, you can recognize blind
Pockets automatically. For a cavity to be recognized as a Pocket
automatically, the following conditions must be met:
 The Pocket must have a flat floor. A cavity that passes all the
way through the stock cannot be recognized. Through cavities
can be recognized only as Side features.
 The Pocket must have walls all the way around it.

For cavities that meet these conditions the automatic recognition
finds:
 The Pocket boundary and the island boundaries. Note that the
islands must be distinct from the boundary, but they can be of
different heights. The island of this example solid is recognized
automatically:
This island is not recognized automatically.

 The Pocket depth is determined by the tallest pocket wall. If you
want to force all the features you are recognizing to start at the
same Z coordinate, then select Force same Z height and then
enter an elevation. If the Pockets you are trying to recognize,
share a wall with a Boss, you should control the depth in this
way. This image shows the pocket that is automatically
recognized.
This image shows the Pocket that is recognized if an elevation is

set to the bottom of the Boss.
 If the Pocket has a consistent bottom radius, it is recognized

automatically.
Chamfers are not recognized, but you can add them in the Feature
Properties dialog. Drafted Pockets cannot be recognized
automatically. You must use Chain feature curves option (see page
507)to recognize drafted features.
Recognizing Pockets automatically from solids

1 Import your solid model. Pockets can only be recognized from
solids.

4 Select a Pocket feature type. Select Extract with
5 Click Automatic and click Next.

6 The Pocket features are recognized and highlighted, and the
Pocket recognition options dialog is displayed.
7 After completing this dialog, click Finish.
Side recognition
Side features can be created using the Automatic (see page 524)
method, or from side surfaces.
Use a boss (see page 519) or pocket (see page 521) for closed
features.
If you are recognizing the feature directly from the side surfaces,
keep in mind:
clicking Hide All Nonvertical Surfaces from the Hide menu.
 Chamfers, draft angles and bottom radii cannot be recognized,
but you can add these parameters to the feature in the
Dimensions page of the New Feature (see page 530) wizard.
See also Boss feature (see page 679) and Feature recognition
surface requirements (see page 502).
Automatic Side recognition on solid models

Some Side features can be recognized using the Automatic Feature
Recognition option of the New Feature wizard. In general, the AFR
(see page 508) wizard is better at recognizing Side features.
Three types of Side feature are recognized using this method:
 Through cavities — Pockets that go all the way through the part
are recognized as Side features, for example the light blue region
of the image below.
 Open Side features that are on the border of the part — The
yellow region of the image below is such a feature.

 Outer boundaries — The material from the stock boundary to the
part boundary is removed using a Side feature. If the stock
boundary and part boundary are the same, a Side feature is
recognized, but no toolpaths are generated.
Blind Pocket and Boss features formed from closed curves are
recognized as Pockets and Bosses, not Side features.
Face recognition
Milling Face features can be created from flat faces of a solid or
from flat surfaces using the Feature Recognition wizard. It works
best on solid models because the other faces of the model are
avoided when the toolpaths are created. An example of Face feature
recognition from a solid model is shown below. Face features
created from surfaces do not take other surfaces into account.
Recognizing a Face feature from a solid

To recognize a Face feature from a solid:

1 Import a solid model or .iges file.
2 If necessary, transform the part, so that the surfaces that

6 Click Next to open the Surfaces page.
7 Select a flat surface then click Next.
listed.


6 Click Next.
If you select the highest surface in the part, a simple Zigzag
toolpath is used to face the selected surface without avoiding
collisions with the rest of the part, and you cannot change the
toolpath type.
Otherwise, a standard Milling toolpath is used to face the
selected surface only, without cutting into the rest of the part.
You can change the toolpath type on the Strategy tab (see page
936) of the Feature Property dialog.

7 Follow the instructions in the wizard, then click Finish to create
the Face feature.
Rerecognition wizard
You can use the Rerecognition wizard to compare a new solid model
with an existing set of features. This is useful if you want to import
a new solid model that is a variation on the initial model.
Select the Construct > Rerecognition Wizard menu option to display
the Rerecognition wizard.
When rerecognizing features in a new model, ensure you use

the same alignment (see page 85) as the original.
FeatureCAM recognizes features from the new solid and compares

them to the existing features. The new features are classified into
these categories:
 unchanged features — These features are identical to existing
features. They are ignored in the rerecognition process.
 new features — These features are not part of the existing
features and therefore are assumed to be new. You can create
these features in the Rerecognition wizard.
 modified features — These features have the same shape or size
as existing features, but parameters like depth, bottom radius or
chamfer distance have been modified. The Rerecognition wizard
asks you if want to replace the existing features with their
modified versions.

 deleted features — These features exist in the current set of part
features, but were not found in the new model. You are offered
by the Rerecognition wizard the option of deleting these features.
There are many possible reasons that this feature is in your
existing set of features but was not automatically recognized, so
you should be careful about deleting these features. If the
feature has clearly been deleted, you can comfortably remove it.
If the feature was created through interactive methods, you
probably want to keep this feature. If you are uncertain, you
should preview each feature and decide on an individual basis.

Features
Create features, such as holes, pockets, slots, and step bores, and
FeatureCAM generates the toolpaths to machine them, so you do
not need to specify individual manufacturing operations.
Pocket feature
Step Bore feature
Slot feature
Hole feature
To create features, use the New Feature wizard (see page 530).
To edit and customize features, use the Feature Properties dialog
(see page 884).

Use Feature Recognition (see page 495) to recognize features
automatically from solids and surfaces.
New Feature wizard

Use the New Feature wizard to create features.
Click the Features step in the Steps panel to display the New
Feature wizard.
Alternatively press the Ctrl+R keys.

The pages available in the wizard vary depending on the document
type:
 Mill (see page 531)
 Turn (see page 573)
 Turn/mill (see page 607)
 Wire (see page 608)
On most pages of the wizard, you can click Finish (see page 531) to
close the wizard and accept the default settings in any remaining
pages. You can edit the feature attributes later in the Feature

Finish button
You can close the wizard in several ways depending what you want
to do next.
Click the arrow on the Finish button, and then click one of these
options:
 Finish — Create the feature and close the wizard, using the
default values in the remaining pages of the wizard.
 Finish and Edit Properties — Create the feature and display the
Feature Properties dialog. You can use the Feature Properties
dialog to edit the feature quickly, and it contains some advanced
options that are not available in the wizard.
 Finish and Create More — Create the feature and display the first
page of the wizard. This enables you to create multiple features
quickly.
Your selection is remembered the next time you use the wizard.
New Feature wizard (MILL)
For Milling documents, you can create the following types of

features:

 From Dimensions — create features by specifying numeric
dimensions.
 From Curve — create features by selecting curves.
 From Feature — create these features:
 Group (see page 869) — create a group of existing features.
 Pattern (see page 869) — duplicate an existing feature to create
a pattern.
 User (see page 857) — create a User Defined Feature (see
page 857) (UDF) or insert a Part Library object (see page
1501).
 Toolpath (see page 633) — create a toolpath directly.
 From Surface — create a 3D Surface Milling (see page 734)
feature.
Optionally select these options:
 Make a pattern from this feature — Select this option to create a
pattern from the new feature. There are extra pages in the
wizard to set up your pattern.
 Extract with FeatureRECOGNITION — Recognize features from a
solid model using the FeatureRECOGNITION module.
You can only recognize specific feature types (see page

511).
You can use the Automatic Feature Recognition (see page

495) wizard to recognize all features in the model
automatically.
 Create new setup — Click this button to display the Setup wizard.
This button is only available when Extract with
FeatureRECOGNITION is selected.
New Feature - Dimensions page (MILL)

If you are creating a From Dimensions feature, the second page of
the wizard is the New Feature - Dimensions page. The page is
different for each of the From Dimensions feature types. See the
specific feature creation topics for how to complete this page:
Hole (see page 639)
Rectangular Pocket (see page 656)
Slot (see page 661)
Step Bore (see page 668)
Thread Milling (see page 672)

Face (see page 677)
New Feature - Curves page (MILL)

If you are creating a From Curve feature, the second page of the
wizard is the New Feature - Curves page.
This page is where you specify the curve that dictates the shape of
your feature. This page is the same for all From Curve feature types.
1 If you still need to chain (see page 319) your geometry into a
curve, click the Curve chaining button and chain the curve.
2 Select the curves(s) in the graphics window. Any curves that
were selected before opening the wizard are already listed.
3 Click Add to add selected curves to the list. In the graphics
window, the added curves change to the highlight color (green
by default).
4 To remove a curve from the list, select the curve in the graphics
window or in the list and click Delete . To select a range of
names from the list, select the top name and then hold down the
SHIFT key and select the bottom name.
5 To select the curves one at a time, click Pick curve , then

select the geometry or curve in the graphics window. Repeat this
procedure to select each curve.
6 When you have selected the curves required to define the
feature, click Next to open the New Feature - Location page.

New Feature - Machining Side page (MILL, WIRE)
For some From Curve features, you must specify the machining side.
You do this on the New Feature - Machining Side page of the wizard.

1 Review the default machining side for each curve in the table by
selecting it and viewing the blue arrow in the Graphics window,
for example:
2 If you are happy with the machining side, click Next to open the
New Feature - Location (see page 534) page.
3 If you want to change the machining side of a curve, select it in
the table and click the Switch machining side button.
The arrow in the Graphics window switches and the table

updates the Machining Side from Normal to Reverse for the
selected curve.
4 Click Next to open the New Feature - Location (see page 534)
page.
New Feature - Location page

Specify the location of the feature:

 XYZ — The feature is aligned so that its depth is parallel with the
-Z direction of the Setup. You position it by specifying the X, Y,
and Z coordinates in the plane of the Setup.
 Polar — The feature is aligned so that its depth is parallel with

the -Z direction of the Setup. It is positioned by specifying a
Radius and Angle.
- Radius
- Angle
 Polar on the OD — The Radius specifies the distance of the

feature from the Z axis. The Angle is the counter-clockwise
angle, in degrees, from the X axis. The Y shift distance is the
distance the feature is translated from the radius in Y. The Z
coordinate is the distance the feature is translated in the Z
direction. This option is available only for turn/mill documents.

- Y shift
- Angle
- Radius
 Radial about axis — For 4th-axis (see page 234) parts.

This point that you are specifying corresponds to the symbol in
the diagrams.
1 Enter the location of a point in the X, Y, and Z fields, or click Pick
location and select a point in the graphics window. Use snap
modes (see page 295) to select precise locations.
2 If you are creating a Mill feature, enter an angle in the A field,
that represents a counter-clockwise rotation around the feature
location.
3 Click Next.
New Feature - Part Surfaces page

Use the Part Surfaces page of the New Feature wizard to select
surfaces that define the shape of the feature.
Add surfaces you want to machine to the list using the buttons:
 Add from selected items — Select surfaces in the graphics
window and click this button to add them to the list.
 Delete from selected items — Select surfaces in the list and
click this button to remove them.
 Pick Surface — Click this button to hide the dialog, then pick
a surface in the graphics window.
Consider the following when specifying part surfaces:
 You cannot manufacture undercut surfaces using 3-axis
machining, so select only surfaces in the feature that can be cut
from the setup.

 Some surfaces may be cut from multiple setups to manufacture
all parts of the surface. In such situations, a Stock Curve is
helpful in limiting the machining area to just those spots that
need it.
New Feature - Strategies page (MILL)

Use the New Feature - Strategies page of the New Feature wizard to
specify the machining strategy for the feature.
After you have created the feature, you can edit these options in
the Strategy tab of the Feature Properties dialog (see page 936).
Climb mill — Enable this option to have the tool on the left side of
the machined edge (in the direction of tool travel). Disable it for
conventional milling, with the tool on the right side of the machined
edge.
Individual rough levels (see page 963) — Select this option to list
each Z-level of the rough pass separately, which enables you to
specify separate attributes and tools for each Z-level.
Depth first (see page 965) — Enable this option to cut each region of
a feature completely before moving on to another region. The
toolpaths descend in Z.
Minimize tool retract (see page 966) — Select this option to reduce
the amount of retracting that the tool does while milling a feature.
Instead of retracting, the tool continues feeding to its next location.

Partline prog — Select this option to use the drawing dimensions of
the feature for the toolpath instead of the centerline of the tool. You
can only use this option when cutter compensation is enabled.
Partline programming is a particular kind of cutter compensation for
milled features. If enabled, the actual drawing dimensions of the
feature are output as the toolpath instead of the center line of the
tool. If Cutter compensation is not enabled for any of the operations
in a feature, selecting Partline program does not affect the NC Code.
The tool selected to cut the feature is still important even when
using part line programming. If the same tool is used for roughing,
ensure that the actual tool diameter does not deviate too far from
the diameter of the tool used by FeatureCAM to ensure proper area
coverage for the roughing passes. Also ensure that the diameter of
the selected finishing tool is small enough to cut the whole feature.
If you have selected a tool too large to fit into a tight corner, you
cannot correct the toolpath with just cutter compensation.
FeatureCAM automatically calculates the entrance point of the Finish
pass and adds a linear move and a ramping move (based on the
Ramp diameter value) to your Finish pass to accommodate cutter
compensation. If you receive a warning in the operations list such
as Can't find ramp in/out arc or Can't extend end of open profile then
correct the problem by decreasing the Ramp diameter value or
changing the Pre-drill point.
Finish Cutter comp — Select this option to use cutter compensation
for the finish and semi-finish operations.
Cutter compensation offsets the lines and arcs of a toolpath to
account for the difference between a tool's actual diameter and the
diameter specified. For example, if the specified diameter is 0.500,
the actual tool diameter, due to wear, could be 0.496. Cutter
compensation allows this difference to be accounted for at the
control so that a single NC program can be used as long as the tool
is close enough in diameter to the ideal size entered into
FeatureCAM.
The direction of the compensation depends on the value of Climb
mill. If Climb mill is on, the cutter compensation direction is left, and
if it is off, the cutter compensation is right.
If you use cutter compensation you must select Enable Cut Comp in
Post Options (see page 1857). Turning it on does not turn on cutter
compensation for every feature, however, as cutter compensation
NC code is output only for those features with the Cutter Comp
attribute selected. If the Cutter Comp option is deselected in the
Post Options dialog, then cutter compensation is disabled for the
entire part regardless of the value of the Cutter Comp attributes on
each feature.

If you select Part line program, you get a special kind of cutter
compensation known as part line programming.
If you have specified both Multiple roughing tools and Part line prog
for the roughing pass, then in most cases bad NC code is generated
because the first roughing tool is likely to be bigger than the arcs in
the part. We would consider this to be a fact of life and you need to
turn off one or the other in order to get workable NC code.
If cutter comp is not chosen for the roughing, then no cutter comp
is output at all.
Cutter compensation for the roughing pass results in only the
passes closest to the wall being compensated. The interior passes
are not compensated because there is no need.
Operations
Pre-drill — Enable this option to add a pre-drill operation to the
feature.
The location for a pre-drill point is set automatically, but you can
override it for a Spiral type toolpath using the Plunge point(s)
operation attribute.
A Pre-drill operation is not available with a Zigzag stepover

toolpath.
Zigzag ramping is automatically disabled when you use a

Pre-drill operation with an NT style toolpath. This is not
supported for the Spiral toolpath and you must set the Max.
ramp angle (see page 1161) to 0 to disable zigzag ramping
when using a Pre-drill operation.
The Pre-drill operation for the NT style toolpaths includes

the tops of multi-height islands. This is not supported for
the original Spiral and Zigzag stepover toolpaths.
Pre-drill diameter — Enter the diameter for pre-drill holes. Ensure the
diameter is large enough to allow the milling tool to enter the stock.
Roughing
Rough pass — Enable this option to add a Rough operation to the
feature.
Stepover — Select the Stepover type for the roughing operations.
Traditional toolpaths
 Spiral — This toolpath type is based on a series of offset curves.

For a Boss feature, the curves of the Boss are offset and then
clipped against the shape of the stock. When using a square piece
of stock the toolpaths tend to cut the four corners first, and then
work their way inward. You can alter the extent of the toolpaths by
using a stock curve of total stock.
For a Pocket feature, the boundary of the Pocket is offset and the
toolpaths are cut starting from the center of the pocket. The shape
of the stock does not affect the toolpaths.
 Zigzag — This toolpath type uses straight toolpaths that are

parallel to each other.

For a Boss feature, the toolpaths are laid in parallel lines across the
stock and clipped against the boundaries of the Boss.
The starting point is one of the four corners of the stock. You can
change the angle of the toolpaths, but the neighboring toolpaths are
always parallel.
For a Pocket feature, the parallel toolpaths are laid inside the Pocket
boundary.
After the parallel paths, a clean-up pass is then performed around

the boundaries of Bosses, Pockets, and Pocket islands.

The Zigzag roughing pass has two phases, the parallel roughing
phase and the boundary clean-up phase. The clean-up phase,
marked , cleans up the boundaries of the feature to ensure a
uniform finish allowance:
The tree view for the feature only shows a single feature, so the
clean-up phase uses the same feed and speed values as the
roughing pass. The number of clean-up passes is determined by the
Cleanup passes (see page 1161) attribute. If Cleanup passes is set
to 0, the clean-up pass is not performed. If set to 1, a single pass is
performed along the boundaries of the roughing region:
- Roughing region
- Finish allowance
The roughing region is determined by offsetting the boundaries of

the feature by the Finish allowance.
If set to a number larger than 1, multiple clean-up passes are
performed. The default spacing of these passes is controlled by the
Cleanup stepover (see page 1161) attribute. To more finely control
the spacing of multiple clean-up passes, set the Cleanup stepover
attribute.
The ramping onto the clean-up pass is controlled by the Ramp
diameter (see page 985) attribute.

The direction of the Zigzag path is controlled by the relationship
between the Zigzag angle (see page 994) and the Climb mill (see
page 936) attributes.
The table shows the relationship between the zigzag angle and the
Climb mill setting. The image in the Path column indicates the
direction, the start point, and the sequencing of the toolpaths.
For example, indicates toolpaths that are parallel to the X

axis. The start point is the lower left and the paths are sequenced
from the bottom to the top. In the images, the X axis of the Setup
is the horizontal axis, and the Y-axis is the vertical axis.
Zigza Climb Path Zigza Climb Path
g Mill g Mill
Angle Angle
0 No 180 Yes
0 Yes 180 No
90 Yes -90 No
90 No -90 Yes
If the Bi-directional cut (see page 936) or the Reorder (see page
1607, see page 1660) attribute is selected, the toolpath is
reordered so that it completes one region before moving on to the
next.
For example, with this Boss feature the toolpaths finish the region
on the right of the Boss before moving on to the region on the left
side.

If Bi-directional cut and Reorder are deselected, the toolpaths move
across the part without any reordering.
When roughing a Boss with the Zigzag method, the amount that the
tool overlaps the stock boundary is controlled by the Finish
allowance (see page 994).
The Zigzag technique applies to a finishing pass only if the bottom
of the feature is being finished. In this case, it behaves just like a
single roughing pass.
NT (New Technology) toolpaths
 NT Spiral (see page 723) — This toolpath is similar to the
traditional Spiral toolpath, but can use stepovers larger than
50%.
 NT Zigzag — This toolpath is similar to the traditional Zigzag
toolpath, but uses an angle that is calculated automatically, to
cut the longest toolpaths.
 NT Continuous Spiral — This toolpath is similar to the traditional
Spiral toolpath, but eliminates nearly all stepovers.
 Vortex (see page 725) (REC/3D MX (see page 10)) — An offset
toolpath, which is machined at the specified cutting feed rate
almost all of the time. The optimum tool engagement angle is
never exceeded, by replacing difficult toolpath segments with
trochoids. This works well for solid carbide tools.

Set the default type in Machining Attributes on the Stepover tab
using the Stepover Options button.
Click the Stepover Options button to open the Rough Stepover

Options dialog:
The NT toolpaths are available in the Stepover menu along with the
traditional Spiral and Zigzag toolpaths.

At feature level, you can override the default Stepover type in the
menu on the Strategy tab of the feature's Properties dialog.

You can override this at operation level on the Stepovers tab. If you
are using Individual rough levels, you can set the Cut type for each
individual rough pass.
Regardless of the roughing method selected, the feature is roughed

to within the Finish allowance (see page 1161) of the boundary.
There are some key differences between Traditional and NT
toolpaths (see page 727).
Bi-directional rough — Select this option to machine the feature in
both directions.
Enable this option to mill in both directions. If disabled,
conventional roughing happens and the cutting path moves in one
direction with rapid, above-stock return movements to set up for
the next pass. Climb mill controls the cutting direction.
Rough cutter comp — Select this option to use cutter compensation
for the rough operations.
FeatureCAM.

each feature.
is output at all.
Finishing
Finish pass — Enable this option to add a finish operation to the
feature.
Finish bottom — Select this option to use a flat endmill to finish the
bottom of the feature. When this is selected, use the Bottom finish
allowance on the Milling tab to specify the amount of material to
leave after the roughing pass.
By default, the bottom of a feature is not machined during the
Finish pass. Enable this option to finish the bottom of the feature
with a flat endmill, up to the Bottom Radius, if the feature has one.
You can enter a positive or negative value.
Stepover — Select the stepover type for the finish passes.



always parallel.
boundary.


- Roughing region
- Finish allowance

attribute.


g Mill g Mill
Angle Angle
0 No 180 Yes
0 Yes 180 No
90 Yes -90 No
90 No -90 Yes
next.
side.

50%.


Options dialog:



Wall pass — Enable this option to finish the bottom of the feature up
to the Finish allowance on the wall, then finish the walls in a
separate pass.
NT toolpaths — Select this option to use NT toolpaths for the Finish
pass.
There are several types of NT (New Technology) toolpath:
50%.

Semi-finish pass — Enable this option to add a Semi-Finish operation
to the feature.
Enable this option to add a Semi-finish (see page 969) operation to
the feature.
Use finish tool — Select this option to create a separate tool for the
finish operation.
If disabled, the same tool is used for both the Rough and Finish
passes. Enable Use finish tool to create a new tool for finishing. This
finishing tool is identical to the tool that was selected for roughing.
The name of the new tool is appended with -finish. For example if
the roughing tool is named endmill1.0, the finishing tool is called
endmill1.0-finish. This finishing tool is not permanently assigned to a
tool crib, it is a temporary tool for use in the current document only.
If you want to use different types of tools for roughing and

finishing, like different length tools or tools with a different
number of flutes, disable Use finish tool and explicitly change
the tool to use for finishing.
Ramp from top — Select this option to ramp the tool to the cutting
depth from the top of the feature.
Disable this option to avoid ramping to depth on the Finish and
Semi-finish pass of a 2.5D feature. This saves machining time.
This example shows the Finish operation for a Side feature.
Ramp from top on: Ramp from top off:
You must deselect the NT toolpaths option to access this

option.
Helical side finish — Enable this option to use a continuous spiral for
the Finish pass. Enter a Pitch to control the tightness of the spiral.

This option enables a small depth of cut and a continuous toolpath.
It also avoids marks on the feature, which stepping down in Z
depths may cause.

option.
Wind Fan — Click this button to open the Wind Fan Finish Options
Face features
Connect stepovers with arc — Select this option to use an arc to
connect stepovers to prevent sharp direction changes.
When cutting Face features, you can optionally select Connect
stepovers with arc.
This example shows a Face feature with Connect stepovers with arc
selected:

Compare this to the example with Connect stepovers with arc
deselected (the default setting):
Thread mill features

Feed Dir — Select from Negative Z or Positive Z. The direction
depends on the handedness of the tool, the thread, and whether it
is an OD or ID thread.
Simple Groove features (Engraving)

Reverse cut — Select this option to reverse the direction that the
feature is cut. Engraving features are cut in a single pass.
New Feature - Strategies page (Drilling)


the Strategy tab (see page 889) of the Feature Properties dialog.
Combine with similar holes into canned cycle (see page 891) — By
default, a tool retracts to the Z rapid plane between operations.
Enable this option and then select whether to Retract to the Z rapid
plane or the lower Plunge clearance plane after drilling each hole.
This option also creates more efficient NC code by entering the
canned cycle mode only once.
Machining Type — Select from:
 Drill only — All Hole features are drilled in the traditional way
using a drill that is the same size as the hole diameter.
 Drill/Mill — This option allows Hole features to be drilled or milled,
to minimize the number of tools needed.
When using Drill/Mill, FeatureCAM adds a rough operation to

the tree view and you can access the Stepovers (see page
985) and Milling (see page 1161) tabs.
Click Drill/Mill Options to display the Drill/Mill Options dialog
(see page 895), where you can edit drill/mill parameters.
You can set the default value of this attribute for the
current document in the Machining Attributes (see page
1591) dialog. Set it on the Drilling (see page 1598, see
page 889) tab.
Spot Drill — Enable this option to add a spot drill operation to the
Hole feature.
This operation has some wide-ranging effects, however, especially
when used with the Attempt chamfer w/ spot and tool optimization.
Of those three settings, tool optimization has the highest priority
and its decisions override settings with a lower priority.
For example, a spot drill operation could be performed with either a
spot drill or a center drill. Spot drills with a tip angle of 90 can also
perform a chamfering operation. You specify a specific tool to cut
the hole's chamfer and also turn on Attempt Chamfer /w Spot and
tool optimization. If there is an appropriate spot drill in the tool crib,
FeatureCAM optimizes things and use this tool in spite of your lower
priority override. Even though you selected a specific tool, your
other settings conflicted with and superseded your choice.
This is the advantage of the optimization and simulation functions in
FeatureCAM. As you work through the optimization settings, and
see where you can optimize automatically and where you cannot,
you can find ways to group your parts for faster production, but still
use specific tools for specific effects when needed.

You can set the default value of this attribute for the current
document in the Machining Attributes (see page 1591) dialog.
See the Drilling (see page 1598, see page 889) tab.
Attempt chamfer w/ spot — Enable this option to try to cut the
chamfer during spot drilling. If no available tool can spot and
chamfer without gouging the hole, a separate chamfer operation is
created.
Pilot Drill — Enable this option to add a pilot drill operation to the
Hole feature.
Pilot drill diameter(s) — This enables and sets a list of drill sizes used
to drill pilot holes. Enter a list of drill diameters to use for pilot
drilling, with a comma between each.
For example, enter 0.5, 1, 1.5 in inches, to pilot drill with the half inch
drill for final hole sizes up to an inch. A hole bigger than 1.5 inches
is pilot drilled with all three of the specified drills before being drilled
to size.
Drill — Enable this option to add a drilling operation to the

manufacture of the hole. This operation is usually undersized in
preparation for later reaming or boring.
Drill large counterdrill first — For Counter Drill holes, select this
option to do the counterdrill operation before the drill operation.
Ream — Enable this option to add a Ream operation to the Hole
feature. This option drills a Hole undersized and then reams it to
size. The diameter of the drill is between 93% and 97% of the final
Hole diameter.
Ream before chamfer — Enable this option to do the Ream operation
before the Chamfer operation. This avoids pushing any kind of burr
or edge back up onto the chamfer if the chamfer is a sealing
surface.
Tap type — This option is available for Tapped Hole features. Select
the type of tap from:
 Cutting — The tool cuts the threads into the material.
 Rolled — The tool presses or forms the threads into the material.
 Helicoil — The size of the Drill and Tap operations are larger to fit
the helicoil insert.
Bore — Enable this option to add a Bore operation to the Hole
feature. Boring places a hole very accurately.
The options on this tab are the same as the options on New Feature -
Strategies page for a Hole feature in the New Feature wizard.

New Feature - Strategies page (Thread Milling)
specify the machining strategy for the Thread Milling feature.
Cutter comp — Select this option to enable cutter compensation.
FeatureCAM.
each feature.

is output at all.
Partline prog — Select this option to create the toolpath from the
drawing dimensions of the feature instead of the center line of the
tool.
Feed direction — Select the direction in which you want to machine
the feature. Depending on the direction the tool is rotating, this
determines whether climb milling or conventional milling is used.
 Negative Z — Start with the tool at the top of the feature (at the
highest Z location) and machine downwards.
 Positive Z — Start with the tool at the bottom of the feature (at
the lowest Z location) and machine upwards.

Rough pass — Select this option to include a Rough operation in the
feature.
Finish pass — Select this option to add a Finish operation to the
feature.
Use finish tool — Deselect this option to use the same tool for the
Rough and Finish passes.
Spring passes — Enter the number of spring passes to include in the
finish pass. A spring pass is a duplicate of the final threading pass.
New Feature - Operations page (MILL, TURN)

This page contains a summary of the operations that are created to
manufacture the feature, the names of the tools that have been
automatically selected, and the feed and speed values that were
calculated automatically. Each row of the table represents an
operation.
1 If you are familiar with the tooling names and satisfied with the
selected tooling and feeds and speeds, click Finish (see page
531).
2 If you want to take a closer look at the tooling or feeds and
speeds, click Next to display the New Feature - Default Tool (see
page 564) page.
New Feature - Default Tool page (MILL)

This page displays details on the automatically selected tool. The
image shows a preview of the tool. If your display is set to more
than 256 colors this diagram is shaded. Otherwise, it is shown as a
line drawing. To the right of the image, you can see the Tool
Parameters.
1 If you want to use the tool displayed in the dialog, select Use the
default tool, then click Next to display the Feed/Speed (see page
567) page.
2 If you want to select a different tool, select Search for another tool
or make a new one and click Next to display the New Feature - Tool
Search (see page 565) page.

New Feature - Tool search (MILL)
You can use the New Feature - Tool Search page of the New Feature
wizard to specify the tool to machine a feature.
To display this page, select Search for another tool or make a new one
on the New Feature - Default Tool (see page 564) page and click Next.
The table lists the default recommended tool (marked with a D) and
other tools in the current tool crib that fit the tool selection criteria.
If you do not want to use the recommended tool, select the check
box next to the tool name you want in the table. The tools that are
listed in the table are controlled by the filter settings.
The tools displayed in the table are chosen from the database based
on the criteria listed above the table. If you would like to choose
from different tools, change the filter criteria. The criteria are:
 Tool Group — The tooling in the tooling database is separated
into different groups. Select a group from the list or select
Anything to show tooling from all groups.
 Diameter — Enter a specific diameter or select Anything to see
tools of all diameters.
 End radius — Enter a specific end radius or select Anything to see
tools of all radii.
Regardless of the filtering criteria, the automatically selected tool
stays in the list.
Select a tool in the table to see the preview image in the upper
right-hand corner of the dialog. You can pan and zoom this display
by left-clicking and dragging the mouse cursor in the tool graphic
window. Right-click in the tool graphic window and select Center all
to center the entire tool and holder.

You can sort the tools listed in the table by any column by clicking
the title of the column.
You can adjust the column widths by clicking and dragging

the borders of the column titles. FeatureCAM remembers your
width preferences.
Undo tool override — Click this button to revert the selected tool
back to the default recommended tool (marked with a D).
New tool — Click this button to create a brand new tool and add
it to the current crib. The tool that is selected in the table is used to
fill in the initial values for the tool.
Tool manager — Click this button to open the Tool Manager (see
page 1745) dialog.
Properties — Click this button to open the Tool Properties (see
page 1749, see page 1795) dialog for the selected tool.
Recent tools — Select this option to filter the list and show only
recently used tools.
To override the automatically selected tool to one of your choice:
1 Select the Tool Group.
2 Select or enter the tool Diameter.
3 Select or enter the tool's End-Radius.
4 Optionally select the Recent tools option to filter your tool search
further.
5 Scroll through the table.
6 To preview a tool:
 Select a tool in the table to view it in the small graphics
window. You can pan and zoom this view.
 Select a tool in the table and click the Properties button or
double-click a tool in the table to open its Tool Properties (see
page 1749) dialog. You can edit the tool's properties if you
want to.
7 To change the tool, select the check box next to the Name of the
tool you want to use in the table.
8 If you canot find the tool you want, click the New tool button
and create a new tool (see page 1749).
To revert back to the automatically selected tool, click the Undo tool
override button. The override tool is deselected in the table and
FeatureCAM uses the default tool marked D.

New Feature - Feed/Speed page (MILL)
This page shows you the automatically calculated feed and speed
values.
1 If you are satisfied with the feed and speed settings, click Next.
2 If you want to change the values, enter new values.
If you enter new values, the override option is selected
automatically. To return to the automatically calculated feeds
and speeds, deselect override.
You can change the Speed units from RPM to SFM by

selecting the Use SFM option, and you can change the Feed
units from IPM to IPR by selecting the Use IPR option.
3 Click Next.
New feature - Coolant page

Use this page to specify the coolant types you want to use for the
operation.
Select the coolant types you want to enable for the operation. The
available coolant types are specified in the CNC file.
Deselect Override to use the default coolant types set in the Coolant
tab in the Tool Properties dialog and the Machining Attributes dialog.
New Feature - Summary

This is the final page of the New Feature wizard. A table is displayed
showing a list of the operations for the feature. The name of the
tool and the feed and speed values are listed for each operation.
1 If you are satisfied with the tooling and feed and speed values,
click Finish (see page 531) and the feature is created.
2 If you want to make changes, click the Back button until you
come to the wizard page you want to alter.

New Feature - Feature Extraction page (IFR) (MILL)
Use the Feature Extraction page of the New Feature wizard to select
the method you want to use to recognize features from a solid
model.
Select a method of recognizing features:

 Select side surfaces — Select the surfaces that represent the
sides of the feature, such as the walls of a pocket.
 Use horizontal surface — Select a horizontal surface that
represents the shape of the feature, such as the bottom of a
pocket or the top of a boss.
 Automatic recognition — Automatically recognize features.
To create all recognition features at the same height, select
Force same Z height and enter an Elevation to specify the height
at which you want to create the features.
 Chain feature curves — Pick curves from a solid to define the
shape of the feature.
Enter a Wall Angle to angle the walls of the feature.
Enter an Elevation to create the feature at a different height to
the curves you select.
 Use horizontal section — Create features from a Z-slice through a
solid.
Enter the Elevation at which you want to create the features.
The image on the right of the dialog displays an example of the
selected recognition method.

New Feature - Feature Alignment page
Use the Feature Alignment page of the New Feature wizard to select
the alignment on which you want to recognize features in turn/mill
parts.
Select the alignment:
 Along the setup Z-axis — select this option to recognize features
aligned with the setup Z axis. For round stock this enables you to
machine the end faces of the part.
 Around the index axis — select this option to recognize features
aligned radially around the index axis. For round stock this
enables you to machine the OD face of the part.
If you are aligning the feature around the index axis, specify the
angle:
 Automatic — Select this option to use Automatic Feature
Recognition to recognize features at all angles. This is available
only for Hole features.
 Specify angles — enter the Index Angle and B Angle of the
feature, or click the blue Index Angle label and pick two points in
the graphics window that represent the direction of the feature's
Z axis.
 Normal to surface — click Pick surface and select a surface in

the graphics window to align the feature perpendicular to it. If
you selected the back of the surface, select Reverse direction to
reverse the direction of the alignment.
New Feature - Surfaces page (IFR)

Use the Surfaces page of the New Feature wizard to select surfaces
that define the shape of the feature.
Add surfaces you want to machine to the list using the buttons:
 Add from selected items — Select surfaces in the graphics
window and click this button to add them to the list.
 Delete from selected items — Select surfaces in the list and
click this button to remove them.
 Pick Surface — Click this button to hide the dialog and select
a surface in the graphics window.
Hide surfaces when finish — Select this option to hide surfaces used
to create the feature when you finish the wizard.
Preview — Display a preview of the feature in blue in the graphics
window.

New Feature - Location page (IFR)
Use the Location page of the New Feature wizard to specify the
vertical location of a recognized feature.
Enter the Top and Bottom Z heights of the feature, or use the Pick Z
location button to pick the locations in the graphics window.
Click Preview to display a preview of the feature in blue in the
graphics window.
New Feature - Feature Recognition Options page (IFR)

Use the Feature Recognition Options page of the New Feature wizard
to specify the options for automatically recognizing features from
solids.
To use the Feature Recognition Options page:
1 Specify the options for automatically recognizing features. The
options are different depending on the feature type.
Boss, Pocket and Side features
The dialog contains these options for Boss, Pocket and Side
features:
 Exclude features smaller than — Features whose maximum
dimension is smaller than the distance you specify are not
created. For example, you can use this to ignore blind holes
that you would rather drill.

 Merge features of the same height into a single feature — Select
this option to create one feature with multiple boundary
curves, or deselect it to create separate features.
 Add all new features into a group if there is more than one —
Select this option to create a group (see page 869) of
features, or deselect it to create individual features.
Chamfer features
The dialog contains these options for Chamfer features:
 Add all new features into a group — Select this option to create
a group (see page 869) of features, or deselect it to create
individual features.
 Create chamfers (deburr) with width — Enter the width of the
chamfers you want to create.
 Exclude chamfer if curve is a single, closed circle — Select this
option if the model contains small holes that you do not want
to chamfer. Enter the minimum size of hole on which you
want to create a chamfer.
 Largest tool diameter — Surfaces within this distance of the
Chamfer feature are selected as check surfaces to ensure they
are not gouged when machining the Chamfer. Use this option
to prevent including unnecessary check surfaces in the feature
that would not be affected, it does not affect tool selection.
Recognized features are shown in blue in the graphics window.
2 Select the features you want to create in the graphics window, or
use the Select All and Unselect All buttons if there are multiple
features.
Selected features are shown in orange in the graphics window.
3 Click Finish to create the selected features and close the wizard.
New Feature - Chaining page (IFR)

Use the Chaining page of the New Feature wizard to pick curves from
solid models to define the shape of a feature.
To create curves:
1 Use the chaining edit bar to select the chaining (see page 319)
type.
2 Click on curves, geometry segments or solids in the graphics
window to create curves.
3 Optionally click Switch to Top View to change the view to make it
easier to create curves.
4 Click Create in the chaining edit bar to create the curve.

5 Repeat the previous steps to create multiple curves.
6 When finished, click Next.
New Feature - Horizontal Section page (IFR)

Use the Horizontal Section page of the New Feature wizard to specify
a Z-slice through a solid. You can create curves within the Z-slice
and use them to create features.
Part solid — Select the solid from which you want to recognize
features.
Slice location — Specify the height at which you want to take a Z
slice.
To use a Z slice at the edge of a solid, such as on the surface,

you must enable the Use edge-based FR option in the AFR
Preview — Display a preview of the curves in blue in the graphics
window.

New Feature wizard (TURN)
The first page of the New Feature wizard for turning contains a list of
possible features, divided into sections:
From Dimensions lists features that are created from numeric
dimensions. Select a feature type and click Next to open the New
Feature - Dimensions (see page 573) page.
From Curve lists features that are created from curves and possibly
some additional dimensions. Select a feature type and click Next to
open the New Feature - Curve (see page 574) page.
The third section contains these other features:
 Part Handling (see page 848)
 User (see page 857)
 Toolpath (see page 633)
 Sub-spindle (see page 846)
 Misc (see page 854)
New Feature - Dimensions page (TURN)

If you are creating a From Dimensions turn feature, the second page
of the wizard is the New Feature - Dimensions page. The page is
different for each of the From Dimensions feature types. See the
specific feature topics for how to complete this page:
Hole (see page 805)
Groove (see page 810)
Thread (see page 818)
Face (see page 824)

Cutoff (see page 826)
Bar Feed (see page 829)/Bar Pull (see page 830)
New Feature - Curve (TURN)

If you are creating a From Curve feature, the second page of the
wizard is the New Feature - Curves page.
This page is where you specify the curve that dictates the shape of
your feature. This page is the same for all From Curve turn feature
types.
2 Select the curve you want to base your feature on in the Curve
list, or click the Pick curve button to pick the curve in the
Graphics window.
The curve is highlighted in red in the Graphics window.
page.
New Feature - Location (TURN)

The default shape and location of the feature are determined by the
feature's curve and the curve's position.
1 If you want to create the feature in the same location as the
curve, click Next.
2 If you want to change the top of the feature, enter a value for
Offset from curve Z location. This can be a positive or negative
number.

3 Click Next.
New Feature - Strategies page (TURN)

Below centerline — Enable this option to make the tool work on the
negative X side of the spindle centerline.
Use canned cycle
Enable this option to perform the feature's operations using canned
cycles. You must use a post that has support for roughing and
finishing canned cycles.
For support of canned cycles in Fanuc controllers, use the

fanucez.cnc post.
Canned cycles can be generated in the NC code for nearly every
turned feature. To generate these macros, your post processor
must support them, and you must turn this function on for the post
and for some features you must also activate the canned cycles at
feature level.

Hole features
If Enable drilled canned cycles is deselected in the Post options
dialog, then all hole drilling operations are computed in the post.
This includes spotdrilling, drilling, bore, ream, and tapping
operations. If Enable drilled canned cycles is selected, then canned
cycles will be output if the post you are using has g-codes defined
for the hole canned cycles. If the post does not have these G-codes
defined, the hole operations will still be computed.
There is no way to control the output of canned cycles on an
individual feature basis.
Turn/Bore features
Canned cycles for Turn and Bore features must be enabled by
selecting Enable turn canned cycles in the Post options dialog. You
must then go to the Properties dialog for each Turn/Bore feature,
click the Strategy tab and select Use canned cycle. Also select Reuse
path in canned cycle if you want to output the path geometry only
once for both roughing and finishing. You can also set these values
in the default attributes, but these values will only apply to features
you create after making this change.
Groove features
Enable grooving canned cycles in the Post options dialog by
selecting Enable groove path canned cycle. Then turn on canned
cycles for each groove by bringing up the feature's Property dialog,
clicking the Strategy tab, and then clicking Use path canned cycle.
You can also set this attribute on the Groove tab of the default
attributes, but this will only apply to features you create after
changing this setting.
Thread features
Thread features always use canned cycles.
1591) dialog. See the Turn/bore (see page 1689) tab.
Reuse path in canned cycle — Relates to Use canned cycle. Enable
this option to output the curve to the NC file once and then
reference it in both the Rough and Finish canned cycles. This option
is enabled by default.
Cycle — Select from:

 Turn/Bore — This cycle roughs within the defined material
boundaries by feeding parallel to the part's center line along the
Z axis while stepping down in the X axis. If you select Negative,
the tool moves from right to left. If you select Positive, the tool
moves from left to right. If the Total stock (see page 1445)
attribute is set, then the part is roughed using curves that are
offset from the feature's profile.
Turn cycle rough operation with Positive feed direction:
Turn cycle rough operation with Negative feed direction:

 Face — This cycle roughs within the defined material boundaries
by feeding from the outside of the part to the center while
stepping into the face of the part along the Z axis in the negative
direction.
 Back face — This cycle roughs within the defined material

boundaries by feeding from the outside of the part to the center
while stepping into the face of the part along the Z axis in the
positive direction.
Toolpath — Select from:

Turning — Normal roughing passes are enabled. Each roughing pass
is cut in the same direction. For finishing, the tool traces the
contour of the feature from right to left and is withdrawn from the
part.
Roughing
If the Toolpath attribute is set to Turning, the normal roughing
passes are enabled. Each roughing pass is cut in the same direction.

Feed straight down into the part. The distance is based on the
depth of cut.
Cut down the right-hand wall.
Feed straight across.
Feed up the left-hand wall.
Withdraw from the wall, retract all the way across the feature.
Finishing
If the Toolpath attribute is set to Turning, the toolpath is generated
as shown below.
The tool traces the contour of the feature from right-to left.
The tool is withdrawn from the part based on withdraw angle
and withdraw length.
Offset — Roughing toolpaths are created using offsets of the Turn
feature's curve. These offsets are clipped against the stock.
For the offset toolpath type, the roughing toolpaths are created
using offsets of the Turn feature's curve. These offsets are clipped
against the stock.

Cut-Grip — Roughing with Iscar cut grip tools is bi-directional. The
cut grip finishing style is performed using a unique strategy that is
enabled by having a grooving tool that cuts in both directions.
Roughing
Roughing with Iscar cut grip tools is bi-directional. The steps of the
cuts are as follows.
Feed straight down into the part. The distance is based on the depth
of cut.
Feed straight over in Z.
Withdraw away from the wall and rapid back slightly in Z.
Feed straight down again based on the depth of cut.
Feed straight in the -Z direction.
Finishing
The cut grip style of finishing is performed using a unique strategy
that is enabled by having a grooving tool that cuts in both
directions.
Cut down the left hand wall up to the bottom radius.

Rapid up and over and plunge a relief groove.
Cut down the right-hand wall, through the bottom radius into the
relief groove.
Cut along the bottom of the groove. This move is offset by a
deflection amount.
Cut up the left-hand bottom radius. This move is offset by a
deflection amount.

If the Turn feature has multiple groove cavities, each cavity is cut in
this way and the cavities are ordered from left to right:
Round Insert — Round tool roughing toolpaths are designed to ease

the tool more gently into a groove shape.
Round tool roughing toolpaths are designed to ease the tool more
gently into a groove shape. Instead of plunging straight into the
material, part entry is controlled by the Engage angle (see page
1416) turning attribute.
A round tool is required and you must manually select the tool
for this toolpath type.
Engage angle
Round insert tool finish toolpaths are the same as Turning

finish toolpaths.
Turnmilling — Uses a rotating endmill tool with rotating stock.

Control the turning spindle speed on the Turn F/S tab. Control the
milling spindle speed on the Mill Speed tab.
feature.
Semi-finish pass — Enable this option to add a Semi-finish (see page
969) operation to the feature.

Finish pass — Enable this option to add a Finish operation to the
feature.
When this option is deselected, the rough pass is still machined as if
the finish pass were included. The Finish allowance is left on the
roughing pass, and the Bottom finish allowance is left on the
roughing pass when Finish bottom is selected, even though the
check box is unavailable.
Conventional — The feed moves in the +X direction, followed by
the -Z direction, and so on, until it reaches the end of the stair
step.
No drag — Using the Conventional finish type can reduce the tool
life and also result in chips being dragged along the face of the
part. Select the No drag finish, to cut the vertical faces first, in
the -X direction, then the horizontal -Z areas.
Feed dir — This is the direction that the tool feeds for the operation.
Select Negative (-Z direction) or Positive (+Z direction). Set this
separately for the Rough, Semi-finish, and Finish operations.
Use finish tool

TNR Comp
Enable this option to ignore the tool radius when generating passes
for Turn, Bore, and Face features. The actual part geometry is
output as the toolpath. It is assumed that the tool radius
compensation will be performed by the operator at the machine tool
when this option is enabled.
Select whether you want TNR comp for Rough, Semi-Finish, and
Finish operations. Enter the Lead-in angle, Lead-out angle, and Lead
distance parameters for TNR comp.
Turn feature example Lead-in
angle
Lead-out
angle
Lead
distance
If you select TNR comp on the Strategy tab, the related attributes
Lead distance, Lead-in angle, and Lead-out angle become available on
the Turning (see page 1420) tab (for a rough pass) or the Leads
(see page 1416) tab (for a finish pass).
See the Turn/Bore (see page 1689) tab.

New Feature - Strategies page (Bore)
Use canned cycle

fanucez.cnc post.
feature level.

Hole features
Turn/Bore features
Groove features
Thread features


direction.

positive direction.

 Turning
 Offset
 Turnmilling
 Cut-Grip
 Round Insert
Pre-drill — Select this option to have a pre-drill operation for a Bore
feature. Enter the Dia (diameter), Depth, and Z position of your
pre-drilled hole.
feature.

feature.
step.
Use finish tool

Tool nose radius compensation
angle
Lead-out
angle
Lead
distance

New Feature - Strategies page (Groove)
feature.
Plunge center first — This attribute is available for Groove features.
Plunge center first — For groove features, if this option is selected,
the straight portion of the groove is roughed first and then the
angled portions are roughed separately. If Plunge center first is set,
the red region of this image is roughed first and then the yellow
regions are roughed.
See the Grooving (see page 1702) tab.
Output dwell on rough — Select this option to have a Dwell amount
on the rough operation of a Groove feature.

feature.
Use finish tool

New Feature - Strategies page (Thread)


Turn to diameter
Optionally create a rough and/or finish pass to turn the part down
to the diameter of the thread. The creation of these operations is
controlled by the Turn to diameter: Rough and Finish options on the
Strategy page. See How a turn feature is manufactured (see page
833) for more details.
Chamfer — Enable the Chamfer option to add a chamfer to your
Thread feature.
The chamfer slopes into the thread for OD threads (turn) and away
from the thread for ID threads (bore).
You must select either Rough or Finish to access the

Chamfer option.
1591) dialog. Set it on the Threading (see page 1699) tab.
Relief Groove
Optionally generate a roughing (see page 814) pass for the relief
groove. The Width controls the Z-axis dimension, the Depth controls
the X-axis dimension and the Side Wall Angle controls the angle of
the wall closest to the thread.
Thread — Enable this option to have a thread operation on the
feature.
Feed — This is the direction of the feed moves, select from:
 Towards chuck — the threading is performed in the direction
toward the chuck.
 Away from chuck — the threading is performed in the direction
away from the chuck.
Passes — This is the number of steps to the bottom of the thread.
Select either Fixed or Calculated.
Fixed — refers to a fixed rate of material removal. As the tool
cuts further into the part, the area of contact of the tool
increases. FeatureCAM reduces the infeed on each pass so that
the tool loading remains constant. Enter the number of passes in
Count.
Calculated — the number of steps is calculated automatically by
FeatureCAM.
Step1 is used to specify the incremental step for the first pass
across the thread.

Step2 specifies the second pass and is used by the system to
determine subsequent passes on the thread, reducing in
depth until the Min Infeed value is reached.
Spring passes — A spring pass is a duplicate of the final threading
pass. Enter the number of Spring passes that you want.
New Feature - Strategies page (Face)

Use canned cycle

fanucez.cnc post.
feature level.

Hole features
Turn/Bore features
Groove features
Thread features
feature.
feature.

Use finish tool

angle
Lead-out
angle
Lead
distance

New Feature - Strategies page (Cutoff)
Part catcher — If enabled, the part catcher code is output after the
Cutoff operation. The code for activating the parts catcher must be
listed in your .cnc file.
Plunge rough edge break — If there is a chamfer or radius on a
Cutoff feature and Plunge rough edge break is enabled:
1 The Cutoff groove is plunged down to the depth of the
chamfer/radius
2 The chamfer/radius is plunge-roughed.
New Feature - Strategies page (Part Handling)


Slug transfer
Part catcher — Enable this option if you want to instigate the part
catcher.
Already Supported — Enable this option to indicate that the part is
already supported.
Push/Press — If you enable this option, the subspindle feeds slowly
until it touches the part, then grabs it at the Grab distance.
Open dwell — Optionally enter the time, in seconds, to dwell after
opening the spindle.
Close dwell — Optionally enter the time, in seconds, to dwell after
closing the spindle.
Spindle Action — Select what you want the main and sub-spindles to
do during synchronization:
 Stop spindles
 Orient spindles
 Keep rotating
Main Angle — Enter the angle that you want the main spindle to
rotate to before the part is collected.
Sub Angle — Enter the angle that you want the sub-spindle to rotate
to before it moves to collect the part.
Spindle Speed — Enter the spindle speed.
Sub-spindle feed rate — Enter the subspindle feed rate.

Transfer turret — If your machine has multiple turrets, select the
correct transfer turret.
Turret control — Click the button to open the Transfer Turret Control
Reverse slug transfer
catcher.
Leave Supported — Enable this option if you want to keep the part
supported.
 Stop spindles
 Orient spindles
 Keep rotating

Bar pull

already supported.
supported.
catcher.

 Stop spindles
 Orient spindles
 Keep rotating
Part support on
Support type — Select the type of support from:

 Subspindle
 Tailstock
 Steadyrest

Jaws Only — For steady rests, select this option to operate the jaws
without moving the steady rest.
 Stop spindles
 Orient spindles
 Keep rotating

Part support off

 Subspindle
 Tailstock
 Steadyrest
Open dwell — Optionally enter a dwell time after opening the
spindle.

New Feature - Strategies page (Air blast)
specify the strategy for the Air Blast feature.
the Strategy tab of the Feature Properties dialog.
New Feature - Default Tool page (TURN)

This page displays details on the automatically selected tool. The
image shows a preview of the tool. If your display is set to more
than 256 colors this diagram is shaded. Otherwise, it is shown as a
line drawing. To the right of the image, you can see the Tool
Parameters.
1 If you are satisfied with this tool, select I want to use the default
tool and click Next to open the Feed/Speed (see page 606) page.
2 If you want to change tooling, select I want to search for another
tool or make a new one and click Next to open the New Feature -
Tool Search (see page 604) page.

New Feature - Tool Search page (TURN)
You see the New Feature - Tool Search page of the wizard only if you
select I want to search for another tool or make a new one on the New
Feature - Default Tool page.
Other tools can be selected from the table by selecting the
check-box next to the tool name. The tools that are listed in the
table are controlled by the filter settings.
on the criteria listed above the table. To choose from different tools,
change the filter criteria. The criteria are:
 Orientation — Select an orientation from among the icons. Select
Anything to see tools of all orientations.
 Insert shape — Select an insert shape from among the icons.
Select Anything to see tools with all insert shapes.
 Presentation angle — Enter a number for the presentation. Select
Anything to see tools with all presentation angles.
stays in the list.

width preferences.
page 1745) dialog.
Turnmilling tool orientation button — available when you select
Turnmilling as the turn Toolpath type on the Strategy (see page
1366) tab. Click this button to open the B-Axis Tool Orientation (see
page 1403) dialog.
1 Select the Orientation.
2 Select or enter the tool Insert Shape.
3 Select or enter the tool's Presentation Angle.
further.
double-click a tool in the table to open its Tool Properties
dialog. You can edit the tool's properties if you want to.
8 If you cannot find the tool you want, click the New tool
button and create a new tool (see page 1749).

New Feature - Feed/Speed page (TURN)

This page allows you to review and change the automatically
calculated feeds and speeds.
1 If you are satisfied with the feed and speed values, click Next.
2 If you want to change the speed:
 Select Constant Surface Speed and enter the Surface Speed.
 Optionally specify the CSS Maximum RPM. This is the
maximum revolutions per minute that the machine can
generate.
 Optionally specify the CSS Approach RPM. This is the initial
speed for the operation while still off the part.
3 If you want to enter the speed as a single revolution per minute
value:
 Deselect Constant Surface Speed and enter the Spindle Speed.
4 If your machine has explicit spindle speed ranges, you may want
to set the RPM Range.
Some turning centers have gear boxes that set the maximum
spindle speed of the machine. The RPM Range list sets the gear box
to a specific maximum range. If you set RPM Range to a value of
1-4, then the range is set explicitly. If RPM Range is set to Auto then
FeatureCAM sets the range for you based on the following rules:
1 If the feature is a turned Hole or another turned feature without
Constant Surface Speed set, then the range is determined based
on the Spindle Speed.
2 If the feature is a turned feature with Constant Surface Speed set,
then the range is determined based on the Max RPM.
3 If you want to change the feed:
 If you want to specify the speed as feed per revolution, select
IPR and enter the Feed Rate.
 If you want to specify the speed as feed per minute, deselect
IPR and enter the Feed Rate.
4 Click Next.

New Feature - Tool Usage (TURN)
This page enables you to change how the tool is used.

Tool — This displays the name of the tool used for the operation.
Turret — Select the tool's turret.
Turret Direction — Select the direction that the turret turns. If set to
Auto, the machine determines the most efficient direction.
New Feature wizard (TURNMILL)

FeatureCAM TURN/MILL (see page 856) classifies features as either
Turn/Mill features or pure Turning features. Turn/mill features (see
page 856) assume powered tools and turning features assume that
the tool does not spin.
For example, you can make a hole along the Z-axis with both
feature types, but the milled one uses rotary tools, and the turned
hole uses a drill that does not spin.
To use the New Feature wizard for Turn/Mill documents:

1 Select the feature type:
 Turn/Mill — use the Milling New Feature wizard (see page 531).
 Turning — use the Turning New Feature wizard (see page 573).

2 Click Next.
New Feature wizard (WIRE)
The first page of the New Feature wizard for wire EDM contains a list
of possible features, divided into categories:
 2 Axis
 4 Axis
 From Feature
There are additional options:
 Make a pattern from this feature — Select this option to create a
pattern from the new feature at the same time. The wizard uses
extra pages to set up your pattern.
 Extract with FeatureRECOGNITION (see page 868) - Select this
option if you are creating features from a solid model using the
FeatureRECOGNITION module.
There is also an Automatic Feature Recognition (see page

495) wizard that tries to recognize all features of the model
automatically.
 Create new setup — Click this button to display the Setup wizard.
This button is only available when Extract with
FeatureRECOGNITION is selected.
To complete this page of the wizard:
1 Select the feature type that you want to create.

2 Optionally select Make a pattern from this feature and Extract with
FeatureRECOGNITION.
3 Click Next to continue with the rest of the wizard. If you are
creating a 2 Axis feature, the next page of the wizard is the New
Feature - Curves (see page 609) page. If you are creating a 4 Axis
feature, the next page of the wizard is the New Feature - Upper
Curve (see page 610).
New Feature - Curves page (WIRE)

If you are creating a 2 Axis feature, the second page of the wizard is
the New Feature - Curves page. This page is where you specify the
curve that dictates the shape of your feature. This page is the same
for all From Curve feature types.
2 Select the curves(s) in the graphics window. Any curves that
were selected before opening the wizard are already listed.
3 Click Add to add selected curves to the list. In the graphics
window, the added curves change to the highlight color (green
by default).
4 To remove a curve from the list, select the curve in the graphics
window or in the list and click Delete . To select a range of
names from the list, select the top name and then hold down the
SHIFT key and select the bottom name.
5 To select the curves one at a time, click Pick curve , then

select the geometry or curve in the graphics window. Repeat this
procedure to select each curve.
6 When you have selected the curves required to define the
feature, click Next to open the New Feature - Location page.

New Feature - Machining Direction page (WIRE)
For rapid features, you must set the machining direction. You do
this on the New Feature - Machining Direction of the wizard.

1 Review the default machining direction for each curve in the
table by selecting it and viewing the blue arrow in the Graphics
window.
2 If you are happy with the machining direction, click Next to open
the New Feature - Location (see page 612) page.
3 If you want to change the machining direction of a curve, select
it in the table and click the Switch machining direction button.
The arrow in the Graphics window switches and the table
updates the Machining Direction from Normal to Reverse for the
selected curve.
page.
New Feature - Upper/Lower Curve page (WIRE)

If you are creating a 4-axis feature, you must specify both an upper
and lower curve. The second page of the wizard for 4-axis features
is the New Feature - Upper Curve page.
2 Select the curve that you want to define the upper boundaries of
the feature in the Upper curve list or use the Pick curve
button to pick the curve in the Graphics window.
3 Click Next to open the New Feature - Lower Curve.

4 Repeat steps 1 and 2, this time for the lower curve.
5 Click Next to open the New Feature - Location page.
New Feature - Surface Boundaries (WIRE)

This page is part of the new feature wizard and it assists you in
creating 4-axis wire EDM features from ruled surfaces. It can be
performed on both surface and solid models. When you enter this
dialog, the edges of all ruled surfaces in the model are displayed in
blue.
To complete the dialog:
1 Click the Pick Curve button. The dialog warps into just a title
bar.
2 Select the Upper curves of the feature in order.
3 Click the Pick button in the title bar of the warped dialog to
complete the picking.

4 Click the Preview button to make sure you have selected the
correct curves.
5 Click Next and complete the wizard.
6 As you select curves, the ruled surfaces are entered into a table
in the middle of the dialog. This table lists the surface name, the
number of the boundary selected and whether or not the curve
has been reversed. There are a number of additional operations
that can be performed on a selected row of the table.
The delete button removes the boundary currently selected in

the tables.
This button moves the selected boundary up in the table.
This button moves the selected boundary down in the table.

This button selects an alternative boundary of the surface.
This button reverses the direction of the selected curve. Note
that FeatureCAM automatically sets the direction of the curves so
this option should not be necessary most of the time.
There are two additional options:
Use Show lower curve option to display the corresponding bottom
curve for each curve selected.
Use Hide surfaces when finish option to have the surfaces hidden
after you leave this dialog.
New Feature - Location page (WIRE)

The default shape and location of the feature are determined by the
feature's curve and the curve's position.
1 If you want to create the feature in the same location as the
curve (or the upper curve for 4-axis features), click Next.
2 If you want to change the top of the feature, enter a value for
Offset from (upper) curve Z location. This can be a positive or
negative number.
3 Click Next to open the New Feature - Dimensions page.
New Feature - Dimensions page (WIRE)

The New Feature - Dimensions page is where you enter the Thickness
of your wire feature.
For 2-axis features:

 If your curve is at the bottom of the feature, select Curve at
bottom.
 Optionally set a Taper (see page 613).

Wire EDM Taper
None — Select this option if there is no taper on the feature.
Constant — With this option, the feature has a constant taper angle
all the way around the feature. The taper is specified by an angle,
specified in degrees, and taper type (see page 613).
Variable — If you want to specify a different taper value for each
line and arc of your curve, select Variable and click the Variable
Taper button to display the variable taper table (see page 614).
Types of wire EDM tapers
All left tapers are performed to the left of the curve (at the bottom
of the feature) relative to the Primary Cut Direction, and all right
tapers are performed to the right of the curve (at the bottom of the
feature) relative to the Primary Cut Direction.
 Left — Sharp corners tapered into sharp corners (G29 on a
Charmilles machine) and arcs tapered into conical corners (see
page 614) (G28).
 Right — Sharp corners tapered into sharp corners and arcs
tapered into conical corners (see page 614).
 Rounded-Left — Sharp corners tapered into arcs (G28) and arcs
tapered into conical corners (see page 614) (G28).
 Rounded-Right — Sharp corners tapered into arcs and arcs
tapered into conical corners (see page 614).
 ISO-Left — Arcs tapered into cylindrical corners (see page
614) (G29) and sharp corners tapered into sharp corners (G29).
 ISO-Right — Arcs tapered into cylindrical corners (see page 614)
and sharp corners tapered into sharp corners.
 ISO/Rounded-Left — Arcs tapered into cylindrical corners (see
page 614) (G29) and sharp corners tapered into arcs (G28).
 ISO/Rounded-Right — Arcs tapered into cylindrical corners (see
page 614) and sharp corners tapered into arcs.

Default conical corner
The normal taper has corners that are shaped like a cone. The arc
of the top curve is different from the arc of the bottom curve.
ISO cylindrical corner

An ISO taper has cylindrical corners. The arcs of the top and bottom
curves have the same radius.
Variable taper table

If the feature has multiple curves, select the appropriate curve from
the Curve list. The curve is broken down into arc and line segments
and each segment is represented by a row in the table. As you click
a row of the table, the segment of the curve is highlighted in the
graphics window. To find the row of the table that corresponds to a
segment, click the Pick curve piece button and select the
segment. The row of the table is then selected.
The columns of each table are:
Status — Double-click box in the status column to display a list of
Types of wire EDM tapers (see page 613).
First Angle — This is the taper angle, specified in degrees, for the
first end point of the segment.
Second Angle — This is the taper angle, specified in degrees, for the
second end point of the segment.

Taper reg — This is the register on the machine containing taper
information for this segment.
If you want smooth walls of your part, the angle of one

segment must match the first angle of the next segment.
New Feature - Start page (WIRE)

The New Feature - Start page is where you set the start point and
curve piece where you want the wire to start cutting the feature.
Leads are non-perpendicular by default. If you want the lead

to be perpendicular, select the Pick only perpendicular lead box
before you click the Pick location button. Click the start point
and FeatureCAM highlights the corresponding perpendicular
point when you mouse-over the curve segment. Click to
accept it.
Die and Punch Features

For 2 and 4-axis Die or Punch features, a start point is automatically
calculated. You can change the start point for a Die or Punch feature
using the following procedure:
1 If the feature has multiple curves, select the appropriate curve
from the Curve list.
2 Click the Pick location button.

3 Click the new Start point.
You must pick on the appropriate side for the feature type.
For die features, pick on the inside. For punch features,
pick on the outside. For side features pick on the machining
side. If you pick a point in the incorrect side, the approach
moves will gouge the part.
4 Select the segment of the curve to connect the start point to by
moving the mouse over the feature until the segment of the
curve you want is highlighted and then click the mouse.
5 The X and Y coordinates of the new start point are displayed in
the dialog.
If you want to force the wire to start on the curve, you cannot
simply double-click. You must move your second pick (the one that
indicates the curve segment) slightly so that you are not picking the
same point twice.
If you are creating a 4-axis feature, follow the above procedure for
both the upper and lower curves.

Side Features
For 2 and 4-axis side features, the default is to start at the first
point of the curve. To add new linear moves at the start or end of a
curve:
from the Curve drop down list.
2 Click the Pick point button for either the start or end point.
A line will rubber-band from the current start of end point.
3 Click a point at the new location.
Alternatively, you can simple enter the new end point coordinates.
New Feature - Match Curves page (WIRE)

FeatureCAM tries to match up the upper and lower curves for 4-axis
features. You can edit the default match on the New Feature - Match
Curves page.
A Side feature must have at least three moves in it including

lead moves. If it does not, then no feature is displayed in the
wizard start page.
For example, if you are creating a feature from a single line,
you must change the start point and end point so that the
feature has three moves.
FeatureCAM attempts to match up the points of the upper and lower
curves of a 4-axis feature. If the curves are not matched as you
want, then you can manually match the two curves.
Before starting to manually match your points, first make sure that
the start points of each curve are close to each other when viewed
from the top. Use the New Feature - Start (see page 615) page to do
this.
To match two curves:
1 Click the Pick curve point button. All of the endpoints of the
two curves are displayed as green dots and existing connections
are shown as thick green lines.
2 Click an endpoint on the lower curve.
3 Click the corresponding endpoint on the upper curve. These
points are connected with a green line.
4 Repeat these steps until you have matched all the points you
want to change.

5 If you want to see how the feature looks with your new matches,
click the Next button. If you want to make further changes, click
the Back button and repeat steps 1-4.
If you want to connect a point on the bottom curve to multiple
points on the top curve, hold down the SHIFT key when you select
the bottom point and each top point.
You cannot change the start points of the curves by adjusting

the matching points. Use the New Feature - Start (see page
615) page to change the start points.
Curve Pieces Management

To break a curve piece into equal pieces:
1 Specify the number of pieces you want by entering the number
or using the arrow buttons.
2 Click the Pick curve piece button.

3 Select the curve piece that you want to break, in the Graphics
window.
To add a single point to a 4-axis wire curve piece:
1 Click the Pick curve piece then location button.

2 Select the curve piece in the Graphics window.
3 Slide the cursor along the piece and click the location.
4 A new point is inserted at this location.
To remove curve pieces from a 4-axis wire curve:
1 Click the Merge broken pieces button.

2 Click the first curve piece.
3 Click the last curve piece. The portion of the curve is highlighted
as you move the cursor to preview the selected region of the
curve.
4 All internal points within these pieces are removed.
You cannot remove the segment that contains the start point.
New Feature - Feature Extraction page (IFR) (WIRE)

Use the Feature Extraction page of the New Feature wizard to select
the method you want to use to recognize features from a solid
model.
Select a method of recognizing features:
 For solid faces — Extract features from the faces of a solid.

 For all surfaces types — Extract features from trimmed surfaces,
or from a mix of trimmed and untrimmed surfaces.
 For untrimmed ruled surfaces — Extract features from untrimmed
surfaces.
Hide horizontal surfaces — Select this option to hide horizontal
surfaces in the graphics window to make other surfaces easier to
select. Enter an angle to hide surfaces that are almost horizontal.
Surfaces within the specified range are hidden when you click Next.
New Feature - Solid Faces page (IFR)

Use the Solid Faces page of the New Feature wizard to select solid
faces that represent a feature.
Add faces you want to machine to the list using the buttons:
 Click Pick surface to hide the dialog and select solid faces in
the graphics window, then click Add from selected items to
add them to the list.
 Select faces in the list and click Delete from selected items to
remove them.
Slicing heights — Select Manual and specify the top and bottom
heights of the feature, or select Automatic to use the height of the
surfaces as the height of the feature.
Preview — Display a preview of the feature in blue in the graphics
window.
New Feature - Upper Surface Edges page

Use the Upper Surface Edges page of the New Feature wizard to
select surface edges that define the shape of the top of the feature.
Use the buttons to select surface edges you want to machine:
— Hide the dialog and pick surface edges in the graphics

window.
— Remove the selected item from the list.
— Move the selected item up in the list.
— Move the selected item down in the list.
— For the item selected in the list, change the edge of the
surface.

— Reverse the direction of the selected item.
New Feature - Lower Surface Edges

Use the Lower Surface Edges page of the New Feature wizard to
select surface edges that define the shape of the bottom of the
feature.

window.
surface.
New Feature - Upper Surface Boundaries

Use the Upper Surface Boundaries page of the New Feature wizard to
select surface boundaries that define the shape of the top of the
feature.

window.
surface.

New Feature - Strategies page (WIRE)
FeatureCAM has a variety of machining cycles for different
purposes. Each operation type has a whole range of parameters and
options.
Operations — Select the operation that you want to use to cut the
feature.
 Retract (see page 625)
 Stop (see page 625)
 Pocketing (see page 626)
 Zigzag (see page 628)
 Cutoff (see page 630)
 Contour (see page 631)
You can have more than one operation by selecting the primary
operation in the Operations list and then selecting the Cutoff or
Contour options.
Primary Cut/Offset Dir
For closed curves, the Primary Cut Dir attribute controls the direction
of a cut. The options are CW (clockwise) or CCW
(counter-clockwise).
For open curves the Primary Offset Dir attribute controls the
direction of a cut. The options are Left or Right. These settings are
relative to the machining-side setting.
- Machining - Machining
side side
- Primary - Primary
offset direction offset direction
is Right is Left

side side
- Primary - Primary
is Right is Left
See the Settings (see page 1717) tab.
Retract Length
The Retract Length attribute is used for Retract, Stop, and Cutoff
operations.
- Retract length
- Stop length
- Wire path
- Inserted end position
- Normal contour start/end po
- Contour
Use on both ends of skim passes — This applies the Retract Length
to both ends of skim passes (the wire does not return to the start
point at one end). See example.
Stop Length
This parameter is used for Retract, Stop, and Cutoff operations.
Retract operation:
Contour
Wire path
Stop length
Normal contour start/end position
Inserted end position
Run-out

Stop operation:
Contour
Wire path
Stop length
Contour start/end position
Inserted stop positions
Cutoff operation (CW):

Contour
Wire path
Stop length
Run-out
Cutoff operation (CCW):
Contour
Wire path
Stop length
Run-out
Stop code — For Stop operations you can choose from:
 M00 is program stop. This stop is always performed.
 M01 is optional program stop. There is a setting on the machine
tool to observe or skip these stops.
Overlap
Stop operation:

- Contour
- Wire path
- Contour start/end
position
- Inserted stop
positions
- Stop length
- Overlap
Cutoff operation (clockwise):
- Contour
- Normal contour
start/end position
- Inserted end
position
- Run-out
- Stop length
- Overlap
Cutoff operation (counter-clockwise):
- Contour
- Normal contour
start/end position
- Inserted end
position
- Run-out
- Stop length
- Overlap
The run-off back to the end position of the contour is at an

angle. On some machines (for example, Agie), an angled
run-off may not be allowable.
If the overlap is too large, a triangular piece of material is

left, which may fall and halt the machine.

Contour overlap — This is used only by the Contour operation. It is
the amount by which the Contour operation overlaps.
Total Stock applies to pocketing and zigzag operations.
This parameter sets the amount of material removed from the
contour when using the Offset Method of Offset Toolpath. When the
value is 0, only one cutting pass is made.
The calculated wire path represents the center of the wire;

the amount remaining on the curve is dependent on the
cutter compensation values.
- Leave allowance
- Contour stock
- Total stock
Stepover — Enter the stepover amount between passes for
Pocketing and Zigzag operations.
Finish allowance — This is the amount of material left after a
Pocketing or Zigzag pass. Even if a Cleanup Pass is used, the finish
allowance still remains.
Cleanup Pass is for zigzag operations.
The contour is cut with a contour parallel finishing path to remove
any rough edges left by the stepover between passes.

- Cleanup Pass
Islands (see page 627) button for pocketing and zigzag operations.
Skim Pass Options (see page 1475) button.
Retract
The retract operation is available for both 2-axis and 4-axis
features.
The contour is not cut completely but is stopped shortly before the
contour end point. The distance of this position from the contour
end point is set in the Stop Length field. This option is generally
used when cutting multiple contours whereby the cut part should
not be separated from the workpiece, such as when the program
should run automatically overnight.
Retract length
Stop length
Wire path
Normal contour start/
position
Contour
A Cutoff operation is normally used after this operation to cut the

part of the contour that is not cut by the retract operation. The
Cutoff operation machines the left over part in the opposite
direction to the machining curve.
Stop
The stop operation is available for both 2-axis and 4-axis features.
A stop command is inserted into the wire path together with a
further stop at the end of the contour. The distance of the new stop
position from the contour end point is defined in the Stop Length
field. If you want to overcut the contour end position, you can also
define an Overlap. In centerline simulation, the locations where the
wire stops are shown as small squares.
A stop operation has two different locations where the wire stops:

Stop length Stop length
Wire path Overlap
Contour Wire path
Contour start/end Contour
position
Contour start/end
Inserted stop position
positions
Inserted stop
positions
Pocketing
The Pocketing operation is available only for 2-axis features.

The Pocketing operation enables contour parallel area clearance of a
closed curve.
Stepover

General rules
 The machining curve must define a closed pocket.
 The start position of the cut is set automatically to a point on the
boundary. The wire then feeds to the center of the pocket and
then cuts from the inside toward the boundary.
 To ensure that the wire starts in a particular position (to thread
the wire for example) you should define a start point. The
toolpath then starts at the start point and then feed to the center
of the pocket.
No attempt is made to check if the stepover value is larger or

smaller than the wire diameter.
Cutter compensation does not apply to a pocketing operation
because it outputs a wire path that is already corrected (that is, no
compensation is entered on the machine).
Islands for pocketing and zigzag
You can use Islands with Pocketing and Zigzag operations to indicate
areas where there is no stock and so avoid air cutting.
When you select either Pocketing or Zigzag as the operation on the
Strategies page of the New Feature wizard (or the Strategy tab of the
feature Properties dialog), you see a button labelled Islands.

Click this button to open the Select Islands dialog where you specify
the curves that you want to act as islands:
The toolpath avoids the area within the island.
Zigzag
The Zigzag operation is available only for 2-axis features.

The Zigzag operation defines a zigzag area clearance cycle for a
closed curve.
Offset
Stepover
General Rules
 The machining curve must define a closed pocket.
 The start position of the cut is set automatically to a point on the
boundary. The wire then feeds to the beginning of the zigzag
pattern.

 To ensure that the wire starts in a particular position (to thread
the wire for example) you should define a start point. The
toolpath then starts at the start point and then feeds to the
beginning of the zigzag pattern.
 By the definition of the Cut Angle you can control the direction of
the wire path and also the start point of the cycle (see page
629).
The angle is defined from the X-positive axis of the current UCS.
Enter the angle in degrees.
 No attempt is made to check if the stepover is larger or smaller

than the wire diameter.
 Cutter compensation does not apply to a pocketing operation
because it outputs a wire path that is already corrected (that is,
no compensation is entered on the machine).
Start point for zigzag

The start position that is automatically calculated by the software
depends on the Cut Angle of the wire path.
If the Cut Angle is 0 , the start point of the cycle is at the bottom
left.
If the Cut Angle is 90 , the start point of the cycle is at the bottom
right.

If the Cut Angle is 180 , the start point of the cycle is at the top
right.
If the Cut Angle is 270 , the start point of the cycle is at the top left.
The chosen angle can naturally lie between the examples shown
above. In this case the start point is set to the nearest of the
positions shown. On extremely complex contours it may be
necessary to experiment with the cut angle to find the optimum
start point.
Cutoff
The Cutoff operation is available for both 2-axis and 4-axis features.
This option is normally used after a contour has been cut with a
retract operation.
Cutoff cuts the part of the contour left by the retract option.
Machining is in the reverse direction to that of the machining curve,
from the contour end point to the stop position. The wire stops
before pulling away from the part. The stop location is shown as a
small square.
Retract length
Stop length

Wire path
Contour
Contour
The contour operation is available for both 2-axis and 4-axis
features.
This cycle is the generally applicable cycle for cutting contours.
Contour
Start point
General Rules
The curve can be open or closed. A contour operation traces the
entire length of the curve. The number of passes is determined by
Contour passes. A contour operation can be optionally added to
retract, stop, pocket, zigzag or cutoff operations by selecting the
Contour option on the Strategy tab.
If you want the contour to overlap, enter the amount of overlap you
want as the Contour Overlap.
New Feature - Operations page (WIRE)

This page lists the operations that you have chosen on the
Strategies (see page 620) page to manufacture the feature.
1 If you are happy with the operations, click Finish (see page 531).
2 If you would like to take a closer look at the cutting data, click
Next to open the New Feature - Cutting Data page.

New Feature - Cutting Data (WIRE)
The New Feature - Cutting Data page provides the feed, water and
cutter compensation registers for each pass of the operation. The
use of all these settings depends on the machine and controller
type. You can set these values automatically from the current
material database, or enter them manually.
Most modern NC machines have an integrated technology database
which the machine uses to set up the optimum cutting conditions
for the workpiece. In this way the cutting is accurate and uses the
full power of the machine. These settings for the cutting conditions
are usually stored in Registers in the controller and are activated by
particular codes in the NC program. FeatureCAM enables you to
define these codes for up to nine cuts (either backwards/forwards
cutting or with sub-programs). You can also load pre-defined
settings from a database you have prepared.
Feed — This is used to select the generator setting on the wire
machine. The generator setting controls the cutting speed of the
machine by setting parameters such as strength, pulse time, and
pause time between pulses of the electrical current used to produce
the spark. These parameters vary with the workpiece material,
height, and so on.
Water — This is used to select the machine register that defines the
water flow during cutting. The parameters that are controlled
include the water pressure, flow rate, and so on.
Comp. Reg. — This sets the number of the Compensation Register of
the NC machine, which is used for wire radius compensation. The
value held within this register is the amount by which the wire is
corrected to the left or right of the defined wire path when the
function for wire correction on the machine is switched on (normally
G41 or G42).

Comp. Val. — This sets the wire radius correction value for the given
offset register on the machine. The value is normally the sum of the
wire radius + spark gap + any finishing allowance required. For
most machines, the compensation value is referenced through the
compensation register, so there is no need to set this value.
You can change the labels of these columns in the Cutting

Conditions Names dialog in XBUILD. Select CNC-Info > Cutting
Conditions Names from the XBUILD menu.
New Feature - Summary (WIRE)

This is the final page of the New Feature wizard. It shows a list of
the operations for the feature.
1 If you are happy, click Finish (see page 531) and the feature is
created.
You can edit (see page 884) the feature later.

2 If you want to make changes, click the Back button until you
come to the wizard page you want to alter.
Specific features
FeatureCAM features can be divided into the following groups:
 Toolpath feature (see page 633)
 2.5D milling features (see page 636)
 3D milling features (see page 734)
 Turning features (see page 804)
 Turn/Mill features (see page 856)
 User-defined features (see page 857)
 Wire features (see page 858)
Toolpath feature
Use a Toolpath feature to directly create a single toolpath
movement. You can create the moves of a toolpath in three ways:
 Create each move individually. You would typically do this if you
have a simple, but very precise tool movement that cannot be
easily created using a FeatureCAM feature.
 Create a curve. This lets you use the drawing tools of
FeatureCAM to control the path of the tool precisely.

 Import an operation of an existing feature. This technique lets
you make changes to the toolpaths that FeatureCAM generates
automatically. You can import toolpaths from either milling or
turning features.
If the toolpath is created from a curve or a feature, it is not linked
to the original source regardless of the parametric modeling (see
page 309) setting. As a result, this is a mechanism for storing a
toolpath that will never be automatically modified by FeatureCAM.
You must simulate toolpaths to check for gouging on any

modified toolpaths.
To create a Toolpath feature:
1 Click the Features step in the Steps panel. The New Feature
2 In the From Feature section, select Toolpath and click Next. The
New Feature - Curve or Operation page is displayed.
 If you want to use a curve, select Curve and select the name
of the curve from the list.
 To edit the toolpaths of an operation, select Operation and
select the operation name from the list.
 Select NC code text to enter NC code directly, such as program
stop code M00 or M01.
3 Follow the steps of the wizard to pick a tool and feed and speed
rates for the toolpath.

Each Toolpath feature creates a single toolpath operation. Each
toolpath operation has a Tools, F/S, and Toolpaths (see page 1037)
tab. Use the Toolpaths tab to edit the Toolpath feature.
If you are creating the toolpath from manually entered moves

or from a curve, you must manually select tools and the feed
and speed values.
If the toolpath was imported from another FeatureCAM

operation, the tooling and machining parameters are kept.
Program stop code example

To enter program stop code directly into the NC program:
2 In the From Feature section, select Toolpath and click Next. The
New Feature - Curve or Operation page is displayed.
3 Select the NC code text option and enter M00 (or M01).

4 Click Next. The New Feature - Toolpath feature page is displayed.
This page has the same toolpath editing buttons as the Toolpaths
(see page 1037) tab in the Toolpath Properties dialog.
5 Click Finish. The Toolpath feature is listed in the Part View and on
the Op List tab.
6 Simulate the Toolpath feature. In this example, there are no
toolpaths to see, but you must simulate the feature to produce
the NC code.
7 View the NC code on the NC Code tab.
If a Toolpath feature consists only of G-code, FeatureCAM

does not display the Tools or F/S tabs in the Toolpath
Properties dialog.
2.5D milling features (25D & 3D)

Hole (see page 637) — A Hole feature is created by drilling or boring
and may have other characteristics such as a chamfer or tapped
threads. They may be manufactured using canned drilling cycles.
Boss (see page 679) — Mills a boss whose shape is determined by a
curve.
Chamfer (see page 684) — Mills a chamfer that follows a curve.
Most features include a chamfer option which you should use for
chamfering entire features.
Face (see page 676) — Is a milling operation to cut a smooth finish
on a face of the stock and to cut the stock to exact dimensions.
Groove (see page 689) — Is a groove that follows a curve. The
curve is the centerline of the groove. Also used for engraving.
Grooves support open or closed curves.

Pocket (see page 700) — Mills an arbitrarily shaped cavity. It may
contain a collection of island curves or bosses within the pocket. The
islands can be at different heights.
Round (see page 705) — Mills a rounding operation that follows a
curve.
Side (see page 709) — Is a general milling operation to cut all the
material on one side of a curve. This feature works with open or
closed curves.
Rectangular pocket (see page 656) — Mills a rectangular pocket with
rounded corners. No curve is needed for this pocket.
Slot (see page 661) — Is a straight slot with rounded ends. No
curve is needed for a slot.
Step bore (see page 666) — Is a nested series of round pockets with
a common center. No curve is needed for a step bore.
Thread mill (see page 670) — Mills a thread on an inner or outer
diameter.
You can create patterns (see page 874) of features as well as

groups (see page 869) of features which, in turn, can become
the basis feature for even more sophisticated patterns.
Hole
There are multiple Hole feature types:
Plain hole
- Chamfer (depth
of 45 chamfer)
- Depth
- Through
- Diameter
Counter-bore hole

- Bore diameter
- Bore depth
- Chamfer (depth
of 45 chamfer)
- Depth
- Through
- Diameter
Counter-sink hole
- Sink diameter
- Angle
- Depth
- Through
- Diameter
Counter-drill hole
- (Counter) Drill diameter
- (Counter) Drill depth
- Chamfer (depth of 45
chamfer)
- Depth
- Through
- Diameter
Tapped hole
- Thread depth
chamfer)
- Depth
- Through
- Diameter

Counter-drilled Tapped hole
- (Counter) Drill diameter
- (Counter) Drill depth
- Thread depth
chamfer)
- Depth
- Through
- Diameter
Thread Milled Hole

- Minor Diameter
- Thread Height
- Thread Depth
- Thread Pitch
- Chamfer
- Depth
- Through
Back Bore Hole

- Bore Diameter
- Bore Depth
- Diameter
- Depth
The different types of holes are defined by dimensional attributes.

Not every hole has every attribute. This table (see page 651) shows
all the hole types and dimension attributes associated with them.
Creating a Hole feature

To create a Hole feature:

This displays the New Feature wizard.
2 In the From Dimensions section, select Hole and click Next to

open the New Feature - Dimensions page.
If a dimension field has a blue label (see page 293), you

can click it and 'pick' the dimension from objects in the
graphics window.

3 Select the type of hole from the Type list.
 A Plain Hole is a simple Hole with an optional chamfer.

 A Counter Bore Hole.
 A Counter Sink Hole.
 A Counter Drill Hole.

 A Tapped Hole is a Hole that is under-sized drilled and then
tapped.
 A CD Tapped Hole is a counter drilled hole with the bottom

part of the Hole tapped.

 A Thread Milled Hole.
 A Back Bore Hole.
4 Enter a Diameter value.
If you are building Hole features from circles, select the

circle before opening the wizard to pre-populate this field.
5 Enter how deep the Hole is in the Depth field.
6 Select Through to increase the hole length by 10% of the hole
diameter to account for the drill tip and prevent burring.

Depending on the type of Hole you selected, you may have other
dimensions (see page 651) to fill in such as Chamfer and Drill
Depth. For Tapped Holes and Thread Milled Holes, you can select
Standard Threads and select a thread type. Each thread type sets
the Thread depth, TPI, and Diameter dimensions.
7 For Tapped Holes and Thread Milled Holes, select Tapered if the
thread is tapered.
Tapered taps are driven to a different depth than straight

taps. For straight taps, a tip allowance is added to the
thread depth so that the tool cuts the complete thread, this
is not added for tapered taps so that the OD is not affected.
8 Click Next to open the New Feature - Location page. Select
whether you want to enter the location as XYZ or Polar.
 For XYZ, enter the X, Y, and Z coordinates or pick the location
in the Graphics window.
 For Polar, enter the Radius (the distance along the X axis), the
Angle, and the Z location.
9 Click Next to open the New Feature - Strategies page. The options
on this page are the same as those on the Strategy (see page
889) tab of the Hole Feature Properties dialog.
10 Click Next to open the New Feature - Operations (see page 564)
page.
11 Click Next to open the New Feature - Default Tool (see page 564)
page.
12 Click Next to open the New Feature - Feed/Speed (see page 567)
page.
13 Click Next to open the New Feature - Summary (see page 567)
page.
14 Click Finish (see page 531) to create the feature and exit the
wizard or click Back to return to previous pages.
You can click Finish (see page 531) at any stage during the
wizard to accept the default settings for the remaining pages
and exit.
Hole macros
Macros can be generated in the NC code for patterns of holes. To
generate these macros, your post processor must support them,
and you must turn this function on for the post.

1 Enable Retract to plunge clearance (see page 889) for the hole
pattern.
2 Select the Manufacturing > Post Process menu option to display
3 Select your post processor.
4 Deselect the Disable Macros option.
5 Change any other appropriate settings.
6 Click OK.
7 Select Manufacturing > Machining Attributes from the menu.
8 On the Operations tab, click the Automatic Options button and
select the Minimize tool changes option.
You could set Minimize tool changes in the Ordering (see page
1495) dialog instead. Using the Default Attributes setting
includes macros for any parts you create.
9 Disable Minimize rapid distance.
10 Click OK.
Macros cause FeatureCAM to analyze the NC code and generate
macros for hole operations if it finds sets of repetitive tasks. This
method may ignore sets of operations that don't have one-to-one
correspondence with the other sets in the macro. For example, if
you are drilling and reaming a pattern of six holes, and another hole
in the Setup also uses the same tool, the operation set that shares
the same tool, is not included in the macro because there are seven
operations in that set, not the six that the other sets of operations
used in the macro.
How holes are manufactured

FeatureCAM follows this process for creating holes:
1 Conducts an analysis of the hole size, type, and attributes to
determine what tool to use (see page 649).
2 Picks feeds and speeds (see page 647) based upon the material
being drilled.
3 Prepares the site (see page 647) with spot drill and pilot drill
operations.
4 Twistdrills to depth (see page 648).
5 Sizes and does counter cutting (see page 648) operations.
6 Taps, or bores/reams (see page 648) if set.
7 Holes are output as either canned cycles or computed moves.

There are many variations on this process, particularly with patterns
of holes and hole macros. You can edit the basic hole process in
these places:
 To edit all Hole features in the current document, use the Drilling
(see page 1598, see page 889) tab in Machining Attributes.
 To edit a single Hole feature, use the Tools, Drilling (see page
900), Strategy, and Misc. tabs in the Feature Properties (see page
884) dialog.
The tooling database also has a large impact on how a hole is
drilled, and the feed/speed database helps to determine the feeds
and speeds used.
Drill selection for tapped holes

The formula FeatureCAM uses is from the Machinery's Handbook Ed.
20 Pg. 1435:
drill size = outside dia * 1.299 * thread_percent * (1/threads_per_inch)
 drill_size is the size of the drill that is used to rough the hole.
 outside_dia is the size of the tapped hole, so for a "1/4-20", it
would be 1/4in.
 thread_percent is Thread % for tap drill from the tool selection
page of default attributes. By default it is 77%.
 threads_per_inch is just that. In the "1/4-20" example, it is 20.
The drill size table is based on 77% thread. Switch to 75% if you
want the same behavior as the Machinery's Handbook.
Also, it should be noted that FeatureCAM's tool selection tolerance is
0.002 inches. This tight tolerance occasionally results in the failure
to automatically select a tool. For example, for a 5/8” hole, the
formula results in a number that is very close to a standard drill size
given in the handbook's table, but not quite within 0.002. Hence
tool selection fails. In this case, you must explicitly select a tool.
Hole: Feeds and Speeds

FeatureCAM chooses feeds and speeds for all of its drilling using the
F/S database that you can customize. Feeds and speeds are
determined based upon the stock material.
Hole: Site preparation

The important aspects of roughing are as follows:

 Spot drilling — Aids later drill operations and is set with the Spot
drill attribute at machine-level (see page 1598, see page 889) or
feature-level (see page 889). If you have selected Attempt
chamfer w/ spot, then the chamfer operation may be combined
with this operation if the tool has the correct angle and size.
 Pilot drilling — Is enabled by setting the Pilot drill (see page 889)
attribute. How pilot drilling is performed is influenced by Chip
break/Deep hole and similar settings.
Hole: Drill to depth

This is shown as a drill operation in the tree view and is turned on
or off with the Drill attribute. The Chip Break and Deep Hole cycles
(see page 898) also affect the behavior. Actual diameter may be
undersized depending on later actions such as tapping or reaming
operations.
The actual depth of the twistdrill operation is determined as follows:
 Drilled Depth = depth + (diameter / 2.0) / tan(Angle_of_drill / 2.0)
 If the Through option is selected, then add 0.1*Diameter.
Hole: Size effects

Depending on the type of hole, a counterbore, counterdrill, or
countersink operation may be performed.
If a Chamfer was set, but not performed with the spotdrill operation,
it happens now. If the hole is too large to chamfer with a
countersink, it is cut by circular interpolation with a chamfer mill.
Hole: Threading, boring, and reaming

The Tap, Bore, or Ream operation occur last for a Hole feature. If
the Hole is tapped, then no Bore operations are possible.
Tap cuts threads in the Hole and is measured in TPI (threads per
inch) in inch units or Pitch (millimeters per thread) in metric units.
Ensure you set the Max tap spindle RPM attribute on the Drilling (see
page 900) tab.
For a tapping operation, the depth is determined as follows:
Tool Diameter Depth
Plug point Less than 3/8 (diameter -
tap inch (9.5mm) 1.1047xPitch)/2 +
4.75xPitch
Plug point 3/8 - 7/16 4.75xPitch
tap inches
(9.5 - 11 mm)

Plug point >=7/16 inches 4.75xPitch +
tap (11.1mm) .2xDiameter
Bottom < 7/16 inches 1.75xPitch
point tap (11.1mm)
Bottom >= 7/16 inches 1.75xPitch +
point tap (11.1mm) .2xDiameter
Bore uses a boring bar to position a Hole exactly. Bore and Ream
settings are not normally used together.
Ream drills a Hole feature undersized and then reams it to size. The
diameter of the drill is between 93% and 97% of the final hole
diameter. Bore and Ream settings are not normally used together.
Summary of ways you can make Holes in FeatureCAM

There are many ways to create holes in FeatureCAM:
 From dimensions (see page 639).
 In patterns (see page 872).
 From a list of points. If you select points before opening the
Feature Wizard (see page 530), these points are used to create a
Point list pattern (see page 879).
 You can create a point list pattern of holes by selecting all circles
of the same radius (see page 884) before entering the Feature
wizard.
 Extract individual Holes from a 3D solid or surface model (see
page 511) using the FeatureRECOGNITION option. By using the
FeatureRECOGNITION option you can also automatically recognize
all the holes from a 3D solid or surface model (see page 512).
Hole: Tool Selection

The first step of drilling a Hole is to determine what kind of hole it
is. Then collect a list of operations to produce that hole. After the
analysis, FeatureCAM picks tools. The table below shows the tooling
types that can be used for each operation type.

Operation Automatically Possible Notes
type selected tool user
overrides
spotdrill Spot or Center spotdrill, Automatic
Drill (see page centerdrill, behavior is
1774) countersink dependent on
the prefer
spotdrill or prefer
centerdrill
attributes.
chamfer Countersink spotdrill, If the tool
(see page centerdrill, diameter is
1758) countersink smaller than the
, chamfer hole diameter,
circular
interpolation is
performed. You
can override the
automatically
selected tool
with a tool that
does not have a
90 degree
included angle,
but the chamfer
is not a 90
degree chamfer.
The tool
diameter is
found by
multiplying the
chamfer's outer
diameter by 1.1
to ensure the
end of the
chamfer tool is
not used for
cutting.

twistdrill Twist drill (see twistdrills, No circular
page 1780) endmills interpolation is
performed with
endmills, even if
the diameter is
smaller than the
hole's. See Step
Bore feature
(see page 666)
if you want to
mill a circular
pocket.
bore Boring bar boringbar
(see page
1754)
counterbor Counter bore counterbor Circular
e (see page e, endmill interpolation is
1757) performed if the
tool's diameter
is smaller than
the
counterbore's.
ream Ream (see ream
page 1769)
tap Tap (see page tap For blind holes a
1776) fast spiral, plug
tap is preferred.
Through holes
require a gun
style plug tap.
For drilling, the most important criteria are diameter and length. If
a tool can't be found that satisfies the criteria, then you receive a
tool selection error.
The size of the tool selected may be affected by the Tool diameter
tolerance attribute on the Tool Selection tab of the Machining
Attributes dialog.
See also:
Tool Groups (see page 1751) for details on the different tooling
types
Hole attribute table

Plain Count Count Counte Tapped CD
er er r drill Tapped
bore sink
Angle refers
to the
included
angle of the
counter sink.
This value
helps select
an
appropriate
countersink
tool.
Back views
the settings
of the pattern
object that
contains the
hole.
Bore depth
refers to the
depth of the
counter bore.
Bore diameter
refers to the
diameter of
the counter
bore.
Chamfer sets
the depth of a
45 chamfer
at the top of
the hole. If
set to 0, no
chamfer is
cut.
Counter drill
diameter sets
the diameter
of the counter
drill.

Counter drill
depth sets the
depth of the
counter drill.
Depth refers
to the overall
depth of the
hole. It is
measured
from the top
to the bottom
of the hole
and includes
other
parameter
values such
as the hole's
Chamfer
depth.
Diameter sets
the finished
diameter of
the hole.
Location
specifies
location by
coordinates.
Click to select
the point with
the mouse.
Metric toggles
TPI (Threads
Per Inch) and
pitch for
metric
threads.

Relative
position
indicates that
the X, Y, and
Z coordinates
are relative to
the current
UCS.
Otherwise,
coordinates
are relative to
the World
Coordinate
System.
Sink diameter
refers to the
diameter of
the counter
sink of the
hole.
The Tapered
option is
available on
tapped holes.
Select it and
enter an
Angle to
specify a
threaded
tapered hole.
Thread depth
sets how
much of the
hole is
threaded.
TPI/Pitch sets
the
threads-per-i
nch or metric
pitch of the
hole's
threads.

Thread
diameter
refers to the
nominal
diameter of
the tap tool
used to
thread the
hole.
Underlying
details such
as selecting
an
under-sized
drill for
creating the
initial hole
are
automatically
computed.
Through is an
option that
controls the
display of
holes. For
manufacturin
g it is only
used for
tapped holes.
XYZ
Coordinates
refer to the
XYZ
coordinate
location of
the top center
of the hole.
These values
are relative to
the World
Coordinate
System.

Rectangular Pocket
Use the Rectangular Pocket feature to create a rectangular pocket.
- Length
- Width
- Corner radius
- Chamfer
- Depth
- Bottom radius
For a Pocket with a non-rectangular curve, use the more

general Pocket (see page 700) feature.
To do so, enter the pocket diameter in both the length and width
fields, and enter the Pocket radius in the corner radius field.
Creating a Rectangular Pocket feature

2 Select Rectangular Pocket and click Next to open the New Feature -
Dimensions page. Enter the following attributes:
 Length — Enter the X dimension of the feature.

 Width — Enter the Y dimension of the feature.
 Depth — Enter the distance cut into the material in Z.
 Corner radius — Enter the radius for all four corners of the
Rectangular Pocket.
 Chamfer — Optionally enter the depth of a 45 chamfer cut at
the top edge of the feature. Leave this value at the default, 0,
for no chamfer.

 Draft angle — Optionally set an angle for the feature wall. Use
only positive numbers.
 Bottom Radius - Optionally set a bottom radius for the feature.
The radius corresponds to the shape of the cutter. By default,
the material is milled using a flat-bottomed mill, making
stair-step passes when close to the radius. Then a rough and
finishing pass is made with the radiused mill. The default
value is 0, which cuts a square corner.

graphics window.
page.
4 Click Next to open the New Feature - Strategies (see page 537)
page.
page.
page for the first operation.
8 If you have more than one operation, clicking Next opens the
New Feature - Default Tool page for the next operation. If you
have no more operations, clicking Next opens the New Feature -
Summary (see page 567) page.

If you want the wall of your feature to have a special cross section:
1 After you have created the feature, open the Feature Properties
dialog and click the Dimensions tab.
2 Click the X Section button to open the Select Side Curve dialog.
3 Select the curve that matches your cross-section shape.
4 Click OK.
See also:
Cross section (X section) for Boss, Side, or Pocket for restrictions on
the curve (see page 928)

How Rectangular Pockets are manufactured
FeatureCAM follows this general process:
1 Conducts an analysis of the dimensions to determine what tool to
use (see page 659).
being machined.
3 Generates a roughing (see page 660) pass possibly in multiple Z
steps depending on the depth of the step.
4 Generates a finishing (see page 661) pass.
You can edit this process in these places:
 To edit all instances of this type of feature in the current
document, use the Machining Attributes dialog.
 To edit a single feature, use the Tools, Milling, Strategy, and Misc.
property tabs for the feature in the Feature Properties (see page
884) dialog.
The tooling database also has a large impact on how a feature is
machined, and the feed/speed database helps to determine the
feeds and speeds used.
Rectangular Pocket: Tool Selection

The first step is to pick a tool from the current tool crib (see the
Manufacturing menu). The most important criteria are diameter and
length. If a tool can’t be found to meet the criteria, then you get an
error and NC code is not generated.
Tool diameter — FeatureCAM conducts an analysis of the dimensions
that define the pocket to determine what size tool to use.
FeatureCAM prefers large tools for pockets but is influenced by the
corner radius. The largest tool that can cut the pocket without
gouging is selected.
Tool length — FeatureCAM picks a tool that has flutes long enough
to cut to the bottom of the pocket.
Operation Automatically Possible user Notes
type selected tool overrides
Roughing endmill face mill,
endmill
Finishing endmill face mill,
endmill

Chamfer chamfer mill spotdrill,
centerdrill,
countersink,
chamfer mill
The size of the tool selected may be affected by the Tool diameter tolerance
attribute on the Tool Selection tab of the Machining Attributes dialog.
See also:
Tool % of arc radius (see page 973)
Tool Groups (see page 1751) for details on the different tooling types.
Rectangular Pocket: Feeds and Speeds

FeatureCAM chooses feeds and speeds for all of its milling using the
Feed/Speed database (see page 1508) that you can customize.
Feeds and speeds are determined based on the stock material.
Rectangular Pocket: Roughing

The important aspects of roughing are:
 Getting to depth — The tool needs to get to depth, and this can be
accomplished by a zigzag in Z (the default setting and influenced
by Max ramp angle), by plunging, or by pre-drilling.
Enter the maximum angle, in degrees, for ramping down to depth.
It applies to helical or zigzag ramping. Set this value to 0 to cause a
plunge cut.
 Vertical step — FeatureCAM's cut depth is no more than 100% of
the tool radius.
 Horizontal stepover — FeatureCAM moves over laterally a
percentage of the tool diameter (controlled with Rough pass %),
as it steps across the feature.
Spiral % is the percentage of tool diameter to use for radial depth of
cut for rough milling or finishing the bottom of a milled feature
when using the offset method.
 Finish allowance (see page 994) — This controls how much
material to leave for the finishing pass. By default this is 0.02.
These attributes affect roughing:
 Pre-drill diameter (see page 1161)
 Pre-drill point (see page 994)
 Rough pass Z increment (see page 994)
For Boss and Pocket features, FeatureCAM provides several different
milling methods for roughing (see page 716).

Rectangular Pocket: Finishing
By default, the bottom is not finished. The roughing tool removes all
of the material in Z. This is controlled by the Finish bottom (see
page 936) attribute.
 Tool selection, after roughing, the roughing tool is used to finish
the pocket. Select Use finish tool (see page 936) to choose a
separate finishing tool (that has the same characteristics unless
you override them).
 The finish pass ramps onto the material with an arc equal to a
percentage of the tool diameter, controlled by Ramp diameter (see
page 994).
 Finish passes and overlap makes the tool go around the pocket a
number of times set by Finish passes (see page 994), and
overlaps the starting point by an amount controlled by Finish
overlap (see page 994).
 To move the tool away from the finished wall, the finish pass
ramps off using an arc of the same size as the arc used to ramp
on.
 Retract removes the tool from the stock area and sets up for the
next operation.
Slot
Slot features are similar to rectangular pockets but have round ends
equal in diameter to the width of the slot.
Length
Width
Chamfer
Depth
Bottom radius
Creating a Slot feature

2 Select Slot and click Next to open the New Feature - Dimensions
page.

graphics window.
 Simple — This option simplifies the manufacturing strategy for
the feature. Select this option to machine the feature by
making a single pass down the center of it with a tool whose
radius is equal to the width of the feature.
 Length — Enter the X dimension of the feature.

 Width — Enter the Y dimension of the feature.
The width of a slot does not have to match the diameter

of a standard available endmill, unless you are making a
Simple slot. If an exact match cannot be found, then a
smaller tool is selected and multiple horizontal passes
are performed.
for no chamfer.
 Bottom radius - Optionally set a bottom radius for the feature.
page and set the location of the center of the left corner arc of
the feature.
page.
page.
How Slots are manufactured


1 Conducts an analysis of the dimensions to determine what tool to
use (see page 664).
being machined.
3 Generates a roughing (see page 665) pass possibly in multiple Z
steps depending on the depth of the step.
4 Generates a finishing (see page 665) pass.
884) dialog.
Slot: Tool Selection

The first step is to pick a tool from the current tool crib (see the
Manufacturing menu). The most important criteria are diameter and
length. If a tool can’t be found to satisfy the criteria, then you get
an error and NC code is not generated.
Tool diameter FeatureCAM analyzes the dimensions that define the
Slot feature to determine what size tool to use. For a Simple Slot,
the tool must match the width of the slot, which also guarantees the
correct radius at the ends of the Slot. For normal Slots, the largest
tool that can cut the slot to width and still leave the Finish
allowance is selected.
Tool length FeatureCAM picks a tool that has flutes long enough to
cut to the bottom of the Slot.
Operation Automatically Possible user Notes
type selected tool overrides
endmill
endmill
centerdrill,
countersink,
chamfer mill

The size of the tool selected may be affected by the Tool diameter tolerance
attribute on the Tool Selection tab of the Machining Attributes dialog.
See also:
Tooling groups (see page 1751) for details on the different tooling types.
Slot: Feeds and Speeds

FeatureCAM chooses feeds and speeds for all of its milling using the
Slot: Roughing
 Getting to depth — The tool needs to get to depth, and this can be
accomplished by a zigzag in Z (the default setting and influenced
by Max ramp angle), by plunging, or by pre-drilling.
plunge cut.
 Vertical step — FeatureCAM's cut depth is no more than 100% of
the tool radius.
percentage of the tool diameter (controlled with Rough pass %),
as it steps across the feature.
 Finish allowance (see page 994) — This controls how much
For a simple slot, Finish allowance has no effect.

These attributes affect roughing:
 Pre-drill diameter (see page 1161)
 Pre-drill point (see page 994)
 Rough pass Z increment (see page 994)
Slot: Finishing
By default, the bottom is not finished. The roughing tool removes all
of the material in Z. This is controlled by Finish bottom (see page
936).

 Tool selection, after roughing, the roughing tool is used to finish
the slot. Use finish tool (see page 936) commands in FeatureCAM
to choose a separate finishing tool (that has the same
characteristics unless you override them).
 The finish pass ramps onto the material with an arc equal to a
percentage of the tool diameter, controlled by Ramp diameter (see
page 994).
Not available for a Simple slot.

 Finish passes and overlap makes the tool go around the slot a

 Ramp off uses another arc of the same size as the ramp on to
move the tool away from the finished wall.

 Retract removes the tool from the stock area and sets up for the
next operation.
See also:
Ramp diameter (see page 994)
Step Bore
A Step Bore feature is a series of nested circular pockets. You can
specify a Step Bore, step by step, or use a number of concentric
circles as the part's curve where each circle defines a level's
diameter.
- Diameter
- Chamfer
- Depth
- Radius

FeatureCAM follows this general process to create a Step Bore
feature:
1 Conducts an analysis of the curve and using tool diameter and
length as the selection criteria, and from the current tool crib
selects the tool to use.
 For tool diameter, the largest tool that can cut the step
without gouging is selected.
 For tool length, FeatureCAM picks a tool that has flutes long
enough to cut to the bottom of the Step Bore depth for that
level.
2 FeatureCAM chooses feeds and speeds for all of its milling using
the Feed/Speed database (see page 1508) that you can
customize. Feeds and speeds are determined based on the stock
material.
3 Generates a roughing pass possibly in multiple Z steps
depending on the depth of the step.
 Getting to depth — The tool needs to get to depth, and this can
be accomplished by a zigzag in Z (the default setting and
influenced by Max ramp angle), by plunging, or by pre-drilling.
plunge cut.
 Vertical step — FeatureCAM's cut depth is no more than 100%
of the tool radius.
percentage of the tool diameter (controlled with Rough pass
%), as it steps across the feature.
 Finish allowance (see page 994) — Controls how much
1 Generates a finishing pass. By default, the bottom is not finished.
The roughing tool removes all of the material in Z. This is
controlled by Finish bottom (see page 936). Setting the Single
Point Bore option for a step disables the other finishing options.
The important aspects of finishing are:

 Tool selection, after roughing, the roughing tool is used to
finish the Step Bore unless it is finished as a Single Point Bore.
Use finish tool (see page 936) commands FeatureCAM to
choose a separate finishing tool (that has the same
characteristics unless you override them).
 Ramp on has the finish pass ramp into the material with an
arc equal to a percentage of the tool diameter.
Disabled for a Single Point Bore finish operation.

 Finish passes and overlap has the tool go around the step a

 Ramp off uses another arc of the same size as the ramp on to
move the tool away from the finished wall.

 Retract removes the tool from the stock area and sets up for
the next operation.
The Step Bore feature may also be used to produce a single

depth round pocket.
A Step Bore feature initially has two steps. Delete the second
step and enter the dimensions for your round hole as the first
step.
884) dialog.
Creating a Step Bore feature

To create a Step Bore feature:

2 Select Step Bore and click Next to open the New Feature -
Dimensions page.
The default Step Bore feature has two steps. Each step corresponds
to a row of the table.
To modify the top step:
1 Click the top row in the dialog. The initial values for this step are
entered into the dimensioned drawing.
2 Edit the Diameter, Radius (see page 733), and Depth for this step.

The Depth is measured from the top of the Step Bore
feature, not the top of the current step.
3 Chamfer — Optionally enter the depth of a 45 chamfer cut at the
top edge of the feature. Leave this value at the default, 0, for no
chamfer.
4 Optionally select Through and Single Point Bore:
 Through — This sets the display of the Step Bore without a
bottom.
Selecting Through does not make the feature pass all

the way through the stock. You must set the depth
value deep enough.
 Single Point Bore — This sets the step to be finished with a
boring bar. This mills the step to a tight tolerance. Select the
option if you want to finish the step with this technique.
5 Click Set to update the values in the table.
6 To modify the second step, repeat this process on the second
row of the table.
To add an additional step:
1 Click the row in the table after which you want to insert.
2 Enter the parameters and click Add to insert the step parameters
into the table.
To delete a step:
1 Select the row in the table.
2 Click Delete.
When you have finished entering the Step Bore dimensions:
1 Click Next and to open the New Feature - Location (see page 534)
page and set the location of the center of the top bore.
2 Click Next to specify more manufacturing details or click Finish to
accept FeatureCAM's automatic selections.
Dimensions that have blue labels can be extracted from

objects in the graphics window.
Thread Mill
The Thread Mill feature mills a thread on an inner diameter (ID) or
on an outer diameter (OD).

ID Thread Feature OD Thread Feature
- Pitch - Pitch
- Minor - Major
Diameter Diameter
- Thread - Thread
Length Length
- Thread Height - Thread Height
FeatureCAM follows this process to create a single Thread Mill

feature:
1 An appropriate tool is selected. The tool selected by default has:
 the same pitch as the thread.
 the internal/external classification matches the feature.
 an overall length greater than the thread length.
If the thread is tapered, the tool must have the same taper.
A tool with a longer cutter length is preferred.

2 Using the Feed/Speed tables (see page 1508), calculates feeds
and speeds based on the stock material being machined.
3 The tool then ramps onto the feature according to the attributes
(see page 674).
4 The tool spirals either up or down the feature depending on the
setting of Feed Dir (see page 936). Cutter compensation is used
on the toolpaths if cutter comp (see page 936) is turned on. Both
of these settings are found on the Strategy page.

The overlap between revolutions is controlled by the Tooth
overlap attribute.
Thread feature
Tool revolution 1
Tool revolution 2
Tooth overlap
You can set this attribute for an individual feature in the

Feature Properties dialog. Feature-level attributes override
Machining Attributes (see page 1591). See the Milling tab.
1 The tool then ramps out. This move is controlled by the same
attributes as the ramp in.
Thread Milling restrictions — The toolpaths are accurate for UN

or ISO metric threads. Adjustments must be made to the
thread height or diameter to adjust for the different thread
forms.
Creating a Thread Mill feature

1 Create a rounded Step Bore (see page 668) or Pocket (see page
702) feature or a round Boss (see page 682) to thread.

3 Select Thread Milling and click Next to open the New Feature -
Dimensions page.
4 Specify the Thread dimensions:

 Type — Select ID for an inner diameter thread or OD for an
outer diameter thread.
 Custom — Enter the thread dimensions.
 Standard Thread — Select a thread from the list to use its
dimensions.

 Thread — Select a Left hand or Right hand thread. When
viewed from the end of the part toward the chuck, on a left
hand thread the tool winds counter-clockwise as it moves
towards the chuck, on a right hand thread the tool winds
clockwise as it moves towards the chuck.
 Minor/Major Diameter — Enter the Minor Diameter for an ID
feature or the Major Diameter for an OD feature.
 Pitch — Enter the pitch of the thread.
 Thread Length — Enter the length of the thread.
 Thread Height — Enter the height of the thread.
 Tapered — If your thread is tapered, select this option and
enter the taper Angle.
taps. For straight taps, a tip allowance is added to the thread
depth so that the tool cuts the complete thread, this is not
added for tapered taps so that the OD is not affected.
page to set the location of the center of the top of the feature.
page.
page.
page.
page.
page.
Thread Milling feature-level attributes

The following feature-level attributes are relevant to thread mill
features:
Helix linear approx tol
Helical ramping
Linear approx
Linear ramp distance

Plunge point(s)
Priority
Ramp angle offset
Ramp diameter %
Retract point
Start angle
Start threads
Taper approx angle
Through
Tooth outside
Tooth overlap
Set these attributes on the Milling (see page 994) tab of the Thread
The Feed Dir attribute is also relevant. Set this on the Strategy (see
page 936) tab of the Thread Milling Properties dialog.
Thread Milling manufacturing attributes

The following machine-level manufacturing attributes are relevant
to thread mill features:
Cutter comp
Finish allowance
Linear ramp distance
Ramp angle offset
Ramp diameter %
Starts
Start angle
Taper approx. angle
Through
Tooth outside
Tooth overlap
Set these attributes on the Thread Mill (see page 1660) tab of the

Face (mill)
FeatureCAM has a fully integrated Face feature performed with
facing tools, and uses the facing feeds and speeds provided in the
database.
- Thickness
Facing removes all of the stock down to the Z=0 plane.
If your stock does not extend above the Z=0 plane, or you do
not set a negative Z value for the feature, the machining
simulation does not show cut movements.
Curves for a Face feature define the regions to be faced. Curves
must be closed (beginning and end points are the same).
FeatureCAM typically follows this process to create a Face feature:
1 Selects a face mill tool from the current tool crib using the tool
diameter and cutter height as the selection criteria.
 Tool diameter is usually large for face operations as there are
no tight spots or complex shapes to create.
 Cutter height is usually small for facing tools. This prevents
them from being used to cut inappropriately deep features
and affects how many passes it might take to face the stock.
If a tool that meets the criteria cannot be found, an error is
displayed and NC code is not generated.
You can change the default tool on the Default Tool page
(see page 564) of the New Feature wizard (see page 531).
2 Using the Feed/Speed tables (see page 1508), calculates feeds
and speeds based on the stock material being machined.
3 Generates a facing pass, possibly in multiple Z steps depending
upon the amount of material to remove. Face features can
contain both a Rough and Finish pass.
The important aspects of a face operation are:
 Getting to depth — The tool needs to get to depth. This is
accomplished by a plunging move.

 Vertical step — The Rough pass can have vertical steps that
are controlled by the Rough pass Z increment (see page 1161)
attribute.
 Horizontal stepover is controlled in both the X and Y directions
with Last pass overcut % (see page 994) and Lateral overcut %
(see page 994).
 Finish allowance — The Rough pass takes into account
the Finish allowance (see page 1161) attribute, which controls
how much material to leave for the finishing pass.
 Retract removes the tool from the stock area and sets up for
the next operation.
4 Performs a finish pass for the final cut.
There are some variations on this process. The process can be
controlled in the Stepover tab (see page 1618) of the Machining
Attributes dialog, and on the Tools, Milling, Strategy, and Misc
property tabs of the Feature Properties dialog (see page 884). The
tooling database also affects the decisions.
See also:
types.
FeatureMILL 2D Milling algorithms (see page 716).
Creating a Face feature

To create a Face feature:


3 Optionally select Extract with FeatureRECOGNITION to recognize a
Face feature from a solid (see page 525) (REC).
page.

graphics window.
6 Enter the Thickness of the Face feature.
page.

page.
page.
page.
page.
Boss
The Boss feature removes all material between the boss curve and
the stock boundary.
- Chamfer
- Height
- Bottom radius
To create multiple bosses on a surface, use multiple curves to
create one boss feature only. This prevents the toolpaths from
overlapping with each other, and enables you to specify the
material you want to remain unmachined. None of the boss curves
should intersect or contain each other.When building multiple
bosses at the same height in the part, include all of the boss curves
in the same Boss feature.
Boss features remove material all the way to the stock boundary,
including any other features you may have placed above the boss
shoulder height. To limit the area milled away by the Boss feature,
use a stock curve (see page 224), or set the Total Stock (see page
1161) attribute.
If you use a , the toolpaths are trimmed to the stock to prevent air
cutting.
FeatureCAM follows this general process to create a Boss feature:

1 Conducts an analysis of the curve and, using tool diameter and
length as the selection criteria, determines the tool to use.
 For tool diameter, FeatureCAM analyzes the curve that defines
the Boss and selects the largest tool that can cut the boss
without gouging. (see Tool % of arc radius (see page 973)).
enough to cut to the bottom of the Boss height.
Endmills are automatically selected for the roughing and finishing
passes, but you can override the automatically (see page 682)
selected tool to specify a face mill.
2 Chooses feeds and speeds using the Feed/Speed database (see
page 1508) that you can customize. Feeds and speeds are
3 Performs a roughing pass, possibly in multiple Z steps based on
the height of the Boss.
influenced by Max ramp angle), by plunging, or by pre-drilling
(see Pre-drill diameter (see page 1161) and Pre-drill point (see
page 994)).
plunge cut.
 Vertical step — The rough pass can have vertical steps with
cut depth not more than 100% of the tool radius (see Rough
depth (see page 994) and Rough pass Z increment (see page
994)).
 Finish allowance — The rough pass contains a Finish allowance
attribute which controls how much material to leave for the
finishing pass. By default this is 0.02.

1 Performs a finishing pass. By default, the bottom is not finished.
controlled by Finish bottom, which finishes the bottom of a
feature with a flat endmill up to the beginning of any bottom
radius if present.
 Tool selection — After the roughing pass, the roughing tool is
used to finish the boss. Use Finish Tool (see page 936)
commands FeatureCAM to choose a separate finishing tool
(that has same characteristics unless you override them).
 Ramp on — The finish pass ramps into the material with an arc
equal to a percentage of the tool diameter (see Ramp diameter
(see page 994)).
 Finish passes and overlap — The tool goes around the boss a
 Ramp off — Uses another arc of the same size as the ramp on
to move the tool away from the finished wall.
 Retract — Removes the tool from the stock area and sets up
for the next operation.
884) dialog.
To create multi-height Boss features or islands in a Pocket feature
with different heights:
1 Create the curves for the Boss or island and translate it to its
proper location in Z.
2 Use this curve as a Boss curve or island curve for a pocket.
See also:
FeatureCAM 2.5D Milling algorithms (see page 716)

Tool override options
Operation type Automatically Possible user Notes
selected tool overrides
endmill
endmill
centerdrill,
countersink,
chamfer mill
See also:
types.
Creating a Boss feature

2 Select Boss and click Next to open the New Feature - Curves (see
page 533) page.
3 Select the curve that represents the shape of the feature. The
curve you select controls the shape of the Boss feature.

If you have multiple features at the same height, you can
create them as one feature by selecting multiple curves.

graphics window.
 Enter the Height of the boss. This sets the overall height of the
boss.
 Bottom Radius — Optionally set a bottom radius for the
feature. The radius corresponds to the shape of the cutter. By
default, the material is milled using a flat-bottomed mill,
making stair-step passes when close to the radius. Then a
rough and finishing pass is made with the radiused mill. The
default value is 0, which cuts a square corner.
for no chamfer.
page.
page.

By default, a boss uses the stock boundary as the outer extent of

the feature. To bound the extent of the boss cut:
(see page 884) dialog and click the Dimensions (see page 905)
tab.
2 Click the Stock curve button. Select the name of the curve you
want to use as the outer extent of the boss.
If Stock Boundary is selected, it indicates that the stock

boundary is used as the outer extent. The stock boundary
is automatically used as the outside extent of the boss only
when the current UCS is parallel to one of the block faces.
If your UCS is not parallel to a stock face, boss features
need to include a stock curve with them.
3 If you want the wall of your feature to have a special cross
section, click the X Section (see page 928) button to open a
dialog to select the curve that matches your cross-section shape.
4 Click OK.
Chamfer
The Chamfer feature creates an edge break along a curve with a
chamfering tool. To chamfer the entire upper edge of a curved
feature, use the optional Chamfer parameter on that feature. Use
the Chamfer feature to chamfer only a portion of the edge of a
feature.
- Width

- Depth
- Outside
- Inside
FeatureCAM follows this general process to create a Chamfer
feature:
1 Chooses a chamfermill tool (see page 1755) automatically from
the current tool crib, based on:
 the width and depth of the Chamfer,
 the tightest bend in the curve,
 and the corner radius and inner diameter of the rounding tool.
FeatureCAM considers the tool and Inner diameter to pick a tool
that has the exact width definitions to cut the Chamfer feature.
The inner radius of the tool is important because the tool must fit
into tight corners of the curve.
The width of the tool must be large enough to cut the depth
and width set for the chamfer.

You can override the automatic tool selection and select a
countersink tool (see page 1758). If you are using a countersink
tool, you may need to adjust your touch-off point to mill an
accurate chamfer.
You can change the default tool used for chamfer operations on
the Tool Selection tab (see page 1676) of the Machining Attributes
dialog.
2 Determines feeds and speeds based on the stock material being
machined. FeatureCAM chooses feeds and speeds for all of its
milling using the Feed/Speed database (see page 1508) that you
can customize.
3 Generates a roughing pass.
 Horizontal step — The horizontal step size is controlled by the
Distance between cuts attribute on the Stepovers tab (see page
985). If there is only one pass, there is no horizontal step
move.

For roughing, the Distance between cuts is the horizontal distance
between roughing toolpaths. The automatically calculated distance
is based on the setting of Rough pass stepover %. For finishing, it is
fixed to be the Finish allowance (see page 994). See Default
ramping for milled finish passes (see page 993) for more
information on finish pass ramping.
For Chamfers and Rounds this attribute enables multiple rough or
finish passes. The default value for roughing is the radius of the
Round feature or the largest dimension of the Chamfer feature. The
default value for finishing is the Finish allowance (see page 994). By
decreasing this value multiple roughing or finishing passes are
created by stepping in horizontally.
 Finish allowance — The Facing parameter that determines the
amount of material to leave after the roughing pass. By
default this is 0.02.
1 Generates a finishing pass. By default, the finish pass is turned
off and the entire feature is machined by the roughing pass. You
can change this on the Strategy page.
 Tool selection — After roughing, the roughing tool is used to
finish the Chamfer. Use Finish Tool (see page 936) commands
FeatureCAM to choose a separate finishing tool (that has the
same characteristics unless you override them).
 Horizontal step — The horizontal step size is controlled by the
Distance between cuts attribute on the Stepovers tab (see page
985). With only one pass, there is no horizontal step. The
contact point of the tool is controlled by the Through depth
attribute.
 Finish passes and overlap — The tool goes around the chamfer
a number of times set by Finish passes (see page 994), and

 Retract — This removes the tool from the stock area and sets
up for the next operation.
884) dialog.
Creating a Chamfer feature

2 Click Chamfer and then click Next to open the New Feature -
Curves (see page 533) page and select a curve from the Curve
list.
3 Click Next to open the New Feature - Machining Side (see page
534) page.
page.


graphics window.
Select the Select the chamfer type:
 2D Chamfer — Create a chamfer on a curve in the XY plane.
For a 2D Chamfer, enter the Width and Depth of the chamfer
edge break. Width and Depth settings are related to each
other as they must match the shape of a tool you have in
your tool crib in order to cut the described chamfer. For a 45
tool, Width and Depth must be equal.
 3D Chamfer — Create a chamfer on a planar curve that is not
in the XY plane, or on a non-planar curve.
For a 3D Chamfer, enter the Depth and Tip offset.
A 3D milling license is required to create chamfers on

non-planar curves.
page.
page.
page.
page.
page.

3D Chamfer tips
 The 3D Chamfer feature works best with small chamfer sizes, as
an edge break simply to remove a sharp burr. The toolpath
produces only an approximation of a 3D chamfer and the width
of the chamfer varies based on the geometry of the 3D curve
and the surrounding surfaces. At larger chamfer depths the
variation in size of the chamfer is magnified.
 The current toolpath uses an XY offset (from the top view) of the
3D curve. The direction of this offset is determined by the
Machining Side (see page 534) chosen for each curve. If the part
requires the chamfer tool to be on one side of the curve in one
region and the other side of the curve in another region, the full
chamfer cannot be cut with this technique. In these situations it
may be possible to split the chamfer curve into multiple curves
and use different machining sides for each curve, but this may
still prove difficult. A better solution, if possible, is to change the
Setup (5-axis position, index angle, B-axis angle and so on.) so
that the Machining Side becomes consistent for the whole curve
when viewed in the new orientation.
 When using a spotdrill, the more the edge break deviates out of
the XY plane, the worse the results are. For this reason a
ball-end mill is recommended when machining a 3D edge break
that deviates significantly from the XY plane. This isn’t because
of any deficiencies in our software, but due to the nature of the
tool geometry in general. When using drills or chamfered tools, it
is recommended that you use the smallest tool you can.
 To get the best result, adjust your index position so that the
deviation from the XY plane is balanced along the extent of the
curve.
 Selecting the part surfaces on either side of the chamfer, for best
results. This is especially true if the curve has steep or vertical
sections.
Groove
The Groove feature creates a groove of any shape.
FeatureCAM enables you to create two types of Groove feature.
They are:
 Face (see page 690) grooves (Regular and Simple).
 Inside/outside (see page 695) grooves (Simple only).

The centerline of a Groove is defined by a curve. Select more than
one curve if you want to create multiple grooving cuts with one
Groove feature. The curves can be open (ends do not touch) or
closed (beginning and end points are the same).
Face grooves
Face groove properties:
 They can be of any shape and can even intersect with itself.
 Regular grooves can be cut to any width using multiple passes.
 If the groove is Simple, the curve can be 3D.
Face grooves can be:
Regular Face grooves — These can have a Width, Depth, Bottom
Radius, and Chamfer.
- Width
- Depth
- Bottom Radius
- Chamfer
Simple Face grooves — These cannot have a Chamfer.
- Width
- Depth
- Bottom Radius

Simple face grooves are cut with one horizontal pass, with a tool,
whose diameter matches the groove's width. For one-pass
engraving, select a Simple groove; this performs a single
manufacturing pass along the curve.
Plunge points (see page 994) and ramping parameters are

ignored for Simple grooves.
Regular Face grooves
Regular grooves are machined similarly to pockets, and include both
a roughing and a finishing pass.
For a regular groove, FeatureCAM uses the following process:
1 Determines the type of tool to use based on the groove width
and depth. Using the tool diameter and tool length as the tool
selection criteria, selects the tool from the current tool crib.
 For tool diameter FeatureCAM uses the width of the groove to
determine what diameter tool to use. The tool needs to fit into
the groove, but still allow room for a finish allowance on both
walls of the groove.
 For tool length FeatureCAM picks a tool that has flutes long
enough to reach the bottom of the groove.

You can override the automatically (see page 682) selected

tool.
3 Performs a roughing pass, possibly in multiple Z steps depending
upon the depth of the groove.
The important aspects of roughing are as follows.
page 994)).
plunge cut.
Zigzag is not an option if the groove has no linear

portion. Simple grooves support only plunging.

994)).
 Horizontal stepover — Although not typically necessary,
FeatureCAM can perform a horizontal stepover to manufacture
a groove. FeatureCAM moves a percentage of the tool
diameter laterally (controlled with Rough pass %), as it steps
across the feature.
1 Performs a finishing pass. By default, the bottom is not finished.
controlled by Finish bottom (see page 936).
used to finish the boss. Use finish tool (see page 936)
(that has same characteristics unless you override them).
(see page 994)).
 Finish passes and overlap — The tool goes around the groove a
 Ramp off — Another arc of the same size as the ramp on
moves the tool away from the finished wall.
884) dialog.

Simple face grooves
Simple face grooves, also called engraving grooves, offer a
single-pass approach to milling a groove. Simple face grooves are
cut with one horizontal pass with a tool whose diameter matches
the groove's width.
Plunge points (see page 994) and ramping (see page 994)
parameters are ignored for Simple grooves.
For a simple groove, FeatureCAM uses the following process:
1 Determines what tool to use based only on the groove width.
This is the same as for a regular groove (see page 691), except
that the tool diameter must equal the groove width. You can
override the automatically (see page 682) selected tool.
2 Uses slotting feeds and speeds based upon the material being
machined. This is the same as for a regular groove, except that
slotting feeds and speeds are used.
3 Generates a single pass, possibly in multiple Z steps depending
on the depth of the groove. Roughing and finishing are
performed in a single pass. There is only one operation shown in
the tree view, and it is called Slot. The critical aspects are as
follows.
 Direction of cut — This can be controlled on the Strategy page.
 Horizontal stepover — Is not available for this feature type.
The tool diameter must be equal to the groove width.
 Finish allowance — Is not available for this feature type. The
tool diameter must be equal to the groove width.
3D simple face grooves are approximated with lines and

arcs, if the arcs lie in the XY, YZ or XZ planes.

Simple grooves have an option of using a trochoidal toolpath.
Instead of a simple slotting cut, the tool uses a series of
circles to clear away the metal, as shown below. This toolpath
has the advantage of reducing the load on the tool.
Using zigzag ramping to mill a helical path for a simple Groove

Zigzag ramping can be used with a simple Groove feature to create
a generalized helical toolpath.
To produce this toolpath:

1 Set Max ramp angle to 90 .
2 Set Max ramp distance to a very large number like 1000.
3 Set Rough pass Z increment to a value less than the depth of the
feature. In one pass around the Groove, the tool spirals down in
Z an amount equal to Rough pass Z increment.
An alternative way to create the generalized helical toolpath is to:
1 Set Max ramp distance to 1000.
2 Set Rough pass Z increment to the depth of the feature.
3 Use the Max ramp angle to control the slope of the toolpath.

Inside/Outside grooves
Inside/Outside grooves are side grooves machined using keyseat
cutters, and include both a roughing and finishing pass.
- Depth
- Width
They can:
 be of any non-intersecting shape that is open enough to allow a
cutter to enter, operate, and exit;
 only cut to widths of tools you have available;
 and only cut to the tool's shape by default.
If you load special tools and create multiple grooves, you can
achieve special effects.
For an ID/OD groove, FeatureCAM uses the following process:
1 Determines what tool to use based on the width and depth of the
groove, and from the current tool crib, picks a keyseat tool using
the length and diameter as the tool selection criteria.
 Tool length is determined based on the depth of the groove.
The tool needs to fit all the way into the depth of the groove.
If multiple steps need to be taken to manufacture the groove,
then those steps can be made to reach the full depth.
 Tool width is matched to the width of the groove within a
small tolerance. If the groove is too big, then you get a tool
selection error.
If a tool can't be found that meets the criteria, then you get an
error and NC code isn't generated.
2 Chooses feeds and speeds for milling using the customizable
Feed/Speed database (see page 1508). Feeds and speeds are
determined based on the stock material.

3 Generates a roughing pass. The groove is first cut down the
center of the groove, with subsequent passes alternating on
either side of the center. Different allowances are possible on the
walls and bottom (see page 994) of the groove.
The amount of material to leave on the walls of an ID/OD groove.
Finish allowance
Bottom
Wall
Wall finish allowance
 Getting to depth — There are two aspects to getting the
keyseat cutter to depth. The tool must first move down in Z,
and then it must plunge into the metal. For the down move,
the keyseat cutter simply plunges down. You must have air
underneath the cutter for this move. You may set the pre-drill
point to determine where the keyseat cutter is lowered in Z.
Then the tool plunges into the material horizontally. There are
no options to control the plunge into the material.
 Vertical step — No vertical steps are taken. You get a tool
selection error if the tool width is not exactly as wide as the
groove.
 Horizontal stepover — Rough pass stepover can override the
horizontal stepover into the groove. Otherwise FeatureCAM
automatically takes as many steps as it needs to cut to the
full depth of the groove. The default is 33% of the tool
diameter.
 Finish allowance — The Facing parameter that determines the
amount of material to leave after the roughing pass. By
default this is 0.02.

1 Generate a finishing pass. The finishing pass is based on the
Finish walls (see page 969) and Wall pass attributes.
Wall pass applies only to the finishing passes of milling

features where the bottom is finished.
Finish allowance
Wall pass
Floor pass
If Wall pass is disabled, then the floor is finished all the way out to
the wall in a single pass. The wall is not finished separately.
For OD/ID grooves if this attribute is selected, then the bottom is
finished separately from the walls of the groove.
Finish allowance
Bottom
Wall
finish the groove. Use Finish Tool (see page 936) commands
 Ramp on — This makes the finish pass ramps into the material
with an arc equal to a percentage of the tool diameter (see
Ramp diameter (see page 994)).

 Finish passes and overlap — The tool goes around the groove a
 Ramp off — This uses another arc of the same size as the
ramp on moves the tool away from the finished wall.
884) dialog.
Creating a Groove feature

To create a Groove feature:

2 Click Groove, then click Next to open the New Feature - Curves
(see page 533) page.

page.

graphics window.
5 Select whether your groove is a Face, or Inside/Outside groove.
 Face — This sets the groove to cut on the XY plane of the
current Setup.
 Inside/Outside — This sets the groove to run on the inside or
outside of a closed curve.
6 If you are creating a Face groove:
 If your groove is a simple groove, select Simple. Simple
designates the groove to be cut with a single pass along the
curve with a tool diameter equal to the Width of the groove.
 Width — Enter the width of the Groove feature.
 Optionally select Through to change the modeling of the
groove if it helps you display your part better.
Through controls the graphical representation of the part. If
Through is set, the Curve Groove is modelled with a bottom.
 Optionally enter a Bottom Radius (see page 733).
 For a non-simple groove, optionally enter a Chamfer, which
sets the depth of a 45 chamfer cut at the top edge of the
feature.
7 If you are creating an Inside/Outside groove:

 If the curve is at the bottom of the groove, select the Curve at
bottom option.
 Depth — Enter the depth of the Groove feature.
 Click Next to open the New Feature - Machining Side (see page
534) and preview the groove in the Graphics window.
 An outside groove uses the curve as the outside of the
groove. An inside groove uses the curve as the inside of the
groove. Click the Switch machining side button to toggle
between the two types of grooves.
page.
page.
page.
page.
page.
Pocket
The Pocket feature creates a pocket of any shape. If you want to
create a simple pocket with a rounded-rectangular cross-section,
use the Rectangular Pocket feature. A Pocket can have an arbitrary
number of islands within the outer boundary.
- Chamfer
- Depth
- Bottom radius

The island curves must be contained within the boundary
curve and the island curves may not touch.
length as the selection criteria, selects a tool from the current
tool crib.
the pocket to determine what size tool to use. FeatureCAM
uses the largest tool that can fit in the corner and the tightest
passage of the feature. The largest tool that can cut the
pocket without gouging is selected (See Tool % of arc radius
(see page 973)).
enough to cut to the bottom of the pocket.
3 Performs a roughing pass, possibly in multiple Z steps based on
the height of the boss.
page 994)).
plunge cut.
994)).

used to finish the pocket. Use Finish Tool (see page 936)
(that has the same characteristics unless you override them).
(see page 994)).
 Finish passes and overlap — The tool goes around the pocket a
 Ramp off — Uses another arc of the same size as the ramp on
884) dialog.
Creating a Pocket feature

To create a Pocket feature:

2 Select Pocket and then click Next to open the New Feature -
Curves (see page 533) page. You can use one curve for the
boundary, or if you have multiple pockets that have the same
depth, you can select multiple curves. Press and hold the Ctrl key
while you select the curves with the mouse to select multiple
curves.
page. The Location page shows you the Z height of the curve.
Enter an offset value if you want to change the height of the
pocket.

graphics window.
for no chamfer.
 Bottom Radius (see page 733) — Optionally set a bottom
radius for the feature. The radius corresponds to the shape of
the cutter. By default, the material is milled using a
flat-bottomed mill, making stair-step passes when close to the
radius. Then a rough and finishing pass is made with the
radiused mill. The default value is 0, which cuts a square
corner.
page.
page.

If you need to specify Islands for the pocket or a different cross
section for the walls:
Islands are regions left uncut with a pocket. Island curves must be
contained within the boundary curve and they cannot touch or
overlap. Clicking Islands opens the Select Islands dialog. There are a
number of methods of selecting curves in the select curve dialog
box. To remove all of the islands from a pocket, click Unselect All.

(see page 884) dialog and click the Dimensions (see page 905)
tab.
2 On the Dimensions tab, you can:
 Set boundaries, defined by curves, that are not milled with
the rest of the pocket.
 Click X section (see page 928) to enter a cross section curve
for the feature.
3 Click OK.
Round
A Round feature creates an edge break along a curve with a
rounding tool.
Inside
Outside
Radius
The shape of the Round is defined by a curve. Select more than one
curve if you want to create a Round along multiple curves with one
feature. The curves can be open (the ends do not touch) or closed
(the beginning and the end points are the same).
In general, FeatureCAM uses the following process to create a
Round feature:
1 Conducts an analysis of the curve and based on the specified
radius of the round and on the tightest bend in the curve, using
corner radius and inner diameter of the rounding tool as the tool
selection criteria, selects a tool from the current tool crib.
 For corner radius, FeatureCAM picks a tool that has exactly
the same corner radius as the Round feature.
 For inner radius, FeatureCAM analyzes the curve that defines
the rounds and determines the tool that fits into the tightest
corners of the curve.

When no tool meets the criteria, an error is displayed and NC
code is not generated.
determined based on the stock material.
3 Generates a roughing pass. The important aspects of roughing
are as follows:
 Getting to depth — The tool needs to get to depth and this is
accomplished by plunging.
 Vertical step — There is no vertical step, but the horizontal
step size is controlled by the Distance between cuts attribute
on the Stepovers (see page 985) tab.
 Finish allowance (see page 994) — The rough pass contains a
Finish allowance attribute which controls how much material to
leave for the finishing pass. By default this is 0.02.
1 If activated, generates a finish pass. By default, the finish pass is
turned off and the entire feature is machined by the roughing
pass. This can be changed on the Strategy page.
finish the round. Use Finish Tool (see page 936) commands
 Vertical Step — There is no vertical step, but the horizontal
step size is controlled by the Distance between cuts attribute
on the Stepovers (see page 985) tab.

 Finish passes and overlap — The tool goes around the Round a
884) dialog.
Creating a Round feature

To create a Round feature:

2 Select Round, then click Next to open the New Feature - Curves
(see page 533) page.
534) page.
page. The Location page shows you the Z height of the curve.
Enter an offset value if you want to change the height of the
round.

graphics window.
1 Enter a value for the Radius of the edge break. This corresponds
to the radius of the rounding tool selected to cut the feature.

page.
page.
Side
The Side feature provides low-level manufacturing control when you
need customized manufacturing that is not addressed by either the
Boss feature or the Pocket feature.
- Chamfer
- Depth
- Bottom radius
The Side feature is useful for:
 Outside part boundaries where the Side feature has special
attributes for controlling the starting point of the cut and for
controlling the region that is cut.
 Features defined by open curves have endpoints which do not
meet.
The region that is cut for a Side feature is controlled by one of the
following:
 The stock boundary, which is extracted automatically for you if
you do not explicitly specify a Stock Curve.

 The Stock Curve that you provide for the Side feature.
 The offset distance specified by the Total Stock attribute.
If you set the Total Stock attribute to a positive number, then a
roughing pass and finish pass are performed in the region between
your Side feature and a curve offset by the Total Stock value. To
perform only a single pass around your feature, set the Total Stock
attribute to a positive value and set Finish Allowance to 0 to turn off
the finish cut.
Do not create a Side feature from a curve that extends more

than a tool radius from the stock boundary. The
manufacturing of these features is unpredictable. To correct
this problem, move your curve onto the stock boundary or to
within a tool radius of the boundary.
If you use a Side feature with a stock solid (see page 223), the
toolpaths are trimmed to the stock to prevent air cutting.
FeatureCAM follows this general process to create a Side feature:

length as the selection criteria, selects a tool from the current
tool crib. The most important criteria are diameter and length.
the Side to determine what size tool to use. The smallest
corner and tightest passage determine the largest tool that
can cut the Side without gouging (See Tool % of arc radius
(see page 973)).
 For tool length FeatureCAM picks a tool that has flutes long
enough to cut to the bottom of the side.
If no tool meets the criteria, an error is displayed and NC code is
not generated.
2 Chooses feeds and speeds for all of its milling using the
3 Generates a roughing pass, possibly in multiple Z steps based on
the depth of the Side feature.
 Getting to depth — The tool needs to get to depth, and this is
accomplished by a zigzag in Z (the default setting and
influenced by Max ramp angle), by plunging, or by predrilling
page 994)). For open curves, Lead distance and Lead in/out
angles control the horizontal approach to the material.

The Lead-out angle applies only over the Lead-out distance, so if the
Lead-out distance is 0, the Lead-out angle has no effect. The Lead-out
angle is applied to the end of the finish pass for an open toolpath. It
also applies to the last toolpath of a roughing pass if the Finish
allowance is set to 0.
The Lead-in angle applies only over the Lead-in distance, so if the
Lead-in distance is 0, the Lead-in angle has no effect.
Lead distance in/out is the linear distance that a tool path extends
beyond the ends of an open toolpath or toolpaths that are clipped
against the stock profile. This parameter is specified as a
percentage of the tool's diameter. If Lead Distance is set to 0.0, the
toolpath starts or stops exactly at the ends of the profile.
- Lead-in/out angle
- Lead distance in/out

plunge cut.
 Vertical step — FeatureCAM's cut depth is no more than 100%
of the tool radius (see Rough depth (see page 994) and Rough
pass Z increment (see page 994)).
%) as it steps across the feature.
 Finish allowance (see page 994) — The rough pass contains a
Finish allowance attribute which controls how much material to
leave for the finishing pass. By default this is 0.02.

used to finish the side. Use finish tool (see page 936)
(that has the same characteristics unless you override them).
 Ramp on — The finish pass ramp into the material with an arc
(see page 994)). For open curves, Lead distance and Lead
in/out angles control the horizontal approach and exit from the
material.
- Lead-in/out angle
 Finish passes and overlap — The tool goes across or around

the side a number of times set by Finish passes (see page
994), and overlaps the starting point by an amount controlled
by Finish overlap (see page 994).
 Ramp off — Uses another arc of the same size as the Ramp on

884) dialog.
Creating a Side feature

To create a Side feature:

2 Select Side and click Next to open the New Feature - Curves (see
page 533) page. Select a curve from the Curve list. The curve
can be a closed loop or an open curve in which the end points do
not meet.
534) page.
page. The Z height of the curve is displayed. If you want to
offset the feature in Z, specify an Offset value.


graphics window.
 Bottom Radius - Optionally set a bottom radius for the feature.
for no chamfer.
page.
page.

By default, an outer Side feature uses the stock boundary as the

outer extent of the feature. You can limit the extent of the Side cut
using a Stock Curve (see page 224). If the UCS is not parallel to the
Stock face, you must use a Stock Curve for Side features.
You can select a Side Curve (see page 928) to describe the shape of
the feature's cross-section.
Cross section (X section) for Boss, Side, or Pocket

You can define the shape of the walls of a Boss, Side, or Pocket
feature by specifying a cross-section curve. This curve is swept
along the curve of the feature to create the overall shape. The curve
must be:
 in the XY plane, with the starting point of the curve at (0,0) in
the setup axis; or
For example,
use this cross-section to create this feature:
curve:
 in place on the feature curve.

For example,
curve:

The curve must be a function in X and Y. This means that when you draw a
vertical line parallel to the X or Y-axis through the curve at any point, it can
only intersect the curve once.
2.5D roughing toolpaths overview

For Pocket, Rectangular Pocket, and Boss features, FeatureCAM
provides several different milling methods for roughing.


always parallel.

boundary.


- Roughing region
- Finish allowance

attribute.

g Mill g Mill
Angle Angle
0 No 180 Yes
0 Yes 180 No
90 Yes -90 No

90 No -90 Yes
next.
side.

50%.


Options dialog:



NT Spiral example
This example part includes a Boss feature and a Pocket feature,
outlined in red:

This is a centerline simulation of the Boss feature using the
traditional Stepover type of Spiral:
This is the same feature cut using the new technology Stepover type
of NT Spiral:
This is a centerline simulation of This is the right Pocket cut using

the left Pocket feature using the the new technology Stepover type
traditional Stepover type of Spiral: of NT Spiral:

2.5D Vortex toolpaths
To create a 2.5D Vortex toolpath, select Vortex from the Stepover
list on the Strategy tab (see page 936) of the Feature Properties
dialog:
You must have the FeatureRECOGNITION module to use

Vortex for 2.5D roughing.
The 3D HSM and 3D MX modules include
FeatureRECOGNITION, 3D LITE does not.
You can use Vortex to machine most 2.5D feature types.

You can use Vortex to machine a Side feature only if the curve is
closed. If the curve is open and you select a Stepover of Vortex, NT
Spiral is used instead.
2.5D Vortex example

This example shows how Vortex machines pockets, channels, and
narrow corners.
For more information on the general principles of Vortex machining,
see the 3D Vortex and step cutting example.

Using a 2.5D model:
Create a Vortex toolpath:

For pockets, the tool spirals down into the pocket before using
trochoidal paths over the full-width cuts.
On completion of the initial full-width cut, the trochoids are placed

in the corners where the maximum tool engagement angle would
otherwise be exceeded.
Differences between Traditional and NT toolpaths

Pre-drill differences
There are some differences with how the Pre-drill operation works
with the NT toolpaths compared to the traditional toolpaths.
 You can use a Pre-drill operation with the NT Zigzag toolpath. It is
not available for the traditional Zigzag toolpath.

 With the NT toolpaths, zigzag ramping is automatically disabled
when you use a Pre-drill operation. This is not supported for the
original Spiral toolpath and you must set the Max. ramp angle to 0
to disable zigzag ramping when using a Pre-drill operation.
 The Pre-drill operation for the NT toolpaths includes the tops of
multi-height islands (not supported for the original toolpaths).
 The traditional Spiral toolpath supports manual plunge points for
the pre-drill locations using the Plunge point(s) attribute. The NT
toolpaths support only automatic locations.
Stepover differences
There are some differences in the attributes available for NT
toolpaths on the feature Stepover tab:
There are two Ramp type options for the NT toolpaths:
 Smooth — This is similar to the traditional toolpath option S-type
 Direct — This is similar to the traditional toolpath option Line.
You can specify separate Lead-in and Lead-out options for NT
toolpaths:
The NT toolpaths have an Approach from outside option. This option

automatically adds a very small lead-in whenever the tool is
plunging off the stock. When you select this option, the lead-in
options are disabled. Deselect it to manually specify the lead-in as a
line, arc, and/or toolpath extension.

The Angle attribute for NT toolpaths supports only positive
angles. The direction relative to the toolpath is determined
automatically.
Minimize tool retract differences

Using the Minimize tool retract options with the NT toolpaths gives
better results than with the traditional toolpaths.
Pocket feature
For a Pocket feature, the toolpath slot cuts following the offsets
instead of just a straight line. There are fewer plunges than with
traditional toolpaths.
Traditional toolpath example:
NT toolpath example:

Boss feature
For a Boss feature, the toolpath has a lot fewer retracts and plunges
at the edge of the Stock.

Other differences
On the Milling (see page 1161) tab, NT toolpaths have a Stepover
rapid distance attribute, which controls when to retract and plunge
on Boss stepovers. This is an absolute distance and replaces the
Min. rapid distance % attribute used by the traditional toolpaths.
You can use the Output Options dialog to control how the points of a
toolpath are processed in the NC program. For 2.5D features, this
dialog is only available for NT toolpaths.
Draft angles
Draft angle — Optionally set an angle for the feature wall. Use only
positive numbers. Using tapered tools or ball end taper tools
improves the quality of tapers and bottom and corner radii. These
manufacturing attributes affect draft angles:
 Draft flat scallop height
Rough
pass
Draft flat
Draft
radius
Flat bottom
Finish
pass
Corner
See also:
Manufacturing steps for milled features with bottom radius regions
(see page 733)
 Draft radius scallop height
Finish pass
Draft taper
Draft radius
Corner
Flat bottom
Rough pass

See also:
(see page 733)
 Radius tool scallop height
Finish pass
Draft taper
Draft radius
Corner
Flat bottom
Rough pass
Draft angles are cut as much as possible with flat tools and floors
are finished with flat tools. Tapered operations are used only if
requested and an appropriate tapered tool exists. An error is
displayed if the operation is requested and an appropriate tool is not
found.
Bull-nosed tools are supported and used if no ball-end tools are
found. No differentiation is made between bull-nosed and ball-end
tools.
More about draft angles

Here is a short list of criteria that affect the manufacture of draft
angles:
 A tool of the exact size radius is not required to finish the
feature, but without the exact size, the pass generally leaves a
scallop.
 The finish operation with a tapered tool only goes down to the
intersection of the straight side and the bottom radius.
 The rough operations are generated unless the scallop height is
set to 0.
 Scallops are never at the top edge of the feature except when
cut with flat-end tools.

Bottom radius
Bottom radius — Optionally set a bottom radius for the feature. The
radius corresponds to the shape of the cutter. By default, the
material is milled using a flat-bottomed mill, making stair-step
passes when close to the radius. Then a rough and finishing pass is
made with the radiused mill. The default value is 0, which cuts a
square corner.
Manufacturing steps for milled features with bottom radius regions or

cross sections
Features with a bottom radius have additional steps:
- Rough pass
- Draft flat
- Finish pass
- Draft radius
- Corner
- Flat bottom
1 Rough up to bottom radius with flat end tool leaving finish
allowance on bottom.
a Rough down to bottom radius with flat end tool.
b Rough bottom radius region with radius tool to reduce stair
steps on wall.
2 Finish floor with flat end tool.
3 Finish tight corners missed by steps 1 and 2 using a radiused
tool
4 Finish corner radius and walls with radius tool.

3D surface milling feature (3D LITE)
The options available to you for 3D milling depend on which 3D
milling product you have.
The main differences between the three 3D products are:
3D Lite 3D MX 3D HSM
 Single surface Everything in 3D Lite, Everything in 3D MX,
 Z-level rough plus: plus:
 Parallel rough  Multiple surfaces  Plunge roughing
 Parallel finish  Feature Recognition  Pencil
 Isoline  Z-level finish  Remachine
 2D spiral  Radial  Steep and shallow
 Flowline  3D spiral
 Four-axis
 Horizontal +
vertical
 Between curves
 Swarf
You need 3D MX or 3D HSM to use 5-axis Simultaneous.

To mill a 3D surface, you must create a Surface milling feature from
the surface(s). A Surface milling feature enables you to generate
toolpaths using a number of 3D toolpath techniques.
A 3D surface milling feature is made up of one or more 3D milling
operations. For example, a single feature may both rough and finish
the part surfaces. The New Feature (see page 735) wizard helps you
create a feature and its initial operation. After the initial feature is
created, you can edit the feature to further control how it is
manufactured, or add additional operations.
3D Milling methods
You have a number of options for milling a 3D feature. The object is
to select a method that is efficient for your feature's shape and that
also gives an acceptable finish.
Z level rough (see page 759)
Z level finishing (see page 771)
Isoline milling (see page 772)
Pencil milling (see page 776)
Remachining (see page 789)
Recommended Machining Strategies

Roughing
Semi-finishing and finishing strategies
Finishing models with few surfaces
Finishing walls of pocket or boss shapes with a 3D floor
Creating a 3D surface milling feature

To create a 3D surface milling feature:

2 Select Surface Milling, then click Next to open the New Feature -
Part Surfaces page. Pick or add the surface, or surfaces (3D MX
(see page 10)), that you want to machine.
3 Click Next to open the New Strategy page. Choose whether to use
a rough, semi-finish, and finish operations to completely machine
the feature or just a single operation.
You can add or remove strategies later on the Process (see

page 1054) tab of the Feature Properties (see page 884)
dialog.
4 If you select Choose rough, semi-finish, and finish operations to
completely machine this feature, the wizard takes you through
three separate pages:

 New Strategy - Rough (see page 739)
 New Strategy - Semi-Finish (see page 740)
 New Strategy - Finish (see page 741)
5 If you select Choose a single operation, there is just one page
where you can choose a strategy (see page 742). Some
strategies have additional options on the following Strategy page.
The options on the Strategy page of the wizard are the same as
the Strategy (see page 1060) tab in the Feature Properties (see
page 884) dialog.
6 Depending on the strategy you choose, you may see the Edges,
Stock, and Slopes pages. These pages of the wizard contain the
same options as the Edges (see page 1115), Stock (see page
1123), and Slopes (see page 1133) tabs in the Feature Properties
page.

New Strategy
Use the New Strategy page of the New Feature wizard to specify the
machining strategy for the 3D Surface Milling feature you are
creating.
Select an option:
 Choose rough, semi-finish, and finish operations to completely
machine this feature — Create a surface milling feature that
contains multiple operations. This enables you to create the
roughing, semi-rough and finish operations quickly using the
wizard.
 Choose a single operation — Create a feature which contains a
single operation. For example, you can create just the roughing
operation, and create the finishing operations later.
New Strategy (single operation)

Use the New Strategy page of the New Feature wizard to specify the
machining strategy for a 3D Surface Milling feature with a single
operation.
Select a machining strategy:
Finishing Strategies
 Parallel (see page 745) - toolpaths that are parallel to the X or Y
axes.

 Z level finish (see page 771) - toolpaths that are parallel to the
XY plane.
 Isoline milling (see page 772) - toolpaths that follow the rows or
columns of individual surfaces.
 2D spiral (see page 749) - Toolpaths that move in a spiral toward
or away from the center of the part. Stepover is constant from
the top view.
or away from the center of the part. Stepover is constant in 3D.
 Radial milling (see page 759) - toolpaths that move out radially
from the center of the feature.
 Flowline milling (see page 773) - toolpaths that follow the rows
or columns of a flowline surface which are then projected onto
the part.
 Between 2 curves (see page 776) - toolpaths that are created
between two specified curves.
Roughing Strategies
 Z level rough (see page 759) - toolpaths that are parallel to the
XY plane.
 Plunge roughing (see page 779) - toolpaths which remove large
amounts of material from a component through a series of
vertical plunging movements.
axes.
Specialized Strategies
 Horizontal + Vertical (see page 778) - machine steep and
shallow regions using different techniques.
 Corner Remachining (see page 786) - A remachining technique
used to clean up corners that occur between non-tangential
surfaces.
 Pencil milling (see page 776) - a single clean-up pass for corners.
 4-Axis Rotary (see page 781) - used in turnmill to machine round
surfaces with an X tool.
 Swarf (see page 794) - toolpaths are cut using the side of the
tool. The tool is in constant contact with the surface.
 5-Axis Trim (see page 800) - toolpaths that are along the edges
of surfaces. There is the option to cut on the inside or outside
edge of the surface.

For more details on these options, see operations overview (see
page 742).
New strategy — Rough

This page helps you select the roughing stage. In this stage you
remove the majority of the material.
1 Enter the Tool Diameter. This is the diameter of the tool. The tool
is a flat end tool for Z level rough and a ball end tool for all other
operations.
2 Enter the Finish Allowance. This is the amount of material left
after a 3D roughing pass.
3 Enter the Tolerance. This sets how close the milling is to the
mathematically ideal surface. This does not guarantee that your
feature is machined to this tolerance in all locations if the tool
you select is incapable of cutting within that tolerance in
constrained areas. If your part shows a faceted appearance, set
the tolerance to a lower value.
4 Select the roughing operation type from:
 Z Level Rough (see page 759) — You must set Classify slices
as either 3D Pocket or 3D Boss.
You can tell FeatureCAM to rough your part as a 3D Pocket, or as a
3D Boss. If you select 3D Pocket, the tool plunges or ramps onto the
part and cuts from the inside of the part out toward the boundary of
the part. A 3D Boss typically plunges off the part and cuts from the
outside toward the center.
Even if the surfaces of your part create a boss shape (meaning it
protrudes instead of being a cavity), you can still select 3D Pocket.
The first image below shows the slices of a part being cut as a boss,
and the second as a pocket. Notice that the slides of the boss go all
the way around the part at each slice, but the pocket example has
slices that just cut a region of the part.

 Plunge (see page 779) (3D HSM (see page 10)) — You must
also decide if you want a Honeycomb pattern.
Plunge roughing is performed in either a straight rectangular
pattern, as shown below:
or a honeycomb pattern in which each row is offset horizontally by

half the rough pass stepover amount:
The honeycomb pattern is usually preferable. The Honeycomb

pattern attribute controls the pattern type.
 None — Select this option if you don't want a rough pass.
New strategy — Semi-Finish

Use this page to select the semi-finish strategy. The semi-finish
stage is used to cut the part to within the finish allowance.
1 Enter the Tool Diameter. This is the diameter of the tool. The tool
is a flat end tool for Z level rough and a ball end tool for all other
operations.
2 Enter the Finish Allowance. This is the amount of material left
after a 3D roughing pass.
4 Select the semi-finishing operation type from among:

 Parallel (see page 745) — For Direction, select X parallel to cut
parallel to the X-axis or Y parallel to cut parallel to the Y-axis.
You can also optionally enter a Parallel angle.
 Z Semi (see page 761) — Perform a single Z level semi-finish
operation.
 Z Finish (see page 771) (3D MX (see page 10))
 None — Select this option if you don't want a semi-finish pass.
New strategy — Finish

Select the finishing strategy to finish the manufacturing of your
part.
1 Select Compute tool diameter based on surface curvature for
automatic tool selection.
2 Select Set tool diameter and enter a specific diameter to override
automatic tool selection.
4 Select the finishing operation type from:
 Horizontal + Vertical (see page 778) (3D MX (see page 10)) —
Enter Slope boundary and Slope overlap parameters.
 Isoline (see page 772)
 Parallel (see page 745)
 Z level (see page 771) (3D MX (see page 10))
 None — Select this option if you don't want a finish pass.
Tool selection for 3D milling features

FeatureCAM selects a default tool for all 3D finish operations.
On the Tools tab, there is an option to use the part's curvature to
select the default tool. If you select this option, FeatureCAM
analyzes all included surfaces and finds the smallest concave radius
of curvature and a ball-end tool closest to that radius is selected.
Tool selection looks at the sides of the surfaces you are

machining. If you flip to the other side, a different tool might
be selected.

Types of 3D milling strategy
Parallel Finish (3D LITE) — This is best suited

to rectangular models and works by taking a
pattern of curves, within a boundary, and
projecting points from these curves onto the
model. Parallel toolpaths are often used on
open parts, whereas 3D Spiral toolpaths work
well in the bottom of pockets. This is a robust
machining strategy that works well on many
models, except for areas that are vertical (or
near-vertical). More about Parallel (see page
745).
Z level finish (3D MX) — This creates a toolpath
by slicing the model at specific Z heights. This
works well on near-vertical surfaces that
require a consistent depth of cut. More about Z
level finish (see page 771).
2D Spiral (3D LITE (see page 10)) — This

strategy projects a spiral pattern onto the
model, which is then machined. More about 2D
Spiral (see page 749).
3D Spiral (3D HSM (see page 10)) — This

strategy is best suited to machining areas that
require a constant stepover and works well on
near-horizontal surfaces. It creates a series of
offsets starting at the outer boundary and
offsetting towards the center. More about 3D
Spiral (see page 755).
Isoline (3D LITE) — This strategy uses the
isoline curves of a surface to mill the surface.
These curves can be in the row direction or
column direction. More about Isoline milling
(see page 772) and isoline curves (see page
347).

Radial (3D MX) — This strategy creates a radial
pattern within a boundary and projects it onto
the model. More about Radial (see page 759).
Flowline (3D MX) — This strategy drives

surface machining. Creates a pattern from the
flowline surface and projects it onto the model.
More about Flowline (see page 773).
Between 2 curves (3D MX (see page 10)) —

This strategy limits machining to be between
two curves. You can set the direction of
toolpath to along or across.
More about Between 2 curves (see page 776).
Pencil (3D HSM) — This strategy creates a

single trace corner toolpath. It is used to clean
up corners that occur between non-tangential
surfaces. They are automatically calculated
inside any existing boundary. More about
Pencil (see page 776).
Z level roughing (3D LITE) — This strategy

clears an area with contours generated by
repeatedly offsetting the initial slice until no
further offset is possible. More about Z level
roughing (see page 759).
Plunge roughing (3D HSM) — A specialized

cutting tool is used to remove large amounts of
material through a series of vertical plunging
movements. More about Plunge roughing (see
page 779).

Corner Remachine (3D HSM (see page 10)) —
This strategy creates a multiple trace corner
toolpath with Across or Along options. More
about Corner (see page 786) remachining.
Horizontal + Vertical remachining (3D MX) —

This strategy combines two different toolpath
operations, one for finishing shallow portions of
the part and a Z-level for finishing the steep
regions. More about Horizontal + Vertical (see
page 778) remachining.
5-axis trim (5AS (see page 10)) — This strategy

enables you to pick a selection of surfaces and
profile around the outside of these surfaces.
More about 5-Axis Trim (see page 800).
Swarf (3D MX) — This strategy cuts with the

side of the tool and works only on developable
surfaces because the tool needs to be in
contact with the surface for the whole cutting
depth.
For a tool to swarf cut, it has to be able to
have contact with the surface at all points
along the cutting edge of the tool. For
non-developable surfaces, FeatureCAM always
leaves material on or produce fragmented
toolpaths (rather than gouge).
Four-axis Rotary (3D MX (see page 10)) — This
strategy creates a toolpath by rotating the
model around the index axis, with linear
motion provided by the non-index axis
coordinate pairs. More about Four-axis Rotary
(see page 781).

Steep and Shallow (3D HSM) — This strategy
calculates a shallow boundary, and then
creates a Z-level toolpath in the steep areas of
the model and a Parallel or 3D Spiral toolpath
in the shallow areas.
Parallel milling
Projection milling techniques are a robust and easily understood
method of generating 3D toolpaths. They work by taking a pattern
of curves and projecting points from these curves onto the surfaces
of the part.
Advantages
 It is robust.
 It handles overlapping surfaces well.
 It is good for multiple surface manufacturing.
 It lets you specify planar stepover distances or scallop heights for
finishing.
 Surface normals are not considered for the manufacturing
computation.
Disadvantages
 It has poor handling of near-vertical surfaces.
 It does not handle vertical surfaces because they are invisible
from above.
Parallel toolpaths
Parallel toolpaths are parallel to the X axis or Y axis of the current
Setup. To slant the toolpaths relative to the axis, set the Parallel
angle attribute on the Strategy (see page 1060) tab.
The value can be anywhere from -360 to 360 degrees, the default is
0.0. A positive value rotates counter-clockwise from the principle
axis, and a negative value rotates clockwise from the axis.

X parallel, Parallel angle 20 Y parallel, Parallel angle 20
 Setting the angle to 90 on an X-parallel operation causes it to

effectively become a Y-parallel operation.
 Setting the angle to 180 causes the toolpaths to be cut from the
opposite side of the part. For example, an X-parallel operation
with the angle set to 0 starts at the minimum Y coordinate. With
the angle set to 180, the toolpaths start at the maximum Y
coordinate.
This example uses the soapmod.fm file from the Examples folder.
With X parallel With Y parallel

selected, the selected, the
toolpath runs toolpath runs
parallel to the X parallel to the Y
axis: axis:
You can have the toolpath at any angle. Enter a Parallel angle. The
angle is measured counter-clockwise from the X axis if X parallel is
selected or counter-clockwise from the Y axis if Y parallel is selected.

For example
This method mills only the area above and down to the surface(s) in
the feature. If part of the stock does not have a feature surface in
it, that area is not milled away, except perhaps incidentally to the
manufacturing of another surface feature.
Restrictions of projection milling techniques
Vertical surfaces are almost invisible to projected manufacturing
methods because the vertically projected lines may not detect the
vertical surface. The top edge of such a surface is protected, but the
actual surface may not be milled. You must machine surfaces that
are exactly and completely vertical with another technique. Vertical
surfaces might be better candidates for a Side (see page 709)
feature instead of a surface.
Troubleshooting projection milling methods
1 Bad surface finish on nearly vertical walls. If you are finishing
across a nearly vertical surface, portions of a surface have larger
scallops than other parts of the surface. Possible solutions
include:
 Use Scallop stepover instead of fixed planar distance
stepovers. This gives a constant scallop height over surfaces
of the model. See item 3 below.
The Scallop stepover option is available for certain finish operations.
For projection milling methods, it toggles the way that you specify
how far the tool moves over between passes. With the Scallop
stepover option disabled, you specify the Stepover. With it enabled,
you specify the Scallop height.
For Z-level finish operations, it toggles options for you to specify
tool movements down in Z. With Scallop stepover disabled, you
specify the Z-increment. With it enabled, you specify the Scallop
height.
With the Scallop stepover option enabled, spacing of the toolpaths is
calculated along the surfaces to provide a uniform surface finish.

These images show surfaces cut without using scallop stepover:
These images show the same surfaces cut with scallop stepover:
 Finishing the surface with isoline milling (see page 772)

 Finishing the surface in another direction with a projection
technique. Finish going up the steep slope rather than across.
Use a stock curve if you want to only mill a small portion of
the surface milling feature.
 Finishing the surface again with the same technique using a
much smaller stepover value.
This is the distance between toolpath center lines. This distance is
measured in the XY plane and then the toolpaths are projected onto
the surfaces of your feature. This attribute does not apply if Scallop
height is enabled.
1 The toolpaths extend beyond the Edge of the surface.
2 Bad finishing of vertical walls. Projection techniques do not finish
vertical walls. Finish vertical walls with Isoline (see page 772)
(3D LITE) or Z level finishing (see page 771) (3D MX).

2D spiral toolpaths
2D Spiral toolpaths mill a feature with a pattern of offset toolpaths.
The pattern is obtained by taking the stock boundary, the feature
boundary or the curve specified on the Stock (see page 1123) tab
and offsetting this curve toward the center of the part. The pattern
can be cut either towards the feature center or away from the
feature center.
The steps between the passes are calculated in 2D. For spiral
toolpaths that use a 3D stepover use the 3D spiral technique (see
page 755). To use the stock boundary, select Use stock dimensions
on the Stock (see page 1123) tab. This results in a square shape to
the toolpaths.

To automatically calculate the silhouette boundary of the surfaces of
your feature, select Use part surface dimensions. This toolpath
mimics the boundary of your feature.
If you want to use a different curve as your toolpath shape, select

the Select curves for boundaries option on the Stock (see page 1123)
tab. The options for using a curve are different for spiral milling (see
page 750) and other techniques (see page 1129).
See also:
Troubleshooting projection milling methods (see page 747)
Boundaries for 2D spiral toolpaths
The shape of spiral toolpaths (see page 749) are determined by the
boundary and island curves and the classifications of 3D pocket (see
page 751), 3D boss (see page 751), 3D side (see page 752), or Wall
only (see page 752). You can specify multiple boundary curves, but
these curves must not touch. If none is specified, then the stock
boundary is used.
Boundary Curve Allowance — The distance to stay away from the
boundary or island curves.
Spiral Boss feature with Boundary Curve Allowance. Notice the gap
between the Boss features and the toolpaths.

For Wall only profile types, click the Other side button to offset
the other direction. For Boss features, use the stock Overcut %
(see page 1123) option to control how close you come to
approaching the stock boundary.
Total offset — This is the total distance away from the boundary
curve to cut for boss or side profile types.
3D pocket
The 3D pocket projects the boundary curve onto the surface and
spirals inside of this closed curve as shown in this image.
If you specify an island curve, that region is avoided.

3D boss
The 3D boss setting cuts between the stock boundary and the
boundary curve by projecting the boundary curve onto the surface,
for example:

3D side
The 3D side setting projects the boundary curve onto the surface
and then cuts on one side or the other as shown in this figure.
Wall only
The Wall only setting traces along the curve, for example:
Boundary Curve Allowance

Creating a 3D boss from font curves
1 Create the surface or surfaces you want to use as the floor of
your feature.
2 Create your text (see page 368).
3 Use Extract font curve (see page 334) and extract the outer
boundaries of the text.
4 Use Extract font curve again and extract the islands.
5 Create a spiral out 3D boss operation (see page 735) for the
floor surfaces using the outer boundary curves as the
boundaries.
6 Set the curve allowance to the tool radius.
7 Create another spiral out 3D pocket operation for the floor
surfaces using the island surfaces as the boundaries.
8 Again, set the curve allowance for this operation to the tool
radius.
5-axis engraving
You can perform 5-axis engraving using a 2D spiral toolpath. This
enables you to use a tool axis angle normal to the surface to ensure
the engraving has a uniform cross-section and depth of cut.
To create a 5-axis surface engraving feature:

1 Create a surface below the stock boundary to determine the
depth of the engraving, for example:
2 Create the curve to define the shape of the engraving feature,

for example:
You can use the Construct > Curve > From Surface > Project
onto Surface menu option to project a curve onto a surface.
3 Create a surface milling feature with a 2D spiral operation.
4 Double-click the feature in the Part View to display the Feature
Properties dialog, and select spiral2d in the Tree View.
5 In the Stock tab, under Choose the drive curve, select Select
curves for boundaries and click Curve Options.
The Boundary Curve dialog is displayed.
6 Under Boundary curve type, select Wall only.
This creates a toolpath along the curve, instead of an area
clearance toolpath inside or outside the curve.
7 Under Boundary curves, click Boundaries.

The Select Boundary Curves dialog is displayed.
8 Select the curve that defines the shape of engraving, and click
OK to close the Select Boundary Curves dialog.
9 Click OK to close the Boundary curves dialog.
10 On the 5-Axis tab, select Use Lead and Lean, and in the from list,
select Contact normal.
This keeps the tool axis normal to the surface.
11 Click OK to close the Feature Properties dialog.
3D spiral
This finishing technique is best suited to machining areas that need
a constant stepover and works well on near-horizontal faces.
Spiral toolpaths mill a feature in a series of offsets towards the
feature center. The initial pattern is specified by taking the stock
boundary, the feature boundary, or the curve specified on the Stock
(see page 1123) tab.
To use the stock boundary, click Use stock dimensions on the Stock
(see page 1123) tab. This results in an initial square shape to the
toolpaths. The next and subsequent toolpaths are obtained by
offsetting the initial shape in 3D (along the surfaces being cut). This
differs from 2D spiral operations (see page 749) which offset the
initial shape in 2D and then project this shape onto the surfaces.
Select Use part surface Dimensions in order to use the silhouette of
the part surfaces as the initial boundary shape as shown in the
simple figure on the left. The figure on the right shows the toolpaths
that would result if Use stock dimensions was used instead.

The Continuous spiral option on the milling attributes page
eliminates the stepover between the offsets, and morphs the
pattern into a continuous spiral. With the Continuous spiral option
selected, you get the result shown below. You can see that this
minimizes the number of tool retracts and converts the original
closed contours into one long spiral.
With the Continuous spiral option deselected, you get the following
result. Notice that there is a retract between each contour.

You can also use boundary curves to control the shape of the spiral.
All of these options are accessed by clicking the Curve options
button on the Stock tab. By specifying a boundary curve, this shape
is used as the initial contour of the spiral.
The boundary curve is clipped against part surfaces as shown in the

figure below. If the curve is entirely outside of the stock, the
silhouette of the surfaces is used as the boundary curve.

If the operation is specified as a boss, then boundary curves
determine regions that are avoided.
If the operation is specified as a pocket, then the boundary curves

represent the shape of each region. Any island curves are avoided.
In the example below, the operation is specified as a pocket with
three boundary curves. The lower left region also has a circular
island region.
Details of 3D spiral milling

 The Z height of any boundary curve is ignored. This means that
the curve can be above, below, or even inside of the part.
 The Total offset option in the Boundary curve (see page 750)
dialog is disabled for 3D spiral milling.
 Curve allowance is the same as described for 2D spiral milling
(see page 750).

Radial toolpaths
Radial toolpaths are created from the center of the part toward the
boundary. This image shows a radial toolpath example.
The center of the radial pattern is calculated automatically unless

you enter a value for the Center point attribute on the Milling (see
page 1229) tab.
Not all feature shapes lend themselves to this manufacturing style.
Long thin features probably are not best milled in this way. The
radial term is only a rough description of the path as not all feature
shapes lend themselves to a radial pattern.
Z-level rough
Z level roughing takes slices of the model at various heights on the
Z axis, and then generates toolpaths to machines each slice.
How to create a Z level rough operation. (see page 759)
Creating a Z level roughing operation
To create a Z level rough operation:
Feature wizard.
2 In the New Feature wizard, select Surface Milling and click Next.
3 Use the Part Surfaces page of the wizard to select the surfaces
you want to machine, then click Next.
4 In the New Strategy page, select Choose a single operation, then
click Next.

5 Under Roughing Strategies, select Z Level, then click Next.
6 Use the Strategy page to specify the machining strategy for the
surface.
If the surfaces represent a cavity, select the 3D pocket option. If
your surfaces represent a 3D boss, select the 3D boss option.
7 Complete the rest of the pages of the wizard, or click Finish to
create the feature and accept the default options.
Troubleshooting Z level roughing
FeatureCAM has different methods of Z level roughing (see page
762).
1 Mills the wrong side of the surfaces.
 Toggle the Classify slices as attribute on the Strategy (see page
1060) tab.
 If the Classify slices as attribute is set correctly, make sure
that the normals of the vertical surfaces are pointing out. Use
the Surface Control (see page 1159) tab to reverse the surfaces.
2 Slices are very coarse.
 Decrease the Tolerance attribute on the Milling (see page 1163)
tab.
3 The slices look strange around holes or passages in the walls of
the feature.
 Use a cap surface to plug holes (or untrim (see page 422) the
surface), or use a larger diameter tool.

Notes:
For a generalized boss, FeatureCAM uses the stock boundary or
stock curve as the outer boundary of the boss.
Control Z-level roughing with the Corner radius %, Tool corner %,
and Trochoidal cut attributes on the Milling (see page 1163) tab of
the Surface Milling Properties dialog.
Z-level roughing with multiple tools
Z-level roughing can be performed with multiple tools. After a larger
tool is used to rough out the majority of the part, FeatureCAM can
automatically apply a semi-roughing pass to the uncut regions of
the part without recutting the previously roughed region. The
smaller tool roughs around the walls of the part with a smaller Z-
increment than the previous tool and roughs regions where the
larger tool does not fit.
This example shows a bottle that is first roughed with a 0.75 inch
endmill and then roughed with a 0.25 endmill:
Roughing with multiple roughing tools is much more efficient than

simply roughing with a small tool. In the case of the bottle,
roughing with two tools takes 9 minutes and 34 seconds, while
roughing the entire part with only the smaller tool takes 19 minutes
and 8 seconds.
To perform Z-level roughing with multiple tools:
1 On the Strategy tab of the New Feature wizard or the Feature
Properties dialog, select the Multiple rough option.
2 Enter a list of Tool diameters. Separate the diameters with a
comma. Each diameter must be smaller than the preceding
diameter.
Each of the roughing passes is listed in feature's tree view so you
are able to further edit these operations to customize attributes
such as stepover values or Z increments.

Methods of Z-level roughing
Zigzag — This is more like an X parallel rough. Roughs each Z level
raster-style with an optional profile pass around each slice.
Offsets — Each slice is offset repeatedly to form the toolpaths.
Vortex (3D HSM) — An offset toolpath, which is machined at the

specified cutting feed rate almost all of the time. The optimum tool
engagement angle is never exceeded, by replacing difficult toolpath
segments with trochoids. This works well for solid carbide tools.

3D Vortex toolpaths (3D HSM)
Vortex machining is an area clearance strategy that rapidly removes
material from a 3D part while controlling tool load. Vortex is best
suited to solid carbide tools and is frequently used in combination
with step cutting.
It is an offset-style toolpath and has these main features:

 The engagement angle never exceeds, by more than 15%, that
produced by a straight line cut with a given stepover. This
eliminates excessive tool load and all full-width cuts. This
enables you to increase feed rates. For other area clearance
toolpaths, the cutting values are based on the tool
manufacturer's slot cutting parameters to ensure the tool can
sustain full cutting engagement. As the tool approaches the
maximum engagement angle for optimum machining, the
toolpath changes to a trochoidal path to avoid tool overload.
 The machine tool almost always runs at the specified feed rate.
With other area clearance toolpaths, the machine tool
automatically slows down as it approaches a corner and the
engagement angle increases. Vortex modifies the toolpath so the
tool engagement angle is never exceeded and the machine tool
achieves the specified feed rate. The only time the machine tool
does not run at the specified feed rate is when the model
geometry (a slot or corner) is smaller than the smallest radius
that the machine can run at full speed.
 Vortex machining cuts with the side of the tool so it is designed
for solid carbide tools, but you may be able to use other tools.

 Because FeatureCAM controls the tool engagement, you can
increase the depth of cut, which minimizes machining time.
 Vortex machining is frequently used in combination with Step
cutting to minimize terracing while maximizing the removal rate.
 Vortex toolpaths are automatically checked for safety.
FeatureCAM checks for:
 plunges into stock.
 excess tool engagement.
 excess depth of cut.
 small arc movements.
To maximize the benefits of Vortex machining:
 Configure the Vortex parameters to suit each machine tool.
 Use Step Cutting to minimize terracing caused by the increased
depth of cut.
With optimum settings, Vortex machining greatly reduces machining
times.
Creating a 3D Vortex toolpath

To create a 3D Z-level roughing Vortex toolpath, select Vortex on
the Strategy tab (see page 1060) of the Surface Milling Properties
dialog:
You must have the 3D HSM module to use Vortex for 3D

Z-level roughing.
The following attributes are available for Vortex toolpaths in the
Feature Properties dialog:
F/S tab (see page 983):
 Feed — Enter the speed the tool cuts into the material. Vortex
toolpaths are machined at this cutting feed rate almost all of the
time.

Milling tab (see page 1161):
 Vortex min point spacing — Enter the minimum point spacing at
which the machine tool can move at the specified feed rate. If
the machine tool has too many points to process, it cannot
sustain the specified feed rate.
 Vortex min radius — Enter the minimum radius of the internal
trochoids. Vortex toolpaths use trochoidal moves to maintain a
constant feed rate. Higher feed rates require a larger minimum
radius. If you do not override this value, a default value is used,
which is suitable for a typical machine tool at the feed rate
specified for the operation.
 Vortex Z lift distance — Enter a Z distance to lift the tool during
trochoidal moves to avoid contact between the tool and the
surface.
Strategy tab (see page 1061)
 Non-Cutting Moves — Displays the Vortex Non-Cutting Moves
dialog (see page 1069) where you can specify whether to retract
and increase the feed rate on non-cutting moves.
3D Vortex example
This example shows you how to combine Vortex machining with
step cutting to rapidly remove material.
Because Vortex machining cuts with the side of the tool, it is
designed for solid carbide tools, but there may be other types of
tools suitable for Vortex. These tools work best when taking deep
cuts with a relatively small stepover.

To machine effectively when taking large depths of cut, you must
ensure the tool engagement angle never exceeds the specified
value. This eliminates excessive tool load and all full-width cuts.
FeatureCAM achieves this by introducing trochoidal moves to
prevent the tool from exceeding the maximum tool engagement
value.

Using a 3D model:
Creating a Vortex toolpath without step cutting.

This removes vast quantities of material quickly, but leaves large
terraces of unmachined stock on the part.
You can minimize the size of these terraces using the Step cutting
options.

This adds extra machining slices up the part. Looking at a detail of
the side view:
Original Vortex pass

Step cutting passes
It also machines more of the excess stock.

Vortex approaches flats from outside stock
instead of always ramping into it. This enables you to create Vortex
toolpaths that are faster to machine and are compatible with a
wider selection of tools.
The tool ramping into the The tool approaching from
part the outside
To approach from outside the stock, FeatureCAM:

 extends a section of the flat area beyond the stock and into an
area already machined; and;
 fills the extended section with cutting moves.
By extending the section to an area already machined, the

machine tool can approach the flat area in open space.
Edge of flat area

Stock
Extended section of flat area filled with cutting moves
Outside edge of extended section
Area already machined

Criteria for toolpath to approach from outside stock
FeatureCAM only extends a section of the flat area if the extended
section:
 has an outside edge that the machine tool can approach.
 does not gouge the model.
 is wide enough to be profile smoothed successfully.
 can reach an area already machined within the distance of one
tool diameter.
If the extended section fails to meet the criteria, FeatureCAM does
not extend the flat area and instead uses a ramp move to approach
the toolpath.
Z-level finish
The Z-level finishing method slices the feature at various depths,
and then mills each slice.
This is a good technique for finishing steep walls or when you
require a consistent depth of cut. This technique is sometimes called
waterline milling. Just like Z-level rough (see page 759), it starts
with slicing the model and then creating toolpaths from the slices.
Here is an example of Z-level finishing:
Troubleshooting Z level finishing

1 Z level finish cuts both sides of part.
 Use a boundary curve to limit cutting to the inside or select
the internal only edge boundary.

Isoline milling
Isoline milling is a good technique for finishing surfaces.
An example of isoline toolpaths on a single surface:
Isoline milling uses the isoline curves (see page 347) of a surface to
mill the surface. These curves can be in the row direction or column
direction.
Advantages
 Uniform finish with scallop height control. The toolpaths are
spaced based on the distance along the surface.
 Nearly-vertical walls handled well. Because this is not a
projection technique, nearly vertical walls are cut correctly.
Disadvantages
 Toolpaths generated on a surface-by-surface basis.
Restrictions of isoline milling

Isoline milling works on a surface-by-surface basis. This can result
in numerous retracts.
The orientation of the surfaces matters. Toolpaths are generated for
surfaces whose normals point up. Surfaces are 'auto-flipped' where
possible, but for vertical and some other cases, you must specify
the machining side. Select the surface in the list and click Switch
machining side. Isoline milling may mill on the wrong side of the
surface or if certain flags are set, it may skip the surface.
Troubleshooting isoline milling
1 The toolpaths are on the wrong side of the surface.

 On the Surface control (see page 1159) tab, change the
machining side to Reverse using the Cut direction button.
2 Toolpaths should go the other direction or start at the other end
of the surface.
 On the Surface control (see page 1159) tab, the Start Curve
column has the options of First Row, Last Row, First Col, Last
Col. Select the surface in the table and click the Set isoline
row/col button to cycle through the options. The start
point and direction of the first toolpath is marked with an
arrow in the Graphics Window.
3 Performance is slow.
 If you do not need the Avoid self-gouging milling option, turn it
off.
4 Surfaces are cut in the wrong order.
 On the Surface control (see page 1159) tab, use the arrow
buttons to rearrange the order of the toolpaths.
5 Toolpaths for a surface are reordered strangely.
 Select the operation in the feature’s tree view. Go to the
Milling tab. Deselect the Reorder option.
Flowline
The Flowline technique projects the isolines from one surface onto
the surfaces of the feature. The isolines are projected in the
direction of the surface normal. In the example below, the isolines
of a flat surface are projected onto the part. By using a side mill
cutter, Flowline machining can be used to machine undercut
regions.

Machining undercut regions
You can cut undercut regions with either an Isoline operation or a
Flowline operation.
To machine undercut regions, you must.

1 Create an Isoline or Flowline operation.
2 Select an appropriate side mill cutter. FeatureCAM does not
automatically select side mill cutters.
3 Specify a Horizontal lead-in/out plane on the Leads (see page
1342) tab. You may also have to experiment to determine an
appropriate Ramp diameter to prevent gouging.
Creating a flowline milling operation
A Flowline milling operation is created using the following steps:
1 Click the Features step.
2 Click Surface Milling. Click Next.

3 Select the part surfaces and click Next.
4 Click Choose a single operation and click Next.
5 Click Flowline and click Finish.
6 Double-click the feature to edit it.
7 In the operation tree-view, select flowline and select the Surface
control tab.
8 Click the Pick surface button and select the flowline guide
surface.
9 The normal of the flowline guide surface must point toward the
surfaces of the part. When you click the surface control tab, two
arrows are displayed on the flowline guide surface. In the image
below, the normal correctly points toward the part surfaces. If
the normal needs to be reversed, click the Switch machining side
button.
The arrows also indicate the starting point of the surface isolines
and their direction. In the image above, the projected toolpath
starts in the lower left and follows the rows of the surface. Use
the Set isoline row/col button to change the starting point of
the pattern and use the Cut direction button to change the
direction of the cuts.

Between Two Curves
Between two curves calculates toolpaths that are bounded by two
curves. This finishing operation is used to control the shape of the
toolpath over multiple surfaces by restricting the machining of the
surface to be between the two specified curves. The toolpaths mill a
feature in a series of offsets starting from the first or start curve
towards the second or end curve.
The toolpaths can be generated to run in two directions:
Along curves — The toolpath is Across curves — The toolpath goes
similar to an offset toolpath radiating from a point on the start curve to a
out from the start curve to the end point on the second curve.
curve.
You can limit the pattern by selecting Tool center on the Strategy tab
to generate the pattern based on the center of the tool. Select
Contact point to generate the toolpath based on last point of contact
between the tool and the surface.
On the Milling tab, you can set Edge tolerance which is the trimming
tolerance used to reduce the noise of resulting toolpath near the
start and end curves. The Stepover attribute is blank by default and
the value is automatically determined based on the tool radius and
tolerance. However, if you want to override the automatically
generated stepover, you can set Stepover to a particular value. If
the automatically generated stepover is too large, you can restrict it
by specifying a Max stepover.
Pencil milling
Pencil milling is used to clean up corners or fillets of a part. Pencil
milling operations automatically detect corners less than or equal to
the specified radius (including sharp corners) and then create a
single toolpath to clean out these corners.
Applications of pencil milling include:
 Finishing fillets in a part with a single toolpath.
 Cleaning up sharp concave corners.
 Pre-relieving corners before high-speed finishing the part with a
small tool.
 Roughing fillets by using the Finish allowance.

The first step is to determine the regions that contain the corners.
Depending on the number of surfaces in the model, this step may

take some time.
After the regions are detected, a single toolpath is created that
cleans out the corners regardless of the number of surfaces
contained in the region.
Creating a Pencil mill operation

1 Create a Surface milling (see page 735) feature.
2 Click the New button on Process page to open the New
Strategy dialog.
3 Select Pencil milling and click Finish to close the New Strategy
dialog.
4 Select the Leads (see page 1342) tab on the Surface Milling
Properties dialog and set options for the moves between
toolpaths.
5 Click OK.
6 Generate toolpaths. If you receive an error, see Trouble shooting
pencil milling (see page 777).
Troubleshooting pencil milling
1 Calculating the regions takes too long.
 Use a stock boundary on the Remachine tab to limit the search
for remachining regions or create a separate feature with only
the surfaces of interest.

2 Some fillets/corners are not being detected.
 Decrease the tolerance.
Horizontal + vertical
This strategy combines two different toolpath operations, one for
finishing shallow portions of the part and one for finishing the steep
regions.
An X parallel or spiral toolpath is applied to the shallow regions, and
a Z level finishing operation cuts the steep regions.
The Slope boundary option on the Strategy (see page 1060) tab
indicates the angle that divides the two regions. Portions of the
surfaces with slopes less than this angle are machined with the
parallel toolpaths, and the steeper slopes are machined by the Z
level.
The Slope overlap option indicates how much the two regions
overlap. An overlap of 0 means that the two regions are distinct. A
value of 10 means that the two passes overlap by 10 degrees.
The parallel pass is parallel to the X axis unless you enter the
Parallel angle. Set the Parallel angle to 90 to be parallel to the Y
axis. If you are using a spiral-in or spiral-out toolpath for shallow
regions, the shape of those regions are automatically calculated
based on the slope region boundaries.
 Combo example with parallel

 Combo example with spiral
Plunge rough
Plunge roughing provides an alternative form of roughing. With this
technique, roughing is performed with a series of overlapping holes.
The advantage of using this technique is that parts can be roughed
quickly because the force of the operation is directly up the spindle.
This figure shows a sphere that is being plunge roughed with a flat
end tool.
The pattern of drilling operations is parallel to the X or Y axes just

like parallel milling (see page 745). Neighboring rows of the pattern
can be offset horizontally to better cover the part.



The Rough pass stepover % attribute controls how far the holes in
the same row are spaced. It is specified as a percentage of the
tool's diameter.
Restrictions of plunge roughing

1 The initial implementation of plunge roughing is limited to center
cutting tools. While you could use non-center cutting tools,
nothing is done to specifically accommodate the use of such
tools.
2 There is no control of the retract distance. Retracts are
performed in the Z-direction.
3 There is no pecking. Each plunge is performed as a straight
linear move.
4 The Uphill Only and Downhill Only settings do not apply.

Four Axis Rotary overview
Creates a toolpath by rotating the job around the index axis. This
axis is often the Z-axis in a turn/mill document and often the X-axis
in a milling document. Rotary milling creates toolpaths that cut
surfaces without the need for wrapping (see page 243). In a
turn/mill document, the feature must have the Cut with X-tool option
selected in the Feature Location tab before you can create a rotary
operation. The angle of the X-tool must also be 0 .
You can control four axis rotary milling with the following settings.
Strategy options
These attributes are available on the Strategy page of the New
Feature wizard and the Strategy (see page 1097) tab in the Feature
Properties dialog.
Select a cutting style from:
 Linear
Linear rotary milling causes the tool to traverse along the index axis
in straight lines, with the rotary axis only used at the end of each
pass to reposition the job.
 Circular
In circular milling the job rotates with the tool at a fixed position,
effectively machining a circle. The tool then steps over the required
amount and machines the next circle.
 Spiral

A continuous spiral is cut along the length of the job when spiral
milling is used. To ensure a clean finish a full circle is cut at the two
ends. Because rotation is continuous, only Climb and Conventional
milling are available (so, you must have a rotary head that can
make an unlimited number of rotations).
Y offset is a distance to avoid cutting on the center of the tool.

A Y offset of 0 cuts using the center of the tool.

A Y offset of 10 cuts using the position on the tool located 10mm
from its center.
Milling options
These attributes are available on the Milling (see page 1284) tab in
Angle start/end — Enter the angular positions where you want
machining to start and end. It applies only to Linear or Circular
milling. The angular limits are measured in a counter-clockwise
direction when viewed along the positive Z axis. The area machined
is between the start and end angles.
If Angle end is greater than Angle start, the tool travels
counter-clockwise.
Angle start = 0
Angle end = 120
Tool moves counter-clockwise

If Angle end is less than Angle start, the tool moves clockwise.
Angle end = 0
Angle start = 120
Tool travels clockwise
To machine an area counter-clockwise starting at 350 and ending
at 10 you need to think about the values you enter. If you enter an
Angle start of 350 and an Angle end of 10 then the tool travels
clockwise and machines the opposite of what you want. So you
must enter an Angle start of 350 and an Angle end of 370 to get the
result you want.
Index start/end coord — To limit the cutting area along the index
axis, set Index start coord and Index end coord. For a turn/mill
document these parameters control the extend of the toolpaths
along the Z axis. For a 4-axis milling document, they are values
along the index axis.
Index start coord

Index end coord
Stepover — For Circular milling, enter the distance between circular
cuts. For Spiral milling, enter the distance the tool travels in a full
revolution along the index axis.
Stepover angle — For Linear milling, enter the distance between the
linear cuts as an angle around the index axis.
Options for rotary milling
Angle start and Angle end — Enter the start and end positions for
Linear or Circular milling: The angles are measured from the x axis
in a counter-clockwise direction when viewed along the positive Z
axis.
Angle start = 0
Angle end = 90

Index start coord and Index end coord — Enter the start and end
positions for machining along the index axis. For a turn/mill
document, these parameters control the extent of the toolpaths
along the Z axis. For a 4-axis milling document, they are values
along the index axis.
Index start coord

Index end coord
Stepover — For Circular milling, enter the distance between circular
cuts. For Spiral milling, enter the distance the tool travels in a full
revolution along the index axis.
Stepover angle — For Linear milling, enter the distance between the
linear cuts as an angle around the index axis.
Corner Remachining
Remachining is used to automatically mill regions that were not cut
by previous operations. You provide the diameter of the previous
tool that was used to cut the part and FeatureCAM automatically
determines the uncut regions and applies a toolpath to them.
Corner remachining is used to clean up corners that occur between
non-tangential surfaces. Each corner edge is called a trace line. By
using the options on the strategy page, you may cut in various
directions relative to the trace lines.
Corner remachining is available in four different styles: Along,
Across, Combo along and across, and Multi pencil.

Along
This style of remachining creates a corner toolpath which follows the
trace lines.
Across
Across remachining creates corner toolpaths that zigzag across the
trace lines.
Combo along and across

The combo corner toolpath creates a corner toolpath which
produces Across toolpaths on the steep areas of the trace line and
Along toolpaths on the shallow areas of the trace line.
Multi-pencil
This creates a corner toolpath which follows along the trace
lines. This is similar to along, but it behaves differently at
intersections of more than two trace lines, for example:
Along Multi-pencil

The slope boundaries (see page 1133) tab is available, so that
a horizontal-only corner operation is possible.
Detection angle — only corners below the angle specified are found.
Detection angle is the largest angle between adjacent,
non-tangential surfaces that is detected as part of a pencil or
remachining operation. It is used to set the sensitivity of the region
detection. Generally, Detection angle should be set as big as possible
to detect the unmachined regions.
The tool used for the corner remachining must be smaller than the
Previous tool diameter.
Remachining overview
You can create remachining toolpaths that automatically mill regions
that were not cut by previous operations.
There are several types of remachining:
 Planar remachining (see page 789).
This is Parallel (see page 745), Z finish (see page 771), or 3D
spiral (see page 755) operations with the Remachining option
enabled in the Remachining dialog (see page 1112).
You specify the diameter of the previous tool that was used to
cut the part and FeatureCAM automatically determines the uncut
regions and applies a toolpath to them.
 Corner remachining (see page 786).
Corner remachining is used to clean up corners that occur
between non-tangential surfaces. You can specify the whether
the tool cuts across or along the trace lines.
 Pencil milling (see page 776).
Pencil milling is a single-line toolpath used to clean up corners
and fillets.

Planar remachining
Remachining is used to automatically mill regions that were not cut
by previous operations. Planar remachining can be performed with a
Parallel (see page 745), Z finish (see page 771), or 3D spiral
toolpath (see page 755).
You specify the diameter of the previous tool that was used to cut
the part and FeatureCAM automatically determines the uncut
regions and applies a toolpath to them.
There are other types of remachining (see page 788).
Remachining is useful for:

 Remove material that could not be reached with a larger tool for
both finishing and roughing.
 Pre-relieve corners roughed with a larger tool for high speed
finishing with a smaller tool.
Examples
In the example below, the trough region is automatically calculated
and the parallel toolpath is limited to this region.

For parallel and Z-level remachining, the previous tool diameter is
used to calculate the uncut region and the toolpath is clipped to that
region as shown in the figures below.

For 3D spiral remachining, the outer boundary of the uncut region is
automatically calculated from the previous tool diameter. A toolpath
is then created that spirals inward from the boundary. 3D spiral
remachining creates a toolpath that is similar to corner remachining
(see page 786), but in some cases, the 3D spiral has fewer retracts.
Creating a remachining operation

To create a remachining operation:
1 Create an X-parallel, Y-parallel milling operation, a Z-level finish
(see page 771), or a 3D spiral (see page 755) operation using
the Features step. Alternatively, a corner remachining (see page
786) operation may be created.
2 On the Strategy page (see page 1060), click Remachining.
The Remachining dialog is displayed.
3 Select Remachining and enter a Previous Tool Diameter. This
diameter is used to calculate the region for remachining.
5 Click Finish.
If the toolpaths do not look correct see Troubleshooting

remachining (see page 793) for hints.
Remachining settings
Remachining is controlled by the following Strategy tab settings:
Previous tool diameter — This is the diameter of the tool that was
used to previously cut the part. This parameter applies to all
remachining methods.

Overcut percent — Use this option to expand the remachining region
by overstating the Previous tool diameter. It is specified as a
percentage of the Previous tool diameter. It is usually a good idea to
overcut a little to ensure complete coverage.
Minimum rest material
This parameter does not apply to corner remachining. It

applies only to parallel, Z-level and 3D spiral remachining.
This setting can be used to filter out regions that have a minimal
amount of rest material left by the previous tool. The default is 0
which means it tries to cut anywhere the previous tool had a double
contact with the part surfaces, including a fillet of the same size as
the previous tool (assuming Overcut percent is also set to 0). If
Minimum rest material is set to a positive number, the remachining
only includes tool paths that remove rest material that is greater
than this depth. Its main use is to handle the case where you have
some part fillets exactly the size of the previous tool and some that
are smaller. If you do not want to remachine the part fillets that are
exactly the size of the previous tool you can set Overcut percent to 0
and Minimum rest material to 1 or 2 times the machining tolerance to
make sure the previous tool radius sized fillets are not remachined.
The following example part has some fillets that have a 10 mm
radius and some smaller fillets. Remachining with a Previous tool
diameter of 20 mm and the default Overcut percent of 5 remachines
all the fillets:
If you set Overcut percent to 0 to avoid cutting the 10 mm fillets we

may get some unwanted tool paths, depending on the machining
tolerance and the accuracy of the part model. Here the machining
tolerance is set to 0.01 mm and we have some unwanted tool paths:

- Unwanted toolpaths
Generally, setting the Minimum rest material to twice the tolerance

(0.02 mm in this case) eliminates these extra tool paths.
Another use for Minimum rest material is to eliminate noise from the
remachining tool paths due to inaccuracies in the part surfaces,
non-solid models, poor tolerances, and so on.
Limitations of planar remachining
 Parallel and Remachining operations use projection toolpath
techniques and have the same limitations (see page 747) as
those techniques.
 Z-level finishing Remachining has the same limitations Z-level
finishing (see page 771).
Troubleshooting planar remachining
1 Remachining is not generating toolpaths.
 Examine your part and make sure there are really regions
where the previous tool diameter would not fit. A fillet is
specified by its radius and a tool is specified by its diameter.
2 Calculating the regions takes too long.

 Use a stock boundary on the Remachine tab to limit the search
for remachining regions or create a separate feature with only
the surfaces of interest.
3 Regions that are exactly the same diameter as the previous tool
are being ignored.
 If there is a region that you would like to remachine that the
previous tool exactly fits into it is best to slightly overstate the
Previous tool diameter to ensure that the region is properly
remachined. For example if you have a pocket with a 0.25
radius corner fillet, you should set the Previous tool diameter
to 0.51 inches. The region is larger than necessary, but the
remachining boundaries are more predictable. Increasing the
overcut percentage can also help with this issue.
Swarf milling
Swarf cutting calculates toolpaths that cut with the side of the tool
and works only on developable surfaces because the tool needs to
be in contact with the surface for the whole cutting depth.
For a tool to swarf cut, it has to be able to have contact with the
surface at all points along the cutting edge of the tool. For a
non-developable surface, FeatureCAM always leaves material on or
produces fragmented toolpaths (rather than gouge). This means
that you need to look at parts carefully before trying to swarf cut
them. It may be that rotating the part (cutting from the side rather
than the top of an aerofoil blade) produces the required result.
Swarf machining makes every attempt to machine the selected
surfaces but you may have to consider running more commands
including ones with different options for swarf milling to obtain the
best machining results.
It is possible to identify approximately whether a surface is
developable and ruled by shading and also displaying its wire frame
geometry within FeatureCAM. You can then orientate the view to be
roughly down the expected tool axis vector.

If the surface top edge and the surface bottom edge appear to be
parallel at all points, on both edges, and no shaded elements are
visible, then the surface is roughly developable and ruled.
Selected Surface
Use the Surface control tab to determine whether you swarf cut:
 on the inside:

 or outside of the surface:
On the Milling (see page 1268) tab you can set:

 Axial offset — offsets the lowest position of the toolpath along the
tool axis.

 Leave allowance — specifies the amount of stock material to leave
after the cut. In PowerMILL this attribute corresponds to Radial
offset.
Using Leave allowance

No Leave allowance
 Multiple Cuts — This allows multiple toolpaths with a Z-increment
setting.
Restrictions of swarf milling

In a non-indexed milling document, swarf machining is limited to a
vertical tool axis.

The orientation of the surfaces is quite important in swarf
machining. Toolpaths are generated on the outer side of surfaces,
that is, on the side of the positive surface normal. Stand-alone
surfaces are not 'auto-flipped' (because FeatureCAM does not know
which side you want to machine), whereas faces in a solid should
have outward pointing normals. In most cases of swarf milling
stand-alone surfaces, you must specify the machining side
manually.
Swarf machining makes every attempt to machine the part
surfaces, even though the part surfaces may not be entirely ruled or
developable. This may lead to wild toolpaths (paths that retract a
lot and are cut in unintended places). For this reason, we
recommend that you include only the ruled surfaces in the feature's
part surfaces. You may include other, non-developable surfaces as
check surfaces.
Swarf milling works best with ruled surfaces where the
parameterization of the surfaces is well-behaved.
Although this appears to be a ruled, developable surface, the

isolines are curved. This may lead to strange looking toolpaths,
because FeatureCAM tries very hard to keep the entire side of the
tool in contact with the surface, in other words, the tool axis may
vary radically.
The parameterization below produces toolpaths that are closer to
the expected results:
Troubleshooting Swarf
Swarf is a very powerful technique. Unfortunately, in a five-axis
simultaneous situation, there are, perhaps, many different correct
answers to the swarf problem. FeatureCAM attempts to pick an
intelligent answer, but sometimes picks a different answer than
what you had in mind. For instance, a single plane can be swarfed
in the U direction or the V direction.

In the image below, the feature consists of two magenta surfaces
and a red surface. The swarf correctly cuts the required edge of the
magenta surfaces, and then (mathematically, correctly) cuts an
incorrect edge of the red surface.
There are several things you can try:

 Break the feature into many features (at the limit, you might
have one swarf feature per surface). In this case, you may end
up with three features.
 In a turnmill document, you may sometimes get the required
answer by choosing to cut the feature with an X tool. This is the
case for a single planar surface that cuts the U direction instead
of the V direction.
 Construct a ruled surface and use it as the part surface(s).
 Additional surfaces can sometimes help FeatureCAM select the
correct face. In this picture, the previous hint was also used (the
green ruled surface replaced the three faces of the solid).

Eliminate any fillets in the model, and use a ball-end of the
appropriate size.
 Decrease or increase the Tolerance (see page 1268). Because the

surface(s) in between its edge curves may not be perfectly ruled,
swarf is very dependent on the tolerance setting.
 Often, the tool is upside down of the required toolpath. Select
Reverse tool axis on the Strategy (see page 1096) tab.
 In cases like the above, the floor of the swarf must not be
touched. This is very difficult to do especially with a flat-end
tool. You may include the floor as a Check surface (see page
1048), but you may not get the complete toolpath. In this
situation, you can get close by using Multiple Cuts (see page
1268) and a fairly small Z-increment. You may also use a slightly
negative Check allowance (see page 1268).
 Increase the Degouge tolerance (see page 1268). The regular
tolerance controls the accuracy of the tessellation. That is,
curved surfaces are first flattened out to triangles, and it's the
triangles that are machined. The Degouge tolerance, tells
FeatureCAM that, in order to get a better, smoother toolpath, it's
okay to gouge the triangles by up to that much.
5-Axis Trim
This technique allows you to profile (or trim) around the outside of a
set of surfaces. This technique only works on surface models (not
triangle models). On the Strategy (see page 1108) page of the trim
operation, select whether to profile on the Inside edge of the
surface:

or the Outside edge of the surface:
The trim operation computes toolpaths only for unconnected

edges in the feature's surface set. For instance, if all six faces
of a cube are part surfaces in a shell milling feature, the trim
operation does not generate any toolpaths (because all edges
are connected to other edges in the feature). That is, to trim
the top face of a cube, select only the top face for the feature,
so the feature should consist of one part surface.
5-axis Hole feature (5AP)

You can create 5-axis Hole features from simple circles in space.
You do not need to use solids, Feature Recognition, or surfaces.
The following 5-axis part example was created with only geometry
and curves:
To create a 5-axis Hole feature on the drafted corner side area, you
just need a circle in the correct position, in this example parallel
with the drafted face:
This circle lies at a different vector orientation to the Z-axis Setup.

You can create a Hole feature that is normal to the selected circle.
To create a Hole feature from a circle:
1 Select the circle.
2 Click the Features step.

The New Feature wizard is displayed, with Hole in the From
Dimensions section selected:
3 Click Next.
The New Feature - Dimensions page is displayed. FeatureCAM uses
the Diameter from the circle by default, for example:
4 Optionally change the Diameter, and any other options you need.
5 Click Finish.

The direction of the Hole is based on how the geometry was
created, and may be created in the wrong direction, for example:
6 If the Hole is created in the wrong direction, use the Reverse

direction button on the Location tab of the Feature Properties
dialog to reverse it.

Turning features (TURN)
The following features are available for turning:
From Dimensions
Hole (see page 805)
Face (see page 822)
Bar Feed/Bar Pull (see page 828)
From Curve
Turn (see page 832)
Bore (see page 840)
Other
Sub-spindle (see page 843)
Misc
User (see page 857)
Toolpath (see page 633)

Part Handling (see page 848)
Turning canned cycles (see page 854)
Hole (TURN)
Turned Hole features are created and controlled in the same way as
milled hole (see page 637) features. They are manufactured in a
similar manner, with the exception that the material instead of the
tool is rotating when turning.
To create a turned Hole feature:


2 In the From Dimensions section, select Hole and click Next to

graphics window.
3 Select the type of Hole from the Type list.
 A Plain Hole is a simple Hole with an optional chamfer.
 A Counter Bore Hole.
 A Counter Sink Hole.
 A Counter Drill Hole.
 A Tapped Hole is a Hole that is under-sized drilled and then
tapped.
 A CD Tapped Hole is a counter drilled Hole with the bottom
part of the hole tapped.
4 Enter a Diameter value.
If you are building holes from circles, select the circle

before opening the wizard to pre-populate this field.
5 Enter how deep the Hole is in the Depth field.
6 Select Through to increase the hole length by 10% of the hole
diameter to account for the drill tip and prevent burring.
Depending on the type of hole you selected, you may have other
dimensions (see page 651) to fill in such as Chamfer and Drill
Depth. For tapped holes, you can click the Standard Threads
button and select a thread type. Each thread type sets the
Thread depth, TPI, and Diameter dimensions.

8 Enter the location of the hole.
9 Click Next to open the New Feature - Strategies page. The options
on this page are the same as those on the Strategy (see page
889) tab of the Hole Feature Properties dialog.
page.
11 Click Next to open the New Feature - Tool Usage page.
page.
You can click Finish (see page 531) at any stage during the
wizard to accept the default settings for the remaining pages
and exit.
Groove (TURN)
The Groove feature is used to machine smaller slots or undercut
regions.
You can create a turned Groove feature from dimensions or from a
curve. There are four types of turned Groove feature:
OD dimensioned Groove
- Depth
- Width
- Chamfer
- Angle
- Radius
ID dimensioned Groove
- Depth
- Width
- Chamfer
- Angle
- Radius

OD Groove from curve
ID Groove from curve
When creating a turned Groove feature, FeatureCAM does the

following:
1 Determines what tool to use (see page 808).
2 Determines feed and speed values based on the material being
machined.
The recommended feed and speed values for an operation are
displayed on the Feed/speed tab. The recommended feeds and
speeds are derived from the Groove column of the turning
feed/speed tables.
3 Generates a Rough (see page 814) pass, possibly in multiple Z
steps depending upon the depth of the feature.
4 Generates a Finish (see page 815) pass.
Turned groove tool selection

The default selected tool for turning has:
1 Lathe - Groove/Cut type.
2 An Insert with a Width of at least the Groove feature's Width - Z
finish allowance.
3 The shortest depth that can cut to the bottom of the Groove
feature.
4 The correct orientation for the type of cut.
5 For ID Groove features, the length of the groove is checked
against the length of the holder to ensure that it will extend far
enough into the part.

For Face Groove features cut in the positive direction, the inside
edge of the Groove feature is between the Min plunge diameter
and Max plunge diameter values.
Many Face Groove tools have curved holders. Due to the curvature
of the holders the tools have a limited set of diameters at which
they can plunge. The image below shows the curved shape of the
supporting holder.
These two diameters are the minimum and maximum diameters

between which the tool can plunge.
The tool inside edge of the groove must be between the Min plunge
diameter and Max plunge diameter if the Groove is being cut in the
positive direction. The outside edge must be between these two
diameters if the Groove is being cut in the negative direction.
For Face Groove features cut in the negative direction, the
outside edge of the Groove feature is between the Min plunge
diameter and Max plunge diameter values.
supporting holder.


The Tip radius and insert grade do not affect the choice of
tool.
Creating a Groove feature (TURN)

You can create a Groove feature either From Dimensions or From
Curve.
From Dimensions
To create a Groove feature from dimensions:


2 In the From Dimensions section, select Groove, then click Next to
open the New Feature - Dimensions page. Set these attributes:
 Diameter — Enter the diameter of the Groove feature.

 Depth — Enter the depth of the Groove feature.
 Angle — Optionally enter the angle of the Groove feature.
 Location — Select ID for an inside diameter Groove or OD for
an outside diameter Groove.
 Orientation — Select the orientation of the Groove feature
from X axis, Face, or Backface.
3 If your curve is a simple groove, select Simple Groove as the
Type. This option simplifies the manufacturing strategy for the
feature. Select this option to machine the feature by making a
single pass down the center of it with a tool whose radius is
equal to the width of the feature.
4 If your curve is a regular groove, select From dimensions and set
these attributes:
 Chamfer/Radius — Optionally add a chamfer or a radius to the
top of the Groove at each side. Select Chamfer or Radius from
the menu and enter the value.
 Angle — Optionally enter an angle for each side wall of the
Groove.

 Radius — Optionally set a bottom radius for the feature. The
passes when close to the radius. Then a rough and finishing
pass is made with the radiused mill. The default value is 0,
which cuts a square corner. You can have a different bottom
radius for each side of the Groove.
page.
page.
page.
10 Click Next to open the New Feature - Tool Usage (see page 607)
From Curve
To create a Groove feature from a curve:
1 Click the Features step in the Steps panel to open the New
Feature (see page 530) wizard.
2 In the From Curve section, select Groove, then click Next to open
the New Feature - Curve (see page 574) page.
page.
 Location — Select ID for an inside diameter Groove or OD for
an outside diameter Groove.
 Orientation — Select the orientation of the Groove feature
from X axis, Face, or Backface.

page.
page.

Cutting wide Face Groove features (TURN)
FeatureCAM roughs a Groove feature in only one direction. The
Groove can be cut in the positive X or negative X direction. Due to
the curved shape of the face groove tool holders, face grooving
tools have a limited range (between the Min plunge diameter and
Max plunge diameter) in which they can plunge.
supporting holder.


To cut wide Face Grooves you may need to create three grooves:
1 The groove you want to machine has Diameter D and the Width
W.
2 The plunge diameter P is a value between the Min plunge
diameter and Max plunge diameter of the tool.
3 Create a Groove feature with Diameter P and Width W - (D-P). On
the Strategy tab select a Rough pass only and set its Feed dir to
Negative.
4 Create a second Groove feature and set the Diameter to D and
the Width to (D-P). On the Strategy tab select a Rough pass only
and set its Feed dir to Positive.
5 Create a third Groove feature and set the Diameter set to D and
Width set to W. On the Strategy tab, select a Finish pass only.
Groove roughing (TURN)

Groove features are roughed by plunging parallel to the X-axis
retracting, stepping over in the -Z direction and then plunging
again. This figure shows the groove roughing algorithm and the
manufacturing attributes that control the process.
Stepover %
Depth of cut
Clearance

Z finish allowance
Side liftoff distance
X finish allowance
If your Groove feature has angled walls, the rectangular middle
portion of the groove is roughed first and then the slanted walls are
roughed as shown in this figure.
The details of this operation are controlled by the manufacturing
attributes contained on the Turning (see page 1420) tab of the
Feature Properties (see page 884) dialog.
Groove finishing (TURN)

The Finish pass cuts a path that is offset from the Groove feature's
profile to the tool's tip center for the entire (defined) curve. The
offset value is just the tool tip radius. Groove features are finished
using a technique called shoulder stroking. This technique ensures
that the grooving tool never cuts in the upward direction. Profiling
proceeds in the -Z direction until the curve moves up in X. The tool
then rapids to the highest point and cuts back in the +Z direction.
This process repeats until the entire Groove is finished. This figure
shows an example for a symmetric Groove with angled walls:
This image shows an example of a groove with multiple valleys:
The following attributes affect turn groove finishing:

On the Turning (see page 1420) tab:
Clearance
Side liftoff dist
Start point
End point
Tool change location
Post Vars
On the Strategy (see page 1366) tab:

Feed dir
Use finish tool
Thread feature (TURN)

The Thread feature allows you to put threads on either the:
ID
Thread height
Thread length
Pitch
Minor diameter
OD
Thread height
Thread length
Pitch
Major diameter
From Dimensions and From Curves

Standard thread features created using From Dimensions are cut
with tools whose shape exactly match the shape of the thread form.
Thread features created From Curves have a more general profile
and are cut in multiple passes in both X and Z.
This feature supports:
OD threads

ID threads
Tapered threads
There is no explicit designation of the type of thread. Instead, the

type of thread is inferred from the profile (see page 820) that is
provided.
If you are creating a Thread feature to cut with a form tool

that perfectly matches the shape of the thread, use a
standard thread that is created From Dimensions. The
simulation does not show the proper thread cross-section, but
the toolpaths generated are correct.
How a Thread feature is manufactured

FeatureCAM follows this general process to create a Thread feature:
2 Picks feeds and speeds based on the material being machined.
To view the recommended speed value for a threading operation,
click the operation in the tree view and select the Feed/speed tab.
The recommended speeds are derived from the Thread column of
the turning feed/speed tables. Feed values are determined by
the canned cycle on the machine tool.

3 Optionally creates a Rough and/or Finish pass to turn the part
down to the diameter of the thread. The creation of these
operations is controlled by the Rough and Finish options on the
4 Optionally generates a roughing pass for the relief groove. The
existence of this operation is controlled by the Relief groove
option on the Strategy page.
5 Generates a Thread (see page 822) pass.
Creating a Thread feature

You can create a Thread feature either From Dimensions or From
Curve.
From Dimensions
To create a Thread feature from dimensions:

2 In the From Dimensions section, select Thread, then click Next to

open the New Feature - Dimensions page for a Thread.
3 Specify the dimensions of the Thread:
 Type — select ID for an inner diameter Thread or OD for an
outer diameter Thread.
 Custom — Enter the thread dimensions.
 Standard Thread — Select a thread from the list to use
standard dimensions.

 Thread — Select a Left hand or Right hand thread. When
viewed from the end of the part toward the chuck, on a left
hand thread the tool winds counter-clockwise as it moves
towards the chuck, on a right hand thread the tool winds
clockwise as it moves towards the chuck.
 Minor/Major Diameter — Enter the Minor Diameter for an ID
feature or the Major Diameter for an OD feature.
 Pitch — Enter the pitch of the thread.
 Thread Length — Enter the length of the thread.
 Thread Height — Enter the height of the thread.
 Tapered — If your thread is tapered, select this option and
enter the taper Angle.
page.
page.
page.
From Curve
To create a Thread feature from a curve:

2 In the From Curve section, select Thread, then click Next to open
the first New Feature - Curve (see page 574) page.
a For Thread, select either Left hand or Right hand. When viewed
from the end of the part toward the chuck, on a left hand
thread the tool winds counter-clockwise as it moves towards
the chuck, on a right hand thread the tool winds clockwise as
it moves towards the chuck.
b Enter the Thread Length and the Pitch (Pitch = 1/TPI). For
threads from curves (see page 820), the pitch is the distance
between replications of the curve. The pitch must be greater
than or equal to the length of the curve.
If you are creating a Thread from a curve, the Taper option

is unavailable. The taper of a thread from curves is
determined by the X angle between the start and end points
of the curve.
page.
page.
page.
page.
page.
page.
Thread curve types

The curve for a Thread feature must represent a single groove of
the thread. The images below are examples for OD thread curves.

This curve is replicated along the curve. The curve length must be
greater than or equal to the thread pitch. If the thread length is less
than the pitch, a linear segment is inserted between the grooves,
for example.
When creating a Thread feature from a curve, the distinction

between an OD and ID feature is determined from the curve. For
OD features, you should model an upward facing groove. ID curves
should be downward facing grooves. As an example, if you are
creating a rope thread, the basic shape of the groove is a sine
wave.
If you want to create this thread on the OD you should use the red
curve shown below.
To create an ID thread, you should use the downward facing curve

shown in red in the following image.
The taper angle of the Thread is determined by the X angle between

the first and last points of the curve. For straight tapers, the two
points should have the same X coordinate. For tapered threads, the
angle between the endpoints will be used as the thread taper. In
the image below, the thread has a 5 degree taper.
Thread tool selection


1 Lathe - Thread tool type.
2 The insert must have a TPI range that contains the pitch of the
required thread.
3 The proper orientation for the type of cut. See turn roughing,
semi-finishing and finishing, face roughing, or backface roughing
for more information.
Currently tip radius, tool length, and insert grade are not
taken into account.
Thread operation
The number of passes is controlled by the Passes option on the
Strategy tab. You can specify either Fixed or Calculate.
 If you select Fixed, you must enter the total steps Count needed
for the Thread operation. In this case, the passes are of a fixed
depth.
 If you select Calculate, then the number of steps for the
threading operation is calculated by the system. Additionally, if
you select Calculate, then you must supply data for the Step 1,
Step 2 and Minimum Infeed fields. In this case, the first step is cut
at a depth of Step1. The second and successive cuts are at a
depth of Step 2. When the remaining depth is less than Minimum
Infeed, it is cut with a single pass.
The other details of this operation are controlled by the
manufacturing attributes on the Threading (see page 1459) tab.
Face (TURN)
A turn Face feature is a straight cut that cleans up the front of the
part.
- Outer diameter
- Thickness
- Inner diameter
1 Determines what tool to use. The default selected tool for turning
has:

 Lathe - Turning tool type.
 The proper orientation for the type of cut. See Turn Face
feature tool orientations for more information.
Turret Cut direction Orientation
Back -Z
OR
Front -Z
OR
 An 80 diamond is preferred but the default selected tool

must have an included tip angle of at least 55 . You can
override the tooling selection with a tool that has a narrower
diamond insert, but such a tool is not automatically selected.
Currently tip radius, tool length, and insert grade are not
taken into account.
1 Picks feeds and speeds based upon the material being machined.
To view the recommended feed or speed value for a turned Face
operation, select the operation in the tree view and then select
the Feed/speed tab. The recommended feeds and speeds are
derived from the Face column of the turning feed/speed tables.
2 If roughing has been requested, generate a roughing pass
possibly in multiple X steps depending upon the depth of the
feature.
The roughing pass of the turn Face feature is turned off by
default. Click the Strategy tab and select Rough to turn on the
roughing pass.
 If the Positive Feed Direction is selected on the Dimensions tab,
the roughing is performed in the +X direction.
 If the Negative direction is selected, the roughing is performed
in the -X direction.
The algorithm is the same as the Turn feature roughing (see
page 834), except that the Withdraw Angle is fixed at 90 and
the Engage Angle defaults to 45 and must be set to less than
90 .
3 Generates a finishing pass.
If ID is selected on the Dimensions tab, the finishing is performed
in the +X direction. If OD is selected, the finishing is performed
in the -X direction. The algorithm is the same as Turn and Bore
feature finishing (see page 839).

Creating a turned Face feature

2 Select Face as the Feature type and click Next to open the New
Feature - Dimensions page.
 Feed direction — Select Positive if you want to cut in the +X

direction or select Negative if you want to cut in the -X
direction.
 Outer Diameter — Enter the top X value as the Outer Diameter.
 Inner Diameter — Enter the inner diameter.
 Thickness — Enter the amount of material to remove in Z.

page. Enter the Z coordinate of the left edge of the feature.
4 Click Next to open the New Feature - Strategies page. By default,
face features only generate a Finish pass. If you want a roughing
pass as well, select Rough.
page.
page.
page.
page.
page.
Cutoff feature
The Cutoff feature cuts the part off with a plunge cut with an
optional back chamfer.
- Chamfer
- Diameter
- Width
- Inner diameter
FeatureCAM follows this general process to create a Cutoff feature:
2 Picks feeds and speeds based upon the material being machined.

To view the recommended feed or speed value for a cutoff
operation, click the operation in the tree view and then click the
Feed/speed tab. The recommended feeds and speeds are derived
from the Cutoff column of the turning feed/speed tables.
3 Generates a cutoff (see page 828) finishing pass.
Creating a Cutoff feature

To create a Cutoff feature:

2 In the From Dimensions section, select Cutoff and click Next to


 Chamfer/Radius - Optionally add a chamfer or a radius to the
Cutoff feature. Select Chamfer or Radius from the menu and
enter the value.
 Diameter - Enter the (outer) diameter.
 Inner Diameter — Enter the inner diameter.
 Width - Enter the width of the Cutoff tool.
page. Enter the Z coordinate as the left edge of the Cutoff
feature.
page.
page.
page.
page.
page.
page.
Cutoff feature tool selection

1 Lathe - groove/cutoff type.
2 An insert Width equal to the Cutoff feature Width.
3 The shortest depth that cuts to the bottom of the feature.
4 The proper orientation for the type of cut. For Back turrets, the
orientation is required. For Front turrets, the orientation is

required.
Tip radius, and insert grade are not taken into account.

Cutoff feature finishing operation
If there is no chamfer, the cutoff is performed as a simple plunge.
If there is a chamfer:
1 The cutoff groove is plunged down to the depth of the chamfer.
2 The tool traces along the chamfer and then down the cutoff
groove.
If there is a chamfer and Plunge Rough Chamfer is selected on the
Strategy page:
1 The cutoff groove is plunged down to the depth of the chamfer.
2 The chamfer is plunged roughed.
3 The tool traces along the chamfer and then down the cutoff
groove.
Bar Feed/Bar Pull

A Bar Feed feature provides support for both:
Bar Feeder
- Diameter
- Feed amount
Bar Puller
- Overlap
- Pull amount

How a Bar Feed/Bar Pull is performed:
1 For:
 Bar Feed operations, the tool rapids to the point (Diameter, 0,
Z-Clearance).
 Bar Pull operations, the tool rapids to a point in front of the
stock along the Z-axis and then feeds to the point (0, 0,
Z-Clearance-Overlap).
2 The tool then feeds out the Pull amount or the Feed amount.
3 The feedrate is controlled by the FPM attribute.
Bar Feed features are only simulated with centerline

simulations. 2D and 3D simulations ignore these operations.
Creating a Bar Feed feature


2 Select Bar Feed, then click Next to open the New Feature -
Dimensions page and select Bar Feeder from the Type menu.
 Diameter - Enter the Y coordinate for the bar feed.

 Feed Amount - Enter the amount of material you want to feed
in the Z direction.
page.
page.
page.
Creating a Bar Pull feature

2 Select Bar Feed, then click Next to open the New Feature -
Dimensions tab and select Bar Puller from the Type menu.
 Overlap - Enter the amount of material to hold in the puller (in

the Z direction).
 Pull Amount - Enter the amount of material you want to pull in
the Z direction.
page.
page.

page.
Turn feature
The Turn feature roughs, semi-finishes, and finishes an outer
diameter (OD) curve.
Manufacturing hints for Turn features

We recommend that you select the Undercut check option for Turn
or Bore features. This attribute uses the geometry of the insert to
prevent gouging.
- Auto round arcs

- Undercut area
If the entire feature was not cut, it could be that the feature could
not be cut entirely with the selected tool. FeatureTURN checks the
toolpath to make sure that the tool can cut the specified path
without crashing into the part itself.

If a conflict is found, the system automatically alters the toolpath so
that a safe path is maintained. A message is displayed warning the
user that the path has been changed.
Turn features restrictions

 The curve must not cross the X-axis.
 For Face or Backface roughing, the curve must cross the top of
the stock or the max diameter must be set to the maximum X of
the curve.
How a turn feature is manufactured

FeatureTURN follows this general process:
being machined.
steps depending upon the depth of the feature.
4 Generates a Semi-finish (see page 838) pass.
5 Generates a Finish (see page 839) pass.
Turn feature tool selection
1 Lathe - Turning tool type.
2 The proper orientation for the type of cut. See turn roughing,
semi-finishing and finishing, face roughing or backface roughing
3 An 80 diamond is preferred but the default selected tool must
have an included tip angle of at least 55 . You can override the
tooling selection with a tool with a narrower diamond insert, but
such a tool will not be automatically selected.
Tip radius, tool length and insert grade are not taken into
account.
Turn feature feeds and speeds

To view the recommended feed or speed value for a turning
operation, select the operation in the tree view and then select the
from the OD column of the turning feed/speed tables.
See also:

Explicitly setting a feed or speed value for a turned operation (see
page 1510)
All about feeds and speeds (see page 1508)
New Turn feature - Strategies page
Use canned cycle


fanucez.cnc post.
feature level.
Hole features

Turn/Bore features
Groove features
Thread features


direction.

positive direction.
If you are creating your part from a casting instead of from bar
stock, use the Stock Curve to limit the extent of the roughing pass.
A stock curve controls the boundaries of the roughing pass. This
figure shows roughing without a stock curve.
This figure shows the use of a stock curve to limit the area that is
roughed.
For a turn roughing pass the curve must have a single value of X for
every value of Z. For a facing pass or back facing pass the curve
must have a single value of Z for every X. Stock curves can be used
for both turning and boring features.
The Boundaries parameter further restricts the region that is
roughed.

The Left boundary, Right boundary, and Max radius boundary
parameters limit the portion of the feature that is roughed. These
boundaries are displayed in blue whenever you select the rough
operation in the tree view. When the material boundaries are
defined to machine a part, the boundary must be specified so that it
completely encloses the path (for example, the path cannot start or
end in the middle of the rectangular box; it must start on, or
outside of the boundary).
Left boundary
Max. radius boundary
Min. radius boundary
Right boundary
When the path is defined, it may extend beyond the material

boundary. This is a powerful technique, because a long path can be
defined, then an area in which a specific portion is roughed only
between material boundaries can be established. In a second
segment, the path could be copied, then the boundaries to rough
another section of the path can be redefined, and so on.
Turn feature semi-finishing

The semi-finishing pass cuts a path that is offset from the part's
surface to the tool's tip center for the entire (defined) curve. The
offset value is ½* the X finish allowance (see page 1420) and ½*
the Z finish allowance (see page 1420) of the Rough pass. Profiling
proceeds in the -X direction unless you select Positive for the Feed
direction on the Strategy page.

Turn and Bore feature finishing
The Finish pass cuts a path that is offset from the part's surface to
the tool's tip center for the entire (defined) curve. The offset value
is just the tool tip radius. Profiling proceeds in the -Z direction
unless you select Positive for the Feed direction is selected on the
Strategy (see page 1367) tab.
Creating a Turn feature

To create a Turn feature:
1 Create the curve that defines the shape of the feature.

3 In the From Curve section, select Turn, then click Next to open
page.
5 Click Next to open the New Feature - Strategies page. A turned
feature automatically creates a roughing, and finishing
operations. If you want to create fewer operations, select the
appropriate operations. The other attributes on this page are the
same as those on the Strategy (see page 1366) tab of the Feature
page.

If you are working from a casting, you can include a stock curve to
limit the extent of the roughing pass. To set a stock curve:
(see page 884) dialog and click the Dimensions tab.
2 Click the Stock Curve button and select the curve from the Curve
list.
3 Click OK.
Bore feature
The Bore feature roughs, semi-finishes, and finishes either an inner
diameter (ID) curve.

2 Picks feeds and speeds based on the material being machined.
To view the recommended feed or speed value for a Bore
operation, click the operation in the tree view and then click the
from the ID column of the turning feed/speed tables.

steps depending upon the depth of the feature. The toolpaths are
the same as a Turn feature.
4 Generates a Semi-finish (see page 838) pass. The toolpaths are
the same as a Turn feature.
5 Generates a Finish (see page 839) pass. The toolpaths are the
same as a Turn feature.
See also:
Feeds and speeds (see page 1508)
Explicitly setting a feed or speed value for a turned operation (see
page 1510)
Creating a Bore feature (TURN)

To create a Bore feature:

3 In the From Curve section, select Bore, then click Next to open
page

page. A bore feature automatically creates a roughing, and a
finishing operation. If you want to create fewer operations, select
the appropriate operations. The other attributes on this page are
the same as those on the Strategy (see page 1366) tab of the
Feature Properties (see page 884) dialog.
page.
If you are working from a casting, you can include a stock curve to
limit the extent of the roughing pass. To set a stock curve:
(see page 884) dialog and click the Dimensions tab.
2 Click the Stock Curve button and select the curve from the Curve
list.
3 Click OK.
Bore feature tool selection

1 Lathe - Boring tool type.
2 The proper orientation for the type of cut. If you have a Back
turret the orientation is preferred. For Front turrets, the
orientation is preferred.

3 An 80 diamond is preferred but the default selected tool must
have an included tip angle of at least a 55 . You can override the
tooling selection with a tool with a narrower diamond insert, but
such a tool is not automatically selected.
Tip radius, tool length, and insert grade are not taken into
account.
Sub-spindle feature
A Sub-spindle feature enables you to manipulate the main and sub
spindles. Often these features are used to transfer the stock from
one spindle to the other. There are two ways to transfer operations
in FeatureCAM:
 You can program each operation by using Sub-spindle features.
To do this you must create the appropriate sequence of
Sub-spindle features for your part. You must also use a post that
fills in all the required sub-spindle formats properly.
 You can use an add-in (macro) that emits a full block of G-code
describing the transfer from a custom format in the post.
Machine simulation is provided by the add-in. This method can
usually be programmed more quickly, but retains plenty of
flexibility for many types of transfer. It is also convenient if you
already have a standard transfer sequence in G-code that you
would like to just drop in to your NC program. We expect to
provide this method directly in FeatureCAM in the future.
In order to use the second method, you must load one of the
following add-ins:
 Subspindle_Transfer_UDF_1Turret.bas, for machines with a single
turret
 Subspindle_Transfer_UDF_2Turret.bas, for machines with twin turrets
These files are in the Addins folder of your FeatureCAM installation,
which also contains documentation (Subspindle_Transfer_UDF.doc) for
using the add-ins. See also User-defined features (see page 857)
There is only one feature-type for sub-spindles, but it performs
many different tasks.
First, you specify the spindle you want to control, either the main or
sub spindle; you then select the action you want to perform:
 Open the spindle — Select this option to open the current spindle.
 Close the spindle — Select this option to close the current
spindle.

 Orient the spindle — Select this option to rotate the current
spindle.
FeatureCAM orients the spindle during cutting. This feature

type is needed only to orient the spindle before grabbing
the part or initializing the spindle position.
 Turn spindle on/off — Select this option to have direct control
over rotating the spindle or turning it off. FeatureCAM
automatically controls the spindle, but this feature type may be
necessary to provide precise control of the spindle when moving
from one spindle to the other.
 Position the spindle — Select this option to position the current
spindle.
 Synchronize the spindles — Select this option to synchronize
spindle rotations for milling or turning.
Sub-spindle overview
Sub-spindles can be used to support the part from both ends of the
stock or to change which spindle is used to hold the stock. To cut
features on two different ends of your stock, you must first create
setups at each end of your part with the Z directions pointing out
from the stock, as shown below. (If your machine requires that the
Zs of each setup point in the same direction, this can be changed in
the post.)
Stock held by main spindle Stock held by sub-spindle
Main spindle
Sub-spindle
Main spindle

Sub-spindle
The features must be included in the proper Setups. The

sub-spindle commands can be located at the end of the main Setup
or the beginning of the sub-spindle Setup. The Part View, shown
below, has the sub-spindle commands at the end of the first Setup.
If you are using the sub-spindle to support the end of the stock,
order the sub-spindle features so that they occur when you need
the extra support.
Sub-spindle feature examples

FeatureTURN provides individual control over the different
sub-spindle functions.
Switch from the main spindle to the sub-spindle is:
1 Sub-spindle position
2 Sub-spindle close
3 Main spindle open
Switch from the main spindle to the sub-spindle using a Cutoff

feature to cut the stock from the bar:
2 Sub-spindle close
3 Cutoff feature

Creating a Sub-spindle feature
To create a Sub-spindle feature:

If you are using the Turn/mill module, first select Turning as

the Feature type and click Next.
2 Select Sub-spindle as the Feature type and click Next to open the
New Feature - Dimensions page
a Select which spindle you want to control, either the Main

spindle or the Sub spindle.
b Select the action you want to perform.

c Click Next.
3 If you selected the action as:
 Open the spindle, optionally select Extend the part catcher
before opening spindle and optionally enter a Dwell after
opening spindle.
 Close the spindle, optionally enter a Dwell after closing spindle.
 Orient the spindle, enter an angle for Set spindle angle to.
 Turn the spindle on/off, select Off, CW (Clockwise), or CCW
(Counter-Clockwise). If you are turning on the spindle, you
must enter the Spindle speed.
 Position the spindle, the New Feature - Location (see page 847)
page for a sub-spindle opens.
 Synchronize the spindles, specify the type of synchronization
to use.

New Feature - Location page for sub-spindle
The New Feature - Location page controls the position of the
sub-spindle.
1 Determine the final location specified in the coordinates of the
main spindle user coordinate system. This can be done by any of
the following methods:
 Select the Send the sub-spindle home option. The coordinates
are automatically entered in the point location shown at the
top of the dialog.
 Click the Pick point button and select the point on the
screen.
 Type in the coordinates directly. The coordinates are relative
to the main spindle user coordinate system.
2 Decide how you want the sub-spindle to arrive at the final
location. Select one of the following:
 Rapid directly to final location — The spindle makes a single
rapid move from its current location to the final sub-spindle
location.
 Feed to intermediate location, then rapid to final location — The
spindle feeds to the intermediate location and then rapids to
the final location. This is useful for gradually removing the
support of one of the spindles.

 Rapid to intermediate location, then feed to final location — The
spindle rapids to the intermediate location and then feeds the
rest of the way. This can be applied to approach the part.
Optionally select Use Push/Press Function.
3 If you have selected a strategy that requires an intermediate
point, specify the intermediate location by either picking the point
or entering the coordinates relative to the main spindle user
coordinate system.
4 At the bottom of the dialog, FeatureCAM automatically shows you
the Z coordinates that it is output in the NC code. If these are
not the coordinates you want, you can enter the Z values for the
Final Z value and Intermediate Z value. These values are used in
the NC code, but the values shown at the top of the dialog are
used for the toolpath simulation.
Part Handling feature

These transfer types are available:
 Slug transfer  Part support on
 Reverse slug transfer  Part support off
 Bar pull
Post and simulation are supported.
To create a Part Handling feature:


2 Select Part Handling then click Next to open the New Feature -
Dimensions page:
3 Select the type of Part Handling feature you want to create and
enter the dimensions.
4 Click Next to open the New Feature — Strategies page:
5 Set the attributes for the Part Handling feature, for example:
 Part catcher — Select this option if you want to instigate the
part catcher.
 Already Supported — Select this option to indicate that the
part is already supported.
 Sub Angle — Enter the angle that you want the sub-spindle to
rotate to before it moves to collect the part.
6 Click Finish to save the Part Handling feature.

Controlling steady rests and tailstocks
You can program and simulate steady rests and tailstocks and check
for collisions.
This example part is 1.5 m long:
Looking at a machine simulation, you can see that there is a long

length of the part sticking out of the jaws:
You can use a steady rest to support the part as you machine each
feature. To use a steady rest, you create a Part Handling feature
with a type of Part support on and a Support type of Steadyrest.
In the example, the steady rest is turned on before the features at
the end of the part are created.
You can move the steady rest by creating an additional Part support
on feature.
In the example, the steady rest is moved further down the part to
support the Turn operation:

An additional Part support on feature is created to move the steady
rest back to the original position, to cut the other Turn feature and
the Groove features:
You can use a tailstock in a similar way. You create a Part Handling
feature with a type of Part support on and a Support type of
Tailstock.
In the example, the tailstock is used to support the end of the part
while the steady rest is supporting the middle:
To send the steady rest or tailstock home, you create a Part

Handling feature with a type of Part support off.
To enable a steady rest:

1 In the turning New Feature wizard, select the Part Handling
feature and click Next.
2 Select Part Support On and enter a value for the Grab distance.
This is the distance in Z where you want to use the steady rest.
3 Click Next.
4 For the Support type, select Steadyrest.
5 If your machine has multiple turrets, select the correct Transfer
turret.
6 If your steady rest is fitted to a turret, click the Turret control
button and set the correct Index position.
7 Click Finish.
A part_support_on feature is added to the Part View. You may
need to drag the feature to a different position in the Part View
and set a Base priority for the feature to set the correct order of
features.

To disable a steady rest:
2 Select Part Support Off and enter a value for the Grab distance.
3 Click Next.
4 For the Support type, select Steadyrest.
turret.
6 If your steady rest is fitted to a turret, click the Turret control
button and set the correct Location and Index position.
7 Click Finish.
A part_support_off feature is added to the Part View. You may
features.
To enable a tailstock:
2 Select Part Support On and enter a value for the Grab distance.
3 Click Next.
4 For the Support type, select Tailstock.
turret.
6 If your tailstock is fitted to a turret, click the Turret control button
and set the correct Index position.
7 Click Finish.
A part_support_on feature is added to the Part View. You may
features.
To disable a tailstock:
2 Select Part Support Off and enter a value for the Grab distance.
3 Click Next.

4 For the Support type, select Tailstock.
turret.
6 If your tailstock is fitted to a turret, click the Turret control button
and set the correct Location and Index position.
7 Click Finish.
A part_support_off feature is added to the Part View. You may
features.
Opening and closing steady rest jaws

You can open and close the jaws of a steady rest without moving it.
This is useful for turning operations on long parts. For example, you
can machine up to the steady rest, open the steady rest and
machine past it, then close the steady rest and machine to the end
of the part.
Steady rest open: Steady rest closed:
To control the jaws of a steady rest without moving it:
Feature wizard.
2 Select Part Handling and click Next.
The Dimensions page is displayed.
3 To close a steady rest, select Part Support On.
To open a steady rest, select Part Support Off.
4 Click Next.
The Strategies page is displayed.
5 In the Support type list, select Steadyrest.
6 Select Jaws only.

8 To specify when the Part Handling feature is performed, click and
drag the feature in Part View, or change the Base Priority
attribute on the Misc tab of the Part Handling Properties dialog.
Turn Format feature

A Turn Format feature enables you to manipulate the upper and
lower turret.
To create a Turn Format feature:
wizard is displayed.
2 Select Misc and click Next. The New Feature - Dimensions page is
displayed.
3 Select whether you want to control the Upper turret or the Lower
turret.
4 Select what you want to do:
 Turret home — sends the turret to the home position.
 Index the turret — Indexes the turret. Enter the Tool Index for
the tool you want to index.
 Air Blast — Creates an air blast. Click Next to display the New
Feature - Strategies (see page 575) page. Select a spindle and
an operation.
5 Click Finish to create the feature.
Turning canned cycles

and for some features you must also activate the canned cycles on
the feature level.
Hole features
Canned cycles for drilling (spotdrill, drill, bore, ream, and tap
operations) are used only if the post has G-codes defined on the NC
Codes page for these operations. If the G-codes are not defined, the
hole operations are still computed. See Hole canned cycles in
XBUILD or Computed tapping cycles in turning for more
information.

Turn/Bore features
Canned cycles for turn and bore features must be enabled by going
to the Properties dialog for each turn/bore feature, clicking the
Strategy tab and selecting Use canned cycle. Also select Reuse path
in canned cycle if you want to output the path geometry only once
for both roughing and finishing. You can also set these values in the
default attributes, but remember these values only apply to features
Groove features
Enable grooving canned cycles for each groove by bringing up the
feature's Property dialog, clicking on the Strategy tab, and then
clicking Use path canned cycle. You can also set this attribute on the
Groove tab of the default attributes, but remember this will only
apply to features you create after changing this setting.
Thread features

Turn/milling (TURN/MILL)
FeatureTURNMILL allows the combination of turning and milling
features on lathes with powered rotary tools. FeatureTURNMILL
supports the normal Z and X axes of turning combined with the C
and optional Y-axis.
The yoke shown in the first image, could be manufactured with a C
axis lathe in two setups or using a C axis lathe with a subspindle
(see page 843). The second image is a piece that requires a Y-axis
due to the flat pockets on the top and bottom of the piece. (If these
pockets were wrapped, they would have a curved bottom and then
they could be manufactured without a Y-axis).
When creating features, you are given the choice of creating turning
features or turn/mill features (see page 607). Turning and turnmill
features can be mixed in a single setup. Turning features are
identical to those on a 2-axis lathe and milling features are created
the same as for a 3-axis mill, except that you are given new choices
for positioning and orienting (see page 534) the features either on
the OD or on the face of the part.
Tool selection in FeatureTURNMILL is very similar to FeatureMILL
and FeatureTURN, except that rotary tools are automatically
classified (see page 1829) as either parallel to the X-axis or Z-axis.
All forms of simulation (Centerline, 2D and 3D solid) are supported.
In 3D simulation the rotation of the part is accurately simulated.
Turn/mill parts require specially written posts. Two axis

turning posts or milling posts will not work correctly.
Features appropriate for turn/mill

Milling features can be performed in turn/mill with the following
considerations:

 Milled features on the Z face. FeatureCAM can make any feature
on the face of a part by using only XZC moves, for machines that
do not have a Y-axis. If you want to use Y-axis on the face of a
feature, you must select Cut feature using Y Axis coordinates on
the Dimensions tab of the Feature Properties (see page 884) dialog.
 You can create drilled features on the Z face or OD without any
restrictions.
 Unwrapped milled features on the OD. These features are output
in X, Y, and Z moves. If your machine does not have a Y axis,
the only features you can cut on the OD (without wrapping) is a
simple slot whose length is aligned with the Z axis. If your
machine has Y-axis capabilities, you can cut the full set of milling
features on the OD.
 Wrapped features (see page 243) are supported (using a live
tool), with known limitations - the same limitations that
FeatureCAM has with wrapped 4th- axis features (see page 252).
To use wrapping, you must select the Wrap feature around Z-axis
option on the Dimensions page of the Feature Properties (see
page 884) dialog.
User-defined feature (UDF)

You can use User Defined Features (UDFs) to create features from
Macro add-ins, or to insert features from the Part Library (see page
1501).
Macro add-ins features are created using FeatureCAM's application
programming interface (API). These features are loaded into
FeatureCAM using the Macro Add-ins dialog (see page 145); this
allows FeatureCAM's standard interface to remain as streamlined as
possible.
Examples of add-in features include: helical bores with cutter
compensation, thin-walled pockets and bosses, and pulley grooves.
You can download add-ins from
http://www.featurecam.com/general/support/addins.asp
(http://www.featurecam.com/general/support/addins.asp).
Creating a User Defined Feature (UDF)

Macro Add-in features
Macro add-in User Defined Features are implemented as a Sax Basic
add-in using FeatureCAM's API. If you already have an add-in for a
UDF and it is loaded into FeatureCAM, then you can create an
instance of the feature it defines by using the following steps:

2 In the From Feature section, select User and click Next to open
the New Feature - User defined feature page.
3 Select the name of the user-defined feature and click Next.
If the feature you want is not listed, you must load it first
(see page 857).
4 To set a parameter, click the parameter name, enter the new
value and click Set.
5 Continue through the wizard and click Finish when you are done.
For information on using FeatureCAM's API to create user-defined
features, select Help > FeatureCAM API Help.
Part Library features

You can insert Part Library features into the document using the
New Feature wizard:
2 In the From Feature section, select User and click Next to open
the New Feature - User defined feature page.
3 Select a feature in the list and click Next.
The Paste Special dialog is displayed.
4 Use the Paste Special dialog (see page 1497) to insert the
selected feature into the document or apply it's machining
attributes to an existing feature, then click Finish to close the
dialog.
5 The User defined feature page of the New Feature wizard is
displayed.
6 Use the wizard to insert more features from the Part Library, or
click Cancel to close the wizard.
Wire features (WIRE)

The Wire feature types offered by FeatureCAM are:
2-axis Die (see page 859)
2-axis Punch (see page 860)
2-axis Side (see page 861)
2-axis Rapid (see page 863)

4-axis Die (see page 864)
4-axis Punch (see page 865)
4-axis Side (see page 866)
4-axis Rapid (see page 867)
The shape of the features is defined by the curve.
These features can create a number of wire EDM operations (see
page 620). The types of operation are controlled by the Strategy
Multiple curves in a single 2-axis wire feature

All wire EDM curves must lie in the XY plane or a plane parallel to
the XY plane.
A single 2-axis Die, Punch, or Side feature can contain multiple
curves. In this case you have the option of setting separate start
points and variable taper values for each curve, but all other
settings apply to all of the curves.
If the feature has multiple operations, such as a retract followed by
a cutoff, each operation is performed on each curve before moving
on to the next operation. To change this ordering, manually reorder
the operations in the Operations List (see page 1494).
2-axis Die
The 2-axis Die feature requires one or more closed curves. It is
assumed that the region(s) outside of the curve(s) is the part that
you keep, so the wire travels on the inside of the curve(s).
The thickness parameter is used to access the appropriate cutting

data table (see page 1509).
The A parameter is used to rotate the feature around the Z-axis of
the current Setup.
A 2-axis Die feature can create a number of cutting operations.
These are specified on the Strategy (see page 1468) tab.
A 2-axis Die feature can have a taper (see page 613).
To create a 2-axis Die feature:

3 In the 2 Axis section, select Die, then click Next to open the New
Feature - Curves (see page 609) page. Select the curve(s) for the
feature.
page.
5 Click Next to open the New Feature - Dimensions (see page 612)
page.
6 Click Next to open the New Feature - Start (see page 615) page.
page.
page.
9 Click Next to open the New Feature - Cutting Data (see page 632)
New Feature - Cutting Data page for the next operation. If you
2-axis Punch
The Punch feature requires one or more closed curves. The wire
travels on the outside of the curve(s).
The Thickness parameter is used to access the appropriate cutting

the current Setup.
A 2-axis Punch feature can create a number of cutting operations.

A 2-axis Punch feature can have a taper (see page 613).
To create a 2-axis Punch feature:
3 In the 2 Axis section, select Punch, then click Next to open the
New Feature - Curves (see page 609) page. Select the curve(s) for
the feature.
page.
page.
page.
page.
2-axis Side
The Side feature can use one or more closed or open curves. The
Punch or Die features provide more cutting options for closed
curves. You can optionally place the wire on either side of the
curves. A Side feature must have at least three arcs or lines in it
including the lead moves.

the current Setup.
A 2-axis Side feature can create a number of cutting operations.
A 2-axis Side feature can have a taper (see page 613).
A Side feature must have at least three moves in it including the
lead moves. If it does not, then no feature is displayed in the start
page that is displayed in the wizard. For example, if you are
creating a feature from a single line, you must change the start
point and end point so that the feature has three moves. If you add
these moves and click the Next button in the wizard, the feature
displays.
To create a 2-axis Side feature:
3 In the 2 Axis section, select Side, then click Next to open the New
Feature - Curves (see page 609) page. Select the curve(s) for the
feature.
534) page.
page.
page.
page.
page.

2-axis Rapid
A Rapid feature is used to rapid along the length of a curve to the
start point of the next feature. You can use Rapid features to quickly
move around a part using curves to avoid possible collision with
fixtures.
FeatureCAM programs a Rapid in a very similar way to a Side (see
page 861) feature. The wizard pages are similar, but fewer options
are needed.
To create a 2-axis Rapid feature:
3 In the 2 Axis section, select Rapid, then click Next to open the
New Feature - Curves (see page 609) page. Select the curve(s) for
the feature.
4 Click Next to open the New Feature - Machining Direction (see page
610) page.
page.
page.
page.
page.
page.

4-axis Die
The 4-axis Die feature needs two closed curves, an upper curve and
a lower curve. It is assumed that the region outside of the curve is
the part that you want to keep. The wire travels on the inside of the
curves.

the current Setup.
To create a 4-axis Die feature:
1 Create the upper and lower curves that define the shape of the
feature.
3 In the 4 Axis section, select Die.
4 Click Next to open the New Feature - Upper Curve (see page 610)
page.
5 Click Next to open the New Feature - Lower Curve (see page 610)
page.
page.
page.
9 Click Next to open the New Feature - Match Curves (see page 616)
page.
page.
page.

4-axis Punch
A 4-axis Punch feature needs two closed curves, an upper curve and
a lower curve. The wire travels on the outside of the curves.

the current Setup.
To create a 4-axis Punch feature:
feature.
3 In the 4 Axis section, select Punch.
page.
page.
page.
page.
page
page.

page.
4-axis Side
The 4-axis Side feature needs and upper and lower curve and can
use closed or open curves. Punch or Die features provides more
cutting options for closed curves. You can optionally place the wire
on either side of the curve. A Side feature must have at least three
arcs or lines in it including the lead moves.

the current Setup.
To create a 4-axis Side feature:
feature.
3 In the 4 Axis section, select Side.
page.
page.
534) page.

page.
page.
page
page.
page.
4-axis Rapid
A 4-axis Rapid feature is used to rapid along the length of upper
and lower curves to the start point of the next feature. You can use
Rapid features to quickly move around a part using curves to avoid
possible collision with fixtures.
FeatureCAM programs a Rapid in a very similar way to a Side (see
page 861) feature. The wizard pages are similar, but fewer options
are needed.
To create a 4-axis Rapid feature:
feature.
3 In the 4 Axis section, select Rapid.
page.
page.

6 Click Next to open the New Feature - Machining Direction (see page
610) page
page.
page.
page.
page.
page.
page.
Wire EDM feature recognition

There are two forms of interactive feature recognition available for
wire EDM features.
For two axis, you can project the vertical surfaces from a solid
model.
In the New feature dialog:
1 Select the 2 axis feature type, check Extract with
2 Select the solid and click Next.

3 Geometry is created from the vertical surfaces of the solid as
shown below. Chain the curves you want to use in the Feature
and complete the wizard.
4-axis features can be recognized from a collection of ruled

surfaces.
In the New feature dialog:
1 Select the 4 axis feature type, check Extract with
2 Select the boundary curve in the Surface boundaries (see page
611) dialog and then complete the wizard.
Groups and Patterns

To help you to model parts with repeated geometry elements in
their design, FeatureCAM enables you to specify groups of different
features, in addition to feature patterns.
A Group (see page 869) is a collection of objects that is treated as
one object. Members of groups do not have to be the same type of
object. When you group unlike features, you are creating your own
(user-defined) feature, which can be used as the basis for a pattern.
A Pattern (see page 872) enables you to quickly create the same
feature at multiple locations.
Creating a Group
To create a Group of unlike features:
1 Create the features you want to group.
2 Select the features you want to group in the graphics window.
Hold shift and click to select more than one object.

3 Select Construct > Pattern and Group > Group from the menu.
The Dimensions tab of the Feature Group Properties dialog is
displayed:
4 Ensure the Group is selected in the Tree View on the left of the
dialog.
5 If you want the objects in the group to be machined in the order
they are displayed in the Objects List:
a Select Ordered.
b Select an object in the Objects list.
c Click Up or Down to move the object up or down by one place
in the list.
d Repeat steps b and c to reorder the objects.
6 To remove a feature from the Group, select it in the Objects list
and click Delete.
7 To add a feature to the Group, select it from the Model Objects
list below the Objects list, then click Add.
Alternatively, you can create a Group using the New Feature wizard:
1 Create any features you want to group.

3 Select Group in the From Feature section.
4 Click Next and follow the instructions in the wizard.
Group Properties dialog

You can use the Feature Group Properties dialog to create groups
from multiple objects.
To display the Feature Group Properties dialog, select any features

you want to group in the graphics window, then select Construct >
Pattern and Group > Group from the menu.
The Dimensions tab contains the following options:
Objects list — A list of objects in the Group.
Model Objects list (below the Objects list) — A list of objects in the
model.
Ordered — Select this option to machine the objects in the order
they are displayed in the Objects list.
Up — Moves the selected Object in the Objects list up by one place.
Down — Moves the selected Object in the Objects list down by one
place.
Add — Adds the selected Object in the Model Objects list to the
group.

Delete — Removes the selected Object in the Objects list from the
Group.
Tree View — Displays the Objects in the group. You can select an
Object in the Tree View to display options for editing the Object.
Ungrouping objects
After you have created a group, you cannot select the objects
individually.
To ungroup objects without deleting them:
1 Select a Group in the graphics window.
2 Select Construct > Pattern and Group > Ungroup from the menu.
If you select the group and press Del, you remove the group
AND delete the objects in the group.
Creating a Pattern
You can create a Pattern from a new feature or from an existing
feature:
To create a pattern from a new feature:
Feature Wizard (see page 530).
2 Select the feature type you want to create a pattern from.
3 Select Make a pattern from this feature.
4 Click Next.
5 Follow the steps in the Wizard to create the Pattern.
To create a pattern from an existing feature using the New Feature
Wizard:
Feature Wizard (see page 530).
2 Select Pattern in the From Feature section.
3 Click Next.
4 Follow the steps in the Wizard to create the Pattern.
To create a pattern from an existing feature using the menu:
1 Select the feature you want to create a Pattern from in the
graphics window.
2 Select Construct > Pattern and Group > Pattern from the menu.

3 Use the Pattern Properties dialog (see page 873) to create a
Pattern.
Pattern Properties dialog

You can use the Pattern Properties dialog to create patterns from a
single object.
To use the Pattern Properties dialog to create a Pattern:

1 Ensure the Pattern is selected in the Tree View on the left of the
dialog.
You can select items in the Tree View to display the pattern
properties, the object properties, and the manufacturing
operation properties.
2 On the Dimensions tab, you can modify the shape of the pattern
using the Number, Spacing, Angle, and other properties.
Optionally select Local Offset to create the pattern around the
location of the original feature.
3 On the Location tab:
 Relative Position — select to enter the coordinates of a point
relative to the Local Coordinate System, deselect to enter the
coordinates of a point relative to the World Coordinate
System.

 XYZ location — you can move the object to a new location. If
the X Y Z coordinate position is (0,0,0), then the group's
objects all remain in the same location at which they were
independently defined.
 For Polar location, Angle rotates the current group
counter-clockwise from its X-axis location by the angle
specified at the Radius specified.
4 On the Strategy tab:
 If you want to use macros (also known as NC subroutines or
subprograms) to reduce the size of the code created for the
pattern, select Use macro calls for each instance in the
pattern. This setting requires you to use a post that supports
incremental programming or local coordinate systems (see
page 1569).
Ensure that macros are enabled in the Post Options (see

page 1858) dialog.
 If you are using macros, you can reduce calculation time by
also selecting Reuse toolpaths from first Instance in the
pattern. In this situation, toolpaths are only calculated for the
first feature and reused for the subsequent features of the
pattern.
Types of pattern
You can create the following types of Pattern:
 Linear (see page 874)
 Radial in the setup XY plane (see page 875)
 Radial around index axis (see page 875)
 Radial around arbitrary axis (see page 875)
 Rectangular (see page 878)
 Points list pattern in the XY plane (see page 879)
Linear
A Linear Pattern arranges the specified number of objects in a line,
at the specified distance apart, starting at the specified XYZ
location.
Use the treeview pane to control whether you are looking at the
pattern, the object, or the manufacturing operations for the pattern.
Simply highlight your choice with the mouse. The rest of the dialog
changes to reflect your choice.

Number of objects in the linear
pattern
Spacing between objects in
the linear pattern
Angle of the linear pattern
position
Angle — Enter the angle of rotation around the Z-axis, measured

counter-clockwise from the X-axis, for the first object in the pattern.
Local offset — This controls whether the initial position of the object
of the pattern is ignored. The position of the object is completely
determined by its position in the pattern. If Local offset is selected,
then the feature's position influences the created pattern.
Using an object's position in a pattern can be tricky. For
example, use local offsets to create a pattern of profiled features,
say, a radial pattern of profile pockets.
The recommended procedure is:
1 Create the profile relative to the UCS.
2 Enter the center of the pattern as XYZ coordinates.
3 Enter 0.0 as the radius.
The pockets share the relative position to their center as the
initial curve did to its UCS.
Object list — This highlights the name of the object repeated in the
pattern. To change the object, click the down-arrow, then select the
object to use in the pattern.
Number — This sets the number of objects in the pattern.
Spacing angle — This sets the space between the objects specified in
degrees.
XYZ — This sets the location of the lower left-hand object of the
pattern, or click to pick a point with the mouse.
Radial
A Radial pattern arranges the specified features spaced along the
circumference of a circle. The spacing can be set so you only
arrange features along an arc instead of the whole circle. Spacing
and angles are set with dimensions settings.

Number of features in the radial pattern,
including the original feature
Diameter of the radial pattern
Spacing Angle between objects in the radial
pattern
Angle of the radial pattern position
Angle — This sets the angle of rotation around the Z-axis, measured
Using an object's position in a pattern can be tricky. For example,
use local offsets to create a pattern of profiled features, say, a
radial pattern of profile pockets. The recommended procedure is:
The pockets share the relative position to their center as the initial
curve did to its UCS.
Diameter — This sets the overall diameter of the pattern.
Spacing Angle — This sets the space between the objects specified
in degrees.

Radial Pattern Types
Radial in the setup XY plane — This option orients the features in the
XY plane of the Setup. The two hole patterns in the image below are
parallel to the Z- axis of the Setup.
Radial around the index axis — This option aligns the features on the
OD of the part, pointing toward the index axis. The slot and hole
patterns in the figure below are radial.
This option is available only with 4th axis wrapping.

Radial around arbitrary axis — This option positions the features
around a specified origin in a specified axis. It is only available only
for 5th axis machining.
Rectangular
A Rectangular Pattern arranges the specified number of like objects
in two linear rows, with each row separating the objects at the
specified spacing, and with the rows spaced as specified in row
spacing, starting at the specified XYZ location.
Number — This is the number of
objects you want in each row of the
rectangular pattern
Row Number — This is the number of
rows you want in the rectangular pattern
Spacing — This is the distance between
objects in the row
Row Spacing — This is the distance
between the rows
Angle of the rectangular pattern
position
Local offset controls whether the initial position of the object of the
pattern is ignored. The position of the object is completely

say, a radial pattern of profile pockets. The recommended
procedure is:
Row Number — This sets the number of rows of objects.
Row Spacing — This sets the spacing between the rows. If you are
creating a pattern in the standard Top view with the Y axis pointing
up and the X axis pointing to the right, the Row Spacing is a
distance in the Y direction.
Spacing — This sets the spacing between the columns. If you are
creating a pattern in the standard Top view with the Y axis pointing
up and the X axis pointing to the right, the Spacing is a distance in
the X direction.
Points list
A Points list pattern enables you to specify the locations of individual
points.
Select Points list pattern in the setup XY plane in the New Feature -
Patterns (see page 874) dialog to display the Pattern - Dimensions
dialog.
Use the tree view to move between the pattern properties, the
object properties, and the manufacturing operation properties.
Select the item in the tree view whose properties you want to see.
There is a shortcut for some points patterns of holes (see page
884).
The different fields and buttons are:

say, a radial pattern of profile pockets. The recommended
procedure is:
Sorting — This displays the Point List Sorting dialog. This dialog
allows you to sort the objects in the following ways:
 Shortest path — Starting with the first object in the list, a path is
created by moving to the next closest object.

 X ascending — Objects are sorted in increasing order according
to their X coordinates.
 X descending — Objects are sorted in decreasing according to
their X coordinates.
 Y ascending — Objects are sorted in increasing order according
to their Y coordinates.
 Y descending — Objects are sorted in decreasing according to
their Y coordinates.
The left-hand figure shows a Shortest Path sorting. The figure on
the right shows a y descending ordering.
The transitions for these four options can be Unidirectional or

Bidirectional and you can edit the Location comparison tolerance
to control how strict the comparisons are.
In this example, Unidirectional is selected. After cutting the three
holes in the first 'column', the tool then rapids back down to the
bottom of the next 'column' to cut the next feature:
These rapid moves are a particular problem with long parts, when
the machine can be accelerating and decelerating over long
distances.

Selecting Bidirectional lets the tool cut in both directions, and results
in a lot less rapiding, for example:
With this example, you can make the toolpath yet more efficient by
entering a Location comparison tolerance:
The tolerance lets FeatureCAM cut the next nearest feature, as long
as it is within the tolerance.
Point List — This displays the location and angle of the selected
points. If you pre-selected holes or points, the order in which you
picked these objects is reflected in the Point List. Clicking a row of
the table displays the values in the X, Y, Z, and A options in the
dialog. You can then modify the values using the Set, Add, Delete,
Up, and Down options.
Pick Feature button — Use to determine which row of the point

list contains the location of a specific feature. Click the button and
then select a feature in the graphic window to highlight the row in
the table containing that feature.
Set — Applies the values in the X, Y, Z, and A fields to the selected
row in the Point List.
To change a location in the Point List table:
1 Click the row in the table you want to change. The values are
inserted into the X, Y, Z, and A fields.
2 Change the values in the X, Y, Z, and A fields.

3 Click Set.
Add — Creates a new point in the Point List with the values in the X,
Y, Z, and A fields.
Delete — Removes the selected row from the Point List.
Up — Moves the selected row of the Point List up one row in the list.
Down — This moves the selected row of the Point List table down
one row in the table.
X, Y, Z — The X, Y, Z coordinates of a point.
A — The local Z rotation about the object's center.
Cut feature using Y Axis coordinates — In Turn/Mill, 4 axis, or 5 axis
parts with Z-indexing (see page 232), select this option to cut in X
and Y, or deselect it to rotate the part about the index axis.

C Angle — If Cut feature using Y Axis coordinates is selected, enter

the spindle C angle at which to cut the feature.
Curves (points pattern)

Curves loads point locations from a linear profile. Click Curves to
bring up the Select Curves dialog. Select the profiles that contain
points you want to use as feature locations.
Hold down the CTRL key to select multiple profiles.

Select Circles
Select the Edit > Select Circles menu option to display the Select
Circles dialog, which you can use to select multiple circles of a
similar size.
To select circles of similar sizes:
1 Select the Edit > Select Circles menu option.
The Select Circles dialog is displayed.
2 Enter the Radius of the circles you want to select.
To use the radius of a specific circle, click the blue label and
select it in the graphics window.
3 Enter the Tolerance for the specified radius.
4 Click OK to close the dialog and select all visible circles in the
current setup that have the specified radius.
You can now use these circles to create patterns of holes. See
Creating patterns (see page 872) or Point list pattern (see page
879) for additional information. See also Interrogating numeric
values (see page 292).
Editing features
You can edit existing features using the Feature Properties (see page
884) dialog. This dialog contains the same options as the New
Feature (see page 530) wizard, which enables you to edit the
physical properties and machining attributes of a feature.
You can also change the default settings for some attributes
at a global level using the Machining Attributes (see page
1591) dialog. If you set an attribute at feature level, it
overrides any default global attributes set in the Machining
Attributes dialog. This is recommended for advanced users
only.
Feature Properties dialog

The Feature Properties dialog enables you to edit the attributes of
existing features.
Use one of the following methods to display the Feature Properties
dialog:
 Double-click the feature in the graphics window or the Part View.
 Right-click the feature in the Part View and select Properties from
the context menu.

 Select the feature in the graphics window or the Part View and
click the Properties button in the Feature/Geometry Edit bar.

 Click Finish and Edit Properties (see page 531) in the New Feature
wizard (see page 530).
The Feature Properties dialog has a tree view on the left and tabs on
the right:
tree view
tabs
The tree view displays a list of the operations and passes for the
feature. The tabs displayed in the dialog change depending on what
level in the tree view is selected.
The feature-level attributes available in the Feature Properties dialog
depend on the type of feature:
milling (see page 903)
drilling (see page 886)
3D milling (see page 1045)
turning (see page 1351)
wire (see page 1468)

Drilling feature attributes (25D)
You can use the Hole Feature Properties dialog to edit the properties
of a drilling feature.
Use one of the following methods to display the Hole Feature
Properties dialog:
 Right-click a Hole feature in the graphics window or Part View
panel and select Properties from the context menu.
 Double-click a Hole feature in the graphics window or Part View
panel.
Tree view
Tabs
The drilling tree view lists the different operations for the feature:
Feature
Operation
The tabs displayed in the dialog change depending on the level in
the tree view you have selected.

Feature-level tabs
Select the feature name at the top level of the tree view to access
these tabs:
 Dimensions (see page 905) — This tab contains critical
dimensions for defining the feature's shape.
 Location (see page 888) — This tab is where you enter the
location of the feature.
 Strategy (see page 889) — This tab controls the types of
operations that are used to cut the hole.
 Misc (see page 973) — This tab contains various parameters for
the feature.
Operation-level tabs
Select an operation in the tree view to access these tabs:
 Tools (see page 981) — This tab controls tool selection.
 F/S (see page 983) — This tab controls feed and speed values.
 Cycle (see page 898) — This tab is where you choose which drill
cycle to use for the operation.
 Drilling (see page 900) — This tab contains attributes for drilling.

Location tab (5AP)
Use the Location tab of the Hole Feature Properties dialog (see page
886) to edit the location of a 5 axis hole feature.
Relative Position — This sets the XYZ coordinates relative to the UCS
(or Setup origin). If deselected, the coordinates are relative to the
Direction — Enter the dimensions of the direction vector to specify
the direction of the hole, or click Pick location and select two
points in the graphics window to represent the direction.
Position — Enter the coordinates of the top of the Hole feature, or
click Pick location and select a point in the graphics window.
Reverse direction — If a 5-axis hole is created in the wrong

direction, click this button to reverse it.

Strategy tab (Drilling) (25D)
You can use the Strategy tab of the Hole Feature Properties dialog
(see page 886) to edit the machining strategy of a Hole feature.
Combine with similar holes into canned cycle (see page 891) — By
When using Drill/Mill, FeatureCAM adds a rough operation to

the tree view and you can access the Stepovers (see page
985) and Milling (see page 1161) tabs.
Click Drill/Mill Options to display the Drill/Mill Options dialog
(see page 895), where you can edit drill/mill parameters.

1591) dialog. Set it on the Drilling (see page 1598, see
page 889) tab.
Hole feature.
created.
Pilot Drill — Enable this option to add a pilot drill operation to the
Hole feature.
Pilot drill diameter(s) — This enables and sets a list of drill sizes used
to drill pilot holes. Enter a list of drill diameters to use for pilot
drilling, with a comma between each.
For example, enter 0.5, 1, 1.5 in inches, to pilot drill with the half inch
drill for final hole sizes up to an inch. A hole bigger than 1.5 inches
is pilot drilled with all three of the specified drills before being drilled
to size.

Drill — Enable this option to add a drilling operation to the
manufacture of the hole. This operation is usually undersized in
preparation for later reaming or boring.
Ream — Enable this option to add a Ream operation to the Hole
feature. This option drills a Hole undersized and then reams it to
size. The diameter of the drill is between 93% and 97% of the final
Hole diameter.
surface.
Tap type — This option is available for Tapped Hole features. Select
the type of tap from:
Bore — Enable this option to add a Bore operation to the Hole
feature. Boring places a hole very accurately.
The options on this tab are the same as the options on New
Feature - Strategies page for a Hole feature in the New Feature
wizard.
Combine similar holes into canned cycle
The Combine similar holes into canned cycle attribute applies to
drilling operations.
In previous versions of FeatureCAM this attribute was called

Retract to Plunge Clearance. The Retract to Plunge Clearance
attribute still applies to milling operations.
By default, FeatureCAM retracts the tool to the higher Z rapid plane
between operations. Although this is a safe assumption, it can result
in inefficient NC part programs because between each operation the
program cancels (G80) and then re-establishes (G81, G83, and so
on) the canned cycle mode. The figure below shows such an
inefficient program.

:10
(9-13-2001)
N25G00G17G40G49G80
N30G30G91Z0
N35T1M6
N40G00G54G90X0.Y0.S38
19M03
N45G43H1Z1.0M08
N50Z0.1
N55G83R0.1Z-1.0Q0.25F
14.3 Tool change location
N60G80 Z rapid plane
N65Z1.0
N70X0.5
N75Z0.1
N80G83R0.1Z-1.0Q0.25F
14.3
N85G80
N90Z1.0
N95X1.0
N100Z0.1
N105G83R0.1Z-1.0Q0.25
F14.3
N110G80
N115Z1.0
N120G0G91G28Z0M09
N125G49G90
N130M30
The Combine with similar holes into canned cycle attribute serves two
functions. First it creates more efficient NC code by entering canned
cycle mode only once. It also causes the tool to retract to the lower
Plunge Clearance plane after drilling each hole.
If the Disable Macros is deselected in the Post Options dialog, the
hole locations are included in a macro as shown in the Fanuc NC
code sample below.

:10
(9-13-2001)
N25G00G17G40G49G80
N30G30G91Z0
N35T1M6
N40G00G54G90X0.Y0.S38
19M03
N45G43H1Z1.0M08
N50Z0.1
N55G83R0.1Z-1.0Q0.25F Tool change location
14.3
Z rapid plane
N60P1001M98
N65G80 Plunge clearance
N70G00Z1.0
N75G0G91G28Z0M09
N80G49G90
N85M30
:1001
N90G91
N95X0.5
N100X1.0
N105G90
N110M99
If Disable Macros is selected, the NC code is still efficient, because

canned cycle mode is entered only once. The code sample shown
below is Fanuc NC code for a hole pattern with Combine with similar
holes into canned cycle enabled, but without macros.
:10
(9-13-2001)
N25G00G17G40G49G80
N30G30G91Z0
N35T1M6
N40G00G54G90X0.Y0.S3819M03
N45G43H1Z1.0M08
N50Z0.1
N55G83R0.1Z-1.0Q0.25F14.3
N60X0.5
N65X1.0
N70G80
N75G00Z1.0
N80G0G91G28Z0M09
N85G49G90
N90M30

After Combine with Similar holes into canned cycles is selected on a
feature, you can specify the retract plane for the whole feature on
the Hole Feature Properties Strategy (see page 889) tab or for each
of the feature's operations individually in the Retract column of the
Op List (see page 1548) tab. If you are using a post that supports
Fanuc-style G99 "R point level return" and G98 "Initial level return",
then these codes are used by FeatureCAM. Otherwise the canned
cycle is cancelled and reinstated as necessary. To set the retract
plane for the feature, you have two options on the Strategy tab:
Retract to Z rapid The tool retracts to the higher Z Rapid Plane

plane (G98, "Initial level return", on a Fanuc
control) after performing the operation.
Retract to plunge The tool retracts to the lower plunge
clearance clearance plane (G99, "R point level return",
on a Fanuc control) after performing the
operation.
To set the retract plane for individual operations, the Retract column
of the Op List (see page 1548) tab contains one of the following
symbols:
This short green up arrow indicates that the tool retracts to

the lower plunge clearance plane (G99, "R point level return",
on a Fanuc control) after performing the operation. You can
toggle this arrow to a tall arrow by clicking the arrow with
the left mouse button and selecting Retract to Z rapid plane
This tall green up arrow means that the tool retracts to the
higher Z Rapid Plane (G98, "Initial level return", on a Fanuc
control) after the operation. You can toggle this arrow to a
short arrow by clicking the arrow with the left mouse button
and selecting Retract to Plunge clearance from the context
menu.
This gray arrow indicates the tool retracts to the higher Z
Rapid Plane after the operation; you cannot change it
because it is typically shown at the end of a canned cycle.

The figure below shows two hole patterns. The first pattern that
contains holes 1, 2 and 3 has Combine with Similar holes into canned
cycles selected. Hole 2 has been modified to retract to the Rapid
plane.
Tool change point

Rapid plane
Retract plane
If you are using a post that supports different rapid planes inside a
canned cycle, that is a Fanuc post that supports G98/G99, then you
can create G-code that is more efficient. Fanuc supports G98 for
retracting to the higher Z rapid plane and G99 for retracting to the
lower plunge clearance plane. These G-codes are entered in the
post processor as the R plane retract (for the lower plunge
clearance plane, G99) and Z rapid retract (for the higher Z Rapid
Plane, G98). The resulting program is as follows:
N65 G83 G98 Z-1.0751 R0.1 Q0.25 F14.3
N70 X0.0
N75 X0.5
N80 X1.0 G99
N85 X1.5 G98
N90 X2.0
N95 X2.5 G99
N100 G80
Drill/Mill Options (feature level)

You can use the Drill/Mill Options dialog to edit the feature-level
drilling and milling options.

To display the Drill/Mill Options dialog, select Drill/Mill on the Strategy
tab (see page 889) of the Hole Feature Properties dialog, then click
Drill/Mill Options.
Select the strategies that you want to enable. The options are:
 Drill full diameter
 Rough with Drill, Finish with Bore
 Rough with Drill, Finish with Ream
 Rough with Endmill, Finish with Bore
 Rough with Endmill, Finish with Ream
 Rough with Endmill, Finish with Endmill
 Finish Bottom
 Rough with Endmill to full diameter — this option lets FeatureCAM
rough to the final hole diameter without having a finish pass.
 Use hole milling canned cycle if available ( ) — For machines that
support hole/bore milling, such as Heidenhain Cycle 208,
Siemens POCKET4, Fagor G88, and Haas G12/13. The hole
milling canned cycle is posted using the hole milling format in
XBUILD. If you enter a G code, for example G208, for the Hole
Milling cycle in the NC Codes dialog in XBUILD, that code
displays in the brackets after this attribute name, for example
Use hole milling canned cycle if available (G208).
If you select more than one strategy, FeatureCAM works down the
strategy list in the dialog until it finds a strategy that can complete
the hole.
Hole feature.

created.
surface.
Cutter comp.
Use continuous spiral — Select this option to use an NT Continuous
Spiral toolpath, which eliminates nearly all stepovers.
Use continuous spiral Use continuous spiral
deselected selected

You can use Helical ramping with Use continuous spiral, for example:
Traditional spiral toolpaths can produce spikes in tool load. Another

advantage of NT continuous spiral is that the tool load increases
gradually.
Cycle tab (25D)

You can use the Cycle tab of the Hole Feature Properties dialog (see
page 886) to edit the Drill Cycle attributes for an Operation.
Drill (G81) — This is a straight up and down motion without any

pecking.
Spot Face (G82) — This is a drilling cycle with an optional dwell.

Deep Hole (G83) — The drill retracts all the way to the Plunge
clearance plane a number of times during the process to clear debris
from the Hole. You can override the tool's pecking options (see page
1794) for each operation, but the peck style is specified in the CNC
file.
Tap (G84) — Select the tap type using the Tap Cycle option. The
choices are Floating, Rigid, Deep Hole, and Chip Break. All cycles use
the same Tap program format, but logical reserved words exist in
XBUILD to distinguish the specified tap type.
Reverse Tap (G74) — This is a left-handed tapping cycle.
If you do not enter a G-code for the Reverse Tap cycle in

the NC Codes dialog in XBUILD, computed canned moves
are performed.
Chip Break (G87) — In this cycle, the drill retracts a short distance
to clear chips before plunging again.
Ream — This cycle affects how a ream is performed. The choices are
Ream FDF (feed-dwell-feed) (G89), Ream FF (feed-feed) (G85), and
Ream FSR (feed-stop spindle-retract) (G86).
If you select Ream FF, the cycle is posted using the Bore
(FF) format in XBUILD. Ream FDF uses the Bore (FDF)
format, and Ream FSR uses the Bore (FSR) format.
Bore cycle affects how a bore is performed. Select one of the
following from the menu:
 FDF — The cycle is posted using the Bore (FDF) (feed-dwell-feed)
(G89) format in XBUILD.
 FF — The cycle is posted using the Bore (FF) (feed-feed) (G85)
format in XBUILD.
 FSR — The cycle is posted using the Bore (FSR) (feed-stop
spindle-retract) (G86) format in XBUILD.
 No Drag — The cycle is posted using the Bore (No Drag) (G76)
format in XBUILD.
 FDSJ — The cycle is posted using the Bore (FDSJ) (G88) format in
XBUILD.

Back Bore (G87) — Use the Back Bore cycle to machine back bore
holes using a single Setup.
Drilling tab (25D)

You can use the Drilling tab of the Hole Feature Properties dialog (see
page 886) to edit the drilling attributes for an Operation.
Drill operation:
Drill depth — Enter the absolute depth that the tool is driven into the
stock, not including a point allowance. The Depth setting in the
dimension attributes automatically includes a point allowance so use
this attribute to override the point allowance. Alternatively use Drill
depth adjust. This applies to Drill, Ream, Countersink, and Boring
operations.
Drill depth adj. — Enter a positive or negative drill depth adjustment
relative to the Hole feature's Depth dimension. Use this attribute
instead of Drill depth if you prefer.
If you enter both a Drill depth and a Drill depth adj. the
adjustment is applied to the Drill depth value not the Depth
dimension.

Spotdrill operation:
Spot drill depth — Enter the absolute depth that the spotdrill
operation is driven into the stock.
Spot drill depth adj. — Enter the spot drill depth adjustment. You can
enter a relative positive or negative spot drill depth adjustment to
the Hole feature's Depth dimension instead of a Spot drill depth if
you prefer.
If you enter both a Spot Drill depth and a Spot Drill depth adj.
the adjustment is applied to the Spot drill depth value not the
Depth dimension.
Tap operation:
Max. tap spindle RPM — Enter the maximum speed, in RPM, for the
tap operation.

Tap depth — This is an override for setting the depth of a tap
operation.
By default, the system automatically sets a depth based on the
thread depth and the geometry of the tap that is chosen. If it is a
plug tap, five pitches are added to the requested tap depth. If it is a
bottoming tap, three pitches are added to the requested tap depth.
If you enter a Tap depth value, no additional adjustment is made for
the tap geometry, the Tap depth is passed straight to the NC code.
Tap plunge clearance — Enter the height above the feature where
the tapping tool starts to feed into the feature.
Post Vars (see page 1656) button
Multi-axis drilling attributes

Multi-axis milling and drilling features have these attributes.
Select from:

irregular shape.

For example:

operations.
Milling feature attributes (25D)

You can use the Milling Feature Properties dialog to edit the
properties of a Milling feature.
Use one of the following methods to display the Milling Feature
Properties dialog:
 Right-click a Milling feature in the graphics window or Part View
panel and select Properties from the context menu.

 Double-click a Milling feature in the graphics window or Part View
panel.
Tree view
Tabs
The 2.5D milling tree view lists the different operations and passes
for the feature:
Feature
Operation
Pass
Feature-level tabs
these tabs:

 Dimensions (see page 905) — This tab contains critical
dimensions for defining the feature's shape. This tab changes
based on the feature type.
 Location (see page 934) — This tab is where you enter the
location of the feature.
 Misc (see page 973) — This tab contains various parameters for
the feature.
 Strategy (see page 936) — This tab controls the types of
operations that are created from the feature.
Select an operation in the tree view to access the following tabs:
 Tools (see page 981) — This tab controls tool selection.
 F/S (see page 983) — This tab controls feed and speed values.
 Stepovers (see page 985) — This tab contains attributes for
connection and lead moves.
 Milling (see page 994) — This tab contains attributes for milling.
Pass-level tabs
If the milling operation has more than one pass, you set the
attributes on the following tabs at pass level. Select the pass in the
tree view.
 Tools (see page 981)
 F/S (see page 983)
 Coolant (see page 985)
 Stepovers (see page 985)
 Milling (see page 994)
Dimensions tab (25D)

You can use the Dimensions tab of the Milling Feature Properties
dialog (see page 903) to edit the physical properties of features.
The Dimensions tab is different for each Milling feature type, and
contains the attributes on the New Feature - Dimensions (see page
532) page of the New Feature (see page 530) wizard, as well as
other advanced attributes.
If a dimension field has a blue label (see page 293), you can
click it and 'pick' the dimension from objects in the graphics
window.

Rectangular pocket
Length — Enter the X dimension of the feature.

Width — Enter the Y dimension of the feature.
Corner radius — Enter the radius for all four corners of the
Rectangular Pocket.
Depth — Enter the distance cut into the material in Z.
Chamfer — Optionally enter the depth of a 45 chamfer cut at the
chamfer.
positive numbers.
Bottom Radius — Optionally set a bottom radius for the feature. The
square corner.
X Section — Click this button to open the Select Side Curve dialog,
where you can select a curve to create a cross section (see page
928) for the wall of your feature.
A — If the feature does not align with the X axis, enter the angle of
the feature from the X axis.

Wrap feature around X/Y axis — This option is available for 4th-axis
wrapping (see page 243).
Wrap Options — Click this button to display the Wrapped toolpath
options dialog.



Slot
This option simplifies the manufacturing strategy for the feature.

Select this option to machine the feature by making a single pass
down the center of it with a tool whose radius is equal to the width
of the feature.
Length — Enter the X dimension of the feature.
The width of a slot does not have to match the diameter of

a standard available endmill, unless you are making a
Simple slot. If an exact match cannot be found, then a
smaller tool is selected and multiple horizontal passes are
performed.
chamfer.
positive numbers.

square corner.
options dialog.



Step Bore
The default Step Bore feature has two steps. Each step corresponds
to a row of the table.
Diameter — Enter the diameter of the selected step.
Chamfer — Optionally enter the depth of a 45 degree chamfer cut at
the top edge of the selected step. Leave this value at the default, 0,
for no chamfer.
The Depth is measured from the top of the Step Bore

feature, not the top of the current step.
Radius — Optionally set the bottom radius for the selected step. The
square corner.
Through — This sets the display of the Step Bore without a bottom.
Selecting Through does not make the feature pass all the
way through the stock. You must set the depth value deep
enough.

Single Point Bore — This sets the step to be finished with a boring
bar. This mills the step to a tight tolerance. Select the option if you
want to finish the step with this technique.
Set — This saves the dimensions for the current step and updates
them in the table.
Delete — This removes the step that is selected in the table from the
Step Bore feature.
Add — This adds a step to the Step Bore feature.
options dialog.



Thread mill
Type — Select ID for an inner diameter thread or OD for an outer

diameter thread.
Custom — Enter the thread dimensions.
Standard Thread — Select a thread from the list to use standard
dimensions.
Pitch — Enter the pitch of the thread.
Thread Length — Enter the length of the thread.
Thread Height — Enter the height of the thread.
Minor/Major Diameter — Enter the Minor Diameter for an ID feature or
the Major Diameter for an OD feature.
Tapered — If your thread is tapered, select this option and enter the
taper Angle.


Thread — Select a Left hand or Right hand thread. When viewed from
the end of the part toward the chuck, on a left hand thread the tool
winds counter-clockwise as it moves towards the chuck, on a right
hand thread the tool winds clockwise as it moves towards the
chuck.



Face
Boundaries — Click this button to open the Select Boundary Curves

(see page 926) dialog, where you can select a curve to limit your
feature.
Thickness — Enter the thickness of the feature.


Boss
Stock Curve — Click this button to open the Select Stock Curve (see
page 930) dialog, where you set the stock boundary for the feature.
Curves — Click this button to display the Ordering (see page 929)
dialog.
Check surfaces — Click this button to open the Select Check Surfaces
(see page 931) dialog. This button is available only for NT toolpaths
(see page 936).
positive numbers.
chamfer.
Height — Enter the height of the feature.

square corner.



Chamfer
Chamfer Type — Select the chamfer type from:

 2D Chamfer — Create a chamfer on a curve in the XY plane.
 3D Chamfer — Create a chamfer on a planar curve that is not in
the XY plane, or on a non-planar curve.

non-planar curves.
dialog.


Groove
Select the type of Groove from:
Face — This sets the groove to cut on the XY plane of the current
Setup.
Inside/Outside — This sets the groove to run on the inside or outside
of a closed curve.
dialog.

Face Groove
Simple (Engrave) — This option simplifies the manufacturing strategy

for the feature. Select this option to machine the feature by making
a single pass down the center of it with a tool whose radius is equal
to the width of the feature.
Width — Enter the width of the Groove feature.
Depth — Enter the depth of the Groove feature.
square corner.


Inside/Outside Groove




Pocket
Boundaries — Click this button to open the Select Boundary Curves

(see page 926) dialog, where you can select a curve to limit your
feature.

(see page 936).
positive numbers.
chamfer.
square corner.
Wrap feature around Z axis — When using 4th-axis positioning (see
page 234), select this option to wrap the feature around the axis.
For example, this part has four Pockets:
Select Wrap feature around Z axis and a 3D simulation looks like this:



Round

dialog.



Side
Stock Curve — Click this button to open the Select Stock Curve (see
page 930) dialog, where you set the stock boundary for the feature.
(see page 936).
positive numbers.
chamfer.
square corner.



Dimensions tab dialogs
You can display these dialogs from the Dimensions tab:
 Select Islands dialog (see page 927)
 Select Side Curve dialog (see page 928)
 Select Check Surfaces dialog (see page 931)
 Select Part Surfaces dialog (see page 1051)
 Select Stock Solid dialog (see page 223)
Select Boundary Curves dialog
You can use the Select Boundary Curves dialog to specify which
curves define a feature boundary.

To display the Select Boundary Curves dialog, click Boundaries on
the Dimensions tab (see page 905) of the Milling Feature Properties
dialog.
Show all — Select this option to show all curves in the current
document.
Ordering
You can use a single feature to machine multiple curves if they are
at the same height and do not intersect. For features with multiple
curves, use this section to control the order in which the curves are
machined:
 Automatic ordering — Select this option to enable FeatureCAM to
determine the machining order of the curves, starting with the
first in the list. This order is not affected by the options in the
Automatic Ordering Options dialog (see page 1553).
 Manual ordering — Select this option to machine the curves in the
order they are displayed in this dialog.
You can change the order by selecting a curve in the list and
using the Move item up and Move item down buttons.
To sort the features in the list, click Sorting and use the Curve
Sorting Options dialog.
Select Islands dialog

You can use the Select Islands dialog to create islands inside pockets
which are left uncut.
To display the Select Islands dialog, click Islands on the Dimensions
(see page 905) tab of the Milling Feature Properties dialog.

You can do this only for Pockets created from curves.
To use the dialog:

1 Select the curve (see page 59) to use as the pocket island.
Islands are regions left uncut within a pocket. Island curves must
be contained within the boundary curve and they cannot touch or
overlap.
2 To remove all of the islands from a pocket, click Unselect All.
Select Side Curve dialog
You can use the Select Side Curve dialog to specify a curve to define
the cross-section of a feature.
To display the Select Side Curve dialog, click the X Section button on
the Dimensions (see page 905) tab of the Milling Feature Properties
dialog.
You can define the shape of the walls of a Boss, Side, or Pocket
feature by specifying a cross-section curve. This curve is swept
along the curve of the feature to create the overall shape. The curve
must be:
 in the XY plane, with the starting point of the curve at (0,0) in
the setup axis; or
For example,

curve:
 in place on the feature curve.

For example,
curve:
The curve must be a function in X and Y. This means that when you
draw a vertical line parallel to the X or Y-axis through the curve at
any point, it can only intersect the curve once.
To use the dialog:
1 Select the curve (see page 59) you want to use as the
cross-section.
2 To remove a cross-section curve, click Unselect.
Ordering dialog
You can use the Ordering dialog to specify which curves define the
shape of a feature.
To display the Ordering dialog, click Curves on the Dimensions (see
page 905) tab of the Milling Feature Properties dialog.

For Pocket features, use the Select Boundary Curves dialog
(see page 926).
Show all — Select this option to show all curves in the current
document.
Ordering
You can use a single feature to machine multiple curves if they are
at the same height and do not intersect. For features with multiple
curves, use this section to control the order in which the curves are
machined:
 Automatic ordering — Select this option to enable FeatureCAM to
determine the machining order of the curves, starting with the
first in the list. This order is not affected by the options in the
Automatic Ordering Options dialog (see page 1553).
 Manual ordering — Select this option to machine the curves in the
order they are displayed in this dialog.
You can change the order by selecting a curve in the list and
using the Move item up and Move item down buttons.
To sort the features in the list, click Sorting and use the Curve
Sorting Options dialog.
Select Stock Curve dialog

You can use the Select Stock Curve dialog to specify a curve to
define the shape of the stock.
To display the Select Stock Curve dialog, click Stock Curve.

You can use this dialog for Boss and Side features only.
Compute the Stock Boundary from the block stock — This is the
default option and uses the block stock.
Use a Curve as the Stock Boundary — Select this option to use a
curve as the Stock Boundary and select a curve (see page 59) to
use as the stock boundary. You can use this method to define the
shape of irregular shaped stock, so the toolpaths do not air cut in
regions without stock.
Show all curves — Select this option to display all available curves in
the list.
Compute the Stock Boundary from a stock model — Select this option
to use a stock model as the Stock Boundary. Boss and Side features
can use stock models.
Select Check Surfaces dialog
You can use the Select Check Surfaces dialog to specify areas you do
not want to machine.
To display the Select Check Surfaces dialog, click Check Surfaces on
the Dimensions (see page 905) tab of the Milling Feature Properties
dialog.
This dialog is available for 3D milling features, and 2.5D NT
roughing toolpaths for these features:
 Boss
 Pocket
 Side

 Face features created with feature recognition (if the plane of the
face intersects the clamp solids)
To specify check surfaces:

1 Select the surface(s) in the list box or click Pick and select a
surface with the mouse. To pick additional surfaces, click Pick
again before selecting each additional surface.
Select surfaces that are more horizontal than vertical. If

you select a vertical check surface the milling may resume
on the other side of it if the surface to be milled extends
beyond the check surface.
2 Click OK to return to the Feature Properties dialog.
If you are using check surfaces to avoid clamps, you can do

this automatically using the Clamp avoidance (see page 1615)
dialog.

Curve Sorting Options dialog
Use the Curve Sorting Options dialog to sort the features in the
Ordering and Select Boundary Curves dialogs.
To display the Curve Sorting Options dialog, in the Ordering or Select

Boundary Curves dialog, select Manual ordering and click Sorting.
To sort the features:
1 Select how to sort the features:
Shortest path — Sort the features to reduce the movement
between features.
X/Y/Z ascending/descending — Sort the features by position.
2 For rows or columns of features, select how to transition between
rows and columns:
Unidirectional — Cut all rows of features in the same direction,
with a rapid move to the start of the next row.
Bidirectional — Cut rows of features in alternating directions to
reduce the rapid movement distance.
Location comparison tolerance — Specify the tolerance within
which a range of positions is considered a row or column.
3 Click OK to close the dialog and sort the features.

Location tab (25D)
Use the Location tab of the Feature Properties dialog to specify the
location of a feature.
Specify the location of the feature:

 XYZ — The feature is aligned so that its depth is parallel with the
-Z direction of the Setup. You position it by specifying the X, Y,
and Z coordinates in the plane of the Setup.
 Polar — The feature is aligned so that its depth is parallel with

the -Z direction of the Setup. It is positioned by specifying a
Radius and Angle.

- Radius
- Angle
 Polar on the OD — The Radius specifies the distance of the

feature from the Z axis. The Angle is the counter-clockwise
angle, in degrees, from the X axis. The Y shift distance is the
distance the feature is translated from the radius in Y. The Z
coordinate is the distance the feature is translated in the Z
direction. This option is available only for turn/mill documents.
- Y shift
- Angle
- Radius
 Radial about axis — For 4th-axis (see page 234) parts.

Relative Position — This sets the XYZ coordinates relative to the UCS
(or Setup origin). If deselected, the coordinates are relative to the

Strategy tab (Milling) (25D)
Use the Strategy tab of the Milling Feature Properties dialog to edit
the machining strategy of a Milling feature.
edge.
Individual rough levels (see page 963) — Select this option to list
each Z-level of the rough pass separately, which enables you to
specify separate attributes and tools for each Z-level.
Depth first (see page 965) — Enable this option to cut each region of
a feature completely before moving on to another region. The
toolpaths descend in Z.
Minimize tool retract (see page 966) — Select this option to reduce
the feature for the toolpath instead of the centerline of the tool. You
can only use this option when cutter compensation is enabled.

Finish Cutter comp — Select this option to use cutter compensation
for the finish and semi-finish operations.
FeatureCAM.
each feature.

is output at all.
Operations
Pre-drill — Enable this option to add a pre-drill operation to the
feature.
The location for a pre-drill point is set automatically, but you can
override it for a Spiral type toolpath using the Plunge point(s)
operation attribute.
A Pre-drill operation is not available with a Zigzag stepover

toolpath.
Zigzag ramping is automatically disabled when you use a

Pre-drill operation with an NT style toolpath. This is not
supported for the Spiral toolpath and you must set the Max.
ramp angle (see page 1161) to 0 to disable zigzag ramping
when using a Pre-drill operation.
The Pre-drill operation for the NT style toolpaths includes

the tops of multi-height islands. This is not supported for
the original Spiral and Zigzag stepover toolpaths.
Roughing
feature.
Stepover — Select the Stepover type for the roughing operations.



always parallel.
boundary.


- Roughing region
- Finish allowance

attribute.


g Mill g Mill
Angle Angle
0 No 180 Yes
0 Yes 180 No
90 Yes -90 No
90 No -90 Yes
next.
side.

50%.


Options dialog:



Bi-directional rough — Select this option to machine the feature in
both directions.
Enable this option to mill in both directions. If disabled,
conventional roughing happens and the cutting path moves in one
direction with rapid, above-stock return movements to set up for
the next pass. Climb mill controls the cutting direction.
Rough cutter comp — Select this option to use cutter compensation
for the rough operations.
FeatureCAM.

each feature.
is output at all.
Finishing
Finish pass — Enable this option to add a finish operation to the
feature.
Finish bottom — Select this option to use a flat endmill to finish the
bottom of the feature. When this is selected, use the Bottom finish
allowance on the Milling tab to specify the amount of material to
leave after the roughing pass.
By default, the bottom of a feature is not machined during the
Finish pass. Enable this option to finish the bottom of the feature
with a flat endmill, up to the Bottom Radius, if the feature has one.
You can enter a positive or negative value.
Stepover — Select the stepover type for the finish passes.



always parallel.
boundary.


- Roughing region
- Finish allowance

attribute.


g Mill g Mill
Angle Angle
0 No 180 Yes
0 Yes 180 No
90 Yes -90 No
90 No -90 Yes
next.
side.

50%.


Options dialog:



separate pass.
NT toolpaths — Select this option to use NT toolpaths for the Finish
pass.
50%.

Semi-finish pass — Enable this option to add a Semi-Finish operation
to the feature.
Enable this option to add a Semi-finish (see page 969) operation to
the feature.
Use finish tool — Select this option to create a separate tool for the
finish operation.

Ramp from top — Select this option to ramp the tool to the cutting
depth from the top of the feature.

option.
Helical side finish — Enable this option to use a continuous spiral for
the Finish pass. Enter a Pitch to control the tightness of the spiral.

This option enables a small depth of cut and a continuous toolpath.
It also avoids marks on the feature, which stepping down in Z
depths may cause.

option.
Face features
Connect stepovers with arc — Select this option to use an arc to
connect stepovers to prevent sharp direction changes.
stepovers with arc.
selected:

Thread mill features

Feed Dir — Select from Negative Z or Positive Z. The direction
depends on the handedness of the tool, the thread, and whether it
is an OD or ID thread.
Simple Groove features (Engraving)

Reverse cut — Select this option to reverse the direction that the
feature is cut. Engraving features are cut in a single pass.
Side Groove features

Finish walls (see page 969)
Plunge gouge check — Deselect to disable gouge checking on the
plunge and retract moves. This is available only when Use new ID/OD
groove toolpath is selected on the Milling tab of the Machining
Attributes dialog.

Strategy tab (Thread Milling) (25D)
Cutter comp — Select this option to enable cutter compensation.

FeatureCAM.
each feature.

is output at all.
the feature for the toolpath instead of the center line of the tool.
Feed direction — Select the direction in which you want to machine
the feature. Depending on the direction the tool is rotating, this
determines whether climb milling or conventional milling is used.
 Negative Z — Start with the tool at the top of the feature (at the
highest Z location) and machine downwards.
 Positive Z — Start with the tool at the bottom of the feature (at
the lowest Z location) and machine upwards.
Wind fan — Select this option to have a single point that is used as
both the start and end point of the Finish path. This is useful for
machines which require large lead moves to enable cutter
compensation.

Rough pass — Select this option to include a Rough operation in the
feature.
Finish pass — Select this option to add a Finish operation to the
feature.
Use finish tool — Deselect this option to use the same tool for the
Rough and Finish passes.
Spring passes — Enter the number of spring passes to include in the
finish pass. A spring pass is a duplicate of the final threading pass.
NT toolpaths
50%.
Vortex example
This example shows how Vortex machines pockets, channels, and
narrow corners.
For more information on the general principles of Vortex machining,
see the 3D Vortex and step cutting example.

Using a 2.5D model:
Create a Vortex toolpath:

For pockets, the tool spirals down into the pocket before using
trochoidal paths over the full-width cuts.
On completion of the initial full-width cut, the trochoids are placed

in the corners where the maximum tool engagement angle would
otherwise be exceeded.
Individual rough levels

Select the Individual rough levels option to list each Z-level of the
rough pass separately, which enables you to specify separate
attributes and tools for each Z-level.

When Individual rough levels is When Individual rough levels is
deselected, you can edit the selected, you can edit the
attributes on the Milling tab to attributes on the Milling tab
edit all Z-levels. individually for each Z-level.
If Individual rough levels is selected, FeatureCAM uses the shortest

tool available in the current tool crib for each level. For example, if
you are cutting a 1 inch deep Pocket feature with 0.25 inch corner
radii with a Z increment of 0.25 inches, these tools are used:
Individual levels off Individual levels on
Operation Tool Name Cutter Operation Tool Name Cutter
Length Length
Rough Endmill037 1.5 Rough pass Endmill037 0.56
5:high+ 1 5:reg
Rough pass Endmill037 0.56
1-1 5:reg
1-2 5:high
1-3 5:high+
Individual rough levels also controls clipping of Boss and Side

features against the stock model including both STL and solid stock
models.
When Individual rough levels is When Individual rough levels is
deselected, all Z levels are selected, each Z level of the
trimmed together, which causes toolpath is trimmed to the
air cutting. stock boundary.

Depth first
If this option is deselected then all regions of a feature are cut at
one Z level before descending to a deeper Z-level.
This attribute has no effect if the toolpaths for your feature do

not rapid between regions of the feature.
The images below show how regions of a feature are completely cut
before moving on to another region.
For an NT toolpath, Depth first cuts by region, so it cuts a

Pocket feature in the same way as a traditional toolpath.
However for a Boss feature, a traditional toolpath cuts
depth-first for each toolpath before moving to the next
stepover, not by region.
If you are using Multiple roughing tools (see page 994) or Multiple
finishing tools (see page 994), to efficiently rough out tight corners,
Depth first is also useful. The images below show a tool finishing
tight corners in a depth first manner.

See the Milling (see page 1607, see page 1660) tab.
Min. retract
This example shows normal retracting.
This is the same example with Minimize tool retract enabled.
Setting this attribute can result in more slot cutting. Study the
toolpaths carefully before cutting.
This feature is helpful for 2-axis mills.
If Minimize tool retract is selected, the setting for the default
attribute, Min. rapid distance, is ignored. The tool does not retract
unless to prevent gouging.
This attribute only affects how the tool retracts within a single
operation. It does not control how operations are ordered. For this
functionality, see Min. rapid distance.
Set it on the Milling (see page 1607, see page 1660) tab.
NT toolpaths

Pocket feature
Boss feature


Semi-finish pass
The Semi-finish attribute of the Strategy tab toggles the existence of
a semi-finishing operation for the feature. Cutter compensation can
be applied to this operation. This operation helps to ensure a
consistent width of cut for the finish pass. If the finish pass is cut at
multiple Z depths, a semi-finish pass is also cut as each Z depth.
See Finish pass Z increment (see page 1161) for more information.
Semi-finish pass
Finish pass
Semi-finish allowance
Finish walls
If this attribute is selected, then the finish allowance is left on the
walls of the groove. Selecting this attribute also enables the Wall
pass option.

Finish allowance
Wall pass
Floor pass

Finish allowance
Bottom
Wall
Spring passes
A 'spring pass' is a duplicate of the final threading pass. Spring
passes indicates the number of spring passes that are to occur at
the completion of the thread.
The amount of material to leave on the walls of an ID/OD groove.
Finish allowance
Bottom
Wall

Side control tab (25D)
You can use the Side control tab of the Milling Feature Properties
dialog (see page 903) to specify the machining side of some
features created from curves.
Select a Curve name in the table. A red arrow is displayed in the

graphics window to show the current machining side, for example:
If you want to machine the other side of the curve, click Switch
machining side . The machining side is reversed:

Right Angle Head tab (25D)
To display the Right Angled Head tab, you must allow right-angled
tool holders (see page 220) on the Right Angled Head page of the
Setup wizard.
Use right angle head — Select to use a right-angled head tool.

Feature location is on ID — Select if the feature is on the inside
diameter of the part.
Holder orientation in spindle — Enter the holder orientation in the
spindle in degrees.

Misc. tab (25D)
You can use the Misc tab of the Milling Feature Properties dialog (see
page 903) to edit the machining options of a Milling feature.
B-axis fixture location — This applies to B-axis turn/mill features.

To set the origin of the coordinate system for a B-axis turn/mill
feature, select B-axis fixture location in the attributes list and use the
Pick point button to pick the location in the Graphics window.
When it is set, the B-axis fixture location point is used as the origin
instead of the natural anchor for the B-axis feature.
This attribute is shown only when the feature is on the OD (B

!=0).
If B == 90, then it is shown only if Use coordinate

transformation for B-axis on OD is selected in XBUILD.
This attribute is dominant if it is set and Offset fixture to

feature origin is selected in XBUILD.
Chamfer before finish — Enable this option to do the Chamfer
operation before the Finish operation.

Deburr radius — Enter a radius to automatically round sharp outside
corners of the feature by the specified radius. The feature shape
does not change, but the toolpaths are modified to reflect the
rounding.
To automatically round inside corners, use Min. corner radius.

Equal depth of cut — Enable this option to make each Z step equal
depth.
If Equal depth of cut is selected, FeatureCAM calculates the depth of
cut like this:
1 Divides the feature depth, for example 10 mm, by the depth of
cut (see page 1023) you set to get the number of steps.
2 Divides the depth by the number of steps to get the actual depth
of cut (the depth of cut for each step is equal).
For example:
If the feature depth is 10 mm and you set a depth of cut of 3 mm,
the number of steps is calculated as (10/3) + 1 = 4 steps. The
actual depth of cut is 10 / 4 = 2.5 mm. The steps are cut at 2.5
mm, 5 mm, 7.5 mm, and 10 mm.
If the second to last pass is within 10% of the depth of cut, it

is ignored.
For a feature depth of 10 mm with a depth of cut of 3.3 mm, the
steps are cut at 3.3 mm, 6.6 mm, and 10.0 mm.
steps are cut at 3.2 mm, 6.4 mm, 9.6 mm, and 10 mm.
To set an exact depth of cut, deselect Equal depth of cut.

Using the same example, with Equal depth of cut deselected:
If the feature depth is 10mm and you set a depth of cut (see page
1023) of 3mm, the number of steps is calculated as (10/3) + 1 = 4
steps. FeatureCAM uses the actual depth of cut you set (3 mm) for
each pass, then cuts any remainder depth. The steps are cut at 3
mm, 6 mm, 9 mm, and 10 mm.
These features support exact depth of cut:

 Profile boss  Rectangular pocket
 Profile pocket  Step bore
 Profile side  Counter bore hole
 Profile groove (Face groove  Plain hole with drill/mill
only) roughing
 Slot  Tapped hole with drill/mill
roughing
Feed override % — Enter a scaling factor for the feed rates
generated by the system. A value of less than 100 reduces the
calculated feed rates. A value of more than 100 increases the rates.
Max. spindle RPM — Enter the maximum spindle speed (in RPM) that
you want to use.
Min. corner radius — Enter a radius to automatically round the inside
corners of a feature by the specified radius. The feature shape does
not change, but the toolpaths are modified to reflect the rounding.
To automatically round outside corners, use Deburr radius.

Plunge clearance — Enter the distance above the operation at which
the tool feeds. You can override this value for the Finish operation
on the Plunge (see page 1028) tab.
This is marked as L1 in the diagram.
For deep hole drilling, the drill retracts to this distance between
pecks. For milling features, the default is to use the same value for
roughing and finishing. As a result, the tool feeds from the top of a
feature to the floor before cutting. To make the tool feed down into
the feature, set the Plunge clearance for an operation to a negative
value, but ensure the value is above the floor of the feature.
To rapid to depth, you can use a negative Plunge clearance, or
select Relative plunge.
Plunge feed override % — This gives the scaling value for the feed
rate used during the initial plunge into the material for milling
operations.
Relative plunge

The Relative plunge attribute in 3D machining affects how the Plunge
clearance attribute is used.
When Relative plunge is deselected, the tool plunges to the Plunge
clearance as an absolute value. This can cause the tool to feed an
unnecessary amount for parts that are not flat. For example, in this
uphill only surface toolpath the tool rapids to a set Z value and then
feeds to the part on each end:
When Relative plunge is selected, Plunge clearance is used as a

relative distance from the surface. For example, here the tool
plunges down closer to the part.
Retract to plunge clearance — Enable this option to retract to the

Plunge clearance instead of the higher Z rapid plane after cutting.
Z rapid plane: Plunge clearance:
Spindle RPM override % — Enter a scaling factor for the speed rates
speed rate, and a value of greater than 100 increases it.
Spline tolerance — If a profile is defined as a spline, it is
approximated with arcs and lines. Enter a tolerance value for the
approximation. The smaller the tolerance, the smoother the profile.

Subfixture ID — This enables you to use a separate fixture offset for
each feature, and corresponds to the <SUBFIXTURE> reserved word
in XBUILD. For example, if the Fixture ID is 54 and you enter a
Subfixture ID of 1, the output is 54.1.
For patterns, enter a Subfixture ID start value and a Subfixture ID
increment value. For example, if the Fixture ID is 54 and you enter a
Subfixture ID start of 1 and a Subfixture ID increment of 1, the output
is 54.1, 54.2, 54.3, and so on.
Subfixture ID increment — See Subfixture ID.
Subfixture ID start — See Subfixture ID.
Tool % of arc radius — This controls the size of the tool that is
automatically selected.
In earlier program versions this attribute was called Default

tool %.
Z rapid plane — Enter the minimum safe distance in Z above your
part.
Before performing a rapid move away from a feature, the tool
retracts to the Z rapid plane setting for that feature. The rapid move
to the next feature changes in Z height, that is, changes Z
coordinates, if the next feature has a different Z rapid plane setting.
So that when it arrives at the next feature it is at the Z rapid plane
for that next feature.
This value is relative to the top of your stock in the current user
coordinate system. Compare with Plunge clearance.

Wall tab (25D)
You can use the Wall tab of the Milling Feature Properties dialog (see
page 903) to control the roughing and finishing of milled features
with a draft angle or bottom radius.
Side Roughing
Auto — This automates the roughing of features with a bottom
radius or a draft angle. FeatureCAM automatically chooses tools,
and the number of steps to manufacture the part. If you want
specific control, turn off Auto and the other fields become active.
Flat-end mill — Enable this option to create a draft flat operation,
which roughs the bottom radius and possibly the walls with a
flat-end mill. Enter a number of Steps to use (in the Z direction) or
leave the Steps field blank to use the Draft flat scallop height
attribute on the Milling (see page 994) tab to control the number of
steps.
Radius mill — Enable this option to create a draft radius operation
which roughs the bottom radius and possibly the walls with a
ball-end or bull nose mill. Enter a number of Steps to use (in the Z
direction) or leave the Steps field blank to use the Draft radius
scallop height attribute on the Milling (see page 994) tab to control
the number of steps.

Tapered mill — Select this option to create a draft taper operation,
which roughs the walls with a tapered endmill. Enter a number of
Steps to use (in the Z direction). This option is available only for
tapered features.
Bottom up — Enable this option to rough the bottom radius or
tapered region from the bottom up, otherwise the roughing is
performed from the top down.
Side Finishing
These settings affect how FeatureCAM performs finishing of a draft
angle feature including bottom radius features.
Choose from the following options:
Automatic — Enable this option to let FeatureCAM decide how to
finish the side wall and/or bottom radius of the feature.
Radius mill — Enable this option to create a finish pass operation
that finishes the wall and bottom radius with a radius tool. This
could be either a finish pass bull nose or ball end tool. The Radius
tool scallop height attribute on the Milling (see page 994) tab
controls the scallop height of the operation.
Tapered mill — Enable this option to create a finish taper operation
that finishes the side wall up to the bottom radius, if any, with a
tapered mill that matches the feature's defined taper. If no tool
matches the draft angle, an error message is displayed.
Bottom up — Enable this option to finish the walls starting at the
bottom of the feature, otherwise the finishing is performed from the
top down.
Manufacturing milled features with tapered walls
Features with tapered walls are manufactured similarly to those
with just a bottom radius. In addition to the bottom radius
operations there is an optional Draft taper operation shown below.

Finish pass
Draft taper
Draft radius
Corner
Flat bottom
Rough pass
The Draft taper operation is a roughing operation for the tapered

wall region. Typically, you would either use a draft taper operation
or a draft radius operation.
For tapered features, the Finish Pass can be performed with a
tapered or ball-end tool.
Manufacturing steps for milled features with bottom radius regions or cross
sections
Features with a bottom radius are manufactured with some
combination of the operations shown below.
1 The Rough pass cuts starting at the top and either roughs down
to the bottom of the feature (if you are not finishing the bottom)
or leaves a finish allowance at the bottom.
2 The stair steps of the roughing operation are knocked down by
the Draft flat operation. This operation takes only a single pass at
each Z level.
3 The stair steps of the Draft flat operation can be further smoothed
by the Draft radius operation. This operation also takes only a
single pass at each Z level.
4 If the bottom of the feature is finished the Flat bottom operation
is performed next with a flat-end mill.
5 The bottom radius and the walls of the feature are finished by
the Finish pass.
6 If the feature has a tight corner on the floor that could not be
finished by the flat bottom operation, a Corner operation is
performed.

Rough
pass
Draft flat
Draft
radius
Flat bottom
Finish
pass
Corner
Tools tab (25D)

You can use the Tools tab of the Milling Feature Properties dialog
(see page 903) to select a tool to machine a feature or create a new
tool.
If you do not want to use the recommended tool, select the check
box next to the tool name you want in the table. The tools that are
listed in the table are controlled by the filter settings.

on the criteria listed above the table. If you would like to choose
from different tools, change the filter criteria. The criteria are:
 Tool Group — The tooling in the tooling database is separated
into different groups. Select a group from the list or select
Anything to show tooling from all groups.
 Diameter — Enter a specific diameter or select Anything to see
tools of all diameters.
 End radius — Enter a specific end radius or select Anything to see
tools of all radii.
stays in the list.

width preferences.
page 1745) dialog.
1 Select the Tool Group.
2 Select or enter the tool Diameter.
3 Select or enter the tool's End-Radius.

further.
double-click a tool in the table to open its Tool Properties (see
page 1749) dialog. You can edit the tool's properties if you
want to.
8 If you canot find the tool you want, click the New tool button
and create a new tool (see page 1749).
F/S tab (25D)

You can use the F/S tab of the Milling Feature Properties dialog (see
page 1749) to view and edit feed and speed settings for the
operation selected in the tree view (see page 884).

Speed
The Speed section is for setting how fast the tool spins. The default
units are RPM (revolutions per minute). Optionally select Use SFM
(surface feet per minute) to change the units. FeatureCAM uses the
Recommended speed value by default. You can optionally enter a
different value and the override option is automatically selected. If
you want to revert back to the recommended value, deselect
override.
Feed
The Feed section is for setting how fast the tool moves through the
stock. The default units are IPM (inches per minute) or MMPM (mm
per minute). Optionally select Use IPR (inches per revolution), Use
IPT (inches per tooth), Use MMPR (mm per revolution), or Use MMPT
(mm per tooth) to change the units.
FeatureCAM uses the Recommended feed value by default. You can
optionally enter a different value and the override option is
automatically selected. If you want to revert back to the
recommended value, deselect override.
1591) dialog. Set the Feed unit on the Misc. (see page
1648) tab.
Reset All clears any overrides you made to the feeds and speeds
and returns the settings to the default value for tool attributes listed
on that page.

Coolant tab
You can use the Coolant tab of the Feature Properties dialog to select
which coolant types to use for each operation.
Select the coolant types you want to enable for the operation. The
available coolant types are specified in the CNC file.
Stepovers tab (25D)

You can use the Stepovers tab of the Milling Feature Properties (see
page 1749) dialog to control the toolpath transitions for 2.5D
milling. The type of transitions that occur at the beginning and
ending of a toolpath depend on whether that portion of the toolpath
is a closed or an open toolpath (see page 993).

Traditional toolpaths:
Cut type — Here you can override the feature-level Stepover type
that you set on the Strategy (see page 936) tab for each operation.
If you are using Individual rough levels, you can set the Cut type for
each individual rough pass.
Non-Cutting Moves — Click this button to display the Vortex
Non-Cutting Moves dialog (see page 1069) where you can specify
whether to retract and increase the feed rate on non-cutting moves
for vortex toolpaths.
Distance between cuts
Connection moves for cuts with closed ends:

Ramp type — Select the stepover style from the list.
Direct
The Direct stepover connection type creates a straight linear
transition that is perpendicular to the toolpath.
Arc
The Arc stepover connection type creates an arc transition. Set the
Diameter parameter to specify the radius of the arc as a percentage
of the tool diameter. This example has the Ramp diameter set to
55%:
This example has the Ramp diameter set to 600%:
Line
The Line stepover connection type creates a linear stepover at an
angle. The length of the line is determined by multiplying the
diameter of the tool by the Ramp diameter parameter.

S-shape
The S-shape stepover connection type creates a stepover move that
consists of two arcs. As a result this transition makes a smooth exit
from the existing contour to the new contour. The diameter of the
arcs is determined by the Ramp diameter parameter.
Ramp diameter — See Ramp type.

Lead moves for cuts with open ends:
Extension distance
Enter a distance if you want to move the tool off the part by that
distance at the end of each pass.
In this Side feature example, we used an extension distance of 1
inch:

Compare it to the same example with no extension distance added:
Arc Lead
Arc Lead changes the lead-in or lead-out move to be an arc. The
endpoint of the arc is determined by the Lead distance and either
the Lead-in angle or Lead-out angle.
- Lead in/out
angle
- Lead distance
Lead distance in/out


- Lead-in/out angle
Add 90-deg, comp. move

Select this option and enter a Distance to add a straight line move
to the start and end of the pass so that cutter compensation is
applied during the lead into and out of the Arc Lead moves.
To enable this option, Arc Lead must be selected.

For example, this Side feature:
Enabled: Disabled:
All Stepover
The All Stepover attribute adds a lead-in and lead-out to each
stepover move for an open feature.

This example shows the behavior with All Stepover deselected.
And with All Stepover selected:
Lead In — Select Lead In to have a lead-in move and enter a Lead-in

angle. The Lead-in angle applies only over the Lead-in distance, so if
the Lead-in distance is 0, the Lead-in angle has no effect.
Lead Out — Select Lead Out to have a lead-out move and enter a
Lead-out angle. The Lead-out angle applies only over the Lead-out
distance, so if the Lead-out distance is 0, the Lead-out angle has no
effect. The Lead-out angle is applied to the end of the finish pass for
an open toolpath. It also applies to the last toolpath of a roughing
pass if the Finish allowance is set to 0.
Default ramping for milled finish passes (see page 993)

NT (new technology) toolpaths:
Cut type — Here you can override the feature-level Stepover type
that you set on the Strategy (see page 936) tab for each operation.
If you are using Individual rough levels, you can set the Cut type for
each individual rough pass.
Connection moves for cuts with closed ends — There are two Ramp
type options for the NT toolpaths:
 Smooth — This is similar to the traditional toolpath option S-type
 Direct — This is similar to the traditional toolpath option Line.
Approach from outside — This option automatically adds a very small
lead-in whenever the tool is plunging off the stock. When you select
this option, the Lead-in options are disabled. Deselect it to manually
specify the lead-in as a line, arc, and/or toolpath extension.
Angle — This option supports only positive angles. The direction
relative to the toolpath is automatically determined.
Transitions for 2.5D milling toolpaths
The type of transitions that occur at the beginning and ending of a
toolpath depend on whether that portion of the toolpath is a loop or
an open toolpath. The transitions for open toolpaths are linear and
are controlled by Lead in angle and Lead distance. Transitions
between closed toolpaths are arcs. See Default ramping for milled
finish passes (see page 993) for more information on the
parameters controlling closed loop toolpaths.

- Lead-in/out angle
Open and closed portions of toolpaths
An open toolpath plunges at one point and retracts at another point.
A closed toolpath forms a loop and begins and ends at the same
point.
Rough or finish passes can contain closed, open or both types

of toolpaths.
Closed loop toolpaths

Open toolpath
Default ramping for milled finish passes
The lead in moves for finish passes for closed milled features such
as pockets and bosses consist of a short linear move and an arc
ramp on move. These moves are included to accommodate the
cutter compensation requirements of many controllers.

The radius of the arc is controlled by the Ramp diameter % in the
Stepover/Lead tab (see page 985), which is specified as a
percentage of the tool diameter.
The default length of the linear move is the Finish allowance of
the roughing pass of the feature.
You can change the length of the linear move by setting the
Minimum ramp distance milling attribute on the finish pass to an
explicit distance, or by setting the Minimum ramp distance % default
attribute as a percentage of the tool diameter.
If you set a Minimum ramp distance, the arc and linear move make
up a quadrant of a circle that has a radius equal to the Minimum
ramp distance.
Milling tab (25D)

You can use the Milling tab of the Milling Feature Properties dialog
(see page 903) to edit the Milling attributes for an Operation.

The attributes displayed on the Milling tab depend on the
feature and the operation/pass selected in the tree view.
General attributes
Check allowance — Enter the minimum distance that you want to
leave around check surface(s) (see page 931). If left blank,
FeatureCAM uses the Finish allowance value.
This attribute is available for NT roughing toolpaths for

Boss, Pocket, and Side features. Also for Face features
created with feature recognition (if the plane of the face
intersects the clamp solids).
Cutter comp. — Enable this option to enable Cutter compensation for
the operation.
FeatureCAM.

each feature.
is output at all.
1591) dialog. Set it on the Milling (see page 1607, see page
1660) tab.
Min. rapid distance % — Enter the minimum distance, as a
percentage of the tool diameter, that the tool can use a rapid move
for. Moves smaller than this distance use a feed move.
Minimum rapid distance applies to 2.5D milling. Specify the value as
a percentage of tool diameter.

This example shows a feature cut with a value of 400%:
As the tool moves inward, there are few rapid moves.

Instead, the tool is fed between passes.
This is the same example with Min rapid distance set to 10% and the
tool retracts and rapids between passes.
1591) dialog. Set it on the Misc. (see page 1648) tab.
NT toolpaths do not have the Min. rapid distance % attribute.

They use Stepover rapid distance instead.
Priority

Enter the priority that the operation takes in the document. The
lower the number, the higher priority the operation takes.
If you use the Op List (see page 1553) to drag-and-drop

operations to the order you want, the Priority is updated
automatically.
Although you can specify the exact order of every operation

by priority, you should not do so casually because you lose
the automatic optimization sequences built into the system
and it is harder to maintain or change the part.
Stepover rapid distance — This option controls when to retract and
plunge on Boss stepovers for NT toolpaths. Enter an absolute
distance.
Traditional toolpaths (Spiral and Zigzag) do not have the

Stepover rapid distance attribute. They use Min. rapid
distance % instead.
Target horsepower (see page 1574) — Enter the ideal [horse] power
for the specified width/depth of cut and feed rate on the specified
stock material type.
Through depth — Enter a value to add extra depth to the feature. All
operations in the feature are updated to have the same value for
this attribute.
It applies to Slot, Step Bore, Groove, Sides, and Chamfer features.
Total stock — Enter an offset distance around a profile feature to
use instead of the stock boundary for the current operation. This
applies to rough operations and finish operations where Finish
bottom is enabled.
Total stock changes the rough or finish operation to use a constant
offset distance from the profile of a profile feature. So instead of
cutting to the stock boundary, which may already have been cut
away, and without having to specify a stock curve, you can still
minimize redundant cutting by using Total stock.

This example shows a toolpath without the Total stock attribute set.
This is the same example with Total stock set to 0.25 inches:
This is the same example with Total stock set to 1.0 inches:
Post Vars. (see page 1656) button

Roughing attributes
These attributes are available to you on the Milling tab when you
select a rough pass in the tree view.

Bottom finish allowance — Enter the amount of material to leave on
the bottom of a feature after the rough pass. This is only available
when Finish bottom is selected on the Strategy tab.
Cleanup passes — Used with a Stepover type (see page 936) of
Zigzag, enter the number of cleanup passes to machine.
Curly Corner (see page 1019) dialog
Finish allowance — Enter the amount of material to leave on a
feature after the Rough pass. You can enter a positive or negative
value.
Roughing region
Finish allowance
HSM max tool overload % — When the tool approaches overload, a
trochoidal path is inserted to avoid the overload. Enter the
maximum allowable overload as a percentage of the existing
stepover. For example, if you enter an HSM Max tool overload % of
10, trochoidal moves start when an overload condition of 10% is
exceeded. This attribute instigates trochoidal machining for NT
Spiral and NT Continuous Spiral toolpaths.
HSM profile corner % — Enter the value as a percentage of the tool's
diameter. This enables arc fitting of profiles to avoid sharp changes
of direction in internal toolpaths. This attribute applies to NT Spiral,
NT Continuous Spiral, NT Zigzag and Vortex toolpaths.
HSM smoothing allowance % — Enter the smoothing allowance as a
percentage of the existing stepover, to replace the standard offset
with a smoother one that can achieve higher feed rates. The
percentage defines the maximum deviation from the existing
stepover. For example, if you enter an HSM smoothing allowance %
of 40, and the existing stepover is 10 mm, the maximum deviation
from the original to the smoothed offset is 4 mm.

The advantages are that rounded corners replace sharp corners and
curve continuity (not just tangency continuity) is maintained to
prevent abrupt changes in force on a machine tool caused by sharp
turns in a toolpath. This attribute applies to NT Spiral and NT
Continuous Spiral toolpaths.
Mult. rough diameter(s) (see page 1016) — Enter a list of roughing
tool diameters separated by commas, to enable multiple Rough
passes.
The last diameter is also used for the Finish pass. If you
want the system to select the tool for the final roughing
pass, enter the last diameter as 0.
Rough pass Z increment — This sets the depth of cut for the rough
pass. Enter a step increment for each pass that the roughing routine
performs on the part. You can set the depth of cut (see page 1023)
in several places.
Stock Model Options — Click this button to open the Stock Model
Settings (see page 1026) dialog. This button is available when you
are using a stock model (see page 930) with an NT toolpath (see
page 936) for a rough operation.
Toolpath corner % — To round sharp corners, enter a percentage of
the tool diameter. Smoothing the sharp corners of the toolpaths
gives a more constant tool velocity and reduces the tool load. Enter
a toolpath radius larger than the tool radius to minimize the
percentage of the tool that contacts the part. This enables enough
cooling to take place and avoiding sharp increases in tool load as
the tool enters the corners.
It applies to all 2.5D milling features. This image shows a feature
without Toolpath corner % set:

This image shows the same feature with Toolpath corner % set:
See also High speed machining application of toolpath corner %.

You can set Toolpath corner % to any positive percentage. Setting it
to a large percentage like 200% or 300% provides a high degree of
toolpath smoothing. In this case, where the radius of the cutter is
significantly less than the radius of the corner, the percentage of
the tool that contacts the part is minimized. This allows the tool to
cool and also avoids sharp increases in tool load as it enters the
corners.
For high speed machining applications:
1 Create at least two roughing passes using Mult. rough diameters
parameter. You can set the tool diameters to be the same if you
want to use the same diameter for each pass.
2 Set the Toolpath corner % to a high value (for example 200%) for
the initial roughing pass. This pass covers the majority of the
part with smooth toolpaths. This image shows an example of
smoothing toolpaths using a high corner %.

3 Set Toolpath corner % to lower values for subsequent roughing
passes. These toolpaths cover only the remaining regions of the
part. This image shows the second roughing toolpaths.
4 It is best to set Tool corner % to less than 25% for the last
roughing pass to ensure that the entire part is roughed. These
toolpaths initially have more inconsistent tool loads, but you can
adjust the stepovers (see page 985), depth of cut (see page
994), or feed rate separately for these passes to create
acceptable tool loads. You can use the tool loads dialog (see
page 1545) during 3D simulation to verify the tool loads of your
paths before cutting.
Trochoidal cut — Enable this option to use a trochoidal cut on a
Simple Groove. Select the direction of the trochoids for a trochoidal
cut, from CW (clockwise) or CCW (counter-clockwise).
Instead of a simple slotting cut, the tool uses a series of circles, for
example:
A trochoidal toolpath reduces the load on the tool.

Trochoidal stepover — Enter the amount to step over between
adjacent circles in a Trochoidal cut toolpath.
Vortex min point spacing — Enter the minimum point spacing at
which the machine tool can move at the specified feed rate. If the
machine tool has too many points to process, it cannot sustain the
specified feed rate.
Vortex min radius — Enter the minimum radius of the internal
trochoids. Vortex toolpaths use trochoidal moves to maintain a
constant feed rate. Higher feed rates require a larger minimum
radius. If you do not override this value, a default value is used,
which is suitable for a typical machine tool at the feed rate specified
for the operation.

Vortex Z lift distance — Enter a Z distance to lift the tool during
trochoidal moves to avoid contact between the tool and the surface.
Finishing attributes
These attributes are available to you on the Milling tab when you
select a finish operation in the tree view.
Bottom leave allowance — Enter the amount of material to leave on

the floor of the feature after the Finish pass. You can enter a
positive or negative value.
Bottom semi-finish allowance — This is the amount of material to
leave on the floor of a milled feature after the semi-finish operation.
It only applies if the Semi-Finish and Finish bottom attributes are
selected on a mill feature's Strategy (see page 936) tab. The
attribute Finish allowance controls the allowance on the walls of a
feature. You can enter a positive or negative value.
Finish allowance — This is a facing parameter for the amount of
material to leave after the rough pass. You can enter a positive or
negative value.
Finish overlap — This attribute applies to features defined by closed
profiles and is the distance that the tool overlaps its starting point
on the finish pass. Enter the absolute distance.
The toolpath runs counter-clockwise.

Finish pass Z increment — By default, a milling feature is finished
with a single pass along the wall of the feature.
Enter a positive number for Finish pass Z increment to finish the

feature with a series of vertical passes. Each pass has a depth of
the value entered.
The finishing tool needs a cutter length greater than or

equal to Finish pass Z increment.
This sets the depth of cut for the finish pass. You can set
the depth of cut (see page 1023) in several places.
Finish passes — Enter the number of duplicate finish passes to
make. If you want to compensate for tool deflection, set Finish
passes to more than 1.
HSM max tool overload % — This attribute instigates trochoidal
machining for NT Spiral and NT Continuous Spiral toolpaths. When
the tool approaches overload, a trochoidal path is inserted to avoid
the overload.
HSM profile corner % — This attribute applies to NT Spiral, NT
Continuous Spiral, and NT Zigzag toolpaths. Select to allow the arc
fitting of profiles to avoid sharp changes of direction in internal
corners.
HSM smoothing allowance % — This attribute applies to NT Spiral
and NT Continuous Spiral toolpaths. Select this option to replace the
standard offset with a smoother one that can achieve higher feed
rates.
 Rounded corners replace sharp corners.

 Changes the stepover from a fixed to a variable distance. The
percentage defines the maximum deviation from the specified
stepover. The maximum percentage is 40% of stepover. So, if
you have a 10 mm stepover the maximum deviation from the
original to the smoothed offset is 4 mm.
 Maintains curvature continuity (not just tangency continuity) to
prevent abrupt changes in force on a machine tool caused by
sharp turns in a toolpath.
Minimum ramp distance — This attribute applies to the Finish
operation. Enter the minimum horizontal distance for ramping. If
the computed horizontal ramp distance is less than this, the tool
plunges instead of ramping.
Mult. finish diameter(s)
Mult. finish diameter(s) controls the use of multiple finishing tools.
Enter a list of diameters separated by commas. If you want
FeatureCAM to select the tool to use for the last pass, set the last
Tool diameter to 0.
Enter the largest tool you want to use first, followed by gradually
smaller tools until the required finish tool. For example, you can let
the system pick the tooling initially, then set up your diameter list
to work gradually toward the last value. If the system recommends
a 0.125 inch endmill, set your Tool diameter attribute to 1.0, 0.5, 0.
By default, FeatureCAM creates one finish pass for all of the milled
features. If you use multiple finishing tools, FeatureCAM cuts all the
parts of a feature that it is capable of cutting with the larger tool,
and cuts only the remaining portions of the feature with the smaller
tool. You do not have to manually create these separate regions.
FeatureCAM automatically calculates them for you.
Default ramping for milled finish passes (see page 993)
Ramp diameter — This sets a percentage of the tool diameter to
generate a tool motion that approaches the stock along a curve on
the finishing pass. The tool arcs only within the distance set in the
finish pass allowance, so the ramping effect is small.
Side leave allowance — Enter the amount of material to leave on the
walls of the feature after the Finish pass. You can enter a positive or
negative value.
Facing attributes
Last pass overcut % — This attribute applies to a Face feature. Enter
the distance, as a percentage of the tool radius, that the tool moves
past the stock boundary perpendicular to the cut, in the Y direction
(unless you have changed the Zigzag angle). The default value is
20% of the tool radius.

This example shows a Face feature top view centerline simulation
using the default Last pass overcut % value of 20% of the tool radius
(the distance marked with the arrows):
This is the same example with the Last pass overcut % value set to
50 % of the tool radius:
Lateral overcut % — Enter the distance, as a percentage of the tool

radius, that the tool cuts past the stock boundary in the direction of
the cut, on the X axis (unless you have changed the Zigzag angle).
The default value is 100% of the tool radius.

using the default Lateral overcut % value of 100% of the tool radius
This is the same example with the Lateral overcut % value set to 150
% of the tool radius:
Stepover % — Enter the width of cut as a percentage of the tool

diameter. The default value is 85%.
Z Increment is the depth of each cut of the facing operation.

Zigzag angle — Enter the angle in degrees (counter-clockwise from
X) that you want to use to cut the Face feature.

An example of a Face The same example
feature with Zigzag with Zigzag angle set
angle set to the to 30 deg:
default 0 deg:
1591) dialog. Set it on the Facing (see page 1681) tab.
Thread Milling attributes

The following attributes are available on the Milling tab for thread
mill features.
Feed to depth override % — Enter the percentage of the Feed setting

to use when feeding to depth.
Linear ramp dist. — Enter the length of the linear approach move to
a Thread feature.

To activate this attribute, you must set Ramp diameter % to
0.
Ramp diameter % — This attribute controls the diameter of the arc
along which the tool ramps on and off the Thread Milling feature.
Enter a percentage of the tool diameter.
Negative angles create a ramp on a clockwise arc. If set to a value
greater than 1000, the tool moves in on a straight line tangent to
the initial cutting move. If set to 0, the tool approaches
perpendicular to the initial cutting move.
Ramp diameter
Start angle
Thread mill feature
Ramp angle offset
Tool
See the Thread Mill (see page 1660) tab.
Ramp angle offset — This angle controls the starting and ending
points of the ramp moves of a Thread Milling feature. The tool starts
ramping along the arc of radius Ramp diameter % using the Ramp
angle offset to determine the start point of the ramping move. If
positive, the arc is counter-clockwise.
Ramp diameter
Start angle
Thread mill feature
Ramp angle offset
Tool

Start angle — Measured counter-clockwise, the Start angle
determines the starting point of the thread.
Measured counter-clockwise, the Start angle determines the starting
point of the thread.
Ramp diameter
Start angle
Thread mill feature
Ramp angle offset
Tool
Start threads — Enter a value greater than 1 for multiple start
threads.
Taper approx angle — For tapered threads, the toolpath is increases
in diameter as well as moving in Z. These moves are approximated
with 3D arcs. The Taper approx angle is the angle around the thread
that is approximated by a single arc. A 360 must be evenly divisible
by the Taper approx angle. For example, if set to 90, a single
revolution of the tool is broken into four arcs.
Through — Select Through to increase the hole length by 10% of the
hole diameter to account for the drill tip and prevent burring. If
Through is deselected, the toolpaths are generated to ensure that
the tool does not cut past the end of the thread.
Tooth outside — Enter the number of teeth that are above (if
feeding in negative Z) or below (if feeding in positive Z) the thread
mill feature for the first pass.
Tooth overlap — Enter the number of threads that one revolution of
a multi-thread tool overlaps the previous revolution. An overlap of
at least one thread is recommended.
Thread feature

Tool revolution 1
Tool revolution 2
Tooth overlap
Ramp in feed override % — Enter the percentage of the Feed setting
to use when ramping into a feature.
Ramp out Feed override % — Enter the percentage of the Feed setting
to use when ramping out of a feature.
Wind fan radius — Enter the radius to use for the wind fan shape.
Increasing the Wind fan radius moves the toolpath's start point
further from the feature boundary.
Wind fan angle — Enter the angle to use for the wind fan shape. The
wind fan angle is a combination of the lead-in and lead-out arc
angles.
Chamfer, draft angle, and bottom radius attributes

Chamfer depth
For milled chamfers, Chamfer depth controls the depth of the tool
and therefore the contact point. The default Chamfer depth for a
chamfer is 0.1 inches or 3 mm. This means that the tool extends 0.1
inches or 3 mm below the bottom of the chamfer. A setting of 0.0
places the bottom of the tool at the bottom of the chamfer. A larger
value moves the contact point down the tool.
Through depth

See the Misc (see page 1648) tab.
or cross sections.
Features with a bottom radius are manufactured with some
combination of the operations shown below.
1 The Rough pass cuts starting at the top and either roughs down
to the bottom of the feature (if you are not finishing the bottom)
or leaves a finish allowance at the bottom.
2 The stair steps of the roughing operation are knocked down by
the Draft flat operation. This operation takes only a single pass at
each Z level.
3 The stair steps of the Draft flat operation can be further smoothed
by the Draft radius operation. This operation also takes only a
single pass at each Z level.
4 If the bottom of the feature is finished the Flat bottom operation
is performed next with a flat-end mill.
5 The bottom radius and the walls of the feature are finished by
the Finish pass.
6 If the feature has a tight corner on the floor that could not be
finished by the flat bottom operation, a Corner operation is
performed.
Rough
pass
Draft flat
Draft
radius
Flat bottom
Finish
pass
Corner
Draft flat scallop height — For a feature with a taper or bottom
radius, enter the maximum allowable height of any scallops left
after the Draft flat pass.

Rough
pass
Draft flat
Draft
radius
Flat bottom
Finish
pass
Corner
See also:
(see page 733)
Draft radius scallop height — For a feature with a taper or bottom
radius, enter the maximum allowable height of any scallops left
after the Draft radius pass.
Finish pass
Draft taper
Draft radius
Corner
Flat bottom
Rough pass
See also:
(see page 733)
Radius tool scallop height —

Finish pass
Draft taper
Draft radius
Corner
Flat bottom
Rough pass
Multi-axis milling attributes

Multi-axis milling and drilling features have these attributes.

irregular shape.

For example:

operations.
Mult. rough diameters
Enter a list of roughing tool diameters separated by commas, to
enable multiple Rough passes.
The system works down the list to the finish tool. One way is to let
to work gradually toward the last value. For example, if the system
recommends a 0.125 inch endmill, enter 1.0, 0.5, 0.
By default, FeatureCAM creates one roughing and one finish pass
for all of the milled features. If you use multiple roughing tools,
FeatureCAM cuts all the parts of a feature that it is capable of
cutting with the larger tool, and cuts only the remaining portions of
the feature with the smaller tool. You do not have to manually
create these separate regions. FeatureCAM automatically calculates
them for you.

For cutting Pocket or Boss features, FeatureCAM automatically
selects a single tool diameter for roughing and finishing. For a large
feature with small corner diameters, this method results in a small
tool cutting the middle of the pocket and wastes time. A better
strategy uses a larger tool for the wide areas and a smaller tool for
the tight corners.
Output Options dialog
Filter linear moves — This automatically removes unnecessary points

in the toolpath while maintaining tolerance. The points are not
equispaced because unnecessary points are deleted.
Filter linear moves and convert arcs to linear — This is similar to the
first option except that all arcs are replaced by straight line
segments. This option is suitable for machine tools which do not
handle arcs well.
Redistribute points after filtering linear moves. Convert arcs to linear —
This option allows the insertion of new points. This ensures a
constant distance between points, only inserting extra points if they
are necessary to keep tolerance. This option may increase toolpath
creation time, but reduce time on the machine tool. This option is
suitable for machine tools that can handle large numbers of
equispaced points.
Preview — Click this button to display the points of the toolpath in

Approximate linear moves with arcs and lines — Select this option to
create an arc line approximation for toolpaths that are contained in
the XY, YZ, and XZ plane. This allows 3D programs to be smaller
and to result in smoother surface finishes for certain types of parts.
Arc/line approximation applies to the following 3D techniques:
 X-parallel and Y-parallel roughing or finishing with Parallel Angle
set to 0.
 Z-level roughing and finishing.
 Isoline finishing where the toolpaths line in a plane.
More about output options

A toolpath is made up of a series of point connections that lie within
a tolerance of the surface to be machined. Toolpaths with a low
Tolerance value usually have more points to follow the surface more
closely.
A toolpath's point distribution controls the number of points in the
toolpath. There are a number of options that can influence the
output, which you can change depending on how the controller
handles the points. Older controllers struggle to deal with a large
number of points as they cannot handle the large amounts of
information being fed to them from the NC code. Newer controllers
often have a much better capacity for point handling, but require
more evenly distributed points to achieve smoother machine
kinematics.
We recommend the following advice for point distribution:
 The Tolerance value relates to how closely the redistributed
toolpath follows the original toolpath tolerance. For example a
toolpath, calculated with an original Tolerance of 0.01, which is
redistributed with an Output filter tolerance % of 50, has a final
toolpath tolerance of between 0.005 and 0.015 (that is, the final
toolpath tolerance = original toolpath Tolerance +/- (original
toolpath Tolerance * Output filter tolerance %)).
 For newer Heidenhain (such as TNC 530) and Siemens (such as
840D) controllers, we recommend you use the Redistribute
option, with the Limit linear moves selected (that is, points are
inserted and limited to a maximum gap between points) and a
Maximum length of 0.3 mm (0.012 in). This inserts points into the
toolpath to ensure a constant distance between points with a
maximum gap of 0.3 mm. This process inserts extra points only
if they are needed to keep tolerance. This is generally for the
more simple '2.5D-type' 3D toolpaths such as Parallel, Z Level
Roughing, and so on.

 For newer Fanuc controllers (such as 31i) the same as above
applies only with a larger gap of, say, 0.5 mm. Though these
controllers can handle more points than the normal toolpath
output, they are generally slower than the Heidenhain and
Siemens equivalent, and as a result need a bigger separation
gap. This is generally for the more simple '2.5D-type' 3D
toolpaths such as Parallel, Z Level Roughing, and so on.
 For 3D Spiral type toolpaths, we recommend that you still use
Redistribute, but that you deselect Limit linear moves. This also
goes for older machines with the previously mentioned
'2.5D-type' 3D toolpaths.
 For really old machines we recommend the Filter linear moves
option, which automatically removes unnecessary points in the
toolpath while maintaining tolerance. The Filter linear moves and
convert arcs to linear option is similar to Filter linear moves except
that all arcs are replaced by straight line segments (polylines).
This option is suitable for machine tools which don't handle arcs
well.
 The Approximate linear moves with arcs and lines option produces
toolpaths with arcs inserted wherever possible. This option is
suitable for machine tools which handle arcs well, but is only
available for 3-axis toolpaths (that is, none of the true 2.5D
toolpaths).
 The Surface triangle tolerance % defines the size of the mesh
relative to the machining tolerance. The smaller the value, the
finer the mesh, and consequently the toolpath takes longer to
calculate, but it is more accurate.
Curly Corner dialog
You can use the Curly Corner dialog to create curly corner toolpaths.
The curly corner toolpath is applicable to 2.5D Pocket, Boss,

and Side features.
To display the Curly Corner dialog:
1 In the Milling Feature Properties dialog, select a pass in the Tree
View.

2 Click Curly Corner on the Milling tab (see page 994) to display the
Curly Corner dialog.
To enable this technique:

1 Select Enable curly corner toolpath.

You can achieve a uniform cutting condition by carefully controlling
the width of cut. Limiting and controlling the width of cut is
important when machining hard stock material where the
programmed peripheral stepover is small. The Curly corner toolpath
is excellent for controlling the width of cut. Going from a small
stepover to a tight corner or slot cutting produces a high percentage
increase of the width of cut, up to the reciprocal of the stepover
percent setting in FeatureCAM. For example, a 25% stepover can
produce 4 times increase in the tool load, whereas a 5% stepover
can produce up to 20 times increase in the tool load. The following
images show the varying width of cut for a corner move and the
consistent width of the cuts of the curly corner toolpath.

This is called a Curly corner toolpath because of the tool's swirling
motions around corners while moving forward. With the rounded
corners and the curly corners, there are no sharp angles in the
toolpath and the width of cut is limited by the specified stepover
size. Because of the extra circular motions and the bounded tool
load, it is expected to take more time to machine the same pocket
than the previous two types of toolpaths. The Curly corner toolpath
machines the corners and slots multiple times. Each time, the tool
cuts no more than the specified width of cut. The image below
shows the shape of the toolpath for cutting a corner using the curly
corner toolpath.
Curly corner options

The Corner Radius is the radius of the circular toolpaths (or
trochoids) that are inserted. The corner radius must be greater than
or equal to the Stepover.
The Minimum Angle is the threshold for inserting the trochoids. If
the angle between two toolpath moves is less than this angle, no
circular paths are inserted between the moves.
The Stepover is the same as the Distance between cuts. It is

displayed in this dialog so that you can view it along with other
relevant parameters.

Overriding the depth of cut
The Rough depth of cut is normally calculated as the tool Diameter
multiplied by the Depth % attribute set on the Stepover tab of
Machining Attributes.
The default Finish behavior is a single pass around the profile of the
feature, up to the Cutter Length of the tool. This is to avoid leaving a
mark on the side wall of the feature.
You can override both the Rough and Finish depth of cut in several
places, from lowest to highest precedence:

 Tool level: Depth of cut attribute on the Overrides tab of the Tool
Properties dialog.

 Tool level: Material-specific Depth attribute on the Feed/Speed tab
of the Tool Properties dialog.Feature operation level:
Rough/Finish pass Z increment on the Milling tab of the Feature
Properties dialog.
The final depth of cut depends on whether Equal depth of cut is

selected on the Misc. (see page 973) tab of the Feature Properties
dialog.

Stock Model Settings dialog
You can use the Stock Model Settings dialog to edit the settings of a
stock model.
To display the Stock Model Settings dialog, click Stock Model Options
on the Milling tab (see page 994) of the Milling Feature Properties
dialog.
This dialog is available when you are using a stock model (see
page 930) with an NT toolpath (see page 936) for a rough
operation.
Stock model rest roughing

These attributes apply to the rough operation.
Expand area by — Enter a value to expand rest areas by the
specified distance (measured along the surface). A negative value
reduces the size of rest areas.
Detect material thicker than — Enter a threshold value. FeatureCAM
ignores rest material that is thinner than the specified threshold.
Minimum gap length — Enter the gap length, which controls
fragmentation by replacing gaps shorter than this distance with a
toolpath segment. A large value reduces fragmentation, but
increases the length of the toolpath that is not cutting material. A
small value produces shorter toolpaths, but increases the number of
toolpath lifts.

A Minimum gap length of 0:
A Minimum gap length of the default value:
Stock model engagement for finishing

These attributes apply to the finish operation. They reduce tool
wear, improve surface finish, and stop the tool engaging with the
material excessively.
Machine stock only — Select this option to limit the toolpaths to
areas where a minimum amount of stock is being removed from the
stock model.
Minimum length removed — Enter a threshold value. FeatureCAM
ignores toolpath portions that are shorter than this.
Use depth of cut — Select this option to limit the depth of cut to the
value you enter.

Plunge tab (25D)
You can use the Plunge tab of the Milling Feature Properties dialog
(see page 903) to edit the plunge settings for a Milling feature.

the tool feeds.

Relative plunge — Select this option to measure the Plunge clearance
from the bottom of the feature instead of the top.
Select Relative plunge and use a Plunge clearance of 0 to rapid to
depth.
Plunge feed override — Enter the percentage of the Feed setting to
use during a plunge into the material. For example, with a Feed
(see page 983) attribute of 2000 MMPM and a Plunge feed override of
50%, the plunge feed rate is 1000 MMPM.
First step — To protect the tool from a hardened surface, enter the
percentage by which you want to reduce the calculated Plunge feed
override for the initial plunge. For example, with a Feed attribute of
2000 MMPM, a Plunge feed override of 50 %, and a First step of 20%,
the feed rate of the first plunge move is 200 MMPM; and the feed
rate of subsequent plunges is 1000 MMPM.
Plunge clearance
Z ramp clearance
First Z depth
First plunge move
Z ramp clearance — Enter the distance above the operation at which
ramping starts. Z ramp clearance is bound by Plunge clearance.

Max. ramp angle — Enter the maximum angle, in degrees, for
ramping down to depth. It applies to helical or zigzag ramping. Set
this value to 0 to cause a plunge cut.
Theta — Maximum ramp angle

Max. ramp distance — This applies to linear or helical ramping.
Max ramp distance applies to linear or helical ramping.
For linear ramping it is the distance for each linear move:
For helical ramping it is the diameter of the helix:
If this attribute is not set, then Max ramp distance is initialized to the
tool diameter. If ramping at this distance would cause a gouge, then
the distance is reduced by a percentage of the initial setting.
Several different percentages are tried by FeatureCAM.
You cannot control the percentages.

If a gouge-free ramping location cannot be found, then FeatureCAM
ramps to depth using helical moves that follow the shape of the
toolpath. In order for this to work, your machine must be able to do
helical interpolation.

If, after reducing the ramping distance, a ramping location still
cannot be found, then a direct plunge may occur. If you observe
direct plunges, then you can set Max ramp distance to be smaller
than the default. So, for example, if your tool is 6 mm in diameter,
then the default of Max ramp distance is initially 6 mm. If you
observe direct plunges at 6mm, then try setting Max ramp distance
to something smaller, say 3 mm. If a gouge-free ramping location
cannot be found at 3 mm, then the Max ramp distance is reduced
using the same percentages as before, but using an initial value of 3
mm instead of 6 mm. In this way, you have a better chance at
getting a successful ramp to depth. The unfortunate trade-off is that
by setting Max ramp distance to 3 mm, then all of your ramps to
depth use this smaller distance.
See also Max. ramp angle.
Minimum Ramp — Click this button to display the Minimum Ramp
Distances (see page 1034) dialog.
Plunge points and Pre-drill points — Specify a point to override the
location that the tool plunges or pre-drills into the stock.
This attribute is ignored if there is no plunge move in the operation.
For example, if there is no plunge move between a rough and finish
operation, the plunge point would be ignored for the finish
operation.
A plunge point is ignored if it would result in a gouge to the part, or
if the tool would gouge when moving to the starting point of the
toolpath. For example if you specify a plunge point that is closer to
a wall than the tool radius, the plunge point is ignored.
A warning is displayed in the Operations sheet when FeatureCAM
ignores a plunge point.
You can use a curve to specify multiple plunge points (see page
1035).
Start point(s) — Specify a point to override the starting location for a
finish operation.
If this attribute is not set the start point is calculated automatically.
You can use a curve to specify multiple start points (see page
1035).
This example shows how the Start point interacts with the Plunge
point and Retract point:
Plunge point — If the tool retracts after the
rough pass, it will plunge at the plunge
point. If the tool feeds to the start of the
finish pass, it goes straight to the start
point.

Start point — This point is the contact point
of the tool with the finish pass. The tool
ramps onto the feature at this point.
Retract point — After ramping off the part,

the tool moves to the retract point before
withdrawing from the feature.
Retract point — This is the point that the tool retracts to after the
operation.
Helical ramping — Enable this option to use helical ramping. Disable

it to use zigzag ramping.
The exceptions to this rule are listed below. These rules apply to
2.5D milling features.
 Zigzag ramping is not performed for NT Spiral, NT Zigzag, NT
Continuous Spiral toolpaths and Vortex when pre-drilling points
are used.
 If Max. ramp angle is 0 the tool plunges directly into the feature.
 If you request zigzag ramping (by deselecting the Helical ramping
check box), but FeatureCAM determines that there is not
adequate room for zigzagging then there are two cases:
 if machine can do a helix is selected then zigzag ramp to depth
while following the contour of the feature.
 if machine can do a helix is deselected then FeatureCAM
plunges directly.
 If Helical ramping is requested, but FeatureCAM determines that
there is not enough room, then FeatureCAM follows the rules for
zigzag ramping (rule 2).
Zigzag ramping

Zigzag ramping occurs when the Helical ramping option is
deselected. Zigzag ramping typically moves in linear segments. You
control the length of these segments with Max. ramp distance and
the slope of the linear moves with Max. ramp angle. If you specify a
Plunge point, zigzag ramping is still available, but the distance of the
ramping moves is calculated automatically. FeatureCAM determines
the starting point for milling the feature and the tool zigzags
between the plunge point and the automatically calculated start
point.
For simple grooves or for plunge points that are located in narrow
regions of a feature, straight, linear zigzag ramping may not be
possible since these moves would gouge the feature. Instead, the
tool will zigzag along a 3D arc or a combination 3D arcs and lines
that would follow the shape of the feature. In this case, 3D arc
moves are output in the NC code. There is currently no way to
approximate these moves with 3D line segments. The Linear approx.
parameter only applies to helical ramping.
See also Using zig-zag ramping to mill a helical path for a simple
groove (see page 694).
Helical and zigzag ramping restrictions
FeatureCAM tries to automatically determine locations for ramping
into the part using the following criteria:
1 The ramping move should not gouge.
2 For zigzag ramping, the XY distance of each linear move must be
at least one tool diameter for non-center cutting tools. Center
cutting tools only need an XY move of 20% of the tool diameter.
3 For helical ramping, the same restrictions mentioned above
apply, except that the distance applies to each 360 helical
move.
If you ask for ramping and do not receive the ramping move set a
Plunge point or pre-drill the entry point.
Helical ramping is not available for zigzag milling.

Helical Options — Click this button to open the Helical Ramp Options
dialog.

Minimum Ramp Distances dialog
You can use the Minimum Ramp Distances dialog to specify the
minimum Z ramp distance, below which plunging occurs.
To display the Minimum Ramp Distances dialog, click Minimum Ramp
on the Plunge tab (see page 1028) of the Milling Feature Properties
dialog.
Minimum Z ramp distance — This is the minimum vertical ramp

distance allowed. If Minimum Z ramp distance is greater than the
calculated ramp distance or Max ramp distance, the tool plunges.
Helical Ramp Options dialog
You can use the Helical Ramp Options dialog to edit the helical
ramping options for a Milling feature.
To display the Helical Ramp Options dialog, select Helical Ramping on
the Plunge tab (see page 1028) of the Milling Feature Properties
dialog, then click Helical Options.
Select the direction for helical ramping from CW (clockwise) or CCW

Linear approximation — Select this option to approximate arc moves
with linear moves.

Linear approximation tolerance — Enter a tolerance to control the
accuracy of Linear approximation relative to the theoretical helix. The
lower the value, the more accurate the approximation.
Multiple Plunge points and Start points
You can use a curve to specify multiple Plunge points or Start points
for an operation.
To specify multiple plunge or start points:
1 Create lines with end-points on the locations you want to use as
the plunge or start points.
2 Chain the lines into a curve.
3 In the Feature Properties dialog, in the Plunge tab, select your
curve as the Plunge points or Start Point attribute, for example:
Example
This is a single Slot feature created from multiple curves:

The pre-drill points specified by FeatureCAM are at the edges of the
slots:
To change the pre-drill location for all the slots, create a curve that
touches the center of each slot, and select this curve as the Plunge
points option in the Plunge tab of the Feature Properties dialog.
The tool now pre-drills at the center of each slot instead of at the
edge:

Toolpaths tab (25D)
You can use the Toolpaths tab of the Milling Feature Properties dialog
to edit a Toolpath feature.
The Toolpaths tab is available for Toolpath features only.
When you select this tab, the Toolpath feature is shown in blue on
the part, for example:
Data column
This shows the coordinates of the move. The coordinates have one
of these icons on the left side.
rapid move
linear move
arc move
G-code, single line
G-code, multiple line
Feed column
This shows the feed rate. If it is listed as a rapid move, this column
displays Rapid.

Comp column
This lists the cutter compensation state for this move. It can be left,
right, off, or blank. If the entry is blank, then this move does not
change the cutter compensation status.
Coolant column
This records the coolant setting for each move. To change the
coolant setting, right-click a row and select Set coolant to display the
Set coolant dialog.
You can edit the feed rate and coolant for multiple segments.
Use CTRL+select or SHIFT+select to select the segments you
want to edit, right-click the selection and use the context
menu.
The toolpath is displayed as a series of points. If you select a row in
the table, the move is shown in red in the graphics area.
To locate a particular point, or series of points in the table,

drag-select the points in the graphics window and the appropriate
rows of the table are highlighted.
If you want to pick a single point, you must still drag-select a

single point. Just selecting it does not work.
Toolpath editing commands

The Edit segment button opens the Edit Toolpath Segment (see
page 1039) dialog to enable editing.
The Delete segment button opens the Delete Toolpath Segment
The Split segment button opens the Split Toolpath Segment (see
page 1041) dialog.
The Add curve button opens the Add Toolpath Curve (see page
1041) dialog.

The Add segment button opens the Add Toolpath Segment (see
page 1042) dialog.
The Add NC code text button opens the Add NC Code Text (see
page 1042) dialog.
The Export toolpath as curve button opens the Extract Toolpath
Curve (see page 1043) dialog.
The Add operation button opens the Add Operation to Toolpath
The Options button opens a context menu (see page 1045).
Edit Toolpath Segment dialog
To display the Edit Toolpath Segment dialog, select a toolpath
segment in the Toolpaths tab (see page 1037) of the Milling Feature
Properties dialog and click Edit segment .
Point — Enter the new coordinates of the point, or click Pick point
and pick the location in the graphics window.
Feed Rate — Specify the feed rate:
 Rapid — Select this option to set this segment as a rapid move.
 Feed — Enter the feedrate.
 Dwell — Enter a dwell time in seconds.
Compensation — Specify the type of cutter compensation:
 Comp left — Include a left compensation code for this toolpath
segment.

 Comp right — Include a right compensation code for this toolpath
segment.
 Comp off — Include a compensation off code for this toolpath
segment.
 Clear comp — Remove the cutter compensation setting for this
toolpath segment.
Active Coolants — Select the coolant types you want to enable for
the toolpath segment.
The available coolant types are specified in the CNC file using the
Coolant dialog in XBUILD.
Delete Toolpath Segment dialog

To display the Delete Toolpath Segment dialog, click Delete segment
on the Toolpaths tab (see page 1037) of the Milling Feature
Properties dialog.
When you delete a toolpath segment, you must select how to

connect the remaining segments from these options:
 Direct move between the 2 segments
 Retract to rapid plane, rapid move to next segment
 Retract to specified Z value, rapid move to next segment, and enter
a Z value

Split Toolpath Segment dialog
To display the Split Toolpath Segment dialog, click Split segment
Properties dialog.
This dialog splits one move into multiple moves to enable finer
editing.
You can split the move into two equal pieces, or specify the number
of equal pieces you want. You can also split the segment into two
pieces at a particular point or at a specific distance from the end
point.
Add Toolpath Curve dialog
To display the Add Toolpath Curve dialog, click Add curve on the
Toolpaths tab (see page 1037) of the Milling Feature Properties
dialog.
In this dialog, you can add a new curve to the toolpath. Select the
Curve from the list or use the Pick curve button to select it
graphically. Select Reverse curve to change the direction of the
curve. A curve is added to a toolpath in one of three ways:
 Replace all toolpath points — The curve is added as a replacement
for the entire path.
 Add curve points before selected toolpath point — The curve is
added before the curve that you selected in the table on the
Toolpaths tab.

 Add curve points after selected toolpath point — The curve is added
after the curve that you selected in the table on the Toolpaths
tab.
Add Toolpath Segment dialog
To display the Add Toolpath Segment dialog, click Add segment
Properties dialog.
This dialog enables you to insert a new point before the currently
selected point. For each point you want to create, enter the new
Point coordinates, specify a Feed rate or select the Rapid option,
optionally enter a Dwell in seconds, and click the Create button.
When you have finished creating points, click OK.
If you are creating only one point, you must click the Create
button and the OK button.
Add NC Code Text dialog
To display the Add NC Code Text dialog, click Add NC code text
Properties dialog.
This dialog enables you insert single or multiple lines of NC code

before the selected point and optionally add a comment.

For example, you could enter a M00 conditional stop at a particular
point in order to check the tool.
Click the Apply button, then the OK button, and the NC code and
comment are added to the Toolpaths tab to the row above the
selected row, for example:
Single lines of NC code have the icon and multiple lines of code
have the icon.
After simulation, you can see the code on the NC Code tab, for
example:
Extract Toolpath Curve dialog

To display the Extract Toolpath Curve dialog, click Export toolpath as
curve on the Toolpaths tab (see page 1037) of the Milling

The Extract curve dialog allows you to create a curve from a
toolpath. If you want to create a single curve, enter the name for
the curve and click OK. If you want to create arcs and lines, click
the Convert geometry. If you want to output only a few segments of
a toolpath, select a range of moves and select the Selected
segments only option.
Add Operation to Toolpath dialog
Use the Add Operation to Toolpath dialog to import an existing
operation into a toolpath feature.
To display the Add Operation to Toolpath dialog, click Add operation
Properties dialog.
To import toolpath points from an operation:

1 In the Operation list, select the operation from which you want to
import the toolpath points.
2 Select where you want to locate the imported toolpath points:
 Replace all toolpath points — Delete all existing toolpath points
and import the toolpath points from the operation.
 Add operation points before selected toolpath point — Import
the toolpath points from the operation and insert them before
the toolpath point selected in the Toolpath Properties dialog.
 Add operation points after selected toolpath point — Import the
toolpath points from the operation and insert them after the
toolpath point selected in the Toolpath Properties dialog.
3 Click OK to close the dialog and import the toolpath points.
For drilling operations, canned cycles are replaced with linear
moves.
All safety rail moves for turning operations are removed

before the operation is copied. You must draw the safety rail
moves.

Options
When you create a Toolpath feature and select the Toolpaths tab,
the full lines of the toolpath are displayed in the graphics window by
default, for example:
To turn the toolpath lines off, click Options and deselect Display
lines:
If Display lines is deselected, toolpath points only are displayed, for

example:
3D milling feature attributes (3D LITE)

You can use the Surface Milling Properties dialog to edit the
properties of a 3D Surface Milling feature.
Use one of the following methods to display the Surface Milling
Feature Properties dialog:
 Right-click a Surface Milling feature in the graphics window or
Part View panel and select Properties from the context menu.

 Double-click a Surface Milling feature in the graphics window or
Part View panel.
The 3D Surface Milling Properties dialog lists the strategies and

operations in the tree view. The tabs displayed in the dialog change
depending on which level in the tree view you select.
Feature
Strategy
Operation
Feature-level tabs
The top level of the tree view is the feature level. Select the feature
name at the top of the tree view to access these tabs:
Dimensions (see page 1048) — Use this tab to specify the part and
check surfaces

Location — Use this tab to reposition the feature relative to the
surface
Process (see page 1054) — Use this tab to create, delete and
reorder the operations of the feature
Machining Side (see page 1056) — Use this tab to control which side
of surfaces to machine
Misc (see page 1058) — Use this tab for a variety of feature-level
attributes
Strategy-level tabs
The next level is the strategy level. Select a strategy in the tree
view to access the following tabs:
Strategy (see page 1060) — Use this tab for rough/finish
classification, edge protection, and re-machining
Edges (see page 1115) — Use this tab to choose how the tool
behaves at the limits of the part surfaces as seen from the top view.
The Edges tab is not available for Z-level roughing or Swarf

finishing operations.
Stock (see page 1123) — Use this tab to choose the clipping curves
for the material to be removed
Slopes (see page 1133) — Use this tab to set slope angle limits for
restricting toolpaths
The Slopes tab is not available for Z-level roughing, Plunge

roughing, Isoline finishing, Flowline finishing, Horizontal +
Vertical and Swarf strategies.
Surface Control (see page 1159) — Use this tab to exclude feature
surfaces for specific operations
The third level is the operation level. Select an operation in the tree
view to access the following tabs:
Tools (see page 981) — Use this tab to view selected tool or change
to a different one
F/S (see page 983) — Use this tab to view automatically calculated
feed or speed or change feed or speeds
Coolant (see page 985) — Specify which coolant types to use.

Milling (see page 1161) — Use this tab to set operation-level
attributes
Leads (see page 1342) — Use this tab to control leads and ramps
Dimensions tab (3D LITE)

You can use the Dimensions tab of the Surface Milling Properties (see
page 1045) dialog to change which surfaces are machined.
The Dimensions tab has two buttons that open dialogs where you
select surfaces to manufacture, and surfaces to use as protected
areas where the tool must not go.
Part surfaces — Click this button to open the Select Part Surfaces
dialog (see page 931).


Dimensions tab (3D chamfer)

You can use the Dimensions tab of the Chamfer Properties dialog
(see page 1045) to change the dimensions of a chamfer feature.
Use a 3D chamfer feature to create chamfers from curves that are

not in the XY plane, or from non-planar curves.

non-planar curves.
Enter the Depth of the 3D chamfer, which is a horizontal and vertical
(negative) tool offset from the contact point on the input curve (the
default is 0.020" or 0.5 mm).
Optionally enter a Tip offset, which is an additional negative vertical
tool offset. The default is 0.0.
The horizontal offset is compensated so that the horizontal

offset remains a constant (the Depth dimension).
The Part surfaces and Check surfaces buttons work in the same way
as for a 3D surface milling feature, but they are optional for 3D
chamfers.
Part surfaces
Use this dialog to pick surfaces you want to gouge-check in your 3D
part feature.
1 Select the surface(s) in the list or click the Pick surface button
and select a surface with the mouse. To pick additional surfaces,
click the Pick surface button again before selecting each
additional surface.
3 Click OK and Apply to apply your surface selection to the feature
and return to the Feature Properties dialog.
Check surfaces
Check surfaces are surfaces that denote areas that are not milled
away. Use this dialog to select surfaces you want to use to limit
machining in a 3D feature.
1 Select the surface(s) in the list box or click Pick and select a
surface with the mouse. To pick additional surfaces, click Pick
again before selecting each additional surface.
If you select any Part surfaces, they are allowed to be cut to the
depth of the chamfer (in other words, the allowance is equal to
-Depth).
If you select any Check surfaces, there is a Check allowance
attribute on the Milling tab (the default is 0).

Select Part Surfaces dialog
You can use the 3D Part Surfaces dialog to pick surfaces you want to
include in your 3D part feature.
1 Select the surface(s) in the list or click the Pick surface button
and select a surface with the mouse. To pick additional surfaces,
click the Pick surface button again before selecting each
additional surface.
You need to consider the following when specifying part surfaces:
 You cannot manufacture undercut surfaces using 3-axis
machining, so it is a good idea to use only surfaces in the feature
that can be cut from the setup.
 Some surfaces may be cut from multiple setups to manufacture
all parts of the surface. In such situations, a Stock Curve is
helpful in limiting the machining area to just those spots that
need it.

Tool Axis tab
The Tool Axis tab controls the orientation of the tool relative to the
part when using the Four Axis Rotary strategy.
Use rotary Z tool — Select this option to align the tool with the Z axis
of the active Setup.
Use rotary X tool — Select this option to align the tool with the X axis
of the active Setup.
Specify angles — You can set the angle in one of these ways:
Index Angle — Enter the index angle to set the angle. If the angle is
set to 0.0 then the tool is aligned with the X axis. The Index Angle is
relative to the setup axis, just as it is with any feature alignment.
The actual angle that is output in the code is relative to the stock
axis.
B Angle (see page 1052) — Enter an angle to set the B-axis angle.
Normal to surface — Set the angle as normal to the surface you pick
using the Pick surface button. Optionally select Reverse direction.
Turn/Mill B-axis rotary example

You can set the tool used on a rotary surface milling feature to be a
fixed B angle.

To use this method you need the 3D, Turn/Mill and Advanced
Turn/Mill components. You do not need the 5-axis
Simultaneous component.
This example cast part has a 3D Surface feature, shown in red:
The shaft on the front of the part makes it difficult to machine with
the default angle.
Using a 4-axis rotary strategy with the default angle, the head of
the machine collides with the chuck, at the point marked with a pink
arrow:

Using a fixed B-angle tool axis of 45 degrees, the tool tilts over and
avoids any collisions:
Process tab (3D LITE)
The Process tab lists the operations that are included for milling the
feature in the order they happen. You can remove operations by
deselecting them. This enables you to customize operations and
then turn them off to reduce screen clutter when working on
subsequent operations.
The buttons have these functions:

New operation
Select a machining strategy:
Finishing Strategies
axes.
 Z level finish (see page 771) - toolpaths that are parallel to the
XY plane.
 Isoline milling (see page 772) - toolpaths that follow the rows or
columns of individual surfaces.
or away from the center of the part. Stepover is constant from
the top view.
or away from the center of the part. Stepover is constant in 3D.
 Radial milling (see page 759) - toolpaths that move out radially
from the center of the feature.
 Flowline milling (see page 773) - toolpaths that follow the rows
or columns of a flowline surface which are then projected onto
the part.
 Between 2 curves (see page 776) - toolpaths that are created
between two specified curves.
Roughing Strategies
 Z level rough (see page 759) - toolpaths that are parallel to the
XY plane.
 Plunge roughing (see page 779) - toolpaths which remove large
amounts of material from a component through a series of
vertical plunging movements.
axes.
Specialized Strategies
 Horizontal + Vertical (see page 778) - machine steep and
shallow regions using different techniques.
 Corner Remachining (see page 786) - A remachining technique
used to clean up corners that occur between non-tangential
surfaces.
 Pencil milling (see page 776) - a single clean-up pass for corners.
 4-Axis Rotary (see page 781) - used in turnmill to machine round
surfaces with an X tool.

 Swarf (see page 794) - toolpaths are cut using the side of the
tool. The tool is in constant contact with the surface.
 5-Axis Trim (see page 800) - toolpaths that are along the edges
of surfaces. There is the option to cut on the inside or outside
For more details on these options, see operations overview (see
page 742).
Move item up changes the order of operations in the milling
feature by moving the selected operation up one place in the list.
Move item down changes the order of operations in the feature
by moving the selected operation down one place in the list.
Delete operation removes an operation from the feature. You can
disable an operation instead by deselecting the operation. The check
box, when set, includes that operation in the feature.
Machining Side tab (3D)

You can use the Machining Side tab of the Surface Milling Properties
dialog (see page 1045) to specify the machining side of Surface
Milling features.
This tab shows a table of each Surface in the feature and its current
Machining Side.
FeatureCAM tries to cut on the appropriate side of a surface based
on the surface normals, but sometimes you need to explicitly orient
a surface. This is mainly for the Z-level rough, Z-level finish, and
Isoline strategies.

Vertical surfaces are usually the only surfaces that need to be
manually oriented. FeatureCAM tries to automatically flip surface
normals so that they are consistent. For this automatic flipping to
work on vertical surfaces, there must be some non-vertical surfaces
nearby. For parts that have only vertical surfaces, FeatureCAM does
not automatically flip any normals. That means that you must
ensure that all surface normals point either in or out by manually
flipping the normals to ensure a consistent cutting side.
For open surfaces with a floor, the normals are flipped to create a
pocket shape and the insides are milled.
For open surfaces with a top, they are treated as a boss shape and
the outsides of the surfaces are milled.
Select a surface name in the table, and an arrow is shown on the

model that indicates which side of the surface is cut.
Reset Normals — Click this button to return the machining side of all
surfaces to the FeatureCAM defaults.

Switch Machining Side button — Select a surface in the table and
click this button to reverse the machining side. The Machining Side
in the table changes from Normal to Reverse. Click again to return to
Normal.
Pick surface button — If you have more than one surface in

your feature and do not know the name of the surface you want to
reverse, click this button and select the surface in the graphics
window. The name of the surface is highlighted in the table.
Misc. tab (3D LITE)

You can use the Misc tab of the Surface Milling Properties dialog (see
page 1045) to edit the machining options of a Surface Milling
feature.
Enable 3D cutter comp — Enable this option to use 3D cutter

compensation. For a 3D surface milling feature, 3D cutter
compensation compensates for the tool radius in the direction of the
contact point. The compensation is not simply right or left. See the
2.5D Strategy (see page 936) tab for more information on cutter
compensation.
To use 3D cutter compensation, the .cnc file must support 3D

cutter compensation in the linear move format. For example:
{N<SEQ> }{<MOTION> }{<COMP-STAT> }{X<X-COORD>
}{Y<Y-COORD> }{Z<Z-COORD> }
<IF><COMP-3D-ON><THEN>
I<X-SRFNORM><32>J<Y-SRFNORM><32>K<Z-SRFNORM><32>
<ENDIF>

3D cutter comp applies only to finishing operations and linear
moves. Any arc lead-ins are approximated by linear moves if 3D
cutter comp is selected for the feature. The XBUILD compensation
keywords (<COMP-STAT>, <COMP-START> and so on) work for both
2D and 3D cutter compensation (only one type of compensation can
be active). Set the NC codes to turn 3D cutter compensation on and
off in the NC Codes dialog in XBUILD:
Base priority

automatically.

Max. spindle RPM — Enter the maximum spindle speed (in RPM) that
you want to use.
Spline tolerance approximates the profile with arcs and lines if a
profile is defined as a spline. The smaller the value of the
parameter, the smoother the profile.
part.

Strategy tab (3D LITE)

The attributes available on the Strategy tab of the Surface Milling
Properties (see page 1045) dialog for 3D surface milling depend on
the strategy.
3D LITE (see page 10)

Z-level rough (see page 1061)
Parallel rough/finish (see page 1070)
2D spiral finish (see page 1073)
Isoline finish (see page 1074)
3D MX (see page 10)

Z-level finish (see page 1076)
Flowline finish (see page 1087)
Between two curves (see page 1089)
Horizontal + vertical (see page 1090)
Swarf (see page 1096)
Four-axis rotary (see page 1097)
3D HSM (see page 10)

Plunge rough (see page 1099)
Corner remachining (see page 1104)
Pencil (see page 1107)
5-axis trim (see page 1108)
Steep and Shallow (see page 1109)

Strategy tab (Z-level rough) (3D LITE)
Specify the style of toolpath. If you select Zig-zag, this roughs the
part raster-style with an optional profile around each Z-slice
(optionally select the Profile contour option).


coordinate.
Continuous spiral — This option enables the tool to move in a
continuous smooth spiral motion and reduces tool load.
This blow mold base example shows a single Z-level rough slice:
Using the Offset option: Using the Continuous Spiral

option:
Vortex (3D HSM (see page 10)) — An offset toolpath, which is

machined at the specified cutting feed rate almost all of the time.
The optimum tool engagement angle is never exceeded, by
replacing difficult toolpath segments with trochoids. This works well
for solid carbide tools.
Classify slices as
You can tell FeatureCAM to rough your part as a 3D Pocket, or as a
3D Boss. If you select 3D Pocket, the tool plunges or ramps onto the
part and cuts from the inside of the part out toward the boundary of
the part. A 3D Boss typically plunges off the part and cuts from the
outside toward the center.
Even if the surfaces of your part create a boss shape (meaning it
protrudes instead of being a cavity), you can still select 3D Pocket.
The first image below shows the slices of a part being cut as a boss,
and the second as a pocket. Notice that the slides of the boss go all
the way around the part at each slice, but the pocket example has
slices that just cut a region of the part.

Offset Direction:
 Automatic — The tool cuts from the outside to the inside of the
stock in a continuous radial movement. This is the default option.
During cutting: Cutting complete:
 In to out — The tool plunges into the stock and cuts outwards.

 Out to in — The tool cuts from the outside to the inside of the
stock. The tool outlines the surfaces and cuts large sections last.

Remachining — Click this button to open the Z-Level Rough
Remachining Options (see page 1066) dialog.

Area Removal (3D HSM (see page 10))
Remove unsafe areas — This removes small toolpath segments to
prevent tool damage when using non-center cutting tools. When
machining into small pockets, removing small segments stops the
central, non-cutting underside of the tool from hitting
non-machinable material. Unsafe segment removal filters out the
machining of confined areas with small movement of the cutting
tool.
Remove area less than — This removes segments that are smaller
than the entered percentage of the tool's diameter, unless they
surround a Boss feature.
Closed areas only — Select this option to remove segments, in
enclosed areas, that are smaller than the Threshold value.
Holder collision clipping — Clips the toolpath where the holder or
shank collides with a part surface, check surface, or unmachined
stock. When selected, the Holder clearance and Shank clearance
attributes are displayed on the Milling tab for the operation.
Z-level rough area removal example
This headlamp mold has a couple of cavities that work their way
down into very small pockets:
This is a cutaway view of a 3D simulation with Remove unsafe areas

deselected:
This is the previous and default behavior.

The bottoms of the pockets are barely bigger than the tool
diameter, and the tool hardly moves in these areas. The non-center
cutting region of the tool cannot cut the material at the bottom of
the pockets.
This is the simulation with Remove unsafe areas selected and
Remove area less than set to 80 % of the tool diameter:
The two smaller pocket regions are removed from the toolpath. This
protects the tool and prevents damage.
Z-Level Rough Remachining Options dialog
To open this dialog, click the Remachining button on the Strategy
None — Select this option to have no remachining.

Multiple tool diameters
Enter a list of roughing tool diameters separated by commas, to
enable multiple Rough passes.

The system works down the list to the finish tool. One way is to let
to work gradually toward the last value. For example, if the system
recommends a 0.125 inch endmill, enter 1.0, 0.5, 0.
By default, FeatureCAM creates one roughing and one finish pass
for all of the milled features. If you use multiple roughing tools,
FeatureCAM cuts all the parts of a feature that it is capable of
cutting with the larger tool, and cuts only the remaining portions of
the feature with the smaller tool. You do not have to manually
create these separate regions. FeatureCAM automatically calculates
them for you.
For cutting Pocket or Boss features, FeatureCAM automatically
selects a single tool diameter for roughing and finishing. For a large
feature with small corner diameters, this method results in a small
tool cutting the middle of the pocket and wastes time. A better
strategy uses a larger tool for the wide areas and a smaller tool for
the tight corners.
Step cutting — This option machines the terraces that would
otherwise remain during a Z-level rough toolpath with the same tool
in the same toolpath. The terraces are machined from bottom to
top. FeatureCAM increases the feed rate of the intermediate slices
as the depth of cut gets progressively smaller, which enables a
constant volume removal rate.
The first pass is a main slice.

The next pass is the lowest step-cutting slice.
The next pass is the next to lowest step cutting slice and so on
up the part (shown by ) until the previous main slice is reached.
The next main slice.
The main slices are cut from top to bottom as normal. The
intermediate slices are cut from bottom to top. This is possible
because the depth of cut is always less than the depth of cut (or
Stepdown) for the main slice. This is the most efficient way of
cutting the part as it reduces the number of passes and increases
the depth of cut of each pass.

Step up — Enter the distance between intermediate cutting levels.
Stepdown of the main slice.

Stepup of the intermediate slice.
The main slice clears the majority of the material. The intermediate
slices remove the terraces remaining after the main slice.
Expand area by — Enter the distance by which to expand the rest
areas, measured along the surface. Use with the Detect material
thicker than value to reduce the areas to be machined to the details
(for examples, corners), and then to offset these areas slightly to
ensure that all the detail (for example, on the corners) is machined.
Model
Thickness
True rest material (outlined in pink)
Actual rest material detected (blue hatched area)
Amount you need to expand the area by to include all the rest
material

Undetected material (black area)
Tool
Reference tool
Use the Expand area by option to increase the rest area (the blue
hatched area) and eliminate the undetected area (the black area).
Increase feed for intermediate steps — Select to increase the Feed rate
of the intermediate slices. Because the stepdown of the
intermediate slices is less than that of the main slice, you can
increase the feed rate of the intermediate slices while maintaining
the tool load. Each intermediate slice can have an increasing feed
rate as the depth of cut gets progressively smaller.
Maximum feed increase % — Enter the maximum allowable cutting
feed rate for the intermediate slices as a percentage of the normal
feed rate. This value must be larger than 100%. A value of 300
means the cutting feed rate of the intermediate slices can be up to
three times faster than for the main slices.
Vortex Non-Cutting Moves dialog
Use the Vortex Non-Cutting Moves dialog to specify whether to
retract and increase the feed rate on non-cutting moves.
To display the Vortex Non-Cutting Moves dialog:
 for 2D toolpaths, click Non-Cutting Moves in the Stepovers tab of
 for 3D toolpaths, click Non-Cutting Moves in the Strategy tab of
 to change the default options, click Non-Cutting Moves in the
Milling tab of the Machining Attributes dialog.
Under Retract on non-cutting moves, select whether you want the

tool to retract on non-cutting moves:
 Never — the tool does not retract on non-cutting moves.

 Automatic — FeatureCAM will decide when the tool should retract
on non-cutting moves.
 Longer than — the tool retracts instead of making non-cutting
moves larger than the value you enter. For example, the left
image is a standard vortex toolpath and in the right image the
non-cutting moves are replaced with retracts.
Select Increase feed rate for non-cutting moves to override the feed
rate for non-cutting moves with the specified Non-cutting feed rate. If
the Non-cutting feed rate is lower than the Feed rate specified on the
F/S tab, the Non-cutting feed rate is ignored.
Strategy tab (Parallel rough/finish) (3D LITE)

X parallel — Select this option to cut parallel to the X axis.
Y parallel — Select this option to cut parallel to the Y axis.
Parallel angle — Optionally enter an angle in degrees. You can have

the toolpath at any angle. The angle is measured counter-clockwise
from the X axis if X parallel is selected or counter-clockwise from the
Y axis if Y parallel is selected.


coordinate.
Add perpendicular remachining pass — Select this option if you want
to add a perpendicular, remachining pass. For example, this setting
adds a Y parallel pass to an X parallel operation. To use this option
you also must specify the Steep slope angle.
Optimize parallel pass — If you create a parallel toolpath and select
Add perpendicular remachining pass, with a Steep slope angle greater
than 0 , the Optimize parallel pass option trims the parallel pass so it
doesn't machine the areas that the perpendicular pass machines.
Optimize parallel pass — If a parallel toolpath is created with a
perpendicular pass, with a shallow angle greater than 0 , this option
trims the parallel pass so it doesn't machine the areas that the
perpendicular pass machines.
Steep slope angle — This option is used with Add perpendicular
remachining pass. The perpendicular pass is applied only to regions
that exceed this slope limit.
You must select Add perpendicular remachining pass to access

the Optimize parallel pass and Steep slope angle options.
Remachining — Click this button to open the Remachining (see page
1112) dialog.
Machine maximum stock — Use with Holder collision clipping to
machine the stock as close to the part without causing a holder
collision. This creates smoother toolpaths with fewer retracts, which
can improve the surface finish and reduce the machining time, but
may cause increased air cutting on some parts.

Strategy tab (2D spiral finish) (3D LITE)
Spiral in — Select this option to spiral from the edge in toward the
center.
Spiral out — Select this option to spiral away from the center.

Strategy tab (Isoline finish) (3D LITE)
Continuous spiral — Enable this option to stop the tool lifting from
the surface when machining.
Enable Continuous spiral to have a toolpath that stays in constant
contact with a surface, reducing the chance of leaving any dwell or
witness marks on the surface caused by regular retract and
approaches to the surface.

The standard Z level finishing toolpaths creates paths with a
constant Z height as shown below. The tool either retracts or feeds
along the surface between Z levels.
With Continuous spiral enabled, the toolpaths change into a

continuous spiral. The toolpaths no longer have a constant Z height.


Strategy tab (Z-level finish) (3D MX)
Undercuts — Select this option to enable side mill tools to machine

undercuts. When Undercuts is enabled, the Machining Side (see page
1056) tab is available.
The Undercuts option is unavailable when Interleave spiral paths is

enabled.
Interleave spiral paths (see page 1081)



Bottom up — Enable this option cut the Surface feature from the
bottom upwards. Disable it to cut top downwards.

For example, you can use Bottom up to cut this glider mold part:
After a Z-level rough and a 2.5D finish, a Z-level finish strategy is

used, with Scallop height to control the shape of the toolpath.
This is a 3D simulation with Bottom up deselected:

The Ball End Mill tool (shown in yellow) starts at the top in the
middle cutting outwards and so is cutting with the center of the
tool:
This is the result with Bottom up selected:

The tool starts at the bottom outside of the slope and mills upwards
and inwards towards the center so that the side of the tool is used,
which has a better cutting surface.

1112) dialog.
Area Removal (3D HSM)

Remove unsafe areas — This removes small toolpath segments to
prevent tool damage when using non-center cutting tools. When
machining into small pockets, removing small segments stops the
central, non-cutting underside of the tool from hitting
non-machinable material. Unsafe segment removal filters out the
machining of confined areas with small movement of the cutting
tool.
Remove area less than — This removes segments that are smaller
than the entered percentage of the tool's diameter, unless they
surround a Boss feature.
Closed areas only — Select this option to remove segments, in
enclosed areas, that are smaller than the Threshold value.
Z-level finish area removal example

This cavity part has a small pocket (shown in red):
After using a Z-level rough on the part, this is a cutaway front view
of a 3D simulation of a Z-level semi-finish with Remove unsafe areas
deselected:

The bottom of the pocket is barely bigger than the tool diameter,
and the tool hardly moves in this areas. The non-center cutting
region of the tool cannot cut the material at the bottom of the
pocket.
This is the simulation with Remove unsafe areas selected and
Remove area less than set to 80 % of the tool diameter:
The small pocket region is removed from the toolpath. This protects
the tool and prevents damage.

Interleave spiral paths
One disadvantage of using Z-level finish is that flat surfaces may
fall between the Z-level slices of your operation. The interleave
option of Z-level finishing inserts toolpaths in the shallow regions
between the slices. This option attempts to finish the entire part
with a minimum number of retracts. This example shows coarse
interleaved toolpaths.
Enable interleaved toolpaths by selecting the Interleave spiral paths

option on the Strategy (see page 1076) tab.
Interleaved toolpaths are controlled by the Spiral max slope
parameter. This parameter controls the slope below which the
zigzag toolpaths are inserted. A higher setting of Spiral max slope
increases the size of the zigzag or spiral region. In general, this
parameter should be set to a value less than 40, because the zigzag
toolpaths should be limited to surfaces with slight slopes.
When using the interleaved technique, Z level toolpaths are always
calculated using the specified Scallop height (see page 1209),
instead of an explicit Z increment. How accurately the toolpaths fit
the surfaces is controlled by the Tolerance (see page 1209)
parameter. To minimize retracts, you may also have to adjust the
Stepover rapid distance (see page 1209).
Arc/line approx. (see page 1209) applies for the Z-level portion of
interleaved toolpath.

There are four different styles of toolpaths that can be created for
the shallow regions. If you select Closed spirals on the Strategy (see
page 1076) tab, but deselect the Spiral attribute on the Milling tab,
offset toolpaths are generated.

If you select Closed spirals on the Strategy (see page 1076) tab and
select the Spiral attribute on the Milling tab, continuous spiral
toolpaths are generated.

If you deselect Closed spirals on the Strategy (see page 1076) tab and
select bi-directional in the Cut Direction dialog (accessed by clicking
the Direction button) on the Milling tab, zigzag toolpaths are
created.

If you deselect Closed spirals on the Strategy (see page 1076) tab
and select Uni-directional in the Cut Direction dialog (accessed by
clicking the Direction button) on the Milling tab, you can create
toolpaths that cut in a single direction.
Remove shallow slices — In addition to the style of cut on the

shallow regions, you can also change the toolpaths with the Remove
shallow slices option. This example shows Z finish toolpaths with
Remove shallow slices selected.

Without Remove shallow slices selected, toolpaths are inserted
between each slice. This results in the shallow regions being
relatively flat.
With Remove shallow slices selected, the slices in the flatter regions
are removed. This results in the removal of some possibly
unnecessary slices, but shallow regions tend to be larger and the
shallow toolpaths tend to vary more in the Z direction.

Strategy tab (Flowline finish) (3D MX)




Strategy tab (Between two curves) (3D MX)
Pick or select the Start curve and End curve to machine between.
Along curves — Select this option to create toolpaths parallel to the
curves radiating out from the start curve towards the end curve.
Across curves — Select this option to create toolpaths that begin at
the start curve and move across to the end curve.
Tool center — Select this option to limit the toolpath based on the
center of the tool.
Contact point — Select this option to limit the toolpath based on last
point of contact between the tool and the surface.

Strategy tab (Horizontal + Vertical) (3D MX)
Slope boundary — This is the angle that divides the horizontal and
vertical regions. Portions of the surfaces with slopes less than this
angle are machined with the parallel toolpaths, and the steeper
slopes are machined by the Z level.
Slope overlap — This indicates how much the two regions overlap, in
degrees. An overlap of 0 means that the two regions are distinct. A
value of 10 means that the two passes overlap by 10 degrees.
Horizontal
Select a Spiral or Parallel toolpath for the shallow regions of the
feature.
If you are using a Spiral toolpath for the shallow regions, the shape
of those regions is automatically calculated based on the Slope
boundary and Slope overlap attributes.


In to out — The default spiral motion starts at the edge of the

feature and moves inwards. Enable this option to start the spiral at
the center of the feature and move outwards.
Smoothing — This removes all sharp changes in direction. It works
in a similar way to the Toolpath corner % (see page 1163) raceline
smoothing attribute, but smooths all toolpaths, not just corners.

This example shows a 3D spiral finish without smoothing:
And with smoothing:
If you select to use a Parallel toolpath, the pass is parallel to the X

axis unless you enter a Parallel angle. Set the Parallel angle to 90 to
be parallel to the Y axis.
Vertical
These attributes control the steeper regions of the feature.
Bottom up — Enable this option cut the Surface feature from the
bottom upwards. Disable it to cut top downwards.
For example, you can use Bottom up to cut this glider mold part:
After a Z-level rough and a 2.5D finish, a Z-level finish strategy is

used, with Scallop height to control the shape of the toolpath.

This is a 3D simulation with Bottom up deselected:

The Ball End Mill tool (shown in yellow) starts at the top in the
middle cutting outwards and so is cutting with the center of the
tool:
This is the result with Bottom up selected:
The tool starts at the bottom outside of the slope and mills upwards
and inwards towards the center so that the side of the tool is used,
which has a better cutting surface.




Spiral example
Parallel example

Strategy tab (Swarf) (3D MX)
Reverse Tool Axis — If the tool axis is upside down, select this
option to reverse it.
Follow surface laterals — When selected, the swarf toolpath follows
the underlying surface rulings. When deselected, this is not
necessarily the case.
Gouge check — Select this option to check the toolpath for gouges.

Strategy tab (Four-axis rotary) (3D MX)
Select a cutting style from:

 Linear
Linear rotary milling causes the tool to traverse along the index axis
in straight lines, with the rotary axis only used at the end of each
pass to reposition the job.
 Circular

In circular milling the job rotates with the tool at a fixed position,
effectively machining a circle. The tool then steps over the required
amount and machines the next circle.
 Spiral
A continuous spiral is cut along the length of the job when spiral
milling is used. To ensure a clean finish a full circle is cut at the two
ends. Because rotation is continuous, only Climb and Conventional
milling are available (so, you must have a rotary head that can
make an unlimited number of rotations).
Y offset — Enter a distance to avoid cutting on the center of the

tool.

Strategy tab (Plunge rough) (3D HSM)
X parallel — Select this option to arrange the drilling operations

parallel to the X axis.
Y parallel — Select this option to arrange the drilling operations
parallel to the Y axis.
Parallel angle — Optionally enter an angle in degrees. You can have
the toolpath at any angle. The angle is measured counter-clockwise
from the X axis if X parallel is selected or counter-clockwise from the
Y axis if Y parallel is selected.

coordinate.
Honeycomb pattern



Strategy tab (3D spiral finish) (3D HSM)


In to out — The default spiral motion starts at the edge of the

feature and moves inwards. Enable this option to start the spiral at
the center of the feature and move outwards.
Smoothing — This removes all sharp changes in direction. It works
in a similar way to the Toolpath corner % (see page 1163) raceline
smoothing attribute, but smooths all toolpaths, not just corners.

This example shows a 3D spiral finish without smoothing:
And with smoothing:

1112) dialog.

Strategy tab (Corner remachining) (3D HSM)
Under Options, select:

 Multi pencil — Create toolpaths along the corner edges. This is
similar to Along, but with fewer retracts where three or more rest
areas meet. This is the same as creating a Pencil milling toolpath
with remachining (see page 1112) enabled.
 Along — Create toolpaths parallel to the sharp corner edges.
 Across — Create toolpaths across the corner edges.
 Combo Along and Across — Create Across toolpaths in steep
areas and Along toolpaths in shallow areas.
Remove deep cuts
Remove deep cuts removes segments of the toolpath where the
depth of cut is large, to prevent tool damage.
A deep cut is defined internally as the sum of the current and
previous tool radii plus any overlap.

Deep cuts example
The following example has 'ribs' that contain deep cuts:

With Remove deep cuts deselected, the remachining toolpaths cut
the full length of the ribs including the deep cut areas, which could
damage the tool:
With Remove deep cuts selected, the remachining toolpaths cut only
the shallower parts of the ribs:
Detection angle — Only corners below the angle specified are found.

1112) dialog.
Strategy tab (Pencil) (3D HSM)
Detection angle — Only corners below the angle specified are found.
1112) dialog.

Strategy tab (5-axis trim) (3D HSM)
Inside edge — Select this option to create toolpaths on the inside

Outside edge — Select this option to create toolpaths on the outside



Strategy tab (Steep and shallow) (3D HSM)
Order — This determines the order in which the steep and shallow
portions are machined.
 Top first — Select this option to machine from the top regions
downwards. If you have a boss, the shallow regions at the top of
the boss are machined before the steep regions down the sides.
 Steep first — Select this option to machine the steep sections
before the flat. If you have a boss, the steep regions are
machined before the shallow regions.

Options
Threshold angle — Enter the angle of the surface slope, measured
from the horizontal, that determines the split between constant Z
(steep) and shallow machining.
Overlap distance — Enter the size of the overlap area between steep
and shallow machining. This reduces marks on the model caused by
a sudden switch between steep and shallow machining.
Steep
Spiral — Select this option to create a spiral path between two
consecutive closed contours. This minimises the number of lifts of
the tool and maximises cutting time while maintaining more
constant load conditions and deflections on the tool.
Shallow
Select from:
Parallel
Optionally enter a Wall Clearance and Raster Angle.

3D Spiral

Smoothing — Select this option to smooth offsets of toolpath
segments over the model.
Selecting the Smoothing option converts this:
to this:
As a general rule, use raster on open-edged parts and 3D

offsets at the bottom of a pocket.

Remachining dialog
You can use the Remachining dialog to create remachining (see
page 788) toolpaths that automatically mill regions that were not
cut by previous operations.
To display the Remachining dialog, click Remachining on the Strategy
Remachining — Select this option to enable planar remachining (see

page 789).
Previous tool diameter — Enter the dimensions of the tool that was
used to cut the part previously. This parameter applies to all
remachining methods.
Overcut percent — Enter a percentage by which to increase the
Previous tool diameter to expand the remachining region. This is
useful to ensure complete coverage by the remachining toolpath.
Minimum rest material — Specify the minimum size of remaining
material you want to remachine.
This parameter does not apply to corner remachining. It

applies only to parallel, Z-level and 3D spiral remachining.

This setting can be used to filter out regions that have a minimal
amount of rest material left by the previous tool. The default is 0
which means it tries to cut anywhere the previous tool had a double
contact with the part surfaces, including a fillet of the same size as
the previous tool (assuming Overcut percent is also set to 0). If
Minimum rest material is set to a positive number, the remachining
only includes tool paths that remove rest material that is greater
than this depth. Its main use is to handle the case where you have
some part fillets exactly the size of the previous tool and some that
are smaller. If you do not want to remachine the part fillets that are
exactly the size of the previous tool you can set Overcut percent to 0
and Minimum rest material to 1 or 2 times the machining tolerance to
make sure the previous tool radius sized fillets are not remachined.
The following example part has some fillets that have a 10 mm
radius and some smaller fillets. Remachining with a Previous tool
diameter of 20 mm and the default Overcut percent of 5 remachines
all the fillets:
If you set Overcut percent to 0 to avoid cutting the 10 mm fillets we

may get some unwanted tool paths, depending on the machining
tolerance and the accuracy of the part model. Here the machining
tolerance is set to 0.01 mm and we have some unwanted tool paths:

- Unwanted toolpaths
Generally, setting the Minimum rest material to twice the tolerance

(0.02 mm in this case) eliminates these extra tool paths.
Another use for Minimum rest material is to eliminate noise from the
remachining tool paths due to inaccuracies in the part surfaces,
non-solid models, poor tolerances, and so on.

Edges tab (3D LITE)
You can use the Edges tab of the Surface Milling Properties dialog
(see page 1045) to specify how the tool behaves at the edges of the
surface.
This tab gives you options to set how the toolpaths are generated
near surface edges.
Automatic — A set of rules that chooses between Don't roll and Cut
to bottom to get the best performance (see page 1121).
Cut to bottom: Roll over top edge and cut to bottom of stock/part limits
— This does not set any boundary. In this case, FeatureCAM uses
only the boundary specified by the curve options in the Stock tab.
Cut top edge: Just roll over the top edge — Sets a pocket-like curve
boundary to the silhouette of the part offset by a tool radius. The
tool rolls over the edges by a tool radius. In PowerMILL this is
known as a silhouette boundary. Edge boundary uses a silhouette
boundary of the part, but it uses the top (highest) Z values where
the silhouettes are at a vertical surface.
Cut top edge examples

Cut top edge, z-level operation:
Cut top edge, parallel operation:
Don't roll over the edge at all

Sets a pocket-like curve boundary to the silhouette of the part. The
tool contacts the surface boundary. In PowerMILL this is known as a
contact point boundary. This prevents any cutting of sharp corners
at the external edges of the part. If the part has a vertical surface
at the outside of the part AND has a sharp corner at the top of the
vertical surface, it prevents cutting of the vertical surface because it
is coincident with the sharp corner at the top.
Don't roll over examples

Do not roll over the edge at all, z-level operation:
Do not roll over the edge at all, parallel operation:
You can set advanced options on the part boundary by clicking the
Advanced (see page 1118) button.
If you have a vertical surface and you want to cut to the bottom,
select Cut to/from bottom of vertical walls.
Cut selected surfaces: Only cut selected part surfaces — FeatureCAM
only machines the selected surfaces and does not cut any of the
neighboring or unselected surfaces. If there are no neighboring
surfaces, the tool rolls over the edges by a tool radius.
If you have a vertical surface and you want to cut to the bottom,
select Cut to bottom of vertical walls.
Save Combined Boundary (see page 1119) — This preview button
shows both the part boundary (in blue) and the tool center (in red)
curves on your model and enables you to save it for future use if
you want to.
The settings on the Edges tab may affect performance (see

page 1121).

Advanced part boundary options
This page gives you advanced settings for the Don't roll over the edge
at all option.
There are two types of curves used by the Don't roll option. One
type is a curve on the surfaces of the feature. This is called a part
boundary and the points are the contact points where the tool stops
at the edge of the feature. These curves do not depend on the tool.
The second type of curve is a tool center (offset) curve. A tool
center curve is a part boundary curve that has been offset by the
tool edge radius. The Show combined boundary button on the Stock
page gives a preview of all the part boundary and tool center
curves.
Part boundary tolerance — This controls the accuracy of the part
boundaries. The default value is automatically computed. Smaller
values give better results but take longer to compute. To reset to
the default value, enter 0 and click OK, then click Apply on the
Edges tab.
Use separate wall tolerance — The part boundaries use a tolerance to
check for vertical surfaces (walls). By default it uses the Part
boundary tolerance. Selecting this option enables you to enter a
separate tolerance value for vertical walls. You may need to use this
setting if you use the Cut to/from bottom of vertical walls option on
the Edges tab. If you preview the part boundaries and they are not
consistent at the bottom of vertical walls, select Use separate wall
tolerance and enter a larger tolerance than the boundary tolerance
above.
Offset boundary tolerance — This controls the accuracy of the tool
center (offset) curves. The default value is the same as the
Tolerance value on the Milling tab, but if you override it here it
becomes a separate tolerance for the tool center curves.
Smaller values produce smoother tool center curves, but take

longer to compute.

Edge tolerance — This specifies the tolerance between the part
boundaries and the surfaces. The default value of 0 means this
tolerance is set automatically based on the boundary tolerance
above. If the tool center curve is rolling over the edges of the
feature you may need to set a larger edge tolerance (relative to the
boundary tolerance).
Advanced part boundary examples
The Save Combined Boundary preview button on the Edges tab
shows both the part boundary (blue) and the tool center (red)
curves:
In the following example, the part boundary (red) is smooth, but

the tool offset (blue) is rough. Decrease the Offset boundary
tolerance for a smoother tool offset:
This shows a smoother tool offset (blue) with decreased Offset

boundary tolerance:

In the following example, the part boundary (red) is not consistent
along a vertical wall. First try reducing the Boundary tolerance. If
that does not solve the problem, try using a separate (larger) Wall
tolerance.
By using a reduced Boundary tolerance, a smoother part boundary is

produced along the top of a vertical wall:
Using the Rollover option, the tool offset (red) (and toolpath) rolls
over the part boundary (blue):

Using an Edge tolerance larger than the Boundary tolerance
eliminates the rollover. Reducing the Boundary tolerance may also
eliminate the rollover without setting the Edge tolerance:
Edges performance
The options on the Edges tab can have a large impact on the
performance of 3-axis toolpaths. The edge options cause various
types of automatic boundary curves to be calculated which,
depending on the size of the model and the tool, can take significant
time to compute.
These are the edge options ordered from best to worst in order of
performance:
 Cut to bottom — This option computes no automatic boundary
and has no impact on performance.
 Cut selected surfaces — This option computes a boundary
between the selected surfaces and unselected surfaces. This is
intended for milling a small subset of the surfaces in a larger
model (in other words, a feature). When used in this way it
should not have a large impact on performance. If you do not
have any unselected surfaces, this option behaves the same as
Cut top edge.
 Cut top edge — This option computes an automatic silhouette
boundary of the part surfaces. Performance is impacted on large
models.
 Don't roll — This option computes two automatic boundaries and
can have a large impact on performance. Large models and small
tools both slow down these calculations. This option is best for
simple surface models where the milling needs to be limited to
not roll over the edges along the profile of a feature.
Automatic
The Automatic option follows a set of rules to choose between Don't
roll and Cut to bottom. Automatic tries to avoid the computation of
Don't roll when it thinks that it is unnecessary and chooses Cut to
bottom (no boundary calculation) instead.

Automatic follows these rules:
 Use Cut to bottom for any of these cases:
 4- or 5-axis operation
 Roughing operation
 Flowline or Isoline operation
 Corner remachining operation
 Select curves for boundaries has been set on the Stock tab
 A slope has been set up on the Slopes tab
 Remachining option has been selected on the Strategy tab
 Overcut % is not 100 on the Stock tab
 Otherwise use Don't roll.

Stock tab (3D LITE)
Use the Stock tab of the Surface Milling Properties dialog (see page
1045) to choose the clipping curves for the material to be removed.
Use part surface dimensions — This creates toolpaths on the surfaces

regardless of the location of the stock. If you are using a spiral
toolpath, this option automatically calculates the silhouette curve of
the feature and uses this curve as the shape of the spiral. This
generally has the best shape for spiral toolpaths.
Use stock dimensions — This restricts the toolpaths to the portions
of the surface feature that are within the stock. If you are using a
spiral toolpath, this option uses the outline of the stock as the shape
of the spiral. You can set what percentage of the tool approaches or
passes beyond the stock boundary in the Overcut % option.
Overcut % applies to three types of surface milling features:
 spiral toolpaths designated as a boss on the stock page
 features cut with projection milling technique that do not have an
explicit boundary curve
 some Z level rough passes.
In the boss case this attribute applies only to how the toolpaths
behave around the stock boundary.

For other 3D surface milling features, use the cut allowance feature
described on the Stock tab. The Overcut % option applies only if Use
stock dimensions is selected on the feature's Stock tab.
Overcut % specifies what percentage of the tool approaches or
passes beyond the stock boundary.
It can have a value between -100 and 100 with the following
meanings:
0 puts the centerline of the tool on the stock curve.
100 overcuts the region by a tool radius.
-100 stops one tool radius short of the stock curve.

For Z level rough, this attribute applies to all features except Pocket
features without stock curves. This attribute controls the outer
extend of Boss features and the amount that Pocket feature cuts
beyond its boundary. The default value is 100% which puts the
edge of the tool on the boundary. A number greater than 100
extends the toolpaths beyond the boundary. A number less than
100 essentially offsets the outer boundary and clips the toolpaths
against this closer boundary.
Use solid model — This restricts toolpaths to be within the solid
model or STL model that you choose. Optionally enter an Allowance.
This applies to Z-level roughing only.

Select curves for boundaries — This uses curves to restrict the
toolpath boundaries or to affect the shape of a spiral toolpath. Click
the Curve Options button to open the Boundary Curve (see page
1129) dialog. Additional options are displayed for 2D spiral
toolpaths (see page 750), 3D spiral toolpaths (see page 755), and
all other techniques (see page 1129).

Stock Model — Select this check box to use a stock model (see page
266) in combination with the curve you selected. Select the Stock
Model name and the Operations to use from the lists. Click the Stock
Model Options button to open the Stock Model Settings (see page
1131) dialog.
This option is available for Z-level rough, Parallel rough and

all 3-axis finishing strategies
Save Combined Boundary — Click this button to display and save the
boundary for the operation. The boundary is a combination of the
edge boundary, the stock curve boundary, and the slope limit. This
may take some time to compute, but is computed and stored with
the operation, that is, computed only once.
Creating an STL file
To create an STL file:
1 Play a 3D simulation up to the end of the operation that you
want to save.
2 Select View > Simulation > Save Simulation Results from the menu.
3 The Save STL dialog (see page 104) is displayed:
4 Select to save to either the current directory or a different

directory.
5 Enter an STL File Name or accept the default.
6 Optionally select Save STL File Using Short File Name, Create
Subfolder, and Overwrite Existing Files.
7 Click OK.
You can then import (see page 1125) the STL file to use as initial
stock for Z-level roughing.
Importing an STL file
To import an STL file:

1 Select File > Import from the menu.
The Import window opens.
2 At the bottom of the Import window, for Files of type, select
Supported types, STL, or All.
3 Browse to the STL file you want to import and either double-click
its name, or select it and click Open.
Follow the steps in the wizard or click Cancel to return to the
Graphics area.
The STL displays in the Part View panel under STL with the
default name stl.
Any additional STL files that you import are named stl_1,
stl_2, and so on.
You can also import an STL file by dragging it into the

Graphics area.

Multiple roughing tools STL example
The following example part needs to be initially machined, and then
sent off to be hardened:
The remaining material must be rest machined around the upstands

of the model.
We do the initial Z-level roughing operation with a 20 mm tool and
achieve the following result:
This is the stock state after hardening.

We save this 3D simulation as an STL file (see page 1125), and
import (see page 1125) it back into the active file:
We then do a Multiple rough Z-level operation using a 10 mm tool

and a 6 mm tool. On the Stock tab for this operation, we select the
*.stl file that we had created and imported, to clip the toolpaths to.
This is the result:

Boundary Curve dialog
To open the Boundary Curve dialog, click the Curve Options button
on the Stock tab (see page 1123).
3D pocket — The toolpaths are restricted to the regions inside of the

curves specified as the boundaries.
You can also specify Island curves for 3D pockets. The toolpaths are
generated outside of the island curves, but inside the boundary
curves. The island curves must be inside of the boundaries and
must not touch the boundaries.

3D boss — The toolpaths are restricted to the regions outside of the
curves specified as the boundaries.
Boundary curves may extend beyond the stock or beyond the

surfaces of the feature. Regardless of the curves that are specified,
toolpaths do not extend beyond the surfaces of a feature.
Curve allowance — The distance to stay away from the boundary or
island curves. This must be a positive number and is an absolute
distance.
Limiting method
Tool center — Select this option to limit the toolpath based on the
center of the tool.
Contact point — Select this option to limit the toolpath based on last
point of contact between the tool and the surface.

Stock Model Settings dialog
Stock model rest roughing

These attributes apply to the rough operation.
Expand area by — Enter a value to expand rest areas by the
specified distance (measured along the surface). A negative value
reduces the size of rest areas.
Minimum gap length — Enter the gap length, which controls
fragmentation by replacing gaps shorter than this distance with a
toolpath segment. A large value reduces fragmentation, but
increases the length of the toolpath that is not cutting material. A
small value produces shorter toolpaths, but increases the number of
toolpath lifts.
A Minimum gap length of 0:

A Minimum gap length of the default value:
Stock model engagement for finishing

These attributes apply to the finish operation. They reduce tool
wear, improve surface finish, and stop the tool engaging with the
material excessively.
Machine stock only — Select this option to limit the toolpaths to
areas where a minimum amount of stock is being removed from the
stock model.
Minimum length removed — Enter a threshold value. FeatureCAM
ignores toolpath portions that are shorter than this.
Use depth of cut — Select this option to limit the depth of cut to the
value you enter.

Slopes tab (3D LITE)
You can use the Slopes tab of the Surface Milling Properties dialog
(see page 1045) to specify the slope limitations of a 3D Surface
Milling toolpath.
Many of the 3D toolpath techniques can be limited to regions of the

part by angles. These controls are located on the Slopes tab. The
options are:
None — All regions of the surfaces of the model are included
regardless of slope.
Horizontal only — Limits cutting to regions with a slope less than the
Maximum surface slope angle.
Maximum surface slope limits the toolpaths to portions of surfaces
with a slope less than that angle. This is a good way to limit milling
to the 'flatter' portions of your model. This attribute applies to most
finishing types of toolpaths (for example Parallel, Radial and so on).
The image below shows an example of limiting X parallel toolpaths
to the bottom of the mold by setting Maximum surface slope angle to
45 degrees.

The toolpaths do not climb up steep walls.
Vertical only — Limits cutting to steep regions with slope greater

than the Minimum surface slope angle.
This limits toolpaths to surface portions that have a slope greater
than that angle. It works well to limit toolpaths to the steeper
portions of the model. The image shows an example of using this to
limit the finishing passes to the walls.
The bottom of the mold is not machined.

If you are using a spiral operation that is limited by slope,
then selecting the Horizontal only option generates spiral
operations based on the outlines of the slope-based regions.
4-Axis/5-Axis tab (5AS)
You can use the 5-Axis tab of the Surface Milling Properties dialog
(see page 1045) to edit the Multi-Axis options of a Surface Milling
feature.

For a turn/mill document with a B-axis enabled post (.cnc file) or a
5-axis positioned document, these surface milling operations have a
5-Axis tab:
 Parallel  3D spiral  Horizontal +
finish  Flowline Vertical
 Z-level  5-axis trim  Pencil
finish  Corner
 Swarf
 Isoline Remachining
 2D spiral  Between 2
curves
The strategy type determines the options that are available.
This tab enables you to set three different things: Tool Axis, Tilt Axis
for Gouge Avoidance, and Tool Axis Limits. The first two sections of
the dialog can be confusing because they both control the tilt of the
tool axis. Think of the first section, Tool Axis, as a first level of tool
tilting, controlled in a manual way. And then you can add extra
tilting in order to avoid gouges with the tool holder by using Tilt Axis
for Gouge Avoidance.
You can use these two sections of the dialog independently,

one without the other, meaning that you can use the second
section without having specified any tilting in the first section.
The Tool Axis enables you to define the tool orientation. The default
value is Vertical, which is used for standard 3-axis machining.
However, it can also be a continuously changing orientation for
so-called 5-axis simultaneous machining.
Vertical (Z) — The tool remains aligned with the Z-axis of the active
Setup and so is the same as for standard 3-axis milling.
Fixed — This option enables you to set the tool axis direction as a
vector.
Use Lead and Lean — The tool tilts at a fixed angle relative to the
direction of tool travel.
from — Select where the lead and lean angle is measured from.
 Contact normal — Select this option to lead and lean from the
surface normal at the contact point.
 Vertical — Select this option to lead and lean from the Setup's
Z direction.
 Travel dir — Select this option to lead and lean from the
perpendicular to the direction of movement
 Legacy — Select this option to use the traditional lead and
lean style.

Lead Angle — This tilts the tool forwards or backwards along the
travel direction.
Lean Angle — This tilts the tool to the left or right of the travel
direction.
For more information, see Lead/Lean (see page 1142).

Other —
From point — This option aligns the tip of the tool away from a
fixed point. The angle of the tool is constantly changing. The tip
of the tool moves significantly while the head of the machine tool
stays relatively still.
To point — This option aligns the tip of the tool towards a point.
The angle of the tool is constantly changing. The head of the
machine tool moves significantly while the tip of the tool stays
relatively still.

From line — This option aligns the tip of the tool away from a
fixed line. The angle of the tool is constantly changing. The tip of
the tool moves significantly while the head of the machine tool
remains relatively still.
To line — The tool tip always tries to point towards the fixed line.
machine tool moves significantly whilst the tip of the tool stays
relatively still.

From curve — This option aligns the tip of the tool away from a
fixed curve. The angle of the tool is constantly changing. The tip
of the tool moves significantly while the head of the machine tool
stays relatively still.
To curve — This option aligns the tip of the tool towards a curve.
machine tool moves significantly while the tip of the tool stays
relatively still.
In FeatureCAM 2013, these options have been improved

and are now more accurate. The old options are still
available so that you can keep any tool axes that you are
happy with, in existing files. The old options have been
renamed From point (old-style), To point (old-style), From line
(old-style), From curve (old-style), and To curve (old-style).

Automatic — The swarf operation has an automatic option (instead
of the above Other option). The automatic option tilts the tool to
keep the side of the tool in contact with the surface(s) being cut.
Retract to — Click the Retract to button to open the Safe Area (see
page 1152) dialog.
Tool axis smoothing — This minimizes changes in velocity and
position of the tool axis. This smooths the axis movements of the
machine tool.
It works by smoothing the rotary axis motion on the A/B axis
(Elevation) and the C axis (Azimuth) of a machine tool.
The benefits of using tool axis smoothing include:
 Improved surface finish due to a reduction in jerky motion and
reduction of surface dwell marks.
 Reduced machining time due to a more constant rotary axis
speed.
 Improved quality of all 5-axis machining strategies.
Tilt Axis For Gouge Avoidance (see page 1143) — This enables you
to tilt the tool in order to avoid gouging the model with the holder,
in a user-defined way.
Smoothing distance — When using Tilt Axis for Gouge Avoidance, set
this attribute to avoid sudden tool axis changes.
This example part has a vertical surface, shown in red, with two
tabs at the top:
This is the surface in more detail:

Using an Isoline strategy, with Tool axis smoothing enabled and a
Tilt axis of Lean then lead with no Smoothing distance value, the tool
has sudden changes in direction. For example, it machines the area
below the first tab in a tilt position:
Then returns to a vertical position between the tabs:
Then returns to the tilt position to machine the area below the
second tab:

With a Smoothing distance value entered that is long enough to
cover the area between the two tabs, the tool stays tilted when
machining between the tabs:
Tool Axis Limits (see page 1147) — This enables you to define limits
on the direction of the tool axis whilst cutting a multi-axis toolpath.
Lead and Lean
The tool is at a fixed angle relative to the direction of the toolpath.
You can specify two different angles, Lead and Lean. If you specify a
Lead angle and a Lean angle, the Lead Angle is applied first in the
direction of the move, and then the Lean Angle from this rotated
position towards a vector perpendicular to the move.
Lead Angle — This defines a rotation of the tool axis in the direction
of travel. It is measured from the perpendicular to the direction of
travel; 0 is vertical. Typically this is used to avoid cutting at the
center of a ball nosed tool on flattish areas. The diagram below has
a lead of 30 .

Lean Angle — This defines a rotation of the tool axis at right angles
to the direction of travel; 0 is vertical. The diagram below has a
lean of 30 degrees. Typically this is used to avoid collisions (such as
a step). Or this can be used when machining up to a step to allow
you to use a smaller tool.
Tilt Axis for Gouge Avoidance

Use this section of the 4-Axis or 5-Axis tab to specify how
FeatureCAM automatically tilts the tool axis to avoid collisions
between the shank and holder of the tool assembly and the model.
No tilting — This is the default setting and means that the holder
and shank are not gouge-checked.
Lean — If a collision is detected, the tool axis moves from the
original axis in the Lean direction until the collision is avoided.
Lead — If a collision is detected, the tool axis moves from the
original axis in the Lead direction until the collision is avoided.
Lead then Lean — If a collision is detected, the tool tilts from the
original axis in the Lead direction until the collision is avoided. If the
collision cannot be avoided by tilting the tool in the Lead direction,
the tool tilts in the Lean direction until the collision is avoided.
Lean then Lead — If a collision is detected, the tool tilts from the
original axis in the Lean direction until the collision is avoided. If the
collision cannot be avoided by tilting the tool in the Lean direction,
the tool tilts in the Lead direction until the collision is avoided.

To Point — If a collision is detected, the tool is aligned with the tip
pointing towards the specified point, to become a Toward Point Tool
Axis, until the collision is avoided.
From Point — If a collision is detected, the tool is aligned with the
tip pointing away from the specified point, to become a From Point
Tool Axis until the collision is avoided.
Towards the surface normal — If a collision is detected, the tool axis
moves from the original axis and move towards the Surface normal
direction until the collision is avoided.
This simple example uses an X-parallel toolpath over a step to show
the effect of Collision Avoidance. If you create a simple parallel
toolpath over this, you get collisions of the shank as it climbs or
descends the step:
One way around this is to increase the length of the tool. Another
way is to change the toolpath strategy. The third way is to use
Collision Avoidance. In this case, the initial Tool Axis is
Vertical. Select a Tilt Axis for Gouge Avoidance of Lead.
Create a new parallel toolpath. You can see that the toolpath now
tilts on the steep portions to avoid the tool holder colliding:

However, the toolpath is still 3-axis on the flat portions where the
tool holder does not collide:
In summary, the tool tries to respect the original Tool Axis Definition
for as much of the toolpath as possible. When this is not possible,
the tool axis changes in the direction specified in the Tool Tilt Axis
field until the tool assembly no longer collides.
Lead then lean example
The following example model can be machined using 5-axis
simultaneous machining:
A Tilt Axis of Lean does not create a toolpath in the corners :
A Fixed direction and a Tilt Axis of From curve creates an incomplete

toolpath.

- the curve used to generate the toolpa
- an incomplete toolpath.
The only way to resolve this would be to create a curve in each

pocket and generate a separate toolpath for each pocket.
A Tilt Axis of Lead then lean achieves the required result with one
toolpath, so there is no need to create any additional geometry.
Linearization
5-axis machine tools do not guarantee (and frequently don't use) a
straight line move from one point to another in multi-axis. This
means that you cannot necessarily guess where the tool might
move to between two points. The machine tool moves all of its axes
simultaneously — it doesn't just move in X and then rotate the
head. It does both together so that both movements are carried out
at the same time. This is not a big issue if the points are close
together. However, if the points are far apart, the machine tool
(which may be rotating the tool tip between two points) can cause
gouges when the part is cut on the actual machine.
Consider moving between two points. Although the move looks like
a straight line, it won't necessarily be a line on the machine tool.
Arc swept by machine tool.

FeatureCAM does attempt to linearize moves by dividing the curves
into smaller straight line moves, based on the Use linearization and
Inch/Metric Tolerance options on the FIVE-AXIS dialog in XBUILD.

A very small wrapping tolerance tends to make 3D and machine
simulation rather slow. For this reason, the simulation has its own
Linearization tolerance option, which you can set to a larger number
than that of manufacturing. That is, the simulation uses the
tolerance (which you set under Options > Simulation > 2D/3D Shaded
tab) for linearization, and the posting process uses the wrapping
tolerance found on the FIVE-AXIS dialog in XBUILD.
Tool Axis Limits
The Tool Axis Limits dialog controls angular limitations of the

machine toolpath which therefore limits the angle at which a tool
can be positioned while cutting a multi-axis toolpath.
When the angular limits are met or exceeded, there are two
options:
 Remove toolpaths — This removes the toolpath outside the
angular limit.
 Leave tool at Limit — This keeps the tool axis at the machine limit
on reaching an angular limit.
Elevation angle — This defines the angular limits of the machine tool
above the azimuth plane; 0 is in the azimuth plane, 90 is along the
axis perpendicular to the azimuth plane.
Azimuth Angle — This defines the angular limits of the machine tool
in the azimuth plane.
Project to Plane — This is the same as setting the elevation angle to
zero. Because the elevation angle is fixed, this usually produces a
4-axis toolpath. If the stock Z axis is not aligned with a rotary axis
of the machine tool, a 5-axis toolpath may be produced.

It is not always immediately obvious how to translate the machine
tool angular limits with FeatureCAM's Azimuth and Elevation angles.
This looks at a couple of machine configurations with different
angular limits.
The configuration of the rotary axes varies widely. However, the
differences between many of these are relatively minor, and there
are really only three fundamentally different machine
configurations:
Table - Table
Both rotary axes move the table.
With table-table machine tools, typical angular limits are:

X 30
Y 360
The machine tool Y limits are equivalent to the Azimuth Angle or the
angular limits in the XY plane. The Y limit of 360 translates to
Azimuth Angle limits of 0 to 360.
The machine tool X limits are equivalent to the angle above the XY
plane. However, they are not the same angle. This is best described
using the diagram below. The machine tool measures the angular
range relative to the Z axis and FeatureCAM measures it relative to
the XY plane. So, the angle required for the limit is the
complementary angle to the one given for the machine tool.

If you select a Mode of Remove Toolpath this will machine a sphere
to the following extent:
Head - Head
Both rotary axes move the head.
With head– head machine tools, typical angular limits are:

X 60
Z 360
The machine tool Z limits are equivalent to the Azimuth angle or the
angular limits in the XY plane. The Z limit of 360 translates to
Azimuth angle limits of 0 to 360 .

The machine tool X limits are equivalent to the angle above the XY
plane. The machine tool measures the angular range relative to the
Z axis and FeatureCAM measures it relative to the XY plane. So, the
angle required for the limit is the complementary angle to the one
given for the machine tool. This is described in more detail in Table
– Table. The X limit of 60 translates to Elevation angle limits of
30 to 90 .
— The machine tool's X angle range = 60 , FeatureCAM's

elevation angle range = 30 to 90 .
If you select a Mode of Remove toolpath this machines:
Alternative typical Head - Head machine tool angular limits are:

X -50 to +60
Z 360
This translates to Azimuth Angle limits of 0 to 360 and to Elevation
Angle limits of 30 to 90 . In this case, although the machine tool
limits appear to be different to those in the first Head - Head
example, the FeatureCAM angular limits are in fact the same. This
happens because rotating the head 180 about Z then gives you the
complete range.
Head - Table
One rotary axis moves the head; the other moves the table. This is
the case for lathes with a B-axis head.
Azimuth Angle - defines the angular limits of the machine tool in the
XY plane. 0 is along the X axis; 90 is along the Y axis. Can range
from 0 to 360.
Elevation Angle - defines the angular limits of the machine tool
above the XY plane. 0 is in the XY Plane; 90 is along the Z axis, -90
is along the -Z axis. Can range from -90 to 90.
That is, the elevation angle limits the angle in the XZ plane. Angle
0 is the X tool, 90 is the Z tool, so a minimum elevation 0 to max
elevation 90 cuts the complete right half of a sphere (flowline) given
no min_azimuth/max_azimuth. (Think of it as latitudes and
longitudes that are reachable. The longitude (circles parallel to XZ
plane for turnmill) is controlled by elevation angles).
The latitude (think of a tool axis in the XY plane for turnmill) is
controlled by azimuth angles. That is, -90 to 90 would cut the entire
top half of a sphere if given no elevation limits... (X axis is 0
azimuth angle). However, the allowable range is 0 to 360, so
setting minimum to 270 and maximum to 90 is acceptable (the limit
is set going clockwise around positive Z axis from minimum to
maximum).

The example below shows you how to transpose the angular limits
on the machine tool to the Azimuth and Elevation limits on the Limits
tab on the Tool Axis Direction dialog. These examples all use a
sphere with an Isoline or Flowline Projection toolpath. If no tool axis
limits are imposed, you will see the following toolpath:
Safe Area dialog
The Safe Area dialog affects the approaches, plunges, and retracts
of a 5-axis simultaneous operation.
Retract to sets the shape of the safe area. Select from:
Plane — In this case, the safe area is defined as a plane, a distance
of Z rapid plane (1.0 inches in this example) above the top of the
stock. All plunges begin a distance of Plunge clearance away from
the top of the stock (at Z = 0.1 inches in this example).

You set the Z rapid plane and Plunge clearance attributes in the
Retract and Plunge (see page 1339) dialog.
Cylinder — If you select Cylinder, the safe area of the operation is

set as an infinitely long cylinder. Enter the Radius of the cylinder,
the Origin and the Axis Direction.
Sphere — If you select Sphere, the shape of the safe area is set as a
sphere. Enter a Radius and Origin for the sphere.
Axis Smoothing tab (5AS)

You can use the Axis Smoothing tab of the Surface Milling Properties
dialog (see page 1045) to specify axis smoothing on Surface Milling
toolpaths.

You must select the Tool axis smoothing option on the 5-Axis
(see page 1135) tab to display the Axis Smoothing tab.
Elevation — Select how to smooth the elevation angle of the tool
axis. An elevation of 90 aligns the tool with the Z axis, and an
elevation of 0 means the tool is in the XY plane.
None — Select this option to have no smoothing. The tool axis
orientation moves as and when it needs to move.
Smoothed — Select this option to enable the tool axis angle to
change smoothly over the Smoothing distance. The change in angle
will not be more than the Maximum angular correction unless the
angle of the unsmoothed toolpath varies by more than the Maximum
angular correction in less than Smoothing distance. In such regions,
the angle may change by more than the Maximum angular correction
to give a smooth result.
Stepped on surface — Select this option to enable the tool axis angle
to change by up to the Maximum angular correction to form steps of
constant value. To avoid sharp tool axis movements, a smooth
transition between steps is made starting at the Smoothing distance
away from the possible ends of adjacent steps. The tool always
remains in contact with the surface.
Stepped with links — Similar to Stepped on surface, select this option
to enable the tool axis angle to change by up to Maximum angular
correction to form steps of constant value. In this case, the toolpath
segments are subdivided at the end of each step, and link moves
are inserted so the tool axis changes when the tool is not in contact
with the model. This means that tool axis angle of each toolpath
segment is constant.
Original toolpath, no smoothing

Smoothed toolpath
Maximum angular correction limits

Azimuth or elevation
Toolpath distance
Maximum angular correction — Enter the maximum angle the
smoothed axis may deviate from the initial in the elevation
direction. The maximum angular correction angle is only
exceeded if the unsmoothed toolpath moves by more than this
value in less than the Smoothing distance. In such regions, the
angle may change by more than the Maximum angular correction
to give a smooth results.
Azimuth — Select how to smooth the azimuth angle of the tool axis.
Azimuth is the angle between the X axis and the projection of the
tool in the XY plane.
None — Select this option to have no smoothing. The tool axis
orientation moves as and when it needs to move.
Smoothed — Select this option to enable the tool axis angle to
change smoothly over the Smoothing distance. The change in angle
will not be more than the Maximum angular correction unless the
angle of the unsmoothed toolpath varies by more than the Maximum
angular correction in less than Smoothing distance. In such regions,
the angle may change by more than the Maximum angular correction
to give a smooth result.
Stepped on surface — Select this option to enable the tool axis angle
to change by up to the Maximum angular correction to form steps of
constant value. To avoid sharp tool axis movements, a smooth
transition between steps is made starting at the Smoothing distance
away from the possible ends of adjacent steps. The tool always
remains in contact with the surface.

Stepped with links — Similar to Stepped on surface, select this option
to enable the tool axis angle to change by up to Maximum angular
correction to form steps of constant value. In this case, the toolpath
segments are subdivided at the end of each step, and link moves
are inserted so the tool axis changes when the tool is not in contact
with the model. This means that tool axis angle of each toolpath
segment is constant.

Smoothed toolpath
Toolpath distance

Maximum angular correction — Enter the maximum angle the
smoothed axis may deviate from the initial in the azimuth
direction. The maximum angular correction angle is only
exceeded if the unsmoothed toolpath moves by more than this
value in less than the Smoothing distance. In such regions, the
angle may change by more than the Maximum angular correction
to give a smooth results.
Smoothing distance — Enter the distance over which to smooth the
tool axis movement. When using Stepped on Surface, or with sudden
changes in direction in the original toolpath (such as a right-angled
corner), you get rapid changes of orientation of the tool axis which
leaves dwell marks. To prevent this, the Smoothing distance blends
the change in orientation and gives a much improved surface finish.

Smoothed toolpath
Toolpath distance
Override smoothing UCS — Select this option to use a different UCS
to the UCS used to generate the toolpath to define elevation and
azimuth for smoothing.
UCS — Select the UCS to use when smoothing.

Stepped on surface example
This car door part uses a trimming toolpath around the edge:
With no smoothing, the rotary table has a rocking motion and

sudden direction changes can leave witness marks.
In some areas of the model, it is impossible to avoid the rotation,
such as when the tool makes its way around the corners and the
wheel arch. However, it is areas such as on this long edge of the
door, where the machine table is rocking backwards and forwards,
that you can avoid this using the Stepped on surface options:
With Stepped on surface enabled for both Elevation and Azimuth,

with a Max. angular correction of 80, the table does not rotate while
cutting this area:

Stepped with links example
This example part uses the Pencil strategy to cut the bottom fillet:
Enabling Stepped with links for both Elevation and Azimuth reduces
the tool movement.
A centerline simulation shows the links that FeatureCAM inserts
links so that it can change direction while not in contact with the
surface:
Surface control tab (3D LITE)

You can use the Surface control tab of the Surface Milling Properties
dialog (see page 1045) to specify how the toolpaths are generated
on surfaces.
The Surface list displays all surfaces in the feature. Deselect the
check box next to a surface name to exclude it from the operation.

Select a surface in the list to highlight it in the graphics window, or
use the Pick surface button and select a surface in the graphics
window to highlight it in the list.
Isoline milling
Attributes for — displays the operation being edited.

 Surface — The surfaces are machined in the order listed. Use the
and buttons to rearrange the surfaces in the list. Deselect
the check box next to a surface name to exclude it from the
operation.
 Start Curve — Isoline surfaces are made up of rows or columns of
curves. The Start Curve determines the first isoline curve used for
machining the surface. Click Set isoline row/col to change the
starting isoline curve.
 First Row — the tool cuts along the row isoline curves, starting
with the first row.
 Last Row — the tool cuts along the row isoline curves, starting
with the last row.
 First Col — the tool cuts along the column isoline curves,
starting with the first column.
 Last Col — the tool cuts along the column isoline curves,
starting with the last column.

 Cut direction — Determines the direction that the tool cuts along
the isoline curves. Click Cut direction to change the direction
between increasing and decreasing.
 Sequence — Determines the sequence in which the tool cuts the
isoline curves. Click Sequence to cycle through the toolpath
sequence options.
 None — the tool cuts the isoline curves in order.
 In to out — The tool starts at the middle and cuts towards the
outside in both directions.
 Out to in — The tool starts at the outside and cuts towards the
middle from both directions.
An axis is displayed in the graphics view which shows the location
and direction of the start of the toolpath for the selected surface:
Machining side arrow

Isoline row column corner and direction
If the wrong side of the surface is selected, click Switch Machining
Side to reverse the machining side.
Flowline milling
If you select a Flowline guide surface (see page 773), the isolines of
another surface are projected onto all the surfaces of the feature.
Milling tab (3D LITE)

You can use the Milling tab of the Surface Milling Properties dialog
(see page 1045) to edit the 3D Milling attributes of the operation
selected in the Tree view to control how the part is manufactured.
The check boxes, menus, and numeric attributes on this tab vary
according to the operation type:
3D LITE
Z-level rough (see page 1163)

Parallel rough (see page 1179)
Parallel finish (see page 1187)
Isoline finish (see page 1202)
3D MX
Z-level finish (see page 1209)
Flowline finish (see page 1222)
Radial finish (see page 1229)
Between 2 curves (see page 1237)
Horizontal + vertical (see page 1246)
Swarf strategy (see page 1268)
3D HSM
Plunge rough (see page 1292)
Corner remachining (see page 1309)
Pencil (see page 1314)
Steep and shallow (see page 1320)
5-axis simultaneous
5-axis trim (see page 1327)

Milling tab (Z-level rough) (3D LITE)

Select from:
leave around check surface(s). If left blank for a roughing pass, the
Finish allowance value is used. If left blank for a finishing pass, the
Leave allowance value is used. You can enter a positive or negative
value. Set Check surfaces on the Dimensions (see page 1048) tab.
Check axial allowance — Enter the amount of axial (XY) material to
leave on a check surface. If you enter a value for Check axial
allowance, the value for Check allowance is applied to radial (Z)
check surfaces only. If you leave Check axial allowance blank, the
value for Check allowance is applied to axial and radial check
surfaces. You can enter a positive or negative value.
Corner radius % — This setting avoids sharp changes in direction by
inserting an arc. To enable it, enter a percentage of the tool
diameter to use for the arc radius.

Slices in Z-level (both rough and finish) can be arc-fitted to avoid
sharp changes in direction. For Z roughing, only the toolpath closest
to the part is rounded. Corner radius % defines the radius that is
inserted in to the toolpaths.
The radius of internal corners is defined as a proportion of the tool
diameter. The default value is 5% for a finish pass and 0% for a
roughing pass. So if you have a tool of diameter 10 mm then the
arc radius is 0.5 mm. The Corner radius % can have a value between
0 and 100.
Arc fitting is of particular importance when high speed machining as
it eliminates sudden changes in tool direction.
- Normal
- Arc fitted
Direction — Click this button to open the Cut Direction (see page
1337) dialog.
value.
Finish axial allowance — Enter the amount of axial (XY) material to
leave on a feature after the Rough pass. If you enter a value for
Finish axial allowance, the value for Finish allowance is applied to
radial (Z) material. If you leave Finish axial allowance blank, the
value for Finish allowance is applied to axial and radial material. You
can enter a positive or negative value.

Flat surface support — There are three options for Flat surface
support:
Off — Select this option to ignore flat areas and calculate Z levels
at a constant Z increment.
Level — Select this option to insert extra levels above each flat
surface and machine whole flat Z levels. This ensures that the
Finish allowance is applied accurately.
Area — Select this option to insert extra levels above each flat
surface and machine flat areas only. This ensures that the Finish
allowance is applied accurately.
Level — FeatureCAM machines whole flat Z levels.

Looking at a different angle you can see that three complete levels
are machined.
Area — FeatureCAM machines flat areas only (instead of the whole

level).
Looking at a different angle you can see that only the flat areas are
machined in the first level.

Off — flat areas are ignored.
Holder Collision Clipping — Clips the toolpath where the holder or

shank collides with a part surface, check surface or unmachined
stock. Select Holder collision clipping on the feature's Strategy tab to
enable it. When enabled, these options are displayed:
 Holder clearance — Enter the clearance distance for the tool
holder. The toolpath is clipped where the tool holder moves
within this distance of a part surface or check surface.
 Shank clearance — Enter the clearance distance for the tool
shank. The toolpath is clipped where the shank moves within this
distance of a part surface or check surface.

irregular shape.

For example:

operations.




New Value — To change the value of an attribute in the list, first

select it, then enter the new value. Click the Set button to save the
new value.
Output Options — Click this button to open the Output Options (see
page 1017) dialog.

Plunge feed override % — Enter the percentage of the Feed setting to
use during a plunge into the material. For example, if the Feed
attribute is 2000 MMPM and you set the Plunge feed override % to 50,
the resulting feed rate for the initial plunge is 1000 MMPM.
Plunge point(s) — Optionally pick plunge points to override the
points that are automatically used by FeatureCAM for a Pre-drill
operation with a Spiral type toolpath.
The Plunge point(s) attribute is only available when Plunge

to Pre-drill location is selected on the Leads tab.
Post Vars. — Click this button to open the Post Variables dialog.
The Post Variables dialog contains nine separate variables that are
passed directly to the post processor. You can use these variables
to pass strings directly to the post processor.
Priority

automatically.

Reorder — Enable this option to create a depth-first strategy. With
Reorder off, each Z level is roughed completely before moving to a
lower depth.

With Reorder off, each Z level is roughed completely before moving
to a lower depth.
With Reorder on, paths are created that machine vertical regions as
shown below.
Reset All — Click this button to reset all of the attributes on the tab
to their default values.
Retract/Plunge — Click this button to open the Retract and Plunge

Rough pass stepover % — Enter the distance between plunge holes
in the same row, as a percentage of the tool diameter.
selected attribute.
If you change the value of a numeric attribute, the attribute

name is prefixed with a * in the attribute list after you click
Set.
Stepover rapid distance — This is used to determine whether to feed
or rapid between toolpaths.
Stepover rapid distance is the maximum 3D length of a non-cutting
move at which a feed move is used, above this length a rapid move
is used. This applies to the different cuts within an operation, even
across multiple surfaces, but does not affect the moves between
operations. If you do not set this attribute, the default stepover
threshold is set to the tool radius.
Stepover rapid distance is similar to Min rapid distance %, but

Stepover rapid distance is a 3D distance and Min rapid distance
% is a 2D distance.
You can use this attribute to prevent stepovers from climbing up or
down a big wall. This image shows toolpaths before increasing
Stepover rapid distance.

This image shows how the tool stays on the metal with an increase
in Stepover rapid distance.
Target horsepower (see page 1574) — This is the ideal [horse]

power for the specified width/depth of cut and feed rate on the
specified stock material type.
Tolerance — This attribute controls how accurately the toolpath
follows the surface. If your part appears faceted, set the tolerance
to a lower value.
Higher value tolerance:
Lower value tolerance:
The tool you select may be incapable of cutting to within the

specified tolerance in constrained areas.

Lower value tolerances may take longer to calculate.
The Tolerance value must be less than the Finish allowance value to
avoid gouging.
Toolpath corner % — This enables raceline smoothing by replacing
sharp corners with rounded corners. Smoothing the sharp corners of
the toolpaths gives a more constant tool velocity and reduces the
tool load. Enter a toolpath radius larger than the tool radius to
minimize the percentage of the tool that contacts the part. This
enables enough cooling to take place and avoiding sharp increases
in tool load as the tool enters the corners.
Effective only during Z-level rough, a non-zero Toolpath corner %
enables raceline smoothing by replacing sharp corners with rounded
corners. Defines the maximum deviation from the sharp corner. The
maximum this can be set to is 40% of stepover. This means that if
you have a 10 mm stepover the maximum deviation from the sharp
to the rounded corner is 4mm.
Using the Toolpath corner % produces a toolpath with fewer small
arcs which makes the toolpath more suitable for high speed
machining. The original profile has the same number of points, but
the offset passes have a reduced number of points.
Total stock — This controls the extent of the toolpaths.

Total stock controls the extent of the toolpaths for a feature.
Enter an offset distance for each Z slice of a feature to use instead
of the Stock boundary.

This example shows a Total stock value of a for one Z slice of a
Surface Mill feature that is classified as a 3D boss:
A — A Z slice of a 3D boss feature

a — Total stock value
If the Total stock value is 0, the Stock boundary is used, for
example:
A — A Z slice of a 3D boss feature
You can also use Boundary curves (see page 1129) to control
the extent of a Z-level rough operation.
Trochoidal cut check box
The Trochoidal cut attribute is available for Z-level roughing.

Turning Trochoidal cut on turns on the ability to detect and avoid
tool overload. As the tool gets towards an overload situation then
FeatureCAM automatically puts in a trochoidal path to take away the
overload. This happens in corners, in narrow channels, slots and the
first cut of an offset toolpath which is, in effect, a narrow channel.
Because some tool overload may be acceptable, you can control
Trochoidal cut with the Avoid overload (% stepover) attribute. This is
the allowable overload percentage of the existing stepover. So, if
you use a stepover of 10 mm and an Avoid overload (% stepover) of
10%, trochoidal moves don't start appearing until an overload
condition of 10% (or 1 mm) is exceeded.

Looking in detail at a typical toolpath:
- Channel
- First cut
- Sharp corner
- Smooth link
Looking at a corner in detail you can see the trochoidal paths more
easily:

If you have changed the value of a numeric attribute, its

name is prefixed by * in the list.

Vortex min point spacing (3D HSM (see page 10)) — Enter the
minimum point spacing at which the machine tool can move at the
specified feed rate. If the machine tool has too many points to
process, it cannot sustain the specified feed rate. You must select
the Vortex option on the Strategy tab (see page 1060) to access this
attribute.
Vortex min radius (3D HSM (see page 10)) — Enter the minimum
radius of the internal trochoids. Vortex toolpaths use trochoidal
moves to maintain a constant feed rate. Higher feed rates require a
larger minimum radius. If you do not override this value, a default
value is used, which is suitable for a typical machine tool at the feed
rate specified for the operation. You must select the Vortex option
on the Strategy tab (see page 1060) to access this attribute.
Vortex Z lift distance (3D HSM (see page 10)) — Enter a Z distance
to lift the tool during trochoidal moves to avoid contact between the
tool and the surface. You must select the Vortex option on the
Strategy tab (see page 1060) to access this attribute.
Z end — Enter the distance along the Z axis below which the
operation does not mill.
Use Z end on an earlier operation then follow it with an

operation using the Z start attribute so you control the
toolpaths efficiently.
Z increment — Enter the distance the tool moves down in the Z axis
with each pass. This is useful if the default step down is leaving
excess material on the part. When Scallop stepover is enabled, this
attribute is not available.
Z start — Enter the distance along the Z axis where the milling
operation starts. You can use this to save time if the stock material
has already been machined away in an earlier operation.

Milling tab (Parallel rough) (3D LITE)

Select from:
1337) dialog.

value.

irregular shape.

For example:

operations.





new value.
page 1017) dialog.

Priority

automatically.

selected attribute.

Set.


% is a 2D distance.

to a lower value.



avoid gouging.



Milling tab (Parallel finish) (3D LITE)

Select from:

1337) dialog.

irregular shape.

For example:

operations.
Leave allowance — This is the amount of material to leave after a 3D
finish pass. If unset, Leave allowance defaults to 0. You can enter a
negative number (up to - tool radius) to allow for shrinkage or
spark gaps, and the part is machined into the part surfaces by the
negative amount specified.
If unset leave allowance defaults to 0. You can enter a negative
number (up to - tool radius) to allow for shrinkage or spark gaps,
and the part is machined into the part surfaces by the negative
amount specified.
Leave axial allowance — Enter the amount of axial (Z) material to
leave on a feature after the Finish pass. If you enter a Leave axial
allowance, the Leave allowance is applied to radial (XY) material
only. If you do not enter a Leave axial allowance, the value for Leave
allowance is applied to axial and radial material. You can enter a
Max. angular deviation — This attribute is available if you select Tool
axis smoothing on the 5-Axis (see page 1135) tab. This value is the
tolerance, in degrees, by which FeatureCAM can adjust the azimuth
and elevation angles during tool axis smoothing.



new value.
page 1017) dialog.
Priority

automatically.

selected attribute.

Set.
Stepover — Enter the planar stepover distance between toolpath
center lines. This distance is measured in the XY plane and then the
toolpaths are projected onto the surfaces of your feature.


% is a 2D distance.

to a lower value.



avoid gouging.
Toolpath end — For X Parallel finishing, enter the Y value for the last
toolpath. For Y Parallel finishing, enter the X value for the last
toolpath.
Toolpath start — For X Parallel finishing, enter the Y value for the
first toolpath. For Y Parallel finishing, enter the X value for the first
toolpath.


Milling tab (2D spiral finish) (3D LITE)

Select from:

1337) dialog.

irregular shape.

For example:

operations.
Leave allowance — Enter the amount of material to leave after a
finish pass. You can enter a positive or negative value. You can
enter a negative number, up to minus the tool radius, to allow for
shrinkage or spark gaps, and the part is machined into the part
surfaces by the negative amount specified. If unset, Leave allowance
defaults to 0.



new value.
page 1017) dialog.

Priority

automatically.

lower depth.
to a lower depth.

shown below.
selected attribute.

Set.

% is a 2D distance.


to a lower value.



avoid gouging.
Toolpath corner % — This enables raceline smoothing by replacing
sharp corners with rounded corners. Smoothing the sharp corners of
the toolpaths gives a more constant tool velocity and reduces the
tool load. Enter a toolpath radius larger than the tool radius to
minimize the percentage of the tool that contacts the part. This
enables enough cooling to take place and avoiding sharp increases
in tool load as the tool enters the corners.
Effective only during Z-level rough, a non-zero Toolpath corner %
enables raceline smoothing by replacing sharp corners with rounded
corners. Defines the maximum deviation from the sharp corner. The
maximum this can be set to is 40% of stepover. This means that if
you have a 10 mm stepover the maximum deviation from the sharp
to the rounded corner is 4mm.
Using the Toolpath corner % produces a toolpath with fewer small
arcs which makes the toolpath more suitable for high speed
machining. The original profile has the same number of points, but
the offset passes have a reduced number of points.



Milling tab (Isoline finish) (3D LITE)

Select from:

1337) dialog.
defaults to 0.


irregular shape.

For example:
operations.
Max. angular deviation — This attribute is available if you select Tool
axis smoothing on the 5-Axis (see page 1135) tab. This value is the
tolerance, in degrees, by which FeatureCAM can adjust the azimuth
and elevation angles during tool axis smoothing.



new value.
page 1017) dialog.
Priority

automatically.

selected attribute.

Set.


% is a 2D distance.

to a lower value.



avoid gouging.

Use alternative 5-axis position (see page 261) (5AP) — Select this
option to change the default orientation for a 5-axis machine.


Milling tab (Z-level finish) (3D MX)

Select from:
Corner correction menu

Corner correction defines the type of corner correction that you
want to apply to all internal corners of a Z-level finish toolpath. The
types are available from a pull-down list and three options are
available:
None - no sharpening or arc fitting is carried out.
Arc Fitted - arcs are created and rounded in all internal corners.
The yellow toolpath shows the Arc Fitted toolpath and the green
toolpath shows the Normal toolpath.
Arc fitting is of particular importance when high speed machining,
as it eliminates sudden changes in tool direction.
- Normal
- Arc fitted
Corner Radius %
This defines the radius used if you select Arc Fitted. The radius is
defined as a proportion of the tool diameter. For a Z finish pass the
default value is 5%. So, if you have a tool of diameter 10 mm
(radius 5 mm) then the arc radius is 0.5 mm. The Corner Radius%
can have a value between 0 and 100.

0 and 100.
- Normal
- Arc fitted
1337) dialog.
Flat srf support — This inserts a final profile pass exactly at the base
of a flat pocket.
This example shows previous behavior, with Flat srf support
disabled:

With Flat Srf support enabled, FeatureCAM adds a final profile pass,
:


irregular shape.

For example:

operations.
defaults to 0.


Min Z increment — Enable Scallop stepover to access this attribute.

The Scallop height attribute specifies the maximum cusp height
between neighboring passes. However, if the calculated value is
smaller than the Min. Z increment, it is set to Min. Z increment.
new value.

page 1017) dialog.
Priority

automatically.

lower depth.
to a lower depth.

shown below.
Scallop stepover
height.

Scallop height
Enter the absolute scallop height between passes. This distance is
measured along the surface and represents the maximum cusp
height between neighboring passes.
Stepover
Scallop height
You must select the Scallop stepover option, to access the

Scallop height attribute.
selected attribute.

Set.

Start point(s) — Override the default start point(s) of a toolpath by
entering the name of a curve that, when projected, intersects the
toolpath at the point you want. You can use a curve with multiple
segments to set multiple start points for a toolpath, and alternating
segments are used to set the start points.
This example aerospace part has several open and closed areas:
This centerline simulation of a Z-level finish toolpath shows the

locations of the default start points:
To move the default start points, first create curves that intersect
the toolpath where you want the new start points to be.
In the example, the curves are shown in red:
You must use a single curve per toolpath. You can use the Join
constructor to create one curve from multiple curves. To open the
Join Curve dialog, select Construct > Curve > From Curve > Join from
the menu.

Select the curves and click the Add button to add the curves to
the list in the Join Curves dialog, for example:
Select the Show Preview option to preview the joined curves, for
example:
If the curves are not listed in the correct order, select the curve you
want to move in the list and use the Move item up and Move item
down buttons.
You can also reverse a curve's direction using the Reverse selected
curve button.
Enter a Curve name for the joined curve.
Copy the Curve name to the clipboard so that you can paste it
into the Start point(s) option.
On the Milling tab for the finishing strategy, select the Start point(s)
attribute, enter the name of the curve you created and click the Set
button to save it.

Another centerline simulation shows that the start points have
moved to the intersections of the joined curve with the toolpath,
and the toolpath is more symmetrical:


% is a 2D distance.


to a lower value.


avoid gouging.


Milling tab (Flowline finish) (3D MX)

Select from:
1337) dialog.

irregular shape.

For example:
operations.
defaults to 0.




new value.
page 1017) dialog.
Priority

automatically.


selected attribute.

Set.

% is a 2D distance.


to a lower value.


avoid gouging.


Milling tab (Radial finish) (3D MX)

Select from:

Angle end/start is a numeric attribute for radial operations only.
counter-clockwise.
Angle start = 0
Angle end = 120
Angle end = 0
Angle start = 120
result you want.

Center point — The center of the radial pattern is calculated
automatically unless you set a Center point. This point is projected
down onto the surface to become the center of the radial pattern.
1337) dialog.

irregular shape.


For example:
operations.
defaults to 0.



new value.
page 1017) dialog.

Priority

automatically.

Radius end/start
Radius start — Enter the radius where you want the toolpath to start
and set Radius end.
Radius end — Enter the radius where you want the toolpath to end
and set Radius start.
These radii control the dimensions of the pattern and whether the
first pass travels inwards or outwards.
If Radius start > Radius end, the first pass moves inwards
Radius end
Radius start
First pass travels inwards

If Radius end > Radius start, the first pass moves outwards
Radius end
Radius start
First pass travels outwards
selected attribute.

Set.
to a lower value.



avoid gouging.



Milling tab (Between 2 curves) finish (3D MX)

Select from:
1337) dialog.

Edge tolerance — Enter the trimming tolerance used to reduce the
noise of the toolpath near the start and end curves.

irregular shape.

For example:

operations.
defaults to 0.
Max. stepover — If the automatically generated stepover is too
large, you can restrict it by specifying a Max stepover.


page 1017) dialog.

Priority

automatically.

selected attribute.

Set.

the menu.

example:
down buttons.
curve button.
button to save it.



% is a 2D distance.


to a lower value.


avoid gouging.


Milling tab (Horizontal + vertical strategy) (3D MX)
This strategy combines two different toolpath operations, one for
finishing shallow portions of the part and one for finishing the steep
regions.
An X parallel or spiral toolpath is applied to the shallow regions, and
a Z level finishing operation cuts the steep regions.
The attributes available on the Milling tab are different for each
operation:

1st (shallow) operation

Select from:
1337) dialog.


irregular shape.

For example:

operations.
defaults to 0.

page 1017) dialog.
Priority

automatically.


selected attribute.

Set.

% is a 2D distance.


to a lower value.


avoid gouging.


2nd (steep) operation

Select from:

Corner correction
Corner correction defines the type of corner correction that you
want to apply to all internal corners of a Z-level finish toolpath. The
types are available from a pull-down list and three options are
available:
None - no sharpening or arc fitting is carried out.
Arc Fitted - arcs are created and rounded in all internal corners.
The yellow toolpath shows the Arc Fitted toolpath and the green
toolpath shows the Normal toolpath.

Arc fitting is of particular importance when high speed machining,
as it eliminates sudden changes in tool direction.
- Normal
- Arc fitted
Corner Radius %
This defines the radius used if you select Arc Fitted. The radius is
defined as a proportion of the tool diameter. For a Z finish pass the
default value is 5%. So, if you have a tool of diameter 10 mm
(radius 5 mm) then the arc radius is 0.5 mm. The Corner Radius%
can have a value between 0 and 100.
0 and 100.

- Normal
- Arc fitted
1337) dialog.
Flat srf support — This inserts a final profile pass exactly at the base
of a flat pocket.
This example shows previous behavior, with Flat srf support
disabled:

With Flat Srf support enabled, FeatureCAM adds a final profile pass,
:


irregular shape.

For example:

operations.
defaults to 0.


Min. Z increment

new value.
page 1017) dialog.
Priority

automatically.

lower depth.

to a lower depth.
shown below.
Scallop stepover

height.
Scallop height
Stepover
Scallop height

selected attribute.

Set.


the menu.
example:

down buttons.
curve button.
button to save it.


% is a 2D distance.


to a lower value.



avoid gouging.



Milling tab (Swarf strategy) (3D MX)

Select from:
Axial offset — This attribute offsets the lowest position of the
toolpath along the tool axis. Positive numbers offset the toolpath
towards the tool holder, negative numbers away.
This is an example of a swarf with a positive offset:

Axial tolerance — This helps to stabilize the tool axis and reduce tool
load.
For a relatively rare number of geometries, the tool axis can waver
slightly as it positions accurately on the surfaces to be machined.
This can be due to small but significant changes in the geometry as
the tool moves from one position to another. This tolerance can be
larger than the machining tolerance to stabilize the tool axis as it
moves across this geometrically varying region. As a consequence
excess material may be left on the surface but the load on the tool
may be reduced.
No Axial tolerance set:
Axial tolerance set to 0.5 (mm):


0 and 100.
- Normal
- Arc fitted
Degouge tolerance — This is the maximum distance (in addition to
Radial offset) that is used to push the tool away from the surfaces to
avoid gouges.
It defines the upper acceptable bound for this intermediate form of
gouge avoidance. If gouges greater than this value are detected
then the tool is lifted axially to avoid the gouge.
This value can therefore be used to control the location and amount
of material left on non-swarfable surfaces. For example, if material
on a surface can mostly be machined by swarf machining, but there
is a region where 3 mm of material could be left, then you can
either:

 choose a Radial offset of 3 mm to leave 3 mm of material on the
whole of the surface; or
 set a Radial offset of 0 mm and a Degouge tolerance of 3 mm. In
this case, the surface is completely machined where possible, but
some material of up to 3 mm is left on a part of the surface.
Degouge tolerance remains in effect even if Gouge check is not

selected.
1337) dialog.
Fan at ends — With Swarf milling, the tool aligns itself with the
ruling direction of the surface. As the toolpath moves from one
surface to another, there can be a change in the ruling direction and
therefore the tool axis. This is called fanning. With Fan at ends
enabled, fanning happens only in the end region of a plane. Disable
Fan at ends, to allow fanning to happen anywhere across the plane.
With Fan at ends on, the tool axis changes mainly in region and
. The tool axis is relatively constant in region .
With Fan at ends off, the tool axis may change in region .


irregular shape.

For example:
operations.

defaults to 0.


Minimum fanning — Enter the distance over which the tool can
change from one ruling direction to the next.
With Swarf milling, the tool aligns itself with the ruling direction of
the surface. As the toolpath moves from one surface to another,
there can be a change in the ruling direction and therefore the tool
axis. This is called fanning.
Enter the minimum distance over which fanning can occur. The
fanning distance is measured as the smallest movement on either
surface edge (or the distance the closest part of the tool is to the
opposite part of the surface before fanning starts). The actual
fanning distance may be larger than the Minimum fanning value
specified, to prevent the toolpath from gouging.
Ruling direction of surface 1

Ruling direction of surface 2
Fanning distance
Multiple Cuts — This enables multiple passes down the tool axis.

By default, Multiple cuts is off and a single toolpath is created:
Enable Multiple cuts to have multiple passes down the tool axis and
select the Multicut strategy.
Multicut strategy — To use multiple cuts, first enable the Multiple cuts
attribute, then select the type of strategy from the Multicut strategy
list.
Offset top down — Select this option to offset the top cutting path,
moving downwards.
Offset bottom up — Select this option to offset the bottom cutting

path, moving upwards.

Merge — Select this option to offset the top and bottom cutting
path, merging from one to the other.

new value.
page 1017) dialog.
Priority

automatically.


Radial offset — Enter the distance to offset the toolpath in the
direction perpendicular to the tool axis. The default is zero.
Trim with no radial offset

Trim with 5 mm offset
selected attribute.

Set.

the menu.

example:
down buttons.
curve button.
button to save it.



% is a 2D distance.

Stock overcut %
meanings:


Surface join tolerance — Use this setting to enter a separate
tolerance to define what represents a gap between surfaces.
Sometimes the default tolerance is smaller than the gap between
surfaces, and two segments of toolpath are created. To ensure one
continuous toolpath across a gap, use a larger Surface join tolerance.
to a lower value.



avoid gouging.

Up/Down smoothing % — Occasionally, the swarf toolpath must
move up and down in order to avoid gouging. The smoothing
happens within the tolerance you enter here. Enter a percentage of
the tool diameter.
The default tolerance is 15%:
A larger smoothing tolerance reduces this 'spike' in the toolpath, but

affects more of the toolpath near the area:


Milling tab (4-axis rotary) (3D MX)
Angle end/start

counter-clockwise.
Angle start = 0
Angle end = 120
Angle end = 0
Angle start = 120
result you want.
value.
1337) dialog.


irregular shape.

For example:

operations.
Leave allowance — This is the amount of material to leave after a 3D
finish pass. If unset, Leave allowance defaults to 0. You can enter a
negative number (up to - tool radius) to allow for shrinkage or
spark gaps, and the part is machined into the part surfaces by the
negative amount specified.
If unset leave allowance defaults to 0. You can enter a negative
number (up to - tool radius) to allow for shrinkage or spark gaps,
and the part is machined into the part surfaces by the negative
amount specified.



new value.
page 1017) dialog.
Priority

automatically.


selected attribute.

Set.

% is a 2D distance.

Stock overcut %
meanings:


to a lower value.



avoid gouging.

Milling tab (Plunge rough) (3D HSM)

Select from:
1337) dialog.
value.

Improved — Enable this option to calculate the true highest Z value
where the tool touches the surface. If disabled, the surface is
tessellated into a series of approximating triangles and the highest
Z value where the tool touches the triangular plane is used.
Improved is more accurate, but may be slower to calculate.

irregular shape.

For example:

operations.



new value.
Next row stepover % — Enter the distance between rows of a plunge
roughing operation, as a percentage of the tool diameter.

Priority


automatically.

selected attribute.

Set.

% is a 2D distance.


to a lower value.



avoid gouging.
Toolpath end/start
Toolpath end — For X Parallel finishing, enter the Y value for the last
toolpath. For Y Parallel finishing, enter the X value for the last
toolpath.
Toolpath start — For X Parallel finishing, enter the Y value for the
first toolpath. For Y Parallel finishing, enter the X value for the first
toolpath.
These attributes are available only for parallel finish

operations.




Milling tab (3D spiral finish) (3D HSM)

Select from:
1337) dialog.


irregular shape.

For example:

operations.
defaults to 0.


new value.
page 1017) dialog.
Priority

automatically.

selected attribute.

Set.


the menu.
example:

down buttons.
curve button.
button to save it.


% is a 2D distance.


to a lower value.



avoid gouging.



Milling tab (Corner remachine strategy) (3D HSM)

Select from:
1337) dialog.


irregular shape.

For example:

operations.
defaults to 0.


new value.
page 1017) dialog.
Priority

automatically.

selected attribute.

Set.
Scallop height
Stepover
Scallop height

Tolerance — This sets how close milling is to the mathematically
ideal surface.
This attribute controls how accurately the toolpath follows the
surface. If your part appears faceted, set the tolerance to a lower
value.


Milling tab (Pencil strategy) (3D HSM)

Select from:

1337) dialog.

irregular shape.

For example:

operations.
defaults to 0.



new value.
page 1017) dialog.

Priority

automatically.

selected attribute.

Set.
to a lower value.



avoid gouging.



Milling tab (Steep and shallow) (3D HSM)

Select from:
1337) dialog.


irregular shape.

For example:

operations.
defaults to 0.


page 1017) dialog.
Priority

automatically.

Scallop stepover
height.

Scallop height
Stepover
Scallop height

selected attribute.

Set.
Shallow stepover — Enter the distance between successive
machining passes. This is for the shallow portions of the toolpath.
Steep stepover — Enter the distance between successive machining
passes. This is for the steep portions of the toolpath.
If you have enabled Scallop stepover, this attribute is replaced

by Scallop height.
to a lower value.



avoid gouging.



Milling tab (5-axis trim) (5AS)

Select from:
Axial offset — This attribute offsets the lowest position of the
toolpath along the tool axis. Positive numbers offset the toolpath
towards the tool holder, negative numbers away.
This is an example of a swarf with a positive offset:

1337) dialog.

irregular shape.

For example:

operations.
defaults to 0.


Multiple Cuts — This enables multiple passes down the tool axis.

By default, Multiple cuts is off and a single toolpath is created:
Enable Multiple cuts to have multiple passes down the tool axis and
select the Multicut strategy.
new value.
page 1017) dialog.
Priority

automatically.


Radial offset — Enter the distance to offset the toolpath in the
direction perpendicular to the tool axis. The default is zero.
Trim with no radial offset

Trim with 5 mm offset
This example uses a 5-axis swarf and two 5-axis trim strategies.

Viewing a centerline simulation from the top, you can see that the
default start point for the 5-axis swarf operation is at the lower right
of the part.
The default start point for the upper trim operation is at the lower
left:
And the default start point for the lower trim operation is at the
lower right:
To override the default start points, you must create a curve that
intersects the toolpaths at the locations of the new start points. In
this example, the curve is shown in blue:
On the Milling tab for each strategy, select the Start point(s)
button to save it.

A centerline simulation of all three operations shows that the start
points are now aligned along the curve:
selected attribute.

Set.

% is a 2D distance.

Stock overcut %
meanings:


Surface join tolerance
Use this setting to enter a separate tolerance to define what
represents a gap between surfaces. Sometimes the default
tolerance is smaller than the gap between surfaces, and two
segments of toolpath are created. To ensure one continuous
toolpath across a gap, use a larger Surface join tolerance.
to a lower value.



avoid gouging.

Cut Direction dialog (3D LITE)
Use the Cut Direction dialog to control the direction the tool cuts
when machining surface milling features. Different options are
available for different toolpath techniques.
To display the Cut Direction dialog, click the Direction button in the
Milling tab of a surface milling feature.

Style Options
 Unidirectional — Toolpaths go in one direction. For Z-level
toolpaths, the conventional/climb mill parameters control the
direction. For other toolpaths, the decreasing/increasing controls
the direction.
 Bidirectional — If active, the decreasing or increasing parameters
control the initial cut’s direction.
 Uphill only — Breaks toolpaths up into segments that increase in
Z. If this option is selected all direction parameters are dimmed
because Uphill only fully determines the cut direction.
 Downhill only — Breaks toolpaths up into segments that decrease
in Z. If this option is selected all direction parameters are
dimmed because Downhill only fully determines the cut direction.
Direction
 Conventional — Applies only to Z level with Unidirectional. The
tool rotates against the direction of the cut.
 Climb mill — Applies only to Z level with Unidirectional. If Climb
mill is set the tool rotates in the direction of the cut.
 Decreasing — Forces the cut to decrease in its principal direction.
For X-parallel operations, the tool starts at the maximum X value
and cut in the negative direction.
 Increasing — Forces the cut to increase in its principal direction.
For X-parallel operations, the tool starts at the minimum X value
(or Y value for Y-parallel) and cut in the positive direction.
If Unidirectional is set, the Increase and Decrease options only affects
the direction of the initial cut. For spiral milling use
Decrease/Increase to toggle the clockwise/counter-clockwise nature
of the paths. For pencil milling Decreasing/Increasing options toggle
the direction of cut. For radial milling, use Decrease/Increase to
toggle the clockwise and counter-clockwise ordering of each radial
pass around the center. For parallel milling set Parallel angle to 180
to cut from the opposite end of the part.
Start corner
Choose the starting point for the parallel pass from among lower
left, lower right, upper left, lower right. These terms are relative to a
top view of the part.

Retract and Plunge dialog (3D LITE)
To display the Retract and Plunge dialog, click the Retract/Plunge
button in the Milling tab of a surface milling feature.

part.
Plunge clearance
Plunge clearance is the distance above a feature at which the tool
starts to feed. In the case of deep hole drilling, the drill retracts to
this distance between pecks. Compare with Z Rapid Plane.
Relative plunge
The Relative plunge attribute in 3D machining affects how the Plunge
clearance attribute is used.

When Relative plunge is deselected, the tool plunges to the Plunge
clearance as an absolute value. This can cause the tool to feed an
unnecessary amount for parts that are not flat. For example, in this
uphill only surface toolpath the tool rapids to a set Z value and then
feeds to the part on each end:
When Relative plunge is selected, Plunge clearance is used as a

relative distance from the surface. For example, here the tool
plunges down closer to the part.
Retract options
Retract to Z rapid plane is the default retract type. The tool retracts
to the full Z height:

Relative retract - When you retract and rapid to a new position, using
the Relative retract option, the tool only retracts as high as it needs
to go plus the Clearance amount that you enter, for example:
Relative retract is known as Skim in PowerMILL.
Retract to plunge clearance can save time on milling features by

retracting a lower Z clearance after cutting:

Leads tab (3D Lite)
You can use the Leads tab of the Surface Milling Properties dialog
(see page 1045) to control how the tool moves on and off the 3D
surface milling feature (lead in/out) and how the tool moves
between toolpaths (stepovers).
There are slightly different options on the Leads tab for

Z-level rough operation (see page 1348).
Stepover type controls the moves between toolpaths.
The options available to you depend on the operation type.

The Stepover type controls the type of transition move that is
inserted between toolpaths. The options are:

 Direct: The tool moves straight over to the next position. The tool
can move in all 3 axes. This figure shows a direct stepover move
on a flat surface feature.
 Arc: For Z-roughing only, the tool attempts to connect to the

next position with an arc. (If that is not possible, an arc and
several tangential lines are used). For Z-roughing, only Direct
and Arc apply.
 Stair step: The tool moves up in Z and then over in X and Y.
This image shows a Stair step transition move on a spherical
surface.
This image shows the same surface feature using a Direct

stepover.

 Loop: The tool makes an arc move out of one toolpath and an
arc move into the next toolpath. These transitions are actually
programmed from linear moves and may move all three axes.
This image shows a loop move on a flat surface feature.
Ramping
If Ramp to Depth is deselected, the tool plunges to depth. If Ramp to
Depth is selected and Helical is not selected, the tool zigzags into
the material. The angle of the zigzag passes is controlled by Ramp
angle. If Helical is selected, the tool spirals into the material.

plunge cut.
Lead Moves
Use lead in/out controls when lead in/out moves are applied.
The Use lead in/out menu controls when lead moves will be applied.
The options are:
 Never: Do not use lead moves on this operation.
 On all plunges/retract: Apply the leads on all plunge and retract
moves for this operation.

 On first plunge/last retract: Apply on the first plunge and last
retract move only for this operation.
 On all stepovers, plunges and retracts: Apply the leads on all
stepovers, plunge and retract moves for this operation.
See the Surface Leadin (see page 1672) tab.
The Lead in/out plane controls how the arcs and ramps are
measured.
The arcs and ramps are measured relative to one of the following
options:
Normal to surface: Lead in/out moves are relative to the surface
normal.
Horizontal: Moves are relative to a horizontal plane. Directions of
the ramp could be right or left.
Horizontal left: This setting is most useful for uni-directional paths. It
ensures a consistent left ramping.

Horizontal right: This setting is most useful for uni-directional paths.
It ensures a consistent right ramping.
Vertical: Moves are relative to a vertical plane.

Default: The default for z-level finish is Horizontal, and Vertical for all
others.
Lead moves are performed either as arcs or linear moves by
selecting one of the following categories:
Use arc ramp-in/out
If you select Use arc ramp in/out, the following parameters are used
to control the ramping on and off the part feature:
- Ramp-in angle - The angle
of the ramp in move.
- Ramp diameter - The
diameter of the ramp move.
- Ramp-out angle - The angle
of the ramp out move.

Use linear lead-in/out
If you select Use linear lead-in/out, the following parameters control
the move off the feature:
 Lead-in angle - Angle measured away from the toolpath for the
lead-in move. Note this angle can be negative.
 Lead-out angle - Angle measured away from the toolpath for the
lead-out move. This angle can be negative.
 Lead-in length - Length of the linear lead-in length.
 Lead-out length - Length of the linear lead-out length.
- Lead-in angle
- Lead-in length

Leads tab (Z-level rough) (3D Lite)
The Leads tab controls how the tool moves on and off the surface
milling feature (lead in/out) and how the tool moves between
toolpaths (stepovers).
The moves between toolpaths are controlled by the Stepover type.
The options available to you depend on the operation type.

The Stepover type controls the type of transition move that is
inserted between toolpaths. The options are:
 Direct: The tool moves straight over to the next position. The tool
can move in all 3 axes. This figure shows a direct stepover move
on a flat surface feature.

 Arc: For Z-roughing only, the tool attempts to connect to the
next position with an arc. (If that is not possible, an arc and
several tangential lines are used). For Z-roughing, only Direct
and Arc apply.
 Stair step: The tool moves up in Z and then over in X and Y.
This image shows a Stair step transition move on a spherical
surface.
This image shows the same surface feature using a Direct

stepover.
This image shows a loop move on a flat surface feature.

Ramping
There are three choices for the Z-roughing ramp style: Plunge To
Depth, Ramp To Depth, or Plunge To A Pre-drill Location.
If Ramp To Depth is deselected, the tool plunges to depth. If Ramp
To Depth is selected and Helical is deselected, the tool zigzags into
the material. The angle of the zigzag passes is controlled by Ramp
angle. If Helical is selected, the tool spirals into the material. See
Helical ramping for more information.

plunge cut.
Selecting Plunge To Pre-drill Location(s) creates a pre-drill
operation(s) in the feature if appropriate (there may only be one
pre-drill operation per feature). You must set the Pre-drill Diameter
which attempts to select a drill of that particular diameter. Be
advised to select a drill smaller than (or equal to) the diameter of
the tool used for the Z-roughing. (A bigger tool may gouge).
FeatureCAM automatically calculates (perhaps multiple) pre-drill
locations based upon the regions where it needs to plunge interior
to the stock boundary.
If Approach Outside Where Possible is selected, the approach moves
include a small horizontal move so the tool plunges off the stock.

Turning feature attributes (TURN)
Tree view
Tabs
The turning feature tab view lists the different operations for the
feature:
Feature
Operation
Feature-level tabs
these tabs:
 Dimensions (see page 1352)
 Strategy (see page 1366)
Select an operation in the tree view to access the following tabs:
 Tools (see page 1401)
 Tool Usage (see page 1404)
 Feed/Speed (see page 1404)

 B-Axis (see page 1412)
 Coolant (see page 985)
 Turning (see page 1420)/Boring (see page 1446)/Threading (see
page 1459)/Cutoff (see page 1464) depending on the feature
Dimensions tab (TURN)

The Dimensions tab of the Turning Feature Properties (see page
1351) dialog is different for each turning feature type. Most of the
attributes on the Dimensions tab are the same as on the New
Feature - Dimensions page of the New Feature (see page 530) wizard,
however there are some additional advanced attributes:
Face (see page 1356)
Bar Feed/Bar Pull (see page 1357)
Turn (see page 1359)
Bore (see page 1360)
Part Handling (see page 1361)
Stock Curve button — You can limit the extent of the roughing by
using a stock curve. Click the Stock Curve button and select or pick
a curve in the Select Stock Curve dialog. This is useful if you are
working from a casting, for example.
Dimensions tab (Groove)
Use the Dimensions tab to edit the dimensions of a Groove feature.
Select a Type, the options in the dialog are different depending what
you select:

 From dimensions — Enter the dimensions of the Groove.
Location — Select ID for an inside diameter Groove or OD for an

outside diameter Groove.
Orientation — Select the orientation of the Groove feature from X
axis, Face, or Backface.
Diameter — Enter the diameter of the Groove feature.
Chamfer/Radius — Optionally add a chamfer or a radius to the top of
the Groove at each side. Select Chamfer or Radius from the menu
and enter the value.
Angle — Optionally enter an angle for each side wall of the Groove.
Radius — Optionally set a bottom radius for the feature. The radius
corresponds to the shape of the cutter. By default, the material is
milled using a flat-bottomed mill, making stair-step passes when
close to the radius. Then a rough and finishing pass is made with
the radiused mill. The default value is 0, which cuts a square corner.
You can have a different bottom radius for each side of the Groove.

 From curve — Select a curve from which to create the Groove.

 Simple groove — Create a Groove with simple geometry and only
one operation.
This option simplifies the manufacturing strategy for the feature.
Select this option to machine the feature by making a single pass
down the center of it with a tool whose radius is equal to the width
of the feature.
Enter the Diameter, Depth and Width of the Groove.

Dimensions tab (Thread)
Use the Dimensions tab to edit the dimensions of a Thread feature.
Type — Select ID for an inner diameter thread or OD for an outer

diameter thread, or select Curve to create the Thread from a curve.
Custom — Enter the thread dimensions.
Standard Thread — Select a thread from the list to use its
dimensions.
Thread — Select a Left hand or Right hand thread. When viewed from
the end of the part toward the chuck, on a left hand thread the tool
winds counter-clockwise as it moves towards the chuck, on a right
hand thread the tool winds clockwise as it moves towards the
chuck.
Thread Length — Enter the length of the thread.
Pitch — Enter the pitch of the thread.
Thread Height — Enter the height of the thread.
Minor/Major Diameter — Enter the Minor Diameter for an ID feature or
the Major Diameter for an OD feature.
Tapered — If your thread is tapered, select this option and enter the
taper Angle.

There are two ways that FeatureCAM can calculate Standard

Threads. Set the Thread depth calculations attribute on the
Threading (see page 1699) tab of Machining Attributes.
Dimensions tab (Face)
Use the Dimensions tab to edit the dimensions of a Face feature.
Feed direction — Select Positive if you want to cut in the +X

direction or select Negative if you want to cut in the -X direction.
Thickness — Enter the amount of material to remove in Z.
Outer Diameter — Enter the top X value as the Outer Diameter.
Inner Diameter — Enter the inner diameter.

Dimensions tab (Cutoff)
Use the Dimensions tab to edit the dimensions of a Cutoff feature.
Chamfer/Radius - Optionally add a chamfer or a radius to the Cutoff

feature. Select Chamfer or Radius from the menu and enter the
value.
Diameter - Enter the (outer) diameter.
Inner Diameter — Enter the inner diameter.
Width - Enter the width of the Cutoff tool.
Transfer to sub spindle — Select this option if you want to transfer
the part to the sub spindle. The Transfer Parameters button is
displayed.
Transfer Parameters — Click this button to open the Transfer
Parameters dialog, where you can enter the Grab distance, Feed
distance, and Pull distance for the transfer.
Dimensions tab (Bar Feed/Bar Pull)
Use the Dimensions tab to edit the dimensions of a Bar Feed or Bar
Pull feature.
Type - Select Bar Feeder or Bar Puller from the menu.

Bar Feeder
Diameter - Enter the Y coordinate for the bar feed.

Feed Amount - Enter the amount of material you want to feed in the
Z direction.
Bar Puller
Overlap - Enter the amount of material to hold in the puller (in the Z
direction).
Pull Amount - Enter the amount of material you want to pull in the Z
direction.

Dimensions tab (Turn)
Use the Dimensions tab to edit the dimensions of a Turn feature.
Curve button — Click this button to open the Select Curve (see page
1366) dialog.
Fillet Radius — Enter a value to automatically deburr sharp corners.
Select Other Side to change between external and internal corners.
For example, no Fillet Radius:

With a Fillet Radius value applied:
If you want to apply the fillet to internal instead of external corners,

select the Other Side option:
Dimensions tab (Bore)

Use the Dimensions tab to edit the dimensions of a Bore feature.
Curve button — Click this button to open the Select Curve (see page
1366) dialog.

Fillet Radius — Enter a value to automatically deburr sharp corners.
Select Other Side to change between internal and external corners.
For example, no Fillet Radius:
With a Fillet Radius applied:
If you want to apply the fillet to external instead of internal corners,

select the Other Side option:
Dimensions tab (Part Handling)

Use the Dimensions tab to edit the dimensions of a Part Handling
feature.
Select what you want to do from:
 Slug Transfer — Select this option to transfer the part from the
main spindle to the sub-spindle.
 Reverse Slug Transfer — Select this option to transfer the part
from the sub-spindle to the main spindle.

 Bar pull — Select this option to use the subspindle to grab and
pull the bar of material further out of the main spindle.
 Part Support On — Select this option to enable part support such
as a steady rest or tailstock.
 Part Support Off — Select this option to remove the part support.
Slug Transfer
Grab distance — Enter the grab distance.

Feed distance — Enter the feed distance.

Reverse Slug Transfer

Sub position — Enter the sub-spindle position.

Bar pull

Pull distance — Enter the pull distance.

Part Support On
Grab distance — Enter the grab distance in Z where you want the
support to move to.

Part Support Off
Select Curve dialog

Use the Select Curve dialog to select the curve that defines the
shape of the feature.
Select a curve in the graphics window and click to add it to the

list.
Show all — Select this option to show all available curves in the
document.
Strategy tab (TURN)

The Strategy tab of the Turning Feature Properties (see page 1351)
dialog has different options depending on the turn feature:

Strategy tab (Turn feature) (TURN)
Use canned cycle

fanucez.cnc post.
feature level.

Hole features
Turn/Bore features
Groove features
Thread features


direction.

positive direction.

Turning — Normal roughing passes are enabled. Each roughing pass
is cut in the same direction. For finishing, the tool traces the
contour of the feature from right to left and is withdrawn from the
part.
Roughing
If the Toolpath attribute is set to Turning, the normal roughing
passes are enabled. Each roughing pass is cut in the same direction.

Feed straight down into the part. The distance is based on the
depth of cut.
Cut down the right-hand wall.
Feed straight across.
Feed up the left-hand wall.
Withdraw from the wall, retract all the way across the feature.
Finishing
If the Toolpath attribute is set to Turning, the toolpath is generated
as shown below.
The tool traces the contour of the feature from right-to left.
The tool is withdrawn from the part based on withdraw angle
and withdraw length.
Offset — Roughing toolpaths are created using offsets of the Turn
feature's curve. These offsets are clipped against the stock.
For the offset toolpath type, the roughing toolpaths are created
using offsets of the Turn feature's curve. These offsets are clipped
against the stock.

Cut-Grip — Roughing with Iscar cut grip tools is bi-directional. The
cut grip finishing style is performed using a unique strategy that is
enabled by having a grooving tool that cuts in both directions.
Roughing
Roughing with Iscar cut grip tools is bi-directional. The steps of the
cuts are as follows.
Feed straight down into the part. The distance is based on the depth
of cut.
Feed straight over in Z.
Withdraw away from the wall and rapid back slightly in Z.
Feed straight down again based on the depth of cut.
Feed straight in the -Z direction.
Finishing
The cut grip style of finishing is performed using a unique strategy
that is enabled by having a grooving tool that cuts in both
directions.
Cut down the left hand wall up to the bottom radius.

Rapid up and over and plunge a relief groove.
Cut down the right-hand wall, through the bottom radius into the
relief groove.
Cut along the bottom of the groove. This move is offset by a
deflection amount.
Cut up the left-hand bottom radius. This move is offset by a
deflection amount.

If the Turn feature has multiple groove cavities, each cavity is cut in
this way and the cavities are ordered from left to right:
Round Insert — Round tool roughing toolpaths are designed to ease

the tool more gently into a groove shape.
Round tool roughing toolpaths are designed to ease the tool more
gently into a groove shape. Instead of plunging straight into the
material, part entry is controlled by the Engage angle (see page
1416) turning attribute.
A round tool is required and you must manually select the tool
for this toolpath type.
Engage angle
Round insert tool finish toolpaths are the same as Turning

finish toolpaths.
Turnmilling — Uses a rotating endmill tool with rotating stock.

Control the turning spindle speed on the Turn F/S tab. Control the
milling spindle speed on the Mill Speed tab.
feature.

feature.
step.
Use finish tool

Cutting method
Choose an entry in the drop-down list to specify a cutting method
for the operation for each pass. Select:
 Single turret to cut the feature using one turret.
 Pinch turning to cut the feature using turrets positioned above
and below the axis of rotation. The tools cut simultaneously: the
first tool leaves a spiral of material and the second tool cuts the
spiral of material left by the first tool.
 Follow turning to cut the feature using turrets positioned above
and below the axis of rotation. Each turret uses a standard depth
of cut: the top tool leads the bottom tool.
TNR Comp
angle
Lead-out
angle
Lead
distance

Strategy tab (Bore feature) (TURN)
Use canned cycle

fanucez.cnc post.
feature level.

Hole features
Turn/Bore features
Groove features
Thread features


direction.

positive direction.

 Turning
 Offset
 Turnmilling
 Cut-Grip
 Round Insert
Pre-drill — Select this option to have a pre-drill operation for a Bore
feature. Enter the Dia (diameter), Depth, and Z position of your
pre-drilled hole.
feature.

feature.
step.
Use finish tool

angle
Lead-out
angle
Lead
distance

Strategy tab (Groove feature) (TURN)
feature.
Plunge center first — This attribute is available for Groove features.
See the Grooving (see page 1702) tab.
Output dwell on rough — Select this option to have a Dwell amount
on the rough operation of a Groove feature.

feature.
Use finish tool

Feed Dir — Select the feed direction. Positive cuts in the +X
direction, Negative cuts in the -X direction.
Use 2nd offset register — Use a different offset register for each side
of a grooving tool. The second offset register number is displayed in
the Tool Mapping dialog.
This requires a change to your post to work properly. See the

XBUILD help for the <OFFSET_CH> reserved word.

Strategy tab (Thread feature) (TURN)
Turn to diameter
Optionally create a rough and/or finish pass to turn the part down
to the diameter of the thread. The creation of these operations is
controlled by the Turn to diameter: Rough and Finish options on the
Chamfer — Enable the Chamfer option to add a chamfer to your
Thread feature.
The chamfer slopes into the thread for OD threads (turn) and away
from the thread for ID threads (bore).
You must select either Rough or Finish to access the

Chamfer option.
1591) dialog. Set it on the Threading (see page 1699) tab.
Relief Groove

Optionally generate a roughing (see page 814) pass for the relief
groove. The Width controls the Z-axis dimension, the Depth controls
the X-axis dimension and the Side Wall Angle controls the angle of
the wall closest to the thread.
Thread — Enable this option to have a thread operation on the
feature.
Feed — This is the direction of the feed moves, select from:
 Towards chuck — the threading is performed in the direction
toward the chuck.
 Away from chuck — the threading is performed in the direction
away from the chuck.
Count.
FeatureCAM.
across the thread.

Strategy tab (Face feature) (TURN)
Use canned cycle

fanucez.cnc post.
feature level.

Hole features
Turn/Bore features
Groove features
Thread features
feature.
feature.

Use finish tool

angle
Lead-out
angle
Lead
distance

Strategy tab (Cutoff feature) (TURN)
Part catcher is available for Cutoff features.
If enabled, the part catcher code is output after the Cutoff
operation. The code for activating the parts catcher must be listed
in your .cnc file.
Plunge rough edge break — If there is a chamfer or radius on a
Cutoff feature and Plunge rough edge break is enabled:
1 The Cutoff groove is plunged down to the depth of the
chamfer/radius
2 The chamfer/radius is plunge-roughed.
Transfer — You must select Transfer to sub spindle on the
Dimensions (see page 1357) tab to access the options in this
section:
already supported.
Push/Press — Select this option to use Push/Press for the spindle
position.

 Stop spindles
 Orient spindles
 Keep rotating

Strategy tab (Part Handling feature) (TURN)
Slug transfer
catcher.
already supported.
 Stop spindles
 Orient spindles
 Keep rotating

Reverse slug transfer
catcher.
supported.

 Stop spindles
 Orient spindles
 Keep rotating
Bar pull

already supported.
supported.

catcher.
 Stop spindles
 Orient spindles
 Keep rotating

Part support on

 Subspindle
 Tailstock
 Steadyrest
 Stop spindles
 Orient spindles
 Keep rotating

Part support off

 Subspindle
 Tailstock
 Steadyrest
Open dwell — Optionally enter a dwell time after opening the
spindle.

Transfer Turret Control dialog
Use this dialog to set the Location and Index that you want to use
for each turret on your machine during part handling.
Location — Select where you want the turret to be during the part
handling:
 None — Select this option to leave the turret at its current
position before starting the part handling.
 Home — Select this option to move the turret to its home
position before starting the part handling.
 Escape — Select this option to move the turret to a safe location
away from the part before starting the part handling.
Index — If necessary, you can rotate the turret to ensure that tools
are not in the way. Enter the Index number.

Strategy tab (Air Blast feature) (TURN)
Use the Strategy tab of the Feature Properties dialog to control air
blast features.

Right Angle Head tab (TURN)
To display the Right Angled Head tab, you must allow right-angled
tool holders (see page 220) on the Right Angled Head page of the
Setup wizard.
Use right angle head — Select to use a right-angled head tool.

Feature location is on ID — Select if the feature is on the inside
diameter of the part.
Holder orientation in spindle — Enter the holder orientation in the
spindle in degrees.

Misc. tab (TURN)
You can use the Misc tab of the Turning Feature Properties (see page
1351) dialog to edit machining options of a Turning feature.

Spline tolerance — If a profile is defined as a spline, it is
approximated with arcs and lines. Enter a tolerance value for the
approximation. The smaller the tolerance, the smoother the profile.

Tools tab (TURN)
You can use the Tools tab of the Turning Feature Properties (see
page 1351) dialog to select a tool to machine a feature or create a
new tool.
Other tools can be selected from the table by selecting the
check-box next to the tool name. The tools that are listed in the
table are controlled by the filter settings.
on the criteria listed above the table. To choose from different tools,
change the filter criteria. The criteria are:
 Orientation — Select an orientation from among the icons. Select
Anything to see tools of all orientations.
 Insert shape — Select an insert shape from among the icons.
Select Anything to see tools with all insert shapes.
 Presentation angle — Enter a number for the presentation. Select
Anything to see tools with all presentation angles.
stays in the list.


width preferences.
page 1745) dialog.
Turnmilling tool orientation button — available when you select
Turnmilling as the turn Toolpath type on the Strategy (see page
1366) tab. Click this button to open the B-Axis Tool Orientation (see
page 1403) dialog.
1 Select the Orientation.
2 Select or enter the tool Insert Shape.
3 Select or enter the tool's Presentation Angle.
further.
double-click a tool in the table to open its Tool Properties
dialog. You can edit the tool's properties if you want to.

8 If you cannot find the tool you want, click the New tool
button and create a new tool (see page 1749).
B-Axis Tool Orientation dialog
Use the B-Axis Tool Orientation dialog to specify the tool orientation
for turnmilling tools.
To display the B-Axis Tool Orientation dialog:
1 Ensure the Turnmilling option is selected under Toolpath on the
Strategy (see page 1366) tab of the Feature Properties dialog.
2 On the Tools tab, click Turnmilling tool orientation .
Select tool orientation — Select whether to align the tool orientation

with the X Axis, Y Axis, or B Axis.
X-axis toolpaths can be used only for OD features.

Tool Y offset — Enter the Y offset for the tool. The default value is
25% of the tool diameter.

Tool Usage tab (TURN)
You can use the Tool Usage tab of the Turning Feature Properties
(see page 1351) dialog to edit the tools usage settings for
machining a Turning feature.
The Tool Usage tab for turning features contains the following
attributes:
Tool — This displays the name of the tool for the operation selected
in the tree view.
This is just for information, to change the tool, use the

Tools tab.
Turret — If you are doing multi-turret turning, select which turret to
use to cut the selected operation.
Turret direction — We recommend that you leave this as Auto so
that FeatureCAM can calculate the direction for a particular
operation. You can also set this option explicitly to CW (clockwise)
or CCW (counter-clockwise).
1591) dialog. Set it on the Misc (see page 1708, see page
1404) tab for Turn.
Feed/Speed tab (TURN)

You can use the Feed/Speed tab of the Turning Feature Properties
(see page 1351) dialog to change the feeds and speeds settings for
a Turning feature.

When using Turnmilling toolpaths (machining using a rotating
endmill), this tab is replaced by two tabs: Turn F/S (see page
1408) and Mill Speed (see page 1411).
Spindle Direction — The direction the spindle turns for the selected
operation. Select from CW (clockwise) and CCW
(counter-clockwise). If you select the option that is not the default,
the Override option is selected automatically. Deselect the Override
option to return to the default value. Set the default Spindle
direction on the Misc. (see page 1708, see page 1404) tab of
Speed
Constant Surface Speed — Select this option to specify the speed as
a constant surface speed.
RPM Range — If your machine has explicit spindle speed ranges,
you can set this option.

Surface Speed — Enter the surface speed in SFM (surface feet per
minute). FeatureCAM uses the displayed recommended value by
default. You can optionally enter a different value and the Override
option is automatically selected. If you want to revert back to the
recommended value, deselect Override.
Spindle speed — If you want to enter the speed as a single
revolution per minute value, deselect Constant Surface Speed and
enter the Spindle speed.
Maximum speed — Enter the maximum constant surface speed in
RPM. This is the maximum revolutions per minute that the machine
can generate. FeatureCAM uses the displayed recommended value
by default. You can optionally enter a different value and the
Override option is automatically selected. If you want to revert back
to the recommended value, deselect Override.
Approach speed — Enter the constant surface speed approach in
RPM. This is the initial speed for the operation before it reaches the
part. FeatureCAM uses the displayed recommended value by
Feeds
The Feeds section is for setting how fast the tool moves through the
per minute). Optionally select Use IPR (inches per revolution) or Use
MMPR (mm per revolution) to change the units.
FeatureCAM uses the displayed recommended feed value by default.
You can optionally enter a different value and the Override option is
Feed from start point or curve — Select this option to use a feed
move from the Start point (see page 1420) or the end of the Start
curve, to the beginning of the toolpath. If you are using a start
curve, you have two further options:
 Rapid on curve — Select this option if you want to use a rapid
move along the start curve.
Selecting Feed from start point or curve and Rapid on

curve is the equivalent of selecting the Feed from start

option on the Turning tab in previous versions of
FeatureCAM.
 Feed on curve — Select this option if you want to use a feed
move along the start curve. Enter the feed rate value(s). You can
set the feed move as a single value, or use a comma separator
to enter multiple values, for example 200, 100, 50. If you enter
multiple values, the feeds are applied to the curve segments in
reverse order. So with these values, the last segment has a feed
rate of 50, the second last has a feed rate of 100 and any
remaining segments have a feed rate of 200. If you do not enter
any feed rate values, FeatureCAM uses the default feed rate.
This example turned part has a Turn, Hole, and Groove feature:
A 3D simulation with 3/4 view shows that the tool has to pass
through a narrow channel to access the Groove feature:
To control the movement of the tool through that narrow

channel, you can create curves and set them as Start point and
End point on the Turning tab.
A Centerline simulation of just the Groove feature, shows the

approach move in green, which is a rapid move:

On the Feed/Speed tab, select Feed from start point or curve and
Feed on curve. Enter the feed value(s) and click Apply.
The Centerline simulation now shows the approach move in
purple, a feed move:
Turn F/S tab (TURN)
This tab is available when using Turnmilling toolpaths (machining

rotating stock with a rotating endmill).
Spindle Direction — The direction the spindle turns for the selected
operation. Select from CW (clockwise) and CCW
(counter-clockwise). If you select the option that is not the default,
the Override option is selected automatically. Deselect the Override
option to return to the default value. Set the default Spindle
direction on the Misc. (see page 1708, see page 1404) tab of

Speed
Surface Speed — Enter the surface speed in SFM (surface feet per
minute). FeatureCAM uses the displayed recommended value by
Maximum speed — Enter the maximum constant surface speed in
RPM. This is the maximum revolutions per minute that the machine
can generate. FeatureCAM uses the displayed recommended value
by default. You can optionally enter a different value and the
Override option is automatically selected. If you want to revert back
to the recommended value, deselect Override.
Approach speed — Enter the constant surface speed approach in
RPM. This is the initial speed for the operation before it reaches the
part. FeatureCAM uses the displayed recommended value by
Feeds
The Feeds section is for setting how fast the tool moves through the
per minute). Optionally select Use IPR (inches per revolution) or Use
MMPR (mm per revolution) to change the units.
FeatureCAM uses the displayed recommended feed value by default.
You can optionally enter a different value and the Override option is


FeatureCAM.


Mill Speed tab (TURN)
This tab is available when using Turnmilling toolpaths (machining

rotating stock with a rotating endmill).
Use the Mill Speed tab to control the speed of rotation of milling
tools when used for turning operations. This tab is only available
when a Toolpath type of Turnmilling is selected on the Strategy tab.
Speed

The Speed section is for setting how fast the tool spins. The default
units are RPM (revolutions per minute). Optionally select Use SFM
(surface feet per minute) to change the units. FeatureCAM uses the
Recommended speed value by default. You can optionally enter a
different value and the override option is automatically selected. If
you want to revert back to the recommended value, deselect
override.
B-Axis tab (TURN)

To use B-axis simultaneous turning, select the finish operation of a
Turn or Bore feature in the Tree view in the Turning Feature
Properties (see page 1351) dialog, then select Use B-axis
simultaneous on the B-Axis tab.
Lead angle — Optionally enter a lead angle (the default is 0).

Limit B-angle — You can optionally limit the B-angle. If you choose
to limit the B-angle, enter values between a Min B-angle of -90 and a
Max B-angle of 270.
When using B-axis simultaneous, please note these points:
 To use B-axis simultaneous, you must set the Tool program point
to Tool tip center on the Misc (see page 1708, see page 1404) tab
of turning Machining Attributes.
 You must also turn on tool nose radius compensation by
selecting TNR Comp on the Strategy (see page 1366) tab of the
 It makes sense to turn undercuts off, by setting the Undercuts
option to No checking on the Turning (see page 1420) tab of the
There is no gouge checking if you turn off undercuts.

B-axis simultaneous example
The B-axis simultaneous option can be used to cut parts such as
this one:
Vertical tool
Using a vertical tool, the tool collides with the part as shown:
Neutral tool, fixed B axis

Using a neutral tool with a fixed B axis, the tool copes with the
undercut part of this example:

However, it collides further along:

Simultaneous B-axis tool
Using the simultaneous B-axis option, the tool can cut the entire
part without colliding, because it can move in the B-axis as it cuts:

Leads tab (TURN)
The Leads tab of the Turning Feature Properties (see page 1351)
dialog applies to the finish pass of a Turn feature:
In
Select the type of lead-in from:
Arc in — Select this option to use an arc ramp-in move and enter
the Arc-in angle and Arc in/out radius.
This example uses Arc in and Arc out:

When using Arc in and Arc out with TNR Comp (see page 1366)
enabled, small linear moves are added to the toolpath before the
arc in and after the arc out. Compensation is turned on during the
linear segments:
Linear in — Select this option to use a linear lead-in move and enter
the Engage angle/Lead-in angle and the Lead distance.
This example uses Linear in and Linear out:
Engage angle — This attribute is available for Linear in if TNR comp is

off for the finish pass.
When TNR comp is off, the part entry angle is controlled by the
Engage angle attribute.
Engage angle
Enter the approach angle for the tool, measured away from the
part. An angle of 0 approaches along the path. An angle of 90
approaches perpendicular to the path. If the beginning of a scan line
begins with a shoulder, a value of 90 is used automatically for that
scan line. The only valid values are 0 or 90 degrees.

The Engage angle and Withdraw angle are specified from the path (or
extension of the path), relative to the side of the path that the tool
is on, and the direction in which the tool is traveling. In the graphic
below, Point 1 is the calculated engage point and the Point 6 is the
calculated withdraw point.
Clearance
Withdraw angle
Clearance zone
Engage angle
1591) dialog. Set it on the Turn/Bore (see page 1689) tab.
Lead-in angle — Enter the angle at which the tool enters the stock
for boundary moves. This attribute is available for the rough pass if
TNR comp is on.
When TNR comp is on, the part entry angle is controlled by the Lead
in angle attribute.
Enter the angle for the lead-in move, measured counter-clockwise
away from the part. An angle of 0 approaches along the path. An
angle of 90 approaches perpendicular to the path.
Out
Select the type of lead-out from:

Arc out — Select this option to use an arc ramp-out move and enter
the Arc-out angle and Arc in/out radius.
Linear out — Select this option to use a linear lead-out move and
enter the Withdraw angle/Lead-out angle and the Lead distance.
This example uses Linear in and Linear out:
Withdraw angle — This attribute is available for Linear out if TNR

comp is off for the finish pass.
Use clearance as finish withdraw length — When selected, the
Clearance value is used as the approach and withdraw length for
finishing moves. When deselected, you can enter a separate
Withdraw length.
Lead-out angle — This attribute is available for Linear out if TNR
comp is on. This is the angle for the lead-out move for
semi-finishing and finishing of Turn and Bore features. It is
measured clockwise. The Lead-out angle is measured away from the
part. An angle of 0 exits along the direction of path. An angle of 90
exits perpendicular to the path.
Arc in/out radius — Enter the radius of the arc to use for arc-in and
arc-out ramp moves.
Lead distance — Enter the distance for linear lead-in and lead-out
moves.

Turning tab (TURN)
You can use the Turning tab of the Turning Feature Properties (see
page 1351) dialog to edit the machining setting of a Turning
feature.
Auto Round
This turning attribute applies to both rough and finish passes. When
Auto round is enabled, FeatureCAM automatically inserts arc moves
to connect two non-tangent elements. The effects are:
 Minimum of wasted motion by the machine; however, the posted
part program may be slightly longer in the number of blocks
used.
 Burrs are removed, but otherwise the part has the same shape
and dimensions given by the feature curve because the radius of
the inserted arc is the same as the tool nose radius.
 Machine motion is smoother.

This is an example with Auto round turned off:
This is the same example with Auto round turned on:
Canned cycle X clearance — Enter the tool clearance in X before the
start of a turning canned cycle. The tool location is obtained by
applying the Canned cycle X clearance and Canned cycle Z clearance
to the start point of the canned cycle.
You must enable Use canned cycle (see page 1367) to

access this attribute.

Canned cycle Z clearance — Enter the tool clearance in Z before the
start of a turning canned cycle. The tool location is obtained by
applying the Canned cycle X clearance and Canned cycle Z clearance
to the start point of the canned cycle.
You must enable Use canned cycle (see page 1367) to

access this attribute.
Centerline overcut — Used with Turnmilling (see page 1366)
toolpaths. Enter the amount that the tool cuts past the centerline
when cleaning up material against a shoulder at the end of a scan
line. The default is 0.1 inches or 3 mm.
Chamfer extend dist. — applies to thread features and provides extra
space for the tool so that it does not start on the metal for the
groove finish pass.
Clearance
At the beginning of an operation, the tool rapids to a point that is a
distance away from the beginning of the toolpath. This distance is
the Clearance.
The clearance is also used to calculate the move at the end of the
operation (except for an ID Groove feature), unless Use clearance as
finish withdraw length is deselected on the Leads tab.
For an ID Groove feature, the Clearance attribute is not used for the
exit point. For safety reasons, by default the center line of the tool
(holder plus exposed insert) is withdrawn exactly along the center
line of the Groove, for example:
ID Groove feature
Entry point, determined by the Clearance attribute
Exit point
Center line of tool (holder plus exposed insert)

You can override this and control the retract point precisely using
the Endpoint attribute. This image shows the same example, but
with an Endpoint set at :
The location of these points is also controlled by the Engage Angle

and Withdraw Angle.
If you are using Tool Nose Radius Compensation, Lead In Dist is
used instead of Clearance.
Deflection — This attribute applies to the finish pass of a Turn
feature when using a Cut-Grip tool.
Depth of cut
Enter a step increment for each pass that the roughing routine
performs on the part. The interpretation of Depth of cut depends on
the Constant DOC setting in the Turn/Bore (see page 1689)
document-level options.
If Constant DOC is deselected, the Depth of cut value you set is the
maximum depth of cut for the feature. If the Depth of cut evenly
divides the depth of your feature, your increment is used. If it
results in a final pass that is quite shallow, the Depth of cut is
adjusted to result in even roughing passes. For example if you have
a feature that is 0.5 inches deep and specify a Depth of cut of 0.4,
the feature is roughed in two even passes 0.25 inches deep instead
of one pass of depth 0.4 inches and another pass with depth of 0.1
inches.
If Constant DOC is selected, the feature is cut using this depth for
each pass. With Constant DOC selected, you can also list a series of
depths, separated by commas, to control the depth of each cut. For
example a Depth of cut specified as 0.25, 0.15, 0.1 results in the first
pass being cut at 0.25 inches, the second at 0.15 inches and the
remaining pass at 0.1 inches. If there are more cuts than depths
specified, the last depth is repeated.
Dwell — Enter the number of seconds that you want the tool to
dwell after plunging. This applies during the Rough pass of a Groove
feature and also a Cutoff chamfer.

End point — Set the point that the tool-tip center rapids to at the
end of the operation.
Start point and End Point attributes are available on all turn
operations. If the Start point is set, the center of the tool tip
rapids to this point at the start of the operation. If the End point
is set, the center of the tool tip rapids to this point at the end of the
operation.
To set the value for Start point and End point, you can click the Pick
XYZ Location button next to the New Value field at the bottom of
the dialog and click the location in the graphics window. You can
also type in the name of a linear curve and the tool follows this
curve on part entry or exit.
You cannot pick the curve graphically.

The image below shows an unusually shaped tool that requires a
start curve to control precisely.
You can set FeatureCAM to feed (see page 1708, see page
1404) from the Start point (or the end of a start curve) to the
beginning of the toolpath.

Engage angle — Enter the angle at which the tool enters the stock
TNR comp is off. This attribute is available when TNR comp is on. For
the Semi-finish and Finish pass, this attribute is available on the
Leads (see page 1416) tab.
Engage angle
Clearance
Withdraw angle
Clearance zone
Engage angle

Finish passes — Normally this is set to 1 and a single pass is
generated offset by the tool tip. If set to greater than 1, then the
region to be finished is divided into equal parts and finished in
sequential passes. The region to be finished is the X semi-finish
allowance and the Z semi-finish allowance if the feature has a
semi-finish pass, and it is the full X finish allowance and Z finish
allowance if the feature has no semi-finish pass.
Lead dist — Enter the distance for the lead-in and lead-out moves.
This attribute is available for the Rough pass if you have selected
TNR comp. on the Strategy (see page 1366) tab. For the Semi-finish
and Finish pass, see the Leads (see page 1416) tab.
TNR comp is on. For the Semi-finish and Finish pass, this attribute is
available on the Leads (see page 1416) tab.
in angle attribute.
Lead-out angle — Enter the angle for the lead-out move, measured
clockwise away from the part. An angle of 0 exits along the
direction of path. An angle of 90 exits perpendicular to the path.
This attribute is available when TNR comp is on. For the Semi-finish
and Finish pass, this attribute is available on the Leads (see page
1416) tab.

Left boundary
A turning feature's boundary (shown in dark blue) encloses the
whole feature by default.
The toolpath is enclosed within the boundary:

You can edit the default leftmost boundary that is machined up to
by setting a Left boundary:
The toolpath is contained within the new boundary:
You must specify the boundary so that it completely encloses

the path (for example, the path cannot start or end in the
boundary box; it must start on, or outside of the boundary).
You can also set the Right boundary and Max/Min radius boundary
attributes.
Max. radius boundary

A Turn feature's boundary (shown in dark blue) encloses the whole
feature by default.
You can edit the default outer radius boundary that is machined up
to by setting a Max radius boundary:


You can also set the Left boundary and Right boundary attributes.
Min. radius boundary
A Bore feature's boundary (shown in dark blue) encloses the whole
feature by default.

You can edit the default inner radius boundary that is machined up
to by setting a Min radius boundary:

You can also set the Left boundary and Right boundary attributes.
Priority

automatically.

Post Vars. (see page 1656) button
Right boundary
A Turn feature's boundary (shown in dark blue) encloses the whole
feature by default.

You can edit the default rightmost boundary that is machined up to
by setting a Right boundary:

You can also set the Left boundary and Max/Min radius boundary
attributes.
Side liftoff angle — Enter the angle to lift the tool off the part after
each plunge cut. This increases the tool's life and leaves a better
finish on the part. This attribute applies to a Groove feature.

This part has a Groove feature, shown in pink:
The default behavior is for the tool to lift off the part at 90 , shown
in the following image by , after each plunge cut. This results in
tool contact with the uncut material, at , when the tool is
retracting at a rapid feed rate along the X axis:
You can avoid this by using the Side liftoff dist. attribute, to move
the tool back along the Z axis , before lifting off.
Side liftoff dist and Side liftoff angle are ignored for the retract move
at the end of the first plunge. The liftoff move is performed at the
plunge feed rate. If the groove is a round-bottomed groove, then
liftoff is not used, even when specified.
1591) dialog. See the Grooving (see page 1702) tab.
Side liftoff dist — Enter the distance to move the tool after a plunge
cut, in the direction opposite to the cutting direction. This increases
the tool's life and leaves a better finish on the part. This applies to a
Groove feature. See also Side liftoff angle.

Skip wall pass
This attribute applies to turning and boring roughing passes. On a
typical roughing pass, the tool follows these moves:
1 Move straight across the part. This is the black move in the
diagram.

2 Move up the wall to remove any scallops, shown as the blue
move.
3 Withdraw from the part at an angle, shown as the small angled
move at the top of the blue move.
If Skip wall pass is enabled the second move (the blue one) is no
longer performed. If you are using a tool that does not cut well in
the upward direction, you should consider using this option. With
Skip wall pass enabled, the toolpaths appear as in the image below.
For boring features, you can select how many passes to apply the
Skip wall pass option to from the menu. For example, if you select 1,
that means that the wall move is skipped for the first roughing pass
but not for the other passes.
Start point — Set the point that the tool-tip center rapids to at the
start of the operation.

operation.

Stepover % — Enter the distance, as a percentage of the tool's
diameter, that the tool shifts to position itself for the next plunge
cut. This value specifies the maximum stepover distance. If this
value evenly divides the width of the feature, it is used. If it results
in a final pass that is quite shallow, the cut widths are adjusted to
result in even roughing passes.

For example if you have a feature that is 0.5 inches wide and
specify a width of cut of 0.4 (specified as a Stepover % of 80 for a
tool with a diameter of 0.5 inches), the feature is roughed in two
even passes 0.25 inches wide rather than one pass of 0.4 inches
and another pass with a width of 0.1 inches.
Tool change location — Set the point where the tip of the tool moves
to before a tool change.
This location is relative to the end of the curve (see page

329).
current part in the Post Options dialog.
Total stock (see page 1445) — Enter an offset distance from the
feature boundary to machine to instead of machining to the stock
boundary. This option is available only for roughing operations of
Offset (see page 1367) type toolpaths.
Undercuts — Select from No checking, Adjust to tool geometry, and
Remove all undercuts.
In the following example, the tool cutting the Turn feature has
started to descend into the Groove feature. You can see this on the
centerline simulation in the area marked:

You can also see that this is happening in the 3D simulation:
To avoid this situation, select Remove all undercuts.

With this option selected, the tool does not descend into the Groove
feature, as you can see from these simulation views of the same
example part.
Centerline simulation:

3D simulation:
Withdraw angle — Enter the angle that the tool withdraws along
before returning for the next step. The angle is measured in
degrees, counter-clockwise from the Z axis. See also Withdraw
length.
Withdraw length — Enter the distance along the Withdraw angle line
that the tool withdraws before returning for the next step.

X finish allowance — Enter the amount of material to leave in the X
direction after the Rough pass.
Z finish allowance
X finish allowance
You can enter a positive or negative value, but X finish

allowance and Z finish allowance must be both positive or both
negative.
X leave allowance — Enter the amount of material to leave in the X
direction after the Finish pass.
Z leave allowance
X leave allowance

You can enter a positive or negative value, but X leave
allowance and Z leave allowance must be both positive or both
negative.
X semi-finish allowance — Enter the amount of material to leave in
the X direction after the Semi-finish pass.
Z semi-finish allowance
X semi-finish allowance
You can enter a positive or negative value, but X semi-finish

allowance and Z semi-finish allowance must be both positive or
both negative.
Z finish allowance — Enter the amount of material to leave in the Z
direction after the Rough pass.

This parameter enables you to specify a separate finish allowance in
the Z-axis direction. This is the amount of material to leave in the Z
direction after the roughing pass.
Z finish allowance
X finish allowance

negative.
Z leave allowance — Enter the amount of material to leave in the Z
direction after the Finish pass.

Z leave allowance
X leave allowance
You can enter a positive or negative value, but X leave

allowance and Z leave allowance must be both positive or both
negative.
Z semi-finish allowance — Enter the amount of material to leave in
the Z direction after the Semi-finish pass.
Z semi-finish allowance
X semi-finish allowance
You can enter a positive or negative value, but X semi-finish

allowance and Z semi-finish allowance must be both positive or
both negative.
Number of passes
This parameter specifies the number of steps to the bottom of the
thread. You can specify either Fixed or Calculate. If you select Fixed,
then you must enter the total steps required for the threading
operation in the Passes field. If you select Calculate, then the
number of steps for the threading operation is calculated by the
system. Additionally, if you select Calculate, then you must supply
data for the Step 1, Step 2, and Minimum Infeed fields.

Taper angle
Taper Angle refers to the angle, measured clockwise from horizontal,
for the thread.
Taper Angle
Total stock (turning)
The Total stock attribute changes the way that the feature is
roughed. Instead of roughing within the boundaries of the stock, the
region that is roughed is determined by offsetting the feature's
curve by the total stock amount. The toolpaths are then performed
parallel to the feature's curve.
Total stock

Boring tab (TURN)
You can use the Boring tab of the Turning Feature Properties (see
page 1351) dialog to edit the machining settings of a Boring
feature.
Auto Round
used.

Clearance
the Clearance.

ID Groove feature
Exit point

and Withdraw Angle.
Constant DOC — See Depth of cut
Depth of cut

inches.
End point
operation.

Rough engage angle — Enter the angle at which the tool enters the
stock for boundary moves. This attribute is available for the rough
pass when TNR comp is off. For the Semi-finish and Finish pass, this
attribute is available on the Leads (see page 1416) tab.
Engage angle

Clearance
Withdraw angle
Clearance zone
Engage angle
Feed from start — This attribute applies to rough and finish turn and
bore operations. If you are using a Start point, then enabling the
Feed from start option ensures that the move from the Start point to
the beginning of the toolpath is a feed move.
TNR comp is on. For the Semi-finish and Finish pass, this attribute is
in angle attribute.

Lead-out angle — Enter the angle for the lead-out move, measured
clockwise away from the part. An angle of 0 exits along the
direction of path. An angle of 90 exits perpendicular to the path.
This attribute is available when TNR comp is on. For the Semi-finish
and Finish pass, this attribute is available on the Leads (see page
1416) tab.
Priority

automatically.

Skip wall pass
This attribute applies to turning and boring roughing passes. On a
typical roughing pass, the tool follows these moves:
1 Move straight across the part. This is the black move in the
diagram.
2 Move up the wall to remove any scallops, shown as the blue
move.
3 Withdraw from the part at an angle, shown as the small angled
move at the top of the blue move.

If Skip wall pass is enabled the second move (the blue one) is no
longer performed. If you are using a tool that does not cut well in
the upward direction, you should consider using this option. With
Skip wall pass enabled, the toolpaths appear as in the image below.
For boring features, you can select how many passes to apply the
Skip wall pass option to from the menu. For example, if you select 1,
that means that the wall move is skipped for the first roughing pass
but not for the other passes.
Start point
operation.

Tool change location is the point where the tip of the tool moves
before a tool change.
You can set this at a global machine level in the Post

Options dialog.
Undercuts — Select from No checking, Adjust to tool geometry, and
Remove all undercuts.
In the following example, the tool cutting the Turn feature has
started to descend into the Groove feature. You can see this on the
centerline simulation in the area marked:

You can also see that this is happening in the 3D simulation:
To avoid this situation, select Remove all undercuts.

With this option selected, the tool does not descend into the Groove
feature, as you can see from these simulation views of the same
example part.
Centerline simulation:

3D simulation:
Withdraw angle — Enter the angle for the lead-out move, measured
clockwise away from the part. This attribute is available when TNR
comp is off. For the Semi-finish and Finish pass, this attribute is
This parameter specifies the angle between cross feed movement
and the withdraw move. For both roughing and finishing passes this
angle is measured against the roughing scanlines.
Withdraw length
Boundary
Clearance
Depth

An angle of 90 retracts perpendicular to the roughing pass. An
angle of 45 pulls back away from the part and the chuck. An angle
of 135 pulls toward the chuck. The withdraw angle for finishing is
not dependent on the shape of the feature curve. Even if no
roughing pass is created, the withdraw angle for finishing pass is
measured against the roughing scanlines.
See the Threading (see page 1699) tab.
Withdraw length — This is the distance along the withdraw angle line
that the tool withdraws before returning for the next step.
Withdraw length
Boundary
Clearance
Depth

X finish allowance
Z finish allowance
X finish allowance

negative.
Z finish allowance
This parameter enables you to specify a separate finish allowance in
the Z-axis direction. This is the amount of material to leave in the Z
direction after the roughing pass.

Z finish allowance
X finish allowance

negative.
Threading tab (TURN)

You can use the Threading tab of the Turning Feature Properties (see
page 1351) dialog to edit the machining settings for a Thread
feature.
Some of the Threading attributes are shown on this diagram:

End clearance Clearance
Withdraw angle Infeed angle
Depth Height
Start clearance
Clearance
the Clearance.
ID Groove feature
Exit point


and Withdraw Angle.
End clearance — Enter the distance that the tool feeds past the end
of the thread (into the relief groove) before retracting from the
part's surface.
1591) dialog. See the Threading (see page 1699) tab.
End point
operation.


Infeed angle — Enter an unsigned, incremental value from the
positive Z axis.
Priority

automatically.

Start clearance — This value is the position to which the tool
traverses before engaging into the workpiece.
Start point

operation.

Start threads — If set to 1, a single thread is created. If set to 2 or 3,
multiple start threads are created. The number of threads per inch
(or per mm) for each thread is divided by the number of threads.
For example, if you create a thread with 10 threads per inch with 2
start threads, then each thread is 5 threads per inch 180 apart.

Tool change location is the point where the tip of the tool moves
before a tool change.

Options dialog.
Cutoff tab (TURN)

You can use the Cutoff tab of the Turning Feature Properties (see
page 1351) dialog to edit the machining settings for a Cutoff
feature.
Chamfer extend dist. — Enter extra space for the tool so that the tool
does not start on the metal for the groove finish pass.
Clearance
the Clearance.

ID Groove feature
Exit point

and Withdraw Angle.
Depth of cut

inches.
Dwell — Enter the number of seconds that you want the tool to
dwell after plunging.
1591) dialog. Set it on the Cutoff (see page 1706) tab.
End point — See Start point
Peck retract dist. — This is the distance the tool retracts between
plunges.
1591) dialog. Set it on the Cutoff (see page 1706) tab.
Priority

automatically.

Start point

operation.

Tool change location — Set the point where the tip of the tool moves
to before a tool change.

Options dialog.

Wire feature attributes (WIRE)
These tabs are available in the Feature Properties dialog for wire
features:
 Strategy (see page 1468)
 Start (see page 1481)
 Cutting Data (see page 1487)
 Leads Style (see page 1489)
Strategy tab (WIRE)

You can use the Strategy tab of the Wire Feature Properties dialog
(see page 1468) to edit the strategy attributes of a Wire feature.
Operations — Choose which operation(s) (see page 620) you want

for your wire feature.
1591) dialog. See the Wire EDM (see page 1716) tab.
Primary Cut/Offset Dir

side side
- Primary - Primary
is Right is Left
side side
- Primary - Primary
is Right is Left
Retract Length — Enter the distance that the wire retracts from the
part at the end of an operation.
operations.
- Retract length
- Stop length
- Wire path
- Contour
Use on both ends of skim passes — Enable this option to apply the
Retract length to both ends of skim passes. (The wire does not
return to the start point at one end.)
The following example shows a retract and cutoff operation using
the default behavior (Use on both ends of skim passes disabled):
1. End of retract 2. End of retract 3. End of retract

pass 1, wire pass 2, wire pass 3, wire
retracts by the retracts back to the retracts by the
Retract Length: start point: Retract Length:

4. End of cutoff 5. End of cutoff
pass 1, wire pass 2, wire
retracts back to the retracts by the
start point: Retract Length:
This is the same example with Use on both ends of skim passes
enabled:

pass 1, wire pass 2, wire pass 3, wire retracts
retracts by the retracts by the by the Retract
Retract Length: Retract Length: Length:

retracts by the retracts by the
Retract Length: Retract Length:

Stepover — Enter the stepover amount between passes for
Pocketing and Zigzag operations.
Finish allowance — This is the amount of material left after a
Pocketing or Zigzag pass. Even if a Cleanup Pass is used, the finish
allowance still remains.
Cut Angle — This sets the cutting angle for a Zigzag operation.
Cleanup Pass — Enable this option to create a finishing cut at the

end of a Zigzag operation.
- Cleanup Pass
Stop length — Enter the distance from the normal contour end
position to the inserted stop or end position.

Retract operation:
Contour
Wire path
Stop length
Run-out
Stop operation:
Contour
Wire path
Stop length

Contour
Wire path
Stop length
Run-out
Contour
Wire path
Stop length
Run-out
Stop code — For Stop operations you can choose from:

Overlap — Enter the distance by which the normal contour end
position is overcut for Stop and Cutoff operations.

Stop operation:
- Contour
- Wire path
- Contour start/end
position
- Inserted stop
positions
- Stop length
- Overlap
- Contour
- Normal contour
start/end position
- Inserted end
position
- Run-out
- Stop length
- Overlap
- Contour
- Normal contour
start/end position
- Inserted end
position
- Run-out
- Stop length
- Overlap




Total Stock — This applies to Pocketing and Zigzag operations.

- Leave allowance
- Contour stock
- Total stock
Linear Approx is for 4-axis EDM. All arcs are converted into small
line segments. This parameter controls how finely arcs are refined
into lines. The smaller the number, the more points arcs will be
broken down into.
1591) dialog. See the Settings (see page 1717) tab (where
it is called 4 axis/Rapid toolpath linear approx.).
Keep wire vertical at retract — This keeps the wire vertical after
Retract and Cutoff operations for 4-axis features.
The following example shows the end of a Retract operation with
Keep wire vertical at retract selected:

This is the same example with Keep wire vertical at retract
deselected:
Skim Pass Options (see page 1475) button
You can set many of these attributes as defaults for the

current document in the Machining Attributes dialog on the
Settings (see page 1717) tab.
Skim Pass Options (WIRE)
Click Skim Pass Options at the bottom of the Strategy tab (see page
1468) to display the Skim Pass Options dialog:
The Skim Pass Options dialog used to be called Offset Options.

Offset method (see page 1479) — This controls whether the
offsetting of the wire path is performed on the machine using cutter
compensation or by FeatureCAM. Select Cutter comp to perform the
offsetting on the machine, or Offset Toolpath if you want
FeatureCAM to perform the offsetting.
Total passes — Enter the total number of passes to take to cut the
feature. If a feature has a Retract, Stop, or Cutoff operation these
operations are each performed Total Passes - Contour Passes. If a
feature has a Contour operation, Total Passes must be at least 2.
Total Passes must be between 1 and 9.
Contour passes — This is the number of passes to take for the
Contour operation for a Retract, Stop, or Contour operation.

Cut all operations on each curve first — For features with multiple
curves, enable this option to do all operations on each curve before
moving on to the next curve. If the option is disabled, the first
operation is done on all curves, then the next operation, and so on.
Cut the first pass on each curve first — For features with multiple
curves, using multiple-pass operations, select this option to cut the
first pass on each curve first rather than cut all passes on one curve
before moving on to the next.
For features with multiple curves, such as the die below, the default
behavior is to cut all the passes for one curve before moving on to
the next curve.
- curve1
- curve2
- curve3
If you want to cut the first pass on each curve first, select the Cut
the first pass on each curve first option:
This option is for 2-axis only and is available for the following
operations:
 Cutoff
 Stop
 Contour only (not, for example, a Stop plus Contour combination)

For the example above with Retract and Cutoff operations, the
default behavior is to cut the three Retract passes on curve1, then
the three Retract passes on curve2, then the three Retract passes on
curve3. It then cuts all three Cutoff passes on curve1, then all three
Cutoff passes on curve2, then all three Cutoff passes on curve3.
With Cut the first pass on each curve first selected for the same
example, FeatureCAM cuts the Retract operation as before. It then
cuts the first Cutoff pass on curve1, then the first Cutoff pass on
curve2, then the first Cutoff pass on curve3.

It then cuts the remaining two Cutoff passes on each curve.
Because the first Cutoff pass of each curve needs the attention of
the machinist to remove the core, the advantage of using Cut the
first pass on each curve first is that the machinist can remove the
cores of all the curves together, and the machine can finish cutting
the part without intervention.
Single Cutoff Pass — Select this option to use one pass for the Cutoff
operation. If you are using a Cutoff operation with a Retract
operation, deselect this option to use the same number of passes as
for the Retract operation.
Leave allowance is the amount of material to leave after the Retract,
Cutoff, Stop, and Contour operations.
- Leave allowance
- Contour stock
- Total stock
A negative Leave allowance acts as an overcut.

Uni-Directional

Applies to Contour, Stop, Retract, and Cutoff operations that use
the Offset Method of Cutter Comp.
For multiple passes, the cutting direction for each following pass is
not reversed and all passes take place in the defined direction. At
the end of each pass the wire is cut and the machine re-positions to
the start point for the next pass.
Uses Macro if available
Applies to Contour, Stop, Retract and Cutoff operations that use the
Offset Method of Cutter Comp. Available for 2-axis features only.
This option activates the automatic creation of sub-programs for the
machining of operations. You must define the format and output of
sub-programs in the post processor. The use of sub-programs is
particularly useful when producing chain programs. In this case
each machining contour is written to a separate sub-program. The
main calling program then contains only the movements required to
move to the next start point.
For multiple pass, if the Uni-Directional option is enabled then only a
single macro is output containing a single pass.
Offset method (WIRE)
The Offset Method attribute controls whether the offsetting of the
wire path is performed on the machine using cutter compensation
or by FeatureCAM. Select Cutter comp to perform the offsetting on
the machine, or Offset Toolpath if you want FeatureCAM to perform
the offsetting.
To cut a workpiece to the finished size the Wire radius
compensation function on the NC-machine is normally used.
Activating this function with a particular value causes the machine
to calculate a new path for the center of the wire. The compensation
value is normally composed of the wire radius plus the spark gap
allowance plus any finishing allowance that may be required. The
compensation value is normally entered in a Compensation Register
on the machine.
Stock allowance
Wire
Spark gap

Compensation (Offset)
If the erosion of a workpiece needs to be made in several cuts
(roughing and finishing), each cut normally uses a different
compensation value or compensation register. The values for the
compensation are often given in a table supplied by the machine
builder or automatically entered in the compensation registers via
the technology tables built into the controller.
In every case you should ensure that the appropriate linear lead-in
and lead-out moves are contained within the program to enable the
compensation to be switched on and off.
The output of the commands to activate and deactivate the
compensation is automatically carried out by the software on the
first and last moves.
On the machine
When using the Wire Compensation command, the center path of the
wire is calculated and corrected directly by the nc-machine. The
compensation amount is normally entered in a Compensation
Register on the machine controller and activated by an appropriate
command within the nc-program. The format of the command to
activate the compensation and to control the compensation
direction is dependent upon the nc-machine type. The FeatureWIRE
software supports the output of these commands both for single
and multiple cuts (backwards/forwards cutting or
Main/Sub-Programs).
The following parameters, in the Skim Pass Options (see page 1475)
dialog, control the use of wire compensation on the machine:
Total Passes
Leave Allowance
Contour Passes
Uni-Directional
Uses Macro if Available
In FeatureCAM
If the wire radius compensation is carried out by FeatureCAM the
appropriate compensation value and direction is automatically used
to produce a wire path that is already corrected. The path cannot be
altered by changing the offset register of the nc-machine. This may
be necessary, for example, when cutting a contour which contains
elements or arcs which are smaller than the required compensation
amount and thus cannot be cut using the machine registers.
The following parameters control the use of wire compensation:
Total stock (see page 1725)

Leave Allowance (see page 1475)
Stepover (see page 1725)
Contour stock (see page 1725)
Start tab (WIRE)

You can use the Start tab of the Wire Feature Properties dialog (see
page 1468) to specify the start point of a Wire feature.
Leads are non-perpendicular by default. If you want the lead

to be perpendicular, select the Pick only perpendicular lead box
before you click the Pick location button. Click the start point
and FeatureCAM highlights the corresponding perpendicular
point when you mouse-over the curve segment. Click to
accept it.
Die and Punch Features

For 2 and 4-axis Die or Punch features, a start point is automatically
calculated. You can change the start point for a Die or Punch feature
using the following procedure:
from the Curve list.
2 Click the Pick location button.

3 Click the new Start point.

You must pick on the appropriate side for the feature type.
For die features, pick on the inside. For punch features,
pick on the outside. For side features pick on the machining
side. If you pick a point in the incorrect side, the approach
moves will gouge the part.
4 Select the segment of the curve to connect the start point to by
moving the mouse over the feature until the segment of the
curve you want is highlighted and then click the mouse.
5 The X and Y coordinates of the new start point are displayed in
the dialog.
If you want to force the wire to start on the curve, you cannot
simply double-click. You must move your second pick (the one that
indicates the curve segment) slightly so that you are not picking the
same point twice.
If you are creating a 4-axis feature, follow the above procedure for
both the upper and lower curves.
Side Features
For 2 and 4-axis side features, the default is to start at the first
point of the curve. To add new linear moves at the start or end of a
curve:
from the Curve drop down list.
2 Click the Pick point button for either the start or end point.
A line will rubber-band from the current start of end point.
3 Click a point at the new location.
4 Alternatively, you can simple enter the new end point
coordinates.

Misc. tab (WIRE)
You can use the Misc tab of the Wire Feature Properties dialog (see
page 1468) to edit machining options of a Wire feature.
Wire Cutting/Threading — This offers settings to control the output of

wire threading or wire cutting commands.
Off — No wire threading or wire cutting commands are output in the
NC-program.
Both — The commands to thread the wire and cut the wire are
output automatically at the start and end of each operation within
the feature.
Cut — The wire cutting command is output at the end of each
operation within the feature (but no wire thread command at the
start). When viewing the toolpath in centerline simulation, the Cut
location is denoted with a small circle.
Thread — The wire threading command is output at the start of each
operation within the feature (but no cut wire command at the end).
When viewing the toolpath in centerline simulation, the Thread
location is shown as a small plus sign.
Modify outside corners
A radius is inserted into the wire path at each outside sharp corner.
This can be useful for reducing unnecessary movements and for
producing cleaner corners.

This example shows the original toolpath:
If Modify outside corners is enabled, the toolpath rounds sharp

corners, for example:
The size of the outside corner depends on the Radius you set, for
example:
See the Misc. (see page 1735) tab
Modify inside corners
Circular
A circle is inserted in the corners. The center of the circle lies on the
corner point.
This example shows the original toolpath of an inside corner:
If Modify inside corners is enabled, with an Inside corner style of

Circular, FeatureCAM inserts a circle into sharp inside corners, for
example:

The size of the circle depends on the Radius you set, for example:
Enter a Center shift to offset the center of the circle.

Positive Center No Center shift: Negative Center
shift: shift:
Select Auto adjust the radius to enable FeatureCAM to automatically

adjust the radius of the circle according to how sharp each corner
is. A 45 degree corner uses a circle of the specified Radius. For
sharper corners with angles less than 45 degrees, the radius of the
circle is increased, for less sharp corners with angles greater than
45 degrees, the radius of the circle is reduced. Deselect Auto adjust
the radius to always use the specified Radius.
Triangular
The path follows a triangular shape at an inside corner. Specify the

length and width of the triangle.
Rounded
The path rounds inside corners. Specify the radius.
See the Misc. (see page 1735) tab.

Modifying both inside and outside corners
Both inside and outside corners are modified as shown below.
Original path curve with Resulting NC output Resulting part shape:
inside corner (shown in pink):
(shown in blue):
Auto Round
If Auto round is enabled, arcs are inserted at all sharp corners. This
applies only if Cutter comp is enabled and you have a leave
allowance or if Cutter comp is not set. If you have enabled Modify
outside corners, it does not perform any further rounding on these
corners. It rounds inside corners (even if Modify inside corners is
enabled) by inserting an arc before and after the circular corner as
shown below: The radius of the inserted arcs is equal to the radius
of the wire.
Wire radius
See the Misc. (see page 1735) tab.

Cutting Data tab (WIRE)
The Cutting Data tab of the Wire Feature Properties dialog (see page
1468) displays the feed, water, and cutter compensation registers
for each pass of the operation selected in the Tree view.
The use of all these settings depends on the machine and controller
type. You can set these values automatically from the current
material database, or enter them manually.
Most modern NC machines have an integrated technology database
which the machine uses to set up the optimum cutting conditions
for the workpiece. In this way the cutting is accurate and uses the
full power of the machine. These settings for the cutting conditions
are usually stored in Registers in the controller and are activated by
particular codes in the NC program. FeatureCAM enables you to
settings from a database you have prepared.
Feed — This is used to select the generator setting on the wire
machine by setting parameters such as strength, pulse time, and
height, and so on.
Water — This is used to select the machine register that defines the
include the water pressure, flow rate, and so on.

Comp. Reg. — This sets the number of the Compensation Register of
the NC machine, which is used for wire radius compensation. The
value held within this register is the amount by which the wire is
corrected to the left or right of the defined wire path when the
function for wire correction on the machine is switched on (normally
G41 or G42).
Comp. Val. — This sets the wire radius correction value for the given
offset register on the machine. The value is normally the sum of the
wire radius + spark gap + any finishing allowance required. For
most machines, the compensation value is referenced through the
You can change the labels of these columns in the Cutting

Conditions Names dialog in XBUILD. Select CNC-Info > Cutting
Conditions Names from the XBUILD menu.
Post Vars. button — displays the Post Variables dialog (see page
1656).
Cutting Data example (WIRE)
In the example above, C1 is the first pass and C2 is the second

pass.
Feed is the feed rate.
Water is where you enter your EPAK values. For an EPAK value of
E1251, enter 1251.

You should have documentation with your machine that lists
the EPAK values for various materials and thicknesses. So, for
example, it should give you one EPAK value for 0.5 inch thick
aluminum, another for 0.75 inch aluminum, another for 0.5
inch titanium, and so on. Each EPAK contains settings for 'On
Time', 'Off Time', 'Dwell', 'Voltage', and so on.
Comp. Reg associates each Comp. Val with a particular pass and
appears as H11, H12, and so on in the NC code.
Comp. Val is basically the wire radius plus the wire offset. Comp.
Vals should also be in your machine's documentation.
Here is the NC code for the above example, with the values from
the table marked in bold:
N10 G90
N15 M101
N20 M106 Q-2
N25 G53 G92 X-95.956 Y-61.722 Z0
N30 M20 (WIRE THREAD LN)
N35 M78 ( FILL TANK )
N40 M78
N45 M80 ( FLUSHING ON )
N50 M82 ( WIRE FEED ON )
N55 M84 ( MACHINING ON )
N60 M90 ( ADAPTIVE CONTROL ON )
N65 H11=0.006
N70 E1251 F0.090
N75 G01 G42 X-369.727 Y-348.437 H11
Leads Style tab (WIRE)

You can use the Leads Style tab of the Wire Feature Properties dialog
(see page 1468) to edit the lead moves of a Wire feature.
This tab applies to 2-axis features with no taper.

Style — There are several choices for the type of moves for leading
in and out of an operation.
Direct — This style moves straight from the start point to the
contour.
- start point
- contour
There are four different ramp styles that arc onto the contour.
The ramp styles available are:
Teardrop: Bullet:
Arc: U-Shape:
To set a ramp style, select the Style from the list and enter a
Diameter for lead moves.
Start point
Contour
Diameter

The same diameter arc is used to ramp off the contour and then the
wire returns to the start point.
See the Start (see page 1730) tab.
Renaming features
When you create a feature, FeatureCAM automatically generates its
name.
To change the name of a feature:
1 Select an item in the graphics window or the Part View panel.
2 To display the Rename Object dialog:
 Select Edit > Rename from the menu.
 Select Rename from the context menu.
 Press the F2 key.
3 Enter the New Name in the Rename Object dialog.
4 Click OK.
Deleting features
Use one of the following methods to delete a feature:
 Select a feature in the graphics window or the Part View, then
press the Delete key.
 Select a feature in the graphics window or the Part View, then
select Edit > Delete from the menu.
 Right-click a feature in the graphics window or the Part View and
select Delete from the context menu.
Move features to a different Setup

To move a feature to a different Setup:
1 Select Manufacturing > Process Plan from the menu to display the
Process Plan (see page 1492) dialog.
Two Setups are displayed in the dialog, with the list of features
on each Setup listed below its name. If there is only one setup it
is displayed in both lists.
2 From the left Setup list, select the Setup which contains the
feature you want to move.

The features on that setup are listed in the left field.
3 From the right Setup list, select the Setup you want to move the
feature to.
The features on that setup are listed in the middle field.
4 In the left field, select the feature you want to move.
5 Click Move item to another setup to move the feature to the
middle field.
Process Plan dialog

Use the Process Plan dialog to move features between Setups,
remove features or Setups from the manufacturing plan, or add
features to the plan. The order of operations in the Process Plan
dialog is only the initial manufacturing order. Settings in the Default
Operation attributes and the Ordering (see page 1495) dialogs can
override this order.
To display the Process Plan dialog, select Manufacturing > Process
Plan from the menu.
The left and middle boxes show the features contained in the
Setups whose name is listed above the box. If you have only one
Setup in your part, both of these boxes display the operations of
your single stage. The Process Plan list contains the names of all
Setups in your process plan.
Process Plan — This displays a list of Setups in the model.
Setup — This lists of all the Setups in the part. Select a Setup from
the list and the features contained in the Setup are displayed in the
Feature list.
Feature — This lists the features for each Setup.
Delete item — Click this button to delete the selected Setup in
the Process Plan list or Feature in the Feature list.
Move item to another setup (right) - moves the selected
manufacturing operation(s) from the left Setup to the right Setup.
For example, if your part has a top and roughbot Setup. With the
roughbot Setup selected in the left Setup list (the first stage of the
manufacturing process), the operations assigned to this Setup are
displayed in the left field. If you select the top Setup in the right
Setup list, the operations for this setup are displayed in the middle
field. If you select an operation in the roughbot Setup and then click
Move item to another setup (right) , the operation is assigned to
the top Setup, and is displayed in the middle field.

Move item to another setup (left) - moves the selected
manufacturing operation(s) from the right Setup to the left Setup.
Move item up - moves the selected feature or Setup up in the list
by one place.
Move item down - moves the selected feature or Setup down in
the list by one place.
Including and excluding features for a process plan

When you create a feature, it is automatically included for
manufacturing in the current Setup of the process plan.
Sometimes, it is convenient to exclude a feature from the
manufacturing plan without deleting the feature.
The Include In Plan and Exclude from Plan options of the Edit menu
toggle the inclusion of the selected feature in the manufacturing
plan.
You can use the Process Plan dialog to select which features and
Setups to include in the plan, and easily correct any oversights you
might make with the include and exclude options.
 Including a feature in the process plan (see page 1493)
 Excluding a feature from the process plan (see page 1493)
 Checking if a feature is included in the process plan (see page
1493)
If a feature is not included in the process plan, the toolpaths,

and the NC code generated by the post processor exclude that
feature entirely.
Including a feature in the process plan

To include a feature in the manufacturing plan:
1 Select a feature in the graphics window or the Part View.
2 Select Manufacturing > Include in Plan from the menu.
Excluding a feature from the process plan

To exclude a feature from the manufacturing plan:
2 Select Manufacturing > Exclude from Plan from the menu.
Checking if a feature is included in the process plan

To check whether a feature is included in the manufacturing plan:

2 Select Manufacturing from the menu. There is a black dot next to
either Include in Plan or Exclude from Plan, which shows the
current setting for the selected feature.
Ordering features for manufacturing

You create features, and FeatureCAM splits them into operations for
manufacturing. For example, from a Hole feature, FeatureCAM
creates spotdrill, drill, and countersink operations. FeatureCAM uses
logic to ensure that operations created from a feature are
manufactured in the correct order. For example, a Hole is
spot-drilled before it is drilled and a Pocket is roughed before it is
finished.
Each Setup can contain multiple features, which are split into
operations. By default, a part is manufactured in the order it is
created. You can change the order of manufacture using the
Process Plan (see page 1492) dialog, or you can set automatic
Ordering optimizations.
You can use the following methods to order features for
manufacturing:
Op list tab (see page 1494)
Ordering optimization (see page 1495)
Using groups to determine manufacturing order (see page 1496)
Op List tab
The Op List tab of the Results panel displays all the operations in
the part and the machining order, and contains options for editing
and reordering operations.
Each row displays the operation, the feature that the operation is
created from and the tool used to cut the feature.
If there is an Error or a Warning icon in the left hand margin,
you have an error or warning (see page 194) for this operation.
This tab has three main functions:
 Simulation control (see page 1550)
 Operation ordering (see page 1553)
 Operation editing (see page 1554)

Ordering optimization
You can use the Ordering dialog to automatically optimize the
manufacturing process.
Clicking Play in the Simulation toolbar displays the Ordering

dialog by default.
To stop the Ordering dialog displaying, select Don't show this

dialog next time in the Ordering dialog.
If you want the Ordering dialog to display, select

Manufacturing > Machining Attributes from the menu, then on
the Operations tab of the Machining Attributes dialog, in the
Ordering section, deselect Don't ask at tool path simulation.
The Ordering dialog displays the current Setup, CNC File, Tool Crib,
and has an option for operation ordering. There are different kinds
of automatic operation ordering that work together to speed up the
manufacturing of your part.
Depending on the type of part, click one of the following buttons to
display the dialog for changing the machining order:
 Mill Ordering — displays the Automatic Ordering Options (see page
1553) dialog, which contains options for setting the machining
order for Milling parts.
 Turn Ordering — displays the Automatic Ordering Options (see
page 1553) dialog, which contains options for setting the
machining order for Turning parts.
If the model contains a Points list Pattern, click Sorting in the Pattern
- Dimensions (see page 879) dialog to display the Point List Sorting
dialog, where you can change the machining order of the Pattern.

You can also use the Op List tab (see page 1494) to change the
order of operations.
Using Groups to determine manufacturing order

You can use Groups (see page 869) to collect features together, but
they also provide a powerful level of control over the order of
manufacturing operations.
When you create a Group, select Ordered on the Dimensions tab of
the Group Properties (see page 871) dialog to specify the
manufacturing order of the Objects in the Group. If you created an
ordered Group with a Hole feature and a Pocket feature, then the
operations are performed in the following order:
 spotdrill Hole
 drill Hole
 rough Pocket
 finish Pocket
You can mix ordered and unordered Groups in your setup for more
flexibility in ordering operations. For example, perform all drilling
operations first and all milling operations last:
1 Create a mixture of Hole and Milling features (see page 636).
2 Create an unordered Group of Hole features:
a Select the Hole features in the graphics window, then select
Construct > Pattern and Group > Group from the menu to
display the Feature Group Properties (see page 871) dialog.
b On the Dimensions tab of the Group Properties (see page 871)
dialog, deselect Ordered, then click OK to close the dialog.
This creates a Group of Holes with a default manufacturing
order.
3 Rename the Group of Holes to holegroup:
a In the Part View panel, right-click the Group of Holes and
select Rename from the context menu to display the Rename
Object dialog.
b In the Rename Object dialog, enter holegroup in the New Name
field.
c Click OK.
4 Create an unordered Group of Milling Features:
a Select the Milling features in the graphics window, then select
Construct > Pattern and Group > Group from the menu to

b On the Dimensions tab of the Group Properties (see page 871)
dialog, deselect Ordered, then click OK to close the dialog.
This creates a Group of Milling features with a default
manufacturing order.
5 Rename the Group of Milling features to millgroup:
a In the Part View panel, right-click the Group of Milling features
and select Rename from the context menu to display the
Rename Object dialog.
b In the Rename Object dialog, enter millgroup in the New Name
field.
c Click OK.
6 Create a Group which contains the two existing Groups:
a In the Part View panel, select holegroup.
b Hold the Shift key and select millgroup.
c Select Construct > Pattern and Group > Group from the menu to
d On the Dimensions tab of the Group Properties (see page 871)
dialog, select Ordered, then click OK to close the dialog.
7 Rename the Group to ordered:
a In the Part View panel, right-click the Group and select
Rename from the context menu to display the Rename Object
dialog.
b In the Rename Object dialog, enter allgroup in the New Name
field.
c Click OK.
When allgroup is manufactured, all the Holes are made first, then
the Milling features are made. Within each group, FeatureMILL
optimizes the order so that tool changes are minimized. For
example, in holegroup, all spotdrilling operations are done first,
followed by all drilling operations. Then all milling operations are
completed. Using Groups, you control the order of manufacturing
operations without sacrificing the help that FeatureMILL can
provide.
Paste Special dialog

The Paste special dialog enables you to replicate or transfer objects
or their settings between FeatureCAM part files.
You can display the Paste Special dialog in different ways depending
what you want to do:

 To duplicate features in the document:
a Select a feature in the graphics window or Part Tree.
b Select Edit > Copy from the menu to copy the selected objects
to the clipboard.
c Select Edit > Paste Special from the menu.
 To insert features from the Part Library:
a Select the Construct > Part Library menu option to display the
Part Library dialog.
b Select a feature in the Part Library dialog and click Paste.
 To insert Part Library features using the New Feature wizard:
a In the New Feature wizard, under From Feature, select User and
click Next.
b On the User defined feature page, select a feature and click
Next.
These options are displayed in the Paste Special dialog:

 Paste the clipboard contents into the current setup — This inserts
the objects in the clipboard into the current FeatureCAM part
document. This is the same as selecting Edit > Paste from the
menu.
If you paste into the same document that you copied from,
the new copy is placed on top of the original.
 Paste the clipboard… Select a new location — This inserts the
objects in the clipboard into the current FeatureCAM part
document, and the Paste Special - Reference (see page 1499)
dialog is displayed which you can use to position the objects.
 Copy attributes from feature to another feature — The Paste Special
- Attributes dialog is displayed, which you can use to apply the
machining attributes of the copied feature to other features in
the model. This option is only available if the clipboard contains a
single feature.
The Undo button is unavailable after using Copy attributes

from feature to another feature.
 Paste the clipboard contents into the current setup — The Select
New Profile Curve(s) dialog (see page 1501) is displayed, which
you can use to replace the pasted feature's boundary curve with
a curve in the document.

Paste Special - Reference
Use the Paste Special - Reference page to specify a reference point
for pasting features.
1 To specify the location of a reference point, enter the coordinates
of a point in the X, Y and Z fields, or click Pick location and
select a point in the graphics window.
2 Click Next to display the Paste Special - Location (see page 1499)
page, which you can use to specify a new location point.
The copied objects will be translated between the point specified
in this dialog and the point specified in the Paste Special -
Location page.
To locate the feature using polar coordinates, select Polar on

the Location page. The Reference page has no effect when
using polar coordinates.
Paste Special - Location

The Paste Special - Location page enables you to specify a new
location point for pasting features.
1 Select whether you want to locate the new feature using XYZ or
polar coordinates.
You can only use polar coordinates to locate individual features,
not groups or multiple features.
 For XYZ coordinates, enter the coordinates of a point in the X,
Y, and Z fields, or click Pick location and select a point in
The copied objects are translated between the point specified
in the Paste Special - Reference (see page 1499) page and this
point.
 For polar coordinates, enter the Radius and Angle to offset the
new feature from the setup location, and enter the Z value to
specify the Z height of the feature above the setup.
2 Click Preview to display a preview of the objects in the graphics
window.
3 Click Finish to create the new objects and close the wizard.
Paste Special - Attributes

Feed/speed overrides — Applies the values for feed and speed that
have been explicitly set on the copied feature to another feature.
This option is available only if the copied feature has feed or speed
values that have been changed from the defaults.

Tool overrides — Applies the tool information from the copied
feature onto another feature. This option is only available if the tool
options used to machine the feature have been changed from the
default.
Machining attributes
 Copy only the attributes that were set on the feature — Applies
non default attributes from the copied feature to another
feature. This affects all tabs of the Feature Properties dialog
except the Dimensions tab.
 Copy all machining attributes in effect for the feature — All
attributes of the copied feature, including the default
attributes, are applied to another feature.
And set them on the following feature(s) — Apply the selected
attributes to these features.
To add a feature to this list:
 Select a feature in the graphics window, then click Add from
selected items .
 Click Pick feature , then select a feature in the graphics

window.
Attributes, feeds and speeds, and tooling can be transferred

only to features of the same type.

Select New Profile Curve(s)
The Select New Profile Curve(s) dialog enables you to select curves to
replace a feature's boundary curve when pasting it into the
document:
Select curves from the list that you want to replace the feature's
boundary curve with, or click Pick Curve and select curves or
geometry in the graphics window.
Click Next to display the Paste Special - Reference dialog (see page
1499).
Part Library
The Part Library dialog enables you to create commonly used
configurations of objects and save them for easy use in FeatureCAM
parts. For example, the library could include a collection of lines and
arcs, single features with customized attributes for specific
applications, or a collection of features that you use regularly.

To display the Part Library dialog, select Construct > Part Library from
the menu.
The Tree View displays the contents of a specific part library. These
libraries contain objects, which you can paste into FeatureCAM
parts, and folders which are used to organize the objects.
Above the Tree View, the dialog displays whether the current part
library is 64-bit or 32-bit.
Add Selected — Click this button to add the selected objects to the
library. If multiple objects are selected, they are added to the
library as a stream and displayed in the tree view with the stream
icon. A stream is a temporary group. When these objects are
pasted into a document, the stream grouping is removed and just
the objects are added directly to the document. If you want a
permanent grouping, create a group of objects and then add the
group to the part library.
Add Folder — Click this button to add a folder to the part library for
storing objects.
Delete — Click this button to remove the selected object from the
part library.
Rename — Click this button to renames the selected object.

Paste — Click this button to apply the Paste special (see page 1497)
command to the selected objects from the part library. The name of
the pasted object is based on the name of the object in the library.
If you paste multiple copies of the same type of object, the
subsequent objects are named with a _1, _2 suffix. The only
exception is a stream object. For stream objects, the objects are
pasted directly into the document using the names of the objects
contained in the stream.
Import — Click this button to import objects from a part library into
the current library.
Export — Click this button to export all objects in the current library
to an external library file. These files have a .nam extension.
Open library — Click this option to open a part library.
New library — Click this button to create a new part library.
When you create or export a part library, you are asked to

specify the format of the part library as 64-bit or 32-bit. A
32-bit version of FeatureCAM cannot read a 64-bit part
library, but a 64-bit part library is faster and recommended.
Part Library example

FeatureCAM has a Counterdrill hole. These are the manufacturing
steps:
1 Spot-drill the top.
2 Drill the smaller diameter hole.
3 Drill the top diameter hole.
The order of these is fixed, you cannot rearrange them in the Op
List.
An alternative manufacturing strategy would be to:

1 Spot-drill the top.
2 Drill the larger hole on the top.
3 Drill the smaller diameter.
You can use the part library to create a feature that uses the
alternative manufacturing strategy.
1 Create a plain hole:
a Set the Diameter to 0.375.
b Set the Depth to 0.25.

c On the Strategy tab, select the Spot drill and Drill options.
d On the Location tab, set the X, Y, and Z coordinates to 0.0.
2 Create a second plain hole:
a On the Dimensions tab, set the Diameter to 0.25 and the Depth
to 0.75.
b On the Location tab, set the Z location to -0.25
c On the Strategy tab deselect the Spotdrill option and select the
Drill option.
3 Create a group of the two holes:
a Arrange the holes so that the top hole is the first in the group.
b Select the Ordered option.
Select the group and create a library part
1 Create the objects in a FeatureCAM document. See Tips for
library part objects (see page 1504).
2 Select all of the objects you want to include in the part library.
3 Select Part library from the Construct menu.
4 Click the Add selected button to create the library part.
Tips for part library objects

 If you plan on modifying the dimensions of a feature, do not
override the default tools on the library object, use the
automatically selected tools. This allows the automatic tool
selection to modify the tooling when the dimensions are
changed.
 If you want to create a single library part that contains more
than one object, use a Group (see page 869). If you want to
ensure that the operations of that group are not rearranged,
select Ordered on the Dimensions tab of the Feature Group
Properties dialog.
 Any object type can be added to the part library.
 If you want to use a unique name for your object, rename the
object either before you put it in the library, or rename the
object in the part library.
 Center the object around the origin. This makes it easier to place
the feature when you paste it into a document.
Adding objects from the part library to a FeatureCAM document

To creating library part objects:

1 Create the objects in a FeatureCAM document. See Tips for
library part objects (see page 1504).
2 Select all of the objects you want to include in the part library.
3 Select Construct > Part library from the menu to display the Part
Library dialog.
4 Click the Add Selected button to create the library part.
To add existing library parts to a model:
1 Select Construct > Part library from the menu to display the Part
Library dialog.
2 Select an object in the Part Library dialog.
3 Click Paste to display the Paste Special (see page 1497) dialog.
Alternatively, you can use the New Feature Wizard (see page
1505) to add an object from the Part Library to the model.
Creating a single part library object

You can insert a single object from a part library by either using the
Paste Special (see page 1497) dialog, or using the New Feature
Wizard:
Feature Wizard.
2 In the From Feature section of the New Feature Wizard, select
User and click Next.
3 Select an object in the Part Library dialog, then click Next.
4 Enter the coordinates of a point, or click Pick location and

select a point in the graphics window.
5 Click Preview to display a preview of the object in the graphics
window.
6 Click Finish to paste the object into the model.
Creating a pattern of part library objects

Creating a pattern of part library or UDF objects:
These instructions assume that you already have an object in a part
library (see page 1501) or have defined a UDF (see page 857) that
you want to add to a part.
Feature Wizard.

2 In the From Feature section of the New Feature Wizard, select
User.
3 Select Make a pattern from this feature.
4 Click Next.
5 Select an object in the Part Library dialog, then click Next.
6 Follow the instructions in the Wizard to create a pattern form the
feature.
Part Library Format

The Part Library Format dialog is displayed when you create a part
library (see page 1501). Use it to choose the format in which the
library is saved.
To specify the format for a part library:

1 In the Part Library dialog, click New Library or Export. The Part
Library Format dialog is displayed.
2 Choose a format option. Select:
 64-bit to export the library in 64-bit format. Choose this option
when the library is only used with 64-bit installations of
FeatureCAM.
 32-bit to export the library in 32-bit format. Choose this option
when the library is used with 32-bit and 64-bit installations of
FeatureCAM.
64-bit libraries are faster and can be larger than 32-bit

libraries, but they cannot be read by 32-bit installations of
FeatureCAM.
3 Click OK to save your changes and close the dialog. The format
you selected is displayed above the tree in the Part Library
dialog.
To check whether you are using the 32-bit or 64-bit version of

FeatureCAM, select the Help > About FeatureCAM menu option.
The version is shown at the top of the About FeatureCAM
dialog.

Feeds and speeds
Feeds and speeds values are calculated automatically for each
operation based on FeatureCAM's built-in feed/speed database.
Each feature is automatically broken down into a collection of
operations. Feeds and speed settings for each operation are
automatically calculated. To view the recommended feed or speed
value for an operation, click the operation in the tree view and then
click the Feed/speed tab for turned features or the Tools tab for
milling operations.
The recommended feed and speed values are extracted from a
built-in database in FeatureCAM. The combination of the stock
material, the tool material, and the manufacturing operation are
used to find the suitable values in the FeatureCAM feed/speed
tables.
You can customize this database by changing the values for an
existing table or by creating a new table for an additional material.
By customizing the database in this way, you are ensuring that
FeatureCAM makes future decisions about feed and speed values
just as you would.
You can also explicitly set the feed rate or spindle speed for an
individual operation, but these changes only affect a single feature
in a single part file.
Feeds and Speeds database

The Feeds/Speeds And Cutting Data Tables dialog displays the
information stored in the Feeds and Speeds database.
Use one of the following methods to display the Feeds/Speeds And
Cutting Data Tables dialog:
 Select Manufacturing > Feeds/Speeds And Cutting Data Tables from
the menu.
 Click F/S Tables on the Material page of the Stock wizard (see
page 205).
See also:
Wire EDM cut data (see page 1509)
Stock material (see page 209)
Initializing FeatureMILL databases (see page 1513)

Feed rates for turn/mill features
All feed rates are specified in inches per minute (or millimeters per
minute). The post processor then translates these rates into
degrees per minute or inverse time.
Wire EDM cut data

FeatureWIRE has material databases that describe the cutting
conditions for various materials. Each database entry is uniquely
identified by the material type, material thickness, wire type, wire
diameter, and machine type. The values for each entry are the feed,
water and cutter compensation registers (see page 1509) on the
machine. The database is used to fill in the values in the Cutdata
dialog, if the current cutting conditions match. The material
thickness does not have to be an exact match. The values for the
closest thickness are used.
Feed, water and cutter compensation registers

Most NC machines have an integrated technology database, which
the machine uses to set up the optimum cutting conditions for the
workpiece. This ensures cutting is accurate and uses the full power
of the machine. These settings for the cutting conditions are usually
stored in registers in the controller and are activated by particular
codes in the NC program. The FeatureWIRE software enables you to
settings from a database.
Feed
This field is used to select the generator setting on the wire
machine by setting parameters such as strength, pulse time and
height and so on.
Water
This field is used to select the machine register that defines the
include the water pressure, flow rate and so on.

Comp. Reg.
This field sets the number of the Compensation Register of the NC
machine which is used for wire radius compensation. The value held
within this register is the amount by which the wire is corrected to
the left or right of the defined wire path when the function for wire
correction on the machine is switched on (normally G41 or G42)
Comp. Val
This field sets the wire radius correction value for the given offset
register on the machine. The value is normally the sum of the wire
radius + spark gap + any finishing allowance required. For most
machines, the compensation value is referenced through the
Other fields
FeatureCAM also contains fields that can be customized to enter
machine-specific data, such as spark on and spark off time. For
more information customizing these fields, refer to the XBUILD help.
How feedrates are scaled

Feedrates are specified for a 1" (or 20mm) tool. For tools that are
other diameters, the feedrates are scaled linearly.
For example, the feedrate for a 0.25" (or 5mm) tool is 1/4 of the
table rate.
Changing a feed or speed value for a Milling operation

1 Double-click a Milling feature in the graphics window or the Part
View panel to display the Feature Properties dialog.
2 In the Tree View on the left of the dialog, select an operation, for
example finish.
3 On the F/S tab (see page 983), enter any values you want to
change.
On the F/S tab, click Reset All to return all fields to their
default values.
Changing a feed or speed value for a Turning operation

1 Double-click a Turning feature in the graphics window or Part
View panel to display the Feature Properties dialog.
2 In the Tree View on the left of the dialog, select an operation, for
example finish.

3 Select the Feed/speed (see page 1404) tab.
4 If you want to specify the speed as constant surface speed:
a Click Constant Surface Speed option.
b Enter the Surface Speed.
c Optionally specify the Approach RPM (the initial speed for the
operation while still off the part).
d Optionally specify the Maximum RPM (the maximum
revolutions per minute that the machine can generate).
5 If you want to enter the speed as a single revolution per minute
value, deselect Constant Surface Speed and enter the Spindle
speed.
 If your machine has explicit spindle speed ranges, you may
want to set the RPM Range.
 If you want to specify the Speed as feed per revolution, select
the IPR option and enter the feed rate.
 If you want to specify the Speed as feed per minute, deselect
the IPR option and enter the feed rate.
Default feed/speed values for turning

The default values for feeds and speeds are calculated from the
feed/speed tables. If the feed is specified in Feed per minute (IPM
for inch units), then the feed rate is dependent on the speed value.
When you change the Speed value, the recommended Feed value is
changed.
To see the recommended Feed value when you have entered a
Speed value:
1 Enter a Speed value on the F/S tab (see page 1510) (Milling
features) or Feeds/speeds tab (see page 1510) (Turning
features) of the Feature Properties dialog.

2 Click Apply.
The Feed value is updated to display the new value.
Show/Hide Material
You can use the Show/Hide Material dialog to remove materials from
the Material list in the Feeds/Speeds And Cutting Data Tables dialog
(see page 1508).
To display the Show/Hide Material dialog, select Manufacturing >
Materials > Show/Hide from the menu.
FeatureCAM comes with a long list of materials. Some of these

materials might not be applicable for your shop. You can delete
materials from the database, but when you upgrade to a new
version, these deleted materials reappear. The solution is to hide
unwanted material. When the materials database is updated, hidden
materials do not reappear.
To hide or show a material:
1 In the list in the Show/Hide Material dialog, select any material
you want to show.
2 Deselect any material you want to hide.
3 Click OK.
Click Exclude all items to deselect all of the materials in

the list or Include all items to select all of the materials in
the list.

Initializing FeatureCAM databases
The tooling and feed/speed databases are created using the INITDB
Initialization program in FeatureCAM. This is the program that is run
the first time you run FeatureCAM to create your initial database.
Select where your database is located:

On my local computer — Select this option to use the database on
your PC.
On another computer that I will access over a network (see page 1838)
(SND (see page 10)) — Select this option to use an MS Access
On a SQL Server (see page 1839) (SND (see page 10)) — Select this
option to use an SQL Server network database. Select the Server
Name and the Database Name. To use SQL authentication, select
SQL Server in the Authentication Mode list and enter your SQL
Username and SQL Password. If you use SQL authentication, the
access.
You may also want to use INITDB for the following reasons:
 Adding default tools and feed/speed tables to the database (see
page 1853)
 Recreating tooling and feed/speed databases if they become
corrupt (see page 1854)

Macro programming options
The type of macro code that is created by a specific post processor
depends on whether the post processor supports incremental
programming, local coordinate systems or both.
Incremental Local File type Code created

coordinate
No No .fm Pattern instances are cut
with absolute coordinates
relative to the current
Setup.
.mf with Each FM part is cut with
multiple absolute coordinates
fixture relative to the global
fixture. Pattern instances
in each FM part are cut
with absolute coordinates
relative to the global
fixture.
global absolute coordinates
fixture relative to its local fixture
(G54). Pattern instances in
each FM part are cut with
absolute coordinates
relative to the part's local
fixture (G54).
Yes No .fm Each pattern instance calls
a macro with incremental
coordinates relative to the
pattern instance location.
multiple absolute coordinates
fixture relative to the global
fixture. Pattern instances
in each FM part are cut
with incremental
pattern instance location
based on the global fixture.

(G54). Pattern instances in
incremental coordinates
relative to the pattern
instance location based on
the part's local fixture
(G54).
No Yes .fm A local coordinate system
is established for each
pattern instance. A macro
is called with absolute
pattern instance location.
.mf with A local coordinate system
multiple is established for each FM
fixture part. A local coordinate
system is established for
each pattern instance. A
macro is called with
instance location which is
based on the global fixture.
(G54). A local coordinate
system is established for
each pattern instance. A
macro is called with
instance location which is
based on the local fixture
(G54).
Yes Yes .fm Local coordinates are not
used.

.mf with A local coordinate system
multiple is established for each FM
fixture part. Pattern instances in
incremental coordinates
instance location based on
the part's local coordinate
system.
.mf with Local coordinates are not
global used.
fixture
Toolpaths
You must simulate toolpaths in FeatureCAM in order to produce the
NC code for your part.
If you are using the Student version of FeatureCAM, you

cannot post NC code.
You can use toolpath simulations to check for gouges (see page
1540) and manage tool load (see page 1545).
Click Toolpaths in the Steps panel to display the Simulation

toolbar:
Simulating toolpaths
In FeatureCAM, you can display the following types of simulation:

Centerline — Lines are drawn that represent the center of the tip of
the tool. This simulation method is usually the fastest. The default
colors are:
Rapid moves (G0)
Toolpath lines and arcs (G1, G2, G3)

Index moves
Part line program toolpaths
Ramps and leads
You can change these colors in the Default Colors (see page 129)
dialog.
For 3D and 2.5D NT toolpaths, stepovers are brown and leads

are blue.
2D — For turning, this style shows a cross section of the part. For
milling this style shows a flat (from the top) view of the part, with
each tool being shown in a different color.

3D (sometimes called Visicut) — This style shows a
three-dimensional shaded rendering of the initial stock and
simulates material removal in 3D. You can optionally display the
holder. Any gouge caused by holder interference or the tool hitting
the part during a rapid move is displayed in pink. For turning
simulation a 3/4 cut-away view is optionally available to view ID
cuts.
3D RapidCut (see page 1524) — This shows a very fast simulation of

a 3-axis milling job. You can also use it with 2.5-axis milling, but it
works best for 3-axis milling.
Machine simulation — This displays the motion of the entire machine
tool (see page 1895).
With all simulation methods, video-style controls (see page 1520)

are used to pause, stop, and step through the toolpath, giving you
fine control over the process.

Generating toolpaths
You can use the Simulation toolbar to simulate toolpaths.
To simulate toolpaths:
1 Click Toolpaths in the Steps panel to display the Simulation

toolbar:
2 Select a simulation type (see page 1519).
3 Click Play .
The toolpaths are simulated in the graphics window.
Simulation types
You can select the following simulation types in the Simulation
toolbar:
Show Centerline — Simulates the centerline of the toolpath in

the graphics window using the current view. If Keep toolpaths upon
view change is selected on the Centerline tab (see page 1532) of the
Simulation Options dialog, you can view the part and the toolpaths
dynamically, otherwise the toolpaths are erased when you change
the view.
2D Simulation — The top view of the part is displayed, and the

toolpaths are simulated in different colors. You cannot change the
view during the simulation. When the simulation is complete, you
can change the view, but the toolpaths are erased.
3D Simulation — A 3D simulation of the part is displayed in the

current view. You can dynamically change the view at any point
during or after the simulation. The simulation does not have to be
recalculated, so the view change is instant.
3D RapidCut — You can view this simulation dynamically. For

zooming, the image must be recalculated, but this calculation time
is quick. For panning or rotating, the image does not have to be
recalculated, but a lower resolution version is displayed while you
are transforming the part. This lets you change the view more
interactively.

Machine simulation — A 3D simulation of the part and the
machine is displayed in the current view. You can dynamically
change the view at any point during or after the simulation. The
simulation does not have to be recalculated, so the view change is
instant.
Video-style controls
When you generate toolpaths, they are displayed in the graphics
window using the technique (centerline, 2D, and so on) that you
selected. You can control the simulation using the video-style
buttons in the Simulation toolbar.
The Eject button removes the Simulation toolbar from the screen
and erases the simulation from the graphics window.
The Stop button cancels a simulation and clears it from the

screen.
The Play button restarts a paused simulation.
The Pause button suspends the simulation. The button changes

to the Play button after it is clicked.
The Single step button moves the simulation by one tool move.
The keyboard shortcut for this button is Alt+F3.
After stepping forward, you can also step backward by

selecting View > Simulation > Step Backward from the menu.
The Next operation button simulates until the end of this

operation. Click the triangle to the right of the button to display the
following options:
The Next rapid button simulates until the next rapid tool
move.
The Next tool change button simulates until the next tool
change.
The Next Z level button simulates the next Z of a Z level

toolpath. For other toolpaths, it plays the entire next operation.
The Clear toolpath button is for centerline simulation only. If you

have paused your simulation, or if you are using one of the
simulation tools above, this button clears all of the centerline
toolpaths simulated up to that point.
The Region of interest button limits the portion of part that is

simulated (see page 1521).

The Show tool load button indicates whether or not to display a
graph of the tool load (see page 1545) when the next 3D Simulation
is performed.
To adjust the speed of a centerline, 2D, or 3D simulation, use the
Sim Speed slider on the right-hand side of the controls. Slide to the
right to speed up, and move to the left to slow the simulation down.
The slider of the simulation toolbar also affects the display for
rapidcut simulation. If the slider is all the way to the right, only the
final simulation result is displayed. Position the slider bar further to
the left to see intermediate results.
Pausing a toolpath simulation

You can use the following methods to pause a simulation:
 Click Pause in the Simulation toolbar.

 Set a break point (see page 1550).
 Use the Single step , Next operation , Next rapid or Next

tool change buttons in the Simulation toolbar.
Region of interest
The Region of Interest button in the Simulation toolbar enables
you to limit the portion of the part that is rendered during a 3D
simulation or 3D Rapidcut simulation. There are two main
reasons to do this:
 The rest of the part is not simulated, so simulation time is
reduced.
 If you are using RapidCut (see page 1524), the region is
simulated at a finer resolution.
There are three different types of region:
Stock — This is the default type of simulation where the entire stock
is rendered during simulation:

Feature — Select the name of the feature from the list and a region
around the feature is selected as the region.
XYZ Location — The region is defined by either a box you drag or by

two points whose coordinates you can enter.
The sides of the box are aligned with the X and Y axes.
Preview simulation button

Simulations are normally performed on all features in a Setup. To
simulate a single feature or operation:
1 Double-click a feature.
2 The Feature Properties dialog is displayed.
3 Select the feature or an operation in the tree view.
4 Click the Preview button. The Feature Properties dialog is
minimized. A special version of the Simulation toolbar is
displayed.
5 Click the Play Feature button. See Using simulation video-style

controls (see page 1520) for more information.
6 Click the Eject button. The Properties dialog is maximized.

Part compare
Part compare is a feature of RapidCut simulation that enables you to
compare the results of a toolpath simulation with the actual solid
part model.
Regions that are properly cut are displayed in green. Regions where
extra material remains are shown in light blue (small amount of rest
material) through to dark blue (larger amount of rest material).
Gouged regions are shown in yellow (small gouge) through to red
(large gouge), for example:
To use part compare:

1 Right-click the solid in the graphics window and select Use Solid
As Part Compare Target from the context menu.
2 Specify the part compare settings and tolerances (see page
1533) on the Part Compare tab of the Simulation Options dialog.
3 Run a 3D RapidCut simulation (see page 1524).
4 Select View > Simulation > Show Part Compare from the menu.
To view the actual part model that the simulation is compared with,
select View > Simulation > Show target part from the menu.
If you adjust the view after a part compare has been

performed, a new RapidCut simulation is performed
automatically, but you must run another part comparison.
Part compare also works with the region of interest (see page
1521).

Part compare example
In the example you can see that the trough is undercut.
Examining the trough more closely, you can see that the bottom of
the trough is greatly undercut. This is indicated by the dark blue
color. The light blue regions indicate a slightly undercut region.
undercut
slight
undercut
3D RapidCut simulation
This mode is available only in FeatureCAM 3D. RapidCut simulation
does not apply to turned parts. In this mode the tool is not
animated, but rather the results of the simulation are directly
displayed. For most parts, the simulation takes only a few seconds
to complete.
To start this simulation mode, click the 3D RapidCut button.

If you have set a break point, the result of the simulation is
performed up to the break point. If you have not set a break point,
then the whole NC program is simulated. The slider of the
simulation toolbar also affects the display. If the slider is all the way
to the right, only the final simulation result is displayed. Position the
slider bar further to the left to see intermediate results.
RapidCut simulation does not detect insufficient cutter length

or tool holder gouges.
When you have run a RapidCut simulation you can then run a part
compare (see page 1523) to see how the toolpaths you generated
compare to the final shape.
Undercuts are not supported when using RapidCut.
Indexed and 5-axis parts are not supported when using

RapidCut.
Simulation Options dialog

You can use the Simulation Options dialog to control how toolpath
simulations behave.
To display the Simulation Options dialog, select Options > Simulation
You can use this dialog while a simulation is playing and edit some
options without having to restart the simulation, such as number of
colors and simulation speed. If you display the Simulation Options
dialog during a simulation, the simulation pauses until you close the
dialog. A message is displayed if you run the 3D simulation in a
display showing fewer than 256 colors.
The Simulation Options dialog contains the following tabs:

2D/3D Shaded (see page 1528)
Centerline (see page 1532)
Part Compare (see page 1533)
Wire (see page 1535)
General tab
You can use the General tab of the Simulation Options dialog (see
page 1525) to edit the settings which affect all simulation types.
Tool Colors — Simulates the cuts of each tool with a different color.
This lets you graphically view which portions of the part are cut with
which tool. After you run a 3D simulation, you can toggle this
setting without re-running the simulation. This image shows an
example of tool colors.
For centerline simulation this option displays each tool in a different

color during the simulation.
You can change the color at any time during a simulation by

clicking Change the Simulation Tool Color in the Simulation
toolbar.
Show holder — Select this option to display the tool holder during
centerline and 3D simulation.

Show spindle — Select this option to display the spindle during
centerline and 3D solid simulation.
You must also select Show holder in order to view the spindle.
Simulation Speed — This controls the speed of the simulation.
Position the slider on the scale between the far left for the minimum
(slowest) speed and the far right for the maximum (fastest) speed.
This slider controls the speed of 2D and 3D solid simulation.
The Status section shows the information that is displayed in the
status bar during simulation. Select the check boxes for the
information you want to see in the status bar:
Feed displays the feed rate for the operation being simulated.
Speed displays the spindle speed rate for the operation being
simulated.
Time turns on the display of the machining time estimate.
Operation displays the name of the operation currently being
simulated.
Tool displays the name of the tool performing the current
operation.
Position shows the X, Y and Z positions of the tool on the screen.
If you are using indexing, the angle you are rotated around the
axis is also shown.
This option can slow the simulation.

2D/3D Shaded tab
You can use the 2D/3D Shaded tab of the Simulation Options dialog
(see page 1525) to edit the settings which affect 2D and 3D
simulations.
Resolution — This controls the quality of the image and affects the
speed of the simulation. Set it to a positive value. The default value
is 1. If you double the value (by setting it to 2.0), the tool is
subtracted from the block half as often. If you decrease the value,
the tool is subtracted from the block more often. If the simulation is
too chunky, decrease Resolution by half. If the simulation quality is
acceptable, but it is running too slowly, double the Resolution.
Power graph samples/min — The tool load graph is determined by
measuring the Tool load (see page 1545) a certain number of times
per minute. The Power graph samples/min is the number of samples
to take per simulation minute.
Pause on limits — Select this option to pause the machine simulation
if a solid exceeds the limits of movement specified in the Machine
Design file.
Show pause on gouge dialog — Select this option to display the
Possible Gouge dialog to warn you that a gouge has taken place.
See Detecting gouges (see page 1540) for more information.

Only Play Sim Once (TURN (see page 10)) — For some machines
with two spindles, the simulation plays through the simulation
twice. If you want to see the part simulated only once, select this
option.
Translucent tool — Select this option to change the tool of a 3D solid
simulation to be slightly transparent.
Translucent part — Select this option to change the stock of a 3D
solid simulation to be slightly transparent.
Metallic — If you are using graphics hardware for OpenGL shading,
you have the option to have the 3D simulation look metallic.
Tool cutting tolerance — This tolerance affects the fineness of the 3D

simulation. If this is set high, the simulation appears more faceted.
The lower this tolerance is set, the smoother the simulation
appears.
Tool visual tolerance — This tolerance affects the appearance of the
tool. By increasing this tolerance, the tool appears chunkier. By
decreasing the tolerance the tool looks rounder and smoother, but
the simulation uses more memory and may be slower.
Turn/mill angular interpolation — If the part rotates during cutting,
the movement of a point on the part's surface is approximated with
small linear movements instead of a true circular movement. This
setting determines how accurately the linear movements
approximate the actual movement of the part. Increase this setting
to reduce the simulation time for complex parts. This tolerance is
also affected by the wrapping tolerance and linearization attributes.
Linearization tolerance (5-AXIS SIM) — This tolerance controls the
linearization (see page 1146) of the 3D simulation. If this is set
larger, the simulation of 5-axis simultaneous features is faster, but
may not be entirely accurate as the tool tip of the machine tends to
travel in arcs instead of straight lines. If this tolerance is set
smaller, the simulation of 5-axis simultaneous features is more
accurate, but the simulation is slower.

Rotate view when indexing — This setting applies to 4th or 5th axis
indexed parts and turn/mill parts. With Rotate view when indexing
selected, the simulation rotates the part for an A-axis or B-axis
indexing move in milling or for a C-axis rotation in turn/mill.
Although these rotations provide a more accurate simulation, they
can slow down the simulation especially with simultaneous X- and
C-axis moves in turn/mill. To speed up the simulation, deselect this
setting and the part stays fixed and the tool moves around the part.
You must deselect 3/4 view with lathe ID work to use Rotate
view when indexing with turn/mill parts.
Save result files during RapidCut — Select this option to view
intermediate shaded simulations (see page 1552) in rapid cut mode
(see page 1524). This option is useful if you want to have quick
access to images of the part at the conclusion of each operation.
This option requires a lot of memory and slows down the simulation
process, so we recommend that you use it only when you want to
study the results of each operation carefully.
Save result files during 3D sim — You must select this option to
enable the Use results as starting point (see page 1540) feature.
View independent — Select this option to use our Visicut
engine. When using this engine you can pause a 3D simulation and
change the view at any time. This simulation method uses a solid
model and can be used for any and all 3D simulations. Deselect
View independent to use our Pixelcut engine. Pixelcut does not allow
you to rotate the model, but the simulation runs considerably
faster. Pixelcut is very fast, similar to RapidCut, but it has an
advantage over RapidCut in that it can simulate tools with
undercuts, and it can also simulate cutting from different directions
(3+2). RapidCut is great if you are cutting a long-running toolpath
in 3-axis, such as a mold. Pixelcut is great if you are cutting a
long-running toolpath from multiple directions (3+2).
Show edges — Select this option to outline the edges of the machine
during machine simulation.

This example shows the default behavior with Show edges
deselected:
This is the same example with Show edges selected:
Shadow quality — If you are using graphics hardware for OpenGL

shading you can display shadows in your simulation. The image
shows an example of shadows displayed when using machine
simulation.

If the slider is dragged all the way to the left to None, then shadows
are turned off. As you drag the slider to the right the quality of the
shadows improves. Be aware that this option can slow down the
simulation.
Centerline tab
You can use the Centerline tab of the Simulation Options dialog (see
page 1525) to edit the settings which affect centerline simulations.
Keep toolpaths with view change — Select this option to leave the
toolpaths on the screen while you change the view of the part.
Without this setting, the toolpaths are erased when the view
changes.
Saving the toolpaths for interactive viewing needs extra

memory.
Show animation — Displays the tool as a line drawing as the
centerline toolpaths are displayed. This setting must be selected to
see the toolpaths in an incremental manner. If this option is
deselected, the toolpaths for the entire part are shown together at
the end of the calculation.
Show animation prior to 2D/3D simulation — If the 2D or 3D
simulation button is selected without performing a centerline
simulation first, the toolpaths must be generated. If this option is
selected, a centerline simulation is shown while the toolpaths are
being generated and then the 2D or 3D simulation is then
performed. If it is deselected, then the initial toolpaths are
generated without display and then the 2D or 3D simulation is
performed.

Smooth animation — This controls the display of the tool during
Centerline simulation. With Smooth animation selected, the tool is
displayed without flickering during the simulation. With this setting
deselected, the simulation needs less memory, but may flicker
during the simulation.
Only update display every — This controls the display of the
centerline toolpath as it is calculated. This number controls how
often the toolpaths are displayed. This number is specified in
minutes of tool travel, that is, if the feed rate is 100 inches per
minute and Only update display every is set to 0.5 minutes, then the
screen is updated after the tool has moved 50 inches. A zero setting
causes the screen to be updated for every block of NC code. If the
speed control slider is not set to the maximum value the Only
update display every setting is ignored.
In older versions of FeatureCAM, this was called Toolpath

update.
Part Compare tab

You can use the Part Compare tab of the Simulation Options dialog
(see page 1525) to edit the settings which affect part compare (see
page 1523).
RapidCut conversion tolerance — When mixing 3D solid and RapidCut

simulations (see page 1539), the images must be converted from
one type to the other by FeatureCAM. If you want to improve the
quality of the part when it switches representations, decrease this
tolerance.

Show rest material — Regions that have extra material greater than
or equal to this value are shown in blue. The more rest material
there is, the darker the shade of blue.
Show gouge — Regions with gouges greater than or equal to this
value are shown in yellow. Larger gouges are shown in red.
Regions with rest material less than the Show rest material
parameter or gouges less than the Show gouge number are shown
in green. These areas are considered correctly cut.
If either the Show rest material value or the Show gouge value
is set too small, then the part comparison is very noisy and
difficult to interpret.
Target part tessellation tolerance (see page 1534)
See also Rapidcut simulation (see page 1524) and
Generating/simulating toolpaths.
Target part tessellation tolerance

Part compare works by comparing the part cut by the toolpaths with
the actual surfaces of your part, known at the target part. The
target part is approximated by triangles for the comparison. If this
tolerance is too coarse, then the part compare reports gouges or
rest material where there actually is none and the model has
streaks, for example:
Decrease this tolerance to remove such streaks.

Wire tab
You can use the Wire tab of the Simulation Options dialog (see page
1525) to edit the settings which affect Wire EDM simulations.
Wire visual diameter — The wires used in wire EDM are often quite
thin and difficult to see during a 3D toolpath simulation. Select the
Wire visual diameter option and enter a larger diameter so that the
wire is easier to see during the simulation.
The width of the actual cut being simulated is not affected

by changing this number. The cut is always simulated using
the actual wire diameter that is specified in the condition
Tool cutting tolerance — This tolerance affects the fineness of the 3D
simulation. If this is set high, the simulation appears more faceted.
The lower this tolerance is set, the smoother the simulation
appears.
Tool visual tolerance — This tolerance affects the appearance of the
wire. By increasing this tolerance, the wire looks squarer. By
decreasing the tolerance the tool looks rounder and smoother, but
the simulation uses more memory and may be slower.
Changing this tolerance does not affect the quality of the

simulation, only how the wire is displayed.

Round Stock tab
You can use the Round Stock tab of the Simulation Options dialog to
edit the settings which affect Turning and Turn/Mill simulations.
3/4 view with lathe ID work — This option enables a 3/4 cut-away
view for ID work for turned setups.
This image shows an example of the 3/4 view:
Roundness tolerance — Reduce the tolerance to make round stock

appear rounder and less faceted.

Higher Roundness Lower Roundness
tolerance: tolerance:
Turn/mill angular interpolation — If the part rotates during cutting,

the movement of a point on the part's surface is approximated with
small linear movements instead of a true circular movement. This
setting determines how accurately the linear movements
approximate the actual movement of the part. Increase this setting
to reduce the simulation time for complex parts. This tolerance is
also affected by the wrapping tolerance and linearization attributes.
Show Turn Chuck — Select this option to display a solid representing
the chuck during 3D simulation.
Show turn chuck enabled: Show turn chuck disabled:
Chip Recognition size — During simulation, detached pieces of the

part are removed if they are smaller than this value. For parts with
large stock, you may want to reduce this value to ensure cutoffs are
not hidden.
Display Specific Stock Length — Specify the length of bar stock in
simulations.
Simulating 3D toolpaths
Due to the large number of moves in the toolpaths for a typical 3D
part, animating the entire toolpath using 3D solid simulation is often
time-consuming. Instead, consider one of the following techniques:
 Mix 3D solid and RapidCut simulation (see page 1539).
 Use centerline simulation and pause the simulation periodically
and erase the displayed toolpaths to clear the screen.

 Use RapidCut (see page 1524) and use the Next operation
button to quickly see the results of each operation.
 Use RapidCut (see page 1524) and slow down the speed control
so that you see some intermediate results.
 Use a region of interest (see page 1521) in combination with
either 3D solid simulation or rapidcut.
If you are doing a 3D simulation of a large part, you can

simulate two different views at the same time (see page
1538).
Dual view for 3D simulation

You can carry out 3D simulation with two different views at the
same time, for example:
To use dual simulation for 3D simulation, follow these steps before

you start the simulation:
1 If the current window is maximized, click Restore Down on
the window's control bar (in the top-right).
2 Select Window > New Window from the menu.
A new window is displayed in front of the original window.
3 Arrange the windows, so that you can see them both.
To move a window, click and drag its control bar. To resize

a window, click and drag the blue borders.
4 Use one window to display a zoomed in detail view of an area,
and the other window to display the whole view of the part.

5 Play the simulation.
The simulation plays in both windows at the same time.
Simulated slug removal

In FeatureCAM WIRE, you can graphically remove a slug after the
3D simulation is finished. The region to remove must be totally
separated from the rest of the part.
To remove the slugs:
1 Perform a 3D solid toolpath simulation.
2 Click the Select button in the Standard toolbar.
3 Click the slug in the graphics window. The slug is removed.
4 Click any slugs you want to remove.
5 Click the Stop button in the simulation toolbar (see page 1520)
to clear the screen.
Before slug is After slug is removed:
removed:
Mixing 3D simulation and RapidCut

You can switch between 3D simulation and RapidCut any time the
simulation is paused.
To switch between these two simulation modes:
1 In the Simulation toolbar, click 3D Simulation or RapidCut

to select a simulation type.
2 Click Play to play the simulation.

3 Pause the simulation (see page 1521).
4 Click 3D Simulation or RapidCut to change the simulation

type
5 Click Play to continue the simulation.

Using this method, you can use RapidCut to fast forward to a point
and then use 3D simulation to see a part of the simulation in more
detail.
Use results as starting point

You can save the results of a 3D simulation to use as a starting
point, to save calculation time during subsequent simulations.
To use the current simulation results as a starting point, select View
> Simulation > Use Results as Starting Point from the menu.
To clear the simulation results, select View > Simulation > Clear
Starting Point from the menu.
To use this feature, Save result files during 3D sim must be

selected on the 2D/3D Shaded (see page 1528) tab of the
Simulation Options dialog. This option is selected by default.
You can add the Set sim results as starting point button
and the Clear starting point to the Simulation (or any)
toolbar from the Simulation Category Buttons section on the
Commands tab (see page 27) of the Customize Toolbars dialog.
Detecting gouges
Using 3D simulation, you can visually detect gouges with the tool
(during rapid moves), the tool holder or the spindle. Any gouge is
displayed in pink. If you want the simulation to pause when it
detects a gouge, set the Pause on gouge simulation option. If this
option is set, the simulation pauses if a gouge is detected. Click the
Play button in the simulation toolbar to continue the simulation. See
Simulation options (see page 1525) for additional options.

Machine simulation gouges
Whenever a named part of the machine collides with another solid,
a flashing arrow is displayed and the display turns transparent, for
example:
You must enable Pause on gouge on the 2D/3D Shaded (see

page 1528) tab of Simulation Options to see this feature.
The first collision point only is marked.
The display returns to normal when you continue the
simulation.
The arrow is not shown for tools colliding with stock.
Fixture and clamp collision detection

Normally, only the part model is rendered during a 3D simulation. If
Pause on gouge is set, the simulation pauses if the tool rapids into
the part. In FeatureCAM 3D, 3D simulation can help you detect
collisions with models of clamps or fixtures that you create as solid
models. To detect these collisions:
1 Create a solid model of a fixture or clamps. It can be as
elaborate as you need it to be. You can also use an STL file as a
clamp.
2 Set the solid or solids as a clamp (see page 1542).
3 If you want the simulation to alert you to gouges, select
Simulation from the Options menu. Click the 2D/3D simulation tab
and select Pause on gouge.

4 Run a 3D simulation. During the simulation both the part and the
clamp model are rendered. It may take longer for the simulation
to start up because the clamp model is being rendered.
The simulation has paused at the end of the move because it

gouged the clamp.
FeatureCAM does not come with a library of clamps, but the

3D solid modeling capabilities of FeatureCAM 3D enables you
to create these models from scratch. You can also import
clamp models for other solid modeling systems (see page 82).
If a clamp is defined in an .fm part file, this clamp is displayed

during 3D simulation in a tombstone document (see page
1885).
Using solids or STL files as clamps

When machining a part, it must be held tight with clamps. The
position and shape of the clamps affect the way the part is
machined. It is useful to see the clamps during simulation (see page
1541).
In FeatureCAM, you can set any solids or STL files to be clamps.
To use solids as clamps:

1 If surfaces are not displayed in the graphics window, click Shade
Surfaces in the Standard toolbar.
2 Select any solids you want to use as a clamp:
 Select a face of a solid in the graphics window.
 Select the name of a solid in the Part View panel.

3 Right-click the selected solid and select Use Solids as Clamp from
the context menu.
To see if a solid is used as a clamp, right-click the solid to display

the context menu. If there is a check mark next to Use Solids As
Clamp in the context menu, the selected solid is currently used as a
clamp:
If there is no check mark next to Use Solids As Clamp, the selected

solid is not currently used as a clamp.
To not use the solid as a clamp, right-click the solid and deselect
Use Solids As Clamp from the context menu.
You can set multiple solids as clamps simultaneously. If you try to
set or unset multiple solids as clamps and some of them are
currently set as clamps, the Use Objects As Clamp dialog is
displayed:
Click Use All to use all of the selected solids as clamps.

Click Use None to use none of the selected solids as clamps.
Click Cancel to close the dialog.
Click Help to open this help page.
To use STL files as clamps:

1 Select any STLs you want to use as a clamp:
 Select an STL in the graphics window.
 Select the name of an STL in the Part View panel.

2 Click Shade Selected in the Display Mode toolbar to shade the
selected STLs in the graphics window.
3 Right-click a selected STL and select Use STLs As Clamp from the
context menu.
To see if an STL is used as a clamp or not, right-click the STL to

display the context menu. If there is a check mark next to Use STLs
As Clamp in the context menu, the selected STL is currently used as
a clamp:
To not use the STL as a clamp, right-click the STL and deselect Use
STLs As Clamp from the context menu.
You can set multiple STLs as clamps simultaneously. If you try to
set or unset multiple STLs as clamps and some of them are
currently set as clamps, the Use Objects As Clamp dialog is
displayed:
Click Use All to use all of the selected STLs as clamps.
Click Use None to use none of the selected STLs as clamps.
Click Cancel to close the dialog.
Click Help to open this help page.
Simulating multiple Setups

Many parts have more than one Setup.
To simulate toolpaths for multiple Setups:
1 Select a Setup in the Part View panel, or in the Setups list in the
Status bar to make it the active Setup.
2 Play a simulation (see page 1516).
Toolpaths on the selected Setup are simulated.
3 Select the next Setup in the Part View panel, or in the Setups list
in the Status bar.
The tool is displayed in its home position in graphics window.

4 Click Play on the Simulation toolbar to continue playing the
simulation.
Toolpaths on the selected Setup are simulated alongside the
previous simulation.
5 Repeat for any other Setups you want to simulate.
Tool load
You can use the Tool Load dialog to show a graph of the estimated
horsepower load on the tool during 3d simulation. You can use
these estimates to fine-tune the program to improve performance.
The horsepower values are estimates. If you are approaching

the power limits of your machine, you should lower your feed
rates, or decrease the width or depth of your cuts.
To show the tool load:
1 In the Simulation toolbar, click Show tool load . The Tool Load
2 Run a 3D simulation. The Tool Load dialog displays a graph of the
simulation time and the load on the tool. The current simulation
time and tool load are displayed below the graph.
3 Click Settings to display the Power Settings dialog.
4 Specify the settings in the Power Settings dialog:

 Max. Power — This displays the maximum horsepower used so
far. Display this dialog at the end of a simulation to see the
maximum horsepower used in the entire program.

 Power Limit — Enter a maximum horsepower displayed in the
Tool Load dialog.
 Pause simulation — Select this option to pause the simulation
when the Power Limit value is exceeded.
 Show this dialog — Select this option to display the Power
Settings when the Power Limit is exceeded.
 Clear — This clears the Max. Power value and clears the graph
when the simulation resumes.
5 Click OK to close the Power Settings dialog.
6 Repeat the 3D simulation to show the graph using the updated
settings.
You can control the accuracy of the graph with the Power
graph: samples/min setting on the 2D/3D Shaded tab of the
Simulation Options (see page 1525) dialog.
If you have run a feed optimization (see page 1570), the Tool Load
graph shows the optimized loads in black and the unoptimized loads
in white:

Results window
You can access the Results window in one of these ways:
 Click the tab labeled Results to the top right of the Graphics (see
page 1) window.
 Select View > Show Reports from the menu and select the tab you
want to view.
The Results window is to the right of the Graphics window and
contains the following tabs:
Op List (see page 1548) — This tab displays a list of all of the
operations in the part, with information about each operation such
as the tool used, and feed and speed values.
Details (see page 1555) — This tab contains two reports, select one
of the options at the top of the tab:
 Operation List (see page 1556) details
 Tool List (see page 1556) details
NC Code (see page 1557) — This tab is displayed only after you
have simulated your part.
Turrets (see page 1557) (MTT (see page 10)) — This tab lists the
operations assigned to each turret of the machine. It is displayed
only when using synchronized turning.
To toggle the display of the Results window, click on the tab

name to collapse or expand it.
To adjust the width of the Results window, move the cursor

over the Results window border until the cursor changes to
, then click and drag the border.

Op List tab
The Op List tab contains a table of operations. The table displays the
following columns by default:
Retract
Operation
Feature
Tool
Feed
Speed
Depth
Right-click on any of the column headers to open a context menu
that lets you show or hide these columns:
Setup
Tool Slot
Turret (for multi-turret turning)
Priority
If there is a or a icon in the left hand margin, you have an
error or warning (see page 194) for this operation.
This tab has three main functions:
Simulation control (see page 1550)
Operation ordering (see page 1553)
Operation editing (see page 1554)
During simulation, the yellow arrow icon moves down the

operations list to indicate which operation is currently being
simulated.

Retract — The name of this column is partly hidden by default, but
you can make it wider by clicking and dragging the column divider.
This column applies to the canned cycle (see page 891) setting and
contains the following symbols:
Retract to plunge This short green arrow indicates that the tool
clearance retracts to the lower plunge clearance plane
(G99, "R point level return", on a Fanuc
control) after performing the operation. You
can toggle this arrow to a tall arrow by
clicking the short arrow with the left mouse
button and selecting Retract to Z rapid plane
Retract to Z rapid This tall green up arrow means that the tool
plane retracts to the higher Z Rapid Plane (G98,
"Initial level return", on a Fanuc control) after
the operation. You can toggle this arrow to a
short arrow by clicking the tall arrow
with the left mouse button and selecting
Retract to Plunge clearance from the context
menu.
Retract to Z rapid This gray arrow means that the tool retracts to
plane the higher Z Rapid Plane after the operation,
and you can't change it because it is typically
shown at the end of a canned cycle.
Operation — This is the type of operation performed. If multiple

roughing tools are used, then the roughing passes are labeled rough
pass 1 and rough pass 2.
Feature — This is the name of the feature. FeatureCAM names
features automatically, but you can rename them using the Feature
Properties dialog.
Setup Name — This shows the name of the setup that the operation
is on.
Display of the Setup name column is optional. To add or

remove it from the display, right-click anywhere in the
existing column titles area and select or deselect Show Setup
Tool — This is the type of tool used for the operation.
Tool Slot is where the tool should be loaded in the tool changer. The
tool slot is displayed within the Tool column to the left of the tool
type.

Display of Tool Slot is optional. To add or remove it from the
display, right-click anywhere in the existing column titles area
and select or deselect Tool Slot from the context menu.
Feed is the feed of the tool that performs the operation. The feed
can be in IPR or IPM units depending on the unit set on the
operation.
Speed is the speed in RPM of the current operation.
Depth is the cut depth for the operation.
Priority shows the priority of the operation.
Display of Priority is optional. To add or remove it from the

display, right-click anywhere in the existing column titles area
and select or deselect Priority from the context menu.
The Priority column appears as the last column on the right

(you may need to scroll-right to see it).
Simulation control using the Op List tab

If you display the Op List tab while simulating a part, the operation
that is currently being simulated is indicated with a yellow arrow in
the left-hand margin. You can also set break points in the
simulation. A break point pauses the simulation at a particular
operation. You can then use the video-style controls (see page
1520) to control the simulation.
Breakpoints in op list tab (see page 1550)
Display a single Z level (see page 1551)
Viewing centerlines for an operation (see page 1552)
Viewing intermediate shaded simulations (see page 1552)
Breakpoints
To set a breakpoint:
1 Select the operation that you want to pause on.
2 Click the Breakpoint button. A maroon dot displays in the
left-hand margin. The next time you run simulation it pauses
when it reaches this operation.
To remove a breakpoint:
1 Select the operation that has a breakpoint set on it. (It has a
maroon dot in the left-hand margin.)
2 Click the Breakpoint button.

The dot is removed from the margin to show that there is no
longer a breakpoint on the operation.
To remove all breakpoints, click the Clear all breakpoints button.
To perform a centerline simulation of a single operation:
1 Click the operation that you would like to simulate.
2 Click the Preview toolpaths button. The Preview simulation

buttons (see page 1522) are displayed on the Simulation toolbar.
Single Z level
To display a single Z level of a Z-level rough or Z-level finish
operation:
1 Click the Show Centerline button and click the Play

button to simulate all of the toolpaths for your part.
2 Click the Clear toolpath button.

3 Select a Z-level operation in the Op List tab. Click the arrow
button to see all of the Z-level toolpaths for that operation.
4 Select a Z level from the menu to see the toolpaths for that
Z-level.

Single operation
To view all the centerline toolpaths for an operation:
1 Click the Centerline simulation button, then click the Play

button.
2 Click the Clear toolpath button.

3 Click any operation in the Op List tab.
Intermediate shaded simulations

To view intermediate shaded simulations:
1 Click the 3D shaded button or the 3D Rapid cut simulation

button, then click the Play button.
2 Click an operation to display the machined model up to that point
in the process.
3 At the end of the list of operations is the word, Result. Click this
word to view the final simulation image for your part.

You must select the Save result files during RapidCut option in
the 2D/3D Shaded tab of the Simulation Options dialog to use
this procedure for rapid cut simulations (see page 1524).
Operation ordering using the Op List tab

The OP List tab of the Results panel displays a list of operations in
the order they are performed. By default, the operations are
automatically ordered. You can change the order of the operations
automatically, by specifying rules, or manually.
For automatic ordering:

1 Select Automatic Ordering at the top of the Op List tab.
2 Click Ordering to display the Automatic ordering options

dialog.
3 Select or deselect the following ordering options:
 Minimize tool changes — Groups operations together that use
the same tool. This saves time for you by eliminating or
reducing needless tool changes. You must select this check
box if you want to generate hole macros in the NC code.
 Do finish cuts last — Moves the finish milling operations to the
end of the Setup without altering the order of the finishing
operations. If you want to perform all rough milling operations
before finish milling operations, select the Do finish cuts last
attribute.
 Cut higher operations first — Affects only milling Setups. Select
this option to mill the features from the top of the stock first
and work toward the bottom. If you deselect this option, you
should graphically verify the toolpath before cutting your part.

 Minimize rapid distance — Affects only milling Setups and is
the only ordering option that changes the order of features
specified in the part view. Minimize rapid distance moves to the
next closest feature that uses the same tool as the last
operation. You must deselected this option if you want to
generate hole macros in the NC code.
As you select ordering options, the operations are re-sorted.
4 Click OK.
If you create a new operation with Automatic Ordering selected, the
new operation is automatically sequenced using the selected
ordering options.
For manual ordering:

1 Select Manual Ordering at the top of the Op List tab.
2 To change the position of an operation:
 Select an operation in the Operation List, then click Move item
up or Move item down .
 Drag-and-drop an operation to move it to a new position in
the list.
Right-click one of the column names and select Show Priority

to display the Priority of each operation.
If you create a new operation with Manual Ordering selected, the
new operation is inserted at the end of the list.
Feature and operation editing from the Op List tab

You can edit features and operations directly from within the Op List
tab. Double-click in the column for the operation you want to edit.
The columns open the following tabs in the Feature Properties
dialog:
Column Tab
Operation Milling or Drilling tab for the operation. Here you can
modify manufacturing attributes.
Feature Dimensions tab for the feature. Change dimensions
for the feature or click the Strategy tab to alter the
types of operations that are used to manufacture
the feature.
Tool Tools tab for the operation. Review tooling details or
modify the tooling for the operation.
Feed F/S tab for the operation.
Speed F/S tab for the operation.

Depth Dimensions tab for the feature.
Priority Milling or Drilling tab for the operation. Here you can
edit the Priority attribute.
Retract Single-click this column to change the retract plane
for drilling features. See Combine with similar holes
into canned cycle (see page 1601) for more
information.
If a manufacturing error is detected for an operation that would

prohibit generating toolpaths, a stop sign icon is displayed in the
left-hand side of the row. Click this icon to try and fix the error.
You can also right-click a row of the table and a menu of

feature tabs is displayed. Select the tab name to go directly to
that tab.
See also:
Overriding the tool, feed or speed for multiple operations at once
(see page 1555)
Overrides for multiple operations

To override the tool, feed, speed, or priority for multiple operations
simultaneously:
1 Select the first operation in the Op List tab in the Results
window.
2 Hold down the Shift key and select the last operation so that a
block of operations are selected.
3 Right-click the selected group to open a context menu. It
contains items that begin with the word Override. Select the
menu item to override the tool, feed, speed, or priority of all
selected operations so that they are identical to the first selected
operation.
Details
At the top of the Details tab, there are two options.
 Operation List (see page 1556) — This displays a detailed report
on each manufacturing operation.
 Tool List (see page 1556) — This displays a report on the
automatically selected tools.

Operation List details
The operation details sheet lists information for each manufacturing
step on cut type, cut depth and center point, tool details,
speed/override, feed/override, and estimated manufacturing time.
Part — This shows the filename of the part. If you have not saved
your part, the default part name is FM1.
Date — This shows the date and time that the NC code was
generated.
Stock — This shows the dimensions of your initial stock.
Mat — This shows the material name and hardness of the stock
material.
Setup — This shows the name of the coordinate system that defines
this Setup.
Origin — This shows the origin using the world coordinate system.
Op — This shows the operation number. The operation numbers
start at 1 and are incremented by one for each operation. The
operation number is followed by the feature name, and the
operation name in parentheses.
F/S — This shows the speed and feed of the operation.
Tool — This shows the tool number and type.
Est. HP and Power — When toolpaths are generated, the estimated
horsepower needed for each operation is calculated by using the
depth of cut, width of cut, feedrate, and stock material. The actual
shape of the feature is not taken into account. Instead, just a
simple straight cut is assumed when calculating the estimated
horsepower. This number is reported as the Est. HP. The estimated
horsepower is calculated only for operations that are cut with flat
bottom tools with a fixed depth. This includes 2.5D milling features,
and 3D Z-level roughing and other 3D features with Z increment set.
Tool List details

Whenever you simulate a part, the Manufacturing Tool Detail sheet is
automatically generated. The Manufacturing Tool Detail sheet
provides information on the following:
 Tool name — This shows name of the tool.
 Tool slot no. — This shows the tool slot (or tool pocket) that
contains the tool.
 Tool offset no. — This shows the tool cutter comp. offset register.
If the offset register has the same number as the Tool Slot No. it
is not reported.

More information on changing the Tool Slot No. or the Tool Offset
No (see page 1575).
NC Code tab
To view the NC code for your part click the NC Code tab. This posts
the part program and shows the M and G-codes. It is not a report in
the normal sense, but is often reviewed as a report by those who
understand NC code. You can also display the NC code by clicking
the NC Code icon in the Steps toolbox.
If you hold the Shift key down and then click the NC Code tab,
the underlying ACL code is displayed in the Manufacturing
Feedback window.
You cannot click the NC tab unless you have a dongle installed.
Clicking one of the report buttons shows you the documentation,
but it doesn't save it to disk. Use Save NC (see page 1567) from the
File menu to save the documentation.
If you are using the Student version of FeatureCAM, you

cannot post NC code.
Tool Posts tab (MTT)

The Tool Posts tab is displayed in the Results Window on the right of
FeatureCAM for Multi-Turret Turning documents.
To display this tab:
1 Click the Results tab in the upper right corner of the FeatureCAM
screen.
2 Click the Tool Posts tab at the bottom of the window.
There are two viewing options for the Tool Posts tab, which you
select from the options at the top of the tab:
 Time view (see page 1557)
 Operation view (see page 1558)
Time view
Use the Time view to show a timeline of operations for each tool
post in the document.
A list of spindles is displayed on the left of the window. A list of tool
posts is displayed under each spindle, and the operations are shown
by each tool post. The tool post names are taken from the solid
names in the Machine Design file.

A Time Scale is displayed on the the top of the window which shows
the machining time in minutes. You can shorten or lengthen the
time scale by clicking an dragging it, or by scrolling the
mouse-wheel when the cursor is in the Results window.
In this example, the machine has two spindles and two turrets that
can cut parts loaded into either spindle. The main spindle has a
roughing operation that is performed simultaneously on both
turrets. The identical length of the boxes surrounding the roughing
operations shows that they will take the same time to cut.
Assign an operation to a turret
Operations are assigned to turrets in the Turret tab.
To change the turret for an operation:
1 Select the operation in the Turret tab.
2 Right-click the mouse on the selected operation.
3 Click either Set opers to turret 1 or Set opers to turret 2. (If you
have more than two turrets, additional menu items will be
displayed to allow you to move the operation to any turret.)
Synchronization for a single operation
Operation view
Use the Operation view to show the operations in the order they are
machined.
Operations are displayed beside the feature names in columns
organized by tool post and spindle.
You can drag and drop operations within the grid to change their
order or tool post.

To control which operations are synchronized, that is run at the
same time, you add sync points.
If you want two operations to happen at the same time:
1 Select one or more operations in a column.
To select multiple operations, hold down the Ctrl key.

2 Press and hold the Ctrl key and select an operation from the
other column.
3 Either:
 Right-click on either of the selected operations and select Set
sync point at oper start from the context menu; or
 Click the Set sync at oper start button at the top right of
the Tool Posts tab.
A red line is displayed in the list to show the sync point. The two
operations and all subsequent operations move below it.
You can also use synchronization to force one operation to run
before another.
In the example above, we want the hole2 drill operation on the

Lower turret to run before the main_off off Main spindle operation on
the Upper turret. To do this:

1 Select the operation that you want to run first, in this case hole2
drill.
2 Press and hold the Ctrl key and, from the other column, select
the operation that you want to run next, in this case main_off off
Main spindle.
3 Either:
 Right-click on either of the selected operations and select Set
sync for 'radial_pattern1.hole2.drill' before 'main_off.off Main
spindle'; or
 Click the Set sync for 'radial_pattern1.hole2.drill' before
'main_off.off Main spindle' button at the top right of the
Turrets tab.
A red line is displayed in the list to show the sync point. hole2
drill is above the sync point and main_off off Main spindle and all
subsequent operations are displayed below it.

To remove a sync point, right-click on it and select Remove selected
sync point from the context menu. To remove all sync points, click
the Remove all sync points button at the top right of the Tool
Posts tab.
Click the button to access the options Reset all opers to default
tool post and Remove all oper sync points.
You can also use the Undo sync code changes button, at the top
right of the Tool Posts tab, to remove your most recently created
sync point.
Automatic synchronized turning

Using the Tool Posts tab, you can manually synchronize operations.
For cutting OD turning features, FeatureCAM can automatically
synchronize operations and load the appropriate tools in each tool
post. All of the automatic synchronized turning requires a lathe with
two opposing tool posts.
Pinch turning
Pinch turning is also referred to as balanced turning. It can be used
for either roughing or finishing. With pinch turning, both tools cut
the same curve (although one is above the axis of rotation and the
other is below). The feed rate that is calculated for each tool is
doubled. The first tool actually leaves a spiral of material after its
finish pass and the second tool is positioned at min Z so that it cuts
the spiral of material left by the first tool. The tools cut at the same
time so that the time needed for the finish pass is halved. The tool
that is selected for the operation is automatically inserted into both
tool posts.
The following image shows an example of pinch turning.
The two tools are positioned identically in both the X and Z

axes.

To set this strategy on a turning operation:
1 Bring up the Strategy tab of the turn operation
2 Make sure that the roughing or finishing pass is enabled by
selecting the Rough or Finish option.
3 Select Pinch turning from the menu after the option.
Follow turning
Follow turning is typically performed when roughing. Each tool post
removes a standard depth of cut. The second tool post removes a
depth of cut below the cut left by the first tool post. The tool posts
wait or synchronize at the start of the cut. One tool post is a fixed
distance in front of tool post 2. The image below illustrates follow
turning. The top tool is in front of the bottom tool and the bottom
tool is cutting deeper in X.
To set this strategy on a turning operation:

1 Bring up the Strategy tab of the turn operation
2 Make sure that the roughing or finishing pass is enabled by
selecting the Rough or Finish option.
3 Select Follow turning from the menu after the option.
4 Enter the Follow distance on the Strategy tab of the operation.

Viewing a turret's NC code
For synchronized turning, a separate NC program is created for
each turret. The Part View has an entry called Turrets. Each turret is
listed under this entry. To display a specific turret's NC code, click
the name of the turret in the Part View. The NC code will then be
displayed in the Results window.
Changing the fonts for the reports in the Manufacturing

Feedback window
You have a choice of three font sizes for the text in the Results
window.
To change the font size:
1 Right-click in the window.
2 Select Small Font, Medium Font, or Large Font.
You can also select Fixed Width Font, which means that the
characters line up vertically. This can be easier to read.
Turn operation order

The Turn operation order option of the Manufacturing menu displays
the general outline that is used for ordering turning operations if the
Use operation template default ordering attribute is set. The dialog
that displays lists the types of operations that are created in a
general turned part. The order of the list determines the order that
the operations in your part are cut. If your part does not have a
particular operation in it, that operation is skipped.
By selecting an operation type and using the arrow keys, you can
change the order in which the features are manufactured. After
rearranging the list, click OK. This order is remembered for all of
your parts.
Printing
You can print the tooling lists, operations sheets, NC programs, and
drawing for a part by selecting File > Print from the menu. You can
also preview these documents with Print Preview. Some options are
unavailable in the dialog if you have not generated toolpaths.
To print information from FeatureCAM:

1 Select the information you want to print in the Print Range area
of the dialog. See FeatureCAM file types (see page 69) for more
information.
2 If there is a toolpath displayed and you want to print it, click
Print tool path.
3 If you want to print so that the units of your part are honored,
click Print to scale. This means that a 1 inch line segment
measures 1 inch on the paper. If your part is larger than your
physical sheet of paper only a portion of your part is printed. If
Print to scale is deselected, your drawing is scaled to fit the
paper.
4 Set your Print Quality. The specific options depend on your
printer.
5 Set the Number of copies to print.
6 Click OK. Setup opens the standard Windows printer
configuration window.
Print Preview
Select File > Print Preview from the menu to display the active
document as it would appear when printed. When you choose this
command, the main window is replaced with a print preview window
in which one or two pages are displayed in their printed format. The
print preview toolbar gives you options to view either one or two
pages at a time; move back and forth through the document; zoom
in and out of pages; and start a print job.
Print Setup
Select File > Print Setup to open the Print Setup dialog, where you
specify the printer and its connection.
Name — Select the printer you want to use from the menu.
Properties — Displays a dialog where you can make additional
choices about printing, specific to the type of printer you have
selected.
Size — Select the paper size.
Source — Some printers offer multiple trays for different paper
sources. Select the tray here.
Orientation — Select Portrait or Landscape.
Network — Click this button to connect to a network location,
assigning it a new drive letter.

NC Code
You must generate toolpaths (see page 1516) before you can
create NC code.
After you have generated toolpaths, the NC Code step is available to
you. Click the NC Code icon in the Steps toolbox to open the NC
Code dialog:
The options are:
Optimize feed rates — Click the icon to open the Feed

Optimization (see page 1570) dialog.
Display the NC code — Click the icon to view the NC code on

the NC code tab of the Results window.
Save the NC code — Click the icon to open the Save NC (see
page 1567) dialog.
Re-map the tools — Click the icon to open the Tool Mapping (see
page 1575) dialog.

Creating NC code
After you have run a simulation, the NC Code tab is active.
You can edit the NC Code directly in this tab.

Right-click in the code area to display the context menu.
Use Cut, Copy, Paste, Delete, Find, Replace, and Undo to edit the
code.
Select the size of the text displayed from:
 Small Font
 Medium Font
 Large Font
Fixed Width Font — Select this option to display the NC code in a
fixed-width font. This means that each individual character is the
same width, which can be easier to read because the characters line
up vertically. Deselect it to display the NC code in a variable-width
font.
You cannot post without the dongle connected to the

computer.

The post processors are configured using the XBUILD
program. The documentation for XBUILD, FeatureCAM's post
processor, is available in a formatted electronic version by
selecting Post Processing Guide from the Help menu in
FeatureCAM. It is available directly from the XBUILD program
in online form by selecting Using Xbuild from the Help menu in
XBUILD. The formatted electronic version is available by
selecting Post Processing Guide from the Help menu in
XBUILD. XBUILD and all of its reserved words are documented
in this separate documentation.
You can use the Post Options dialog (see page 1857) to change the
post options and select the controller.
Saving an NC part program to disk

Open the Save NC dialog in one of these ways:
 Click the NC Code icon in the Steps toolbox and then click
the Save the NC code icon.

 Select File > Save NC from the menu.
The Save NC dialog is displayed:
1 Specify the NC Output Directory.

2 If you want the NC code file to have a different name that the
part name, enter a different name for the NC file name. If you
omit the file extension, it defaults to *.txt.
3 If you want to save the NC code for only the current Setup,
select Current Setup. Select All Setups if you want to save
separate NC programs for each Setup.
4 Select what you would like to save to disk from: Operations list,
Tools List of All Setups, Tools List of Each Setup, NC Program, Tool
data, F/S data, Machining Configuration. See FeatureCAM file types
for an explanation of the types of files that are saved (see page
69).
5 Click Create subfolder if you want to create an additional folder
inside the NC Output folder. This folder has the same name as
your part.
6 If you know you want to overwrite all existing folders with the
same names, select Overwrite Existing Files. Otherwise you are
asked to confirm before overwriting any file.
7 Click OK.
Milling macros
Macros can be generated in the NC code for multiple Z levels of a
milled feature. To generate these macros, your post processor must
support them, and you must turn this function on for the post.
1 Select the Manufacturing > Post Process menu option to display
2 Select your post processor.
3 Deselect Disable Macros.
4 Click OK.
5 Select Manufacturing > Machining Attributes from the menu.
6 Select Minimize tool changes.
You could set Minimize tool changes in the Ordering (see page
1495) dialog instead. Using the Default Attributes setting
includes macros for any parts you create.
Minimize tool changes groups operations together that use the same
tool. This saves time for you by eliminating or reducing needless
tool changes. You must select this check box if you want to
generate hole macros in the NC code.
1 Turn off Minimize rapid distance.

This attribute affects only milling setups and is the only ordering
option that changes the order of features specified in the part view.
Minimize Rapid Distance moves to the next closest feature that uses
the same tool as the last operation. You must deselect this option if
you want to generate hole macros in the NC code.
1 Click OK.
Now when you generate NC code, you get macros for the milled
features that are milled at multiple Z depths.
Incremental programming and local coordinate systems

These topics apply to the use of milling macros (also called
subprograms or subroutines) and are activated by selecting the Use
macro calls for each instance in the pattern on the pattern Strategy
(see page 873) tab.
Incremental programming means that the moves in the subroutine
are relative instead of absolute. Instead of moving to a particular
absolute location inside of the macro, the moves are relative to the
current position, such as move two additional inches in X. An
example G-code is Fanuc's G91 for relative programming.
When using local coordinate systems, the coordinate systems are
constantly being redefined outside of the macro and the moves
within the macro are absolute. Examples of this concept are Fanuc's
G92, Heidenhain's Datum Shift and Siemen's G58.
The actual G-code created for a particular pattern depends on the
macro programming options (see page 1514) that are supported by
the post processor.
Turning canned cycles

and for some features you must also activate the canned cycles on
the feature level.
Hole features
dialog, then all hole drilling operations will be computed in the post.
This includes spotdrilling, drilling, bore, ream and tapping

Turn/Bore features
selecting Enable turn canned cycles in the Post options (see page
1857) dialog. You must then go to the Properties dialog for each
Turn/Bore feature, click the Strategy tab and select Use canned
cycle. Also select Reuse path in canned cycle if you want to output
the path geometry only once for both roughing and finishing. You
can also set these values in the default attributes, but remember
these values apply only to features you create after making this
change.
Groove features
Thread features
Feed Optimization
You can use Feed Optimization to even out the tool load by
adjusting the program's feed rates.
To optimize a program's feed rates:
1 Generate the toolpaths.
2 Set the Target horsepower (see page 1574) milling attribute for
the operations you would like to optimize. For 2.5D finish milling
operations, set the Peripheral Feed (see page 1655) options.
3 Select Manufacturing > Feed Optimization from the menu. The
Feed Optimization dialog is displayed.
4 Specify the Feed Optimization parameters (see page 1571), and
click OK to close the dialog.

5 In the Simulation toolbar, click Show tool load , and run the
simulation again to show the tool load (see page 1545) before
and after the optimization. The Tool Load graph shows the
optimized loads in black and the unoptimized loads in white:
In the image above, the tool load spikes have been reduced in
the black (optimized) curve.
6 To remove the optimized feed rates without regenerating the NC
code, select the Manufacturing > Clear Optimized Feeds menu
option.
Feed optimization parameters

These parameters are in the Feed Optimization dialog:
Increase feed when load is below % of target horsepower — The

programmed power is the estimated horsepower displayed in the
Operations List. This percentage is applied to the estimated
horsepower and the feed rate is increased for any move that
requires less power.

But do not increase feed beyond % of programmed feed — Enter the
maximum percentage to increase the feed rate over the operation's
initial feedrate.
Decrease feed when load is above % of target horsepower — The
programmed power is the estimated horsepower displayed in the
Operations List. This percentage is applied to the estimated
horsepower and the feed rate is decreased for any move that
requires more power.
But do not decrease feed below % of programmed feed — Enter the
minimum percentage to decrease the feed rate.
Perform super sampling to calculate instantaneous tool load — Set this
option to create a more accurate sampling of the tool loads by
sampling the loads at a number of points along the toolpath and
then averaging these loads for each NC block. If this option is
turned off a single tool load is calculated for each block of NC code.
Number of times to measure tool load — If Perform super sampling is
selected, then you can enter how many times per minute to
calculate the tool load. To calculate the load for each NC block, the
loads are averaged. The larger this number is, the longer the feed
optimization takes.
This number is relative to the running time of your NC

program. If your program runs more than an hour, we
recommend that you set this number to 100 or less.
Use different feed rates on a single block — A long cut may have
varying tool loads. If you want to break up NC blocks so that you
can more finely control the feed rates, check this option.
This option increases the size of your NC program.

Distance to split toolpath — If you select Use different feed rates on a
single block, then this parameter controls how often the toolpath is
broken up. It is specified as a percentage of the tool diameter.
OK — Click the OK button to optimize feed rates for the part.
See also tool load (see page 1545).

Feedrate optimization example
The top boss of this brake caliper is used in this example.
When cutting this feature in aluminum with the default stepover and
feed/speed table, the horsepower is estimated at 2.0 for the
roughing pass and 0.3 for the finishing pass. A 0.5" tool is selected.
Let's assume that you would like to keep the horsepower
requirements for this cut to less than 2.5. When a tool load is run
on this example, the maximum horsepower required is shown to be
5.9. In order to stay under the stated horsepower requirement, the
feedrate for the roughing pass must be reduced by 50%. Without
feedrate optimization, your only choice for lower the horsepower
requirements are to adjust the width or depth of cut for the entire
operation or change the feedrate for the entire operation.
When you examine the toolpaths of this boss there are light cuts, as
shown in the narrow cut in the first image, and heavy cuts, as
shown in the wide cuts in the second image.
Feedrate optimization looks at the tool load for each move and
adjusts the feedrate to even out the load. Instead of reducing the
overall feedrate for the roughing pass, let's keep the feedrate for
the roughing feature the same and use feedrate optimization to
adjust the feedrates of the individual moves of the toolpath. The
table below shows that feedrate optimization allowed us to reduce
the machining time by 47% while maintaining a more constant
cutter load.

Before Feedrate After Feedrate
Optimization Optimization
Roughing 2:57 1:21
Finishing 0:30 0:27
Total 3:27 1:49
Time 47%
Savings
Max 2.4 2.4
Horsepowe
r
Target horsepower
Target horsepower is the ideal [horse] power for the specified
width/depth of cut and feed rate on the specified stock material
type. By default, it is set on a 2.5D milling operation when a
flat-end milling tool is used. The calculation is simple. The stock
material has a property which specifies the [horse] power per unit
material removal rate. All we need is to calculate the material
removal rate from the width/height of cut and the feed rate. Then
multiply this value and the stock's [horse] power per unit material
removal rate.
During feed optimization, FeatureCAM calculates the sampled
material removal rate along the whole toolpath. If the rate is faster
than the target feed rate, it is decreased. If the rate is slower than
the target feed rate, it is increased.
Set this milling attribute to the required horsepower for the
operation. This number is then used in feed optimization (see page
1570) to even out the tool loads. This attribute is automatically set
to the estimated horsepower for 2D roughing passes performed with
flat end tools. For 3D roughing passes performed with flat end tools,
this attribute is also set to the estimated horsepower as long as the
Z increment attribute is set. For all other operations, this attribute
has no default value.

When toolpaths are generated, the estimated horsepower required
for each operation is calculated by using the depth of cut, width of
cut, feedrate and stock material. The actual shape of the feature is
not taken into account. Instead just a simple straight cut is
assumed when calculating the estimated horsepower. This number
is reported in the Operations list of the Details tab as the Est HP. The
estimated horsepower is only calculated for operations that are cut
with flat bottom tools with a fixed depth. This includes 2.5D milling
features, and 3D Z level roughing and other 3D features with Z
increment set.
When toolpaths are generated, the estimated horsepower required
for each operation is calculated by using the depth of cut, width of
cut, feedrate and stock material. The actual shape of the feature is
not taken into account. Instead just a simple straight cut is
assumed when calculating the estimated horsepower. This number
is reported in the Operations list of the Details tab as the Est HP. The
estimated horsepower is only calculated for operations that are cut
with flat bottom tools with a fixed depth. This includes 2.5D milling
features, and 3D Z level roughing and other 3D features with Z
increment set.
If the Target horsepower is not set for an operation, then its
feedrates are not modified by feed optimization (see page 1570).
This means that if you do not explicitly set the target horsepower
for individual operations, feed optimization will only affect 2D
roughing operations and 3D roughing operations with flat end mills
and the Z increment parameter set.
For 2.5D finish milling operations, we recommend that you

use Peripheral feeds (see page 1655) instead.
Tool Mapping
You can open the Tool Mapping dialog in one of these ways:
 Select Manufacturing > Tool Mapping from the menu.

 Click NC Code in the Steps panel, then click Re-map the tools
to new tool slots in the NC Code dialog.
The Tool Mapping dialog is where you change the tool slot assigned
to the selected tool. You can change the Cutter comp. offset register
for any tool here too.
The dialog has a table at the top. Each row of the table represents a
tool. Select a tool to edit its values in the fields below the table.
Double-click on a tool name, or click the + to the left of the tool
name to see the list of operations that use that tool.
Click the Add tool slots button at the top left of the table to
open the Number of tool slots dialog. It enables you to increase the
number of tool slots listed; you cannot reduce this number.
Tool number — This corresponds to the first (gray) column in

the table and is the current tool slot number for that tool. To move
a tool to a different slot tool slot, enter a new Tool number and click
the Set button, or drag-and-drop the name of the tool in the table
onto the tool slot number in the left column. More than one turning
tool can occupy the same tool slot (see page 1582).

Diameter offset register — Specifies the diameter cutter
compensation offset register number for the tool. This value is
passed to XBUILD as <COMP-NUM>. It corresponds to the Diameter
column in the Tool Mapping table. Enter up to 8 digits.
Length offset register — Specifies the tool length offset register
number. Most lathe controllers have a single register that contains
the length and diameter offset values. In this case, the Length offset
register is the important field to set in FeatureCAM. This value is
passed to XBUILD as <OFFSET#>. It corresponds to the Length
column in the Tool Mapping table. Enter up to 8 digits.
2nd Length (for grooves) — The second length offset register for
groove tools. The default second offset register number is the Tool
number plus the 2nd offset reg. increment in the Turn default
attributes.
To set the offset registers by operation, select the operation

in the table. You may need to expand the tool name to view
the operation.
Most lathe controllers have a single register that contains the

length and diameter offset values. In this case, the Length
offset register number is the important field to set in
FeatureCAM.
Tool ID — This corresponds to the ID column in the table and is the
tool ID register for the tool. This is a seldom-used field that is used
by Bridgeport lathes and occasionally for Cincinnati machines.
The Tool Mapping dialog has these buttons:

Same — This sets the cutter comp. offset registers for all tools to
the value of their tool slot number.
Set — Select a tool in the table, enter a Tool number and click the
Set button to assign this tool a number specific for this part.
This assignment is for the current part only. If you want to

assign a tool to a default tool slot for all parts, use the
Overrides (see page 1785) tab of the Tool Properties dialog.
Save in Crib — This permanently assigns the tool number with the
tool in the database. The tool is then locked in this position for all
parts that use the tool.
Clear in Crib — The tool number slot for the selected crib is
erased. This means you want FeatureCAM to assign a tool number
automatically.

See Tool Manager (see page 1745) for more information on
tooling databases.
Set All — All tools numbers are set to their current values and are
not changed.
Reset All — This returns all tool slot numbers and cutter comp offset
registers to their initial values.
Select Block — Click this button to display the Tool Block Selection
dialog (see page 1579), which you can use to specify which tool
block is used to hold the selected tool.
Tool Life — Tool life management enables you to limit the use of a
tool and automatically switch to another tool when that limit is
reached. It is useful when cutting hard material that may wear out a
tool during a single program run. The table in the Tool Mapping
dialog displays the number of Holes that are cut by each drilling tool
and the Time (number of minutes) that each milling tool is used
during a single run of the NC program. Select a tool in the table and
click the Tool Life button to open the Tool Life (see page 1579)
dialog.
This button is not available until after you have run a

simulation.
Tool numbering
FeatureCAM automatically selects tools from the active tool crib.
These tools are assigned a tool number (also referred to as a tool
slot or tool pocket) for an automatic tool changer. The numbering is
assigned according to these rules:
1 Use the number assigned in the Tool Mapping (see page 1575)
dialog.
This numbering is in effect for the current part only.

2 If no number has been assigned via tool mapping, then the
number assigned to the tool in the crib (the Tool number field for
milling tools or the Tool slot for turning tools), is used as the tool
number. If two tools have the same permanent number in the
crib, the first tool used is assigned the preset number and the
other tool is given a new number.
3 If no number has been assigned via tool mapping or in the crib,
FeatureCAM assigns a tool number.

Tool Block Selection dialog
Use the Tool Block Selection dialog to specify which tool block holds
a tool.
To specify which tool block holds a tool:

1 In the Tool Mapping dialog, select a tool and click Select Block to
display the Tool Block Selection dialog.
2 In the Tool block list, select the tool block solid from the Machine
Design file that you want to hold the selected tool.
3 Select the sub slot in the list that you want to hold the tool.
4 Click OK to close the Tool Block Selection dialog.
The tool block you selected is displayed in the tool mapping tree.
Tool Life
To open the Tool Life dialog, select the tool you want to manage in
the table in the Tool Mapping (see page 1575) dialog and click the
Tool Life button.
The Tool Life dialog has different options depending on if the tool is
a drill or a milling tool.

Drills
The Tool Life dialog for drilling tools has these options:
 Use a single tool. (Turn off tool life for this tool) — Select this option
to disable tool life management for this tool. A single tool
performs all operations that are scheduled for this tool slot.
 Divide the number of holes equally between a specified number of
tools — This option divides the work of the tool, in terms of
number of holes, equally among the Number of tools you specify.
 Limit each tool to a specified number of holes. Create as many tools
as needed — For this option you specify a limit in Number of holes
and additional tools are assigned when the limit is reached. No
tool cuts more than the Number of holes you specify. Additional
tool slots are then assigned to the same tool and the work is
divided among those slots. When the NC code is created, a tool
change is inserted when the limit is reached.

Milling tools
The Tool Life dialog for milling tools has these options:
 Use a single tool. (Turn off tool life for this tool) — Select this option
to disable tool life management for this tool. A single tool
performs all operations that are scheduled for this tool slot.
 Divide the cutting time equally between a specified number of tools
— This option divides the work of the tool, in terms of cutting
time, equally among the Number of tools you specify.
 Limit each tool to a specified number of minutes. Create as many
tools as needed. — For this option you specify a limit in Number of
minutes and additional tools are assigned when the limit is
reached. No tool cuts more than the Number of minutes you
specify. Additional tool slots are then assigned to the same tool
and the work is divided among those slots. When the NC code is
created, a tool change is inserted when the limit is reached.
Time measurements only consider cutting times. Time

spent in rapid moves is ignored.
 Divide the cut distance equally between a specified number of tools
— This option divides the work of the tool, in terms of cut
distance, equally among the Number of tools you specify.
 Limit each tool to a specified distance. Create as many tools as
needed. — For this option you specify a limit in Distance and
additional tools are assigned when the limit is reached. No tool
cuts more than the Distance you specify. Additional tool slots are
then assigned to the same tool and the work is divided among
those slots. When the NC code is created, a tool change is
inserted when the limit is reached.

Restrictions for Tool Life management
 Tool life management is active for milled parts, multiple fixture
parts, and tombstone parts.
 It is not active for turning, turn/mill, or wire EDM parts.
 You must generate toolpaths to activate tool life management.
 For milled parts, tool life management is only active for the
creation of a single program. Therefore it is active for
single-Setup parts, or 4-axis or 5-axis indexed parts. For 4-axis
and 5-axis parts, if Setup dominant is selected, you must also
select Generate single program to enable tool life management.
See the Index tab of the Stock dialog for more information on
indexing. If you have a multiple-Setup milling part without
indexing, you must deselect all but one setup in the Part View to
enable tool life management for this setup.
 Tool life applies only to the use of a tool during the running of a
single program. Tool life information is not stored permanently in
the tooling databases.
Putting two tools in the same tool slot

There are situations in turning when two different tools are loaded
in the same tool slot. For example, two drills may be loaded with
one facing the main spindle and the other facing the sub-spindle.
Use the following steps to implement this tooling setup.
1 Program the part as if the tools are in separate tool slots.
2 Open the Tool Mapping (see page 1575) dialog.
3 Set the Tool number of the two tools to the same number.
4 Set the Length offset register to different values for the two tools
in the same tool slot.
Using an insert drill to drill and bore in the same program

1 Create the Hole feature and override the tool for the drilling
operation to be an insert drill.
2 Create the Bore feature and override the tool to be the same
insert drill.
If you view the tools in the Tool mapping (see page 1575) dialog,
you see that there are two drills listed in the same tool slot, but
they each have a different Length offset register.

Getting the file to the machine
Configuring HyperTerminal (see page 1583)
EZ-UTILS (see page 1583)
Cables (see page 1589)
Serial port pinouts (see page 1590)
Configuring HyperTerminal
HyperTerminal is easy to use to send and receive NC code from the
machine. The first time you use HyperTerminal, set up an icon for
communication with the machine tool. All the parameters for
machine communication are linked to the icon link you created. In
later sessions, you only have to double-click the icon instead of
re-entering the communications settings.
1 Launch Hyperterminal from the Start menu.
2 Double-click the Hypertrm.exe icon. You may or may not see the
.exe extension depending on your computer's configuration.
3 You may be prompted to install a modem. If you do not have
one, click No and set up a communications icon.
4 Enter a name for the icon and pick an icon from the group.
5 Click OK.
6 Set the list box at the bottom of the screen to Direct to COM1 (or
whichever port you communicate through). Click OK and a
communications properties box appears.
7 Your machine tool should have recommended communication
settings. If so, use those settings here.
8 Click OK. HyperTerminal is configured to communicate with your
machine.
You may also need to review how to send and receive files from the
machine.
EZ-UTILS
To run the EZ-UTILS program, double-click the EZ-UTILS icon. When
the EZ-UTILS main screen appears, there are three menus at the top
of the screen: To CNC, From CNC, and Settings. These menus
contain commands to communicate with various CNC controls.

EZ-UTILS is an unsupported module that is provided to
FeatureCAM users free of charge. FeatureCAM regrets that it
cannot provide customer support on this application.
To CNC menu
The To CNC menu shows five commands. These are all used to allow
a file to be sent from the FeatureMILL system to the CNC control via
a hard-wired cable which is attached to both the CNC control and
the FeatureMILL computer.
From CNC menu
The From CNC menu shows three commands. These are all used to
accept a file sent from a CNC control to the FeatureMILL system via
a hard-wired cable which is attached to both the CNC control and
the FeatureMILL computer.
Settings menu
The Settings menu in EZ-UTILS contains three menu choices. These
are used only before sending a part program to the CNC machine.
Resequence lets you renumber the lines in a part program without
re-posting the program. When the Resequence command is selected
from the Settings menu, a dialog is shown asking for the Start
Number and Increment values. When OK is selected, the screen
displays a dialog that allows the operator to select a *.txt file from a
disk volume.
After you have selected a file, enter a filename at the prompt so the
resequenced file can be saved under a new name. The name can
also be the same as the file selected. After a file name is selected,
the file is renumbered. The first line in the program is numbered
with the Start Number and the line number on every succeeding line
in the part program file is incremented by the Increment value.
A message is shown on the screen indicating that the operation was
completed successfully. Click OK to return to the EZ-UTILS menu
level.
Serial port changes two basic communications settings. The Baud
Rate is the speed at which the computer sends data to the CNC.
This speed must be set the same at both the CNC and FeatureMILL
computer.
The Port setting determines which serial port the computer uses to
communicate to the CNC. The communications cable must be
attached to the selected port.
Set directory changes the locations where incoming files from a CNC
are stored. This command should be set before attempting to
download any file, or before establishing communications using the
EZ-Link utility.

Connecting to the SX15 or DX32
When linking EZ-UTLS to the Bridgeport SX15 and DX32 controls,
connect the Bridgeport communications cable to the RS-232 serial
port on the machine and the adapter cable connected to the RS-232
serial port (COM 1 or COM 2) on the computer.
Sending from EZ-UTLS to the CNC:

1 At the EZ-UTLS system:
1 Start EZ-UTLS and select the EZ-Link utility from the To CNC
menu.
2 At the CNC:
1 Select the Load Remote command on the numeric keypad.
2 Press the 4 RECV EZLINK key on the keyboard.
3 Press the F3 LOAD key. A list of files is shown. Press the + key
to enter a new file name for receiving. Be sure to type the
.TXT file extension.
The file should be sent automatically to the control.
Sending from the CNC to EZ-UTLS:

1 Start the EZ-UTLS program and select EZ-Link from the To
CNC menu.
2 At the CNC:
1 Select the 4 Load Remote command on the numeric keypad.
2 Press the 3 SEND EZLINK key on the keyboard.
3 Press the F3 LOAD key. A list of files is shown. Use the cursor
keys to select the file to be sent to EZ-UTLS. Press Enter when
the file name is highlighted.
The file should be sent automatically to EZ-UTLS.
Connecting the EZ-UTLS system to BOSS 8, 9, or 10
When linking EZ-UTLS to BOSS 8, 9, or 10, connect the Bridgeport
communications cable to the BOSS 8 adapter cable, then plug the
round end of this cable into the port on the machine. Connect the
adapter cable to the RS-232 serial port (COM 1 or COM 2) on the
computer. The BOSS 8 adapter cable should be connected to port B
on the CNC.

Use the REMOTE load utility to upload and download
programs less than 12,000 characters long (V2E3, R2E3) and
less than 200,000 characters long for the R2E4. Use DNCLINK
(Direct Numerical Control) when the part programs are too
long to reside in the CNC memory.
Sending from EZ-UTLS to the CNC

To transfer a program from disk into the memory of the BOSS
8/9/10:
1 Select Set Directory in the Settings menu.
2 Choose the directory from the dialog.
3 Click Open.
4 Select EZ-Link from the To CNC menu.
2 At the CNC:
1 Under OPTIONS, set the baud rate to 4800.
2 Press the LOAD/CLEAR/EDIT button once.
3 Press 0 (REMOTE), then EXECUTE.
4 Press 0 (FROM REMOTE), then EXECUTE.
5 Enter the file name and press EXECUTE (if the file name is
numeric). If the file name is NOT numeric, just press
EXECUTE, and the EZ- UTLS system prompts for the file
name. Enter the file name, then press RETURN.
Sending from the CNC to EZ-UTLS

To transfer a program to disk from the memory of the BOSS
8/9/10:
3 Click Open.
4 Select EZ-Link in the To CNC menu.
2 At the CNC:
1 Under OPTIONS, set the baud rate to 4800.
2 Press the LOAD/CLEAR/EDIT button once.
3 Press 0 (REMOTE), then EXECUTE.d) Press 1 (TO REMOTE),
then EXECUTE.

4 Enter the file name and press EXECUTE (if the file name is
numeric). If the file name is NOT numeric, just press
EXECUTE, and the EZ- UTLS system prompts for the file
name. Enter the file name, then press RETURN.
Connecting to the EZ-Trak SX
When linking EZ-UTLS to an EZ-Trak SX, connect the Bridgeport
communications cable to the RS-232 serial port on the machine and
the EZ-UTLS adapter cable connected to the RS-232 serial port
(COM 1 or COM 2) on the computer.
Sending from EZ-UTLS to the CNC

To transfer a program from EZ-UTLS into the memory of the EZ-Trak
control:
3 Click Open.
4 Select EZ-Link in the To CNC menu.
2 At the CNC:
1 Press UTILS.
2 Press 7 Send or Receive Files.
3 Select the EZ-Link communications protocol, by pressing 1.
4 Select either 3 or 4, receive an EZ-TRAK (.PGM) file or other
(.TXT).
5 Enter the numeric name of the file to be sent from EZ-UTLS.
Sending from the CNC to EZ-UTLS

To transfer a program to EZ-UTLS from the memory of the EZ-Trak:
3 Click Open.
4 Select EZ-Link from the To CNC menu.
2 At the CNC:
1 Press UTILS.
2 Press 7 Send or Receive Files.
3 Select the EZ-Link communications protocol, by pressing 1.

4 Select either 1 or 2, send an EZ-TRAK (.PGM) file or other
(.TXT).
5 Enter the numeric name of the file to be sent to the EZ-UTLS
system.
Connecting to Heidenhain Interact I and II
When linking EZ-UTLS to Interact I or II or to Bridgeport R2C3 Series I
or II with the Heidenhain TNC 145 control, connect the Bridgeport
communications cable to the RS-232 serial port on the machine and
the adapter cable to the RS-232 serial port (COM 1 or 2) on the
computer.
Sending from EZ-UTLS to the CNC:

If downloading from EZ-UTLS, make sure that the text file is in the
proper Heidenhain format. See the Heidenhain TNC 145 Operation
Manual for details.
1 Select Serial Port from the Settings menu.
2 Set the Baud Rate to 2400 and click OK.
3 Select Heidenhain from the To CNC menu.
4 Select a directory and file name from the dialog.
2 At the TNC 145:
1 Select the MANUAL mode.
2 Click EXT.
3 Enter 2400 for the baud rate and press ENT.
4 Now choose the PROGRAMMING and EDITING mode.
5 Press the EXT key. The CRT displays the message: EXTERNAL
DATA INPUT.
1 On the screen, the message Data Transfer in Progress appears.
Sending from the CNC to EZ-UTLS:

1 Select Serial Port from the Settings menu.
2 Set the Baud Rate to 2400 and click OK.
3 Select Heidenhain from the From CNC menu.
4 Select a directory and enter a new file name in the dialog.
5 Click Open.
2 At the TNC 145:

1 Select the MANUAL mode.
2 Press the EXTernal key.
3 Enter 2400 for the baud rate and press RETURN.
4 Select either PROGRAM RUN modes (SINGLE BLOCK or FULL
SEQUENCE).
5 Enter the starting block number of the program, then press
the GO TO key.
6 Press EXTERNAL key. The CRT displays the message
EXTERNAL DATA OUTPUT.
1 The message Data Transfer in Progress appears on the screen.
Cables
You need an RS-232 adapter cable to connect the computer to the
communications cable leading to the CNC machine. The adapter
cable may also be used to connect the computer to a serial port
expander (ABC switch box). The adapter cable can be plugged into
the COM1 or COM2 port, at the back of the main unit.
The cable can be a 9-pin or 25-pin connector at the computer

end. The manual contains an illustration of the required wiring
pattern for the cable.

Serial port pinouts
The necessary communications cables for connecting the computer
to any device or CNC control can be made with parts available from
most electronics supply stores. The pin functions for a standard
25-pin RS-232 port and a standard 9-pin RS-232 port are shown
below. Check your computer owner's manual for the correct
information.

Customize Manufacturing
Click Customize Mfg. in the Steps panel to display the Customize
Manufacturing dialog:
The options are:
Establish my manufacturing preferences — Click to open the

Machining Attributes (see page 1591) dialog. You can also open this
dialog by selecting Manufacturing > Machining Attributes from the
menu.
Setup FeatureCAM's virtual tool cribs — Click to open the Tool

Manager (see page 1745) dialog. You can also open this dialog by
selecting Manufacturing > Tool Manager from the menu.
Refine FeatureCAM's feed & speed tables — Click to open the

Feeds/Speeds and Cutting Data Tables (see page 1508) dialog. You
can also open this dialog by selecting Manufacturing > Feeds/Speeds
and Cutting Data Tables from the menu.
Configure post processor. — Click to open the Post Options (see

page 1857) dialog. You can also open this dialog by selecting
Manufacturing > Post Process from the menu.
Machining attributes
You control the default behavior for manufacturing with default
machining attributes. You set these attributes so that the system's
default behavior represents the practice of your shop.

To override these settings for a particular instance of a
feature, you use Feature attributes (see page 884). These
attributes are set directly on the feature.
You can save machining attribute settings as Machining

configurations (see page 1741).
Select Manufacturing > Machining Attributes from the menu to display
the Machining Attributes dialog:
At the top of the dialog, select one of three categories of machining

attributes from Mill (see page 1597), Turn (see page 1685), and
Wire (see page 1716).

Default values (inch and mm)
The following tables show the default machining attribute values in
inches and metric for milling (see page 1593), turning (see page
1595), and wire (see page 1596).
Milling
Type Attribute Default value

inch mm
Milling Minimum tool diameter 0.125 5.000
Z rapid plane 1.000 25.000
Rough tool diameter "0.5, 0" "15, 0"
Spline tolerance 0.001 0.025
Wrap tolerance 0.0001 0.003
Chamfer depth 0.100 3.000
Z clearance plane 0.100 3.000
Tap Z clearance plane 0.100 3.000
Z ramp clearance 0.010 0.030
Z index clearance 1.000 25.000
Finish allowance 0.050 1.250
Finish bottom allowance 0.050 1.250
Semi-finish allowance 0.020 0.500
Semi-finish bottom 0.020 0.500
allowance
Side finish overlap 0.100 3.000
Wind fan radius 0.100 3.000
Deburr radius 0.000 0.000
Min corner radius 0.000 0.000
Helix linear approx. tol. 0.001 0.025
Face depth of cut 0.250 5.000
Face finish allowance 0.020 0.500
Tool diameter selection 0.002 0.050
tolerance

Thread Linear ramp dist. 0.100 3.000
milling
Helix linear approx. tol. 0.001 0.025
Drilling Bore X shift 0.000 0.000

Bore Y shift -0.010 -0.250
Spot drill edge break 0.005 0.100
Turn spot drill edge 0.005 0.100
break
Spot drill default size none none
Pilot drill diameters none none
Turn pilot drill diameters none none
3D milling Rough tolerance 0.005 0.100
Finish tolerance 0.001 0.025
Scallop height 0.001 0.025
Check allowance none none
Stepover 0.050 1.250

Turning

inch mm
Turn X finish allowance 0.005 0.100
Z finish allowance 0.005 0.100
X semi finish allowance 0.002 0.050
Z semi finish allowance 0.002 0.050
Rough DOC 0.200 5.000
Rough constant DOC 0.200 5.000
Withdraw length 0.025 0.500
Clearance 0.100 3.000
Cutter comp lead 0.100 3.000
distance
Cutter comp min. corner 0.000 0.000
radius
Turn groove Rough DOC 0.500 12.000
Chamfer extend distance 0.005 0.100
Rough liftoff distance 0.000 0.000
Finish liftoff distance 0.000 0.000
Peck retract distance 0.050 1.250
Turn cutoff Peck retract distance 0.050 1.250
Turn thread Start clearance 0.250 5.000
End clearance 0.100 3.000
Step1 0.000 0.000
Step2 0.000 0.000
Groove additional depth 0.005 0.100
Turn bar Feed rate 50.000 1250.00
feed 0

Wire

inch mm
Wire Stop length 0.500 15.000
Overlap 0.000 0.000
Contour overlap 0.000 0.000
Retract length 0.020 5.000
Offset total stock 0.150 4.000
Contour total stock 0.050 1.250
Leave allowance 0.000 0.000
Cutoff leave 0.010 0.250
allowance
Lead length 0.100 3.000
Side lead length 0.250 5.000
Inside corner radius 0.050 1.250
Outside corner radius 0.050 1.250
Corner options 0.250 5.000
length
Corner options width 0.050 0.250
Upper guide 10.000 250.000
Lower guide -2.000 -50.000
4th axis linear 0.010 0.250
approx.
2 axis pocket total 0.000 0.000
stock

Milling default machining attributes
The Machining Attributes dialog for Mill parts has these tabs:
Drilling (see page 1598, see page 889)
Pecking (see page 1605)
Milling (see page 1607)
Stepover (see page 1618)
Lead/Ramp (see page 1637)
Coolant (see page 1647)
Misc. (see page 1648)
Operations (see page 1657)
Thread Mill (see page 1660)
Surface Mill (see page 1666)
Surface Leadin (see page 1672)
Tool selection (see page 1676)
Facing (see page 1681)

Drilling tab
Spot drill — Enable this option to add a spot drill operation to the
Hole feature.

Machining Attributes (see page 1591). See the Strategy (see
page 889) tab.

Spot drill edge break — To create an edge break or chamfer using
the spot drill tool, enter the radial distance of the edge
break/chamfer. The spot drill creates an edge break/chamfer by
cutting deeper than it normally would to create the spot drill
operation alone. The default value 0.0050" or 0.1 mm results in a
chamfer 0.0100" or 0.2 mm greater than the hole size. The angle of
the chamfer depends on the spot drill tool used.
created.
Spot drill diameter % — This percentage is used to select a spot
drilling tool. A value of 100 specifies that the spotdrill should be the
same diameter as the hole. A smaller value creates only a starter
hole.
Use L/D compensation — This reduces speed and feed for holes that
have a ratio of hole depth (L) to hole diameter (D) of greater than
2.5. The greater this ratio, the greater the speed/feed reduction.
Combine similar holes into canned cycle (see page 1601) — By
Retract to
Z rapid plane: Plunge clearance:
surface.

Click the Drill/Mill Options (see page 1604) button to set drill/mill
parameters.

Machining Attributes (see page 1591). Set it on the Strategy
(see page 889) tab.
Dwell — Enter the amount of time, in seconds, for the spot drill to
dwell for a feed-dwell-feed cycle.
Max. tap spindle RPM — This is the maximum speed (in RPM) for
tapping.
Drill cycle — This affects how FeatureCAM performs a drill operation.
Select one of the following from the menu:
 Deep Hole — The tool pecks and retracts to the Plunge clearance
and returns to the previous depth. This cycle is posted using the
Deep Hole format in XBUILD.
 Chip Break — The tool stops feeding only to break the chip. This
cycle is posted using the Chip Break format in XBUILD.
Tap cycle affects how a tap operation is performed. Select from:
 Floating — Floating and tension-compression holders
 Rigid — This is most commonly available on current machines
and returns to the previous depth.
 Chip Break — The tool stops feeding only to break the chip.
All cycles use the same Tap program format, but logical reserved
words exist in XBUILD to distinguish the tap type.
Ream cycle — This affects how a ream is performed. The choices are
FDF (feed-dwell-feed), FF (feed-feed), and FSR (feed-stop
spindle-retract).
If you select FF, the cycle is posted using the Bore (F-F) format in
XBUILD. FDF uses the Bore (F-D-F) format, and FSR uses the Bore
(F-S-R) format.
Bore cycle — This affects how a bore is performed. Select one of the
following from the menu:
 FF — The cycle is posted using the Bore (F-F) (feed-feed) format
in XBUILD.

 FDF — The cycle is posted using the Bore (F-D-F)
(feed-dwell-feed) format in XBUILD.
 FSR — The cycle is posted using the Bore (F-S-R) (feed-stop
spindle-retract) format in XBUILD.
 No Drag — The cycle is posted using the Bore (No Drag) format in
XBUILD.
No drag X shift and No drag Y shift — These attributes affect the
amount that the boring tool shifts prior to retracting in No-drag
boring.
Pilot diameter(s) — This enables and sets a list of drill sizes used to
drill pilot holes. Enter a comma-separated list of drill diameters. For
example, entering 0.5, 1, 1.5 in inches, causes holes to be pilot drilled
with the half inch drill for final hole sizes up to an inch. A hole in
excess of 1.5" is pilot-drilled with all three of the specified drills
before being drilled to size. No list of drill sizes turns off pilot drilling
for the feature, although this attribute can also be set up as a
default for all parts.
Combine similar holes into canned cycle

The Combine similar holes into canned cycle attribute applies to
drilling operations.
In previous versions of FeatureCAM this attribute was called

Retract to Plunge Clearance. The Retract to Plunge Clearance
attribute still applies to milling operations.
By default, FeatureCAM retracts the tool to the higher Z rapid plane
between operations. Although this is a safe assumption, it can result
in inefficient NC part programs because between each operation the
program cancels (G80) and then re-establishes (G81, G83, and so
on) the canned cycle mode. The figure below shows such an
inefficient program.

:10
(9-13-2001)
N25G00G17G40G49G80
N30G30G91Z0
N35T1M6
N40G00G54G90X0.Y0.S38
19M03
N45G43H1Z1.0M08
N50Z0.1
N55G83R0.1Z-1.0Q0.25F
14.3 Tool change location
N60G80 Z rapid plane
N65Z1.0
N70X0.5
N75Z0.1
N80G83R0.1Z-1.0Q0.25F
14.3
N85G80
N90Z1.0
N95X1.0
N100Z0.1
N105G83R0.1Z-1.0Q0.25
F14.3
N110G80
N115Z1.0
N120G0G91G28Z0M09
N125G49G90
N130M30
The Combine with similar holes into canned cycle attribute serves two
functions. First it creates more efficient NC code by entering canned
cycle mode only once. It also causes the tool to retract to the lower
Plunge Clearance plane after drilling each hole.
If the Disable Macros is deselected in the Post Options dialog, the
hole locations are included in a macro as shown in the Fanuc NC
code sample below.

:10
(9-13-2001)
N25G00G17G40G49G80
N30G30G91Z0
N35T1M6
N40G00G54G90X0.Y0.S38
19M03
N45G43H1Z1.0M08
N50Z0.1
N55G83R0.1Z-1.0Q0.25F Tool change location
14.3
Z rapid plane
N60P1001M98
N65G80 Plunge clearance
N70G00Z1.0
N75G0G91G28Z0M09
N80G49G90
N85M30
:1001
N90G91
N95X0.5
N100X1.0
N105G90
N110M99
If Disable Macros is selected, the NC code is still efficient, because

canned cycle mode is entered only once. The code sample shown
below is Fanuc NC code for a hole pattern with Combine with similar
holes into canned cycle enabled, but without macros.
:10
(9-13-2001)
N25G00G17G40G49G80
N30G30G91Z0
N35T1M6
N40G00G54G90X0.Y0.S3819M03
N45G43H1Z1.0M08
N50Z0.1
N55G83R0.1Z-1.0Q0.25F14.3
N60X0.5
N65X1.0
N70G80
N75G00Z1.0
N80G0G91G28Z0M09
N85G49G90
N90M30

Drill/mill options (machine level)
You control machine-level drill/mill in the machine-level Drill/Mill
Options dialog:
Select the strategies that you want to enable. The options are:
 Drill full diameter
 Rough with Drill, Finish with Bore
 Rough with Drill, Finish with Ream
 Rough with Endmill, Finish with Bore
 Rough with Endmill, Finish with Ream
 Rough with Endmill, Finish with Endmill
 Finish Bottom
 Rough with Endmill to full diameter — this option lets FeatureCAM
rough to the final hole diameter without having a finish pass.
 Use hole milling canned cycle if available ( ) — For machines that
support hole/bore milling, such as Heidenhain Cycle 208,
Siemens POCKET4, Fagor G88, and Haas G12/13. The hole
milling canned cycle is posted using the hole milling format in
XBUILD. If you enter a G code, for example G208, for the Hole
Milling cycle in the NC Codes dialog in XBUILD, that code
displays in the brackets after this attribute name, for example
Use hole milling canned cycle if available (G208).
If you select more than one strategy, FeatureCAM works down the
strategy list in the dialog until it finds a strategy that can complete
the hole.

Use continuous spiral — Select this option to use an NT Continuous
Spiral toolpath, which eliminates nearly all stepovers.
Use continuous spiral Use continuous spiral
deselected selected
You can use Helical ramping with Use continuous spiral, for example:
Traditional spiral toolpaths can produce spikes in tool load. Another

advantage of NT continuous spiral is that the tool load increases
gradually.
Pecking tab

Pecking applies to Deep Hole, Chip Break, and Tap operations.
FeatureCAM supports four styles of pecking. These styles are listed
in the post processor. Three different attributes control the pecking
and they are used differently depending on the style of pecking.
FeatureCAM checks the pecking type in the currently loaded post
processor to duplicate canned cycles when simulating toolpaths. Set
these attributes separately for Drilling and Tapping operations:
 First peck — This is the depth of the first peck of a
drilling/tapping operation specified as a percentage of tool
diameter. If the depth of the hole is less than First peck, the hole
is drilled in a single peck.
 Second peck — This is the depth of the second peck of a
diameter. The post handles the conversion.
Minimum peck — This is the minimum step size for a peck used for
value reduction pecking methods or factor reduction pecking
methods.
The peck style is specified in the CNC file, and determines which of
the tool's pecking depth values are used to calculate the pecking
depth values for the operation:
Fixed Steps
The NC code specifies one depth (First peck) and all the steps peck
at that depth. Second peck and Minimum peck have no effect in this
case.
Two Steps
The NC code specifies two depths. The first step pecks at the first
depth (First peck) and all the subsequent steps peck at the second
depth (Second peck). Minimum peck has no effect in this case.
Value Reduction
The NC code specifies the first depth (First peck), a reducing value
(First peck - Second peck), and a minimum depth (Minimum peck).
The first step pecks at the first depth. Each subsequent step is
reduced by the reducing value until the minimum depth is reached.
Factor Reduction
The NC code specifies the first depth (First peck), a reducing factor
(Second peck/First peck), and a minimum depth (Minimum peck).
The first step pecks at the first depth. Each subsequent step is
reduced by the reducing factor until the minimum depth is reached.

Milling tab
edge.
Bi-directional rough — Enable this option to mill in both directions. If
disabled, conventional roughing happens and the cutting path
moves in one direction with rapid, above-stock return movements
to set up for the next pass. Climb mill controls the cutting direction.
Use finish tool — If disabled, the same tool is used for both the
Rough and Finish passes. Enable Use finish tool to create a new tool
for finishing. This finishing tool is identical to the tool that was
selected for roughing. The name of the new tool is appended with
-finish. For example if the roughing tool is named endmill1.0, the
finishing tool is called endmill1.0-finish. This finishing tool is not
permanently assigned to a tool crib, it is a temporary tool for use in
the current document only.


Finish cutter comp (see page 1614) — Enable this option to use
cutter compensation for the Finish and Semi-finish passes of a
milled feature.
Rough cutter comp — Select this option to enable cutter
compensation for the rough pass of all milled features in the current
document by default. See Finish cutter comp for more information.
Chamfer cutter comp — Select this option to enable cutter
compensation for chamfer operations of all milled features in the
current document by default.
Partline program — This is a particular kind of cutter compensation
for milled features.
Part line program is a particular kind of cutter compensation for
tool. The tool selected to cut the feature is still important even when
be sure that the actual tool diameter does not deviate too far from
the selected finishing tool is small enough to cut your entire feature.
FeatureCAM automatically calculates the entrance point of your
finish pass and adds a linear move and a ramping move (based on
the Ramp diameter attribute) to your finish pass to accommodate
cutter compensation. If you receive a warning in the operations list
such as "Can't find ramp in/out arc" or "Can't extend end of open
profile" then correct the problem by decreasing the Ramp diameter
attribute or changing the Pre-drill point.
Minimize tool retract — Enable this option (see page 966) to reduce

This example shows normal retracting.
This is the same example with Minimize tool retract enabled.
Setting this attribute can result in more slot cutting. Study the
toolpaths carefully before cutting.
This feature is helpful for 2-axis mills.
If Minimize tool retract is selected, the setting for the default
attribute, Min. rapid distance, is ignored. The tool does not retract
unless to prevent gouging.
This attribute only affects how the tool retracts within a single
operation. It does not control how operations are ordered. For this
functionality, see Min. rapid distance.
NT toolpaths
Pocket feature

Boss feature

Individual rough levels (see page 963) — The rough pass is often
performed at multiple Z levels (see page 963) due to the depth of
the feature. Enable this option to list them all so that you can edit
the attributes of each level separately.

Depth first — Enable this option to cut each region of a feature
completely before moving on to another region. The toolpaths
descend in Z.
If this option is deselected then all regions of a feature are cut at
one Z level before descending to a deeper Z-level.
This attribute has no effect if the toolpaths for your feature do

not rapid between regions of the feature.
The images below show how regions of a feature are completely cut
before moving on to another region.
If you are using Multiple roughing tools (see page 1676) or Multiple
finishing tools (see page 994), to efficiently rough out tight corners,
Depth first is also useful. The images below show a tool finishing
tight corners in a depth first manner.

page 936) tab.
Reorder
The Reorder attribute tells FeatureCAM to re-sequence the toolpaths
to minimize retractions while trying to avoid full width cuts. Use
Reorder when you have a part where several separate regions are
cut. If you want the toolpaths to move directly across a surface
without worrying about retractions, deselect Reorder.

For Z-level operations (rough or finish), the Reorder attribute
enables zone machining, where the toolpaths descend in the Z (or
-Z) direction if that is more efficient than cutting the entire part in
complete Z levels. The phone handset example below shows that
the toolpaths cut the top of the part in complete Z levels and then
cut one side and the other.

Select from:
Clamp avoidance — Click this button to display the Clamp Avoidance
dialog (see page 1615) where you can specify the options for
avoiding clamp solids in 3 axis and NT toolpaths.
Use new ID/OD groove toolpath — Select this option to use the new
Side Groove toolpath style (see page 69), or deselect it to enable
backwards compatibility.
When this option is selected, these changes are made to side
groove toolpaths:
 The plunge and retract moves are checked for gouges.
You can disable the gouge checking on plunge and retract moves
by deselecting the Plunge gouge check option on the Strategy tab
 You can use wind fan finishing for the finish operation.

To specify the wind fan settings, click Wind Fan on the Strategy
tab of the Feature Properties dialog, and use the Wind Fan Finish
 You can use arc lead-in moves for the finish operations.
Otherwise you can only use a linear lead-in move.
To use an arc lead-in move, select Arc Lead on the Stepovers tab
 You can set a start point for the finish pass.
To set a start point, use the Start point attribute on the Plunge
Trochoidal slotting
Trochoidal cut — Enable this option to use a trochoidal cut on a
Simple Groove. Select the direction of the trochoids for a trochoidal
cut, from CW (clockwise) or CCW (counter-clockwise).
Instead of a simple slotting cut, the tool uses a series of circles, for
example:
A trochoidal toolpath reduces the load on the tool.

Max tool diameter % — This is the percentage of the groove width
that is used to determine the diameter of the tool that will be
selected.
Max step distance % — This is specified as a percentage of the tool
diameter and represents the maximum distance between
neighboring circles of the toolpath.
Cutter comp
FeatureCAM.

each feature.
is output at all.
Clamp Avoidance dialog

To open the Clamp Avoidance dialog, click the Clamp avoidance
button on the Milling (see page 1607) tab of the Machining Attributes
dialog.
Automatic clamp avoidance — Select this option to automatically

avoid solids that are marked as a clamp. To mark a solid as a
clamp, right-click its name in the Part View and select Use Solids as
Clamp in the context menu.

This option applies to 2.5D NT-style toolpaths and 3D
toolpaths. You must use NT-style toolpaths for both the
Rough and Finish operations to use this option for a 2.5D
part.
Allowance — Enter the minimum distance that you want to leave
around clamps.
Axial allowance — To set separate axial and radial allowances, select
this option and enter the minimum axial (XY) distance that you
want to leave around clamps. If you enable Axial allowance, the
Allowance value is applied to the radial (Z) distance only.
For 2D features, the Axial allowance is ignored, and the Allowance is
used as the radial and axial allowance.
Example:
This example bracket part is held in place by four clamps:
With Automatic clamp avoidance disabled, there is a collision with the

clamps in the bright pink areas:

Here is the back clamp in more detail, the front of the clamp has
been machined away:
With Automatic clamp avoidance enabled, the clamps are avoided:
You can see the upstands of material, which have been left around
the clamps:

Stepover tab
Rough pass — Select this option to have a rough pass by default for
all milling features.
Depth % — Enter the percentage of the tool Diameter to use for the
Rough depth of cut. You can override the depth of cut (see page
1023) value in several places.
Equal depth of cut — Enable this option to make each Z step equal
depth.
If Equal depth of cut is selected, FeatureCAM calculates the depth of
cut like this:
1 Divides the feature depth, for example 10 mm, by the depth of
cut (see page 1023) you set to get the number of steps.
2 Divides the depth by the number of steps to get the actual depth
of cut (the depth of cut for each step is equal).
For example:
If the feature depth is 10 mm and you set a depth of cut of 3 mm,
the number of steps is calculated as (10/3) + 1 = 4 steps. The
actual depth of cut is 10 / 4 = 2.5 mm. The steps are cut at 2.5
mm, 5 mm, 7.5 mm, and 10 mm.
If the second to last pass is within 10% of the depth of cut, it

is ignored.
steps are cut at 3.3 mm, 6.6 mm, and 10.0 mm.

steps are cut at 3.2 mm, 6.4 mm, 9.6 mm, and 10 mm.
To set an exact depth of cut, deselect Equal depth of cut.

Using the same example, with Equal depth of cut deselected:
If the feature depth is 10mm and you set a depth of cut (see page
1023) of 3mm, the number of steps is calculated as (10/3) + 1 = 4
steps. FeatureCAM uses the actual depth of cut you set (3 mm) for
each pass, then cuts any remainder depth. The steps are cut at 3
mm, 6 mm, 9 mm, and 10 mm.
These features support exact depth of cut:
 Profile boss  Rectangular pocket
 Profile pocket  Step bore
 Profile side  Counter bore hole
 Profile groove (Face groove  Plain hole with drill/mill
only) roughing
 Slot  Tapped hole with drill/mill
roughing
Stepover Options button — Click this button to open the Rough
Stepover Options (see page 1620) dialog.
Semi-finish pass — Select this option to have a semi-finish pass by
default.
Allowance — This is a facing parameter for the amount of material
to leave after the roughing pass.
Bottom allowance — Enter the amount of material to leave on the
floor of a milled feature. It applies only if Finish bottom is selected.
The attribute, Finish allowance, controls the allowance on the walls
of a feature.
Zig-zag angle — this controls the angle (measured from the X axis)
of the direction of the facing passes. A setting of 0 cuts parallel to
the X axis and a value of 90 cuts parallel to the Y axis.
Finish pass — Select this option to have a finish pass by default.
Allowance — Facing parameter for the amount of material to leave
after the roughing pass.
No. of Passes — The number of duplicate finish passes to take. If
you want to compensate for tool deflection, set No of Passes to
more than 1.
Overlap — This applies to features defined by closed profiles and is
the distance that the tool overlaps its starting point on the finish
pass. The toolpath runs counter-clockwise.

Bottom Finishing — Click this button to open the Bottom Finish
Options (see page 1628) dialog.
Rough Stepover Options dialog

Click the Stepover Options button on the Stepover tab to open the
Rough Stepover Options dialog:
For Pocket, Rectangular Pocket, and Boss and features, FeatureCAM

provides several different milling methods for roughing:
Stepover — Select the Stepover type in the list.


always parallel.

boundary.


- Roughing region
- Finish allowance

attribute.

g Mill g Mill
Angle Angle
0 No 180 Yes
0 Yes 180 No
90 Yes -90 No

90 No -90 Yes
next.
side.

50%.


Options dialog:



Spiral % — Enter the percentage of the tool diameter to use for the
radial depth of cut for machining the bottom of a milled feature
when using the spiral method.
Zigzag % — This is the percentage of tool diameter to use for radial
depth of cut for roughing the bottom of a milled feature when using
the zigzag method.

Bottom Finish Options dialog
Open this dialog by clicking the Bottom Finishing button on the

Stepover (see page 1618) tab of Milling Machining Attributes (see
page 1597).
Finish bottom —
separate pass.

Finish allowance
Wall pass
Floor pass

Finish allowance
Bottom
Wall
Stepover — Select the stepover type for finishing the bottom of a
milled feature.


always parallel.

boundary.


- Roughing region
- Finish allowance

attribute.

g Mill g Mill
Angle Angle
0 No 180 Yes
0 Yes 180 No
90 Yes -90 No

90 No -90 Yes
next.
side.

50%.


Options dialog:



Spiral % — This is the percentage of tool diameter to use for radial
depth of cut for finishing the bottom of a milled feature when using
the spiral method.
Zigzag % — This is the percentage of tool diameter to use for radial
depth of cut for finishing the bottom of a milled feature when using
the zigzag method.

Lead/Ramp tab
Horizontal lead/ramp
Extension distance
Enter a distance if you want to move the tool off the part by that
distance at the end of each pass.
In this Side feature example, we used an extension distance of 1
inch:

Compare it to the same example with no extension distance added:
Lead distance
- Lead-in/out angle
All stepover
The All Stepover attribute adds a lead-in and lead-out to each
stepover move for an open feature.

This example shows the behavior with All Stepover deselected.
And with All Stepover selected:
Ramp type — Select the stepover style from the list.
Direct
The Direct stepover connection type creates a straight linear
transition that is perpendicular to the toolpath.

Arc
The Arc stepover connection type creates an arc transition. Set the
Diameter parameter to specify the radius of the arc as a percentage
of the tool diameter. This example has the Ramp diameter set to
55%:
This example has the Ramp diameter set to 600%:
Line
The Line stepover connection type creates a linear stepover at an
angle. The length of the line is determined by multiplying the
diameter of the tool by the Ramp diameter parameter.

S-shape
The S-shape stepover connection type creates a stepover move that
consists of two arcs. As a result this transition makes a smooth exit
from the existing contour to the new contour. The diameter of the
arcs is determined by the Ramp diameter parameter.
Ramp diameter — See Ramp type.

Minimum ramp distance — This attribute applies to the Finish
operation. Enter the minimum horizontal distance for ramping. If
the computed horizontal ramp distance is less than this, the tool
plunges instead of ramping. Enter the value as a percentage of the
tool's diameter.
Vertical ramp
Minimum Z ramp distance — This is the minimum vertical ramp
distance allowed. If Minimum Z ramp distance is greater than the
calculated ramp distance or Max ramp distance, the tool plunges.
Enter the value as a percentage of the tool's diameter.
Max. ramp angle — This controls the angle of the ramp.
Max. finish ramp angle — This is the same as Max. ramp angle, but for
the finish pass.
Ramp from top


option.
Helical ramping — Enable this option to use helical ramping. Disable
it to use zigzag ramping.
Helical ramping is not available for zigzag (see page 716)

milling.
Helical Options — Click this button to open the Helical Ramp Options
Arc lead
Arc Lead
Arc Lead changes the lead-in or lead-out move to be an arc. The
endpoint of the arc is determined by the Lead distance and either
the Lead-in angle or Lead-out angle.

- Lead in/out
angle
- Lead distance
Wind Fan Finish Options dialog
Open the Wind Fan Finish Options dialog by clicking the Wind Fan
button on the Lead/Ramp (see page 1637) tab of the Milling
Machining Attributes (see page 1597) dialog, or on the Strategy (see
page 936) tab in the Feature Properties dialog.
Wind fan finish — Select this option to have a single point that is
used as both the start and end point of the Finish path. This is
useful for machines which require large lead moves to enable cutter
compensation.
Wind fan radius — Enter the radius to use for the wind fan shape.
Increasing the Wind fan radius moves the toolpath's start point
further from the feature boundary.

Wind fan angle — Enter the angle to use for the wind fan shape. The
angles.
By changing the Start point (see page 1028), you can move
the starting and ending points of the toolpath. FeatureCAM
uses the nearest point to your Start point that is consistent
with the angle and radius you specify for the wind fan.
Wind fan example

This example shows you how to create a wind fan finish toolpath,
and change the start and end points.
To use wind fan finishing to cut the Boss feature:

1 Create the Boss feature.
2 Enable wind fan finishing:
a In the Boss Properties dialog, on the Strategy tab, click Wind
Fan.
The Wind Fan Finish Options dialog is displayed.
b Select Wind fan finish to make the finish path start and end at
the same point.
c Specify the Wind fan radius and Wind fan angle, then click OK
to close the dialog.
d Click OK to close the Boss Properties dialog.
3 Run a 2D simulation.
To machine the Boss finish pass, the tool:

a starts in the top-right corner of the part and cuts the feature.
b returns to the start point.
The part is complete, but you can edit the toolpath. For example,
you may want the tool to start cutting on a straight edge, rather
than on the corner.
To change the starting and finishing point of the toolpath:
1 In the Geometry toolbar, click Point , and create a point near

one of the edges of the feature.
2 In the Boss Properties dialog, on the Plunge tab, specify the Start
point as the position of the point you created.

3 Run a 2D simulation:
The point's location along the curve is used to place the start
point, but the point's distance from the feature boundary is
ignored.
Helical Ramp Options dialog
Select the direction for helical ramping from CW (clockwise) or CCW

Linear approximation — Select this option to approximate arc moves
with linear moves.
Linear approximation tolerance — Enter a tolerance to control the
accuracy of Linear approximation relative to the theoretical helix. The
lower the value, the more accurate the approximation.
Ramp diameter — Enter the diameter of the helix to use for helical
ramping.

Coolant tab
Use the Coolant tab of the Machining Attributes dialog to specify the
default coolants to use for an operation.
Select the coolant types you want to use. The available coolant
types are specified in the CNC file using the Coolant dialog in
XBUILD.
You can override this option for a tool using the Coolant tab of the
Tool Properties dialog, or for an operation using the Coolant tab of

Misc. tab

part.
the tool feeds.

Z ramp clearance — Enter the distance above the operation at which
ramping starts. Z ramp clearance is bound by Plunge clearance.
Spline tolerance — This approximates the profile with arcs and lines
if a profile is defined as a spline. The smaller the value of the
parameter, the smoother the profile. This machining attribute is
used in Feature Recognition to determine whether a surface is a
Hole.
Posting tolerance — Enter the tolerance with which the toolpaths are
created. Reduce the Posting tolerance value for small parts to create
more precise toolpaths.
You must also adjust your post processor to output more digits. For
example, if you adjust the posting tolerance from 0.001 to 0.0001,
then you must adjust the digit format in the post processor so that
the extra decimal place is used in the NC code. Reducing the
posting tolerance creates additional lines of NC code, so you should
only do this for high-precision NC machines that can use the
high-precision coordinates, when required for an application.
Z index clearance — This is the clearance distance above the stock
bounding cylinder.
This can result in a Z value for indexing that is outside the

valid range for the machine. It can also result in
less-efficient retract moves if the part is an irregular shape.
You can set absolute X, Y, and Z coordinates to use for the
index retract move at feature-level (see page 900) or
Setup-level.
Wrap tolerance

Arcs that are wrapped must be converted to small 3D line
segments. The Wrap tolerance is used to determine the acceptable
distance between the line segments and the initial arc. The figure
on the left shows a lower tolerance for a wrapped circular groove.
The right-hand figure shows a large tolerance. In this case the circle
is approximated by a square.
The Wrap tolerance is also used to calculate toolpaths which are on a

cylinder, given a linear toolpath in unwrapped space. That is, if the
toolpath without wrapping is a straight line, then the wrapped
toolpath is an arc around the index axis. The Wrap tolerance controls
the accuracy of this arc.
This attribute is also used to control the polar interpolation on face

cuts for turn/milling. If FeatureCAM is performing the polar
interpolation, any linear move or off center arc move on the face of
the part must be interpolated by linear moves and rotations about
the C axis. Wrap tolerance is used to control the fineness of this
linear interpolation. The figure on the left shows a straight face cut
with loose wrap tolerance. The right-hand figure shows the same
cut with a tighter tolerance.

When circular interpolation is turned off in post, then Wrap tolerance
is used to control fineness of toolpath.
Chamfer depth
For milled chamfers, Chamfer depth controls the depth of the tool
and therefore the contact point. The default Chamfer depth for a
chamfer is 0.1 inches or 3 mm. This means that the tool extends 0.1
inches or 3 mm below the bottom of the chamfer. A setting of 0.0
places the bottom of the tool at the bottom of the chamfer. A larger
value moves the contact point down the tool.
Through depth

Machining Attributes (see page 1591). See the Milling (see
page 994) tab.
Deburr radius — Enter a radius to automatically round sharp outside
corners of the feature by the specified radius. The feature shape
does not change, but the toolpaths are modified to reflect the
rounding.
To automatically round inside corners, use Min. corner radius.
Be wary of setting a default Deburr radius value, because

small part details (less than 2*Deburr radius) can be
mistakenly eliminated. You can set a Deburr radius at
feature-level in the Feature Properties dialog on the Misc. (see
page 973) tab.
To automatically round outside corners, use Deburr radius.




Machining Attributes (see page 1591). Set it on the Milling
(see page 994) tab.
Back clearance — Used when machining a backbore Hole, Back
clearance is the distance the backbore tool is from the bottom of the
Hole when cutting the bore section.

Use edge-based stock curve finder — In certain cases, the Parasolid
kernel does not compute a Stock curve correctly. If you have
problems trying to compute a Stock curve from a Parasolid file, try
selecting this option. This option is deselected by default because it
is slower.
Speed % — This is a scaling factor for the spindle speeds generated
by the system. A value of less than 100 reduces the calculated
speed rates. A value of more than 100 increases the rates.
Feed % — This is a scaling factor for the feeds generated by the
system. A value of less than 100 reduces the calculated feed rates.
A value of more than 100 increases the rates.
Plunge feed % — The percentage of the Feed % attribute to use
during the initial plunge into the material. For example, if the Feed
% attribute is 2000 MMPM and you set the Plunge feed % to 50, the
resulting feed rate for the initial plunge is 1000 MMPM. See also First
plunge feed %.

(see page 994) tab.
First plunge feed % — You can specify a slower feed rate for the first
plunge move (the initial approach to the Stock) than for subsequent
Z plunge moves to depth. This is a percentage of the Plunge feed %.
For example, if the Feed % attribute is 2000 MMPM and you set the
Plunge feed % to 50, and the First plunge feed % to 20, the resulting
feed rate for the first plunge move is 200 MMPM. Setting the First
plunge feed % at a slower feed rate can protect your tool from a
hardened crust on the surface of the material.
Plunge clearance
Z ramp clearance
First Z depth
First plunge move

(see page 994) tab.
Feed unit — This changes the default feed rate units.
Select the units that you want to be FeatureCAM's global feed rate
units in the Feed unit menu:
Use IPM (inches per minute)
Use IPR (inches per revolution)
Use IPT (inches per tooth)
Use MMPM (mm per minute)
Use MMPR (mm per revolution)
Use MMPT (mm per tooth)
This global setting is reflected locally on the Feed/Speed page of the
New Feature wizard and the F/S (see page 983) tab of the feature
Properties dialog.
Proportional plunge feed
If Proportional plunge feed is selected, the feed rate of the ramping
move is scaled based on the Max ramp angle. A Ramp angle of 1
sets the feed rate of the plunging moves to approximately the
milling feedrate. An angle of 90 sets the feed rate of the plunging
moves to the value determined by Plunge feed override %. If
Proportional plunge feed is not selected, then the feed rate of
plunging moves is determined by Plunge feed override % regardless
of the ramp angle.
plunge cut.
Peripheral Feed (see page 1655) dialog.
Post Vars — Click the Post Vars button and the Post Variables dialog
is displayed. This contains a list of variables that are passed straight
to the post processor. You can use these variables to pass strings
directly to the post processor.

Peripheral Feed dialog
These parameters let you adjust the feedrates of arc moves for
2.5D milling features. The concept is that by slowing the feedrate
on internal arcs and increasing the feedrate on external arcs, you
get a more consistent finish.
Select Decrease feed on internal arcs to slow down on concave
moves. Set the lower limit by entering a percentage of the linear
feed.
Select Increase feed on external arcs to speed up on convex moves.
Set the upper limit by entering a percentage of the linear feed.
There is a section for roughing and finishing and the options are
identical. The finishing section applies to semi-finishing and finishing
2.5D milling operations. The roughing section applies to 2.5D
Internal arc
External arc
We recommend that you use these adjustments for finishing and

leave the settings for roughing deselected. Use feed optimization
(see page 1570) for roughing instead.
In earlier versions of FeatureCAM, this functionality was called

Corner feedrate reduction and only allowed you to slow down
concave corners.

Post Variables dialog
You can use the Post Variables dialog to pass strings of text to the
post processor.
To display the Post Variables dialog:
 In the Feature Properties dialog, on the Milling (see page 994),
Drilling (see page 900), Turning (see page 1420), or Cutting Data
(see page 1487) tab, click Post Vars.
 In the Machining Attributes dialog, on the Misc tab, click Post
Vars.
Variables
The dialog contains a list of variables. You can enter a value for
each variable so that when the variable name is used in the post,
the assigned Value is output to the NC code.
To assign a value to a variable, select the variable's name in the
list, and enter the value. Ensure that when you enter the value it is
displayed in the Value list.
You can assign a different value to a variable for each operation,
and you can set the default values for the document in the
Machining Attributes dialog. The value output to the NC code is
taken from the active operation.
You can change the names of post variables to make them

easier to use. In the XBUILD dialog, select CNC-Info > Post
Variable Names from the menu to display the Post Variable
Names dialog.

Comments
Open the Post Variables dialog for each operation to set the
comment for the operation. The operation comment is included in
the operation sheet after the operation's details.
Open the Post Variables dialog from the Machining Attributes dialog
and enter a comment to set the default comment for the document.
The default comment is not included in the operation sheet. If an
operation has the default comment, the comment is not included in
the operation sheet.
Operations tab
Automatic Options (see page 1658)

Base priority
Features are sorted by their Base priority to determine the order in
which they are manufactured. For features that have the same Base
priority value, the system uses the Automatic Ordering settings.
To ensure that an individual feature is cut before anything else, you
can set its Base priority attribute. All features have a default Base
priority of 10. To ensure that a feature is manufactured first, set its
priority to a lower value. To make a feature last, set its priority to a
higher value. For example, if you set the Base priority of a pocket to
8, its roughing pass is the first operation performed, its finish pass
is second, and the rest of the operations are ordered according to
the Automatic Ordering or Manual Ordering settings.

Although you can specify the order of every feature by
priority, you should not do so casually because you lose the
automatic optimization sequences built into the system and it
is harder to maintain or change the part.
The order of operations in the document is controlled by the
operation-level Priority attribute. If you use the Op List (see page
1553) to drag-and-drop operations to the order you want, the
Priority is updated automatically.
Don't ask at tool path generation — This is a toggle for whether you
are prompted with the dialog when you run a simulation. The
Ordering dialog settings override the operation defaults set on this
tab.
Time estimation attributes — Set these attributes to fit the behavior
of your particular machine. These attributes affect the machining
time estimates printed in the operation sheets.
Rapid traverse — This is the feed per minute of rapid moves.
Tool change — This is the time in seconds it takes to change a tool
(not including the rapid to get to tool change location).
Go to start — This is the time it takes for the tool head to move to
the start location and the spindle or tool head to come to a stop.
X-Y acceleration — This is used in the formula (see page 1659) to
calculate the time for a particular tool move.
Z acceleration — This is used in the formula (see page 1659) to
Rotary rapid — This is the rotation per minute of the indexing axis.
Automatic Options
The following settings control the ordering of milling operations.

Minimize tool changes — This option groups operations together that
use the same tool. This saves time for you by eliminating or
reducing needless tool changes. You must select this option if you
want to generate hole macros in the NC code.

Do finish cuts last — This option moves the finish milling operations
to the end of the Setup without altering the order of the finishing
before finish milling operations, select this option.
Cut higher operations first — This option affects only milling Setups.
Select this option to mill the features from the top of the stock first
and work toward the bottom. If you deselect this attribute, you
should carefully graphically verify the toolpath before cutting your
part.
Sorting by Z coordinate is controlled by the Cut higher

operations first attribute. If you deselect this attribute,
graphically verify the toolpath before cutting your part.
Minimize rapid distance — This affects only milling Setups and is the
only ordering option that changes the order of features specified in
the part view. Minimize Rapid Distance moves to the next closest
feature that uses the same tool as the last operation. You must
deselect this option if you want to generate hole macros in the NC
code.
If you have selected all of the optimization options, the
manufacturing order for operations that were derived from different
features is determined like this:
1 The operations are sorted by their top Z coordinate.
2 Among operations with the same top Z coordinate, operations
are grouped by the tool with which they are cut.
3 After an operation is cut, FeatureCAM moves to the next
operation performed with the same tool that is the closest to the
current operation.
Formula for particular tool move

The formula for the time estimate for a particular tool move is:
time = dist/fpm + fpm * (1 + zdist/dist * (1/z-accln - 1))
/ xy-accln
where:
 fpm is feed per minute (Rapid Travers for rapids, feed rate for
cutting moves)
 xy-accln is X-Y Acceleration
 z-accln is Z Acceleration
 dist is the total distance of tool move
 zdist is the total distance that the tool moves in the Z-direction

Acceleration conversions
If the acceleration rates for your machine are reported in different
units, use the following conversions:
Current Units Desired Units Multiply by
Meter per second Millimeters per 3,600,000
squared minute squared
Feet per second Inches per minute 43,200
squared squared
Inches per second Inches per minute 3,600
squared squared
Assumptions used
Most often, because of change of direction (and/or several other
factors), the tool must effectively accelerate to final fpm from a
stop. So the acceleration is calculated as if the tool head must
always accelerate to final fpm from 0.
Also, most mills take longer to accelerate in the Z-direction than in
either X or Y (and that X and Y acceleration are equal).
Thread Mill tab

Wind fan — Select this option to have a single point that is used as
both the start and end point of the Finish path. This is useful for
machines which require large lead moves to enable cutter
compensation.
Wind fan radius — Enter the radius to use for the wind fan shape as
a percentage of the thread-milling tool radius. Increasing the Wind
fan radius moves the start point of the toolpath further from the
feature boundary.
Wind fan angle — .Enter the angle to use for the wind fan shape. The
angles.
Linear ramp distance — Enter the length of the linear approach move
to a Thread feature.
To activate this attribute, you must set Ramp diameter % to

0.

Ramp diameter % — This attribute controls the diameter of the arc
along which the tool ramps on and off the Thread Milling feature.
Enter a percentage of the tool diameter.
Negative angles create a ramp on a clockwise arc. If set to a value
greater than 1000, the tool moves in on a straight line tangent to
the initial cutting move. If set to 0, the tool approaches
perpendicular to the initial cutting move.

Ramp diameter
Start angle
Thread mill feature
Ramp angle offset
Tool

Ramp angle offset
This angle controls the starting and ending points of the ramp
moves of a Thread Milling feature. The tool starts ramping along the
arc of radius Ramp diameter % using the Ramp angle offset to
determine the start point of the ramping move. If positive, the arc
is counter-clockwise.
Ramp diameter
Start angle
Thread mill feature
Ramp angle offset
Tool

pass. Spring passes indicates the number of spring passes that are
to occur at the completion of the thread.
Starts — Enter a value greater than 1 for multiple start threads.

Start angle — Measured counter-clockwise, the Start angle
determines the starting point of the thread.
Ramp diameter
Start angle
Thread mill feature
Ramp angle offset
Tool

Tooth overlap — Enter the number of threads that one revolution of
a multi-thread tool overlaps the previous revolution. An overlap of
at least one thread is recommended.
Thread feature
Tool revolution 1
Tool revolution 2
Tooth overlap

Tooth outside — Enter the number of teeth that are above (if
feeding in negative Z) or below (if feeding in positive Z) the thread
mill feature for the first pass.
Taper approx. angle — For tapered threads the toolpath is increasing
in diameter as well as moving in Z. These moves are approximated
with 3D arcs. The Taper approx. angle is the angle around the thread
that will be approximated by a single arc. A 360 must be evenly
divisible by the Taper approx. angle. For example, if set to 90, a
single revolution of the tool is broken into 4 arcs.

OD Depth % — The default ratio of Pitch to Thread Height for OD
Thread Milling features.
ID Depth % — The default ratio of Pitch to Thread Height for ID
Thread Milling features.
Helical Ramping
Cutter comp (see page 936)

Partline program — This is a particular kind of cutter compensation
for milled features.
Part line program is a particular kind of cutter compensation for
tool. The tool selected to cut the feature is still important even when
be sure that the actual tool diameter does not deviate too far from
the selected finishing tool is small enough to cut your entire feature.
FeatureCAM automatically calculates the entrance point of your
finish pass and adds a linear move and a ramping move (based on
the Ramp diameter attribute) to your finish pass to accommodate
cutter compensation. If you receive a warning in the operations list
such as "Can't find ramp in/out arc" or "Can't extend end of open
profile" then correct the problem by decreasing the Ramp diameter
attribute or changing the Pre-drill point.
Through — Select Through to increase the hole length by 10% of the
hole diameter to account for the drill tip and prevent burring. If
Through is deselected, the toolpaths are generated to ensure that
the tool does not cut past the end of the thread.

Use Finish tool (see page 936)
Rough
Select the Rough attribute to include a roughing operation when you
create a thread milling feature.
Enter a Stepover in % for the roughing operations.
You can edit the attributes of the roughing operations using the
Milling tab of the Thread Milling Properties dialog when the roughing
operation is selected in the Tree View.
Finish
Select the Finish attribute to include a finishing operation when you
create a thread milling feature.
Enter an Allowance and number of Spring passes for the finishing
operations.
A 'spring pass' is a duplicate of the final threading pass. Spring
passes indicates the number of spring passes that are to occur at
the completion of the thread.
You can edit the attributes of the finishing operations using the
Milling tab of the Thread Milling Properties dialog when the finishing
operation is selected in the Tree View.

Surface Mill tab
Tolerance (Finish) and Tolerance (Rough) — Set how close the milling
is to the mathematically ideal surface. This does not guarantee that
your feature is machined to this tolerance in all locations if the tool
constrained areas. If your part shows a faceted appearance, set the
tolerance to a lower value. This also affects the default tolerance for
stock models.
Scallop stepover — Select this attribute to set the default stepover
type for projection milling finishing and Z-level finishing to be
specified by scallop height instead of a linear stepover distance.
Scallop height — This sets the default scallop height allowed for
surface milling features. You can override it on individual features.
Stepover — Enter the default Stepover value for surface milling
features. This also affects the default Step Size value for stock
models.
Parallel angle is a numeric attribute for X and Y parallel roughing
only.


Setting the angle to 180 causes the toolpaths to be cut from the
opposite side of the part. For example, an X-parallel operation with
the angle set to 0 starts at the minimum Y coordinate. With the
angle set to 180, the toolpaths start at the maximum Y coordinate.
Tool diameter — This sets the default tool diameter for 3D surface
milling features.
Tool end radius
Select the type of Tool end radius from:
 Ball end sets the default tool to a ball-end tool to be chosen
automatically from the tool database. If there are no ball-end
tools in the database, a flat-end tool is chosen as a template and
a new ball-end tool is automatically created from it. The new tool
is given a name with a suffix of -ground, implying that you must
grind the tool as needed. If there are no flat-end mill tools in the
database, a tool-selection error is displayed.
 Flat sets the default tool to a flat-end mill to be chosen
automatically from the tool database. If there are no flat-end mill
tools in the database, a tool-selection error is displayed.
 Bull nose sets the default tool to a bull-nose tool to be chosen
automatically from the tool database. If there are no bull-nose
tools in the database, a flat-end mill tool is chosen at a template
and a new bull-nose tool is automatically created from it. The
new tool is given a name with a suffix of -ground, implying that
you must grind the tool as needed.
You can override the tool on individual features as needed.

Steep and Shallow Options — Click this button to open the Steep and
Shallow Options dialog.
Finish allowance — This is the amount of material left after a 3D
roughing pass.

Check allowance — This is the minimum distance that you want to
leave around check surface(s). Select from:
 Finish/leave allowance — FeatureCAM uses the Finish allowance
value for rough operations and the Leave allowance value for
finish operations, by default. You can override this by entering a
Check allowance value at operation level.
 Fixed allowance — Enter a specific Check allowance value to use
by default for both rough and finish operations. You can override
this by entering a Check allowance value at operation level.
Slope limitation angles
Horizontal only — The default Maximum surface slope (see page
1133) angle for the current part document.
Vertical only — The default Minimum surface slope (see page
1133) angle for the current part document.
Steep slope — The default Steep slope angle (see page 1060) for
parallel operations in the current part document.
Swarf axial tol. — This helps to stabilize the tool axis and reduce tool
load.
For a relatively rare number of geometries, the tool axis can waver
slightly as it positions accurately on the surfaces to be machined.
This can be due to small but significant changes in the geometry as
the tool moves from one position to another. This tolerance can be
larger than the machining tolerance to stabilize the tool axis as it
moves across this geometrically varying region. As a consequence
excess material may be left on the surface but the load on the tool
may be reduced.
No Axial tolerance set:
Axial tolerance set to 0.5 (mm):

Edges — The default Edges (see page 1115) setting for the current
part document.
Steep and Shallow Options dialog
Order — This determines the order in which the steep and shallow
portions are machined.
 Top first — Select this option to machine from the top regions
downwards. If you have a boss, the shallow regions at the top of
the boss are machined before the steep regions down the sides.
 Steep first — Select this option to machine the steep sections
before the flat. If you have a boss, the steep regions are
machined before the shallow regions.

Options
Threshold angle — Enter the angle of the surface slope, measured
from the horizontal, that determines the split between constant Z
(steep) and shallow machining.
Overlap distance — Enter the size of the overlap area between steep
and shallow machining. This reduces marks on the model caused by
a sudden switch between steep and shallow machining.
Steep
Spiral — Select this option to create a spiral path between two
consecutive closed contours. This minimises the number of lifts of
the tool and maximises cutting time while maintaining more
constant load conditions and deflections on the tool.
Shallow
Select from:
Parallel
Optionally enter a Wall Clearance and Raster Angle.

3D Spiral

Smoothing — Select this option to smooth offsets of toolpath
segments over the model.
Selecting the Smoothing option converts this:
to this:
As a general rule, use raster on open-edged parts and 3D

offsets at the bottom of a pocket.

Surface Leadin tab
Stepover type — This controls the moves between toolpaths.

Stepover type controls the type of transition move that is inserted
between toolpaths. The options are:
 Direct - The tool moves straight over to the next position. The
tool can move in all 3 axes. This figure shows a direct stepover
move on a flat surface feature.

 Stair step: The tool moves up in Z and then over in X and Y. This
figure shows a stair step transition move on a spherical surface.
This figure shows the same surface feature using a direct

stepover.
This figure shows a loop move on a flat surface feature.
Use lead-in/out — This controls when lead-in/out moves are applied.

The Use lead in/out menu controls when lead moves will be applied.
The options are:
 Never: Do not use lead moves on this operation.

 On all plunges/retract: Apply the leads on all plunge and retract
moves for this operation.
 On first plunge/last retract: Apply on the first plunge and last
retract move only for this operation.
 On all stepovers, plunges and retracts: Apply the leads on all
stepovers, plunge and retract moves for this operation.

Machining Attributes (see page 1591). See the Leads (see
page 1342) tab.
Normal to surface — If you select Normal to surface, the lead in/out
moves are performed with respect to the surface normal. If you
deselect it, the moves are performed in the plane of the toolpath.
Lead moves are either performed as arcs or linear moves by
selecting one of the following:
Use arc ramp-in/out
If you select Use arc ramp in/out, the following parameters are used
to control the ramping on and off the part feature:
- Ramp-in angle - The angle
of the ramp in move.
- Ramp diameter - The
diameter of the ramp move.
- Ramp-out angle - The angle
of the ramp out move.

page 1342) tab.
Use linear lead-in/out
If you select Use linear lead-in/out, the following parameters control
the move off the feature:
 Lead-in angle - Angle measured away from the toolpath for the
lead-in move. Note this angle can be negative.

 Lead-out angle - Angle measured away from the toolpath for the
lead-out move. This angle can be negative.
 Lead-in length - Length of the linear lead-in length.
 Lead-out length - Length of the linear lead-out length.
- Lead-in angle
- Lead-in length

page 1342) tab.

Tool Selection tab
The Counter bore options control the default behavior for tool
selection for counter bore operations. Select Use counter bore to
default to a counter bore tool or select Use endmill to make circular
interpolation with an endmill the default. Select Automatic to have
FeatureCAM first attempt to select a counter bore and to use an
endmill as a secondary choice.
Spot drill — Select from:
 Prefer spot drill — Use a spot drill tool for spot drill operations if
possible.
 Prefer center drill — Use a center drill tool for spot drill operations
if possible.
Tool diameter tolerance — This is the tolerance used when selecting
a tool for an operation. If the tool diameter is within the tolerance of
the tool, the tool is selected.
Drill % of ream/bore — This is the percentage of the Hole diameter to
use for selecting tooling for undersize drilling operation. For
example, if set to 95, a drilling operation is created with a diameter
that is 95% of the nominal Hole diameter.
Thread % for tap drill

Thread % for tap drill (cutting, helicoil, user-defined) and Thread % for
tap drill (rolled) represent the percentage of the thread form that is
cut with the tap. By default the cutting percentage is greater than
the rolled percentage indicating that a greater percentage of the
thread is manufactured by the cutting tap. This parameter is used in
determining the size of the drill to use for cutting and rolled tapping
operations. The larger the percentage, the smaller the size of the
drilled hole.
(cutting, helicoil,
user-defined)
(rolled)
Tap type — Select the type of tap from:

Default auto-chamfer tool — Select the default tool for chamfer
operations. The selected tool is used for any new chamfer
operations you create, and any existing chamfer operations which
use the default tool are updated.
Tool % of arc radius controls the size of the tool that FeatureCAM
automatically selects.
If Tool % of arc radius is set to 100 then a tool equal to the smallest
corner radius is selected for a feature such as a pocket, and the
finish tool path for the pocket looks like the toolpath shown below.
With Tool % of arc radius set to 100 the tool dwells in the corners as
it changes direction. This can sometimes nick the part. To avoid this
problem, set Tool % of arc radius to a slightly smaller number, such
as 98.

In earlier versions of FeatureCAM Tool % of arc radius was
called Default tool %.
Preferred spot drill diameter — This is the diameter of the spot drill
(or center drill) that is preferred for all holes.
Optimize spot drill tool selection — Select this option to automatically
spot drill all Holes with the largest spot drill that would be used for a
collection of Holes.
For example if you have 0.25, 0.375 and 0.5 inch holes, a 0.5 inch
spotdrill is used for all holes. It is possible that you could get a
gouge with this setting turned on, if a large spotdrill might gouge
neighboring features. The following image shows a situation that
would gouge:
This image shows the proper result with Optimize spot drill tool
selection deselected:
Optimize chamfer tool selection — Select this option to automatically

chamfer all Holes with the largest chamfer that would be used for a
collection of Holes.
Tool diameter tolerance — This is the tolerance used by tool
selection.
Multiple Roughing Tools — Displays the Multiple Roughing Tools for
Milling (see page 1679) dialog.
Tool Holder Clearance — Displays the Tool Holder Clearance dialog
(see page 1680).

Multiple Roughing Tools for Milling dialog
FeatureCAM has the option of roughing a 2.5D milling feature with a

single tool or using a sequence of tools.
If you use multiple roughing tools, FeatureCAM cuts all the parts of
a feature that it is capable of cutting with the larger tool, and cuts
only the remaining portions of the feature with the smaller tool. You
do not have to manually create these separate regions. FeatureCAM
automatically calculates them for you.
The default behaviors available are:
Use a single tool that is automatically selected — FeatureCAM selects a
tool based on the smallest radius of the feature and use that tool to
cut the entire feature. If your part has broad corners or you need to
minimize the number of tools you are using, this is a good option to
pick. If you have features with tight corners, you should not choose
this option. If you are using automatic feature recognition, this
option can result in a number of tool selection errors for parts with
sharp corners.
Use Multiple roughing tools — This option cuts the part with a list of
tools you supply. Each tool cuts only in the regions that have not
been cut previously. As soon as the part has been cut completely,
no more operations are created with the smaller tools. This is a
good option to select if your part has sharp corners, but be aware
that your part needs more tools and tool changes. You should enter
the tool diameters you want to use. Separate each diameter with a
comma. As part of this option, you can select Automatically select an
additional tool that fits the smallest radius of the contour. If you select
this option, you should list some larger diameters for multiple
roughing and then let FeatureCAM select the tool for the final
roughing pass.
As a separate option, you can limit the smallest tool FeatureCAM
chooses by selecting The minimum tool diameter of an automatically
chosen roughing tool and entering a diameter. Because many CAD
models have sharp corners, we recommend that you use this option
when working with imported models with Feature Recognition.

Tool Holder Clearance dialog
Use the Tool Holder Clearance dialog to specify an additional
clearance for FeatureCAM's automatic tool selection to prevent tool
holder gouges.
To display the Tool Holder Clearance dialog, click Tool Holder
Clearance on the Tool Selection tab of the Machining Attributes
dialog.
To specify a tool selection clearance:

1 In the Clearance Requirement list, select the clearance you want
between the tool holder and the part. Select from:
 None — Select this option to leave no additional clearance.
Old part files select the same tools as before.
 Feature — Select this option to ensure the tool is long enough
for the tool holder to clear the feature.
 Setup — Select this option to ensure the tool is long enough
for the tool holder to clear the total depth below the setup.
 Stock — Select this option to ensure the tool is long enough
for the tool holder to clear the total depth into the stock.
2 Enter an Extra allowance as a % of feature or setup depth to leave
extra clearance of the tool holder above the feature, setup, or
stock
3 Select how tool selection is affected if no matching tool is found:
 Give an error if no tool meets requirements — FeatureCAM does
not select a tool for the operation, so an error is shown during
NC code generation. In the Operation List, a red exclamation
point is displayed beside operations with no tool selected.
 Select tool closest to requirements if none match — this enables
you to generate NC code, but it may result in tool holder
gouges because a smaller tool may be used.

Facing tab
Rough pass — Select this option if you want to have a rough

operation on face features by default. You can override this
selection at an individual feature level.
Finish pass — Select this option if you want to have a finish
operation on Face features by default. You can override this
selection at an individual feature level.
Finish allowance — This is a facing parameter for the amount of
material to leave after the rough pass. You can enter a positive
or negative value.
Facing stepover % — This is the width of cut for a facing operation
specified as a percentage of the tool diameter.
Lateral overcut % — Enter the distance, as a percentage of the tool
radius, that the tool cuts past the stock boundary in the direction of
the cut, on the X axis (unless you have changed the Zigzag angle).
The default value is 100% of the tool radius.

using the default Lateral overcut % value of 100% of the tool radius
This is the same example with the Lateral overcut % value set to 150
% of the tool radius:
Last pass overcut % — This attribute applies to a Face feature. Enter

the distance, as a percentage of the tool radius, that the tool moves
past the stock boundary perpendicular to the cut, in the Y direction
(unless you have changed the Zigzag angle). The default value is
20% of the tool radius.

using the default Last pass overcut % value of 20% of the tool radius
This is the same example with the Last pass overcut % value set to
50 % of the tool radius:
Max depth of cut — This is the maximum depth of cut for facing
tools.
Connect stepovers with arc
stepovers with arc.

selected:

Zigzag angle — Enter the angle in degrees (counter-clockwise from

X) that you want to use to cut the Face feature.
An example of a Face The same example

feature with Zigzag with Zigzag angle set
angle set to the to 30 deg:
default 0 deg:

Turning default machining attributes [TURN]
The Machining Attributes dialog for Turn parts has these tabs:
Drilling (see page 1686)
Pecking (see page 1688)
Turn/Bore (see page 1689)
Threading (see page 1699)
Grooving (see page 1702)
Bar Feed (see page 1707)
Misc. (see page 1708, see page 1404)

Drilling tab [TURN]
Spot drill

page 889) tab.

Spot drill edge break — To create an edge break or chamfer using
the spot drill tool, enter the radial distance of the edge
break/chamfer. The spot drill creates an edge break/chamfer by
cutting deeper than it normally would to create the spot drill
operation alone. The default value 0.0050" or 0.1 mm results in a
chamfer 0.0100" or 0.2 mm greater than the hole size. The angle of
the chamfer depends on the spot drill tool used.
Enable this option to try to cut the chamfer during spot drilling. If
no available tool can spot and chamfer without gouging the hole, a
separate chamfer operation is created.
Spot drill diameter % — This percentage is used to select a spot
drilling tool. A value of 100 specifies that the spotdrill should be the
same diameter as the hole. A smaller value creates only a starter
hole.
Use L/D compensation — This reduces speed and feed for holes that
have a ratio of hole depth (L) to hole diameter (D) of greater than
2.5. The greater this ratio, the greater the speed/feed reduction.
Max. tap spindle RPM — This is the maximum speed (in RPM) for
tapping.
Tap cycle affects how a tap operation is performed. Select from:
 Floating — Floating and tension-compression holders
 Rigid — This is most commonly available on current machines
and returns to the previous depth.
 Chip Break — The tool stops feeding only to break the chip.
All cycles use the same Tap program format, but logical reserved
words exist in XBUILD to distinguish the tap type.
Pilot diameter(s) — This enables and sets a list of drill sizes used to
drill pilot holes. Enter a comma-separated list of drill diameters. For
example, entering 0.5, 1, 1.5 in inches, causes holes to be pilot drilled
with the half inch drill for final hole sizes up to an inch. A hole in
excess of 1.5" is pilot-drilled with all three of the specified drills
before being drilled to size. No list of drill sizes turns off pilot drilling
for the feature, although this attribute can also be set up as a
default for all parts.

Pecking tab [TURN]

Minimum peck — This is the minimum step size for a peck used for
value reduction pecking methods or factor reduction pecking
methods.

Turn/Bore tab [TURN]
Rough depth of cut

inches.

Constant DOC (see page 1697) — See Rough depth of cut.
X finish allowance
Z finish allowance
X finish allowance

Machining Attributes (see page 1591). See the Turning (see
page 1420) tab.

Machining Attributes (see page 1591). Set it on the Turning
Z finish allowance — See X finish allowance.
Rough Engage angle — Enter the angle at which the tool enters the
stock in roughing operations when TNR comp is off.
Engage angle

Clearance
Withdraw angle
Clearance zone
Engage angle
Finish Engage angle — Enter the angle at which the tool enters the
stock in finish operations when TNR comp is off.
Engage angle

Clearance
Withdraw angle
Clearance zone
Engage angle
Rough withdraw angle — Enter the angle at which the tool withdraws
from the stock after cutting during roughing operations when TNR
comp is off.
Finish withdraw angle — Enter the angle at which the tool withdraws
from the stock after cutting during finish operations when TNR comp
is off.
Withdraw length — This is the distance along the withdraw angle line
in which the tool withdraws before returning for the next step.

Withdraw length
Boundary
Clearance
Depth
Use Clearance as finish withdraw length — When selected, the
Clearance value is used as the approach and withdraw length for
finishing moves. When deselected, the Withdraw length value is
used.
Auto round
used.


angle
Lead-out
angle
Lead
distance

page 1366) tab.
Rough lead in angle — Enter the angle at which the tool enters the
stock in roughing operations when TNR comp is on.

in angle attribute.
Finish lead in angle — Enter the angle at which the tool enters the
stock in finish operations when TNR comp is on.
in angle attribute.
Rough lead out angle — Enter the angle at which the tool withdraws
from the stock after cutting during roughing operations when TNR
comp is on.
Finish lead out angle — Enter the angle at which the tool withdraws
from the stock after cutting during finish operations when TNR comp
is on.

Use canned cycle

fanucez.cnc post.
feature level.
Hole features
Turn/Bore features

Groove features
Thread features

page 1366) tab.
Canned cycle clearance X and Z — These attributes control the tool
location before the start of a turning canned cycle. The tool location
is obtained by applying the X and Z clearances to the start point of
the curve.

Constant DOC
The Constant DOC option controls how the Depth of cut attribute is
used to calculate the X depth of roughing passes.
If Constant DOC is deselected, cuts are guaranteed not to exceed
the Depth of cut, but some cuts may be less than that amount. A
pass is performed at each step. The area above each step is divided
into equal regions with a depth of less than the Depth of Cut.
In the example below, the bottom three cutter paths are aligned
with the steps. The top region is divided into two equal regions with
shallow depths of cut.

Aligned with steps
Shallow cut
If Constant DOC is selected, each pass is performed at a consistent

depth of cut. If required, the pass also climbs and cleans up
previous steps. In the figure below, the first cut is performed
straight across at the specified Depth of cut.
Depth of cut
In the next pass, the tool cuts across at the specified depth of cut
and then the tool climbs up the wall and the previous step is cut to
with the finish allowance.
Cleanup of previous steps

Threading tab [TURN]
Some of the Threading attributes are shown on this diagram:
End clearance Clearance

Withdraw angle Infeed angle
Depth Height
Start clearance
Rough turn and Finish turn — Select these options to automatically
turn the piece down to the thread diameter. See How a thread
feature is manufactured (see page 817) for more details.
Chamfer
OD Thread feature:

(Chamfer addl.) Depth
(Chamfer) Angle
ID Thread feature:
(Chamfer addl.) Depth

(Chamfer) Angle
(Chamfer) Angle — Enter the angle of the chamfer in degrees

(between 0 and 85) measured from vertical. The default angle is 30.
(Chamfer addl.) depth — Optionally enter additional depth for the
chamfer. The default depth is the same as the Thread Height. The
minimum value is 0.

page 1366) tab.
Relief groove — A Thread feature has an option of cutting a relief
groove at the end of the thread. Enter the groove parameters in the
Feature Properties dialog on the Strategy (see page 1366) tab.
Side wall angle — This is the default angle of the relief groove of the
thread.
Groove addl. depth — The depth of the relief groove is the depth of
the thread plus the Groove addl. depth. This prevents the threading
tool from dragging on the bottom of the groove.
Start clearance — This value is the position to which the tool
traverses before engaging into the workpiece.

Machining Attributes (see page 1591). See the Threading
End clearance — Enter the distance that the tool feeds past the end
of the thread (into the relief groove) before retracting from the
part's surface.

Infeed angle — Enter an unsigned, incremental value from the
positive Z axis.

OD/ID Depth % — The depth of a thread is based on the thread pitch.
The thread depth is calculated as Depth% * pitch.
Count.
FeatureCAM.
across the thread.

page 1366) tab.

Thread depth calculations - Select how you want FeatureCAM to
calculate the Standard Threads for pre-populating the dimensions of
a Thread (see page 1352) feature. Select from:
 Use tool tip radius — This option takes into account the tool tip
radius. For example the standard thread designation M20 x 2.5
outputs:
 OD thread: Thread Height 1.894, Major Diameter 19.791
 ID thread: Thread Height 1.625, Major Diameter 17.519
 Use tool tip zero radius — This option outputs the nominal
diameter and actual thread depth. This method is more
commonly used in Europe. With this option selected, the
standard thread designation M20 x 2.5 outputs:
 OD thread: Thread Height 1.534, Major Diameter 20.000
 ID thread: Thread Height 1.534, Major Diameter 16.933
Grooving tab [TURN]


page 1366) tab.
Cut type
A turned groove can be cut in two different styles. The regions in
the following figure are used to show the differences.
Width first - regions are cut in the order: , , , , , .

Depth first - regions are cut in the order: , , , , , .
If Depth First and Plunge Center First are both enabled, then the
groove is cut in the order: , , , , , . If the groove
were wider, the subsequent cuts would alternate from one side of
the groove until the other until the entire groove was cut.
Feed dir — This is the direction the tool feeds. The choices are either
Neg (negative, -Z direction) or Pos (positive, +Z direction). For
finish, you can also set this to Opposite from rough dir.
Side liftoff dist — Enter the distance to move the tool after a plunge
cut, in the direction opposite to the cutting direction. This increases
the tool's life and leaves a better finish on the part. This applies to a
Groove feature. See also Side liftoff angle.


page 1420) tab.
Side liftoff angle — Enter the angle to lift the tool off the part after
each plunge cut. This increases the tool's life and leaves a better
finish on the part. This attribute applies to a Groove feature.


page 1420) tab.
Dwell — The number of seconds the tool dwells after plunging
during a groove roughing pass. It also applies to the roughing of the
Cutoff chamfer.
Use 2nd offset register — Use a different offset register for each side
of a grooving tool. The second offset register number is displayed in
the Tool Mapping dialog.
This requires a change to your post to work properly. See the

XBUILD help for the <OFFSET_CH> reserved word.

Stepover % — Enter the distance, as a percentage of the tool's
diameter, that the tool shifts to position itself for the next plunge
cut. This value specifies the maximum stepover distance. If this
value evenly divides the width of the feature, it is used. If it results
in a final pass that is quite shallow, the cut widths are adjusted to
result in even roughing passes.
For example if you have a feature that is 0.5 inches wide and
specify a width of cut of 0.4 (specified as a Stepover % of 80 for a
tool with a diameter of 0.5 inches), the feature is roughed in two
even passes 0.25 inches wide rather than one pass of 0.4 inches
and another pass with a width of 0.1 inches.

page 1420) tab.
Chamfer extend dist. — This provides extra space for the tool so that
the tool does not start on the material for the Groove finish pass.
Peck retract dist. — For Cutoff and Groove features, Peck retract dist
is the distance the tool retracts between plunges.
Cutoff tab [TURN]
Peck retract dist. — For Cutoff and Groove features, Peck retract dist
is the distance the tool retracts between plunges.
Dwell — The number of seconds the tool dwells after plunging
during a groove roughing pass. It also applies to the roughing of the
Cutoff chamfer.
You can set these attributes for an individual Cutoff feature in

the Feature Properties dialog on the Cutoff (see page 1464)
tab.

Bar Feed tab [TURN]
Dwell — The number of seconds you want the tool to dwell after
plunging during a groove roughing pass. It also applies to the
roughing of the cutoff chamfer.
Coolant tab
Use the Coolant tab of the Machining Attributes dialog to specify the
default coolants to use for an operation.

types are specified in the CNC file using the Coolant dialog in
XBUILD.
You can override this option for a tool using the Coolant tab of the
Tool Properties dialog, or for an operation using the Coolant tab of
Misc. tab
Plunge clearance — This is the distance above an operation at which

the tool starts to feed. In the case of deep hole drilling, the drill
retracts to this distance between pecks. For milling features, the
default is to use the same value for roughing and finishing. As a
result, the tool feeds from the top of a pocket to the floor before
cutting. To make the tool feed down into the feature, set the Plunge
clearance for an operation to a negative value, but make sure the
value is above the floor of the feature.
2nd offset reg. increment — When using a 2nd offset register for
grooving tools, the 2nd Length offset register in the Tool Mapping
dialog is calculated as the Length offset register plus the 2nd offset
reg. increment.

The Starting offset number for shared tool slots is the first length
offset register to use for tools that share the same tool slot.
Tool program point — Specify the program point for turning tools,
select from:
 Tool tip edge — Select this option to adjust the tool program
point by the insert radius in the NC code. In this case, adjust the
tool's program point by the radius compensation on the Prog. Pt
(see page 1815) tab of the Tool Properties dialog.
 Tool tip center — Select this option to adjust the tool program
point by the insert radius at the machine. In this case, set the
tool's program point X Coordinate and Z Coordinate to 0, 0 on the
Prog. Pt (see page 1815) tab of the Tool Properties dialog.
Turnmilling program point — Specify the program point for
turnmilling tools, select from:
 Tool edge — Select this option to adjust the tool program point
by the tool radius in the NC code.
 Tool center — Select this option to adjust the tool program point
by the tool radius at the machine.
Post vars. dialog (see page 1656)

FeatureCAM.




Turret direction — We recommend that you leave this as Auto so
that FeatureCAM can calculate the best direction for a particular
operation. You can also explicitly set this option to CW (clockwise)
or CCW (counter-clockwise).
Remachining — This automatically sets the boundaries for
subsequent operations that use the same curve. This minimizes air
cutting and works between Turn features, Bore features and
between Holes and Bore features. The same curve must be used in
both features. ID features use the results of a previous turn drill
operation if such a feature exists. The stock curve that results from
the first operation is the result of undercut clipping with the tool
geometry and nothing more than that.
Use IPR/MMPR — The default feed units are IPM (inches per minute)
or MMPM (mm per minute). Select this option to use IPR (inches per
revolution) or MMPR (mm per revolution).
Do feed reduction for small moves — This attribute helps FeatureCAM
cut small features properly. It is typically applied to small chamfers
or small radii but affects any small move. If Do feed reduction for
small moves is selected, then any move with fewer revolutions than
the Threshold, is reduced by the Feed rate %.
Calculate index radius from solid stock outline — Select this option to
determine the index height directly from the stock solid, instead of
Calculate index radius from solid Calculate index radius from solid
stock outline off: stock outline on:

— Distance to bounding box — Distance to stock
— Z rapid level attribute boundary
value — Z rapid level attribute
value
Automatic tool orientation — Select this option to use a turning tool

in any orientation without needing to create duplicates. When this
option is selected, only tools in the default orientation are displayed
in the tool crib and available for selection. When this option is
deselected, all tools are available, but each tool can only be used in
the orientation selected on the Orientation tab of the Tool Properties
dialog.
Turret location
The Turret location is kept in the *.cnc file, because there may be
multiple turret locations.
To change the locations:
1 Select Manufacturing > Post Process from the menu.
2 In the Post Options dialog, click the Turn/Mill tab.
3 Click the Edit button and XBUILD opens. Select CNC-Info > Turrets
from the menu.

Operations tab [TURN]
Automatic Options (see page 1714)

Base priority
Features are sorted by their Base priority to determine the order in
which they are manufactured. For features that have the same Base
priority value, the system uses the Automatic Ordering settings.
To ensure that an individual feature is cut before anything else, you
can set its Base priority attribute. All features have a default Base
priority of 10. To ensure that a feature is manufactured first, set its
priority to a lower value. To make a feature last, set its priority to a
higher value. For example, if you set the Base priority of a pocket to
8, its roughing pass is the first operation performed, its finish pass
is second, and the rest of the operations are ordered according to
the Automatic Ordering or Manual Ordering settings.
Although you can specify the order of every feature by

priority, you should not do so casually because you lose the
automatic optimization sequences built into the system and it
is harder to maintain or change the part.
The order of operations in the document is controlled by the
operation-level Priority attribute. If you use the Op List (see page
1553) to drag-and-drop operations to the order you want, the
Priority is updated automatically.
Don't ask at tool path generation — This is a toggle for whether you
are prompted with the dialog when you run a simulation. The
Ordering dialog settings override the operation defaults set on this
tab.

Time estimation attributes — Set these attributes to fit the behavior
of your particular machine. These attributes affect the machining
time estimates printed in the operation sheets.
Rapid traverse — This is the feed per minute of rapid moves.
Tool change — This is the time in seconds it takes to change a tool
(not including the rapid to get to tool change location).
Go to start — This is the time it takes for the tool head to move to
the start location and the spindle or tool head to come to a stop.
X-Y acceleration — This is used in the formula (see page 1659) to
Z acceleration — This is used in the formula (see page 1659) to
These attributes are the same as on the Operations tab for Mill (see
page 1657), with an additional option in the Automatic Ordering
Options dialog, Use template:
This attribute is applicable only to turning setups. If Use template is

selected then the order of operations is determined by the outline of
operations listed in the Feature Order dialog. Click Edit template to
open the Feature Order dialog. See turn operation order (see page
1563) for more information.
Automatic Options [TURN]

These attributes are the same as on the Operations tab for Mill, with
one additional option in the Automatic Ordering Options dialog, Use
template:

Use rules:
Minimize tool changes — This option groups operations together that
use the same tool. This saves time for you by eliminating or
reducing needless tool changes. You must select this option if you
want to generate hole macros in the NC code.
Do finish cuts last — This option moves the finish milling operations
to the end of the Setup without altering the order of the finishing
before finish milling operations, select this option.
Cut higher operations first — This option affects only milling Setups.
Select this option to mill the features from the top of the stock first
and work toward the bottom. If you deselect this attribute, you
should carefully graphically verify the toolpath before cutting your
part.
Sorting by Z coordinate is controlled by the Cut higher

operations first attribute. If you deselect this attribute,
graphically verify the toolpath before cutting your part.
Minimize rapid distance — This affects only milling Setups and is the
only ordering option that changes the order of features specified in
the part view. Minimize Rapid Distance moves to the next closest
feature that uses the same tool as the last operation. You must
deselect this option if you want to generate hole macros in the NC
code.
If you have selected all of the optimization options, the
manufacturing order for operations that were derived from different
features is determined like this:
1 The operations are sorted by their top Z coordinate.
2 Among operations with the same top Z coordinate, operations
are grouped by the tool with which they are cut.
3 After an operation is cut, FeatureCAM moves to the next
operation performed with the same tool that is the closest to the
current operation.
Use template — This attribute is applicable only to turning Setups. If
you select Use template then the order of operations is determined
by the outline of operations listed in the Feature Order dialog. Click
Edit template to open the Feature Order dialog. See turn operation
order (see page 1563) for more information.

Wire default machining attributes [WIRE]
The Machining Attributes dialog for Wire parts has these tabs:
Wire EDM (see page 1716)
Settings (see page 1717)
Start (see page 1730)
Misc. (see page 1735)
Posting (see page 1740)
Wire EDM tab [WIRE]
2 axis Die operations — This sets the default operations for a 2-axis
Die feature. Select the main operation from the menu. For some
operations you can optionally select to add an additional Cutoff and
Contour operation.

2 axis Punch/Side operations — This sets the default operations for a
2-axis Punch or Side feature. For some operations you can
optionally select to add an additional Cutoff and Contour operation.
4 axis Die operations — This sets the default operations for a 4-axis
Die feature. For some operations you can optionally select to add an
additional Cutoff and Contour operation.
4 axis Punch/Side operations — This sets the default operations for a
4-axis Punch or Side feature. For some operations you can
optionally select to add an additional Cutoff and Contour operation.

page 1468) tab.
Settings tab [WIRE]
Die/Punch primary cut dir


side side
- Primary - Primary
is Right is Left
side side
- Primary - Primary
is Right is Left

page 1468) tab.
Side primary offset dir
side side
- Primary - Primary
is Right is Left
side side
- Primary - Primary
is Right is Left

page 1468) tab.
Retract/Cutoff/Stop stop length — This is the distance from the
normal contour end position to the inserted stop or end position.

Retract operation:
Contour
Wire path
Stop length
Run-out
Stop operation:
Contour
Wire path
Stop length

Contour
Wire path
Stop length
Run-out
Contour
Wire path
Stop length
Run-out

page 1468) tab.
Stop Code — For stop operations you can choose from:

Retract/Cutoff retract length — This is the distance that the wire
retracts from the part at the end of an operation.
operations.
- Retract length
- Stop length
- Wire path
- Contour
Use on both ends of skim passes — Enable this option to apply the
Retract length to both ends of skim passes. (The wire does not
return to the start point at one end.)
The following example shows a retract and cutoff operation using
the default behavior (Use on both ends of skim passes disabled):

pass 1, wire pass 2, wire pass 3, wire
retracts by the retracts back to the retracts by the
Retract Length: start point: Retract Length:

retracts back to the retracts by the
start point: Retract Length:

This is the same example with Use on both ends of skim passes
enabled:

pass 1, wire pass 2, wire pass 3, wire retracts
retracts by the retracts by the by the Retract
Retract Length: Retract Length: Length:

retracts by the retracts by the
Retract Length: Retract Length:
Retract/Cutoff overlap — This is the distance by which the normal

contour end position is overcut.
Stop operation:

- Contour
- Wire path
- Contour start/end
position
- Inserted stop
positions
- Stop length
- Overlap
- Contour
- Normal contour
start/end position
- Inserted end
position
- Run-out
- Stop length
- Overlap
- Contour
- Normal contour
start/end position
- Inserted end
position
- Run-out
- Stop length
- Overlap



2 axis Pocket/Zigzag total stock


- Leave allowance
- Contour stock
- Total stock

page 1468) tab.
Stepover — This is the default stepover for Pocketing or Zigzag
operations. Specify this default attribute as a percentage of the wire
diameter.
2 axis Pocket/Zigzag finish allowance — This is the amount of
material left after a Zigzag pass. Even if a Cleanup Pass is used, the
finish allowance still remains.
2 axis Zigzag cut angle — This sets the cutting angle for a Zigzag
operation.

page 1468) tab.
Cleanup Pass — Enable this option to create a finishing cut at the
end of a Zigzag operation.
- Cleanup Pass
4 axis/Rapid toolpath linear approx — In 4-axis wire EDM, all arcs are
converted into small line segments. This attribute controls how
finely arcs are refined into lines. The smaller the number, the more
points arcs are broken down into.
This attribute is called Total Stock at feature-level on the

Strategy (see page 1468) tab
Keep wire vertical at retract — This keeps the wire vertical after
Retract and Cutoff operations for 4-axis features.
The following example shows the end of a Retract operation with
Keep wire vertical at retract selected:

This is the same example with Keep wire vertical at retract
deselected:
You can override many of these default attributes at feature

level on the Strategy (see page 1468) tab.
Offset tab [WIRE]
Offset method (see page 1479) — This controls whether the

offsetting of the wire path is performed on the machine using cutter
compensation or by FeatureCAM. Select Cutter comp to perform the
offsetting on the machine, or Offset Toolpath if you want
FeatureCAM to perform the offsetting.
Total passes — Enter the total number of passes to take to cut the
feature. If a feature has a Retract, Stop, or Cutoff operation these
operations are each performed Total Passes - Contour Passes. If a
feature has a Contour operation, Total Passes must be at least 2.
Total Passes must be between 1 and 9.
Contour passes — This is the number of passes to take for the
Contour operation for a Retract, Stop, or Contour operation.

Uni-directional
Applies to Contour, Stop, Retract, and Cutoff operations that use
the Offset Method of Cutter Comp.
For multiple passes, the cutting direction for each following pass is
not reversed and all passes take place in the defined direction. At
the end of each pass the wire is cut and the machine re-positions to
the start point for the next pass.
Uses Macro if available
Applies to Contour, Stop, Retract and Cutoff operations that use the
Offset Method of Cutter Comp. Available for 2-axis features only.
This option activates the automatic creation of sub-programs for the
machining of operations. You must define the format and output of
sub-programs in the post processor. The use of sub-programs is
particularly useful when producing chain programs. In this case
each machining contour is written to a separate sub-program. The
main calling program then contains only the movements required to
move to the next start point.
For multiple pass, if the Uni-Directional option is enabled then only a
single macro is output containing a single pass.
Total stock — This is the default for the total stock feature attribute.

- Leave allowance
- Contour stock
- Total stock
Contour stock — This the default for the contour stock attribute.

Contour Stock is the amount of material to leave for the contour
operation.
- Leave allowance
- Contour stock
- Total stock
Stepover — This is the default attribute for the stepover feature
attribute. This default attribute is specified as a percentage of the
wire diameter.
This parameter defines the stepover between passes for Cutoff,
Stop, Retract, and Contour operations.
Cut all operations on each curve first — For features with multiple
curves, enable this option to do all operations on each curve before
moving on to the next curve. If the option is disabled, the first
operation is done on all curves, then the next operation, and so on.
Cut the first pass on each curve first — For features with multiple
curves, select this option to cut all the passes for one curve before
moving on to the next curve.
For features with multiple curves, such as the die below, the default
behavior is to cut all the passes for one curve before moving on to
the next curve.

- curve1
- curve2
- curve3
If you want to cut the first pass on each curve first, select the Cut
the first pass on each curve first option:
This option is for 2-axis only and is available for the following
operations:
 Cutoff
 Stop
 Contour only (not, for example, a Stop plus Contour combination)
For the example above with Retract and Cutoff operations, the
default behavior is to cut the three Retract passes on curve1, then
the three Retract passes on curve2, then the three Retract passes on
curve3. It then cuts all three Cutoff passes on curve1, then all three
Cutoff passes on curve2, then all three Cutoff passes on curve3.

With Cut the first pass on each curve first selected for the same
example, FeatureCAM cuts the Retract operation as before. It then
cuts the first Cutoff pass on curve1, then the first Cutoff pass on
curve2, then the first Cutoff pass on curve3.
It then cuts the remaining two Cutoff passes on each curve.
Because the first Cutoff pass of each curve needs the attention of
the machinist to remove the core, the advantage of using Cut the
first pass on each curve first is that the machinist can remove the
cores of all the curves together, and the machine can finish cutting
the part without intervention.

Leave allowance — This is the amount of material to leave after the
Retract, Cutoff, Stop, and Contour operations.
- Leave allowance
- Contour stock
- Total stock
A negative Leave Allowance acts as an overcut.
Start tab [WIRE]

For Die/Punch
Lead length — This is the default distance for the automatically
calculated lead move of die or punch features. The initial point of
the toolpath by this lead length perpendicular from the start point of
the curve. You can change the start point of the toolpath on the
Start (see page 1481) tab of the wire feature.
Connect lead to first curve piece's — This is the position of the default
lead on the first curve piece, select either Beginning (default option)
or Middle.
This example shows the default Beginning option:
This is the same example with Middle selected:
For circular Die

Use the center as the start/end point — Select this option to use the
center of the circle as the start/end point. Deselect this option to
use a different location for the start/end point.
Use lead angle (see page 1733) — Select the option and enter the
lead angle in degrees. Deselect the option if you do not want to use
a lead angle.
2 axis lead style (for non-taper only)

Style — There are several choices for the type of moves for leading
in and out of an operation. The default Diameter for lead/retract
moves is a percentage of the tool diameter.
Direct — This style moves straight from the start point to the
contour.

- start point
- contour
There are four different ramp styles that arc onto the contour.
The ramp styles available are:
Teardrop: Bullet:
Arc: U-Shape:
To set a ramp style, select the Style from the list and enter a
Diameter for lead moves.
Start point
Contour
Diameter
The same diameter arc is used to ramp off the contour and then the
wire returns to the start point.

Use lead angle example
This example model has been pre-machined and only the circular
areas are left to finish:
Create a Die feature from the four circles, using a Contour strategy
with a Direct lead style.
After doing a 3D simulation, you can see that there is unnecessary
cutting into the model on circles , , and :
Because the Die feature is made up of four circles, if you change the
default Lead angle on the Start tab of the Machining Attributes dialog,
from 0 to 90 deg., this changes the lead angle for all four circles:
So now, circle is fine, but there is unnecessary cutting for circles

, , and , so changing the lead angle does not help in this
situation.

To change the lead angle for each circle individually, deselect the
Use lead angle option on the Start tab of the Machining Attributes
dialog, and FeatureCAM uses the start points of the curves as they
were defined:
You can change the start points of new or existing curves

using the Set start point option in the Curve Start/Reverse (see
page 329) dialog:

Misc. tab [WIRE]
Wire Cutting/Threading — This offers settings to control the output of

wire threading or wire cutting commands.
Off — No wire threading or wire cutting commands are output in the
NC-program.
Both — The commands to thread the wire and cut the wire are
output automatically at the start and end of each operation within
the feature.
Cut — The wire cutting command is output at the end of each
operation within the feature (but no wire thread command at the
start). When viewing the toolpath in centerline simulation, the Cut
location is denoted with a small circle.
Thread — The wire threading command is output at the start of each
operation within the feature (but no cut wire command at the end).
When viewing the toolpath in centerline simulation, the Thread
location is shown as a small plus sign.
Modify outside corners
A radius is inserted into the wire path at each outside sharp corner.
This can be useful for reducing unnecessary movements and for
producing cleaner corners.

This example shows the original toolpath:
If Modify outside corners is enabled, the toolpath rounds sharp

corners, for example:
The size of the outside corner depends on the Radius you set, for
example:

Machining Attributes (see page 1591). See the Misc. (see page
1483) tab.
Modify inside corners
Circular
A circle is inserted in the corners. The center of the circle lies on the
corner point.
This example shows the original toolpath of an inside corner:
If Modify inside corners is enabled, with an Inside corner style of

Circular, FeatureCAM inserts a circle into sharp inside corners, for
example:

The size of the circle depends on the Radius you set, for example:
Enter a Center shift to offset the center of the circle.

Positive Center No Center shift: Negative Center
shift: shift:
Select Auto adjust the radius to enable FeatureCAM to automatically

adjust the radius of the circle according to how sharp each corner
is. A 45 degree corner uses a circle of the specified Radius. For
sharper corners with angles less than 45 degrees, the radius of the
circle is increased, for less sharp corners with angles greater than
45 degrees, the radius of the circle is reduced. Deselect Auto adjust
the radius to always use the specified Radius.
Triangular
The path follows a triangular shape at an inside corner. Specify the

length and width of the triangle.
Rounded
The path rounds inside corners. Specify the radius.

1483) tab.
Modifying both inside and outside corners
Both inside and outside corners are modified as shown below.
Original path curve with Resulting NC output Resulting part shape:
inside corner (shown in pink):
(shown in blue):
Auto round
If Auto round is enabled, arcs are inserted at all sharp corners. This
applies only if Cutter comp is enabled and you have a leave
allowance or if Cutter comp is not set. If you have enabled Modify
outside corners, it does not perform any further rounding on these
corners. It rounds inside corners (even if Modify inside corners is
enabled) by inserting an arc before and after the circular corner as
shown below: The radius of the inserted arcs is equal to the radius
of the wire.
Wire radius

1483) tab.
Post Vars (see page 1656) dialog

Operations tab [WIRE]
Click the Automatic Options button to open the Automatic Ordering

Options dialog:
This dialog contains options suitable for Wire EDM:

 Do Cutoffs last — All retracts are done together, then cutoffs,
then contours
 Minimize rapid distance — This minimizes movement of the wire
by moving to the next closest feature after the one it is currently
cutting
If the Don't ask at tool path simulation option is deselected, the
Ordering dialog is displayed when you start simulation, as a
reminder about ordering.

Posting tab [WIRE]
The Posting tab is for 4-axis features only.

By default, FeatureCAM outputs the upper and lower toolpaths at
the same planes as the feature is programmed. For example, if the
feature is at Z0 and has a depth of 1, then the upper toolpath is at
Z0 and the lower toolpath is at Z-1.
Some machines need the output to be at the Z planes of the upper
and lower wire guides, so FeatureCAM must project the toolpaths
outwards to the location of the guides. For example, if the wire
guides are at Z-2 and Z10, we need to project the upper toolpath to
Z10 and the lower toolpath to Z-2.
For these machines, select Generate 4 axis toolpath at the wire guide
planes and enter the Z planes of the Upper guide and Lower guide.

In the image below, is the original lower toolpath, is the
toolpath at the wire guide plane.
Machining configurations
A configuration is a collection of machining attributes. The defaults
for values such as for stepovers, ramping, canned cycle use, or
operation ordering are all stored as default machining attributes.
Default attributes are stored in collections called configurations.

Select Manufacturing > Machining Configurations to open the
Machining Configuration dialog.
This dialog lists all of the available configurations. Configurations

are listed with the following icons:
File (f) — Configurations for files that are currently open.
Personal (p) — Configurations that are independent of a particular file
and are stored only on your PC.
Workgroup (w) — Configurations that are independent of a particular file
and are stored on a network for sharing with colleagues.
Selecting a configuration from the Available configurations list

does not have any affect unless you then select one of the
actions below.
New — Click this button to open the New Configuration dialog:
Use this dialog to create a new configuration that is independent of

any part file.
Enter the name of the new configuration.
Select an existing file to copy and base the new configuration on.
Select the Configuration type.

To create a Workgroup configuration, you must first enter a
valid network path on the Database (see page 140) tab of
the File Options dialog.
Configurations are saved in a file called EZFM_mfg.ini.
If you have several Personal configuration files that you

want to share as Workgroup files, you can copy your local
EZFM_mfg.ini file to the network location specified on the
Database (see page 140) tab in the File Options dialog.
Rename — Click this button to rename a configuration that is
independent of a part file.
Copy — Click this button to copy attributes from one configuration
to another. Select the configuration you want to copy to in the
Available configurations list before clicking the Copy button. You are
then prompted for the configuration to copy from.
Delete — Click this button to delete the selected machining
configuration. You can remove only configurations that are not
associated with an open file. You are not allowed to delete the last
configuration that is independent of opened files.
Import — Click this button to import a .cdb configuration file into
FeatureCAM.
These attributes are not applied to a file unless they are

copied or unless these attributes are used as an initial
configuration for a document.
Export — Click this button to export configurations to a .cdb file. A
dialog is displayed in which you can select the configurations to
export and to specify the name of the file to be exported.
Edit — Select a configuration from the list of Available configurations
and then click the Edit button to modify the attributes of the
configuration.
To modify the attributes of the current document, it is easier

to select Machining attributes from the Manufacturing menu.
Use the Initial configuration list at the bottom of the dialog to specify
the configuration to use as the initial configuration for new
documents. New documents copy the attributes from this
configuration when the document is created.

Tooling
FeatureCAM has extensive tooling databases and automatically
selects tools for each manufacturing operation.
Overview of tooling (see page 1744)
Tooling database (see page 1745)
How to import tooling (see page 1830)
How to export tooling (see page 1833)
Assigning tool numbers (see page 1575)
Spindles and tool holders (see page 1841)
Tool life management (see page 1579)
Overview of tooling
For each manufacturing operation created for the features of a part,
a tool must be selected from the internal tooling database. This
database is broken into separate tool cribs to represent individual
collections of tools that your organization might have. The image
below shows the structure of the tooling database.
Tooling database
Tool cribs
Tool groups for
example drills, taps, or
mills
Tools
FeatureCAM comes with two different built-in tool cribs. The Basic
crib is the default crib that contains standardly available tools that
most shops own. The Tools crib is a large crib containing thousands
of tools. This crib is most often used as a source to copy from into
custom tool cribs or into the basic tool crib. Only one tool crib is
available at a time and all tools are selected for a part from only the
current tool crib. Tool cribs contain individual tools and they are
classified into tool groups such as drills, end mills, and boring bars.
You cannot create new tool groups, but you can create new tools to
reflect the specific tools that your shop owns.
Each feature type has rules for tool selection.

Double-click a feature in the graphics window or the Part View panel
to display the Feature Properties dialog, then select an operation
from the Tree View on the left of the dialog.
On the Tools tab of the Feature Properties dialog, you can:
 see which tool is currently selected to perform the operation; or
 change the tool used to perform the operation.
Tooling database
The tooling database defines the set of tools from which
FeatureCAM selects tools to perform manufacturing operations.
These tool sets are called cribs. FeatureCAM comes with two
standard tool cribs, the Tools tool crib and the Basic tool crib. The
Tools tool crib is a comprehensive tool crib that contains more tools
than your shop probably owns. The Basic tool crib contains a
smaller set of tools such as HSS endmills and standardly available
drills. By default FeatureCAM is set to use the Basic tool crib. You
should modify the cribs to reflect the tools your shop has. You can
create a crib containing tools you commonly use, which can simplify
setting up a part for machining.
The name of the active tool crib is displayed on the status bar. To
change the current tool crib you are currently using, click the crib
name on the status bar. A list of tool cribs is displayed that you can
select from.
To create or modify a tool crib, you must have a part file open, then
select Manufacturing > Tool Manager from the menu to display the
Tool Manager (see page 1745) dialog.
Tool Manager
To display the Tool Manager dialog, select Manufacturing > Tool
Manager from the menu.
Use the Tool Manager to view, edit, or add tools to a tool crib. Tools
are separated into groups. Tool Group (see page 1751) contains a
list of the groups supported by FeatureCAM.

The Tool Manager shows only one type of tool at a time. The dialog
is arranged so it's convenient to move tools from one crib to
another. In general you want to have the Tools tool crib selected in
From Crib and the basic or basicmetric tool crib selected in Current
Crib.
From Crib — Select the tool crib from which you want to take tool
definitions to copy to the tool crib selected in the Current Crib.
Tool Group — This menu lists tools in related groups, according to
the type of manufacturing operation that class of tools typically
performs.
Current Crib — Select the tool crib into which you copy tools from
the crib selected in From Crib.
Sort by — You can sort the tools by selecting one of the following:
Name — The tool name.
Unit — The tooling unit. All inch tools are grouped together and
all mm tools are grouped together.
Material — Sort by the tool material.
Diameter — The diameter of the tool. The units of the tool are
ignored.
Show only — You can filter which tools are displayed by selecting
Name, Unit, Material, or Diameter and entering a value.

To limit the tools by name, type in the initial characters of the
name.
You cannot use other string wildcards like the "*".

Available Tools — This shows the tools that are in the tool crib
selected under From Crib for the selected Tool Group.
Select All — Click the left arrow button to copy all the tools listed
under Current Tools to Available Tools. Click the right arrow button
to copy all the tools listed under Available Tools to Current Tools.
Add — Copies the selected tool(s) in the Available Tools list to the
Current Tools list, thus building a set of tool definitions for the tool
crib selected under Current Crib.
Remove — Removes the selected tool(s) from the Current Tools list.
Use the Shift and Ctrl keys to select more than one tool.
Current Tools — This shows the tools that are already in the Current
Crib for the selected Tool Group.
Double-click a tool name under Current Tools to open the Tool

Properties (see page 1749, see page 1795) dialog for that
tool.
dialog.
any changes.
New Tool — Click this button to create a new tool for the selected
Tool Group. Click the New Tool button and the Tool Properties (see
page 1749, see page 1795) dialog is displayed for the selected Tool
Group.
The Tool Properties dialog is displayed with a copy of the

tool selected in the Tool Manager, or if no tool is selected, it
uses a copy of the first tool in the Current Tools list.
If the new tool that you want to create is similar to an

existing tool, select that tool in the Tool Manager before
clicking New Tool and you have fewer attributes to edit.
New Crib — Click this button to create a new tool crib. Click New Crib
and the New Tool Crib dialog is displayed. Enter a unique name for
your new tool crib. Click OK to create the new, empty, crib. The new
crib is selected under Current Crib ready for you to add tools to it.

Delete Crib — Click this button to delete the tool crib selected under
Current Crib. FeatureCAM asks you to confirm before deleting the
tool crib.
Copy Crib — Click this button to bulk-copy tools by whole Tool Group
from one crib to another. Select the destination crib you want to
copy into under Current Crib and click the Copy Crib button. The
Copy Tool Crib dialog is displayed. Select the Tool crib to be copied,
select the Tool Groups that you want to copy and click Copy, then
Close.
Tool Grades button - opens the Turning Tools Grades dialog. See
Adding a new tool grade for turning operations (see page 1849) for
more information.
Import — Click this button to import tools from other FeatureCAM
users. Click the Import button to open the Tool Import dialog. Browse
to where the import file is saved, select the tool crib you want to
import into and select what to do if the tool name already exists.
Export — Click this button to export tools so that you can share
them with other FeatureCAM users. Click the Export button to open
the Tool Export dialog. Two file types are supported, .xml and .tdb.
We recommend that you use the .xml format as it supports
exporting custom-drawn holders. Click the browse button and
specify the location and File Name for your file, and click OK. Select
the Tool crib to be exported and the Tool Groups that you want to
export. Click Export and wait for FeatureCAM to confirm how many
tools were exported. Click OK to confirm and click Close in the Tool
Export dialog to return to the Tool Manager.
Properties — Select a tool in the Current Tools list and click
Properties to see more details of the tool. You can also double-click
a tool in the Current Tools list to open its Properties dialog.
Tool Parameters — Click the tool preview image to pan and zoom it.
The orientation of the preview is determined by the Machine tab
settings of the Viewing Options dialog. Right-click the image to
access a context menu.
Center Tool — Select this menu option to center the tool in the
preview image.
Center All — Select this menu option to center the tool and tool
holder in the preview image.
Redraw Tool — Select this menu option to recreate the preview
image after making changes to its attributes.
Show Tool Holder — Select this menu option to display the tool
holder with the tool. The tool holder is displayed by default.
Show Flutes on End Mills — Select this menu option to display a
representation of an end mill tool's flutes in the preview image.

2 flutes, 4 flutes, 4 flutes,
right-handed right-handed left-handed
Automatic Center Tool — Select this menu option to center the tool
automatically when you move the mouse pointer over the image.
Milling Tool Properties dialog

Use the Tool Properties dialog to:
 View a tool's details.
 Edit a tool's details.
 Create a new tool.
To display the Tool Properties dialog:
 Double-click the name of a tool on the Tools tab of the Feature
Properties dialog (see page 884).
 Select a tool on the Tools tab of the Feature Properties dialog and
click Properties .
 Double-click the name of a tool on the Op List tab (see page
1548) of the Results window.
 Select a tool on the Op List tab of the Results window and click
Properties .
 Double-click the name of a tool in the Current Tools list in the
Tool Manager dialog (see page 1745).

 Select a tool from the Current Tools list in the Tool Manager dialog
and click Properties.
The Tool Properties dialog has four tabs for milling tools.
Tool Group (see page 1751)
Overrides (see page 1785) — Use this tab to set the tool number,
cutter comp register and offset register for the tool. These settings
are used for this tool whenever it is used to cut a part.
Holder (see page 1789)
Feed/Speed (see page 1791) — Use this tab to set speed and feed
overrides for a particular tool. Whenever this tool is used, the feed
and speed values are scaled by this percentage value.
Click the tool preview image to pan and zoom it. The orientation of
the preview is determined by the Machine tab settings of the

Tool Group tab
The first tab of the Milling Tool Properties dialog (see page 1749)
has the name of the tool group that the tool belongs to.
Viewing Options dialog. Right-click the image to display the context
menu.
preview image.

These tool groups are available for milling:

Backbore (see page Probe (see page
1753) 1767)
Boring Bar (see Ream (see page
page 1754) 1769)
Chamfer Mill (see Rounding Mill (see
page 1755) page 1770)
Counterbore (see Side Mill (see page
page 1757) 1773)
Countersink (see Spot and Center Drill
End Mill (see page Tap (see page 1776)
1760) Thread Mill (see
Face Mill (see page page 1779)
1762) Twist Drill (see page
Plunge Mill (see 1780)
page 1766)

Backbore
Backbore tools are used for drilling Backbore Hole features.

Name — Enter a name that identifies the tool. The name must be
unique among all the tools in the crib.
Measure — This indicates the units that are used for reporting the
tool’s dimensions. Select Inches for inch units or deselect it for
millimeters.
Diameter — See diagram.
Cutter Length — See diagram.
Overall Length — See diagram.
Exposed length — This is the amount of the tool that sticks out of
the holder if the holder is simulated.
Shank Diameter — See diagram.
Tip Radius — See diagram.
Material — This indicates what the tool is made of. This information
is important when calculating the feeds and speeds (see page
1508).
Hand — Set whether the tool is Right-handed or Left-handed.

Diameter
Cutter Length
Overall Length
Shank Diameter
Tip Radius
Boring Bar
Boring Bar tools are used in milling for the boring operation of a
Hole feature or for a step of a Step Bore feature.
millimeters.

Tip Radius — See diagram.
1508).
The Tip Radius is taken into account only for step bores.
FeatureCAM assumes that you have an adjustable boring bar. For
boring operations, if there is not an appropriate tool in the tool crib
FeatureCAM creates a tool with the name user_adjust….
Diameter
Length
Tip Radius
Chamfer Mill
Chamfer Mill tools are used for chamfer features or for chamfering
large diameter holes.

millimeters.
Inner Diameter — See diagram.
Outer Diameter — See diagram.
1508).
Inner Diameter
Outer Diameter
Shank Diameter
Overall Length

Counterbore
Counterbore tools are used for the counterbore operations of

counter bored holes.
millimeters.
Pilot Diameter — See diagram.
Pilot Length — See diagram.
Flutes — Enter the number of grooves on the tool.
Touch off at the shoulder — Select this check box to position the tool
z-zero at the end of the flutes (the tool shoulder). Deselect the
check box to position the tool z-zero at the end of the pilot (the tool
tip).
1508).

Tool Finish — This is the coating, or finish, on the tool. This
information is also used in feed/speed calculations. If a feed/speed
table exists for a material cut with a tool with a Bright finish, but not
for TI_N or Black Oxide tool finishes, then the speed values are
derived from the Bright table. The speed for TI_N is 1.5 times the
BRIGHT speed. The speed for BLACK_OXIDE is 1.05 times the
BRIGHT speed. The feed rates are the same as the BRIGHT feed
rates.
Diameter
Overall Length
Shank Diameter
Length
Pilot Length
Pilot Diameter
Countersink
Countersink tools are used for counter sink operations on holes.


millimeters.
Body Diameter — See diagram.
Flat Diameter — Countersink tools can optionally have a flat end. See
diagram.
Angle — See diagram.
1508).
rates.
Shank Diameter
Body Diameter
Overall Length
Angle
Flat Diameter
See also Hole: Tool Selection (see page 649).

End Mill
End Mill tools are used to represent flat end mills, ball end mills,
bull-nose mills, and tapered end mills.
millimeters.
End Radius — See diagram.
Use curve to describe tool shape — Select this option to create a form
tool. Select a curve in the Curve list to define the profile of the tool.
Taper — See diagram.
1508).

Diameter
Overall Length
Cutter Length
Shank Diameter
End Radius
Diameter at Bottom
Cutting Type: Non-center
Cutting Type: Center
For ball end tools, enter the diameter, select Ball-end and the radius
is calculated.
For flat end tapered tools there are three different ways to specify
the taper angle, cutter length and diameters:
 Enter the Taper angle, Diameter (which is the diameter of the tool
at the top of the taper) and the Cutter length.
 Enter the Taper angle, select Diameter at Bottom, enter the Bottom
diameter and enter the Cutter length.
 Enter the Taper angle, select Diameter at Bottom, enter the
Diameter (which is the diameter at the bottom of the taper) and
click the Compute from shank button to have the Cutter Length
computed for you.

Face Mill
Face Mill tools are used for facing features.

millimeters.
Height — See diagram. If you selected Chamfer as the corner type,
ensure that the Height is >= (Diameter - Effective diameter)/2.
Corner — Select either Round or Chamfer (45 ) as the corner type.
You can use a Face Mill with a Chamfer to cut a Chamfer

feature to reduce the number of tools used to cut a part.
This example part has a Face and Chamfer features on the top and
on the side:

By default, this part uses three tools:
 a Face Mill to cut the top Face, then indexed around to cut the
side Face.
 a Chamfer tool to cut the Chamfer around the top Face
 a Chamfer tool to cut the Chamfer around the side Face
Instead of the default Face Mill, you can create a new Face Mill with
a Chamfer, for example:
Set this new tool as the override for the Face feature, and then use
it to cut the Chamfer features, by overriding the default tools in the
Op List.

After simulating the part again, you can see that the new Face Mill
tool cuts both the Face features and the Chamfers:
In this example, the chamfered Face Mill tool is too large to cut the
Chamfer on the side of the part:
FeatureCAM give a warning and you can change the tool for this
Chamfer back to the default tool.
Using a chamfered Face Mill tool, you can cut this particular part
with two tools instead of three:

 a chamfered Face Mill to cut the top Face, the top Chamfer, then
indexed around to cut the side Face
 a Chamfer tool to cut the Chamfer around the side Face
Effective diameter — See diagram. If you selected Chamfer as the

corner type, enter an Effective diameter greater than 0. The Effective
diameter must not be less than Diameter - 2*Height and must not be
greater than Diameter.
Corner Radius — See diagram.
1508).
Round Chamfer
Height
Diameter
Corner Radius
Effective
Diameter

Plunge Mill
Plunge Mill tools are used in plunge roughing operations.

millimeters.
Insert Tip Radius — See diagram.
Insert Length — This parameter is for tooling documentation only. It
is not used for toolpath generation.
1508).

rates.
Diameter
Cutter Length
Overall Length
Shank Diameter
Insert Tip Radius
Probe
Ball Diameter
Stem Diameter
Overall Length
Shank Length
Lower Shank Diameter
Upper Shank Diameter
Taper Length

Taper Shank — Deselect this option to have a shank with a constant
diameter and enter the Shank Diameter instead of Lower Shank
Diameter and Upper Shank Diameter.
millimeters.

Ream
Ream tools are used for reaming operations on holes.

millimeters.
Shank diameter — See diagram.
Drill diameter — Enter the default diameter of all drill and bore tools
used in the feature.
This value should not be larger than the Diameter value of the tool,
as this causes the drill tool to be larger than the ream tool, which
may compromise the accuracy of the feature.
If Calculated is selected, the Drill diameter is calculated from the Drill
% of ream/bore attribute on the Tool Selection tab (see page 1676) of
1508).

rates.
Diameter
Overall Length
Shank Diameter
Cutter Length
Rounding Mill
Rounding Mill tools are used for Round features.


millimeters.
Inner diameter — See diagram.
Outer diameter — See diagram.
Shank diameter — See diagram.
Radius — See diagram.
Overall length — See diagram.
When Touch off at the shoulder is selected, the Exposed length

value does not include the tip. When it is deselected, the
Exposed length value includes the tip length.
Tip-To-Shoulder Length — Enter the length between the shoulder
and the tip of the tool. This length is the same as the arc Radius by
default, but you can increase it.
Touch off at the shoulder — Rounding Mill tools touch off at the
shoulder by default. Deselect this option to move the touch-off point
to the tip of the tool.
This example shows the default behavior with Touch off at the
shoulder selected. The toolpath is at the top of the Round feature.
This example shows Touch off at the shoulder deselected. The tool
touches off at the tip. The toolpath is at the bottom of the Round
feature.
This example shows Touch off at the shoulder deselected and a
Tip-To-Shoulder Length that is double the Radius value. The tool
touches off at the tip. The toolpath is below the bottom of the
Round feature.
When Touch off at the shoulder is selected, the Exposed length

value does not include the tip. When it is deselected, the
Exposed length value includes the tip length.

1508).
Inner Diameter
Outer Diameter
Shank Diameter
Radius
Exposed length
when Touch off at the
shoulder is selected.
Exposed length
when Touch off at the
shoulder is
deselected.
Tip-To-Shoulder
Length

Side Mill
Side Mill tools are used for OD and ID grooves.

Slitting Saw — This parameter is used only as documentation on the
tool.
millimeters.
Cutter Width — See diagram.
Neck Diameter — See diagram.
Arbor Tip Length — See diagram.
1508).

rates.
Diameter
Cutter Width
Exposed Length
Shank Diameter
Neck Diameter
Arbor Tip
Length
Spot & Center Drills

Spot Drills are used for spot drilling starter holes.
Center Drills are preferred for spot drill operations.

Center Drills are used to drill starter holes. They are preferred over
spot drills for spot drilling operations. Spot Drills can also be used
for spot drill operations.
Type — Select Center or Spot.
millimeters.
Diameter — See diagrams.
Body Diameter — See diagrams.
Overall Length — See diagrams.
Tip Angle — See diagrams.
1508).
rates.
Spot drill diagram:
Diameter
Overall Length
Tip Angle
Cutter Length
Center drill diagram:

Diameter
Body Diameter
Overall Length
Cutter Length
Tap
Tap tools are used to tap holes.

millimeters.
Length — See diagram.
TPI/Pitch — For inch tools, you specify the threads per inch (TPI),
and for metric tools, you specify the Pitch of the threads.

Drill Diameter — If this is set, that tap always uses a twist drill of
that diameter. If you select Calculate, the drill is calculated using
the product's formulas. FeatureCAM uses one of two formulas for
calculating Drill Diameter. One formula is used for Cutting, Helicoil,
and user-defined tap types. The other formula is used for Rolled
types. You can control these two formulas by using the Thread % for
tap drill (cut) and Thread % for tap drill (rolled) attributes on the Tool
Selection (see page 1676) tab of Machining Attributes.
If no Drill Diameter is set for helicoil or user-defined tap types, then
the cutting tap formula is used to calculate the drill diameter.
Taper — If you want a tapered tap, enter the angle in
degrees. Holes with tapered threads automatically select tapping
tools with the same taper angle.
1508).
rates.
Point — Bottom taps have a flat bottom, and Plug taps come to a
point. If a bottom tap is required for a blind hole, a warning is
issued in the operations sheet. Regardless of the type of tool used
for tapping, the hole must allow enough clearance for the tap. If the
hole breaks this rule, an error message is generated when you enter
the hole dimensions.
Style — Spiral-style taps have twisted flutes while Gun-style taps
have straight flutes.
Limit — This attribute is ignored for tool selection. It is used only to
document the tool.
Type — A tapped hole is classified by its Type. When selecting taps,
FeatureCAM searches for a tapping tool that matches the Type of
the threaded hole.

Cutting — These tools cut the threads into the material. The
diameter of the drilling operation is typically calculated.
Rolled — These tools press or form the threads into the material.
The diameter of the drill operation for rolled (or formed) taps is
typically larger than for cutting taps and is typically calculated
using a formula.
Helicoil — These operations are performed within a cutting-style
taps, but the size of the drill and tap operations are larger to fit
the helicoil insert. For these holes, specify the TPI and Diameter
of the helicoil that you want to insert and FeatureCAM selects the
appropriate drill size and helicoil tap.
Add New — New types can be created when a tapping tool is
defined. Any new tapping tool type is displayed as a potential hole
tap type. Automatic tool selection is limited to looking for tools of
this new type.
Diameter
Length
Overall Length

Thread Mill
Thread Mill tools are used for OD and ID thread milling operations.
millimeters.
Pitch — See diagram.
Body Length — See diagram.
1508).
rates.

Pitch
Shank Diameter
Cutter Length
Body Length
For single point tools, set Max Pitch equal to Cutter Length.
Hand — Select whether the tool is a Right Hand or Left Hand tool
Twist Drill
Twist Drill tools are used for drilling operations.

When drilling with a standard twist-drill, extra depth is added to the
operation to account for the drill tip geometry. When a form tool
(see page 1782) or insert drill is used for drilling, no extra depth is
added automatically. You can use the Drill depth (see page 900)
attribute to manually add extra depth if required.

millimeters.
Angle — See diagram.
Class — For insert drills, select Insert and enter the Insert Depth
instead of the Angle. Insert drills do not usually require a spot drill
operation, so to remove the spot drill operation by default when
using this tool, deselect Spot drill on the Overrides tab. Selecting
this option does not affect the drill depth (see page 648) or
automatic tool selection (see page 649).
Use curve to describe tool shape — Select this option to create a form
tool. Select a curve in the Curve list to define the profile of the tool.
1508).
rates.
Diameter
Overall Length
Shank Diameter
Angle
Cutter Length

Form tools
The FeatureCAM tool cribs contain thousands of industry-standard
tools in a wide variety of types. Custom-shaped form tools are not
included in the default tool cribs, but you can create these tools and
use them to cut features.
Examples of form tools:
Concave cutter Tripan cutter Port-entrance tool
Using these tools does not change the toolpaths generated for
features, but the 3D simulation does simulate the proper shape of
form tools. Form tools are never automatically selected, but you can
select them manually.
Form tools have unique shapes, but their type must be endmill,
twistdrill, or sidemill. If you want to use the form tool to perform a
milling operation it must be an endmill form tool. Drilling operations
can be performed with endmill form tools or twistdrill form tools.
OD/ID grooves can be performed only with sidemill form tools.
Creating a form tool
To create a form tool:
1 Create a curve in the graphics window that you want to be used
as the 2D turned profile of the tool. There are some
requirements which the curve must meet.
2 The curve must lie in the XZ plane of the Stock axis.
3 One endpoint of the curve must be on the origin (0,0,0) of the
stock axis and the other must lie on the Z-axis.

.
You can display the profile of an existing tool (see page 1783) in
the graphics window to help you create this curve.
1 In the Tool Manager (see page 1745) dialog or on the Tools tab of
the Feature Properties dialog, select either an endmill, sidemill, or
twistdrill tool.
2 To create a new tool:
 click New tool in the Tool Manager (see page 1745) dialog; or
 click New tool on the Tools tab of the Feature Properties
dialog.
3 Select Use curve to describe tool shape in the Tool Properties
dialog.
4 Select the curve you created from the Select curve list.
5 Click OK to close the Tool Properties dialog.
When you use a curve to define the shape of a tool, many of

the dimensions in the Tool Properties dialog are not used, but
the Diameter is still used for calculating stepovers and
generating the paths.
Displaying a profile of an existing tool
You can display the profile of an existing tool in the graphics window
to use as a reference when creating a curve for a form tool.
To display the profile of a tool in the graphics window:
1 Double-click a tool on the Tools tab of the Feature Properties
dialog (see page 903) to display the Tool Properties dialog
2 Click Paste copy of curve in the Tool Properties dialog.

3 Click Cancel to close the Tool Properties dialog without making
any changes to the tool.
Using a form tool or insert drill for drilling operations
When drilling with a standard twist-drill, extra depth is added to the
operation to account for the drill tip geometry. When a form tool or
insert drill is used for drilling, no extra depth is added automatically.
You can use the Drill depth (see page 900) attribute to manually add
extra depth if required.
Using an insert drill for drilling and boring
To use an insert drill for drilling and boring:
1 Create the drilling and boring operations.
2 Override the tool for the drilling operation to use an insert drill.
3 Override the tooling for the boring operations to use the same
insert drill.
In the Tool Mapping dialog, the insert drill is listed twice. Each listing
has the same tool slot, but the Length offset registers are different.
See also:
How to put two tools in the same tool slot (see page 1582)
Changing the Tool number and Cutter comp
On the Overrides tab of the Tool Properties (see page 1749) dialog,
the tool slot number and cutter comp offset register are displayed in
the Tool number and Diameter offset register fields.
1 If the Diameter offset register field is unavailable, deselect Same.
2 Enter the new values in the Tool number and Diameter offset
register fields.
3 Click OK to close the Tool Properties dialog.

Overrides tab
Use the Overrides tab of the Milling Tool Properties dialog (see page
1749) to set the tool number, cutter comp register, and offset
register for the selected tool.
menu.
preview image.

Name — Specifies the name of the current tool. You can edit the
Name of the tool on the Tool Group (see page 1751) tab.
Only set turret 1 — Select this option to set the tool registers for only
one turret.
Set all turrets — Select this option to set the tool registers for each
turret of a multi-turret machine. Select an entry in the Turret and
spindle list to choose the turret you want to work with.
The turret options are only displayed when the Turning

component (see page 10) of FeatureCAM is activated. The
turrets you can select are determined by the current post file
Default tool registers — Specify the register settings for the tool:
 Tool number — Specifies the slot number for the tool. Enter 0 to
allow FeatureCAM to assign a value when the tool is used.
Tools can occupy the same tool slot (see page 1582).

 Same — Select this check box to use the Tool number value for all
the registers. Deselect the check box to set the registers
individually.
 Diameter offset register — Specifies the diameter cutter
passed to XBUILD as <COMP-NUM>.
 Length offset register — Specifies the tool length offset register
number. Most lathe controllers have a single register that
contains the length and diameter offset values. In this case, the
Length offset register is the important field to set in FeatureCAM.
This value is passed to XBUILD as <OFFSET#>.
 Tool ID — Specifies the identification number of the tool. This is
used by Bridgeport lathes and some Cincinnati machines.
To override the register values for individual parts, use the

Tool Mapping (see page 1575) dialog.
Operations — Select an entry in the list to specify the type of
operation for which FeatureCAM can select this tool. You can
override this setting by selecting the tool manually (see page 981).
Cycle — Select the type of drilling cycle to be used with the tool.
Spotdrill — This enables the spotdrill operation for insert drill tools.
This is useful for high-speed drilling.
Depth of cut (see page 1023) — Select the check box and enter a
value to specify a depth of cut (Z-step increment) override for the
tool.
Stepover — Select the check box and enter a value to specify the
stepover distance override for the tool.
RampAngle — Select the check box and enter an angle to specify a
ramp angle override for the tool.
Comments — Enter any comments for the tool. The post can be
configured to output these comments.

Coolant tab
Use the Coolant tab of the Tool Properties dialog to specify the
default coolants to use for an operation when this tool is used.
types are specified in the CNC file.
tab of the Machining Attributes dialog.
You can override the coolant types for each operation using the
Coolant tab of the Feature Properties dialog.

Holder tab
Use the Holder tab of the Milling Tool Properties dialog (see page
1749) to change or edit the Tool Holder for the selected tool.
The Holder tab enables you see the tool holder that has been
automatically selected for the tool and to permanently assign a
holder to the tool.
menu.
preview image.

Tool name — This displays the name of the tool.

Current spindle — This displays the spindle type that matches the
current holder.
Tool holders are shown in the table at the bottom of the dialog.
Select Only show holders that match the current spindle to hide
holders that do not fit in the current spindle. Select Show all holders
to show them all.
The holder that was selected automatically for the tool is shown
with a D in the check box. To explicitly select a holder to use with
this tool any time the tool is used, select the check-box next to the
tool name. To remove an association of the tool with a holder, click
the Undo holder override button.
Create new toolholder — Click this button to open the Tool Holder
Properties (see page 1843) dialog, where you can create a new tool
holder for the current spindle. The dimensions of the current tool
holder are used as initial dimensions.

Edit toolholder definition — Click this button to open the Tool
Holder Properties (see page 1843) dialog, where you can edit the
properties of the selected toolholder.
Feed/Speed tab
Use the Feed/Speed tab of the Milling Tool Properties dialog (see
page 1749) to specify Feed and Speed overrides for the selected
tool.
This tab is where you override the feed and speed values if you
want to always use specific speed and feed values for this tool, or
this tool with a specific material.
menu.
preview image.

Name — Specifies the name of the current tool.
You can edit the Name of the tool on the Tool Group (see
page 1751) tab.
The table displays any overrides that have been set for this tool
with specific materials.
Material is the list of materials that you choose to override the feed
and speed values for.
% Speed override is the percentage to adjust the speed value
whenever this tool is used; 100% means that the values chosen by
FeatureCAM or overridden by the user are not scaled.
% Feed override is the percentage to adjust the feed rate whenever
this tool is used; 100% means that the values chosen by

Create new item — Click this button to open the Tool Specific
Feeds and Speeds (see page 1793) dialog, where you can add a new
Material and its corresponding feed and speed values to use with
this specific tool.
Properties — Click this button to open the Tool Specific Feeds and
Speeds (see page 1793) dialog for the selected material, where you
can edit the material's feed and speed values to use with this
specific tool.
Delete item — Click this button to remove the selected material.
You can override the depth of cut (see page 1023) value in
several places.
Tool Specific Feeds and Speeds dialog
You can edit the Name of the tool on the Tool Group (see
page 1751) tab.
To add a material:
1 Select the Material from the list.
2 Change any Feed, Speed, Depth (of cut), and Stepover values and
click OK.

The material is added to the table on the Feed/Speed (see page
1791) tab.
To edit values for a material:

1 Ensure that the Material is the one that you want to edit the
values of.
2 Change any Feed, Speed, Depth, and Stepover values and click
OK.
The material is updated with the new values in the table on the
Feed/Speed (see page 1791) tab.
Pecking tab
You can use the Pecking tab to override the Pecking depths for
individual tools. The global pecking depth values are specified on
the Pecking tab of the Machining Attributes dialog.


 Minimum peck — This is the minimum step size for a peck used
for value reduction pecking methods or factor reduction pecking
methods.
For each attribute, leave the value as 0% to use the global setting,
or enter a new value to override the global setting.
For example, if the tool diameter is 1", and the tool's First peck
depth is 80% of the tool diameter, the operation's First peck depth
is 0.8", regardless of the global First peck depth specified in the
Turning Tool Properties dialog

Use the Tool Properties dialog to:
 View a tool's details.
 Edit a tool's details.
 Create a new tool.
To display the Tool Properties dialog:
 Double-click the name of a tool on the Tools tab of the Feature
Properties dialog (see page 884).
 Select a tool on the Tools tab of the Feature Properties dialog and
click Properties .
 Double-click the name of a tool on the Op List tab (see page
1548) of the Results window.
 Select a tool on the Op List tab of the Results window and click
Properties .
 Double-click the name of a tool in the Current Tools list in the
Tool Manager dialog (see page 1745).

 Select a tool from the Current Tools list in the Tool Manager dialog
and click Properties.
The Tool Properties dialog has these tabs for turning tools:
Insert/Type (see Holder Drawing
Holder (see Overrides (see
page 1803) page 1826)
Orientation (see Coolant (see
page 1813) page 1788)
Prog. Pt. (see Feed/Speed (see
page 1815) page 1828)
Insert/Type tab
For most turning tools, the first tab in the Tool Properties dialog (see
page 1749, see page 1795) is the Insert tab.

The parameters on the Insert tab are different depending on the
turning tool type:
Lathe - Turning (see page 1797)
Lathe - Boring (see page 1797)
Lathe - Groove/Cutoff (see page 1799)
Lathe - Thread (see page 1801)
Lathe - Bar Feed (see page 1802)
For Bar Feed tools, the first tab in the Tool Properties dialog is the
Type tab.
Turn, Bore
Viewing Options dialog. Right-click the image to access a context
menu.
preview image.

Insert Shape — Select the insert shape. For the Cust. diamond shape,
you must enter the Tip Angle.
80 Diamond: Square: Triangle: 35 Diamond:
55 Diamond: Round: 80 Trigon: Cust.

Diamond:
Tip Radius is the radius of the cutting tip of the insert.
For threading tools, 3D simulation simulates the tool with a

tip radius of 0.0. This is just for visualization purposes only.
The NC code or tool selection is not affected in any way.
Tip Angle is the included angle of the insert.

Inscribe Circle Diam is the diameter of a circle that fits inside the
insert shape.
Tip radius
Tip angle
Inscribe circle diam.
millimeters.
Groove/Cutoff
menu.
preview image.


Width is the width along the Z axis of a grooving/cutoff tool.
Length (C)
Shaft height
Tip Angle
Width
Tip Radius
Cutgrip grooving tool

millimeters.

Thread
menu.
preview image.


millimeters.
Bar Feed
The Bar Feed tool group represents both bar feeders and bar pullers.
This tool group has a Type tab instead of an Insert tab.
menu.
preview image.

Type — Select Bar Feed or Bar Pull.
millimeters.
Bar Pull tools have additional options:
Depth is the depth of the puller
Max. Diameter is the maximum diameter of the puller
Holder tab
The Holder tab describes the characteristics of the tools holder and
how the insert is oriented relative to the holder. The parameters on
this tab depend on the type of tool:
Groove/Cutoff (see page 1808)
Bar Feed (see page 1810)

Turn
menu.
preview image.

To edit the Name of the tool, use the Insert/Type (see page
1796) tab.
End Cut — The tool cuts in a direction parallel with the length of the
holder.
Side Cut — The tool cuts in a direction perpendicular with the length
of the holder.
End angle
End clearance
Side angle
Side clearance
Shaft Width (A)

Length (C)
Tip to Back (F)

Bore
menu.
preview image.

1796) tab.
holder.
of the holder.
End angle
End clearance
Side angle
Side clearance
Z axis
Min. Diameter (MD)
Length (C)
Shaft Diam. (D)

Groove/Cutoff
menu.
preview image.
The Holder tab for Groove/Cutoff tools, contains these attributes:


1796) tab.
Holder Type — For grooves possible holder types are:
 OD Groove — Select this option for outer diameter grooving tools.
 ID Groove — Select this option for inner diameter grooving tools.
 Face Groove — Select this option for face grooving tools.
 Cutting — Select this option for cutoff tools.
holder.
of the holder.
End angle
End clearance
Side angle
Side clearance
Shaft Diam. (D)

Length (C)
Tip angle
Width
Tip radius
Min/Max plunge dia.

supporting holder.

Cut Depth — This is the maximum depth of cut.
Exposed length — This is the amount of the tool that sticks out of the holder
if the holder is simulated.
Bar Feed

menu.
preview image.
The Holder tab for Bar Feed and Bar Pull tools contains these
attributes:
1796) tab.
Shaft width
Head width
Length

Thread
menu.
preview image.

1796) tab.
Holder Type — For threads possible holder types are:
 OD Threads — Select this option for outer diameter threading
tools
 ID Threads — Select this option for inner diameter threading tools
holder.
of the holder.
Shaft Diam. (D)

Length (C)
Orientation tab
On the Orientation tab, you can set the orientation of the holder in
the machine and the handedness of the tool.

menu.
preview image.
1796) tab.
Insert — Select the handedness of the tool from Right Hand and Left
Hand.
Select holder orientation:
 Select whether the holder is for an OD Turning tool or ID Boring
Bar.
 Set the orientation of the holder by clicking one of the buttons:
SE , SW , NE , or NW .
The images on the buttons do not necessarily show the

shape of the actual insert. The insert of the tool can be any
shape.
When Automatic tool orientation is selected on the Misc tab of

the Machining Attributes dialog, the tool holder orientation is
ignored, and a tool can be used in any orientation.

Prog. Pt. tab
On the Prog. Pt. (program point) tab you set the point of the insert
that is programmed. You can set both the X Coordinate and the Z
Coordinate.
menu.
preview image.

1796) tab.
Tool tip centre — If both X Coordinate and the Z Coordinate are set to
0.0 then the center point of the tip arc is programmed. In this case
it is expected that you perform insert radius compensation at the
machine tool.
Tool tip edge — To perform insert radius compensation in
FeatureCAM, set the X Coordinate and Z Coordinate to the radius
compensation values provided with your tool.
X/Z Gauge length — This is the distance between the tool program
point and the origin/part program zero in the X and Z directions,
when the tool is at the tool home/tool change location position:
Turre
Holde
Origin
program
X Gau
Z Gau
Tool p
point
X Gauge length corresponds to the <X-PRESET> reserved word in

XBUILD.
Z Gauge length corresponds to the <Z-PRESET> reserved word in
XBUILD.
You should also set the default Tool program point (see page 1708,
see page 1404) attribute to Tool tip center or Tool tip edge.

Holder Drawing tab
You can use the Holder Drawing tab to create a custom Tool Holder
from a curve or solid.
menu.
preview image.

1796) tab.
No Custom Holder — A default rectangular holder is used based on
the Holder dimensions.
Curve — You can select a curve to define the shape of the Holder.
This enables you to specify the exact shape of your Tool Holder, so
you can check for Holder collisions during simulations.
Paste example — Creates a curve in the shape of the current Holder
in the graphics window, which you can use as a guide to create a
new curve.
Regardless of the eventual orientation of the holder in the

machine, draw the holder curve in the XZ plane with the
length of the tool holder in the +Z direction and the leading
edge of the insert at the origin. The curve you draw must be a
closed curve.
Select a curve from the Select custom drawn list, then click Set
selected to save it. The curve is saved in the tooling database
independently from the part file. Any subsequent use of this tool in
any part file uses the custom holder.
Solid — You can select a solid to define the shape of the Tool
Holder. This is the most accurate way to represent the tool holder.
After you have imported and positioned the solid (see page 1819)
so that the point zero is in the correct place, select Solid, then
select it from the Select custom drawn list, then click Set selected to
save it. The solid is saved in the tooling database independently
from the part file. Any subsequent use of this tool in any part file
uses the custom holder. the solid name in the Set menu. Click Set
selected to save the solid.

Solid tool holder example
Here is an example of a FeatureCAM turning tool holder:
To use a solid model to accurately define the shape of the tool

holder:
1 Import the solid model file of the tool holder:
a Select File > Import from the menu to display the Import dialog.
b Select the solid model in the Import dialog, then click Open.
c Click Cancel to close the Import Results dialog.
In this example, a *.x_t solid model of the tool holder is used:
2 Optionally rename the solid in the Part View panel:

a Right-click the solid in the Part View panel and select Rename
to display the Rename Object dialog.
b Enter a New Name, then click OK.
3 Find the zero point (mounting point) of the solid model holder:

a Select the two faces that point towards the zero point, for
example:
b Click Hide Unselected in the Hide Menu on the Advanced

Toolbar. Only the selected surfaces are displayed in the
graphics window:
c On the Geometry toolbar, click Line from 2 Pts, and create a

line along the mounting edge of each face, for example:
d Select the two faces in the graphics window, then right-click

on the selection and select Hide Selected from the context
menu.
e Click Trim/Extend in the Geometry toolbar and use the

Trim/Extend tool (see page 315) to extend the lines until they
intersect:

f Click Clip in the Geometry toolbar and use the Clip tool
(see page 315) to clip the ends of the lines beyond the
intersection:
The intersection is the zero point which you can use to

position the holder:
g
4 Create a reference point to move the holder to:
a On the Holder Drawing tab of the Tool Properties dialog (see
page 1749, see page 1795), select Curve, then click Paste
example:
A curve is created in the graphics window.
b Click Show All Solids in the Show Menu in the Advanced

toolbar.
c Click Unshade All in the Display Mode toolbar.

An outline of the solid is displayed in the graphics window:
5 Use the Transform tool to move the zero point of the solid holder
to the zero point of the pasted holder curve :
a Select the solid holder in the Part View panel.
b Select Edit > Transform from the menu to display the
Transform dialog.
c Select Translate and Move and under Distance from 2 points,
click From Pick Location and select the zero point you
sketched earlier in the graphics window:
d Click To Pick Location and select the zero point of the

pasted holder curve in the graphics window:
e Click Preview to display a preview of the solid holder's new

location of the in the graphics window. The preview is shown
in blue:

f Click OK to accept the new location and close the Transform
dialog.
6 Click Shade Surfaces in the Standard toolbar:
7 Select the holder curve you pasted earlier and press the Delete
key to delete it.
8 If you look at the solid holder from the front, there is a recess
where the insert sits:
9 You must take this recess into account to achieve accurate

simulation. To do this:
a Using the Linear Distance tool (see page 290), create a
measurement of the depth of the recess:
In this example, it is approximately 2mm.

b Select the solid holder in the Part View panel.

c Select Edit > Transform from the menu to display the
Transform dialog.
d In the XYZ Distance section, enter 0 for X, -2 for Y, and 0 for Z
to move the holder down by 2mm in the Y direction.
e Click OK.
The solid holder is now in the correct position.
10 Set the solid as the holder for the tool:
a On the Holder Drawing tab of the Tool Properties dialog (see
page 1749, see page 1795), select Solid, then select the solid
from the Select custom drawn list.
b Click Set Selected.

c The solid holder is displayed in the preview window on the tab
and you can see the insert position relative to the holder:
d Click OK to accept the solid holder.

The preview on the Tools tab is updated:
e Click OK to continue.
11 Hide the imported solid and show the part solid.

12 Run a 3D simulation. The solid model that you imported is now
used as the tool holder and the simulation is more accurate:
Overrides tab
menu.
preview image.

1796) tab.
Only set turret 1 — Select this option to set the tool registers for only
one turret.
Set all turrets — Select this option to set the tool registers for each
turret of a multi-turret machine. Select an entry in the Turret and
spindle list to choose the turret you want to work with.
The turret options are only displayed when the Turning

component (see page 10) of FeatureCAM is activated. The
turrets you can select are determined by the current post file
Default tool registers — Specify the register settings for the tool:
 Tool number — Specifies the slot number for the tool. Enter 0 to
allow FeatureCAM to assign a value when the tool is used.
Tools can occupy the same tool slot (see page 1582).
 Same — Select this check box to use the Tool number value as
the Default offset register, Length offset register, and Tool ID
number. Deselect the check box to set the register values
individually.
 Diameter offset register — Specifies the diameter cutter
passed to XBUILD as <COMP-NUM>.
 Length offset register — Specifies the tool length offset register
number. Most lathe controllers have a single register that
contains the length and diameter offset values. In this case, the
Length offset register is the important field to set in FeatureCAM.
This value is passed to XBUILD as <OFFSET#>.

 Tool ID — Specifies the identification number of the tool. This is
used by Bridgeport lathes and some Cincinnati machines.
To override the register values for individual parts, use the

Tool Mapping (see page 1575) dialog.
Operations — Select an entry in the list to specify the type of
operation for which FeatureCAM can select this tool. You can
override this setting by selecting the tool manually (see page 981).
Max. depth of cut — This is the maximum cut depth that is allowed
for this tool.
Comments — Optionally enter comments associated with the tool. A
post processor can be configured to output these comments.
Feed/Speed tab
This tab is where you override the feed and speed values if you
want to always use specific speed and feed values for this tool, or
this tool with a specific material.
menu.
preview image.

1796) tab.
The table displays any overrides that have been set for this tool
with specific materials.
Material is the list of materials that you choose to override the feed
and speed values for.
% Speed override is the percentage to adjust the speed value
whenever this tool is used; 100% means that the values chosen by
% Feed override is the percentage to adjust the feed rate whenever
this tool is used; 100% means that the values chosen by
Create new item — Displays the Tool Specific Feeds and Speeds
dialog, where you can add a new Material and its corresponding feed
and speed values to use with this specific tool.
Properties — Displays the Tool Specific Feeds and Speeds dialog
for the selected material, where you can edit the material's feed and
speed values to use with this specific tool.
Delete item — Removes the selected material.
Tool selection for turn/mill features

Turn/mill features use the same tools as the normal milling
features, but they are renamed with -rotaryX appended to the name
to indicate that it is a powered rotary tool. For example, if a tool
called center_4 is selected for a turn/mill center drill operation, the
tool is copied and the copy is called center4-rotaryX.

Rotary tools cannot be explicitly created, but if you manually select
a tool for a turn/mill operation, it is copied and the copy is
designated as a rotary tool.
Rotary tools cannot be used for turning operations.
Turret location
The Turret location is kept in the *.cnc file, because there may be
multiple turret locations.
To change the locations:
1 Select Manufacturing > Post Process from the menu.
2 In the Post Options dialog, click the Turn/Mill tab.
3 Click the Edit button and XBUILD opens. Select CNC-Info > Turrets
from the menu.
Adding tools to an existing tool crib

You can copy a tool definition directly from an already defined tool
crib (such as Tools) to a new tool crib, or create a new tool.
See Adding tools or New tools.
To add a tool from a tool crib to another tool crib:
1 Select the tool crib that contains the tool definition in the From
Crib list.
2 Select the name of the destination crib in the Current Crib list.
3 Select a tool from the Available Tools list.
You can select multiple tools by pressing the CTRL key, or

you can select a tool group's entire tool list using the left
Select All arrow.
4 Click Add.
Importing tools into a tool crib

To import a tool into the tool crib:
Select Manufacturing > Tool Manager from the menu to display the
Tool Manager dialog.

1 Click Import to display the Tool Import dialog:
2 Under Tool import file name, enter the name and path of the file
you want to import, or click Browse and select it in the Import
dialog.
You can import TDB or XML files, and you can import tools saved
in Excel documents (see page 1831).
3 In the Import into tool crib list, select the tool crib you want to
import the tools into.
4 Under If tool name already in crib, select an option to determine
what happens to tools with the same name as existing tools:
 Select Overwrite with new tool to replace the old tool with the
new tool.
 Select Add 2nd copy of tool to add the new tool under a
different name.
 Select Skip tool to ignore any new tools with the same name
as old tooling.
5 Click Import to import the tools.
A message dialog is displayed that tells you how many tools have
been imported.
6 Click Close to close the dialog.
Importing tools from Excel

You can import Excel documents that contain tool information by
converting them to TDB files.
TDB files do not support form curves.

To import tools saved in an Excel document:
1 Create a backup of your Excel document before starting.
2 Export tools (see page 1833) from FeatureCAM into a TDB file.
3 Open the TDB file in Excel to see how it is formatted.

4 Edit the Excel document that contains your tools so it is
formatted the same as the exported TDB file.
5 Save your Excel document as a TDB file.
A TDB file is similar to a CSV (Comma Separated Value)

file. You can create a TDB file from Excel by saving as a
CSV file and changing the file extension.
6 Import (see page 1830) your TDB file into FeatureCAM using the
Tool Import dialog.
Changing the active tool crib

FeatureCAM selects tools from only the active tool crib to create
toolpaths.
You can use these methods to change the active tool crib:
 Select the Manufacturing > Set Tool Crib menu option. In the
Select Active Tool Crib dialog, select the tool crib you want to use
and click OK.
 In the Status bar (see page 32), click the name of the active tool
crib, and select the tool crib you want to use in the menu.
 In the Tool Manager dialog, select the tool crib you want to use in
the Current Crib list, and click OK to close the dialog.
A message is displayed asking if you want to change the current
tool crib.
To create or edit a tool crib, use the Tool Manager dialog (see page
1745).

Exporting tools
To export tools from a tool crib:
1 Select Manufacturing > Tool Manager from the menu to display the
2 Click Export to display the Tool Export dialog:
3 Enter the file name and location under Export file name, or click
Browse , browse to the location and enter the File name in the
Export dialog.
Two file types are supported: .xml and .tdb. We recommend that
you use the .xml format as it supports exporting form tools and
custom drawn holders. To change the type, click the Browse
button and select the file type in the Save as type menu.
4 Select a tool crib from the Tool crib to be exported list.
5 In the Tool Groups list select the groups you want to export, and
deselect the groups you do not want to export.
Use the Include all items button to select all groups. Use
the Exclude all items button to deselect all groups.
6 Click Export.
7 Click Close.
The file created is tab delimited text. You can edit the file in a
spreadsheet. This file can now be imported into FeatureCAM.
Editing multiple tools at the same time (bulk editing)

If you want to edit many tools, editing them individually in the Tool
Properties dialog may be time-consuming.
There are several ways to bulk-edit tools:

 Export the tools (see page 1833) to a .tdb file, edit them in Excel,
then reimport (see page 1830) them.
You must select Overwrite with new tool in the Tool Import
dialog when reimporting, otherwise you lose form curve
information. By selecting Overwrite with new tool, the
numeric information is overwritten, but the form curve is
not lost.
 Export the tools (see page 1833) to an .xml file, edit them in
Notepad, then reimport (see page 1830) them. This method
keeps the curve/holder information regardless of your overwrite
choice upon import. The disadvantage with this method is that it
is not so easy to edit an .xml file.
 Use a BASIC macro to do your edits. This is useful if you have
many edits to do of a similar type and you are adept at writing
BASIC.
 Using MSACCESS is possible, to directly edit a network database,
but the database structure is convoluted and confusing and easy
to break. We do not recommend this method.
Moving a tool database without exporting and importing
FeatureCAM can use either a local or a network database. This

topic applies only to local databases.
You cannot move a local database between computers simply by
transferring the database files. To move a local database between
computers, export (see page 1833) tools and materials from the
source computer and import (see page 1830) them on to the target
computer.
Sometimes this is not possible due to hardware problems, or if you
cannot export information from FeatureCAM, for example:
 the source computer is damaged but you can access the
hard-drive where the database is stored.
 there is a fault and you cannot open FeatureCAM.
In this situation you can move the database manually.
To manually move a database between computers:
1 Identify the location of the source database:
The following points describe the database:
 It is a folder with a lot of files in it.
 If you have the 32-bit version of FeatureCAM, the folder is
called DATABASE.

If you have the 64-bit version of FeatureCAM, the folder is
called DATABASEX64.
 A FeatureCAM databases folder contain the following files:
object.idx
domain.num
several .a1 files
Problems which make it difficult to find the database:
 If you have installed multiple copies of FeatureCAM, there are
multiple databases.
 The database is stored in different places on different versions
of Windows.
 The database is stored in different places on different versions
of FeatureCAM.
 The database may be stored in a different place or with a
different name depending on the language of Windows or
FeatureCAM.
Use the following tips to distinguish between different databases:
 You can compare time stamps to distinguish between an older
database and a newer one.
 You can compare file sizes to distinguish between a database
that you have not used (such as from a trial download), and
one you have used a lot.
2 Identify the location of the target database:
You need to identify the target database that you want to replace
with your source database. You must have already installed
FeatureCAM on the source computer with a local database.
a Use the information in step 1 to find the database on the
target computer, and note the full pathname to the database
folder, for example:
C:\programdata\featurecam\featurecam188\database.
b From the target database folder, open object.idx in a text
editor. It contains the folder name repeated many times.
c From the target database folder, open domain.nam in a text
editor. It contains the folder name repeated many times.
3 Create a copy of the source database in a neutral location:
Copy the source database folder and all its contents (the
domain.nam, object.idx, and .a1 files) to a neutral location.

You will edit this copy of the database instead of the original. If
you make a mistake you can start again by recopying the original
folder.
4 Edit the neutral copy of the database:
a In the neutral database folder, open object.idx in a text editor.
b Replace all instances of the source database pathname with
the target folder pathname.
For example, if the source database pathname is:
c:\foo\bar\featurecam\featurecam184\database
and the target pathname is:
c:\programdata\featurecam\featurecam188\database
Replace all instances of
c:\foo\bar\featurecam\featurecam184\database with
c:\programdata\featurecam\featurecam188\database.
c Repeat steps a and b for domain.num.
d Optionally repeat steps a and b for object.bak (this is a backup
file).
Be careful not to make any other accidental changes when

editing the files.
Do not edit .a1 files, they are binary and cannot be edited
with a text editor.
5 Delete all files in the target database folder.
Any tools or materials in the target database are deleted. If

you want to keep them, export them before you delete the
target database and import them later.
6 Copy all files from the neutral database folder into the target
database folder.
The next time you use FeatureCAM on the target computer, you can
access the tools and materials you copied from the source database.
Displaying a profile of an existing tool

You can display the profile of an existing tool in the graphics window
to use as a reference when creating a curve for a form tool.
To display the profile of a tool in the graphics window:
1 Select a tool in the Tool Manager (see page 1745) dialog and click
Properties to display the Tool Properties dialog.
2 Click Paste copy of curve in the Tool Properties dialog.

3 Click Cancel to close the Tool Properties dialog without making
any changes to the tool.
Deleting a tool crib

To delete a tool crib:
1 Select Manufacturing > Tool Manager from the menu to display the
2 Select the crib you want to delete in the Current Crib list.
3 Click Delete Crib.
4 Click Yes in the message dialog to delete the tool crib.
5 Click OK to close the Tool Manager dialog.
Tool and Material Setup

The tooling and feed/speed databases are created using the INITDB
Initialization program in FeatureCAM. This is the program that is run
the first time you run FeatureCAM to create your initial database.
Select where your database is located:

On my local computer — Select this option to use the database on
your PC.
On another computer that I will access over a network (see page 1838)
(SND (see page 10)) — Select this option to use an MS Access

On a SQL Server (see page 1839) (SND (see page 10)) — Select this
option to use an SQL Server network database. Select the Server
Name and the Database Name. To use SQL authentication, select
SQL Server in the Authentication Mode list and enter your SQL
Username and SQL Password. If you use SQL authentication, the
access.
You may also want to use INITDB for the following reasons:
 Adding default tools and feed/speed tables to the database (see
page 1853)
 Recreating tooling and feed/speed databases if they become
corrupt (see page 1854)
MS Access shared network database (SND)

The shared network database is provided as an empty MDB format
database, created by Microsoft Access and accessed using the
Microsoft Jet database driver.
The database must be set up properly before it can be used:
1 Establish a location on your network for the database and copy a
blank database from the FeatureCAM DVD to that location.
2 Fill the database with default tooling and feed/speed information.
Do this by running INITDB on any computer that has access to
the database and point INITDB to the database.
3 Set the location of the database for each user using the Browse
button during installation (see page 1837), or after installation
on the Database tab (see page 140) of the File Options dialog.
To set up a network database on a 64-bit machine:
1 Download the 32-bit Microsoft Access Database driver from
internet. The 32-bit driver needs to be used on both 32 and
64-bit machines.
2 If a 64-bit driver is already installed on the machine (for
example, if you have 64-bit MS Office installed), you must
uninstall it.
Uninstalling the 64-bit driver and installing the 32-bit

driver, could break 64-bit MS Access.
3 Install the 32-bit driver you downloaded in step 1.
4 Open the folder C:\Windows\SysWOW64.
5 Find and run the file odbcad32.exe. The ODBC Data Source
Administrator dialog is displayed.

6 Click Add on the User DSN tab. The Create New Data Source dialog
is displayed.
7 Scroll down, select Microsoft Access Driver (*.mdb, *.accdb) and
click Finish. The ODBC Text Setup dialog is displayed.
8 For the Data Source Name option, enter MS Access Database and
click OK. The database is displayed in the list of User Data
Sources on the User DSN tab.
Network database configuration is user-based. If there are

multiple users on the machine, each user must go through the
process above and configure it.
SQL Server shared network database (SND)

You can use SQL Server for your network database. This gives
better performance and reliability for your network database.
Microsoft SQL Server 2014 Express is a free edition of SQL Server
that you may use to host your Delcam tools and materials database
used by FeatureCAM. It is available in 32-bit and 64-bit editions and
in these languages:
 Chinese  Japanese
(simplified)  Korean
 Chinese  Portuguese
(traditional) (Brazil)
 English  Russian
 French  Spanish
 German
 Italian
When using Microsoft SQL Express to host your FeatureCAM tools
and materials you need a server computer to host the SQL Server
software and the tools/materials database. This server computer
should be a different computer from the client workstations where
users are running FeatureCAM.
The database server can host tools and materials databases

from different versions of FeatureCAM, or different parts of
your organization.
Installation
1 Pick a computer at your facility that you want to host the
FeatureCAM tools and materials database. We'll call this the
database server. The database server must meet these criteria:
 It must be running Microsoft Windows.

 It must be connected to your network.
 It must be able to run Microsoft SQL Server Express 2014.
 You can see system requirements at
http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms143506.aspx
(http://msdn.microsoft.com/en-us/library/ms143506.aspx)
2 Find out the hostname of the database server.
3 Download either the Express (Database Only) or Express with
Tools from
http://www.microsoft.com/en-gb/download/details.aspx?id=422
99
(http://www.microsoft.com/en-gb/download/details.aspx?id=422
99). If your database server is a 32-bit Windows, then you'll need
to download the 32-bit version of SQL Server Express. If 64-bit,
then download the 64-bit version instead.
The bitness of your download must match the bitness of the

database server computer, and has nothing to do with the
bitness of your client workstations. You may download the
language of your choice.
4 Install Microsoft SQL Server Express on your database server.
5 From any client workstation using FeatureCAM 2016 R2, find
INITDB in the Start menu and run it.
6 In the Tool and Material Setup dialog, select On a SQL Server and
enter the hostname of the database server computer as the
Server Name.
7 After entering the Server Name, you can select an existing
database on the database server in the Database Name menu, or
create a new one.
8 The first time you run INITDB you can do one of the following:
 Initialize a new database with all the default tools.
 Import tools from another database elsewhere on your
network
 Upgrade an existing database to the latest version of
FeatureCAM and load it with all of the default tooling.
Subsequent client installations default to this choice.

Spindles and tool holders
You can display spindles and tool holders in toolpath simulations to
see how they interact with the part and check for collisions and
gouges (see page 1540).
Use the Simulation Options dialog to display spindles and tool

holders in simulations.
To display spindles or tool holders during simulation:
1 Select Options > Simulation from the menu to display the
Simulation Options dialog.
2 On the General tab, select Show Holder to display the tool holder
during simulation.
3 Select Show Spindle to display the spindle during simulation.
You cannot select Show Spindle without unless Show Holder is
selected.
4 Click OK to close the Simulation Options dialog.
You can change these settings while a simulation is playing,

but you must restart the simulation for the changes to take
effect.
Use the Spindles and Tool Holders dialog (see page 1841) to manage
spindles and tool holders. You can open these dialogs:
 Use the Tool Holder Properties dialog to view, edit, and create
tool holders.
 Use the Spindle Properties dialog (see page 1845) to view, edit,
and create spindles.
The length of tool extending past the tool holder is determined by
the Exposed length attribute in the Tool Properties dialog.
Spindles and Tool Holders dialog

Use the Spindles and Tool Holders dialog to view, edit, and create
new spindles and tool holders.

To display the Spindles and Tool Holders dialog, select Manufacturing
> Spindles and Tool Holders from the menu.
These options are the same as on the Holder tab (see page
1789) for a specific tool.
The Spindles and Tool Holders dialog displays the current spindle and
the holders that are defined for it. To change the current spindle,
select the spindle from the Current Spindle list. Select a tool holder
to display the spindle and tool holder combination in the preview
area.
The spindle buttons are:
Create new spindle — Displays the Spindle Properties (see page

1845) dialog. The dimensions of the current spindle are used as
initial dimensions.
Edit spindle definition — Displays the Spindle Properties (see

page 1845) dialog where you can view and edit the dimensions of
the current spindle.
Delete spindle definition — Deletes the current spindle and its

tool holders.
The tool holder buttons are:
Create new tool holder — Displays the Tool Holder Properties (see
page 1843) dialog. Creates a new tool holder for the current
spindle. The dimensions of the current tool holder are used as initial
dimensions.
Edit tool holder definition — Displays the Tool Holder Properties

(see page 1843) dialog where you can view and edit the properties
of the current tool holder.

Delete tool holder definition — Deletes the current tool holder.
Tool Holder Properties dialog

The Tool Holder Properties dialog enables you to view, edit, and
create tool holders.
To display the Tool Holder Properties dialog, click Create new tool
Holder or Edit tool Holder definition on the Holder tab (see page
1789) of the Milling Tool Properties dialog or the Spindles and Tool
Holders dialog (see page 1841).
Holder Name — Each tool holder must have a unique name.

Measure — Select the Inches check box if the tool holder dimensions
are in inches. For millimeter dimensions deselect this box.

Holder type — Holders are either Endmill or Collet. The major
difference between these two types of holders is that collets are
adjustable to fit a range of tool diameters.
Tool Groups — This button displays a list of tooling types that use
this holder.
Use curve as revolved holder shape — If you want to make a custom
holder shape, select this option and select a curve in the menu that
describes the shape. This curve must be in the XZ plane with one
endpoint at the origin.
Use solid to describe holder shape — If you want to use a solid for
the custom holder shape, select this option and select a solid in the
menu.
Paste example into graphics window — Click the Paste button to copy
into the graphics window a set of lines and arcs for the current
holder shape. This can be useful as a reference if you are going to
draw a custom holder shape.
Tip Dia — This is the outer diameter of the holder at the tip for
collets. For convenience, you can set the Tip diameter for endmill
holders to Based on tool dia so that the holder is scaled to fit a tool.
Tool Dia — The diameter of the tool. For collets this can be specified
as a minimum and maximum value, to accurately reflect actual
collets, or it can be set to Fit any tool so that the diameter is
adjusted to fit any tool with a diameter less than the Tip Dia.
Dimensions — The other dimensions of the holders are shown
below.
Endmill tool holder dimensions:
Flange length
Step diameter
Tip diameter
Tool diameter
Tip length
Length
Diameter
Collet tool holder dimensions:

Flange length
Step diameter
Tip diameter
Tool diameter
Tip length
Length
Diameter
Angled Head — Select this option if you want to create a
right-angled tool holder. This option is only available when you are
using a solid to describe the holder shape.
Azimuth angle — Select whether the tool has a Variable or Fixed
azimuth angle. If Fixed is selected, enter the angle in degrees.
Spindle Properties dialog

The Spindle Properties dialog lets you view, edit, and create
spindles.
To display the Spindle Properties dialog, click Create new spindle

or Edit spindle definition in the Spindles and Tool Holders dialog
(see page 1841).
Spindle Name — Each spindle must have a unique name.

Measure — This indicates the units that are used for the spindle's
dimensions. Select Inches to use inch units or deselect the box for
millimeters.
Diameter — This is the diameter of the spindle (see diagram)
Height — This is the height of the spindle (see diagram)
Gage Diameter — This is the diameter of the gage (see diagram)

Diameter
Height
Gage Diameter
OK — Click OK to save any changes to new or existing spindles.

Cancel — Click Cancel to discard any changes (if you have made
any) and return to the Spindles and Tool Holders dialog.
Tool holder selection

When you select a tool for an operation, FeatureCAM automatically
selects a tool holder.
If there is no tool holder that matches the tool, FeatureCAM creates
a new tool holder by scaling up the dimensions of an existing
holder.
Tool holders have a Holder Type of either Endmill or Collet.
When you select a Holder Type on the Holder Properties dialog,
FeatureCAM selects a holder to match the diameter of the tool. For
Endmill holders, the smallest tool holder with a Tool Diameter value
greater than or equal to the tool's diameter is selected. For Collet
holders, the tool's diameter must be within the Min and Max values.
You can specify which tool holder is used for a tool on the Holder tab
(see page 1789) of the Tool Properties dialog.
Creating/editing a spindle
To create or edit a spindle:
1 Select Manufacturing > Spindles and Tool Holders from the menu
to display the Spindles and Tool Holders dialog.
2 To modify a spindle, select it from the Current Spindle list and
click Edit spindle definition . The Spindle Properties dialog (see
page 1845) is displayed.
3 To create a new spindle, select an existing spindle from the
Current Spindle list and click Create new spindle . The spindle
properties dialog (see page 1845) is displayed. The dimensions
of the selected spindle are used as the initial dimensions for the
new spindle.
Creating/editing a tool holder

To create or edit a tool holder:
1 Select Manufacturing > Spindles and Tool Holders from the menu
to display the Spindles and Tool Holders dialog.

2 Select a spindle from the Current Spindle list. The tool holders for
the selected spindle are displayed.
3 To modify a tool holder, double-click the tool holder name in the
Tool Holders list, or select the tool holder name and click Edit tool
holder definition to display the Tool Holder Properties (see
page 1843) dialog.
4 To create a new tool holder, select an existing tool holder name
from the Tool Holders list and click Create new tool holder to
display the Tool Holder Properties (see page 1843) dialog. The
dimensions of the selected tool holder are used as the initial
dimensions for the new holder.
Feeds/Speeds and Cutting Data Tables

Use one of the following methods to display the Feeds/Speeds and
 Select Manufacturing > Feeds/Speeds and Cutting Data Tables from
the menu.
 Click Customize Mfg. in the Steps panel, then click Refine

FeatureCAM's feed & speed tables to suit my particular requirements
in the Customize Manufacturing dialog.
 Click F/S Tables on the Material page of the Stock wizard.

Material — Select the material you want to edit. The selected
material's table of speed and feed values is displayed.
Tool Grade and Tool Finish — Select a tool grade and tool finish. A
material can have multiple data tables, to account for the different
combinations of tool grade and finish.
If a feed/speed table exists for a material cut with a tool with

a BRIGHT finish, but not for TI_N or BLACK_OXIDE tool
finishes, then the speed values are derived from the BRIGHT
table. The speed for TI_N is 1.5 times the BRIGHT speed. The
speed for BLACK_OXIDE is 1.05 times the BRIGHT speed. The
feed rates are the same as the BRIGHT feed rates.
Use Range — Some materials have two tables, each associated with
a hardness value. For these, you must select either Hardness 1 or
Hardness 2 to see the table.
Feedrates are specified for a 1" (or 20mm) tool. For tools that
are other diameters, the feedrates are scaled linearly. For
example, the feedrate for a 0.25 tool is 1/4 of the table rate.
Dialog buttons
New Stock Material — Add a new stock material (see page 1848).
Delete — Delete the table for the selected material.
Copy Values — Copy the speed and feed values from one material to
another. This saves time if two materials have similar values.
Import — Import a feed and speed data file.
Export — Export the feed and speed data.
Adding a new stock material

To add a new stock material:
1 Click New Stock Material in the Feeds/Speeds And Cutting Data
Tables dialog to display the New Stock Material dialog.
2 Enter the name of the new material in the New Stock Material
dialog and click OK.
The name can contain characters in the ranges A-Z and 0-9,
plus underscores (_) and dashes (-).
3 Click New to create a Feed/Speed table for the new material.
4 Select the Tool Grade and Tool Finish from the lists.
5 Enter speeds and feed values for each operation type.

To copy the values from an existing material, click Copy
Values; select a material in the Copy Feed/Speed Values
dialog; and click OK.
6 If the feed or speed are dependent on the hardness:
a Select Use Range and enter the lower hardness value in the
Hardness 1 field.
b Enter the upper hardness value in the Hardness 2 field.
7 Click OK to close the Feeds/Speeds And Cutting Data Tables dialog.
If a feed/speed table exists for a material cut with a tool with

a BRIGHT finish, but not for TI_N or BLACK_OXIDE tool
finishes, then the speed values are derived from the BRIGHT
table. The speed for TI_N is 1.5 times the BRIGHT speed. The
speed for BLACK_OXIDE is 1.05 times the BRIGHT speed. The
feed rates are the same as the BRIGHT feed rates.
Adding a new tool grade for turning operations

To add a new tool grade for turning operations:
1 Click Tool Grades on the Turning tab of the Feeds/Speeds And
Cutting Data Tables dialog.
The Turning Tool Grades dialog is displayed.
2 Click New, then enter the new Tool Grade Name and click OK.
3 Under When F/S table is undefined select either:
 Generate toolpath error if you want to define all table entries.
 Scale existing material to get values from another material.
Select the existing material from the list and enter the scaling
values for Speed and Feed.
4 Click OK to close the Turning Tool Grades dialog.
5 If you selected Generate toolpath error, enter values in the fields
in the Feeds/Speeds And Cutting Data Tables dialog.
6 Click OK.
Feeds and Speeds database

The Feeds/Speeds And Cutting Data Tables dialog displays the
information stored in the Feeds and Speeds database.
Use one of the following methods to display the Feeds/Speeds And

 Select Manufacturing > Feeds/Speeds And Cutting Data Tables from
the menu.
 Click F/S Tables on the Material page of the Stock wizard (see
page 205).
See also:
Wire EDM cut data (see page 1509)
Stock material (see page 209)
Initializing FeatureMILL databases (see page 1513)
Use Range
For a rangeless table, deselect Use Range. The stock hardness value
is ignored and a single feed/speed table is used.
For a ranged table, select Use Range. You must enter two values of
hardness and two separate feed/speed tables are created. You must
enter the values for both tables.
For a stock hardness below the first value in the range, the
table for the first hardness is used. For a hardness between
the two range values, a table of interpolated values is used.
Hardnesses above the last hardness value are invalid.
Importing feeds/speeds or cutting data tables

1 Click Import in the Feed/Speed And Cutting Data Tables dialog to
display the Feed/Speed And Cutting Data Import dialog.
2 Enter the path to the file or click Browse for file location and
select it in the Import dialog and click OK.
.fdb files have been previously exported from FeatureCAM.

.dxx files are text files containing Wire EDM cut data.
3 Click Import.
4 If you are importing a .dxx file, you are prompted to enter the
wire type, machine name and unit before the file is imported.
5 Select an option for handling new materials with the same name
as existing materials:
 Select Overwrite material if you want the new material to be
copied over the old one.
 Select Skip material to ignore any new materials with the same
name as an existing material.
6 Click Import.

7 Click Close.
See also How to export feed/speed tables (see page 1851).
Exporting feeds/speeds or cutting data tables

1 Click Export in the Feed/Speed And Cutting Data Tables dialog to
display the Feed/Speed And Cutting Data Export dialog.
2 Enter a pathname in the Export file name field, or click Browse
and select a file location in the Export dialog.
3 In the Materials to be exported list, select any materials you want
to export and deselect any materials you do not want to export.
Click Include all items to select all materials, or click

Exclude all items to deselect all materials.
4 Select Milling to export milling tables.
Select Turning to export turning tables.
Select Wire EDM to export the cutting data for FeatureCAM.
5 Under Export F/S values in, select the units to export the tables
in, from either Inch units or Metric units.
6 Click Export.
7 Click Close.
The file created is tab delimited text. You can edit the file in a
spreadsheet if you want to. This file can now be imported (see page
1850) into FeatureCAM.
Creating a text file for wire material databases

A material database can be imported as an ASCII (readable text)
file that can be created using a text editor (Notepad, Wordpad and
so on). When you have written the file you should save it as plain
ASCII text (if your editor offers more than one option) with a name
that has the extension *.dxx such as Copper.dxx. You can import the
file into the Feed/Speed and Cutting Data Tables dialog.
Format of the file:
2.0 This value is a version number. It has no
special function but should always be entered
to maintain the file format

COPPER 10.0 This line is the first line of a new material
0.25 3 definition. The fields have the following
functions:
COPPER - the name of the material
10.0 - The material thickness
0.25 - The wire diameter
3 - the number of cuts
1 1 1 0.1 This line specifies the generator and water
settings, and so on, for the first cut. The fields
are as follows:
1 - the generator setting register number
1 - the water setting register number
1 - the compensation register number
0.1 - The value of the compensation
2 2 2 0.2 The parameters as above but for the second
cut
3 3 3 0.3 The parameters as above but for the third cut
COPPER 20.0 New Material
0.25 3
11 11 11 0.11
12 12 12 0.12
13 13 13 0.13
COPPER 30.0
0.25 3
21 21 21
0.183
22 22 22
0.173
23 23 23
0.163
COPPER 40.0
0.25 3
31 31 31
0.184
32 32 32
0.174
33 33 33
0.164

STEEL 20.0
0.25 4
41 41 41
0.185
42 42 42
0.175
43 43 43
0.165
44 45 46
0.155
Adding default tools and feed/speed tables to the database

Each tool is identified by a tool name and each feed/speed table is
defined by a combination of the stock material name, tool material,
and tool grade.
Any tool or feed/speed table that you add to the database remains
even if you re-run the INITDB program. INITDB does not overwrite
any existing tools or feed/speed table in the database.
The only way to remove them is to explicitly delete them in the
Feed/speed table dialog or the Tool Manager dialog. See Deleting a
tool from a tool crib for more information.
The two most common reasons for re-running INITDB are:
 Restoring default tools or default feed/speed tables that you
have deleted.
 Adding tools specified in other units. You may have chosen to
load only the inch tools the first time and you may now want to
add the metric tooling.
To perform these tasks:
1 Exit FeatureCAM if it is open.
2 Run INITDB from the FeatureCAM group in the Start menu.
3 Select the units of tools you want to add. FeatureCAM does not
alter any items that you changed or delete any items that you
added.
4 Click OK.
5 If you added tooling of both units, you prompted to select which
unit you use most often to model parts.

Recreating tooling and feed/speed databases if they
become corrupt
If your tooling or feed/speed database becomes corrupt, you can
recreate the databases using the INITDB program.
This procedure erases any changes you have made to existing

tools or feed/speed tables and deletes any custom tooling or
new feed/speed tables that you have created. Contact your
FeatureCAM support person before performing this task.
To remove your database and recreate it:

1 Exit FeatureCAM if you are running it.
2 Run Windows Explorer.
3 Open the directory in which you installed FeatureCAM.
4 Open the database directory.
5 Click in the right-hand contents window.
6 Click Select All from the Edit menu.
7 Press the Delete key on the keyboard.
8 In Windows, select Start > All Programs > FeatureCAM > INITDB.
9 Select the units of tools you want to add. FeatureCAM does not
alter any items that you changed or delete any items that you
added.
10 Click OK.
11 If you added tooling of both units, you are asked which unit you
use most often to model parts.
Cutting data by tool

You can associate cutting data with individual tools in the tool
database at two levels:
 On the Overrides tab of the Tool Properties dialog. You can set
cutting data for the tool for all materials and operations.
 On the Feed/Speeds tab of the Tool Properties dialog. You can set
cutting conditions by material, operation, and cut type. These
override any settings on the Overrides tab.
You can override these settings at feature operation level.

Tool overrides for all materials and operations
The new parameters on the Overrides tab of the Tool Properties
dialog are Depth of cut (Z-step increment), Stepover distance, and
Ramp angle.
Enter values to use with the current tool for all materials, except
those overridden on the Feed/Speed tab, for example:
Tool overrides by material, operation, and cut type

As well as the previously available Speed and Feed settings, you can
set Depth (of cut) and Stepover by Material, operation (Rough and
Finish) and type of cut (Profile, Slot, Face, and Plunge Mill).
To do this, select the Feed/Speed tab of the Tool Properties dialog
and click the Create new item button:

The Tool Specific Feeds and Speeds dialog is displayed.
Select the Material name from the list and enter any Depth and
Stepover overrides by operation and type of cut, for example:
Click OK. The material is listed on the Feed/Speed tab:
These material-based settings take priority over any on the global

Overrides tab.

Post Options
The Post Options dialog controls the type of CNC machine that
FeatureCAM targets for NC output.
The dialog contains some auxiliary parameters used in post
processing.
You can open the Post Options dialog in one of these ways:
 Select the Customize Mfg. step from the steps panel and
select Configure post processor by clicking the Post Process
Options icon.
 Select Manufacturing > Post Process from the menu.
 Click the name of the current CNC in the Status (see page 32)
bar.
In the Post Options dialog, select the tab you want from:
 Milling (see page 1858)
 Turning or Turn/Mill (see page 1864)
 Wire EDM (see page 1870)

Milling tab
CNC File — This is the file name and location for the type of
machine. The file is either one that comes as standard with
FeatureCAM or one that you created with the XBUILD program. Click
Browse to select your CNC file from the list of available files. Browse
presents a list of files on disk. You may put your files anywhere on
disk, but look in the Posts subdirectory of the FeatureCAM directory
to find the CNC files that come as standard with FeatureCAM.
For example, if you installed FeatureCAM in C:\FeatureCAM, the
pre-defined CNC files are in the following directory:
C:\FeatureCAM\Posts\Mill
See a description of some of the most-used CNC files for milling
(see page 1860).
You can also use the Delcam post processor files *.pmopt and
*.pmoptz with XBUILD.
Some XBUILD reserved words have no equivalent in PMOPT.
However these are available as PMOPT user-defined parameters:
XBUILD PMOPT
reserved word user-defined
parameter
<P1> udp_P1
<P2> udp_P2
… …

<P100> udp_P100
<FIXTURE> udp_FIXTURE
Some PMOPT capabilities are not supported by XBUILD. For

example, XBUILD supports much wider variety of NC output
for 2-axis milling than is currently unavailable in
PMOPT. So if you choose PMOPT you lose such control of
your NC code. PMOPT files do not support Turning and Wire
EDM.
Select the file name and click Open to use a file.
Edit — This opens the post processor, XBUILD, for the current CNC
file.
Defaults — Click this button to return all the Post Options attributes
Min Arc — This defines the limit for any arc whose radius is
transferred to the CNC machine as a line. Arcs greater than this
limit are sent as arcs.
Max Arc — This defines the maximum arc radius. Arcs greater than
this limit are translated into lines.
Block Start — This sets the starting line number for your CNC
programs.
Block Increment — This sets the increment between line numbers in
your CNC programs.
Disable Macros — This turns off macro generation for the NC code.
This option is not available for all posts. Refer to Hole macros (see
page 645) for more information about setting up macros.
Enable Cut Comp — This enables output of cutter compensation NC
code.

Force segment start for each operation — Enable this option to force a
Segment Start format for each operation. You can also set this option
to ON or OFF in XBUILD in the General Information dialog.
If you have set this option in XBUILD, the Post Options dialog in
FeatureCAM displays a message, either Force segment start for each
operation is set to on in the current post or Force segment start is set to
off in the current post.
You must close and reopen the Post Options dialog to see
any changes.
Non-Modal Decel. override — This is an optional setting for the
G-code for overriding the automatic deceleration of a control.
Tool Change Location — This is the point where the tip of the tool
moves to prior to a tool change.
dialog.
any changes.
Milling Post Processors

Post Description
INMTCI/ Interact Manual Tool Change (Inch/Metric).
M Bridgeport Machines with Heidenhain
150,151,155 controls.
INATCI/ Interact Automatic Tool Change (Inch/Metric).
M Bridgeport Machines with Heidenhain
150,151,155 controls.
TN145I/ Heidenhain TNC 145 (Inch/Metric). Bridgeport
M machines using the TNC 131,135,145
controls.

BP320I/ Bridgeport 320 Machining Center
M (Inch/Metric). Bridgeport 320 series
horizontal machining centers with Fanuc
6M/11M controls.
M (Inch/Metric). Bridgeport 380 series
horizontal machining centers with Fanuc
6M/11M controls.
M (Inch/Metric). Bridgeport 520 series vertical
machining centers with Fanuc 11M controls.
R2G4I/ Bridgeport Series II Mill (Inch/Metric).
M Bridgeport Series II vertical knee mills with
Fanuc G4 controls.
BOSS3I/ Bridgeport Operating Software Systems 3
M (Inch/Metric). Bridgeport machines with
BOSS3 control software.
M (Inch/Metric).Bridgeport machines with
M (Inch/Metric).Bridgeport machines with
BPSER2 Bridgeport Series II NC (Inch). Series II
incremental controls.
BTC2I/M Bridgeport BTC II (Inch/Metric). BTC II
controls.
ABS7DI/ Allen Bradley S7D3 (Inch/Metric). Bridgeport
M Series II CNC S7D3 (Manual tool change)
with an Allen Bradley 8200 control.

AB845I/ Allen Bradley 7-845 (Inch/Metric). Bridgeport
M Series II BMC 7-845 (Automatic tool change)
with an Allen Bradley 8200 control.
GES7DI/ General Electric S7D3 (Inch/Metric).
M Bridgeport Series II CNC S7D3 (Manual tool
change) with a General Electric Mark Century
2000 control.
GE845I/ General Electric 7-845 (Inch/Metric).
M Bridgeport Series II BMC 7-845 (Automatic
tool change) with a General Electric Mark
Century 2000 control.
OKUMA5 Okuma OSP5000 (Inch). General post for
Okuma vertical mills using the OSP5000
control.
OK5MGI Okuma OSP5000 (Inch). General post for
Okuma vertical mills using the OSP5000
control.
FANU6M Fanuc 6M (Inch). General post for mills using
the Fanuc 6M control.
CINACR Cincinnati Acramatic CNC-MC 2200B (Inch).
General post for Cincinnati Milacron mills
using the Acramatic CNC-MC 2200B control.
This post is setup for vector type cutter
compensation.
ACLOC Acraloc CNC (Inch). General post for Acraloc
mills.
MAZAK Mazak CNC (Inch). General post for Mazak
mills.
BANDIT Bandit CNC (Inch). General post for mills
using the Bandit control.
SYS10 Bendix system 10 (Inch). General post for
mills using the Bendix system 10 or 20
controls.
MAHO60 Maho Model 600 (Inch). This post is
specifically designed for the Maho Model 600
horizontal machine center with the Phillips
CNC 432 Control. It will support the model
500 with a minimal amount of changes to the
output.
ANILAM Anilam (Inch). General post designed for mills
using the Anilam control.

EZTRAK Bridgeport EZ-Trak (Inch)
FADALI Fadal Controls (Inch) Compatible with all
Fadal Machines.
BOSS15 Bridgeport BOSS 15 (SX) based control. This
I V2XT post generates M26 for tool changes & M22
KNEE for program rewind.
MILL
(INCH)
DSC300 Discovery 300 (Inch) Bridgeport BOSS 15(SX)
I based control. This post generates M6 for tool
changes & M22 for program rewind.
DSC308 Discovery 308 (Inch) Bridgeport BOSS 15(SX)
I based control. This post generates M6 for tool
changes & M22 for program rewind.
HD2500 Heidenhain 2500 Manual Tool Change (Inch)
MI Interact I Mark II knee mills with Heidenhain
2500 control. This post uses tool change
positions and M25 code to change tools.
HD2500 Heidenhain 2500 Automatic Tool Change
AI (Inch) General post for machining centers
with Heidenhain 2500 control. This post does
not use tool change positions and uses M6 to
change tools.
INT300I Heidenhain 2500 (Inch) Interact 300
Machining Center with Heidenhain 2500
control.
INT308I Heidenhain 2500 (Inch) Interact 308
Machining Center with Heidenhain 2500
control.
INTGI Heidenhain G-Code (Inch)
OM550I Bridgeport 550 Machining Center (Inch).
Bridgeport 550 series horizontal machining
centers with Fanuc -0-M controls.
FAN0M Fanuc -0- M General post designed for mills
using the Fanuc 0 M control.
PTRAKM Proto Trak MX3 This post will generate 3 axis
X3 G-Code format programs.
850SXM Cincinnati Avenger 850 Machining Center

DI308I4 Discovery 308 with DX-32 Control & Rotary
X Axis This post will support G97 origin
translation without turning on indexing or
wrapping. It also supports indexing and
wrapping in both milling and drilling cycles.
BOSSSX This post for the BOSS SX15 controls
supports a pneumatic indexer using an M51
code. Wrapping is not supported.
INMTCI This post supports the rotary axis on
4X Heidenhain 150, 151, and 155 controls.
Indexing and wrapping are supported.
EZTRAK Bridgeport EZ-Trak 2 or 3 AXIS
SX conversational post; no cut comp.
TORQCU Bridgeport TORQ CUT 22 CNC uses 4th axis
TI and MCSID
Turning or Turn/Mill tab
Post Options in the Manufacturing menu controls the type of CNC

machine that FeatureCAM targets for NC output.
The dialog contains some auxiliary parameters used in post
processing.

CNC file is the file name for the type of machine. The file is either
one that comes standard with FeatureCAM or one that you created
with the XBUILD program. Click Browse to select your CNC file from
the list of available files. Browse presents a list of files on disk. You
may put your files anywhere on disk, but look in the Posts\Turn
folder to find the CNC files that come standard with FeatureCAM.
For example, if you installed FeatureCAM in "C:\FeatureCAM", the
pre-defined CNC files are in the following directory:
C:\FeatureCAM\Posts\Turn
Select the file name and click OK to select a CNC file.
See a description of some of the most-used CNC files for turn (see
page 1867).
Defaults returns all the Post Options to their default values.
Max. speed is the maximum spindle speed of your machine.
Min. Arc defines the limit for any arc whose radius is transferred to
the CNC machine as a line. Arcs greater than this limit are sent as
arcs.
Block Start sets the starting line number for your CNC programs.
Block Increment sets the increment between line numbers in your
CNC programs.
A number of system features are enabled at the bottom of the
dialogs. These settings allow these options to be individually set on
features. Note that these settings must be set on the feature to be
activated. By turning off these settings, the options is turned off
system-wide. These options include:
Enable Tool Nose Radius Comp
angle
Lead-out
angle
Lead
distance

Disable Macros — This turns off macro generation for the NC code.
This option is not available for all posts. Refer to Hole macros (see
page 645) for more information about setting up macros.
Enable Hole Canned Cycle activates canned cycles for drilling. This is
a global setting and cannot be set on individual hole features. Note
the post processor must support canned cycles.
Enable Groove canned cycle activates canned cycles for grooving.
This is a global setting and cannot be set on individual groove
features. Note the post processor must support canned cycles.
Enable Part catcher
If enabled, the part catcher code is output after the Cutoff
operation. The code for activating the parts catcher must be listed
in your .cnc file.
Enable Turn Canned Cycle activates canned cycles for turning and
boring. It must also be turned on for individual features. See Use
canned cycle for more information.

fanucez.cnc post.
feature level.
Hole features

Turn/Bore features
Groove features
Thread features
Tool Change Location — Enter the point where the tip of the tool
moves to before a tool change. This location is absolute.
Turning Post Processors

Post Description
850SXT Cincinnati 850 Talon Lathe
850TC Acramatic 850TC control. Inch format, OP
STOP after tool changes, BLOCK DELETE
(SKIP) at sync blocks. Turn off BLOCK
DELETE to access sync block when restarting
at other than start of program. Uses TOOL
CHANGE location as positioning move in sync
blocks.
ANILAM Anilam Lathe
T
FAN0TC Fanuc 0TC controller. Inch format. Supports
multiple repetitive cycles (G70/G71) and
threading canned cycles (G76).

FAN6TI/ Fanuc6T Control (Inch/Metric). General post
M for Lathes using the Fanuc6T control. The
post is designed for computed threading and
drilling cycle output, with canned grooving
cycle output.
FANUC1 Fanuc 11T Lathe
1T
FANUC3 Fanuc 3T Lathe. This post is for a Fanuc 3TD
T control on a Mori Seiki SL - 1. G50's are used
on every tool and after completion of the
segment it is returned to the Home position
by a G28 on the X axis first followed by the Z
axis. X axis output is negative for all values
since all cutting is done on backside of part.
G10_CY G10 Romi lathe with Fanuc 21i control.
C Supports Fanuc Canned Cycles: G83 Drilling,
G84 Taping G70 Finishing Cycle, G71/72
Roughing Cycles, G76 Threading Cycle.
G30_CY G20 & G30 Romi lathes with Fanuc 21i
C control. Supports Fanuc Canned Cycles: G83
Drilling, G84 Taping G70 Finishing Cycle,
G71/72 Roughing Cycles, G76 Threading
Cycle.
GE1050 General Electric 1050T Control. This is a
general post designed for lathes using the
General Electric 1050T control.
HARD6T Hardinge Fanuc6T Control (Inch). General
post for Hardinge Lathes using the Fanuc6T
control. Instead of using G0 for rapid
movements it uses feed rates of 200 inches
per minute. The post is designed for
computed threading, with canned drilling and
grooving cycle output.
JLAB73 Jones & Lamson Allen Bradley 7365 Control.
Jones & Lamson TNC lathes with the Allen
Bradley 7365 control.
MAZAK Mazak lathe with radius output. Computed
2TI thread and groove. G41 left compensation.
G42 right compensation.
MAZAK Mazak lathe with diameter output. Computed
TI drilling and canned thread and groove. G42
left compensation. G41 right compensation.

MORSE Moriseki (Inch). General post for Moriseki
K lathes. The post is designed for computed
drilling, threading and grooving output.
MSL200 Moriseki SL200 Lathe. Inch format
NC-RUN This is a special post created just for NC-RUN
verification, it is based on the okuma
OSP5000 control.
NEW6T New Hardinge Fanuc6T Control (Inch). This is
a modified version of the HARD6T post for
Hardinge, It uses G0 for all rapid
movements. The post is designed for
computed threading, drilling and grooving
cycle output.
OK500I Okuma OSP5000 Control (Inch/Metric).
/M General post for Okuma lathes using the
OSP5000 control. The post is designed for
canned cycle drilling, threading and grooving
output.
OKLC3I Okuma LC30 Lathe OSP3000
/M Control(Inch/Metric). General post for Okuma
lathes using the OSP3000 control. The post is
designed for canned cycle drilling, threading
and grooving output.
PATH *Bridgeport EZ-Path Lathe (without CSS).
This post generates native conversational
format programs.
PATH_C Bridgeport EZ-Path Lathe (without CSS) with
YC canned cycles. Conversational format
programs. Supported Canned Cycles:
ROUGH, PROFIL, GROOVE, THREAD, and
DRILL.
PATHG Bridgeport EZ-Path Lathe (without CSS). This
post generates G-Code format programs.
PATHS *Bridgeport EZ-Path S Lathe (with CSS). This
post generates native conversational format
programs.
PATHSG Bridgeport EZ-Path S Lathe (with CSS). This
post generates G-Code format programs.
(with CSS)
PP15_C Bridgeport PowerPath 15 Lathe with canned
YC cycles. Supported Canned Cycles: ROUGH,
PROFIL, GROOVE, THREAD, and DRILL.

PPATH *Bridgeport Power-Path-15 Lathe. This post
generates native conversational format
programs.
PPATHG Bridgeport Power-Path-15 Lathe. This post
generates G-Code format programs.
PTHS_C Bridgeport EZPath S Lathe (with CSS) with
YC canned cycles. Supported Canned Cycles:
ROUGH, PROFIL, GROOVE, THREAD, and
DRILL. (with CSS)
ROMI35 Romi Lathe. This post is designed for the
I Romi
SBLI South Bend Lathe (Inch) This post is
designed for the Magna Turn Slant Bed
CNC2000 lathe.
For Plain Language Dialog Post (P1 = Tool I.D.)
Wire EDM tab
Block Start — This sets the starting line number for your CNC
programs.
Block Increment — This sets the increment between line numbers in
your CNC programs.
Block Maximum — This is the maximum block number for the CNC
program.

Reorder cut comp moves for old Agie controls — Select this option if
you are posting to a machine with a control from Agie. If selected,
the lines of NC code that correspond to cutter compensation are
output in a different order.
Skip moves that travel less than n % of wire diameter — This prevents
moves that are too small from being sent to the EDM control. If a
move is too small, it is not output. As soon as the program
advances the wire to a point that is more than this threshold, then a
move is output directly to that position.
In this example, if move is too short, it is not output. If the
distance from the end of move to the end of move is long
enough, move is inserted between moves and .

Multiple fixture documents (2.5D & 3D)
If you want to cut different parts on your machine at the same time,
use the Multiple Fixture document type. With multiple fixture parts,
you can mix different setups from FeatureCAM parts. FeatureCAM
can then create a single program for cutting all the parts and it can
minimize tool changes across all parts.
Example of a multiple fixture part:
Creating a multiple fixture part

In FeatureCAM, a multiple fixture part can include Setups, UCSs,
and part files.
To create a multiple fixture part:
1 Open any .fm files which contain Setups you want to add to the
multiple fixture document.
2 Select File > New from the menu to display the New Part
Document dialog.
3 Select Multiple Fixture from the Type list.
4 Select the Unit of Measure from either Inch or Millimeter.
5 Click OK to create a document.
The Multiple Fixtures dialog (see page 1873) is displayed.

You can use the Multiple Fixtures dialog to add and orientate
parts and Setups.
Multiple Fixtures dialog

You can use the Multiple Fixtures dialog to add and orientate parts
and Setups in the multiple-fixture document.
To display the Multiple Fixtures dialog:
 The Multiple Fixtures dialog is displayed when you create a
multiple fixture document.
 Click Parts in the Steps panel, or double-click a space in the

graphics window.
The Multiple Fixtures dialog contains the following options:

Setups — A list of all Setups in the multiple-fixture document.
Click Up and Down to move the selected Setup up or down in the
Setups list.
Click Include or Exclude to include or exclude the selected Setup
from the Process Plan. Excluded Setups have a * in the Excl.
column of the Setups list.
Tool Dominant — When creating the toolpaths, FeatureCAM uses a
tool everywhere possible before moving on to the next tool.
Part Dominant — When creating the toolpaths, FeatureCAM
machines every part completely (within the limits of the setup)
before moving on to the next part.
OK — Closes the dialog and accepts the changes.

Cancel — Closes the dialog and cancels any changes, including
changes made in linked dialogs.
Parts List — Displays the Part Files dialog (see page 1875), which
you can use to open part files so you can add Setups from them to
the multiple fixture document
Fixtures — Displays the Fixture Offset Locations dialog (see page
1876).
Add — Displays the Setup dialog (see page 1874), which you can
use to add Setups to the multiple fixture part file.
The Add button is unavailable unless you have other part files
open, or you have opened part files in the Parts List dialog.
Delete — Deletes the selected Setup from the multiple fixture
document.
Edit — Displays the Setup Properties dialog for the selected Setup.
Machine Sim — Displays the dialog where you can specify the
machine design file and clamp locations.
Add
You can use the Add function to add Setups from open .fm files to
the multiple fixture part. To open part files, use the Part files dialog.
(see page 1875)
To add Setups to a multiple fixture document:
1 Click Add in the Multiple Fixtures dialog (see page 1873) to
display the Setup dialog.
The Add button is unavailable unless you have other part

files open, or you have opened part files in the Parts List
dialog.

A list of setups in open .fm files is displayed.
2 Select a setup in the Part/Setup list.
3 Optionally enter a Part Name.
4 Click Next to display the Fixtures dialog:
5 Select how you want to locate the new setups, select from:
 Add the new setups to a predefined fixture.
Select a fixture from the list.
This option is unavailable unless you have already

created a fixture using the Fixture Offset Locations
dialog.
 Create a new fixture for each setup.
The default value for Start fixture IDs at is the number above
the previously used fixture ID. You can enter a new value or
use the default.
6 Click Next to display the Configuration dialog (see page 1878).
Parts List
Click Parts List in the Multiple Fixtures dialog (see page 1873) to
display the Part Files dialog.

You can use the Part Files dialog to open part files, so that you can
add setups from them to the multiple fixture document:
FM Part Files — A list of part files from which you can add (see page
1874) Setups. Open part files are displayed automatically.
Cancel —Closes the dialog and cancels any changes.
Browse — Displays the FM Part File dialog. Select an .fm file and click
Open to open the part file. You can add (see page 1874) Setups
from any open part files to the multiple fixture document.
Reload — Updates the selected part file in the multiple fixture
document if the source file has changed.
Delete — Removes the selected part file from the FM Part Files list.
This option is unavailable for part files currently being used by the
multiple-fixture document.
Fixture Offset Locations dialog

You can use the Fixture Offset Locations dialog to create, edit, and
delete fixtures in a multiple fixture document.
To display the Fixture Offset Locations dialog:
 Click Fixtures in the Multiple Fixtures dialog (see page 1873).

 Click Fixture ID in the Steps panel.
Fixture ID — A list of fixtures in the multiple fixture document.

Add — Displays the Fixture wizard for creating a new fixture.
Delete — Deletes the selected fixture.
Edit — Displays the Fixture wizard for editing the selected fixture.
Cancel —Closes the dialog and cancels any changes.
Fixture wizard
You can use the Fixture wizard to create a new fixture, or edit an
existing fixture.
To use the Fixture wizard:
 to create a new fixture, click Add in the Fixture Offset Locations
 to edit an existing fixture, select a fixture in the Fixture Offset
Locations dialog (see page 1876) and click Edit.
The first page of the Fixture wizard is the Fixture ID page:

Optionally enter a Fixture ID to overwrite the default. The default
value is numbered sequentially from the previously used value.
Click Next to display the Fixture Zero Location page:
Enter the X, Y and Z coordinates of the fixture zero location in the

X, Y and Z fields.
Click Preview to display a preview of the fixture in the graphics
window. A symbol Fixture ID next to it shows the location of the
fixture in the graphics window.
Click Finish to accept the changes and close the wizard.
The Fixture Offset Locations dialog (see page 1876) is displayed.
Configuration
You can use the Configuration dialog to specify the number of copies
and locations of Setups.
To complete the Configuration dialog:

1 Enter the coordinates of the origin of the first Setup in the X, Y,
and Z fields.

2 If you want to repeat the Setup in the multiple fixture document,
enter the number of repeats and the spacing between Setups.
Repeated Setups are organized in a rectangular array.
X spacing and Y spacing are the spacings between part origins.
Depending on your post, these spacing numbers might not have
any effect on the part as produced at the machine. That is
controlled by the Fixture ID and how the Fixture ID is used to
locate other parts relative to each other.
You can enter negative values.

Repeated Setups' Fixture IDs are numbered sequentially from the
previously used number.
3 Click Next.
If you entered values in the X repeats or Y repeats fields, the
Layout (see page 1879) tab is displayed, where you can specify
the layout of the repeated Setups.
If there is only one Setup, the Preview (see page 1883) dialog is
displayed.
Layout
You can use the Layout dialog to specify the layout of repeated
Setups:
Select a stock configuration, from:

 Individual Blocks (see page 1880) — Simpler to design, but less
efficient.
 Single Block (see page 1880) — Minimizes waste, but more
difficult to layout and fixture.

Individual blocks
1 Select Individual Blocks in the Layout (see page 1879) dialog:
2 Click Next to display the Preview dialog. (see page 1883) A

preview of the Setups is displayed in green in the graphics
window.
Single block
To create a single block layout:
1 Select Single Block in the Layout (see page 1879) dialog to
display the Single block options:
2 Select Retract if you want the tool to retract to the home position
after each operation.
3 Optionally select Nested to display the nesting options. (see page
1881)
4 Click Next to display the Stock (see page 1882) dialog.

Nested
You can set the following nesting options in the Layout dialog (see
page 1879):
Nested — FeatureCAM rotates and flips the part geometry to find

the most efficient layout, to reduce the waste material when cutting
some parts.
X shift and Y shift — The distances between the origins of nested
objects in the X and Y axes.
These options only applies to the inverted row or column; the

spacing between objects on the same row or column is
dependent on the X spacing and Y spacing values in the
Configuration dialog (see page 1878).
These options are only available if Nested is selected.
You can enter negative values.

Click Next to display the Preview dialog (see page 1883).

Stock
You can use the Stock dialog to specify the size and location of the
stock:
1 Enter the coordinates of the stock origin in the X, Y and Z fields.

The default block size is calculated as the minimum block size
that will contain all the parts in the document with the spacings
specified in the Configuration dialog.
2 If you want to use a stock with a specific size, enter the
dimensions in the Length, Width, and Height fields.
3 Click Auto to calculate the minimum block size that will contain
all the parts.
4 Click Next to display the Preview dialog (see page 1883). A
preview of the layout is displayed in green in the graphics
window.

Completing the multiple fixture part
The Preview page is displayed, and a preview of the Setup(s) is
displayed in green in the graphics window.
If you want to change any settings, click Back until you reach the
page you want to change.
Click Cancel to close the wizard and cancel any changes.
Click Finish to accept the changes and close the Preview dialog.
The Multiple Fixtures dialog is displayed.
You can repeat the Add (see page 1874) process to place more
Setups or parts in the whole layout as needed to complete the task.
You can add a mixture of single and individual block layouts.
To save the changes, click OK in the Multiple Fixtures dialog.
If you click Cancel, or you close the dialog without clicking

OK, any changes you made in previous dialogs are lost.
You can edit (see page 1883) a Setup or part after you have added
it to the multiple fixture document.
Editing a multiple fixture document

You can use the Setup Properties dialog to edit a multiple fixture
document after you have created it.
To display the Setup Properties dialog:
 Right-click a Setup or part in the graphics window and select
Properties from the context menu.

 Select a Setup in the Multiple Fixtures dialog (see page 1873) and
click Edit.
The tabs contain the options from the Setup, Fixtures (see page
1874), Configuration (see page 1878), Layout (see page 1879), and
Stock (see page 1882) dialogs.
The Layout and Stock tabs are not available for non-repeated parts,
and you cannot create repeats of a part after it has been added to
the multiple fixture document.
You can modify the spacing, shift spacing, nesting, and so on in the
Properties dialog. You can also change the Setup name and fixture
ID directly in the Name tab.
Saving and opening multiple fixture parts

Multiple fixture documents are saved as MF Documents with the file
extension .mf.
To open a multiple fixture document:
1 Select File > Open from the menu to display the Open dialog.
2 Select FM Documents (*.fm) from the Files of type list.
3 Select a file.
4 Click Open.

Tombstone machining (TOMB)
If your milling machine is equipped with a tombstone, FeatureCAM
makes it easy to take advantage of this high production feature.
Tombstone parts are saved in files with the .tsf extension. When
opening tombstone documents change the Files of type to be TSF
Documents (*.tsf) to view the tombstone documents saved on your
disk.
You must license the Tombstone machining option to use

tombstone machining.
Overview of tombstone machining

The tombstone fixture document enables you to arrange
FeatureCAM milling parts on a tombstone for production
manufacturing.
Your first step is to describe your tombstone (see page 1887).
Tombstones for vertical and horizontal milling machines are
supported. Specify the number of faces and the dimensions of a
face. These dimensions are remembered for future parts.
Next use the tombstone wizard to open FeatureCAM parts and
position them on the tombstone (see page 1893). You can cut
multiple copies of a single part or mix different parts on the
tombstone. You can order the operations automatically to minimize
tool changes across all setups or to cut each setup completely
before rotating.
Example of four parts on a two face horizontal tombstone

Example of twelve parts on a six face horizontal tombstone
Example of four parts on a four face vertical tombstone.
Creating a tombstone machined part

To create a tombstone machined part:
1 Select File > New from the menu or click the New button from
the Standard toolbar.
The New Part Document dialog opens.
2 Select Tombstone Fixture as the type.
3 Select the system units you will use for the multiple part
document. This is the unit you will use to specify the size of the
tombstone and to position the parts on the faces of the
tombstone. It specifies the system of units for all parts that you
will place on the tombstone.
4 Click OK.
5 If it is the first time you have created a part for tombstone
machining, specify the dimensions of the tombstone (see page
1887).
6 Add parts to the tombstone (see page 1893).

Specifying tombstone dimensions
It is important to accurately reflect the dimensions of the tombstone
because these dimensions are used to simulate toolpaths and to
calculate the required retract distances.
To specify the dimensions of the tombstone:
1 If the Tombstone Dimensions dialog is not already open, click the
Tombstone step in the Steps Toolbox to open it.
2 Select the Axis of rotation for the tombstone. For horizontal

machining centers, this is normally the Y axis. For vertical
machining centers, this is normally the X axis.
3 Enter the Number of faces of the tombstone.
4 Enter the dimensions as indicated on the diagram on the dialog:
a Enter the axis Length. This is the dimension of the tombstone
parallel with the tombstone axis.
b Enter the Width of Face. This is the dimension that is
perpendicular to the Axis Length.
For a tombstone with four faces, enter Width of Face1

and Width of Face2.
c Enter the Tombstone Thickness. For a tombstone with an even
number of faces, this is the distance between parallel faces.
For a tombstone with an odd number of faces it is the
perpendicular distance from a face to the joint of faces on the
opposite side of the tombstone.

Handling multiple tombstones
If you have more than one tombstone in your shop, you can
simply enter the dimensions of the tombstone with each part,
but there is an easier way. The dimensions of the tombstone
are stored in the tombstone part file (.tsf file extension). If you
create a blank tombstone file for each tombstone in your
shop, you can use these files as a starting point for each
tombstone part. Make sure to save your part under a different
name so that you do not overwrite your initial blank
tombstone file.

Tombstone global fixtures
You can create global fixture coordinate systems relative to the
existing part setups (see page 1889) or relative to tombstone faces
(see page 1890).
Creating global fixture coordinate systems from Setups on

placed parts
If you want to use a Setup of a part that you have placed on the
tombstone to locate other part Setups, use the following procedure:
1 Open the Fixture Offset Locations dialog in one of these ways:
 Click the Fixture ID step in the Steps Toolbox.

 Click the Fixtures button in the Tombstone Process Plan dialog.
2 Click the Add button. The Fixture Location wizard is displayed.
3 Select Create the fixture zero at the origin of a setup and click Next.
The Select Fixture Setup page is displayed.
4 Select the Setup whose origin you want to use and click Next.
The Fixture ID page opens.
5 Enter the Fixture ID to use for the first face. You probably don't
need to change the default value because it was set when you
placed the first part.

6 If you want to set the origin of each face at the same point,
select Use the same fixture ID on each orientation.
7 If you want to use a different origin for each face, select
Increment the fixture ID for each orientation.
The fixture offsets you create are displayed, in the Graphics
window, on each face of the tombstone with the symbol.
The Fixture Offset Locations dialog lists the fixture IDs you
created.
9 Click OK to accept them.
The faces that they apply to are shown underneath the fixture
IDs.
10 Click OK to accept the settings and close the Tombstone Process
Plan dialog.
Creating global fixture coordinate systems on the

tombstone
The first step to placing parts on the tombstone is to locate a point
on the tombstone to position the primary setups of the parts. These
coordinate systems are created relative to the tombstone and are
called global fixture coordinate systems.
1 Open the Fixture Offset Locations dialog in one of these ways:
 Click the Fixture ID step in the Steps Toolbox.

 Click the Fixtures... button in the Tombstone Process Plan
dialog.

2 Click the Add button. The Fixture Location wizard opens.
3 Select Create the fixture zero relative to one of the faces of the
tombstone and click Next.
The Fixture ID page opens.
4 Enter the Fixture ID to use for the first face.
5 If you want to set the origin of each face at the same point,
select Use the same fixture ID on each orientation.
6 If you want to use a different origin for each face, select
Increment the fixture ID for each orientation.
7 Click the Next button.
8 The Fixture Zero Location page opens. Enter the offsets from the
left/right edge, top edge and tombstone face.
These values are for simulation purposes only. When you

set up the machine you can locate the origin anywhere on
the face that you want.
The fixture offsets you create are displayed on each face of the
tombstone with the symbol.
The Fixture Offset Locations dialog lists the fixture IDs you
created.
10 Click OK to accept them.
The faces that they apply to are shown underneath the fixture
IDs.
11 Click OK to accept the settings and close the Tombstone Process
Plan dialog.
Tombstone Process Plan dialog

Open the Tombstone Process Plan dialog in one of these ways:
 Click the Parts step in the Steps toolbox.

 Click the Properties button at the bottom of the Graphics window.
 Select Manufacturing > Process Plan from the menu.
Fixtures — Click this button to open the Fixture Offset Locations

dialog.
Add Part — Places a part (see page 1893) on one face of the
tombstone.
Add To All — Places a part (see page 1893) on all faces of the
tombstone.
Delete — Removes a face from the tombstone, or a part from a face
of the tombstone. Select the entity name in the list and click Delete.
Edit — Lets you modify the location of a part on a face, or a setup
name or fixture ID. Select the entity in the list and click Edit. If you
selected a part, the Edit Part Location dialog is displayed. If you
selected a setup, the Edit Setup Information dialog is displayed.
Reload — Reloads the selected part file into the tombstone
document. If the part file has changed since you created the
tombstone part, you must reload the part.
Machine Sim — Opens a dialog where you enter the location of the
bottom of the bottom-most clamp, and the location of the machine
design file, for simulation purposes.
Tool Dominant — If you want the ordering of operations to minimize
tool changes across all setups, select Tool Dominant.
You must also select Minimize tool changes in the Automatic

Ordering Options (see page 1553) dialog for Tool Dominant
to work correctly.

Setup Dominant — If you want the ordering of operations to
complete each setup before moving on to another setup, select
Setup Dominant. The milling ordering attributes determine the order
in which operations are performed within a setup.
OK — Accept changes and close the dialog
Apply — Accept changes and keep the dialog open.
Help — Opens this Help topic.
Adding a part to the tombstone

To add a part to the tombstone:
1 Open the Tombstone Process Plan (see page 1891) dialog.
2 Click the Add Part button to place a part on one face of the
tombstone, or Add To All to place a part on all faces of the
tombstone.
The Select Part page is displayed and all open part files are listed.
3 Do one of the following:
 Select a part file from the list.
 Click Browse, browse to the location of the file, click Open and
select the part file in the list.
4 Click Next.
The Primary Setup page is displayed.
5 Select the name of the setup to orient the part on the
tombstone. The Z-axis of the primary setup is oriented
perpendicular to the face of the tombstone.
6 Click Next.
The Active Setups page is displayed.
7 Select each setup that will be active on the tombstone and click
Next.
The Select Fixtures page is displayed.
8 To assign the part to an existing fixture ID, select Use a
predefined fixture ID and select a fixture in the list.
To assign the part to a new fixture ID:
a Select Create a new fixture zero at the setup origin.
b Enter the Fixture number.
c Click Next.

d When locating a part on a single face, select whether to locate
the primary setup relative to the tombstone face or to an
existing fixture.
9 Click Next.
The Part Location page is displayed.
10 Specify the offset of the part's setup from the location selected in
the Select Fixture page.
These values are for simulation purposes only.

11 Click Next.
The Preview page is displayed, and a wireframe preview of the
part is displayed in the graphics window.
12 Click Finish to add the part and close the dialog.

Machine Simulation
FeatureCAM's Machine Simulation enables you to see the whole
machine in a view that is similar to FeatureCAM's 3D simulation.
Machine Simulation is intended to complement the standard
simulation types of Centerline, 2D, 3D, and 3D RapidCut. With these
other types of simulation you can see only the stock and the current
cutting tool. This is enough for simple machines, but more complex
machines such as multi-axis turning and 5-axis milling need
simulation of the entire machine in order to help you understand
how the machine cuts your part. You can detect odd motions and
collisions so that you can adjust the program before code is sent to
the CNC machine. You can expect to save a lot of time by proofing
your NC code on the PC before sending it to the machine.
A few simple example machines are provided with FeatureCAM. But
the ability to design a machine from scratch is also included in
FeatureCAM as a document type called a Machine Design (MD)
document. The file extension is .md. The process of designing a
machine consists of creating solids and establishing movement
relationships between them. Because machine design relies on
solids, you must either create them in FeatureCAM or import them
from another CAD system. You must license the Solid Modeling or a
solid import component. After the solids are present in an MD file,
you establish relationships between them. This capability is part of
the MD document type and is independent of solid modeling or solid
import.
Machine Simulation applies to every machine type except wire. The
full range of milling machines is supported, such as 2.5-axis, 3-axis,
4-axis indexers and rotary tables, and 5-axis machines of all types.
Turning is also fully supported: simple 2-axis turning, Y-axis,
C-axis, turn/mill with rotary (live) tooling, sub-spindle, and
multi-axis multi-turret turning. You can also create auxiliary
machine functions like parts catchers, tool changers, bar feeders,
and so on, possibly using some coding in BASIC using FeatureCAM's
API.
Using Machine Simulation

To use Machine Simulation you must:
1 Choose a machine.
2 Choose a corresponding post processor.
3 Open a part file that uses the kind of machining done on the
chosen machine.

Choosing a machine
In order to use Machine Simulation you first need to specify a
machine for each Setup. Every Setup can have its own machine
(.md file), or you can specify a machine in the first Setup to apply to
all Setups. You can change which machine is used by the Setup by
editing the Setup properties (see page 1896).
Choosing a post processor

It is important to have an appropriate post processor (.cnc file)
loaded. So make sure that you've got an .md file that has the same
configuration as the post processor that you have selected.
Using Machine Simulation

After you've established a machine for the Setup, you can select
View > Simulation > Machine Solid from the menu. Or click the
Machine simulation button in the Simulation toolbar. Then click
the Play button to start the simulation.
Examples
You should try running the examples that are provided with
FeatureCAM. In the Examples\Machine Design folder there are several
folders each containing three files:
 a machine design file (.md)
 a post processor file (.cnc)
 a sample part file (.fm)
To see full machine simulation:
1 Load the .fm file.
2 Load the post processor.
3 Select Machine simulation button in the Simulation toolbar.

Then click the Play button.
In these examples you do not need to set the machine design

file for each Setup because the part file specifies using one in
the post processor file, which in turn references the machine
design file in the same folder.
Specifying the machine simulation file

The Machine Simulation file is associated with the Setup. For files
where you simulate multiple setups such as indexed or turn/mill
parts, you should associate the machine file with the first setup of a
part.

To specify a machine simulation file:
1 Open the Setups dialog in one of these ways:
 Select Manufacturing > Setups from the menu.
 Double-click the Setup name in the Part View.
 Select Properties from the Setup's context menu in the Part
View.
 Double-click the Setup in the graphics window.
2 Click the Edit button.
3 Click the Next button until the Setups > Simulation Information
4 Enter the X Offset, Y Offset, and Z Offset parameters. These

represent offsets for loading the part onto the machine. For
simulating single milling or turning setups these offsets are
applied to the setup after the part is aligned with the top-most
location (see page 1912). For indexed parts or turn/mill parts,
the offset is relative to the stock axis.
5 The Simulation machine design file section has these options:
 Always use this one — Select this option if you want to identify
a specific file. Browse to the location of the Machine Design
file.
The number of turrets and locations of the turrets must

match the selected post processor.

 Use the one specified in the .cnc file — Select this option to use
the machine specified in the post processor .cnc file.
Removing objects from the simulation

During a machine simulation you can remove an object (such as
machine doors) from the scene. To do this:
1 Click the Select button.

2 Click on an object.
This removes the object from the simulation temporarily; it

does not delete it. To show all solids, select View > Show All
when the simulation is still shown.
Shadows
If you are using graphics hardware for OpenGL shading you can
display shadows in your simulation. The image shows an example of
shadows displayed when using machine simulation.
The quality of the shadows is controlled by the Shadow quality slider

on the 2D/3D shaded tab of the Simulation Options (see page 1525)
dialog. If the slider is dragged all the way to the left to None, then
shadows are turned off. As you drag the slider to the right the
quality of the shadows improves. Be aware that this option can slow
down the simulation.

Creating a Machine Design document
In the New Part Document (see page 63) dialog there is an option for
file type Simulation Machine Design. Files of this type have a .md
extension (MD for machine design). In these types of files you
design solids that collectively represent a CNC machine and specify
how these solids interact or move according to how your machine
operates. (You must have the ability to at least import solids, that
is, you must have the solid import plugin installed which comes with
the FeatureRecognition product, the 3D milling product, and the
advanced solid modeling product).
Each solid represents a particular part of your machine, and it is
important that you model each movable part of your machine as an
independent solid. That is, do not make use of the solid wizard's
Combine Solids command to union two tables into one solid,
because you need to rotate one table independently of the other. If
you have imported a file and it contains only one solid, use the
Explode Solid (see page 491) method and then reconstruct multiple
solids from the exploded surfaces (probably constructing additional
surfaces as well).
In an MD document, there are no manufacturing-like commands.
That is, there is no stock, no Setups, no simulation, and no
manufacturing attributes, manufacturing menu, and so on. The
purpose of the document type is to design solids, and to assign
attributes to the solids that match your particular machine
movement and machine hierarchy. An example of a machine
hierarchy is that tableA is on top of tableB and so, whenever you
rotate tableB, tableA is also rotated. This is called a parent/child
relationship (see page 1910).
General guidelines
Some general guidelines for machine design:
 You should design the machine in its home state. Design the
machine in the file as it is when you first power-on the real
machine.
 All FeatureCAM movements are programmed relative to the tool
direction. For example, if FeatureCAM wants to move the tool in
a positive X direction, and your machine tool is stationary, but
the tables move, the +X tool direction is equivalent to moving
your table in a negative X direction.

 If you are designing a 4-axis or 5-axis machine, a single solid
can rotate only about one axis. Unlike the human wrist, for
example, machine joints are modeled as single revolute joints
(only allow rotation about one mechanical axis).
 Your .md file should match your .fm and .cnc files. If, for example,
your part file (.fm) is defined as Indexing around the X axis, you
should design your machine so that the degree of rotation is
about the world X also. (Although we have plans to remove this
restriction in the future, it simplifies the design process if your
wrapping axis matches your .md file rotation axis). Also consider
your post (.cnc file); if your .md file specifies two turrets, you
must use a .cnc file that enables twin turrets or the simulation is
unpredictably wrong, and so on.
 Using our approach, you should be able to model most lathes as
well as most of the traditional 4-axis and 5-axis machines.
(Traditional meaning table-on-table, rotating head(s), and so
on). Non-traditional 4-axis or 5-axis machines such as a machine
which 3 linear motors push and pull 3 different points of the table
(or tool) to effectively rotate the table through A and B, are not
supported by the framework. (It may be possible to program
these in our BASIC API).
 Mixing units is supported, that is, you may model your machine
in millimeters, and use it when simulating an inch .fm document
and vice-versa.
 Keep the model simple. Only the necessary details of a machine
should be modeled. Modeling every chamfer, fillet and tiny detail
is only going to slow the simulation down.
 There are several attributes which are based on the name of the
solid. This means if you want to rename some or all of the solids,
you should use the rename commands before you begin using
the machine design commands.
 FeatureCAM cannot distinguish a crash (sometimes called a clash
or gouge) and the case where a table slides along another table
such that the two tables share a common plane. We advise that
you avoid modeling such solids. Use solid offset or transform by
small amounts (for example, 0.005 inches) to eliminate false
gouges in the simulation.
 Although you can use STL data for machine simulation,
surface-based data is better.
 Solids must be closed. No open faces are allowed.

Machine Design concepts
Parent/child relationships
Think of a machine as a hierarchy. For example, when the slide on a
lathe moves back and forth, the turret moves with it in
lock-step. The turret is considered to be a child and the slide is
considered to be a parent. In this manner, if the G-code specifies a
certain movement, you can assign that movement to the parent and
all of the children move with it. That way you don't need to specify
how every piece of the machine moves independently.
Movement
You assign a piece of the machine to a particular movement. For
example, you could assign a slide on a lathe to Z movement. So
whenever the G-code has a Z move, the slide moves accordingly. If
the slide is a parent of a turret, the turret moves too.
Top-most table
A milling machine has a top-most table that the fixture, vise, or
stock from the FM file must mate to. A turning machine has a
similar concept with the main-spindle chuck.
UCS/LCS
FeatureCAM users are familiar with the term UCS (User Coordinate
System). UCSs are critically important in machine design. The term
LCS (Local Coordinate System) is sometimes used and is equivalent
to UCS.
Mate
A mate is a term from assembly modeling (or constraint-based
positioning). Suppose there are 2 similarly sized cubes in space,
randomly oriented and you want cube1 to be totally coincident with
cube2 so that a specific corner of each cube occupies the same
point as a specific corner of the other cube, and the edges are
parallel and, in fact, coincident. Suppose further that there is a UCS
that describes the position of the interesting corner of each cube
and the orientation of the edges of that cube. We want to mate the
UCS of cube2 to that of cube1, that is, we find a transformation
(translation and rotation) such that the origins of the UCSs are
made to be concentric, and the X, Y, and Z directions are the same.
That is, there is one transformation (and only one) which takes
cube1 (or cube2) and moves it to where you want it.

Lathe design overview
Lathe tool inserts cut the stock when they are parallel to the Setup's
XZ plane. You must design your lathe machine so that a lathe tool
in slot 1 can be moved into the XZ plane. FeatureCAM does not
initially rotate the turret.
The following image shows a turret that is modeled incorrectly. The
turret solid can't be moved such that the tool in slot #1 can cut in
the XZ plane of the chuck without rotating the turret. In this
situation, you should rotate the turret solid so that the tool is in the
XZ plane of the chuck.
Turret
Chuck
Tool slot #1
FeatureCAM assumes that the tools point toward the center of the
chuck. If that is not the case with the machine you are modeling,
FeatureCAM needs the flexibility to move the turret so that the tool
points toward the center of the chuck. In the example shown below,
the tools are parallel to the XZ plane, but they do not line up with
the chuck's center. In this case you should tell FeatureCAM that part
of your machine moves in Y, when in reality, your machine cannot
move in the Y axis. FeatureCAM needs to move the turrets in Y so
that the tools can be translated into the chuck's XZ plane.
The machine simulation does not affect the NC code. No

actual Y moves are included in the NC code.

Chuck
It is not necessary or desirable to include the tool holders in the .md

file. However, the tool blocks are part of the lathe machine.
About UCSs for machine design

The key to a Machine Design file that properly simulates the target
machine lies in the correct placement of the various UCSs. These
UCSs are used to control both mating and movement. Mating
controls how various components are positioned and oriented with
respect to each other.
Some of the important mate interactions are:
 Stock and machine table/chuck (see page 1912)
 Tool and milling spindle (see page 1915)
 Tool holders and turning turret (see page 1923)
 Tool and tool holder on turning turret (see page 1923)
Some UCSs affect the direction of linear or rotational movement of
machine components. Linear movements in the machine simulation
take place in the coordinate system for the top-most table. That is,
if you've used Specify Movement (see page 1904) to indicate that a
turret slide can move in X, it is the X direction of the top-most table
UCS that indicates the direction of translational freedom.
Rotational motion, however, is determined by a UCS specifically
associated with the particular solid that is rotating. This is done in
the Local Coordinate System (see page 1923) dialog.

Configuring the machine
Think of Machine Design files as consisting of two parts:
 A model of the physical machine to be simulated, which is a set
of geometric solids.
 The definition of the kinematics that describe how the
components move with respect to each other in the machine.
You can find basic information about preparing your solid model in
the General guidelines (see page 1899) topic, and additional
suggestions in the Preparing the solid model (see page 1946) topic
of the Machine Design handbook (see page 1945).
You define the kinematics within the FeatureCAM Machine Simulation
component. The following topics give information about the
concepts you need to understand, as well as how to use the dialogs
and menus provided for machine design.
You can delete a machine design (movement, parent/child

relationships, tool location, and so on) by selecting Machine
Design > Start over from the menu. This does not delete solid
names, solid colors, and UCSs.
Specify Movement dialog

If a part on a machine moves independently, you must specify the
way it moves in the Specify Movement dialog.
To open the Specify Movement dialog, select Machine Design >

Specify Movement from the menu.

If the solid moves only through the association with its parent
solid, you do not need to specify any additional movements
for that solid.
There are two major categories of movement: Tool quill and Table.
There are translational and rotational options for each category. The
movements specified under Tool quill move in the same direction as
the tool. If the tool moves in the +X direction, the solid also moves
in the +X direction. Solids in the Table category move in the
opposite direction. To affect a +X tool movement, a table solid must
move in the -X direction.
After you determine whether the solid is a Tool quill or a Table solid,
indicate how the solid moves by selecting the appropriate options.
For Tool quill solids, select Moves +delta X, Moves +delta Y, or Moves
+delta Z for translational movements. Select rotates +A, rotates +B,
or rotates +C for rotational movements. For Table solids the
translational options are Moves -delta X, Moves -delta Y, or Moves
-delta Z and the rotational movements are rotates -A, rotates -B, or
rotates -C.
One special case of movement that must be specified for lathes
which support a sub-spindle is the Moves as Turn spindle option.
Select this option for the solid that supports the sub-spindle and
performs the independent Z movement.
To use this dialog:
1 Select or pick the solid.
2 Select the appropriate type of movements.
3 Click the Apply button.
4 Use the Specify Limits tab (see page 1906) to set the limits of
movement.

Specify Limits tab
You can use the Specify Limits tab of the Specify Movement dialog to
set the limits of movement for solids in a Machine Design document.
To specify the limits of movement for a solid in the Machine Design

document:
1 Select the Machine Design > Specify Movement menu option.
The Specify Movement dialog is displayed.
2 Use the Specify Movement tab to select the solid and specify how
it can move.
3 Use the Specify Limits tab to specify the linear and rotational
limits of movement.
There are several example MD files that have limits of

movement set. These are located in
\FeatureCAM\Examples\Machine Design\Axis Limits.
To display a warning if the machine exceeds its limits of movement
during a machine simulation, select Pause on limits on the 2D/3D
Shaded of the Simulation Options dialog.
A message dialog is displayed when the machine moves outside the
specified limits if Pause on Limits is selected.

The Outside of Limits message dialog displays this information:
 The name of the solid that has exceeded its limits.
 The axis in which the solid has exceeded its limits..
 The specified limit.
 The solid's current position.
You can select these options in the Outside of Limits message
dialog:
 Don't pause for this solid again — Select this option to run
machine simulations without pausing when this solid exceeds its
limits.
 Don't pause on limits again — Select this option to run machine
simulations without pausing when any solids exceed their limits.
Part Handling Movement dialog

Use the Part Handling Movement dialog to program steady rests and
tailstocks.
To display the Part Handling Movement dialog, ensure the Machine
Design > Enable Turn/Mill UI menu option is selected, and select
Machine Design > Specify Part Handling Movement.
solid — Select the solid for which you want to specify movement.

Jaw
Use this section to mark a solid as a jaw.
A jaw can be a jaw of a chuck (on a lathe spindle) or a jaw of a
steady rest. The jaw on a chuck translates to open and close, the
outer jaws of a steady rest rotate.
For a translating jaw, select Moves in LCS X or Moves in LCS Y to
specify in which axis of the jaw's Local Coordinate System the jaws
translate.
A translating jaw with Moves in LCS X selected opens in a positive X
and closes in a negative X of its Local Coordinate System. Marking a
solid as a translating jaw of the chuck in the .md file means that
you do not have to write BASIC code in the .md file to close it. If
you mark it as a translating jaw, you should not move it around
with the BASIC callback hooks. If you want to move it around in a
custom method, leave it unmarked.
A rotating jaw with Rotates +C selected closes by rotating in a
positive direction around the Z-axis of its LCS, and opens by
rotating in the opposite direction. A rotating jaw with Rotates -C
selected closes by rotating in a negative direction around the Z of
its LCS.
Steady Rest
Use this section to mark a solid as a steady rest.
Select Moves in LCS Z for the parent steady rest solid (the solid that
connects the steady rest to the machine) to make it slide along a
track in Z in response to a Part Support On or Off feature. The jaws
of a steady rest should be children of the steady rest solid.
Select Moves in LCS X or Moves in LCS Y if you have an off-center
steady rest that needs to move in X or Y to be in line with the part.
Steady rests are simulated with pressure sensitive jaws that close in
small increments until they touch another solid or themselves.
Ensure you design your steady rest jaws and housing so they do not
touch when the jaws are moving.
Model the steady rest in the open position. A Part Support On
feature causes the jaws to open (the first open move does nothing),
positions the LCS of the steady rest to the appropriate grab
distance, and then closes the steady rest until the jaws touch the
stock.The next Part Support On feature is used to reposition the
steady rest, which opens the jaws to the position they were
modeled in, positions the steady rest, and closes the jaws. For
example, if the first Part Support On feature causes the jaws to
close by 37 degrees, the next Part Support On feature causes them
to open by 37 degrees.

Subspindle
Select Moves as Turn Subspindle to specify this solid as the
subspindle.
Tailstock
Select Moves as Turn Tailstock for the parent solid to specify it as a
tailstock. A tailstock solid and its children move in Z in response to
a Part Support On or Off feature, from its LCS origin to the grab
distance in the Setup coordinate system.
There are two types of tailstock, dead-center and live-center. In a
live-center tailstock the tailstock piece rotates as it supports the
stock. In a dead-center tailstock the tailstock piece does not rotate.
A live-center tailstock piece is made from softer material so it can
be remachined, a dead-center tailstock piece is made from harder
material. A tailstock piece typically has a 60 degree nose.
Live-center tools are not necessarily held by a turret, some
tailstocks have a spindle that can rotate the tool (the tailstock
piece).
Some tailstocks have a hydraulic pressure-sensing cylinder that also
moves in Z. The tailstock in process is then a two-step process, you
position the large tailstock housing to some position out in front of
the stock, and then the hydraulic cylinder/cone comes out (in Z)
until it hits the stock.
For a dead-center tail stock, you can have the LCS of the tailstock
be at the tip of the cone, and move the tip of the tailstock to Z=0
by using a Part Support On feature with a grab distance of 0.
Alternatively, you can move the large tailstock housing out in front
of the stock by using a Part Support On feature with a negative grab
distance. Then, you can implement a BASIC callback hook to move
in the hydraulic pressure sensing cylinder in the callback hook:
MachineSim_PartHandle. The MachineSim_PartHandle callback hook
is called whenever a steady rest or a tailstock is opened or closed,
and is called twice for positioning moves: once before the move,
and once after the move. To implement the move in the hydraulic
pressure sensing cylinder, you would implement
MachineSim_PartHandle and test if Action is
eSimAction_TS_PostPosition (that stands for tailstock, post (after)
positioning). You can move the hydraulic pressure sensing cylinder
in small Z increments until it collides with the stock if the tailstock is
moving in, or move the cylinder back if the tailstock is moving out.

Parent/Child Relationships dialog
The first step in creating a simulation machine is to specify the
relationships between the different solids. In the image below, Table
C is located on top of Table A. If Table A moves, then Table C should
move with it. This is specified by indicating that Table A is the
parent of Table C.
Table A
Table C
You specify this type of relationship in the Parent/Child Relationships

dialog.
To open the Parent/Child Relationships dialog, select Machine Design

> Parent/Child Relationships from the menu.
To use this dialog:
1 Select the parent solid.
2 Select the child solid.
As you work up or down through the machine hierarchy, you

can save time by moving the previously selected solid from
the parent to the child selection or the child to the parent
selection using the arrow buttons.

All solids must be associated with the machine. The machine solid in
the Part View is not an actual solid, but it represents the top level of
the machine. All solids must be connected to machine to be included
in the simulation. The parent/child relationships are displayed in the
Part View under the machine object. Here is an example of the
hierarchy for a simple table-on-table machine.

Top-most Table dialog
The top-most table solid is the solid that the stock and clamps are
attached to. That is, the stock and clamps in the machine simulation
move around with the solid that is specified in this dialog as if they
were children of the solid.
For a lathe, this is the main spindle or chuck. For mills, it is the top
table solid. Use the Top-most Table dialog to set this up.
To open the Top-most Table dialog, select Machine Design > Top-most
Table from the menu.
To use this dialog:
2 Select either:
 Existing UCS — Select or pick the UCS on the top of the solid
where you want the part mounted.
Note that if your part has its coordinate system located

on its top, you can offset the solid in the Simulation
Information page of the Setup wizard.
 Create UCS and go to alignment wizard
UCS for top-most table

The Top-most Table UCS is the most crucial UCS to get right,
particularly for a turning machine. Both the position and the
orientation of the top-most table UCS are important because they
establish a correspondence to the Setup position and orientation
used in the FeatureCAM part. You can think about this in any of
several equivalent ways:

 The top-most table UCS is mated to the Setup's origin (minus
the offsets in the Setup - Simulation Information (see page 1896)
dialog).
 The origins of the Setup UCS (minus the offsets in the Setup -
Simulation Information (see page 1896) dialog) are made to be
coincident with the top-table UCS; and the X, Y, and Z directions
are aligned.
 FeatureCAM's simulation aligns (transforms) the whole machine
so that the top table UCS is aligned with the setup (minus the
offsets in the Setup - Simulation Information (see page 1896)
dialog). That is, the machine is transformed such that the +X of
the top table UCS is aligned to the Setup's +X, +Z to +Z, and
the machine is translated such that the Setup's origin (minus the
offsets in the Setup - Simulation Information dialog) is the same
point as the top-table UCS origin.
Below is a sample of the UCS and solid used for a milling machine:
The UCS for milling should have:

 the XY positioned in the center of the table
 the Z positioned on the top of the table
 X pointing to the right
 Z pointing up
For 4-axis indexed parts, the combination of the .fm's Setup's clamp
location and the top-most table location should translate the stock
such that the index axis of the part is aligned with the table's
rotation axis. If this is not true, the simulation cannot rotate the
machine about the index axis.

Below is a sample of the UCS and solid used for a turning or
turn/mill machine:
The UCS for turning should have:

 the XY positioned in the center of the chuck
 the Z positioned on the face of the jaws
 X pointing up (or towards the tool on a slant-bed lathe)
 Z pointing to the right (from the main to the sub-spindle or
tailstock)
Sub-spindle dialog
Ensure that the Machine Design > Enable Millturn UI menu

option is selected to access the lathe design options.
If you are modeling a lathe with a sub-spindle, you must identify
the solid representing the sub-spindle. Specify the solid in the
Sub-spindle dialog:
To open the Sub-spindle dialog, select Machine Design > Sub-spindle

from the menu.
To use this dialog:
1 Select or pick the sub-spindle solid.

This dialog lets you designate which solid represents the
sub-spindle. In a sense, this is akin to the Top-most Table dialog,
that is, FeatureCAM has to know which solid holds the part when
cutting on the sub-spindle.
If the stock is parted with a cutoff operation, the right-most

stock becomes a child of the sub-spindle solid.
The Local Coordinate System (see page 1923) of the sub-spindle is
important in terms of simulating sub-spindle positioning
features. Typically the sub-spindle is positioned with respect to a
machine coordinate system and not the part program (or Setup)
zero. Set the Local Coordinate System's Z direction to match the
machining sub-spindle commands. That is, if the machine's
sub-spindle moves to the left in response to a negative W (or
sometimes B), set the Z direction of the LCS pointing to the right
(like the main spindle or turning main setup). Sometimes the
positive W axis points to the left, that is, the machine moves to the
left in response to a positive W (assuming W=0 is the home
position). You can set the home W and max W in the .cnc file (Edit
the .cnc file, and go to CNC-Info > Spindles).
Here, the sub-spindle's LCSs (UCS shown) Z direction points to the

right; this would be correct for a machine where a move the
sub-spindle in to grab the part is a negative W and the move the
sub-spindle home is a W of zero.
Add Tool Location dialog (Milling)

You can use the Add Tool Location dialog to specify where the tool is
held in a milling machine.

To display the Add Tool Location dialog, select the Machine Design >
Add Tool Location menu option.
For most milling machines, the tool location is a single point at the
center of the base of the spindle as shown below. The +Z axis
points away from the part. The choice of the X and Y directions of
the UCS are relatively arbitrary.
To use the Add Tool Location dialog to add a milling machine tool
location:
1 Specify the solid that represents the milling spindle that holds
the tool.
Select a solid from the list, or click Pick Solid and select it in
2 Select the UCS that represents the location where the milling
spindle is attached to the machine.
Select Existing UCS and then pick the UCS from the graphics
window, or select Create UCS/use alignment wizard and then use
the wizard to create the UCS.

3 Enter a Simulation C angle offset value. This is the angle between
the turret and the X axis. In some milling machines, you can
perform turning with a C table, where you can turn in the YZ
plane using a X angle offset of -90.
4 Click Apply.
A wireframe preview of the tool is displayed in the graphics
window.
Add tool locations dialog (Turning)

You can use the Add tool locations dialog to specify where the tool
block mounting locations are in turning and turn/mill machines.
To display the Add tool locations dialog, ensure Machine Design >
Enable Turn/Mill UI is selected, and select the Machine Design > Add
Tool Location menu option.
Add tool locations tab

Use the Add tool locations tab to specify the details of the solid that
holds the tools.

This solid holds tools as a turret or gang — Specify the solid that
represents the turret or gang that holds the tools.
Select a solid from the list, or click Pick Solid and select it in the
graphics window.
Which turret — Specify whether to use a main turret or sub turret,
and whether the turret is above or below the stock.
Ensure this setting matches the information in the .cnc file.
Consider this solid a — Select whether the solid is a Programmable
channel or Part of turret. For most turn/mill machines, a turret is a
programmable channel. For non-standard machines, such as where
part of the gang can rotate, you can create turrets and gangs made
of multiple solids, and select Part of turret to set up hierarchical
movements.
Solid rotates when changing tool — Select this option for rotating
solids such as turrets, deselect it for gang tools. For
non-symmetrical turrets, you must add tool locations individually.
Tool Locations tab

Use the Tool locations tab to add and edit tool locations, which
determines where the tool blocks are held on the solid.
Add — Displays the Add Tool Location wizard (see page 1919).
Remove — Select a tool location and click Remove to delete it.

Edit — Select a tool location and click Edit to display the Each new
location page. This enables you to edit the tool type, spindle, and
tool slot, but not the UCS.
Add Tool Location wizard

Add Tool Location wizard
Use the Add Tool Location wizard to create tool locations.
Select Existing UCS — Select the UCS that represents the location
where the top of the spindle is held in the turret or gang.
Type — Select the type of tool that is held at this tool location.
To create a turret, the solid must have a Local Coordinate System
(see page 1923), and you can create multiple tool locations rotated
around the LCS origin and the Z axis.
Mounting type — Specify the mounting type.
Specify whether the tool is mounted on the face of the turret for
cutting on the main spindle, the face for cutting on the
sub-spindle, or on the OD which can cut in either direction. The
image shows the tool mounting directions:

Face-mount
ed, main
spindle
Face-mount
ed,
sub-spindle
OD-mounte
d, either
spindle
These options are unavailable if Head is selected in the Type list.
Repeats — Specify how many tool locations to create.
Click Next to display the Each new location page.
Each new location page

Use the Each new location page of the Add Tool Location wizard to
specify the details of the tool locations.
Tool location(s) can hold — Select the tool types that can be held by
the tool location.
Can address — Select which spindles the tool can machine.
Simulation C angle offset — This is the angle between the turret and
the X axis. This is usually 0 for an upper turret and 180 for a lower
turret.

Begin tool slot — Specify the tool slot number. When creating
multiple tool locations, they are numbered sequentially starting on
this number.
Delta tool slot — Specify the numerical increment between tool slots.
For example, a Delta tool slot of 2 results in T1, T3, T5....
Show tool block — Select this option to simulate the tool block in
this tool location.
Show milling holder — Select this option to simulate milling tool
holders in this tool location. You can deselect this to hide the tool
holder when the insert is held directly without a tool holder.
Show turning holder — Select this option to simulate turning tool
holders in this tool location. You can deselect this to hide the tool
holder when the insert is held directly without a tool holder.
Reverse rotary tool spindle direction of the first tool location added —
Specify whether the spindle direction of the first tool location is
reversed. When adding multiple tool locations, selecting this option
reverses all tool locations, unless Toggle the reverse sense is
selected.
Toggle the reverse sense (spindle direction) of every other tool location
— When creating multiple tool locations, select this option to
alternate between reverse and normal spindle direction.
Has ATC — Select this option if the machine has an automatic tool
changer. This enables you to use a single tool location and tool slot
with multiple tools.

Tool direction
Tool direction
The tool location orientation is the same for milling and turning,
where +Z points into the quill or turret. The following image shows
both a machine tool spindle and lathe turret for illustration purposes
only:

Local Coordinate System dialog
For any machine part that rotates during the simulation, a center of
rotation, its local coordinate system must be specified using the
Local Coordinate System dialog:
To open this dialog, select Machine Design > Local Coordinate System
from the menu.
Rotating parts include turrets and rotating tables. Parts that rotate
about the A axis rotate about its local X axis. B-axis rotations are
performed about the local Y axis and C-axis rotations rotate around
the local Z axis.
Turrets rotate about their local Z axis.
If a solid rotates only if the parent rotates, you do not have to

define a local coordinate system.
To use this dialog:
1 Select or pick the Solid.
2 Select Existing UCS and pick/select the UCS or select Create UCS
and go to alignment wizard to create a new UCS.
Tool Block dialog

Use the Tool Block dialog to specify solids as tool blocks, specify
their positions relative to the turret, and specify the locations of the
tools in the tool blocks.
There are different types of tool blocks (see page 1926).

To display the Tool Block dialog, select the Machine Design > Tool
Block for Turret menu option.
To create a tool block:

1 Select a solid to use as the tool block. You can use a block solid
positioned out in space, or in place such that it plugs into tool
slot #1.
2 Under This UCS will match up with the tool location on the turret,
select a UCS to mate with the tool mounting location on the
turret (shown in the image below).
If the tool block solid is already in place, you can use the same
UCS as the tool location slot #1 on the turret.
Tool location
Mounting location to turret
3 Select which turrets the tool block can address.

4 Select which tool locations on the turret the tool block can attach
to.

5 Select the Tool Locations tab.
6 Click Add to add a new tool location.

The new Tool Information dialog is displayed.
7 Select a UCS to define the tool location (see page 1930) on the
tool block, or click New UCS Wizard and create one.
8 Under Modeled to cut which spindle, select which of the spindles
the tool addresses.
9 Under Holds which tool type, select the tool types that can be
used at this tool location.
For OD Lathe tools, select the Handedness of the tool.
10 Select or deselect Show milling holder and Show turning holder to
specify whether to simulate the tool holders in the tool block. You
can use this to hide the tool holder when a tool block holds the
insert directly.

11 Specify where to locate the tool in relation to the tool location.
Select Locates back of tool to specify that the tool location is the
location of the back of the tool, or select Locates front of tool to
specify that the tool location is the location of the tool tip.
Tool location at back of Tool location at tool tip:
tool holder:
1 Click OK to add the tool location and close the Tool Information
dialog.
2 To remove a tool location, select it and click Remove.
3 To edit a tool location, select it and click Edit, or double-click it.
4 Use the Move Up and Move Down buttons to change the order of
the tool locations in the dialog.
Types of tool blocks for turrets

For a turn/mill machine, the holder is held by tool blocks. The tool
blocks are most likely supplied by your machine tool vendor. As
such, they are stored in the machine design file.
 Each tool block must be represented by a separate solid model.
 Tool blocks should not be associated with the machine through a
parent/child relationship.
 The solids must be identified only as a tool block and the
appropriate block is displayed along with the selected tools
during machine simulation.
 You can model the tool blocks in any location.
There are three basic types of tool block:

 those that hold OD turning tools
 OD turning (RH)
This tool block holds right-handed turning tools and is
mounted on the face of the turret.
 OD turning (LH)
This tool block holds left-handed turning tools and is mounted
on the face of the turret.
- Turret
- Tool block
- Lathe tool
 those that hold X-rotary tools

 X tool, OD mount
This tool block holds milling tools parallel to the X axis and is
mounted on OD of the turret.
- Turret
- X tool block (OD mount)
- X tool
 X tool, face mount

This tool block holds milling tools parallel to the X axis and is
mounted on the face of the turret.
- Turret
- X tool not mounted on OD block
- X tool
 those that hold ID turning tools (boring bars), drills, and other
Z-axis aligned milling tools
 Z tool
This tool block holds boring bars and drills parallel to the Z
axis and can be mounted on the OD or the face of the turret.
- Turret
- ID or Z tool block
- Z tool and holder
You may want to differentiate between an OD turning tool block for

left-handed tool versus a right-handed tool. If you use any
left-handed turning tools, add a left-handed tool block.
There is another option for X-rotary and Z-axis tools: you can
mount them on the OD of the turret or on the face of the turret. If,
when adding a tool location on the turret, you specified the tool
position was on the face of the turret, you should use the
face-mounted option here in this dialog as well. (The converse is
also true, if the OD mounted tool was used as a tool location,
specify that the tool block is also OD mounted).

If you cannot mount a tool to the OD of your turret, you do not
need to define an OD-mounted tool block. You must, however, have
at least one solid tool block defined for every tool type that you
intend to simulate. Currently, you cannot use the same solid for
different types of tool blocks.
If you do not define an OD-turning tool block, FeatureCAM attempts
to use an OD mounted X-tool block for any OD turning tools. In this
manner, you can generally define a machine with only two tool
blocks, one for OD turning and X-tools, and another for ID boring
bars and other Z-tools.
You need only define tool blocks for the main turret. Tool blocks
with appropriate transformations are used for the sub-turret
automatically.

Positioning turning tool holders in a tool block
The tool location UCS for a turning tool block should be located at
the back of the holder at the bottom of the tool block as shown:
The tool holder is positioned with the back of the tool along the Z
axis of the tool location UCS and extends below the tool block by
the distance specified as Exposed length on the Holder tab (see page
1803) of the Turning tool properties dialog. Additionally, the tool tip
is located the distance specified as Tip to back (F) on the Holder tab
in the local X direction of the tool location UCS (the turning stock Z
direction).
Exposed length
Tip to back (F)
Machine jogging
You can use machine jogging to simulate the movement of solids in
a Machine Design document without having to use an FM file. This
enables you to test the movement and ensure the limits (see page
1906) are set correctly.
To use machine jogging to test machine movements:
1 Save any changes to your MD document.

Any unsaved changes to the document are not displayed in the
jogging simulation.
2 Select the Machine Design > Jog Machine menu option.
The Jog Machine dialog is displayed.
Each row displays an axis in which solids in the document can

move.
3 Select a solid in the list next to an axis name.
The list is unavailable if there is only one solid that can move in
that axis.
4 For the selected solid, move the slider between the minimum
limit and the maximum limit.
The solid's current position is shown in the middle field, and the
solid's movement is simulated in the graphics window.
You can set the limits (see page 129) and home positions of
the solids using the Specify Movement dialog.
5 To hide solids in the jogging simulation, click Select in the
Standard toolbar, then click solids in the graphics window.
6 To return all solids to their default positions, click Reset All.
7 When finished, close the dialog. The jogging simulation is
cleared, and all solids are returned to their default positions.

G53 Z0 Before Indexing
The Machine Design menu has a G53 Z0 Before Indexing option,
mainly for 5-axis machines. Select this option to enable it (a check
mark displays to the left of the menu item when it is enabled). This
option simulates the movement of the tool to Z=0 in the machine's
coordinate system before performing the indexing rotations. The
effect of putting such a line in the segment start is that the tool
retracts to a safe position before the tables and/or head index to a
new set of angles.
This command does not affect the G code. It performs only

the simulation of this move.
G28 (move turret home) Before Tool Change

The Machine Design menu has a G28 (move turret home) Before Tool
Change option. Select this option to enable it (a check mark displays
to the left of the menu item when it is enabled). This option outputs
a G28 to move the tool to turret home before changing the tool.
This command does not affect the G code. It performs only

the simulation of this move.
Delete Tool Locations/Blocks dialog

Select Machine Design > Delete Tool Location/Block from the menu to
open the Delete Tool Locations/Blocks dialog.
This dialog removes any tool locations and tool block attributes
associated with a solid.

To complete this dialog:
1 Select or pick the solid whose tool locations you want to delete.
You can use this dialog to remove tool locations that are
specified with either the Add Tool Location dialog or the Tool
Block for Turret dialog.
Display Properties
Use the Display Properties dialog to control the display of the solid
components of the machine during full machine simulation:
To open this dialog, select Machine Design > Display Properties from
the menu.
To use this dialog:
2 Enter the Fineness value. (Low numbers look better, but may
slow down the simulation. High numbers run faster, but the solid
may appear faceted.)
3 Optionally select the Transparent option.

Replace Solid dialog
Use the Replace Solid dialog to replace solid1 with solid2, and keep
the machine design attributes from solid1, such as parent/child
relationships, movement, and so on.
Lock or Unlock File

You can protect your Machine Design files from the extraction of
solids, so that you can share them for simulation without anyone
being able to extract the solids.
FeatureCAM comes with some locked Machine Design files. You can
use these for simulation, but you cannot extract solids from them.
When you open a locked file, a dialog is displayed explaining the
restriction.
You can lock your files, but you cannot unlock them. You should not
lock an original file, instead create a copy of it and lock the copy.
To lock a file:
1 Use the File > Save As menu option to save a copy of your file.
2 Select the File > Lock/Unlock menu option.

The Lock or Unlock File dialog is displayed.
3 Select Lock.
If you lock a file, you cannot unlock it.

Mini-turrets
You can simulate mini-turrets, which are tools with multiple inserts
where the tool rotates around the b-axis to access each insert. The
tools are simulated simultaneously, which enables you to check for
gouges with the tools that are not currently in use.
To simulate a mini-turret:
1 In the Machine Design file, create a solid and UCS to represent
the mini-turret, with the X axis of the UCS pointing towards the
main spindle.
2 Create a UCS for each tool location. The difference between the
X axis of the tool location UCS and the turret UCS determines the
angle that the mini-turret is rotated to use the tool.
3 In the Tool Block dialog:
a Select the turret solid under This solid is a tool block for solids.

b Select the turret UCS under This UCS will match up with the tool
location on the turret.
c Use the Tool Locations tab to add each tool location UCS as a
separate sub slot in the tool block.
4 Save the Machine Design file.
5 In the FM document, use the Tool Mapping dialog to specify
which tool block and sub slot to use for each feature.
Turning head tool holders Machine Design

You can simulate turning head tool holders (see page 186), which
machine.
For example, in the image below the piece is machined by the tool
rotating around the stock.
To modify a Machine Design file to support turning head tool

holders:
1 In the Machine Design document, ensure the Machine Design >
Enable Turn/Mill UI is selected.
2 Select the Machine Design > Supports Specialized Turning Heads
menu option.

3 Create or import solids to represent the turning head tool holder
and the plate that moves in the U axis that holds the turning
tool.
4 Use the Parent/Child Relationships dialog (see page 1910) to

make the U plate solid a child of the turning head tool holder
solid.
5 Use the Specify Movement dialog (see page 1904) to enable the U
plate solid to move in +delta X.
6 Create a UCS on the U plate solid to locate the tool.
7 Using the Tool Block dialog (see page 1923), make the turning
head tool holder solid a tool block, and create a tool location on
the tool block using the UCS you created on the U plate solid.
8 To use two tools that cut from opposite sides of the part, create
a second UCS for the tool location, which is facing the opposite
direction to the other tool location UCS, and add the tool location
in the Tool Block dialog.

Machine Design tutorial: Simple 3-axis mill
This tutorial guides you through the design of a simple 3-axis
milling machine. We start the tutorial by opening an .md file that
already contains all of the solids that represent the machine. This
tutorial gives you instructions that help you establish the
relationships between the different solids. You are guided in
establishing movement, parent/child, and top-most table
relationships.
Specifying movements
First, open 3axFerarriMachine Notcomplete.md from
Examples\Machine Design\Mill\3-Axis.
Let's specify how the machine moves. The first piece is the quill.
The quill is represented as a single solid in the part file. You can see
the quill displayed in the Part View and in the graphics window
(shown in red here):
1 Select Machine Design > Specify Movement from the menu.

The Specify Movement dialog is displayed:
2 For the solid, select quill and in the Tool quill section, select
Moves +delta Y.
3 Click the Apply button to save the setting for this solid.
4 For the next solid, select z_slide and in the Tool quill section,
select Moves +delta Z.
6 For the next solid, select x_slide and in the Table section, select
Moves -delta X.
8 Click the OK button to close the dialog.
Defining parent/child relationships

Next, we must define some parent-child relationships between
various solids. The image below shows the first set of parent-child
relationships that we must establish. The machine is the parent of
column_base, which in turn is the parent of z_slide, which in turn is
the parent of quill. If column_base moves, then z_slide needs to
move with it, and if z_slide moves, then quill needs to go along as
well.

quill
z_slide
column_base
1 Select Machine Design > Parent/Child Relationships from the menu.

The Parent/Child Relationships dialog is displayed.
2 For parent/solid1, select machine and for child/solid2, select
column_base. This sets machine as the parent of column_base.
3 Click the Apply button to save the relationship.

4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 to set the following:
 column_base as the parent of z_slide
 z_slide as the parent of quill
 machine as the parent of base
 base as the parent of x_slide
 x_slide as the parent of top_table
 x_slide as the parent of tool_storage
Use the left arrow button to quickly move the previous child
solid to the parent column as you work down the list.

Your machine hierarchy should look like this:
5 Click the OK button to close the dialog.
Defining the stock attachment point

Next, we must define the top-most table so that FeatureCAM knows
where to put the stock whenever this machine is used in simulation.
1 Select Construct > UCS from the menu.
The UCS dialog is displayed.
2 Click the New button.
The New UCS dialog is displayed.
3 In the New UCS dialog:
a For the Name, enter UCS2.
b Select the Create from UCS option.
c Select the STOCK UCS.
d Click the OK button to close the New UCS dialog.
4 In the UCS dialog, ensure UCS2 is selected as the Current UCS
and click the Translate button.
The Translate dialog is displayed.
5 In the Translate along axis section, enter 100 for the Z axis. This
places it on the top of toptable as shown below.

6 Click the OK button to save the settings and close the dialog.
7 Click the Close button to close the UCS dialog.
8 Select Machine Design > Top-most Table from the menu.
The Top-most Table dialog is displayed.
9 In the Top-most Table dialog:
a Select top_table as the solid.
b Select the Existing UCS option.
c Select UCS2 from the Existing UCS menu.
d Click the OK button to save the settings and close the dialog.
Defining the spindle attachment point

Next, we must define a place where the spindle mates to the quill.
1 Select Construct > UCS from the menu.
The UCS dialog is displayed.
2 Click the New button.
The New UCS dialog is displayed.
3 In the New UCS dialog:
a For the Name, enter UCS3.
b Select the Create and go to alignment wizard option.
c Click the OK button.
The Align UCS wizard opens.
4 Select Revolved Surface and click the Next button.

5 For the surface, select or pick face_31 of the quill solid (shown
below).
6 Click the Finish button to save and close the wizard.

7 Click the Close button to close the UCS dialog.
This new UCS is a mating point for the spindle.
8 Select Machine Design > Add Tool Location from the menu.
The Add Tool Location dialog is displayed.
9 In the Add Tool Location dialog:
a Select the Add Tool Location tab.
b For the solid, select quill.
c Select the Existing UCS option.
d Select UCS3 from the Existing UCS menu.
e Click the OK button to save the settings and close the dialog.
Saving your new machine

Save your machine in a new file.
1 Select File > Save As from the menu.
2 Save the file with a new name so that you don't overwrite the
example file and can run the tutorial again in future.
Using your new machine

To use your new machine:
1 Open an .fm file.
2 Select Manufacturing > Setups from the menu.
The Setups dialog is displayed.
3 Select the Setup that you want to simulate and click the Edit
button.

For files where you simulate multiple Setups such as
indexed or turn/mill parts, you should associate the
machine file with the first Setup of a part.
4 Click the Next button until you reach the Setup - Simulation
Information page.
5 Change the offset as needed. Usually, if the part-program zero is
on the top of the part, then the offset is a negative Z.
6 Select Always use this one and browse to the location of your new
Machine Design file.
Click the Finish button to save the settings and close the wizard.
7 Select Machine Simulation mode in the Simulation toolbar and
press Play.

Machine Design handbook
This handbook is a practical guide for creating a Machine Design
document (for use with Machine Simulation) from a solid model of a
machine tool. The handbook does not try to duplicate the
information elsewhere in FeatureCAM Reference Help, but rather
gives you a framework for using that information more effectively,
along with various practical suggestions to make the task more
manageable.
We have assumed that you already know how to use FeatureCAM's
machine simulation (see page 1895).
Before using this handbook, it is important that you are familiar
with at least the introductory topics of FeatureCAM Reference Help.:
 Creating a Machine Design document (see page 1899)
 General guidelines (see page 1899)
 Machine Design concepts (see page 1901)
 Lathe design overview (see page 1902) (if you are creating a
turning machine)
Getting started with Machine Design

To start creating a new MD file, select File > New to open the New
Part Document dialog.
1 Select Simulation Machine Design in the Type list.
2 Select Millimeter as the Unit of Measure.
3 Select None for Initial stock dialog.
4 Click the OK button.
You can develop the MD in inches, but most are done in

metric, as that is the bulk of the dimensions that would be
read from a print for any machine.
When your document is open, select File > Import from the menu to
import the CAD model of the machine you want to make into an MD
file.

Preparing the solid model
The solid model that you use to create your machine design file may
be well-suited to the simulation task, or it may have characteristics
that make it difficult to work with in simulation. Many solid models
are provided by machine tool builders, and probably were not
specifically created for simulation purposes. Before trying to set up
the relationships needed for simulation, it is a good idea to spend
the time to prepare your solid model for the task. The next few
topics provide some guidelines.
It may be tempting to skip these steps because some of them

do not seem relevant to the simulation of the machine.
However, we strongly recommend you carry out as many of
these tasks as early as possible. The reason is that the rest of
the machine design definition can be easily lost or destroyed
when renaming or replacing solids in the machine design file.
So you could end up having to re-do all the work anyway.
Machine Design file size

Large files can slow down simulation, so it is useful to ensure
machine design files are less than around 2 MB.
The machine design files provided for simulation are often more
complex than is necessary for correct and informative simulation.
You can use the following methods to reduce the size of machine
design files:
 Remove solids that are not needed, such as small details like
bolts, or hidden components that do not affect simulation.
 Remodel components with less detail. Keep enough of the
supporting structure to ensure that the components are
connected and do not float in space.
 You do not usually want to simulate the outer housing and doors
when simulating, but you may not want to delete them. Exclude
these components from the machine hierarchy, and they will not
be included in the simulation.
Selecting solids
When creating an MD file, you regularly need to select solid
components to modify them, set relationships and attributes. Select
solids in these ways:
 Select solids by name (see page 1947) in the Part View, in the
Solids or Machine areas.
 Select solids from the graphics window:

 Hold the spacebar key and select a face to select the whole
solid.
 Right-click a face and select Select Solid from the context
menu.
Select solids in the graphics window before opening the

Machine Design dialog, and they will be automatically selected
in the dialog when you open it.
Naming solids
When you open a Machine Design file in FeatureCAM, the solids may
not have descriptive names. You do not need to rename all solids,
but it is useful to rename the moving machine components to their
standard descriptive names (for example main_spindle) or by their
intended motion (for example x_slide). This makes the rest of the
creation process simpler, and makes it easier for others to modify
the document later.
To rename a solid:
1 Right-click its name in the Part View.
2 Select Rename from the context menu.
The Rename Object dialog is displayed.
3 Enter the New Name for the solid.

4 Click OK to save your changes.
Changing solid colours

You can change the colors of solids to match your machine tool.
To change the color of a solid:
1 Select the solid you want to change.
2 Select Options > Coloring > Change Selected from the menu.
The Selected Object Color Overrides dialog is displayed.

3 In the Selected Object Color Overrides dialog, click the More Colors
button, and choose a new color from the palette.
4 Click Apply.
Creating clearances
During machine simulation, FeatureCAM checks for collisions
between solids. This is one of the main purposes of the simulation,
but there are sometimes false errors that are not due to any error in
the toolpaths or machine setup. These false errors often occur
during development of the MD file when appropriate clearances
have not been created between the moving parts of the machine.
There must be a small clearance between some of the moving parts
so they do not collide in typical intended motion. If the mating faces
are flat, there is little likelihood of a collision being signaled.
However, when the faces are not flat, a collision is more likely
because curved solids are approximated by (smaller) flat polygons
during the simulation. The fineness of this approximation plays a
role, and in some cases collisions can be erroneously signaled when
the simulation is run at low resolution, where a higher resolution
would not raise any error. It may be safer to provide relatively
larger clearances for curved mating faces.

The image shows some examples of clearances. They are not much
larger than 2mm each.
You cannot check for moving collisions until you have completed
enough of the machine design to run tests with full machine
simulation. However, when the solids for your machine are detailed,
it may save some effort to perform an initial check of the solids that
have close interactions. In some cases, the solids may intersect
each other in the home position of the machine; these always
produce false collision reports.
As well as checking them visually, you can check whether two solids
intersect in the home position like this:
1 Open the Combine Solids dialog in one of these ways:

then Combine Solids, and click Next.
 On the Solid toolbar (see page 453), click the Combine Solids
 From the menu, select Construct > Solid > Modifiers > Combine
solids.
2 In the Operation menu, select Intersection.
3 Select the two solids you want to check as solid1 and solid2.
a If you see the error Unable to construct object with these inputs,
the solids do not have any overlapping volume.
b If not, the overlapping area is displayed in a dark blue
preview in the graphics window, and you can adjust the view
to determine what the problem is.
5 Click the Cancel button to close the dialog without saving any
changes.
If you find that there is an overlapping volume, you can correct it in
several ways (depending on the amount of the overlap and the
function of the components in conflict):
 Scale one component down by a small amount. For example, if
you have a cylindrical piece with a Z axis that is just slightly too
big, you could scale it non-uniformly in XY without changing any
critical motion of the machine.
 Translate one component away from the collision area by a small
amount, in a way that does not affect the simulation.
 Shrink or expand one of the solids to avoid the collision using
Construct > Solid > Modifiers > Offset.
 Cut off the conflicting portion of the solid if it is not critical to the
simulation. Cut with Parting Surface can be useful for this if you
carefully construct a temporary surface to 'slice off' a small
portion of the solid.
 Remodel the solid in a simpler way (possibly in a separate CAD
system) to avoid the collision without compromising the fidelity
of the simulation.

Defining the Machine Kinematics
When you have prepared the model, you are ready to establish the
relationships and properties that define how your machine moves.
The following topics provide a general framework and suggestions
for working through this process.
Setting up the machine hierarchy

The first step in creating the MD file is to set up the machine
hierarchy, which is done using the Parent/Child Relationships (see
page 1910) dialog. You must add all components that you want to
show during machine simulation as children of machine in the Part
View. The main purpose of this is to create a hierarchy of
movement, but static components (such as body, base, or even
logos) are also included. There may be solids that you choose to
leave in the document even though they are not displayed during
simulation (for example the doors, which should always be hidden
during simulation, or a parts-catcher mechanism for which you plan
to add the simulation at a later time).
Here are examples of two different machines with their parent/child
relationships structures set up.
Turn/mill example: 5-axis milling example:
In the turn/mill example, the jaws are children of the chucks, which
are children of the heads. In the mill example, head sits on the
z_slide, which sits on the x_slide.
Additional notes
 It is not possible to have a child solid linked to several parent
solids. Therefore, if you require this, you must make a copy of
the child solid.

 If you ever need to remove these relationships to be rebuilt or
replaced, it is best practice to remove the lowest objects in the
hierarchy first. In the 5-axis milling example above, if you
wanted to remove the objects x_slide, z_slide, and head, you
would remove head first, then z_slide, then x_slide.
 The machine tree is easier to navigate if you make non-moving
solids children of the main (non-moving) body. Because they do
not move, this has no functional effect, but makes it easier to
navigate and adjust the solids that move.
Managing UCSs for machine design

The UCSs (User Coordinate Systems) that you create and associate
with the components of your solid model are crucial to correct
simulation. Be sure to pay close attention to the information about
position and orientation of the UCSs. If you are having trouble,
review the introduction and overview (see page 1903) topic. The
UCS checklist provides a summary of all the UCSs and their
positions, and also contains links to full documentation on each type
of UCS.
Here are a few general tips for creating UCSs:
 Although you can create a UCS from within almost all of the
machine design dialogs (via the Create UCS and go to alignment
wizard option). It is usually better to do this as a separate step
before opening the dialog.
 Be sure to give each UCS that you create with a name that
describes what it is used for. As you work with the machine
design, it's much easier to remember that, for example,
Tool_UCS defines the tool location, rather than UCS3.
 Usually only one UCS is visible while you work on the MD file.
One way to see them all and to work out which is which is to
open the Local Coordinate System (see page 1923) dialog. When
open, this dialog displays all the UCSs currently defined for the
machine. The UCS selected in the Existing UCS menu is
highlighted in red in the graphics window, so you can select them
one at a time to highlight a specific UCS and compare it to
others.
Ensure you click Cancel to close this dialog if you didn't

really want to assign a UCS to a particular solid.

Defining component motion
The second stage of building your MD file is to set which solids work
in which axes, using the Specify Movement (see page 1904) dialog.
You can define both rotary and linear axis movements for all types
of machines, from simple 3-axis milling machines to full turn/mill
machines.
In the following example, the z_slide solid is selected.
Given that this solid moves in the Z axis, the option Moves +delta Z
is selected in the Tool quill section.

If this were a Z motion on the table instead, we would select the
Moves -delta Z option in the Table section.
Although this component also moves in the X axis, that is not
selected because the solid behind it controls that movement that
relates to this solid when we set our parent/child relationships.
If a particular machine component has compound motion

(meaning it moves around a non-orthogonal axis), you cannot
set this in the machine simulation module, but you can use a
BASIC script (see page 1961) associated with the MD file.
Movement for slant-bed turning machines

Many lathes and turn/mill machines have a slant-bed design that
requires compound linear motion for the turret. When you first
create the machine design, it may be easiest to ignore the slant-bed
to start with and just specify the X and Y motion in the machine
coordinate system. You can disable collision warnings when testing
the simulation to check more basic functions, such as whether the
stock and tool interact properly. Then, go back and set up the
correct motion for the slant-bed.
Setting the top-most table

The top-most table is a UCS and solid combination that tells
FeatureCAM where to place the stock on the machine when trying to
simulate the program. This equates to the Setup position on the
machine when running the program. Both the position and the
orientation of the UCS for the top-most table are very important.
Full information is available in the Top-most table (see page 1912)
topic, and it is worth your while to read this section carefully. If you
are having trouble with this step, it might also be helpful to read
About UCSs for machine design (see page 1903).
The following clarifications for machines with turning may be
helpful:
 The solid to be used for the top-most table should be the chuck
rather than the jaws on a turn/mill style machine, even though
the UCS is located on the jaws.
 On a machine with two spindles, this location should be on the
main spindle. (The sub-spindle specification is described
elsewhere.)
Setting up the sub-spindle

See the Sub-spindle (see page 1914) topic for full information about
setting up the sub-spindle and also the quick reference table (see
page 1952).

If you are having trouble, check the following:
 Sub-spindle (see page 1914) dialog:
 Is the correct solid selected? (It should be the sub-spindle
chuck)
 Specify Movement (see page 1904) dialog:
 Have you selected Moves as Turn spindle for the main
sub-spindle solid? Do not select any other movement options
for this solid.
 Have you set the chuck to rotate (as table) about C?
 Parent/Child Relationships (see page 1910) dialog:
 Is the chuck a child of the main sub-spindle solid?
 Are the jaws children of the chuck?
 Local Coordinate System (see page 1923) dialog:
 Is the UCS specified for the sub-spindle chuck correct for the
rotational motion of the chuck?
 Is the UCS specified for the main sub-spindle correct for the
sub-spindle to move in Z?
The distance between the two spindles is specified within the

CNC file.
Tailstock or steady-rest
You can control tailstocks and steady rests using the Part Handling
Movement dialog (see page 1907).
Alternatively, you can use UDF macros to simulate them as a
sub-spindle. If you are using these, you must specify that the
tailstock or steady-rest is the sub-spindle in the MD file. You may
need to provide a BASIC script to control the movement.
Adding tool locations

Milling machines generally have a single tool location, which is quite
easy to set up. Lathes and turn/mill machines may have multiple
tool posts and need several tool blocks for mounting tools of
different types. Setting up the tool locations properly may be the
most difficult part of creating a working machine design file for a
lathe or turn/mill machine.
Before you define the tool locations for a lathe or turn/mill machine,
make sure you read these topics:
 Add Tool Location dialog (see page 1915)
 Overview of tool blocks for tool posts (see page 1926)

 Tool Block dialog (see page 1923)
Here is a summary of the various tool block types:
Type Required? If unspecified, uses
X tool Yes Not applicable
Generic Z tool Yes Not applicable
OD turning (RH) No X tool
Z drilling/milling (only) No Generic Z tool
Z boring (only) No Generic Z tool
OD turning (LH) No X tool
Here are some tips for working with tool locations and tool blocks:
 To create a tool post tool location, the tool post solid must have
a LCS. Go to the Local Coordinate System dialog and set the UCS
before setting the tool location. See the lathe overview section of
Add tool location (see page 1917)s for details about the location
and orientation of this UCS.
 Make sure that the CNC file you are using specifies a tool post for
each of the locations you specify in the Tool Locations tab (for
example, Main Lower and Sub Lower are not interchangeable).
When first defining tool locations and tool posts, it can be difficult to
work out why things do not work, and to determine what you have
(or have not) defined. Here are some tips that may help you:
 For Milling machines, you can only associate one tool location
with a solid. You can select your solids one-by-one and examine
the dialog settings (in either the Add Tool Location or Tool Block
dialog). However, the dialogs do not clearly indicate if no tool
location is defined for a particular solid. If the Existing UCS
option in the Local Coordinate System dialog shows STOCK, it is
probably not defined.
 If you are unsure about the state of a location, delete it and
define it again. You can use Delete Tool Location (see page 1932)
to remove tool locations created with either the Add Tool Location
or Tool Block dialogs.

UCS checklist
This table summarizes the UCSs that you need to create an MD file:
UCS Machine Dialog Notes
type
Stock Any Not applicable Cannot be changed
Top-most Mill Top-Most Table The XY location is at the
table (see page 1912) center of the table, Z is on
the top of the table.
Orientation should be so
that X points to the right
and Z points up.
Top-most Turn, Top-Most Table The XY location is at the
table turn/mill (see page 1912) center of the chuck, Z is
on the face of the jaws.
Orientation should be so
that X is up, Z points to
the right.
Sub-spindle Turn, Sub-spindle (see Z points in the direction of
turn/mill page 1914) the machine sub-spindle
motion, its location is at
the center of the jaws of
the sub-spindle
Tool Mill Add Tool Z points away from the
Location (see part, X and Y do not
page 1915) matter.
Tool Turn, Add Tool Multiple locations possible,
turn/mill Location (see around turret and with
page 1915) various mounting
directions, Z points into
the turret.
Rotational Any Local Coordinate For any solid that rotates,
Axes System (see make sure that it is
page 1923) assigned a UCS that
points the rotational axis
in the proper direction,
and at the right location.
Toolblock-t Turn, Tool Block for Mates to the Tool UCS
o-turret turn/mill Turret (see page (see previous row). Z
1923) points away from the part.
X aligns with X on the
Tool UCS.

Tool-to-tool Turn, Tool Block for Tool mates to this
block turn/mill Turret (see page location. Z points away
1923) from the part. For turning
tools, see the Positioning
turning tool holders in a
tool block (see page 1930)
topic for details about
where to locate this UCS.
Jaws Turn, BASIC script You can simulate the main
turn/mill (see page 1961) or sub-spindle jaws using
a BASIC script. A UCS
must define the direction
of movement for each jaw
that is moved by the
script.
Viewing Any Not applicable The view of the machine
that you want when it first
loads (looks along Z).
Strategy for a milling machine

Machine design files for milling (even 5-axis) are relatively simple to
set up. The following is a suggested order for the required steps.
1 Prepare solid model (see page 1946).
2 Define parent/child relationships (see page 1951).
3 Specify movement for linear axes only (see page 1953).
4 Set top-most table (see page 1954).
5 Set tool location (see page 1955).
6 Specify movement for rotational axes (see page 1953).
Unfortunately you must complete steps 1 to 5 before you can try to
simulate even the most basic toolpath motion. If you have
rotational axes, omit them at the beginning and use only 3-axis
linear motion until you have confirmed that the tool, stock, and
table are interacting the way you intend.

Strategy for a turn/mill machine
Unlike milling machines, setting up a machine design file for even a
simple lathe without live tooling can be quite difficult. Some of the
complicating factors are:
 Many lathes have slant-beds, which makes even linear motion
complicated (BASIC script).
 Tool blocks must be defined to work with turrets, which requires
several UCS mates per type of tool block.
 Many machines have sub-spindles that require additional
specification and clearances.
The following is a suggested order for the required steps.
1 Prepare solid model (see page 1946).
2 Define parent/child relationships (see page 1951).
3 Specify movement (see page 1953).
 Ignore slant-bed, pretend it is straight XYZ and ignore
collisions.
 Ignore sub-spindle, and do not try any transfers or cutting on
the sub-spindle initially.
 Fake a Y motion if necessary. If the machine does not have a
Y motion, the components (chuck/turret/sub-spindle) must
align exactly. Sometimes this is hard to achieve so it may be
simpler to add a Y motion to the turret assembly to correct for
this. This does not affect the simulation in any significant way.
4 Set top-most table (see page 1954).
 Ignore sub-spindle (the top-most table applies only to the
main spindle).
5 Set tool location (see page 1955).
 Tool blocks - do not define any, just put one temporary tool
location on the bottom of the turret like a milling machine,
and ignore how the tools look with respect to the turret.
 Ignore the lower turret if there is one.
6 Add slant bed (see page 1961).

7 Add toolblocks (see page 1923). This is easier if you have a
working example of a machine with similar toolblock types.
Study the locations and orientations in the working model
carefully. Add one toolblock at a time.
8 Add sub-spindle (see page 1914).
9 Add lower turret (Tool location (see page 1915) and Tool block
(see page 1923))
You may find it useful to save key versions of a turn/mill

machine design file as you progress. If you change something
that breaks a motion that was working in a prior version, you
can revert back to that version.
MD and post interactions

In general, a Machine Design file is not necessarily tied to a
particular post. For example, if you have a lathe without an optional
sub-spindle, the main spindle simulation of the machine works fine
with a post that doesn't support a sub-spindle. There are a few
interactions that you need to be aware of. Only the first two apply
to milling machines; all apply to lathes and turn/mill machines.
 Matching .md file (found under Sim-Info > Set .md in the XBUILD
menu) — We recommend that you set this to machine.md
(without a full path), so that the simulation looks for the MD file
in the same directory as the CNC file. This means that you can
move the post/MD file combination anywhere and it still works
without changes.
 Dogleg rapid moves (found under CNC Info > General in the
XBUILD menu) — This option affects only simulation, not the NC
code produced by XBUILD.
 B-axis support (found under CNC Info > General in the XBUILD
menu) — You must select this option for a B-axis lathe, or for a
hybrid milling machine that has a table that spins rapidly for
turning (for example, SuperMILLER or Variaxis).
 Turret configuration (found under CNC-Info > Turrets in the
XBUILD menu) — The number and placements must match the
machine design file. For example, a main-spindle-side lower
turret is much different to a sub-spindle-side lower turret.

 Spindle distances (found under CNC-Info > Spindles in the XBUILD
menu) — The distance between spindles is vital for sub-spindle
transfers. These are the options Machine Z coordinate at
sub-spindle home and Machine Z coordinate at sub-spindle max
(left). In particular, the sign of the movement should match the
local coordinate system of the sub-spindle solid in the machine
design file. For instance, if the Z coordinate at sub-spindle left is
-63 inches, the sub-spindle solid should have a local coordinate
system where the Z point 'to the right' so that it interprets 'move
minus Z' as 'move left'.
BASIC scripts for MD files

As in other areas of FeatureCAM, you can extend the functionality
that is provided for machine design files by accessing the
FeatureCAM Application Programming Interface (API). This
programming environment enables you to customize and enhance
the machine design capabilities using the BASIC programming
language.
Some functionality that has been added using the API in various
situations includes:
 Linear motion for slant-bed lathes
 Opening and closing jaws on main and sub-spindle chucks of a
lathe
 Moving a lower turret out of the way for a sub-spindle transfer
 Part-catcher simulation
 Pallet-changer simulation
Typically, it is fairly simple to program one of these scripts. Often
you can copy a similar block of code from another machine and edit
it slightly to get it to work on a new machine. In fact, we
recommend that you use copy-and-edit for any standard functions.
The BASIC script that is associated with a machine design file is
completely managed by FeatureCAM. That is, you do not have a
separate file that you can see in the file browser. You can access it
only from within FeatureCAM in the following way:
1 Load your machine design file into FeatureCAM.
2 Press the Alt+F11 keys on your keyboard.
A new window is displayed, containing the BASIC script
associated with the current MD file.

Important notes
 Although there is a Save button in the window displaying your
BASIC script, the only way to save the script is to save the MD
file from the FeatureCAM window. The script is saved
automatically each time you save the MD file.
 FeatureCAM does not handle two MD scripts loaded at the same
time very well. If you are working with an MD file that has a
script, it is best to not open any other MD files in the same
session. If you do, you are very likely to lose your script
completely or to save the wrong script with the MD file.
As a small example of a BASIC script for an MD file, code for
opening the main spindle jaws is shown below. Annotations
following the code describe some key aspects that you must
consider.
Public Sub MachineSim_spindle( Doc As

FeatureCAM.MFGDocument, _
ByVal data As Double, _
ByVal Action As
FeatureCAM.tagFMMachineSimSpindleActionType, _
ByVal spindle As Long)
Dim Vw As MFGWindow
Dim Err As Long
Dim i As Integer
Dim dOpen As Double
Dim dCls As Double
Set Vw = Doc.ActiveWindow
Err = 0
i = 0
If( Doc.Metric ) Then
dOpen = 4
dCls = -1
Else
dOpen = .25
dCls = -.125
End If
Vw.SimIgnoreClashes(0)
If( Action = eSimAction_Open And spindle = 0 ) Then

Vw.SimIgnoreClashes(1)
While Err = 0 And i<3
Vw.SimCutMove( "main_jaw_1", dOpen, 0, 0 )

Vw.SimPerformCut Err
If( Err = 0 ) Then
Vw.SimUpdateGraphics
End If
i = i + 1
Wend
End If
End Sub
The MachineSim_spindle routine shown is the hook provided for

getting control over spindle actions.
Although you define your machine in metric or imperial units,
those who use your file may run FeatureCAM documents in either
type of units. So the MD file must calculate or convert all units for
either system.
The eSimAction_Open enum indicates that the action generated
is 'Open'. Other types include eSimAction_Close and
eSimAction_Position. See the API guide for a full list.
The main sub-spindle is identified as 0, the sub-spindle as 1. So
this block catches events that signal the opening of the main spindle
only.
Turns off gouge-checking, which you must handle manually in
the script.
Movement is usually done in a loop to break the motion into
small increments. In this case the jaws are opened in three steps.
Typically, we can use much larger increments for things that are
unlikely to collide. When closing jaws, however, you might use 50
steps in order to be able to stop exactly when the jaws touch the
stock.
This is the basic command to move a solid with linear motion. (A
similar command, SimCutRotate, is used for rotational motion). All
child solids declared in the MD file follow appropriately. The name of
the solid is the first argument and must match the name of a solid
in the MD file. The motion is with respect to the LCS defined for the
solid, or the table coordinate system if no LCS is specified.
Perform all the movements that have been specified, and
perform gouge-checking at the same time. Note that the
movements are performed simultaneously, not sequentially.

Check whether there was an error. Sometimes it can be useful to
disable the error checking for debugging, but you should put the
condition back when the model is working.
Update the graphics display only if there was no error.

Index
3axFerarriMachine Notcomplete.md •
1939
# 3D • 10
# of tools • 1916, 1956 3D Attributes • 1046
3D boss • 1062
3D cutter comp • 1059
. 3D leads/step tab • 1343
3D Lite • 10, 1046, 1049, 1055, 1057,
.cnx • 162 1059, 1061, 1116, 1124, 1160, 1162,
.html • 162 1164, 1180, 1188, 1195, 1203
.md file protection • 175, 1935 3D milling attributes • 1667
.prn files • 105 3D milling feature attributes • 1046
.sldasm • 10 3D Milling tab • 1162
.sldprt • 10 3D operations • 1046
.xml • 162 3D pocket • 1062
3D product differences • 11
3D RapidCut simulation • 1517, 1525,
< 1540
<SUBFIXTURE> • 974 3D simulation • 1517, 1538, 1540
3D spiral finish • 1018, 1110
3D Strategy tab • 1055
2 3D milling • 55
3D toolpath simulation • 14, 37, 54, 66,
2.5D • 10 71
Milling features • 637 3Dconnexion • 53
Multiple region support for stock solid
• 223
Roughing toolpaths overview • 717 4
2.5D milling • 9
2D chamfer • 287, 1050 408MT • 234
2D NT toolpaths • 150 4-axis
2D simulation • 1517 4-axis Die feature (Wire) • 865
2D turned profile • 30, 47, 48 4-axis match curve • 617
4-axis Punch feature (Wire) • 866
4-axis Side feature (Wire) • 867
3 4th axis indexing
32-bit files • 67
FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Index • 1965

4th axis indexing - How the clearance Add button to toolbar • 27
plane is calculated • 243 Add default tools and feed/speed
4th axis indexing - Specifying the tool tables to the database • 1854
change position • 242 Add new operation • 1055
4th axis indexing with a single setup - Add objects from the part library to a
Positioning features • 240 document • 1505
4th axis indexing with multiple setups Add part (TOMB) • 1892
• 238 Add perpendicular remachining pass •
1061, 1071
Add stock model • 266
5 Add surface curve • 439
5 axis engraving • 754 Add to all (TOMB) • 1892
5 axis Z-indexing • 13 Add tool location • 1916, 1939, 1956
5AP • 10 Add tools to a tool crib • 1831
5-axis • 68 Add Operation to Toolpath dialog • 17
5-axis engraving • 126 Addendum • 192
5-axis patterns • 207 Adding Tombstone parts • 26
5-axis positioning • 256 Adding tool locations to tool blocks • 48
Using a single coordinate system • Add-ins • 194, 226, 228, 230, 233, 234,
263 145, 146, 147, 173
Using fixture offsets • 265 Additional trimming restrictions • 422
5-Axis tab • 1136 Adjust to tool geometry (undercuts) •
5-axis untransformed coordinates • 91 1421, 1447
Advanced part boundary options • 1119
Advanced toolbar • 12
6 AFR • 496
Air blast • 855
64-bit files • 67 Align (UCS) wizard • 112
Align to revolved surface • 113
Alignments for interrogation • 294
A All Stepover • 986, 1638
A and 45 degree angled B tilting head Allowance • 1124
figure • 256 Along curves • 1061, 1090
A difference B (SOLID) • 476 Along option • 1105
A intersection B (SOLID) • 476 Always
A table B tilting head figure • 256 Always save (toolpath) • 67
A union B • 476 Always save as 32-bit • 67
Accelerated feature creation • 532 Always show • 298
Accelerators • 34 Always unshow • 298
ACIS files • 82, 94 Always update • 133
ACIS solids • 61 Always use this one • 1897, 1939
ACL code • 1558 Ambient • 49
Acrobat files • 224 Analysis tab • 192
Across curves • 1061, 1090 Analysis tab (Gears dialog) • 140
Across option • 1105 Angle • 290
Active setups (TOMB) • 1894 Angle end • 1230
Add • 455, 1875 Angle line • 279
Add a new material • 1849 Angle start • 1230
Add a new tool grade for turning API • 80
operations • 1850 Apply button • 188
1966 • Index FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help

Approach outside • 1349 Auto round • 1421, 1447, 1484, 1690
Approach RPM • 1511 AutoCAD • 61, 89, 93
Approach speed (TURN) • 1409 Export settings • 93
Approximate linear moves • 1018 Importing AutoCAD files • 89
Arbor tip length (tooling) • 1774 Mechanical Desktop Import • 94
Arc • 56, 986, 1490 Simplifying 3D AutoCAD data for 2D
Arc fitting • 1018 import • 90
Arc from center, radius, begin, and Solid Import • 94
end points • 290 Auto-chamfer • 204
Arc from three points • 288 Autodesk Inventor • 222
Arc from two points and center • 289 Autohide solids • 36
Arc from two points and radius • 288 Automatic
Arc Lead • 986, 1638 Automatic boss recognition on solid
Arc/line approx. • 1018 models • 522
Arcline fitting tolerance • 1018 Automatic Feature Recognition • 496
Arcs • 287, 288, 986, 1018, 1490, 1517 Automatic feature recognition error •
From 2 points and radius • 288 511
From 3 points • 288 Automatic flipping • 1059
From center Automatic grid • 298
radius Automatic options • 1659
Automatic ordering • 1554
begin and end points • 290
Automatic pocket recognition on solid
From center begin and end points •
models • 522
289
Automatic side recognition on solid
Area clearance
models • 525
Roughing • 63
Automatic synchronized turning •
Area removal (3D HSM) • 1062, 1077
1562
Array operators • 40
Automatic Feature Recognition • 185
As add (SOLID) • 455
Automatic ordering • 16, 38
As cut (SOLID) • 455
Automatic tool orientation • 74
As new base solid (SOLID) • 455
Automatic tool selection • 16, 110, 146,
As on setup • 41
1681
As on UCS • 41
Auto-round with TNR • 19
As on world • 41
Avoid sharp corners • 324
Ask before update (op list) • 133
Away from chuck • 1367
Ask me (saving toolpath) • 67
Axial offset • 1269, 1328
asm files • 82, 97
Axial tolerance • 1269
Assign keyboard shortcut • 30
Axis (stock) • 208
Assign shortcut • 30
Axis Length (TOMB) • 1888
Assigning a macro to a custom toolbar
Axis of rotation (TOMB) • 1888
button • 29
Axis smoothing • 68
Assistance bar • 5, 1, 29
Azimuth angle • 1148
Attempt chamfer w/ spot • 890, 1599
Attributes • 885, 1592
Authentication mode • 181 B
Auto Path
Auto Path Cut Off Option B and 45 Degree angled A tilting head
Contouring Cycle • 631 figure • 256
Auto Path Retract Option B table and A tilting head figure • 256
Contouring Cycle • 626 Back clearance • 1649
Auto Path Stop Option • 626 Back to top • 8

Back view • 41 Boundaries for spiral toolpaths • 751
Backface lighting • 49 Boundaries for techniques other than
Backfaces removed • 49 spiral • 1130
Backups • 67 Boundaries tab • 1124
Bad solid (SOLID) • 450 Boundary Curve allowance • 753
Bad surfaces (SOLID) • 451 Box zoom • 40
Balanced turning • 1562 Breakpoints in op list tab • 1551
Ball end (tooling) • 1761 Bridgeport • 82
Bar Feed tab • 1708 Browser • 1, 8, 143
Bar stock • 160 Bullet • 1490
Bar-fed mill • 85 Button size • 24, 29
Bar-fed mills • 234
Barrel Cams • 249
How to create a cylindrical cam • 250 C
Base (SOLID) • 448 C rotary A tilting figure • 256
Base priority • 1059, 1658 C rotary B tilting figure • 256
BASIC IDE • 147 Cables • 1590
BASIC script • 1955, 1956, 1962 Calculate index radius from solid stock
B-axis outline • 116
B-axis fixture location • 974 Cam Performance at high speeds • 366
B-axis simultaneous example (TURN) CAMplete • 80, 166
• 1414 Cams • 249, 364
B-axis support • 1961 Barrel • 249
B-axis tab • 1413 Edit Cam Segment • 367
Bi-directional cut • 937 General tab • 364
Bi-directional rough • 937, 1608 Roller tab • 365
Blend surface • 441 Segment tab • 366
Block Stock • 207 Canned cycle • 890, 892, 1599
Body diameter (tooling) • 1759, 1775, Canned cycle X clearance • 1421
1780 Canned cycle Z clearance • 1421
Body length (tooling) • 1780 Cap surface • 448
Boolean (SOLID) • 476, 1949 Catia files • 82, 96, 97
Boolean dialog • 141 C-axis indexing • 124
Bore • 890, 899 Center all • 40
Bore cycle • 1599 Center point • 1230
Bore FDF • 899 Center selected • 40
Bore feature • 841, 843 Centerline options • 1533
Bore FF • 899 Centerline overcut • 1421
Bore FSR • 899 Centerline simulation • 142, 1517
Bore NoDrag • 899 Centre all • 26, 44
Bore depth • 202 Chain curves • 27, 44, 56
Bore feature • 30 Chain only on-screen geometries • 324
Boring bars for milling • 1755 Chaining • 319
Boring tab (TURN) • 1447 Chamfer • 27, 204, 483, 1050
Boss recognition • 520 Chamfer depth • 995, 1649, 1658
Bottom radius • 979 Chamfer extend dist • 1421, 1703
Bottom semi-finish allowance • 995 Chamfer extent distance (TURN) •
Bottom up • 979, 1077 1421, 1465
Bottom view • 41 Chamfer mills • 1756
Boundaries • 205 Chamfer, 2D • 287

Chamfer limit • 230 Combine similar holes into canned cycle
Change Layer dialog • 303 • 1599
Change link to arc • 439 Combine solids • 476, 1900, 1949
Change link to line • 438 Combine with similar holes into canned
Change point • 437 cycle • 890, 892
Change selected menu option • 128 Combining solids • 141
Changing the active tool crib • 1833 Combo along and across • 1105
Changing the simulation tool color • 57 Command line options • 194
Check include or exclude • 1494 Command prompt install language • 37
Check surfaces • 1049 Comparison of surface and solid
Checklist • 19 modeling • 448
Child solids • 1952 Comparison of surface surface
Chip Break • 899, 1599 intersection and trim a surface with a
Chip recognition size • 143 curve • 436
Chuck • 83, 1952, 1955, 1962 Compensation
Circle • 281 Compensation register • 1488
From center and edge • 282 Compensation value • 1488
From diameter • 283 Completing the multiple fixture part •
From radius and center • 281 1884
From two points and radius • 284 Compress file • 67
Snapping to centers • 295 Condition dialog • 219
Tangent to two entities • 283 Condition dialog box • 228
Through three points • 284 Configuration • 1879
Circular inside corner (WIRE) • 1484 Connect attribute • 986
Circular text • 371 Connect stepovers with arc • 937
Clamps • 80, 83, 185, 1542, 1543 Connected lines • 278
Classic style • 24 Connection moves for cuts with closed
Classify slices • 1061, 1062 ends • 986
Cleanup Pass (WIRE) • 1469 Construct solid (SOLID) • 452
Clear Starting Point • 1541 Contact Delcam • 8
Clear toolpath button (simulation) • 1521 Contact point • 1061, 1090
Clearances • 1421, 1447, 1460, 1465, Context menus • 1
1949 Context-sensistive help • 6
Climb Mill • 937, 1608 Continuous spiral (3D LITE) • 1062,
Clip geometry • 315 1077, 1102
Clipping curves • 205 Contour operation (WIRE) • 1469
Closed areas only (3D HSM) • 1062, Contour Overlap • 1469, 1718
1077 Contouring - wire radius compensation •
Closed curve • 320 1480
Closed toolpaths • 994 Contouring Cycle • 632
CNC documentation • 93 Contouring Cycle Cut Off Option -
cnc file • 1896, 1900 Auto Path • 631
CNC files • 240 Contouring Cycle Retract Option -
CNC-Info menu • 242 Auto Path • 626
CNX • 162 Contouring Cycle Stop Option - Auto
Collate copies • 105 Path • 626
Collision avoidance • 65, 197 Controlling operations • 20
Collisions • 1542, 1949 Controlling strategies • 20
Colors • 128, 129, 132, 1948 Convert arcs to linear • 1018

Coolant • 71, 89, 984, 986, 1405, 1649, Creating a user defined feature (UDF)
1658 • 858
Coons • 395, 396, 397 Creating an STL file • 1126
Coordinate system • 26, 44 Creating multiple features • 532
Coordinate systems • 109 Creating shortcuts • 30
Copies • 105 Creating the fixture zero relative to
Copy solid (SOLID) • 452 one of the faces of the tombstone
Core usage • 33 (TOMB) • 1891
Core/Cavity (SOLID) • 486 Creating toolbar buttons for macros •
Corner blend surface • 441 28
Corner correction • 1210 Creo files • 82
corner feedrate reduction • 1656 Cross section for Boss, Side, or Pocket •
Corner fillet • 285 716
Counter bores • 1758 Cube (SOLID) • 466
Counter-bore hole • 638 Curly Corner dialog • 995
Counterbore operation • 202 Current UCS • 1939
Counterdrill first • 890, 1599 Cursor color • 138
Counter-drill hole • 638 Curvature • 290
Counter-drilled Tapped hole • 638 Curve • 27, 44, 50, 68, 4, 318
Counter-sink hole • 638 Adjusting • 179
Countersink tab • 1759 Approximating with lines and arcs •
Creating 337
Creating a bore feature • 842 Arc • 56
Creating a chamfer feature • 688 Fineness • 44
Creating a cutoff feature • 827 From curve • 327
Creating a face feature • 678 From function • 356
Creating a form tool • 1783 From surfaces • 343, 351
Creating a groove feature • 699 Join • 327
Creating a new part • 61 Offset • 332
Creating a new part while in Profile • 68
FeatureMILL • 61 Project to UCS • 333
Creating a new setup • 114 Splines • 367
Creating a pattern of part library Start/End Point (WIRE) • 1482
objects • 1506 Start/reverse • 329
Creating a pocket feature • 703 Text • 372
Creating a rectangular pocket • 657 To geometry • 380
Creating a round feature • 708 Unwrap • 339, 340
Creating a side feature • 714 Wizard • 325
Creating a single part library object • Curve length • 139
1506 Curve Sorting Options dialog • 6
Creating a solid (SOLID) • 452 Curves • 59, 190, 192
Creating a step bore feature • 669 Custom Format Name dialog • 236
Creating a thread feature • 819 Custom parallels for vises • 35
Creating a tombstone machined part • Custom setup sheets add-in • 177
1887 Custom toolbar • 24
Creating a turn feature • 840 Customize colors • 128
Creating a turned face feature • 825 Customize manufacturing • 1592
Creating a User Coordinate System • Customizing the snapping cursor • 138
110 Customizing toolbars • 23, 31
Cut

Cut all operations on each curve first Cylinder snapping • 187
(WIRE) • 1476 Cylindrical Cams • 249
Cut angle (WIRE) • 1469
Cut data dialog box • 1488
Cut direction • 1164, 1180, 1188, D
1195, 1203, 1210, 1223, 1230, 1238, Database • 2
1269, 1293, 1301, 1310, 1315, 1338 Material database • 2
Cut from curves • 455 Tool database • 2
Cut higher operations first • 1554 Database • 181
Cut Off Option Auto Path - Database tab • 140
Contouring Cycle • 631 Date • 1557
Cut selected surfaces • 1116 ddx files • 82, 88
Cut sides perpendicular to index axis Deassign keyboard shortcut • 30
• 251 Debug options • 194
Cut the first pass on each curve first Deburr (TURN) • 1360, 1361
(only for Cutoff) (WIRE) • 1476 Deburr radius • 974, 1649
Cut to bottom • 1116 Decimal places dialog • 317
Cut top edge • 1116 Decimal points • 92
Cut type • 717, 986 Dedendum • 192
Cut type overview • 717 Deep Hole • 899, 1599
Cut using Y-axis coordinates • 857 Deep Holes • 153
Cut with parting surface • 1949 Default
Cut with surface (SOLID) • 474 Default attributes • 1592
Cut feature using Y Axis coordinates • Default browser content • 8
13 Default color list [FC] • 131
Cutoff Default colors • 129
Cutoff feature feeds and speeds • 826 Default conical corner • 615
Cutoff feature finishing operation • Default feed/speed values for turning
829 • 1512
Cutoff feature tool selection • 828 Default keyboard shortcuts • 30
Cutoff Leave Allowance (WIRE) • Default ramping for milled finish
1476 passes • 995
Cutoff operation (WIRE) • 1469 Default tool • 565, 974
Cutoff tab • 1465, 1707 Default toolbars • 24
Cutter compensation • 937, 1059, Default values for inches and metric •
1476, 1480, 1608, 1661 1594
Cutoff feature • 30 Define Custom Colors • 128, 129, 132
Cutoff Properties dialog • 216 Degouge tolerance • 1269
Cutoffs • 143 Delcam Exchange • 87
Cutter length • 16, 1024, 1754, 1755, Delcam PowerSHAPE files • 82, 88
1758, 1761, 1767, 1770, 1775, 1780, Deleting
1781 Deleting faces • 490
Cutting Condition Names dialog • 237 Deleting features • 1492
Cutting data • 219 Deleting keyboard shortcuts • 30
Cutting Data tab (Wire) • 1488, 1489 Deleting solids (SOLID) • 450
Cycle contouring • 632 Deleting surface curves • 440
Cycle overview pocketing cycle • 627 Deleting tool locations • 1933
Cycle overview zig-zag cycle • 629 Deleting toolpaths • 1521
Cycle tab • 899 Deleting unused curves • 103
Cylinder example • 410 Depth • 1024, 1619, 1700

Depth column • 1549 Depth Cueing • 44
Depth cue • 49 Surface Fineness • 44
Depth first • 937 Toolpath Update • 44
Depth of cut • 210, 974, 1024, 1447, Display shortcuts list • 30
1619 Display snap mode dialog • 297
Depth-first machining • 1608 Display Status Bar • 29
Derive surface from feature • 411 Display the profile of a tool • 1837
Details tab • 1548, 1556 Display toolbars • 24
Detect material thicker than (3D LITE) • Display toolbox • 29
1067 Display mode tololbar • 30
Detecting gouges • 1541 2D turned profile • 30, 47, 48
Detection angle • 1105, 1108 Distance between cuts • 986
Diameter • 290, 1024, 1754, 1755, 1758, Dither • 49
1761, 1763, 1767, 1770, 1774, 1775, Do feed reduction • 1709
1777, 1781 Do finish cuts last • 1554
Diametric pitch • 192 Documentation for CNC files • 93
Die feature • 218 Dogleg rapid moves • 1961
Die feature (Wire) • 860 Don't ask at tool path simulation • 1658
Difference (SOLID) • 476 Don't roll over edge • 1116
Diffuse lighting • 49 Double-click depth • 324
Dimension dialog bar • 292 Draft angle • 74, 733, 979
Dimension text size • 44 Draft face • 494
Dimensions • 290, 1049 Draft flat scallop height • 995
Angle dimension • 290 Draft radius scallop height • 995
Annotation • 290 Drill • 890, 899
Dialog bar • 292 Drill cycle • 899, 1599
Diameter dimension • 290 Drill depth • 901
Dimensions tab (feature properties) • Drill diameter • 1349, 1777
222, 906, 1049, 1353 Drill large counterdrill first • 890, 1599
Horizontal • 290 Drill only • 887, 1599
Label • 290 Drill selection for tapped holes • 648
Linear • 290 Drill/Mill • 890, 1599
Radius dimension • 290 Drilling • 153
Stock • 207 Drilling feature attributes • 887
Vertical • 290 Drilling tab • 1599, 1687
Dips • 210 Dual view • 1538, 1539
Direct • 986, 1490 Duplicate holes • 49
Direction button (3D Lite) • 1164, 1180, Duplicating features • 99, 101
1188, 1195, 1203, 1210, 1223, 1230, Dwell • 1421, 1465, 1599, 1703, 1707
1238, 1269, 1293, 1301, 1310, 1315 dwf files • 89
Disable Macros option • 163 dwg files • 82, 89
Disconnected design feature (SOLID) • DWG files • 61
449 DX DY • 292
Display dxf files • 103
Display a single Z level • 1552 Dynamic tab • 46
Display Assistance Bar • 29 Dynamic viewing choice upon
Display grid • 298 FeatureCAM start-up • 44
Display properties • 1934
Display settings • 44
Curve Fineness • 44

Exit geometry • 276
E Exiting a geometry mode • 276
Edge • 446, 1667 Expand area by (3D LITE) • 1067
Edge chamfer (solid) • 483 Explode solid • 492, 1900
Edge performance • 1122 Export • 84
Edge tolerance • 1119, 1238 Exporting program files • 233
Edges tab • 1116 Exposed length • 16
Edit Exposed length (tooling) • 1754, 1755,
Clip • 314 1756, 1758, 1759, 1761, 1763, 1767,
Edit cam segment • 367 1768, 1770, 1771, 1774, 1775, 1777,
Edit colors • 128 1780, 1781
Edit tools • 314 Extcut (SOLID) • 448
Infinite • 314 Extend example • 418
Trim/extend • 314 Extend geometry • 315
Editing a multiple fixture design • 1884 Extend surface • 417
Editing drawings • 309 Extension dist • 986, 1638
Editing solids (SOLID) • 452 Extract font curve • 334
Effective diameter (tooling) • 1763 Extract with FeatureRECOGNITION •
Eject button (simulation) • 1521 532
Elevation angle • 1148 Extracting geometry from solid models
Ellipse curve • 374 of turned parts • 354
Email Delcam • 8 Extrude • 385, 468
Enable 3D cutter comp • 1059 ezfm.exe • 194
End ezfm.ini • 71
End Clearance • 1460, 1700 ezfm_mfg.ini • 54, 71
End curve • 1061 ezfm_ui.ini • 54, 71
End points • 295, 1421, 1447, 1460, EZ-UTILS • 1584
1465
Endmill tools • 1761
Endpoint tolerance • 324 F
Engage angle • 76 F/S tab • 984, 986
Engage Angle • 1421, 1447, 1690 Face dimensions • 533
Engraving • 50, 126, 754 Face feature • 30
Entities dialog • 43 Face features • 186
Equal depth of cut • 974, 1024, 1619 Face mills • 1763
Equations • 304, 309 Face recognition • 526
Erase toolpath • 1521 Facing attributes • 995
Error (SOLID) • 449 Facing tab • 1682
Estimated horsepower • 1557 Fan at ends • 1269
Evaluating other FeatureCAM Fanuc-style programming • 240
components • 11 FDF • 899
Even sections • 295 Feature • 4
Exact depth of cut • 974, 1619 Bore feature • 30
Examples • 8 Cutoff feature • 30
Excel document • 1832 Duplicate holes • 49
Exchange • 223, 87 Engraving • 50
Exclude features • 4 Face feature • 30
Exclude steps • 1494 Feature and operation editing • 1555
Existing UCS • 1913, 1916, 1924, 1939, Feature attributes (WIRE) • 1469
1956 Feature column • 1549

Feature default tool • 565 Feed column • 1549
Feature feed/speed • 568, 607 Feed from start • 1447
Feature from curve • 532 Feed optimization • 1546, 1571, 1572
Feature from dimensions • 532 Feed override % • 974, 1059
Feature from feature • 532 Feed rates for millturn features • 1510
Feature from surface • 532 Feed unit • 1649
Feature location • 575 Feed rate of non-cutting moves • 64
Feature operations • 565 Feed/Speed tab (tooling) • 1024
Feature parameters and attributes • Feed/Speeds and Cutting Data Tables
885 dialog • 184, 219, 237
Feature recognition • 496 Feedrate optimization example • 1574
Feature recognition - surface selection Feeds and speeds • 984, 986, 1509,
• 511 1557, 1854
Feature recognition examples • 498 FF bore cycle • 899
Feature recognition surface File Options • 181
requirements • 503 File Options dialog • 136
Feature recognition methods • 500 Fillet • 44
Feature simulation • 1523 2D chamfer • 287
Feature step • 531 Corner • 285
Feature summary • 568 Fillet and Chamfer Limit dialog • 179
Feature to surface example • 412 Fillet radius (TURN) • 1360, 1361
Feature tool search • 982 Fillet restrictions • 430
Feature tool usage • 608 From 3 points • 286
Feature wizard • 531 From two points • 286
Fineness • 44 Surface • 427
Groove feature • 30 Fillet limit • 230
Hole feature • 10, 30, 49 Filter linear moves • 1018
Pocket feature • 10 Fineness • 44, 1934
Slot feature • 53 Finish • 937, 1666
Surface milling feature • 63 Finish allowance • 995, 1164, 1180,
Thread feature • 30 1293, 1469, 1667
Turn feature • 30, 47 Finish bottom • 532, 937
Wire EDM feature • 69 Finish depth of cut • 1024
Feature Properties (WIRE) • 1469 Finish geometry • 276
Feature recognition • 185, 186 Finish overlap • 995
Feature/geometry edit bar • 5, 1 Finish pass • 1682
FeatureCAM file types • 69 Finish pass allowance (TURN) • 1421
FeatureCAM interface • 1 Finish pass Z increment • 995, 1024
FeatureCAM options • 128 Finish Passes • 995, 1421
FeatureCAM Product Family • 10 Finish turn • 1700
FeatureCAM to CAMplete • 80 Finish walls • 970
FeatureCAM to CAMPlete • 166 Finish button • 188
FeatureCAM to Vericut add-in • 163 Finishing • 63
FeatureCAM website • 8 Finishing attributes • 995
FeatureCAMToNCSIMUL • 233, 173 Finishing features • 1666
Feature-level attributes • 885 Finishing strategies • 200
Feature-level tabs • 887, 904, 1046 Finite lines • 277, 278, 316
Features appropriate for turn/mill • 857 First plunge feed % • 1649
FeatureWIRE feature types • 859 Five axis machine types • 256
Feed • 984, 1488, 1527, 1649 Fixed width text • 58

Fixed-width font • 1564
Fixing solids (SOLID) • 451
G
Fixture and clamp collision detection • G0 • 1517
1542 G1 • 1517
Fixture collision detection • 1542 G2 • 1517
Fixture ID (TOMB) • 1890, 1891 G28 • 1933
Fixture Location wizard (TOMB) • 1890, G3 • 1517
1891 G53 Z0 before indexing • 1933
Fixture Offset Locations dialog (TOMB) • G74 • 899
1890, 1891 G76 • 899
Fixture Zero Location (TOMB) • 1891 G81 • 899
Fixtures • 1542 G82 • 899
Flat • 410 G83 • 899
Flat diameter (tooling) • 1759 G84 • 899
Flat example • 411 G85 • 899
Flat surface • 410 G86 • 899
Flat surface support • 1164 G87 • 899
Flat-end mill • 979 G88 • 899
Flats • 148 G89 • 899
Flowline • 200, 774 G98 • 1549, 1602
Fluid • 219 G99 • 1549
Flutes (tooling) • 1758, 1759, 1761, Gear curve • 378
1770, 1777, 1780 Gears • 140, 192, 378
fm file • 1896, 1900 General simulation options • 1527
FMA • 80 General viewing options • 44
Follow distance • 1562 Generate Single Program with program
Follow surface laterals (3D MX) • 1097 stop between each setup • 229, 230
Follow turning • 213, 1562 Generating toolpaths • 1520
Font • 1564 Generic Z tool • 1956
Font curve • 334 geo files • 82
For OD mounted tools • 1916 Geometry • 274
For turning turrets • 1916, 1956 Hide all geometry • 61
Form Tools • 1783 Show all surfaces • 61
Formatiing reserved words • 92 Geometry Constructors dialog • 275
Formats • 236 Geometry creation • 27, 56
Formats editor • 243 Arc • 56
Formula for tool move • 1660 Chain curves • 27, 44, 56
Forum • 8 Chamfer • 27
Fourth axis rotation • 237 Curve • 27, 44, 50, 68
From feature (SOLID) • 467 Draft angle • 74
From line • 1136 Engraving • 50
Front view • 13, 41 Fillet • 44
FSR • 899 Line • 27, 44, 56
Full machine architecture • 80 Profile • 68
Full machine simulation • 1896 Taper • 74
Function curve • 356 Text • 50
Functions • 307, 356 Geometry edit bar • 5, 1
Geometry from curve • 380
Gimbal head figure • 256
Glass style • 24

Go to start • 1658 Highlighting objects from the Part View •
Gouge • 1900 55
Gouge avoidance • 197 Holder collision checking • 197, 199
Gouge check (3D MX) • 1097 Holder tab • 1804
Gouge detection • 1541 Hole attribute table • 652
Gouge-checking • 65 Hole dimensions • 533
Graphics window • 5, 1 Hole feature • 10, 30, 49
Results window • 5, 15, 16, 18, 19, Hole Feature Properties dialog • 202
38, 40 Hole features • 638
Toolbox window • 5 Hole figures • 638
Grid • 296 Hole macros • 646
Grid display • 298 Hole patterns • 207
Grid points • 295 Hole recognition • 512
Grid resizes to match • 298 Hole recognition on imported parts • 99
Groove feature • 30 Holes • 153
Grooves • 69, 77 Honeycomb pattern • 1061, 1100
Grooving tab • 1703 Horizontal + vertical strategy • 779
Groups • 4, 532, 874 Horizontal distance • 290
Groups of features • 872 Horizontal line • 279
GUI • 1 Horizontal milling machine • 49
Horizontal only • 1134, 1667
Horizontal Tombstone Machining • 1886
H Horsepower • 995, 1164, 1180, 1188,
Hardness (stock) • 209 1195, 1203, 1210, 1223, 1230, 1238,
Hardness units • 209 1269, 1293, 1301, 1315, 1546
Head • 1952 Hot keys • 30
Helical (3D) • 1343, 1349 How
Helical ramping • 995, 1343, 1349, How a barfeed/barpull is performed •
1649, 1661 829
Helical side finish • 155, 995 How a bore feature is manufactured •
Helix linear approx tol • 995 833
Help • 6, 54 How a cutoff feature is manufactured
Context-sensistive help • 6 • 826
Help links • 6 How a thread feature is manufactured
Online help • 6 • 818
Technical support • 6 How a turn feature is manufactured •
Help links • 6 834
Help PDF • 3 How a turned face feature is
Hide all geometry • 61 manufactured • 823
Hide flyout • 39 How a turned groove feature is
Hide grid • 298 manufactured • 808
Hide menu • 39 How chamfers are machined? • 685
Hide rapid moves in centerline How do setups relate to UCSs? • 127
simulations • 142 How feedrates are scaled • 1511
Hide solids • 36 How holes are manufactured • 647
Hide Status Bar • 29 How is a face groove machined? •
Hide toolbar • 24 692
Hide toolbox • 29 How is a round machined? • 706
Hierarchy • 1952 How is a simple face groove
machined? • 694

How rectangular pockets are How to modify a User Coordinate
manufactured • 660 System • 111
How sides are manufactured • 710 How to put two tools in the same tool
How slots are manufactured • 664 slot • 1583
How step bores are manufactured • How to recognize all holes in a setup
667 • 513
How to chain lines and arcs into How to recognize drafted features •
curves • 319 508
How to change the start point of a How to recognize features from
curve • 330 surfaces • 501
How to change User Coordinate How to recognize features from
systems • 111 surfaces using curve chaining • 503
How to create a 3D boss from font How to recognize pockets and bosses
curves • 754 from top or bottom surfaces • 504
How to create a barfeed feature • 830 How to recognize pockets
How to create a barpull feature • 831 automatically from solids • 524
How to create a fillet surface • 429 How to reverse a curve • 329
How to create a NC program using How to trim surfaces against other
4th axis wrapping • 245 surfaces • 434
How to create a pencil mill operation • How to untrim a surface • 423
778 How to use an insert drill to drill and
How to create a remachining bore in the same program • 1583
operation • 792 HTML • 162
How to create a sub-spindle feature • HTML documentation • 42
847 HTML documentation for CNC • 93
How to create a surface from a curve html files • 8
mesh • 399 HyperTerminal • 1584
How to create a User Coordinate
System • 110
How to create a Z level roughing I
operation • 760 iam files • 82, 97
How to create an indexed program • ID grooves • 69
236 IDE • 147
How to create an intersection curve • IDE Editor • 226
345 IFR • 56, 186
How to create blend surfaces • 443 iges files • 82, 91, 93, 103
How to create linear text • 369 Imperial tools • 2
How to create text along a circle • 371 Imperial units • 4
How to create text along a curve • Import • 82
372 Import formats • 84
How to delete a tool crib • 1838 Import Results dialog • 85
How to export feed/speed tables • Import Using Exchange • 87
1852 Import wizard • 85
How to export tooling • 1834 Import/Export • 75
How to extract curves from 3D data • Import/Export Options • 75
350 Imported solid models (SOLID) • 448
How to import feed/speed tables • Imported solid names • 61
1851 Importing • 82
How to import tooling • 1831 ACIS • 94
AutoCAD • 89

Autodesk Inventor files • 82, 97 Index Z coordinate (5AP) • 1164, 1180,
Catia • 96, 97 1188, 1195, 1203, 1210, 1223, 1230,
Delcam PowerSHAPE files • 88 1238, 1247, 1269, 1293, 1301, 1310,
Dimensions from DXF and DWG files 1315, 1321, 1328
• 89 Indexing • 234
DMT files • 98 Indexing using a stock solid • 116
dwg and dxf files • 89 Individual blocks • 1881
iges files • 91 Individual levels • 937, 964
Mechanical Desktop • 89 Individual rough levels • 1608
NX (Unigraphics) files • 98 Infeed angle • 1460, 1700
Parasolid • 94 Infeed angle (TURN) • 1460
Pro/E files • 97 Infinite and finite lines • 316
SolidEdge • 94, 98 Infinite geometry • 316
SolidWorks • 94, 95 Infinite lines • 279, 316
Solidworks assemblies • 96 ini files • 194, 54, 71
STEP files • 98 Initial orientation • 231
STL files • 98 Initial viewing mode • 44
Tools • 1831 Initializing FeatureCAM databases •
Unigraphics • 94 1514
Importing files • 222, 223, 224 Inner diameter (tooling) • 1756, 1771
Importing SolidEdge files • 106 Input modes • 26, 44
Importing SolidWorks 2016 files • 10 Insert length (tooling) • 1767
Importing SolidWorks files • 105 Insert shape (TURN) • 1402
Importing toolpath points • 17 Insert tip radius (tooling) • 1767
In to out • 1102 Inside corners (WIRE) • 1484
Inch tools • 2 Inside edge • 1109
Inch units • 4 Installation message • 180
Inches per minute • 984, 1649 Installing FeatureCAM • 9
Inches per revolution • 984, 1649 Instructions • 1
Inches per tooth (feed) • 984, 1649 Integrated Development Environment •
Include features • 4, 1494 147
Include steps • 1494 Interactive Feature Recognition • 56,
Increase feed for intermediate steps (3D 186
LITE) • 1067 Interface • 1
Increment the fixture ID for each Interleave spiral paths • 1061, 1077,
orientation (TOMB) • 1890, 1891 1082
Increment tool color • 57 Intermediate CNC files • 87
Index axis • 207 Internal gears • 140
Index axis UCS • 229 Interrogation • 292
Index radius • 116 Interrogation dialog • 293
Index X coordinate (5AP) • 1164, 1180, Intersection (SOLID) • 476
1188, 1195, 1203, 1210, 1223, 1230, Intersections • 295, 1949
1238, 1247, 1269, 1293, 1301, 1310, Inventor files • 222, 82, 97
1315, 1321, 1328 Inventor hole recognition • 99
Index Y coordinate (5AP) • 1164, 1180, Invoking the automatic feature
1188, 1195, 1203, 1210, 1223, 1230, recognition wizard • 509
1238, 1247, 1269, 1293, 1301, 1310, Invoking the automatic option of new
1315, 1321, 1328 feature wizard • 500
IPM • 984, 1649
IPR • 984, 1649

IPT • 984, 1649 Lead in angle • 1343, 1421, 1638, 1673,
ipt files • 82, 97 1690
Iscar CUT-GRIP tooling • 1800 Lead moves for cuts with open ends •
Islands • 218 986
ISO 282-2 standard • 230 Lead out angle • 1343, 1421, 1638,
ISO cylindrical corner • 615 1673, 1690
Isoline • 200 Lead/Ramp tab • 1638
Isoline curve • 347 Lead-in • 76, 986
Isoline milling • 773 Lead-in distance • 1421, 1690
Isoline • 200 Lead-in length • 1343, 1673
Isometric • 41 Lead-in/out plane (3D) • 1343
Isometric 2 • 41 Lead-out • 986
Isometric 3 • 41 Lead-out angle • 76
Isometric view • 13, 35, 48, 61 Lead-out length • 1343, 1673
Leads • 1517
Leads style tab • 1490
J Leads tab (3D) • 1343
Jaws • 1952, 1955, 1962 Lean angle • 1136, 1143
Jogging • 130 Leave allowance • 77, 1188, 1195,
Join curves • 327 1203, 1210, 1223, 1230, 1238, 1269,
JT files • 223 1301, 1310, 1315, 1421, 1476
Left boundary • 1421
Left view • 41
K Left-arrow button • 1493
Length of curves • 139
Keep toolpaths upon view change • Lengthen Sim Speed slider • 20
1533 Library part objects • 1505
Keep wire vertical at retract (WIRE) • License checks • 194
1469 Light vector 1 • 49
Keyboard shortcuts • 34 Light vector 2 • 49
Keyboard Shortcuts tab • 30 Limit B-angle (TURN) • 1413
ksi • 209 Limit linear moves • 1018
Limitations of planar remachining • 794
Limits of movement • 1907
L Line • 27, 44, 56
L/D compensation • 1599 Line at angle through point • 279
Large buttons • 24 Linear approximation • 1343, 1638
Large font • 1564 Linear distance • 290
Last pass overcut % • 995 Linear moves • 1018
Lateral Overcut % • 995 Linear pattern • 875
Lathe - barfeed tool group • 1803 Linear ramp distance • 995, 1661
Lathe design • 1903 Linear text • 369
Layers • 299, 303 Linearization tolerance • 1529
Changing layers • 303 Lines • 277, 986, 1517
Layout • 4, 1879, 1880 Angle • 279, 290
LCS • 1902, 1924, 1953, 1955 Connected • 278
Lead and lean • 1136 From 2 points • 277
Lead angle • 1136, 1143, 1413 Horizontal line • 279
Lead distance • 986, 1638 Offset • 280
Vertical • 279

Local Coordinate System • 1904, 1924, Machining Overview Pocketing
1955, 1956 Cycle • 627
Locating back of tool • 48 Machining Overview Zig-Zag Cycle •
Lock Machine Design documents • 175, 629
1935 Machining - Start point for Zig-Zag
Loft (SOLID) • 462 Cycle • 630
Lofted example • 402 Machining - Wire radius
Lofted solid design feature • 462 compensation • 1480
Lofted surface • 400, 448 Machining - Wire radius
Lofting • 400 compensation via Software • 1480
Lower Curve Start/End Point (WIRE) • Machining configurations • 1742
1482 Machining side • 535
Machining Side tab • 1057
Machining type • 890, 1599
M Machining attributes • 182, 204
M00 • 1469 Machining Attributes • 154
M01 • 1469 Machining operations • 15, 38
Machine can do helix • 995 Automatic ordering • 16, 38
Machine design • 1896, 1946 Controlling operations • 20
Machine Design document protection • Controlling strategies • 20
175, 1935 Finishing • 63
Machine design file • 22 Manual ordering • 18
Machine design handbook • 1946 Operation template • 38
Machine design tutorial • 1939 Ordering options • 16, 38
Machine doors • 1947 Results window • 5, 15, 16, 18, 19,
Machine hierarchy • 1900, 1952 38, 40
Machine jogging • 130 Roughing • 63
Machine maximum stock • 199 Semi-finishing • 63
Machine movement limits Macro Add-ins dialog • 226
Specifying limits • 129 Macro buttons • 28
Testing limits • 130 Macros • 163, 145, 147, 1955
Using limits • 113 Main lower (turret) • 1916
Machine simulation • 142, 143, 160, Main spindle (face mounted) • 1916
166, 1517, 1896, 1897, 1946 Main upper (turret) • 1916
Machine solid • 1896, 1952 Make a pattern from this feature • 532
Machine tab • 49 Managing your settings • 54
Machine tool simulaiton • 1517 Manual ordering • 18, 1554
Machine Z coordinate at sub-spindle Manually ordering Pocket curves • 8
home • 1961 Manufacturing • 483
Machine Z coordinate at sub-spindle Manufacturing Attributes
Climb Mill • 937, 1608
max (left) • 1961
Feed Override % • 1059
Machining Finish Passes • 995, 1421
Maching attributes • 1592 Plunge Clearance • 1059
Mill machining attributes • 1598 Plunge Feed Override % • 974, 1059
Turn machining attributes • 1686 Pre-drill Diameter • 995
Wire machining attributes • 1717 Priority • 995, 1059
Machining Contouring Cycle • 632 Retract to Plunge Clearance • 890,
Machining - Overview of Strategies • 974, 1059, 1340, 1549, 1599
621 Spindle RPM Override % • 1059
Spline Tolerance • 1059

Spot Drill • 890, 1349, 1599 Maximum spindle RPM • 974, 1059
Tool diameter override % • 1059 Maximum step distance • 1608
manufacturing databases • 1746 Maximum stepover • 1238
Manufacturing hints for a side • 710 Maximum surface slope • 1134
Manufacturing hints for a step bore • Maximum tap spindle RPM • 901, 1599
667 Maximum tool diameter • 1608
Manufacturing hints for turn features • Mazak integrex i-150 • 85
833 MD file • 22
Manufacturing milled features with MD file protection • 175, 1935
tapered walls • 980 md files • 1896, 1900
Manufacturing operations • 1556 Measure (tooling) • 1754, 1755, 1756,
Manufacturing operations sheet • 1758, 1759, 1761, 1763, 1767, 1768,
1549 1770, 1771, 1774, 1775, 1777, 1780,
Manufacturing steps for milled 1781
features with bottom radius regions • Measure Boss/Bore • 150, 152
734 Measure Corner (Probing) • 154
Manufacturing Tool Detail • 1549 Measure Single Surface (Probing) • 155
Manufacturing tool detail sheet • 1557 Measure Web/Pocket (Probing) • 157
NC code • 21, 41, 73 Measuring curve length • 139
Post processor • 22 Measurment over pins • 192
Manufacturing Feedback window, Menu bar • 5, 1
Changing fonts • 1564 Merge curves • 341
Manufacturing operations • 15, 38 Merge surfaces • 431
Automatic ordering • 16, 38 Metallic • 1529
Controlling operations • 20 Metric tools • 2
Controlling strategies • 20 Metric units • 4
Finishing • 63 Microsoft SQL Server 2014 • 168
Manual ordering • 18 Middle mouse button • 44, 46
Operation template • 38 Mid-points • 295
Ordering options • 16, 38 Mill machining attributes • 1598
Results window • 5, 15, 16, 18, 19, Facing tab • 1682
38, 40 Lead/Ramp tab • 1638
Roughing • 63 Operations tab (25D) • 1658
Semi-finishing • 63 Pecking tab • 1606
Mat • 1557 Stepover tab • 1619
Matching .md file • 1961 Surface Lead-in tab • 1673
Mate • 1902, 1904 Surface Mill tab • 1667
Material (stock) • 209 Thread Mill tab • 1661
Material database • 2 Tool Selection tab • 1677
Math • 303 Mill s • 1412
Maximum B-angle (TURN) • 1413 Mill/turn • 43
Maximum feed increase (3D LITE) • Mill-curve tolerance add-in • 31
1067 MillCurveTolerance.bas • 182
Maximum length • 1018 Millimeter • 64
Maximum power • 1546 Milling
Maximum radius boundary • 1421 2.5D milling • 9
Maximum ramp angle • 995, 1638 3D milling • 55
Maximum ramp distance • 995, 1164, Surface milling feature • 63
1180 Milling feature attributes • 904
Maximum speed (TURN) • 1409 Milling macros • 1569

Milling Post Processors • 1861 Multi-pencil • 1105
Milling setup • 4 Multiple coolant types • 71
Milling tab • 995, 1024, 1162, 1608 Multiple cuts • 1269, 1328
Min radius boundary • 1421 Multiple features • 532
Minimize rapid distance • 1554 Multiple fixture part • 1873
Minimize tool changes • 1554 Multiple operation overrides • 1556
Minimize tool retract • 1608 Multiple regions • 314
Minimize width check box • 242 Multiple rough • 1061
Minimum B-angle (TURN) • 1413 Multiple roughing tools for milling • 1680
Minimum corner radius • 974, 1649 Multiple select • 4
Minimum fanning • 1269 Multiple Setups • 56
Minimum rapid distance • 1649 Multiple Setups simulation • 1545
Minimum rapid distance % (3D Lite) • Multiple tool diameters (3D LITE) • 1067
1164, 1180, 1188, 1195, 1203, 1210, Multi-rough diameters • 995, 1017
1223, 1230, 1238, 1247, 1269, 1293, Multi-tool blocks • 170
1301, 1310, 1315, 1321, 1328 Multi-turret machining • 211, 213, 215
Minimum rest material • 1061
Minimum retract • 937
Minimum surface slope • 1134 N
Minimum Z increment • 1210, 1321 Name (tooling) • 1754, 1755, 1756,
Minimum Z ramp dist % • 1638 1758, 1759, 1761, 1763, 1767, 1768,
Mini-turrets • 132 1770, 1771, 1774, 1775, 1777, 1780,
Misc attributes • 1059 1781
Misc tab • 29, 974, 1024, 1059, 1484, Name Layer dialog • 302
1649, 1709 Naming solids • 1948
Mixing 3D simulation and rapid cut • NC code • 21, 41, 73, 58, 87, 1517,
1540 1548, 1558, 1564
Modal delimiters • 243 Saving NC code • 23
MODEL files • 82, 96 Tool mapping • 22
Modify example • 441 NC file extension • 240
Modify inside corners • 1484 NC part program • 1557
Modify surface • 437, 448 NC program names • 125
Modifying geometry • 309 NCSIMUL • 233
Modifying patterns • 874 NCSIMUL add-in • 173
Modifying solids • 141 Neck diameter (tooling) • 1774
Module • 192 Negative leave allowance for grooves •
Modules • 10 77
More colors • 128, 129, 132, 1948 Nested • 1882, 1883
More Simulation toolbar • 22 Nesting • 81, 189
Motion controller support • 53 Net • 10
Mouse options • 44 Network printer • 107
Move features to a different setup • 1492 Never save (toolpath) • 67
Move solid (SOLID) • 452 New Crib • 1746
Movement • 1902 New feature strategy • 1061
Moves as Turn spindle • 1905 New Feature wizard • 531, 574
MSIM • 10 New Feature - Curves page • 534
MTT • 10 New Feature - Default Tool page •
Multi Turret Turning • 161 565, 604
Multi-code coolant • 89 New Feature - Dimensions page •
Multi-finish diameters • 995 533, 574

New Feature - Feed/Speed page • Nozzle position • 219
568, 607 N-sided stock • 207
New Feature - Location page • 535, NT Continuous Spiral (25D) • 717
575 Pattern • 532
New Feature - Machining Side page • NT Spiral (25D) • 717
535 NT toolpaths • 150
New Feature - Operations page • 565 NT Toolpaths (25D) • 717
New Feature - Strategies page • 538, NT Zigzag (25D) • 717
576 NTX1000 • 234
New Feature - Summary • 568 Number of copies • 1564
New Feature - Tool Usage (TURN) • Number of copies to keep • 67
608 Number of faces (TOMB) • 1888
New Feature - Type (TURN/MILL) • Number of passes • 1445
608 Number of steps • 974, 1619
New Feature Wizard • 207 Numeric attributes • 995
New Files tab • 137 NX files • 82, 98
New FM document • 63
New keyboard shortcut • 30
New Object Color Override dialog • 132 O
New part • 61 Object color • 128
New part document • 1946 Objects • 295
New Part Document dialog • 63 OD grooves • 69
New Part Document wizard • 222 OD turning (LH) • 1956
New Part Document Wizard • 61 OD turning (RH) • 1956
New shortcut • 30 Offset (solid) • 1949
New solid (SOLID) • 452 Offset (SOLID) • 480
New Stock Material dialog • 184 Offset boundary tolerance • 1119
New strategy — Finish • 742 Offset curve • 332
New strategy — Rough • 740 Offset line • 280
New strategy — Semi-finish • 741 Offset Method (WIRE) • 1476, 1480
New Technology (NT) toolpaths (25D) • Offset Options dialog (WIRE) • 1476
717 Offset tab • 1726
New Technology toolpaths • 150 Offset Toolpath (WIRE) • 1476, 1480
New tool • 982, 1402, 1746 Offset/spiral • 1061, 1062
New toolbar • 24 Offsetting Tab (Machining Attributes) •
New Window • 1539 1726
Next operation button (simulation) • Okuma-style programming • 240
1521, 1522 Online help • 6
Next rapid button (simulation) • 1521, Only update display every • 1533
1522 Op • 1557
Next row stepover % • 1293 Op List • 133, 1549
Next tool change button (simulation) • Opacity • 49
1521, 1522 Open and closed portions of toolpaths •
Next Z level button (simulation) • 1521 994
No checking (undercuts) • 1421, 1447 Open toolpaths • 994
No drag X shift and No drag Y shift • Opening a part • 4
1599 Operating systems • 180
No-core machining • 218 Operation • 1527
No-drag turning • 157 Operation column • 1549
Normal to surface • 1673 Operation details • 1557

Operation list • 133, 1548, 1556 Outside corners (WIRE) • 1484
Operation order • 1554 Outside edge • 1109
Operation ordering • 1554 Outside of Limits dialog • 113, 1907
Operation simulation • 1523 Overall length (tooling) • 1754, 1756,
Operation template • 38 1758, 1759, 1761, 1767, 1770, 1771,
Operation view • 1559 1774, 1775, 1777, 1780, 1781
Operation-level tabs • 887, 904, 1046 Overcut percent • 1061, 1113, 1124
Operations • 15, 38, 211, 213 Overlap (WIRE) • 1469
Automatic ordering • 16, 38 Overlap angle • 1110
Controlling operations • 20 override • 984, 986
Controlling strategies • 20 Override multiple operations • 1556
Manual ordering • 18 Overrides • 215
Operation template • 38 Overrides tab (tooling) • 1024
Ordering options • 16, 38 Overriding the tool feed or speed for
Operations (WIRE) • 1469 multiple operations at once • 1556
Operations list • 19 Overview - Machining strategies • 621
Operations tab (25D) • 1658 Overview Pocketing Cycle • 627
Operators • 305 Overview Zig-Zag Cycle • 629
Operator's checklist • 19 Overview of blend surfaces • 442
Operators table • 305 Overview of chaining • 319
Optimize parallel pass • 1071 Overview of combine solids • 476
Options • 71, 128 Overview of cut solid with parting
Options (printing) • 105 surface • 474
Order of operations • 1554 Overview of feeds and speeds • 1509
Ordering • 1658 Overview of fillets • 427
Ordering feature curves • 6, 8 Overview of isoline milling • 773
Ordering of operations • 15, 38 Overview of shell solid design feature •
Automatic ordering • 16, 38 478
Controlling operations • 20 Overview of solid fillets • 471
Controlling strategies • 20 Overview of solid from 2.5D feature •
Manual ordering • 18 467
Operation template • 38 Overview of stepover types • 717
Ordering options • 16, 38 Overview of stitching • 464
Ordering optimization • 1496 Overview of surface from curve mesh •
Ordering options • 16, 38 398
Orientation (printing) • 107 Overview of surface surface trimming •
Orientation (TURN) • 1402 433
Orientation angle • 124 Overview of the feature rerecognition
Orientation of turning tools • 74 wizard • 528
Orientation tab • 1814 Overview of tooling • 1745
Origin • 1557 Overview of trimmed surface • 419
Other side • 1360, 1361 Overview of untrimming surfaces • 422
Outer diameter (tooling) • 1756, 1771
Output filter tolerance • 1018
Output filtering • 152 P
Output options • 150, 152, 1018, 1164, P numbers • 240
1180, 1188, 1195, 1203, 1210, 1223, Pan and zoom • 40
1230, 1238, 1269, 1301, 1310, 1321, Panels • 182
1328 Paper size (printing) • 107
Output streams • 87 Paper source (printing) • 107

Parallel • 1091, 1110 Pattern dialog • 874
Parallel angle • 1018, 1061, 1062, 1071, Pattern Properties • 876
1100, 1667 Linear • 290, 876, 1018
Parallel toolpaths • 746 Point List • 879
Parallels for vises • 35 Rectangular • 875
Parameters • 194, 1592 Patterns • 207, 875
Parameters (feature level) • 885 Pause button (simulation) • 1521, 1522
Parametric modeling • 309, 310 Pause on limits • 1907
Parasolid • 62 Pause simulation • 1522, 1546
Parasolid files • 82, 94 Pausing a toolpath simulation • 1522
Parasolid v28.0 • 11 PDF • 54
Parent/child relationships • 1900, 1902, PDF files • 224
1911, 1939, 1955 PDF of reference help • 3
Part • 1557 Peck retract distance • 1465, 1703, 1707
Part Pecking • 153
Opening a part • 4 Pecking tab • 1606
Part boundary options • 1119 Pencil milling • 777
Part boundary tolerance • 1119 Per minute (feed) • 984, 1649
Part catcher • 1367 Per revolution (feed) • 984, 1649
Part catchers • 216 Per tooth (feed) • 984, 1649
Part compare • 1524 Performance • 1122
Part compare example • 1525 Perpendicular remachining pass • 1061
Part compare options • 1534 Pick curve pieces • 321
Part compare rest material > • 1534 Pick Dimension dialog • 139
Part documentation • 19, 40 Pick point • 275
Part Documentation • 70 Pick types and pick filters for
Part handling • 158 interrogation • 294
Part handling simulation • 23 Picking profiles • 319
Part library • 99 Pilot diameter (tooling) • 1758
Adding objects • 1505 Pilot drill • 890
Importing objects • 1505 Pilot drill diameter • 1599
Part library example • 1504 Pilot length • 202
Part line program • 937, 1608, 1661 Pin gauge • 192
Part Location dialog • 26 Pinch turning • 213, 1562
Part Location page (TOMB) • 1894 Pitch diameter • 192
Part Name • 125 Planar remachining operation • 790
Part surfaces • 1049 Plunge • 1340, 1349
Part Tree • 4 Plunge (relative) • 974
Part view • 182 Plunge center first • 1367
Part View • 1, 4, 448 Plunge clearance • 974, 995, 1340,
Part-catcher • 1962 1599, 1649, 1709
Partial select • 98 Plunge feed % • 1649
Parting surface • 492 Plunge Feed Override % • 974, 1059
Parts List • 1876, 1882 Plunge feed override % (3D Lite) •
Pass-level tabs • 904 974, 995, 1164, 1180, 1188, 1195,
Past special - reference • 1500 1203, 1210, 1230, 1238, 1269, 1293,
Paste special — attributes • 1500 1301, 1310, 1315, 1321, 1328
Paste special — location • 1500 Plunge feed override (1st step) % •
Pasting features • 101 995
Pattern • 4 Plunge points • 995

Plunge roughing • 780 Presentation angle (TURN) • 1402
Plunge to depth • 1349 Pressure angle • 192
Plunge to pre-drill location • 1349 Preview options • 242
Plunging • 15 Preview picture • 67, 71
Pocket and boss horizontal surfaces • Preview simulation • 1523
504 Preview toolpath points • 152
Pocket curves manual ordering • 8 Previous tool diameter • 1061, 1113
Pocket feature • 10 Primary cut direction. (WIRE) • 1469
Pocket recognition • 522 Primary offset direction (WIRE) • 1469
Pocketing (Wire) • 218 Primary Setup dialog (TOMB) • 1894
Pocketing Cycle Overview • 627 Primitive surface • 406
Pocketing operation (WIRE) • 1469 Principal View menu • 41
Point distribution preview • 152 Prinicipal views flyout • 41
Point input • 275 Print • 1564
Point input for geometry creation • 275 Print comments • 106
Point size • 137 Print dialog • 105
Points • 276, 295, 1018 Print Graphics window • 106
Points controlling a finish pass • 995 Print NC program • 106
Polar coordinates • 101, 307 Print operations list • 106
Polar on the face location • 535 Print preview • 1565
Polar on the OD location • 535 Print quality • 105, 1564
Polygon curve • 376 Print range • 1564
Polygonal curve • 190 Print resolution • 105
Position • 1527 Print setup • 107, 1564
Post documentation • 162 Print to file • 105
Post Number • 240 Print to scale • 106, 1564
Post Options dialog • 236 Print tool list • 106
Post options FeatureWIRE • 1871 Print toolpath • 1564
Post options for Milling • 1859 Print white background • 106
Post processor • 22, 1896, 1961 Printer • 105, 107
Post Vars • 995, 1164, 1180, 1188, Printing Options dialog • 106
1195, 1203, 1210, 1223, 1230, 1238, Priority • 995, 1059, 1164, 1180, 1188,
1247, 1269, 1293, 1301, 1310, 1315, 1195, 1203, 1210, 1223, 1230, 1238,
1321, 1328, 1421, 1488, 1649 1269, 1293, 1315, 1321, 1328, 1421,
Post vars. • 901, 995, 1164, 1180, 1188, 1447, 1460, 1465, 1549
1195, 1203, 1210, 1223, 1230, 1238, Priority Attributes • 1496
1269, 1293, 1301, 1310, 1315, 1421 Priority of depth of cut • 1024
Posting tab (WIRE) • 1741 Pro/E files • 223
Posting tolerance • 154 Probe tool properties • 1768
Power • 1557 Probing • 168
Power graph • 1529 Process plan • 1493
Power limit • 1546 Process tab • 1055
Power Settings • 1546 Product family • 10, 11
PowerMILL viewing settings • 44 Profile • 68
PowerSHAPE • 81 Profile contour • 1062
PowerSHAPE files • 82, 88 Profile side feature • 710
Pre-drill • 937, 1349 Profile stock • 224
Pre-drill Diameter • 995 Program files • 233
Pre-drill point • 995 Program Options • 1568
Prefix • 292 Program point • 118

Program point tab • 1816 RapidCut conversion tolerance • 1534
Project curve to UCS • 333 RapidCut simulation • 1517, 1525, 1540
Project to UCS • 333 Raster angle (3D HSM) • 1110
Project to XY plane • 1148 Ream • 890, 899
Projected onto surface curve • 349 Ream before chamfer • 890, 1599
Proportional plunge feed • 1649 Ream cycle • 1599
Protecting Machine Design files • 175, Ream FDF • 899
1935 Ream FF • 899
prt files • 82, 97, 98 Ream FSR • 899
Punch feature (Wire) • 861 Reams • 1770
RECOG • 10
Recreating tooling and feed/speed
Q databases if they become corrupt •
Quadrant • 295 1855
Rectangle curve • 375
Rectangular pocket • 533
R Redistribute points • 1018
Redo • 309
r = F(a) • 358 Reduce curve • 335
r = F(a), z = G(a) • 361 Reducing curve data • 338
r=F(a) • 358 Reference help PDF • 3, 54
r=F(z) Z=G(a) • 361 Reflect geometry • 313
Radial Reflect solid (SOLID) • 452
Radial about X • 535 Refreshing the view • 54
Radial about X axis • 935 Region example • 414
Radial about Y • 535 Region of interest • 1521, 1522
Radial about Y axis • 935 Registers • 1488
Radial offset • 1269, 1328 Relative plunge • 15, 974, 1340
Radial pattern • 876 Relative retract • 1340
Radial toolpaths • 760 Release center • 8
Radius • 290 Relief groove • 1367, 1700
Radius end • 1230 Reload settings • 54, 71
Radius mill • 979 Remachining • 1061, 1067, 1709
Radius start • 1230 Remove
Radius tool scallop height • 995 Remove all sync points • 1559
Ramp angle (3D) • 1343, 1349 Remove all undercuts • 1421, 1447
Ramp angle offset • 995, 1661 Remove area less than (3D HSM) •
Ramp diameter • 995, 1343 1062, 1077
Ramp diameter % • 995, 1638, 1661, Remove button from toolbar • 27
1673 Remove deep cuts • 1105
Ramp styles • 1490 Remove object from simulation • 1899
Ramp to depth (3D) • 1343, 1349 Remove selected sync point • 1559
Ramp type • 1638 Remove shortcut • 30
Ramp-in angle • 1343, 1673 Remove slugs (simulation) • 1540
Ramping (3D) • 1343, 1349 Remove unsafe areas (3D HSM) •
Ramping attributes • 995 1062, 1077
Ramping for milled finish passes • 995 Rename object • 1948
Ramp-out angle (3D) • 1343 Renaming features • 1492
Rapid moves • 142, 1517 Reorder • 1164, 1195, 1608
Rapid traverse • 1658 Reports • 1556

Reserved words • 92, 242, 243 Revolve a surface (SOLID) • 470
Reset all opers to default turret • 1559 Revolved boundary curve • 353
Reset normals • 1057 Revolved example • 388
Reset selected opers to default turret • Revolved solid design feature • 457
1559 Revolved solid from surface design
Reset settings • 44 feature • 470
Reset viewing options • 44 Revolved surface • 1939
Resize grid • 298 RH Command line options • 73
Resolution • 1529 Right boundary • 1421
Restrictions Right view • 41
Restrictions of 4th axis wrapping • Rockwell • 209
252 Roller tab (cams) • 365
Restrictions of indexing • 243 Rotary rapid • 1658
Restrictions of plunge roughing • 781 Rotate • 40
Restrictions of projection milling Rotate geometry • 312
techniques • 748 Rotate solid (SOLID) • 452
Restrictions of surface from curve Rotate view when indexing • 1529
mesh • 399 Rotate X • 40
Restrictions of using pick pieces Rotate Y • 40
(chaining) for creating curves • 322 Rotate Z • 40
Restrictions on blend surfaces • 444 Rotating construction grid • 296
Rests • 234 Rotation axis (TOMB) • 1888
Results window • 5, 15, 16, 18, 19, 38, Rotation of primary axis • 266
40, 1, 1548 Rough • 937, 1666
Retract • 1340 Rough cutter comp • 1608
Retract • 937 Rough depth of cut • 1024
Retract and Plunge dialog • 1340 Rough pass • 1619, 1682
Retract column • 1549 Rough pass stepover % • 1180
Retract Length (WIRE) • 1469 Rough pass Z increment • 995, 1024
Retract operation (WIRE) • 1469 Rough turn • 1700
Retract options • 626, 1340 Roughing • 63
Retract point • 995 Roughing methods • 717
Retract to • 1136, 1599 Roughing toolpaths (25D) • 717
Retract to Plunge Clearance • 890, Round corners (TURN) • 1360, 1361
974, 1059, 1340, 1549, 1599 Round stock • 143, 207
Retract to Z rapid plane • 890, 1340, Rounded inside corner • 1484
1549, 1599 Rounding mills • 1771
Retract/plunge • 1164, 1180, 1188, RPM • 984, 986
1195, 1203, 1210, 1223, 1230, 1238, Ruled example • 394
1247, 1269, 1293, 1301, 1315, 1321, Ruled surface • 392, 448
1328
Retract on non-cutting moves • 64
Reuse path in canned cycle (TURN) • S
1367, 1690 sab files • 82, 94
Reverse Cutoff (WIRE) • 1469 Safe Area dialog • 1136
Reverse scroll wheel zoom • 46 sat files • 82, 94
Reverse surface • 414 save • 66
Reverse tap cycle • 899 Save .stl dialog • 104
Reverse tool axis (3D MX) • 1097 Save as 32-bit • 67
Revolve (SOLID) • 457

Save combined boundary • 1116, Semi-finish • 937
1124 Semi-finishing • 63
Save computed toolpath • 67 Sequence • 200
Save Holes • 1529 Serial port pinouts • 1591
Save NC • 1568 Server authentication • 181
Save on Exit • 71 Set sync at oper start • 1559
Save options • 67 Settings • 71, 1718
Save preview picture in file • 67 Setup • 4, 105, 1557, 1896, 1897
Save result files during 3D Sim • 1529 Imperial units • 4
Save result files during rapid cut • Inch units • 4
1529 Metric units • 4
Save settings now • 54, 71 Milling setup • 4
Save simulation results • 1126 Setup - Simulation Information • 1897
Save STL dialog • 104, 1126 Setup - Simulation information dialog •
Save toolpath • 67 22
Save view • 42 Setup Activate add-in • 36
Saving a part file • 66 Setup column • 1549
Saving an NC part program to disk • Setup layer • 299
1568 Setup Name column • 1549
Saving and opening multiple fixture Setup Sheet • 165
parts • 1885 Setup Sheet add-in improvements • 34
Saving NC code • 23 Setups • 56
Saving your settings • 71 Setup-sheet • 79
Scale geometry • 312 Shade stock by default • 49
Scale solid (SOLID) • 452 Shaded gray style • 24
Scallop height • 1210, 1247, 1310, 1321, Shading • 35, 48, 61
1667 Shading options • 49
Scallop stepover (3D MX) • 1210, 1247, Shading Options dialog • 49
1321 Shadow quality • 1529, 1899
Screen layout • 5 Shadows (simulation) • 1899
Scripts, running • 194 Shank diameter (tooling) • 1754, 1756,
Section • 298 1758, 1759, 1761, 1767, 1770, 1771,
Segment adjustment • 179, 182 1774, 1780, 1781
Segment End Format • 39 Shape modifiers (SOLID) • 471
Segment tab (cams) • 366 Sheet (SOLID) • 446
Segments • 230 Shell (SOLID) • 478
Select Active Tool Crib dialog • 1833 Shininess • 49
Select button • 1899 Shortcut keys • 30
Select circles • 885 Show
Select Core/Cavity (SOLID) • 486 Show • 1524
Select Fixture dialog • 26 Show animation • 1533
Select Fixture Setup (TOMB) • 1890 Show flyout • 37
Select Fixtures (TOMB) • 1894 Show gouge • 1534
Select Part dialog (TOMB) • 1894 Show grid • 298
Select tool block • 1580 Show holder • 1527
Selected object color overrides • 128, Show menu • 37
1948 Show pause on gouge dialog • 1529
Selecting a Machine Design file • 22 Show rest material • 1534
Selecting objects • 98 Show spindle • 1527
Selection radius • 44 Turret column • 1549

Show surface boundaries only • 44 Single Cutoff Pass (WIRE) • 1476
Show this dialog • 1546 Single step button (simulation) • 1521,
Show tool load • 1521, 1546 1522
Show toolbar • 24 Single-click depth • 324
Show Toolbox • 29 Size of buttons • 24
Show Turn chuck • 1529 Skim Pass Options dialog (WIRE) •
Show/Hide Material • 1513 1476
Status Bar • 29 Skin (user interface) • 24
Show all surfaces • 61 Skip wall pass • 1421
Show Centerline Rapids • 142 Slant bed lathe • 49
Side feature (Wire) • 862 Slant-bed turning machines • 1954,
Side finish bottom up • 1608 1962
Side finishing • 979 sldasm files • 82, 96
Side grooves • 69 sldprt files • 82, 95
Side leave allowance • 995 Slices • 1061
Side liftoff distance • 1421 Slop limits tab • 1134
Side mills • 1774 Slope boundary • 1061, 1091
Side recognition • 525 Slope limitation angles • 1667
Side roughing • 979 Slope overlap • 1091
Side roughing bottom up • 1608 Slot • 519, 533, 662
Significant digits • 292 Slot feature • 53
Silent install • 9 Slug removal simulation • 1540
Silent install language • 37 Small buttons • 24
Silhouette (SOLID) • 484 Small font • 1564
Silhouette Curves • 484 Small parts • 154
Simulate feature • 1523 Smart dialogs • 54
Simulate operation • 1523 Smart MD choice • 22
Simulated slug removal • 1540 Smooth animation • 1533
Simulating 3D toolpaths • 1538 Smooth line • 49
Simulating multiple Setups • 1545 Smooth shading • 49
Simulating tool post movements during Smooth/reduce curve • 335
part handling • 23 Smoothing • 1102, 1110, 1269
Simulating toolpaths • 14, 37, 54, 66, 71, Smoothing distance (5-axis Sim) • 1136
1517 Snap Discrimination dialog • 297
3D toolpath simulation • 14, 37, 54, Snap modes • 15, 295
66, 71 Snapping • 138, 187, 295
Simulation • 142, 143, 160, 166 Snapping grids • 134, 296, 298
Simulation (machine) • 1896, 1897 SOLID • 10
Simulation C angle offset • 1916 Solid (SOLID) • 446, 448
Simulation control • 1551 Solid colors • 1948
Simulation controls • 1521 Solid design features (SOLID) • 448,
Simulation machine design file • 449
1897, 1900 Solid error (SOLID) • 449
Simulation Options dialog • 1526 Solid from curves (SOLID) • 455
Simulation speed • 1521, 1527 Solid Import tab • 77
Simulation toolbar • 1521 Solid model • 1124
Simulation types • 1520 Solid offset • 1900
Simulation Options dialog • 143 Solid simulation • 1517
Simulation tool color • 57 Solid source file • 95
Single block • 1881 Solid Source File dialog • 95

Solid toolbar • 22 Split surface • 424
Solid wizard • 453 Spot Drill • 890, 1349, 1599
Solid modelling • 141 Spot drill depth • 901
SolidEdge • 106 Spot drill diameter % • 1599
SolidEdge files • 82, 98 Spot drill edge break • 1599
SolidEdge hole recognition • 101 Spot face • 899
SolidEdge Import • 94 Spotdrills • 1775
Solids • 61, 188, 223, 4 Spring Passes • 971, 1367, 1661, 1700
SolidWorks • 105, 94, 95 SQL server • 181
SolidWorks and Autodesk Inventor SQL Server • 168, 1840
automatic hole recognition example • S-shape • 986
102 Standard toolbar • 11
SolidWorks Export settings • 93 Start
SolidWorks files • 82, 93, 95, 96 Start angle • 995, 1661
SolidWorks hole recognition • 100 Start Clearance • 1460, 1700
SolidWorks IGES Export settings • 93 Start curve • 1061
SolidWorks Import • 94, 95 Start point (TURN) • 1421, 1447,
SolidWorks 2016 files • 10 1460, 1465
Sorting feature curves • 6 Start points • 995, 1210, 1238, 1269,
Source file • 95 1301
SpaceBall • 53 Start tab • 1731
SpaceMouse • 53 Start threads • 995, 1460
SpaceTraveler • 53 Starting FeatureCAM • 2
Spacing • 298 Starting Point (simulation) • 1541
Spatial R25 SP2 • 62 Starts • 1661
Specific stock length • 160 Status bar • 5, 32
Specify limits • 1907 Steady rest • 158
Specify movement • 1904, 1905, 1939, Steady-rest • 1955, 1962
1954, 1955 Steep and shallow strategy (3D HSM) •
Specular • 49 1321
Speed • 984, 1527, 1649 Steep first • 1110
Speed column • 1549 Steep slope • 1667
Sphere • 406, 408 Steep slope angle • 1061, 1071
Spindle direction • 608 Step 1 • 1367, 1700
Spindle list • 1558 Step 2 • 1367, 1700
Spindle properties dialog • 1846 Step backward (simulation) • 1521
Spindle RPM override • 974, 1059 Step Bore dimensions • 533
Spiral • 717, 986, 1074, 1110, 1203, Step cutting (3D LITE) • 1067
1210, 1223, 1301, 1619 step files • 82, 98
Spiral in • 1061, 1074, 1091 Step size • 266
Spiral out • 1061, 1074, 1091 Step up (3D LITE) • 1067
Spiral stepover (25D) • 717 Stepover • 1188, 1195, 1203, 1223,
Spiral toolpath (25D) • 717 1238, 1301, 1517, 1667
Spiral toolpaths • 750 Stepover % • 995, 1421, 1703
Spiral Z-roughing (3D) • 1061 Stepover (WIRE) • 1469
Spiral finishing • 155 Stepover rapid distance (3D Lite) •
Spline curve • 367 1164, 1180, 1188, 1195, 1203, 1210,
Spline Tol • 974, 1059, 1649 1223, 1238, 1269, 1293, 1301, 1328
Splines • 367 Stepover tab • 1619
Split face • 489 Stepover type • 1673

Stepover type (3D) • 1343, 1349 Controlling strategies • 20
Stepover type overview • 717 Manual ordering • 18
Stepovers tab • 986, 1024 Ordering of operations • 15, 38
Steps • 974, 979, 1619 Ordering options • 16, 38
Steps buttons • 29 Strategy tab • 213
Steps panel • 1 Strategy tab (feature properties) • 890,
Steps toolbar • 22 937, 1061, 1367, 1469
Steps Toolbox buttons • 29 Strategy-level tabs • 1046
Stitch (SOLID) • 464 Student version • 10
Stk (SOLID) • 448 Style • 24, 1490
STL • 4, 1900 Styles of automatic feature recognition •
stl files • 4, 1124 497
Stock • 9, 24, 44, 56, 67, 4, 223, 1557, Sub slot • 1580
1883, 1956 Subfixture ID • 974
Stock axis • 208, 235 Sub-spindle (face-mounted) • 1916
Stock curve • 224 Sub-spindle location tab • 848
Stock indexing tab • 229 Sub-spindle transfer • 1962
Stock layer • 299 Sub-spindles • 845, 1558, 1915, 1955,
Stock material • 209 1956
Stock models • 266, 1124 Sub-upper turret • 1916
Stock opacity • 49 Suffix • 292
Stock overcut % • 1269, 1328 Summary of ways you can make holes
Stock tab • 1124 in FeatureCAM • 650
Stock wizard • 205 Support for Microsoft SQL server 2014 •
Stock wizard - Align Part Program 168
Zero with UCS • 216 Support forum • 8
Stock wizard - Align with Index Axis • Surface • 446, 448
216 Surface boundary • 343
Stock wizard - Definition • 212 Surface control tab • 1160
Stock wizard - Dimensions • 207
Surface design tips • 382
Stock wizard - Material • 209
Stock wizard - Multi-axis options • 211 Surface edges curve • 350
Stock wizard - Multi-axis positioning • Surface editing • 383
211 Surface editing tips • 383
Stock wizard - Part Program Offset • Surface fineness • 44
218 Surface from feature • 411
Stock wizard - Part Program Zero • Surface from multiple surfaces • 426
214, 215 Surface from one surface • 412
Stock length • 160 Surface intersection curve • 345
Stock materials • 184, 199 Surface join tolerance • 1269, 1328
Stock models • 205 Surface Lead-in tab • 1673
Stock solid • 72 Surface Mill tab • 1667
Stock solid indexing • 116 Surface milling feature dimensions
Stop button (simulation) • 1521 tab • 1049
Stop Code • 1469 Surface Milling Properties dialog •
Stop Length (WIRE) • 1469 1046
Stop operation (WIRE) • 1469 Surface Normal offset • 416
Stop option • 626 Surface of revolution • 386
stp files • 82, 98 Surface offset • 416
Strategy Surface projection curve • 351
Automatic ordering • 16, 38 Surface region • 413

Surface Region • 413 System units • 64
Surface Reverse • 414
Surface speed (TURN) • 1409
Surface surface trimming restrictions • T
435 Table • 1905, 1939
Surface triangle tolerance • 1018 Tabs • 904
Surface wizard • 381 Threshold angle • 1110
Surface/surface trimming • 432 Through • 995
Surface-surface trimming • 432 Tailstock • 1955, 1962
Surface creation • 60 Tangent • 295
Surface of revolution • 60 Tap • 899
Surface milling feature • 63 Tap cycle • 1599
Surface Milling Properties dialog • 199, Tap depth • 901
200, 205 Tap plunge clearance • 1649
Surface of revolution • 60 Taper • 74
Surface selection • 195 Taper (tooling) • 1761, 1770, 1777, 1780
Surfaces • 28, 381, 441 Taper angle • 1446
Blending • 441 Taper approx angle • 995, 1661
Cap • 405 Tapered mill • 979
Coons • 396 Taps • 1777
Cylinders • 409 Target horsepower • 995, 1164, 1180,
Editing • 383 1188, 1195, 1203, 1210, 1223, 1230,
Extending • 417 1238, 1269, 1293, 1301, 1310, 1315,
Extruded • 385 1321, 1328, 1575
Fillet • 427, 448, 471 Target part tessellation tolerance • 1534,
Flat • 410 1535
From 2.5D feature • 411 Teardrop • 1490
From surface region • 413 Technical support • 6
Lofted • 400 Teeth (tooling) • 1756, 1763, 1771, 1774
Merging • 431 Template
Modifying • 437 Operation template • 38
Offset • 416 Tensile Strength • 209
Reversing • 414 Text • 50, 368
Revolved • 386 Text curve • 368
Spheres • 406 Text Label • 290
Splitting • 424 Thread • 533
Surfaces from curves • 384 Thread feature • 30
Sweep • 389 Thread mill attributes • 995
Trimming • 418 Thread Mill tab • 1661
Trimming with another surface • 432 Thread mills • 1780
Untrimming • 422 Thread tool selection • 822
Swarf axis tol • 1667 Threading (WIRE) • 1484
Swarf machining • 66 Threading operation • 823
Swarf milling • 795 Threading tab • 1700
Sweep • 391, 460 Three point fillet • 286
Swept surface • 389 Through depth • 995
Switch machining side • 535, 1057 Through option • 995, 1661
Synchronizing operations • 211 Thumbnail pictures • 65
Synchronizing operations (multi-turret) • Tilt axis for gouge avoidance • 1136,
1559 1144

Time • 1527 Tool life management overview •
Time estimation • 1658 1580
Time view • 1558 Tool List • 1548, 1556, 1557
Tip angle (tooling) • 1775 Tool load • 1521, 1546
Tip offset • 1050 Tool location • 1916, 1956
Title bar • 5, 1 Tool Manager dialog • 1746
TNR undercut checking • 19 Tool Mapping • 1576
Tolerance • 179, 266, 292, 1018, 1164, Tool nose radius compensation •
1180, 1188, 1195, 1203, 1210, 1223, 1367, 1690
1230, 1238, 1269, 1293, 1301, 1310, Tool programming point • 1709
1315, 1321, 1328, 1667 Tool quill • 1905, 1939, 1954
Tolerance of Line Segments dialog • 182 Tool selection for 3D milling features •
Tolerance of Turned Segments dialog • 742
179 Tool selection for MillTurn features •
Tolerancing • 31 1830
TOMB • 10 Tool Selection tab • 1677
Tombstone • 1894 Tool Slot • 1549
Adding a part to the tombstone • 1894 Tool Usage tab (TURN) • 1405
Coordinate systems from already Tool visual tolerance • 1529, 1536
placed parts • 1890 Tool block • 170, 173
Creating global fixture coordinate Tool Block Selection dialog • 173, 1580
systems on the tombstone • 1891 Tool block tool location • 48
Creating tombstone document • 1887 Tool color • 57
Delete button • 1892 Tool crib • 1833
Edit button • 1892 Tool database • 2
Fixture • 1887 Imperial tools • 2
Overview • 1886 Inch tools • 2
Reload button • 1892 Metric tools • 2
Specifying tombstone physical Tool holder • 112
dimensions • 1888 Tool holder clearance • 146, 1681
Thickness • 1888 Tool Holder Clearance dialog • 110
Tombstone Process Plan dialog • Tool Information dialog • 48
1890, 1891 Tool location at back of tool holder • 48
Tombstone adding parts • 26 Tool Locations • 170
Tool • 565, 1527, 1557 Tool mapping • 22
Tool % of arc radius • 974, 1059 Tool Mapping dialog • 173
Tool (TURN) • 1405 Tool Nose Radius compensation • 19
Tool axis limits • 1136, 1148 Tool orientation • 74
Tool blocks for turrets • 1924, 1927, Tool pecking depths • 153
1956 Tool post movement simulation • 23
Tool center • 1061, 1090 Tool Properties dialog • 215
Tool change • 1658 Tool selection • 16, 110, 146, 1681
Tool colors • 1527 Tool selection tab • 204
Tool column • 1549 Tool slot numbers • 1916
Tool cutting tolerance • 1529, 1536 Toolbars • 5, 1, 10, 32
Tool details • 1557 Assistance bar • 5
Tool diameter • 1024, 1667 Display mode tololbar • 30
Tool end radius • 1667 Feature/geometry edit bar • 5
Tool groups • 982, 1746 Geometry edit bar • 5
Tool holder selection • 1847 Menu bar • 5

Status bar • 5 Transform solid (SOLID) • 452
Title bar • 5 Transforming a solid • 452
Toolbar display • 24 Transforms • 310, 1900
Toolbar name • 24 Reflect • 310
Toolbar view • 24 Rotate • 310
Toolbox • 182, 1, 29 Scale • 310
Toolbox window • 5 Translate • 310
Toolholder properties dialog • 1844 Transitions for 2.5D milling toolpaths •
Tooling database • 1746 993
Toolpath • 295, 1517, 1533 Translate • 311, 1939
Simulating toolpaths • 14, 37, 54, 66, Translucent part • 1529
71 Translucent tool • 1529
Toolpath colors • 1517 Transparent • 49, 1934
Toolpath corner % • 995, 1164, 1195, Traveling steady rest • 234
1608 Tree view • 4, 904
Toolpath end/start • 1188 Triangular inside corner (WIRE) • 1484
Toolpath feature • 532 Trim • 418
Toolpath type • 717 Trim geometry • 315
Toolpath boundaries • 205 Trim surface • 418
Toolpath features • 17 Trimmed surface edge • 344
Toolpath points preview • 152 Trimming a surface with a curve • 420
Toolpaths • 199, 200 Trimming restrictions • 421
Tools Trochoical cut • 995, 1164, 1608
Imperial tools • 2 Trochoidal stepover • 995
Inch tools • 2 Troubleshooting isoline milling • 773
Metric tools • 2 Troubleshooting pencil milling • 778
Tool database • 2 Troubleshooting pick pieces
Tool mapping • 22 (chaining) • 322
Tools list • 19 Troubleshooting planar remachining •
Tools tab • 982, 984, 1402 794
Tools with multiple inserts • 132 Troubleshooting projection milling
Tooth outside • 995, 1661 methods • 748
Tooth overlap • 995, 1661 Troubleshooting Z level finishing •
Top • 10 772
Top first • 1110 Troubleshooting Z level roughing •
Top view • 41 761
Top-most table • 1902, 1913, 1939, tsf files (TOMB) • 1886
1955, 1956 Turn • 11
Total Passes (WIRE) • 1476 Turn F/S tab • 1409
Total stock • 995, 1164, 1446 Turn feature feeds and speeds • 834
Touch off at the shoulder (tooling) • Turn feature finishing • 840
1781 Turn feature roughing • 835
Touch off at the shoulder check box • Turn feature semi-finishing • 839
202 Turn feature tool selection • 834
Towards chuck • 1367 Turn features (TURN) • 574
TPI (tooling) • 1777 Turn groove finishing • 816
Trackball • 40 Turn groove roughing • 815
Traditional toolpaths • 717 Turn machining attributes • 1686
Transfer tool post control • 23 Bar Feed tab • 1708
Transfer Turret Control • 23 Cutoff tab • 1465, 1707

Grooving tab • 1703 Two lights • 49
Pecking tab • 1606 Two point fillet • 286
Threading tab • 1700 Two points line • 277
Turn/Bore tab • 1690 Types of features that can be
Turn operation order • 1564 recognized • 512
Turn to diameter • 1367 Types of wire EDM tapers • 614
Turn feature • 30, 47
Turn format feature • 855
Turn Properties dialog • 213 U
Turn/Bore tab • 1690
Turn/mill • 43 U axis • 29
TURN/MILL • 10 UCS • 110, 229, 1902, 1904, 1939,
Turn/mill angular interpolation • 1529, 1953, 1955
1537 UDF • 1955
Turn-curve tolerance add-in • 230 Unable to construct object with these
TurnCurveTolerance.bas • 179 inputs • 1949
Turned groove feature • 808 Unattached design features • 449
Turned groove tool selection • 809 Unconnected design feature (SOLID) •
Turning • 24 449
Turning canned cycles • 1570 Undercut checking with TNR • 19
Turning chuck • 83 Undercuts • 157, 1077, 1421, 1447
Turning Features • 805 Undo • 309
Turning head tool holders • 186 Undo sync code changes • 1559
Turning head tool holders Machine Ungrouping objects • 873
Design • 1937 Uni-directional (WIRE) • 1476
Turning heads with multiple tools • 29 Unigraphics files • 82, 94, 98
Turning Input Modes • 304 Union (SOLID) • 476
Turning Post Processors • 1868 Unit horsepower • 209
Turning tool orientation • 74 Units • 1900, 1946
Turning tool overrides tab • 1786 Imperial tools • 2
TurnMill location dialog • 535 Imperial units • 4
Turnmill Overview • 857 Inch tools • 2
Turnmilling • 1367 Inch units • 4
Turnmilling program point • 118 Metric tools • 2
Turret (TURN) • 608, 1405 Metric units • 4
Turret control • 855 Unpick curve pieces • 324
Turret direction • 608, 1405, 1709 Untransformed coordinates • 91
Turret Information dialog • 240 Untrim surface • 422
Turret location • 1713 Unused curves • 103
Turret names • 161, 1558 Unwrap curve • 339
Turret NC code • 1564 Up/down smoothing % • 1269
Turret rotates when changing tools • Update operation list • 133
1916 Update options (probing) • 168
Turret selection • 215 Upper Curve Start/End Point (WIRE) •
Turrets • 4 1482
Turrets tab • 211, 1548, 1558 Use
Tutorial - machine design • 1939 Use 90 deg comp • 1638
Twist drills • 1781 Use alternative 5-axis position (5AP) •
Twists in surfaces or solids with closed 1164, 1180, 1188, 1195, 1203, 1210,
cross sections • 395 1223, 1230, 1238, 1247, 1269, 1293,
1301, 1310, 1315, 1321, 1328

Use arc ramp in/out • 1673 Using groups to determine
Use arc ramp-in/out (3D) • 1343 manufacturing order • 1497
Use B-axis simultaneous • 1413 Using multiple UCS and setups • 113
Use Blank • 8 Using simulation video-style controls •
Use canned cycle (TURN) • 1367, 1521
1690 Using the Integrated Development
Use curve to describe tool shape • Environment (IDE) • 147
1761, 1774, 1781 Using zig-zag ramping to mill a helical
Use finish tool • 937, 1367, 1608, path for a simple groove • 695
1661
Use graphics hardware • 49
Use IPR • 568, 984, 1649 V
Use IPT • 984, 1649 Valid solids (SOLID) • 450
Use L/D compensation • 1599 Variable taper table • 615
Use lead and lean • 1136 Variable width text • 58
Use lead in/out • 1343, 1673 Variables • 995, 1164, 1180, 1188,
Use linear approximation (3D) • 1343 1195, 1203, 1223, 1230, 1238, 1269,
Use linear lead in/out • 1343, 1673 1293, 1301, 1310, 1315
Use MMPR • 984, 1649 Vericut files • 163
Use MMPT • 984, 1649 Verify solid (SOLID) • 450
Use on both ends of skim passes Verifying that a solid is valid • 450
(WIRE) • 1469 Vertical • 279
Use operation template • 1564 Vertical (Z) • 1136
Use part surface dimensions • 1124 Vertical Distance • 290
Use Results as Starting Point • 1541 Vertical line • 279
Use separate wall tolerance • 1119 Vertical milling machine • 49
Use SFM • 568, 984, 986 Vertical only • 1134, 1667
Use Solid As Part Compare Target • Vertical turret lathe • 49
1524 Videos • 8
Use solid model • 1124 View
Use Solids As Clamp (SOLID) • 1543 View animation • 44
Use stock dimensions • 1124 View Entities • 43
Use the same fixture ID on each View independent • 1529
orientation (TOMB) • 1890, 1891 View menu • 40
Use white background (printing) • 106 View on start-up • 44
Use solids as clamp option • 185 View shortcuts list • 30
User Coordinate System • 109, 1953, View toolbars • 24
1955 &frac34 • 1529
User interface • 4 Viewing • 4, 37, 44
User interface style • 24 Viewing centerlines for an operation •
User views • 42 1553
User-defined features (UDFs) • 532, 858 Viewing intermediate shaded
User-defined stock • 72, 223 simulations • 1553
Uses Macro if Available (WIRE) • 1476 Viewing mode on startup • 46
U-Shape • 1490 Viewing Options dialog • 44
Using Viewing Options dialog • 137
Using a form tool or insert drill for Viewing the part • 13, 35, 48, 61
drilling operations • 1785 Hide all geometry • 61
Using an insert drill for both drilling Shading • 35, 48, 61
and boring • 1785 Show all surfaces • 61

Views Offset tab • 1726
2D turned profile • 30, 47, 48 Posting tab (WIRE) • 1741
Centre all • 26, 44 Start tab • 1731
Front view • 13 Wire EDM tab • 1717
Isometric view • 13, 35, 48, 61 Wire radius compensation • 1480
Viewing the part • 13, 35, 48, 61 Wire radius compensation - on the
Vise • 83 machine • 1480
Vises • 35 Wire radius compensation via the
Visicut simulation • 1517 software • 1480
Vortex • 148, 150 Wire simulation options • 1536
Vortex non-cutting moves • 64 Wire visual diameter • 1536
Withdraw angle • 1421, 1447
Withdraw length • 1421, 1447, 1690
W Words Info dialog • 242
Wall clearance (3D HSM) • 1110 Working with imported geometry • 84
Wall finish allowance • 971 World layer • 299
Wall pass • 937 Wrap feature around Z-axis • 857
Wall tab • 979 Wrap tolerance • 1658
Wall tolerance • 1119
Warnings • 194, 195
Warp dialogs • 54
X
Water • 1488 x = F(t) • 360
Web content • 8 x = F(t), y = G(t) • 360
Web pages • 8 x = F(t), y = G(t), z = H(t) • 362
Website • 10 x = F(y) • 357
White background (printing) • 106 X finish allowance • 1421, 1447, 1690
Wide face grooves • 814 X Length • 298
Width of face (TOMB) • 1888 X offset • 1897
Willemin-Macodel 480MT • 85 X Origin • 298
Wind fan • 1661 X parallel • 1061, 1071, 1100
Wind fan angle • 1638 X semi-finish allowance • 1421, 1690
Wind fan finish • 937, 1638 X Spacing • 298
Wind fan radius • 1638 X tool • 1956
Window x=F(t) • 360
Graphics window • 5 y=G(t) • 360
Results window • 5, 15, 16, 18, 19, x=F(t) y=G(t) z=H(t) • 362
38, 40 XBUILD • 236, 237, 240, 242
Toolbox window • 5 xmb files • 82, 94
Windows 7 • 180 XML • 162
WIRE • 10 xmt files • 82, 94
Wire Compensation (WIRE) • 1480 X-Y acceleration • 1658
Wire cutting/threading • 1736 XYZ location • 535
Wire EDM • 67, 218, 219, 237
Wire EDM cut data • 1510
Wire EDM feature • 69 Y
Wire EDM tab • 1717 y = F(x) • 357
Wire EDM Taper • 614 y = G(t) • 360
Wire feature attributes (WIRE) • 1469 Y Length • 298
Wire machining attributes • 1717 Y offset • 1897
Misc. tab (WIRE) • 1736

Y Origin • 298 Z-zero position • 202
Y parallel • 1061, 1071, 1100
Y Spacing • 298
y=F(x) and x=F(y) • 357
Z
z = G(a) • 361
Z boring (only) • 1956
Z depth • 974
Z drilling/milling (only) • 1956
Z end • 1164, 1180, 1188, 1195, 1203,
1210, 1223, 1230, 1238, 1293, 1301,
1310, 1315, 1321
Z finish allowance • 1421, 1447, 1690
Z increment • 995, 1164, 1210
Z index clearance • 243, 1658
Z leave allowance • 1421
Z offset • 1897
Z ramp clearance • 995, 1649
Z rapid plane • 974, 1059, 1340, 1599,
1649
Z semi-finish allowance • 1421, 1690
Z start (3D Lite) • 1164, 1180, 1188,
1195, 1203, 1210, 1223, 1230, 1238,
1293, 1301, 1310, 1315, 1321
Z steps • 974, 1619
Z-acceleration • 1658
Z-buffer • 49
Zigzag • 986, 1061, 1062, 1469, 1619
Zigzag Cycle - Define Start point •
630
Zigzag Cycle Overview • 629
Zigzag operation (WIRE) • 1469
Zigzag ramping • 995
Zigzag stepover (25D) • 717
Zigzag toolpath (25D) • 717
Zigzag (Wire) • 218
Z-indexing • 13
Z-level
Z-level finish • 772
Z-level rough — How to create • 760
Z-level Rough Remachining Options
dialog (3D LITE) • 1067
Z-level rough spiral (3D) • 1061
Z-level roughing • 760, 762, 763,
1164
Z-level simulation • 1552
Z-level slice classification • 1061
Zoom • 40

FeatureCAM Reference Manual

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

FeatureCAM Reference Manual

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

FeatureCAM 2016 R2

FeatureCAM Version: 2016 R2 Date: 11 December 2015 15:03

Getting Started in FeatureCAM 1

FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Contents • i

What's New in FeatureCAM 1

ii • Contents FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help

Reference Help 245

FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Contents • iii

iv • Contents FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help

FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Contents • v

Welcome to the FeatureCAM help. Use the following sections to

Using the Help window

FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Introduction • 1

By default, the search looks for common suffixes as well as

If you do not enclose the text in quotation marks, the

2 • Introduction FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help

This is available only in English.

FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Introduction • 3

Installing your PAF license

For any problems, see PAF Troubleshooting (see page 7).

Installing your PAF license with internet access

If FeatureCAM is still in Evaluation Mode, see PAF

Installing your PAF license using the PAFWizard

4 • Introduction FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help

5 In the Dongle Diagnostics dialog, click Run PAFWizard.

7 Close the PAFWizard and restart FeatureCAM.

If FeatureCAM is still in Evaluation Mode, see PAF

FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Introduction • 5

We ship the software before sending the PAF file to you. It is

6 In the Dongle Diagnostics dialog, click Open PAF Directory.

6 • Introduction FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help

You must close all files and windows in FeatureCAM

 Did you edit the PAF file in any way?

 Is the PAF file being recognized?

 Is the dongle attached to the computer?

 Do you have the latest Sentinel drivers installed?

FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Introduction • 7

 Do you have more than one PAF file on your computer?

8 • Introduction FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help

Catia add-in silent install

FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Introduction • 9

If no code follows the topic title, the functionality is available

10 • Introduction FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help

You need 3D MX or 3D HSM to use 5-axis Simultaneous.

Evaluating other FeatureCAM components

FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Introduction • 11

3 Select the Manually select product components option.

Select Activate all available product components to

12 • Introduction FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help

Learn how to use FeatureCAM in the topics that follow.

FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Getting Started in FeatureCAM • 1

The functionality available to you depends on which

FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Getting Started in FeatureCAM • 1

You can also start the program by double-clicking the

FeatureCAM icon on your desktop.

3 To create a local database, select On my local computer.

You need to create a database folder on your network first,

You need to have the Shared Network Database module to

2 • Getting Started in FeatureCAM FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help

Inch - loads only the inch tools.

The tools database specifies the set of tools used by

FeatureCAM 2016 R2 Reference Help Getting Started in FeatureCAM • 3

4 Select the Unit of Measure (Inch or Millimeter).

You can change the default dimension units later, by